Full text of "The Cambridge Ancient History 3rd Edition"

See other formats

THE

CAMBRIDGE
ANCIENT HISTORY

XIV

LATE ANTIQUITY
EMPIRE AND SUCCESSORS
A.D. 425-600

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CAMBRIDGE
ANCIENT HISTORY

VOLUME XIV

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CAMBRIDGE
ANCIENT HISTORY

VOLUME XIV

Late Antiquity: Empire and Successors,

A.D. 425—600

Edited by

AVERIL CAMERON
Warden of Keble College, Oxford
BRYAN WARD-PERKINS
Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford
MICHAEL WHITBY
Professor of Ancient History, University of Warwick

Cambridge

UNIVERSITY PRESS

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, Sao Paulo

Cambridge Univeristy Press
The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 8ru, UK

Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York

www.cambridge.org

Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9780521325912
© Cambridge University Press 2000

This publication^ in copyright. Subject to statutory exception
and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without
the written permission of Cambridge University Press.

First published 2000
Fourth printing 2007

Printed in the United Kingdom at the University Press, Cambridge

A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library

Library of Congress Cataloguing card number: 77-87719

iSBN-13 978-0-521-32591-2 hardback
iSBN-13 978-0-521-85073-5 set

Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy
of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication,
and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain,
accurate or appropriate.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

List of maps pagexm

List of text- figures xiv

Preface xvii

PART I CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

1 The western empire, 425— 76 1

by peter heather, Reader in Early Medieval History, University

College London

1 The era of Aetius, 425— 54 5

11 The fall of the western empire 1 8

hi Conclusion 30

2 The eastern empire: Theodosius to Anastasius 3 3

by a. d. lee, Senior Lecturer in Classics and Ancient History at the
University of Wales, Lampeter

1 Theodosius II 34

11 The successors of Theodosius 42

in Anastasius 52

3 Justin I and Justinian 63

by AVERIL CAMERON

i Justin I (518-27) 63

11 Justinian’s early years (527— 32) 65

in St Sophia, the ‘reconquest’ and the middle years

(c 532-54) 72

iv Religious policy: the Three Chapters and the Fifth

Oecumenical Council 79

v The last decade (c. 5 54— 65) 82

4 The successors of Justinian 86

by MICHAEL WHITBY

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

i Justin II page 86

n Tiberius 94

hi Maurice 99

iv Conclusion 108

5 The western kingdoms 1 1 2

by roger collins, Research Fellow in the Department of History,

University of Edinburgh

1 Gaul: Visigothic kingdom, 418—507 1 1 2

11 The Burgundian kingdom, 412—534 1 14

hi Frankish Gaul, 481-596 116

iv Spain: the Suevic kingdoms, 425-5 84 121

v Visigothic Spain, 456-601 122

vi Vandal Africa, 429-533 124

vn Ostrogothic Italy, 493-535 1 26

vin Italy: the Lombards, 568-90 130

ix The British Isles: Anglo-Saxon, Irish and Pictish

kingdoms, 410—597 132

PART II GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

6 Emperor and court 1 3 5

by michael mccormick, Professor of History, Harvard University

1 The physical context of power 136

11 The emperor 142

hi The court: the human element 145

iv Court and ceremony 1 5 6

v Court and culture 160

7 Government and administration 164

by sam barnish, Lecturer in Late Roman and Early Medieval
European History, Royal Holloway College, University of London,

A. D. LEE and MICHAEL WHITBY

i Sources 165

11 The structures of government 170

hi Administration in operation 181

iv Administrative change 193

v From Rome to Byzantium 203

8 Administration and politics in the cities of the fifth to the mid

seventh century: 425—640 207

by j. h. w. G. liebeschuetz, Professor Emeritus of the University of
Nottingham

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS Vll

East and west: common trends

page 207

The cities of the east

210

III

Administration and politics in the west

229

Conclusion

236

Roman law

238

by detlef liebs, Professor of Roman and Civil Paw, University of
Freiburg im Breisgau

Introduction: law in the late Roman empire

238

The jurisdiction

240

III

Sources of law and law making

242

Codification

244

Law schools

2 5 3

Legal literature

2 5 5

VII

Continuity, vulgarization, classicism

2 5 8

Law in the western kingdoms between the fifth and the seventh
century 260

by t. m. CHARLES-EDWARDS,/mr/ 3 ro/gj'j'oro/’ Celtic, University of

Oxford

Law and ethnic identity

262

Edicts and judgements

263

III

Lawbooks and codes

269

The evolution of Frankish written law

2 7 1

From north-west Europe to the Mediterranean

278

Barbarian and Roman law

282

VII

Burgundian and Gothic law

284

The

army, c. 420—602

288

by MICHAEL WHITBY

Troops: categories, conditions of service, numbers

288

Navies

2 93

III

Western collapse

2 95

The eastern army: men and resources

300

Eastern survival

V-M

PART III EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY

AND SOCIETY

Land, labour and settlement

3 D

by BRYAN WARD-PERKINS

The issues and the evidence

3 D

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

viii

ii Population; the spread of settlement; demographic

decline? page 320

in Rural settlement (villages, farmsteads and villas) 327

iv Rural fortifications 3 3 5

v The pattern of land ownership; the status of peasants 336

13 Specialized production and exchange 346

bj BRYAN WARD-PERKINS

i Difficulties and evidence 346

11 The general picture 350

in The extent of the change 361

iv Beyond the frontiers of the empire 362

v Regional and local variation 363

vi ‘Prosperity’ and ‘sophistication’ 365

vn The distribution of goods and wealth within the late

antique economy: the role of overseas commerce 369

viii State and aristocratic distribution; the effects of taxation

on the economy 377

ix Causes of economic decline: a general consideration 381

x War, disruption and economic decline 383

xi Climate, the environment and the economy 386

xn Population change and economic change 388

xiii Economic decline: some conclusions 390

14 The family in the late Roman world 392

by andrea giardina, Professor of Roman History, University of

Rome La Sapien^a

I Christianity and laws on the family 392

11 Law and society 399

in Negations of the family 407

iv West and east 41 1

15 Family and friendship in the west 416

by ian n. wood, Professor of Early Medieval History, University of Leeds

16 State, lordship and community in the west (c. a.d. 400—600) 437

by PETER HEATHER

i The community of the realm 437

II Peers and lords: local communities 45 5

17 Armies and society in the later Roman world 469

by MICHAEL WHITBY

i Military power and authority 470

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

ii The maintenance of order page 47 5

in Local and central 480

iv Soldier and civilian 485

PART IV THE PROVINCES AND THE
NON-ROMAN WORLD

1 8 The north-western provinces 497

by IAN N. WOOD

19 Italy, a.d. 425— 605 525

by mark Humphries, Lecturer in Ancient Classics at the National
University of Ireland, Maynooth

1 Italian interests and the end of the western empire

(425-76) 526

11 Odoacer and Theoderic (476— 526) 529

hi The end of the Ostrogothic kingdom (526—68) 5 33

iv Forging the Lombard kingdom (568— 605) 535

v Italy transformed: the ruling elite 538

vi The church and the papacy 540

vii Settlement and society 5 44

viii Italian identities in late antiquity 548

ix Conclusion 5 50

20 Vandal and Byzantine Africa 552

by AVERIL CAMERON

i The Vandal conquest and Vandal rule (a.d. 429— 5 34) 553

11 The Byzantine conquest and Byzantine rule 5 5 9

21 a Asia Minor and Cyprus 570

by charlotte roueche, Reader in Classical and Byzantine Greek,

King’s College, University of London

1 Sources 570

11 The political geography 571

hi The historical framework 575

iv The cities 577

v City and countryside 5 83

vi The end of the civic era 5 85

21b Syria, Palestine and Mesopotamia 588

by hugh Kennedy, Professor of Middle Eastern History, University
of St A ndrews

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

21 c Egypt page 612

by james G. keenan, Professor of Classical Studies, Loyola University,
Chicago

zza The Sasanid monarchy 638

by ze'ev rubin, Professor of History, University of Tel Aviv

1 Romans and Sasanids 638

11 Royal legitimation 644

in Sasanid kings and the Zoroastrian priests 647

iv Kings and nobles 651

v Taxation and military organization 654

vi Sasanid collapse 659

zzb Armenia in the fifth and sixth century 662

by r. w. Thomson, Calouste Gulbenkian Professor of Armenian
Studies, University of Oxford

22 c The Arabs 678

by Lawrence i. conrad, Historian of Near Eastern Medicine,

Wellcome Institute

1 Introduction: the question of sources 678

11 The Arabs in late antiquity 679

in Arabian religious traditions 682

iv Economic life in Arabia 686

v Imperium and imperial politics 689

vi Mecca, Muhammad and the rise of Islam 69 5

23 The Balkans and Greece, 420— 602 701

by MICHAEL WHITBY

i Introduction 701

11 The Huns 704

hi From the Huns to the Avars 712

iv From Roman to post-Roman 721

PART V RELIGION AND CULTURE

24 The organization of the church 73 1

by stuart george hall, Professor Emeritus of Ecclesiastical History,

King’s College London

1 Bishops and patriarchs 731

11 Councils and clergy 736

hi Finance 741

iv Teaching 742

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTENTS

25 Monasticism page 74)

by Philip rousseau , Andrew W. Mellon Professor of Early Christian
Studies, Catholic University of America

26 Holy Men 781

by peter brown, Professor of History, Princeton University

27 The definition and enforcement of orthodoxy 8 1 1

by pauline allen, Director, Centre for Early Christian Studies,

Australian Catholic University

1 The Councils of Ephesus I and II 8 1 1

11 The Council of Chalcedon 814

hi Aftermath of Chalcedon 815

iv Zeno and Basiliscus 816

v Anastasius I 818

vi Justin I and Justinian 820

vii Justinian’s successors 828

28 Philosophy and philosophical schools 835

by anne sheppard, Senior Eecturer in Classics, Royal Holloway

College, University of London

1 Introduction 835

11 Philosophy in Athens 837

hi Philosophy in Alexandria 843

iv Philosophy elsewhere in the empire 852

29 Education in the Roman empire 85 5

by the late Robert browning, formerly Professor Emeritus of
Classics, Birkbeck College, University of London

30 The visual arts 884

by robin cormack, Professor of the History of Art, Courtauld

Institute of Art, University of London

1 Artistic evidence and its interpretation 886

11 Church and art in the fifth century 894

hi ‘The age of Justinian’ 902

iv Church, monks and art at the end of the sixth

century 912

3 1 Building and architecture 918

by marlia mundell mango, University Lecturer in Byzantine
Archaeology and Art, and Fellow of St John’s College, Oxford

1 Introduction 9 1 8

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

XU CONTENTS

ii Secular architecture page 924

hi Religious architecture 955

iv Conclusion 971

Conclusion 972

Chronological table 982

BIBLIOGRAPHY 987

Abbreviations 987

Frequently cited works 990

Part I: Chronological overview (chapters 1—5) 994

Part II: Government and institutions (chapters 6—1 1) 1004

Part III: East and west: economy and society (chapters 12—17) 1028

Part IV: The provinces and the non-Roman world (chapters 1 8— 2 3) 1 046

Part V: Religion and culture (chapters 24—3 1) 1080

Conclusion 1099

Index 1102

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAPS

1 The Roman world of the fifth and sixth century page 16

2 Justinian’s empire in 565 68

3 The eastern frontier 93

4 The Balkan frontier 107

5 The post-Roman west 1 1 7

6 Cities of the fifth and sixth century 21 1

7 Settlements of the fifth and sixth century 318

8 Specialized production and exchange 349

9 The northern and western provinces 500

10 Late Roman and Ostrogothic Italy 425— 5 35 529

1 1 Lombard and Byzantine Italy c. a.d. 600 5 37

1 2 The central provinces of Vandal and Byzantine Africa 5 57

1 3 North Africa in Vandal and Byzantine times 5 64

14 Asia Minor and Cyprus 573

1 5 Provinces and principal cities of the east a.d. 500 591

16 Archaeological sites and regions within the eastern provinces 605

1 7 Egypt 6 1 6

1 8 Sasanid Iran 640

19 Armenia and its neighbours 666

20 Pre-Islamic Arabia and its northern neighbours 690

21 The Balkans and Greece 707

22 Building in late antiquity 927

23 Building in the eastern provinces 943

xiii

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TEXT-FIGURES

1 Threats to the western empire, c. 425 page 3

2 Vandal and Alan settlements in North Africa 10

3 Suevic expansion in Spain, c. 440—4 1 2

4 The city of Constantinople 138

5 The late antique village site of Bamuqqa in the north Syrian

limestone massif 322

6 The fortified farmstead of Nador in Mauretania 326

7 Ancient sites in the north Syrian uplands 329

8 The late antique large village of Kaper Pera in the north Syrian

limestone massif 330

9 South elevation and plan of the baths built in 473 at the village

of Sergilla, in the Syrian Jabal Zawiye 3 3 1

10 The south Italian villa of S. Giovanni di Ruoti in the late fifth

century 334

1 1 The sixth-century monastery of a holy man, Elias, excavated at

Scythopolis, in Palaestina II 339

12 Distribution of one type of pot produced by the third/fourth-

century Roman potteries located in the area of Oxford 3 5 1

13 Stone houses in the late antique Syrian village of Dehes 353

14 Coin-finds from the town of Luna in Liguria, Italy, and from

the village of Dehes in northern Syria 356

1 5 Recorded finds of one type of late antique chancel-screen 3 5 9

1 6 African red-slip ware recorded on five sites in the western

Mediterranean 372

17 City territories of Gaul known to have raised troops in the

sixth century 442

1 8 Leaf from the Notitia Dignitatum. Insignia of the comes limitis

Aegypti 614

19 Relief from a limestone grave-marker showing a bearded

monk 621

20 Fragment of a papyrus codex from Antinoopolis with

illustration of five charioteers 623

21 Deed of surety sworn to the heirs of Flavius Apion 632

xiv

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TEXT-FIGURES XV

22 The walls of Thessalonica page 710

23 Tsaricin Grad (Justiniana Prima) 719

24 Athens in the fifth century a.d. 723

25 The ‘Palace of the Giants’ at Athens 724

26 The Library of Hadrian at Athens 725

27 Gamzigrad (Acquis), sixth-century church within ruins of

palace of Galerius 726

28 Laocoon: miniature from the Vatican Virgil 888

29 Mosaic panel of the Hospitality of Abraham, S. Maria

Maggiore, Rome 890

30 Mosaic panel of the Hospitality of Abraham and Sacrifice of

Isaac, S. Vitale, Ravenna 892

31 Mosaic of the Annunciation to Mary and Joseph and of the

Adoration of the Magi, S. Maria Maggiore, Rome 897

32 Mosaics of saints in the Rotunda (church of St George),

Thessalonica 899

3 3 Silver paten from the Riha Treasure, Dumbarton Oaks 901

34 The nave of St Sophia, Constantinople 904

3 5 Sanctuary and apse with mosaic of Christ between angels and

St Vitalis and bishop Ecclesius, S. Vitale, Ravenna 907

36 Encaustic icon of the Virgin and Child with angels and saints,

monastery of St Catherine, Sinai 913

37 Lead ampulla from the cathedral treasury at Monza 914

3 8 Mosaic panel from the church of St Demetrius in Thessalonica,

showing the Virgin and Child enthroned 916

39 Plan of Rome 920

40 Plan of Constantinople 921

41 Plan of Justiniana Prima 922

42 Plan of Dar Qita in the Jabal Barisha, Syria 925

43 Plan of Augustaion and surrounding area, Constantinople 929

44 Column in the Forum of Leo, Constantinople 930

45 The Arcadiane at Ephesus 931

46 Street of the sixth century in Caesarea Maritima 932

47 Thermae and porticoed street at Scythopolis 937

48 Thermal baths at Gadara in Palaestina II 939

49 Laura monastery at Kellia in Egypt 944

50 Coenobitic monastery founded in 473 near Jerusalem 946

5 1 ‘Palace of the Giants’ at Athens 949

52 Palaces of Antiochus and Lausus at Constantinople 951

5 3 Two-storey house at Salamis, Cyprus 952

54 House of 5 1 o at Refade in Syria 954

5 5 Longitudinal sections of western and eastern basilicas, Ravenna 957

56 The church of St Demetrius, Thessalonica 959

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

XVI

TEXT-FIGURES

57 The church of St John the Evangelist, Ephesus page 960

5 8 The church of Sts Sergius and Bacchus, Constantinople 962

5 9 Church of St Sophia, Constantinople 964

60 Church at Jirade in Syria 966

61 Church at Behyo in Syria 967

62 Baptistery at the shrine of St Symeon Stylites at Qal'at Sim'an

in Syria 968

63 Synagogue at Horvat Susiya in Palaestina I 970

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PREFACE

The decision to extend The Cambridge Ancient History to the end of the sixth
century, from the closing date of a.d. 324 selected for the first edition of
1938, has already been explained in the Preface to Volume XIII.
Scholarship in Britain lagged behind continental Europe in the discovery
of ‘late antiquity’, which suffered (and to some extent still suffers) from the
disadvantage of falling between the two stools of ‘ancient history’ and
‘medieval history’. However, in 1964 the political and institutional param-
eters of the period were magisterially set out in English in A. H. M. Jones’s
The Later Roman Empire 284—602. A Social, Economic and Administrative Survey ,
which was followed seven years later by the very different picture presented
in Peter Brown’s World of Late Antiquity (1971).

Jones’s evidence consisted primarily of legal texts, administrative docu-
ments and narrative political histories, from which he constructed a pow-
erful, if undeniably bleak, image of the late Roman state; whereas Brown
exploited mainly hagiography and the writings of pagan and Christian lite-
rati to reconstruct a world of vibrant (if somewhat anxious) spiritual and
intellectual debate. More recently, in work pioneered by French and Italian
scholars, the abundant and ever-increasing archaeological evidence for the
period has also been brought into play. This material evidence proved con-
clusively that, in the eastern Mediterranean at least, late antiquity was no
mere appendage to classical glories, but a period of spectacular prosperity
and splendour.

It is our hope that CTE/XIV mirrors and builds on earlier work on late
antiquity; and that it provides an introduction to the richness of the
different sources and different approaches that are now readily available for
this period. As a multi-author work, it cannot have the crispness and sense
of direction of the best single-author surveys, and we have not attempted
as editors to iron out differences of opinion or of emphasis. On the other
hand, there are obvious merits in multiple authorship. In particular, no
single scholar can hope to be as much at home in sixth-century Britain as
in Egypt, nor as comfortable with late antique saints as with barbarian war-
lords; so a wide range of expertise is needed to provide detailed introduc-
tions to specific fields of knowledge. Furthermore, multiplicity of opinion

xvii

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

xvm

PREFACE

and approach characterizes modern scholarship; and this volume may
rather be faulted as too single-minded in its overall shape than as too
diverse.

The dates selected for the start and finish of the volume ( circa 425 and
circa 600) are, of course, primarily dates of convenience, in order to break
‘history’ into bite-size chunks and single, if door-stopper, volumes. The
420s are, however, a reasonable point for an historical break. In the west,
the Vandal invasion of Africa in 429 brought about a decisive decline in
imperial resources and influence; while, in the east, the growth of Hunnic
power in the 430s was a very significant development. Historiographically,
the now fragmentary History of Olympiodorus, which covered both
western and eastern developments in some detail, concluded in 425, to be
continued by the much more Constantinopolitan focus of Priscus’ narra-
tive; while the eastern ecclesiastical historians Socrates, Sozomen and
Theodoret all avoided providing a thorough account of the Nestorian con-
troversy and the 431 First Council of Ephesus, leaving this to their succes-
sors Liberatus and Evagrius. Our concluding date of circa 600 also needs
some explanation, since it marks the end of the entire Cambridge Ancient
History, and must therefore mark the approximate date when we think
‘antiquity’ ended. In the west, in politics, an earlier concluding date would
probably be simpler: either towards the end of the fifth century, with the
definitive fall of the western empire; or around 5 50, with the defeat of the
Ostrogothic successor-state in Italy and the firm establishment in northern
Europe of Frankish power. In the west, it is principally in terms of cultu-
ral and social continuities (in particular, in the survival of a recognizably
‘Roman’ episcopal and secular aristocracy) that our ‘long’ late antiquity,
reaching up to a.d. 600, is justified. This is, indeed, close to what Henri
Pirenne expounded in Mahomet et Charlemagne in 1937, though few scholars
nowadays would agree with his argument for underlying economic conti-
nuity through the fifth and sixth centuries.

In die east, the choice of circa a.d. 600 as a concluding date for a history
of antiquity is more straightforward (despite a recent fashion for extend-
ing late antiquity up to 750 and beyond), and received authoritative sanc-
tion in Jones’s decision to draw his work to a close with the death of
Maurice in a.d. 602. Scholars may debate whether the eastern empire had
begun a process of serious decline at an earlier date (perhaps with the
Great Plague of 541/2, or with the Slav and Avar invasions of the Balkans
at the end of the century), but no one disputes that the Persian wars and
Arab conquests of the earlier seventh century brought about dramatic
and, as it turned out, irreversible shifts in the balance of power and polit-
ical geography of the east, accompanied by a bouleversement of the politi-
cal, social and economic order. Out of the dramatic events of the seventh
century came eventually those changes in religious, cultural and ethnic

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PREFACE

XIX

identity that created the Arab and Islamic Near East and North Africa,
and destroyed for ever the political and cultural unity of the ancient
Mediterranean.

Although strong and valid arguments can be made for continuities in
many fields of life up to around a.d. 600, it is also undeniably the case that
the political and military upheavals of the fifth century in the west began a
process whereby separate regions of the former empire went their separ-
ate ways and developed their own distinctive identities. Furthermore, in
cultural and social life there was a great deal of diversity even within the
politically united eastern empire. It is our hope that this volume brings out,
particularly in its long regional section (Part iv), not only the ways in which
the fifth- and sixth-century Roman world was still united and identifiable
as ‘ancient’, but also the ways in which it was diverging from older patterns
of life and fragmenting into separate units.

In contrast to earlier volumes that cover Roman history, the two volumes
of the CAH that deal with late antiquity are probably more eastern than
western Mediterranean in their focus. In part, this merely reflects the estab-
lishment of a specifically eastern polity during the fourth century, so that
political ‘events’ now take place in the east as well as in the west. But it also
reflects the way that the eastern empire came to dominate the political and
mental worlds of the fifth and sixth centuries. The earliest barbarian suc-
cessor-states in the west were, for the most part, in theory still part of a
Roman empire, and after 476 this was an eastern-based power. Further-
more, the reality of eastern wealth and military muscle was brought home
to the west very forcibly during the sixth century, when Justinian ‘re-
conquered’ Vandal Africa, Ostrogothic Italy and part of Visigothic Spain.

The centring of this volume on the Mediterranean and its leanings
towards the east are in fact fortunate, given the decision, subsequent to the
initial planning of CAH, to recommission the Cambridge Medieval History
and to have a first, overlapping volume, running from a.d. 500 to 700. The
CMH, inevitably and reasonably (from the perspective of later history), is
essentially a history of what was to become Europe, and offers only partial
coverage of events and developments in the Byzantine and Arab regions
of the Mediterranean. By contrast, the CAH, including this volume, is
equally correct (from the perspective of antiquity) to centre itself firmly on
the Mediterranean, and to treat northern Europe as somewhat peripheral.

The work of editing OfA/XIV was a genuinely collaborative venture, and,
as a result, both pleasant and instructive. The three editors together were
responsible for the overall shape of the book, and subject matter and
length of the chapters, and their allocation to individual authors (aided at
an early stage by John Matthews). All three editors subsequently read and
commented on both first and second drafts of each chapter.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PREFACE

Our main debt of gratitude must be to the individual authors whose
work is here presented: for being prepared to summarize their complex
knowledge within a meagre allocation of words; and for their courtesy in
responding to our promptings and suggestions. All of us have learnt a great
deal from working with their chapters. We are particularly grateful to those
authors who, for one reason or another, had to step into the breach at the
last minute, and yet (without exception) produced full and stimulating
chapters. We also must apologize to those who were prompt in submitting
their work and then had to wait while other distinguished members of the
camel-train were politely goaded into action.

Once again Barbara Hird has compiled the index. The editors are
pleased to take this opportunity to acknowledge her enormous contribu-
tion to The Cambridge Ancient History. With the exception of Volume VII. 1 ,
and of Volume XII which is not yet in production, all of the volumes from
V to XIV have been indexed by Barbara Hird. Her meticulously detailed
and intelligent indexes draw together the scattered contents of these huge
works and make them easily accessible to readers.

Both the editors and the individual contributors would also like to thank
the many people and institutions who gave permission for their illustrative
material to be reproduced.

Finally, it is a very pleasant duty to thank Pauline Hire at Cambridge
University Press for all her help. She has seen the new CAH through from
its very beginnings in 1 970, and has been endlessly patient and helpful with
us, despite our many academic twistings and turnings. Although this is not
quite the last volume of the new CAH to appear, we are delighted to con-
gratulate her on reaching the final date of a.d. 600, a long way from the
‘Geological Ages’ which opened Volume I. The commissioning and pro-
duction of the new Cambridge Ancient History was a massive enterprise; that
it succeeded is due to Pauline’s efficiency, courtesy and perseverance.

A. C.

B. W-P.

M.W

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 1

THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425-76

PETER HEATHER

On 2 3 October 425 the emperor Valentinian III was installed as ruler of the
western half of the Roman empire. The act was a triumph for the
Theodosian dynasty, which had lost its grip on the west following the death
of Valentinian’s uncle, the emperor Honorius, on 1 5 August 423, and, at
first sight, a remarkable demonstration of imperial unity. The young
Valentinian (born on 2 July 419) had been taken to Constantinople by his
mother Galla Placidia even before Honorius died. Valentinian’s father,
Flavius (FI.) Constantius, had done much to reconstitute the western
empire in the 410s. He then married Galla Placidia (Honorius’ sister) on 1
January 417 at the start of his second consulship, and had himself declared
co-emperor of the west in February 421 . He died the following September,
before he could extract recognition of his self-promotion from
Constantinople. His death let loose an extended power struggle in the west,
which at first centred on controlling the inactive Honorius.

Placidia and Valentinian had fled east in the course of these disputes in
422. When, after Honorius’ death, power was seized by a high-ranking
member of the western bureaucracy, the notariusjohn, the eastern emperor,
Theodosius II, eventually decided to back Valentinian and the cause of
dynastic unity. Hence, in spring 425, a large eastern force — combining fleet
and field army — moved west, and despite the capture of its commander,
Ardaburius, quickly put an end to the usurper. Imperial unity was sealed by
the betrothal of Valentinian to the three-year-old Licinia Eudoxia, daugh-
ter of Theodosius II. The whole sequence of events was recorded in con-
siderable detail by the historian Olympiodorus, who brought his story of a
twenty-year period of crisis and reconstruction in the western empire to a
happy conclusion with Valentinian’s installation.

Thus Olympiodorus, writing from an eastern standpoint (he was, in
fact, an eastern diplomat), might well have entitled his work ‘How the
West was Won’. 1 For die landowning Roman elites of the west, however,
Valentinian’s installation did little to address a series of problems, whose

1 Although we know he liked to refer to the work as ‘raw materials for a history’ (vXr] ovyypa<prjs):
Photius, Bibl. lxxx, trans. Blockley, p. 153 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

causes were far-reacliing indeed. A brief survey of the western empire at
die end of 425 both makes clear the fact of imperial disarray and hints at
its causes (cf. Fig. 1).

At the periphery, control had been lost altogether. Local Romano-British
elites had declared themselves independent of Honorius in c. 410, relying,
it seems, upon mercenaries from across the North Sea (Angles and Saxons)
to assist in their defence. Across the Channel, a similar sequence of events
had unfolded in Armorica (broadly speaking, modern Brittany) at more or
less the same time (Zos. vi.5.3). Although central imperial control was in
the process of being restored there by 417, north-western Gaul remained,
as we shall see, a centre of separatist tendencies. In the south-west, the
Goths whom we know as Visigoths had been settled by formal treaty in
Aquitaine — the Garonne valley between Bordeaux and Toulouse — in 416
and/or 41 8. 2 They likewise remained assertive of their own interests,
exploiting the central power-struggles of the mid 420s, for instance, to
besiege Arles (see below). By this date, Arles had replaced Trier as the main
seat of imperial power north of the Alps.

Elsewhere, the situation was no less problematic. In eastern Gaul,
along the Rhine frontier, while there is no record during 425 of any actual
Frankish, Alamannic or Burgundian activity, die ambitions of these
peoples (either as whole confederations or by way of their constituent
parts) posed a constant threat which would develop in intensity. In 413,
for instance, they had supported the Gallic usurper Jovinus against
Honorius’ regime, 3 and, as we shall see, the crisis of the mid 420s was
exploited by all three.

In the Iberian peninsula, likewise, central imperial control was under
threat. Groups of Vandals, Alans and Sueves had crossed the Pyrenees in
409. As the chronicler Hydatius put it, ‘some say September 28th, others
October 12th, but it was definitely a Tuesday’ (34(42]). They had subse-
quently divided the Hispanic provinces between them, and, although one
group of Vandals and many Alans had been destroyed by joint Romano-
Gothic campaigns in the second half of the 410s, the Hasding Vandal coali-
tion (which also now included many Alans) and the Sueves remained
unsubdued in Baetica and Gallaecia respectively. The death of Honorius
and its aftermath provided the Vandals, at least, with an opportunity for
expansion which they cheerfully accepted. In and around 425, they cap-
tured Seville, the capital of Baetica, moved into Carthaginiensis, took the
Balearic islands, and even made a first move into Mauretania in North
Africa (Hydat. Chron. 77(86]).

Thus, of the western empire’s traditional territories, only the Italian
peninsula and its rich and strategically vital North African provinces were

2 See e.g. Wolfram (1988) 170—4 or Heather, Goths and Romans 220—1.

3 Matthews (1975) ch. 12.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANGLES AND
SAXONS

ROMANO-BRITISH

REVOLT*^

.' ' 'F RANKS AND
XvKSAXONS

<®J 8 ' ’f *

«r

7 A? ~

ARMORICAN

BAGAUDAE

mm «a mm*'

P^iY /« 77\ 35

® 7 18 /
VIS ^J ”

720 VY3!

" „„ \ \\5 1 \\f HUNS

4<7727^v':§

-^VANDALS^s

AND n AL'ANS\

16 a/ 41 ®

,A47Y

^'<4371

A 38 > 4.37

i 59 /

r''

Areas lost to central control
owing to internal revolt

Central control threatened by
internal revolt

Areas lost to central control owing
to outside settlement (with names)

Central control threatened by
outside forces (with names)

The Gallic Prefecture

O British diocese

1 Britannia I
2 Britannia II
3 Flavia Caesariensis
4 Maxima Caesariensis
5 Valentia

6 Alpes Poeninae
7 Belgica I
8 Belgica II
9 Germania I
10 Germania II
11 Lugdunensis I
12 Lugdunensis II
13 Lugdunensis III
14 Lugdunensis Senonia
15 Maxima Sequanorum

16 Alpes Maritimae
17 Aquitanica I
18 Aquitanica II
19 Narbonensis I
20 Narbonensis II

21 Novempopuli

22 Vienensis

© Spanish diocese
23 Baetica
24 Baleares
25 Carthaginiensis
26 Gallaecia
27 Lusitania
28 Tarraconensis
29 Tingitania
The Italian Prefecture

© Italian, or Annonarian,
diocese
30 Aemilia
31 Alpes Cottiae
32 Flaminia et Picenum
annonarium
33 Liguria
34 Raetia I
35 Raetia II
36 Venetia et Histria

® Suburbicarian diocese
37 Apulia et Calabria
38 Campania
39 Corsica

40 Lucania et Bruttium

41 Picenum suburbicarium

42 Roma

43 Samnium

44 Sardinia

45 Sicilia

46 Tuscia et Umbria

47 Valeria

\ lllyrican diocese
/48 Dalmatia

49 Noricum
mediterraneum

50 Noricum ripense

51 Pannonia I

52 Pannonia II

53 Savia

54 Valeria

\ African diocese

/55 Africa Proconsularis

56 Byzacena

57 Mauretania Caesariensis

58 Mauretania Sitifensis

59 Numidia

60 Tripolitania

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

free from major disruption, or the threat of it, at the moment Valentinian
III was installed upon the throne. More than that, his installation did not
bring to an end the struggle for power in the west; it merely redefined its
nature. A six-year-old boy could not actually rule. After 425, no further
usurpers tried to seize the throne, but political ambition continued to man-
ifest itself in a struggle to exercise the power behind Valentinian’s throne.

Before considering these events, however, one further defining factor in
the strategic position of the west at the start of Valentinian’s reign requires
brief examination: the Huns. They figured directly, indeed, in the events of
425 . Lacking sufficient forces to defeat Theodosius’ army, the usurper John
sent one of his trusted supporters, Aetius, to seek Hunnic assistance for his
putative regime. The Huns were by this date established on the Great
Hungarian Plain of the middle Danube, still, in all likelihood, beyond the
imperial frontier marked by the river. Aetius was chosen, it seems, because
he had, as a child, spent some time as a hostage among the Huns. Aetius
failed to arrive in time to save John, but brought such a large force (said,
unbelievably, to have numbered 60,000) that the new rulers of the west had
to conciliate rather than destroy him. 4

With the Huns, the cast of main characters is assembled and the basic
situation established. In 425, the eastern imperial authorities reasserted
dynastic unity, but the western empire was far from intact. A mixture of
outside forces (Huns, Franks, Alamanni, Burgundians), immigrants
(Goths, Vandals, Alans and Sueves) and internal separatist groups (espe-
cially in Britain and north-west Gaul) had generated intense and — in the
context of the recent past, at least — unprecedented centrifugal pressures.
These had been sufficient to detach some areas entirely from the orbit of
the imperial centre in Italy, and had disrupted the exercise of central power
elsewhere. The unity of the culturally homogeneous Roman landowners of
the west — the men by whom and for whom the empire was run — was under
severe stress.

Although the workings of the fourth-century empire betray many prob-
lems in socio-political and economic organization, there is not the slight-
est sign that the empire had been about to collapse under its own weight.
The early fifth century saw, however, the sudden intrusion, from 405
onwards, of large numbers of outsiders, organized into a number of rela-
tively coherent groupings, into the lands of the western empire. A force of
Goths led by Radagaisus invaded Italy in 405/6, the Vandals, Alans and
Sueves forced their way across the Rhine in 406, Alaric — attracted by the
resulting chaos — brought more Goths to the west in 408, and the
Burgundians moved the centre of their power right on to, if not actually
within, the Roman frontier at precisely the same time.

4 Refs, as PLRE 11 . 22 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54

Why this should have happened has occasioned much debate. To my
mind, however, the key to these events is provided by the activities of the
Huns. It is well known that their western movements had pushed some of
the Goths later led by Alaric across the Danube in 376. What is less well
understood is that, as late as the 390s, the centre of Hunnic power still lay
north of the Black Sea, well to the east of the Carpathian mountains. By
425, as we have seen, they had moved in force into Hungary, and it was
almost certainly in response to this second wave of western Hunnic expan-
sion that Goths, Vandals, Alans, Sueves and Burgundians fled across the
Roman frontier during the first decade of the fifth century. 5 By 425, these
intrusions had caused, as we have seen, enormous difficulties for the
western empire, which the installation of Valentinian III in 425 did nothing
in itself to solve.

I. THE ERA OF AETIUS 425 — 54

The half-century of imperial history covered by this chapter can be divided
into two roughly equal parts, the watershed marked by the death of Aetius.
This is no artificial divide. The nearly thirty years of Aetius’ prominence
were characterized by a very different mode of political operation from the
last two decades of the western empire’s existence after his death. Broadly
speaking, Aetius was able to pursue a more traditional line of policy
towards the immigrant groups who had forced their way into the western
empire than was possible in the circumstances faced by his successors.

1. The struggle for power 425 — 73

The main contenders for power in the years after 425 were the leaders of
three of the main army groups in the west: Felix, senior magister militum prae-
sentalis and commander in Italy, Boniface, commander in Africa, and Aetius,
commander in Gaul. The latter post was Aetius’ pay-off for not using his
Hunnic army against Valentinian’s eastern forces in 425. Felix, it seems,
made the first move. Accusing Boniface of disloyalty, he ordered the latter
to return to Italy in 427. When Boniface refused, Felix sent a force to North
Africa, but it was defeated. Then Aetius stepped in. On the back of mili-
tary success against both Visigoths (426) and Franks (428), Aetius felt
confident enough to move against Felix. Perhaps these successes had
attracted political support from Valentinian’s mother, Galla Placidia, and
other key members of the court. They certainly secured for Aetius a trans-
fer to Italy and promotion to the post of junior magister militum praesentalis.
The surviving sources are too thin for us to be certain of the exact course

5 Heather (i 99 5) 5—19.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

of events, but in May 430 Aetius had Felix and his wife arrested for plot-
ting against him. They were quickly executed at Ravenna.

A decisive encounter with Boniface was not long delayed. As the strug-
gle between Aetius and Felix played itself out, Boniface was attempting to
deal with the Vandals who had crossed from Spain to North Africa in 429.
Although Aetius had successfully undermined Felix, he clearly lost ground
at court in the early 430s. Perhaps other court politicians, such as Galla
Placidia, did not want to fall entirely under Aetius’ control. Thus Boniface
was recalled to Rome in 432, seemingly in Aetius’ absence, and promoted
magister militum praesentalis. Aetius was quick to respond. Marching to Italy
with an army, he met Boniface in battle near Rimini. Boniface was victori-
ous, forcing Aetius to flee, but was himself mortally wounded in the action
and died soon afterwards. The post of magister militum praesentalis passed to
his son-in-law Sebastianus.

Aetius, however, had other resources upon which to draw. He first
retreated to his country estates but, after an attempt was made on his life,
he turned (as he did in 425) to the Huns. In 43 3, he returned to Italy with
sufficiently large Hunnic reinforcements to cause Sebastianus to flee to
Constantinople, where he remained until 444. Aetius became senior magis-
ter militum praesentalis. By the end of 433, therefore, both of Aetius’ main
rivals had been defeated, and his position in the west was unchallenged. On
5 September 435, he adopted the title Patricius to express his pre-eminence.
Valentinian, perhaps wisely, continued to take no active part in the strug-
gles going on around him. By a combination of assassination, battle and
luck, Aetius had gained control of the western empire.

Fierce struggles, with death the likely price of failure, were hardly a new
phenomenon in imperial politics. Once semi-autonomous outside groups
had established themselves on imperial territory, however, the paralysis that
such struggles caused at the centre resulted in other dangers too. In the era
of Aetius, most of the immigrants were content to operate within a political
and ideological framework which accepted the existence of the Roman
empire. According to circumstance, they sought Roman commands and dig-
nities, married into the imperial family (Galla Placidia’s first husband was
Alaric’s successor, Athaulf), or sponsored usurpations, rather than attempt-
ing to carve out their own entirely independent states. 6 Ostensible respect for
romanitas never prevented the immigrants, however, from looking to extend
their own particular niche within the empire. Hence the struggle of the three
generals between 425 and 433 further loosened the bonds of central control.

6 Cf. Athaulf ’s famous remark that he had first thought to replace Romania with Gothia, but then
decided to use Gothic military power to sustain the empire: Oros. vn.43.2— 3. On the ambitions of
Alaric and Athaulf, see Heather, Goths and Romans 215—17, 219—24. Burgundians and Alans supported
the usurpation of Jovinus (p. 2 above), and the Vandal Gunderic seems to have supported a usurpation
in Spain ( PLRE 11.745).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54

As we have seen, the Goths of Aquitaine threatened Arles, the second
city of the empire, in 426. A second revolt against Roman power led by a
Gothic noble, Anaolsus, unfolded in 430, but this was perhaps the unsanc-
tioned, independent action of an autonomous sub-leader. The Vandals
were even more active. In the mid 420s, they first dramatically expanded
their range of action in the Iberian peninsula, and then in 429 took the deci-
sive step of crossing en masse to Mauretania in North Africa. With their
departure, the Sueves were free to extend their attacks on the Roman pop-
ulation of Gallaecia in both 430 and 431 (Hydat. Chron. 81 [91], 86 [9 6]).
Rhenish groups, likewise, exploited the power vacuum. Counterattacks are
recorded against the Franks in 428 and 432, and, in 430 and 431, the
Alamanni raided across the frontier.

All this directly threatened the empire’s survival. To put it simply, the
Roman state taxed the agricultural production of its dependent territories
to pay for a powerful army and a political-cum-administrative establish-
ment. 7 Any loss of territory through permanent annexation or temporary
damage in warfare thus meant loss of revenue and a weakening of the state
machine. The pragmatic realization on the part of immigrant leaders that,
in the early fifth century, the Roman state was still the most powerful polit-
ical and military force of its day, and hence demanded some show of def-
erence, did not make them any less assertive of independent political
interests, nor those interests any less inimical to the Roman state. 8

Moreover, any weakening of the Roman state (permanent or temporary)
had the more insidious effect of breaking down ties between local Roman
elites and the imperial centre. Again reducing the matter to basics, it can be
said that the late Roman elite consisted of a geographically widespread
class of local landowners, who also participated in imperial institutions.
They did so because the Roman state offered protection and legitimation
of their position at home and, via imperial careers, substantial additional
opportunities for making money and acquiring influence. This extra wealth
and power, together with the lifelong rights and privileges which were part
and parcel of an imperial career, further strengthened the landowners’
position within their local societies. 9

When, because of the appearance of outside military forces, the Roman
state was no longer in a position to sustain local elites (and hence to constrain
their loyalties, either), the whole point of their attachment to the empire dis-
appeared. As a result, they had to look elsewhere for props to their position,
notably to whichever barbarian immigrant group was currently most power-
ful in their own locality. For some, perhaps those with most invested in the
imperial system, the process of psychological adjustment to the decline of

7 On its workings: Jones LRE ch. 13. Structural importance: Wickham (19 84).

8 For a different view, Goffart (1981) 2.9 5 fF. and Goffart (1989) 93ff.

9 On careers, Matthews, (1975) ch. 1 and passim . ; Heather (1994) 25 ff.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

imperial power was naturally slow (see further pp. 29—30 below); for others,
such switches of loyalty could happen quickly. In Gaul in the early 410s, for
instance, Athaulf attracted considerable support from local landowning
elites. They saw good relations with the militarily powerful Goths as the best
means, in changed circumstances, of preserving the essential fabric of their
lives — above all, their property. 111 An alternative response to the same
problem, and equally damaging to the interests of the imperial centre, was
self-assertion. As we have seen, in Britain and Armorica local elites of a more
determined and martial character had attempted to take responsibility for
their own defence as early as the 410s, 11 and there may have been similar sep-
aratist movements in Vindelicia and Noricum in 430. 12 The central power
vacuum of the 420s and early 430s thus gave complete freedom to a whole
range of forces which posed a direct threat to the Roman state.

2. Years of hope 4)4—9

Once his position was secure, Aetius was able to take direct action to
restore the situation. As we have seen, even during his struggles with Felix
and Boniface, he had won some victories over the Franks and Goths. After
434, he pushed the policy forward with greater vigour. Defeating Roman
rivals before tackling the barbarian threat might seem the wrong order of
priorities. But political crisis does not suspend personal ambition; in fact, it
often provides a genuine pretext for a quarrel. And to combat the grave
threats now facing the empire, any leader needed to deploy the full range
of imperial resources — particularly, of course, on the military front.

Aetius’ main military successes again came in Gaul. In 436, the Goths
revolted again and, moving south and east, laid siege to Narbonne. This was
no small-scale raid, and it took Aetius three years to restore some order. His
main commander in the region was the dux Litorius, who operated with an
army primarily of Huns. The Goths suffered considerable losses in 437/8,
but in 439 Litorius was himself defeated, captured and killed near Toulouse.
There followed a renewal of the treaty of 41 8 . Despite the loss of Litorius,
Aetius had prevented the Goths from making any further gains. More suc-
cesses came against the Franks (among whom unrest had broken out in
432). Perhaps more worrying was the extensive revolt of so-called bagaudae
led by one Tibatto in 435. It began in Armorica (where, as we have seen,
there had been trouble before) and spread more widely through Gaul. In
437, however, Tibatto was captured and the revolt suppressed. Aetius also
enjoyed great success against the Burgundians. Since the first decade of the
fifth century, they had been established right on the Roman frontier. They

10 The best illustration of the fundamental importance of secure property is Priscus, ed. Blockley
fr. 1 1 .2, p. 72. 504—7. 11 See e.g. Wood (1984); Van Dam, Leadership and Community pt 1 .

12 Chron. Min. 11.22 s.a. 430; Sid. Ap. Carm. vn.233— 4; cf. Thompson (1956) 35.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54

are recorded in different sources as suffering heavy defeats in both 436 and
437. The first occasion was explicitly at Aetius’ hands, the second at the
hands of the Huns. As we shall see, Aetius may well have organized the
Hunnic attack too (if both were not part of one and the same campaign). 13
In the Iberian peninsula, Aetius’ approach was less direct, but not, it seems,
unsuccessful. The Sueves were still harassing the Gallaecians, and Aetius
responded to requests for help by sending embassies in 43 3 and 438 (Hydat.
Chron. 8 8 [9 8] ; 91 [100]; 105 [1 13]). A panegyric of Aetius does record a mili-
tary intervention in Spain by one of his subordinates, but there is no record
of this in the writings of the Hispano-Roman chronicler Hydatius. 14
Whatever the case, the second embassy seems to have persuaded the Sueves
to make peace, not least, one presumes, because by the latter date Aetius had
already enjoyed considerable military success in Gaul.

Apart from the indigenous resources of the western empire, Aetius
drew on two outside sources of assistance in these years. The first was the
eastern empire. In 43 1, initially in support of Boniface (whom the east may
have backed in the struggle with Aetius), an eastern army under Aspar came
to North Africa to combat the Vandals. According to Procopius (Wars
111.3.36), Aspar left North Africa for Constantinople after being defeated
by the Vandals, and before Boniface’s death in battle against Aetius (432).
He was still in Carthage on 1 January 434, however, by which time Aetius
was securely established in power in Italy, so that a working relationship was
probably established between Aspar and Aetius. It also seems likely that
Aspar brokered the peace treaty with the Vandals in 435, which saw them
settled in relatively poor areas of Mauretania and the Numidian coast (Fig.
2). 15 Constantinople thus continued to take an active interest in western
affairs, and, if eastern forces were unable to defeat the Vandals, they did
enough to exclude them from the richest North African provinces of
Proconsularis and Byzacena.

Second, Aetius drew very heavily on Hunnic military manpower, which
he presumably paid for in hard cash. The Huns had been his trump card in
internal imperial political disputes in both 425 and 43 3. 16 From the mid
430s onwards, Aetius also used them extensively in Gaul, where they were
responsible both for crushing the Armorican bagaudae and for much of
the campaign against the Visigoths. 17 The Huns also savaged the
Burgundians in 437, an event organized — according to some of our
sources, at least — by Aetius, and which preceded a resettlement of the sur-
vivors within the Roman frontier. 18

13 Refs, as PLRE 11.24— 5. Secondary accounts: Mommsen, (1901) 523; Stein (1959) 322ff.; Zecchini
(1983) ch. 9. 14 Merobaud. Pan. fr. iia 22— 3; Jord. Get. 176; cf. PLRE 11.25.

15 Sources: PLRE 11.166; cf. Courtois (1955) 15 5—71- 16 Refs, as PLRE 11.23— 4.

17 Refs, as PLRE 11.684—5.

18 Refs, as PLRE 11.523. On Aetius’ role: Stein (1959) 323; O’Flynn (1983) 89 n. 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

IO I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

Fig. 2 Vandal and Alan settlements in North Africa

In the later 430s, therefore, Aetius restored some order to the western
empire. Britain did not return to the fold, although substantial contacts of
a more informal nature clearly continued between Romano-Britons and
their continental counterparts. The two famous visits to the island of
bishop Germanus of Auxerre in 429 and (probably) the early 440s are likely
to be no more than the tip of a substantial iceberg. Otherwise, indigenous
and immigrant revolts in Gaul were suppressed, and Rhine frontier groups
defeated. The Sueves were kept within reasonable bounds in north-western
Spain and, with eastern help, the Vandals confined to the poorer North
African provinces. This last point is worth stressing, for Aetius has been
criticized in modern times for concentrating on Gaul at the expense of the
richer and strategically more defensible provinces of North Africa. Ties
between Italian and southern Gallic elites were very strong, however, and
Aetius had made his name in Gaul. Abandoning the latter would have been
politically impossible, therefore, and it was far from an unreasoanble line
of policy to rely on eastern help to retain the most valuable African prov-
inces. In many ways, the most striking aspect of Aetius’ success is the role
played by the Huns. Not only did they rescue him from political defeat in
both 425 and 432, but were also central to his military success in Gaul. With
Hunnic and eastern imperial assistance, therefore, Aetius succeeded in
creating a precarious balance of power in the 430s, which, at least to some
extent, checked the process of political fragmentation in the west.

3 . The loss of Africa and after, 439—49

An already difficult situation was pushed into acute crisis, however, when
in 439 the Vandals marched into Carthage to take possession of the richest

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54 II

provinces of North Africa. 19 These lands were crucial to the empire, not
least in feeding the population of Rome. The Vandals also followed up this
success by exploiting to full effect the maritime expertise available in the
city. Early in 440 a large Vandal fleet left Carthage, and landed on, and dev-
astated, large parts of another major revenue centre of the western empire:
Sicily. Both east and west reacted swiftly to the Vandals’ new capacities. The
maritime defences of Rome and Constantinople were immediately
strengthened, 211 and plans were laid to restore the situation. That eastern
help was on its way was announced by Aetius as early as June 440, but, given
all the logistic problems (cf. CJ xii.8.2; 50.21), a counter-expedition could
not be ready before the campaigning season of 441 . At the start of the year,
a combined force from east and west gathered in Sicily, the eastern troops,
under the command of Areobindus, having been drawn from the Danube
frontier. 21 In many ways, this crisis was the acid test of whether Aetius’
efforts could really hold the line against political fragmentation in the west
or were merely slowing it down. Unfortunately for the western empire, the
expedition went no further than Sicily. A critical change had occurred in the
political stance of the Huns.

By c. 440, the Hunnic empire was approaching the apogee of its power,
under Attila and (at first) his brother Bleda. This was the end result, it
seems, of related processes, which saw both the increasing centralization
of power among the Huns and continuing conquests of other tribes.
Between them, these transformations brought unprecedented numbers of
different subjects under the direct control of individual Hunnic leaders. 22
Because of this greater strength, Hunnic leaders could widen the scope of
their ambitions, and Aetius’ old policy of using them against unwanted
immigrants on Roman soil collapsed. 23 As the joint east— west Vandal expe-
dition gathered in Sicily, Attila and Bleda launched their first major invasion
across the Danube. Exploiting a variety of pretexts, the Huns crossed the
river in force, capturing the cities of Viminacium and Margus. Smaller-scale
raiding extended over a wider area. 24

One direct result of this sequence of events was that North Africa was
secured for the Vandals. Many of the eastern troops in Sicily had been
drafted from the Danube frontier and, because of the Huns, had to return.
In consequence, Aetius was forced in 442 to acknowledge by treaty the

19 Courtois (195 5) iylff. 20 Nov. Val. 5.3; Chron. Pasch. ad a. 439 = Chron. Min. 11.80.

21 Best account: Maenchen-Helfen (1973) io8ff.; cf. Stein (1959) 324—5; Zecchini (1983) 1 71 fF.

22 See further Mommsen (1901) 524—6; Thompson (1996) 26ff.; Harmatta (1952) 292ff.; Maenchen-
Helfen (1973) 94ff.; cf. ch. 23 (Whitby), pp. 704-8 below.

23 Cf. amongst others Mommsen (1901) 526; Stein (1959) 334—5. This has perhaps also been the
policy of FI. Constantius: Heather (1995) 26.

24 The sources for Attila’s campaigns of the 440s have prompted two alternative chronological
reconstructions. In general, I prefer Maenchen-Helfen (1973) io8ff. to Thompson (1996) 86ff. The
question turns on the reliability of a notice provided by the By2antine chronicler Theophanes; cf.
Heather (1996) 252.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

Vandals’ latest conquests. In this agreement, Aetius recognized their
control over Proconsular Africa, Byzacena and western Numidia. He
received back the poorer and now devastated provinces previously ceded
to the Vandals in 43 5. 25

In the meantime, imperial control had suffered further setbacks in Spain.
In the wake of Geiseric’s seizure of Carthage, the Sueves, under a new king,
Rechila, took advantage of Aetius’ preoccupation with North Africa to
expand their dominion. In 439, they moved out of Gallaecia to take the
main city of Lusitania, Merida. In 440, they captured Censurius, Aetius’
commander and main representative in the peninsula. In 441, they took
Seville and extended their control over the whole of Baetica and
Carthaginiensis (Fig. 3). 26 Imperial control was further undermined by a
series of bagaudic uprisings, particularly in Tarraconensis, the one province

25 Maenchen-Helfen (1973) io8ff.; Courtois (1955) 1 73 ff. Taxes in the returned provinces were
reduced to an eighth: Nov. Val. 13.

26 Hydat. Chron. 1 19 (capture of Merida: a.d. 439), 1 21—3 (fall of Seville, Baetica and Carthaginiensis:
a.d. 440—1), Chron. Min. 11.23— 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54

1 3

still under direct imperial control from the centre. As in Gaul, these upris-
ings would seem to have represented assertions of local against central
imperial power. At least one of the revolts, that led by Basilius in Tyriaso
(Tirasona) in 449, seems to have favoured a Suevic take-over of the prov-
ince. 27 After Censurius’ capture, a succession of imperial commanders were
sent to the region: Asturius in 442, Merobaudes in 443 and Vitus in 446.
Asturius and Merobaudes had to concentrate on defeating bagaudae, pre-
sumably to maintain imperial control in Tarraconensis (Hydat. Chron.
1 1 7[i 25]; 1 2o[i 28]). Vitus’ brief was more ambitious. Repeating the strategy
of the 41 os, he led a combined Roman and Gothic force into Carthaginiensis
and Baetica to restore broader imperial control in the peninsula. Hydatius
complains bitterly about the logistic demands the army made upon local
Hispano-Romans, but this complaint was perhaps dictated by the expedi-
tion’s outcome. When Vitus’ force met the Sueves in battle, it was routed
(Hydat. Chron. 1 26 [1 34]) . After 446, Hydatius records no further imperial
military initiatives in the peninsula, and, in alliance with local groups, the
Sueves began to make headway even in Tarraconensis.

Of Gaul in the 440s we know comparatively little. In the south-west, at
least, Aetius’ successes of the 430s were enough to keep the Goths quiet.
No revolt of any kind is mentioned, and they contributed to Vitus’ Spanish
venture of 446. Elsewhere, imperial control did not go unchallenged.
Armorica continued to present particular difficulties. Aetius seems to have
established a group of Alans, under Goar, in the region in 442 to discou-
rage rebellion. This did not prevent trouble from breaking out again in 448
— apparently because of the Alanic settlement — but, once again, the bagau-
dae were suppressed. 28 Whether the same reasoning underlay Aetius’ deci-
sion to settle Burgundians in Savoy, in south-eastern Gaul, is unclear. This
has sometimes been argued, but it is also possible that the Burgundians,
heavily defeated by combined Romano-Hunnic action in the mid 430s,
were refugees from the power of Bleda and Attila (repeating the pattern of
earlier frontier penetrations in 376 and 406). Whatever the case, Aetius
supervised their installation in Savoy in 443 (Chron. Gall. 452 no. 128 =
Chron. Min. 11). On the Rhine frontier, we hear only of a Frankish attack on
Arras which Aetius himself beat off, probably in 448. Control was thus sub-
stantially maintained in Gaul, but the loss of North Africa had plunged the
western empire into acute financial crisis.

Such a crisis had been in the offing since the first decade of the century.
Any territory caught up in warfare, annexed outright by ambitious barbar-
ian kings or turned independent, involved temporary or permanent losses
of revenue to the central Roman state. No more revenues came from

27 Hydat. Chron. 133—4 [142], where Basilius firsts acts independently, and then helps the Suevic king
Rechiarius to plunder Saragossa (Caesaraugusta). 28 Refs, as PLRE 11.26-7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

Britain after c. 410, and Spanish revenues must have been entirely lost for
most of the 410s and were only partially restored thereafter. Parts of
Gallaecia remained in Suevic hands throughout the fifth century, and the
Vandals remained very active (sometimes attacking the Sueves, sometimes
pillaging the Hispano-Romans) until they left Spain in 429. 29 It is also
unlikely that much tax was raised in war-torn Gaul either in the 410s or the
430s. Moreover, substantial tax remissions had sometimes to be granted to
areas caught up in fighting. After Alaric’s Goths left Italy, Honorius reduced
the land-tax of the eight Suburbicarian provinces to one-fifth of their
normal level in 41 3 , and, after a further five years, the taxes of Picenum and
Tuscia to one-seventh, and those of Campania to one-ninth. 3 "

The western empire’s tax base had thus suffered substantial losses — both
temporary and permanent — even before 439. Not surprisingly, tax-payers in
those areas which did remain under central control seem to have faced ever-
increasing burdens. It has been argued, for instance, that in 440 western tax
rates were twice as high as those prevailing in the east even a century later. 31
When, in addition, the west lost control of its richest assets to the Vandals,
and of other worthwhile ones to the Sueves, a bad situation was made
incomparably worse. The legislation of Aetius’ regime from the 440s shows
unmistakable signs of the consequent financial stress. In 444, an imperial law
claimed that plans for a larger army were being frustrated by revenues which
were not large enough even to feed and clothe the existing troops. This state-
ment was used to justify the introduction of the siliquaticum , a new sales-tax
of about four per cent. 32 Just a few months previously, many bureaucrats had
lost their exemptions from the recruitment tax (Nov. Val. 6.3 of 14 July 444),
and other efforts had been made in 440 and 441 to cut back on tax privileges
and corruption. The regime was thus desperate enough for cash to increase
taxes for the landowning, bureaucratic classes on which it depended for
political support."’ The precarious balance of power established by Aetius
in the 430s had been undermined, primarily because of the Huns’ expan-
sionary ambitions. Further twists in the Hunnic saga, in the late 440s and
early 450s, would totally destroy it, and with it Aetius himself.

4. Attila and after, 449—44

Although unable to reverse the situation in Africa or the gains made by the
Sueves in Spain, for most of the 440s the west did not, at least, have to deal

29 E.g. Hydat. Chron. 71, 75, 86, 89—90, Chron. Min. 11.20— 1; cf. Thompson (1977).

30 C. Th. xi. 28.7, 1 2. After Vandal attacks, the taxes of Sicily were similarly reduced to a seventh: Nov.

Val. 1.2 (440). 31 Jones, LRE 464 n. 128, deduced from Nov. Val. 5.4.

32 Nov. Val. 1 5 of September 444 to January 445; cf. Nov. Val. 24 of 447.

33 Privileges: Nov. Val. 10.1 (a.d. 441), 10. 1.3. Corruption: Nov. Val. 7.1—2 (a.d. 440 and 442).
Unjustified exemptions: Nov. Val. 4 and 10 (440 and 441). Stein (1959) 337—8 argued from these laws
that Aetius conspired with leading landowners to keep the land-tax down against the interests of the
state. On this point, see Twyman (1970); Zecchini (1983) ch. 10; and, more generally, Weber (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54

directly with Attila’s ambitions. Sometime before 449, presumably under
duress, Aetius had ceded the Pannonian province of Savia to the Huns
(Priscus fr. 7; Blockley fr. 1 1.1). By the same date, Attila was also enjoying
the rank of honorary magister militum of the western empire, with its atten-
dant salary (Priscus fr. 8; Blockley fr. 11.2, p. 278.627—31). The circum-
stances of these concessions are unknown. In the meantime, Attila had
concentrated on the Balkan possessions of the eastern empire, where he
won huge victories in 441 / 2 and (probably) 447. ~’ 4 In the late 440s, however,
Attila turned his attention westward.

Scandals within the royal family provided him with a pretext. The emperor
Valentinian’s sister, Honoria, conceived a child, we are told, as the result of
an unsuitable love affair with one Eugenius, the manager of her estates.
Eugenius was executed and Honoria placed in custody. To prevent further
scandal she was subsequently betrothed to a trustworthy senator called
Herculanus. At this point, she seems to have written to Attila offering him
half the western empire as a dowry if he would rescue and marry her. In 449
or 450, consequently, Attila made a formal demand, based on the letter, and
threatened war. What we should make of this is hard to know. The story
appears in a wide variety of sources, and the fact of Honoria’s disgrace seems
securely enough established. 35 The likelihood is, however, that Attila (having
probably exhausted the possibilities of immediate gains in the east) was in
any case planning a western campaign, or series of campaigns.

Indeed, Attila carefully prepared the ground for a major western move,
and Honoria was not his only pretext. In the summer of 449, western
ambassadors were sent to Attila to answer his charge that a Roman banker
called Silvanus was in possession of gold plate which was Attila’s by right.
The issue was trivial, but Attila threatened war if it was not settled as he
wished (Priscus fr. 8; Blockley fr. 1 1.2, pp. 263, 265, 277). This might have
been an autocrat’s megalomania, but, given its context, I would take it as
another sign that Attila wanted to press a quarrel with the west.
Diplomatically, too, the ground was carefully prepared. In the summer of
450, outstanding issues in Attila’s relations with Constantinople were
settled on terms which the historian Priscus regarded as favourable to the
eastern empire (frr. 13—14; Blockley fr. 15.3—4). Attila’s generosity suggests
that he was keen to secure his eastern front, presumably with a western
campaign in mind. 36 At the same time, he was interfering in the west, not
least in an attempt to sow discord among its different constituent powers.
There are vague records of some kind of contact between Attila and
Geiseric, who is said to have bribed Attila to turn his armies westwards.
One of the leaders of the recently defeated bagaudae, the doctor Eudoxius,
had fled to the Huns in 448. His reception may suggest that Attila foresaw

34 I would generally follow Maenchen-Helfen (1973) io8ff. (cf. p. 11 above, n. 24). For details, see
ch. 2 (Lee), pp. 41—2, and ch. 23 (Whitby), pp. 704—12 below.

35 For further details with refs., Thompson (1996) 145— 6. 36 Cf. Thompson (1996) 143.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

W ^ u/fi 0 North [C]

v^MORICA Troy JyD-x \ r/wr'

OAuxerre' Me I^

\ K . T\U CAT ALA UN! AN

V rj / ft, V PM/A/S ^

> a »”

A />'"

Bordeaux 6

Clermont 0 .

, / -'"•Av / NORICUM A ''6(f

) Lr^

$L L y° ns Milan/ v er ona

^/(Lugdunum) O / 0 ^OjAquileia (

^ACarcassonne n 0 ^NK)Arles ^.^'Ravenna;

%^^(?^.NarbonneY ^3^ A <

ivennaCf Sirmium^^T oM

A OR R i m i n i V DALMATIA #- TIn?

X.Salona._> \ v "

^Xngidunum
S Margus

s.^^—0-Cordoba ^ (/

^^CTANIA

PICENUM

Rome N " — .

AFRICA b
PROCON-
SULARISf

BYZACENA

iCarthage^5ICILY |

Boundary of eastern empire
Land over 1000 metres

SCALE

0 250

.Dyrrhachium - X^ 0 ConstantinopjJa

3 JJ

c A U C A s u ,

Black Sea

ARM E N te=F/-Theodosiopolis

^xLYt 1 ^ U

3 C_^y~-V. d Martyropolis

1 s~- AmidaP'/ \

/ C 7 OEdess^DaraA

VAv . Ad Ephesus n/ larsi

HiT?’' '•••.•Acaria 1 (SAURrA

Tyre A

Caesarea o^o 0 /

I /

Jerusalem O^j* /

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ERA OF AETIUS, 425 — 54 17

a possible use for him in fomenting a revolt to ease the path of any Hunnic
army operating in the west. Late in 450, likewise, Aetius and Attila backed
different candidates for the recently vacant kingship of the Ripuarian
Franks. Every possible opening was thus being exploited by Attila, first, to
provoke a quarrel, and, second, to prevent the creation of any united front
against him in the west. The diplomatic offensive reached a climax in 451,
when, as his forces finally began to march, Attila sent letters both to the
western court at Ravenna and to the Visigothic king Theoderic I in
Toulouse. To Ravenna, Attila proclaimed that he had come to attack the
Visigoths on their behalf. Theoderic was told that the Huns’ quarrel was
with Ravenna and he was urged to bring the Goths over to Attila’s side. 37
As Jordanes comments: ‘Beneath his ferocity, [Attila] was a subtle man, and
fought with craft before he made war’ {Get. 36. 1 85— 6).

At the start of 451, Attila’s expedition moved westwards along the left
bank of the Danube. The Rhine was crossed around Mayence, the prov-
ince of Belgica ravaged, and the city of Metz burned on 7 April. Towards
the end of May, the Huns were encamped around Orleans, when Aetius
finally appeared. His army was composed of Roman regulars and a series
of detachments from allied peoples. Of these, the most important was
Gothic, under the command of their king, Theoderic I. Jordanes also men-
tions the presence of Franks, Saxons and Burgundians {Get. 36.191). The
western authorities, it seems, had been expecting an invasion of Italy, and
Aetius had had to work extremely hard to make the Goths take the field.
Attila’s diplomatic manoeuvrings had nearly worked. On Aetius’ appear-
ance, Attila retreated towards the Champagne, where battle was joined on
the so-called Catalaunian Plains (or campus Mauriacus) in late June or early
July. In a bloody encounter, the Visigothic king was killed, but victory went
to Aetius. Attila at first contemplated lulling himself, but then withdrew to
Pannonia to lick his wounds and prepare another effort. 38

Attila’s second western expedition followed in the next campaigning
season, and this time did fall on Italy. Friuli was taken by storm — a victory
followed in swift succession by the capture of, amongst others, Aquileia,
Padua, Mantua, Verona and Brescia. It was after these successes that the
famous encounter between Attila and pope Leo is supposed to have taken
place on the river Mincius. Whether it ever occurred is doubtful, and it
seems most unlikely that the pope’s persuasion really saved Rome. Aetius
has sometimes been criticized for not giving full-scale battle to the Huns,
but without bringing the Goths to Italy — a very dangerous move — he
lacked sufficient forces. Further, contrary to some interpretations, he does
seem to have been harrying the Huns with the troops that were available to

37 On these matters, see Thompson (1996) 143ft.; Clover (1972).

38 Further details: Thompson (1 996) 148ft.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

him. The new eastern emperor Marcian also launched an attack on Attila’s
underprotected homelands, and disease was becoming rife in the invading
army. In all probability, a combination of these factors, rather than papal
intervention, led Attila to withdraw. 39

On his return to Pannonia, the Hunnic king decided to take another wife.
Precisely how many he had it is impossible to ascertain. The wedding took
place early in 45 3, and, as is well known, the great conqueror burst a blood
vessel and died in his sleep. His death let loose a vicious struggle for power
among his sons, which culminated at the battle of the Nedao in 454 or 45 5,
where his eldest son Ellac died in the conflict. This succession crisis was
seized upon by many of the Huns’ subject peoples as an opportunity to
throw off the Hunnic yoke. The exact course of events is difficult to recon-
struct, but, by the early 460s at the latest, Attila’s composite empire had dis-
solved into its constituent parts; Gepids, Goths, Rugi, Heruls and Sueves
had all asserted their independence. By the late 460s, the remnants of
Attila’s Huns were themselves seeking asylum inside the eastern empire. 4 "
This dramatic Hunnic collapse brought in its wake a final crisis for the
Roman empire in western Europe.

II. THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

The most immediate effect of the collapse of the Huns was that the
emperor Valentinian III, thirty- five years old in 454, felt no further need of
Aetius. Aetius himself would seem to have sensed this, since in that year he
pressed the emperor into a marriage alliance. Aetius’ son Gaudentius was
to marry Valentinian’s daughter Placidia. Since Valentinian had no son, this
would have reinforced Aetius’ political pre-eminence by making his son
Valentinian’s likely successor. Valentinian, however, resented the move, and
there were other western politicians who chafed under Aetius’ long-
standing predominance, not least the senator Petronius Maximus who
encouraged the emperor to act. Valentinian assassinated Aetius personally,
we are told, on 21 or 22 September 454. Valentinian himself was murdered
the next March by two of Aetius’ bodyguards. 41 The disappearance from
the scene of Aetius, Valentinian and, above all, Attila marked the opening
of a new (and final) era in the history of the Roman west.

1 . A new political order: Petronius Maximus, Avitus, and after, 4JJ—7

After the collapse of Attila’s empire, it was no longer possible to use
Hunnic troops to pursue a policy of military containment towards the

39 Further details and full refs.: Thompson (1996) 1 56ff.; Maenchen-Helfen (1973) i29ff.

40 Maenchen-Helfen (1973) 143!?.; Heather, Goths and Romans 228—9, 2.46 — 9; cf. Thompson (1996)

ch. 6. 41 Sources as PLRE 11.28.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE 19

immigrants who had established themselves in the western empire since
a.d. 400. This policy, though it was the basis of Aetius’ success in the 430s,
had broken down anyway in the 440s, when Hunnic ambitions increased.
After 45 3, it ceased altogether to be relevant. Not only was Hunnic power
in the process of being extinguished, but the western empire, as we have
seen, was itself chronically short of funds and could perhaps no longer
have afforded to pay for its assistance. It would probably also have raised
political difficulties to re-employ the Huns after the devastation they had
so recently caused. As a result, a fundamental change followed in the nature
of power politics in the western half of the empire.

The traditional players of the power game — at least at first — remained.
The eastern empire continued to play a significant political role; so too did
the western Roman military. The Gallic army was prominent, particularly
under Aegidius in the 460s, 42 the Italian army underlay the influence of
Ricimer, and the forces of Dalmatia provided a solid power base between
450 and 480 for Marcellinus and his nephew Julius Nepos. 4 ’ These western
army groups had all to be reconciled individually to imperial regimes. In the
same way, leading members of the Roman landed elite, especially the sena-
tors of Italy and southern Gaul, remained politically important. In contrast
to fourth-century career patterns, the fifth century was marked by an unprec-
edented tendency for Gallic senators to hold the top jobs in Gaul, and Italian
senators those in Italy. Each group also had its own institutional focus. The
senate of Rome and the imperial court at Ravenna continued to function as
centres for elite political activity in Italy. From 418, the refounded Gallic
council did the same for Gallic senatorial elites. 44 There was thus a greater
tendency towards the emergence of regional solidarities in the fifth century,
though this should not be overstressed. Major families north and south of
the Alps remained interrelated, 45 and there is quite as much, if not more, evi-
dence for dispute within the ranks of Gallic and Italian senators as between
them. Very immediate interests tended to surface, indeed, at moments of
crisis. Sidonius’ resentment that his native Clermont was traded by the
emperor Nepos to the Goths in return for Provence is a famous example. 46
Both the Roman senate and the Gallic council remained as much gatherings
of rich, interrelated and politically powerful landowners as forums through
which genuinely regional views were expressed. 47

From c. 450, however, the major autonomous barbarian groups on
Roman territory also began to demand and play an increasingly active role

42 The comites Nepotianus, Paul and Arbogast also commanded elements of this force between the
450s and the 470s. 43 Cf. Wozniak (1981) 35 3—63.

44 Jobs: Sundwall (1915) 8—9, 21—2; cf. Matthews (1975) esp. 3 3 iff., 3 5 6fT.

45 Matthews (1975) 3 3 8 fT. ; Barnish (1988) 134—5; Mommaerts and Kelly (1992).

46 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.7: cf. Harries (1995) 236ff.

47 E.g. Max (1979) 225— 31; Weber (1989) 491—3. The case for a Gallic— Italian divide as a fundamen-
tal factor in political activity has been made by several: e.g. Twyman (1970) 484—7; Mathisen (1981).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

in western affairs. This was true, in the first instance, of the Goths and
Burgundians of southern Gaul, and the Vandals of North Africa. By the
470s and 480s, however, they had been joined by groups of Franks, partic-
ularly those led by Clovis’ father, Childeric. Previously, Hunnic power was
used by Aetius to contain these groups within designated physical boun-
daries, and to minimize their political influence. When Hunnic power col-
lapsed, the only viable alternative was to include all — or some — of them
within the western empire’s body politic. Such a move was already
prefigured, indeed, in the great alliance Aetius put together in 451 to defeat
Attila on the Catalaunian Plains. The old strategic order was reversed.
Instead of the western Roman state using Hunnic power to control the
immigrant barbarians, in 451 it allied itself with the immigrants against the
Huns. 48

Western imperial politicians clearly understood the new realities. The
first move of Petronius Maximus, for instance — the immediate and self-
proclaimed successor of Valentinian III — was to win Gothic support. His
close associate Avitus was despatched to Toulouse to court the Visigothic
king, Theoderic II. 49 Perhaps the best example of the sea change in western
politics, however, is Avitus himself. While he was still in Toulouse, news
came through that Maximus had been killed in the Vandal sack of Rome
(May 455). Avitus took his place, being proclaimed emperor first by the
Goths and then by Gallo-Roman senators at Arles on 9 July 455. The writ-
ings of Sidonius Apollinaris provide us with a fascinating document from
these tumultuous months of political reordering. As we have seen, some
members of the Roman landowning elite had in the 410s quickly allied
themselves to the Goths. Many, however, remained to be convinced that
this was an acceptable strategy. Around the time of Avitus’ accession,
Sidonius wrote a detailed account of life at the Gothic court. In it, he
records Theoderic’s natural physical perfection, the ordered, rational pro-
cedure of daily business, and the moderation and virtuous nature of the
food, drink and entertainment on offer there. Given that the traditional
images of ‘barbarians’ in Graeco-Roman ideology were irrationality and
sensuality, the letter carries a clear ideological message. Its tone would still
appear to be patronizing in places (particularly in its account of the king’s
willingness to grant requests if you let him win at board games), but its
central theme still rings out clearly. Theoderic was a king close enough to
Roman ways of doing things for him to be properly included within the
Roman order.

Avitus’ regime quickly took off in Gaul, where it combined Goths, Gallo-
Romans and Burgundians, but failed to establish itself in Italy, whose army,

48 A similar analysis: Clover (1978) 171.

49 Valentinian III was murdered on 1 6 March, Petronius Maximus proclaimed on 1 7 March: PLRE
11.75 1. Avitus’ mission: Sid. Ap. Cartn. vn.392ff.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

under Ricimer and Majorian, remained implacably hostile. The eastern
empire also withheld its recognition, although it did not go so far as to
condemn Avitus as a usurper. 30 And in practice, when Avitus advanced into
Italy in 456, Ricimer’s forces were powerful enough to defeat him, at the
battle of Placentia on 17 October. In the aftermath, Avitus resigned to
become bishop of Placentia, and died soon after. The manner of his defeat
is indicative. Most subsequent western imperial regimes took the form of
Ricimer plus a variety of frontmen; Ricimer himself never sought the
throne. This would suggest that the Italian army he commanded was too
powerful for any western regime to function without it as a central player.
Nevertheless, Ricimer’s army was not by itself sufficient to control areas
outside Italy, and every imperial regime after Valentinian III also attempted
to include other Roman army groups, senators (Gallo-Roman and Italian)
and, from among the barbarians, at least the Goths and Burgundians.

Regimes largely independent of the immigrant groups, of the kind
which had prevailed earlier in the century, thus gave way, after 450, to
regimes which included them. This fundamental change in the nature of
political activity had important consequences. No group of supporters was
ready (nor previously had any of the more traditional power blocs ever
been ready) to back a regime without some kind of pay-off. One effect of
including immigrants in governing coalitions, therefore, was to increase the
numbers of those expecting rewards.

The most obvious reward sought by, and given to, the leaders of immi-
grant groups was involvement in the running of the empire. Burgundian
kings took Roman titles, for instance, while the Visigoth Theoderic II
attempted to order affairs in Spain. 51 The Vandals’ intervention in Italy in 45 5
should also be read as an attempt to stake a claim in the new political order.
That they sacked the city of Rome has naturally received most attention, but
Geiseric, the Vandal leader, also took back to North Africa with him Eudoxia
and Eudocia — respectively, the widow and daughter of Valentinian III.
Geiseric subsequently married the daughter to his son and heir, Huneric. The
two had been betrothed, but not married, under the treaty of 442 (see p. 1 1
above), but, on assuming the throne in 455, Petronius Maximus married
Eudocia to his son, the Caesar Palladius, instead. Thus Geiseric intervened
in Italy at least partly because a match which should have cemented the
Vandals’ place in the new political order of the west appeared to have been
thwarted. Subsequently, Geiseric would also attempt to forward the imperial
claims of Olybrius who married Placidia, the younger daughter of
Valentinian, and was thus his relative by marriage. 52

50 Refs, as PLRE 11.198; cf. Mathisen (1981) 233—4.

51 The Burgundian kings Gundioc and Gundobad were both magister militum per Gamas'. PLRE
11.523— 4. Goths in Spain: p. 22 below, n. 54.

52 Clover (1978) 193 fT. ; cf. generally Clover (1989a), (1989b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

Involvement in imperial affairs carried great prestige, and had been
sought by immigrant leaders since the time of Alaric and Athaulf. The
western empire only had this prestige, however, because it was, and was
perceived to be, the most powerful institution of its day. Prestige certainly
incorporates abstract qualities, but the attraction of the living empire for
immigrant leaders was firmly based upon its military might and overall
wealth. They wished to avoid potentially dangerous military confrontations
with it, while its wealth, when distributed as patronage, could greatly
strengthen a leader’s position. By the 450s, however, the reality of power
behind the western imperial facade was already slipping. Britain, parts of
Gaul and Spain (at different times) and, above all, North Africa had
removed themselves, or been removed, from central imperial control. The
rewards — wealth in the form of money or land, wealth being the basis of
power 53 — given after 454 to new allies from among the barbarian immi-
grants were granted, therefore, from an already shrunken base. And, of
course, the very process of rewarding caused further shrinkage.

Take, for example, Avitus. Under him, the Goths were sent to Spain to
bring the Sueves to heel. In contrast to the position in the 410s, however,
Theoderic II’s troops seem to have operated by themselves and, by
Hydatius’ account, basically ransacked northern Spain, including its loyal
Hispano-Romans, of all the wealth they could force their victims to
produce. 54 This benefited the Goths, but not the western Roman state.
There is no indication that Roman administration and taxation were
restored by their actions to any lost territories. Likewise the Burgundians:
after participating in the Spanish campaign (Jord. Get. 44. 231), they received
new and better lands in Savoy. An enigmatic chronicle entry tells us that
they divided them with local senators. Another prosperous agricultural area
no longer formed part of central imperial resources. 55

After 454, there thus built up a vicious circle within the western empire:
too many groups squabbling over a shrinking financial base. With every
change of regime, there had to be further gifts. Having been granted a free
hand in Spain under Avitus, the Goths then received the city of Narbonne
and its territory (presumably especially its tax revenues) as the price of their
support for Libius Severus in the early 460s (see below). 56 Even worse, this
concentration on the internal relations of established power blocs allowed
the rise of other, more peripheral forces, such as the Franks. In previous
eras, this would have been prevented by direct military and diplomatic

53 The point is unaffected by whether the Roman state granted these groups land or tax proceeds, a
subject of recent debate. Some major contributions are Goffart, Barbarians and Romans , and Durliat
(1988) (both arguing, with slight differences, in favour of allocations of tax revenue); Barnish (1986)
and Wood (1990) (arguing the case for a land setdement in, respectively, Italy and Savoy).

54 Hydat. Chron. 170, 172—5, 186, Cbron. Min. 11.28—9.

55 Mar. Avent. ad a. 456.2, Chron. Min. 11.232; cf. Auct. Prosp. Haun. s.a. 457, Chron. Min. 1.305; cf.

Wood (1990) 65—9. 56 Hydat. Chron. 217, Chron. Min. 11.33.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

2 3

action. The activities of Franks and other parvenus took still more terri-
tory out of central control. Particularly ominous in this respect was the
expansion of the Armoricans and, above all, the Franks in northern Gaul
from the 460s. 57 The dangers inherent in the new political order were thus
profound. Centrifugal forces could not be transformed into centripetal
ones merely by throwing around a few Roman titles.

2. Attempts at equilibrium, 477—68

The deposition of Avitus in October 456 was followed by an interregnum.
It was not until 28 December 457 that Majorian was declared Augustus at
Ravenna. The new emperor had served under Aetius and was brought back
from retirement by Valentinian III, after Aetius’ murder, to help reconcile
the latter’s troops. As early as 455 he was being talked of as a potential
emperor, and, although he worked closely with Ricimer against Avitus,
Majorian was clearly no mere puppet of the Italian army’s generalissimo
(unlike many of his successors). The delay between Avitus’ deposition and
Majorian’s election was taken up with delicate negotiations, winning
support for his candidacy not only in the west but also from Marcellinus,
the army commander in Dalmatia, and from Constantinople. Majorian
eventually took the throne with the backing of the eastern emperor Leo I. 58

Majorian’s four-year reign is marked by determined efforts to restore
order in the west. In the letters of Sidonius, considerable evidence survives
of the efforts he made to woo Gallic aristocrats. In 458, Majorian pro-
gressed through southern Gaul and, employing a mixture of force and gen-
erosity, attempted to heal the divisions created by Avitus’ defeat. 59 Sidonius,
at least, was won over. He composed and delivered a panegyric in the new
emperor’s favour, receiving in return a minor official post. Majorian’s mili-
tary forces were also active outside Italy. Of his commanders’ activities, we
know that Aegidius in Gaul fought both Franks and Goths. The latter
engagement, at least, would seem to have been successful, since Gothic
forces later assisted Nepotianus, another of Majorian’s commanders, to
curb Suevic activities in north-western Spain. 60 In 461, however, Majorian
attempted to invade Vandal Africa via Spain and was heavily defeated (see
below) . This provided Ricimer with an opportunity which he was quick to
take. He formally deposed Majorian on 2 August 461, and had him exe-
cuted five days later.

57 Franks: James (1988a) 64#. Armorica may have seen substantial immigration from Britain (e.g.
Riothamus: PLRE 11.945), on top of an indigenous population which had already shown separatist ten-
dencies: p. 8 above.

58 Stein (1959) 374—5; Max (1979) 234—6; O’Flynn (1983) 185—6 n. 18. Marcellinus took part in

Majorian’s Vandal expedition (PLRE 11.709). 59 Mathisen (1979).

60 Refs. PLRE 11.12 and 778, cf. O’Flynn (1983) io6ff.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

The next western emperor, Libius Severus, was much more Ricimer’s
puppet. He was proclaimed emperor on 19 November 461, and, once
again, determined efforts were made to win support for him throughout
die remaining Roman west. The Goths, for instance, were granted
Narbonne in return for their support, and Ricimer had close relations
with the Burgundian royal house, which guaranteed their adherence to the
new regime. The murder of Majorian and the ceding of Narbonne,
however, prompted a major revolt from elements of the Gallo-Roman
military under Aegidius. The year 463 thus saw the interesting, if confus-
ing, spectacle of a western emperor employing Goths to attack part of
the Roman army in Gaul. When battle was joined at Orleans, Aegidius was
victorious. His revolt was only contained in the autumn of 465, when he
was assassinated. At the time, he was engaged in negotiations with the
Vandal king Geiseric, trying to construct an alternative balance of
western forces to challenge Ricimer’s domination. Severus’ regime also
failed to win eastern approval; he was never recognized by the emperor
Leo. Ricimer may eventually have poisoned Severus (he died on 14
November 465). 61 If so, it was presumably because Severus had become
an obstacle to Ricimer’s continued negotiations with the east. It is perhaps
significant that major developments in the east— west relations followed
Severus’ death.

The next western imperial regime, for instance, was clearly the product
of careful negotiation between Ricimer and Leo. In spring 467, again fol-
lowing an interregnum, a successful eastern general by the name of
Anthemius advanced into Italy with Leo’s support. He brought with him
military forces which probably consisted, in large measure, of the
Dalmatian troops of Marcellinus. Ricimer too was ready to accept
Anthemius, and even married his daughter, Alypia. Gallic landowners, as in
the time of Majorian, were carefully courted, and Goths and Burgundians,
at least in the first instance, were ready to defer to him. 62 On 1 2 April 467,
therefore, Anthemius was proclaimed western emperor. The central plank
of his policy was revealed the next year, and turned out to be exactly the
same as that pursued earlier by Majorian. Having obtained the support or
acquiescence of the major power blocs in Italy and southern Gaul,
Anthemius, like Majorian, turned on the Vandals. In 468, a very large expe-
dition was put together, comprising both forces from the western empire
and a vast eastern fleet commanded by Basiliscus. On its approach to North
Africa, however, Vandal fire ships destroyed the bulk of the fleet, and with
it sank any hope of Roman victory (Procop. Wars 3.6.10—26).

61 Cass. Chron. s.a. 46;; cf. Sid. Ap. Carm. 11.317-18.

62 Anthemius himself: PLRE 11.96—8. Marcellinus accompanied him to Italy in 467 and was named
Patrician in 468 ( PLRE 11.709— 10). Ricimer: O’Flynn (1983) 1 1 5 fF. On Anthemius in Gaul, Stein (1959)
389—90; O’Flynn (1983) 118.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE 25

The policy of attacking the Vandals makes very considerable sense.
There were only two possible ways of breaking the vicious circle affecting
the western empire after the collapse of Hunnic power, whereby too many
political participants were bankrupting the entity to which they were
looking for rewards. Either the number of political participants had to be
reduced, or central financial resources increased. This clarifies the logic, it
seems to me, behind attacking the Vandals, the policy pursued by both
Majorian and Anthemius. Victory over the Vandals would have renewed
imperial prestige, but, more important, it would have removed from the
political game one of its major players. Perhaps above all, it would have
restored to the rump western empire the richest of its original territories.
Both Vandal expeditions failed (and as a result both regimes fell apart), 63
but what if either had succeeded? Particularly in 468, the expedition was a
very serious effort, 64 and the later success of Belisarius shows that recon-
quering North Africa was not inherently impossible.

Buoyed up by victory and the promise of African revenues, a victorious
western emperor could certainly have re-established his political hold on
the landowners of southern Gaul and Spain. Many of them would have
instinctively supported an imperial revival. Sidonius, and the other Gallic
aristocrats who would later organize resistance to Euric the Goth, for
instance (see below), would have been only too happy to reassert their ties
to the centre. 65 Burgundians, Goths and Sueves would have had to be faced
in due course, but victory would have considerably extended the active life
of the western empire.

3 . The end of ew/pire, 468-/6

As events turned out, the expeditions failed, and with them disappeared any
possibility of escaping the cycle of decline. As the Franks in particular grew
in importance, the number of players increased rather than diminished.
Since the empire’s financial base was simultaneously decreasing, the idea of
empire quickly became meaningless. The centre no longer controlled any-
thing anyone wanted. In consequence, the late 460s and 470s saw one group
after another coming to the realization that the western empire was no longer
a prize worth fighting for. It must have been an extraordinary moment as the
realization dawned on the leaders of individual interest groups, and upon
members of local Roman landowning elites, that, after hundreds of years of
existence, the Roman state in western Europe was now an anachronism.

63 Majorian was deposed by Ricimer after his defeat (p. 23 above); Anthemius’ defeat allowed
Ricimer to assassinate his main supporter, Marcellinus: O’Flynn (1983) 1 17.

64 Refs, as PLRE 11.213; cf. Courtois (1955) 1 99^-

65 Sidonius: pp. 29—30 below. So, too, men in Spain such as Hydatius who had previously looked to
the centre for help: see pp. 9, 13 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

26 I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

The first to grasp the point was Euric, king of the Visigoths. After the
Vandals defeated Anthemius, he immediately launched a series of wars
which, by 475, had brought under his control much of Gaul and Spain (see
ch. 5 (Collins), pp. 1 21— 2 below). There is a striking description of his deci-
sion to launch these campaigns in the Getica of Jordanes:

Becoming aware of the frequent changes of [western] Roman emperor, Euric,
king of the Visigoths, pressed forward to seize Gaul on his own authority.

This snippet captures rather well what it must have been like suddenly to
realize that the time had come to pursue one’s own aims with total indepen-
dence. 66 Euric’s lead was soon followed by the other interested parties. The
eastern empire, for instance, abandoned any hope in the west when it made
peace with the Vandals, probably in 474- 67 As we have seen, Constantinople
had previously viewed the conquest of North Africa as a means of reinvig-
orating the western empire, giving its support both to Majorian’s and espe-
cially to Anthemius’ efforts in this direction. Making peace with the Vandals
was thus a move of huge significance, signalling the end of substantial
attempts to sustain the west. Diplomatic recognition as western emperor
was subsequently granted to Julius Nepos, but he never received any prac-
tical military assistance. 68

That the western empire had ceased to mean anything dawned on the
Burgundians at more or less the same time. Gundobad, one of the heirs to
the throne, played a major role in central politics in the early 470s. A close
ally of Ricimer, he helped him defeat Anthemius. Relations between
Ricimer and Anthemius had turned sour soon after the collapse of the
Vandal expedition. A first quarrel, in 470, was healed by negotiation in 471,
but in 472 relations deteriorated to the point of war, and it was Gundobad
who captured and killed Anthemius on 1 1 July. Gundobad also supported
the subsequent regime of Olybrius, whom Ricimer proclaimed emperor in
April 472, and even took over the role of kingmaker after Ricimer’s death.
Ricimer died on 1 8 August 472, closely followed to the grave by the last of
his imperial nominees, Olybrius, on 2 November. Gundobad subsequently
persuaded Glycerius to accept the western throne, to which he was elevated
on 3 March 473. 69 Sometime in late 473 or early 474, however, Gundobad
‘suddenly’ (as one chronicler put it) left Rome. 70 Possibly this was due to
his father’s death, or perhaps he just gave up the struggle. Either way, he

66 Jord. Get. 45.237; cf. Wolfram (1988) i8iff.

67 Malchus, ed. Blockley fr. 5, dating between February 474 and Zeno’s exile in January 475, there-
fore most likely mid 474; cf. Courtois (1955) 204. The treaty is misdated to ‘probably 476’ at PLRE
11.499.

68 Leo supported Nepos in 473/4 before the latter seized the western throne: John of Antioch fr.

209. But cf. Malchus, ed. Blockley fr. 14: Nepos got no practical help between his retreat from Italy in
475 and his death in 480. 69 Refs, as PLRE 11.524; cf. Stein (1959) 395; O’Flynn (1983) i2iff.

70 Malalas, ed. Bonn, 374—5; otherwise PLRE 11.524.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

2 7

never bothered to return. Events at home were now much more important
to Gundobad than those at the centre.

The army of Dalmatia made one more attempt to sponsor a regime,
when Julius Nepos marched into Italy in 474. Glycerius was deposed
without a struggle and ordained bishop of Salona. One year later, however,
Nepos left again — definitively — in the face of the hostility of Orestes and
the army of Italy. 71 Fittingly, it was the army of Italy which was the last to
give up. In 475, its commander Orestes proclaimed his own son Romulus
emperor, but within a year lost control of his soldiers. Not surprisingly,
given all the resources which had by now been seized by others, it was
shortage of money which caused the unrest. A subordinate commander,
Odoacer, organized a putsch, murdered Orestes, and deposed Romulus,
derisively titled Augustulus, on or around 4 September 476. 72 He then sent
an embassy to Constantinople which did no more than state the obvious.
There was no longer any need for an emperor in the west. 73

4. Romans and barbarians

Alongside, and often as part of, the great power blocs, many millions of
individuals found themselves caught up in the events which brought about
the end of the Roman empire in western Europe. Of these, the surviving
sources allow us to say most about the experiences and reactions of local
landowning elites. As much as the imperial court at Ravenna, the provin-
cial landowning elites of the west were the Roman empire, in that it was
run by them and for them. Their adherence to it, or lack of it, is thus as
good a measure of the prevalence of empire as are the activities of the
court. The variety of reactions to fifth-century events among even this elite
is very striking, and, thanks to the correspondence of Sidonius Apollinaris,
particularly well documented in the case of Gallo-Roman landowners.

Some local landowning groups throughout the west (outside, perhaps,
Italy) responded quickly to temporary or permanent power vacuums
created by the intrusion of armed immigrants into the western empire. In
Britain, independence was asserted as early as 410, although, as the Saxon
threat grew, some seem to have regretted the decision and wrote to Aetius
(probably in 446) requesting his assistance (Gildas 20). Likewise, in north-
ern, and particularly north-western, Gaul, many of the groups labelled
bagaudae should probably be understood as representing a similar kind of
phenomenon, rather than, as has sometimes been argued, outright peasant

71 Refs, as PLRE 11.777.

72 Refs, as PLRE 11.81 1— 12. Cf. Procop. Wars v.1.5— 8; the troops demanded ‘one-third of the lands
of Italy’; what this means is debated: p. 22 above, n. 5 3.

73 Malchus, ed. Blockley fr. 14; despite the opening sentence, the rest makes clear Odoacer’s respon-
sibility for the initiative.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

revolt. In Armorica, the disturbances aimed at independence or some
degree of autonomy. In Spain, at least some of the groups operating in
Tarraconensis in the 440s were advocating accommodation with the
Sueves as opposed to continued allegiance to the empire (see p. 13 above).

Not dissimilar processes had begun to unfold even in southern Gaul in
the 41 os. In the early years of the decade, some members of the Gallo-
Roman elite rallied to usurpers sponsored by the Goths and Burgundians.
Such alliances of immigrants and Roman landowners represented as great
a danger to the unity of the empire as declarations of independence. For
local power-brokers to see political entities other than the imperial court as
the main force in their lives presaged imperial collapse. Moreover, after the
Gothic settlement in Aquitaine in 41 8, economic reasons dictated that any
Gallo-Roman with estates in the Garonne had to enter into relations with
the Goths or leave. Much of Paulinus of Pella’s patrimony, for instance,
inherited from Ausonius, was situated in areas around Bordeaux that were
now dominated by the Goths. This was perhaps the primary reason why his
sons migrated to the Visigothic court. 74 The sources provide us with no evi-
dence between c. 41 5 and 450, however, of further close political alliances
between Roman and Goth. In this I suspect that the re-establishment and
continued operation of the Gallic council probably played a part. The
council was re-established in 418, the year of the Gothic settlement in
Aquitaine. This is unlikely to have been mere chronological coincidence.
Giving Gallic landowners a designated forum established firm lines of com-
munication between these men and Ravenna. 75 Aetius’ campaigns and the
council can be seen as two reflections of one policy which contained within
very strict limits the ability of Goths and other immigrants to exercise
influence within the empire.

After 450, circumstances changed dramatically. Sidonius’ writings illus-
trate the ways in which an ever wider cross-section of the political classes
of southern Gaul were drawn particularly into a Gothic orbit, as Goths
participated ever more centrally in imperial politics. From the early 460s,
we find Romans holding military offices to which they were appointed by
Gothic kings. The first was probably Arborius, 76 and others quickly fol-
lowed. Vincentius was perhaps an imperial general in 465 , but by 477 he was
Euric’s dux Hispaniae. Others were Victorius, Calminius and Namatius. 77 At
the same time, similarly, disaffected Roman officials entered into negotia-
tions with the Gothic king In 468, the newly reappointed prefect of Gaul,
Arvandus, wrote to Euric telling him to throw off the rule of Anthemius —
the ‘Greekling’ who had just taken the throne — and divide up the provinces

74 Euch. 499#".; cf. 57off., 5 1 4 ; Salvian, De Gub. Dei v. 5 ff.

75 On the council, see Matthews (1975) 33 3 ff . ; Heather (1992).

76 Hydat. Chron. 213 s.a. 461; cf. Harries (1995) 97 .

77 On these men, see respectively: PLRE 11.1 168; PLRE 11.1 162— 4; Sid. Ap. Epp. 5.12; 8.6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE FALL OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

of Gaul with the Burgundians (Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.7.5). Shortly afterwards,
another high civilian imperial official, Seronatus, possibly vicarius to the
Gallic prefect, visited Euric on several occasions and encouraged him in
the same direction. Seronatus was brought to trial and executed before 475
(PLRE 11.99 5 f.). By the mid 470s, Romans were holding high civilian
appointments under Gothic kings. The first known example is Leo of
Narbonne, who became Euric’s chief civilian adviser ( PLRE u. 66 z{.).

As Gothic influence increased, more Romans took up service among the
Goths, prompted by a wide variety of motives. Some probably did think
that accommodation with the Goths and others was the best way to main-
tain order in a changing political climate (cf. Paulinus of Pella, Euch. 2901?.).
Others were probably more personally ambitious. Sidonius is perhaps
being ironic in commenting, in a letter to Namatius, on how sensible it is
of him to follow ‘the standards of a victorious people’ {Ep. 8.6. 1 6). In addi-
tion, recent studies have stressed how competitive were the lives of Gallo-
Roman aristocrats. They were constantly in dispute with one another for
prestige and financial gain. 78 In circumstances where Gothic power was
increasing, it became only natural to look to the Goths for assistance in
both climbing to the top and staying there.

This whole process of accommodation between immigrants and Roman
elites was, however, far from smooth. In the fifth century, as we have seen,
western imperial authorities conducted a whole series of major campaigns
and fought countless minor engagements to maintain their control. Local
assertions of independence and the so-called bagaudic movements also
involved violence and disruption on a very considerable scale. Even rela-
tively peaceful transfers of loyalty among the landowners of southern Gaul
could be traumatic. A good case in point is that of Arvandus, the Gallic
prefect toppled for plotting with the Goths. He was taken before the senate
in Rome, where his accusers were fellow Gallic aristocrats. All were related
to, or associates of, Sidonius, whose letter describing the trial is strongly
critical of Arvandus. Yet, despite being sentenced to death, Arvandus was
eventually spared, partly because Sidonius and his friends appealed for his
life (Sid. Ap. Ep. i.7.4ff.). The rise of Gothic power thus split opinion in
southern Gaul. Nor is Arvandus an isolated example. Calminius, corre-
spondent of Sidonius, fought for the Goths at Clermont, at the same time
as Sidonius was busy conducting its defence (Sid. Ap. Ep. 5.12).

While some were willing to work with Gothic kings, therefore, others
were not, especially when the Goths threw off their allegiance to the
empire. Sidonius himself is representative of this strand of opinion. He
was happy to work with, and even praise, the Goths when they were a plank
of Avitus’ regime (see p. 20 above). He was also willing to accept Gothic

78 Van Dam, Leadership and Community 57 ff.; Brown (1982); Harries (1995) ch. 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 °

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

territorial extensions, such as the ceding of Narbonne, if they were legiti-
mized by the empire. But when the Goths took over southern Gaul without
authorization, he resisted, his chief collaborators being Ecdicius, son of
Avitus, and Eucherius. 79 For these men, and others like them, the Goths
may have been acceptable allies in the creation of imperial regimes. They
were entirely unacceptable, however, as a complete alternative to the con-
tinued existence of the western empire.

In the course of the fifth century, then, we witness a process of psycho-
logical adjustment, among local Roman landowning elites, to the fact of
imperial disintegration. That different local situations prompted different
local strategies for survival and self-advancement is hardly surprising. We
can perhaps venture to say more. Local landowners represent that class of
men who had prospered (to different degrees) under the established polit-
ical order: the Roman empire. As a group, they had potentially the most to
lose from the political revolution represented by its collapse. Some,
however, had more to lose than others. A fair rule of thumb would seem
to be that those who had gained most from the old order clung to it the
longest. This would explain why elites in peripheral areas, who did not par-
ticipate as fully in the benefits of empire, were quicker to cast in their lot
with barbarians or to declare independence. For them, presumably, the
benefits of empire (assessed in terms of personal rewards and collective
defence) did not outweigh its costs (above all, taxation). For others such as
Sidonius, however, relatives of emperors, or would-be emperors, and
holders of high imperial office, life without the empire was a much more
intimidating proposition. But in the end, continued tenure of their landed
possessions would demand that even this group mend its fences, in so far
as it could, with the new powers in the land. It was either that or lose every-
thing. Thus Sidonius eventually wrote verses in praise of the glories of his
erstwhile enemy, Euric (Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.9. 5). He did it, however, to effect his
own release from exile, and another letter makes clear his hatred of old
Gothic women ‘quarrelling, drinking and vomiting’ outside his window
(Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.3.2).

in. CONCLUSION

Seventy years separated the deposition of Romulus Augustulus in 476 from
the invasions and population movements of the first decade of the fifth
century (themselves prompted by the intrusion of the Huns into central
Europe). None the less, the two are intimately linked. The regular political
crises for the empire in intervening years represent no more than the slow
working out of the full political consequences of the earlier invasions. The

79 PLRE 11.384; cf. Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.8, Harries (1995) 185—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONCLUSION 31

loss of territory to the invaders — sometimes sanctioned by treaty, some-
times not — meant a loss of revenue and a consequent loss of power. As
the state lost power, and was perceived to have done so, local Roman land-
owning elites came to the realization that their interests would best be
served by making political accommodations with the outsiders or, in a
minority of cases, by taking independent responsibility for their own
defence. Given that the empire had existed for four hundred years, and that
the east continued to prop up the west, it is perhaps not surprising that
these processes took between two and three generations to work them-
selves out in the old empire’s heartlands: southern Gaul, Italy and Spain
(even if elites in other areas, such as Britain, were quicker off the mark).
Despite the time-lag, the well-documented nature of these processes sub-
stantiates a direct link between the invasions and the collapse of empire.
There was no separate additional crisis.

The nature of this crisis has been much debated and, in some ways, does
not now appear so cataclysmic as it did to older generations of historians . 80
The appearance of barbarian powers actually within the western empire’s
borders in the fifth century, for instance, can legitimately be seen as having
opened up a pre-existing fault line in the relationship between imperial
centre and local Roman landowning elites. The centre relied on a mixture
of constraint and reward to focus the loyalties of landowners, some of
them many hundreds of miles distant, upon the empire: never an easy bal-
ancing act . 81 Moreover, at least in some areas — particularly southern Gaul,
Italy and Spain — there was a considerable degree of survival among Roman
landowning elites, many choosing to cast in their lot with the new powers
in the land, and so survive as elite landowners into the post-Roman politi-
cal era. In recent years, likewise, the peaceful nature particularly of the final
stage of the process — when Roman elites actually jumped from Roman
imperial to barbarian royal courts — has received considerable and due
attention. And it has also been pointed out — again correctly — that many
of the intruders (Goths, Burgundians, Franks, etc.) were not unknown out-
siders, but peoples who had been established on the frontier for many
years. Indeed, the Roman state had previously enjoyed, with all or most of
them, a whole range of close diplomatic, economic and social contacts . 82

None of this means, however, that the fall of the Roman empire was
anything other than a revolution. In political terms, a unitary state in
western Europe fragmented into a whole series of mutually antagonistic
successors. As we have seen, the process of fragmentation was protracted
and violent. Likewise, the immigrant groups, even if tied to the empire, had

80 Just in English, for instance, one might compare Bury (1928) with Brown (1971).

81 One case study is Heather (1994).

82 See, for instance, the works of Walter Goffart cited in the Bibliography, and, for a broader per-
spective over time, Whittaker (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 2

I. THE WESTERN EMPIRE, 425—76

previously been its subordinate satellites. Now they became its masters.
And Roman landowning elites had, in the end, no choice but to make their
accommodations with the immigrants, or lose the very lands on which their
elite status was based. The end of the empire was thus not the result of free
choice. In making their way to the courts of barbarian kings, Roman elites
(at least in the inner core of empire) were merely struggling to ensure that
political revolution should not be accompanied by social and economic
cataclysm.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 2

THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO
ANASTASIUS

A. D. LEE

When he assumed sole rulership of the eastern half of the Roman empire
in 408, Theodosius II became head of a state which during the short reign
of his father Arcadius (395—408) had experienced an extraordinary array of
crises. Gothic troops in Roman employ had risen in revolt under the lead-
ership of Alaric in 395 and spent much time during the following years
freely plundering the Balkan provinces until Alaric eventually decided to
move westwards (40 1). 1 Also in 395, nomadic Huns had invaded the empire
through the Caucasus, bringing widespread destruction to Syria and eastern
Asia Minor until 3 97. 2 Another Goth named Gainas, who held a command
in the Roman army, instigated a revolt which was only suppressed in 400
with much bloodshed in and around Constantinople. 3 Within a few years
there was further turmoil in the capital over the bitterly contested deposi-
tion and exile of the bishop John Chrysostom (403— 4), 4 while eastern Asia
Minor suffered a prolonged bout of raiding by Isaurian brigands (403— 6). 5
In addition to all this, relations with the western half of the empire
throughout Arcadius’ reign were characterized by antagonism and mutual
suspicion, the result of the ambitions and rivalries of dominant individu-
als, such as Eutropius and Stilicho, at the courts of Arcadius in
Constantinople and his younger brother Honorius in the west. 6

Against this background, one might justifiably have wondered about the
prospects for the eastern half of the empire — even more so when one adds
into the equation the fact that Theodosius was a mere seven years old in
408. Contrary to expectation, however, Theodosius’ reign was a long one
(408— 50), 7 and although he and his successors down to the early sixth
century were to experience numerous crises of a gravity comparable to
those of Arcadius’ reign, the eastern empire proved able to survive this crit-
ical period, during which its western counterpart succumbed. Why this

1 Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops ch. 5 ; Heather, Goths and Romans ch. 6.

2 Maenchen-Helfen (1973) 51—9.

3 Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops chs. 9— 1 1; Cameron and Long (1993) chs. 5—6, 8.

4 Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops chs. 15—21; Kelly (1995) chs. 16—18. 5 Shaw (1990) 249.

6 Cameron, Alan (1970); Matthews (1975) ch. 10; Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops chs. 6, 8.

7 Arcadius had elevated him to the status of co-emperor in January 402 while still a baby, so the
formal length of his reign was actually forty-eight years — the longest of any Roman emperor.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

34 2 - the eastern empire: Theodosius to anastasius

should have happened is not easy to account for, particularly because it is
generally more difficult to explain why something did not happen.
Nevertheless, it remains a question of fundamental importance, to which
this chapter will endeavour to suggest some answers.

I. THEODOSIUS II
i . Political life

There was obviously no question of the seven-year-old Theodosius having
any real involvement in government affairs for some years, so it should
occasion no surprise that during his minority power lay in the hands of
various officials at court, notably the praetorian prefect Anthemius. 8 Even
once he reached adulthood, however, Theodosius appears rarely to have
attempted to exercise power in his own right, showing greater interest in
theological and scholarly pursuits. One consequence of this was that his
court gained a reputation for patronage of literary and educational endea-
vours, 9 reflected, among other things, in reforms of university teaching in
the capital (425) 10 and the production of the Theodosian Code (429— 37). 11

Another consequence, however, was that the initiative in political life by
and large lay with individuals other than the emperor himself, making it
difficult to determine the extent to which Theodosius deserves credit or
blame for particular decisions or policies. Female members of the imperial
family feature prominently in this respect, notably Theodosius’ sister
Pulcheria and his wife Eudocia, whom he married in 421, although the
extent of their power has probably been exaggerated. 12 Helion’s long
tenure of the important office of magister officiorum (414—27) marks him out
as a man with influence, while the praetorian prefect Cyrus was important
during the 430s, until displaced by Theodosius’ chamberlain, the eunuch
Chrysaphius, who was pre-eminent throughout the 440s. 13 Although less
conspicuous, certain military figures are also worthy of note: the way in
which the Alan general Flavius Ardabur and members of his family, espe-
cially his son Aspar, held high commands throughout much of
Theodosius’ reign must be significant, 14 while during the emperor’s final
years, the Isaurian general Flavius Zeno (not to be confused with the later

8 On the early years of Theodosius’ reign, see Lippold (1973) 964—6, CAH 2 xm, ch. 4 (Blockley).

9 Momigliano (1972) 12— 17. 10 Cameron, Alan (1982) 285— 7.

11 Harries and Wood (1993) 1—6.

12 See Holum (1 977) and Holum, Empresses for this emphasis, Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops
134 and Harries (1994) 35—6 for reservations.

13 See PLRE n, s.v. Helion 1, Cyrus 7, Chrysaphius, with emendations on points of detail (especially
on Cyrus) in Cameron, Alan (1982).

14 Family solidarity is epitomized in the silver missorium celebrating Aspar’s consulship in 434: CIE
xi. 2637 (= ILS 1299) with Painter (1991). For details of careers, see PLRE 11, s.v. FI. Ardabur 3, FI.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THEODOSIUS II

emperor) emerged as a powerful enemy of Chrysaphius and someone
whom Theodosius is said to have feared as a potential usurper . 15

The important role of these individuals in the political life of
Theodosius’ reign can be explained partly in personal terms, as a result of
Theodosius’ own apparent lack of inclination to exercise power (a ten-
dency no doubt encouraged by his advisers and tutors during his formative
years). But it also reflects an important structural change in the character
of the imperial office which began during the reign of his father — namely,
the way in which first Arcadius and then Theodosius abandoned leading
the army on campaign in person and indeed rarely travelled far beyond the
environs of Constantinople, instead spending virtually the whole of their
reigns in the capital . 1 ' 1 The permanent residence of emperors in
Constantinople enhanced the opportunities for those at court to exercise
influence because the emperor was now constantly in contact with them
and was also less exposed to the outside views and influences that would
have been one of the incidental benefits of a more itinerant lifestyle . 17 To
be sure, the adherence of subsequent emperors of the fifth and sixth
century to this pattern did not prevent them from taking more active roles
in political life, but they had experienced substantial portions of their lives
beyond the confines of the palace before they assumed the imperial purple.
Theodosius, on the other hand, had known nothing else and was therefore
that much more susceptible to the limiting effects of this regime.

Despite all this, however, Theodosius was not overthrown, nor did the
imperial office come to be seen as something which could be dispensed
with . 18 For one thing, Theodosius’ formal claim to the throne, unlike that
of most of his fifth-century successors, was not open to question: he was
the son of the deceased emperor, and had already been elevated to the
status of co-emperor with his father some years earlier . 19 For another, the
very prominence of influential courtiers and advisers is likely to have had

Ardabur Aspar (though he was probably not magister in the final years of the 440s: Zuckerman (1994)
170—2), FI. Plinta (though he was probably still magister in 439/40: Zuckerman (1994) 160—3).

15 PLRE 11, s.v FI. Zeno 6.

16 Presumably it was anxieties about this development, coming as it did after more than a century of
military emperors, which spawned the story that Theodosius I had forbidden his sons to campaign: Joh.
Lyd. De Mag. 11.11, 111.41. For Theodosius’ known movements outside Constantinople, see Dagron,
Naissance 85—6, with Roueche (1986).

17 Hopkins (1978) ch. 4, valuable though it is on the power of eunuchs, does not take sufficient
account of this fundamental change in imperial behaviour in the fifth century. On eunuchs, see also
Patterson (1982) 299—333.

18 Reports of potential usurpers (Priscus fr. 16) show that Theodosius’ position was sometimes per-
ceived to be under threat. Cf. the popular anger expressed against Theodosius himself during a grain
shortage in the capital (Marcell. Chron. s.a. 431).

19 This is not to deny that the months immediately following Arcadius’ death were nervous ones in
Constantinople, since Theodosius was still vulnerable on account of his extreme youth: see Zos.
v.3 1.3-4, Soz. HE ix.4 (Stilicho’s plans), Lippold (1973) 963—4, Blockley (1992) 51—2 (for the proble-
matic sources on possible Persian interference); threats from these quarters, however, soon dissipated.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

36 2 . THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

the effect of deflecting criticism from the emperor. 211 Similarly, although his
non-involvement in military campaigning curtailed his contact with the
army and risked leaving him more vulnerable to military usurpation, it also
had the important benefit of shielding him from the political (and possible
physical) consequences of military defeat, and so played its part in his sur-
vival and that of his office. 21

At the same time Theodosius was quick to capitalize on anything which
could be presented as a success on the part of his armies. The Persian war
of 421—2, which may in part have been embraced anyway for its potential
political benefits for the unmilitary Theodosius, 22 quickly became the
subject of a flurry of celebratory poetry even though the war itself ended
in stalemate, while news of the success of eastern troops against the
western usurper John in 425 was the occasion for the emperor to lead an
impromptu procession of thanksgiving through the capital. 23 Theodosius’
participation in hunting is surely also significant in this context: in earlier
centuries, hunting, as the sport most closely allied to warfare, had been a
way for unwarlike emperors to offset any stigma arising from their lack of
involvement in military affairs. 24

But though victory had always been an important element in the projec-
tion of a strong image by emperors, it was, fortunately, not the only impe-
rial virtue available for exploitation. 25 Philanthropic/ was another which
Theodosius could be seen exercising, 26 while his renowned reluctance to
impose capital punishment secured his claim to dementia ? 1 But it was pietas,
an attribute with a respectable pedigree going back to Augustus, 28 and given
fresh significance more recently by Christianity, which through the
influence of the devout Pulcheria and in the hands of contemporary
writers became the keynote of the Theodosian court. There is no reason
to doubt Theodosius’ personal sincerity in this area, but in a society where
asceticism was accorded great respect there were also clear political advan-
tages to be gained from advertising this aspect of the emperor’s behaviour
— his regular fasting, self-denial of comforts, daily devotions and memor-
izing of the scriptures — and the stories which circulated concerning the
role of the emperor’s prayers in achieving military success served to
confirm that such piety was an attribute of real consequence. 29 It was to

20 Cf. Hopkins (1978) 196. 21 Cf. Whitby (1992).

22 Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 1 29.

23 Soc. HE vn. 21.7— 10, 23.1 1— 12; John Ant. fr. 195 {= FHG iv.613). Cf. Chron. Pasch. p. 579 which
reports the formal announcement in the capital of a Roman success during the Persian war of 421—2.

24 Theodosius’ hunting: John Ant. fr. 194 (=FHG iv.612); Theodore Lector, HE 353 (Hansen p.
100.4); earlier centuries: Charlesworth (1943) 4.

25 Charlesworth (1937), with Wallace-Hadrill (1981).

26 Notably in subventions towards the costs of public building projects in provincial cities: Nov. Th.
23 (443) (Heraclea Salbake, Caria: see Roueche (1986)); cf. Marcell. Chron. s.a. 436 (Cyzicus).

27 Soc. HE vn. 22. 9— 1 1. 28 Charlesworth (1943).

29 Soc. HE vn. 2 2.4— 7, 23.9; Harries (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THEODOSIUS II

play a role of continuing and increasing importance in preserving the integ-
rity of the imperial office through the vicissitudes of the fifth century and
beyond.

2. Religious affairs

‘Give me the earth undehled by heretics, and in return I will give you
heaven. Help me to destroy the heretics, and I will help you to destroy the
Persians.’ This blunt appeal, reportedly made to Theodosius by a bishop of
Constantinople, provides a telling insight into how it was believed the
emperor could enhance his piety — and the practical benefits that would
ensue. 30 Certainly, Theodosius’ reign witnessed the proclamation of a
number of measures aimed at penalizing heretics, as well as pagans and
adherents of other religious groups in the eastern empire. 31 The confident
rhetoric of these laws, however, often belied their effectiveness. Despite
Theodosius’ assumption to the contrary in 423, pagan practices continued,
as the very repetition of the laws, together with other evidence, shows. 32
Indeed, it cannot in practice have been a straightforward task to enforce
such laws consistently anyway, and a significant element of pragmatism is
also apparent in their application. Known pagans and Arians continued to
hold high military rank throughout Theodosius’ reign, 33 and the significant
numbers of Arian Goths serving in the army must have acted as a power-
ful disincentive against strict implementation of the relevant laws, let alone
the introduction of more severe ones. 34 But perhaps for a regime con-
cerned to promote the idea of imperial piety, it was the pronouncement of
the laws, rather than their enforcement, which was ultimately of primary
importance. At the same time, it is worth remembering that, even if the
extent of official enforcement was variable, some clergy had no hesitation
about taking matters into their own hands. 35

Another important dimension of imperial piety, first articulated by
Constantine, was concern for harmony within the church, and Theodosius’
reign was not short of opportunities for its exercise. The latent potential for
conflict between the theological traditions of Antioch and Alexandria over
the seemingly rarefied issue of the relationship between the human and the
divine in Christ was realized when the renowned Antiochene preacher,
Nestorius, was chosen by Theodosius to be bishop of Constantinople (428)
and proceeded to use his position to insist that the appropriate epithet for

30 Soc. HP. VTT.29.5 (the bishop in question was Nestorius).

31 Heretics: C.Th. xvi.6.6; (428), Nov.Th. 8.9 (438); pagans: C.Th. xvi.10.21 (41 5), 22 (423), 25 (435),

Nov. Th. 3.8 (438); Jews and Samaritans: C.Th. xvi.8.25 (423), 27 (23), Nov.Th. 3.2-5 (438), with discus-
sion in Linder (1987) (see also Millar (1992) 1 17—21). 32 Harl (1990); Trombley, Hellenic Religion.

33 PLRE 11, s.v. Apollonius 3, FI. Zeno 6 (pagans); FI. Plinta, FI. Ardabur Aspar, Ardabur 1 (Arians).

34 Liebeschuetz, Barbatians and Bishops 148. 35 E.g. Soc. HE vii. 29, 31; Gregory (1979) 143.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

38 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

the Virgin Mary was Christotokos (‘Mother of Christ’) rather than the tradi-
tional title of Theotokos (‘Mother of God’) with its implicit emphasis on
Christ’s divinity. In an attempt to resolve the ensuing controversy which this
aroused with Cyril, patriarch of Alexandria (412—44), Theodosius inter-
vened and called a council at Ephesus (43 1), in the expectation that it would
uphold Nestorius, for whose abilities Theodosius had great respect. In fact,
the council took the view that his teaching effectively proposed the existence
of a human Christ and a separate divine Christ, and condemned Nestorius.
Despite the council’s serious procedural irregularities, Theodosius executed
a volte-face and approved the verdict.

The controversy did not, however, go away. In the late 440s a prominent
Constantinopolitan monk, Eutyches, who had been teaching his version of
Cyril’s views in the capital, was condemned for denying Christ’s humanity
by a local council convened by the bishop, Flavian (448). Cyril’s successor
at Alexandria, Dioscorus (444—51), was outraged and induced Theodosius
to convene a second council at Ephesus (449), at which the condemnation
of Eutyches was reversed and Flavian and other supposed Nestorian sym-
pathizers were condemned. The proceedings were, however, accompanied
by intimidation and violence on the part of Dioscorus’ supporters,
prompting pope Leo to denounce the whole occasion as ‘brigandage’ and
demand a fresh gathering under his own presidency. Theodosius, however,
was not at all enthusiastic about this proposal. 36

Although these disagreements were in the first instance doctrinal in char-
acter, the vehemence of the feelings and behaviour they aroused betrays the
existence of important non-theological dimensions as well. For example, it
was difficult for Antioch, Alexandria and Constantinople to disentangle the
debate about orthodoxy from questions of ecclesiastical rivalry and pres-
tige, 37 and the support of some western Anatolian bishops for Cyril’s con-
demnation of Nestorius was motivated by resentment at encroachments on
their independence by the patriarchate of Constantinople. 38 Imperial
actions were likewise swayed by political considerations. Theodosius ini-
tially resisted the idea of calling a council in 430 until public disturbances in
Constantinople persuaded him otherwise; his reluctant abandonment of
Nestorius in 43 1 seems to have been induced by his realization of the extent
of popular opposition to the bishop; and his behaviour in the late 440s
reflected the loyalty of Chrysaphius, then the key figure at court, to
Eutyches, who happened to be his godfather. 39 This goes a long way
towards explaining Theodosius’ cool response to Leo’s demand for a fresh

36 For a succinct but magisterial exposition of the theological issues and historical context of the
events outlined in this and the preceding paragraph, see Chadwick (1983). For more detailed discus-
sions, see Gregory (1979) chs. 4— 5; Young (1983) 229—89; Frend, Monop hy site Movement ch. 1 (to be read
with Wickham (1973)). 37 Baynes (195 5). 38 Gregory (1979) 102.

39 Gregory (1979) 100— 1, 108—14, 134—41.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THEODOSIUS II

council, a response which looked set to create an impasse until Theodosius’
unexpected death the following year reopened the possibility of new devel-
opments.

3 . Foreign relations

For much of the fourth century, relations with Sasanian Persia had been
the most taxing external problem confronting the eastern half of the
Roman empire. In the final decades of that century, however, the focus of
attention had shifted elsewhere, and this pattern continued during
Theodosius’ reign. The empire did fight two wars against Persia in the first
half of the fifth century, but these conflicts — the first in 421—2, the second
in 440 40 — were of short duration and constituted brief interruptions to
otherwise quiescent relations between the two powers, both of whom had
other, more pressing preoccupations. In the case of Persia, this took the
form primarily of nomads from Central Asia troubling its north-eastern
frontier. 41 In the case of Constantinople, there were two pre-eminent areas
of concern — developments in the western Mediterranean, and relations
with the Huns in the lower Danube basin.

Eastern forces were despatched westwards on four occasions during
Theodosius’ reign. In 410, 4,000 men were sent to Ravenna to assist in the
defence of the western emperor Honorius against Alaric and the Goths,
while in 424 an army commanded by Ardabur and Aspar intervened in the
upheaval that followed Honorius’ death, eventually defeating the usurper
John and overseeing the installation on the western throne of Honorius’
nephew, Valeninian III (425). The third occasion was in 43 1, when eastern
units under Aspar went to North Africa to aid western forces struggling to
hold back the eastward advance of the Vandals towards Carthage.
Although Aspar’s forces enjoyed limited success in the ensuing campaign,
this involvement none the less contributed to achieving the settlement of
435 which preserved, albeit only temporarily, Roman control of the more
valuable eastern provinces of the region. Finally, when the Vandals subse-
quently broke the treaty and captured Carthage itself (439), another expe-
dition — probably the largest of the four — was organized to act in concert
with western forces (441). 42

Constantinople’s willingness to commit substantial forces to the western
Mediterranean in this way may initially appear somewhat surprising. On the
first three occasions, eastern interests were not threatened in any obvious
or direct manner, so that intervention is best understood as an expression
of dynastic solidarity with members of the Theodosian family, mingled

40 Blockley (1992) 56—61. 41 Frye (1984) 320—1.

42 For further detail on these events, see ch. 1 (Heather), pp. 9—12 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

40 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

with an element of self-interest. 43 However, the Vandal capture of
Carthage with its docks and shipping introduced a dramatic new element
into the equation. The western empire promptly undertook hurried defen-
sive measures in anticipation of sea-borne attacks on Italy, 44 and an impe-
rial order to extend the mural defences of Constantinople along the
seaward sides of the city has often been interpreted in the same light. 45 The
Vandal invasion of Sicily in 440 showed that there was genuine cause for
apprehension, and concern about its potential ramifications for the secur-
ity of the eastern Mediterranean must have influenced Constantinople’s
decision to commit substantial forces to the expedition of 441.

In the event, the expedition never progressed beyond Sicily because a
Hun offensive in the Balkans forced Constantinople to recall its troops.
Not for the first time during Theodosius’ reign, Hunnic moves dictated
eastern policy. The Huns had of course impinged on Roman horizons well
before Theodosius’ accession, having first made their presence felt indi-
rectly as far back as the 370s, when their movements across the steppe
regions north of the Caspian and Black Seas induced Gothic tribes adja-
cent to the lower Danube to seek admission to the empire. However, it was
probably not until the early years of Theodosius’ reign that the Huns them-
selves reached the Danube in significant numbers, 46 or were in a position
to pose a serious threat to the heartlands of the eastern empire.
Throughout history, the general socio-economic character of nomadic
pastoralist peoples such as the Huns has never been conducive to the emer-
gence of centralized political power — dispersal in small groups over large
areas, absence of permanent settlements, and minimal social differentiation
have tended to militate against any such development. However, where
they are able to establish dominance over a sedentary population and
exploit their produce and manpower, such a development can occur. 47 By
the early fifth century, the Huns had achieved hegemony over various
setded peoples living north of the Danube — Goths, Gepids, Heruls and
others — and Constaninople found itself having to deal with rulers such as
Rua and Attila who could command significant human and material
resources.

The consequences were felt for the first time in 422 when Rua took
advantage of imperial preoccupation with war against Persia to launch an
invasion of Thrace, and the empire had to buy him off by agreeing to an
annual payment of 350 pounds of gold. 48 Rua employed a similar strategy
in 434, making further demands when significant numbers of eastern
troops were absent defending Carthage against the Vandals. Negotiations

43 Kaegi (1968) ch. 1; Matthews (1975) 378—82. 44 Nov. Val 5 (March 440), 9 (June 440).

45 Chron. Pasch. p. 583 with Whitby and Whitby (1989) 72 n. 243. 46 Heather (1995) 5 — 19.

47 Anderson (1974) 219—26; Khazanov (1984) ch. 5.

48 Croke (1977) with Zuckerman (1994) 162 n. 12.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THEODOSIUS II

evidently broke down and war ensued, but the sudden death of Rua (appar-
ently struck by lightning) threw the Hun forces into disarray. He was suc-
ceeded by his nephews Attila and Bleda, who took time to consolidate their
position internally, before the empire’s concern to ensure peace on the
Danube in preparation for its second expedition against the Vandals pre-
sented them with the opportunity in 439/40 to extract further significant
concessions, including an increase in the annual payments to 700 pounds
of gold. 49

Once the expedition for North Africa had departed, however, the Huns
found a pretext for reneging on their agreement and attacked the empire,
capturing a number of Danubian cities and plundering widely in Illyricum
and Thrace (441—2). The crack imperial troops bound for Africa were
recalled from Sicily, and, faced by this threat, Hunnic forces withdrew. The
empire then discontinued its annual payments to the Huns until, in 447,
Attila — now sole ruler after the murder of Bleda (445) — took advantage of
a concatenation of natural disasters — earthquake, famine and plague — to
renew the offensive, this time with devastating effect. 50 Eastern forces were
comprehensively defeated, there was widespread destruction in Thrace, the
city of Constantinople itself was threatened, and the eastern empire was
forced to make its most serious concessions yet. In addition to the now cus-
tomary requirement that Hunnic fugitives be returned, Attila claimed all
territory five days’ journey south of the lower Danube, and stipulated an
annual payment of 2,100 pounds of gold (together with arrears of 6,000
pounds). 51

One immediate result of this disaster was the need to increase taxation,
from which not even senatorial families escaped. 52 Priscus’ account may
well engage in rhetorical exaggeration about the burden this entailed for
senators, but the fact that everyone was obliged to contribute suggests
strongly that Attila’s new demands did impose a strain on the empire’s
resources. 53 Another probable consequence was the construction of the
Long Walls in Thrace, designed to afford greater protection to
Constantinople and its immediate hinterland. 54 Yet another, indicative of
the nadir to which Roman fortunes had sunk, was Chrysaphius’ scheme to
assassinate Attila, a ‘solution’ to which the empire had had recourse a

49 For the events of the 430s, I follow the persuasive reconstruction of Zuckerman ((1994) 160—3),
who revises the older accounts of Thompson ((1948) 70—8) and Maenchen-Helfen ((1973) 81—94) in
significant respects. The other concessions comprised the return of Hunnic fugitives, a (high) fixed rate
of ransom for Roman prisoners, agreement not to enter an alliance with any enemy of the Huns, and
establishment of safe markets (Priscus fr. 2.29—38).

50 Again, I follow Zuckerman’s ((1994) 164—8) reinterpretation of the events of 441—7. See also ch.

23 (Whitby), pp. 704—8 below. 51 Blockley (1992) 63-4. 52 Priscus fr. 9. 3.22—33.

53 Priscus’ rhetoric: Thompson (1948) 191— 7; Jones, LRE 206— 7. Jones’s minimizing of the burden
seems to take no account of Priscus’ statement that all had to contribute.

54 Whitby, Michael (1985), contra Croke (1982). Crow (1995) adds nothing to the debate about the
date.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

42 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

number of times over the past century when confronted by particularly
intransigent barbarian leaders . 55 On this occasion, the plan became known
to Attila and failed, and the empire was fortunate to escape the conse-
quences of his wrath relatively lightly, probably owing to the fact that his
attention was now turning westwards . 56

There can be no doubt that the Huns, and Attila in particular, caused the
eastern empire considerable damage and discomfort during Theodosius’
reign, whether in terms of the loss of productivity and revenue caused by
Hunnic devastation of the Balkans , 57 the financial drain of annual treaty
payments, or the way in which the timing of Hunnic demands and inva-
sions limited Constantinople’s freedom of action elsewhere. But while the
situation was often grim, particularly for the inhabitants of the Balkans and
particularly in 447, the period as a whole was not one of unremitting dis-
aster in which the eastern empire was utterly helpless in the face of the
Hunnic threat. Eastern armies undoubtedly suffered decisive defeats in
447, but they had also been able to force a Hunnic withdrawal a few years
earlier . 58 The very fact that the Huns did so often time their diplomatic and
military offensives to take advantage of temporary Roman handicaps or the
absence of troops implies a healthy respect for Roman arms on the part of
the Huns and helps to keep Hunnic successes in perspective. Attila’s death
in 453 was to reveal just how fragile the foundations of his empire were,
though Theodosius’ own demise in 450 meant that it was his successor who
savoured the relief occasioned by that fortuitous turn of events — and who
had also to cope with the first phase of its momentous consequences.

II. THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS

i. Martian

Theodosius died on 28 July 450 from injuries sustained in a fall from his horse
while hunting. His marriage to Eudocia had produced no male offspring, 59
and perhaps excusably, given the sudden and unexpected nature of his death,
he had not made public any choice of successor. Nearly a month later, on 25
August, a new emperor was at last proclaimed in the person of an unknown
fifty-eight-year-old former army officer of Balkan origin named Martian.
The long delay between Theodosius’ death and Marcian’s accession belies
the reports, no doubt initiated by Marcian’s supporters, that the new emperor
was Theodosius’ deathbed choice. But if Theodosius did not promote
Martian, then someone else must have. The western emperor Valentinian III
was the one individual with an obvious claim to arbitrate in this matter, but

55 Lee (forthcoming). 56 Blockley (1992) 66—7.

57 On which see ch. 23 (Whitby), pp. 709—12 below. 58 Zuckerman (1994) 167—8.

59 On the spurious Arcadius 1’ of PLRE 11, see Holum, Empresses 178 n. 14.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS

Marcian was certainly not his selection, since Valentinian pointedly refused
to acknowledge his accession until March 4 5 2 . 60 Some sources attribute the
choice to Pulcheria, a possibility rendered plausible by her subsequent mar-
riage to Marcian, but one which there are in fact strong reasons to doubt. 61
Aspar is more credible as kingmaker in 450: Marcian had served as aide to
Aspar and his father for fifteen years, and Aspar’s son Ardabur was promoted
to a high military command soon after Marcian’s accession. Yet Aspar
himself was not in a strong position during Theodosius’ final years — unlike
Flavius Zeno, who also benefited from Marcian’s rise. Strange though the
notion of co-operation between Aspar and Zeno may seem, Marcian may in
fact have been their joint candidate. 62

Whatever the solution to this conundrum, there can be no doubt that
Marcian’s accession signalled significant change. Chrysaphius was quickly
eliminated, and with him went the major policies with which he had been
identified: Marcian refused to make any further annual payments to Attila
and soon took steps to overturn the results of the recent second council of
Ephesus. If Zeno played a key role in Marcian’s promotion, then this would
help to explain the reversal of policy towards Attila, Zeno having been a
staunch critic of the payments during Theodosius’ final years. It is less
likely, however, to account for the change in ecclesiastical policy, for Zeno
was a pagan. 6 ’ Pulcheria, however, had a deep interest in the latter area, and
undoing the second council of Ephesus may have been her quid pro quo for
agreeing to marry Marcian, an essential step towards legitimating his rule. 64

Marriage to Pulcheria did not, however, solve all his problems on this
front. His undistinguished background was an impediment to winning sen-
atorial support, and Valentinian’s refusal to acknowledge his accession left
a worrying question mark over his right to rule. His changes of policy can
also be seen as strategies for overcoming these immediate political handi-
caps. A tough line towards Attila as he moved to invade Gaul was a good
way of expressing solidarity with the west and, hopefully, of earning the
gratitude and recognition of Valentinian, 65 while the termination of pay-
ments to Attila permitted tax concessions and so stood to gain the new
emperor much-needed domestic support, particularly from the senatorial

60 Burgess (1993—4) 63. One source (John Ant. Excerpta de insidiis (de Boor) 85) even suggests that
Valentinian would have taken steps to remove Marcian had he not been opposed in this by Aetius.

61 Burgess (1993-4).

62 This is the proposal of Zuckerman (1 994) 1 69—76, who argues that Aspar had been removed from
his command after the defeats of 447, whereas Zeno had effective control of the only two eastern field
armies not damaged in that debacle and was therefore the most powerful general at the time of
Theodosius’ death. Moreover, Zeno’s elevation to the distinction of patricius must date to the beginning
of Marcian’s reign (174 n. 56), and Marcian’s reversal of policy on subsidies to Attila coincides with
Zeno’s views on this issue.

63 Zuckerman (1994) 176 observes the irony of this. Of course, Zeno’s hostility towards

Chrysaphius may have inclined him to overturn as many as possible of the latter’s policies, irrespective
of where Zeno’s personal sympathies lay. 64 Cf. Burgess (1993— 4) 65. 65 Hohlfelder (1984) 60.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

44 2 - the eastern empire: Theodosius to anastasius

aristocracy, 66 whose good will was further courted by the abolition of the
tax on senatorial land known as the collatio glebalis or folks , 67 The senatorial
aristocracy also appears to have resented the direction of ecclesiastical
policy in Theodosius’ final years, so that a reversal on this front might be
expected further to increase their sympathy for the new regime, 68 as well as
winning the favour of pope Leo who in turn had influence with
Valentinian’s court at Ravenna. 69

The embodiment of Marcian’s ecclesiastical policy was the oecumenical
council held at Chalcedon in 451, a watershed in the history of the church.
Dioscorus of Alexandria, the instigator of the Second Council of Ephesus,
was condemned and deposed; those in whose condemnation he had been
instrumental in 449 — Flavian of Constantinople and other supposed
Nestorian sympathizers — were rehabilitated; and a formula was sanctioned
which aimed to find common ground between the Antiochene and
Alexandrian positions on the relationship of the human and the divine in
Christ. The council brought immediate benefits for Marcian — he was hailed
as a new Constantine and relations between Constantinople and the pope
were much improved — but the Chalcedonian formula failed to reunite the
warring factions and, if anything, served to harden divergent tendencies. In
the eyes of supporters of the Alexandrian school of thought, it still made
too many concessions to unacceptable Antiochene ideas, and the rejection
of Chalcedon became a rallying-cry which strengthened their sense of sep-
arate identity and gave rise during the ensuing decades to the so-called
Monophysite movement. Moreover, although the Chalcedonian definition
was compatible with Antiochene teaching, the council also reaffirmed
Nestorius’ condemnation as a heretic, prompting some adherents of the
Antiochene tradition also to reject Chalcedon and furthering the process
through which an independent Nestorian church eventually emerged.

The strength of popular feelings aroused by Chalcedon may be gauged
from the fact that Marcian was obliged to use military force to maintain
pro-Chalcedonian bishops in office in Alexandria and Jerusalem, and when
news of Marcian’s death reached the former city in 457, the incumbent was
lynched and replaced by an anti-Chalcedonian candidate whom Marcian’s
successor was in turn only able to replace by deploying troops. Of course,
incidents of this sort simply served to reinforce popular antagonism
towards Chalcedon and strengthen support for Monophysite theology in
Egypt and Palestine, and increasingly even in Syria. 70

66 Jones, LRE 219 .

67 CJ xii . 2. 2 (450—5). Barnish (1989) discusses the evidence for how significant a source of income
this was for the government. 68 Gregory (1979) 141— 2, 166.

69 Stein (1959) 1. 3 1 2; Jones, LRE 219.

70 Frend, Monophysite Movement 148—69; Gray, Defence of Chalcedon 17—25; Meyendorff, Imperial Unity
1 87—90.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS

Marcian enjoyed more enduring success in foreign relations. His policy
towards the Huns enraged Attila, but preoccupation with his campaigns in
Gaul and Italy during 451—2 meant that he was unable to make good his
dire threats. No doubt Attila’s lack of success in the west and Valentinian’s
eventual recognition of Marcian in 452 strengthened Marcian’s resolve in
pursuing this course, but it is not difficult to understand why he should have
been regarded as fortunate when Attila unexpectedly died in 45 3. 71 The
importance of Attila’s personal authority in maintaining the coherence of
the Hunnic empire soon became apparent as his sons fell to fighting over
their inheritance and the various subject peoples seized the opportunity to
assert their independence, culminating in the battle at the river Nedao
(4 5 4). 72 The consequences of all this were to be a continuing anxiety for
Constantinople for most of the remainder of the century, but Attila’s death
certainly marked the beginning of the end of Hunnic power.

The early years of Marcian’s reign also witnessed other successes on the
military/diplomatic front: Arab attacks in the east were repulsed in late
451/early 452, 73 while offensives into Egypt by Nobades and Blemmyes,
tribesmen from the south, were defeated in 45 3. 74 At the time of his death
Marcian was planning an expedition against Carthage, an understandable
reaction to the Vandal sack of Rome in 455 and the abduction of the
western empress Eudoxia and her daughters, 73 but though he had himself
portrayed as a conquering hero, 76 his regime otherwise avoided unneces-
sary foreign commitments, which, together with the ending of payments
to Attila, must go a long way towards explaining the healthy reserve of
more than 100,000 lbs of gold which he had accumulated by the end of his
reign. 77

2. Leo

Marcian died on 27 January 457 at the age of 65. 78 There was never any
prospect of his marriage to Pulcheria producing an heir: Marcian had
agreed to respect her vow of chastity and she was already beyond child-
bearing age anyway. Marcian may have hoped that the succession would
pass to his son-in-law Anthemius, who had received rapid promotion

71 Jord .Rom. 333. 72 Thompson (1948) 1 52— 4; Maenchen-Helfen (1973) 143—52.

73 Priscus fr. 26; Nicephorus xv.9; Shahid (1989) 5 5—7.

74 Priscus fr. 27,1 with Zuckerman (1994) 176—9. 75 Mathisen (1981) 242—3.

76 Anth. Pal. ix.802 (statue of Marcian on horseback trampling on a defeated enemy).

77 John. Lyd. DeMag. 111.44 for the figure. Marcian’s rapid creation of this surplus has been taken as
proof that payments to the Huns cannot have been that serious a problem and that the reserve must
already have been building up under Theodosius: Thompson (1948) 194; Hendy, Studies 264. But if
Theodosius already had a reserve of any substance in place by 447, then surely he would have avoided
imposing new and obviously unpopular taxes to meet Attila’s demand. Moreover, it can be argued that
the growth of the surplus during the years after the termination of the payments in 450 shows just how
serious a burden they had previously been. 78 For the details, see Croke (1978).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

46 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

during the mid 450s, 79 but, if so, those hopes were not realized. An element
of uncertainty remains concerning the manoeuvrings behind Marcian’s
own assumption of the purple, but the sources are explicit in stating that
the succession in 4 5 7 was determined by Aspar, who preferred another can-
didate. 80 His choice was similar to Marcian in many respects — a relative
nonentity of Balkan origin, in his mid fifties and from a military back-
ground, named Leo. 81 Formal legitimation was a more serious problem this
time: recognition from the west was not an issue (Valentinian had been
assassinated in 45 5 and the ensuing chaos was still unresolved), but there
was no female member of the Theodosian household available to provide
a convenient dynastic link through marriage. 82 The character of the cere-
monial accompanying Leo’s accession — much more elaborate than what is
known of previous such occasions and, interestingly, displaying an appar-
ently novel ‘liturgical’ dimension — is highly significant in the light of this. 83

Aspar no doubt promoted the unknown Leo in the expectation of being
able to exercise a predominant influence in the affairs of state, and the way
in which his sons and kinsmen monopolized the consulship during Leo’s
early years is one measure of his success. 84 By the mid 460s, however, Leo
showed himself prepared to follow his own mind. Sources refer to dis-
agreements between the two over certain high officials and over a foreign
policy decision, and in the latter case Leo certainly prevailed. 85 It must also
have been in the mid 460s that he began pursuing a longer-term plan
designed to free himself completely from dependence on the Alan general.
Aspar’s strength lay particularly in the support of the Goths serving in the
army, but from the mid 460s Leo sought to counterbalance this by drawing
on manpower from Isauria, a rugged, mountainous region in south-
western Anatolia whose inhabitants had a reputation for brigandage and
savagery on a par with foreign barbarians but who were also, for this very

79 Anthemius, grandson of the powerful praetorian prefect of Theodosius IPs early years, married
Marcian’s daughter (from a previous marriage) in 45 3/4; for further details, see PLRE 11, s.v. Anthemius
3. If Anthemius did have such aspirations in 457, Leo’s choice of him for the western throne in 467
might in part be explained by a concern to mollify an aggrieved party, while also conveniendy remov-
ing him from the eastern scene.

80 Priscus fr. 19; Candidus fr. 1.4, 25—6. Aspar’s power in 457 is confirmed by pope Leo effectively
treating him as co-ruler: Leo, Epp. 149.2, 1 50, 1 5 3 (= PE liv.i 1 20, 1 1 21, 1123). Flavius Zeno had died
during Marcian’s reign, possibly as early as late 451 (Zuckerman (1994) 175).

81 Two sources, but both late (Theophanes p. 116.7—8, Zonaras xm.25), also report that Leo had
once been in the service of Aspar.

82 Pulcheria had died in 45 3, predeceased by Theodosius’ other three sisters; Theodosius’ second
daughter Flacilla had died in 43 1, while his first, Eudoxia, widow of Valentinian III, was a prisoner in
Carthage. 83 De Caer. 1.9 1, with Nelson (1976), MacCormack (1981) 240—7.

84 His second son, Patricius, was consul in 459, his third, Herminericus, in 465 (his eldest, Ardabur,
had already held it in 447), and Dagalaifus, husband of his granddaughter, held the consulship in 461.
They also held various military or administrative posts of importance.

85 Foreign policy: Priscus fr. 45 (dated to c. 466 in PLRE n, s.v. FI. Ardabur Aspar); officials: Candidus
fr. 1.28—30, who places this after the great fire of 464, though he does not explain the point at issue or
the outcome.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS

reason, excellent fighters. 86 Isaurians were drafted into the army on an
increased scale, and probably also into the new elite bodyguard of the excu-
bitores which Leo established as a further way of trying to ensure his inde-
pendence. 87

A necessary part of this strategy was Leo’s advancement to high military
rank of a leading Isaurian chieftain, Tarasicodissa, who changed his bar-
baric-sounding name to Zeno, hoping by its Greekness and the reputation
which his fellow countryman of that name had enjoyed in the late 440s and
early 450s to mitigate the prejudice which attached to his Isaurian origins. 88
He discredited Aspar’s son Ardabur on charges of treasonable communi-
cation with Persia (466), secured marriage to Leo’s elder daughter Ariadne
(466/7), 89 and held the consulship (469). Although Aspar was in turn able
to pressure Leo into not only marrying his younger daughter Leontia to
another of his sons, Patricius, but also declaring that son emperor-
designate, Zeno steadily eclipsed Aspar as the leading influence in the state,
to the point where Leo finally had Aspar and Ardabur murdered (471), 90
winning him the epithet ‘the butcher’ and leaving the way clear for Zeno
effectively to succeed him in 474.

There was a significant degree of continuity of policy between the reigns
of Marcian and Leo. Leo was a supporter of Chalcedonian orthodoxy and
also initiated further measures against pagans and heretics, including a
blanket exclusion from the legal profession of anyone not an orthodox
Christian. 91 For the first decade of his reign, he also sought diplomatic
solutions to foreign-policy issues. In one area, however — the lower Danube
— he faced increasing problems arising from the break-up of Attila’s
empire, while in a second area — relations with the Vandals — he eventually
abandoned a cautious approach for a more aggressive one — with disastrous
consequences.

Some of Attila’s sons remained a disruptive presence along the Danube
during the 460s — Dengizich’s abortive invasion of 468 is the best-
documented example 92 — but more problematic were the peoples previ-
ously subject to the Huns who gained their independence during the years

86 For the Isaurians’ reputation, see e.g. Philostorg. HE xi.8, Theodoret, Ep. 40 (Azema), Joshua
Styl. Chron. 12. For the region and its history: Matthews (1989) 35 5—67; Hopwood (1986), (1989); Shaw
(1990). 87 Leo and the Isaurians: Brooks (1893) 211— 15; excubitorer. Haldon (1984) 136—8.

88 For the name, see Feissel (1984) 564 n. 105, contra Harrison (1981); for his career to 474, see PERE
11, s.v. FI. Zeno 7.

89 The suggestion of Pingree ((1976) 146—7) that Zeno was engaged to Ariadne as early as 463 is
doubtful; cf. Dagron (1982) 275.

90 For the fates of Patricius and Herminericus, see PERE 11, s.v. Iulius Patricius 1 5 , Herminericus.

91 CJ 1.4.15 (468), 1. 1 1.8 (472?). Cf. CJ 1.5.9— 10. (For Marcian’s anti-pagan legislation, see CJ 1.11.7
(451).) Leo’s quaestor Isocasius was accused of being a pagan, stripped of office and forced to undergo
baptism ( PERE 11, s.v. Isocasius), and Leo is also reported as enforcing anti-heretical legislation against
one group of Arians (Malal. p. 372.3—5) - perhaps to spite the Arian Aspar?

92 Thompson (1948) 1 54— 60; Maenchen-Helfen (1973) 152—68.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

48 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

following Attala’s death, the most important of whom were the Goths
(though they were certainly not a unified people at this stage). During the
late 450s and 460s, various groups of Goths are found in Pannonia
(effectively no longer imperial territory since the 440s), while a second
cluster was located within the empire in Thrace. 93 Some of the latter had,
by the 460s, acquired formal status as federate troops within the eastern
empire with particular ties of loyalty to Aspar. Predictably, his assassination
by Leo in 471 provoked a revolt, which Leo was only able to end (473) by
making various concessions to their leader Theoderic Strabo — an annual
payment of 2,000 pounds of gold, an imperial generalship for Strabo and
recognition of him as the only Gothic leader with whom Constantinople
would deal — but not before a substantial portion of the Pannonian Goths
had seized the chance presented by Leo’s preoccupation with the revolt to
invade the eastern empire, advance as far as Macedonia and extract conces-
sions of their own in the form of land. 94 At Leo’s death, therefore, the sit-
uation in the Balkans was one fraught with difficulties.

As for relations with the Vandals, during the decades following the abor-
tive expedition against Carthage in 441, Vandal raiding had concentrated
on the western Mediterranean, but had also increasingly impinged on the
east, 95 to the extent that by the mid 460s there were fears of a Vandal attack
on Alexandria 96 — an ominous prospect in the context of the grain supply.
The Vandal abduction of the western empress Eudoxia and her daughters
following the sack of Rome (45 5) had clearly provoked alarm and outrage
in Constantinople, and was a continuing vexation so long as the imperial
womenfolk remained prisoners in Carthage, 97 while the persecution of
orthodox African Christians by the Arian Vandals must have been a further
cause for concern in the east. 98

These varied circumstances help to explain why Leo eventually aban-
doned diplomacy and took the fateful step of organizing another expedi-
tion against Carthage. In preparation, he arranged in 467 for Marcian’s
son-in-law Anthemius to occupy the then vacant imperial throne in the
west, so that the following year a formidable eastern armada was able to

93 Marcian is often given responsibility for their entry to the empire (on the basis of Jordanes), but
there is good reason to think that at least some of the Pannonian Goths were placed there by Attila,
and that at least some of the Thracian Goths had been setded there by the imperial authorities during
the 420s (Heather, Goths and Romans 242—4, 259—63). 94 Heather, Goths and Romans ch. 7.

95 Raiding in the east in the late 440s and early 450s: Priscus fr. 10.12— 13 (with Croke (1983a) for the
date) , Jord. Rom. 333; attacks on Illyricum and Greece in the late 450s and 460s: Viet. Vit. Hist. Pers. 1. 5 1 ,
Procop. Wars in. 5. 2 2— 6.1, 22.16— 18. 96 V. Dan. Styl. 56.

97 All but Eudocia were finally released c. 462; the soures are contradictory concerning the eventual
fate of Eudocia, who was forced to marry Geiseric’s son, but it is likely she was still in Carthage in 468:
see PLRE n, s.v. Eudocia 1.

98 Courtois ((1955) 292—3) is sceptical about Geiseric as a persecutor on the basis of a lack of
martyrs during his reign, but persecution can entail other forms of discrimination, which are certainly
in evidence in this period: Moorhead (1992b) xi— xii.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS

combine with western forces, while an eastern army also advanced towards
Carthage along the coast from Egypt." The difficulties of co-ordination
inherent in such a strategy no doubt go far towards explaining the subse-
quent debacle, though Geiseric’s skilful use first of diplomatic delay and
then of fireships was also clearly important. It is less easy to determine
whether the odium which fell on the eastern commander, Basiliscus,
resulted from the need for a scapegoat or was genuinely deserved. 11111 The
ensuing disaster cost Constantinople dearly in terms of military and
financial resources. The sources differ about the precise sums involved, but
the most conservative estimate is still in excess of 64,000 pounds of gold
— ‘a sum that probably exceeded a whole year’s revenue’. 101 It is hardly sur-
prising that one source talks of the entire state being shipwrecked — a par-
ticularly apposite metaphor in the context. 102 In this respect, Leo left his
successor a most unwelcome legacy. 103

3. Zeno

Leo’s wife Verina had given birth to a son of unknown name in 463, but he
died when only five months old, 104 and when Leo himself succumbed to
the effects of dysentery on 1 8 January 474 he was succeeded by his seven-
year-old grandson Leo, son of Zeno and Ariadne, whom he had made co-
emperor shortly before his death. Leo II, however, died ten months later,
but not before having in turn raised his father to the rank of co-emperor. 105
By thus gaining the throne, Zeno has a strong claim to be regarded as the
most politically successful general in the fifth-century east. Once emperor,
however, he had to channel most of his energies into clinging on to power,
for his reign was overshadowed by a succession of revolts and usurpations
— that of Basiliscus (who actually controlled Constantinople for twenty
months during 475—6), of Marcian (who almost gained control of the
capital in 479), and of Illus and Leontius (former supporters of Zeno’s

99 Courtois ((1955) 202—4) gives priority to Theophanes’ version, whereby the army from Egypt
becomes a quite separate campaign in 470, but this view has found little support (cf. Blockley (1992)
75-6, 212).

100 Accounts of Basiliscus’ less than glorious role in the expedition may have been coloured by the
unpopularity he had earned by the end of his later usurpation (475—6).

101 Convenient summary of figures and quote in Hendy, Studies 221, 223. Courtois ((195 5) 202—4)
downplays the size and cost of the expedition, arguing that they were inflated by sixth-century writers
concerned to enhance the significance of Belisarius’ expedition (533). This is plausible in principle, but
some of the relevant sources pre-date Justinian’s reign, his strictures against Priscus are unpersuasive,
and the evidence of Candidus does not receive due consideration. 102 Joh. Lyd. De Mag. 111.44.

103 Suda e 3100 refers to the treasury being empty during Zeno’s reign, but its attribution to the
alleged failings of Zeno is suspect (Cameron (1965) 505—6), and the financial repercussions of the dis-
aster of 468 are a more plausible explanation (cf. Malchus fr. 3).

104 Pingree (1976) 146—7 with the important qualifications of Dagron (1982) 275.

105 The sources do not even hint at any suspicious circumstances surrounding young Leo’s death
(Croke (1983b) 82 n. 5), a silence of considerable import given Zeno’s subsequent unpopularity.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

50 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

regime who raised a revolt against him in Isauria itself during 484-8). 106
Those of Basiliscus and Marcian were inspired partly by resentment on the
part of some of Leo’s relatives at their displacement by Zeno’s rise —
Basiliscus was Leo’s brother-in-law, Marcian his son-in-law — and partly by
public prejudice against uncouth Isaurians. Even before Zeno’s accession,
this prejudice had manifested itself against the Isaurians increasingly resi-
dent in Constantinople, many of whom were lulled in a hippodrome riot
in 473. 107 Antagonism was heightened by Zeno’s promotion of fellow
countrymen to positions of importance in the state, and when Basiliscus
seized the throne in 475, large numbers of them were massacred in the
capital . 108 Zeno’s struggle with his fellow countrymen Illus and Leontius,
on the other hand, was much more of a power struggle between rival
Isaurian chieftains, on this occasion played out on a far larger stage and for
much higher stakes than usual . 1119

Zeno’s domestic political difficulties were compounded by the situation
in the Balkans which he inherited from Leo, where there were now two rival
groups of Goths in close proximity to the imperial capital, one of which
(that of Theoderic Strabo) was hostile towards the new emperor, who had
been no friend of their patron Aspar and was the chief beneficiary of his
fall. This hostility soon found opportunity for expression, with the Thracian
Goths lending their support to Basiliscus’ usurpation in 475. 110 It was not
sufficient, however, to prevent Basiliscus’ downfall the following year, and
upon Zeno’s return, the Thracian Goths found themselves displaced from
their position of favour by the Pannonian Goths, with whom Zeno had
established links during his enforced absence from Constantinople. The
annual payments were now to go to the latter, and their leader, Theoderic
the Amal, was given the generalship formerly held by Theoderic Strabo. In
return for these favours, Zeno expected the Pannonian Goths to act against
the Thracian Goths, but Theoderic the Amal soon came to believe (no
doubt with some justice) that Zeno was actually trying to engineer the
mutual destruction of the rival groups and he in turn revolted, leaving Zeno
to patch up a fresh agreement with Strabo in 478. 111

106 p or narra tive of these complex events, see Brooks (i 893); Stein (1959) 1.363—4; Stein, Bas-Empire
11. 1 5—20, 28—3 1 . The part played in these events by Leo’s widow Verina is noteworthy in the context of
influential imperial women. 107 Marcell. Chron. s.a. 473 with Croke (1995) 100.

108 Joshua Styl. Chron. 12; Candidus fr. 1.57.

109 There appears also to have been a religious dimension to this struggle. Although Illus was a
Christian, one of his leading supporters was the pagan Pamprepius and it is apparent that Illus’ revolt
inspired hopes of a pagan revival among sections of the urban elite of the eastern empire (PLRE 11,
s.v Pamprepius; Zacharias Rhetor, V. Severus ( PO n (1907)) 40). However, the attempt to place certain
anti-pagan measures in this context (Trombley, Hellenic Religion 1.81—3 on CJ 1. 1 1 .9—1 o) overlooks P. Oxy.
1814 (line 16) which shows that the first of these laws is from Anastasius’ reign, in turn making it prob-
able that the second is also later than Zeno.

110 Malchus fr. 1 5.20—2; V. Dan. Styl. 75; Heather, Goths and Romans 273—5.

1 1 1 Heather, Goths and Romans 275—93.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE SUCCESSORS OF THEODOSIUS 51

This already complicated sequence of developments then took yet
another tortuous turn in 479 when Strabo’s backing of another usurper —
on this occasion the unsuccessful Marcian — once more alienated him from
Zeno. However, Strabo’s subsequent attempts to capture Constantinople
(480) failed, and in the course of withdrawing into Greece the following
year he fortuitously died. This simplified Zeno’s problem, but in the face
of the growing challenge from Ulus and Leontius, Zeno now sought a new
rapprochement with Theoderic the Amal, as a result of which the latter gained
land for his people and a generalship and prestigious consulship for
himself. He further consolidated his position by organizing the elimination
of Strabo’s son and successor Recitach, thereby opening the way for the
amalgamation of the Thracian Goths with his own. Although Theoderic
provided Zeno with help in his campaign against Ulus, Zeno continued to
harbour doubts about Theoderic’s intentions and loyalty, and only arrived
at a definitive solution to this problem, gready protracted by the instability
of Zeno’s own position, through the time-honoured tactic of setting one
barbarian against another, in this case persuading Theoderic to lead his
people to Italy (489) and challenge the Scirian general Odoacer who had
been ruling the peninsula since deposing the last western emperor in 476. 1 12

In the sphere of religious policy, Zeno’s reign was chiefly notable for his
attempt to resolve the controversies arising from Chalcedon. The usurper
Basiliscus had tried to win support for his regime in Egypt and Palestine by
issuing an edict condemning Chalcedon, but this had the effect of provok-
ing riots in the capital — Constantinople and the Balkans were for the most
part staunchly pro-Chalcedonian. These riots, which had much more direct
implications for the viability of his regime, forced Basiliscus to retract the
edict, but the damage was already done. 113 Zeno showed a keen apprecia-
tion of the lessons to be learned from Basiliscus’ failure when in 482 he
issued his famous juggling-act known as the Henotikon or ‘formula of
union’, through which he hoped to please everyone. It affirmed the con-
demnation of both Nestorius and Eutyches, approved one of Cyril’s most
important formulations (the so-called Twelve Anathemas), spoke of the
one Christ without mentioning ‘natures’ or other terminology which had
been a stumbling block in the past, and denounced any who had advanced
different views at Chalcedon or any other council.

Zeno’s interest in establishing ecclesiastical harmony in the east is not
hard to understand: his hold on power had been tenuous from the start and
a breakthrough here offered the prospect of consolidating much-needed
support for his regime. The Henotikon did not in fact meet with a rapturous
reception in all quarters, but it achieved short-term success where it mattered

112 Heather, Goths and Romans ch. 9; Moorhead (1984) 261—3. For Constantinople’s sometimes trou-
bled relations with Theoderic as ruler of Italy, see Moorhead (1992a) ch. 6.

113 V. Dan. Styl. 70-85 ; Evagr. HE 111.7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

52 2 . THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

most for Zeno. Although extreme Monophysites were unhappy at its failure
to condemn Chalcedon, others, including the patriarchs of Alexandria and
Antioch, were willing to endorse it, as was the patriarch of Constantinople,
Acacius (471—89), who rather surprisingly (given his see) was unenthusiastic
about Chalcedon. In the west, the pope was incensed by its ambivalent atti-
tude to Chalcedon and by Zeno and Acacius associating themselves with the
Monophysite patriarchs, and threatened to excommunicate them (484).
However, Zeno evidendy judged that the benefits to be derived from a
greater degree of harmony within the east outweighed the disadvantages of
poor relations with the west. So began the so-called Acacian schism between
Rome and Constantinople which was to last until Anastasius’ death. 114

Zeno was also responsible for the final closing of the school at Edessa
(489) which had been an important centre for Antiochene theology in its
Nestorian guise — another way of trying to win the support of both
Monophysites and Chalcedonians. The closure was in fact largely symbolic,
since the majority of the teachers had some time before realized that the
tide of opinion in the eastern empire was increasingly against them and had
therefore established themselves afresh across the border at Nisibis in
Persia, from where they had long drawn many students anyway and where
Nestorian Christianity was to have an enduring future. 115

III. ANASTASIUS

1 . Politics and administration

Zeno died from dysentery (or perhaps epilepsy) on 9 April 49 1 . His mar-
riage to Ariadne had produced no further male offspring after young Leo,
another son from a previous marriage had also predeceased him, 116 and
Zeno had nominated no successor. His brother Longinus believed that he
had a good claim to the throne, but after the turmoil of Zeno’s reign there
was little enthusiasm for another emperor of Isaurian origin. Court officials
and senators promptly met to discuss the succession and, perhaps unable
to agree on a suitable candidate themselves, they accepted the proposal of
the chief chamberlain Urbicius that Zeno’s widow Ariadne be invited to
nominate the successor. This surprising move must have been due not so
much to Ariadne’s status as the widow of the unpopular Zeno, as to her
being the daughter of Leo and the last surviving member of the imperial
family previous to Zeno’s reign. It is another interesting, if unusual,
example of the opportunities that both imperial eunuchs and imperial
women sometimes had to influence political life during the fifth century, in

114 Frend, Monophysite Movement 174—83; Gray, Defence of Chalcedon 28—34; Meyendorff, Imperial Unity
194—202. 115 Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 98— 9. 116 PURE n, s.v. Zeno 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANAS TA S I U S

the tradition of Chrysaphius on the one hand and Pulcheria, Eudocia and
Verina on the other. 117

If the decision to give Ariadne the choice was surprising, then the
outcome of her deliberations was even more unexpected, for she selected
a palace official named Anastasius, who was already sixty years of age and
held heterodox theological views. Though this last characteristic became
the cause of difficulties in the final years of his reign, he nevertheless
proved to be in other respects a good choice, for he was to display a degree
of political and administrative competence superior to that of any of his
fifth-century predecessors. Once again, the lack of any dynastic link was a
potential problem, but another elaborate accession ceremony (i i April
49 1) helped to offset this handicap, 1 18 while a month later Ariadne strength-
ened his position immeasurably by marrying him.

Anastasius’ most pressing problem upon his accession was Isaurian
resentment at the fact that Zeno had not been succeeded by his brother
Longinus, which rapidly provoked a revolt in Isauria. Anastasius seized the
initiative in Constantinople by despatching Longinus into exile and using
the pretext of a hippodrome riot to expel all Isaurians from the capital.
Rebel forces advancing against Constantinople from Isauria were defeated
in late 492, though it took six years to reduce the various rebel strongholds
in Isauria itself. 1 19 Although this should not be equated with the pacification
of Isauria, 120 it did mark the end of the Isaurian factor in political life at the
centre, and Anastasius was not slow to capitalize, via victory ceremonial,
panegyric and architecture, on the kudos to be gained from this success. 121

In addition to the Isaurian revolt, the early years of Anastasius’ reign
were also troubled by frequent outbreaks of unrest in Constantinople and
Antioch, some of it very pointedly directed at the emperor himself. 122 The
violence regularly manifested itself at places of public entertainment,
though why there should have been a sudden upsurge of such incidents in
the 490s is not easy to determine. 123 Anastasius responded initially by
sending in troops, with much resultant bloodshed, and then by banning

117 Ariadne does not, however, appear to have exercised any sustained influence; it is known, for
example, that Anastasius turned down her request for the promotion of a particular individual to the
praetorian prefectship (Joh. Lyd. DeMag. in. 50). Urbicius was a man of vast experience, having already
served most eastern emperors during the fifth century: PERE n, s.v. Vrbicius 1.

118 De Caer. 1.92 with Nelson (1976), MacCormack (1981) 240—7.

119 Brooks (1893) 231—7; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.82—4.

120 Shaw (1990) 25 5—9, contra Jones, ERE 230—1.

121 Victory ceremonial: McCormick, Eternal Victory 61; panegyric: Procopius of Gaza, Panegyric
9—10; Priscian, De laude Anast. 15—139; Suda s.v. Christodorus (a six-book epic entitled Isaurika\ cf.
Colluthus’ Persika a decade later); architecture: Anth. Pal. ix.656 (a palace built to commemorate his
victory). The abolition of the chrysargyron (see p. 54 below) was also timed to coincide with celebrations
of the Isaurian victory: Chauvot (1986) 1 54; McCormick, Eternal Victory 61.

122 Cameron (1973) 233—4 lists the incidents with references; see esp. John Ant. fr. 214b (= FHG
v.29— 30) and Marcell. Chron. s.a. 493 with Croke (1995) 107, when statues of the emperor were pulled
down. 123 For discussion of possible causes, see Cameron (1973) 234—40.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

54 2- the eastern empire: Theodosius to anastasius

wild-beast shows (498) and pantomimes (5 02). 124 His decision to abolish
the highly unpopular tax known as the collatio lustralis or chrysargyron (498)
should perhaps also be understood in this context, as a more positive
response to this problem. The chrysargyron was a tax on urban traders and
craftsmen, and its abolition may have been an attempt to counteract
popular hostility in the cities by gaining good will towards the emperor
from at least one important sector of the urban community.

Despite his abolition of this tax 125 and his granting of tax remissions in
areas of the empire adversely affected by natural disasters or warfare, 126 and
despite other significant expenses incurred during this reign — major building
projects 127 and war against the Isaurians and, later, the Persians (see pp. 5 8—9
below) — Anastasius nevertheless managed over the course of his reign to
accumulate a massive reserve of 320,000 pounds of gold. 128 This figure is tes-
timony to Anastasius’ skill in financial management, or at the very least to his
skill in selecting officials with the requisite abilities in this area. Three policies
seem to have played particularly important parts in achieving this astonish-
ing result. The first, evident in Anastasius’ laws, was a concerted effort on the
part of the emperor and his officials to minimize waste and unnecessary
expenditure through such measures as increased use of adaeratio (commuta-
tion of the land-tax in kind to gold). The second was the creation by one of
Anastasius’ praetorian prefects, Marinus, of a new category of officials, the
vindices, who assumed responsibility for overseeing the collection of the land-
tax in place of city councillors, a move which is likely to have reduced the
scope for abuses on the part of the latter. 129 The third, perhaps less obviously,
was Anastasius’ currency reform, modelled, interestingly, on recent changes
in Vandalic Africa and the new Gothic regime of Theoderic in Italy. 130

Although fourth-century emperors had managed to keep the value of the
gold solidus stable, attempts to do the same for the copper nummus had been
unsuccessful, and its steady loss of value encouraged the continuation of
inflationary trends. Anastasius’ reform of 498 created a new set of copper
coins valued at forty, twenty and ten nummi. They had specified weights
which fixed their relationship with the soliduy, these weights were later
doubled (512), at which time an additional five nummi denomination was
added. 131 A number of significant consequences ensued. The initial issuing
of the new coins in 498 slowed inflationary trends, while their doubling in

124 Bans: Joshua Styl. Chron. 34, 46; c£ Procopius of Gaza, Panegyric 1 5—16, Priscian, De laude A.nast.
223—8; Cameron (1973) 228—32.

125 In spite of its unpopularity, its abolition may not, in any case, have represented that great a loss

to the government: Bagnall, Egypt 1 5 3—4. 126 Jones, ERE 237.

127 Malal. p. 409; Capizzi (1969) ch. 6. 128 Procop. SH 19.7.

129 Jones, ERE 235-6; Chrysos (1971); Chauvot (1987).

130 Metcalf (1969); Hendy, Studies 478—90.

131 Hendy, Studies 475—8, contra Jones, E RE 443 (who associates the five nummi coin with the initial
reform of 498).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANAS TA S I U S

weight in turn began to reverse those trends; the new coins made life easier
for ordinary consumers by reducing the quantity of low-value nummi they
needed to carry around; and because the specified value of the copper coins
in relation to the gold solidus was greater than the actual cost of the copper
used in their production, it is likely that the imperial treasury made a profit
from selling them to the public in return for solid /. 132

Despite the rejoicing occasioned by his abolition of the chrysargyron and
the benefits of the currency reform for ordinary people, Anastasius’ accu-
mulation of a surplus and some of the means by which this was achieved
earned him an unwarranted reputation for avarice. 13 ’ In fact his compe-
tence, and that of senior officials, in the unspectacular but crucial area of
imperial finance made a significant contribution to the recovery of the
eastern empire’s fortunes, and constituted one of the major achievements
of his reign.

2. Religious affairs

As a native of Dyrrhachium in the Balkans, Anastasius might reasonably
have been expected to be an unequivocal supporter of Chalcedon, but
this did not prove to be the case. Like Justinian, he had aspirations to be
a theologian, and the result of his deliberations was considerable sympa-
thy with the Monophysite cause. L ’ 4 This was already known at the time of
his accession, so that the pro-Chalcedonian patriarch of Constantinople,
Euphemius (490—5), at first opposed his nomination and then, when
overruled by Ariadne and the senate, demanded that he sign a declaration
that he would not abrogate Chalcedon. 1 ’ 5 Anastasius’ initial policy — to
continue trying to maintain a degree of ecclesiastical stability in the east
on the basis of the Henotikon — was not incompatible with this, but
Euphemius’ subsequent attempts to achieve reconciliation with Rome by
effectively abandoning the Henotikon threatened the success of that policy
and eventually led Anastasius to have Euphemius deposed on charges of
Nestorianism (495). His successor was Macedonius (495— 51 1), who ini-
tially supported Anastasius’ approach.

Antioch also posed problems for Anastasius. The patriarch Flavian
(498—51 2), while personally sympathetic to Chalcedon, referred only to his
adherence to the Henotikon in official pronouncements, thereby accommo-
dating himself to Anastasius’ aims. Some Syrian Monophysites, however,

132 Jones, ERE 444; Metcalf (1969) (though he questions whether the reform contributed anything
to Anastasius’ surplus (p. 12)).

133 E.g. Malal. p. 408; Joh. Lyd. De Mag. 111.4 (>\Anth. Pal. xi. 271; John Ant. fr. 21 5 {=FHG iv.621).

134 The heterodox theological views of his mother and an uncle may also have played a part: see
PERE 11, s.v. Anastasius 4 for references.

135 Evagr. HE 111.32; Theodore Lector, HE 446 (Hansen pp. 1 25.25—1 26. 1 5); Viet. Tunn. Chron. s.a.
49 1 -

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

56 2 . THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

were unhappy with Flavian’s failure to condemn Chalcedon and began a
concerted propaganda and diplomatic campaign to persuade Anastasius to
remove him. Meanwhile, in Constantinople itself, Macedonius began
reverting to the capital’s more usual uncompromising adherence to
Chalcedon, while the highly articulate Monophysite theologian Severus,
also present in the capital (508—11), brought further pressure to bear on
Anastasius from the anti-Chalcedonian side. 136

It is against this background of increasing polarization that Anastasius’
adoption of a less neutral stance from 5 1 1 onwards must be understood.
Like Zeno, Anastasius understandably viewed stability in the east as a more
important priority than reconciliation with the west, and accordingly took
various steps to ensure that he retained the support of Monophysites — first
through the deposition of Macedonius at Constantinople, then through
the deposition of Flavian at Antioch (in favour of Severus), and finally
through decreeing the inclusion of controversial Monophysite phraseol-
ogy in the liturgy of the capital’s churches. The reaction to this last move
was more extreme than Anastasius can have anticipated. There were several
days of serious rioting (November 512), during which much blood was
shed and parts of the city were burnt, but most worrying was the over-
throw of statues of Anastasius accompanied by calls for a new emperor.
Anastasius’ response was to appear in the hippodrome without his diadem
and to offer his abdication — a course of action which quelled the unrest. 137
While this may seem an idiosyncratic way of dealing with such a crisis, it is
perhaps better viewed as a remarkable demonstration of the susceptibility
of the capital’s populace to a calculated display of imperial piety.

It did not, however, mark the end of religious turmoil, for Anastasius’
actions of 5 1 1 — 12 provoked a further serious challenge to his position, a
revolt orchestrated by an army officer, Vitalian, who commanded units of
barbarian federates in Thrace. 138 The failure of their supplies to arrive in
5 1 3 and dissatisfaction among the regular troops with the magister militum
for Thrace, Hypatius, 139 enabled Vitalian to win their support, 14(1 but the
real issue for him — as indeed for many inhabitants of the Balkans — was
Anastasius’ stance on Chalcedon. That this was not a mere pretext for
Vitalian’s personal ambitions is indicated by the way he was prepared, on
the first two occasions when he advanced against Constantinople (513 and
514), to withdraw after Anastasius agreed to take steps which offered the
hope of resolving the religious issue. His willingness to do so, particularly

136 p renc j ? Monophysite Movement ch. 5; Gray, Defence of Chalcedon 34—40; Meyendorff, Imperial Unity
202—6.

137 Evagr. HE 111.44; Malal. pp. 407—8; Marcell. Chron. s.a. 51 1— 12 with Croke (1995) 1 14—16.

138 For full details, see Stein, Bas-Empire 11.178—85; Capizzi (1969) 123—7; PURE n, s.v. FI. Vitalianus

2; Croke (1995) 1 1 7— 19. 139 Probably not the nephew of Anastasius: Cameron (1974) 313—14.

140 John Ant. fr. 2i 4 e (= FHGvyz).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANAS TA S I U S

the second time after Anastasius’ original promises of 513 had proven
empty, is strong evidence for this being his genuine motivation. When
Anastasius once more failed to fulfil his side of the bargain, Vitalian
advanced a third time (515), but on this occasion suffered a military defeat
sufficiently serious for him to have to abandon any further attempts to
capture the capital, and it was only after Anastasius’ death and the acces-
sion of the Illyrian Justin that a resolution of the issue acceptable to
Vitalian became possible. Anastasius survived this crisis, but his reign
showed that the Henotikon was not a satisfactory basis for attaining an
enduring settlement of the east’s ecclesiastical difficulties. In acknowledg-
ing Anastasius’ failure in this area, however, it is worth remembering that
his Chalcedonian successors were not to find it any easier to achieve a solu-
tion to this intractable problem.

3 . Foreign relations

Anastasius’ priorities in foreign relations proved to be rather different from
those of his predecessors. Although the failure of Leo’s expedition in 468
had left the eastern Mediterranean vulnerable to further Vandal depreda-
tions, 141 the death of the long-lived Geiseric in 477 and growing domestic
problems with Moorish tribesmen led to a less confrontational stance on
the part of Geiseric’s successors and much more stable relations between
Constantinople and the Vandals over the next half-century 142 — a stability
reflected in the archaeological and numismatic evidence for a substantial
increase in trade between the eastern Mediterranean and Carthage during
the last quarter of the fifth and first quarter of the sixth century. 14 ’ The
Danube frontier was rather more problematic, in part because of the way
the empire’s defensive infrastructure in that region had suffered extended
neglect during Zeno’s reign. So long as the various Gothic groups were
active in Illyricum and Thrace, they effectively cushioned the empire from
the consequences of this neglect, but soon after Theoderic’s departure for
Italy, the empire began to feel the effects in the form of invasions by
peoples referred to in contemporary sources as Bulgars, generally taken to
be descendants of the Huns who survived north of the Danube after the
break-up of Attila’s empire. Between 493 and 502, they are known to have
made three significant thrusts into the Balkans. 144 Anastasius took various
steps to try to remedy the deficiencies of fortifications in the region,

141 Of which there were some in the early 470s: Courtois (1955) 197.

142 Stein, Bas-Empire 11. 5 9—60. 143 Fulford (1980).

144 Marcell. Chron. s.a. 493, 499, 502 with Croke (1995) 108, no, in. The first record of involve-
ment with the empire is Zeno’s attempt to use them against Strabo in 480 (John Ant. fr. 21 1 (4) (= FHG
iv.619)). The observations in CJ x.27.2.10 (491/505) on the debilitated economic state of Thrace
perhaps reflect the impact of the Bulgars in addition to that of the Goths.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

58 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

including, probably, repair of the Long Walls in Thrace which had been
damaged by the great earthquake of 479, 14:5 and nothing further is heard of
depredations across the Danube until the final years of his reign. 146

The major foreign policy issue during Anastasius’ reign, however, was
Persia, with whom relations had been relatively untroubled throughout the
fifth century. Tensions had undoubtedly existed, notably over the treatment
of religious minorities within both empires 147 and over Persian demands
for Roman financial assistance with the defence of the Caucasian passes,
from which, the Persians argued, the Romans derived as much benefit as
Persia. 148 These tensions, however, had only escalated into warfare on the
two brief occasions already noted during Theodosius’ reign, for Persia also
faced many other problems comparable in gravity to those confronting the
Romans during this period. In the second half of the fifth century, the
Persians had to deal with another nomadic people, the Hephthalites, who
captured the Persian king Peroz in one campaign and lulled him in a second.
Succession crises and Armenian revolts at various points created further
distractions, and then in the final decade of the century, Kavadh’s radical
social reforms, probably designed to weaken the power of the Persian aris-
tocracy, resulted in social upheaval and his temporary deposition
( 496 - 8 ). 149

It was Kavadh who initiated war with the Romans in 502, ostensibly over
the issue of Roman subsidies for the defence of the Caucasian passes, but
probably as much because such a campaign offered the hope of uniting a
recently strife-torn state against a common enemy. The Romans were slow
to react to Kavadh’s invasion — perhaps partly because of preoccupation
with the Bulgar invasion of that year and a major Arab raid 15 " — and his
forces quickly captured Armenian Theodosiopolis, Martyropolis and
Amida. That Kavadh’s invasion created considerable uncertainty and inse-
curity in the empire’s eastern provinces is indicated by the contemporary
piece of apocalyptic literature emanating from the region known as the
‘Oracle of Baalbek’. 1 ’’ 1 It took Roman forces until 505 to effect the recov-
ery of Amida, by which time Kavadh found himself having to deal with
another Hephthalite invasion and was therefore amenable to a seven-year
truce (which in practice lasted until 527). 152 The deficiencies of Roman

145 Long Walls: Whitby (1985); generally: Capizzi (1969) 204—6.

146 Marcell. Chron. s.a. 517 (it is unclear whether the Getae referred to here are Bulgars or Slavs: cf.
Bury, ERE 1.436 n. 2; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.105—6; Croke (1995) 120).

147 E.g. Soc. HE vii . 1 8.1—7 (persecution of Persian Christians); Priscus fr. 41. 1 (persecution of
Zoroastrians living in the Roman empire). 148 Blockley (1985).

149 Frye (1984) 321—4. For a different interpretation of some aspects of Kavadh’s reforms, see Crone
(1991), with corrections of detail by Whitby (1994) 249 n. 72.

150 Marcell. Chron. s.a. 502; Theophanes p. 143.20—7. 151 Alexander (1967).

152 The most important source for this war is the contemporary Chronicle attributed to Joshua
Stylites. For modern accounts, see Bury, ERE 11.10— 1 5; Capizzi (1969) 180—5; Blockley (1992) 89—91.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANAS TA S I U S

defences in the region revealed by the war resulted in action to repair and
strengthen them and in the construction of a new frontier fortress at Dara,
the aim of which was to provide a forward base for Roman troops. 15 ’ This
last move provoked strong protests from the Persians, since a fifth-century
settlement had prohibited any new forts close to the frontier, but by the
time Kavadh had dealt with the Hephthalites and was in a position to trans-
late protest into action, he was confronted by a Roman fait accompli.
Anastasius’ judicious use of diplomacy and money apparently dissuaded
him from pursuing the issue further, 154 and relations between the two
empires thereafter remained stable until the reign of Anastasius’ successor.

4. Epilogue

Anastasius died on 9 July 518. Given his age and the availability of suitable
candidates among his relatives, 153 his failure to nominate a successor rep-
resents an uncharacteristic oversight on the part of an emperor who had,
in most areas of government, shown himself to be energetic and intelli-
gent, and had done much to ensure the continuing viability of the eastern
empire. That continuing viability, of course, stands in marked contrast to
the demise of the western empire, and prompts reflection on the question
posed in the introduction to this chapter as to why the fate of the east
during the fifth century diverged from that of the west. Needless to say, the
following observations make no claim to comprehensive coverage of all
the major issues which bear on this subject. In keeping with the focus of
the chapter, they concentrate primarily on the emperor and his policies in
key areas.

One feature of imperial behaviour in the fifth century which distin-
guishes it sharply from that in the third and fourth centuries is the way in
which it became rare for the emperor to participate personally in military
campaigning. This development arose in the first instance out of the youth
and inexperience of Arcadius and Honorius, and then of Theodosius II
and Valentinian III (whose collective reigns, it is worth recalling, account
for the first half of the fifth century). However, the way in which it
remained the pattern thereafter until the early seventh century, in spite of
the military experience of many subsequent incumbents, suggests that a
more fundamental consideration was also at work — namely, concern to
protect the emperor from the political and physical consequences of mili-
tary defeat, which the fates of Julian and Valens in the latter half of the
fourth century had particularly highlighted. 156 The corresponding disad-
vantage of this change was that it limited the emperor’s contact with the

153 Dara: Whitby (1986b); other sites: Capizzi (1969) 206-7, 214-28; Whitby (1986a) 726.

154 Procop. Wars 1.10.13— 19. 155 For the relatives, see Cameron, Alan (1978).

156 Cf. Whitby (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6o 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

army and increased the potential for ambitious generals to exert a dominat-
ing influence on political life — a potential realized in the careers of Stilicho,
Aetius and Ricimer in the west. That this trend was less evident in the east
can be attributed in large part to differences in the military command struc-
ture in the two halves of the empire. In the early- fifth-century west (prob-
ably as a result of Stilicho’s actions) all forces were ultimately under the
authority of one general, whereas in the east the field armies were through-
out the fifth century divided amongst five generals . 157 This arrangement
not only acted as a safeguard against the concentration of military power
in the hands of one individual, it also diverted commanders’ energies into
rivalries between themselves. Moreover, it enlarged the scope for others —
civilian officials, prominent courtiers, female members of the imperial
family — to compete for power and counterbalance the political weight of
the military . 158

In the middle of the fifth century, to be sure, Aspar came to exercise
influence analogous to that of the western ‘generalissimos’, yet when Leo
began to assert his independence, Aspar never gave any sign of contem-
plating his removal in the way that Ricimer eliminated Majorian and
Anthemius, thereby seriously devaluing the authority of the imperial office
in the west. Whether from choice or necessity, Aspar pursued the much less
destructive strategy of establishing a marital alliance with Leo in the expec-
tation that his son would succeed to the throne in due course. In the event,
Aspar lost out to another general of ambition and ability. Unencumbered
by Aspar’s dual handicap of barbarian origin and religious heterodoxy,
Zeno was able to assume the imperial purple himself via the same strategy
of marriage into the imperial family, so preserving the integrity of the
imperial office in the east and helping to ensure that it never came to be
viewed as an irrelevancy or an anachronism. Granted Zeno did not prove
to be a popular emperor and the political turmoil of his reign raised the
spectre of the eastern empire disintegrating into anarchy, yet it is note-
worthy that, of those who challenged him for power, Basiliscus and
Marcian had dynastic links, while Illus and Leontius came from the same
provincial background as Zeno himself. Even if any of them had suc-
ceeded in removing Zeno permanently, therefore, there was never any
question of the imperial office itself being done away with . 159 Had the reign
of his successor been as tumultuous as Zeno’s, then perhaps questions
might have been asked. As it was, Anastasius proved to be a very capable

157 Jones, LRE (joy— io.

158 Through their marriages, the two most important imperial females — Pulcheria and Ariadne —
also played a crucial role in maintaining a high degree of dynastic continuity during the fifth century
(Leo’s accession marks the only break), and the significance of that continuity for preserving the integ-
rity of the imperial office ought not to be underestimated.

159 Basiliscus, of course, actually adopted the title of emperor during his twenty-month occupation
of Constantinople.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANASTASIUS

ruler whose policies by and large served to stabilize the empire, which at
his death was in most respects in a stronger position than it had been for
more than a century.

Religious policy also played a part in preserving the emperor’s position.
Regular pronouncements throughout the century against pagans, Jews or
heterodox Christian groups served to re-emphasize imperial piety, a virtue
which helped to offset the less martial character of imperial life in the fifth
century. Like non-campaigning, however, religious policy could be two-
edged in its potential consequences. Chalcedon undoubtedly brought
Marcian immediate political benefits in certain vital quarters, but it was also
the catalyst for a polarization of opinion within the eastern church which
caused increasing difficulties for his successors. Arguably the most impor-
tant success of Zeno’s reign was his holding of the resultant tensions in
balance, albeit temporarily, through the Henotikorr, arguably the most
important failure of Anastasius’ reign was his inability to sustain that
balance, though as we have seen he was to a considerable extent at the
mercy of pressures beyond his control. Interestingly, this was one area
where western emperors had far less to worry about, but recognition of
that serves only to pose the basic question all the more acutely.

In foreign relations, the east undoubtedly faced some serious tests, par-
ticularly in the Balkan provinces, whose security and economy were placed
under severe strain by the Huns during the first half of the century and
then by the Goths in the second half. Against these difficulties, however,
must be set the experience of Asia Minor, Syria, Palestine and Egypt, which
remained securely under government control and suffered only occasional
disruption, if any. This situation owed much to the geographical
configuration of the region — Asia Minor and Egypt were both well insu-
lated from serious external threat — and to the overall stability of relations
with the empire’s most powerful neighbour, Persia, despite the existence of
the tensions discussed earlier. In addition to circumstances specific to the
fifth century such as the preoccupation of both powers with dangers on
other fronts, this stability may also in part be attributed to the general con-
straint imposed by the sheer difficulty both powers faced in mounting a
major invasion without its being anticipated by the other. 160

It is in their implications for the area of imperial finances that these con-
siderations have their greatest significance: compared with the west, the
eastern empire suffered only limited erosion of its tax base. Above all, the
revenues of Egypt, whose importance in the eastern economy paralleled
that of North Africa in the western, remained at the uninterrupted dispo-
sal of Constantinople. Thus even when financial crises occurred, such as
those precipitated by Attila’s demands in the late 440s or by the failure of

160 Cf. Lee (1993b) 18—20, 112—20, 139—42.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6z 2. THE EASTERN EMPIRE: THEODOSIUS TO ANASTASIUS

Leo’s expedition against the Vandals in 468, imperial finances never lapsed
into the downward spiral they did in the west, and the eastern government
and its armies were able to continue functioning with a sufficient degree of
effectiveness. This underlying economic strength of the eastern empire is
further highlighted by Anastasius’ demonstration of what could be
achieved through prudent management of the treasury. By the end of his
reign, therefore, although continuing ecclesiastical controversy gave cause
for concern, the eastern empire was in most other respects in a position to
face the future with considerable optimism.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 3

JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

AVERIL CAMERON

I. JUSTIN I (518-27)

For understandable reasons the reign of Justin I tends to be eclipsed by that
of Justinian, his nephew and successor (527—65). Not only was Justinian
already a powerful figure during his uncle’s reign, but Procopius of
Caesarea, the leading historian of Justinian, regarded his rule as effectively
including that period. 1 In view of their common background and the con-
tinuity of imperial policy in certain areas, Justin’s reign is often associated
with that of Justinian in modern accounts. 2 Although Anastasius had three
nephews, Hypatius, Pompeius and Probus, there was no designated succes-
sor when he died in 5 1 8. As magister militum per Orientem, Hypatius was away
from Constantinople, and Justin, then the head of the excubitors (the
palace guard), is said to have used cash destined for the support of another
candidate to bribe his troops to support his own name; as a result, on 10
July 518 he was proclaimed by the senate, army and people and then
crowned by the patriarch. 3

The new emperor was already elderly and his background was humble.
He originated from Latin-speaking Illyricum, having been born at
Bederiana, near Naissus (Nis), and he owed his success to his career in the
guard. According to Procopius he was illiterate, 4 and in his religious views
he was staunchly Chalcedonian. Other contemporaries recorded the arrival
of this backward provincial in Constantinople in about 470 and his subse-
quent success as something at which to marvel, and the story was depicted
in art. 5 Though the family of Anastasius was to continue to have an
influential role, 6 the new regime was bound to be very different; Justin lost
no time in giving the title of comes to his nephew Justinian, who was a can-
did atus, and seems also to have formally adopted him. 7 Justinian was

1 See Cameron, Procopius 9. However, Justin’s reputation suffers in that the evidence comes from the
Secret History, where in his intent to blacken Justinian Procopius exaggerates the rusticity of Justin and
the ruthlessness of both uncle and nephew.

2 E.g. Evans (1996) 96—1 1 5; see, however, Stein, Bas-Empire 11.219— 73; Vasiliev (1950).

3 Marcell. Chron. s.a. 519; Malal. p. 410; Evagr. HE iv.i; further, PLRE n, s.v. Iustinus 4.

4 SH6.11; see PLRE 11, s.v. 5 Zach. Rhet. HE viii.i. 6 See Cameron, Alan (1978).

7 See PLRE n, s.v. Iustinianus 7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

involved, according to Procopius and others, in the murders in 5 1 8 of the
pro-Monophysite eunuch Amantius and in 520 of Vitalian, his own closest
rival and the consul of the year. 8 In 519 he was already building a basilica
to Sts Peter and Paul in the palace of Hormisdas, and requesting relics from
Rome. 9 The fall of Vitalian was followed by Justinian’s consulship in a.d.
521, inaugurated by brilliant consular games and from which three sets of
diptychs survive; 10 he was now m agister militum praesentalis, also an office held
by Vitalian. Also in the reign of his uncle, and before April 527, he married
the Hippodrome performer Theodora, whose early career and exploits
Procopius recounts in prurient detail in the Secret History (SH 9.1—30); the
marriage was made possible only after the death of Justin’s wife Euphemia,
who was strongly opposed to it, and by the passage of a special law allow-
ing retired and reformed actresses to petition the emperor for the right to
marry even into the highest rank. 1 1 Theodora is praised in the Monophysite
tradition for her piety; however, it is not denied there that she was originally
a prostitute. 12

Both Justin I and Justinian were supporters of Chalcedon. Under
popular pressure, within days of Justin’s accession, the patriarch John of
Constantinople recognized Chalcedon and condemned Severus of
Antioch, while a series of eastern synods sought to overturn the religious
measures taken by Anastasius. Justin reopened relations with Rome;
Theoderic’s son-in-law Eutharic became western consul for 5 1 9 with Justin
himself as his eastern colleague, and the ending of the Acacian schism
between Constantinople and the papacy was announced in Constantinople
in terms favourable to Rome at the end of March, 519. 13 Predictably, this
led to discontent among eastern Christians, which was met by repression;
this was to cause difficulties for Justinian later, 14 and the 520s also saw the
appearance of other doctrinal issues, with which he had to struggle as
emperor. 13 In Africa Hilderic, king of the Vandals from 523 to 5 30, devel-
oped a warm relationship with Justinian and lifted the persecution of
Catholics in his kingdom, but the alliance with Theoderic in Italy did not
prove straightforward; in 524, suspicious of possible plots with
Constantinople, the aged king turned on members of the Roman senato-
rial class, and when the philosopher Boethius, whose sons had both been

8 SH 6.27—8; Zach. Rhet. HE viii.i— 2; Viet. Tunn. Chron. s.a. 523; PLRE 11, s.v. Amantius 4;
Vitalianus 2. 9 Procop. Buildings 1.4.

10 Procop. SH 18.33; 2 $- I 5 24.29; Cyril of Scythopolis, PC Sabae 68. Procop. SH 6.27—28; career of
Justinian: PLRE 11.645—8; Bagnall et al., Consuls 576—7.

11 CJ v.4.23, 1—4 (a.d. 520—3); Procop. SH 9.51; PLR E in, s.v. Theodora 1. The name Euphemia was
given to the empress on Justin’s accession in preference to the unsuitable Lupicina; Procopius alleges
that she had originally been bought by Justin as a slave (SH 6.17; see PLRE n, s.v. Euphemia 5).

12 For John of Ephesus’ Lives of the Eastern Saints , an important source for Theodora, see Harvey,

Asceticism and Society in Crisis. 13 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.224—8.

14 Ibid., 228—325; Egypt escaped the persecution and was able to offer haven to Monophysite exiles.

15 See below and ch. 27, p. 81 1 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s early years (527—32) 65

consuls in 522, attempted to intervene he was tried and executed himself;
his death was followed in the next year by that of his father-in-law
Symmachus, the leader of the senate. 16 The king’s own death in 526, leaving
his young grandson Athalaric as heir under the guardianship of his mother
Amalasuintha, soon provided Justinian with an excuse for intervention in
Italy.

In the east, Justin’s government followed the traditional policy of using
diplomacy and alliances to maintain Byzantine interests, supporting an
Axumite (Ethiopian) expedition against the Jewish regime of Himyar in
south Arabia (a.d. 524—5) and adopting a long-term policy of utilizing the
Monophysite Ghassanids as federates to balance the pro-Persian
Lakhmids. 17 Christianity and Byzantine influence likewise went hand-in-
hand in the Caucasus, but here the highly political baptism and marriage to
a Christian wife of Tzath, the king of Lazica, in Constantinople led to retal-
iatory moves by Kavadh of Persia and to the flight of the Iberian royal
family to Constantinople. In Justin’s last year, the generals Belisarius and
Sittas raided Persarmenia; as dux Mesopotamiae, Belisarius’ base was the for-
tress at Dara, and Procopius the historian now became his aide. 18

11. Justinian’s early years (527—32)

Before he died on 1 August 527, Justin had made his nephew Justinian co-
emperor, and the latter now succeeded. 19 He is perhaps best known from
his depiction in the famous mosaic in the church of San Vitale, Ravenna.
The contemporary chronicle of Malalas describes him as ‘short, with a
good chest, a good nose, fair-skinned, curly-haired, round-faced, hand-
some, with receding hair, a florid complexion, with his hair and beard
greying’. 211 The formula is conventional, but at least the description lacks
the sheer malice of that given by Procopius in the Secret History, where
Justinian’s appearance is slyly compared with that of the tyrant and perse-
cutor Domitian. 21

The importance of Justinian’s reign has been recognized by contempo-
raries and modern historians alike. It is seen as a time of triumph, marking
the re-establishment of strong imperial rule, or the transmission of an ideal
of Catholic government to the western Middle Ages and the Renaissance.
Equally, it has been seen as an autocracy, marked by persecution and ending
in failure. The early successes of Justinian’s ‘reconquest’ of the western

16 See PLRE n, s.v. Boethius 5 and Symmachus 9, and see ch. 19, p. 525 below.

17 See Evans (1996) 86—90, 112— 14; Fowden (1993); ch. 22c, p. 678 below; Shahid (1995) 1.1 and 2.

18 For the diplomatic aspects and the idea of a Byzantine ‘commonwealth’ see Fowden (1993); the

subsequent activities of Belisarius are known in detail from Procopius, and are given in detail in PLRE
hi, Belisarius 1. 19 Malal. 422.9—21; 424.14—425.9; Chron. Pasch. 616 Bonn.

20 Malal. 425 , 1—9, trans. Jeffreys etal; on the ‘portraits’ in Malalas, see Elizabeth and Michael Jeffreys,
in Jeffreys et al.. Studies 231—44. 21 SH 8.12—21.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 - JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

empire were accompanied and followed by profound difficulties; his much-
vaunted aim of restoration, realized in the great codification of Roman law
which took place in his early years, sat awkwardly with the harsh measures
taken against teachers and the effective closure of the academy at Athens;
the great church of St Sophia, perhaps his finest achievement, owed its very
existence to a serious riot which almost led to the emperor’s own fall.
Bitterly opposed, but also eulogized as a Christian monarch, Justinian
forced his own compromises on an unwilling church, only to fall into
heresy on his deathbed. Edward Gibbon, in his History of the Decline and Fall
of the Roman Empire , had some difficulty in deciding whether to place
Justinian’s reign in the context of Roman success or Greek decline, and
indeed it is still an open question whether the emperor’s policies over-
stretched the empire’s resources to a dangerous level, as the propaganda of
his successor suggests . 22

Much of the problem is to be traced to the contradictions to be found
between the contemporary sources. Procopius of Caesarea began as the
emperor’s ardent supporter, but in the course of the composition of his
History of the Wars in eight books (finished a.d. 5 50/ 1—5 5 3/4) turned into
his bitter opponent. Procopius’ vituperative pamphlet, the so-called Secret
History, seems to have been composed while the Wars was still in progress
(a.d. 5 50/ 1), and was followed soon afterwards (a.d. 5 54/5) by a panegyr-
ical account of Justinian’s Buildings , 23 No reliable biographical data about
Procopius exist to provide us with an explanation for this change . 24 But a
similar ambivalence can also be detected in the work On Magistracies by his
contemporary John Lydus, a former official in the praetorian prefecture , 25
and in the work of the North African Latin poet Corippus, who wrote a
hexameter poem in praise of the accession of Justinian’s successor Justin
II (565—78); like his own contemporary, the historian and poet Agathias,
Corippus accords Justinian the respect due to a major emperor while at the
same time criticizing him . 2 ' 1 The contemporary Chronicle of John Malalas
records the reign in detail and from a different and specifically Christian

22 For this see Corippus, In laudem Iustini minoris 1.250— 71; with notes in Cameron, Corippus", Agathias,
Hist, v.14; Menander Protector, ed. and trans. Blockley 1985: fr. 8. There is also a hostile portrayal of
the reign in the work of the Chalcedonian church historian Evagrius Scholasticus, HE iv.jof., on which
see Allen, Evagrius 171—208. For Gibbon’s view of Justinian see Cameron, Averil (1997). The extent to
which Justinian’s military ventures resulted in a weakening of Roman resources (Jones, ERE 298—302)
is questioned by Whitby, ch. 1 1, p. 288 below.

23 The traditional dates have recently been defended again by Greatrex (1994). The discovery of a
single manuscript of the Secret History in the Vatican Library (published by Alemanni, 1623) upset the
then prevailing favourable opinion of Justinian and led to Procopius’ authorship being denied.

24 See Cameron, Procopius for the argument that the works are more similar than would at first appear,
and that Procopius’ ‘change of view’ is explicable in relation to the developing circumstances in which
he wrote. 25 See Maas, John Lydus.

26 Cameron, Corippus", cf. Agathias, Hist, v.14, with Cameron, Averil (1970) 124—30. Evagrius’ criti-
cisms (see n. 22 above) are combined with a neutral account of Justinian’s wars drawn from Procopius’
Wars, but Evagrius apparently used neither the Buildings nor the Secret History. On the hostility to
Justinian expressed here and elsewhere, see Carile (1978) 81—4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s early years (527—32)

perspective ; 27 other important chronicle sources are the Latin Chronicle of
Marcellinus Comes 28 and the early-seventh-century Greek Chronicon
Paschale, which is dependent on Malalas only for the early years . 29 Naturally,
there were always poets and writers ready to render the conventional
praises to Justinian, just as there were artists ready to commemorate his vic-
tories. 3 ” Since antiquity, many have wanted to claim Justinian as the proto-
type for their own ideal, whether legal, religious or political . 31

Theodora had been crowned Augusta with Justinian while Justin was still
alive, and her forceful character soon revealed itself, although she did not
formally share the imperial power. In the mosaics in San Vitale she is
depicted in parallel with her husband, and she was also shown on the ceiling
of the Chalke entrance to the imperial palace, standing beside him to
receive the triumphal homage of Belisarius . 32

The new emperor was ambitious. His second consulship, in 528, was
remarkable for its lavish display and largess, 33 and significantly, after 541 the
consulship was reserved for emperors alone. 34 Less than a year had passed
since his accession when on 13 February 528 Justinian appointed a commis-
sion to produce a new code of imperial law which would revise the exist-
ing ones and add laws passed subsequently; by 7 April 529 the task was
complete and the Codex Justinianus was formally promulgated. 35 Excited by
this success, Justinian went further and set up a commission to codify the
writings of the Roman jurists (15 December 530), again meeting with
astonishing success. Only three years later its members, led by Tribonian,
had completed their apparently impossible task, which involved reading
some three million lines of Latin contained in two thousand books. Their
compilation, known as the ‘Digest’, appeared on 1 6 December 5 3 3 , 36 A
month earlier, Tribonian and others had produced the Institutes, a handbook
for law students, and Justinian issued a law reforming the structure of legal
studies; finally, the Code itself was issued in a revised edition, bringing it up
to date, at the end of 5 34. 37 The achievement was extraordinary, and much

27 See Jeffreys et al., Chronicle] Jeffreys et al., Studies (here especially Scott, ibid., at 69—71).

28 See Croke (1995). 29 Trans, with detailed notes by Whitby and Whitby (1989).

30 See Paul the Silentiary’s hexameter poem on the restoration of St Sophia, delivered in January 563:
ed. Friendlander 1912, see Whitby, Mary (1985); Magdalino and Macrides (1988); for the ‘Mirror for
Princes’ of the deacon Agapitus see Henry (1967). Little of Justinian’s triumphal art has actually sur-
vived, but see Cameron, Corippus 140— 1, 1 84; McCormick, Eternal Victory 67—8.

31 Capizzi, Giustiniano 17—23; Justinian the Catholic legislator: Biondi (1936); Justinian as tyrant:
Honore (1978) ch. 1.

32 See Barber (1990); the lost Chalke mosaic is described by Procop. Buildings 1.10.16— 19; for the
Chalke see Mango (1959).

33 Marcell. Chron. s.a., with Croke (1995) 124; Chron. Pasch. 617; Bagnall et al.. Consuls 590—1.

34 On this see Cameron and Schauer (1982).

35 Const. Haec and Summa , Corp. Iur. Civ. 11.1— 3. The Code was revised and reissued in 5 34: Chron.
Pasch. 633—4; Const. Cordi. Corp. Iur. Civ. 11.4.

36 Const. Deo auctore , ibid. 1, Dig. 8 (= CJ 1.17.1); Tanta, ibid. 13—14 (= CJ 1.17.2).

37 Institutes'. Const. Imperatoriam , Corp. Iur. Civ. 1, Inst, xxi); legal education: Const. Omnem, ibid. Dig.
10—12.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

C/3 o

[A] 10°W

50°E/ \ h \

Map 2 Justinian’s empire in 565

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s early years (527—32)

of the credit must go to Justinian’s quaestor, Tribonian, of whose learning
both Procopius and John Lydus write with respect, though the former, typ-
ically, also accuses him of being avaricious and a flatterer. 38 Tribonian held
the post of quaestor sacri palatii twice, being dismissed by Justinian during
the Nika revolt in order to pacify the crowd, but later reinstated. The great
compilations were all issued in Latin, but, like John Lydus, Tribonian could
function in both Latin and Greek, and Justinian’s later laws, known as
Novels, because new, were issued mainly in Greek. 39

Justinian’s activity as codifier of imperial Roman law was of immense
importance in its later transmission and adoption in western Europe. But
he was also an energetic legislator himself — indeed, restless innovation is
one of Procopius’ charges against him. Vehement against homosexuals, his
legislation on family matters gives more rights to mothers and recognizes
women as being in need of protection, also allowing them to initiate
divorce, even if on restricted grounds. 41 ’ Justinian was severe in his meas-
ures against pagans, and indeed all who deviated from the orthodox norm.
Pagans, heretics, Manichaeans, Samaritans and Jews were the targets of a
series of laws beginning very early in his reign; property and other rights
were severely curtailed; Manichaeans and renegade Christians were liable
to death; pagans were forbidden to teach, and ordered to convert on pain
of exile and confiscation of property. 41 A harsh law directed against the
Samaritans led in a.d. 529 to the first of two serious revolts which broke
out during Justinian’s reign, both put down amid much bloodshed. 42
Among those singled out for investigation as a pagan was the patrician
Phocas, who as praetorian prefect was later in charge of the construction
of St Sophia and who is praised for his integrity by John Lydus. 43

Something of the milieu shared by many of those who came under attack
now and later in the reign can be sensed from an anonymous dialogue on
political knowledge preserved in palimpsest, in which the speakers are a
certain Menas, patricius, and Thomas, referendarius ; 44 like John Lydus, the
author uses Platonic categories to put forward a critique of contemporary
monarchy. The legislation forbidding pagans to teach effectively put an end
to the existence of the Academy at Athens, where Platonic philosophy had

38 Procop. Wars 1.24.16, with 1.25.2, SH 13.12; Joh. Lyd. DeMag. 111.20; for Tribonian, see PLRE in,
s.v. Tribonianus 1; Honore (1978), especially ch. 2.

39 The Novels on ecclesiastical and religious matters were soon collected and issued together with
collections of church canons: van der Wal and Stolte (1994).

40 Beaucamp (1990, 1992). Justinian’s laws: Malal. 430.12—17; 436.3—16; 437.3—18; 439.8—440.13.
Procop. SH gives much detailed information, even if from a hostile point of view.

41 Stein, Bas-Empire n. 370— 5 ; Pertusi (1 978) 1 85—7; Lemerle, Byzantine Humanism 73—9; for Justinian’s
measures against Samaritans and Jews see Rabello (1987).

42 Procop. R3zrei.i3.io; Malal. 445.19-447.21; Chron. Pasch. 619, with Whitby and Whitby (1989) 111

n.; second Samaritan revolt (5 5 5): Malal. 487; not mentioned in Procop. Buildings , see Cameron, Procopius
92. 43 See Maas,y<^w Lydus 78—82; Phocas committed suicide after a similar purge in 546, ibid. 71.

44 Ed. Mazzucchi (1982); cf. Phot. Bibl. cod. 37.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

70 3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

been taught for a thousand years. Fifty years later, Agathias told a romantic
story of the flight of seven Athenian philosophers, including Damascius,
the head of the school, to seek a philosopher king in Persia; disappointed
in the young Ivhusro I, they nevertheless secured special treatment under
the terms of the treaty of 5 3 1 between Byzantium and Persia and were able
to return to Byzantine territory. Simplicius, at least, continued to write
important commentaries on Aristotle, possibly establishing himself at
Harran (Carrhae) in Mesopotamia; but organized philosophical teaching at
Athens had come to an end. 45

At the same time as initiating these measures against non-orthodox
minorities, Justinian built churches and secular buildings 46 and involved
himself in religious affairs. The rededication between 524 and 527 of the
massive and ostentatious church of St Polyeuktos by the patrician Anicia
Juliana, daughter of the western emperor Olybrius ( Anth . Pal. 1.10), had
clearly rankled with him, and, while on a far smaller scale, the domed
octagon-in-square church of Sts Sergius and Bacchus (a.d. 527—36), built
alongside Justinian’s basilica of Sts Peter and Paul in the palace of
Hormisdas, and with a long inscription honouring himself and Theodora,
pointed forward to the innovative masterpiece which St Sophia was soon
to represent. 47 In 5 32—3 public disputations were held under imperial aus-
pices between Chalcedonians and Monophysites in the palace of
Hormisdas, and it was also here that Theodora sheltered Monophysite
monks and clergy until her death in 548.

As in religious matters, so in matters of foreign policy and external rela-
tions, Justinian was faced with die need to perform a balancing act.
Mundo achieved a success against Goths and Bulgars already threatening
Thrace in 529—30 and claimed a victory procession. 48 In the east, Justinian
continued to attempt by a mixture of diplomacy and mission to create a
strategic buffer between the rival states of Byzantium and Persia, extend-
ing from Transcaucasia and the Caucasus in the north to Ethiopia/Axum
in the south — a task complicated by the religious divide between
Constantinople and some of the churches in this large area. 49 In the war
against Persia which occupied the years 528—3 1 the Byzantines had con-
siderable difficulty in holding their own, despite die favourable light in
which the activities of Belisarius are presented by Procopius, who was

45 Malal. Chron. 451; Agathias, Hist. 11.23— 31. On Simplicius and Harran see Tardieu (1990); on the
closing of the Academy: Chuvin, Chronicle 135—41.

46 For the latter, see, besides Procopius’ Buildings , Chron. Pasch. 618.

47 The basilical church of St Polyeuktos (Sara$hane), with its elaborately carved capitals, was one of

the most lavish and influential of early Byzantine churches: see Harrison (1989); Sts Sergius and
Bacchus: Mango (1972), (1975); Rodley (1994) 69—71. 48 Marcell. Chron. s.a.

49 Fowden, Empire to Commonwealth ch. 5; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.296—305; the range of Justinian’s pol-
icies in the east is shown clearly in Malal. 427—36. For a good statement of some of these problems see
Brock (1995), and see p. 79 below, n. 100.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s early years (527—32) 71

present with him; 50 the latter’s account shows little interest in the attempts
of Justin I and Justinian to strengthen Byzantine military and diplomatic
interests in the east. 51 The terms of the ‘eternal’ peace concluded in the
autumn of 532 and pushed through by Kavadh’s son and successor,
Khusro I, nullified whatever had been gained by the Romans while at the
same time imposing on them a payment of 1 1 ,000 pounds of gold; it was
under this treaty that the Athenian philosophers were granted safe
return. 52

In January of the same year Justinian had faced the most serious crisis
of his reign, in the so-called Nika (‘Victory’) revolt, so named after the ral-
lying-cry of the rioters. 5 ’ The trouble began at the chariot races in the
Hippodrome on 1 3 January, and its immediate cause was the mishandling
by the city prefect of the execution of Blue and Green malefactors. During
13 and 14 January the praetorium of the city prefect, the seating in the
Hippodrome and parts of the portico as far as the baths of Zeuxippos
were destroyed by fire. The damage soon extended to the Chalke entrance
to the imperial palace, the portico of the scholae, the senate house and
Augustaion, and the church of St Sophia, and thus to the ceremonial heart
of Constantinople. According to Procopius, Justinian would have turned
to flight and was only restrained by the proud and defiant words of
Theodora: ‘Empire is a fair winding sheet.’ 54 The Blue and Green factions
chanted slogans and demanded the removal of Justinian’s ministers, includ-
ing the praetorian prefect John the Cappadocian, Tribonian the quaestor and
the city prefect Eudaimon. But the rioting continued after the emperor had
complied with these demands and went on for some days even after
Belisarius had been sent into the Hippodrome to put it down with force;
more of the city was destroyed in the ensuing violence between rioters and
soldiers. Justinian himself appeared to the people in the Hippodrome on
Sunday, 1 8 January; some rioters were won over by bribery, but others were
inflamed into an attempt to crown the patrician Hypatius in his stead. At
last Justinian was able to stage a counter-coup with his loyal supporters,
including Belisarius and the eunuch Narses the cubicularius and spatharius , 55

50 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.283—93; Lazica; Malal. 427.1— 13; on the Persian war the narrative of Malalas,
perhaps based on reports of the magister Hermogenes, provides a corrective to the narrative in
Procopius, Wars. 51 See Shahid (1995) 1.1, 139— 143. 52 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.294— 95.

53 Differing accounts are given in the sources: Procop. Wars 11.24, with SH 12.12 and Buildings i.2of.,
attributes the riots to political factors, especially dislike of Justinian’s ministers and his attacks on the
senate, or to the excitability of the factions or ‘the rabble’; Marcell. Chron. s.a. 5 32 blames an attempt
on the throne by the nephews of Anastasius; further accounts in Malal. 473—7; Chron. Pasch. 620—9,
based on Malalas, with lacuna at the start of the account (detailed discussion in Whitby and Whitby
(1989) 112—27; see also Croke (1995) 125—6); Theophanes, Chron. pp. 181—3 de Boor, also based on
Malalas, but less reliably. See Bury (1897); Stein, Bas-Empire 11.449—56; Cameron, Alan (1976) 278—80;
PERE hi, s.v. Calapodius 1 ; Greatrex (1994).

54 Wars 1.24.3 3 — 7? see Cameron, Procopius 69, pointing out the literary tone of the speech.

55 PERE hi, s.v. Narses 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 2

3 . JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

and managed with difficulty to break into the imperial box, seizing
Hypatius and the patrician Pompeius, who were executed on the next day,
19 January. Many thousands of people were killed in the fray. 56

It is difficult to establish either the chronology of the rioting or the
reasons for it. Procopius ascribes it in the main to the irrationality of the
Blues and Greens, though admitting that the people had real grievances and
that the senators were divided. 57 The ‘revolt’ must indeed be seen in the
context of the high level of urban violence that characterized the cities of
the eastern empire in the early sixth century; 58 but its effects were far more
serious than most, and the call for the removal of unpopular ministers was
to be a recurring feature of the reign. The career and eventual fall of John
the Cappadocian, in particular, the bad effects of whose rule John Lydus
catalogues in relation to his own provincial region, 59 are treated extensively
by Procopius as a major element in the network of power and intrigue
which he sees as characteristic of Justinian’s rule. 60 Understandably,
Justinian himself claimed the suppression of the Nika revolt as a major
victory, issuing a public announcement in the course of which he promised
to make good all the damage that had been done.

III. ST SOPHIA, THE ‘RECONQUEST’ AND THE MIDDLE YEARS

is- 5 3 2 - 54 )

The Nika revolt not only made peace with Persia even more desirable but
also provided the need and the opportunity to rebuild St Sophia on a grander
scale than before. Described in detail by Procopius ( Buildings 1. 1.20— 77) and
again on the restoration of the dome in January 5 63 in a lengthy verse enco-
mium by the poet Paul the Silentiary, 61 Justinian’s ‘Great Church’ remains
extraordinary today for its size, its innovative design and, even though most
of its internal fittings have long since disappeared, for the interplay of its
coloured marbles and the light of its many windows (Fig. 34, p. 904 below).
Work began on the new church almost at once and it was dedicated on 27
December 537. Again Justinian was well served by those he had put in charge
of the task, this time the architects Anthemius of Tralles and Isidore of
Miletus. Justinian’s great building, together with the square situated between
St Sophia and the palace, and known as the Augustaion, where an equestrian
statue of Justinian himself (now lost) was erected, the huge Basilica cistern
and the Chalke entrance to the imperial palace (see above) formed an impres-
sive imperial centre for the city, whose impact can still be felt today.

56 35,000: Chron. Pasch. 627; 30,000: Procop. U%rsi. 24.54; 50,000: Joh. Lyd. DeMag. 111.70; see Whitby
and Whitby (1989) 125, n. 366.

57 See Cameron, Procopius 166—7; analysis of the sources in Bury (1897), and see Greatrex (1998).

58 Cameron, Mediterranean World 1 71—4. 59 DeMag. 111.58, 61. 60 Cameron, Procopius 69—70.

61 H. Soph. ed. Friedlander; see Whitby, Mary (1985); Magdalino and Macrides (1988). Cf. also the

much later Narratio de S. Sophia ed. Preger, with Dagron (1 984) 1 91— 3 14. The church: Mainstone (1 988).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ST SOPHIA AND THE ‘RECONQUEST’ ( c . 532—54)

Equally active in religious affairs, the emperor was anxious to find a doc-
trinal formula that could reconcile east with west, and in 5 3 3 he issued a
lengthy decree, for which he later obtained papal approval, affirming
Chalcedon while at the same time seeking to meet Monophysite concerns. 62
Meanwhile it was believed that Theodora was seeking to promote
Monophysite interests — for instance, in achieving the appointments of
Anthimus and Theodosius as patriarchs of Constantinople and Alexandria
in 535, and in engineering a visit to the capital by Severus of Antioch and
lodging him in her own palace. Procopius was not the only one who sus-
pected, rightly or wrongly (SH 10. 1 3 f.) , that the emperor and empress fol-
lowed opposing religious policies in order to divide and rule. 63 However,
Justinian was soon persuaded by a visit from pope Agapitus (5 36) to
remove Anthimus and Severus alike, deposing Theodosius also in 537.

Long before the completion of St Sophia in a.d. 537, and indeed very
shortly after the Nika revolt, the emperor had launched the first stage in the
enterprise for which he is probably best known, the so-called ‘reconquest’ of
the west. The scheme may have developed in stages, the first being the
despatch of Belisarius against Vandal Africa in the summer of 533, with
1 5 ,000 troops in addition to bucellarii. According to Procopius, many were
doubtful of the prospects of success, but the emperor’s determination was
increased by a vision conveniently vouchsafed to one of his bishops ( Wars
in. 10. 1— 21). Procopius took partin this expedition himself in the entourage
of Belisarius’ wife Antonina. Having sailed via Sicily, the fleet landed on the
coast of Byzacena, and the expedition met with extraordinary success,
defeating the Vandal army at Ad Decimum and entering Carthage, where
Belisarius occupied the palace and took possession of the throne of the
Vandal king Gelimer on 14 September. He was rewarded with the excep-
tional honour of a triumph in Constantinople in 534, during which he
marched into the Hippodrome at the head of a procession of Vandal pris-
oners and spoils and with Gelimer himself walking in chains. The spoils
included the treasures originally taken by Titus from the Temple at Jerusalem
in the Jewish war and captured from Rome by the Vandal king Geiseric.
Belisarius presented all this to Justinian and Theodora in state as they occu-
pied the imperial box in the Hippodrome, only two years after the scenes of
carnage which had taken place there during the Nika revolt, while the noble
Gelimer neither wept nor lamented, but only repeated the verse from the
Book of Ecclesiastes: ‘Vanity of vanities, all is vanity.’ 64 This great occasion
was echoed soon afterwards when on 1 January 535 Belisarius celebrated his

62 CJ i.i.6; cf. Amelotti and Zingale (1977) 31—5; the decree is also preserved with some differences
in Chron. Pasch. 630—3.

63 Cf. Evagr. HE iv.io, 30, 32; Zonaras, Epit. xiv.6, 9; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.377—86.

64 Procop. Wars iv.9.1— 12, see PLRE m, s.v. Belisarius, 193; Marcell. Chron. s.a. 534, the end of the
Chronicle , with Croke (1995) 126—7; McCormick, Eternal Victory 125—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

consulship by leading Vandal captives in another triumphal procession and
distributing Vandal spoils. 65

The ease of the success over the Vandals inspired further initiatives. In
5 35 Belisarius was again despatched to the west, this time to Italy; in this
case, however, reconquest was to prove a far more difficult and lengthy
business. The conquest of Sicily was the first and easy step, and Belisarius
was able to celebrate the ending of his consular year there with yet another
procession at Syracuse. 66 Interrupted by a diversion to Africa to put down
a serious military revolt which had broken out there, Belisarius proceeded
on Justinian’s orders to invade Italy and make war on the Goths. Naples fell
to him in 5 36 and he entered Rome on 9 December in the same year, 67 pre-
paring the city for a siege by Vitigis and the Goths, which began early in
5 3 7 and lasted for over a year.

From now on, problems became apparent: reinforcements were
urgently needed; Belisarius became involved in necessary dealings with the
Roman church, replacing pope Silverius with Vigilius; and he had to resort
to diversionary ploys in order to allow the passage into the city of army pay
sent from Constantinople. The siege ended after a year, in March 538, when
the Goths too ran short of provisions and heard that Ariminum had fallen
and that Byzantine troops were threatening Ravenna; however, Belisarius
and Narses (recently arrived with a new army) together foiled the Gothic
attempt to recapture Ariminum. Division between Belisarius and Narses
led to a Gothic entry into Milan and the massacre of its male citizens early
in 5 39, 68 and Narses was recalled on Belisarius’ request. But Justinian’s
uncertainty undermined Belisarius’ attempts to achieve total victory. In 5 40
the Goths of Ravenna, discontented with Vitigis and unwilling to make a
treaty with Justinian as the latter’s envoys proposed, invited Belisarius to
become emperor of the west; his loyal refusal seems to have been a turning-
point for the historian Procopius, who became increasingly critical of him
thereafter. 69 Belisarius was able to carry the other Roman generals with
him, enter Ravenna and place Vitigis under guard (540), but the emperor,
whether influenced by Belisarius’ detractors or because he wanted to send
him to Persia, now recalled him to Constantinople.

The return of Belisarius with Vitigis and his wife and the Gothic treas-
ures should have been a great moment in the reign, but this time the general
was denied the glory of a triumph, and spent the winter in Constantinople
as a private citizen. 7 " His career illustrates the uncertainties of Justinian’s
conduct of the wars in both east and west. Though Belisarius seemed to

65 Procop. Wars iv.9.1 5— 16.

66 Procop. Wars v. 5. 17— 19; there is also a fairly detailed account of the Gothic war in the continua-
tion of Marcellinus’ Chronicle , on which see also the notes by Croke (1995).

67 Wars iv. 1 5; v.7. 26; see PLRE 111.196. 68 Warsvi.zz.i.

69 Wars vi. 29. 1 7— 18; for the change in Procopius’ view see Cameron, Procopius 189; Procopius and
Antonina were also present at these events. 70 PLRE 111.207—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ST SOPHIA AND THE ‘RECONQUEST’ ( c . 532—54) 75

have snatched victory in Italy despite the emperor’s readiness to make
terms with the Goths, his success was achieved only at the price of
Justinian’s suspicion. Belisarius was now sent to the east, hostilities having
been renewed by Khusro I, and had some success there, but was again
recalled in winter 541—2 and, despite further success against Khusro in 542,
he came under suspicion at the end of this year and (according to
Procopius) was dismissed and his property seized through the agency of
Theodora. 71 The second Persian war of the 540s coincided with the
onslaught of plague in the Byzantine east, and lack of Byzantine manpower
exposed the cities of Mesopotamia and led them to make ignominious and
expensive treaties of surrender to the Persians, while Byzantine achieve-
ments were inglorious at best. 72 Procopius’ narrative reveals that the
Byzantine presence in the east was dangerously weak. Set battles were
avoided, and Khusro was able to extort treasure from the cities almost at
will. Furthermore, Belisarius’ expedition followed the sack of Antioch in
540, one of the worst disasters that occurred in Justinian’s reign. 7 ’ Similar
conditions prevailed in Italy when Belisarius returned there on his second
expedition in 544; this was made far more difficult than the first through
the lack of necessary troops and resources; it is recounted unsympatheti-
cally by Procopius. 74 Belisarius had a difficult time, and even when he suc-
ceeded in reoccupying Rome (547), which had fallen to Goths under Totila
after a terrible siege, he had to keep writing to Justinian for reinforce-
ments, and sent Antonina to Constantinople on the same mission in 548.
Procopius did not accompany him on this expedition, and describes it as
ignominious for Belisarius. 75 The latter was recalled again in 549, possibly
through the intervention of his wife, after the death of Theodora in 548,
and was sent neither to the east nor back to Italy when the newly appointed
Germanus died in 550.

It is difficult to gauge the truth about Justinian’s military policies from
the tendentious and personalized account given by Procopius; indeed,
Evagrius’ version has a rather different emphasis. In the event, it was not
Belisarius who ended the long and difficult Italian war but his rival Narses,
with victories at Busta Gallorum and Mons Lactarius in which, respectively,
the Gothic leaders Totila and Teias were killed (5 5 2). 76 Nevertheless, the
war in Italy was not yet over, for Narses had still to recover Cumae and the
cities of Etruria, and to face the army of Franks and Alamanni under
Butilinus and Leutharis which had invaded Italy from the north; the siege
of Cumae lasted a year, that of Luca three months. Narses spent the winter
of 5 5 3—4 in Ravenna and Rome, and defeated Butilinus and the Franks,
who had a much larger army, near the river Casilinum in the vicinity of

71 Wars 11. 19.49; cf. SH 2.21—5; 4- I 3~ T 7 ; see PLRE 111.21 1. 72 See Cameron, Procopius 1 59— 65.

73 Procop. Wars 11.10.4. 74 PLRE m.zii— 16, see especially Warsv\i. 35.1, SH 4.42— 5, 5.1— 3.

75 See Cameron, Procopius 189. 76 Procop. Wars vm.32.6— 21; 35.16— 32.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

76 3 - JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

Capua in the summer of 5 5 4. 71 Justinian’s so-called Pragmatic Sanction of
13 August 554, regulating matters in Italy, was addressed to Narses; the
latter was still in Italy when pope Vigilius died while en route from
Constantinople (5 5 5), and present at the consecration of his successor
Pelagius (April 556).

Though technically it resulted in victory for Justinian and certainly
achieved its aim of defeating the Goths, the long war in Italy destroyed the
very structures it had sought to rescue. 78 Procopius movingly describes the
sufferings of the Roman aristocrats during the Gothic war; among them
was Rusticiana, the widow of Boethius, who with other Roman ladies was
reduced to begging for food during the siege of the city in 546, and was
rescued only by the intervention of Totila. 79 A number of the Italian aris-
tocrats went to the east in the 540s, where they put pressure on the court
as to the conduct of the final stages of the war, and contributed to a circle
of Latin letters in Constantinople. For the Byzantines, the Gothic war had
also been difficult: the attitude of the Romans in Italy was by no means
straightforwardly pro-Byzantine, and the Byzantine armies were often out-
numbered by those fielded by the Goths, while personal rivalries compli-
cated relations between the commanders in Italy and the government in
Constantinople. 80

During the 540s Justinian had to juggle the needs of the Italian front
against those caused by renewed hostilities in the east, while simultaneously
attempting a religious policy that produced as many anatagonisms as it
hoped to cure. Nor had the situation in Africa after the early victories been
straightforward: the conquest required a heavy investment of men and
resources, and the adverse effects first of mutiny in the Byzantine army and
then of Berber hostilities were only made good with difficulty by John
Troglita in 546—9, as Procopius admits. By the end of the sixth century
Africa seems to have recovered some of its old prosperity, but Corippus’
panegyric on the accession of Justin II in 565 laments the bad state of
affairs there, which John’s campaigns had not in themselves been enough
to reverse. 81

Justinian’s difficulties were increased by a severe outbreak of bubonic
plague, beginning in Egypt late in 541 and spreading in the following year
to the capital and the eastern provinces, from where it also passed to the
west. Repeated outbreaks were still being felt in places as far apart as Syria
and Britain in the seventh century, and the church historian Evagrius, a

77 These events are told by Agathias, Histories , Procopius’ narrative having ended with winter 5 5 3—4;
see PLRE 111, s.v. Narses 1, 920—2, with Cameron, Averil (1970).

78 See ch. 19 (Humphries), pp. 544—: 8 below. 79 Wars vn.20.27f., with Cameron, Procopius 192.

80 For these issues see Thompson (1982) chs. 5 and 6; Moorhead (1983).

81 Wars viii. 1 7.22, cf. the exaggeratedly hostile picture at SH 18.4b John Troglita’s campaigns are
described in the Iohannis , eight books of Latin hexameters by Corippus (ed. Goodyear and Diggle,
1970); see also Cor. In laudern lustini , Pan. Anast. 37. See further ch. 20, p. 5 52 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ST SOPHIA AND THE ‘RECONQUEST’ ( c . 532—54) 77

native of Antioch, vividly describes their effects on different generations of
his own family (HE iv.29). Procopius has left a description of the plague’s
impact in Constantinople (Wars n.22f.) which remains moving and credible
even when allowance is made for literary allusions to the famous plague
description in Thucydides, and the Syriac writer John of Ephesus has
recorded the devastation it caused in rural Asia Minor. 82 It is of course dan-
gerous to rely on impressionistic accounts in literary sources, and the out-
breaks have left few clear traces in the archaeological record in the east.
However, Justinian’s legislation immediately after the outbreak in the
capital demonstrates the government’s concern for the effect on revenues
when so many tax-payers were dying; prices rose, and had to be controlled
by a law of 544. 80 The emperor fell ill himself, but foiled those who were
plotting about the succession by recovering. There were other disasters,
notably earthquakes, one of which destroyed the famous law school at
Berytus, 84 and in June 548 the empress Theodora died; 85 her death was a
severe blow to her husband, who never remarried.

Theodora’s influence, like that of Justinian’s favourite ministers, was
clearly a major factor in the internal politics of the reign. While
Monophysites had good reason to be grateful for her support and cast her
in the role of repentant sinner turned virtuous protectress, Procopius saw
her as an unprincipled schemer who would stop at little to advance her
favourites. Theodora remained conscious of her powers of sexual attraction;
she took care of herself well and knew how to exploit her beauty. 86
According to Procopius, she attended meetings of the imperial consistory
and effectively ruled in partnership with her husband; the two together were
like a pair of bloodthirsty demons or furies in human form such as one can
read about in the ancient poets. This portrayal, however, which manifestly
depends on misogynistic prejudice, may also arise from personal resent-
ment. 87 It is clear enough that Theodora protected Monophysite monks and
clergy, though apparently with Justinian’s knowledge, for he would also join
her in personal visits to and discussions with those who had taken refuge in
the palace. But Procopius also claims that she brought about the downfall of
her enemies, chief among them Justinian’s minister John the Cappadocian,
who had been quickly reinstated after his dismissal from the praetorian pre-
fecture during the Nika revolt; Procopius, John Lydus and the church histo-
rian Zachariah of Mytilene are all highly critical of his administration, but it
was Theodora, Procopius claims, who brought about John’s fall in a . d . 5 41 . 88
Justinian was reluctant to carry the policy through, and despite enforced
ordination, John was able to recover some of his property and apparently to

82 Full references: Stein, Bas-Empire 11.75 8—6 1 ; Allen (1 979); see Durliat (1989) for a minimizing view,
and against this, Whitby (1995). 83 Edict 7, pref.; Nov. 122. 84 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.756—8.

85 PLRE in. 1241. 86 Procop. SH 10. 1 if., 1 5. 6f. 87 SH 12. 14; see Cameron, Procopius

88 PERE 111.627—35, s.v. Ioannes 1 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 «

3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

continue scheming; thus Theodora was not fully successful, and after her
death Justinian brought John back from exile. Another key figure in the reign
was the Syrian Peter Barsymes, twice comes sacrarum largitionum and twice prae-
torian prefect; unlike John, Peter was protected by the empress, who shortly
before her death prevailed on Justinian to reappoint him to office after he
had removed him. 89 Tribonian, quaestor sacri palatii and the master mind
behind Justinian’s legal codification, himself fell during the Nika revolt, only
to be subsequently restored; unlike John the Cappadocian and Peter
Barsymes, he does not seem to have been either a particular favourite or a
victim of Theodora, but like them he was the object of critical attack, includ-
ing such stock abuse as charges of paganism. 911

Procopius is by no means the only hostile witness to Justinian’s reign. In
John Lydus’ work on Roman magistracies, he contrives to be critical of
Justinian while superficially praising him. 91 Justinian posed as a restorer of
tradition, and at one level these criticisms are the reactions of conservatives
disappointed that the emperor had not been successful in that aim. But at
a deeper level, the apparent contradictions in contemporary political
comment, and in artistic and literary expression, 92 are indicative of a mis-
match between actual social and economic change and the persistence of
an administrative structure still recognizably similar to that established in
the fourth century. In the face of these internal tensions and the impact of
external threats and increased military demands, Justinian himself adopted
a rhetoric of strong government,. 9 ’ but his critics attacked him from an
even more conservative and traditionalist stance. Procopius paints a picture
in the Secret History of a deliberate onslaught on the wealth of the senato-
rial class, fuelled by greed and combined with religious bigotry and caprice.
He further viewed the emperor’s legislative activity, which seems to have
been aimed predominantly at checking abuses and raising revenue, 94 as a
sign of restless meddling, and was equally ready to blame ‘the rabble’ for
the instability which was a structural feature of urban life in the sixth
century. 9 ’ The best Procopius could do by the early 5 50s in summing up the
results of the African campaigns was to ascribe them to Justinian’s desire
for bloodshed and human slaughter. 96 Much of the contemporary and later
criticism of Justinian, by secular and ecclesiastical historians alike, rests on
traditional accusations against a ‘bad’ emperor who is not seen to be
sufficiently amenable to the aspirations and wishes of the elite. 97

89 PLRE m.999— 1002, s.v. Petrus 9.

90 PLRE m.1335— 9, s.v. Tribonianus 1 ; Justinian’s ministers: Stein, Bas-Empire 11.433— 9, 463— i 83,

761—9. 91 Maas, John Lydus 83—96. 92 Cameron, Procopius 19—32; Carile (1978).

93 For Justinian as a ruthless autocrat see Honore (1978) 1—39. 94 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.437— 49 -

95 Cameron, Mediterranean World 171— 5; Justinian is blamed for using the factions to foment trouble
by Evagr. HE v.32, as well as by Procopius.

96 SH 18; signs of this critique in the later parts of the Wars'. Cameron, Procopius 186.

97 See Allen, Evagrius 194—6, on Evagr. HE iv.30 and Zonaras, Epit. xiv.6.1— 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THREE CHAPTERS AND THE FIFTH OECUMENICAL COUNCIL 79

IV. RELIGIOUS policy: THE THREE CHAPTERS AND THE FIFTH
OECUMENICAL COUNCIL

During the 540s Justinian continued his attempts to keep the eastern and
western churches in balance, a task now complicated by the fact that on the
one hand North Africa had been officially restored to the empire and its
church hierarchy released from the Arian rule of the Vandals, while on the
other the fluctuating fortunes of the war against the Goths in Italy put new
problems in the way of relations between Constantinople and the papacy
at the same time as it added urgency to Justinian’s desire for union.
Religious policy was still complicated by the apparently conflicting aims of
Justinian and Theodora. Monophysite ordinations were already being per-
formed by John of Telia, and a Monophysite monk from Amida, later to
be created titular bishop of Ephesus and well known as the Syriac church
historian John of Ephesus, was allowed to proselytize widely in Asia Minor;
he claimed 80,000 conversions between 535 and the end of the reign, as
well as taking credit for ninety-six churches and twelve monasteries. 98 John
of Telia died in prison in 538, just before Severus.

In 542 Theodora responded to a request for clergy from the Ghassanid
allies of Byzantium, who were Monophysite in sympathy, and Justinian was
persuaded to allow the consecration of two ‘flying bishops’, Theodore as
bishop of the nomadic Ghassanids, and Jacob Bar’Addai (Baradaeus) as
titular bishop of Edessa." Of these, Theodore, also a Monophysite, had
come from a monastery in Constantinople; their activity was spread all over
the east, and John of Ephesus claims that Jacob ordained more than 100,000
clergy, as well as nearly thirty bishops. Whether this is true or not, the long-
term effects were important: the ordinations gave the Monophysites not
only a rival identity but also a rival ecclesiastical structure in the east, and
Jacob’s influence extended to the consecration of a Monophysite patriarch
of Antioch. While the initiative helped to retain the loyalty of the
Ghassanids, whose military support was essential for the defence of the
east, it made religious unity in the empire even harder to achieve.

As before, Justinian continued to search for a formula which could bring
east and west together. 100 He now evolved a policy which he was to push
through with great determination, but which was to be no more successful
in the longer term than his earlier efforts. In a long edict published in 5 42—3
he had taken sides with pope Pelagius in a dispute which was proving

98 The numbers are variously given by John himself: Mitchell, Anatolia ii.i 1 8—19.

99 See Harvey, Asceticism and Society in Crisis 105—6; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.624—2; Shahid (1995) 1.2,
75 5 — 9 2 -

100 For what follows see ch. 27, p. 81 1 below; there is an authoritative treatment of Justinian’s relig-
ious policy in Grillmeier, Christ in the Christian Tradition 11.2, and of doctrinal division in the east in the
sixth century in ibid. 11.4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3. JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

deeply divisive in Palestine, and formally condemned Origen and
Origenism. Immediately afterwards he published an edict known as the
Three Chapters which formally condemned certain writings by the fifth-
century theologians Theodore of Mopsuestia, Theodoret of Cyrrhus and
Ibas of Edessa which were held to be Nestorian. 1111 The emperor hoped
thereby to conciliate the Monophysites and hold ecclesiastical interests in
balance but only found himself in deeper trouble. The Monophysites were
unimpressed, and the edict aroused passionate opposition among Latin-
speaking Catholics in North Africa and Italy, who considered that it went
too far in a Monophysite direction. Holding a balance was next to impos-
sible: the African Junillus, for instance, who had recently been appointed
imperial quaestor ; was himself the translator and adapter of a work clearly
inspired by Theodore of Mopsuestia. The imperial decision incensed the
African church, and bishop Facundus of Hermiane in Byzacena at once
started work on a treatise in twelve books defending the authorities con-
demned in the edict. 102

Stung, the emperor summoned pope Vigilius to Constantinople and
pressurized him to accept. Vigilius arrived in Constantinople early in 5 47, 103
under equal pressure from the Roman and African clergy to refuse (the
deacon Ferrandus of Carthage had categorically denied the emperor’s right
to impose his own views in this way). At length Vigilius reluctantly acceded
to the edict in his Iudicatum of 548, but this document was forthwith
rejected in Dalmatia, Scythia and Gaul, 104 and provoked Vigilius’ formal
condemnation at a council held at Carthage in 5 50. Having been received
by the emperor with a great show of ecclesiastical pomp in 547, he now
found his name formally erased from the diptychs (formal lists) of ortho-
dox bishops. 105 Justinian next issued a summons to the recalcitrant African
bishops to come to Constantinople. When they arrived, Reparatus of
Carthage and others were deposed and exiled, and the rest kept under
arrest. Among the African bishops who took refuge at the church of St
Euphemia at Chalcedon, where Verecundus of Iunci died, was the chron-
icler Victor of Tunnuna. 106 There were also difficulties in the east, and the
patriarchs Menas of Constantinople, Zoilus of Alexandria, Ephraem of
Antioch and Peter of Jerusalem agreed to sign the edict only under the
greatest pressure.

Faced with such a level of unrest, the emperor determined to refer the
matter to a council of the whole church. Meanwhile, however, he himself

101 Capizzi, Giustiniano ch. 3; Stein, Bas-Empire 11.392— 5; 632—8.

102 Junillus, Instituta regrtlaria divinae tegis, PE lxviii.i 5—42; Facundus, Pro dejensione , ed. Clement and

Vander-Plaetse, CCSE 90 a, 1974, 1—398; see further O’Donnell (1979) 169!^; Cameron, Averil (1982)
46—8. 103 Procop. Wars vn. 1 6.1; Malal. 483.3— 5; Marcell. Cont. s.a.

104 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.638—46. 105 Malal. 484.1 1— 13; 485.4—7; cf. Theoph. Chron. 225.21—5.

106 Viet. Tunn. Chron. s.a. 551, 552.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THREE CHAPTERS AND THE FIFTH OECUMENICAL COUNCIL 8l

issued a second document of the same import as the first, 1 " 7 which so much
enraged Vigilius that notwithstanding his recent experience he decided to
oppose it formally. Imperial officers had already succeeded in forcing him
to leave his place of sanctuary at the church of Sts Peter and Paul, and now
troops would have dragged him with his supporters from the altar of the
church of St Euphemia, where he next sought sanctuary. Justinian sent a
high-level delegation, which included Belisarius, to guarantee Vigilius’
safety if he returned to the palace of Placidia, but the pope refused to leave
and succeeded in publicizing his ill-treament. 108 Before the council began,
the patriarch Menas of Constantinople died, and was quickly replaced, late
in 5 52, by Eutychius of Amasea, who had distinguished himself as a sup-
porter of Justinian’s policy, and who could be relied upon to guide the
council in the right way. 1 " 9

If the preliminaries made a sorry story, the council and its aftermath were
no better. The Fifth Oecumenical Council opened in Constantinople on 5
May 553, attended by 1 66 bishops, of whom only nine came from Illyria and
none from Italy outside Milan and Rome. 110 Eustochius, the patriarch of
Jerusalem, was not present, and, though he was still in the city, Vigilius
refused to attend, responding to delegations from the council with a docu-
ment of his own which led to the council’s removing his name from the dip-
tychs. At last, however, he gave way, and in February 5 54 published a second
Constitutum and was formally reconciled with the emperor and council. The
unfortunate Vigilius died on the way back to Rome in June 555.

While scrupulously refraining from attending the council in person,
Justinian had pushed his views through, but without achieving any of his
objectives. Pelagius, Vigilius’ successor, was resisted by his own bishops,
while the Illyrian opposition spread into north Italy; in the east the
Monophysites were not reconciled, and the church of Persia reaffirmed its
attachment to Nestorianism. 111 In seventh-century Spain, Isidore of Seville
effectively denied the authority of the council, which was thus remembered
as either illegitimate or a failure; only Eustratius the deacon, apologist for
the patriarch Eutychius on the latter’s death some three decades later, could
bring himself to praise it as a major achievement. The Italian church had
been alienated just as Italy itself had been officially ‘recovered’, while the
growing Monophysite self-identity in the east had received encouragement.

The events leading up to the council and its outcome were also felt
sharply in North Africa. Victor of Tunnuna, who shared the experiences

107 Known as the Exposiiio rectae fidei, ed. Schwartz (1939), 73—1 1 1 (Greek and Latin); cf. Chron. Pasch.,
636—84 (not translated by Whitby and Whitby (1989)). 108 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.649—50.

109 Evagr. HE iv.38, V. Eutych ., PG Lxxxvi.3. 2300, with Allen, Evagrius 203.

110 AGO iv. 1 ; numbers: Chrysos (1966); cf. Stein, Bas-Empire 11.654—69; Capizzi, Giustiniano 1 1 8—31;

Herrin, Formation of Christendom 119—25; Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 241— 5 . An account highly flattering
to Eutychius is given in Eustratius’ Fife of the patriarch Eutychius, ed. Laga 1994: see Cameron (1988),
and see also Evagr. HE iv.38. 111 See Guillaumont (1969/70) 54—62.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

of the African bishops summoned to Constantinople and effectively held
under arrest there, finished his sharply worded Chronicle in 565/6, a few
years after Liberatus of Carthage’s Breviarium. In effect, the African
bishops, who had traditionally looked to Rome but who may have allowed
themselves to nurture hopes that Belisarius’ ‘reconquest’ would allow a real
restoration of Catholicity, found themselves instead subjected to a new and
equally unwelcome domination. The late 540s, with the death of Theodora
in 548, were a difficult period for Justinian, and it was now that Procopius’
disappointment seems to have reached its height; the Secret History and the
highly critical seventh book of the Wars were both finished in 5 50— 1, as the
author witnessed the spectacle of an emperor apparently obsessed with
forcing his own dogmas on an unwilling church. He did not include the
Fifth Council when he updated the History of the Wars by adding an eighth
book in 5 5 3/4; it lay strictly outside his scope, but one may also imagine
that he found the subject distasteful.

Following a historiographical tradition whose origins can be traced back
to the Reformation, modern scholarship still devotes a good deal of atten-
tion to the question of whether Justinian can be termed ‘Caesaropapist’ —
that is, whether he can be seen as an emperor who controlled the church. 112
This debate has usually, however, been conducted from a western perspec-
tive, and the position in Byzantium was more complex than is suggested. 113
Justinian’s dealings with the church lay at one end of a wide spectrum of
differing kinds of negotiation. He was prepared to use force as well as
intimidation in his desire to achieve and maintain unity, but there was little
that was new about this, not even the degree to which he would go.

V. THE LAST DECADE (c. 554—65)

By now the great achievements of Justinian’s early years were proving
difficult to emulate or sustain. The Gothic war ended in a.d. 5 5 4 with the
settlement known as the Pragmatic Sanction (13 August 5 54), following a
similar ordinance issued to regulate affairs in North Africa some twenty
years earlier. 114 But the mood now was very different and no official cele-
bration followed. 115 The Pragmatic Sanction sought to turn back the clock
to the days before Ostrogothic rule, but the restoration of civil administra-
tion which it promised soon gave way to a military hierarchy. 116 By the late
sixth century the establishment of a Lombard kingdom had forced the
Byzantines back into pockets of influence centred round Ravenna, Rome

112 Against: Biondi (1936); Amelotti (1978); discussion: Capizzi, Giustiniano 151—64 (‘objective
Caesaropapism’). 113 See Dagron (1996), especially 290—322; Ducellier, E’Eglise by^antine.

114 Nov., app. 7; for the terms, Stein, Bas-Empire 11.613—22; Africa: CJ 1.27.

115 See ch. 19 (Humphries), p. 525 below, and cf. Wickham (1981) 26: ‘the wars devastated Italy . . .
The Goths disappeared as a nation.’ 116 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers , and ch. 19, p. 525 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE LAST DECADE (c. 554—65)

and Naples; again, the effects of war were severe . 117 A series of Greek
popes and a strong eastern monastic presence in Sicily and south Italy kept
religious and cultural ties with the east alive in the seventh century; but after
the Gothic war there was no long-standing Byzantine investment in Italy
such as happened in the case of North Africa.

The northern frontiers in the Balkans and Thrace came under attack in
the later part of the reign, and Justinian’s fortifications did not serve to keep
these raiders out, though they did preserve Roman control of the main
centres. In 5 50 Sclavenes crossed the Danube, not for the first time, reach-
ing the Adriatic coast and threatening Thessalonica. Justinian’s plans for
dealing with them, like his intentions for the final stages of the war in Italy,
were upset by the death of his cousin, the general Germanus, 118 recently
married to the Ostrogothic princess Matasuintha, and the Sclavenes
remained within Roman territory. The Balkans and the Danube area
received much attention in Justinian’s programme of fortification, causing
Procopius to make extravagant claims, 119 yet Kotrigurs were permitted to
settle in Thrace in the 5 50s and in 559 a dangerous invasionary force of
Kotrigurs and Sclavenes crossed the Danube, and eventually even threat-
ened Constantinople, undeterred by Justinian’s Long Walls. Agathias gives
a colourful account of the panic that set in and the emergency measures
which had to be taken. 12 " Palace guards, more used to ceremonial than to
fighting, were mobilized, and finally the aged Belisarius was summoned to
take charge. But despite an extraordinary success at the head of an army
allegedly consisting of peasants and civilians, he was once again slandered
and recalled, leaving the young Germanus, the son of Dorotheus, a fellow
countryman of the emperor, to defend the wall which protected the
Chersonese. In this task he had considerable success, but the Kotrigurs
retreated and returned Roman captives only after a large payment from the
emperor. 121 The threats from the north were to continue. The first Avar
embassy arrived in Constantinople in 5 5 8, and another in 5 6 1 ; their haughty
dismissal by Justin II was an ominous prelude to future danger. 122

Following the classic pattern of the last years of a great ruler, plots and
suspicion darkened Justinian’s final years. 12 ’ The dome of St Sophia was
cracked in an earthquake in 5 57 and, while under repair, partially collapsed
during further tremors in 5 5 8. In the following year it was rumoured that
the emperor had died; 124 the people’s agitation was successfully calmed, but

117 Wickham (1981) 64. 118 Procop. Wars vn.40.1— 9; cf. PLRE 11.507, s.v. Germanus 4.

119 Buildings 4.1. 14; 11.20. 120 Hist, v.i 1—20.

121 Ibid. 21—3; Agathias’ defence of Justinian’s subsidy policy, which his successor made a great show
of ending: v.24.1— 2.

122 Malal. 489.1 1— 12; Theoph. Chron. 232.6— 14. Justin II: Corippus, Laud. lust, m.i 51— 401, cf. Praef.
4—9; Men. Prot. fr. 8 Blockley; John Eph. HE vi.24.

123 See Malal. 493—5, supplemented by Theoph. Chron. 232-41.

124 Theoph. Chron. 234.20—235.15.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8 4

3- JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

a plot was suspected. In 560 Justinian had to order action against factional
violence in the Hippodrome and again in 5 6 1 his nephew and successor,
Justin the curopalatus , was able to put an end to rioting and arson by the fac-
tions in the centre of the city only with considerable difficulty. 125 The ded-
ication of the restored dome of St Sophia took place during the festival of
Christmas and Epiphany, a.d. 562—3; emperor and patriarch were lauded
together in Paul the Silentiary’s poem, and the people sang Psalm 23, but
the memory of the serious plot of 562, as a result of which Belisarius had
been stripped of his household and assets, was fresh in their minds. One
of those involved was Sergius, nephew of the Aetherius who was himself
to be executed for treason in the first months of the reign of Justin II. 126
Sergius was dragged from his place of sanctuary at the church of the
Theotokos at Blachernae and his information led to the arrest of two men,
one of whom was a retainer in Belisarius’ household who in turn informed
against his master. More disturbances took place in Justinian’s last year,
when both Blues and Greens engaged with imperial troops; after the
rioting had ended, members of the factions, especially the Greens, were
castrated, burned, impaled or dismembered. 127

Peace with Persia was brought during these years at a very high price.
Whereas the Romans could defeat enemies such as the Vandals and, even-
tually, the Goths, the Persians were different; it had been clear for three cen-
turies that the military strength of the two empires was evenly balanced,
and neither side expected to inflict permanent defeat on the other. War with
Persia was the reality of early Byzantine experience, and ceased only in 628
when a powerful counter-strike by Heraclius ended the Sasanian dynasty
on the very eve of the Arab conquest. In 561—2, however, the master of
offices, Peter the Patrician, met the Persian envoys at Dara and negotiated
a peace treaty whose terms are given in full by Menander Protector. 128 Both
empires were ready to negotiate, Byzantium after recent events in Lazica
and Armenia, and Persia in the light of developments in the north
Caucasus. The peace was made for fifty years; the Persians renounced all
claim to Lazica, while the Romans agreed to pay a heavy annual tribute con-
sisting of 30,000 gold nomismata, payment for the first seven years to be
due immediately. Most of the detailed provisions sought to regulate border
trade and communication. The peace did not last: it made no official pro-
vision for the treatment of the Christians of Persia, which had been a point
at issue between the two powers since the days of Constantine, this matter,
which continued to be a matter of tension, being dealt with separately.
Nevertheless, the negotiations were accompanied by great pomp and for-
mality, and the reception of the Persian ambassador at Constantinople a

125 Ibid. 235.26— 237.1; Malal. 490.16— 492.2. 126 Malal. 493.1— 495.5.

127 Malal. De Insid. fr. 51. 128 Fr. 6 Blockley, with notes: Stein, Bas-Empire 11.516—21.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE LAST DECADE (c. 554—65)

few years before is probably reflected in the protocol for such a diplomatic
visit still extant in the tenth-century Book of Ceremonies and taken from the
records of Peter the Patrician himself. 129

Like Agathias, Menander Protector describes Justinian in these years as
tired and growing feeble with age. 130 But he had not given up his passion
for theology, and one of his last actions was to depose the patriarch
Eutychius of Constantinople when the latter refused to support the
emperor’s desire for all bishops to subscribe to a decree confirming the
incorruptibility of the body of Christ; Anastasius of Antioch, who also
refused and convened a synod against the emperor’s decree at Antioch, was
also threatened with deposition. 131 For the first time Justinian had clearly
departed from the traditions of Chalcedon. Naturally, also, the move to
depose Eutychius was exploited by the latter’s personal enemies. 132 The
patriarch went into exile at Amasea and was replaced by John Scholasticus,
a canon lawyer and apocrisarius from Antioch, who was soon to prove highly
influential in bringing about the succession of Justin II.

Justinian died on 14 November 565, allegedly expressing on his death-
bed his wish for his nephewjustin to succeed him and his promise to those
of his associates who supported Justin that they would be rewarded and his
enemies punished. 1 ” The emperor lay in state in the palace, his bier covered
by a magnificent pall on which he was depicted in the symbolism of victory,
trampling the defeated Gelimer beneath his feet, flanked by the
personifications of Africa and Rome and by rows of conquered kings and
vanquished peoples. 134

125 Cameron (1987).

130 Menander fr. 5 Blockley; Corippus, In laudem Iustini 11.260—3; cf. Agathias, Hist. v. 14: ‘in his declin-
ing years when old age came upon him he seemed to have wearied of vigorous policies’ (trans. Frendo).

131 Evagr. HE iv 39— 40; Eustratius, V.Eutych., AG'LXXXvi.3.23 13—24 (both very hostile tojustinian);

Theoph. Chron. 240.24— 241.5. 132 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.685—8.

133 Corippus, In laudem Iustini iv.3 39—50, with notes of Cameron ad loc. and pp. 1 26, 130— 1 .

134 Corippus, In laudem Iustini 1.276—90, with notes; cf. in. 1—27 for the funeral. The triumphal scene
here described is classic, see McCormick, Eternal Victory, the pall has perished, but many embroidered
or woven textiles with figural decoration survive from the period.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 4

THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

MICHAEL WHITBY

I. JUSTIN II

Imperial succession

Despite his age and the conspiracies of his latter years, Justinian took no
steps to designate a successor. Whether he could not decide between the
merits of various relatives, or stubbornly preferred to allow the traditional
constituencies of senate, army and people to select a suitable candidate, is
unknown, but as a result the succession was presented to the man on the
spot, his nephew Justin, son of his sister Vigilantia and husband of Sophia,
the ambitious and competent niece of Theodora. Since at least the early
5 50s Justin had been curopalatus , a position of modest significance but
central to palace life, and had shown resolution in quelling faction rioting
in 562, but his career does not appear as distinguished as that of his main
rival within the extended imperial family, his cousin Justin, son of
Germanus, who had won victories in the Balkans and was currently serving
as maf,ster militum on the Danube. Justin the curopalatus, however, was in
Constantinople and was well supported: the comes excubitorum, Tiberius, was
a protege, and his presence in command of the imperial bodyguard indi-
cates that Justin had been planning ahead; other supporters included the
quaestor Anastasius, and the newly- appointed patriarch of Constantinople,
John Scholasticus, who had transmitted the prediction of Justin’s succes-
sion made by Symeon Stylites at Antioch, and who now performed the cor-
onation; Callinicus, a leading senator, invited Justin to accept the
succession, while his brother Marcellus and son-in-law Baduarius were
both patricians. Sophia, too, was a powerful lady and will have had her own
network of friends. 1

But no chances were taken. Before news of Justinian’s death could
spread, Justin was hurriedly crowned on the same day (14 November)
within the Great Palace so that the populace, which had rioted in 5 60 at a
rumour of Justinian’s demise, was presented with a fait accompli when Justin
entered the Hippodrome. Justin may also have feared that his cousin, Justin

1 For details on these individuals, see PLRE hi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN II

the general, might attract support. In 5 66 the latter was recalled from his
Danubian command and despatched to Alexandria, where he was mur-
dered, and in the same year two prominent senators, Addaeus, a former city
prefect, and Aetherius, curator of the palace of Antiochus, were executed
for alleged conspiracy. Imprecisions and distortions in the evidence make
it impossible to prove that there really were moves to topple Justin II,
perhaps in favour of his cousin, and it is significant that the closest con-
nections of Addaeus and Aetherius are with known supporters of Justin II
— namely, the quaestor Anastasius and the patriarch John; thus they might
have been removed as over-mighty kingmakers. 2

Whatever the reason, Justin was quick to consolidate his hold on power.
His son-in-law, Baduarius, replaced him as curopalatus, the post’s importance
now enhanced by Justin’s own career. Elaborate celebration of Justinian’s
funeral allowed Justin to demonstrate his closeness to his uncle, perhaps
providing scope for stories of a deathbed declaration in his favour, while
in other respects he emphasized the significance of the change in ruler. On
first entering the Hippodrome he won instant popularity by repaying out
of his own pocket compulsory loans to Justinian; the redeemed contracts
were joyfully burnt in a powerful display of imperial generosity. The eccle-
siastical turmoil of Justinian’s last months was also countered by an edict
that permitted most exiled bishops to return to their sees. Reception of
foreign embassies gave scope for further demonstration of the new force-
ful emperor: Avars on a routine mission to receive gifts from Justinian were
dismissed empty-handed, after enduring a harangue on the grandeur of the
Roman empire, and Persian envoys soon experienced a similar tough stance
in negotiations about frontier disputes. Justin, actively encouraging percep-
tions of a renewed empire under younger and more dynamic control,
assumed the consulship on 1 January 566 as the culmination of his inaugu-
ral image-building: the consulship had been in abeyance for twenty-five
years, but the sequence of costly ceremonies allowed Justin to present
himself to the people of his capital city with a lavish display that bought
popularity and rewarded his supporters. These different initiatives are
recorded in Corippus’ contemporary panegyric. 3

2. Internal affairs

This initial generosity was reinforced by an edict in 5 66 which remitted tax
arrears, though not exactions in kind or revenues from certain categories
of military land. But despite this, and comparable behaviour by Sophia who
in 567/8, according to Theophanes, won praise for taking debt pledges
from bankers and returning them to the borrowers, Justin was to achieve a

2 Evagr. HE v.3; Eife of Eutychius 76—7. 3 Discussion in Cameron, Corippus.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

4- THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

widespread reputation for avarice. His cautious attitude is evident from the
inaugural speech credited to him in Corippus: ‘Let no one seize what
belongs to the treasury. Know that the treasury has the position of the
stomach, by which all the limbs are fed. If the stomach should be empty,
everything fails . . . Let the benefits of the holy treasury be enough for all
. . . Let the treasury be protected without any of the just suffering harm: let
it take what is its own, and leave alone what belongs to private individuals.’ 4
Justin stressed the weakened position of state finances under his predeces-
sor, and this official rhetoric underlies assessments that Justinian
bequeathed his successors an empire that was internally exhausted and
completely ruined financially and economically. 5 But by the end of Justin’s
reign the position had been reversed, and a considerable surplus was avail-
able to Tiberius for charitable distributions, which might suggest that
Justinian’s difficulties had been cyclical rather than structural.

Precisely how Justin achieved this is unclear: a short-term reduction in
external payments would have helped, but Justin did have to send 90,000
solidi to the Persians in 568, and payments were made to the Avars from the
early 570s, perhaps as much as 80,000 solidi each year, and to the Persians
again from 574 after warfare in the east had restarted. Another area where
expenditure may have been reduced is buildings: Justin showed concern for
the state of urban defences in the east, and attempted to impose a new
imperial image on Constantinople through various family monuments; 6 but
even cumulatively these and his various religious benefactions will not have
matched the costly repair works that Justinian had to undertake in his last
decade after earthquake damage in Constantinople and tribal invasions in
the Balkans.

One factor in the empire’s apparent financial recovery may have been
that the personal wealth of Justin, and of his relations as they died
(Germanus’ sons Justin in 566, for example, and Justinian in 577) or were
disgraced (Martian, 573; Baduarius, 575), was incorporated into the impe-
rial treasuries: this seems to have happened in the case of Justin’s brother
Marcellus, whose considerable wealth was subsequently available for
Maurice to bestow on his father and brother, and Justin’s personal wealth
had been sufficient to repay public debts, admittedly of unknown size, at
his inauguration. In this way some of the considerable benefactions of
Justinian’s reign to his own and Theodora’s relatives will have returned to
the state. Another factor may have been a gradual recovery in the prosper-
ity of important provinces, and hence of imperial revenues: the great
plague was now a generation in the past, and rural life might not have been
particularly affected by subsequent recurrences of the disease, which will

4 Nov. 148; Theophanes 242.21—7; Cor. In laudem 11.249— 57 with Cameron, Corippus 70.

5 Ostrogorsky (1956) 78. 6 Menander fr. 9.16—19; Cameron (1980).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN II

always have struck hardest in densely populated cities but more lightly in
the countryside. Recent survey and other archaeological work in Syria and
Palestine suggests that there was no appreciable decline in population
before the seventh century. 7

Justin was certainly interested in provincial stability, and in a law of 569
he attempted to ensure that governors were appointed without payments
( suffragia ) and on the nomination of local interest groups, though an edict
of Tiberius from 574 may indicate that the law was ineffectual. Justin also
acted quickly to stop urban violence in Constantinople, warning the Blue
faction that their patron Justinian was dead but threatening the rival Greens
that they would find Justinian still alive. 8 One factor in the rioting of
Justinian’s last years was undoubtedly the general awareness of the
emperor’s extreme age and the lack of a clear successor, whereas an appear-
ance of stability, coupled with decisive leadership and an occasional show
of force, was normally enough to contain urban unrest.

The church benefited from Justin’s determination to reverse some of
Justinian’s policies. Aphthartodocetism was renounced, and it was ruled
that the creed of Constantinople should be read in churches before the
Lord’s Prayer, a move that both demonstrated Justin’s orthodoxy and side-
stepped the contentious question of the status of Chalcedon (since the
Constantinople creed antedated that of Chalcedon). Justin’s objective was
doctrinal unity, but this meant being seen to act differently in different parts
of the empire. In the west the schism caused by Justinian’s Three Chapters
edict dragged on, and Justin could only bring peace by appearing a staunch
upholder of Chalcedon: he seems to have achieved this by means of a state-
ment of intent that was perhaps reinforced by strategic gifts such as the
silver-gilt cross and the reliquary of the Cross that were sent respectively
to Rome and the monastery of Radegund at Poitiers. In the east the oppo-
site behaviour was required, and Justin initiated discussions with leading
Monophysites in an attempt to find a neo-Chalcedonian formula on which
reconciliation could be based. 9

It is difficult to follow these ecclesiastical developments because our
sources were all interested parties, but it is clear that at an intellectual level
compromise could be reached by emphasizing the single nature of God the
Word incarnate. Monophysite confidence was further attracted by the
honourable treatment accorded the patriarch Theodosius of Alexandria,
who died in 566, and by Justin’s willingness to have the name of Severus
of Antioch included in the diptychs. In the east, however, Monophysite
monks reacted angrily to proposals agreed by their leaders, while back
in Constantinople Justin’s attempts to rescue discussions failed when

7 Whittow (1 990) 13-20; Whitby (199;). 8 Nov. 149, 161; Theophanes 243.4—9.

9 Cameron (1976); Allen (1980).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

9 °

4- THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

Monophysite bishops found that an otherwise acceptable agreement was
not accompanied by an explicit condemnation of Chalcedon. Justin’s doc-
trinal edict, probably to be dated to 571, proclaimed his compromise
formula, with Chalcedon neither mentioned nor condemned and a provi-
sion that disputes over the persons of the Trinity and over terminology
should be avoided. Monophysite sources record that, after six years of tol-
eration, Justin then resorted to pressure and persecution in an attempt to
coerce them into agreement, with the Constantinopolitan patriarch, John
Scholasticus, being a prime mover. Justin and Sophia apparently visited
monasteries in their attempts to win over Monophysites, and John of
Ephesus, our main source, records the harsh treatment which he suffered. 10
Perhaps Justin’s patience had snapped, but it is unsafe to talk of forced con-
versions and mass persecutions, since John’s testimony lacks precision and
corroboration: John had compromised himself by twice accepting com-
munion with Chalcedonian ‘heretics’ during negotiations, and so may have
exaggerated the pressures applied to himself and other Monophysites at
Constantinople.

Pressing secular concerns supervened, and doctrinal unity was relegated.
This, however, did not amount to religious neglect. Justin was an active
patron in the religious field, and was alert to the benefits to be derived from
official involvement in the cult of the Virgin at Constantinople and the
acquisition of famous relics: the Chalkoprateia church which housed the
Virgin’s girdle was repaired after earthquake damage, while the Camuliana
icon, one of the images of Christ ‘not made by human hand’ ( acheiropoie -
tos), was conveyed to the capital in 574. Justin communicated with Symeon
Stylites the Younger outside Antioch, and the saint, who had prophesied
Justin’s accession through the intermediary of John Scholasticus, cured
Justin’s daughter of demoniac possession by a letter; he might have saved
Justin himself from madness if Sophia had not already consulted a sorcerer
before approaching Symeon. 11

3 . External affairs

Justin is traditionally judged, and condemned, as a ruler mainly because of
his handling of the empire’s external problems. In the Balkans he achieved
initial success. After the diplomatic rebuff at Justin’s accession, the Avars
concentrated on westward expansion at the expense of the Franks, while
the two dominant tribal groups occupying Pannonia, the Gepids and the
Lombards, struggled for supremacy. Gepid victories persuaded the
Lombards to summon the Avars as allies on very favourable terms, and

10 Evagr. HE v.4; John Eph. HE 1.23—30; 11.9, 25.

11 Patria in. 32; Cedrenus 1.685; Life of Symeon 208; Cameron (1976) 65—7 and (1980) 77—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN II 91

after the Gepids, who had been unreliable allies of the Romans for much
of Justinian’s reign, failed to obtain support from Justin, Avar participation
proved decisive. The Lombards migrated to Italy, wary of the enhanced
power of their erstwhile supporters; the Avars now occupied Pannonia;
and the Romans contented themselves with the recovery from the Gepids
of the fortress of Sirmium, which controlled an important crossing of the
river Sava. This prompted hostilities between Avars and Romans, Avars
claiming their right to all former Gepid possessions, the Romans relying on
their prior claim to Sirmium and the advantages of possession. There was
fighting in 570/ 1, with the Romans under the command of the comes excu-
bitorum Tiberius perhaps winning an initial victory but then being seriously
defeated. Justin did not concede Sirmium, but was probably forced to
resume diplomatic payments to the Avars. 12

The consequences of these events were felt most immediately in Italy,
where the Lombards, already familiar with the province from service
during the Byzantine reconquest, arrived in 568. In parts of northern Italy
Roman control had only recently been restored with the removal of
Frankish garrisons from certain Alpine forts and the submission of the last
Gothic resistance in 561, and elsewhere eastern administration was proving
unpopular: Justin was apparently told that Gothic rule was preferable.
There is an implausible story that Narses, who still controlled Italy as com-
mander-in-chief, was dismissed by Justin and retaliated by summoning the
Lombards. 13 Old age (Narses died, probably in 573/4, aged ninety-five) and
lack of resources meant that the Lombards could not be prevented from
overrunning much of the Po plain, where they installed dukes and garri-
sons in the major cities, and establishing themselves further south at
Spoleto and Beneventum. The struggle may have been complicated by the
fact that significant contingents of Lombards were still serving in the
Roman armies and might switch sides as their fellow tribesmen were suc-
cessful. The main Roman achievement was to procure the assassination of
Lombard rulers — in 572 Alboin, who had led the invasion, and then in 574
his son Cleph. Thereafter there was a ten-year interregnum when the
Lombards were controlled by local dukes, a situation that should have
favoured the divisive operations of Roman diplomacy. 14

In the east Justin attempted to present the same bold front. The fifty-
years’ peace treaty of 561/2 had left some minor issues outstanding,
notably the status of the sub-Caucasian region of Suania. In negotiations
about this, Justin’s ambassador, John son of Comentiolus, was upstaged at
the Persian court and in return Justin snubbed a Persian ambassador and
haughtily rejected a request for subsidies from the pro-Persian Lakhmid

12 Menander frr. 8, 1 1— 1 2, 1 5 ; Whitby, Maurice 86—7. 13 Discussion in PLRE 111.925—6.

14 Wickham (1981) 28—32.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

Arabs: Persian and Roman rulers were locked into a competition over
status. Tension between the two great kingdoms was raised by the installa-
tion of a Persian governor in the Homerite kingdom in south Arabia, and
further increased as a result of Roman diplomatic contacts with the
Turkish federation in central Asia, whose sphere of influence extended up
to the Persian north-east frontier. The Turks had approached the Romans
in order to sell silk, whose overland passage from China they could now
control, and to co-ordinate action against the Avars, whom the Turks
regarded as fugitive subjects, but a common interest in Persia soon
emerged. Roman and Persian envoys argued at the Turkish court, the
Roman envoy Zemarchus was invited by his Turkish hosts to participate in
a raid into Persia, and the Persians then tried to ambush the Roman
embassy as it returned through the Caucasus. The upshot was a proposal
from the Turkish Chagan for a joint attack on Persia from opposite sides. 15

This tempting offer coincided with two other factors conducive to war in
572: in Persian Armenia the local nobility had been in contact with the
Romans for some time, since they objected to Persian efforts to extend fire-
worship in this region; the murder of the regional Persian commander in
February prompted leading Armenians to flee to Roman protection.
Furthermore in 572 the first annual payment under the fifty-years’ peace fell
due: this would initiate a regular yearly transfer to Persia of money scarcely
distinguishable from tribute, and hence an offence against the strong image
that Justin had been constructing. Khusro realized that the moment was
sensitive, and despatched as ambassador a Persian Christian, Sebukht, to
dissuade Justin from war, but the chance to exploit Persian troubles along
their northern frontiers seemed too good to be missed; Justin rudely
rejected Sebukht’s mollifications and request for the promised payment. 16

Neither side was particularly ready for war, and Justin is roundly criti-
cized for this by Evagrius, but in reality events moved fast and Justin had
to decide quickly whether, like Khusro in 540, he should break a recent
treaty to take advantage of his enemy’s temporary weakness. Justin’s cousin
Marcian was appointed to command in the east, and in the latter part of
572 he mounted a minor raid into Arzanene; he may also have begun prep-
arations to besiege Nisibis, whose recapture after two centuries in Persian
possession seems to have been an objective for Justin. In Armenia the
Romans and their local allies made some headway against Persian support-
ers and occupied the capital, Dwin.

In 573 Marcian operated around Nisibis; unfavourable reports on his
siege operations were secretly sent by the city’s Nestorian bishop to Gregory
of Antioch, 17 but these may have been distortions characteristic of an

15 Menander frr. 9—10, 13.5; Whitby , Maurice 217— 1 8. 16 Menander fr. 16; Whitby , Maurice 250—4.

17 Lee (1993a) 571-5-

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Black Sea

'ALBANIA

''CAPPADOCIA C

. r '\

i™°s M'9 uNTAlN L-J_

?Comana\ Me |iteneO
^ I (Arabissus r

Theodosiopolis o)
(Erzurum) /

ARMENIA

\ w

Martyropolis Os| / ^

j flARZANEIME yHAKKARl

Amidad Chlomaron

OSRHOENE Constintina Da T a k
) Edessao\ \Oi „ P t,. 1

& MOUNTAINS Lake) W ^
^ y ^ Urmiah) 0 Js. E

BETH ARABAYE

/Antioch/

/ 33 O Chalcis

Theodosiopolis^

(Resaina)

Callinicum

C Singara^ yT *0^* ^

(oApTmea SePgiopolis

Epiphania yCircesium

/ O Palmyra //

/ !

PALESTINE

o X

Jerusalem

4 , 1 )

^ o\OCtesiphon ^
^ Seleucia k, I C

I I Land over 1000 metres

SCALE 0

0 100 200 300 400 km

45°E 4]

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

94 4 - the successors of justinian

over-enthusiastic amateur observer of military preparations. Whatever the
truth, Justin’s patience snapped and he dismissed Marcian, but this coin-
cided with the appearance of a Persian relief army led in person by Khusro,
who had been believed to be close to death. Khusro’s preparations and rapid
march up the Euphrates surprised the Romans, who may have expected
some warning from their Arab allies, but the Ghassanid leader al-Mundhir
claimed to have been insulted, or even betrayed, by Justin and had with-
drawn from the conflict. Part of the Persian army ravaged Syria and sacked
Apamea, while Khusro’s contingent invested Dara. After six months the city
fell, and the great bastion of the Roman frontier was in Persian hands for
the first time. 18 Justin’s sanity may already have shown signs of instability, if
there is truth in Theophanes’ story about the row with his son-in-law
Baduarius, but the loss of Dara, capping a sequence of disasters, finally
turned his mind. In desperation, the empress Sophia sent the physician
Zacharias to Persia to negotiate, on the grounds that it would demean
Khusro to fight a defenceless woman: at a cost of 45,000 solidi a one-year
truce was arranged to permit more substantive negotiations, though the
Persians insisted that fighting could continue in Armenia, where they
wanted to restore control. 19

II. TIBERIUS

1. Successio n

Justin’s failure to regain his sanity during 574 forced the proclamation of an
imperial colleague. Sophia, keen to remain influential, identified the comes
excubitorum Tiberius as a loyal aide to Justin who would also serve her inter-
ests. Rumour held that she saw him as a replacement spouse, apparently
unaware that Tiberius was married with children, but our source, John of
Ephesus, was basically hostile to Sophia and the story might have been gen-
erated by jealousy at Tiberius’ newly-imperial family and by Sophia’s reluc-
tance to be ousted from the comforts and opportunities of the palace.
Whatever her intentions, Tiberius was proclaimed Caesar on 6 December
when Justin, in a brief moment of lucidity, gave a simple but moving
speech that encapsulated his ideas about imperial rule and the supremacy
of God. For almost four years Tiberius functioned as junior but operative
colleague to Justin, until the latter’s death on 4 October 578, when Tiberius
succeeded as Augustus. Sophia was still loath to relinquish her power: John
of Ephesus records ructions between the imperial women inside the
palace, while Gregory of Tours preserves stories about attempts by Sophia
to have Justinian, the cousin of Justin, proclaimed — even if the precise

18 Whitby, Maurice 254—8. 19 Theophanes 246.1 1—27; Menander fr. 1 8; Whitby, Maurice 25 8—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TIBERIUS

details must be untrue, since Justinian was already dead, they illustrate the
widespread perception of tensions in the imperial family. Tiberius’ declar-
ation that he would regard Sophia as a mother might have been a politely
calculated insult. Later Syriac tradition described Tiberius as the first Greek
emperor, which may simply reflect the fact that after a succession of
emperors from Latin-speaking lllyricum (Anastasius from Dyrrachium, the
family of Justin from Bederiacum) Tiberius as a Thracian was probably a
native Greek-speaker, as the Cappadocian Maurice would also have been. 2 "

2. The Persian war

Tiberius, who must already have been influential in the councils of the
‘interregnum’, acted decisively to stabilize the Roman position. Ambassa-
dors were despatched to Khusro to announce his proclamation and extend
the truce, while large numbers of Germanic tribesmen in the Balkans were
recruited to replenish Roman ranks. Both initiatives succeeded: the envoys
Trajan and Zacharias secured a prolongation of the true for three years,
although Armenia was still excluded (contrary to Tiberius’ hopes), while
the recruits were formed into a corps called Tiberiani, 15,000 strong, and
allocated to the new eastern commander, the patrician Justinian, son of
Germanus, another of Justin’s cousins. To mark his accession Tiberius
announced in April 575 the remission of one year’s monetary taxes, to be
spread in instalments over four years, but payments in kind were main-
tained and specific mention was made of military needs in Osrhoene and
Mesopotamia. 21

In 575 there was probably little major action on the eastern front, but in
576 Khusro attempted to combine aggression in Armenia with discussion
of a permanent peace: with a large army that included elephants, he reas-
serted Persian authority in Persarmenia but then failed to capture
Theodosiopolis. Negotiations began while Khusro pushed west towards
Sebaste and then Caesarea in Cappadocia, but Roman forces harassed his
unwieldy army into retreat and after a confrontation near Melitene the
Persian royal baggage was captured; there were severe Persian losses, either
in set battle, as the Romans claimed, or during a disorganized flight over the
Euphrates. Khusro retired across Arzanene, having to cut a path for his ele-
phant through the Hakkari mountains. These failures, coupled with ener-
getic Roman ravaging that reached as far as the Caspian Sea, stimulated
Persian interest in negotiations, with the Romans arguing for peace on equal
terms and the exchange of Dara for Persarmenia and Iberia. In 577, how-
ever, Persian confidence revived when Tamkhusro defeated Justinian in

20 John Eph. HE 111.5— 10; Greg. Tur. Hist, v.30; Gregory Barhebraeus ix p. 81 (Budge).

21 Nov. 163.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

9 6

4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

Armenia, where Roman actions had alienated local inhabitants. Discussions
stumbled on through the winter of 577/8, but the main objective was now
to observe, or deter, the opposition’s military preparations. 22

Maurice, comes excubitorum, who had been involved in secret aspects of
these negotiations at Constantinople, was now appointed supreme eastern
commander, since Justinian had died and his former subordinates were
wrangling. Maurice recruited troops in his native Cappadocia, Anzitene and
Syria, before positioning himself at Citharizon, suitably located to react to
Persian moves in both Armenia and Upper Mesopotamia when the truce
ended. The Persians Mahbodh and Tamkhusro anticipated this, at least on
the Roman interpretation of the agreement, and ravaged Constantina and
Theodosiopolis-Resaina and then Amida, but throughout most of summer
578 the initiative lay with the Romans: Maurice attacked Arzanene, captured
Aphum and closely besieged the region’s main city, Chlomaron; ravaging
was sufficiently extensive to be visible to Khusro in his summer retreat in
Carduchia, and the Romans took thousands of prisoners whom they reset-
tled on Cyprus.

Roman successes again prompted the Persians to negotiate, but talks
were disrupted, this time by Khusro’s death and the accession of his son
Hormizd, who was reluctant to start his reign with a surrender of territory.
Diplomatic delays prevented serious fighting during 579, though the two
sides probably attempted to consolidate their positions in Arzanene. In 5 80
Maurice returned to the offensive, with extensive raids across the Tigris,
and for 5 8 1 he planned an even more ambitious enterprise, an expedition
down the Euphrates towards Ctesiphon with the Ghassanid leader al-
Mundhir, while other Roman troops occupied the Persians in Armenia. His
grand plan failed, for reasons that are not clearly recorded in the sources;
Maurice extricated his forces from a position that might have been as des-
perate as Julian’s in 363, but the commanders quarrelled and accusations of
treachery were levelled against al-Mundhir. The justification for these is
uncertain, but the Ghassanids withdrew from the fighting and their king
was subsequently arrested. In 5 82 the Persians tried to exploit the Roman
discomfiture, and Tamkhusro once again advanced towards Constantina,
but was defeated and lulled. By now Maurice had his eye on events in
Constantinople, and at some point, perhaps even before the victory at
Constantina, he left the eastern army to pursue imperial ambitions. 23

3 . The west and the Balkans

In the west Tiberius’ main preoccupation was to restore the Roman posi-
tion in Italy; a major expedition under Justin’s son-in-law, Baduarius, was

22 Whitby, Maurice 262—8. 23 Ibid 268—74.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TIBERIUS

despatched in 575 , but he was severely defeated and lulled. This encouraged
the Lombards to further expansion, in spite of their lack of an overall
leader, and in 578 Faroald, duke of Spoleto, even captured Classis,
Ravenna’s port, and besieged Rome. An embassy from the Roman senate,
led by the patrician Pamphronius, begged for practical help and presented
3,000 pounds of gold, perhaps the senate’s traditional coronation offering
to a new ruler. But Tiberius had no troops to spare; he returned the money
and advised that it be used to purchase support from Lombard leaders or
secure alliances with the Franks.

The orthodox Franks of Austrasia were incited to oppose the Arian
Lombards, and the new pope, Pelagius II, who had been consecrated
during the Lombard pressure on Rome, wrote to the bishop of Auxerre to
urge him to persuade the Burgundians to assist. Guntram of Burgundy,
however, was already allied with the Lombards, and the first goal of Roman
diplomacy now became an alliance of Austrasia and Neustria against the
uncooperative Guntram. Tiberius sent gold, and the size and decoration of
his coins or medallions are said by Gregory of Tours to have impressed the
Gallic nobility. Pelagius also renewed appeals to Constantinople for help,
but without success. The problems of controlling the remaining Roman
territories in the west may have prompted Tiberius to initiate significant
administrative reforms: an exarch, a local commander who combined civil-
ian and military authority, is first attested in Italy in 5 84, and in Africa in
591, but greater local independence in the production of gold coin in
Africa and Sicily between 5 8 1 and 583 suggests that fiscal and administra-
tive reform was already under way. 24

In the Balkans the Roman position deteriorated significantly under
Tiberius: troops had probably been removed for service with Baduarius in
Italy as well as for the east, and numerous recruits were siphoned off for
eastern service after the disasters of 573. The empire could only afford a
major war in one area at a time, and the east took priority. Initially the Avars
were quiet, content with an annual payment of 80,000 solidi, and the main
threat was posed by the various Slav tribes who crossed the lower Danube
to ravage Thrace and other regions. But once the Avars appreciated the full
extent of Roman weakness, they quickly exploited this by renewing their
attempts on Sirmium, which dominated the Balkans during Tiberius’ sole
rule, since possession of the city would provide a foothold south of the
Sava and so facilitate attacks on Roman territory. The Avars, exploiting the
technical expertise of some Roman engineers, isolated Sirmium by build-
ing bridges over the Sava both upstream and downstream, to cut it off from
relief by water, though in negotiations the Chagan asserted his loyalty,
saying that Slavs rather than Romans were his intended target. In spite of

24 Menander fr. 22; Greg. Tur. Hist, vi.2; Goffart (1957); Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 49—53.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

9 8

4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

their suspicions, the Romans could not prevent the bridge construction,
even though Tiberius, pretending to accept Avar protestations, warned
them that their dreaded former overlords, the Turks, had reached Cherson
on the Black Sea and might exploit the absence of the Avar army from
Pannonia.

The Roman problem is bluntly presented in Menander: the Persian war
had completely drained the Balkans of troops, and no thought had been
given to laying in supplies to resist sieges, since the Avars had seemed well-
disposed. Relief proved impossible and Sirmium was eventually forced to
surrender after a blockade of three years. While Roman attention was
focused on the north, elsewhere in the Balkans Slavs roamed with little
apparent restraint. Brigands, referred to as Scamareis, interfered with travel
even by official embassies on the main highways. Scamareis, perhaps to be
considered the eastern equivalent of the bagaudae, had similarly appeared
in Noricum as central control evaporated. Coin hoards, probably to be
dated to Tiberius’ reign, have been found from the foothills of the Stara
Planina in northern Bulgaria as far south as Porto Cheli and Olympia in the
Peloponnese, illustrating the extent of disruption. Even at Constantinople
Tiberius is alleged to have erected a fortification to protect shipping in one
of the harbours. The Slavs were no longer content to ravage, but were
thought to have begun to settle. 25

4. Internal affairs

Such lack of success did little to dent Tiberius’ popular reputation. In con-
trast to Justin, who had come to be regarded as stingy, Tiberius retained an
image of conspicuous generosity: the contrast of regimes is made in the
stories of disagreements between Sophia and Tiberius about the level of
his charitable expenditure, with Tiberius expressing the laudable but quite
impractical attitude, at least for an emperor, that gold in the treasury was of
little use when the world was suffering from hunger. 26 Quite apart from
charity, warfare and diplomacy in west and east cost Tiberius dear, at a time
when state income was reduced by almost 25 per cent because of the tax
remission of 575: in his first year as emperor John of Ephesus alleges that
he spent 7,500 pounds of gold, 540,000 solidi, as well as quantities of silver
and silks — his expenses would have included a consulship, in imitation of
Justin, and an accession donative for the armies, but the outlay is still
impressive. Western rumour had it that he had benefited from the discov-
ery of the fabulous treasure of Narses, the former duke of Italy, but it is
not surprising that the empire was impoverished at his death. 27

25 Menander frr. 1 5.6, 25, 27; John Eph. HE vi.24— 5, 30—2; Whitby, Maurice 86—9.

26 Cameron (1977). 27 John Eph. HE v.20; Greg. Tur. Hist. v.19.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAURICE

Tiberius attempted to avoid being drawn into religious disputes. He
achieved a good reputation with Monophysites even though persecution was
allowed to continue, since blame was ascribed to Eutychius, who had
returned as patriarch of Constantinople in 577. Tiberius was believed to have
asserted that he could see nothing wrong with Monophysites, and that it was
senseless to contemplate persecution at a time of external crisis; he also
invited the Monophysite Ghassanid leader al-Mundhir to Constantinople in
an unsuccessful attempt to promote unity between splintered Monophysite
groups, and gave him an honourable reception. He appears to have favoured
inaction in two other religious disputes, first when the people of
Constantinople rioted against concessions supposedly made to Arian
Germans recruited for military service, and second when an embarrassing
scandal implicated imperial administrators and even the patriarch of
Antioch, Gregory, in pagan worship. Such toleration could give rise to accu-
sations of being too passive. 28

In August 5 82, Tiberius fell ill, allegedly after eating a dish of poisoned
mulberries. His first intention was to appoint two successors: the comes excu-
bitorum Mauri ce and Germanus, son of the Ostrogoth princess Matasuintha
and Justinian’s cousin Germanus, were proclaimed Caesars on 5 August and
betrothed to Tiberius’ two daughters, Constantina and Charito. One source,
hostile to Maurice, alleges that Germanus was Tiberius’ real preference,
although another claims that the dowager empress Sophia was consulted
and declared support for Maurice. In retrospect Maurice’s accession
attracted the usual predictions from contemporary holy men, predictions
which boosted the reputations of both the saint involved and the secular
beneficiary: Symeon Stylites outside Antioch, who had already prophesied
the rise of Justin II and Tiberius, identified Maurice as the next emperor, as
did Theodore of Sykeon in central Anatolia. Whatever the truth, Tiberius’
health deteriorated; on 1 3 August Maurice alone was proclaimed Augustus
and successor in a ceremony at the palace at the Hebdomon, and on the next
day Tiberius died, his corpse being escorted into Constantinople for burial
in the Holy Apostles. 29

III. MAURICE

1 . Internal affairs

Finance was the key problem throughout Maurice’s reign: Tiberius’ gene-
rosity had apparently exhausted the central treasuries, so that Maurice had
to tackle the various external threats to the empire while struggling at the

28 John Eph. HE in. 17— 22; iv.39— 43; m - 2 6, 29—32. Cameron (1977) 13.

29 Whitby, Maurice 5—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

IOO

4- THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

same time to acquire the necessary resources: ‘I do not scatter and disperse,
but amass and store away so that I may pay for the peace of the state’ is a
statement of policy attributed to him byjohn of Ephesus. When Maurice,
like his two predecessors, held the consulship at the start of his reign, he
entered office on Christmas Day 5 83, which probably enabled him to avoid
some of the expenditure associated with the post. A significant change in
financial administration may be represented by the appearance of a logo-
thete, and the first known holder of this senior financial post, Constantine
Lardys, shared Maurice’s unpopularity and fate in 602. 30

Financial stringency generated accusations of avarice. When Maurice
attempted in 588 to reduce military expenditure on the eastern army, the
soldiers mutinied and castigated him as a ‘shopkeeper’. The Balkan army
was equally hostile when Maurice imposed analogous changes in pay and
conditions in the winter of 593/4, and in Egypt Maurice was believed to
have greedily sold Constantinople’s grain for gold; in the capital itself
during a food shortage in 602 Maurice was heckled as a Marcianist, an
adherent of a heresy which rejected normal standards of charity. The impe-
rial family, however, had money to spend on building projects in
Constantinople. Even if many of the constructions were of a charitable or
more broadly religious nature, expenditure on palaces, on statues of the
imperial family at prominent places such as the fagade of the Chalke, the
ceremonial entry to the Great Palace, and even on private monasteries
would not win sympathy from ordinary people faced by famine. 31

The contrast with Tiberius’ munificence was bound to cause problems,
but Maurice made matters worse by showing generosity to his relatives,
who in common with members of other new dynasties received titles, high
office and property. His father Paul became head of the senate, Philippicus,
husband of his sister Gordia, was appointed comes excubitorum and com-
mander of the eastern armies, his brother Peter was made curopalatus and
became a general in the Balkans, and another relative, Domitian, for whom
Maurice had obtained the bishopric of Melitene in 577/8, was an influential
adviser. Such patronage was no greater than that bestowed on Justin’s rel-
atives, and indeed Maurice could economize to some extent by ‘recycling’
the property of Justin’s brother Marcellus, but Tiberius had not had an
extensive family on which to lavish gifts, so that the new direction of pat-
ronage would be more obvious. Prominent individuals from outside the
family included Comentiolus, who progressed from being a scribon, an
officer in the excubitores, to one of Maurice’s most regular if not successful
generals, and Priscus, another frequent commander. Of these relatives and
favourites only Priscus remained prominent under Phocas; most of the
chosen clique were executed in the coup of 602. 32

30 John Eph. HE v.20; Hendy, Studies 193; Haldon (1979) 33—4; Whitby, Maurice 17.

31 Whitby, Maurice 286—7, x 66— 7, 19—21. 32 Ibid. 14—17.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAURICE

IOI

Maurice was faced with the same religious problems as his predecessors.
With regard to the Monophysites, the contemporary John of Ephesus
praised him for resisting moves to stimulate persecution, and in this
Maurice was supported by the patriarch John Nesteutes, but later Syriac
writers criticized him for allowing Domitian of Melitene to punish
Monophysites in the east towards the end of his reign; four hundred monks
are said to have been slain outside the walls of Edessa. Maurice was also
inclined to be tolerant towards lapses into pagan practices: Paulinus, a
‘magician’ discovered at Constantinople, was only executed after strong
insistence by John Nesteutes, and Gregory, patriarch of Antioch, was
acquitted on various obscure charges that probably included paganism. 33

A new source of trouble was an increasingly heated argument with pope
Gregory: a significant factor was the Constantinopolitan patriarchs’ use of
the title ‘oecumenical’, to whose alleged universalist claim Gregory took
exception, misguidedly, but questions of ecclesiastical control in the
Balkans and imperial policy in Italy also played their part. Maurice contin-
ued the imperial practice of associating himself with the acquisition of
relics, and with popular cults, such as that of the Virgin: the weekly Friday
feast of the Virgin at Blachernae was developed, and the commemoration
of the Virgin’s Assumption on 1 5 August was instituted as a feast; the holy
man Theodore of Sykeon was invited to Constantinople to bless the impe-
rial family. Maurice was deeply religious, spending the night in church
before a major expedition, marking victory with religious celebrations, and
apparently showing concern for the need to justify his worldly actions
before the eternal throne of judgement. ,4

Maurice’s rule has been characterized as both negligent and unpopular,
but the evidence is insufficient to justify such an assessment. 35 Most emper-
ors experienced bouts of unpopularity, especially when famine or other
misfortune disrupted normal patterns of life, and attempts to change long-
standing arrangements in financial or military matters were bound to
provoke opposition. In many respects, perhaps, Maurice was an interven-
tionist or reformer, as might be suggested by his reputation as a military
commander in the east. He was also, directly or indirectly, associated with
the Strategikon that bears his name, a military manual that shows good
knowledge of contemporary Balkan warfare and overall is less attached to
the traditions of this genre than most such texts. He attempted to tackle
the key financial problem of the late Roman empire, the cost of the army,
and the appearance of a logothete suggests there may have been some
redefinition of duties in civilian administration. His quarrels with pope
Gregory sprang, in part, from his willingness to interfere in areas that the
western church regarded as its traditional prerogative. His unpopularity,

33 John Eph. HE v.i 5—17; Michael the Syrian x.23, vol. n pp. 372—3; Theophylact 1.1 1.

34 Whitby, Maurice 20— 4. 35 Olster (1993) 49.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

102

4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

perhaps, was the typical fate of a reformer who was unable to complete his
intended changes.

2. Eastern warfare

As his replacement in charge of the eastern armies, Maurice initially
appointed his former subordinate, John Mystacon, who continued opera-
tions in Arzanene in autumn 582 and then through 583 with mixed
success. 36 Arzanene was a vulnerable salient of Persian territory, control of
which would allow the Romans to consolidate their hold on Armenia to the
north. For 584 Maurice appointed a new general, his brother-in-law
Philippicus; negotiations occupied the first part of the year, possibly
another Persian delaying tactic, but in autumn 584 and through 585
Philippicus ravaged the plains of Beth Arabaye near Nisibis and continued
operations in Arzanene, though progress slowed when Philippicus fell ill.
Raiding into Syria by Rome’s former allies, the Ghassanid Arabs, who had
been alienated by the arrest and punishment of their king, al-Mundhir, may
also have caused disruption.

In 586 activity seems to have been on a different scale. Philippicus
thwarted a Persian invasion of Upper Mesopotamia with victory in a
pitched battle at Solachon in the plains south of Mardin, and thereafter
returned his attentions to Arzanene. Although unsuccessful in an attack on
the main city, Chlomaron, which Maurice had also failed to capture in 578,
the Romans maintained the initiative during the rest of the year, building
or capturing strategic forts and raiding deep into Persia; Philippicus’ ill
health meant that much of this activity was conducted by Heraclius, the
father of the future emperor, and other subordinate commanders.

During winter 587/8 there were two developments: Priscus was
appointed to replace Philippicus, and he was ordered to introduce a reduc-
tion in military pay, a move whose unpopularity may have been offset by
improvements in conditions of service. Priscus’ arrival at the camp at
Monocarton was unhappy, and the army mutinied during the Easter festi-
val: Priscus was forced to retire to Edessa, his attempts to reconcile the
troops were rebuffed, and the mutineers chose as leader Germanus, duke
of Phoenicia. The mutiny persisted for a whole year, until Easter 5 89, but
the Persians were surprisingly unable to exploit this opportunity, which
may reveal the extent of Roman successes in recent years. Germanus
indeed defeated the Persians near Martyropolis and sent 3,000 captives to
Constantinople as a gesture of allegiance to Maurice. The troops were
finally won back through a combination of imperial emissaries, who dis-
bursed normal payments, and exhortations from Gregory, patriarch of

36 For discussion of these years, see Whitby, Maurice 276—92.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAURICE 103

Antioch; Philippicus was now reinstated as commander, but this return to
normality in fact prompted a reverse for the Romans when the frontier city
of Martyropolis was betrayed to the Persians. Philippicus quickly invested
the city, but was unable to prevent Persian reinforcements from entering;
as a result he was superseded by Comentiolus, who persevered with the
blockade of Martyropolis but also moved south to threaten Nisibis and
defeated the Persians nearby at Sisarbanon.

Dramatic developments in Persia now affected the course of the fron-
tier war. 3 The king Hormizd had not commanded military expeditions in
person, perhaps obedient to advice given by his father after the mishap in
Armenia in 576, which meant that he was out of touch with his troops. His
leading general, Vahram Tchobin, recently returned from the north-east
where victories against the Turks had stabilized the frontier, had then cam-
paigned against Roman supporters in the Caucasian principalities. But here
he was routed. Hormizd saw this as an opportunity to humble an over-
mighty commander, and publicly insulted Vahram with a gift of female
clothing. Vahram persuaded his army to revolt and marched south on
Ctesiphon; Hormizd’s support evaporated, and in February 590 he was
overthrown in a palace coup that placed his son, Khusro II, on the throne;
this did not mollify Vahram, and after a confrontation north of Ctesiphon,
Khusro fled across the Tigris towards the Roman empire.

The rest of 5 90 was occupied by negotiations, Khusro eager to secure
Roman support for his reinstatement, Vahram wanting to persuade
Maurice that he was the man to deal with. Although some of his advisers,
including the patriarch John Nesteutes, thought the Persians should be
allowed to weaken themselves through internal conflict, Maurice decided
that legitimate sovereigns had a duty to support each other, accepting the
argument that the Roman and Persian empires, even if antagonists, had
considerable self-interest in mutual stability. Khusro’s careful professions
of interest in Christianity seem also to have been a significant factor, and
the two leading clerics in the east, Domitian of Melitene and Gregory of
Antioch, were sent to supervise his stay on Roman territory and to co-ordi-
nate action; subsequently pope Gregory commiserated with Domitian on
his failure to win over Khusro. 38

Preparations were made for a grand campaign to restore Khusro, with
support being canvassed in the frontier areas. By 591 everything was ready
and Vahram was too weak to oppose a three-pronged attack against
Azerbaijan, Upper Mesopotamia and Ctesiphon; he was defeated near
Canzak in Azerbaijan, and Khusro resumed his throne. The Roman reward
for their assistance was the return of Dara and Martyropolis and the acqui-
sition of Iberia and much of Persarmenia. Twenty years of war initiated by

37 For discussion, see ibid. 292—304. 38 Greg. Reg. 111.62.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

104 4 - the successors of justinian

Justin had been brought to a surprisingly successful conclusion, and during
the last decade of Maurice’s reign relations on the eastern frontier were
generally good: Arab tribes and local arguments might raise tension, but in
602 Maurice was sufficiently confident of Khusro’s good faith to contem-
plate sending his son Theodosius to appeal for Persian support against
Phocas.

3 . The west and the Balkans

Comparable success eluded Maurice in the west. In Italy he continued the
policies of Tiberius, attempting to engage the Franks as allies against the
Lombards, but two invasions in 584 and 585 achieved little; as a result, in
586 the exarch Smaragdus made a three-year truce with the Lombards.
Meanwhile in Gaul financial support was given to Gundovald, an illegiti-
mate member of the Merovingian royal house, in attempts to gain the
throne of Burgundy or Neustria; these had failed by the end of 585. In
Spain Roman possessions had been whittled away by the Visigoths, but
small enclaves based on Seville and Cartagena remained, and the fortuitous
capture of the Merovingian princess Ingund, daughter-in-law of king
Leovigild, and her son Athanagild gave Maurice considerable influence at
the Austrasian court. In Africa Moorish raids had troubled the province
under Justin II and Tiberius, but it was peaceful throughout most of
Maurice’s reign, and tribal threats were dealt with by the exarch
Gennadius. 39

During the 5 90s the Roman position in Italy remained weak. The exarch
Romanus maintained pressure on the Lombards and managed to secure
communications across the Apennines between Ravenna and Rome, but
his belligerence was not favoured by the new pope, Gregory (590—604);
Gregory, more concerned by the isolation of Rome and the city’s lack of
troops, preferred to establish links with the Lombards and in this he was
successful after Romanus’ death in 596, with the orthodox queen
Theodelinda as an important contact. Policy towards the Lombards
remained a contentious issue between Gregory and Maurice, and relations
were complicated by the row over the Constantinopolitan patriarch’s use of
the oecumenical title, disputes about jurisdiction in Illyricum, a diocese
under papal control but geographically orientated more closely with
Constantinople, and Gregory’s desire to prevent secular interference with
church estates in the west. By 602 relations were sufficiently bad for
Gregory to react warmly to the news of Phocas’ accession and the death
of Maurice’s supporter, Comentiolus, whose involvement in a dispute
about church property in Spain had displeased Gregory. 40

39 Goffart (1957); Goubert (1951—65) 11. 40 Richards (1980) chs. 11, 13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAURICE 105

At Maurice’s accession the Roman position in the Balkans appeared per-
ilous, with Slavs overrunning much of the countryside and the Avars con-
trolling a bridgehead across the Sava at Sirmium. 41 The Avars tried to
exploit the change of emperor by demanding diplomatic gifts, and then an
increase in annual payments from 80,000 to 100,000 solidi. The extra tribute
was conceded after an Avar invasion reached Anchialus on the Black Sea.
This purchased two years’ peace from the Avars, but all the time the Slavs
were on the move, ravaging and restricting the areas of Roman control: in
584 they approached the Long Walls of Constantinople, and then in 585
had to be driven from the Thracian plain. Such Roman actions prompted
Slav bands to wander towards less protected areas, and the lower city of
Athens was sacked, followed by Corinth in 586, and in the same year
Thessalonica, the second city of the Balkans, was briefly besieged. In
autumn 5 86 the Avars found a suitable excuse to renounce their treaty, and
again they swept from Pannonia to the eastern foothills of the Stara Planina
near the Black Sea. Maurice raised a scratch army through harsh conscrip-
tion, but 40 per cent of the 10,000 troops were apparently unsuitable for
battle, and their commander, Comentiolus, seems to have restricted his
aims to curbing Avar depredations and keeping them north of the Stara
Planina. In this he failed, partly perhaps because of his troops’ inexperi-
ence, and he was pursued across the mountains. In the Thracian plain,
however, the Avars were less successful, in that the major cities withstood
their attacks and a force of Lombards inflicted a tactical defeat on them.

At this point the chronology of Balkan events becomes uncertain,
because our main source, Theophylact Simocatta, who was writing a gen-
eration later, did not fully understand events. The detailed solution adopted
here is no more than a possibility, although the contrast of severe crisis in
the late 580s followed by considerable recovery in the 590s should be
right. 42 In 588 Priscus, recently returned from the mutinous eastern army,
was given command with the task of attempting to defend the Stara Planina
again. He was no more successful than Comentiolus, since Roman garri-
sons were too small to defend key passes. The Avars managed to capture
Anchialus, and the Chagan donned imperial robes, which the empress
Anastasia had dedicated in a church there, and blatantly challenged
Maurice’s authority as emperor. The Avars then pushed south to Heracleia
on the Sea of Marmara, where they ravaged the shrine of the martyr
Glyceria, but eventually withdrew after receiving a payment from the
Romans, and perhaps also influenced by rumours of a Turkish threat to
their homeland in Pannonia. 43

After this catastrophe for Roman control, Maurice himself took the field
and marched across Thrace to Anchialus in autumn 590, perhaps to

41 Whitby, Maurice 140—5 1 . 42 See ibid. 1 51 — 3. 43 Ibid. 153—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

106 4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

counter the Chagan’s assertion there of imperial pretensions. Thereafter
Roman operations were greatly assisted by the termination of the Persian
war and the transfer of resources and eastern troops to the Balkans. 44
Between 5 9 3 and 5 9 5 Priscus and Peter gradually reasserted Roman control
of the eastern Balkans, driving scattered Slav groups back to the Danube,
campaigning across the river to deter further incursions, and reopening
contacts with those Roman outposts that had survived the invasions of the
5 80s. This sequence of imperial collapse followed by recovery provides a
context for the story of Maurice’s achievement in winning over a brigand
chief: 45 ‘brigands’ was a convenient term to apply to local self-help groups
that appeared as central authority collapsed, but in many cases their prior-
ity was efficient protection for their own territory and so they were pre-
pared to show deference to an emperor who appeared to be capable of
providing this.

The Avar Chagan, though concerned about these actions, was unable to
intervene: Singidunum was protected by a Roman fleet, and the Avars were
forced to turn their attentions west to Illyria and the Frankish kingdoms.
In autumn 5 97 the Avars again raided eastwards and reached Tomi on the
Black Sea; in 598 a Roman attempt, perhaps too ambitious, to trap the
Avars there failed, and the Avars were able to burst across the mountains
to ravage the Thracian plain, but disease and diplomacy persuaded them to
withdraw. A new treaty established the Danube as the frontier, but the
Romans were specifically allowed to cross the river to attack Slavs, a recog-
nition of the considerable Roman recovery that had been achieved. This
time it was the Romans who were on the offensive and had no intention of
preserving the treaty; in 5 99 there was a successful campaign into Pannonia
itself, in 601 Roman control of the Danube Cataracts was safeguarded, and
in 602 there were further successes against the Slavs. Constant campaign-
ing, much of which is probably reported inadequately by Theophylact, had
reasserted Roman authority in the Balkans: the Danube was now a real
frontier, Slavs beyond the frontier were becoming cowed, while Slavs south
of the river might be turned into Roman subjects.

This achievement, however, was the product of hard toil, and fighting
perhaps became less lucrative for the Romans. Concern about Maurice’s
desire for financial economies, which had already prompted sedition in
winter 593/94, culminated again in late 602 when Maurice ordered the
troops to spend the winter north of the Danube. 46 There were good military
reasons for this, expounded in the contemporary Strategikon, but the soldiers
mutinied, chose Phocas as leader and marched on Constantinople. In the
capital Maurice’s unpopularity had been demonstrated in rioting over a food
shortage in February; there were insufficient troops to defend the city, and

44 Ibid. 153—65. 45 Farka (1993/4). 46 Whitby, Maurice 165-9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MAURICE

io 7

Map 4 The Balkan frontier

Maurice’s position was undermined when he quarrelled with Germanus, the
other son-in-law of Tiberius, who is noticeably absent from most events of
Maurice’s reign but whose daughter had recently married Maurice’s eldest
son Theodosius. On 22 November Maurice fled across the Bosphorus after
a night of rioting, and the next day Phocas was proclaimed emperor at the
Hebdomon; on 27 November Maurice and most of his male relatives were

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

108 4. THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

killed at Chalcedon, an act that would provide Khusro II with an excuse to
attack the Romans to revenge his former protector and usher in twenty- five
years of exhausting conflict. 47

IV. CONCLUSION

Thus the grand hopes of imperial renewal proclaimed by Justin II and
resuscitated by the achievements of Maurice’s second decade were finally
dashed, but long-term failure should not prejudice assessments of individ-
uals or trends. In the late sixth century the Roman empire was still the
mightiest single political institution in the Mediterranean or near eastern
world, even if it was not powerful enough to dominate simultaneously on
all frontiers. The emperor controlled this great machine, a leader whose
images could excite envy in Gaul, whose grandeur prompted first submis-
sion and later imitation from the Avar Chagan, and whose legitimate
authority led a fugitive Persian monarch to beg for assistance. These emper-
ors were civilian figures, palace officials or notaries by background, who
dominated the administrative and military infrastructures through their
secular authority. In time-honoured fashion this authority was reinforced
by association with religious symbols, such as relics or festivals, which
influenced contemporaries and sustained the potent symbolism of the
heaven-endowed earthly empire. Such was the authority of the emperor
that even imperial madness or severe personal unpopularity did not at once
prompt a change of ruler: Justin remained sole Augustus for over four
years after the onset of insanity, while Maurice even in 602 could have sur-
vived by making timely concessions to the Balkan mutineers, or might at
least have been replaced by a close relative.

These reigns have been analysed in terms of differing relationships
between emperors on the one hand and the senatorial aristocracy and
urban populace on the other, 48 but the evidence is insufficient to permit
detailed investigation. With regard to the senate, the emperor was the
supreme patron throughout; senators desired stability as the guarantee of
their privileged position — hence their support for the rapid proclamation
of Justin II inside the palace to avoid public debate in the Hippodrome and
their pleas to Maurice not to leave the capital on a risky military expedition.
Undoubtedly there were tensions in this relationship, but there was also a
fundamental community of interest. With regard to the populace, emper-
ors seem to have managed to achieve a more secure control over the circus
factions, the most prominent or vocal representatives of public opinion: in
602 for the first time demarchs, official controllers, of the Blues and Greens
are mentioned, and these now maintained lists of registered followers who

47 Ibid. 24—7. 48 Bury, LRE 11.92— 4; Ostrogorsky (1956) 82—3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONCLUSION

109

could then be summoned for military action. The factions were prominent
in imperial ceremonial outside as well as inside the Hippodrome, the orig-
inal focus of their activities, and the closeness of their connection with the
emperor persuaded both Maurice in 602 and Phocas in 610 that they might
support an unpopular ruler in a crisis. 49

During this period the frontiers of the empire contracted, except in the
east, where Roman authority was re-established as far as the Caucasus.
Justinian’s western reconquests ceded priority to the defence of the east, so
that Lombards in Italy and Visigoths in Spain took over Roman territory,
but this might have been a temporary phenomenon: Maurice’s friendly rela-
tions with Khusro and reassertion of Roman control in the Balkans could
have permitted the transfer of attention and resources to the far west again,
and the division of the empire between his sons proposed in his will of 5 97
suggests a traditional Roman view of the Mediterranean world. If peace-
ful co-existence had continued on the eastern frontier, it is arguable that the
Islamic raids and attacks of the 630s would not have achieved the dramatic
success which they did. Maurice had acted timeously in curbing the power
of the Ghassanid federation at a point when it threatened, like any over-
successful quasi-client neighbour, to become too powerful for the good of
its supposed patron.

The usurper Phocas was a convenient scapegoat for the misfortunes that
befell the empire in the early seventh century, and some of the blame should
certainly be allocated to the considerable disruption that attended the coup
of Heraclius’ family in 609— 10, 5(1 but Phocas’ seizure of power does mark a
break. Previous emperors — Zeno when briefly ousted by Basiliscus,
Anastasius when faced by religious rioting and the challenge of Vitalian, or
Justinian during the Nika riot — had been seriously threatened, but in 602 for
the very first time a Constantinopolitan emperor had been overthrown and
lulled, and his corpse displayed for public humiliation. A precedent had
been created. Furthermore, the new emperor was a man with no obvious
experience of court life or administration at Constantinople. It is true that
the empire was a military monarchy, and that military ability was about to
become important again as an imperial quality after a lapse of two centu-
ries, but the secular machinery of rule had to be regulated and, when nec-
essary, dominated. Phocas seems to have been insensitive to the niceties of
the emperor’s ceremonial existence within the capital, and this caused
tension, plotting and hence further misfortunes for the empire.

Heraclius’ coup generated conflicts within many of the empire’s major
cities, with rival supporters appropriating the confrontation of the circus
partisans — Greens for Heraclius, Blues for Phocas — even in places with no
immediate access to a hippodrome. It took time for Heraclius to assert his

49 Theophylact vm.7.10— 1 1; Cameron, Circus Factions 120—2. 50 Olster (1993) ch. 7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

4- THE SUCCESSORS OF JUSTINIAN

authority completely, and this hiatus permitted the Persians to extend their
conquests across the Euphrates and on to the Anatolian plateau. A Roman
counter-offensive failed, and major disasters ensued: in 614 Jerusalem was
captured and the True Cross taken into captivity; Egypt, the granary of
Constantinople, was invaded in 616 and Alexandria fell in 619. To face this
onslaught Heraclius transferred troops from the Balkans, where peace with
the Avars had to be purchased at a rapidly increasing price; the less orga-
nized Slavs ravaged extensively throughout the peninsula and the Aegean
islands. Heraclius himself was almost taken prisoner while attempting to
negotiate an agreement with the Avar Chagan at Heracleia in 623, and it is
clear that the emperor’s authority scarcely stretched beyond the Long Walls
of Constantinople. In this crisis Heraclius took personal charge of the
armies, and energetic campaigning in the 620s gradually turned the military
balance in Anatolia, even though the Persians remained in control of the
whole of the near east and occupied Chalcedon on the Bosphorus. The
year 626 was critical for Roman survival. Constantinople withstood a short
but fierce attack co-ordinated by the Avars; this failure was a serious blow
to the Chagan’s prestige, and contributed to the fragmentation of his fed-
eration. By 627 Heraclius was ravaging Azerbaijan, the spiritual heart of
Persia; victory at Nineveh and an advance on Ctesiphon led to a coup
against Khusro II, and Heraclius was able to arrange a favourable peace
with his successor Shiroe. Thereafter the Sasanid dynasty lapsed into
dynastic chaos.

This triumph, like that of Maurice in 591, could have been the cue for a
determined recovery of Roman affairs in other parts of the empire.
Heraclius made a start. The restoration of the relic of the True Cross to
Jerusalem was a major ceremonial triumph, and he attempted to translate
his divinely achieved military success into a resolution of the long-stand-
ing divide between Monophysites and Chalcedonians. Here, however, his
compromise formulae, the Monergist and Monothelete doctrines, achieved
no more success than similar initiatives by Zeno in the fifth century and by
Justinian and Justin II in the sixth: any move towards the Monophysite
position was regarded as heresy by Chalcedonian traditionalists, especially
in the west. In the Balkans Heraclius may have taken advantage of the col-
lapse of Avar power to make agreements with some of the emerging
smaller tribal groups, such as the Croats and Serbs, but our evidence for
events here is extremely sketchy. Constantinople itself had suffered a con-
siderable loss of population: a major aqueduct destroyed during the Avar
siege in 626 was not repaired for 1 50 years. Further west, if Africa appears
to have remained relatively peaceful, much of Italy was firmly under
Lombard control. The potential for recovery was shattered by the Arab
attacks on Palestine which began in 63 3. Three years later at the Yarmuk a
large imperial army was defeated, and Heraclius then withdrew Roman

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONCLUSION

I 1 1

troops north of the Taurus. At his death in 640 Roman control in Egypt
was virtually confined to Alexandria. In his later years Heraclius had been
seriously ill, and between 638 and 641 dynastic rivalries within the imperial
family again distracted attention from external events at a crucial time. The
world of east Rome, which had united the Balkans and Asia Minor with the
Levant and Egypt, was conclusively destroyed; the near east adopted its
Byzantine shape, with the Anatolian plateau as the frontier between
Christian and Islamic worlds.

Justinian has been described as the last Roman emperor to occupy the
throne, 51 but his immediate successors in their different ways strove to
uphold Roman authority along the important frontiers and to preserve
efficient administration internally. Difficult decisions were repeatedly
required, and Justin II, Tiberius and Maurice took these when necessary,
with a reasonable measure of success. Phocas, however, lacked the author-
ity, and perhaps also the ability and inclination, to sustain these efforts. In
610 Phocas, on the point of being executed, had responded to Heraclius’
question, ‘Is this how you have governed the state?’ with the challenge,
‘Will you be able to do better?’ In spite of the transient victories of the
620s, Heraclius failed the test; the year 602, adopted by Jones, 52 is an appro-
priate terminus for the Roman empire in the east.

51 Ostrogorsky (1956) 77. 52 Jones, LRE.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 5

THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

ROGER COLLINS

I. GAUL: VISIGOTHIC KINGDOM, 41 8— 507

In 418 the patrician Constantius concluded a peace treaty with the
Visigothic king Wallia (41 5—1 8), giving him and his following the province
of Aquitania Secunda and some adjacent territories to occupy. This com-
pleted a process initiated in 416 when Wallia returned his predecessor’s
widow, Galla Placidia, to her brother, the emperor Honorius. He had sub-
sequently campaigned for the emperor in Spain, destroying the kingdoms
of the Alans and of the Siling Vandals. The nature of the Visigothic pres-
ence established in Aquitaine by the treaty of 41 8 remains controversial.
The argument concerns the nature of the process known as hospitalitas.
Traditionally, this has been interpreted as involving a major change in land
ownership, with the Visigothic ‘guests’ receiving two-thirds of all Roman
estates within the designated regions. More recent arguments have seen it
as involving not a physical redistribution of land, which would involve
large-scale expropriation by the empire of aristocratic property, but a revi-
sion of tax obligations, with the Roman landowners having to pay the fiscal
burden on two-thirds of their property directly to the designated
Visigothic recipients rather than to the imperial administration. 1 According
to the view adopted, the Visigoths can be seen in the aftermath of the
treaty either as being settled on the land and widely distributed throughout
southern Aquitaine or as forming a purely military presence, based on a
limited number of urban garrisons.

The next thirty years saw several fluctuations in relations between the
newly established Visigothic kingdom, with its centre in Toulouse, and the
western imperial government. Under Theoderic I (418—51), who was not a
descendant of the previous kings but may have married a daughter of
Alaric I (395—410), the area of southern Gaul under Visigothic control was
expanded whenever Roman authority was too weak to prevent it. Thus,
unsuccessful attempts were made to seize Arles in both 425 and 430. More
general warfare broke out in 436 when the Visigoths tried to take
Narbonne. The use of Hun mercenaries, a practice espoused by Aetius as

1 GofFart, Barbarians and Romans. Durliat (1988). Heather, Goths and Romans 220—4.

I 12

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

GAUL: VISIGOTHIC KINGDOM, 416— 507 I I 3

a means of controlling the Burgundians and the bagaudae, enabled the
imperial government to take the offensive. In 438 Aetius defeated
Theoderic in battle, and in 439 his deputy Litorius was able to besiege
Toulouse. Here, though, the latter was defeated, captured and subsequently
executed. A new peace treaty was made later in the same year.

The abrupt change in imperial policy brought about by the Hun invasion
of Gaul in 4 5 1 led to a new military alliance with the Visigoths, resulting in
the defeat of Attila at the battle of the Catalaunian Plains. Theoderic I was
lulled in the battle, and his eldest son Thorismund (451—3) was persuaded
by Aetius not to pursue the Huns. In 452/3 he renewed his father’s attempts
to capture Arles. His reign proved brief in that he was soon murdered, for
reasons that are not known, by his brothers Theoderic II (453—66) and
Frederic. The end of Aetius’ regime in 454 and the Vandal sack of Rome
in 45 5 provided new opportunities for the Visigothic kingdom to enlarge
itself. The threat from Vandal Africa now replaced that of the Visigoths as
the prime concern of the Roman senate. In consequence Avitus, a Gallic
aristocrat and former tutor of the new Visigothic king, was chosen as
emperor. Theoderic II was ordered by Avitus to invade Spain to counter
the expansion of the Suevic power in the peninsula. 2 This objective was
achieved by the defeat and subsequent killing of Theoderic’s brother-in-
law, the Suevic king Rechiarius, at the battle on the river Orbigo in 45 6. The
Suevic kingdom rapidly broke up, and Visigothic control was established
over most of the south and the east of Spain.

Avitus did not last long as emperor, not least because the Visigoths failed
to provide him with adequate military assistance, and under his successor
Majorian (457—61) there was renewed confrontation between the Visigoths
and the imperial government. The Visigothic king made another unsuc-
cessful attempt to take Arles in 45 8 and was defeated by the new emperor
in 459. Theoderic’s hold on much of Spain was, however, enhanced by the
failure of Majorian’s attempt to invade Africa in 460 and by the ensuing
fragmentation of Roman imperial authority in the west. The Visigothic
kingdom also extended itself in Gaul at this time. Thus, Narbonne was
taken in 461, but the Visigoths encountered competitors in the north on
the Loire, where they came in conflict with the former Roman general
Aegidius. Theoderic’s brother Frederic was lulled in a battle against
Aegidius in 463. Theoderic himself was murdered in 466 in a conspiracy
led by his younger brother Euric. Sidonius Apollinaris provides in one of
his letters ( Ep . 1.2) both a pen portrait of Theoderic and a somewhat rhe-
torical account of daily life at his court.

Euric (466—84) took advantage of the disintegration of the power of the
western emperors in the 470s to occupy the Auvergne in 474/ 5 , and to

2 Hydat. Chron. 173, ed. Tranoy SChret. 218, p. 154. For dating see Muhlberger (1990) 279— 31 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

114

capture Arles and Marseilles in 476. In the same year, a Roman general in
his service carried out an unsuccessful invasion of Italy. In Spain the
remaining areas still under direct imperial rule, notably the province of
Tarraconensis, were brought under Visigothic control by campaigns in the
same decade. 3 Thus, by the end of Euric’s reign the Visigothic kingdom
extended from the Rhone to the Loire and also encompassed all but the
north-western corner of the Iberian peninsula. Euric is recorded by Isidore
of Seville as having issued laws, but it is not certain that the extant frag-
mentary code that is called the Codex Euricanus is his work or that of his
son. 4 He is also reported by Gregory of Tours to have been a persecutor
of his Catholic subjects, being, like most of the Visigoths, an Arian.’’
However, there is no contemporary evidence for such a view. Sidonius
merely confirms that he was strongly committed to Arian theology. 6

Further territorial expansion came to an end under Euric’s son Alaric II
(484—507), but considerable advances were made in the establishment of a
stable Romano-Gothic state. These culminated in the holding of a major
council of the Catholic church in the kingdom at Agde in 506, and the issuing
in the same year of an abbreviated corpus of imperial laws and juristic writ-
ings that came to be known as The Breviary of Alaric ? Under this king, as
under his father, a number of Gallo-Roman and Hispano-Roman landown-
ers are found in royal service, and there are no real indications that the relig-
ious divide between Allans and Catholics served to undermine political
loyalty to the Visigothic monarchy. Where Alaric II did face a problem was
in the rising power of the Franks to the north of his kingdom. One conse-
quence of this was the making of close ties with the Ostrogothic monarchy
in Italy, symbolized not least by Alaric’s marriage to Theodegotha, daughter
of its ruler Theoderic (493—526). An alliance between the Frankish king
Clovis and the Burgundian ruler Gundobad led to a joint attack on the
Visigothic kingdom in 507. Alaric II was killed in battle against the Franks at
Vouille near Poitiers, and Toulouse was sacked. In the course of 507/8 all of
the Visigothic kingdom north of the Pyrenees, other than the coastal region
of Septimania, passed into Frankish control. In Spain, where Visigothic set-
tlement may have been increasing since the 490s, what was effectively a new
kingdom came into being in the aftermath of the battle of Vouille.

II. THE BURGUNDIAN KINGDOM, 412— 534

Following the collapse of the Rhine frontier in the winter of 406 and
the migration across Gaul of the Vandal— Sueve— Alan confederacy, the

3 Chron. Gall. A dxi, nos. 651—3, ed. Mommsen pp. 664—5.

4 Historia Gothorum 35, ed. Rodriguez Alonso (1975) 228.

5 Historiae 11.25, e d- Krusch and Levison, MGH SRM 1.70. 1. 6 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.6.6.

7 See ch. 10 (Charles-Edwards), p. 285 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BURGUNDIAN KINGDOM, 412— 534 I I 5

Burgundians crossed the river and established a kingdom in the vicinity of
Mainz. In the political vacuum that followed they gave their backing to the
short-lived Gallic imperial regime of Iovinus (41 1— 13) and Sebastianus
(41 2—1 3). Little is known of the Burgundians after the destruction of these
usurpers by the Visigoths. In 435 they negotiated a treaty with the Roman
magister militum , Aetius, following some conflict, but soon after they were
attacked by the Huns (436/7). The latter may have been in the employ of
Aetius, as he used them against other groups in Gaul at this time. The
Burgundian king Gundichar was killed and many of his followers massa-
cred. 8 In 442 the survivors were established in Savoy, probably on the
orders of Aetius. According to the Chronicle of 452 this involved a division
of lands, implying the application of the system of hospitalitas ? As in the
case of the Visigoths, argument continues as to whether this should be
taken to mean a physical division of estates or a fiscal procedure.

The Burgundians next appear, now under the rule of two kings, Gundioc
and Chilperic I, as allies of the Visigoths. In 456 they accompanied
Theoderic II on his campaign against the Suevic ruler Rechiarius, and in
consequence were given more extensive lands to occupy, probably in the
central Rhone valley and to the east of it. By 463 Gundioc had received the
Roman military office of fnagister militum, possibly from his brother-in-law
Ricimer, who dominated the imperial government in Italy at this time. 1 "
Nothing more is known of Chilperic I. Gundioc probably died in 473/4,
and the kingdom was divided between his four sons. One of these,
Gundobad, had succeeded his uncle Ricimer as magister militum in Italy in 472
and had provided the main military prop for the imperial regime of
Glycerius (473—4). He abandoned Italy to go and contend with his brothers
Godigisel, Chilperic II and Godomar for part of the Burgundian kingdom.

The settlement reached in 474 was unstable, and conflicts between the
brothers continued. Chilperic II, who controlled Lyons and Geneva, was
murdered by Gundobad at some unspecified date. In 500 Godigisel
obtained the help of the Frankish king Clovis and was able to expel
Gundobad from his kingdom, forcing him to take refuge in Avignon.
However, after the Franks left, Gundobad besieged and captured Godigisel
at Vienne and tortured him to death. 11 As nothing more is known of
Godomar, it seems that Gundobad thereby reunited all the parts of the
Burgundian kingdom under his own rule. He was an Arian, but was willing
to receive theological treatises from Avitus, the Catholic bishop of Vienne.
Various of the laws that he issued have survived in the code that was prom-
ulgated in the reign of his son. 12

8 Prosper, Epit. Chron. 1322, ed. Mommsen MGH AA 9, p. 475; Chron. Gall. A cccclii 118, ed.
Mommsen p. 660. 9 Chron. Gall. A cccclii 128, ed. Mommsen p. 660. 10 PLRE 11.523— 4.

11 Marti Episcopi Aventicensis Chronica s.a. 500, ed. Mommsen MGH AA 1 1, p. 234. On Chilperic II
see Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.28, ed. Krusch and Levison pp. 73—4. 12 See ch. 10, pp. 284—6 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I 1 6 5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Gundobad’s son Sigismund seems to have shared the kingdom prior to
his father’s death in 516, and during this joint reign he converted to
Catholicism. He subsequently founded the monastery of Saint-Maurice at
Agaune. His marriage to Ostrogotho, the daughter of Theoderic the
Ostrogoth, was part of the complex web of diplomatic ties that the latter
created for the defence of Italy. In 522 Sigismund, who had by this time
remarried, executed his son Sigeric for his possible involvement in a con-
spiracy. This was certainly regarded by some as unjust, and may have con-
tributed to the subsequent political weakness of the kingdom. In 523, in the
course of a Frankish invasion, Sigismund and his family were surrendered
by their own followers to the Frankish king Chlodomer, who subsequently
had them thrown down a well near Orleans. Sigismund’s brother Godomar
(524—32) took over the kingdom, and held off a renewed Frankish attack in
524 in which Chlodomer was lulled. Godomar was less lucky when they
tried again in 5 32. He was defeated, captured and imprisoned, and in 5 34
the Burgundian kingdom was divided up between the Frankish monarchs. 13

III. FRANKISH GAUL, 48 1 — 5 96

A Frankish presence was established in the far north-east of Gaul in the
mid fourth century in the time of Magnentius (350—3), and the Franks were
never thereafter dislodged. Other Franks remained east of the Rhine, and
the limited nature of the evidence makes it impossible to delineate the cul-
tural and political differences between the various groups. The breakdown
of imperial administration and of the Roman military presence in the
second half of the fifth century provided opportunities for some of the
Frankish leaders to aggrandize themselves and build up powerful follow-
ings, in the way that various other Germanic military commanders were
doing at this time. 14 The most successful of these was Childeric, whose
probable tomb was discovered at Tournai in 1653. His power was built up
partly on the basis of alliance with some of the competing Roman com-
manders jockeying for control of parts of northern Gaul in the 460s and
possibly also on some support from his wife’s people, the Thuringians. He
may have helped Aegidius defeat the Visigoths on the Loire in 463. In 469
in alliance with a Roman count, Paul, he defeated Odoacer and an army of
Saxons at Angers. In the late 470s he was discussing, probably with the
same Odoacer, now established as king in Italy, a possible joint campaign
against the Alamans.

On his death, usually dated by the implications of Gregory of Tours’
narrative to 481, his son Clovis (481?— 51 1?) took over the kingdom. Clovis

13 In general the Chronicle of Marius of Avenches has here been followed in preference to Greg. Tur.
Hist. 111.5—6, ed. Krusch and Levison pp. 100—3. See also PLRE n: Gundobadus 1, Sigismund,
Godomarus 2. 14 Collins (1991) 94—108.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I I 8 5. THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

transformed its size and scale in a series of effective campaigns against his
rivals. The first of these was probably Syagrius, the son of Aegidius, who
controlled Soissons, though the wider extent of his authority may have
been exaggerated. 15 The general chronology of Clovis’ wars derives from
Gregory of Tours’ account, and has proved contentious. 16 It seems clear
enough that in the 490s he undertook some campaign against the Alamans,
possibly in alliance with some of the Rhineland Franks, known as the
Ripuarians. In 500 he was the ally of the Burgundian king Godigisel in the
latter’s war against his brother Gundobad. This would seem to have been
undertaken in return for payment rather than further territorial expansion.
Clovis’ best-known conflict was that with the Visigoths in 507. In the after-
math of the battle of Vouille he and his Burgundian ally Gundobad
overran virtually all of the Visigothic territories in Gaul. Only an
Ostrogothic intervention in 508 prevented them from acquiring control of
the Mediterranean coastal regions as well. Gregory of Tours places a series
of brief campaigns and conspiracies leading to the elimination of some of
the minor Frankish kings around Cologne, Cambrai and Le Mans in the
final phase of Clovis’ life, but he may have been organizing his material
more thematically than chronologically. The exact date of Clovis’ death,
normally given as 51 1, is not easy to determine, and it could be as late as
513. By this time he had made himself master of most of northern Gaul
and Aquitaine.

As well as for his military exploits, Clovis is noted as the first of the
Frankish rulers to accept Christianity — though it is arguable that his father,
usually thought of as a pagan, had been a Christian. Gregory of Tours’
apparent dating of Clovis’ baptism to the later 490s has not been accepted,
and it is now normally seen as taking place in 508, linked to the war against
the Visigoths. Although it is unlikely that his conversion led to an upsurge
of support for him on the part of the Catholic Gallo-Roman subjects of
the Arian Visigothic king, it did make Clovis a more acceptable diplomatic
partner for the emperor Anastasius I, who awarded him an honorary con-
sulship in 508. Recently and persuasively, it has also been suggested that
Clovis may have had some flirtation with Arianism prior to his formal
acceptance of Catholicism. 17 Indeed, it is possible that he had actually been
an Arian. Equally plagued by later myth-making is Clovis’ supposed
responsibility for the first version of the Frankish law code, Lex Salica.
Although this is frequently said to have been promulgated by him in the
period 507—1 1, the evidence to support such an affirmation is minimal. 18

The decade following Clovis’ death is peculiarly badly documented. It is
clear that by the early 520s his kingdom had come to be divided between

15 James (1988b). 16 Van de Vyver (1936, 1937 , 1938). 17 Wood (1985).

18 See ch. 10 (Charles-Edwards), pp. 271—8 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FRANKISH GAUL, 48 I — 5 96

H 9

his four sons: Theuderic I (51 1? — 5 33), the product of a first marriage, and
Chlodomer (51 1? — 524), Childebert I ( 5 1 1 ? — 5 5 8) and Chlothar I (51 1 ? — 5 61)
who came from his marriage to Chlothild, daughter of the Burgundian king
Chilperic II. Like their father, these kings had to build up their own per-
sonal followings by effective war leadership to be able to acquire the land
and treasure with which to reward their supporters. In this respect each pre-
sented a threat to the other, and such rivalries between members of the
ruling house became a standard feature of the political life of sixth-century
Gaul. Initially, however, a number of vulnerable neighbours presented the
best opportunities for territorial aggrandizement. In 523 and 524 the three
younger rulers combined against the Burgundian kingdom with some
success at first. The death in battle of Chlodomer in 524 put an end to this,
but provided alternative rewards: Childebert and Chlothar murdered his
children and divided his kingdom up between them.

The best opportunities for building up a powerful realm probably
existed along the eastern frontiers of Francia. This area was dominated by
the senior branch of the descendants of Clovis in the persons of
Theuderic I (c. 51 1—3 3) and his son Theudebert 1(53 3—48). They built up a
hegemony over most of the peoples living immediately to the east of the
Rhine, notably the Frisians, the Jutes, the Saxons and the Thuringians. The
outbreak of war between the emperor Justinian and the Ostrogothic
kingdom in 5 3 5 provided fresh ways of expansion. Theudebert in a series
of extant letters presented himself to Justinian as a powerful potential
Catholic ally against the Arian Goths. 19 At the same time he negotiated with
the Ostrogoths, who sought, if not his active help, then at least his neutral-
ity. Their king Vitigis ceded Provence to Theudebert in 5 36 with just such
a hope. In the outcome, Theudebert deceived both sides and in 5 39 invaded
Italy to try to annex more territory. Although, after taking Milan, his expe-
dition was forced to retreat by the outbreak of disease, Frankish control
was established over several regions in the north of Italy. These were
eventually regained by the empire in the time of his son Theudebald
(548—5 5). It is possible that Theudebert aspired to even greater things, and
Justinian ceded northern Pannonia to the Lombards not least to block the
perceived threat of a Frankish move into the Balkans, possibly aimed at
Constantinople.

The early death of Theudebald brought this branch of the Merovingian
dynasty (so named from Clovis’ possible grandfather Merovech) to an end.
The kingdom built up by these monarchs was taken over by Chlothar I, but
the Frankish position east of the Rhine began to weaken immediately, with
successful Saxon revolts. This shrinking of the eastern territories did not
immediately matter in that, on the death without heirs of his brother

19 Epist. Austras. 1 8—20, ed. Gundlach MGH SRM m, pp. 13 1—3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I 20

5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Childebert I in 5 5 8, Chlothar was able to unite all of the Frankish kingdoms
under himself. However, Chlothar faced problems within his own immedi-
ate family through the ambitions of his eldest son Chramn, who had con-
spired with Childebert, perhaps hoping to succeed to the latter’s kingdom,
and who rebelled in 5 60 in Brittany. He was defeated and burnt to death
along with his family.

The death of Chlothar I led to a new partition of the Frankish territo-
ries amongst his four surviving sons: Charibert I (561—7), Sigebert I
(561—75), Chilperic I (561—84) and Guntramn (561—92). Each had a
primary residence — Paris, Rheims, Soissons and Orleans respectively — but,
as in the division following the death of Clovis, compact territorial king-
doms were not created. Each brother had an interest in most parts of
Francia, and enclaves of one kingdom might be found in territory largely
belonging to another. Such apparent anomalies are probably explained by
the pattern of personal adherence to the various monarchs on the part of
the leading Frankish and Gallo-Roman (a distinction that was becoming
harder to make in most parts of Gaul) landowners. Changes in allegiance
could have considerable impact on the strength of the individual king-
doms, and competition between the monarchs was intensified by the
increasing difficulties to be faced in trying to expand their territories. The
Frankish hegemony over peoples east of the Rhine became increasingly
tenuous at this time and was threatened by Avar pressure. The Lombards
established a kingdom in Italy after 568, and Visigothic resistance to
Frankish raids across the Pyrenees became more effective in the reign of
Reccared (586—601).

The death of Charibert I in 567 enabled his brothers to divide his
kingdom, but open conflict between them soon followed. Chilperic tried
to take Tours and Poitiers, which were in that part of Charibert’s former
kingdom claimed by Sigebert, and civil war ensued. Guntramn, who had a
territorial dispute of his own with Sigebert, was persuaded to join
Chilperic. Although forced to make peace in 574, Chilperic and Guntramn
resumed the fighting in 575 . Following the defeat of Chilperic near Rheims,
Guntramn made a separate peace. Chilperic’s kingdom was only saved from
being overrun when, thanks probably to his wife Fredegund, hired assas-
sins murdered Sigebert. Sigebert’s kingdom passed to his son Childebert II
(575—96), who was still a minor. The same occurred after the murder of
Chilperic in 5 84, when his kingdom passed to his young son Chlothar II
(584—629). In both cases the presence of an under-age king exacerbated
factional conflicts amongst the aristocracy, jockeying for power and the
prospects of enhanced rewards, either at a local level or in the royal courts.
The premature death of his sons had left Guntramn with no male heirs,
and in 585 he came to an agreement with Childebert II, who thereby inher-
ited his uncle’s kingdom on his death in 592. This left Childebert as by far

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SPAIN: THE SUEVIC KINGDOMS, 425 — 584

I 2 1

the more powerful of the two surviving Merovingian monarchs, but on his
own death when aged only twenty- five, his realm was redivided between his
two young sons, Theudebert II (596—612) and Theuderic II (596—613).

IV. SPAIN: THE SUEVIC KINGDOMS, 425 — 584

The Sueves who entered the Iberian peninsula in 409 benefited from the
elimination by the Visigoths of two of the other components of their con-
federacy, the Siling Vandals and the Alans, in 417/ 18, and then from the
removal of the other remaining ally, the Hasding Vandals, into Africa in
429. This left them free to expand their authority from the north-west of
the peninsula, where they had first established themselves, over most of the
south and the centre as well. Under their king Rechila (438—48) the prov-
inces of Baetica and Lusitania were conquered by 441, and from 439
Merida became the Suevic capital. A last imperial attempt to regain these
regions was defeated in 446. Rechila’s son Rechiarius (448—56) was the first
Germanic king to become a Catholic Christian, and his decision would
suggest that the Sueves, previously noted for their plundering of the
Galician civilians, were looking towards better relations with their new
Hispano-Roman subjects and with the vestigial imperial government. After
conducting raids in the Ebro valley in 448 and 449 Rechiarius made a treaty
with Rome in 452, which was renewed in 454. However, when in 455
Rechiarius invaded the province of Tarraconensis, the last portion of the
peninsula to remain under rule from Rome, his brother-in-law, the
Visigothic king Theoderic II, was sent against him by the emperor Avitus
(45 5—7). In 456 Rechiarius was defeated in a battle on the river Orbigo, cap-
tured and executed (see p. 1 13 above). In the aftermath the Visigoths estab-
lished their rule over much of the former Suevic kingdom in the south and
the east, leaving a series of rival Suevic leaders to fight for dominance in
the north-west. One of these, Rechimund (4 5 9—6 1) , may have been related
to the previous royal dynasty, but the other competitors — Maldras
(456-60), Framtano (457-8), Frumarius (460—5) and Remismund (464-?) -
probably were not. 20 Under the last of these the Sueves were once more
united, and Remismund is recorded as opening diplomatic links with the
emperor Leo I when faced with renewed conflict with the Visigoths.

The termination of the Chronicle of Hydatius in 469 marks a caesura in
information on the Sueves, and it is not until the mid sixth century that they
re-emerge into historiographical light. Confined to the north-west, in more
or less the boundaries of the province of Gallaecia, the Suevic kingdom
was now surrounded by that of the Visigoths, under whose influence a

20 Chronology followed is that of Muhlberger (1990) 308—11; that in the entries in PLRE n can be
erroneous.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

122

5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

conversion to Arian Christianity had taken place at some unknown period.
However, communications were maintained by sea with the west coast of
France and the Loire valley. Contacts with Tours, including the despatch
from there of some relics of St Martin, played a part in the conversion of
the Sueves from Arian to Catholic belief. Another important participant in
this poorly reported process was the Pannonian ascetic Martin, who estab-
lished a monastery at Dumio (Guimaraes) and subsequently became
bishop of Braga. The dating of these events is uncertain but must have pre-
ceded the holding of the first council of the Catholic bishops in the Suevic
kingdom at Braga in 561. This was in the third year of the reign of a king
Ariamir. By the time of the holding of a second council in 572 the monarch
was Miro (570—83). Politically the Suevic kingdom was still overshadowed
by that of the Visigoths, and Miro died while aiding the Visigothic king
Leovigild in the latter’s civil war with his son Hermenegild. When Miro’s
son Eboric ( 5 8 3—4) was overthrown by a certain Audeca, Leovigild invaded
the kingdom in 585. As the Chronicle of John of Biclar describes it, he
‘placed the people of the Sueves, their treasure and their homeland under
his power, making it a province of the Goths’. 21 It was never re-established.

V. VISIGOTHIC SPAIN, 456— 601

The permanent extension of Visigothic power into the Iberian peninsula
resulted from the campaign undertaken by Theoderic II (45 3—66) against
the Sueves in 45 6. Much of Baetica, Carthaginiensis and southern Lusitania
came under Visigothic rule as a consequence, and Tarraconensis was added
as the result of campaigns carried out by the generals of the next Visigothic
king, Euric (466—84) in 474/6. Only northern Lusitania and Gallaecia then
remained outside the kingdom, which continued to be centred on
Toulouse. References in the marginalia to two manuscripts of the Chronicle
of Victor of Tunnuna, which have been ascribed to an otherwise lost
‘Chronicle of Zaragoza’, suggest that a more intensive Visigothic settle-
ment of Spain took place in the 490s. This may have facilitated the survi-
val of the kingdom in the aftermath of the battle of Vouille in 507. While
most of the Visigothic territories in Gaul were then overrun by the Franks
and the Burgundians, Spain was retained and Narbonne and then
Barcelona replaced Toulouse as the royal centre.

After Alaric II’s death at Vouille the kingship was taken by his illegitimate
son Gesalic (507—11), but he was subsequently ejected by Ostrogothic
forces sent by Theoderic to install his grandson Amalaric (51 1—3 1). This
king, the son of Alaric II by his marriage to Theoderic’s daughter
Theodegotha, was still a child, and effective power seems to have remained

21 Chronicon anno III Mauricii, 2, ed. J. Campos (i960) 93.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

VISIGOTHIC SPAIN, 456— 601

I2 3

in the hands of Ostrogothic regents appointed by Theoderic. Only on the
latter’s death in 526 did Amalaric exercise personal rule. In 531 he was
defeated by the Franks near Narbonne and was murdered at Barcelona
while in flight. He was replaced by the Ostrogothic general Theoderic, also
known as Theudis (5 3 1—48), who had previously served as regent during
the minority of Amalaric. Little is known of his reign, but in his time the
Catholic church in Spain was able to hold a number of provincial councils.
An attempt to extend the kingdom into North Africa proved abortive.
Ceuta was occupied by a Visigothic army, but they were rapidly expelled by
eastern Roman forces. Theudis was murdered in consequence of an
obscure personal vendetta, a fate that also befell his successor, Theudisclus
( 548 - 9 )-

A period of weakness for the monarchy ensued. The next king, Agila
(549—54), provoked a revolt in Cordoba and, in trying to suppress it, was
defeated, lost his treasure and had his son lulled. Another Visigothic noble
called Athanagild (5 52—68) soon after rebelled against him in Seville. In 552,
during the course of the ensuing civil war, the emperor Justinian sent an
army to assist one of the parties, which then succeeded in establishing an
imperial enclave along the south-east coast of the peninsula from
Cartagena to Medina Sidonia, though not extending into the Guadalquivir
valley as is sometimes assumed. 22 Although this hostile presence never
developed into the full-scale attempt at imperial reconquest that had taken
place in Africa and Italy, this territory was not finally recovered by the
Visigothic kingdom until the mid 620s. After Justinian’s expedition, led by
Liberius, had established itself, the unsuccessful Agila was murdered by his
own men in Merida. Athanagild, having reunited the kingdom and estab-
lished a new capital at Toledo, failed to make headway against the imperial
forces in the south-east. Since he lacked male heirs, another Visigothic
noble, Liuva I (568—73), was chosen as king on his death.

Faced widi Frankish threats on the Pyrenees and in Septimania, die
new king established his brodier Leovigild (569—86) as joint ruler, initially
with responsibility for the south. This new monarch was by far the most
effective Visigothic ruler since the fifth century. In a series of campaigns
in the 570s he regained some of die imperial territory in the south, recon-
quered Cordoba, which had been lost by Agila, and suppressed various
independent local authorities that had come into being in the north of the
peninsula. He also fought against the Basques, and established a new
town in the middle of Spain, which he called Reccopolis after his second
son Reccared. In 579 he set up his elder son Hermenegild as joint ruler in
the south, but in 5 80 the latter broke free of his father’s control. When
Hermenegild began to negotiate with the emperor and, probably in 5 82,

22 Thompson (1969) 320—34.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

124

5. THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

became the first Visigothic king to convert from Arianism to Catholicism,
Leovigild invaded his kingdom. Merida was taken in 582, Seville in 5 83 and
Cordoba in 5 84. Hermenegild, sent into internal exile, was subsequendy
killed.

This conflict should not be regarded as a religious war, but it did make
clear the need to resolve the religious divide. Leovigild had reunited virtu-
ally all of the peninsula, a process that culminated in his conquest of the
Suevic kingdom in 585, and had rebuilt the power and prestige of the
Visigothic monarchy. However, the Catholic church, whose bishops were
often the most influential local notables and whose interests were best
served by a strengthened central government, could not rally to the cause
of an uncompromisingly Arian king. Although there were rumours that
Leovigild contemplated conversion in the last phase of his reign, it was left
to his son Reccared (586—601) to take this step. Following the king’s own
personal conversion in 5 87, most of the Arian clergy followed suit, and in
5 89 a great ecclesiastical council was held in Toledo to celebrate the formal
conversion of the Visigoths, and to settle any outstanding practical prob-
lems. Some local Visigothic potentates and some of the Arian metropoli-
tan bishops, who stood to lose their regional authority, tried to resist this
process, and a number of unsuccessful revolts occurred in the years
5 87—90. From this point on, however, the issue became a dead one.

VI. VANDAL AFRICA, 429—533

Of the four components of the loose confederacy of peoples that crossed
the Rhine in the winter of 406/7 and entered Spain in 409, the Alans and
the Siling Vandals were perhaps the most powerful, and they established
themselves in the richest parts of the Iberian peninsula. However, they
were destroyed as coherent units by the Visigoths in 416/ 17, and the sur-
vivors merged with the Hasding Vandals under their king Gunderic
(406—28). They were subjected to attack by imperial armies in 422, and it
may have been their inability to achieve a treaty with the Roman govern-
ment that drove them into moving to the potentially greater safety of
North Africa in 429. On the other hand, there may be some truth in the
report of Procopius that they were invited to cross into Africa by its mili-
tary ruler Boniface, who was then in conflict with Felix, magister militum in
Italy. 23

Following the crossing of the straits the Vandals, now led by Gunderic’s
half-brother Geiseric (428—77), moved eastwards along the coast, and took
Hippo following a siege in 430. In 435 a treaty was made with the imperial
government, giving them control of coastal Numidia. In 439 Geiseric

23 Procop. Wars m. 3 . 23 — 4 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

VANDAL AFRICA, 429—533

125

broke this by invading the province of Africa Proconsular^ and capturing
Carthage. In 440 a Vandal fleet raided Sicily. Under Aetius the western
empire was too involved in conflict with the Visigoths in Gaul to under-
take any punitive measures. An eastern expedition sent by Theodosius II in
441 only proceeded as far as Sicily, and in 442 the western government
made a new treaty with the Vandals. This placed the provinces of
Proconsular^, Byzacena and eastern Numidia under their control. A future
marriage between Geiseric’s son Huneric and Eudocia, the daughter of
Valentinian III, may have been an element in this treaty, and this justified
Geiseric’s despatch of a fleet to Rome in 45 5 when Valentinian was over-
thrown by Petronius Maximus, and Eudocia forcibly married to the new
emperor’s son. Rome was subjected to a second and perhaps more vigor-
ous sack, and Valentinian Ill’s widow and daughters were taken back to
Carthage. At the same time Corsica and the Balearic islands were subjected
to Vandal rule, and Sardinia was added in 468.

The Vandal attack on Rome, and the wider damage inflicted around the
western Mediterranean littoral by Vandal sea-power, made the elimination
of their kingdom in Africa a primary aim of imperial policy over the next
few decades. In 460 and 468 naval expeditions were planned against the
kingdom. In the first case, the western fleet was captured near Cartagena,
and the second fleet, sent by Leo I, was destroyed by fire ships on the
African coast. In 472 the western regime controlled by Ricimer came to
terms with Geiseric, making his son’s brother-in-law, Olybrius, emperor. A
treaty was made subsequently with the eastern emperor Zeno, probably in
476. Despite this high degree of success in repelling imperial attempts at
the reconquest of Africa and in making themselves masters of all the larger
islands in the western Mediterranean, the Vandals were less successful mil-
itarily in Africa in combating the growing pressure of the Berbers. The
former imperial limes in the south could not be maintained, and the Vandal
army suffered a major defeat by the Berbers in the reign of Thrasamund
(496—523) and another under Hilderic (523— 30). 24

Geiseric and the Vandals had regarded the African provincials, especially
the Roman nobility, with considerable suspicion. Members of many leading
families were exiled and had their lands expropriated. Similarly, the religious
conflict between Arian Vandals and Catholic Romans was unusually savage.
Many Catholic bishops and priests were subjected to internal exile, and their
churches and landed endowments given to Arians instead. A highly
coloured account of their suffering was presented in Victor of Vita’s History
of the Persecution of the African Province of c. 484. Both of these phenomena
appear symptomatic of considerable unease on the part of the Vandal
rulers, and it is very probable that there was no significant settlement of the

24 Procop. Wars in. 8. 14— 29; 9.3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

iz6 5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Germanic population on the land. The ill-treatment of the Catholic clergy,
which had begun under Geiseric, intensified under Huneric (477—84). His
brother Gunthamund (484—96) reversed this policy and permitted the
Catholic clergy and others to return from exile. In the reign of Thrasamund
(496—523), another of the sons of Geiseric, bishops once more were exiled,
this time primarily to Sardinia. However, this monarch allowed some of the
exiled bishops to return, and even permitted Arian— Catholic theological
debates. His successor Hilderic (523—30), the son of Huneric, was also,
through his mother Eudocia, a grandson of Valentinian III and perhaps in
consequence the most Romanophile of the Vandal kings. He finally put an
end to the exile of the Catholic bishops, which had been reimposed in the
last years of Thrasamund, and made amicable diplomatic advances to the
empire. This reversed a previous policy of closer ties with the Ostrogothic
kingdom in Italy, symbolized by his predecessor Thrasamund’s marriage to
Amalafrida, the sister of Theoderic.

These moves on the part of Hilderic led to his overthrow by his nephew
Gailamir in 530, and this in turn proved to be the diplomatic casus belli that
led in 533 to the emperor Justinian I sending an expedition, ostensibly to
restore Hilderic. A rebellion was fomented in Sardinia, which led to the
despatch there of an army and fleet under Gailamir’s brother Tzazo, and
this enabled the imperial expedition led by Belisarius to reach Africa and
disembark unchallenged. Landing ten miles from Carthage, Belisarius
advanced on the city and defeated Gailamir and a hastily assembled army.
When Tzazo and his forces had been recalled from Sardinia, Gailaimir
attempted to retake Carthage but was convincingly defeated. His brother
was killed and he and his remaining followers retreated into Numidia. They
were blockaded in the mountains, and forced to surrender in 534. The
remaining Vandals were then shipped back to Constantinople to be
absorbed into the imperial army. As a distinct ethnic unit they disappeared.

VII. OSTROGOTHIC ITALY, 493—535

The Ostrogothic invasion of Italy that followed from the agreement made
in 488 between their king Theoderic and the emperor Zeno helped to give
this people a new identity. For the previous forty years a very mixed
Germanic population had maintained itself precariously in the eastern
Balkans under a variety of rival leaders. In the later historiographical tradi-
tion of the Italian Ostrogothic kingdom, this was presented as a conflict
between a legitimate and supposedly ancient Amal dynasty and such parve-
nus as Theoderic Strabo (d. 481) and his son Recitach (d. 484). It was only
on the murder of the latter, which Theoderic the Amal arranged for Zeno,
that the various rival groups were first united under a single leader. Failing
to obtain a secure position in imperial service, Theoderic was persuaded to

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

OSTROGOTHIC ITALY, 493—555

I2 7

take his confederacy to Italy to dispossess Odoacer (476—93). The ensuing
migration and four years of fighting began the process of uniting these dis-
parate Germanic elements into a more coherent and ethnically self-con-
scious people. 25

The Ostrogothic conquest of Italy was initially hard-fought. Moving
westwards, they had to defeat die Gepids around Sirmium in 488 before
forcing their way into Italy in August 489. Odoacer was defeated in battle
twice that year and again in 490, after he had for a while besieged
Theoderic in Pavia. After a battle near the Addua in August, Odoacer fled
to Ravenna, which the Ostrogoths proved unable to take. The blockade
of the city lasted until 493, when an agreement was finally made whereby
Theoderic and Odoacer undertook joint rule of Italy. This proved mean-
ingless, as, once admitted to the city, Theoderic rapidly secured the
murder of Odoacer and his family. Such an outcome may have been
prompted by the attitude of some of the leading Roman office-holders
who refused to enter Theoderic’s service while their former master still
lived. This was the position of Liberius, who became praetorian prefect
of Italy immediately following Odoacer’s death. 26 In general, the seizure
of power by Theoderic was marked by remarkable continuity as far as the
Roman aristocracy was concerned. Families and individuals who had
served Odoacer continued to hold office under the Ostrogoths. Despite
some initial hesitation, and following three embassies to Constantinople,
the new eastern emperor Anastasius I (492—518) finally recognized
Theoderic as ruler of Italy around 497.

The Roman landowners had already found the regime of Odoacer an
improvement on the political instability and military disorder of the last
twenty years of western imperial rule, and they were to benefit even more
from the government of Theoderic. 27 In particular, the external security of
Italy attained a level previously unmatched in the fifth century. The defeats
of the Alamans at the hands of the Franks in the 490s led a significant body
of them to put themselves under Theoderic’s protection. They were then
settled in the Alps to defend the northern passes into Italy. Further north,
the defence of Italy and a wider stability in the region were augmented by
an alliance with the Thuringians. In 5 1 o the Thuringian king Herminafrid
married Theoderic’s niece Amalaberga. The eastern approaches were
secured by the conquest of Pannonia in 504—5. Theoderic’s general Pitzia
took Sirmium from the Gepids and defeated a Bulgar army sent by the
emperor. The Heruls on the Danube were also at this time brought into the
Ostrogothic political orbit — a change marked by Theoderic’s adoption of
their king Rodulf as his ‘son by arms’. To the south, good relations were

25 Heather, Goths and Romans 227—308. 26 PLRE 11, s.v Liberius 3, 677—81.

27 See ch. 19 (Humphries), pp. 544-8 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

128

5. THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

achieved with Vandal Africa; this new concord was again symbolized by a
marriage, that of Theoderic’s sister to the Vandal king Thrasamund
(496—523). To the west, the dominance in southern Gaul of the Visigoths,
who had sent help to Theoderic in 490, was assured by family ties and sen-
timents of common ethnicity.

This western Mediterranean ‘co-prosperity sphere’ that Theoderic and
his advisers created was to prove fragile. The empire, initially grudingly tol-
erant of Theoderic’s position, became hostile after the Ostrogothic seizure
of Pannonia. An imperial fleet was despatched to the Adriatic in 508 and
carried out some raids on the Italian coast, but the troubled internal poli-
tics of the empire in the second half of the reign of Anastasius prevented
the outbreak of more extensive hostilities. Anastasius turned instead to the
use of diplomatic means to try to undermine the Ostrogothic kingdom.
This was well matched by the territorial ambitions of the Frankish king
Clovis, whose hopes of expansion southwards were blocked by the Gothic
presence. In the aftermath of the defeat of the Visigoths at Vouille in 507,
Theoderic was forced to intervene directly in Gaul and annex Provence to
secure the western approaches to Italy. In 5 1 1 he brought the whole
Visigothic kingdom under his hegemony, by sending an army to expel
Gesalic and to install his grandson Amalaric (51 1—3 1) as king. Frankish
aggression, abetted by imperial diplomacy, was held in check, but the Herul
kingdom was destroyed in 510 by the Lombards. The Thuringians at least
remained secure until after Theoderic’s death in 526. Only in 5 34 was their
kingdom overrun by the Franks and Flerminafrid killed. In the south,
Vandal friendship with the Ostrogothic kingdom survived until Hilderic
succeeded Thrasamund in 523, when the new king’s rapprochement with
Constantinople led Theoderic to order the building of a fleet in 526 against
the possibility of attacks from Africa.

Internally, Theoderic’s achievements were potentially longer-lasting. His
programme of public works, involving the building or restoring of aque-
ducts, baths, defensive walls and palaces in many of the principal cities of
Italy, conferred immediate benefits and gave a sense of patronage that was
imperial in character, as was his formal adventus into the city of Rome in
500. Public entertainments and charities were also supported, including a
restoration of the corn dole to the poor of Rome. This emphasis on the
revival of traditional features of public life, together with the use made of
senators in the administration, seems to have endeared Theoderic’s regime
to many of the Roman aristocracy. Others were less willing to see the rule
of an Arian Germanic soldier as a permanent replacement for imperial
government, and such sentiments surfaced in the accusations made against
Boethius, the former consul and magister officiorum . He was accused by some
fellow senators, late in 523, of shielding traitors in the senate. After trial by
the praefectus urbis, he was condemned and executed in 524. Despite his later

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

OSTROGOTHIC ITALY, 493—555

129

reputation and the propagandistic use of the episode in subsequent impe-
rial historiography, there is no evidence that this and the parallel execution
of his father-in-law Symmachus led to any alienation of the Roman aris-
tocracy from the regime of Theoderic.

The Ostrogothic king was faced with problems over his succession.
Lacking a son of his own, in 515 he married his daughter Amalasuintha to
Eutharic, a member of a collateral branch of the Amal dynasty living in
Spain. The emperor Justin I (518—27), who was initially less hostile to the
Ostrogothic kingdom than his predecessor, adopted Eutharic as his ‘son by
arms’ and shared the consulship with him in 519. However, Eutharic prede-
ceased Theoderic, who left the throne to his ten-year-old grandson Athalaric
(526—34) under the tutelage of Amalasuintha. The problems of a minority
were always acute in Germanic military societies, and Amalasuintha appar-
ently resorted to violent measures to maintain her authority. She is said to
have had several of her opponents murdered. The death of her son in 5 34
left her unable to rule in her own right, and she was forced to concede the
crown to the senior male member of the family, Theodahad (5 34—6), a
nephew of Theoderic. Her attempts to continue to exercise influence led
him to have her imprisoned on an island, where she was murdered, appar-
ently by the relatives of those she herself had had killed. 28

This, following the precedent used to justify the imperial invasion of the
Vandal kingdom in 5 3 3, was made the excuse for the despatch of Belisarius’
army from Africa to Sicily in 5 35 and then on to Italy in 536. Theodahad
failed to take any effective action against the imperial forces, and after
Naples fell to Belisarius the leading Gothic nobles deposed him. He was
subsequently murdered on the orders of his successor while trying to escape
to Ravenna. Under the new king Vitigis (5 36—9), who was not a member of
the Amal dynasty but who married Athalaric’s sister Matasuintha, more
energetic measures were taken to try to stem the imperial advance.
However, Belisarius was allowed to occupy Rome and a subsequent siege
failed to dislodge him. When a second imperial army took Rimini, threaten-
ing to cut Vitigis off from his capital, he was forced to retreat to Ravenna.
Blockaded there, he submitted in 5 39, having allowed himself to be per-
suaded that Belisarius would proclaim himself emperor if admitted to
Ravenna. In 540 Vitigis and those Ostrogoths with him in Ravenna, despite
the existence of an earlier plan to establish a reduced Ostrogothic kingdom
north of the Po as a buffer for Italy, were shipped off to Constantinople and
incorporated into the imperial forces. This was due to the acute military
needs of the empire, resulting from the Persian invasion of the eastern
provinces, something that Vitigis is said to have tried to persuade the shah
Ivhusro I to undertake in the final stages of the war in Italy.

28 Procop. Wars v. 4.2;— 7, in preference to Jord. Get. 306.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

130 5- THE western kingdoms

Despite the loss of Ravenna, many other major towns of northern Italy
were still in the hands of Ostrogothic garrisons, and in 5 40 fighting was
renewed when it was clear that Belisarius was not going to honour his
secret pledges to make himself western emperor. A new king was chosen
in the person of Ildibad (540—1). After his murder, the crown passed
rapidly to his nephew Baduila or Totila (541—52), who won a significant
victory over imperial forces at Faenza in 542. The scale of the renewed war
was such that Belisarius had to be sent back to Italy in 544, but he failed
to achieve the same dramatic results. Baduila took Rome in December 5 46,
was forced to abandon it in 547 and regained it in 550. Belisarius was
recalled in 548 and eventually replaced by the emperor Justinian’s cousin
Germanus, who had married Vitigis’ widow Matasuintha. On Germanus’
unexpected death en route for Italy in 550, the eunuch and former treasurer
Narses was given command, and he inflicted a crucial defeat on Baduila in
the battle of Busta Gallorum in June/July 5 52. Baduila died from wounds
received there and was succeeded briefly by Teias (552), former com-
mander in Verona. He too fell in battle against Narses, at Mons Lactarius
in October. Some of the northern towns continued to resist, and the last
of these, Verona, only fell in 562, but no Ostrogothic king was chosen after
Teias.

VIII. ITALY: THE LOMBARDS, 568— 90

It appears ironic that the restoration of imperial rule over Italy, that was
so long and hard fought for, should have proved so short-lived. Within six
years of the extinguishing of the last Ostrogothic resistance in 562, Italy
was subjected to a new invasion, that of the Lombards. This people had
been one of those who had moved into the vacuum north of the Danube
caused by Odoacer’s elimination of the Rugi in 488. They had fallen into
subjection to the Heruls, but defeated them in 510, killing their king
Rodulf. In the 5 40s they were encouraged by Justinian to cross the Danube
into western Pannonia as a counter to possible Frankish aspirations in the
Balkans. They shared this role with the Gepids, who were again given
control of Sirmium, which they had lost to the Ostrogoths in 504, and,
with the Heruls, were established around Singidunum. Justin II reversed
his predecessor’s policy of generally favouring the Lombards in their peri-
odic conflicts with the Gepids, and in consequence the Lombards allied
themselves with the rising power of the Avars, north of the Danube. The
destruction of the Gepid kingdom of Sirmium by the Avars in 5 67 seems
to have led the Lombards to decide to put a greater distance between
themselves and their quondam allies. In later traditions, their move into
Italy was presented as the result of treasonable negotiation on the part of

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ITALY: THE LOMBARDS, 568— 90 I 3 I

N arses, who had been dismissed from his Italian command by the new

emperor.

The Lombards were unable to achieve the unifying conquest of all Italy
that had been possible for the Ostrogoths. This was because they failed to
take either Rome or Ravenna, and were faced with unremitting imperial
hostility. Some cities, such as Milan, capitulated without a fight; others; such
as Pavia, which held out for three years, offered spirited resistance. The
murder of king Alboin at Verona in 572 weakened the already stretched
political cohesion of the invaders. His murderers, who favoured a rapproche-
ment with the empire, fled with the royal treasure to the imperial governor
or exarch at Ravenna. Although a new king, unrelated to the previous
dynasty, was elected in the person of Cleph (572—3/4), his subsequent
murder undermined centralized authority amongst the Lombards entirely.
No new king was chosen for ten years, while regional potentates emerged
in the persons of the dukes {duces). Although initially royal appointees as
local military commanders, these men were able to establish themselves as
effectively independent rulers in the absence of a monarchy. Only when the
Frankish threat grew too great in the early 5 80s did the Lombard magnates
accept the need to recreate a central leadership, and thus to choose a new
king in the person of Authari (584—90), the son of Cleph. To reconstruct
the economic basis for the monarchy the dukes agreed to surrender a fixed
proportion of their assets to endow the revived royal house. In practice the
more numerous and territorially smaller northern duchies co-operated
more closely with the monarchy than the two large central and southern
Italian duchies of Spoleto and Benevento, which may first have come into
being during the interregnum, and were physically much further removed
from the royal capital of Pavia. Not until the reign of Authari’s successor
Agilulf (590—616) was royal authority firmly imposed over the south.

The Frankish threat that had led to the recreation of the Lombard mon-
archy was the product partly of the expansionary ambitions of king
Childebert II (575—96) and partly the product of imperial diplomacy. The
military and economic problems of the empire in the 5 80s meant that
large-scale intervention in Italy could not be undertaken from
Constantinople. However, the Franks, who had suffered from Lombard
raids across the Alps in the chaotic period of 568—70, were willing to act
for the emperor in return for subsidies. 30 Although Childebert II was prone
to take the imperial money and then fail to act, he did launch an expedition
in 5 85 and again in 590. In both cases Authari negotiated a withdrawal in
return for a formal submission and, doubtless, the payment of tribute.

29 Isidore of Seville, Chronica 402, ed. Mommsen MGHAA 1 1, p. 476; Fredegar, Chronica 111.65, e d-
Kusternig, p. 134; Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 11.5, MGH SRG, pp. 87—8.

30 Epist. A.ustras. 25, 31—48, ed. Gundlach, pp. 138—9, 141—52.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

1 3 2

5- THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Under his successor the Frankish threat receded, and the Lombard
kingdom became more securely established.

IX. THE BRITISH ISLES: ANGLO-SAXON, IRISH AND PICTISH
KINGDOMS, 410—597

The collapse of Roman provincial administration in Britain following the
usurper Constantine Ill’s departure from the island in 407 seems to have
been followed fairly rapidly by the fragmentation of political authority. The
principal problem to be faced in trying to understand these processes is the
almost total lack of reliable evidence. 31 The testimony of the early-ninth-
century Historia Britonum , also known from its supposed author as
‘Nennius’, is now largely discredited. There are no good evidential grounds
for believing in the existence of a king Vortigern, let alone of an Arthur,
but rulers of a still more or less united Britain may have existed for some
decades after the end of imperial control. It is at least clear from the testi-
mony of the De Excidio Britonum of Gildas (520/40) that a certain
Ambrosius Aurelianus served at least as military leader of the Britons in the
later fifth century. 32 By the time Gildas himself was writing there existed,
certainly in western Britain from Cornwall through the Severn valley and
up to Gwynedd, a series of small kingdoms ruled by dynasties whose
members had Celtic names.

The military problems that the public authorities in Britain, whatever
their character might have been, had to face came firstly in the form of sea-
borne raiding by the Piets and by the Irish (the Scotti). An appeal to Aetius,
probably in the period 446—54, failed to provide imperial assistance, and it
seems, on the basis of Gildas’ narrative, that increasing recourse had to be
made to the Saxons for defence against these attacks. Although much
debated, the dating of the start of this process cannot be given more pre-
cisely than c. 410— 42. 33 The Saxons who came to settle, probably under
some form of treaty of federation, in turn became a problem in their own
right, demanding increased annona, in other words pay for their services.
This led to a revolt and fighting between the Saxons and the British pro-
vincials, before a victory, probably of the latter, at the siege of Mons
Badonius (c. 490) led to a peace that had still not been broken when Gildas
was writing forty-four years later.

Just as the history of the British has been obscured by later legendary
traditions, so too was that of the Anglo-Saxons affected by subsequent dis-
tortion and rationalization. By the middle of the seventh century a series
of distinct, and in some cases quite substantial, kingdoms had come into

31 Dumville (1977) 173—92. 32 De Excidio 25.3, ed. M. Winterbottom (Chichester 1978) p. 98.

33 Chron. Gall. A cccclii i 26, ed. Mommsen, p. 660.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BRITISH isles: ANGLO-SAXON, IRISH & PICTISH, 410— 597 I 3 3

being throughout most of Britain. The origins of these were in several
cases, through genealogical fabrication or historiographical invention,
pushed back into earlier periods, and distinct ethnic identities were
accorded them. However, the reality of conditions in the later fifth and
sixth centuries was rather different. The picture that should emerge is one
not of Germanic Saxons or Angles fighting against Celtic Britons and grad-
ually squeezing them back into what would become Wales, Cumbria and
Cornwall, so much as an entrepreneurial melee in which individual rulers
and dynasties emerged in many different localities, depending on warfare
against their neighbours to build up military followings. The population for
such fluctuating kingdoms was ethnically mixed, consisting of Germanic
and Celtic elements. Inevitably, because of the initial establishment of the
Germanic federates in the east of the island, the cultural and ultimately lin-
guistic mix took the form of a spectrum, with Germanic elements predom-
inant in the east and Celtic ones in the west, and complex intermixtures of
the two in the centre, notably the areas of the later kingdoms of Wessex,
Mercia and Northumbria.

Evidential problems also abound with respect to the history of the
Celtic kingdoms to the north of Hadrian’s Wall, of the Pictish ones beyond
them and of Ireland. In the case of the British ones in the north, some con-
tinuities can be traced between them and some of the Celtic tribes that
existed in these regions in the early Roman period, though some of the
tribes had clearly disappeared entirely. By the end of the sixth century the
most powerful of these was probably the kingdom of Gododdin (the
former Votadini), centred on Edinburgh, whose king’s disastrous military
expedition against the Anglian kingdom of Northumbria is recorded in the
elusive verses ascribed to the poet Aneirin and known as Y Gododdin?*
Another British kingdom, that of Strathclyde, existed around the Firth of
Clyde, with its capital at Dumbarton, and to the south of it lay the kingdom
of Rheged in Cumbria. Culturally distinct from these were the kingdom(s)
of the Piets. Only references concerning the fifth-century missionary ven-
tures of Nynia, based in Whithorn in Galloway, and of the Irish monk
Columba (d. 597), founder of the monastery of Iona, have led to the
deduction that two separate Pictish kingdoms or tribal confederacies, a
northern and a southern one, existed at this time.

Similarly in Ireland, which was a pre-literate society until the beginning
of Christian missionary activity there in the fifth century, it is only the
letters of Patrick that give any reliable clue as to political organization. Later
materials, notably the various Lives of Patrick and the annals which prob-
ably did not start being kept until the mid eighth century, cannot be relied
upon to provide objective records of the earlier period. 35 In particular, the

34 Jarman (ed.) (1988). 35 Hughes (1972) 97—159, 219— 32, but cf. Smyth (1972).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

134

5 . THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

growth of the claims of the church of Armagh and its manipulation of its
Patrician foundation led to the fabrication of complex historical myths.
What relationship the political organization of Ireland in the fifth century
had to that in the seventh or the ninth is not as easy to say as has sometimes
been believed.

In general, the fifth and sixth centuries in the former provinces of the
western Roman empire saw the fragmentation and rapid disappearance of
the imperial administrative structures, and their replacement by the new
Germanic kingdoms. These were, however, dependent on Roman tradi-
tions of government, and in many cases benefited from the close involve-
ment in the administration of leading members of Roman provincial
society. Initially, some of these realms had the character of little more than
a military occupation, with most of the civil administration remaining in
Roman hands. The law codes of the German rulers were also largely
Roman in content and in the forms that they took. In some cases, such as
that of the Vandals, no real rapprochement ever seems to have taken place
between the German garrisoning forces and the Roman civil population,
even though many of the invaders appear to have become increasingly
Romanized in their lifestyles. This left their kingdom peculiarly vulnerable
once an eastern army was able to land in Africa in 533. Wars, largely moti-
vated by the expansionary needs of first the Visigothic and then the
Frankish kingdoms could also lead to the elimination of some of the minor
regional powers, such as those of the Burgundians in 5 34 and of the Sueves
in 585. For those kingdoms that were able to survive and to expand, the
sixth century was marked by an increasing integration between the indige-
nous population and the conquerors, a process that was not completed in
either Gaul or Spain before the seventh century. However, in both the
Frankish and Visigothic kingdoms the elimination of religious conflicts
between the two elements of the population, symbolic not least of wider
cultural cleavages, opened the way to the disappearance of the division
between Roman and German. In the case of Spain the Arab conquest of
71 1 aborted this process, but it led in Gaul to the absorption of much of
the indigenous population into a new Frankish ethnic identity. In Britain,
where political fragmentation had been more intensive and the develop-
ment of alternative structures of power more localized, cultural and
governmental unity could not be re-established at more than a regional
level. In Italy, where imperial authority, however much diminished, had sur-
vived longest, the Ostrogothic kingdom had offered the best example of
the kind of Roman administrative and cultural continuity that could be
established under a dynasty of German kings. However, Justinian’s pro-
tracted war of reconquest wrought so much damage that the peninsula was
not to regain political unity for well over a millennium.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 6

EMPEROR AND COURT

MICHAEL MCCORMICK

The figure of the late Roman emperor dominated his society as few rulers
before or since. To convey what it would be like to die and meet God, a
contemporary evoked the emperor emerging from his palace, and an age
obsessed with religion constantly linked emperor and God: ‘God needs
nothing; the emperor needs only God.’ The emperor’s body was human,
but his imperial power made him ‘like God’. Yet the all-powerful ‘Master
of Earth and Sea and Every People’ never appeared alone: he was always
accompanied by others, who bathed in the reflected glory of his splendour.
Onlookers envied the luck of his closest attendants and companions,
despite the realization that exalted rank at court was precarious . 1

The concept of court conveniently encapsulates the convergence of
people and structures at the pinnacle of late Roman society around this
awesome figure. The remarkable social group surrounding the emperor
encompassed but transcended the chief institutions of government and
now assumed more elaborate forms. The recent and definitive establish-
ment of imperial residences in the new capitals of Constantinople and
Ravenna helped precipitate this change. A travelling monarchy yielded per-
manently to a sedentary one, and stable palace milieux began to drive roots
into capital cities. This occurred in both halves of the empire and affected
all other developments, although the evidence is much richer for the
eastern empire.

Obvious components like the government and kinship ties constituted
and shaped this milieu. Broader social factors were at work, too: friendship,
shared religious enthusiasms and hostilities, gender, common ethnicity and
professional experiences bound together and distinguished elements
within the court. On a linguistic level, the eastern court formed an enclave
of Latin or Latin— Greek bilingualism in a polyglot but Hellenized city:
though Greek ultimately prevailed, court jargon remained studded with
Latin loan words. The uniforms and insignia of government service visu-
ally assigned to courtiers their social and institutional rank. The laws, too,

1 John Chrys. Ad Theod. laps, i, xi and xn; Agapetus, Capitula admonitoria lxiii and xxi; ACO 2.1.
p. 417.

1 3 5

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

1 36

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

set the emperor’s entourage off from the rest of the population: a draco-
nian law of treason governing the repression of conspiracies had been
extended to protect the prince’s advisers, and palatine service usually
brought tax exemptions as well as special palace jurisdiction. Thus, even
menial posts in the palace were swamped with ambitious aspirants. 2 But
first and foremost, members of the late Roman court were distinguished
by their physical location, near the emperor and within the palace.

I. THE PHYSICAL CONTEXT OF POWER

Whereas the fourth century had favoured the vocabulary of a human
group on the move ( comitatus ) or, in striking Greek, ‘the army camp’ ( strato -
pedoti) for the itinerant imperial headquarters of its day, the new fact of the
fifth and sixth centuries may be summed up with the word for a building,
the palace {palatium , iraXaTiov). Thus Justin I informed the pope that he
had been elected by ‘the most splendid grandees of our sacred palace and
of the most holy senate’/’ Insiders like Peter the Patrician, Justinian’s magis-
ter officiomm, might think in terms of archontes (‘officials’ or ‘leaders’), and in
the east synkletos, ‘senate’, and its derivatives seem sometimes to refer
loosely to elite court society as well as designating the institution which
attempted to replicate in Constantinople the senate of old Rome. But to
outsiders, the emperors’ associates were simply palatini, even though over
time the term narrowed to mean the palace people most exposed to the
population at large, the financial bureaucrats based there. 4 The concept of
palace stretched beyond the physical buildings to encompass the entire
imperial establishment — for instance, in the public prayers Christian
churches offered for the state. Nevertheless, the physical context both
reflected and shaped the life of the emperor and his court, and it is there
that we begin.

By about 425 the east’s new capital of Constantinople had expanded into
one of the empire’s greatest cities, whereas Ravenna resembled rather a
glorified military base. Constantine I had established the original core of
Constantinople’s main palace at the south-east end of the peninsula on
which the capital was built, in the city’s monumental centre. 5 The massive
Hippodrome shielded much of the palace’s western perimeter from riots
and fires. The size and importance of this palace warranted it the epithet
‘Great’. From the site now occupied by the Blue Mosque, some thirty
metres above sea level, it spread down the slope towards the shore,
affording splendid sea views and breezes and dominating the view of the

2 C.Th. ix. 1 4. 3; cf. CJ ix.8.5; Jones, LRE 1.586 and 571. 3 Coll.Avell cxli. 2 .

4 Ensslin (1942).

5 Janin (1964); Guilland (1969) (both to be used with caution); Dagron, Naissance 92—7; Muller-
Wiener (1977); Mango, Developpement.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE PHYSICAL CONTEXT OF POWER 1 37

city for sea-borne travellers. It was impressively suited to the tasks of
governance and providing comfort for its residents. Contemporaries ima-
gined heaven as a palace , 6 and surviving remains confirm its grandeur. The
complex expanded considerably in the fifth and sixth centuries. By the
shore, the future Boukoleon palace was begun, possibly in the time of
Theodosius II, and the north-east area of the palace was lavishly rebuilt by
Justinian. Justin II and Tiberius added further ambitious buildings, gardens
and monuments, until the rhythm slackened under Maurice as imperial
resources declined.

The western empire’s palace occupied the south-eastern quadrant of
Ravenna. The government buildings into which Honorius moved and
which have been uncovered so far underwent only superficial remodelling.
Valentinian III added a new palace ‘Ad Laureta’. However, excavation sug-
gests — and it is symbolic of the west’s straitened circumstances — that the
western residence approached eastern standards of luxury and magnifi-
cence only under the Ostrogoths . 7 Though sparse, the archaeological and
literary record from Ravenna is not contaminated by the living medieval
tradition that so colours our data from Constantinople.

A number of lesser palaces and residences also served the emperors and
their families in Constantinople and its environs. In addition to the Great
Palace and four other nearby imperial establishments, the Notitia of
Constantinople mentions at least five more mansions associated with the
imperial family to the west and north . 8 During the Nika revolt, in fact, the
usurpers gave some thought to establishing the rebel government in one of
these secondary palaces . 9 Suburban palaces catered for the imperial family’s
enjoyment of the aristocracy’s villeggiatura lifestyle. In some seasons, the
emperor retired to a country residence and slowed the rhythm of court life:
thus laborious negotiations aimed at unifying dissident church factions
were suspended for thirty days when Justin II left the city to relax in the
Asian suburbs. 1 " The accompanying procession explains why these excur-
sions became known as prokensa in the multilingual jargon of the court,
reflecting a popular Latin pronunciation of processus.

In the European suburbs, the imperial family frequented the great mili-
tary complex on the Via Egnatia at the Hebdomon ( Septimum ), the seventh
milestone from central Constantinople, on the shore of the Sea of
Marmara. There, near the present-day airport, the army assembled on a
great parade ground, the Kampos. At its southern end, the Tribunal, a large
platform adorned with statues, rose five metres above the field, whence the
emperor and his entourage could be seen by the troops in relative security.
Here the army acclaimed new emperors down to 4 5 7 . 11 The Asian shore

6 Nil. Ep. 11. 1 70. 7 Deichmann (1976— 89) 11.3.58— 70. 8 Notitia 11, iv, x— xi, xv.

9 Procop. Wars 1.24.30. 10 John Eph. HE 111.1.26—' 7. 11 Demangel (1949).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Fig. 4 The city of Constantinople (based on Mango, Developpement plan n

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE PHYSICAL CONTEXT OF POWER I 39

attracted Theodosius II’s sisters, who sometimes stayed at the palace of
Rufinianae. 12 By 541 Belisarius and his wife had acquired this estate, pre-
sumably a sign of imperial favour. 13 Justinian and especially Theodora pre-
ferred the Hiereia palace, built on a peninsula just across the bay from
Chalcedon and equipped with a splendid artificial harbour. 14 Farther north,
the villa on the Bosphorus used by Justin II before his accession became
the Sophianae palace, named for his powerful wife. 11 The emperor and
empress did not relax in these suburban palaces by themselves. The crowd
that accompanied Theodora on her lengthy stays in Hiereia required abun-
dant provisions, which explains Justinian’s construction of markets there.
Justin II and Sophia travelled to the baths in the Asian suburbs accompa-
nied by the ‘senate’. 16

In the capital, courtiers’ mansions congregated in the Great Palace’s
immediate vicinity. Just south-west of it lay the palace of Hormisdas. 17
After 5 1 8 the increasingly powerful Justinian made his residence there seem
palatial even before he assumed the purple, adorning it with the churches
of Sts Peter and Paul and of Sts Sergius and Bacchus (the modern Kiigtik
Ayasofia Cami); 18 this palace— monastery was subsequently connected to
the Great Palace, and housed Monophysite monks under Theodora’s pro-
tection, while the Caesar Tiberius resided there with his family in the last
years of Justin II’s reign. 19 Immediately west of the Hippodrome were the
grandiose mansions of two imperial eunuchs that rivalled one another in
splendour: the grand semi-circular entrance portico to Lausus’ palace
measured over twenty-five metres in diameter, while Antiochus’ was
double that. 20 Nearby lived consuls like the empress Verina’s brother
Basiliscus and Anastasius’ nephew Pompeius, while Probus, another
nephew and consul, dwelled within a few hundred metres. 21

The prince’s security was vital. Like contemporary town houses, the
Great Palace was probably never an open structure; a perimeter wall has
been detected at Ravenna. 22 The Mese, the main thoroughfare of
Constantinople, brought visitors to the monumental square at the Milion
or Golden Milestone, from where they would have walked through the
Royal Colonnade or Regia to the Chalke or Brazen House, the palace’s main
entrance, which had been lavishly rebuilt by Justinian. 23 Beyond it lay a
series of military quarters that housed various units of palace guards and

12 Callin. Vi Hypatiixxxvn.y, cf. XLi.13 and Janin (1964) 152. 13 Procop. Warsi.zyzi.

14 Procop. Buildings 1. 1 1.16—22. 15 Cameron (1967).

16 Procop. Secret History 1 5.36—7; cf. Buildings 1.1 1.21; John Eph. HE 111.2.46.

17 Guilland (1969) 1.294.

18 Procop. Buildings 1.4. 1—3 ; cf. Muller-Wiener (1977) 177—83 and Mango in Kazhdan (1991) hi. 1 879.

19 John Eph. VSS.Or. xlvii; HE 111.3.8. 20 Naumann and Belting (1966); Naumann (1965).

21 Janin (1964) 123, 319—20; cf. Berger (1988) 434—5, also 282—4. Marc. Com. s.a. 512; Theoph. AM
6024, with Mango, Developpement 38—9. 22 Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.60.

23 Mango (1959); cf. Muller-Wiener (1977) 230 with pi. 263.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

140

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

barred the way to the heart of the palace. The Ravenna palace probably dis-
played similar features, as the medieval place-names ‘Ad Chalci’ and
‘Scubitum’ (from Excubitum) suggest. 24

The warren of buildings which housed the court’s functions are most
fully described by the tenth-century Book of Ceremonies , but that work rarely
documents the late antique situation unequivocally. Excavation, medieval
descriptions and general Roman practice suggest that rectangular peristyle
porticoes constituted the palace’s main building blocks. Some featured lux-
urious gardens adorned with statuary and fountains, or they dazzled with
magnificent mosaics like the one still visible today. 25 Constantinople’s
climate encouraged the court to congregate out of doors, at least in good
weather. For instance, during the deliberations preceding Anastasius’ acces-
sion in spring 491, the most powerful men at court discussed the situation
as they sat on benches in the portico in front of the Triclinium of the
Nineteen Couches. 26

The buildings in which the court lived and worked lined these porticoes.
The palatine ministries must have occupied many rooms: the smaller pala-
tine bureaucracy and court at Ravenna has recently been estimated at about
1,500 people, but the details escape us. 27 The schola or office of the magister
officiorum was near the hall known as the Consistorium, since western
ambassadors waited there immediately before an imperial audience. 28 At
Ravenna the mint controlled by the comes sacrarum largitionum has been con-
vincingly located near the palace’s main entrance, while there are similar
indications for the Great Palace. 29

Large halls served as settings for the court’s ceremonial business.
Typically, access was through a triple set of doors and an antechamber
which was perhaps identical with the silentiaries’ station ( Silentiarikion ),
where a final screening of participants occurred. A raised platform for die
emperor seems to have closed one end; large curtains and inlays in the
floor helped guide those entering the hall. 30 The Great Palace had both a
Great or Summer Consistorium and a Small Consistorium. There the
court assembled for the audiences granted to Roman legations and
foreign ambassadors, promotions, or the reading of laws. Another type
of large structure, the triclinium, was intended primarily for state banquets.
The main banquet hall, the Triclinium of the Nineteen Couches — the old-
fashioned style of dining while reclining survived at state banquets —
could accommodate 228 guests in addition to the emperor, and may

24 Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.53— 4; 56.

25 Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.65; John Eph. HE hi. 3. 23; Talbot Rice (1958).

26 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.92. 27 Deichmann (1976— 89) 11. 3.1 14— 1 5.

28 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.87. 29 Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.54—6; Hendy (1972) 13 1 n. 2.

30 Deichmann (1 976—89) n. 3 .67; Cyr. Scyth. TT Sabae li, and for an excavated hall: Talbot Rice (1958)
25. Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.89; cf. Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.69, and Guilland (1969) 1.56—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE PHYSICAL CONTEXT OF POWER 141

have had a distinctive design . 31 Justin II added an octagonal and domed
Chrysotriklinos or Golden Banquet Hall. To judge from banqueting
arrangements from later centuries, this magnificent structure seated only
102 guests and so catered to particularly select gatherings . 32

Churches inside the palace met the imperial family’s normal religious
needs. The oldest, the Kyrios or Church of the Lord, lay in the Constantinian
part of the palace. The empress Pulcheria added the church of St Stephen
to house the relics of the first martyr. As already noted, Justinian built two
churches in connection with the Hormisdas palace . 33 The seclusion of the
imperial chambers or cubiculum was nearly complete: curiosity about their
appearance consumed even a prominent general and consul, and he incurred
the emperor’s wrath in finding out . j4 Normally, only court eunuchs, domes-
tic servants and the occasional doctor or privileged holy man might set foot
there. The empress occupied separate quarters that expressed physically the
segregation of men and women. Her chambers admitted privileged visitors,
perhaps because they functioned as her main reception space . 35 Who resided
in the palace beyond the imperial family, their domestic servants and the
security forces is an open question. The imperial family might well span gen-
erations: Zeno’s mother-in-law, the dowager empress Verina, certainly con-
tinued to live within the palace, as did, apparently, his mother, Lallis . 36 Unable
to dislodge his predecessor’s widow, Tiberius expanded the northern part of
the palace for his own family . 37 Foreign hostages also lived there, and
Theodora supposedly sheltered five hundred Monophysites in the palace of
Hormisdas. If they indeed occupied ‘every chamber and room’ and had to
subdivide larger rooms to fit, then this secondary palace normally housed far
fewer people . 38 Each high-ranking resident of the palace apparently consti-
tuted a kind of organizational cell, since he lived with his own personal
domestic staff, including slaves, bodyguards and a cellarer, which in turn sug-
gests separate arrangements for food storage . 39

The infrastructure which supported the imperial household included
stables and baths. The sixth-century palace’s multiple cisterns made good
sense, given the city’s perennial problems of water supply, while Justinian’s
experience of the Nika revolt encouraged greater self-sufficiency for the
palace, which was now furnished with granaries and bakeries. 4 " Nothing is
known about kitchens, workshops, storerooms, or sanitary installations.

The emperor’s duties exposed him to his people in the Hippodrome,
where he watched the races and patriotic displays from the kathisma , or

31 Oikonomides (1972) 164 n. 136; cf. Krautheimer (1966).

32 Oikonomides (1972) 196 n. 209; Deichmann (1976—89) m.2.53, 64—9.

33 Mathews (1974) and Mathews (1971) 48— 50; also Mango (1975). 34 Priscus fr. 63.

35 Marc. Diac. V. Porph. xlv; cf. Procop. Secret History 1 5.27.

36 Chron. Pasch. s.a. 477; John Ant. fr. 94 (Exc. de Insid. De Boor). 37 John Eph. HE m.3.23.

38 V. Petr. Iber. pp. 24 and 28— 9; John Eph. V.SS.Or. xlvii. 39 V. Petr. Iber. pp. 25 and 27.

40 John Eph. HE m.3.23; Janin (1964) 21 1; Chron. Pasch. s.a. 532.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

142

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

imperial box. This was not easily accessible to other spectators but was
directly and securely connected to the palace. Even when rioting factions
acclaimed a usurper seated in the kathisma, Justinian and his loyal followers
could approach from behind and listen to developments . 41 Arrangements
to protect the emperors when they joined the people for services in the
Great Church are unclear; in this period, their place was somewhere in the
south aisle of the Justinianic church, at ground level. Typically for this
society, the empress watched the service separately from the gallery . 42
Then, as now, boats allowed easy movement around Constantinople and
afforded additional security. The emperor’s private harbour by the
Boukoleon palace provided direct access to suburban palaces or other
seaside locations, and a secure escape route in emergencies. This was prob-
ably how Zeno and his followers escaped to Chalcedon during Basiliscus’
usurpation . 43

II. THE EMPEROR

Theoretical discussion about the imperial office and its Christianization
intensified in the sixth century with works like the Dialogue on Political Science ,
the Treatise on Strategy and the writings of Agapetus, not to mention the
reflections in the prefaces to Justinian’s Novels. The visual symbolism of
power fascinated contemporaries as the court’s rituals themselves became
the subject of panegyric and the meaning of the imperial insignia attracted
new attention . 44

The emperor’s official titles remained substantially the same as before.
In the Greek-speaking east, the official translation of imperator as autokrator
persisted, with its connotations of autonomous power and monarchy. The
last shreds of republican ideology were vanishing, however, as basileus,
which originally meant ‘king’, prevailed in informal usage. The emergence
of tribal kingdoms in the west imposed a distinction between the univer-
salist monarchy of the Romans and the upstart western rulers, whose Latin
title rex was transliterated into Greek. Even within the palace an increasing
identification of basileus and ‘emperor’ — the magister officiorurris private
records already use basileus under Justinian — facilitated the adoption of
basileus as the emperor’s official title a century later. The empress, too,
asserted her regal status ever more sharply, as an embittered Procopius
testifies . 45

41 Chron. Pasch. s.a. 5 32; cf. in general Guilland (1969) 1.462—98.

42 Paul Sil. Descr. 580—5; Evagr. HE iv.31.

43 John Ant. fr. 94 (Exc. de Insid. De Boor); cf. Theoph. AM 6094; also AM 6003; Procop. Wars

1.24.32—7. Miiller-Wiener (1977) 60. 44 MacCormack (1981).

45 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.89; Theodora: Procop. Secret History 10.7, 1 5.13— 17.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EMPEROR

143

The emperor’s activities varied according to the individual character and
abilities of the ruler. Some appear to have been little more than figureheads,
for whom officials, empresses and eunuchs guided the fortunes of state,
while others, none more so than Justinian, worked day and night to achieve
astonishing ambitions. Emperors did not leave the palace to direct affairs
of state as they had in earlier days. They no longer led the Roman army into
battle. A Justinianic civil servant claimed that Theodosius I had forbidden
this to future emperors; Maurice’s attempt to do so was met, we are told,
with a flock of sinister portents . 46 In an age of great bureaucracies, emper-
ors governed with the bureaucrat’s tools of meetings and the pen.

We often see emperors performing symbolic acts of governance: inspect-
ing granaries, celebrating triumphs, holding audiences. This was serious and
time-consuming business. For reasons we shall see, questions of ceremonial
and precedence sometimes required the emperor’s personal attention. 4 '
Ceremonial catered to the institutions which translated imperial decisions into
policy. An impatient Justinian could try to gain time only by shifting some
obligatory ceremonies to odd hours of the day or night, or by performing
them on the side as he proceeded to a public appearance in the Hippodrome . 48
But the seclusion and security which shielded the emperor make it difficult to
see behind the ceremonial scenes into the emperors’ daily routine of running
the empire. We catch a glimpse of Marcian in the senate, discussing a wealthy
widow’s contested will . 49 Exception or routine? We cannot tell.

The emperor’s purple ink fuelled the engines of bureaucracy. He will
have spent many hours reviewing and subscribing documents; a child who
could not write could not rule . 50 The emperor listened: to endless panegyr-
ics and petitions in public, to proposals and reports in private, the responses
to which are preserved in the laws and historians of the age. But Justinian’s
personal drafting of laws, which once would have epitomized an ideal
emperor, was resented in the sixth century . 51 So far had the central institu-
tions of the empire evolved towards autonomous activity. The parallel and
competing organs of the central government jealously guarded their terri-
tory. John Lydus was acutely aware that every diminution of his beloved
praetorian prefecture meant another bureau’s increase, and vice versa . 52 The
emperor must often have intervened to arbitrate among bureaucratic rivals.

Though the circumstances are unusual, the emperor occasionally
appears at work in less secluded settings — for instance, whenjustin II ham-
mered out an edict of religious union. The emperor or his advisers first
drew up a draft. The emperor’s personal physician, a seeming sympathizer,

46 McCormick, Eternal Victory 47. 47 E.g. Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.86 and 87.

48 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.84 and 86. 49 Marcian, Nov. 5, praef

50 Justin I needed a stencil: PLRE 11 s.v. Iustinus 4; V. Dan. Styl. 67; Classen (1977c) 60—7.

51 Procop. Secret History 14.2—3. 52 John Lyd. De Mag. 11.1 1; cf. 111.41.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

144

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

conveyed it to one of the two main factions, representative Monophysites
who had been confined in the patriarch’s palace. The doctor invited them
to propose amendments. Their list of revisions went to the other faction,
which immediately began to lobby prominent court figures, and especially
the quaestor, against the proposed changes. Both factions were convened in
an imperial audience. Justin listened, approved the changes and com-
manded that they be entered into the edict’s final text. The opposing faction
of Dyophysite clergy and senators exploded in a raucous outcry, protest-
ing against the political consequences of accepting the revisions. Justin II
made a show of his wrath, threatened the protesters and commanded
silence. He then ordered the quaestor to produce twenty fair copies of the
revised edict by nightfall or lose his head. The Dyophysites began buzzing
like angry bees. They entreated the emperor, despite his command for
silence, to consider the disruptive consequences they foresaw. Finally Justin
relented and left the protesters to draw up a compromise formula. The
result was twenty official copies of an edict which, despite pressure and
persecution, failed to achieve the desired union . 53

The give and take, the efforts to persuade, apply pressure and terrorize, the
emperor’s limited success in imposing his will, the sheer noise — these sur-
prise us after the choreographed silence of more formal ritual appearances.
But even emperors had sometimes to persuade as they arbitrated among
powerful subordinates and subjects. Thus, at a critical juncture which surely
required a consensus among the ruling elite, Leo I presented incriminating
evidence of treachery to the senate and elicited the response he wished for
by skilful questioning . 54 Though we cannot distinguish their voices, we can
hear the dissonance among the emperor’s advisers in the dramatic scene
when Theodora spoke up as the Nika riot engulfed the capital, urging death
rather than escape by sea . 55 Though doubtless atypical, these incidents hint
at how, in concrete terms, emperors made decisions and ruled their subjects.

Loyalty to the emperor was constantly forced on subjects’ minds in
capital cities and provinces alike. Across the empire’s cities, his portraits
enjoyed the sacred status accorded to his person, Roman citizens prayed
publicly for his health and success, and they acclaimed his name when mes-
sengers read communiques announcing his victories or new laws . 56
Holidays commemorating imperial accessions, victories or adventus had
long punctuated the Roman months, but now, as regnal years increasingly
organized public time, the emperor even began to supplant the old consu-
lar years and compete with the indictional system of dating documents . 57

Though similar public gestures of loyalty persisted in both parts of the
empire, broad regnal patterns point to a separation even before Odoacer

53 John Eph. HE in. 1. 19— 29. Text of Edict: Evagr. HE v.4. 54 V. Dan. Styl. lv.

55 Procop. Wars 1.24.32—9. 56 McCormick, Eternal Victory 232—44.

57 CTh. vi. 3 0.21; Justinian, Nov. 47. McCormick, Eternal Victory 73—4; cf. 2nd edn xiii— xiv.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human element

145

deposed Romulus. After 425 the western empire would last only a half-
century, but its instability produced nearly as many emperors as exercised
power in Constantinople from 425 to 602, corresponding to average reigns
of about five and sixteen years respectively. After Theodosius II, no son
inherited his father’s throne, whence great diversity among emperors.
Where emperors came from suggests that the imperial elite, too, was
Assuring along regional lines. Of the seven western emperors whose back-
grounds are known, six certainly came from families based in the west or
were born there. One was born in Constantinople, and Anthemius is the
exception that proves the rule, since he owed power to the eastern empire’s
intervention in Italy. Conversely, nine or ten of the eleven men who actu-
ally wielded power at Constantinople certainly came from families estab-
lished in the eastern empire. 58 The Balkan peninsula alone supplied nearly
half the eastern emperors, while Constantinople or its environs apparently
gave birth to only one western (Anthemius) and two eastern emperors
(Theodosius II and Justin II).

The geographic pattern is closely connected with emperors’ profes-
sional backgrounds, since the army recruited heavily in the Balkans. In fact,
military careers or families supplied at least half of the emperors, whereas
fewer than a fifth had significant backgrounds in the civilian bureaucracy. 59
The details of emperors’ military careers, however, underscore the promi-
nence of the court. Six out of ten or eleven military emperors had accom-
plished part or all of their military careers in palatine units and, even more
significantly, Tiberius and Maurice both shifted from civilian careers as
notaries to the palace guard, the excubitors. 60 In other words, until Maurice
was overthrown by a field army, physical presence at court was an asset in
competing for the purple. Indeed, as Justin II’s success against his cousin
and rival Justin, son of Germanus, shows, a field command was a liability.
Finally, regardless of professional background, over one-third of all
emperors owed their position to some sort of kinship with the imperial
family. 61 The court had become more than the centre of power: it was also
the best avenue to power.

in. the court: the human element

Besides the emperor himself, who really wielded power at court? Efforts to
lobby the imperial entourage show that contemporaries naturally valued

58 Unless otherwise noted, this section is based on data in PLRE n and in; Basiliscus appears to be
non-Roman, but his origin is unclear: Krautschick (1986) 350.

59 Petronius Maximus, Anastasius; Tiberius and Maurice both started out as notaries.

60 Whitby, Maurice 6.

61 Valentinian III; Anthemius, who married Euphemia; Olybrius; Theodosius II; Zeno; Basiliscus;
Justinian and Justin II.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

146

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

the support of civil servants who headed the great imperial bureaux and
worked closely with the ruler, especially the m agister officiorum , the praetorian
prefect of the east, and the quaestor , 62 Down to the 470s, extraordinary
power lay also with the powerful professional and social group of the magis-
tri militum. Though they were often barbarians and Arians by religion, like
Ricimer in the west or the Ardaburs in the east, they acted as powers behind
the throne, established marriage alliances with Roman families and claimed
the ceremonial perquisites befitting their position in public life. 63 But the
court comprised more than just the key bureaucrats and generals. One
figure late antique lobbyists rarely neglected as much as modern historians
was the empress.

The prominence and political significance of empresses advanced mark-
edly: they gained control of their own cubiculum , which paralleled the
emperor’s, and efforts to influence the court regularly targeted them. 64
Justinian required his officials to swear a religious oath of allegiance to ‘Our
most divine and most pious Lords Justinian and Theodora’, and from
Justin II — whose wife’s statue often flanked his own even as her portrait
joined his on the bronze coinage — the Augustae always figured next to their
husbands in legal oaths confirming citizens’ public business. 6 ’’ The four-
teen empresses known from 425 to 600 derived their emperor-like legal
status from the emperor. 66 The Augusta issued coinage — or at least some
coins were issued in her name — authenticated documents with lead seals, 67
wore imperial insignia, and disposed of dedicated revenues and the appro-
priate staff. With two exceptions (Pulcheria and Honoria), her title was
linked to marriage to an emperor. 68 The cases of Eudocia in 423 and
Eudoxia in 439 suggest a link between the birth of a child and the granting
of the title.

The place that family ties held at court is underscored by the fact that the
majority of Augustae themselves stemmed from the imperial family: seven
were emperors’ children (Pulcheria, Placidia, Honoria, Licinia Eudoxia,
Euphemia, Ariadne and Constantina) and one, Sophia, a niece. 69 Thus,
women supplied a family continuity that the emperors generally lacked.
LTnlike their husbands, moreover, many empresses grew up in an imperial
capital or even, like the girls from the imperial family, at the heart of palace
society. Once a woman rose to the purple, she tended to stay there, for the
Augustae outlasted emperors, averaging over twenty years in their position
(see Table 1 below). Background and longevity enabled empresses to help

62 ACO 1.4. pp. 224—5; Epist. Austras. xxxiv— xxxv.

63 Demandt (1970), (1986); McCormick (1989).

64 CJ xii. 5. 3 and 5. ACO 1.4. pp. 224—5; Epist. Austras. xxix— xxx and xliv; Greg. I, Reg. v.38.

65 Nov. viii. 1 ; Cameron (1980) 70—1; Morrisson (1970) 124—5, also x 66 and 179; Worp (1982).

66 Digest 1.3.3 1. 67 Licinia Eudoxia: Zacos, Veglery and Nesbitt (1972-84) no. 2759.

68 Bury (1919).

69 Also, perhaps, Nepos’ anonymous wife, a relative of Verina: PLRE 11 s.v. Nepos 3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human element

147

Table 1. hist of empresses A.D. 425—600

Aelia Pulcheria
Aelia Galla Placidia
Aelia Eudocia
Iusta Grata Honoria
Licinia Eudoxia
Aelia Marcia Euphemia
Aelia Verina
Aelia Ariadne
Aelia Zenonis
Euphemia (Lupicina)
Theodora
Aelia Sophia
Aelia Anastasia
Aelia Constantina

414-5 3
421-50
423-60
?437-c. 450

439 -c- 462

? 467-?472
?457-r. 484

474- 515

475- 6

? 5 1 8— c 527
527-48

565-after March 601
? 578 — 5 93/ 4
582— 7604/5

transmit an imperial tradition within an emerging court society: Pulcheria
was credited with personally preparing Theodosius II for his ceremonial
duties, while an anecdote reveals that Sophia and Constantina jointly pro-
cured a new crown for Maurice and suggests that imperial women contrib-
uted to the development of the symbols of power which is so prominent
in this period. 70

Did they actually wield power? After all, they operated in a society which
severely limited their field of action. Sexual segregation restricted their con-
tacts with men: empresses are noticeably absent from many, if not most,
public ceremonies involving the emperor, and they apparently had their own
female court, consisting chiefly of the wives of leading men in the
emperor’s entourage. 71 Yet modern historians have credited Galla Placidia
and Pulcheria with decisive political roles. Between them, the mother and
daughter Verina and Ariadne maintained a pivotal role at court for over half
a century, notwithstanding coups and civil wars, while the diadem passed
through the male hands of four biological families, including their own.
Empresses’ political importance is most obvious at times of transition — for
instance, when, like Pulcheria or Ariadne, they married newly elected
emperors. But their role went beyond merely legitimizing someone else’s
choice for emperor. Ariadne is reliably reported to have selected Anastasius
as emperor, while her mother proclaimed the usurpers Basiliscus and
Leontius. 72 Sophia attempted to exploit the transition at her husband’s death
and, as we saw, Tiberius had difficulty dislodging her from the Great Palace.

70 Soz. ix. 1.6; Theoph. 71 Cf. John Eph. HE 111.3.8.

72 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.92; Chron. Pasch. s.a. 477; Joh. Mai. (slav.) xv.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

148

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

Her correspondence with the Persian king fits this pattern, since it was moti-
vated by her husband’s declining health. Theodora, on the other hand, may
have intervened in diplomacy with Ostrogothic Italy and Persia on her own
account. 7 ’ According to Procopius, Theodora’s religious differences with
her husband were consciously manipulated to capture the political loyalty of
her fellow Monophysites. In any event, her co-religionists treasured her
memory. 74

But the empresses’ greatest influence may have come from the links
between kinship and imperial politics, for Augustae had a voice in mar-
riages involving the imperial family. According to one tradition, Pulcheria
was responsible for finding a wife for her brother; as long as she lived,
Lupicina Euphemia bitterly and successfully opposed her nephew’s desire
to marry Theodora. And Theodora herself arranged or vetoed marriages
involving the imperial family, most of which, like Artabanes’ plan to marry
Justinian’s niece Praeiecta, had clear political implications. 75

Household and the central institutions of government meshed within
the palace and so magnified the significance of family connections.
Whatever the constitutional mythology of the period, imperial children
enjoyed presumptive claims on the purple. Thus, Zeno’s homonymous son
was expected to succeed his father, who promoted both his career and his
physical fitness to that end, even while anonymous members of the court
schemed against him. 76 The birth of a son to Maurice and Constantina was
hailed as the first male heir born to the purple since Theodosius II; he was
therefore baptized Theodosius. 77 Marriage into the imperial family was a
highly advantageous affair, and marriage to an emperor’s daughter allowed
the son-in-law to hope for the purple, an expectation that in fact material-
ized for Maurice after his engagement to Tiberius’ daughter.

One individual’s promotion was a boon for the whole family. After his
accession, Anastasius’ relatives received consulates and high offices and
concluded marriages with illustrious families: nine relatives obtained the
consulate between 500 and 518, a niece married into the blue-blooded
Anicii, creating connections with the Valentinian and Theodosian houses,
while two other nieces wed leading generals and thereby coupled the
emperor’s family to the social group of the magistri militum ? 8 Nor was this
an isolated phenomenon. Even disregarding Justinian’s career, Justin I’s
peasant kin rapidly experienced high office, wealth, and brilliant marriages
to the capital’s great families: Justinian’s cousin Boraides was enriched, and
his sister Vigilantia, whom one poet took the liberty of calling a queen, saw
her children make brilliant matches, while her son became Justin II.

73 Menander fr. 18.1—2; Procop. Secret History 16.1—5; 2.32—6. 74 E.g. John Eph. V.SS. Or. xlvii.

75 Pulcheria: Malalas 352; Cameron, Alan (1981) 275—7, contra Holum, Empresses 115; PLRE n s.v.
Euphemia 5; Procop. Wars vii.31.2— 14, esp. 5 and 14. 76 Malchus, fr. 8.

77 John Eph. HE m.5.14. 78 Cameron, Alan (1978); c£, however, PLRE 11.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human element 149

Theodora’s family was not left far behind. Her daughter by an earlier liaison
probably married Anastasius’ grand-nephew; the empress managed to
marry the grandson that resulted from that union to Belisarius’ daughter,
and so attached the great general’s family to her own. Another relative
occupied a lucrative post in the palace administration and earned his keep
when he uncovered a potential conspiracy. 79 In similar fashion, Maurice’s
accession brought new wealth to his family. 8 "

Once these families reached the top, most showed remarkable staying
power, especially in the light of the upheavals that wracked the broader
society and economy of the sixth century. None of Anastasius’ relatives
followed him to the throne, but his descendants have been tracked in posi-
tions of prominence and power over the next five generations. It is inter-
esting that the aristocratic eighth-century patriarch of Constantinople who
dared oppose imperial iconoclasm bore the name Germanus, so well
attested in Justinian’s family, and was himself the son of a seventh-century
patrician J us tinian.

What we have been discussing so far looks like family patronage, the par-
celling out of wealth and position on the basis of kinship. In fact, kinship
meant more within the imperial palace. Family links functioned as a tool of
governance as well as a key component of court society. Thus, between 468
and 476, the generals Basiliscus, Armatus and Nepos were related to the
empress Verina by blood or marriage, while another two, Zeno and
Marcianus, married her daughters. Indeed, Odoacer may have been Verina’s
nephew, and the coincidence of the coup d’etat in Ravenna and Basiliscus’
usurpation takes on new meaning. 81 In any event, Julius Nepos, who had
seized the western throne with Leo I’s support, was certainly married to a
relative of Verina, which helps explain why she pressured Zeno not to
abandon Nepos.

Zeno’s own kin in turn supplemented and perhaps counterbalanced his
mother-in-law’s relations: we have already seen that his son by an earlier
marriage had been groomed for the succession, but he died young. Zeno’s
brother Longinus was m agister militum praesentalis and twice ordinary consul,
granting the Isaurian highlander honour and a chance to gain favour in
Constantinople through consular largess. Malalas identifies the Isaurian
general Ulus, magister officiorum , patrician and consul, as Zeno’s uncle, 82
which suggests that the Isaurian emperor reached beyond the military
bureaucracy to control the key post of magjster officiorum through kinship or,
at the least, ethnic solidarity. The same holds for another Ulus or two, who
were praetorian prefects of the east in this period. 8 ’

79 Procop. Wars vu.$z.ii\Anth. Gr. vii. 590 with Cameron, Alan (1978) 268; Theoph. AM 6055.

80 John Eph. HE 111.5.18. 81 Krautschick (1986).

82 Demandt (1989) 188 n. 29, contra PLRE 11 s.v. Ulus 1.

83 PLRE 11 s.v. FI. Illus Pusaeus D. . .; Ulus 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

150 6. EMPEROR AND COURT

When Anastasius took over, Longinus was pushed aside. Anastasius’
brother-in-law, Secundinus, was soon made city prefect, clearly to control
public order. A nephew, Hypatius, who may have fought against the Isaurian
rebels, certainly became magpster militum praesentalis and occupied several other-
commands, even returning to prominence, after his uncle’s death, until he
was swept away by the Nika uprising. His brother Pompeius, who met the
same fate, commanded an army in Thrace late in Anastasius’ reign. Similar-
patterns obtain for Justin I’s family. The extreme case is Maurice: the
emperor’s brother Peter was both magister ojficiorum and curopalatus, his
brother-in-law Philippicus became comes excubitorum and commanded numer-
ous campaigns, while a cousin or nephew, bishop Domitian, remained
Maurice’s closest confidant and adviser. Here the emperor’s relatives indubi-
tably spread through different segments of government. The empire had
become so much a family affair that, in unprecedented fashion, Maurice’s
father and Domitian entered the imperial pantheon at the church of the Holy
Apostles; indeed, the latter received a state funeral on an imperial scale . 84

From Verina on, most high-ranking generals were family appointments,
which surely reflects a threat emperors perceived in the armed forces. For
all his power, the emperor’s control was constantly jeopardized by conspir-
acies, usurpations and riots. By keeping the armies largely in relatives’
hands, the emperor gained an added degree of loyalty. When other struc-
tures of imperial power cracked in crisis, as in the Nika riot, Justinian fell
back on his kin. His wife alone urged him to keep fighting and she turned
the tide when other advisers panicked. To his cousins Boraides, not other-
wise known to have played a political role, and Justus, he entrusted the dan-
gerous mission of arresting Anastasius’ nephews who had turned the riot
into a usurpation.

Another factor, too, may have figured in this conspicuous overlay of
family on the institutions of late-Roman government, where power was par-
titioned among competing and compartmentalized bureaucracies. These
stretched vertically through society, but lacked much horizontal integration
below the emperor, since the normal bureaucratic career was advancement
by seniority within one organization, whereas transfers seem to have been
rare and resented . 83 This pattern also applied to the court. Thus the
empress’s court was distinct from the emperor’s in its gender, location,
organization and finances. Palace security and its personnel were split
among the magister officiorum , another corps headed by the comes excubitorum,
and, thirdly, the eunuch spatharius. Triply redundant security systems created
countervailing pressures which enhanced the emperor’s safety. Yet such
pronounced corporate identity and rivalry also engendered inefficiency or

84 John Eph. HE in. 5.1 8; Whitby, Maurice 14—15; Theoph. and 6094.

85 Jones, ERE 1.602.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human ELEMENT I 5 I

worse. By weaving together disparate organizational strands with the thread
of kinship, the emperor could attempt to unite safely what earlier emperors
and custom had set apart. The value of reliable kinship ties across profes-
sional divisions was obvious. For example, in 51 8 young Justinian was a can-
didatus, one of the emperor’s personal bodyguards, in the palatine scholae
commanded by the magister officiorutn, while his uncle was comes of the rival
excubitors. So Justinian was able to save one imperial candidate proposed
by his scholarii from being massacred by his uncle’s unit, and perhaps helped
to persuade some scholarii to back his uncle, who of course enjoyed his own
corps’ support. The rivalry between the two groups was in fact so intense
that some scholarii assaulted Justin. 86

Within the palace, the imperial family’s influence was consistently
rivalled by one group which was both intimately linked with them and often
kinless: the eunuch chamberlains, who staffed the imperial apartments. 87
Corippus aptly describes the essential duties of this ‘crowd of chaste men’:
they enjoyed full trust and authority within the emperor’s household,
served his table, prepared his bed and garments, and locked the emperor
and themselves in his bedroom every night. Their responsibility for access
to the imperial couple, and for carrying and keeping the imperial insignia,
created both visibility and the power that flowed from proximity. 88 The
eunuch castrensis or major-domo oversaw the lower palatine staff, whence
the latter’s collective designation as castrensiani. In this capacity he ran much
of the daily routine of the palace. Eunuchs were also influential in raising
the imperial children: Antiochus tutored Theodosius II and the pope
admonished Maurice’s sister to see that the eunuchs set a proper example
for the emperor’s children. 89

Their power reached into the highest affairs of state. Chrysaphius
arranged an assassination attempt against Attila and had a patriarch deposed.
Urbicius made the suggestion that led to his subordinate Anastasius’ impe-
rial election, and Amantius came close to imposing his own assistant in 518.
The schedule of bribes paid by Cyril of Alexandria furnishes a rough scale
of the value of the support of some dozen leading figures at court. Even
leaving aside the luxury goods, the grand chamberlain or praepositus sacri cuhi-
culi who headed the eunuch establishment leads the list with two hundred
pounds of gold. Though a second grand chamberlain — one of the two is
certainly the empress’s — received only fifty pounds, the other chamberlains
each received a hundred pounds. That is, their power was equated with that
of the magister officiorum, quaestor and praetorian prefect, who each received
the same amount. 911 But it was power of a very peculiar sort.

86 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.93. 87 Hopkins (1978) 172—96; Clauss (1984).

88 Coripp. lust. hi. 214— 19; care of insignia: Claud. InEutrop. 1.417— 23; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.91 and
93; Theoph. AM 6041. 89 Jones, ERE 1.571; Malalas 361; Greg. Reg. vn.23.

90 ACO 1.4, pp. 224—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I 5 2

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

Most eunuchs were foreigners from the empire’s north-eastern frontiers.
Though their condition almost implied slave status, they gained freedom on
entering imperial service and their status rose in the fifth century. In fact,
the grand chamberlain received precedence equal to prefects or generals by
a decree of 422. 91 Yet unlike others at court, the foreign and kinless eunuchs
lacked the ordinary late Roman social bases of power. Paradoxically, this
very weakness fed their strength. Near-total dependence on the emperor
and constant proximity to him could create an unparalleled degree of
confidence between servant and master. Indeed, their fate was sometimes
so closely tied to his that some, like Chrysaphius or Amantius, outlived their
emperor by only a few days, though these were exceptional cases. Such utter
dependence meant that they could be counted on for deeds which others
might shun, whether it was the murder of Stilicho’s son or Zeno’s purported
attempt to assassinate Ulus. So too their dependency and physical
disqualification from the purple made them safe choices as generals, an
innovation probably intended for the same purpose as the generalships for
the emperor’s family. Thus, Zeno used a eunuch as co-commander during
the civil war against his compatriot and possible relative, Ulus. Justinian had
Narses share Belisarius’ command in Italy and ultimately turned the Italian
war over to him, after the death of his cousin Germanus terminated the
emperor’s plans for keeping the Italian front under family control.

Another source of power lay in the eunuchs’ unparalleled knowledge of
the court itself. Combined with the fact that some long-serving eunuchs
first appear in vital positions scarcely appropriate for newcomers, the
length of some careers suggests that chamberlains often grew up in the
palace, as we know was true of Justinian’s trusted Narses. 92

The careers of Urbicius, Misael and the earlier Narses (1) span virtually
the entire period from Theodosius II to Tiberius’ promotion to Caesar.
Furthermore, palace links normally did not cease on retirement: many years
after he retreated to a monastery, Misael copied a treatise in large letters for
an apparently near-sighted Theodora. 9 ’ In other words, the eunuchs pro-
vided an essential ingredient to the emergence of enduring court traditions,
a kind of institutional memory. In particular, their duties meant that they
contributed to the flowering of court ceremonial which occurs in this
period. Eunuchs practised the corporate solidarity that typifies court
organizations. For instance, two western eunuchs owned an estate outside
Rome together. When a bishop refused to make an appointment sought by
one chamberlain, he naturally turned to another chamberlain to intercede
and explain his action. Links among fellow eunuchs extended even to a
shared tomb. 94

91 C.Th. vi.8.1; cf. 67x11.5. 92 Agathias 1.16.1. 93 Severus Ant. Ep. Sel. 1.63.

94 CIL vi. 3 1 946 = xv.7 1 3 1 ; Severus Ant. Ep. Sel. 1. 1 7; John Eph. 1 V.SS. Or. lvii.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human element 153

Table 2. Some prominent eunuch careers

Eunuch

First attestation

East attestation

Years of activity

Michael-Misael 95

470

537

Urbicius PSC

434/449

505/6

57 +

Narses i PSC

5 30 ( sacellarius )

573/4

43 +

Lauricius PSC

before 423

443/4

21 +

Romanus 3

43 1

451

Narses 4 spath.

565 ( spatharius )

about 5 8 1

16 +

Lausus PSC

420 (PSC)

436

16 +

Antiochus

before 408

about 421

13 +

Artaxes

442 (PSC)

45 1

Chrysaphius

about 441

450

Scholasticius

422

43 1

Note:

N.B.: the dignity in parentheses is that held at the earliest attestation; the last attestation
may include retirement.

As Cyril of Alexandria’s bribes suggest, chamberlains acquired fabulous
wealth, some of which flowed into spectacular palaces like those of Lausus
and Antiochus and some into religious enterprises. The eunuchs’ religious
zeal created privileged links between the court and the new urban or sub-
urban monastic movements, and they constantly crop up in the Lives of
holy men associated with the court. Lacking the progeny to whom other
late Romans might turn, the eunuchs were early and active in founding or
endowing monasteries which provided for their retirement, burial and per-
petual prayer. Thus, Valentinian Ill’s chamberlain Lauricius constructed a
splendid tomb for himself in a monastery attached to the church of St
Laurence, about six hundred metres outside the main gate to the palace
quarter of Ravenna. Narses constructed a monastery in Bithynia for his
eventual retirement: though he died on duty in Italy, his body was returned
home and buried in his monastery by the sovereigns themselves . 96

The grand chamberlain was in charge of the court ushers, the thirty silen-
tiaries, who wielded golden wands to ensure quiet and order during the cer-
emonies which constituted court routine. Their status and visibility were
fairly high: they entered the imperial senate on retirement, and if Anastasius
is any example, tall stature and dignified mien may have been part of the
requirements for this post. In any case, personal association with the throne
favoured chamberlains and silentiaries alike as personal emissaries who
could forcefully represent an emperor’s interest in problems arising in the

95 PLRE 11 s.v. Michael i; hi s.v Misael.

96 Deichmann (1976—89) 11.2.336— 40; John Eph. HE m.1.39.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

154

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

provinces. Thus Leo I sent the silentiary Diomedes along with a disapprov-
ing papal letter to the newly elected patriarch of Alexandria, Timothy
Aelurus . 97 The women whom the sources call cubiculariae are more shadowy.
Their name implies that they were the eunuchs’ female counterparts, and
Zeno explicitly included them in his blanket manumission of chamberlains.
Like four specially selected silentiaries, they seem to have served the

empress.

Other members of the imperial entourage owed less to institutions or
kinship. They range from Zenonis’ nurse, who shared the secrets of the
empress’s heart, to old friends who experienced a meteoric rise in govern-
ment, like Theodosius II’s school friend Paulinus, who became magister
ojjnciorum before falling from favour, or the brothers who had cared for an
ill Marcian long before he ascended the throne . 99 While the story that the
brothers owed their fortune to their having predicted Marcian’s imperial
destiny may be fiction, there is no doubt that soothsayers and astrologers
received high status at court in return for their services. Thus, Zeno’s friend
Maurianus, who foretold the next reign, held the rank of comes. Pamprepius’
spectacular rise and fall in the household of Ulus and the governments of
Zeno and the usurper Leontius owed much to his prophecies. Proclus, an
interpreter of dreams, was Anastasius’ ‘very close friend ’. 100

Court doctors occupied an enviable position in their profession and the
palace. Retirement brought them membership of the senate and, judging
from the laws, it was not unusual for them to reach the rank of comes. Their
prestige could be considerable. The pagan comes Jacob, who dared to breach
imperial etiquette when examining an afflicted Leo I, had statues raised to
him in the public baths adjoining the Great Palace. When the pope needed
to bring his views on a controversial issue to Maurice’s attention, his
method was to request the court doctor Theodore, not his own ambassa-
dor, to deliver his brief to Maurice’s attention at a propitious moment, out
of the public eye . 101

Perhaps the least noticed of the socially prominent people at court must
have been a powerful force for transmitting late Roman cultural values to
foreign elites. These were the political hostages who were sent to the palace
to be raised under imperial tutelage. For instance, when aged twelve,
Nabarnugios, scion of the royal family of Iberia, was sent to Theodosius
IPs court and spent about a decade there. He received a royal education and
held military rank, but became obsessed with ascetic practices. The venera-
tion of martyrs’ relics in his private chamber won friends among the palace
eunuchs and other zealous Christians, including an architect and his brother,

97 Evagr. HE ii.io. 98 CJ xii.5.4; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.86; Holum, Empresses 132 n. 87.

99 PLRE 11 s.v. Maria, Paulinus, Tatian 1.

100 PLRE 11 s.v. Maurianus 2, Pamprepius; Proclus, cf. Malalas 409.

101 PLRE 11 s.v. Iacobus 3; Greg. Reg. 111.64, cf. PLRE hi s.v. Theodorus 44.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE court: the human element 155

a manager of imperial estates. Simultaneously — and most revealingly — it
earned him the hatred of his Byzantine staff: his cellarer refused to supply
oil for his devotions, and his bodyguards and slaves tried to kill him. Their
grievance shows how the hostage system, beyond its geopolitical intent, was
supposed to function. Nabarnugios had been sent from Georgia to achieve
glory among the Romans but, instead of sharing in his worldly success as
their master was assimilated into court society, his Roman household was
being dragged down by his monkish desires. To escape from his gilded cap-
tivity required the miraculous intervention of the martyrs of Sebasteia, who
guided the young man and his eunuch friend through the watch-posts that
protected the sleeping palace . 102 This story parallels our limited evidence for
the young Theoderic’s decade at the court of Leo I and suggests the roots
of the Ostrogothic king’s later emulation of imperial ways at Ravenna.

One final group added their voice to the sometimes cacophonic chorus
of court life. Although it may not have changed the structures of social
access to the emperors, Christianization helped transform the kind of
people who used them. Leaders of the institutional church clamoured for
the emperor’s ear and the bishops of Constantinople became a regular
presence at court, routinely introducing visiting prelates to the emperor, for
instance, or participating in the discussions surrounding an emperor’s elec-
tion, as well as performing the sacred functions court life demanded . 103 Not
to be left on the sidelines, the pope established a permanent ambassador
or apocrisarius to the emperor, whose inclusion among the influential figures
targeted by a Merovingian diplomatic mission reveals his perceived value in
lobbying the court . 104

Even more novel was the access granted to holy men. Through their
feats of asceticism and putative proximity to the supreme emperor in
heaven, these rugged and malodorous individuals supposedly escaped the
court’s networks of power and pressure groups, conquering a significant
position on its fringes like their prototypes on the edges of Syrian villages.
Thus Hypatius established himself near the suburban palace of Rufinianae.
Daniel the Stylite climbed a column overlooking the Bosphorus and was
soon enjoying imperial patronage. Like other Syrian holy men, Daniel arbi-
trated between conflicting factions, and made predictions for courtiers and
emperors alike; his biography opens a fine window on court life . 105 The
concerted opposition of Justinian’s chief financial officials and generals
delayed his risky plan to invade Africa until an eastern holy man’s vision
supported the war . 106 We have already seen Theodora’s role in housing the
schismatic Monophysites she favoured right under her orthodox husband’s
nose in the palace of Hormisdas.

102 K Petr Iber. pp. 25— 35; cf. PLRE 11 s.v. Petrus 13, Proclus 3.

103 Coll. Avell. cxvi.25; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.92. 104 Epist. Austras. xxxii.

105 Brown, Society 132— 9; Callin. V. Hypatii vni.i— 7. 106 Procop. Wars in.io.i 8— 21.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

156

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

Diversity, then, characterized the social groups that constituted the
court. Differing religious enthusiasms, languages, social statuses, kinship
networks and rival organizations included, excluded and collided with one
another inside the Great Palace. And we have barely hinted at the ethnic
underlay implied by the tribesmen — Goths, Lombards or Isaurians —
serving in the palatine guards or the ethnic variety, ranging from Italians to
Mesopotamians, which was concealed under the all-embracing Roman cit-
izenship. LTnited by service to the emperor, their corporate groups, and
themselves, the people of the court shared proximity and the precarious-
ness of their power and position. Today’s all-powerful courtier who
enjoyed free speech or ‘outspokenness’ (parrhesia) might be exiled or even
executed tomorrow, whether he was the ruler’s boyhood friend, like
Theodosius II’s magister officiorum , or his trusted physician, like Justinian’s
doctor . 1 " 7 This heterogeneous and dynamic human mass needed structure,
and ceremony helped meet that need.

IV. COURT AND CEREMONY

In its zest for elaborate symbolic gestures, the palace reflected broader
society, for imperial ceremonial capped a pyramid of rituals in late Roman
society and government. The recurring dilemmas of choreographing the
court’s public movements in a stable landscape naturally encouraged court
officials to codify ritual solutions once they had been devised. The durable
empresses, and eunuchs who spent their entire lives in the palace acquiring
or caring for the symbols of power, helped foster a growing ceremonial tra-
dition, as the insignia of power, like ceremonies, began to accumulate: the
Great Palace still boasted splendid thrones commissioned by Arcadius and
Maurice five centuries later . 1 " 8 It is a token of the new situation that the
palace tradition of ceremonial treatises begins in the fifth century . 1 " 9

The interplay of the multiple elements we have sketched meant that their
configuration within court society changed. The main scale for gauging one’s
importance was precedence. Accordingly, quarrels among competing
bureaucratic elites explain much of the Theodosian Code, as law after law
tinkered with the minutiae of official rank, and an imperial decision enhanc-
ing an official’s precedence was a sure sign that he and his corporate com-
partment had arrived. Revealingly, precedence attained its definitive
statement when members of the court adored the emperor at solemn audi-
ences — for example, the consistorium. So long as a member of court held a
governmental title — and virtually all significant figures within the palace
received one — the senatorial order provided the general framework for these

107 PLRE 11 s.v. Paulinus 8; Chron. Pasch. s.a. 5 32.

108 Oikonomides (1972) 275.10; Const. Porph. De Cer. 11.1 5. 109 McCormick (1985) 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COURT AND CEREMONY

1 57

distinctions. Senate and consistonum had changed from earlier days: once they
had been institutions where important decisions were made, but now they
had become places where decisions were manifested. The connection
between precedence and emperor was intimate. Indeed, when western dig-
nitaries arrived at the eastern court to obtain recognition for their emperor
— or, later, king — their ranks were studiously ignored during their initial audi-
ence, since recognizing their precedence meant recognizing their ruler . 110

‘Leva!’ ‘Raise the curtain!’ With these words began the central act of the
most solemn imperial audiences. As the great curtain {velum) rose in the con-
sistorium to reveal the Roman emperor seated on an elevated throne beneath
a golden baldaquin, the subject prostrated himself on a porphyry marker
and adored him (pros kynesis). After a final screening in the antechamber,
each person or group was summoned to the adoration when their names
and ranks had been read aloud (citatio). Precedence governed admission: the
highest-ranking person entered last, and the silentiaries and ushers had to
guard against people entering out of rank and usurping undue precedence.
After adoring the emperor — and, in privileged circumstances, kissing his
feet — each person joined his peers. He stood in the spot fixed for his per-
sonal rank, as determined by his office, his dignities and their seniority, and
watched while the higher ranks repeated the procedure. When all had
entered and adored the emperor in this way, the main ceremonial transac-
tions began — audiences of ambassadors, reading out of new laws, promo-
tions, retirements, etc. Afterwards the court was dismissed and exited by
precedence, the highest-ranking individuals first . 111

Eating with the emperor created a bond, and the growing significance of
state banquets in court life can be seen in Justin IPs Chrysotriklinos and
Justinian’s gold tableware depicting his victories. Here, too, the most pow-
erful men at court were easily identified: they shared the emperor’s couch;
when the emperor sent part of his own meal to the Persian ambassador,
this could only signify perfect concord between the two great powers . 112
The prominence of banquets explains why Justinian could signal the
court’s profound and public mourning at a catastrophic earthquake by can-
celling one. By the time Maurice celebrated his marriage to the late
Tiberius’ daughter, state banquets figured on a par with comedy shows and
circus races as elements of public rejoicing in the capital . 113

When the emperor returned from excursions, the court was convoked
to meet him at various places designated by his wishes and itinerary. Even
if he sailed quietly to the Great Palace, key officials were expected to assem-
ble to welcome him on the landing . 114 Alternatively, the emperor’s travels

110 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.87—8.

111 Coripp. lust. hi. 191—256; Cyr. Scyth. V. Sabae x, John Lyd. De Mag. 11.9, Const. Porph. De Cer.

1.84— 8; Jones, ERE 1.528—35. 112 Theoph. AM 6065; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.90— 1.

113 McCormick, Eternal Victory 105 n. 109. 114 Const. Porph. De Cer. Append. 497.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

i?8

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

to the country could be inflated into a full-scale procession through the city,
and these ceremonies outside the palace precincts projected different facets
of imperial rule to a broader public. The emperor might ride through the
streets in a gilded carriage pulled by snow-white mules, escorted by the
imperial standards and heavily-armed, brawny men with long hair. He was
preceded by the senate through cleaned and repaired streets where, at
various locations, choruses saluted him. 115

Some secular urban processions dramatized the emperor’s role as civic
benefactor — for instance, when he inspected the city’s granaries — and
onlookers could divine the political stature of leading figures by their prox-
imity to the imperial carriage. 116 The visual symbolism of these elaborate
displays was verbalized — and actively incorporated onlookers — by the
acclamations chanted by the crowd or, increasingly, by semi-professional
performers. Their simple, rhythmical formulae trumpeted the emperor’s
felicity, victory and piety and might also salute important figures in the
power structure. Though street processions persisted, imperial ceremonies
geared to broader audiences shifted increasingly to the circus. Emperors
still braved the streets when necessary, but their security might be jeopard-
ized, as Theodosius II discovered when a famished crowd stoned his pro-
cession to inspect the granaries. 117

The army’s role as audience and participant in these public ceremonies
seems to diminish in this era. Thus, the great accession ceremony had
remained closely linked with the Roman army so long as coronations fol-
lowed the precedent established by Valens in 364. Down to the time of Leo
I, emperors were proclaimed by the troops outside the city, on the parade
ground at the Hebdomon, a place clearly identified with the army by the
city’s inhabitants. 118 But the pattern changed thereafter, perhaps in connec-
tion with Leo I’s murder of his former patrons, the generals Aspar and
Ardabur, which ended that military family’s dominance at court. Leo I had
his grandson proclaimed emperor in the Hippodrome, and Zeno’s investi-
ture followed suit shortly thereafter. 119 This new civilian setting for impe-
rial accession kept the soldiers who symbolized the army’s participation
safely down in the arena. It geared the emperor’s assumption of power to
the urban crowd, as he appeared in the kathisma surrounded by leading
figures of his court to receive the troops’ Latin acclamations and his
people’s Greek ones. The first accession celebrated inside the city set a
pattern which prevailed until the seventh century and affected other cere-
monies — for example, triumphs. 120

115 Proclus of Constantinople,//?^. ix.i— 2.

116 Const. Porph. De Cer. 11.51; cf. Mango, Developpement 40.

117 Marc. Com. s.a. 431; cf. McCormick, Eternal Victory 94 n. 61. 118 Dagron, Naissance 100— 1.

119 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.94; Theoph. 5966.

120 Beck (1966) 10—22; McCormick, Eternal Victory 60—9 and 93—100.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COURT AND CEREMONY 1 5 9

Though doubtless reflecting a shift in the structure of power that
benefited the civilian bureaucracies to the detriment of the army, the move
towards the circus probably responded to other factors as well. By linking
great ceremonies to the empire’s most popular sport, imperial ceremonial
managers guaranteed a huge audience — the Hippodrome held perhaps
300,000 spectators 121 — for the key symbolic moments in the life of the
state, at the same time that the kathisma guaranteed imperial security. Races
had, in any case, long celebrated anniversaries or important events, while
the cult of sporting victory came, in the emperor’s presence, to be confused
and fused with the all-pervasive cult of the emperor as the military victor
par excellence. Now, however, the circus became not only a means of cele-
brating political realities, but the place in which those political realities were
publicly acted out. In some sense, the move of imperial accessions from
the suburban parade ground to the urban Hippodrome represents a final
acknowledgement that the court was part of a great capital city.

As the ceremonial importance of the Hippodrome grew, so did that of
the factions in the life of the city and, ultimately, the court. These associa-
tions of partisans of the colours which identified racing teams may have
been inspired by late Roman theatre claques and grew out of the organiza-
tions which staged circus games. Though formally enrolled members
would have been a small minority of Constantinople’s population — 900
Blues and 1,500 Greens in 602 122 — they were young, energetic and well
organized, they tended to come from comfortable backgrounds, and they
were vociferous. They sat in special sections at the races and became amaz-
ingly adept at chanting the acclamations which, however carefully stage-
managed by the authorities, were persistently regarded as the people’s
voice, with the capacity both to reassure and terrify men of power. The fac-
tions’ skill at performing these indispensable tokens of public approval

encouraged the court to build political bridges to this emerging pressure
12

group.

The emperor’s scrupulous and flamboyant performance of Christian
rites reassured all concerned that God was on the side of the Roman
empire. Although the palace’s churches allowed the emperor to discharge
his Christian duties in seclusion, there was clear advantage to be gained by
publicly worshipping with the people. By the reign of Theodosius II, the
seasonal celebrations of the new religion permeated the social life of the
court: the aristocracy customarily visited each other and the emperor on
feasts like Epiphany. 124 Though emperors normally attended religious ser-
vices in the Great Church only on great feast days, the stational nature of
Constantinople’s liturgy opened the way for new imperial processions to

121 Muller-Wiener (1 977) 64. 122 Theophyl. Sim. Hist, vm.7.10— 11.

123 Cameron, Circus Factions cf. ch. 8 (Liebeschuete), pp. 224—9 below. 124 V. Petr. Iber. p. 25.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

i6o

6. EMPEROR AND COURT

other shrines on other great feasts, again exposing the ruler to the popu-
lace’s admiration or wrath, as during Maurice’s procession to Blachernae . 125
Indeed, the emperor himself founded liturgical feasts and processions to
honour the Virgin, who was emerging as the heavenly patron of the eastern
capital . 126 Elaborate hymns, of which the most famous were composed by
Romanos, enhanced these grand ceremonial occasions.

The connection between religion and political ideology became explicit
when the forms of Christian worship were attached to specific events in
the life of the state. The patriarch’s blessing lent religious resonance to
imperial accessions from the fifth century, and interaction between liturgy
and public ritual steadily intensified. 12 ' Theodosius II interrupted a circus
show and improvised a liturgical procession of thanksgiving when news of
a usurper’s defeat reached the eastern capital. By the reign of Maurice,
purely liturgical forms had emerged to herald the success of Roman arms
against the Persians . 128

The ceremonial patterns which governed the adoration of the emperor
also shaped the court’s public devotions. The convergence of religion, cer-
emony and imperial ideology stands out clearly in the cult of the relic of
the True Cross, which had become the simultaneous symbol of the new
religion’s victory over death and of the regenerated empire’s victory over
its enemies. So, when the relic was exposed to the city’s veneration in the
Great Church, Justin II’s court assembled and proceeded in ranks of prec-
edence to adore the cross, just as they adored the emperor . 129 The court
also stimulated the cult of relics: Pulcheria obtained the supposed remains
of St Stephen Protomartyr from Jerusalem and had them deposited in the
palace church built especially for the purpose, and it has been argued that
one of the exceedingly rare depictions of the imperial court shows pre-
cisely this procession. Leo I arranged for relics of St Symeon Stylites to be
translated to the capital and lent his imperial carriage for the ceremony . 130

V. COURT AND CULTURE

Court patronage helped promote new religious fashions, while its ceremo-
nies and language prompted imitation within and beyond the empire’s
borders . 131 The court’s influence extended into late Roman elite culture.
The situation was propitious. The court, we have seen, comprised a poly-
glot mass of foreigners and Romans from throughout the empire drawn to
the prestigious rewards of imperial service. Like the former hostage

125 Theophyl. Sim. Hist, vm.4.1 1—5.3; Baldovin (1987).

126 Theoph. AM 6080; cf. Cameron, Averil (1978).

127 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.94; Winkelmann (1978b). 128 McCormick, Eternal Victory 60; 69—70.

129 Gage (193 3); John Eph. HE m. 23. 29. 130 Holum and Vikan (1979); V. Dan. Styl 58.

131 McCormick (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COURT AND CULTURE l6l

Theoderic, even the founders of post-Roman kingdoms might be inti-
mately familiar with it. Their descendants, like the Vandal king Hilderic,
might well have spent time and formed friendships there. Within the
empire, constant emphasis on the emperor’s omnipotence encouraged a
stream of suppliants from the provinces who lobbied for various privileges
or policies, whence, inevitably, wider exposure for the latest court trends
among local elites. The court’s lifestyle and its high fashion reverberated far
afield, to judge from the inspiration detected in a Merovingian queen’s
burial gown long after direct contacts with foreign elites had decreased . 132

In the capital, competition for visibility among the elite fuelled the
demand for prestigious expenditure, as even the shreds of surviving evi-
dence show. The general Ardabur and his Roman wife commissioned litur-
gical silver to satisfy a vow, and an emperor’s daughter, Anicia Juliana, to
whom a pope might turn when negotiating a rapprochement with the court,
rivalled Justin I himself with her opulent shrine to St Polyeuctus. Justinian’s
lavish expenditure in the capital was followed by the remarkably extensive
artistic patronage of his nephew. It is characteristic of the age that the
balance of munificence shifts from the old civil projects of baths and thea-
tres to religious buildings. These conditions fostered powerful cultural cur-
rents which spurred imitation in distant elites, as links between innovative
sculptural decoration at St Polyeuctus and projects in the Ostrogothic
kingdom indicate . 133

Political practice dictated that the court have easy access to metalwork-
ers and artists. As soon as Anastasius emerged as Zeno’s successor, the
future emperor was sequestered with engravers and painters, surely to pub-
licize his accession throughout the empire by coinage and official portraits
whose arrival stimulated so many provincial rituals . 134 Standard govern-
mental procedure thus diffused art to the provinces, as did the direct impe-
rial patronage of distant shrines and sites practised by Justinian:
Constantinopolitan influence has been detected in the spectacular mosaics
he commissioned at Sinai in the monastery of St Catherine . 135 Justinian’s
construction of churches in Africa dedicated to the Virgin lent impetus to
a cult of Mary which mirrored developments in the capital, while the cha-
rateristically Constantinopolitan saints’ cults that took root at Ravenna
from the fifth century have been ascribed to the court . 136

The links between court and culture are especially clear in literature.
Some Latin manuscripts connected to Constantinople testify to that court’s

132 Viereck (1981) 90—2.

133 Demandt (1986); Cameron (1980); Mango, Developpement 52; Harrison (1986) 415 and 420; cf.

Deichmann (1976—89) 11.3.273—6. 134 Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.92, cf. 1.87; Kruse (1934).

135 Forsyth and Weitzmann (1966) 16.

136 Procop. Buildings vi.2.20, 4.4, 5.9, 7.16, cf. Cameron, Averil (1978) for Gaul; Deichmann
(1976-89) 11.3.176-7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

l6z 6. EMPEROR AND COURT

bilingual culture. 137 Emperors who, like Justinian, actually composed
learned theological treatises, or empresses like Eudocia who versified scrip-
ture, hagiography and her husband’s victory over the Persians, were excep-
tions. But the political dimension of religious orthodoxy required the
palace to marshal theologians in the search for harmony, just as emperors
deployed considerable resources for codifying Roman law. Theodosius II,
in particular, was noted for his scholarly bent, discernible in the theologi-
cal library and a geographical project that he sponsored. 138

Dedications of literary works to the emperor or courtiers suggest
another aspect of the palace’s cultural role. Sozomen and Olympiodorus
addressed their histories to Theodosius II, and Palladius’ Lausiac History
owes its title to Lausus, Theodosius IPs chamberlain, a dedication which
surely contributed to its remarkable success in publicizing ascetic practices.
Panegyrics are a special case. These command performances were often
solicited from figures with court connections and were well remunerated.
For the elite privileged to hear them and penetrate their glittering complex-
ity, elegant panegyrics accompanied important ceremonies. So Paul the
Silentiary recited his famous paean on God’s ‘colleague’ Justinian and his
magnificent church during the rededication of the Great Church, while the
city prefect praised the prince in an ambassadorial audience granted by Leo
I in 467. John Lydus, who had served in the palace before joining the bureau
of the praetorian prefect of the east, performed a similar service for
Justinian — in return for which he was rewarded both with cash and pro-
motion. 139 Corippus ascribes the initiative for his Latin epic on Justin IPs
accession chiefly to his master, the quaestor, while his claim only to furnish
the tongue for the words of Justin IPs mother and the Augusta is tantaliz-
ing indeed. 140

The recurring professional connection of panegyrists and palace points
to a more invidious aspect of the court’s role in late Roman literary life, for
there is a repeated pattern among the histories from this period. Sozomen
may well be identical with the personal assistant of a praetorian prefect of
the east; Olympiodorus served Theodosius II as ambassador; Priscus was
a trusted assistant to the same emperor’s close personal friend; Candidus
was notary for some leading Isaurians, whose rise at court his lost history
chronicled. Marcellinus controlled access to the young patrician Justinian
and apparently won the title comes and a place in the court hierarchy thanks
to his chronicle. Procopius, of course, served as assistant to Justinian’s top
general, and the stress of composing acceptable history left its mark in the
Secret History. Menander’s dignity as protector and his references to Maurice’s
generosity and fascination with history at least suggest a connection

137 Cavallo (1984) 629-30. 138 Soc. HE vn. 22; Traube (1891) 406-9.

139 Paul Sil. Descr. 6; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.87; John Lydus, De Mag. 111.28—9.

140 Inst. 1. 15— 24; 7— 11. Cf. PLRE hi s.v. Corippus.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COURT AND CULTURE

163

between the two . 141 Over and over, the pattern is the same: obscure but
trusted assistants to key players at court took up their pens to write histo-
ries that interpreted recent events for contemporaries. While these names
do not exhaust the historical record of the period, they surely dominate it.
Just as the emperor and his court permeated the conditions of these works’
production and readership, so, through them, the court continues implicitly
to influence our understanding of their era.

141 Fr. 1 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 7

GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

SAM BARNISH, A.D. LEE AND MICHAEL WHITBY

The late Roman period saw the development, for the first time in the
Roman world, of complex bureaucratic structures which permitted emper-
ors, who had now abandoned the campaigning or peripatetic style of most
of their predecessors during the first four centuries of imperial history, to
retain their authority. The emperor and his court with its glittering ceremo-
nies in Constantinople was the focus for the eastern empire, and from there
issued the laws which announced imperial wishes. The armies, though no
longer directly commanded by emperors, strove to preserve the frontiers
and maintain law and order inside them . 1 But the smooth functioning of
this system required administrative structures which had to become more
complex and intrusive as the curial elites in individual cities, who had tra-
ditionally performed many vital tasks in the areas of revenue generation,
dissemination of imperial wishes and preservation of local order, slowly
declined in authority or surrendered control of some of these duties; here
was a cyclical process, with administrative developments responding to, but
also encouraging, a weakening of the curial class. The impact of adminis-
tration is reflected in a story from the Life of Theodore of Sykeon: devils
being exorcized cried out: ‘Oh violence! Why have you come here, you
iron-eater, why have you quitted Galatia and come into Gordiane? There
was no need for you to cross the frontier. We know you have come, but we
shall not obey you as did the demons of Galatia, for we are much tougher
than they, and not milder.’ It is telling that the author of the Life should have
seen the power of governors to cross provincial boundaries in pursuit of
bandits as an analogy for Theodore’s dealings with demons . 2 Active emper-
ors, such as Anastasius and Justinian, could attempt to dominate and
reform the administration, but their interference raised hackles; passive
emperors might be treated with contempt for their laziness and neglect of
their subjects. Overall, the fifth and sixth centuries are a time of gradual
development in the key processes which permitted the empire to function.

1 See ch. 6 (McCormick), pp. 142—56 above, and ch. 9 (Liebs) and ch. 11 (Whitby), pp. 242—4 and
308—14 below.

2 Seech. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 219—22 below. Lifeoi Theodore 43, with which cf. Justinian, Nov. 145;
Edict 8; Jones, ERE 294.

164

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOURCES 165

I. SOURCES

The range of different types of source for government and administration
in the fifth to sixth centuries is extensive, and these can be exploited to yield
a wide range of conclusions (often, though, highly conjectural) on the
structures and methods of government, on its personnel, and on their
values and attitudes. The sources, however, are also tantalizingly patchy, too
often restricted to narrow areas of space and time. The range indicates the
pervasiveness of government, at least at literate levels of society, and the
role of emperors and their administration in defining social and economic
structures and ways of thought; the restrictions indicate the infrequency of
major change — people take special notice of institutions when they are in
peril.

The men who tell us most about the system are those who sat at its centre,
the emperors. Their laws, however, express not only the imperial will, but the
wishes both of the ministers who will in most cases have influenced, or
determined, the drafting of laws, and of other ministers and subjects whose
complaints, reports and recommendations evoked them, and without whose
active and passive co-operation the system could not work. When, in 438, the
emperor Theodosius II published the sixteen books of his Code, compiling
legislation from the time of Constantine onwards, four books were devoted
to laws concerning civil and military administrative duties, privileges and
precedence, four to taxation and the imperial fisc, and another to the admin-
istration of Rome and Constantinople. 3 Of the Code of Justinian (529,
revised in 5 34) which superseded it, three out of twelve books are largely
devoted to these themes. In addition, we have a number of imperial laws
{Novels) published after the Codes, especially from Justinian, which also
handle administrative matters. Setting aside the content of individual laws,
this legislation tells us much about the interrelations of politics and govern-
ment. The Theodosian Code was compiled by a bureaucracy which had been
firmly established at Constantinople for a generation, and seems modestly
professional in its approach to the problems of running systems of govern-
ment and law that had both grown up haphazardly over centuries: indeed,
one aspect of this professionalism is the very process of identification and
collection of laws from provincial archives, in order to provide information
that had not been preserved at Constantinople in the period before it became
the settled capital of the eastern empire. The authorities were tidiers, rather
than innovators; it is notable that the volume of legislation included dimin-
ishes markedly in the early fifth century.

The Code also, however, reflects insecurity: the fact that the control of the
Theodosian dynasty over the western parts of the empire was dwindling,

3 In general on the Theodosian Code, see the papers in Harries and Wood (1993).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

i66

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

through barbarian occupation of the provinces, while emperors had increas-
ing difficulty in collecting taxes and enforcing their will in their own territo-
ries. The Code (published when a marriage alliance drew together the eastern
and western branches of the dynasty) symbolically reaffirmed imperial unity
and central control; it legitimated emperors by stressing their role as founts
of law; not surprisingly, it was used or imitated by barbarian kings in the west,
who, on a smaller scale, faced similar problems. 4 Justinian’s Code and his sub-
sequent Novels reflect the problems of an emperor whose relationship with
the senatorial elite was often tense, and who (arguably) had grandiose long-
term ambitions for the restoration of the empire as a single administrative
unit. Unlike his fifth-century predecessors, Justinian was a legislative and
administrative innovator, ruling an empire undergoing increasing social, eco-
nomic and religious change, and aware that his world was in a state of flux.
The rhetorical preambles to his earlier Novels (laws when included in the
Codes omit this standard form) emphasize continuity and tradition, even in
major administrative reforms. 5

The overall picture of government given by the Codes is, then, as much
symbolic as practical, and needs to be treated with some suspicion, when
we ask not what emperors ideally expected from their servants and sub-
jects, and their servants and subjects from them, but what they actually
achieved. This principle also applies to individual laws. Thus, the 192 con-
stitutions of Theodosian Code xn. 1 , in which emperors from Constantine
to Theodosius II repeatedly tried to force men of the curial class to stay in
their cities and do their duties in the imperial system, are often used to high-
light the contrast between aspirations and effectiveness. We should not,
however, be too sceptical. The curial system probably continued to func-
tion in a reasonably effective way over much of the empire during that
period. Such laws may be seen as a repeated symbolic beating of the parish
bounds, allied with the very practical purpose of forcible reminding. At the
same time, however, they acted as a sluice gate by which emperors, and the
curiae which, directly or indirectly, raised these problems and pressed
emperors to legislate, controlled the level of the pool of literate, upper-
class citizens who were needed in both the central and the local adminis-
trations. 6

Our other main official source for the system at work in this period is the
Zariae? This is the compilation of letters written by Cassiodorus on behalf
of the Ostrogothic kings of Italy between c. 506 and 537, and in his own

4 See ch. io (Charles-Edwards), pp. 284—7 below; also Barnwell (1992); Rousseau (1996) 10.

5 Maas (1986).

6 Repetition of laws may also be a consequence of requests by officials and subjects for clarification
of the law: Harries in Harries and Wood (1993) 1 5. On the curiales, see Heather in CM//XI11.204— 9.

7 See Mommsen (1910); also the introduction to his edition in MGH Auct. Ant. xii (Berlin, 1894),
and Barnish (1992), introduction.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

right as praetorian prefect of Italy from 5 33 to 536. Since his masters pre-
served most Roman institutions, and depicted their realm as an imitation of
the empire, the Variae tell us as much about imperial as about barbarian
government. However, they must be handled as cautiously as the laws, and
for similar reasons. Individually, they were written not just to promulgate
decisions, but to legitimate Gothic rule by showing it as effective in practice,
and imperial in style and structures. As a compilation, they probably served
in part as an apology for the author and other Romans who had served the
barbarians, and as a model for future administrators of Italy appointed by
Justinian. Hence, we must be alert for institutional anachronisms, and for an
over-flattering portrait of government. However, the Variae are a valuable
supplement to the laws, both for the institutions, techniques and principles
of administration, and also for its discourse, in which it responded to the
presumed aspirations of its subjects. They have the ring of a government
liturgy, a note absent from the bulk of the laws through the loss of their pre-
ambles. In the appended treatise On the Soul, Cassiodorus gave this liturgy a
foundation in semi-theological reflections on morality and social history.
Moreover, by using, in some cases, the form of private letters between cul-
tivated upper-class gentlemen (in this, Cassiodorus may have been an inno-
vator), the Variae highlight the important bond between ruler and subject of
a shared literary culture. All government depends on the formation of such
bonds, and it may be more important to the historian to understand them
than the minutiae of administrative institutions.

Both laws and Variae, moreover, are a prime source of information on
the leading ministers of state, assisting the prosopographical exploration
of social mobility, family ties, politics and career paths. In particular, the
Variae give us not just names and offices, but, in their numerous letters of
appointment to high office, sketches of characters, backgrounds and
careers. These conventional eulogies should be treated with the usual
caution, but are at least evidence for what monarchs and senators expected
of the top administrators. If the Codes affirm the dignity of the monarch
as a fount of laws, the Variae affirm him as a fount of honours.

A variety of unofficial or semi-official sources help us to build up an
image of the establishment classes and their ideas about government.
Procopius’ Secret History, with its scurrilous attacks on Justinian as the great
innovator, tells us both something about his administrative practices and a
great deal about the alienation of men on whom his government depended.
The well-rehearsed invective topoi of the Secret History are the mirror image
of the laudatory presentations of Cassiodorus’ Variae and other more direct
panegyrics such as those of Anastasius by Procopius of Gaza and Priscian,
or of Justinian by Procopius of Caesarea ( Buildings ) and Paul the Silentiary. 8

Scott ( 1985 ) argues that Malalas’ Chronicle is another mirror to the Secret History.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

1 68

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

The contents of all such works require close but sceptical attention, though
they can serve to reveal the aspirations of the educated elite. The expecta-
tions of a pious Christian are encapsulated in the deacon Agapetus’ treatise
of advice to the emperor Justinian. John Lydus’ On Magistracies , primarily a
highly informative, if often fictional, history of the praetorian prefecture by
a middle-ranking official in its legal department, includes some illuminating
autobiography, a Procopian attack on Justinian’s great reforming prefect
John the Cappadocian, and a general critique of changes which had affected
the prefecture since the reign of Constantine . 9 John’s history was not
unique; it had a partial parallel, now lost, in the work of Peter the Patrician,
master of the offices, who wrote a history of his bureau from Constantine
to Justinian; the sixth-century Liber Pontificalis may likewise be seen as an in-
house history of papal administration . 1(1 An anonymous and fragmentary
dialogue on political science, probably from senatorial circles in the reign of
Justinian, may supplement Procopius and John with its approval of a non-
interventionist emperor. Like the works of John, Cassiodorus and
Agapetus, this dialogue exemplifies a marked and significant sixth-century
fashion for thinking about government . 11

More conventional historiography gives only incidental information on
administration, but, in its techniques, seems, like bureau-histories, to
suggest the increasing penetration of late antique culture by a bureaucratic
mentality. Historians seem willing to delve into archives, and to cite origi-
nal documents at length, to an extent foreign to the classical tradition: not
only church historians like Socrates, Sozomen and Evagrius, following the
Eusebian tradition, but the chronicler John Malalas, probably an official in
the bureau of the count of the east, and Menander Protector, on the fringe
of official circles in Constantinople; the continuator of the Anonymus
Valesianus at Ravenna provides a picture of Theoderic’s administration
comparable to the representation of Justinian’s in Malalas . 12 As in the early
empire, history continues to be largely the work of members of the classes
from which governors and imperial officials were recruited, but also to
show, at times, a latent or overt tension between their values and those of
the emperor and his immediate circle: the alienation from government of
a Procopius was hardly a novelty in the Roman world.

Upper-class circles — their cultural bonds, their political values and their
relations with officialdom — can also be illuminated by other types of liter-
ary activity. This is a valuable corrective to the world of official documents:

9 Maas ,]ohn Lydus. 10 Noble (1990).

11 Cameron, Procopius ch. 14; the dialogue is edited by C. Mazzucchi, Menae Patricii cum Thoma
Referendario, De Scientia Politica Dialogus (Milan, 1982).

12 Scott (1985); Jeffreys, Studies 204—11; Blockley (1985) 18—20. Note too the hypothesis of Howard-
Johnston (1995) 166 n. 13 that behind the accounts of the Persian campaign of 503—4 in Theophanes
and Joshua the Stylite there lies an official report circulated as propaganda.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOURCES

169

it reminds us that a man’s power depended as much on contacts, relatives
and cultural prestige as on the posts he did or did not hold; prosopogra-
phies dominated by office-holders give a misleading picture of the estab-
lishment by ignoring the important gift-exchange relationships of praise
and honour which produced their own parallel system. 13 From
Constantinople, we have the poetry exchanged or collected among lawyers
and civil servants like Agathias, and preserved in the Palatine Anthology, from
Egypt, the poems which Dioscorus of Aphrodito addressed to local
bigwigs; from Ostrogothic Italy, the letters and poems of bishop Ennodius
of Pavia, or the account of Theoderic’s activity as judge and builder pre-
served in the continuation of th cAnonymus Valesianus\ from Gaul at the end
of the empire, the letters and poems of Sidonius Apollinaris. 14 Boethius’
Consolation of Philosophy gives a brief attack on Theoderic’s administration
which balances Cassiodorus and stands in the ancient tradition of senato-
rial opposition to bad emperors. Papal correspondence — for example, the
letters preserved in the Collectio Avellana — illumines the increasingly impor-
tant role of popes in maintaining relations between Rome and
Constantinople; the voluminous correspondence of Gregory the Great, in
particular, tells us much about Byzantine Italy at a period when the pope
was closely involved with imperial administration and diplomacy. 15

Papyri continue to be a source, not only for the running of Egypt, but
also of Palestine, and for the administrative personnel of Ostrogothic and
Byzantine Ravenna; 16 unlike most literary texts, they can sometimes yield
information about the lowest, almost invisible levels of the bureaucracy.
Well down into the sixth century, inscriptions, especially those from
Aphrodisias (Caria), continue to tell us much about the running of eastern
cities and their relations with provincial governors. 17 Archaeology, too,
casts light on the bureaucracy, specifically on archive storage (see below),
while in the sixth century, seals emerge as a useful source for offices and
office-holders. 18 New discoveries will produce more evidence, as for
example the collection of sixth-century papyri discovered at Petra in 1992
which, among other details of local life, refer to a Ghassanid leader in the
context of a dispute about water rights. 19

Perhaps the most serious deficiency of our sources is the near invisibil-
ity of the minor civil servants referred to above. We seldom know even the

13 Cf., in general, Lendon (1997) ch. 3—4.

14 Anthology: see Cameron and Cameron (1966); McCail (1969). Dioscorus: MacCoull, Dioscorus.
Ennodius: Cesa (1988); Rohr (1997). Sidonius: Harries (1994b).

15 For interesting use of Gregory’s letters, see Brown, Gentlemen and Officers.

16 For a recent survey of eastern papyri found outside of Egypt: Cotton, Cockle and Millar (1995);
Ravenna: Tjader (195 5—82), with discussion in Brown, Gentlemen and Officers.

17 Roueche, Aphrodisias", Roueche, Performers and Partisans.

18 The most accessible collection of this information is in the fasti at the back of PLRE 111.

19 Daniel (1996).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

\-]0 7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

names of the more lowly staff of prefects or governors; of their compe-
tence, culture or official values, if any, almost nothing. Even at the top levels
of the administration, we are informed of only a tiny percentage of office-
holders (especially during the fifth century, with its dearth of legislation),
and know all too little about their careers (especially any lesser posts they
may have held) and their achievements; 20 this means that general assess-
ments of competence, promotions and power are bound to be conjectural.

II. THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT

The structures of civil administration in the east when Justinian came to
power, or in contemporary Ostrogothic Italy, had, at least in outward
appearance, altered very little from the days of Valentinian I at the end of
the fourth century. However, following the reign of Maurice (582—602),
change (very ill documented) seems to have been radical: from a complex
and essentially civilian system of a few multi-tiered departments, subject to
great ministers, there evolved a number of simpler departments ( sekreta ),
as listed in the Kleterologion of Philotheos (899); these were directly subor-
dinated to the emperor, and integrated with a militarized system of provin-
cial government. 21 As we shall see, however, it is possible to detect changes
beneath the surface of the fifth- and sixth-century system which prepared
the ground for the empire which fought off the Arabs.

The fundamental purpose of the administrative system remained the
delivery of the resources upon which the empire’s existence depended.
This entailed the control of a complex system of apportionment, extrac-
tion, transport and redistribution, and the judicial supervision of the prob-
lems and complaints which this process inevitably generated. When
studying the administration, it is important to remember that state service
extended far outside the official hierarchies. Thanks in part to the classical
tradition of personal, liturgic service of the community, there was no clear
division between public and private: it is significant that ancient languages
have no word for the concept of the state as something distinct from, and
superior to, its citizens. 22 Any man of standing in the empire was, or might
easily become, an unsalaried civil servant, administering his city (the basic
unit of the empire) or an imperial estate, collecting taxes on his estates,
organizing corvee labour on the roads or finding transport for military or
civil supplies. Conversely, it was easy for him to treat any paid office he
might hold as a kind of private property. A regular civil servant might wield

20 The best lists of known office-holders are provided in the fasti in PLRE n and in.

21 Philotheos: Bury (1911). Bureaucratic change: Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century,
Winkelmann (1976).

22 Note, too, that the verb TroXcreveadai., ‘to be a citi2en’, came to mean ‘to hold public office’:
Cameron, Circus Factions 2 8 8—9 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT 171

his office as in the case of the praetorian prefect Cyrus of Panopolis (simul-
taneously prefect of Constantinople), like a great private benefactor, or
even like an emperor: this point was lost neither on the Hippodrome crowd
in Constantinople, which compared Cyrus’ building achievements with
those of Constantine, nor on the emperor Theodosius II, who promptly
relegated Cyrus to the bishopric of Cotyaeum. No description of the
administration can really do justice to its pervasiveness and complexity. 23

Among those at the top in the fifth and sixth centuries, the men whose
offices gave them the rank of illustris and membership of the senate of
Rome or Constantinople, were the two great palatine heads of department,
members of the emperor’s personal entourage ( comitatus ) with the title of
count [comes or companion of the emperor). 24 These were the comes sacrarum
largitionum (count of the sacred largesses), who collected the revenues due
in the form of precious or semi-precious metals and textiles, and disbursed
it in coin, plate and uniforms, and the comes rerum privatarum (count of the
private estates), who saw to the incorporation and administration of estates
accruing to the emperor by confiscation or bequest, and as abandoned or
heirless property [bona vacantia or caduca ). 21 The former headed a large and
elaborate department, with ten sub-departments [scrinid) at the imperial
court; in each diocesan group of provinces, he controlled an administrator
with a large staff, and jurisdiction in fiscal cases; he also controlled provin-
cial depots, customs offices, mines, certain state factories and a departmen-
tal transport service. The latter’s organization was similar, but on a smaller
scale: five sub-departments at court, administrators at diocesan and provin-
cial level, and officials in charge of individual estates or groupings of
estates [domus divinae). Both ministers supervised the work of their provin-
cial subordinates, principally the collection of revenue, by annually
despatching staff {palatini ) from their central scrinia.

In the west, some of the functions of the comes rerum privatarum were even-
tually hived off to a new illustris minister, the comes patrimonii, perhaps first
attested under the emperor Glycerius (473— 4). 26 He seems to have been in
charge of imperial estates directly administered, while the comes rerum privat-
arum took in new accessions and collected revenues from those estates which
had been rented out. This reform was imitated in the east by the emperor
Anastasius in the 490s, although it is uncertain whether the responsibilities
of the two counts were identical to those of their western counterparts; it
may be that the patrimonium was dedicated to the emperor’s public, fiscal
expenditure, his ‘largesses’, the res privata to the expenses of the court. This
may reflect a distinction between public and private property which had
accrued to the crown, the former including confiscated civic or temple lands,

23 In general, for description see Jones, LRE chs. 12—16. 24 Cf. Kelly in CAH xm. 162— 9.

25 Delmaire (1989). 26 Hanel (1857) 260.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I 7 2

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

and old Roman ager publicus. The comes rerum privatarum also tended to lose
control of the domus divinaer. by 414, the administration of the vast
Cappadocian domus divina had been taken over by the emperor’s head eunuch
chamberlain, the praepositus sacri cubiculi, presumably as the man chiefly
responsible for the court; under Justinian, other domus divinae came under
high-ranking curators, who probably worked independently from the
privata }' Theoderic seems to have earmarked the revenues of Visigothic
Spain for his cubiculum, perhaps on the legal excuse that they were due to him
personally as guardian of the Visigothic king Amalaric. 28 This fissiparous
tendency of the privata may reflect the difficulties of administering enor-
mous and far-flung estates through one department. It may also show
attempts to clarify the blurred distinction, which dates back to the overlap-
ping competences of aerarium and fiscus under the first emperor Augustus,
and which will continue into the medieval west with the interlocking roles of
royal exchequer and wardrobe, between the wealth of the state and of the
emperor as an individual. The growing power of the cubiculum also reflects
the reality that rulers were always interested in direct control of cash.

The third great palatine ministry — and politically, perhaps, the most
important — was that of the magister officiorum (master of the offices), 29 who
was titular superior to a range of palace staffs, including the sacra scrinia of
the chancellery (which handled legal affairs, as well as general imperial com-
munications) and the scholae of imperial bodyguards; how far, if at all, he
actually controlled their operations, is obscure. The magister officiorum also
ran the politically sensitive arms factories. His power lay mainly in his dom-
inance of communications with the emperor. He organized audiences, pro-
vided interpreters for foreign envoys, and controlled the corps of couriers
and public post inspectors, the agentes in rebus or magistriani. The agentes
sometimes acted as spies and informers in the provinces, and the senior
members of their corps were appointed to head the staffs of prefects, dioc-
esan vicars, and certain provincial governors and generals. In this capacity,
they countersigned all orders issuing from their offices, but remained under
the control of the magister ; who was thereby well placed to get information
on a wide range of official activity. 30 When Arvandus, praetorian prefect of
Gaul, was suspected of treason in 468, his correspondence was intercepted
and his secretary arrested; 31 in this the agens may have assisted.

The magister ? s control of the palace was balanced, to some extent, by an
independent corps of socially and politically prestigious notaries. 32 Their
original duty of acting as secretaries to the imperial consistorium (council) was
taken over during the fifth century by the agentes, but they came to supply
the emperor with an important group of law officers, the referendaries;

27 Kaplan (1976) 10— 16. 28 Cass. Variae v.39.13. 29 Clauss (1980); Delmaire (1995) ch. 6.

30 Giardina (1977) part 1 ; Sinnigen (1964); Morosi (1981). 31 Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.7.5.

32 Tei tier (1985).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT

I 73

these enjoyed frequent access to him, presenting legal appeals and transmit-
ting his responses. Cyprian, who served as referendary to the Ostrogoth
Theoderic and rose to high office, presented appeals to the king when they
were out riding for relaxation; he was able to challenge the magpster Boethius
in the presentation of a treason case and bring about his downfall. 33 Petrus,
a ?nagister of the sacra scrinia {magister epistularuni) under Majorian, com-
manded armies and conducted diplomatic negotiations; politically, he prob-
ably outweighed the magister officiorum , his nominal superior. ,4

Another top palatine minister was the quaestor of the sacred palace. 35 He
was the emperor’s mouthpiece, drafting letters, proclamations, responses,
rescripts and laws, and transmitting petitions to the emperor; consequently,
he was often a legal expert. He headed no department, administered
nothing, and borrowed his staff from the chancellery scrinia ? 6 His duties,
those of the chancellery heads and those of the referendary overlapped
each other; in Merovingian Gaul, the royal referendary seems to have been
the principal law officer and secretary; in Ostrogothic Italy, the quaestor
probably took over the role of the magistri scriniorum, who became honorary
officials, while the quaestor, ‘the mother of all honours’, ‘the gate of royal
favours’, issued letters of appointment to major offices. 37 Since suggestions
for reforms in the system of government came from the relevant ministers
and departments, the quaestor had little power over the system; he merely
put into legal shape what others had originated. However, his influence
over non-administrative legislation was great, and he presumably had con-
stant access to the emperor. His chancellery role probably meant that he
had to work closely with the magister, and was presumably another counter-
balance to his power (and vice versa): Boethius, as magister, was temporar-
ily able to block the appointment of an objectionable quaestor, Tribonian
alternated between the two offices, and even combined them in 535, while
under Justin II Anastasius also held these concurrently. 38 In the east, the
quaestor gradually developed a role as judge of appeal, in which he outlasted
the praetorian prefect (another example of administrative balancing).
From 440, he sat with the prefect to hear appeals from spectabiles iudices, and
under Justinian he heard appeals from Sicily and the provinces of the quaes-
tura exerritus. This reflected his close association with the emperor: ‘For we
think it not improper that the quaestor should take under his jurisdiction
Sicily, which is established as, so to speak, our personal estate.’ 39

33 Bury (1910); Cass. Variae v.41.5; Anon. Valesianus 85 . 34 See PLRE 11 s.v. Petrus 10.

35 Guilland (1971); Tribonian: Honore (1978) 8—9; Harries (1988).

36 However, the preface to Justinian, Nov. 3 5 may indicate that he came to control the scrinia memor-
iae et epistularum\ cf. also Cass. Variae viii.i 8.3.

37 Cass. Variae vi.5.5; vm.13.5— 7; Justinian, Nov. 17 ( CJC 111.117, 33) indicates that the quaestor is
issuing codicils to new provincial governors, an extension of his involvement in appointments.

38 Cons. Phil. 3, prose 4; cf. Cass. Variae v.3-4.

39 CJ vn.62.32; Nov. 20, 41; 104; quotation from 104.3

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

T 74

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

The praetorian prefects stood, in theory, and sometimes in practice,
outside the palatine system: they were imperial deputies, and their judicial
functions, their right to issue edicts and the honours paid to them paralleled
and mimicked those of the emperors: ‘On his entry to the palace, he is
adored as I [the monarch] am, by large numbers, and so high an office
permits a practice which would mean a treason charge for others .’ 40 Post-
Roman monarchs in the west may have adopted something of their legis-
lative role from the prefects . 41 However, an informal distinction grew up
between the prefects of Italy and the east ( Oriens ), who resided in the impe-
rial capitals and were de facto members of the comitatus, and the prefects of
Gaul and Illyricum, who were usually based far from the court and enjoyed
less wealth, prestige and influence on the court and emperor. From com-
manding the praetorian guard of the early empire, the prefects developed
into something like ministers of war, deputizing for the emperor as head
of the army, even though operational command of troops was taken from
them by Constantine I. They remained the army’s chief purveyors, drawing
up the empire’s annual budget, calculating the needs of the empire and the
corresponding taxes or special levies, and seeing to military recruitment
and supply; hence they controlled the systems of taxation and communi-
cations — namely, the roads and the cursus publicus (public post) — on which
these were based, supervising the lower administrative tiers, the diocesan
vicars, the provincial governors and even the town councils. It should be
noted that the cursus publicus was ‘probably second only to the army in its
command of manpower and resources — certainly it must have been super-
ior in this respect to the civil bureaucracy ’. 42 Praetorian duties of military
supply seem also to have been gradually extended into the food supply of
the imperial capitals and of lesser cities . 43 This formidable accumulation of
responsibilities highlights the degree to which the Roman empire was an
institution organized for war; the fourth-century separation of military and
civilian powers, important politically, seems, in this light, an artificial and
vulnerable distinction. Aided by tax changes (discussed below), these
mighty prefectures increasingly overshadowed the financial ministries, but
their powers were also exposed to encroachment by generals and warlords,
and to reforms that aided the army’s needs, notably Justinian’s creation of
the quaestura exercitus.

The staffs of the prefectures (we know most about the prefectures of
the east) were divided into two sections, judicial and financial. In the latter,
one scrinium was allocated to the tax affairs and administrative expenses of

40 Cass. Variae vi.3.4. Cf. Eunap. VS 490 (‘an office which, while lacking the imperial purple, exer-
cises imperial power’); Soc. HE 11.16 (‘second in power after the emperor’).

41 Barnwell (1992) 74; though note the criticism of Sirks (1996a) 1 54—5.

42 Hendy, Studies 605; though cf. n. 168 below for the magister officiorum sharing control of the cursus.

43 Cass. Variae praef. 5; xi. 2.2—4, 5> n, 15, $9; xii.i 1.26—8. Durliat (1990a) 67, 234, 245.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT 175

each diocese; others dealt with outgoing payments or levies of money or
commodities for public works, and for the state arms factories. Another
looked after the treasury, and thereby apparently channelled the prefec-
ture’s holdings in gold to the other scrinia\ the eastern treasury was divided
into the General Bank and the Special Bank (the Genike and the Idike
Trapesed), the separate duties of which are virtually unknown. There were
also departments without the title of scrinium , one for army rations and one
(formed under Justinian) for the corn supply of Constantinople. The judi-
cial sections had a smaller range of scrinia, concerned with legal records,
management of trials and the general secretarial work of the prefectures.
The staffs of diocesan vicarii (also those of the quasi-vicarial augustal
prefect and count of the east) and of provincial governors replicated the
judicial/financial division, and many of the official grades of the prefec-
tures above them; how far the formal scrinium organization was also repro-
duced is unknown, although some elaboration must have been necessary
in the larger diocesan staffs. All departmental staffs had a large administra-
tive penumbra of supernumeraries, assessors, advisers, and men recruited
from the households of their heads, or assigned by them to special duties.
They also had many low-ranking sub-clerical personnel officially on the
strength. 44

In addition to the great ministries, staffed at the upper levels by men
from the landed aristocracies of the empire, the emperors maintained large
numbers of cubicularii (chamberlains), usually eunuch slaves or freedmen.
In addition to potentially vast influence in politics and patronage (reflected
in the rise of the praepositi sacri cubiculi, by the early fifth century, to illustris
rank), these had important administrative roles. Their control of the domus
divina per Cappadociam has been noted; in addition, the eunuch sacellarius
managed the privy purse. Presumably dedicated initially to court expenses,
under Justinian, if not earlier, it was used to fund warfare and fortifications;
hence, sacellarii emerge as generals and army paymasters. The distinction
between public and private imperial resources seems to have proved hard
to maintain, and emperors probably received nearly as much wealth from
crown properties as from taxes: in 43 1, Valentinian III, an emperor whose
tax revenues were very inadequate, boasted of his public expenditure from
the res privatad 5 It may be that emperors were, in fact, making themselves
increasingly independent of the traditional state hierarchies and the ruling
class of the empire. Procopius describes at length and with bitterness
Justinian’s methods of enriching the crown; there may be more in this than
just a standard attack on a bad emperor. The counts of the various parts of
the domus divina were already important people by the end of Justinian’s
reign, a reflection of the emperor’s determination to secure direct control

44 Jones, LRE 586— 96. 45 C.Th. xi.1.36.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

176 7 - government and administration

of financial matters. 46 In the seventh century, the sacellarius grew further
in importance, and came eventually to supervise the small departments
of the new Byzantine system: the land survey and tax reassessment con-
ducted by the sacellarius Philagrius in the late 630s illustrates this growing
domination. 47

Offices were not just bureaucratic posts; they were also highly-prized
dignities: the source which provides our best evidence on official structures
at the end of the fourth century, the Notitia Dignitatum , 48 is, as the title sug-
gests, a register of dignities: offices, civil and military, are defined in terms
of insignia and subordinates far more than of duties. Precedence mattered,
and was controlled and demonstrated, in the eastern empire, through the
organization of imperial ceremonies at Constantinople. 49 Much adminis-
trative legislation of the late empire is devoted to problems of precedence,
and in eleventh-century Byzantium Anna Comnena saw the emperor
Alexius’ skill in devising new and splendid titles for his supporters as deci-
sive evidence of his political talent. 5 " The distinction between service and
honour was blurred. Moreover, the practice of short-term appointments
at the higher levels of the system both enlarged the emperor’s patronage
and confirmed the preference of his more prominent subjects for hon-
oured leisure. Not surprisingly, then, outside the departmental structures
but within the late Roman establishment stood large numbers of honoratr.
retired officials, or men with honorary titles. Such titles were not sought
only for prestige and influence; they freed their holders from the duties of
service on the town councils, although they might still involve them in local
or civic administrative tasks: checking of accounts, revision of the census,
and supervision of buildings or the corn supply. One effect of the multi-
plication of honorati was to create a class in each province which might rival,
or outweigh the authority of, the provincial governor, 51 though in some
areas governors came to be drawn from this class. 52 The gradual replace-
ment of civic by imperial service as the prime source of honour may often
have tied the provinces more closely to the centre, though to offset their
declining importance one finds surviving cutiales usurping the title of claris-
simus by the late fifth century. 53 At a higher level, the emperors, especially
in the east, might grant honorary illustris offices to serving officials to lift
them to senatorial status, or to men called in for special tasks: thus, jurists

46 Theophanes 235.1—7; 237.1—4. 47 Kaegi (1992) 256—8.

48 On the Notitia , see Kelly in CAHx 111.163— 5.

49 See ch. 6 (McCormick), p. 1 57 above. Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 387—94.

50 Alexiad in. 4; cf. Eusebius, Life of Constantine iv.i: ‘For the emperor devised new dignities, that he
might give tokens of his favour to a larger number of people.’ For the combined process of develop-
ment of new ranks and titles and devaluation of existing ones, see Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 130—43;
Haldon (1990) 389—91.

51 Lendon (1997) 223—35; Van Dam (1996) 80 for bishops and governors.

52 Cass. Variae 1.3.5; 1.4. 13; xi. 39.5; Greatrex (1996); Aphrodisias 66; Barnish (1988) 131— 3.

53 Barnish (1988) 121 n. 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT

T 77

working on the Theodosian Code might be honorary quaestor , or men
charged with supplying an army for a campaign might rank as praetorian
prefects. Some of those so honoured were vacantes, without specific duties,
but still (presumably) enjoying the official salary of their rank.

Recruitment to the corps of notaries might also be a way of honouring
high-flyers with a sinecure post, but many notaries withdrew entirely from
their nominal duties at court. In the sixth century, in particular under
Justinian, the number of high honorary officials, especially prefects, pro-
liferated enormously, as did the more formally honorific titles of patrician
and honorary consul, far beyond the capacity of the emperors to find occa-
sional employment for them. The emperors were enlarging the pool of
gentry who were bound more directly to them than those associated with
the traditions of town councils or state departments; like politicians at
other periods, they also increased their revenues through the sale of
honours (see further below). The practice testifies to the integration of the
imperial system and its wealthier subjects, who pressed for admission; it
may also reflect Justinian’s problems with the established aristocracy, espe-
cially during the 520s when he was desperate to ensure his succession to the
throne. In the long run, this tendency to separate power and status from
imperial service must have weakened emperors and devalued the active
offices on which status was ultimately based. 54

Another potential challenge to imperial domination might be provided
by the senates of Rome and Constantinople, which embodied the tradi-
tions of Rome even more than did imperial office. Constantine I and
Valentinian I had made senatorial membership the highest reward for
service; senatorial approval still legitimated emperors or actively aided their
accessions, as it did for Anastasius and Justin II; the senate at Rome may
have played a part in the rise of Theodahad to the Gothic kingship. 55
Senators were also capable of passive resistance, and even active opposi-
tion to rulers. Justin I and Justinian, for example, both submitted contro-
versial plans to the senate and faced strong opposition, led on one occasion
by the quaestor Proclus and on another by the praetorian prefect John the
Cappadocian. 56 Phocas seems to have encountered determined opposition
from the administrative and social elite in Constantinople. The elimination
of Boethius reflects Theoderic’s justified anxiety about the behaviour of
the Roman senate.

Again outside the administrative structures, but loosely associated with
them by function, and by imperial honours, payments and supervision, stood
the professional groups of lawyers, doctors and teachers. The judicial func-
tions of Roman magistrates and emperors, and the engagement in litigation

54 The fasti in PLRE in provide lists of honorary offices and ranks.

55 For this speculation, see Barnish (1990) 28—30.

56 Theophanes 168.2— 6; Procop. Wars i.n.io— 18; 3.10.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

178 7 - government and administration

of the imperial treasury, had long intertwined lawyers and government;
‘more and more of the law, in the late Roman empire, was administrative’. 57
In 469, Leo described the legal profession as a militia as important to the
empire as the army. 58 The empire conventionally defined itself, over against
the barbarians, as the domain of law. Every official with judicial duties
(including generals) had his own bar of registered advocates, the most senior
of whom briefly served, with a high salary and with retirement honours, as
advocatus fisci, presenting cases for the emperor. Magistrates also picked out
advocates to serve as their judicial assessors, with salaries from the state, and
many lawyers passed on to government office. The emperors did much to
regulate the career structures and rewards of lawyers at the official bars: from
460 onwards they even demanded of them some measure of formal profes-
sional qualifications, a requirement probably unique in the ancient world.
Even high-ranking officials used the title scholasticus, which denoted their
legal qualifications, though for the advocate the skills of jurisprudence never
quite seem to have outclassed those of rhetoric. 59

From the time of the Hellenistic monarchies onwards it had been seen
as a ruler’s duty to foster scholars and teachers. In the sources for the late
empire, this duty becomes so conspicuous that it is possible to speak of an
etatisation of higher (but not of primary) education. When appointed to the
chair of rhetoric at Autun by Constantius 1 in 298, Eumenius likened his
promotion to a military command (compare Leo on the lawyers’ militia) and
acclaimed his role in teaching potential imperial barristers and secretaries;
in about 310 a panegyrist from Autun described as sons his ex-pupils who
had moved on to such service. 60 Gratian increased the number of endowed
chairs of grammar and rhetoric in the provincial capitals of the Gallic pre-
fecture, Theodosius II those of grammar, rhetoric, philosophy and law in
Constantinople; in both Rome and Constantinople, public teachers and
students were regulated by the emperors and supervised by the urban pre-
fects. In 370 Gratian ordered the prefect of Rome to despatch annual reg-
isters of students to the imperial scrinia ‘in order that we may learn of the
merits and education of the various students and may judge whether they
may ever be necessary to us’. 61 In 5 3 3 king Athalaric described the teach-
ers of Rome as ‘those through whom good morals are advanced and the
talent of rhetoric is nurtured to serve my palace’. 62

All the same, education was never fully a function of the central author-
ities. No bureau was specifically dedicated to its supervision; control was
exercised mainly by the cities which had endowed the majority of the

57 Crook (1995) 192. 58 6/11.7.14.

59 Roueche, Aphrodisias 76—7; Crook (1995) 188—94. In the fifth century, scholastici were usually
described as ‘most eloquent’.

60 Pan. Pat. 9.5.4; 6.23.2. See further Cameron in 6M//X111.673— 9, and ch. 29 (Browning), pp. 871—2
below. 61 C.Th. xiv.9.1 (trans. C. Pharr). 62 Cass. Variae ix.21.8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE STRUCTURES OF GOVERNMENT 179

chairs; imperial grants of appointment and salaries seem to have been
rather unsystematic, exemplifying patronage of individuals and cities rather
than any long-term educational policy. Julian, in decreeing that town coun-
cils should appoint their own teachers, remarked, ‘I cannot be present in
person in all the municipalities.’ 63 The expectation that rhetorical training
would supply the empire with lawyers and civil servants seems genuine
(though Gratian’s registers may never have proved workable), but it is less
prominent in the sources than a more generalized concern for literary skills
and the upper-class moral values which that training was supposed to incul-
cate. The extensive involvement of emperors in the education of the aris-
tocracy may illustrate the extent to which the imperial system and the
empire’s ruling class were identical, with no division between state and indi-
vidual; then, as now, education was a public utility, which the state was pre-
pared to fund in return for perceived benefits. The most consistent and
important form of teachers’ pay was indirect — namely, immunities from
curial and other burdens — which demonstrates that education was seen as
one form of the liturgic duties which citizens in general owed to their cities
and the empire. Education was interwoven with the traditions of civic life,
with the winning of praise among one’s peers in the forum, so that the
transformation of the classical city would affect both education and impe-
rial administration. 64

Other professions appear in the same light. Public doctors were similarly
maintained in the cities by a mixture of civic and imperial funding and
immunities. There were also, however, court doctors who were granted
official rank as counts, with duties of supervision and technical advice for
the medical profession, whereas teachers do not seem to have been
attached to the palace in this regular fashion. Emperors likewise, though
more spasmodically, used immunities to encourage the teaching and prac-
tice of architecture, and even of crafts and fine arts. 65

Office in the church was increasingly supervised by emperors, and
exploited for local administration and as a channel for benefactions — to
such an extent that, by the reign of Justinian, the church seems almost a
government militia, while Gregory the Great looks, at times, like a second
exarch in Maurice’s Italy; in the 630s patriarch Cyrus of Alexandria was
simultaneously governor of Egypt. 66 Yet the church was never formally
a department, but, like the other professions, experienced grants of
immunities, privileges, occasional subventions, and spasmodic regulation
of appointments; the church could be seen as another alternative to litur-
gic service of the community. Significantly, pope Gregory usually refers

63 C.Th. xiii. 3. 5. 64 Cass. Variae vm. 3 1.4—6. 65 Cass. Variaevi. 1 9.3 — 7;Jones, LRE 1012— 13.

66 On bishops, urban corn supplies and taxation, see Durliat (1990a) 131—56, 316—17 (perhaps over-
stated). Benefactions: M. Sartre in IGLS xm.1.210— 11, discussing Justinian and the archbishop of
Arabia.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

l8o 7 . GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

to ecclesiastical functions as a dignitas or honos, even though the compet-
itive culture of honour was deeply offensive to his ideal of the priest-
hood. With die church’s increasing administrative role should be linked
the partial replacement of the classical and civic by Christian and eccle-
siastical education, die decline of the curiales and other changes in civic
life, and Justinian’s purging of highly educated pagans from the govern-
ment . 67

This overview of the structures of government has focused, justifiably,
on personnel and their organization. However, such a survey would be
incomplete without some consideration of that other quintessential element
integral to bureaucracies and their ethos — paperwork (i.e. records on papyri,
for which we have some local examples from Egypt and Palestine). The
evident increase in the number of bureaucrats during the late Roman period
compared with the principate would seem logically to imply, first, an increase
in the volume of administrative paperwork and, second, the need to orga-
nize such material more effectively than is assumed to have been the case in
previous centuries . 68 The first proposition has in fact been disputed on the
basis of the papyrological evidence , 69 but it is a view which fails to give due
weight to the evidence of the laws contained in the Codes and collections of
Novels from the fifth and sixth centuries. In their mode of promulgation and
in much of their substantive content, these imply the generation of
significant quantities of official documentation. The second proposition is a
logical corollary not only of greater amounts of paperwork, but also of the
more sedentary lifestyle of emperors during the fifth and sixth centuries. As
a result of their active involvement in military campaigning, the governmen-
tal apparatus of the tetrarchs and their fourth- century successors had to be
relatively mobile, which must have retarded the development of centralized
imperial archives to any great extent. The new pattern, initiated under the
sons of Theodosius I, of non-campaigning emperors who rarely travelled
far from the imperial capital will, by contrast, have favoured such a develop-
ment. Records could function as a symbol of government, but also as
weapons whose control gave power and wealth to the bureaucrats who
understood their language and had access to long-forgotten receipts. John
the Cappadocian earned great unpopularity in the praetorian prefecture by a
determined effort to reduce its paperwork and, ultimately perhaps, the
number of officials who handled it . 70

Repositories for a variety of records are attested in Constantinople
during our period — the judicial records of the office of the praetorian

67 Marrou (1956) ch. 10; Mango (1980) ch. 10; Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 425—35;
Cameron, Rhetoric of Empire ch. 6.

68 John Lydus, DeMag. m.ii— 13, 19—20, 68. Cf. Millar (1977) 259—68. 69 Harris (1989) 290, 317.

70 Symbols: John Lydus, DeMag. in. 14; Cass. Variaex 1.38; weapons: Nov. Val. 1.3; cf. 7.1—2, and Nov.

Maj. 2.1; John the Cappadocian: John Lydus, De Mag. m.ii— 19, 66, 68.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION I 8 I

prefect of the east, 71 the archives of the city prefect, 72 tax registers 73 and
the texts of treaties with foreign states. 74 It is apparent that archives of
official documents were also maintained in provincial capitals, 73 and one of
Justinian’s reforms extended this further by requiring the defensor civitatis in
every city to establish a building for the deposit and consultation of docu-
mentation associated with his duties, under the care of a designated guar-
dian. 76 Some of the physical structures for the storage of official
documents have even been identified in the archaeological record, in both
metropolitan and provincial contexts. The archive rooms of the praetorian
prefect have been located under the Hippodrome in Constantinople, while
recent excavations in Caesarea Maritima (Palestine) have revealed a late
Roman building (18X15 metres) described in a mosaic inscription set into
its floor as an office ( skrinion ) staffed by chartularii and a nurnerarius, pre-
sumed to be part of the provincial governor’s administrative apparatus;
comprising seven rooms facing on to a courtyard, it includes a further
inscription (appropriately, in duplicate), which quotes St Paul, to urge their
duty on tax-payers and officials. 77 Of course, one should not assume too
high a level of efficiency in the maintenance of such collections: the need
for the compilers of the Theodosian Code to resort to provincial archives
to locate copies of some imperial laws provides a salutary warning in this
respect. 78 On the other hand, this particular episode dates from early in our
period and in fact more likely serves to confirm the limited character of
central archives in the fourth century; as already noted, Constantinople had
not long been the settled capital of the eastern empire.

III. ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION

Assessing the operational effectiveness of these administrative structures
is no easy task, and requires attention to a number of different issues. One
is the responsiveness of the administration to the problems and grievances
of the administered, another its impact on the financial well-being of the
empire — its cost-effectiveness. The first issue involves consideration of the
modes of communication between ruler and ruled. The emperor commu-
nicated a variety of messages, both explicit and subliminal, to the inhabi-
tants of his empire through media ranging from official proclamations to

71 John Lydus, De Mag. 111.19, with discussion in Kelly (1994) 261.

72 Chron. Pasch. p. 622 (destruction during Nika riot); Theophanes p. 297 (destruction during riot in

608). 73 Evagr. HE hi. 3 9 (discussed below).

74 Menander fr. 6,1; Greg. Reg. ix.229, with discussion of further possibilities in Lee (1993) 33—40.

75 Jeffreys, Studies 203—9; Evagr. HE in. 3 9.

76 Nov. 15.5.2. How far this law was implemented by defensores is another matter, but it certainly dem-
onstrates an appreciation of the value of storage of records.

77 Kelly (1994) 161—3; SEG 32.1498 (the skrinion inscription); Holum (1988) 169—71; Stern (1993)

1.285. Further discussion in Holum (1995). 78 Matthews in Harries and Wood (1993) 19—45.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

182

7- GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

architecture and coinage, but, within the context of administration and
government, the primary form of communication from centre to subject
was imperial legislation, usually circulated to provincial officials and then,
as appropriate, conveyed to the upper classes in provincial assemblies and
to the populace by the display of laws on boards in public areas, such as the
market-place or at the doors of churches 79 — though officials might some-
times prove obstructive in their implementation. 8 " The system worked
partly through exhortation and persuasion, partly also through the fear
induced by the prospect of savage punishment, something of which loyal
officials like Malalas thoroughly approved . 81

The emperor’s subjects in turn communicated their views and grievances
to the centre by a variety of methods. At the individual level, those with the
resources might travel to Constantinople to seek legal redress from the
emperor or senior officials, or they might send written petitions.
Communities sent similar embassies: at Aphrodisias the pater civitatis and the
possessors bypassed the governor of Caria to approach Justinian directly
about the regulation of civic funds . 82 An individual willing to undertake
such communal business might well also have private matters to transact, as,
for example, Dioscorus of Aphrodito. In spite of the danger that orches-
trated chanting might present unrepresentative opinions, acclamations were
an important form of administrative feedback; although the term has pos-
itive connotations in English, acclamations in the late Roman empire were
often negative in import. Constantine had actually urged gatherings of pro-
vincials to express approval or criticism of governors, and later in the fourth
century the public post was made available for their transmission to the
emperor . 83 An inscription from Ephesus, recording a letter from the prae-
torian prefects in response to acclamations in favour of the proconsul of
Asia, shows that the system was continuing to function in the mid fifth
century; Constantine’s law was retained in Justinian’s Code, and it has been
argued that acclamations became increasingly prominent and important as
expressions of popular opinion during the fifth and sixth centuries. The
grievances of Thracian farmers were not submitted to Justinian in an official
report, but may well have been brought to his attention by chanting . 84

79 Assemblies: Sid. Ap. Ep. vm.6.5. Display: e.g. Malalas pp. 470— 1; Justinian, Nov 8 (preface to the
edict: p. 79.1 5—17 (Scholl-Kroll)), 128.1; Cass. Variae vm.33.8; ix.16.2, 20.2. This practice raises impor-
tant questions with respect to the issue of literacy, which cannot, however, be pursued here.

80 ACO 1.4, 155 (432/3: the praetorian prefect Flavius Taurus advises against publication of an
imperial letter which he believes will result in disorder in Cilicia and interrupt the flow of taxes); Theod.
II Nov. 3.8—9 (438: inaction of officials with regard to legislation against heretics, Jews and pagans).

81 Scott (1985) 103—4.

82 Justinian, Nov. 160; cf. also Liebeschuetz (1985) 1 50—8 discussing Syn. Ep. 95.

83 C.Th. 1. 1 6.6 (331); viii. 5. 32 (371).

84 Inscr. Ephes. 44 (439/42); CJ 1.40.3; Roueche (1984), who also argues that the dangers of manipu-
lation of acclamations have been overemphasized. Nov. 32, 34; cf. also Cass. Variae 1 v. 1 o (contrast 11.24
for a report by a governor).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION I 8 3

The church provided another means of access to the emperor: imperial
attendance at major church festivals offered an especially good opportunity
for the submission, sometimes with tumult and outcries, of petitions, and
the quaestor sacri palatii was delegated to receive and pass these on; petition-
ers deterred by fear of a powerful individual were authorized to approach
the emperor with the help of the patriarch or of ecclesiastical defensores? 5 In
the provinces, the clergy could act as a channel for reports back to the centre,
as is illustrated by the commending of Stephen, governor of Palestina Prima,
to Justinian by a delegation of clergy; assemblies of bishops regularly
demanded that their acclamations be transmitted to the emperor. Justinian
explicitly sought to exploit the clergy to monitor judicial abuses in the prov-
inces; by contrast, his complaint about the shortage of information from
Egypt might reflect his lack of contact with the Monophysite church which
dominated the province. 86 Another linkage was provided by high officials
themselves, who might well lend a sympathetic ear to petitions from their
home provinces. 87 Overall, the role of curial elites in sustaining links
between the imperial centre and its subjects was diminishing as other chan-
nels took over. A determined official, however, was likely to override local
opposition, regardless of who was articulating it: at Philadelphia in Lydia
John Maxilloplumacius, a relative of John the Cappadocian, for whom he
acted as a local agent in securing tax revenues, is alleged to have forced the
bishop and clergy to perform a mock eucharist in the theatre after they had
tried to rescue an upper-class citizen from a scourging over taxation. 88

A crucial question is whether the laws issued by the emperor and the
central administration represented, to any significant degree, responses to
the concerns of the empire’s inhabitants communicated via these channels.
As one might expect, explicit indications in the surviving evidence of such
causal links are elusive, but some imperial legislation can clearly be charac-
terized in these terms. Perhaps the most striking instance relates to the
office of quaestor exercitus, effectively an additional praetorian prefect
created by Justinian to provide more efficient logistical support to the
armed forces on the lower Danube; in the same way as any praetorian
prefect, the quaestor exercised both fiscal and judicial authority over the
provinces under his responsibility — in this case, Moesia II and Scythia
(where the troops were stationed), and Caria, Cyprus and the (Aegean)
Islands (from where army supplies were to be gathered). This institutional
arrangement was established on 1 8 May 5 36, but soon proved problematic,
though not on the logistical front: in order to gain legal redress from the
quaestoi s court, the inhabitants of Caria, Cyprus and the Islands had to
travel all the way to Odessus on the Black Sea coast, where the quaestor was

85 CJ 1. 1 2.8. 86 PLRE hi. 1 1 84—5, s.v. Stephanus 7; Nov. 86.1; Edict 13 (preface).

87 Cass. Vdriaexi.}(); xii.5, 13— 15. 88 John Lydus, De Mag. 111. 5 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

184

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

based, and clearly did not appreciate the opportunity to broaden their hori-
zons. Justinian therefore issued an edict allowing them to come instead to
Constantinople, where a representative of the quaestor would hear their
cases. What is of particular interest in all this is, first, the fact that Justinian
ascribes his revision of arrangements to the appeals of those inconven-
ienced, while, secondly, the law implementing the revision was issued on 1
September 5 37 — little more than fifteen months after the office of quaestor
was first established. 89 It is unusual to be able to determine the speed of
reaction in such an exact manner, but Justinian’s legislation does offer
further examples of laws being issued in response to the difficulties or
complaints of individuals. 9(1 We are, however, prevented from going further
by the nature of the evidence: we only know of these cases from Justinian’s
reign because his Novels retain their prefaces, in which the background
prompting legislation is sometimes alluded to, but these prefaces have
usually been excised by the compilers of the Codes, on which we rely for
our knowledge of most of the legislation of his predecessors. Justinian,
with his interventionist approach to government, may not be typical: his
accessibility, which might be regarded as a token of a conscientious ruler,
was criticized by Procopius, while Evagrius praised Maurice precisely for
not being too readily available. 91

The other issue highlighted at the start of this section was that of cost.
The later Roman empire is often described as a bureaucratic state whose
substantial running costs, compounded by the role of corrupt practices
such as bribery, contributed to its ultimate demise by placing an excessive
burden on the agricultural base. 92 There is evidence for resistance to taxa-
tion: Salvian, notoriously, speaks of harassed provincials fleeing to the bar-
barians or the bagaudae, or putting themselves under the patrocinium of
local potentes. Inhabitants of remote regions might stay put and resist, pro-
voking protestations of lawlessness from emperors. Emperors were aware
that unpopular activities — for example, warfare in remote areas — might
prompt resistance to the taxation needed to fund it; Arcadius was even
reluctant to harass loyal pagan tax-payers in Gaza in case they abandoned
their city. Paulinus of Pella prided himself on his timely and willing
payment of taxes, through which he attempted to purchase peaceful
repose, but his self-congratulation is contrasted with the behaviour of
others who found the surrender of their wealth especially bitter. 93 It has

89 Nov. 41 and 50, with Stein, Bas-Empire 11.474— 5.

90 E.g. Nov. 32, 34, which responded to complaints of Thracian farmers; further details in Jones,

ERE 349 n. 59, 350 n. 63. 91 Procop. Secret History 13. 1—2; 1 5.1 1— 12; Evagr. HE v.19.

92 Jones, ERE 563; 469, 819—20; Brown Gentlemen and Officers 113. MacMullen (1988) is an extreme
case.

93 Salvian, De Gub. Dei v. 5—9; cf. CJ xi.54 (law of Leo, a.d. 468) for patrocinium in the east. Justinian,
Nov. 24, 25; Sidonius, Pan. Maj. 441—69 (taxation of Gaul for use against Vandals); Justinian, Nov. 8.10.2;
Marc. Diac. V. Porph. 41; Paulinus of Pella, Euch. 194— 201.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION I 8 5

been argued that Africa after the Justinianic reconquest was so peaceful
that its inhabitants saw no advantage in paying taxes which would be used
to finance the defence of other parts of the empire, an attitude which ulti-
mately resulted in a lack of resistance to the Arabs in the late seventh
century. 94

However, generalizations about the quality and financial impact of late
Roman administradon are dangerous — administration generates com-
plaints more often then praise, and complaints had to be extravagant to
have any chance of success, as in this appeal composed by Dioscorus for
his village of Aphrodito: ‘we are suffering more than places afflicted by
barbarians, with our minds constantly on exactions of diagraphai . . . abnor-
mal demands, and all surcharges of that type’. 95 A more appropriate start-
ing-point is the survival of the eastern empire throughout this period: its
fiscal structures were able to produce surpluses under Marcian, Anastasius
and Justin II, and, even if with difficulty, to cater for the Vandal expedi-
tion of Leo, Justinian’s heavy expenditure, and the liberality of Tiberius. 96
There may have been tax rises under Justinian, but the evidence is complex
and contentious, since the indications for a rise in taxation in gold in Egypt
may reflect an increasing use of adaeratio, not an increase in overall tax
levels. Natural disasters and warfare caused problems which provoked
demands for remissions or cancellations, but the rhetoric of such requests
does not provide evidence for structural over- taxation. 97 Campaigns
which extended over several years, or even decades, as in the Balkans,
created local problems and a de facto rise in taxation: thus under Anastasius
coen/ptionesvjc'tc a permanent element of the tax system in Thrace, whereas
elsewhere they were only to be levied in special circumstances, and in 575
the need for payments in kind to be maintained in Mesopotamia and
Osrhoene is specifically mentioned in the context of Tiberius’ remission
of taxation in gold. 98

The best tax regime was one which was stable and predictable, since both
rises and ultimately remissions in tax proved counter-productive: although
Basil of Caesarea could defend tax immunities for the clergy on the
grounds that the benefits could be passed on to the disadvantaged, a law of
Theodosius II asserted that ‘some men appear to have converted to their
own gain and booty the remission of taxes ... so that what had been public

94 Durliat (1981) 526—31. 95 P. Lond. 1674, 21— 4; MacCoull, Dioscorus 47 .

96 Though for problems caused to the prefectural treasury, see John Lydus, De Mag. 111.43— 4, 54, 56.

97 Life of Theodore of Sykeon 73; Joshua the Stylite 39, 82, 92— 3. Johnson and West (1949) 62 claim
overall stability for Egyptian tenants during 600 years of Roman rule, but contrast Remondon (1965),
whose argument is accepted by Liebeschuetz (1974) (using this as proof of increasing peculation) and
Banaji (1992) 124. Jones, LRE 820—1 bases his argument for a substantial rise in state demands on evi-
dence from Ravenna and Antaeopolis, but for greater caution see the discussions of Whittaker (1980)
8—9, 13, and Bagnall (1985) 302—6. Cf. also more generally MacMullen (1987).

98 CJ x.27.5— 6; Nov. 163.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

1 86 7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

debts became private debts’." The eastern empire achieved this stability, at
least until Justinian’s reign: the tax burden was heavy, but in most places for
most of the time it continued to be met and was probably even increased
during the seventh century in the provinces under Arab control. 100 By con-
trast, the western empire suffered a spiralling financial crisis during the fifth
century as its fiscal base was drastically reduced, especially by the loss of
Africa, while special levies greatly increased the tax burden on surviving
territories. Constant warfare required money, and may also have facilitated
tax evasion: Ostrogothic Italy achieved a reputation for prosperity partly
because Theoderic did not indulge in regular major campaigning, but the
return to insecurity during and after the Justinianic reconquest ensured that
Italy in the late sixth century mirrored the state of Salvian’s Gaul: as the
inhabitants complained to Justin II and Sophia in 566/7, ‘It would be better
for the Romans to serve the Goths than the Greeks when the eunuch
Narses is a ruler who subjects us to slavery and our most pious prince does
not know it. Either deliver us from his hand or we and the Roman citizenry
will serve the barbarians.’ 101

After the provincial and administrative reforms of the tetrarchy, the
number of imperial employees engaged in administrative duties far
exceeded those of the early empire, when many tasks were handled cen-
trally by the imperial household and in the provinces by the curial elite and
by governors attended by their small staffs. 102 Thus the official salary bill
will have grown substantially, though whether the overall cost of adminis-
tration had grown in proportion is a much harder question to answer, since
the hidden costs of maintaining the imperial household and the whole
curial class during the principate cannot be quantified. A few figures are
available for the size and salary costs of late Roman offices. When Justinian
reconstituted the office of the praetorian prefect of Africa, he was allo-
cated 396 staff, of whom three-quarters were paid at the modest level of an
ordinary soldier (nine solidi per year); admittedly, this office will have been
smaller than the other prefectures, but the pay scale is likely to have been
representative. 103 A standard size for the staff of provincial governors was
100, with average rates of pay substantially lower, at a ‘miserable’
three— four solidi, than for the more privileged praetorian staff. 104 Such levels
of pay meant that staff depended heavily for their overall income on the
fees and perquisites to which their positions gave them access, so that, in
certain respects, those who made use of the imperial administration had to
pay for the privilege of doing so. Whereas it might seem reasonable for
those with judicial business to have to contribute to the costs of their

99 Basil, Letter 1 04; C.Th. xi.28.10; cf. Amm. Marc, xvi.5.14— 15; xvi.2.10 on Julian’s financial admin-
istration in Gaul. 100 Reinink (1988); Drij vers (1992) 204— 8. 101 Lib. Pont. John III.

102 For an estimate of numbers, see Heather (1 994) 1 8—20.

103 Jones, LRE 590—1; Hendy Studies 164—73. 104 Jones, LRE 592—4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION I 87

action, it is less clear that tax-payers benefited from having to supplement
their regular payments by a variety of fees ( sportulae ): in the western empire,
these might amount to over a third of the total sum collected, though in
the east the amounts were very substantially lower. 105 It would, however, be
possible to interpret these customary exactions as a substitute for higher
official salaries, and hence higher taxes, with correspondingly larger oppor-
tunities for graft, which was harder to control than the recognized sportu-
lae ; they might almost be regarded as a form of indirect taxation, with the
subjects contributing directly towards the salaries of officials, who in turn
contributed to the income of their superiors and ultimately to that of the
emperor. In response to such indirect taxation, autopragium , the right to pay
directly to a representative of the central administration, was a valuable
privilege which cut out profiteering middlemen. 106

These perquisites are categorized as one aspect of the endemic corrup-
tion which has been canvassed as an explanation for the empire’s demise. 107
It is, however, impossible to prove that the situation in late antiquity was any
worse than in preceding centuries, and payment for securing a post was
accepted, indeed on occasions regulated by emperors. Thus office-holders,
like the magistrates of republican Rome who had bribed the electorate, had
to recoup their costs: the first permanent court in Rome had been estab-
lished to deal with the issue of recuperation of wealth wrongly acquired by
Romans in the provinces, while 750 years later a governor of Sardinia was,
to pope Gregory’s disgust, prepared to accept protection money to permit
the continuation of polytheist practices since he had to repay his sportula. w&
But, to an extent, corruption is in the eye of the beholder, or dependent on
circumstances. 109 Justinian legislated against the sale of offices and appears
to have made a determined attempt to eradicate the practice — for example,
by providing compensation for lost income to those who had traditionally
controlled the disposal of the office; on the other hand, although Procopius’
allegation that Justinian was himself selling offices again only a year after
this legislation is open to doubt, both Justin II and Tiberius also legislated
on the subject; John the Lydian both condemns and accepts the custom, and
the upright Gregory was prepared to give bribes to ensure that Leontius’
financial investigation in Sicily was speedily ended. 110 Sale of offices was
regarded as a sign of personal greed, and is a stock accusation against
unpopular ministers or rulers, but its overall impact on the administration
is unclear: the practice seems usually to have been restricted to provincial
offices and rarely to have extended to the most powerful positions at

105 Jones, LRE 467—8; this calculation is based on the consolidation of fees under Majorian in 45 8.

106 Cass, Variaexii.%.z. 107 MacMullen (1988). 108 Greg. Reg. v. 3 8.

109 Heidenheimer, Johnstone and Levine (1979) 2 1; 88—90.

110 Nov. 8; Procop. Secret History 21.4 ; 24.6; Nov. 149, 1 61; John Lydus, De Mag. 111.66—7; Greg. Reg.
ix.130. Cf. Kelly in CAH xm. 171—80.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

court, 111 which the emperor tended to rotate quite rapidly among the inter-
ested nobility. Anastasius is criticized by John of Antioch for transforming
the entire empire into an aristocracy through his sale of office; Justin 11’s
anti-corruption measure to have provincial governors chosen by local gran-
dees, clerical and secular, will presumably have resulted in the selection of
similarly wealthy individuals. 112 In each case imperial action may have
encouraged family traditions of public service; some minor offices became
quasi-hereditary, with sons having the reversion right of precedence in pur-
chasing their fathers’ posts, whose value might be included in the inherited

1 1 n.

estate.

Bribery or gift-giving was an integral part of the late Roman patronage
system, but there is also evidence for more extreme abuse of official posi-
tion. In Egypt, the pagarch Menas’ attempts to annex the right to collect
the taxes of Aphrodito involved the exploitation of a group of violent
shepherds, damage to irrigation works and threats to Christian women. In
southern Italy, the misdeeds of a tribune at Otranto and a duke of
Campania each prompted part of the local population to desert to the
Lombards. 114 In all these instances we never have more than one side of
the case, and it is possible that self-interest has distorted the presentation:
at Aphrodito Dioscorus had to whip up official sympathy against a member
of the administrative structure, the pagarch, and so might have exploited
traditional complaints, while pope Gregory was attempting to persuade
officials to behave in ways that better suited the interests of the church.
Feuding between higher and lower, central and provincial officials might
add to administrative disorder, and the ruler might find it hard to protect
the party of lower status: Theoderic was often forced to give special pro-
tection, usually enforced by a Goth, to subjects, even of high status, who
were being harassed by great men, and the church of Ravenna offered pro-
tection against violent attacks, in return for the grant of estates. 115

Abuses there certainly were, but attempts to investigate and regulate
them would not necessarily be welcomed: Gregory’s keenness to restrict
Leontius’ activities in Sicily has already been noted, while the unpopular
activities of Justinian’s emissary, the logothete Alexander ‘the Scissors’,
whose cost-cutting achieved notoriety through Procopius’ account in the
Secret History , can be regarded as an attempt to overhaul an administrative
system in which a decade of warfare, as well as a long period of
Ostrogothic rule, had permitted abuses to arise. Alexander’s mission is one

111 Cass. Variae ix.24.6; xi.i.i 8 imply bribery was used in competition for the magj.sterium officiorum.

112 John of Antioch fr. 215, though note Theophanes 143.18; Nov. 149; important discussion in
Jones, LRE 391—6.

113 CJ 111.28.30.2— 3; Jones, LRE 577, 581. For a comparative discussion, see Doyle (1996).

114 MacCoull, Dioscorus 23—8; Greg. Reg. ix.205; x.5.

115 Feuding: Cass. Variae in. 27; John Lydus, De Mag. hi. 50. Protection: Cass. Variae 1.15, 37; in. 27;
iv. 27; vn. 39; P. Ital. 13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION

189

example of methods of controlling regional officials, by the despatch or
assignation from the centre of a special officer, such as the cancellarii and
canonicarii appointed to provinces by Cassiodorus when praetorian
prefect. 116 Other methods were the encouragement of reports by junior
staff on superiors, and the public apportionment of praise and blame, as
for example in the letters of appointment which were read out in the
senate. 117 Imperial concern for fairness is also evident in Zeno’s law which
stipulated that governors must wait in their provinces for fifty days after the
end of their term of office in order to be available to answer complaints. It
had never been easy for provincials to gain access to their former govern-
ors, and this law refers to the means of circumventing its good intentions:
the former governors were to be present in the public places of major
towns, not hiding in sanctuaries or the houses of powerful friends. By
contrast, Justinian expounded on the glory which honest governors might
win from himself and provincials. 118 Distance from the court, the source
of redress and centre of supervision, increased the chances of corruption,
as Cassiodorus was well aware. It also enhanced provincial discontent:
embittered plaintiffs and refugees fleeing the exactions of John the
Cappadocian’s agents seem to have contributed to the Nika riot in 532; in
410 the inhabitants of remote Britain and Armorica had thrown out the
imperial administration altogether. 119

The system had numerous imperfections, and human nature ensured
that many opportunities for enrichment and advancement were exploited,
but blanket condemnation is inappropriate. At Edessa in 497 the governor
Alexander placed a complaints box in front of his residence, and every
Friday he gave judgement free of charge in the church of John the Baptist
and Addai; the governor Demosthenes organized charitable relief during
the Edessa famine of 502, and after the Antioch earthquake of 526 the
effectiveness of count Ephrem’s actions prompted the inhabitants to select
him as their next bishop. 12 " It might, however, be significant that these
examples of responsive government occur in provincial or metropolitan
capitals, whereas in smaller cities and more remote areas it may have been
harder for the central government to have an impact on local practices;
implementation of the imperial will now required the presence of a repre-
sentative of the administration, since the inclination or ability of local
councillors to act had diminished along with their status. It is also the case
that evidence for good conduct by officials has to be treated with the same
degree of scepticism as for complaints: it would be misguided to rely on

116 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 1 52—3; Cass. Variae xi.io; xii.i; Morosi (1978).

117 Blockley (1969); Lendon (1997) 191— 201; Cass. Variae vm.13.1; 20.1—2; cf. 1.25; 111.20; iv.29;

ix.12. 118 6/1.49.1; Nov. 8; 10.

119 Cass. Variae vi.22.1— 2; ix.12.4; John Lydus, De Mag. hi. 70; Justinian, Nov. 8; Zos. vi.5.

120 Joshua 29; 42—3; Malalas 423—4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

190 7 - government and administration

evidence for public-spirited officials to imply that the system regularly
worked well. When pope Gregory praised the public conduct of particular
officials, his reasons cannot be reconstructed , 121 but are unlikely to have
been simple — there are instances of governors being praised by one group
of provincials and attacked by another . 122

John Lydus’ On Magistracies provides a glimpse of the operation of one
particular bureau of the praetorian prefecture as seen through the eyes of
a loyal and talented, but also embittered, member; he was proud of his own
unit’s skills and talents, and jealous of the prestige of the financial branch
of the prefecture — though his overall loyalty to the prefecture ensured that
he took an intelligent and sympathetic interest in its fiscal health and the
differing impact on it of high-spending or frugal emperors . 123 According to
John, not surprisingly, patronage was of crucial importance in securing
advancement; much attention was devoted to increasing the official remu-
neration and constructing a healthy cash balance on which to retire;
members of the bureau were jealous of their own positions within the
bureau, but also of the position of their bureau relative to other parts of
the administrative machine; the dull routine of quotidian duties was allevi-
ated by the shared literary interests of many of the officials. Many elements
of John’s picture would be quite familiar to the inhabitants of modern
administrative units, with their concern for mutual back-scratching, depart-
mental gossip, inter-office rivalries and the diversion of crosswords. Above
all, administrators always know better than their political masters: an anon-
ymous sixth-century dialogue regarded a good emperor as one who left the
administration to run itself . 124

The bilingual Greek and Coptic archive of Dioscorus casts light on
administration at a much lower, provincial level. Learning was still impor-
tant, and Dioscorus is representative of the educated lawyers whose shared
literary and professional interests provided some coherence to the dispar-
ate bureaucratic structure. Favourable decisions required the interest of the
local governor, and Dioscorus used his talents to attract attention: strong
metaphors presented the governor with the qualities which his petitioners
hoped he would display; grandiloquent poetry showed him, and influential
members of his or the prefect’s staff, the rewards that favourable decisions
might bring, while enemies would be publicly shamed by Dioscorus’ vitu-
peration . 125 Dioscorus represented the intertwined interests of his family
(including a monastery founded by his father) and local community in the

121 Greg. Reg. vn.3; xi.4; Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 122—3 with n - 2 5 for other references.

122 Amm. Marc, xxvm.6.21, the Romanus affair, where complaints from the curiales of Tripolis in
Africa were discredited by their fellow citizens. There were clearly divergent attitudes among leading
inhabitants of Gaul to the prefect Arvandus: Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.7.

123 John Lydus, De Mag. 111.43— 5, 51, 54, 56. 124 Anon. Peri politikes epistemes 5.

125 MacCoull, Dioscorus ch. 2; and cf. pp. 168—9 a hove on sources.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION IN OPERATION 191

manner characteristic of late Roman society: infringements of the rights of
Aphrodito might well have entailed extra taxes for the family of Dioscorus
(see above). For Dioscorus, public duties and private interests naturally
interlocked.

The careers of John and Dioscorus provide evidence for the type of
person who joined the administration. Anyone who had completed all
stages of the educational system was likely to possess the resources to pur-
chase a position, though education might have raised expectations above
what the individual could realistically hope to obtain: for many it was nec-
essary to wait in the unsalaried ranks of the supemumerarii attached to the
officia, or of lawyers waiting for registration at the bar . 126 Personal contacts
also mattered, whether through kinship, regional solidarity, shared factional
allegiance or the favour which a timely panegyric might procure: John
Lydus was lucky, whereas Augustine, for example, was less fortunate, until
his Manichee connections at Rome helped him secure his position at Milan.
An unlikely potential recruit to the administration was the future holy man,
Theodore of Sykeon: his father was a Hippodrome entertainer, who per-
formed acrobatics on camels, and so was undoubtedly attached to one of
the factions; he also had official connections, since he had met Theodore’s
mother, the prostitute Mary, while travelling through Galatia on imperial
orders; when Theodore was still only six, his mother decided to journey to
Constantinople to secure his entry into imperial service and so kitted him
out with a gold belt and expensive clothing . 127 Granted the long queues of
supernumeraries attached to all desirable administrative posts, Mary was
probably starting her employment drive none too soon. Advancement up
the career structure was, in many cases, achieved through seniority, with
progression being so slow that senior officials might be too ancient to
perform their duties properly. There are, however, examples of exceptional
abilities being rewarded: the reforming praetorian prefects Polycarp,
Marinus, John the Cappadocian and Peter Barsymes. These individuals had
experience in subordinate financial positions or in related areas (Peter was
a banker), and in each case it was probably their administrative talent which
brought them to imperial attention and resulted in exalted office . 128
Another example of such apparently rare professionalism is John the
Paphlagonian, a former tractator in the scnnium Orientis, who, as comes sac-
rarum largitionum, conducted Anastasius’ currency reform (see below); the
careers of Basilides in the first decade of Justinian’s reign and of Magnus
under Justin II might also suggest that hierarchy and precedence were no
longer of supreme importance in the choice of major ministers.

126 For these, see Jones, LRE 510, 585, 598, 604. 127 Life 5.

128 Note John Lydus, De Mag. in. 57 on John’s appointment as logothete ‘because he had promised
to do things beyond belief on behalf of the government’; Procop. Secret History 22.1 on the intensive
search before Peter’s appointment. Epinicus (see PLRE n) is another example.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

192 7 - government and administration

Inevitably, the men who emerged from the ranks and thought innova-
tively about administrative issues had their detractors: to a traditionalist like
John Lydus, however, their excessive professionalism was as unwelcome as
the literary talents of Cyrus of Panopolis — John might have been expected
to appreciate the latter’s cultural sophistication, but instead criticized him
as an amateur. John Lydus, of course, represented the ideal balance
between these inappropriate extremes, but we should be cautious about
accepting his judgements at face value. It would be wrong to assume a lack
of fiscal, as distinct from legal or rhetorical, professionalism among all aris-
tocrats and litterateurs: Cyrus in fact seems to have been an effective admin-
istrator. The classical education, if pursued beyond rhetoric and law, might
be of value: Boethius’ mathematical talents were summoned to reform
Theoderic’s gold currency, and a high level of mathematical skill was
expected of the emperor’s chief architect, as demonstrated by Anthemius
of Tralles whose family also produced doctors, a lawyer and a grammar-
ian. 129 The men who inherited and ran great estates in Egypt, whose organ-
ization might be modelled on that of the empire, may often have had
substantial skills — for example, Apion, whom Anastasius appointed to
manage the food supply of the eastern army. Good estate management
earned praise for Roman nobles under the Ostrogoths, and, as with the
Cassiodori, who provided remounts for the army, their activity might be
integrated with the state system. Many landowners had experience of that
system: Justinian encouraged the praetorian prefect to promote to govern-
orships curiales and other honestiores knowledgeable in taxation . 130 In spite of
the usually short terms of aristocratic office, when state service ran in fam-
ilies experience might be transmitted down the generations by combina-
tions of personal advice and the tenure of minor posts: Cassiodorus began
his career as consiliarius to his father when the latter was prefect of Italy.
There was a tendency for the comes sacrarum largitionum and the comes rerum
privatarum to be recruited from families linked to imperial service rather
than from intellectual circles; these recruits had often held relevant offices
earlier in their careers, and they tended to move on either to the other
financial countship, or to an urban or praetorian prefecture. Youth spent at
a monarch’s court might also give training to educated gentry, as well as to
palace eunuchs like Narses. Within departments, the in-house histories
noted above should be associated with an induction into bureaucratic
values — though the training provided by the prefect Zoticus to his young
protege John Lydus was apparently more concerned with personal profit
than administrative competence . 131 In general, Cassiodorus’ letters of

129 Cass. Variae i.io; vn.5, and cf. Inst. 1.30.4— 5; Agathias v.6.3— 6 with PLRE in s.v. Stephanus 1.

130 Hardy (1968) 29; Banaji (1992) 164, 179. Cass. Variae 1.4.17; n.1.3— 4; in. 6.6. Justinian, Nov. 8.8.

131 Ordo Generis Cassiodorum\ cf. Variae vni.16.3; 20.5—6; 31. 1. Education at court: Variae iv.4.3;
vin. 10.3; John Lydus, De Mag. in. 27; Delmaire (1989) 94—118.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE 193

appointment, while usually stressing the nominee’s noble birth and rhetor-
ical skills (both linked with personal integrity), also emphasize his or his
family’s record of service and the close attention paid by the monarch to
performance, in and out of office. The system, especially at the top, was
still far from professional, but was probably less amateurish than that of
the early empire . 132

IV. ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE

The difficulty involved in effecting permanent change to administrative
arrangements is well illustrated by Anastasius’ abolition of the chrysargyron
tax. Once the emperor had decided that the tax should no longer be col-
lected — whether for moral reasons, as asserted by Evagrius, or because the
empire’s finances were sufficiently healthy to do without the relatively small
return — he instructed his reluctant officials to destroy the relevant paper-
work. This stage removed the records stored in central archives, but
Anastasius surmised that there would be enough information in provincial
archives to reconstruct the tax precept if a future emperor decided, or was
persuaded by grasping officials, to do so. Hence, Anastasius played a trick
on his administrators by persuading them to assemble all surviving paper-
work relevant to the tax, on the grounds that he had realized his mistake
and now wanted to reinstate the chrysargyrotr, the officials gladly obliged,
only to find that their endeavours resulted in another bonfire of their pre-
cious records. Even if embroidered in the telling, Evagrius’ story , 133 besides
providing an intriguing glimpse of the extent of official archives, including
the existence of parallel record systems in Constantinople and provincial
centres, illustrates how administration was a collaborative process: the
emperor was all-powerful, but the exercise of that power depended on
numerous individual officers who transmitted information into, and orders
out from, the imperial centre. Abolition of the chrysargyron had significant
consequences quite unconnected with the motivation for the change: the
sacrae largitiones lost a sizeable chunk of revenue and, even though
Anastasius replaced it by allocating to a special fund imperial estates which
generated the same income, this ensured that the comes sacrarum largitionum
was now, to an extent, beholden to the administrators of those estates. The
appointment to the post of comes sacrarum largitionum of John the
Paphlagonian, a tractator in the praetorian prefecture, may have been
intended to help secure the reform . 134

Any change was bound to tread on vested interests, as in the case of the
chrysargyron, and it was more common for processes and structures to

132 Cass. Variae 1.42.2; v.40— 1; viii.16— 17, 21—2. Goffart (1970); Barnes (1974).

133 Evagr. HE 111.39. 134 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.204.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

194 7 - government and administration

evolve gradually, through the introduction of a new official or procedure
which ran alongside existing arrangements until the innovation either dem-
onstrated its effectiveness by marginalizing its predecessor or proved
unequal to the task. Such an approach is illustrated by the introduction by
Anastasius of vindices to supervise the collection of taxes by town councils:
though they began as monitors of local arrangements, their superior
authority contributed to undermining that of the local curiae (as Evagrius
complained), which consequently declined further in power and attractive-
ness. 133 This tendency for change to be gradual could also explain some of
the apparent administrative anomalies of the seventh century, when the
praetorian prefecture and elements of provincial administration under its
authority persisted long after the appearance of the systems that would
replace them.

Major administrative change might creep up on the empire for a variety
of reasons, and it is difficult to be specific about causes and effects. A
good example is the question of adaeratio, the practice of commuting into
gold coin taxes and payments which were assessed in kind. This habit
emerged in the western empire during the fifth century, but rather more
gradually in the east, where commutation of the land-tax into gold
remained restricted until Anastasius switched most into gold, while
leaving sufficient to be collected in kind for the needs of the field armies.
It is interesting that adaeratio was regarded as a privilege, since the most
obvious beneficiary of the practice would appear to be the state: it could
obtain the gold which it needed to pay troops, especially non-Roman mer-
cenaries, 136 and also save on the expense and labour of the cursus clabularis
and corvees; the state could then, in theory, choose where to purchase die
goods and services which it needed, hence permitting armies to move
rapidly to respond to crises, though in practice this flexibility will have
been constrained by die facts of supply and demand. Benefits for tax-
payers are less clear: the combined consequences of demands for tax pay-
ments in coin and die removal in Asiana of the state post, which had
provided the means for injecting coinage into local economies, are
reported, in similar terms, by Procopius and John Lydus; 137 both reports
are tendentious and may exaggerate a transitional local crisis. If Asiana
failed to adjust to the new tax regime in the medium term, it may have
been exceptional: the emperor Leo had already introduced a similar
change in the Oriens diocese in 467/8, while the picture of rural life in
Galatia in the late sixth century in the Life of Theodore of Sykeon sug-
gests a moderately prosperous and tax-paying peasant economy — these

135 Evagr. HE m.42; Priscian, Pan. Anast. 193 presented the panegyrical claim that the vindices pro-
tected the farmers from the rapacity of the curiales. For further discussion of the fate of the curiales, see
ch. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 219—22 below. 136 Carrie (1995) 35 — 9.

137 Procop. Secret History 30; John Lydus, De Mag. 111.61; Hendy, Studies 294—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE

T 95

areas undoubtedly still benefited from the presence of coin-using soldiers
and official travellers. 138

If adaeratio in the absence of coin posed problems, it is unclear why it
was adopted sooner in the less monetized and controlled west than in the
east. Vera’s proposal — that adaeratio was no more than a monetary valua-
tion of tax which was still paid in kind — is not demonstrated by his ques-
tionable interpretation of pope Gregory’s reference to the gold pensiones of
Sicilian church coloni (c. 600). 139 It is at variance with earlier evidence from
the east for payments nominally calculated in kind actually being made in
gold, and with the problems in Asiana recorded by Procopius and John
Lydus. Further, the payment of taxes in three instalments, trim illatio,
though made in kind in the 360s, was strongly linked by Majorian in 458
with the sale of produce to raise cash for taxes. 140 An alternative solution
is that adaeratio was favoured in particular by the larger landowners, the
people who had greatest access to cash reserves to see them through phases
of low prices and to the facilities for transporting surpluses to markets or
using commercial agents to dispose of produce as means to acquire coin.
A good harvest might, paradoxically, be a special disadvantage to peasants,
who would be forced to make hurried sales in a glutted market in order to
raise money for their taxes. 141 In such situations, adaeratio might mean the
slippage of land from the tax system, and ultimately from state control, into
the hands of the grand proprietors who could sustain their weaker neigh-
bours through periods of crisis: the dominance of gold within the state
economy ensured the pre-eminence in society of those with ready access
to gold, namely soldiers, senior officials and those with extensive connec-
tions. 142

One further consequence of adaeratio, undoubtedly unintended but of
vital importance in administrative terms, was the eclipse of the finance
ministries, the res privata and sacrae largitiones, by the praetorian prefectures
which now controlled greater monetary resources than all other depart-
ments; this led in turn to an increase in the size of the prefectures, espe-
cially that of the east, which became so unwieldy that some of its financial
functions were transferred to special logothetes who would eventually, in
the seventh century, overshadow the prefect. Logothetes tend to have the
same terminology applied to them by Justinian as the comes sacrarum largi-
tionum had done, and to perform similar roles in dispensing payments and
imperial largess; they were drawn from the prefecture, but were assigned

138 CJ xii. 50.22; Mitchell, Anatolia n ch. 19. 139 Vera (1986).

140 Liebeschuetz (1972) 88—90; Nov. Maj. 2.3; cf. C.Th. xi.1.15— 16; 19.3; xii.6.15; v.15.20; but note
that the Breviary of Alaric’s interpretatio to xi.i.i 5 speaks only of payment in kind.

141 E.g. Sid. Ap. Ep. vi. 1 2.6, and on tied trade in general, Whittaker (1983); Liebeschuetz (1987) 463
on possible disadvantages to the state. Banaji (1992) 1 13. Transport: Mitchell , Anatolia 1.233, 247—8.

142 Anon. De Rebus Bellicis 2; Theodoret, Ep. 37; Barnish (1987) 166—8, arguing the case of the pig-
based economy of San Giovanni di Ruoti; Banaji (1992) ch. 6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

196 7 - government and administration

their tasks by the emperor himself. 14 ’ It is notable that the dominance of
the prefecture in the east is associated with the careers of a series of astute
financial officials: Polycarp and Marinus under Anastasius, John the
Cappadocian and Peter Barsymes under Justinian. These reforming admin-
istrators are precisely the professional appointees identified above: emper-
ors who wanted to introduce change knew that they had to sideline the
aristocratic amateurs and promote lower-ranking bureaucrats, even if they
lacked the liberal paideia prized by the cultured elite . 144 Marinus was respon-
sible for the introduction of vindices, officials charged with the supervision
of local collection of taxes. John was admitted, even by his enemies, to be
capable at identifying problems and devising solutions to them, while it was
his efficiency in securing revenues to meet Justinian’s considerable expen-
ditures, by improving the efficiency of the collection system, eliminating
abuses, reducing delays in judicial appeals and challenging the established
practices of career civil servants, which earned him the wrath of ‘victims’
like John Lydus. John, in fact, appears to have been a prudent controller of
imperial resources, and like any canny financier he was reluctant to endorse
major new commitments: he opposed Justinian’s plans for the Vandal expe-
dition, partly on financial grounds, and he may have been responsible for
ensuring that the experienced Archelaus was appointed to oversee the
logistical side of the campaign . 145 Peter Barsymes has a similarly unscrupu-
lous reputation, but two Justinianic laws addressed to him suggest that his
concern for the interests of the treasury extended to protection of the
rights of tax-payers, i.e. the people who were ultimately responsible for the
health of the treasury . 146 In part, such reformers were the victims of
Justinian’s determination to tighten up the whole tax-collecting system: the
same law which abolished suffragia gave governors considerable authority in
the rigorous exaction of taxes to support the wars of reconquest — unless
there was actually theft, provincials were forbidden, under pain of the most
severe penalty, to complain of their exactions and punishments . 147

Understanding the mechanics of adaeratio is complicated by the practice
of coemptio, the purchase of produce, often compulsory 148 and usually for
military needs. The development of coemptio was an inevitable conse-
quence of adaeratio-. the state had to purchase the supplies which had for-
merly been brought in as tax. In theory, it could be used to benefit the
tax-payer, since the state could adjust its demands to accord with local
fluctuations in harvests and trade, and could finance the storage of surplus

143 Millet (1925); CJ x.30.4.

144 Procop. Wars 1.24. 12 for the alleged illiteracy of John the Cappadocian.

145 Since the mid fifth century, there had developed the practice of appointing a special deputy prae-
torian prefect to oversee the logistical arrangements for major campaigns: Jones, LRE 627—8, 673—4.

146 PLRE 11 s.v. Marinus 7; PLRE 111 s.v Johannes 1 1; PLRE 11 s.v. Archelaus 5; PLRE in s.v. Peter

9; Nov. 128, 130. 147 Justinian, Nov. 8.

148 Gib. xi. 1 5.2 (a.d. 384) indicates that it was not always compulsory.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE 197

produce . 149 In this case, gold coin would be recycled through the tax
system, though if payment was arranged by the allocation of a notional
credit to the individual’s tax account, the effect of coemptio would be to
demonetize local economies by removing the need for tax-payers to obtain
coinage, thus reversing the impact of adaeratio. This conflict of effects indi-
cates that the imperial administration focused on certain specific objec-
tives — a need for coin in one area at one time, a reserve of supplies at
another — and that planning at a macroeconomic level was, not surprisingly,
beyond the capacity of officials and the information available to them.

Economic theory has rarely matched practical reality. Because adaeratio
entailed greater reliance on coemptiones, there was a danger that the latter
could merge into a permanent supplement to the annual tax levy, a super-
indiction: Anastasius, who permitted the extension of adaeratio, had to
decree that coemptiones were not a regular part of the tax system . 1 '’ 11 The
estates of the potentiores were particularly liable to coemptio, presumably
because these could deliver the necessary surpluses, and there was a prohi-
bition on exactions from those with no surplus, but there were still alleged
cases of coemptiones being levied on regions which could not supply the
produce locally . 151 The practice of coemptio required the state to take greater
heed of fluctuating harvests and the need to move produce around the
empire: instead of extracting the regular tax indiction in kind, the state
obtained money with which it could purchase its necessities from the most
suitable places. Customs dues had always been an important source of
imperial revenue, and even in the fourth century provincial governors had
exploited the grain market to profit from public stocks , 152 but there are
signs of tighter control from the centre in the sixth century. Anastasius
created important customs posts at the Bosphorus and Hellespont, whose
lucrative operation was overhauled by Justinian, and recaptured Iotabe, an
island in the Red Sea which had housed a customs post; Justinian estab-
lished state monopolies in various goods which he then licensed to individ-
uals, with the result that prefects of Alexandria and governors of Lazica
could be accused of behaving like merchants in their operation of these . 153
Even Anastasius’ abolition of the chrysargyron could contribute to this
picture, since by forgoing the modest gold revenues derived from taxing

149 Cass. 1 Variae xn.22.1— 2; cf. also CJ appendix 7 (Pragmatic Sanction 22). State storage: Amm.
Marc, xxviii. 1. 7 with Vanags (1979); Procop. Secret History 22.14—18.

150 CJ Appendix 7 (Pragmatic Sanction 26) might suggest that the landowners of Apulia and
Calabria regarded regular coemptio and superindictions as similar; CJ x.27 (Anastasius).

151 C.Th. xi. 1 5.2; CJ x.27. 2.4 (Anastasius); Cass. Variae xn.14.6. Other examples of corrupt prac-
tices: Agathias, Hist, iv.21— 2 for the activities of John the Libyan; Cass. Variae 11.26.2; CJ Appendix 7
(Pragmatic Sanction 18); Procop. Secret History 23.1 1— 14.

152 De Rebus Bellicis 4.1; cf. Peter Barsymes: Procop. Secret History 22.14—22; perhaps also Maurice and
the Egyptian grain: John of Nikiu 95.21.

153 Stein, Bas-Empire 11.196—7; Procop. Secret History 25.1— 10; 20.4; 25.13—26; 26.36—9. Leo and Zeno
had prohibited the licensing of monopolies by palace officials: CJ iv.59.1— 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

198

7. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

commercial production in towns, the emperor perhaps hoped to gain more
from the closer supervision of an increased movement of goods.

Another indication of greater official interest in trade is the growing
number, from the time of Anastasius, of lead seals which belonged to indi-
viduals entitled commerciarius: it is disputed whether these should be
regarded as customs collectors, who developed into controllers of state
warehouses, or as the farmers of the more lucrative monopolies, but in the
sixth and early seventh century they included men of high status who
sometimes moved into, or even from, major office. In the latter years of
Justinian, the bankers of Constantinople were capable of underwriting
substantial imperial expenditure, even if somewhat reluctantly; they were
also attached to, and politically involved with, leading courtiers and sol-
diers . 154 These developments were not confined to the east: in the west
Valentinian III had met military needs through the creation of the siliquat-
icum tax on sales and purchases; in Spain and Italy the Ostrogoths sold
monopolies to merchants, perhaps — as conjectured by Jones — to ease col-
lection of the siliquaticunr, at Ravenna the wealth of the banker Julianus
Argentarius rivalled that of his Constantinopolitan contemporaries; in
Merovingian Gaul, customs dues sustained royal revenues while the return
from the land-tax declined; in Anglo-Saxon Britain, royal control was main-
tained over centres of commerce and production, and resources were allo-
cated to the upkeep of the Roman road system over considerable
distances . 155 The involvement of the state in such economic matters is par-
alleled by that of major bishops — for example, John the Almsgiver at
Alexandria or pope Gregory at Rome — and big secular landowners, such
as the Apions.

The problem of distinguishing between civilian and military competences
supports the impression that aspects of administration were haphazard
rather than the product of systematic design . 156 Separation of military
command from provincial administration is accepted as an important
element in the stability of the empire in the fourth century, a separation
achieved through Diocletian’s initiation of the process whereby duces assumed
the military responsibilities of provincial governors, through Constantine’s
completion of that process and his removal of military duties from praeto-
rian prefects, and by the insistence of conscientious emperors, like
Constantius II, on preserving the divide . 137 In Ostrogothic Italy, this separa-
tion of powers (to which there were some exceptions) was displayed as a
balance between Goths who fought and Romans who paid and administered

154 Hendy, Studies 626—9; Nesbitt (1977); Oikonomides (1986); Dunn (1993). Bankers: Coripp. lust.
11.361—406, with the notes of Cameron, Corippus", Barnish (1985) 35.

155 Nov. Val 1 5, 24. Ostrogoths: Cass. Variae 11.4; 11.26.4; n.30.3 with Jones, LRE 826. Iulius: Barnish
(1985). Gaul: Pirenne (1939)- Britain: Sawyer and Wood (1977) 143—8; Rackham (1986) 257.

156 Tomlin (1976). 157 Amm. Marc. xxi. 1 6. 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE 199

the taxes which supported their masters and defenders . 138 This separation was
probably vital to the fiscal structure of the state; if Romans were allowed to
become warriors in the Gothic army, they would tend to remove themselves
from the ranks of tax-payers, as seems to have happened in Merovingian
Gaul, and was effectively the case at the ending of Roman rule in Britain.

The distinction, however, was difficult to maintain and may often have
been unrealistic. Powerful generals naturally had an interest in the business
of the praetorian prefects, if only to ensure supplies for their troops: the
patrician Aetius engaged in tax supervision and reform, and his murder was
accompanied by that of the prefect Boethius and the purging of honorati ; 159
successful commanders often acquired control of civilian affairs — for
example, the sequence in Italy of Stilicho, Aetius, Ricimer, Odoacer,
Theoderic, Narses and finally the institution of the exarchate of Ravenna;
the exarchate of Africa is a parallel case where the resources of a particu-
lar area had to be placed under a unitary authority to cope with local mili-
tary threats. The case of Sabinianus Magnus, magister militum per Illyricum in
the late fifth century, who acted to prop up local councils and the tax reg-
ister which were under threat, indicates that administrative blurring was not
confined to the west. Military problems were a factor in this merging of
responsibilities, and security considerations, which were in part sharpened
by the waning authority of the curial elites, also led to Justinian uniting civil
and military authority in various provinces of the Asianic diocese and in
Egypt: there were administrative precedents for the western exarchates of
the late sixth century . 160

Sabinianus was a soldier who undertook civilian tasks, which might
appear to be the natural process: Vegetius remarked on the superiority of
the army’s bureaucratic procedures to those of the civilian administra-
tion . 161 In areas of the empire where the urban infrastructure was weak and
hence educational levels probably relatively low, there may have been a
problem with the supply of civilians to undertake minor routine tasks.
Justinian assigned command over troops in Arabia and Phoenicia
Libanensis to the local governors precisely to keep the army out of civilian
affairs and to repair the impoverished state of the fisc, and a similar move
in Thrace was explained because of the need for ‘a man who is good for
both civilian and military affairs ’. 162 Most administrators were recruited
from the peaceful and educated provinces of Asia, Syria, Palestine and
Egypt, whereas from Justinian onwards natives of warlike Armenia
became prominent as governors or exarchs of frontier regions.

The military may have been keen to encroach on civilian responsibilities,
but there are also numerous instances of civilians who took on military

158 Cass. I driae ix.14.8; xn.5.4. 159 Nov. Val. 1.4; Priscus fr. 30; I lydat. Chron. s.a. 453/4.

160 Marc. Com. s.a. 479. Just. Nov. 145; Edict 13.2; Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 35—6.

161 Vegetius 11. 1 9. 162 Justinian, Nov. 102; Edict 4; Nov. 26.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

200

7- GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

command: the sacellarius Rusticus acted as paymaster for Justinian’s army in
Lazica, transmitted information between the emperor and his troops, and
participated in tactical debates; John the Armenian, treasurer in Belisarius’
household, was also one of his trusted commanders, and Alexander the
logothete also led an army; 163 Narses and the exarchs Smaragdus and
Eleutherius were all eunuchs with some financial experience within the
palace before their appointment to Italian commands; the future emperor
Maurice was an imperial notary before becoming count of the excubitors
and then magister militum per Orientem. The assumption of responsibility for
oversight of the limitanei in the eastern half of the empire by the magjster
officiorum from 443 is analogous. 164 These appointments and rearrange-
ments might be seen as politically motivated, with the intention of keeping
generals under control, but administrative efficiency is an equally plausible
explanation. The empire was organized for war, and military expenditures
consumed the majority of tax revenues, so that the appointment of prae-
torian prefects — for example, Apion and Calliopius for the Persian war
under Anastasius — to co-ordinate the supply of particular armies is not
surprising, since the costs of military disaster were high — for example,
Leo’s expedition against the Vandals in 468, which cost over seven million
solidi, of which the prefectural reserve provided almost half. 165 John Lydus
bitterly lamented the loss by the prefecture of its military role, 166 and may
well have wished to see it restored. The necessities of internal security,
external threats or the enforcement of tax collection might dictate the inte-
gration of military and civilian duties, but the reversals of Justinian’s legis-
lation on the provincial powers indicate that there was no overall policy: 167
what mattered was what worked in a specific area at a particular time;
emperors were prepared to change their minds in the light of experience.

One interpretation of the shifting balances between military and civilian
interests, and between the different elements in the civilian administrative
structure, is to see the late Roman empire as a polycracy of competing and
overlapping powers, with the emperor as the ultimate arbitrator. 168 This
enabled the emperor, at least in the east, to avoid being dominated by his mil-
itary commanders and to ensure that no single office controlled the state:
emperors were able to intervene in administration at any level, by-passing
senior ministers to communicate directly with governors and other local
agents on even the most trivial matters. Emperors undoubtedly perceived the
benefits of a balance, and sometimes acted to eliminate individuals who had

163 Agathias, Hist. 111.2— 5 (Rusticus), and cf. iv. 17.2—3 (Martin); Procop. Wars 111.17 (John); Wars
vii. 3. 4 (Alexander); see also PLRE in. 164 Theod. II, Nov. 24.

165 Hendy, Studies 221 for the various figures. 166 John Lydus, De Mag. m.io— 1 1.

167 E.g. Nov. 145.

168 Jones, LRE 341—7; Tomlin (1976); Kelly in CM//X111.169— 75. John Lydus, De Mag. 11.10; 111.22,
40 for the claim that the prefecture lost control of the fabricae to the master of offices, and had to share
control of the cursus publicus.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE

201

become too powerful — for example, Valentinian III and Aetius or Leo and
the family of Aspar — but the balance was probably more accidental than
planned. Prominence of a particular individual in one post was often fol-
lowed by the pre-eminence of someone in a different position, as if emper-
ors spontaneously reacted against the dominance of one office: thus, after
Anthemius held the praetorian prefecture for nine years (405—14), Helion
emerged as the most prominent individual in the east, as master of offices
for thirteen years (414—27); Cyrus of Panopolis, who occupied both urban
and praetorian prefectures for two years (439—41) and had probably held the
urban prefecture for longer (as well as a previous stint as praetorian prefect),
was followed as the power at court by the eunuch Chrysaphius, the sacellar-
ius, and Nomus, master of offices 443—6 and subsequently an influential
patrician; when Chrysaphius was executed after the death of his patron,
Theodosius II, in 450, Palladius occupied the praetorian prefecture for five
years (450— 5). 169 Although the prefecture was gaining power during the fifth
and sixth centuries, it would not appear that emperors had a policy of relying
on this or any other particular office, at least until the long tenures of the pre-
fecture by John the Cappadocian (531—2, 532—41) and Peter Barsymes
(543—6, 5 5 5—62) under Justinian — and even this development was followed
by a reaction under his successors, when the posts of curopalatus and count
of the excubitors became the most important at court. Normally, emperors
will have been surrounded by a variety of influential individuals, as suggested
by the schedule of bribes deployed by the patriarch Cyril of Alexandria to
ensure the acceptance of his Christological views at Theodosius IPs court in
the 430s: the master of offices, the quaestor, the wife and assessor of the prae-
torian prefect and numerous eunuchs from the bedchambers of both
Theodosius and his sister Pulcheria, as well as two of Pulcheria’s ladies of the
bedchamber, received gifts of varying size. 17 ' 1 Powerful offices were usually
held for short terms, to avoid the development of local power bases; 171 much
of the jockeying for power may have been played out through ceremonies
and individual precedence, privileges and immunities, rather than the trans-
fer of departmental functions, although competition is not unknown. 172

Overlapping structures probably enhanced imperial control, but emper-
ors did not favour disruptive competition: the existence of diversity in the
provinces could cause confusion, and an exasperated Justinian terminated

169 References in PLRE n. Note that Nomus as master of offices was given joint management with
the praetorian prefect of the East of civic lands, and took over from the praetorian prefect of the East
management of agri limitanei: Nov. Theod. 23—4. 170 ACO 1.4.2, 224—5.

171 An exception is the Lycian Tatianus: after his fall from power in 392, his fellow provincials were
banned from the administration for some years (C. Th. ix. 3 8.9). John the Cappadocian counteracted his
unpopularity in the prefecture by relying on his own household.

172 Lendon (1997) 1 3 5 — 6, 153; CJ xn.8.2; C.Th. vi.6— 19, 21—3, 27. Competition: Nov. Val. 8.1—2 for
rivalry over tax collection in the western empire between the praetorian prefect of Italy and the comes
sacrarum largitionum and the comes rerum privatarum\ Lendon (1997) 177—85.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

202

f. GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

military— civilian disputes in Pisidia and Thrace by uniting powers. 173 The
archive of Dioscorus of Aphrodito illustrates the problems caused by
conflict between a community’s traditional right of autopragia , the right to
pay its taxes direct to the provincial governor, and the desire of the gover-
nor’s tax-collector, in this case the pagarch Menas, to have all local taxes
gathered under his authority (with consequent opportunities for graft).
Dioscorus’ reports of the violence inflicted on Aphrodito may well be
exaggerated (see pp. 185 and 188 above), but his plea appears to have been
upheld, and he was able to obtain an injunction from the duke of the
Thebaid that ordered the pagarch to behave properly, and confirmation for
Aphrodito’s special tax position from the imperial court after an appeal to
the empress Theodora. From Dioscorus’ perspective, the actions of Menas
were an unwarranted encroachment on Aphrodito’s long-standing privi-
leges, but from a broader perspective this competition to extract tax reve-

nues might have been seen as a means of ensuring the full payment of fiscal

dues. 174

A final area of change deserving comment is the linguistic dimension of
government. Latin had always been the official language of administration
and continued to be so in the various barbarian successor states of the west.

In the surviving eastern half of the empire, however, our period sees its
gradual displacement by Greek — one aspect of the broader transformation
of the Roman empire into the Byzantine. Although during the principate
the imperial government had generally communicated with Greek-speak-
ing communities in their own language, this was a practical concession on
the part of emperors drawn almost uniformly from Latin-speaking parts
of the empire, who issued their legislation in Latin (even if it was then
sometimes translated into Greek) and who communicated in Latin with
their officials, most of whom were from the same background. Indeed, the
advent of the military emperors of the late third and fourth centuries,
accustomed as they also were to Latin as the language of the army, seems
to have resulted in a renewed emphasis on Latin as the language of admin-
istration even in the Greek east, while the opportunities offered by an
enlarged bureaucracy and the emergence of Constantinople as an admin-
istrative centre created a demand in the fourth-century east for education
in Latin, much to the chagrin of Libanius. 175 This heightened profile for
Latin, however, proved relatively short-lived. Concessions to the predom-
inant language in the east began to appear from the turn of the fourth
century onwards — a law of 397 allowed judges to give their decisions in
Latin or Greek, another of 439 accepted the legal validity of wills in Greek,
while the contemporary praetorian prefect of the east, Cyrus (439—41),

173 Nov. 24.1; 26. 174 MacCoull, Dioscorus io— n, 23—8.

175 Dagron (1969) 38—40; Liebeschuetz (1972) 242—5 5, esp. 251—2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROME TO BYZANTIUM

203

earned the contempt of John Lydus for having initiated the practice of
issuing prefectural edicts in Greek . 176 The second half of the fifth century
saw a steady increase in the proportion of imperial laws issued in Greek,
and the erosion of Roman civilization in the Latinate north-western parts
of the Balkans will have reduced the availability in the east of native Latin-
speakers . 177 The fifth and sixth centuries did witness the great codifications
of Roman law, in Latin, under Thedosius II and Justinian, but these were
as much grand exercises in asserting the continuity of the eastern empire
with increasingly distant Roman traditions as they were projects of practi-
cal administrative import. Greek translations of Justinian’s Code, Digest
and Institutes were soon available , 178 and although Justinian’s great jurist
Tribonian appears to have tried to resist the trend, Justinian’s own subse-
quent legislation was increasingly issued in Greek alone, unless specifically
directed to one of the Latin-speaking provinces of the west . 176 These
changes were not completely one-sided, for in the process Greek absorbed
a wide range of Latin administrative terminology, but by the end of the
sixth century, Gregory the Great could complain of the difficulties of
finding anyone in Constantinople competent to translate from Greek into
Latin , 180 while soon after, in a highly significant move, Heraclius began
using the term basileus in his official titulature . 181

V. FROM ROME TO BYZANTIUM

The seventh century was a time of major administrative change, when the
structure of civilian provinces which could trace its origins back to the days
of the Roman republic began to be replaced by the middle Byzantine system
of themes, whose primary function was the maintenance of the major army
groups, initially the Anatolic, Armeniac, Thrakesian and Opsikion. Just as
military needs in the mid third century contributed to the emergence of the
‘new’ Diocletianic tax system, so now the location of army groups led to the
development of administrative structures to support them. The sequence
and chronology of these developments have been much disputed, partly
because of misguided attempts to establish the identity of the grand
reformer who devised such an administrative revolution, but there is now a
substantial consensus that the process was gradual, a set of responses to the
fundamental changes which overtook the eastern Roman world during
the seventh century . 182 The Persian war which dominated the first quarter
of the century played its part, since the empire successively lost control of

176 CJ vn.45.12; Theod. II, Nov. 1 6.8; John Lydus, De Mag. 11.12. 177 Honore (1978) 39.

178 Jolowicz and Nicholas (1972) 481—2, 500-1. 179 Dagron (1969) 44-5; Honore (1978) 58—9.

180 Greg. Reg. vn.27. 181 Dagron (1969) 38.

182 An illustration of this process is the gradual emergence of a militarized society in the exarchate
of Ravenna: on this, see Brown, Gentlemen and Officers.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

204 7 - government and administration

all its major revenue-generating regions, with the result that Heraclius was
forced to rely on emergency measures, such as the annexation of church
treasures; since the emperor was far removed from Constantinople, tempo-
rary mints had to be created to service his needs. The capture of most pro-
vincial cities by Persians, Avars or Slavs effectively destroyed much of the
administrative network, with an inevitable increase in the role and power of
administrative elements attached to the court.

But military disaster did not occasion a complete break in organization;
perhaps rather it accelerated tendencies already apparent in the sixth
century, such as the declining importance of provincial cities and of the
curial class which had upheld the liturgical principle on which much of the
administration of the empire had formerly depended. Some important
administrative developments also had their antecedents in practices of the
preceding century. A case in point is the emergence of coemptio ( synone in
Greek), i.e. a reversion to taxation in kind, as the basis for imperial finances.
In the early sixth century Anastasius had increased the monetary element
in imperial taxation through commutation of the land-tax, adaeratio, and
arguably also through changes to the collection of customs dues; even if
adaeratio benefited rich landowners, who might control the local provision
and collection of the necessary gold, Anastasius’ reforms appear to have
increased the resources available to the emperor. In the late sixth century,
Maurice was still interested in commutation, since he converted the
Egyptian grain-tax into gold, and the process was also attractive to major
landowners such as pope Gregory, who commuted for gold the rents from
papal estates which had been registered in produce by pope Gelasius in the
fifth century. 183 But Maurice was also desperately short of money, and
twice attempted to reduce the cash element in military pay by a return to
issues in kind. The regularity of warfare in the Balkans and the east must
have increased the need for coemptiones, and these were probably levied as
tax credits so that in certain areas the tax cycle was being demonetized: the
empire, and more especially its armies, were living from hand to mouth, so
that financial problems might rapidly assume critical proportions. If this
was true under Maurice, it was even more so during the three decades of
constant turmoil under Heraclius.

Heraclius’ triumph over the Persians (628) might have enabled a restora-
tion of traditional arrangements, but almost immediately the Arab inva-
sions of the 630s ensured that there could be no return to normality. The
richest areas of the empire were lost for good, the major army units had to
regroup on the Anatolian plateau and the coastline of Asia Minor became
vulnerable to sea-borne raiding. By the mid seventh century, endemic
warfare had led the empire to revert to a tax system based on levies in kind,

183 John of Nikiu 95.21; John the Deacon, Life of Gregory.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROME TO BYZANTIUM

205

as had happened in similar circumstances in the late third century: coemp-
tiones were now the backbone of taxation, to the extent that regular land-
taxes on property might be referred to as the extraordina of the public fisc . 184

Survival for the impoverished empire, parts of which were demonetized
and decommercialized, took the form of the attachment of troops to
specific regions and the concentration of administrative structures in the
only city of any substance to survive, namely Constantinople . 185 Authority
in threatened cities tended to be given to military governors of proven
loyalty, who were less likely than local figures of authority such as bishops
to negotiate surrenders, thereby ensuring that imperial interests were sus-
tained in each particular locality . 186 This development resembles the
appointment of comites civitatis in the west, a practice which probably
emerged during the military crises of the fifth century: as in other matters,
the east follows western practices, after a considerable time-lag. The
governors of themes have been interpreted as a regularization of the sixth-
century practice of appointing extraordinary praetorian prefects to oversee
the supply of major armies (see p. 200 above ); 187 even if the precise link
cannot be proved, the similarity of powers is evident. Another element of
continuity with the empire of the fifth and sixth centuries is that, despite
the greater overall militarization of administration, financial and military
matters were largely kept separate . 188 In this respect there is a significant
divergence from the western empire, where simplified, patrimonial admin-
istration tended to follow the collapse of imperial authority, with real
power held by landowning soldiers, whose support had to be courted by
the rulers of the different successor states.

With the disappearance of intermediary provinces and cities, the state
came to relate more directly to its tax-paying subjects. It has been argued
that the tax system shifted from the late Roman distributive model, in
which the state fixed its total requirements and then distributed these
among the contributing regions, to the contributive model of middle
Byzantium, in which assessments might vary according to the resources of
tax-payers as well as the needs of the state . 189 This development would have
been facilitated by the increased use of coemptio in the sixth century, since
this process was supposed to be geared to the ability to provide the requi-
site produce; there is also evidence from the sixth century for increasingly
frequent reassessment of taxes and of rents on great estates, which would
point to greater flexibility within the system . 190 A contributive system

184 Farmers’ Law 19; Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 146—5 3.

185 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century ch. 5; Dunn (1993); note Whittow (1996) 104—6 for res-
ervations about demonetization. 186 Kaegi (1992) 167— 9.

187 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 203—7, 22 3 -

188 Whittow (1996) 105—6; Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 101.

189 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 1 50; following Oikonomides (1987).

190 Goffart (1989) ch. 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

206 7- GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

required the regular updating of information. It has also been suggested
that the unsettled conditions forced the state to adjust its procedures to rec-
ognize the facts of demographic mobility: the agricultural population
could no longer be tied to the land by imperial legislation, and so methods
of attracting population to underexploited land had to emerge, with a con-
sequent increase in the numbers of peasant smallholders and the emer-
gence of the village as a key intermediary between the state and the
tax-payer; also the household came to replace the individual as the basic tax
unit, which would also help the state to avoid the disappearance of mobile

191

tax-payers.

The late Roman state was bureaucratic, certainly in comparison to the
administrative structures of the earlier empire, but, as the foregoing discus-
sion shows it, it was not a monolithic or petrified structure. There were
competing elements within the administrative structure, for which the
emperor acted as the ultimate umpire, while the balance between the impe-
rial centre and its local operators and the base of tax-payers also shifted.
The administration provided the eastern empire with at least a century of
significant prosperity, and then proved itself capable of reshaping its struc-
tures to respond to the disruption of its world in the early seventh century.

191 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 1 50 — 2 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 8

ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE
CITIES OF THE FIFTH TO THE MID SEVENTH
CENTURY: 425-640

J. H. W. G. LIEBESCHUETZ
I. EAST AND WEST: COMMON TRENDS

This chapter is concerned with the political evolution of the ancient city —
that is, of a political unit comprising an urban core serving as administra-
tive centre of a rural territory — in a period of great change. As the western
empire broke up, the relatively uniform environment that had been pro-
vided by the imperial administration was replaced by a great variety of con-
ditions. In view of this, it is perhaps surprising that the evolution of cities
in different regions continued to a large extent to follow parallel lines and
that comparable developments can be observed in the new barbarian king-
doms and in areas which remained under imperial control, regional
differences often being a matter of timing rather than substance. 1

Taking the city of the second century as a standard of comparison, the
type survived better in the east 2 than in the west, 3 but not uniformly well
even there. The classical city with an urban population, monumental build-
ings, games and a highly literate upper class continued in at least the pro-
vincial capitals 4 of western and southern Asia Minor, 5 in Syria, Arabia,
Palestine 6 and Egypt 7 right up to the Arab invasions, 8 and in the areas under
Arab rule even beyond that. In the west the Roman version of the classi-
cal ideal survived best in North Africa — but only up to the Vandal con-
quest 9 — in southern Spain, 1 " in Provence 11 and in much of Italy, especially
the north. 12 In much of Spain, Gaul and the Balkans, cities had contracted
within a reduced circuit of walls. The late fifth century saw signs of revival,
first in the east, 13 then in the west, mainly in church building. It is first

1 General surveys: Rich (1992), Ddlger (1959). 2 Claude (1969); Brandes (1989); Kirsten (1958).

3 There is no general survey to compare with Claude’s, but see Fevrier (1980) on Gaul.

4 For the qualification see Roueche (1989) 218—20 and Roueche, Aphrodisias 34.

5 Brandes (1989); writings of Foss cited in Bibliography.

6 Kennedy (1985b); Whittow (1990) 13— 20. 7 Bagnall, Egypt— much, but mainly fourth century.

8 So Foss, see Bibliography; but much evidence suggests some ‘decline’ from c. 550: see Cameron,

Mediterranean World 1 58—66; Kennedy (1985b); Kennedy (1992). 9 Lepelley, Cites.

10 Cordoba, Merida, Italica and Hispala seem to have been independent and active in the sixth
century; see Keay (1988). 11 Vittinghoff (1958).

12 Ward-Perkins (1978); Wickham (1981); Eck and Galsterer (1991); also p. 234 below.

13 E.g. at Aphrodisias, Gerasa, Bostra, Caesarea; see p. 21 5 below.

207

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

208 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

observed in Ostrogothic Italy , 14 then, in the second half of the sixth
century, in Merovingian Gaul , 15 and last of all in Visigothic Spain . 16

Meanwhile, the cities were changing. On the negative side, self-govern-
ment by legally defined bodies (the curiae) in accordance with constitutional
procedures — that is, politics in the classical sense — was perishing every-
where. Cities came to be run by groups of powerful individuals who are
described in various ways without our ever being told the criteria which
qualified a man for membership of this ruling group . 17 A plausible expla-
nation of this development was given by Libanius towards the end of the
fourth century. The maintenance of curial strength depended essentially on
the curiales themselves. If they did not keep their colleagues to their duties,
nobody could. But the most powerful councillors did not mind their col-
leagues’ departure, for it meant that they could concentrate power in their
own hands . 18 The consideration that they would also have to bear a larger
share of the financial burdens ceased to carry much weight as the civic ser-
vices which councillors had paid to provide — that is, public buildings, ban-
quets, spectacles and competitions — came to be valued less or were
financed in different ways. On the other hand, there was little reason why
an ordinary decurion should want to remain in his council. If he was well
connected, he was likely to win more wealth and esteem in the imperial
service or the church. In any case, he was likely to enjoy a more carefree life
outside the council. Councillors were at risk of being beaten or bank-
rupted, and this risk was no longer compensated for by the prospect of
high esteem in the city. So they left.

The government did its utmost, right up to the reign of Justinian, to stop
this trend through legislation , 19 but to little effect. In the east, the notables
were in control by the reign of Anastasius. The government recognized the
situation, and new legislation took account of this fact. This may well have
been an important factor in the Justinianic revival . 211 In the west, the process
may have taken a little longer but the outcome was the same: the govern-
ment had to find ways of raising the resources it needed in peace or war
through agencies other than decurions , 21 and perhaps in the seventh
century gave up collecting the basic land-tax altogether . 22

The helplessness of the government in face of the relentless decline of
the councils was related to another empire-wide development: the decline
in the effectiveness of the provincial governor, the key figure in the admin-
istration of the late empire as organized by Diocletian. In various areas of

14 La Rocca (1992).

15 Rouche (1979) table p. 295; also Claude (i960); Dhondt (1957); Cuppers (1977); Fevrier (1980).

16 Part of a remarkable cultural revival after the union of Goths and Romans: Collins (1983) 51—5.

17 See pp. 219— 22 below. 18 Lib. Or xlix. 8—1 1, cf. xlviii. 3 7— 41. 19 Schubert (1969).

20 See p. 220 below.

21 Merovingian Gaul: Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.2, v.34, ix.30; Visigothic Spain: De fisco Barcinonensi in

SCNACk.^-j^.-, see also Vives (1963) 54. 22 Goffart (1982).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EAST AND WEST: COMMON TRENDS

209

the east, civil provincial governors proved unable to keep order, and
Justinian saw himself obliged to combine military and civilian administra-
tion. 2 ’ Soon after, provincial notables were given a voice in the appointment
of the men who were to govern them; in other words, the office was local-
ized . 24 In the barbarian west, the provincial system disappeared altogether,
and the rulers attempted to control cities directly by appointing counts over
at least the most important of them . 25 It is doubtful whether barbarian
rulers were in fact able to exercise stronger control than the emperors. Many
of the counts, too, were local magnates. It is likely that many cities enjoyed
greater independence in the sixth century than they had done since the reign
of Diocletian. Independence was greater in proportion to a city’s distance
from the centres of imperial or royal power, and particularly in situations
where city authorities had to decide whether or not to resist an invader , 26 or
to support one or the other contender in a civil war . 27

A positive development in east and west was the growth of the power
of the bishop. The importance of the church became increasingly conspic-
uous in the structure of the town. There had, of course, been a significant
amount of church building in some towns since the early fourth century,
but the building of monumental churches only became general towards the
end of the fourth and the beginning of the fifth century. In many parts of
the empire, and particularly in the west, church building was interrupted by
the military crises of the mid fifth century. It resumed in the late fifth and
sixth century and continued to the end of our period and beyond.
Ecclesiastical buildings became particularly prominent in the reduced for-
tress cities of the west, which became centres of prayer dominated by an
episcopal complex of sometimes two cathedrals, a bishop’s palace and a
baptistery, with nunneries and smaller churches within the walls, and ceme-
tery basilicas and monasteries in suburbs beyond the fortifications . 28 The
east did not see the development of church- or monastery-centred
suburbs, but the periods of high activity in church building in towns and
villages were earlier than corresponding periods in the west, and the donors
seem to have come from a much wider social range . 29 Of course, the whole
process came to a stop with the Muslim conquest and subsequent raids all
over Asia Minor.

Another development which had a strong impact on cities everywhere
was the growth of monasticism, though in this case the effect was, at least

23 Just. Nov. 24—5, 27—31; on the reorganization, Jones, LRE 280—1.

24 In reconquered Italy: Just. Nov. App. vii (Const. Pragm.) 1 2 (5 52), for east Nov. (Justin II) 149 (5 69).

25 Claude (1964); Spandel (1957); Declareuil (1910); Lewis (1976); Murray (1986); Thompson (1969)
139-43; Ewig (1976) 451-62.

26 Many examples in Procopius’ accounts of the wars in the east and in Italy.

27 E.g. Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.24 (Poitiers), 26 (Perigueux), 27 (Toulouse), 31 (Bordeaux).

28 Testini et al. (1989) — Italy; J.-P. Sodini (1989) — Asia Minor; N. Duval (1989) — North Africa.

29 Dagron (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

210 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

at first, different in east and west. In the west, the first stages of the spread
of monasteries were controlled by bishops, so that the number and wealth
of monasteries actually strengthened the power of the bishop over city and
suburb. It was only later, in the seventh and eighth centuries, that the estab-
lishment of rural monasteries in northern and north-eastern Gaul by
members of the Frankish aristocracy was one of the factors contributing
to the break-up of the classical tivitas as a political unit in that area. 30 In the
east, monasteries were generally founded well outside cities and without the
participation of the bishop. Abbots and holy men established a close rela-
tionship with the population of neighbouring villages and became their
patrons vis-a-vis the authorities of city or empire. 31

One of the attractions of the classical city was that it was the centre of lit-
erary culture, whose continuity was ensured by the availability of teachers,
with the higher rhetorical education only being provided at regional centres.
Cassiodorus explained that to be able to get one’s children educated, and so
to ensure the continuance of the cultural tradition, was a strong reason for
keeping one’s main residence in a city ( Variae vm.31). So the survival of
cities, or rather their continuing to be the centre where the leaders of a region
lived, was linked with the continued prestige of secular literary culture. But
this was under pressure during the whole of our period. The Bible was stead-
ily taking over more of the ground that had been occupied by classical
authors, and the ascetic ideal had no place for secular literature at all, and
could be pursued quite without book knowledge. 32 Now this development
had very different consequences in east and west in our period. In many cities
of the east, literary culture and Christianity continued to coexist through the
sixth century. 3 ’ The poems of Dioscorus of Aphrodito and the speeches of
Choricius of Gaza are evidence of this. During this period in the west, liter-
ary education came to be restricted to an ever narrowing group of leading
families at a few centres of government. Cities ceased to have schools, and
the transmission of higher literary culture was left to private tutors and ulti-
mately to the church. 34 But in the seventh century the same trend became
conspicuous in the east as well. Books became scarce, and learning was
increasingly restricted to clergy and Constantinople. 35

II. THE CITIES OF THE EAST

The written material for the study of the political and administrative devel-
opment of the late Roman city in the east comes principally from three

30 Prinz (1965), particularly chs. iv and v; Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 193—4.

31 Well illustrated in Sevcenko (1984) and Mitchell, Anatolia 11.122— 50. See also p. 217 below.

32 Markus (1990) 199— 21 1.

33 Mid-fifth-century Seleucia: Dagron (1978); sixth-century: Bowersock, Hellenism ; MacCoull,

Dioscorus. 34 Riche (1973). 35 Wilson (1983) 58—9; Lemerle (1971) 74—85; Mango (1980) 130—7 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Bourgeso Autun
k/i ) / Geneva .
Bordeaux qJ ^ — "

^ Wo'fV OCahors^ OGre ^_

Boundary of eastern empire

A L M AT I

(/ .

I 0 o b 0l (

% B. P 3 !^^ j

>,Hadrianopons'Q v *v
Constantinople^:

ARMENIA / r

Caesaree^j' x' J ^ / x
C^* fMopsuestia o Edessa

forthag^CIL^

o\ »o<\S ' B/c. v »’ I iviopsuesna o Edi

Ephlsusp Aphrodisias% \ \\

Corinth^Athens oV^(rxAntioch^ H*

*•{? MyraC

Ptolemais . — -
Arsinoerf^ oCyrene

SideVlKorykos febApamea X

X' Assyria C

HAURAN

Bostra

o O AI^BIA

UoGerasa
h Amman

Land over 1000 metres

\ 1 ^>\q Antaeopolis

'30«E'%£f 1 nopoli l m

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

212 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

kinds of evidence: inscriptions, laws and, in Egypt, papyri. For each kind
of evidence, the material is relatively abundant for the fourth century,
scarce in the middle of the fifth century, and again becomes more abun-
dant from the last quarter of the fifth century to at least the middle of the
sixth . 36 It will be seen that the revival of the late fifth century corresponds
to a transformation of civic government. The decline from the mid sixth
century probably reflects the changes which were to bring about the ‘col-
lapse’ of the ancient city in Asia Minor which became manifest after the
Arab invasions.

i . Cities of the Greek east: pattern I

What general conclusions can be drawn about the political condition of
these cities in the fifth and sixth centuries? The fading out of monuments
commemorating local politicians suggests that by the beginning of the fifth
century the competitive civic politics of the early empire were dead or
dying nearly everywhere. In the smaller cities, it had already disappeared
early in the fourth century; in the larger cities and provincial capitals, it had
for practical purposes come to an end towards the end of the century.
Decurions, from being the political elite, had become a group of heredi-
tary functionaries whose position was nothing to boast about — certainly
no longer worth publicizing on an expensive monument. In the case of
provincial capitals, imperial officials remained concerned to maintain the
classical and monumental appearance of the cities and took epigraphic
credit for such public work as occurred . ,7 It looks as if the administration
was coming to regard provinces rather than cities as the basic administra-
tive units of the empire . 38 Provincial assemblies, meeting at the capital,
could be attended by decurions and honorati of all the cities in the province,
and expressions of either praise or discontent, included in the acclamations
of the provincial assembly, were sent to the emperor. Imperial legislation
was now often addressed to the inhabitants of a particular province, and it
would be logical if it was first promulgated to the provincial assembly, and
subsequently placed on permanent public record in the provincial capital . 39
The traditional diplomacy by embassy and panegyric seems to have ceased
to operate between ordinary provincial cities and the emperor, and even
between the provincial governor and the ordinary cities of his province. At
any rate, such cities seem first to have stopped putting up inscribed monu-
ments to emperors, and then to provincial governors as well. It becomes
rare for an imperial decree to be inscribed in a provincial city. Imperial

36 Examples of temporal distribution of inscriptions: Roueche, Aphrodisias passim, Sartre (1982)
(Bostra). Laws: Seeck (1919) lists laws year by year. Papyri: Remondon (1966); Bagnall and Worp (1980).

37 Robert (1948). 38 Roueche, Aphrodisias 33— 4; Roueche (1989) 218— 21.

39 Notably the provincial reforms of Justinian: see above, n. 23.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

21 3

statues, statues of governors and inscribed imperial decrees continued to
be displayed in provincial capitals, at least — certainly at Ephesus. After
some resistance, the imperial government sanctioned the transfer of civic
funds, statues and even building materials from ordinary cities to the pro-
vincial capital . 40

Great centres like Ephesus or Antioch, and provincial capitals like
Corinth or Aphrodisias, retained their classical monumentality into the mid
sixth century and beyond . 41 But it seems that in places which were not
centres of government the decay of buildings characteristic of classical city
life often began much earlier. Gymnasia went out of use, and were built
over or fell into ruin. Public spaces such as theatres or colonnaded streets
were invaded by shoddy structures. The agora might be built over, and
sometimes even aqueducts were allowed to decay, although it appears that,
of the classical amenities, baths were maintained, and even new ones built,
when other monumental public buildings had been abandoned . 42 In central
and northern Asia Minor especially, where the emergence of classical cities
had been closely linked with Roman rule under the early empire , 43 there is
very little evidence, whether inscriptions or remains of buildings or indeed
objects of any kind, that suggests conspicuously urban activity after, say,
the early fourth century. If such places continued to have bishops, as is sug-
gested by their continuing to figure on bishops’ lists, it is likely that the
bishops presided over what were little more than large fortified villages . 44

The imperial government was aware of the development and tried to
maintain the monumental appearance of cities , 45 not, in the long run, suc-
cessfully. Unfortunately, it is not yet possible to tell the story of the decline
of classical urbanism in detail or even, except in a few cases, to provide a
chronology. Of the excavations that have taken place, too few have been
concerned to answer this kind of question. The decline of classical urban-
ism did not, in any case, necessarily mean that cities ceased to be centres of
population. Indeed, the building on previously open spaces implies that
there was a need for more houses and shops. In some towns there may well
have been a shift in the location of population. Early churches were sited
on the periphery of cities, and it is quite conceivable that the population
sometimes tended to group round churches on the edge of the cities,
leaving the centres empty — a development which was common in the
western provinces.

* C.Th. xv.1.18 of 374, 26 of 390, 37 of 398.

41 The evidence for undiminished secular monumentality and continued secular building in the writ-
ings of Foss (see Bibliography) is derived mainly from cities like these, which are the cities which in the
sixth century had a financial official entitled ‘father of the city’; see Roueche (1979).

42 Scott (1987), Crawford (1990) 6 — Sardis; Brandes (1989) 88 — Priene, 95 — Hierapolis, 108 —

Caesarea in Cappadocia, no — Pergamum — 1 1 5 Cycicus, 120 — Anemurion (for Anemurion see also
Russell in Hohlfelder (1982) 133— 4). 43 Mitchell, Anatolia 1.8 1—98.

44 Mitchell, Anatolia n. 1 20—1 . 45 C.Th. xv.1.1 (357), 14 (365), 37 (398 );xv.5.i (372), 3 (409).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

214 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

2. The Greek east: pattern II

There is a second pattern of evidence, epigraphic and other, bearing on the
condition of the cities which is found in eastern areas of the Hellenistic
classical world. Starting perhaps at Side in Pamphylia, 46 further east in
Cilicia-Isauria, 47 then at Apamea 48 and other sites in eastern Syria, in
Palestine and in Arabia, 49 where Gerasa and Bostra 50 are the most notable
of a number of sites, there is an abundance of fifth- and sixth-century evi-
dence of activity in cities. The pattern is found not only in cities, but also in
the villages in their territories and in areas where villages predominate:
inland Cilicia, eastern Phrygia, western Galatia, the Hauran, the Negev. 51 A
feature of this area is that the inscriptional habit came relatively late, and
that late Roman inscriptions form a much higher proportion of surviving
inscriptions than in the core areas of classical civilization. In these areas, the
epigraphic habit seems to remain strong through most of the sixth century.

Among Cilician-Isaurian inscriptions those of the small port of Korykus
are outstanding. They are overwhelmingly funereal and a high proportion
are late imperial and Christian (fourth— sixth centuries). They seem to
provide a social profile of a small late Roman town. 52 Among 591 inscrip-
tions no fewer than 408 commemorate craftsmen, with the great majority
working in trades providing for the subsistence of their fellow townsmen.
There are 74 members of the clergy or employees of the church. The town
had at least nine ecclesiastical institutions for looking after the poor. In
format, the inscriptions are remarkably egalitarian. The higher ranks of
society did not receive significantly more elaborate epitaphs than craftsmen.
There are five members of the council, one illustiis , two comites, one protector,
five privatarii, a censitor, a censualis. These were the elite of the place. They
were not numerous or particularly prominent, but they were no doubt
among the ktetores who together with clergy and bishop elected the defensor
and the cur at or f The procedure for election was laid down in an edict of
Anastasius, issued in reply to a petition by bishop, clergy, landowners and
inhabitants, who were concerned that elections should not be fixed in
advance by members of the provincial officium. So this little town had a
council, but its role was subordinate. It was no longer the voice of the city.

To the east of Cilicia, in Syria and Arabia, villages have produced a very
large number of late inscriptions. 54 Of the major cities, Emesa, and Edessa
have few epigraphic remains, perhaps because their sites remained densely

46 Robert (19 58) ( =OMSv (1989) 1 5 5—93). 47 MAMA in, Dagron and Feissel (1987).

48 Baity (1980), (1989). 49 IGLSxi, Inscriptions de la Jordanie, x, Inscriptions de Bostra\ Dentzer (1985).

50 Kraeling (1938); Sartre (1985).

51 Summary: Patlagean, Pauvrete 307—13; Dentzer (1985); Mitchell, Anatolia 11.122— 34; Wilkinson
(1990) 120; Tchalenko, Villager, Tate (1992); Dauphin and Schonfield (1983); Evenari (1971); also n. 66
below. 52 MAMA 111.197—788; Patlagean, Pauvrete 1 5 8—69; Trombley (1987).

53 MAMA in 1 97 a. 54 Published in the series IGLS.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

2I 5

built up. Late Roman Antioch is very deeply buried. But Bostra 55 and
Gerasa 56 have left many late inscriptions, confirming considerable building
activity on both sites, in each case with a peak in the first half of the sixth
century. At Bostra, most of the building was military or ecclesiastical. The
walls were maintained, and many churches built, some with interesting
plans, but using spolia rather than stone cut for the purpose. Political life
shows the same trends as elsewhere. The civic magistrates are last men-
tioned, in connection with building projects, in 320 and 325. 37 The council
does not figure in late inscriptions at all, but there is reference to a decu-
rion supervising work on the governor’s palace as late as 490. 58 Around the
same time, some building work was carried out by individuals who were
neither decurions nor officials. Goldsmiths and silversmiths are mentioned
as taking part in the administration of building. Most secular work was
ordered by the military governor, who often doubled his post with that of
civil governor. Some work was ordered by the magister militum per Orientem.
The emperor Justinian provided financial support for a great deal of build-
ing at Bostra — for restoration of an aqueduct, for work on fortifications,
for at least one church and for an almshouse. It is significant that the bishop
is involved in the administration not only of the building of churches but
also of secular and military work: the subsidy for the fortification had been
urged on the emperor by the bishop. 59

The pattern of activities evidenced by inscriptions at Gerasa is very
similar to that at Bostra. There was a considerable amount of building in
the later fifth and early sixth century. This included work on walls, on the
orders of a military commander, but also some secular building, a bath-
house at the expense of an agens in rebus, a portico, a small baths complex
paid for by bishop Placcus in 454/7, and, most conspicuously, no fewer
than seven churches, three of them in 529— 3 3. 60 No doubt the church made
a major contribution to the expense of building, but individual donors, lay
and clerical, are mentioned too. So much activity, in what was not a provin-
cial capital, bears witness to the flourishing condition of cities in this area
well into the sixth century. 61 But the apparent cessation of building at
Bostra around the middle of the century may also be significant. 62 There is
evidence which may suggest that the cities of northern Syria were weak-
ened before the last and most destructive Persian war (602— 29). 63 Yet the
seventh century did not see a permanent collapse of urbanism in Syria
comparable to that in Asia Minor. 64

55 Sartre (1982), (1985). 56 Kraeling (1938). 57 Sartre (1982) nos. 9111— 12.

58 Ibid no. 9123. 59 Ibid. nos. 9128—36.

60 But building is recorded until 629: Zayadine (1986) 16—18, 137—62, 303—41.

61 Whittow (1990) 14-18; Kennedy (1985b).

62 The latest inscriptions: Sartre (1982) 540—1, but Bostra has not been excavated.

63 Kennedy (1985b); Conrad (1986). 64 Kennedy (1992) 196-7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

2 l 6 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

3 . Greater prominence of villages and the ascetic movement

In many areas of the Greek provinces of the empire, there are remains of
solid stone-built villages dating from late antiquity. They are found in
Galatia, Cappadocia, Pisidia and Isauria in Asia Minor, 65 east of the
Orontes in Syria, in the Hauran, in Galilee, Judaea and the Negev in
Palestine, 66 and around Bostra and Amman in Arabia. 67 They have also
been found in Libya and Tripolitania. 68 Most of the remains are in areas
that have been scantily inhabited in later times. It remains an open question
whether similar villages once existed in areas like western Syria or the
coastal territories of Asia Minor, which have continued to be densely
inhabited. Naturally, no such villages have left remains in Egypt, but
papyrus documents show that large villages with village councils and elders,
craftsmen and prosperous peasants did exist there. 69 Aphrodito in the ter-
ritory of Antaiopolis was probably larger than its city, and it certainly had
many characteristics of a city, including some highly literate inhabitants. 70
So large and, in many areas, stone-built villages, with considerable churches
with mosaic pavements and cemeteries with inscribed tombstones, are a
feature of late antiquity. It needs to be explained.

The high empire, which saw monumental classical building in so many
cities, did not as a rule produce buildings of this kind in villages. The late
empire saw much less activity in cities, and it is therefore tempting to
suggest that the late Roman villages grew at the expense of the city in
whose territory they lay. This might well have been the case in central and
northern Asia Minor where, as we have seen, city sites show few signs of
activity in this period. But it cannot be the whole explanation, since in
Arabia and eastern Syria villages and the cities in whose admittedly large
territory they were situated seem to have prospered together.

A development which must have strengthened the village vis-a-vis the city
was the ascetic movement. Monasteries were established largely in the
countryside and around villages, 71 and in some areas — for instance, the vil-
lages of northern Syria — they were very numerous indeed. At and around
Aphrodito in Egypt there were no fewer than forty monasteries. 72 These
institutions benefited from donations and legacies, 73 and could afford
buildings of a quality not previously seen in villages. Their existence must
have diverted resources from towns. Heads of monasteries, particularly if
they acquired a reputation for holiness, were men of influence and power

65 Mitchell, A-natolia ii.ioo— 8 . 66 See above, n. 51; also Tate and Sodini (1980).

67 Donceel-Voute (1988); building goes on longer than in cities: Sartre (1985) 136—8.

68 Sjdstrdm (1993); Barker (1985). 69 Bagnall, Egypt 1 1 5—19, 127—30, 138; Rathbone (1990).

70 MacCoull, Dios corns 5—9.

71 Voobus (1958—60); Tchalenko, Villages 111.63—106; Brown, ‘Holy man’; Hirschfeld (1992); Palmer

(1990). 72 MacCoull, Dioscorus 7. 73 Wipszychka (1972) 37, 75— 7).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

2I 7

whose connections might reach far beyond the neighbourhood of their
monastery and, in a few cases, to the emperor himself. Such a one was
Theodore of Sykeon, head of a monastery in north-western Galatia, who
was called in to solve problems in other villages and was evidently revered
over a very wide area. Theodore frequently and successfully interceded for
villagers with threatening potentates from the city: landlords lay and eccle-
siastical, tax-collectors, and the provincial governor himself. Theodore
several times visited Constantinople and was in communication with the
emperor Maurice. 74 Nicholas of Sion, in the neighbourhood of Myra in
Lycia, had a widespread practice as a miraculous healer in the hill villages
of Lycia. He rarely, if ever, used his powers in the city. But the authorities
in the city knew about him. After the outbreak of plague in 541—2 it was
thought that he had organized a boycott of Myra among the peasants who
normally supplied the city with its food. Men were sent to arrest him. But
the villagers rallied on his behalf and prevented the arrest. Subsequently
Nicholas set out on a tour of the villages, slaughtering oxen and feasting
with the villagers. 75 More formidable than Theodore and Nicholas was
Shenoute of Atripe, abbot of the White Monastery near to Panopolis in
Egypt, who ruled over hundreds of monks, suppressed pagan shrines in
his neighbourhood, championed the poor and acted as spokesman for the
region to imperial officials. 76 A celebrated hermit might play a comparable
role. Symeon Stylites was the most celebrated of many. We know about
these men from Lives which usually, but not always, celebrate their hero
from his own village-centred point of view. 77 All the names mentioned
were ‘orthodox’, but it is part of the same trend that the Monophysite
movement 78 was centred on monasteries and villages 79 and developed
liturgy and theology in Syriac or Coptic, the languages spoken by the major-
ity of villagers in Syria and Egypt. All this amounted to a major cultural and
political change, and a challenge to the age-long cultural and political
monopoly of the towns.

4. The rise of the bishop

By the time of Justinian, the bishop had a very special position in the cities
of the east. This emerged most clearly in times of emergency, like the
Persian invasion 80 and later the Arab invasions. 81 For it was inevitably the
bishop who negotiated the surrender of his city to the invaders. The devel-
opment of this position was recognized and consolidated by the emperors,

74 Mitchell, A.natolia 11.122— 50; A.-J. Festugiere, Ta vie de Theodore de Sykeon , Subsid. Hag. 48 (1970)
36—8, 58, 76, 78—9, 82, 97. 75 Sevcenko (1984). 76 Leipoldt (1903); Van der Vliet (1993).

77 Brown, ‘Holy man’; Festugiere (1959). 78 Frend, Monophysite Movement 1 3 6—4 1 .

79 Liebeschuetz and Kennedy (1988) 8 iff.; Tchalenko, Villages 111.63—83.

80 Procop. Wars n. 5.13 ff., 6.13 ff., 11. 2off; Claude (1969) 124— 36. 81 Donner (1981).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

2l8 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

notably by Anastasius, who got the bishop formally involved in urban
administration by giving him a part — inevitably a very influential part — in
the election of curator and defensor, and sitona , 82 Subsequently, Justinian
assigned the bishop a supervisory role in important aspects of urban
administration. 83

That emperors tried to base urban administration on the bishop is not
surprising. Over the years the bishop must have become the most power-
ful individual in many, if not most, cities. 84 He was elected with at least the
consent of the citizen body. Once consecrated, he held the office for life,
as no secular civic functionary did. As the church grew in wealth, the
bishop came to control greater financial resources than all but the wealthi-
est inhabitants, and these enabled him to fulfil his claim to be the guardian
of the poor and the sick. The bishop settled disputes between members of
his community more quickly than any public official and without any
charge. Cases involving church business and church personnel were nor-
mally reserved for the jurisdiction of the bishop. 85 The religious character
of his office gave weight to the bishop’s intercession on behalf of individ-
uals with imperial officials. It also afforded him some protection from vio-
lence at the hands of the provincial governor, something which even men
of standing in the city had to fear. So Synesius, bishop of Ptolemais, was
able to excommunicate and bring about the dismissal of Andronicus, gov-
ernor of Libya. 86 The bishop was in a better position than almost anybody
else to start a demonstration or a riot, or to appease it.

That a bishop might have, or be well on the way to having, such power
did not mean that he automatically became an integral part of the city’s
government. In fact, it is safe to say that, up to the end of the fourth
century at least, the church and its head stood outside the machinery and
ceremony of civic government. Indeed, it represented a rival ideology, in
that the competitive giving for public entertainment and display which was
the essence of traditional civic politics was condemned as vanity and
seeking after vain glory by Christian preachers, while the calendar of civic
festivals was deeply suspect because of its pagan origin. Lepelley has shown
that this was the situation in the already strongly Christian cities of Africa
in the age of Augustine, and the situation was no different in Christian
Antioch. 87 It may well be that in 387, at the time of the riot of the statues,
bishop Flavian emerged as the natural spokesman of the city, and the one
most capable of winning a pardon from the emperor. 88 But very few laws
were actually addressed to bishops. It is clear that the bishop did not play a

82 See p. 220 below. 83 See p. 221 below.

84 Brown (1992) 46—1 5 8 is a brilliant reconstruction of the ‘rise of the bishop’, though the develop-
ment was probably slower and more sporadic. 85 Jaeger (i960); Hunt (1993) 1 51— 4.

86 Syn. Ep. 57—8, 72—3, 79. 87 Lepelley, Cites 1.3 9 1—42; Liebeschuet2 (1972) 239—42.

88 Or. xix.28; John Chrys. Horn, de Statuis. 21; cf. Van de Paverd (1991); Brown (1992) 105—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

2IC)

part in routine civic affairs except as far as he considered that they affected
his church, especially the exercise of Christian compassion and charity or
the suppression of paganism and, more consistently, heresy. 89

In the fifth century, the bishops’ power generally increased as the coun-
cils grew weaker, and as the leaders of the cities became more thoroughly
Christianized. As far as the administration of the cities was concerned,
there was a power vacuum into which the bishop was naturally drawn. But
the extent to which the bishop was drawn into routine civic affairs varied
very greatly from city to city and in accordance with the character of the
individual bishop. No doubt Justinian wanted the bishop to act as the chair-
man of the notables. In some cities — for instance, at Gerasa — the bishop
may well have played that role. But even so, he did not simply become part
of the civic or imperial executive. The church had its own sense of prior-
ities and its own growing financial resources, which were quite separate
from those of the city and from those of the empire. 90 Some churches
received imperial subsidies, but that was always a special favour. We do hear
of bishops who undertook secular civic tasks, like paying for public works
or going on an embassy to Constantinople or even presenting chariot races.
But that was a matter of their individual choice. It was not part of their
regular job. 91 Bishops became prominent in emergencies, in war and
famine. Normally, most bishops seem to have been fully occupied running
their church. Papyri provide us with a relatively detailed view of the admin-
istration of the towns of Egypt. It is remarkable how rarely the documents
mention the bishops in connection with secular affairs. The bishop of
Alexandria, is, of course, an exception.

5 . Government by notables

When we look at the laws dealing with the administration of cities, we must
not be misled by the fact that the Code of Justinian includes a lot of laws
aimed at compelling decurions and their property to remain in the service
of their councils and so at the disposal of their cities, and generally gives
the impression that the councils remained essential for running the inter-
nal affairs of cities, as well as for the collection of the taxes of the empire. 92
The Novels — that is, Justinian’s own legislation — and even such of
Justinian’s laws as were early enough to be included in the Code show that
this was no longer so. We read of certain officers or magistrates who might
be responsible for administration of a city. Generally the most important

89 Lib. Or. xxx.11; cf. Lieu (1985) 160—4.

90 See Gaudemet (1958) 288—310. Durliat (1984) and Durliat (1990b) 58—63 are unconvincing.

91 Avramea (1989); Dagron (1977) 19—23; Feissel (1989). Considering the influence and resources of
bishops, references to their intervention in routine administration are surprisingly few.

92 Jones, LRE 741—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

220 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

was the defensor , 93 There was also the sitona, responsible for the buying of
corn , 94 and the pater, responsible for local finance, who probably did not
have the same functions as the old curator , 95 Anastasius appears to have tried
to transfer the organization of tax-collecting to the somewhat mysterious
vindices. This experiment was evidently soon abandoned except in a few
cities, including Alexandria . 96 Elsewhere in Egypt we find the pagarch
directing the collection of taxes . 97 Above all, the laws seek to give the
bishop a leading part in civic affairs . 98 Bishops are instructed to intervene
on behalf of cities and their inhabitants in cases of abuse of power by
imperial officials . 99 Justin II went as far as to give bishops, jointly with not-
ables, the right to nominate the governor of the province . 100 Bishops
were even given the right to check the genuineness of newly arrived docu-
ments claimed to be orders of the emperor, and an inscription from
Hadrianopolis in Bithynia tells us how an official ordered to suppress ban-
ditry in the neighbourhood presented his imperial letter of instructions to
the bishop and notables of Hadrianopolis in the court of the bishop . 101

The laws suggest that the old uniformity of civic administration had
broken down, and that there now existed considerable variation in how
cities were run . 102 But a point to note is that none of the men in charge of
civic business was a curial official. They were not as a rule curiales themselves
and they received their appointment not from the curia but, formally at
least, from the emperor through the praetorian prefect . 103 The defensor, the
curator, the corn-buyer and the pater were actually elected by bishop, clergy
and principal landowners . 104 In the Justinianic laws, decurions are no longer
mentioned separately, although some will certainly still have been included
among the principal landowners.

When it came to supervising and controlling civic officials, obviously the
provincial governor or the military commander, if he was on the spot and
interested, would play a key role. Otherwise, supervision was assigned to
‘leading citizens’. For example, bishop, clergy and ‘leading citizens’ audit the
accounts of magistrates once a year. The bishop and three men ‘of good
repute and in every respect outstanding citizens’ are to audit the accounts
of anybody responsible for spending civic revenues . 105 It is the bishop who
is to take steps against imperial officials who have demanded an excessive
gratuity for publishing an imperial proclamation . 106 Maintenance of public

93 Jones, LRE 726—7 , 75 8— 9. 94 CJ x.27.3; Just. Nov. 128.16. 95 Roueche (1979).

96 Chauvot (1987); Chrysos (1971). 97 Gascou (1972); Liebeschuetz (1973), (1974).

98 Esp. laws of CJ 1.4.26. 99 Just. Nov. 86.1, 2, 4 (5 39); 134.3 (566).

100 Just. Nov. App. vn. 12 (Prag. Sanct. of 5 54); Nov. (Just. II) 149 (569).

101 Feissel and Kaygusuz (1985).

102 A variety of arrangements for tax collection suggested by: Just. Nov. 128.8; 134.2; 163.2.

103 CJ 1.5 5.8; Nov. 8 notitia 36 (535); Nov. 1 5.6.

104 6/1.5 5.8, 1 1 ; 1.4.19 (505); MAMA 111.197A; Just. Nov. 15. epilog.

105 6/1.4.26 prol.; Nov. 128.16. 106 6/1.4.26.7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

221

buildings and the enforcement of building regulations is the responsibility
of bishop, pater and possessores. wl In short, the duty of protecting the inter-
ests of the city and its citizens from the abuses of local as well as imperial
functionaries is assigned to the bishop 108 and to semi-imperial officials like
the defensor or pater and to ‘leading citizens’ or possessores. Decurions as such
have no function. Contrary to what is stated as a general fact by some liter-
ary sources , 109 the curiae , and certainly the decurions, have not disap-
peared . 110 But their status has become subordinate, almost contemptible. So
Justinian ordered clergy caught taking part in an illegal game of dice to be
enrolled in the city council . 111

Who then were these notables who played so prominent a part in running
the city and in safeguarding its interests? It is striking that they are never
defined. They are regularly described by a rather indefinite general term like
proteuontes, andres dokimoi or primates, though not incidentally principales ,' 12 or
sometimes by a more comprehensive description, as, for instance, possessores
et habitatores. The lack of formal definition and the coexistence of narrower
and wider descriptions suggest that we are not dealing with permanent con-
stitutional bodies of fixed composition, but with a de facto oligarchical group,
who in practice decided for themselves who was to be one of themselves
and who was not. (The five prifnates of Alexandria may have been an excep-
tion .) 113 Most cities will have included among their inhabitants a number of
individuals who would have been recognized as outstanding in wealth and
influence — above all, the men holding titles real, honorary or assumed, from
‘most glorious’ and ‘illustrious’ downwards, leading members of the provin-
cial offcimn, principales of the council, and men of outstanding wealth who
did not fall into any of these categories. Some of these will have had the
right to sit with the provincial governor during sessions of his court, others
will have attended regularly by invitation . 114 Such men were self-evidently
the leading citizens and they will have made the decisions needed for the
administration of the city. Who convened these men and thus also decided
who was to be invited and who not presumably depended on the particular
circumstances of each city. In a provincial capital the initiative might most
often have been taken by the provincial governor. Elsewhere, the convenor
may often have been the bishop, or else the defensor or the pater or another
of the principal magistrates. In Egypt, about which we have by far the most
information, the bishops of cities other than Alexandria seem to have
played a comparatively small part in municipal affairs . 115

107 CJ 1.4.26.9—10; Nov. 17.4 (535); Nov. 25.4. 108 Just. Nov. 86.1-4 (539); 134.3 (5 5 6), 128.17.

109 John Lydus, De Mag. 1.28, 111.46, 111.49; Evagr. HE 111.42.

110 Just. Nov. 38 pr.; Ed. xiii.i 5 (538/9); A/<w. 128.7; 163.2 (575). 111 6/1.4.33.12.

112 References to principales in C. Th. (Jones, ERE 111.230 n. 41) have generally not been taken over
into CJ. 113 67x.32.57 (436). 114 Lib. Or. li,lii.

115 Individuals simultaneously holding three principal offices logisteia, proedria and pateria : P. Oxy. 2780
(5 5 3); SB xii . 1 1079.7— 8; Sijpesteijn (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

222 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

I know only one account of an episode that involved die assembly of
notables. This was the occasion when a jury of sixteen laymen was sum-
moned at Mopsuestia in a.d. 5 50; togedier with die same number of
clerics, they were to confirm that Theodore of Mopsuestia had never
been entered on the diptychs of the church of that city. 116 This list starts
with two clarissimi and includes altogether seven men with imperial rank.
Only one is described as a decurion and a principalis. Some or all of the
remaining six could, I suppose, have been decurions, but they are not
described as such. Members of this particular group had been presum-
ably selected from the more elderly notables because they were being
asked to give evidence about the past. So this composition was probably
not typical. Other meetings of possessores and habitatores were no doubt
chosen by odier criteria, as were appropriate to the occasion. In the case
of the Mopsuestia group, the summons came from die bishop. Selection
of the laymen had been made by die defensor. That such informal and
irregularly constituted groups should play a leading role in the govern-
ment of cities of the late fifth and sixth centuries marks a great change
from the well-defined constitutional bodies that governed Greek and
Roman cities in earlier time.

But such arrangements were not confined to the government of cities.
They were a characteristic of the time. Bishops were elected by clergy and
laity. It was laid down that a bishop was needed to consecrate a bishop. But
it was nowhere defined what bishops or what members of the clergy pre-
cisely, or what laymen, were entitled to have a say in the election of a
bishop. 117 In practice the election was normally made by the archbishop,
with a group of local clergy, and approved by acclamation of the local
laity. 118 Sometimes, no doubt, lay opinion or, in the case of an important
see, the voice of the emperor would have a decisive say.

6 . The internal administration of cities

For a detailed picture of how cities were run by the notables we have to
look to Egypt, which alone has left us administrative documents. The
picture is, however, still far from complete. Taxation and provision for the
needs of the imperial administration and army continued to be organized
through cities. Duties were to a considerable extent assigned to blocks of
property or monasteries 119 and even guilds, rather than to individuals. The
blocks of property were known as ‘houses’. Presumably a share of the
duties attached to a particular house would pass to whoever inherited or

116 ACO iv.i, pp. 116—17; Dagron (1984b) vi.19— 26; Wickham (1995).

117 CJ 1. 3. 41 praef. (528); Nov. 123.1 (546).

118 Cf. the election of St Augustine’s successor: Aug. Ep. 213, CSEE 57.372; see also Jones, ERE

hi. 3 14 n. 1 19. 119 Remondon (1971); Gascou (1976a).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST 22J

purchased part of the land . 1211 The houses differed greatly in size, from what
were no more than large peasant holdings to the estates of the Apions,
which were large even by senatorial standards . 121 The Apions were not the
only landowners on a grand scale , 122 but it is not clear how important these
very large landowners were in the economy and politics of Egypt as a
whole. Gascou argues that large estates had come into existence in the
course of the fifth century as a result of an arrangement between landown-
ers and the government precisely for the purpose of making it possible for
the taxes to be collected by them. Alternatively, estates may have grown
through patronage, as more and more peasants agreed to pay their taxes
through patrons powerful enough to protect them from the rapacity or the
officiousness of tax-collectors.

The administration of taxation continued to be city-based. Every city had
a financial office to keep the register up to date and to administer collection.
The accounting was presumably done by professionals. The director of tax-
ation was known as the pagarch. 12 ’ This office was held by the biggest fam-
ilies of the city in turn, sometimes by a woman, sometimes by one of the
family’s administrators. At Oxyrhynchus and Arsinoe the office was split
into several parts, each of which seems to have been run by one of the great
houses . 124 A pagarch had at his disposal considerable coercive power . 125 In
the actual collection, the ‘houses’ were once more prominent, for a large
part of the revenue, whether in gold or in kind, was actually paid in by them.
Some of it they paid in their own name, some on behalf of others. It is not
clear whether only tenants in the strict sense paid ‘through’ the great houses,
or whether, as Gascou thinks, each of the houses had been assigned respon-
sibility for collecting the taxes of a certain number of independent peas-
ants . 126 Surviving accounts show that landowners collected both tax and
rent from peasants without clearly distinguishing which was which.

Civic duties, too, were assigned to ‘houses’. A consortium of them con-
tributed to the painting of the baths . 127 The riparius or police officer was
supplied by the principal ‘houses’ in turn in accordance with a rota drawn
up for many years in advance . 128 Similar rotas may have existed for other
civic functions too. Justinian ordered the notables to hold the office of
defensor in turn . 129 But the ‘house’ of Timagenes seems to have provided
staff for a taxation office for part of Oxyrhnchus over many years. 13 " The
individuals representing the ‘houses’, and even the administrators of the
greatest of them, used high imperial titles. It looks as if the imperial admin-
istration had lost control of the use of titles of rank. Many of the users of

120 Gascou (1985) is fundamental but not definitive.

121 For houses and their contributions: P.Oxy. 2020, 2040. 122 Johnson and West (1949) 49—65.

123 PLRE hi. 2. 1498— 9. 124 Gascou (1972). 125 MacCoull, Dioscorus 24— 8, 48— 9.

126 Gascou (1985) 48— 52 — controversial. 127 P.Oxy. 2040. 128 P. Oxy. 2039.

129 Nov. 1 5.1. 130 P. Warren 3 ( [c, . 500); P.Oxy. 1887 (538); cf. P.Oxy. 125, house of Theon (572).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

224 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

lofty senatorial titles surely were the descendants of decurions or owners
of curial land. But there still were individuals described as decurions (i.e.
bouleutai, politeuomenoi) who continued to play some public role, even if it is
not clear how they fitted into the system. 131

In spite of a seeming abundance of material, the picture of civic govern-
ment remains extremely fragmentary. How were the various appointments
made, and how were the various activities co-ordinated? It may be that
assignement to ‘houses’ rather than individuals meant that fewer elections
and appointments were needed. But somebody must have drawn up the
rotas and supervised the working of the administration. At Antaiopolis, 132
and at Arsinoe, Herakleopolis and Oxyrhynchus, politics seem to have been
dominated by the heads of a handful of great houses. These families, of
whom the Apions are much the best known, regularly filled not only the
pagarchate but also the civic executive offices of logistes, pater or proedros , 133
Sometimes the same individual held all three. 134 It is likely that if any
serious problem arose at Oxyrhynchus or Arsinoe, the Apions would have
had the last word.

7. The factions and the games

It will be seen that the ‘late late Roman’ arrangements for municipal
government had no constitutional procedure for compelling the oligarchy
of notables to admit colleagues whom they did not want to admit — unless
the imperial administration could be induced to intervene, or the oligarchs
could be impressed with the strength of public opinion. Both objectives
were achieved most effectively by demonstrations. The best-documented
example of a campaign of demonstrations against a local magnate is that
orchestrated against bishop Ibas of Edessa by a group of mainly clerical or
monastic opponents, who were successful in winning the emperor’s
support for the deposition of the bishop. 135 We hear of a comparable but
unsuccessful campaign waged against the patriarch Gregory of Antioch. 136
We have no information about any comparable campaign against a secular
urban magnate. But then the historical sources at no period concern them-
selves with the municipal politics of provincial cities. However, the role of
the factions in the troubles in Egypt in the reign of Phocas suggests that
these organizations, whose duty it was to lead acclamations in theatre and
hippodrome, had become deeply involved in local conflicts. 1 ’ 7 This is pre-
cisely what one would expect in a political situation where demonstrations,
more or less violent, were the only procedure for bringing about change.
In late antiquity, civic shows underwent important changes. There were

131 Geremek (1981), (1990). 132 E.g. PLRE 111.830: the various FI. Mariani . . . Gabrielii . . .

133 Gascou (1985) 61— 71. 134 POxy. 2780.7— 1 1; SB xii. 1 1079.7—8; Sijpesteijn (1986) 1 13—7.

135 Flemming and Hoffmann (1917) 1 5— 5 5. 136 Evagr. HE vi.7. 137 See p. 228 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST 225

fewer of them and there was less variety. Athletic games and gladiatorial
shows came to an end. Theatrical shows continued, and chariot racing of
the Roman type — that is, as a professional spectator sport — became more
widespread. It seems to have become the principal entertainment in larger
cities, perhaps in most provincial capitals — and not only in capitals . 138

Organization of shows was fundamentally affected by the decline of the
councils and the passing of power to the notables. Under curial govern-
ment games were paid for and administered by decurions, who took turns
to perform these duties. There must have been some permanent organiza-
tional infrastructure to maintain the buildings and equipment, and endow-
ments to pay for them. There were also guilds of performers, with the help
of which the decurions would be able to engage actors, hunters, gladiators,
charioteers or whatever they needed for their particular show. This system
of course depended on decurions and could not survive the loss of power
and resources of the councils. Reorganization was inevitable. It seems that
in the course of the fifth century the liturgical organization was replaced in
very many, if not all, cities of the east by an organization ultimately mod-
elled on that of the games at Rome and Constantinople. This gave a prin-
cipal part in the production of shows to the ‘factions’, the Greens and the
Blues. These were large organizations that provided all the personnel,
animals and equipment needed for the show, and as there were two of them
(in a sense, four), they provided the competition as well . 139 They thus took
over the role of the decurions as well as of the guilds of performers, 14 " and
they were paid largely, but not entirely, out of taxation — that is, by the
emperor. So the new organization involved a kind of ‘imperialization’.
Subsequently the emperor paid, and his representative, the provincial gov-
ernor, or at Constantinople the emperor himself, presided.

What had been celebrations of the city-community became occasions of
celebration of the emperor. For the factions not only produced the games,
but also had the duty of leading the spectators in formal acclamations 141 of
the emperor and his representative, and not only in the theatre or the hip-
podrome but on other ceremonial occasions as well. For this purpose each
faction paid a chorus, which had the double duty of leading applause for
the emperor and of rousing the fans to enthusiasm on behalf of the com-
petitors of one colour or the other. The choruses were large and included
not only the unemployed and the rootless, but also young men of good
family with money to spend.

Once the factions had come into existence, they attracted the permanent
loyalty of very large numbers of fans. Cities became divided into support-
ers of the Greens and supporters of the Blues. The relationship of the fans

138 Cameron, Alan, Factions 210—14, 3 J 4 — 17; Gascou (1976a).

139 Cameron, Alan, Factions 214—21. 140 Roueche, Performers and Partisans 44—7.

141 Roueche (1984) 181—99.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

226 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

to their faction bears some similarity to that of modern football fans to the
club they support. Football fans are sometimes destructive but hardly ever
political. But the ancient games had a very considerable political
significance, so that the activities of the factions could not avoid having a
significant political aspect. The acclamations which it was the duty of the
Greens and Blues to lead played an important part in two highly political
activities: the making of an emperor and the voicing of popular grievances.
Acclamation led by the factions was an essential stage in the making of a
legitimate emperor; and whenever the succession to the throne was not uni-
versally agreed, their indispensability gave the factions power. Both — or at
least one — had to agree to lead the acclamation for the new ruler. A coro-
nation would have to be preceded by bargaining with the factions . 142

The second source of the factions’ political power resulted from the
privileged character of demonstrations at the games. Since the time of
Augustus, the games had been treated by the emperors as occasions for
their subjects to publicize grievances. 14 ’ In the later empire this applied not
only to games in the capitals but also to those in provincial cities, and
reports of provincial acclamations were taken down in writing and sent to
the capital, so that the emperor could learn how his subjects felt about his
officials, and reward or punish them accordingly. It is evident that acclama-
tions were expected to include criticism and complaints as well as praise. In
fact, surviving texts show that there was a fixed order for these demonstra-
tions. They began with praise of God. This was followed by acclamations
of the high officers of state, perhaps the patriarch or the bishop, then of
the individual who was being honoured on that particular occasion and
then at the end, and interrupted by more shouts of praise, petitions,
requests or grievances . 144 Civic life offered many occasions for acclama-
tions: the setting up of imperial statues, the arrival or departure of the pro-
vincial governor or some visiting high official, the honouring of a civic
benefactor, but most regularly the shows in the theatre or hippodrome.
While acclamations could be spontaneous, or organized without the help
of one or both factions by some powerful, probably ecclesiastical, pressure
group, the participation of one or both factions with their large choruses
of professional supporters, whether open or covert, would have been an
enormous advantage. Clearly it would have been difficult to get a particu-
lar grievance included in the acclamations without the co-operation of at
least one of the factions.

Given the fact that the factions had a political role, it was inevitable that
they should be manipulated by interested parties. By far the best-docu-
mented cases of manipulation involve emperors. Most emperors publicized

142 Examples; Const. Porph. De Cer. 1.92—3 (Justin I); Theophylact vm.9— 10 (Phocas).

143 Cameron, Alan, Factions 156—83. 144 Roueche (1984) 186— 7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES OF THE EAST

227

their support for one or the other of the colours , 145 and in this way made
sure that one of the factions at least would support him through thick and
thin. An emperor disposed of a wide range of favours by which to demon-
strate his partisanship: gifts in money or in kind, posts in the administration
and positive discrimination in the law courts.

The favour of the factions was sought by a wide range of people. Rich and
powerful men acted as patrons of the factions, and wealthy young men
figured among the organized fans . 146 At least one faction’s support was clearly
essential for anybody with the ambition to become emperor, as emperors
were well aware. When the emperor Phocas heard that the factions had put
up statues of his recently married son-in-law and daughter, he had the leaders
of the factions displayed naked in the Hippodrome, and was only with great
difficulty dissuaded from having them executed . 147 When the praetorian
prefect John the Cappadocian flaunted his support for the Greens, this was
taken as an indication that he had imperial ambitions . 148 When Germanus
decided to claim the empire from Phocas, he offered money to the Greens . 149
The means by which the wealthy and powerful could manipulate the factions
were similar to those at the disposal of the emperor, if on a smaller scale.
They could offer money, or wine or horses, or dancers, over and above those
provided out of taxation. So the accounts of the great Apion family of
Oxyrhynchus in Egypt regularly show payments in wine or in money to
employees of the Blue faction 150 — and even at least one to the Greens . 151

It was not only the great who looked to the factions to represent their
interests. This is suggested by the way minor disturbances escalated into
great riots. Often a riot started over a relatively trivial incident — typically,
fighting between fans of the two factions or the refusal of the authorities
to release a few members of one of the factions arrested for some misde-
meanour. But then attempts by the authorities to check the disturbance and
to punish breakers of the peace produced escalation, until great crowds
were roaming the streets and setting fire to buildings, and the situation was
completely out of control . 152 So it would seem that a large number of
people who did not take part in the street battles of the fans were prepared
to go into the street when they saw the activists being disciplined. It was
evidently a situation where a limited number of violent activists had the
passive support of a large part of the population, who identified with the
faction members when they saw them under pressure.

Alan Cameron has demonstrated that membership of factions, and the
division between them, was not based on either geographical or adminis-
trative divisions of the city. It does, however, seem to have been the case

145 Cameron, Alan, Factions 127—9. 146 E.g. young Menander Protector: FHG iv.201— 2.

147 Theoph. 294 AM 6099 (a.d. 606/7). 148 John Lydus, De Mag. 111.36.

149 Theoph. 293 AM 6098 (a.d. 605/6). 150 P.Oxy. 152; 2480.28, 82, 82—3 etc.; .PT/953.49, 77.

151 P.Oxy. 145. 152 E.g. the development of Nika riot: Procop. Wars 1.24#.; Malalas xvm.474— 7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

228 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

that certain organized collectives — for instance, tanners, gardeners, gold-
workers, young men, Jews and also old Jews — sat together and on the side
of one of the factions or the other. The Jews regularly sat with the Blues.
Presumably these groups supported the faction with whom they sat. 153 The
question remains whether their faction allegiance was an accidental conse-
quence of the position of their seats in theatre, odeon or hippodrome, or
whether they had chosen to sit in a particular sector precisely because of
their preference for the faction that sat there. It is unlikely that the location
of seats is sufficient to account for the huge numbers that were ready to
support one or both factions when they got into trouble. It is much more
likely that what rallied people on behalf of one or even both factions was
awareness that they had publicized grievances in the past and would be
needed to do so again in the future. We do have information about a
number of political episodes in which the active participation by the fac-
tions is either explicitly stated or at least probable. The years 579—80 saw a
large-scale anti-pagan witch hunt. The political background was certainly
complicated. It involved political and religious antagonisms, both in Syria
and at Constantinople. 154 Certainly the spectators in the hippodromes at
Antioch and at Constantinople were manipulated to put pressure on the
authorities, and were promised favours by lay and ecclesiastical authorities
trying to restore order. The colours are not mentioned in connection with
these demonstrations, but it is difficult to believe that they were not
involved. The reason could well be that in this episode they were on the
same side — as they were in a subsequent wave of demonstrations against
bishop Gregory of Antioch in 5 88— 9. 155

In die violent local dispute between some of the cities of the Nile delta
known as the Aykela revolt, the factions were active participants, though
their allegiance was not consistent. This was in the 590s. 156 When the
Persians besieged Jerusalem in 614, the factions were united in pressing
for resistance when the patriarch advocated surrendering the city. 157
When the Roman generals Menas and Domentianus quarrelled in
Alexandria at the time of the Arab invasion (641), one was supported by
the Greens and the other by the Blues, and in this case Monophysitism
was an issue. 158

There is one feature of the urban troubles of the later sixth century
which is not found earlier: they were regional rather than confined to a
single town. This was certainly the case with the anti-pagan witch hunt of
579—80, the Aykela revolt of the late 590s, and the support for Heraclius’

153 Roueche, Performers and Partisans 83—1 28.

154 Evagr. HE v.18; John Eph. HE 111.29, 31—2. Rochow (1976).

155 Evagr. HE vi.7. 156 J. Niciu 97.1—30, tr. Charles 1 57—60.

157 Strategius Monachus, Ea Prise de Jerusalem v.io, ed J. Garitte, CSCO 202, Louvain i960.

158 J. Niciu 1 19.5— 17, tr. Charles 189—90.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE WEST 229

revolt against Phocas . 159 One factor which helped to bring about this
development is probably the fact mentioned earlier, that provincial
governors were now appointed by the emperor on the advice of bishops
and outstanding landowners and inhabitants of the province. This meant
that the province rather than the city had become the important political
unit, and that political groupings, and consequendy also political conflicts,
tended to be on a provincial or regional scale.

III. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE WEST

In the fifth century and after, many western cities continued to exist as
centres of civil and/ or ecclesiastical administration, refuges for the country
population and bases for defending troops in time of war. The degree of
contraction varied. It had gone furthest in Britain, where cities, together
with Christianity, seem practically to have disappeared , 160 and had gone
very far in the invasion-harassed Balkans 161 — though even in exposed
Noricum, resistance to invaders seems to have been organized on a city
basis, as it is not known to have been in Britain . 162 On the lower Danube,
cities received a severe blow from the raids of the Huns. If Nicopolis ad
Istrum is typical, rebuilding took the form of a powerful circuit of walls
enclosing military buildings and churches . 163 The cities of Aquitaine 164 and
of central Gaul, roughly south of a line from Avranches to Geneva , 165 were
much reduced in area and population, but retained more of their urban
character than the cities of northern France and the Rhineland . 166 The
latter suffered heavily during the invasions of the fifth century; Franks
settled in much of their territories and their bishops’ lists have wide gaps,
but habitation seems to have continued on most urban sites . 167 A few
became the residence of a Germanic king. Among the latter the most out-
standing were Trier , 168 Metz , 169 Soissons and Paris. In southern Spain , 170
city life seems to have continued much as in the fourth century. In the
north, Tarraco lost its monumental centre but kept a large population . 171
In northern Italy and Tuscany, of some hundred Roman municipia three-
quarters still survived in a.d. iooo. Of those abandoned, the majority had
never had a bishop. By contrast, less than half of the cities of southern
Italy, with their small and infertile hill territories, survived the troubles of
the sixth and seventh centuries . 172 The decline of classical monumental

159 J. Niciu 1 07-9. 1 7, tr. Charles 167-75.

160 Frere (1977); Hobley (1986); Brooks (1986); Dixon (1992); Reece (1992); Millett (1990).

161 Poulter (1992a); Dagron (1984a). 162 Noll (1963); Lotter (1971).

163 Poulter (1992a), (1992b). 164 Rouche (1979), Sivan (1992), Loseby (1992).

165 Ewig (1 976) 231-4,430-4.

166 Wightman (1978); Wightman (1985) 219—42, 305—8; Horn (1987) 105—9; Piling (1986); Frezouls

(1988). 167 Bruhl (1975); Duchesne (1907) on individual cities. 168 Cuppers (1977).

169 Weidemann (1970). 170 Taradell (1977). 171 Keay(i99i). 172 Wickham (1981) 80.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

230 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

urbanism which had taken place in most areas of the west more than a
century earlier seems to have come to North Africa in the fifth century. A
shortage of evidence makes it difficult to trace. 173

In the fifth century, bishops had generally achieved a position of at least
potential leadership in the cities of the west. Urban populations were now,
at any rate nominally, Christian. The effect was profound. Many cities
acquired a new Christian identity founded on the cult of relics of a saint or
saints, whose presence provided an ever-effective source of supernatural
patronage and protection to those who worshipped at their shrine. 174 The
saint brought glory to the city and prestige to the bishop. The church made
provision for pilgrims, and these, together with clerics travelling on church
business, maintained communications in a world which in the west tended
towards greater regional self-sufficiency. 175 As temples were destroyed or
fell into decay, 171 ' churches came to be the most prominent buildings in their
cities. The prestige of the episcopal office gave territorial magnates who
had freed themselves from institutionalized civic responsibilities an incen-
tive for returning to the service of their city. 177 Bishops were less involved
in the regular secular administration of their cities under the Visigothic
kings than under the eastern emperors. 178 However, wherever secular
administration, whether urban or imperial, broke down, we find bishops
left in charge. It was in the guise of the ecclesiastical diocese that the unity
of city and territory, which was the essence of the Graeco-Roman city, sur-
vived longest. So the territory of the civitas Agnppinensium long survived as
the diocese of Cologne. 179 Such survivals were particularly numerous in
Italy 180 and southern Gaul.

Very extensive civitates were liable to break up into smaller ecclesiastical
units. In the south of France, between 400 and 450, Nice, Carpentras,
Toulon and Lizes were taken (or took themselves) out of the control of
their civitas capital to receive a bishop of their own. 181 Thus we observe in
the sphere of ecclesiastical administration the continuation of a secular
trend which had promoted secondary centres like Geneva, Grenoble, Gap
and Sisteron. The phenomenon can also be seen in North Africa.

The rise of the bishop was not paralleled by the elimination of secular
institutions of city self-government. Certainly the mere fact of the estab-
lishment of kingdoms by Goths and Vandals seems to have made little
difference to the condition of cities in areas under their rule. 182 In 506 the
Visigothic king Alaric II published a law book, the Lex Rom ana \ / isigotorum

173 Cameron, Averil (1982); Duval and Caillet (1992); Moderan (1993).

174 Van Dam, Leadership and Community 230—300; Harries (1992a). 175 Mathisen (1992).

176 Ward-Perkins, Public Building 85—91. 177 E.g. Prinz (1973); Kopecek (1974); Mathisen (1984).

178 The same contrast between Lombard and Byzantine Italy: Wickham (1981) 77—8.

179 Ennen (1975) 38-9. 180 Dilcher (1964). 181 Loseby (1992).

182 Humphrey (1980); Clover (1982).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE WEST

2 3 I

or Breviarium Aland. This essentially consists of extracts from earlier
Roman collections of laws, especially the Codex Theodosianus and the Novels
of Theodosius and his immediate successors. Most of the extracts are
accompanied by an interpretatio which is not simply a paraphrase of the legal
text but introduces modifications adjusting the law to changes in society. 183
As a source for the social history of Visigothic Gaul, the Breviarium of
Alaric has the serious disadvantage that, while we are provided with infor-
mation about surviving Roman institutions and, thanks to the interpreta-
tiones, about the modifications which they have undergone, we are not
informed about institutions introduced by the Gothic kings themselves. It
is nevertheless possible to recognize some important developments. There
has been a reduction in the administrative importance of the province and
its governor, and a corresponding increase in that of city-based officials.
Vicars and dioceses have disappeared. The Visigothic kings did not appoint
a praetorian prefect. Provincial governors survive. They continue to exer-
cise jurisdiction and are closely associated with the collection of taxes. But
the ruler now has a representative in the city itself, the comes dvitatis} M who
also acts as a judge. 185 In Visigothic Gaul, comites were appointed by the
Visigothic king but were not necessarily Goths. 186

In the city decurions still had an essential role. The Breviarium retains
many laws designed to prevent decurions from evading their duties. That
decurions might escape into the imperial — or now the royal — service has
become much less of a problem, but decurions might go into hiding, move
to another city, 187 marry their daughters to non-decurions, 188 refuse to have
legitimate children, 189 or enter the service of a magnate. 190 It seems that all
decurions now had the rank of honorati and enjoyed the associated privilege
of sitting with the judge when he was hearing a case. 191 The proliferation
and devaluation of official titles was, of course, a characteristic of late
Roman society. Since the rank of an honoratus recognized service to the
empire, it had become meaningless in the territory of a Gothic king. But the
use of senatorial titles by men who were not senators and lived in a provin-
cial city was introduced in the east, too, sometime after 450 192 — yet another
example of parallel development in the east and west of the divided empire.

183 The interpretationes are cited below by page references to Conrat (1903) and then by the laws as
numbered in Mommsen’s edition of the Theodosian Code and the associated Novellae.

184 Declareuil (1910); Spandel (1957); Claude (1964).

185 It is often not clear whether a index mentioned in the interpretatio of a law is a governor ( index ordi-
narius) or a civic judge ( index civitatis ), who might be the comes or the defensor.

186 E.g. Attalus, comes of Autun: Sid. Ap. Ep. v.18. 187 Conrat (1903) 736: C.Th. xn.1.2.

188 Conrat (1903) 737: C.Th. xii.1.7. 189 Conrat (1903) 737: Novellae of Theodosius xi.1.5— 9.

190 Conrat (1903) 239—40: Novellae of Majorian 1.1.4— 5.

191 Conrat (1903) 773—4: 1.1 5.1; 1.71; on the privilege, see Liebeschuetz (1972) 190.

192 Roueche, Aiphrodisias 13 1 ; Jones, ERE 528—9. Both east Roman and Visigothic governments were
anxious that lower-ranking honorati should return to the service of their city (C.Th. xn. 1.187 (436); CJ
xn. 1. 1 5 (426—42)).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

2 3 2 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

The Code makes clear that apart from decurions there also existed a class
of powerful landowners who were not liable to curial duties but available
as patrons and protectors of fugitive decurions. These presumably
included Goths but also descendants of the great senatorial families who
had built up large estates in the last century of imperial rule, and were now
consolidating their position in the service of Visigothic kings . 193 These
men might still have town houses, but this does not mean that the city was
still their principal place of residence. On the other hand, they did not con-
tinue to inhabit the spectacular late Roman villas. In Gaul as well as Spain,
most of the villas seem to have been abandoned quite early in the fifth
century . 194

Under the Visigoths the late Roman tax system survived, and, as long as
it continued, it was necessary that the tax, which was after all a land-tax,
should be collected not only from the built-up area, but from the whole city
territory. In this way, the system of taxation preserved the unity of urban
core and surrounding agricultural territory. There must have been great
difficulties. The greatest landowners were presumably no longer able to
claim privileges as members of the imperial senate — certainly, these privi-
leges have not been taken into the Breviarium — but their land-based power
of obstruction and resistance was undoubtedly greater than ever: they were
on the way to becoming medieval barons, even if landholding in return for
military service was still centuries away. So the public revenue diminished.
There is no reference to collection other than by curiales in Visigothic
Gaul , 195 but collection by officials eventually became the rule in Visigothic
Spain . 196

It is not surprising to find evidence that amenities provided by cities have
shrunk. Some laws of Book xi of the Theodosian Code, dealing with
public works, aqueducts and public shows, have been included in the
Breviarium. The one law about public buildings shows that some public
buildings might be repaired, with the public fisc contributing a third of the
cost, but it also permits persons who have built homes on public land to
keep them. Some aqueducts are still functioning, since existing water rights
are confirmed, but the Code includes no provision for maintenance of
aqueducts. In fact, the most active form of secular building was the build-
ing or maintenance of walls. The games have come to an end. The
Breviarium has no regulations for teachers or doctors or actors. Such liter-
ary education as survived was evidently provided by private tutors in sena-
torial houses . 197 The closing of schools and the declining prestige of

193 Rouche (1979) 327—32; Mathisen (1993). 194 Percival (1992); Gorges (1979).

195 Rouche (1979) 338—46.

196 Edict of Erwig of 683: Zeumer (1902) 479!^; cf. Thompson (1969) 215.

197 A late-fifth-century private (?) teacher at Arles: Pomerius, PLRE 11.896. The end of secular rhe-
torical culture as experienced by Gregory of Tours: Van Dam, Leadership and Community 221—6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE WEST 233

literary culture removed a strong incentive for landowners to reside in
cities . 198 In this respect the situation in the cities of fifth-century Gaul was
totally different from that of contemporary provincial cities in the east. In
Gaul, Spain and Italy, the transmission of literary education was well on the
way to becoming a matter for clergy and monks . 199 But even in the early
seventh century some aristocratic bishops still displayed a rhetorical edu-
cation . 200 A lower level of literacy survived much more widely. Administra-
tion and jurisdiction in Visigothic Gaul and Spain, and even in Merovingian
Gaul, required a significant amount of lay literacy . 201 One function of the
council has become very much more prominent: the witnessing and
recording in the municipal gesta of legal transactions such as wills, gifts,
emancipation of slaves, adoptions, oaths and sales of property. Perhaps
this development reflects a reduction in the keeping of written records by
landowners in the civic territory.

Under the Visigoths the principal civic magistrate in Gaul, as elsewhere
in the empire, was the defensor. This office had been created by the imperial
government, and, in the empire, appointments were still, at least formally,
made by the praetorian prefect. Since one of his original functions had
been to protect both plebs and decurions from wrong at the hands of the
powerful , 202 it is likely that he was normally chosen from among the pow-
erful himself. For all practical purposes, in most parts of the empire —
perhaps North Africa was an exception — the defensor, often together with
the curator, replaced the traditional curial magistrates . 203

In Visigothic Gaul the defensor was elected by all citizens ( consensus avium,
subscripts universorum). This procedure would seem to have been more
popular than that followed in the east, where appointment was by bishop,
clergy, honorati, possessors and curiales? w In cities which were inhabited prin-
cipally by the bishop and a few magnates, the participation of the people is
likely to have been a formality. But Aquitaine, the area for which the
Breviarium was principally designed, included cities with a considerable ple-
beian population , 205 so that the people’s role — probably acclamation or
vilification of a candidate proposed by the notables — may well have been
significant. In the north Italian cities, the people retained a genuine voice
in the election of bishops, which thus did not become the exclusive
concern of the clergy.

The defensor of Visigothic Gaul seems to have wider powers of jurisdic-
tion than civic officials of the fourth century. He judges criminal actions
involving offences against mobile or immobile property, and civil actions too
can be started in his court . 206 Guardians are required to make an inventory

198 Cass. Var.v in. 31. 199 Riche (1973); Kaster (1988).

200 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 239— 42. 201 Wood (1990).

202 Conrat (1903) 728: C.Th. 1.10.2. 203 Liebeschuetz (1972) 167—70. 204 CJ 1.55.8.

205 Sivan (1992). 206 Conrat (1903) 729: C.Th. n.1.8, 4.2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

234 8 . ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

of their ward’s property in the defensor’s presence . 207 The defensor is to assure
punishment of robbers irrespective of who the robbers’ patrons are , 208 and
he is allowed to order a whipping — but not of the innocent . 209 The enhanced
position of the defensor in Visigothic Gaul resembles that of the same office

as defined by Justinian in seemingly quite different circumstances in the

east.

210

The administration of cities in Ostrogothic Italy seems to have resem-
bled that in Visigothic Gaul and Spain. The defensor was the local head of
the city, whose inhabitants were his clients . 211 Theoderic was delighted
when the defensor and the curiales of Catania in Sicily took the initiative of
asking permission to restore the city walls using material from the ruined
amphitheatre . 212 It was the defensor and curiales that Theoderic addressed
when he made demands on cities. 21 ’ The defensor was particularly respon-
sible for fixing prices . 214 Besides the defensor, most — perhaps all — cities had
a comes civitatis, appointed by the Ostrogothic king for supervision, and
above all to exercise jurisdiction . 215

We are once more allowed a relatively detailed view of cities in the west
in the last quarter of the sixth century, when we have the Letters of Gregory
the Great for Italy, the contemporary History of Gregory of Tours for Gaul,
and the Visigothic Code for Spain, together with a varied assortment of
supporting sources. It is clear that there has been a significant reduction in
the classical institutions. Lay power in cities seems to be wielded by the royal
representative, the comes and notables (cives) and their leaders (maiores or sen-
iores) and of course the bishop, who will normally have been the most pow-
erful and influential individual in the town. Bishops are recorded to have
acted as judges, to have rebuilt walls, to have pleaded with the representa-
tives of the king on the city’s behalf for remission of taxation and to have
negotiated with threatening commanders in war, civil or otherwise. Bishops
provided poor relief for individuals on the church’s register (matriculd). 2lG
They built hospitals and ransomed prisoners. They received donations on
behalf of the church and could afford to build churches and found monas-
teries, even in disturbed times . 217 As far as the cities were concerned, the
competition for authority between royal count and bishop seems to have
been won by the bishop. It must, however, be remembered that our princi-
pal sources are Gregory’s History and the Lives of saints, which almost cer-
tainly exaggerate the importance of bishops relative to that of lay magnates.

Curiae and decurions and even the defensor seem to have ceased to play
any part in the decision-making and administration of the city. They did,

207 Conrat (1903) 730: C.Th. m.17.3. 208 Conrat (1903) 731: C.Th. 1. 10.3.

209 Conrat (1903) 732: C.Th. 11. 1. 10—12. 210 Nov.i-) (534). 211 Cass. Var. vn.11.

212 Var. 111.49. 213 Var. iv.45, transport; v.14, tax collecting; in. 9, building material.

214 Var. vn.ii. 215 Var. vi.23, 26. 216 Rouche (1974).

217 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 71— 87; James (1988) 183— 4; Pietri (1983).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE WEST 235

however, continue to perform a function of great importance. They kept
the gesta municipalia, which provided a written record of all property trans-
actions in the civitas. This notarial role of the city council is attested by sur-
viving formulae from Aquitaine (Bordeaux, Bourges, Cahors and Poitiers),
Burgundy and northern Gaul (Sens, Orleans, Tours, Le Mans, Paris), 218 and
also from Italy and Dalmatia, but scarcely from Spain. These documents
show that city councils, sometimes with curatores and defensores, survived in
some places well into the eighth century. In Italy gesta municipalia disappear
around 800. At Naples the council survived to the tenth century. 219
Significantly, in some cities, such as Naples and Amalfi, the professional
notaries, who took on this work, assumed the title of curiales . 220

Under the Merovingians, curiales no longer seem to have been respon-
sible for the land-tax, which appears to have been collected by agents of
the comes } 22 In fact, the tax was no longer self-evidently essential for the
maintenance of government. Gregory of Tours refers to the royal tax
revenue as a luxury. He exaggerates. The kings had to reward their follow-
ers and to show generosity towards the church. They seem regularly to have
done this not by paying salaries but through grants of estates or of ‘immu-
nity’. This meant that the ‘immune’ landowner kept the tax which, in the
west as in the east, he had received from the tenant together with the rent,
instead of passing it on to royal representatives. 222 The development
severed an important link between the city and its territory.

The Germanic kings could afford to be extravagantly generous with their
revenue only because they employed comparatively few civil servants, and
above all did not have to pay a large professional army. They fought their
wars with levies of peasants. The countryside was becoming militarized.
This was partly a result of the settlement on the land of Franks in the north
of Gaul and of Visigoths in Spain. But, in addition, the great landowners
of Gaul and Spain were themselves acquiring armed followings. The
process can be observed in the case of one Ecdicius, 233 who around 471
raised first a small troop and later on an army to resist the Visigoths. 224 The
Visigoths themselves made use of this capability and compelled Roman
aristocrats and their men to fight for them. 223 This was a development of
fundamental importance. 226 In the independent city state, the peasants

218 Zeumer (1886). 219 Wickham (1981) 75. 220 Schmidt (1957) 122-4.

221 Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.2, v.34, ix.30.

222 Goffart (1982), Kaiser (1979) — the traditional view — rather than Durliat (1990b).

223 PLRE 11 s.v Ecdicius 3. 224 Sid. Ap. Ep. 111.3.7—8.

225 Sid. Ap. Ep. v.12; Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.3.

226 Bachrach (1971); Rouche (1979) 350—2. In general on militarization in the west, see Krause (1987)
13 iff., who supplies a comprehensive survey of the evidence but tends to underestimate the scale of
the development. On fortified hill-fort refuges, frequent in frontier zones, and fortified villas, for which
there is some but not abundant evidence, see Johnson (1983) 226—44. I n Italy, militarization occurred,
both under the Lombards and Byzantines, without ruralization (Wickham (1981) 72, 76—7).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

236 8. ADMINISTRATION AND POLITICS IN THE CITIES

were the army, and they were called up by the city. Under the empire, peas-
ants might be individually conscripted into the imperial army, and in the late
empire landowners provided recruits as a tax, while themselves remaining
civilians. That landowners should join the army at the head of their own
armed tenantry is a fundamental departure both from the principle of the
city state and from the practice of the empire. But that was the way of the
future . 227 Even the clergy became militarized . 228 The gradual militarization
of the landed aristocracy, together with the equally gradual breakdown of
the Roman city-organized system of taxation, did much to end the integra-
tion of urban centre and territory which had been a principal characteris-
tic of the ancient city.

So power moved to the countryside. In the sixth century, bishop
Nicetius of Trier had a castle on the Moselle in addition to his residence
near the cathedral . 229 Not much later, the Frankish comites civitatis and their
families seem normally to have lived outside the fortifications of their
city. 23 " Meanwhile, city centres emptied of inhabitants, and clusters of set-
tlements grew up around churches and monasteries on the periphery.
Timber or wattle and clay replaced stone as building material for houses,
even in north Italian cities . 2 ’ 1 The Carolingians abandoned the Roman
system of taxation, and ceased to use city organization as a basis of their
administrative system. Kings and nobles founded monasteries deep in the
countryside which became centres of agriculture, craftsmanship and
trade . 232 The degree of physical and indeed demographic continuity
between ancient and medieval cities of the former western Roman empire
varies greatly from area to area . 233 It was strongest around the
Mediterranean coast, and above all in Andalusia under the Arabs , 234 and in
northern Italy , 235 and weak to the point of insignificance in Britain and
along the Danube.

IV. CONCLUSION

The development of the late Roman city in east and west is a story of
infinite variety. Nevertheless, we are dealing with a single cultural institu-
tion liable to die same vicissitudes. Even if these did not affect cities
everywhere at the same time, the unity was manifest to the end. The
eastern urban revival of the late fifth and early sixth century, of which
diere is evidence in the form of striking buildings at, say, Gerasa or
Apamea, and of a rich munificent city-based upper class at Aplirodisias

227 Leges Visigothorum ix.2. 8—9; cf. Thompson (1969) 262—6. 228 Prinz (1971).

229 Venantius Fortunatus 3.12. 230 Claude (1964). 231 Bavand (1989).

232 Prinz (1965) 1 2 1 ff . , 1 5 2 ff. ; Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 1 83—94.

233 Ennen (1975) 27-45; Wolff (1991). 234 Ennen (1975) 70-1.

235 Eck and Galsterer (1991); Picard (1988).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONCLUSION

2 37

and Athens, is paralleled in Ostrogothic Ravenna 236 and — if on a more
modest scale and some decades later in time — by abundant church build-
ing in remote western Aquitaine, 237 and as far north as Trier and
Cologne. 238 In a sense the golden age of Visigothic Spain following the
conversion of the Goths to Catholicism in 589 represents the last
flowering of that revival. 239 But in the east the plague of 542 24u inaugu-
rated a period of deepening crisis, which in due course spread to the
whole area of the old empire: repeated visitations of plague, first Persian,
then Arab invasions of the east, Slav invasions of the Balkans and
Greece, 241 Lombard advances into Italy. Byzantine Italy was ‘milita-
rized’, 242 and the Arabs conquered Spain. The chaos of the internecine
wars among the Franks in the mid seventh century may have been exag-
gerated by Carolingian propaganda. 243 Nevertheless, when order was
restored, Gaul and Italy had moved significantly further from their clas-
sical condition. This was the starting-point of Pirenne’s famous theory
that, without Muhammad, Charlemagne would have been inconceiv-
able. 244 Pirenne was probably wrong about the importance of the Arab
conquest’s effect on Mediterranean trade. But it remains true that the eco-
nomic and political centre of the western Christian world moved to the
much more weakly Romanized north of Gaul and the Rhineland. The
latest mention of a city council and a defensor in Gaul occurs on a formula
from Poitiers of 805. In Italy most councils seem to have disappeared by
700, leaving the bishop, now by far the greatest landowner, supreme in the
city. 245 Leo VI (a.d. 886—912) formally abolished city councils in the
Byzantine empire. 246 By then, surviving councils had long become an
anachronism. When the restoration of stability was begun by Charles
Martel (a.d. 719—41) in the west and by Leo III (a.d. 717—41) in the east, 247
administration in neither area was any longer based on the ancient city
units, and cities no longer functioned as centres of secular administration
for an attached rural territory. In both east and west the history of the
ancient city might be said to have come to an end with the emancipation
of the countryside, even if die emancipation took very different organ-
izational forms in what had been the eastern and western halves of the
old empire. 248

236 Deichmann (1976—89). 237 Rouche (1979).

238 Kempf (1968); Oswald, Schaefer, Sennhauer (1966) 140, 150, 154.

239 Palol (1968); Fontaine (1959).

240 Conrad (1986); Durliat (1989) argues that the immediate impact was rather less.

241 Huxley (1977); Wiseman (1984); Spieser (1984). 242 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers.

243 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 255—9.

244 Pirenne (1939) 234; cf. Hodges and Whitehouse (1983); Barnish (1989).

245 Wickham (1981) 19. 246 Leo VI, Nov. 46-8.

247 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 84— 91 .

248 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 1 80—207 on ‘themes’.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 9

ROMAN LAW

DETLEF LIEBS

I. introduction: LAW IN THE LATE ROMAN EMPIRE

Law was central to the social structure of the Roman empire in the fifth
and sixth centuries a.d., more so than in the principate and in the neigh-
bouring barbarian kingdoms. The administration of justice, and of finance,
had been strengthened by the reduction in the size of provinces and by the
reforms which both relieved governors of military responsibilities and pro-
vided them with a substructure of bureaucratic support. The legislative
machine had also become more energetic. The legislative functions of the
senate in Rome had been transferred to the imperial consistorium in
Constantinople and Ravenna, which worked with more expedition and
produced incomparably more enactments. The number was especially high
at the beginning and towards the end of our period — that is, a.d. 425—60
and, even more so, 527—46. Tradition had by this time built up a vast store
of legal literature, impressive alike in its volume, antiquity and quality. A
civilized state, based on the rule of law, seemed on the surface of things to
be assured, and this must have enhanced Roman pride. With the exception
of the Vandals, one nation of Germanic barbarians after another sought
to emulate this Roman ideal (see pp. 260—87 below).

However, the aspiration was also a burden which was difficult even for
the Roman state to sustain. The sources of law were remote from the ordi-
nary inhabitants of the empire, since the personal contacts entailed by legal
practice in the first centuries a.d. had now been displaced by bureaucratic
structures. The jurists who used to give responsa and who, with the
emperor’s endorsement, made the development of law their personal
responsibility had given way to career professionals with a technical
command of a huge but ever more unwieldy body of enacted law, as well
as other texts. Further, the social position of the numerous lawyers of late
antiquity was now such that they seldom reached the top positions in the
state. For financial reward, 1 they had for the most part to content them-
selves with more modest posts than the few who preceded them in the
years before a.d. 212. The central bureaucracy was inclined to extend its

1 Chastagnol (1979) 2 3 of.

238

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

introduction: law in the late roman empire 239

competence at the expense of the local officials nearer to the citizens.
Jurisdiction over weighty matters, as for example capital punishment or the
imposition of special levies, was transferred to the centre or made depen-
dent on lodging a report and obtaining central assent. Even such an impor-
tant official as the city prefect tended to prefer to report to the centre rather
than decide matters himself . 2

The substantive law of the principate was developed — with, for
example, more sensitive differentiation in relation to succession on intes-
tacy — and was adapted to changed circumstances. The most important
change was the transformation of the dominant ideology, since the adop-
tion of Christianity and imperial responsibility for enforcing orthodoxy
produced a substantial body of legislation. Changes to the tax system under
Diocletian and Constantine generated a huge mass of laws intended to
tighten its efficiency and ensure that the state’s increasing financial needs
were promptly satisfied by all subjects. To ensure regularity of supplies,
various posts and professions were peremptorily made subject to legal
burdens on a hereditary basis. In particular, membership of town councils,
which had become less attractive, relatively, in comparison to service in the
imperial bureaucracy, and perhaps also absolutely, because of the demands
of tax collection, had to be defended by a sequence of laws . 3

Tenant farmers were another area of particular legislative concern. In
the course of the fourth century they were gradually turned from a free
smallholder into a serf with scarcely more rights than a slave, though with
regional exceptions and differences, so that landowners’ objectives were
not universally achieved. There was also an important change in family law.
The hitherto dominant rule had been that children followed the status of
their mother if for any reason their parents’ union did not amount to a fully
valid marriage. Step by step this regula iuris gentium was displaced by the prin-
ciple that such children must follow the parent with the lower status . 4 Penal
statutes with grisly punishments aimed at life and limb multiplied for
people of all ranks , 5 and free status no longer gave immunity from torture.
For embezzlement in the public sphere, money penalties at hitherto
unimaginable levels were introduced. However, corruption was to an
extent legalized, in that payments for procuring position or office or secur-
ing performance of an official act, which had become customary, were gen-
eralized and had their amounts fixed . 6 There was also legislation which
turned with new emphasis to the task of providing for public welfare . 7

The texts give the impression that these laws reached out to their
victims like the tentacles of an octopus, but the reality was different. The

2 E.g. Symmachus, Relat.\ Liebs (1983) 220—3; Dazert (1986) 1 57E

3 C.Th. xn;c£ Liebs (1986) 276b 4 Voss (1985). 5 Liebs (1985).

6 Merkel (1888); Veyne (1981); Noethlichs (1981); MacMullen (1988).

7 Vogt (1945) 141 -2; Biondi (1952—4).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

240

9- ROMAN LAW

effectiveness of the law against the rich was less than it had ever been , 8 and
this weakness was well known. Every official act was prone to corruption,
while the differences between rich and poor had grown so vast that the rich
could defy local authorities and achieve their ends by applying sufficient pres-
sure . 9 This did not mean that the legal system was entirely subverted, simply
that it lacked authority. Those without money or influence had no choice but
to rely on the law, and the majority of the people accepted it. Indeed, most
people usually accept even thoroughly unsatisfactory laws, as being better
than no law at all. Sometimes legal process and punishment were brought to
bear even on the arrogant rich, 1 " but neither reliably nor expeditiously.

II. THE JURISDICTION 11

The subject matter of legal proceedings was diverse: civil litigation over
property and debt, criminal prosecutions of dangerous offenders, admin-
istrative and tax cases concerning public duties and levies, military cases
concerning both disciplinary infringements and the proprietary and other
affairs of soldiers which in a civilian would have belonged to the ordinary
private law. The regular judge for civil, criminal, administrative and tax
cases was the governor of the province (praeses , index) or, where geograph-
ically appropriate, the city prefect of Rome or Constantinople (praefectus
urbis). For minor matters there were town courts. The court of the gover-
nor sat in the capital of the province, the former practice whereby the gov-
ernor took his court on circuit ( conventus ) having become a rarity. A frequent
practice was for the governor, as for the prefect and the emperor himself,
to delegate ordinary civil cases to lower judges (indices pedanei, indices delegate),
so as to retain for himself the more important class of business, especially
criminal cases and cases involving status, wardship and public finance.

There were also special courts for special categories of people: for crim-
inal cases involving senators, there was the imperial consistory, the praeto-
rian prefect or, in the west, the Roman city prefect together with five
senators chosen by lot (quinquevirale iudicium)', for the officials of the palace
(palatini), the court of the magister officiorum', for the officials of the financial
administration, the local comes largitionum or, where appropriate, the central
comes sacrarum largitionum', for imperial tenants, the local rationalis rei privatae
or, where appropriate, the comes rei privatae at the centre; for soldiers, the
local dux or, where appropriate, the magister militum.

The jurisdiction of the town courts extended only to matters of small
value and non-contentious items. They were presided over by the local

8 Wieacker (1983b). 9 E.g. Aug. Ep. io*.2— 8.

10 Arvandus in 469: Stevens (1993) 103—7; Harries (1992b); Teitler (1992).

11 von Bethmann-Hollweg (1866); Kaser and Hackl (1966) 517—644.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE JURISDICTION

241

magistrates, the duumviri. Still lower down, the defensor civitatis exercised a
summary arbitral jurisdiction over the small claims of ordinary folk. In the
two capital cities, jurisdiction over both small claims and public order, as
also over the personnel directly responsible for public order, was exercised
by the praefectus vigplum (called the praetor plebis in Constantinople from a.d.
535). Similarly, disputes to do with the food supply to the capitals or involv-
ing the personnel concerned with it fell within the jurisdiction of the prae-
fectus annonae. The praetors by this time were chiefly occupied in the
planning and financing of the public games. They had retained jurisdiction
only in some particular matters. 12

Jurisdiction at first instance, albeit only in exceptional cases, was also
exercised by the twelve to fifteen regional meant so long as they existed and
by the equivalent authorities at the intermediate level, the comes Orientis in
Antioch and the praefectus Augustalis in Alexandria, as also the higher author-
ities, such as the two to four praefecti praetorio. Normally, like the senates of
both capitals and the emperor himself, these jurisdictions functioned as
courts of appeal, of second or third instance. But their powers were of
course larger, since in the Roman political system judicial functions were
regularly associated with other governmental responsibilities: judicial, leg-
islative and executive powers were not separated.

All governmental judges — provincial governors, vicars, and prefects —
sat with an assessor, who was paid by the state and was, if possible, a profes-
sional lawyer. He had a decisive voice on questions of law. 13 Every court
was permitted a fixed number of advocates, who had their own corporate
organization. Thus, the courts of governors had thirty, of vicars and their
equivalents fifty (sixty in Egypt), of city prefects eighty, and of praetorian
prefects 150. However, in the west these numbers were not maintained
after the early fifth century. The advocates’ remuneration was fixed; they
could only claim modest fees compared to the honoraria paid in the first
centuries of the principate. They were now required to have had a legal
education: anyone applying to practise in the court of the praetorian
prefect had to produce certificates sworn by the professor of law who had
taught him. 14

From the delegated judges an appeal could be made to the delegating,
and from the courts of towns to the governor of the province. There was
then no further appeal. A case begun before the governor could be
appealed to the vicar or, if he was nearer, to the praetorian prefect. From
the latter there was no further appeal. However, from the vicar, as from the
city prefects, it was possible to appeal again to the emperor himself. In that
case the emperor acted as a court of third instance.

12 C.Th.v 1.4.16. 13 E.g. Aug. Conf. vi.io. 14 CJ ii.j.11.1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

242

9. ROMAN LAW

III. SOURCES OF LAW AND LAW MAKING 15

Once the monarchical principal of government had been fully established
in the fourth century, the emperor or, as it might be, the central bureau-
cracy acting in his name was in sole control of the machinery of legislation.
To a greater or lesser extent he also dominated all other law-making organs
— namely, the senate, the regional magistrates and local authorities, espe-
cially the towns and other communities, whose finances had gradually been
brought under imperial control.

Imperial legislation adhered to the diverse forms handed down from the
earlier period, above all resolutions of the senate and magistral edicts. In
this spirit the fundamental pronouncement on the sources of law for the
whole epoch, enacted on 7 November 426, 16 recognized as universally
binding statutes only the so-called resolutions of the senate (imperial leg-
islative proposals communicated to the senate, orationes ad venerabilem coetum
missae) and imperial edicts. The term ‘edict’ must be understood as includ-
ing not only pronouncements which expressly so describe themselves but
also all others which were published throughout the empire by the govern-
ors and claimed to have general application. In short, pronouncements
took effect according to their own tenor — to apply to everybody, the text
had only to speak as a lex generalis. From a.d. 446, a new statute required the
assent of the imperial consistorium and the senate. 17

The mass of law handed down from the past continued in force so far
as it had not been changed by more recent legislation. It remained the prin-
cipal source of rules for contemporary application. The law was thus to be
found in the standard legal literature, now known in the west simply as ius
in contradistinction to leges , 18 which was used of imperial pronouncements.
The a.d. 426 enactment concerning the sources of law gave instructions
about handling conflicts of opinions in the canonical books: 19 these should
be resolved by counting heads, while in a tie Papinian had the casting vote.
In the west the only books easily available were those of Gaius, Papinian,
Paul, Ulpian and Modestinus. Even in the case of Julian and Marcellus
there were evidently problems so that their opinions were only to count
when the relevant text could be corroborated from more than one manu-
script.

Theodosius II entertained a plan to overcome all the uncertainties in
relation to the law gathered from the writings of the old private jurists. He
intended that the part of the old literature which was to remain in use
should be issued in one authoritative edition of excerpted works. He did

15 Gaudemet (1979a); Liebs (1992).

16 Five pieces survive: C] 1.14.3; 114.2; 1.19.7; 1.22.5; C.Th. 1.4.3.

17 6/1.14.8; Wetzler (1997) esp. 127— 31 and 197— 9. 18 Gaudemet (1979b).

19 C.Th. 1.4.3; see Volterra (1983).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOURCES OF LAW AND LAW MAKING 243

not, however, accomplish this plan, but a century later it was taken up by
Justinian and carried through. The result is the Digest (see p. 249 below).

Law-making utterances of the emperor were not confined to the enact-
ment of leges generales. The absolute monarchy increased the tendency to
accord legislative authority to his other pronouncements in the fields of
both law and administration. These took many forms: official interpreta-
tions of legislation ( scripta ad edictuni), instructions to imperial officials
( mandata ), judgements of the emperor’s court ( decreta , sentential), imperial
answers [rescripta) to individual supplications (preces) or to questions from
office-holders engaged in some legal process ( consultatio ). Rescripts to indi-
viduals ( rescripta personalia) usually contained merely a ruling on the law and
did nothing but apply the existing law ( rescripta simplicid). Frequently the
petitioner requested some special privilege, which, if granted to an individ-
ual, was called an adnotatio or an adnotatio specialis (a marginal note, or a
special marginal note). They could only be granted by the emperor person-
ally, and the grant was originally made in the form of an entry on the margin
of the petition. A privilege for a province, town or other corporate body
was called a pragmaticum or pragmatica sanctio. Examples were remissions of
taxation, moratoria, immunities from compulsory labour and charters for
the Catholic church. The same term included ad hoc disqualifications, such
as the disabilities imposed on the Donatists in Africa.

Even oral utterances of the emperor ( interlocutiones ) could acquire stat-
utory authority, as for instance where he declared a principle during a session
of his court, or at a meeting of his consistorium, or indeed in any other impe-
rial speech. Although the absolute conception of the imperial office
simplified the business of legislation, it also entailed the danger that the legal
system would be subverted from within, for grants of imperial graces and
favours such as exemptions from a statute, or immunities, whether from the
emperor himself or in his name, claimed the same status as general legisla-
tion. The system therefore had to cope not only with the ruler’s policy of
granting genuine graces and favours, but also with the corrupt multiplication
of such dispensations. For the emperor’s closest ministers knew every means
of procuring the imperial signature, and petitioners sought to obtain privi-
leges not only by laying out money but also by misrepresenting the facts.

Emperors made repeated assaults on abuse, especially of rescripts.
Rescripts contradictory to the general law were to be treated as invalid; priv-
ileges were only to take effect if a petitioner had expressly applied to be
exempted from the force of a particular statute; imperial favours must not
encroach on the private rights of third parties. Further, rescripts were to be
used only in the case for which they had been issued, a rule which Justinian
abandoned, reverting to the earlier position. 20 Shortly afterwards Justinian

20 6/1.14.12; VII.45. 13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

244 9 - Roman law

also enacted that judges must disregard imperial rescripts or mandates
which encroached on their jurisdiction, whether adduced by imperial refe-
rendarii in writing or by word of mouth. This law included all private
rescripts, pragmatic sanctions, official rescripts and imperial instructions to
public servants ( mandata ) and applied whether they had been obtained
before or during the case. Further, the law was to be recited at the start of
the record of every case. 21

Hardly any records of law making by magistrates below the emperor
have survived — essentially only a collection of abbreviated edicts emanat-
ing from the praetorian prefect of the east between 490 and 5 63 in Greek. 22
Three of these, in part preserved unabbreviated, were appended to the
comprehensive collection of Justinianic NovelsP Documents relating to
private transactions survive in large numbers. Of those in Latin the most
important are the papyri from Ravenna dating from the fifth century. 24
Copious Greek papyri come from sixth-century Egypt.

IV. CODIFICATION

In 429 Theodosius II decided to have all imperial constitutions since
Constantine brought into an official order on the model of the private col-
lections made under Diocletian, the Codex Gregorianus and Codex
Hermogenianus , 25 The flood of imperial pronouncements had become so
great that no professional lawyer could pretend to master them all. 2 ' 1 The
first phase of the project was to be the collection of all constitutions since
Constantine which had general validity: the resolutions of the senate (in
reality, imperial communications to the senate), imperial edicts and other
leges generates even where applicable only in particular regions. All were to be
shorn of their legally superfluous outworks, especially the high-flown rhe-
torical introductions, distributed under titles according to subject matter
and, within those titles, set out in chronological order. The resulting collec-
tion was intended to be no more than the foundation for a more far-reach-
ing project: there was to be a volume of all contemporarily valid legal
materials, purged of all that was obsolete, ambiguous or contradictory. This
definitive work was to be assembled from what would, with the new addi-
tion, be the three extant collections of constitutions and from the private
juristic literature. According to the plan, it was this work which was to bear
the emperor’s name.

However, the larger ambitions were not destined to be realized. After
nearly seven years’ work assembling the constitutions, the emperor ordered

21 Just. Nov. 82.13 (a.d. 5 39); 1 1 3 (h 1 ), now confined to encroachments contrary to the law.

22 Ed. by Zachariae von Lingenthal (1843b). 23 Just. Nov. r 66 — S . 24 Tjader (195 5-82).

25 C.Th. 1. 1.;; Albanese (1991a); Falchi (1989) 13-17; Honore (1998).

26 Nov. Theod. 1.1; cf. Anon. De reb. bell. 21, with Brandt (1988) 125ft.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CODIFICATION

245

his commissioners to bring the third codex to completion on the basis of
what had originally been planned as only the first phase. He widened the
scope of the commission’s work on the constitutions which they had col-
lected, and enlarged its membership. The commissioners were now to take
on the tasks necessaria adicere, ambigua demutare and incongrua emendare. And the
originally intermediate volume was now itself to be called the Codex
Theodosianus . 21

It was promulgated in Constantinople for the eastern empire on 1 5
February 438, to come into effect on 1 January 439, 28 and during 438 it was
also brought into operation in the west through Valentinian III. The senate
in Rome welcomed its introduction at its meeting on 25 December 438,
when most careful attention was paid to ensuring reliable dissemination of
the Codex throughout the empire; the senate also recognized the danger
that privileges, surreptitiously obtained, would undermine the legal order,
especially the holding of property. 29

The work of assembling the constitutions had been difficult and only
partly successful. In Mommsen’s view the presence of a constitution in the
Codex was determined more by chance than choice. 30 Only the more recent
enactments, since Arcadius, could be taken from the imperial archives in
Constantinople. The commissioners had to find the vast majority of the
earlier ones from other sources in the capital or in the provinces. In the west
many areas had fallen into the hands of the barbarians, and at Rome in 410
there had been widespread destruction. Nevertheless, it was possible to find
many constitutions, even for instance in the records of cases, which had to
set out such constitutions as had been adduced. The archives of the numer-
ous lower courts would obviously be the source. It was still possible to obtain
many from Carthage, which fell to the Vandals only in 439; also Beirut, where
there was a famous law school (see pp. 25 3— 4 below), contributed a good deal.

The collection was not accurate in every detail: many dates were incor-
rect, and it was not comprehensive. The prohibition which accompanied
the promulgation forbade recourse to any enactment from the relevant
period if it had not been included in the codex, but, typically, exceptions
had to be admitted in the case of the specially sensitive areas of military
law and state finance. 31 On the other hand, the fact that the collection was
originally conceived as a stepping stone to a more perfect volume meant
that it had not been purged of much obsolete material. With the help of
the chronological arrangement it was for the user himself to decide what
was still valid and what had been overtaken by later developments. Unfor-
tunately the insertion of some enactments in the wrong place (leges fugitivae)
made this task difficult.

27 C.Th. r. 1 . 6 . 28 Nov. Theod. 1 .

29 Gesta senatus Romani de Tfjeodosiano publicando, C.Th. ed. Mommsen, pp. iff., esp. 3, lines 8—12; 16;
20—4; 33. 30 Mommsen (1905) 384; also Seeck (1919) 1— 18. 31 Nov Theod. 1.6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

246

9. ROMAN LAW

The Codex Theodosianus consists of sixteen books, each of which is sub-
divided into between eleven and forty-eight titles systematically ordered
according to subject matter. In every title the laws or the excerpts thereof
follow each other in chronological order. The first book concerns the
sources of law and the higher offices of state, hence the constitution gen-
erally, though omitting the emperor himself. The second book deals with
civil procedure and begins to address private law, which occupies the next
three books as well. Book 6 is then directed to the law relating to the upper
classes and the higher office-holders; book 7 to military law; book 8 to the
law relating to lower officials and some supplementary private law matters.
Book 9 turns to crime and criminal procedure; 10 to the ius fisci; 1 1 to tax-
ation and appeals, together with evidence; 1 2 to local government. Book 1 3
governs the public duties of those engaged in business and the liberal pro-
fessions; 14 the food supply to the towns, especially to the two capital cities;
1 5 public entertainments; and 16 ecclesiastical law.

In contrast to the Codex Gregorianus , of whose fourteen or possibly
fifteen books thirteen had been devoted to private law, in the Theodosianus
private law occupied only four out of sixteen. The reason for this difference
lies partly in the materials which were in play, in that, while the earlier Codex
gathered mainly rescripts to individual petitioners, Theodosius’ commis-
sioners collected only leges generates, even though this did not exclude many
that were ephemeral in nature, such as the annual amnesties at Easter. 32
Nevertheless, the changed emphasis reflects the greater importance of
public law in the later period and its inclination towards bureaucratic solu-
tions — or perhaps simply the dominance of the bureaucracy. It is not to be
forgotten that the bureaucracy itself was the force behind the entire
project, while the Codex Gregorianus and the Codex Hermogenianus had been
works of private enterprise. The Codex Theodosianus is thus an invaluable
source for our understanding of the state and administration in the late
Roman empire, though in private law it leaves much to be desired. Quite
apart from the Codex’ s initial imbalance, it is perhaps no coincidence that
books 2 to 5 on private law survive only in part (about one-third of what
was originally included), while the public law books have come down in full
and in remarkably good manuscripts. 33

The preparation and publication of the Codex d\d not bring the momen-
tum of the legislative machine to a halt. Even in the late 430s in the east,
and in the west chiefly in the 440s and 450s, Novels were issued in large
numbers. Immediately valid in the legislator’s own half of the empire, these
took effect in the other half only if ratified. 34 That happened only once. On
3 June 448 Valentinian III ratified a series of thirty- five Novels , 35 which his

32 C.Th. ix.38.3— 8. 33 Siems (1984) 5 if.; Viden (1984). 34 Nov. Theod. i.6f.

35 Nov Valent. 26.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CODIFICATION

2 47

cousin and father-in-law in Constantinople had sent him with a letter dated
i October 447. 36 A collection of Novels which was made in Italy in 460 or
461 contained these thirty- five from Theodosius II, thirty-nine from
Valentinian himself and at least twelve from Majorian. Later western col-
lections made occasional additions to this 460/ 1 collection, including five
from the eastern emperor Marcian (450—7). In total we have from western
sources 102 post-Theodosian Novels dating from between 438 and 468. In
the east the story is hidden behind the Codex Justinianus, which prohibited
recourse to all earlier collections of constitutions. 37 Whether collected pri-
vately or officially in the manner of Theodosius II, the Novels surviving
from the western empire retain the outworks cut away in the codices. They
still have the preambles reciting their cause and purpose, and on occasion
an epilogue and particular instructions about promulgation. In addition,
the subject matter of individual constitutions, sometimes of several
together, is identified in a short title.

Half a year after his sole reign began, Justinian revived the project
mooted by Theodosius II for a codification of the whole law. He proposed
to achieve it in a rather simpler manner. On 13 February 528 he set up a
commission of ten, consisting of high-ranking public servants with two
generals, one professor of law and two advocates. He charged them to take
the three existing codices, the Gregorian, Hermogenian and Theodosian,
together with all eastern Novels issued since, to select all the constitutions
which remained in operation, to excerpt and simplify them and to purge
them of everything that was out of date, repetitive or contradictory. The
powers of the commission extended not only to deletions and alterations
but also to supplementation and to consolidation of diverse constitutions
on the same subject matter. And yet, since the constitutions were then to
be arranged in chronological order within titles and each with its proper
inscription (author and recipient) and subscription (place and date), the
edited texts would still bear attributions to the emperor who originally
issued them or, in the case of a consolidation of several constitutions, to
the emperor who issued the earliest. 38 Justinian thus gave his commission-
ers wider powers than had Theodosius in 429 and 435. He had also learned
by the earlier commission’s experience that a professor of law was essen-
tial to its purpose. In the intervening period the archives in the capital had
also been put in a more satisfactory condition.

The commissioners were able to complete their work in just over a year.
They arranged the material in an intelligible order, easy to survey. And they
managed to bring the number of books down to twelve. Previously, if one
adds together those of the Gregorianus, Hermogenianus and Theodosianus and
the subsequent Novels, there had been more than thirty. Admittedly each

36 Nov. Theod. z. 37 CJ Const. Summa 3. 38 CJ Const. Haec, cf. Honore (1978) 212—14.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

248

9. ROMAN LAW

book was now a good deal longer than before. On 7 April 529 Justinian
promulgated the new codex, for use from Easter (16 April). 39 In fact the
Codex Justinianus which survives is not this but a second edition, the Codex
Justinianus repetitae praelectionis, dated 16 November 5 34, when it was prom-
ulgated to take exclusive effect from 29 December 534. The use or even
citation of constitutions from other sources thereafter incurred the penal-
ties of forgery. An exception was made for privileges expressly granted as
a matter of grace and favour. All other privileges were in future to be exer-
cised only so far as compatible with the laws generally applicable. No
special allowance was any longer made for military matters. 40 However, the
law contained in the old imperial constitutions relating to the state
economy and financial administration retained independent validity.

The twelve books of the Codex Justinianus are each divided between
forty-four and seventy-eight titles. Book 1 begins with ecclesiastical law and
proceeds to sources of law and constitutional matters, again omitting the
monarch himself. Books 2 to 8 deal fully with civil procedure and private
law. Book 9 covers crime and criminal procedure; 10 the ius fisci, taxation
and local government with particular reference to local taxes; 1 1 corpora-
tions with tied membership, state industries and estates. Finally, book 1 2
covers the law relating to rank and the holding of offices. Private law thus
receives substantially more space than in the Theodosianus, albeit linked in
with the law relating to control of the economy and status.

The manuscript tradition of the Codex Justinianus causes particularly
awkward problems. 41 In the early Middle Ages the last three books were jet-
tisoned and the first nine were reduced to about a quarter of their original
size. When, from the late Middle Ages, interest in more complete texts
revived, multiple copies were not made of any of the surviving full manu-
scripts. Instead, there was a process of gradual supplementation by the use
of extracts from the fuller manuscripts. But this did not serve to achieve a
complete restoration of the comprehensive range of the original work. We
have lost in particular most of the constitutions which were issued in
Greek, for which we have to make do with Byzantine paraphrases. The tra-
dition has, however, preserved by way of introductory texts the constitu-
tions by which Justinian first commissioned the work [Const. Haet),
promulgated it [Const. Summa) and then again promulgated the new edition
[Const. Cordi).

The second edition of the Codex Justinianus had been necessitated by the
issue of numerous Novels. These had in turn been occasioned by the fact

39 CJ Const. Summa.

40 CJ Const. Cordi. Of the first edition of CJ there survives an index to the rubrics of Book i, tides
1 1— 16: P.Oxy. 1814.

41 Kruger, Praejatio (pp. v— xxxxi) to Cod. lust. (ed. maior); Kruger (1912) 425—8; Dolezalek (1985);
Tort-Martorell (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CODIFICATION

249

that in the meantime the juristic literature had been reviewed and excerp-
ted with an eye to saving whatever was still useful, and the excerpts thus
selected had been put together to produce the fifty books of the Digest. The
emperor was fond of the number fifty, which symbolizes perfection in the
Bible and the Early Fathers. 42 The number of books of classical legal
writing still surviving had been 1,508 (Justinian maintains it was nearly
2,000), which suggests that only about a thirtieth of the material was
retained. However, the proportion is nearer a twentieth, since more than
three million lines of text were compressed into fifty books with almost
1 50,000 lines: 43 the average length of earlier books was 2,100 lines, whereas
the comparable figure for the fifty books of the Digest is 2,800. The figure
for the Codex is much larger, 5,000.

The books of the Digest contain between two and thirty-two titles
(though books 30 to 32 exceptionally constitute only one title between
them). Within the titles, the individual texts (‘fragments’) are for the most
part set out in the order in which the old books were excerpted. In that
exercise the work had been divided into four separate assignments, the so-
called ‘masses’, whose contributions follow each other but not always in the
same order. The masses are the Sabinian, named after the commentaries on
Masurius Sabinus’ ius civile ; the edictal, named from the commentaries ad
edictunr, the Papinian, dominated by the writings of that jurist; and the
appendix, a small additional group brought in after the beginning of the
work, evidently because they were only acquired after the operation had
begun. Every fragment retained in the Digest is preceded by an ‘inscription’
which sets out its provenance — the author, the work and the number of the
book from which it was taken. However, where excerpts were taken from
one book they are put together as a single fragment. Many fragments run
to several pages, some to only a few words. The longer ones were divided
into paragraphs, something which had already proved necessary in a few
cases in the Codex.

The overall order is roughly the same as that of the Codex, although in
many cases the different structure of the books which were excerpted was
followed. Ecclesiastical law was of course not present in the materials.
Private law and civil procedure filled books 2 to 47, eleven-twelfths of the
whole. This compares with a quarter in the Codex Theodosianus and a good
half in the Justinianus. There was minimal interference with the individual
fragments. Changes chiefly took the form of abbreviation, even within pas-
sages selected for retention, especially if a path had to be cut through
conflicting opinions. In addition, in order to adjust them to fit develop-
ments which had taken place in the law, the texts were modernized by

42 Kniitel (1996) 427—8; Scheltema (1975) 233; Schminck (1989) 81.

43 CJ 1. 17. 2. 1 (= Digest Const. Tanta 1).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

250

9. ROMAN LAW

‘interpolations’ and supplemented with emblemata. Nevertheless it is clear
that much obsolete material survived. Even reduced to a bare twentieth of
the extant corpus, the volume was enormous. That sufficiently shows that
the commissioners found it impossible to submit to the discipline of select-
ing only what was essential and that, quite to the contrary, they allowed
themselves to be carried along by their fascination with the classical legal
literature.

The work was not confined to the books of the five jurists approved by
the Law of Citations (see p. 242 above, n. 1 9) but took into consideration
all that were still obtainable, even the critical commentaries on Papinian
which Constantine had outlawed. Moreover, conflicts were to be resolved
by following the line which seemed most reasonable; there was no question
of counting heads or following an artificial structure of authority in the
manner of the Law of Citations. That law itself, though included in the first
edition of 529, was omitted from the 534 Codex. Only authors who had
achieved no recognition at all were excluded. The instruction to eliminate
all contradictions did not prevent the survival of much evidence for diver-
gent opinions and unresolved discussions of difficult points.

The driving force was Tribonian. In the commission to compile the
Codex he had been sixth in seniority, and it was now he who put together
the team which Justinian commissioned to undertake the work on the
Digest. He included the four leading professors of law. It is also clear that it
was Tribonian’s thinking that underlay the idea and scope of the project as
authorized byjustinian’s constitution of 1 5 December 5 30, when in fact the
work had already begun. 44 On 16 December 5 3 3 the emperor was able to
publish the complete work. 45 The purpose which it served was not so much
the work of the courts and legal practice but rather the very demanding
programme of legal education. A fine manuscript from the sixth century
survives in Florence. 46

From 529 the emperor had started on the business of resolving by leg-
islation the outstanding controversies in the standard legal literatures.
These decisions were collected under the title Quinquagfnta decisiones and
published at the earliest in late 531, more probably in 5 32. This collection
has not survived. Further interventions were necessitated as the work pro-
gressed, and more reforming constitutions were therefore enacted. A wide-
ranging law of this kind was issued on 1 7 November 533 , 47 Apart from this,
the commissioners were left in peace from the time of the Nika riot in
January 5 32, which cost Tribonian all his offices except his chairmanship of

44 Digest Const. Deo auctore= CJ 1.17.1; on Tribonian and his work, see Honore (1978).

45 Digest Const. Tanta ( = CJ 1.17.2) or, in its Greek form, A<e8ojk€V.

46 Mommsen, Praefatio (pp. v— lxxviii) to Digested, maior); Kruger (1912) 428—3 3; Spagnesi (1986);
Mantovani (1987) with Kaiser (1991).

47 CJ 1.3.5 3; v.17.1 1; vii.24.1; ix.13.1; xi.48.24, all from the same law.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CODIFICATION

2 5 I

the commission. Justinian was then busy with the rebuilding of S. Sophia.
The commissioners made many changes on their own initiative.

A further project was the production, alongside the Digest, of a text for
those embarking on the study of law. This was achieved in the form of a
compilation in four books, averaging 2,200 standard lines, drawn from the
introductory works ( Institutions ) currendy available. The new text, Justinian’s
Institutes, chose not to disclose the provenance of the excerpts of which it is
composed. 48 They mostly come from Gaius’ Institutes but also from his Res
Cottidianae and from the Institutes of Florentinus, Marcianus and Ulpian. In
addition some passages were borrowed from the already completed Digest,
and summaries were added of the most important imperial reforms. 49 Once
the principal task of compiling the Digest had been completed, the work of
compiling the Institutes was undertaken by Tribonian and two famous profes-
sors of law, Theophilus of Constantinople and Dorotheus of Beirut. It was
quickly done. By 21 November 5 33 it was possible to bring the Institutes into
use. 511 On 16 December, together with the promulgation of the Digest,
Justinian established a new legal curriculum. 51 In Constantinople and Beirut
the course of study lasted five years. Instead of the customary diet of clas-
sical legal authors, it was now ordained that it should proceed from the
Institutes through the first thirty-six books of the Digest, arriving in the fifth
year at the study of the Codex.

Once again the legislative machinery was not brought to a halt by the
completion of the three parts of the codification. On the contrary, the
effect of the study in depth of the legal literature of the past was to precip-
itate numerous reforms even after the work of compilation had been con-
cluded. These now came in the form of Novels which were, with a few
exceptions, always in Greek. Between January and August 5 35 alone there
were thirty-two, and down to 546 another 1 1 5. Their effect was to render
obsolete many provisions in the codification. After 546 the rate of legisla-
tion fell back to a more normal level. In 5 34 Justinian was still planning an
official collection of Novels , 52 and in 5 5 4 he proposed to promulgate for the
new western provinces all those issued up to that date, presumably with
appropriate deletions and translations. 53 Neither of these projects came to
fruition. However, many private collections of Novels were made. They
once again retain the outworks of the legislation and add a short descrip-
tive title. Most Novels, short ones excepted, were divided into chapters.

We know of four such collections. 54 The second of these is built on the
first, which itself had been slightly enlarged four times. It originally
reached to 5 44 and numbered 1 1 1 Novels, but actually contained only no,
since one occurred twice. Thereafter it was extended in 5 48 to include four

48 In general, see Stein and Lewis (1983). 49 Zocco-Rosa (1908—10).

50 Inst. lust., Const. Imperatoriam. 51 Digest Const. Omnem. 52 CJ Const. Cordi 4 fin.

53 Nov. lust. App. 7.1 1. 54 Noailles (1912— 14); van der Wal (1964).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

252

9. ROMAN LAW

later constitutions. It was then extended another three times, adding two
more Novels each time, but three on the last occasion, which had previously
been omitted from those of the period 535—45. The third extension
involved another duplication. Here the individual Novels stood in a num-
bered series, but the subdivisions, the chapters, were also numbered, in
such a way that the numbering of the chapters overrode the boundaries
between the individual Novels. The collection itself does not survive, but
we have evidence of it in five documents emanating from Julian’s contem-
porary teaching of law in Constantinople (see below). The most impor-
tant is a Latin index, a summary of the contents of all 1 24 items by Julian
himself, which survives as the so-called Epitome Juliani , 55 It is the textbook
of his course on the Novels given in the academic year 5 5 6—7 in Latin, evi-
dently for refugees from Italy. It met with success in the west and was
almost exclusively relied upon in the early Middle Ages. 56 The second col-
lection of Justinianic Novels originally reached to 556. It sought to put the
late additions to the first collection into their proper chronological places,
which it carried through with some minor mistakes, and to add some more
recent pronouncements. It was later extended at least to 5 66. 57 The origi-
nal edition survives only in fragments of a Greek course on the Novels
given byjulian in 5 57— 8. 58 The extended edition can likewise be seen only
through the fragments of an anonymous writer of about 600. The third
collection reached at first to 5 56 and contained 127 items. Here again we
lack direct evidence, but most of the items were in Greek and we do have
a word by word Latin translation of those ( /card iroSas), and we also have
Latin texts of a few of those which were issued either in Latin or in both
languages. The translation was made to back up a course on the Novels in
Rome in 5 57—8 and was bit by bit extended by the addition of further Latin
Novels reaching up to 563, till it included 134 items. It acquired the name
Authenticum and in the west displaced the Epitome Juliani in the late Middle
Ages. 59 Only the fourth and last collection of Novels has come down to us
directly. 60 It reaches to 575 and includes 168 items. The last three, edicts of
praetorian prefects from the early or mid sixth century, are clearly later
additions. In 572 Athanasius of Emesa made a Greek epitome of the
Novels and put them into a systematic order; 61 in 580—90 Theodorus
Scholasticus of Hermopolis produced a Greek abridgement of the collec-
tion of 168 Novels . 62

55 Scheltema (1970) 47—50. On the four remaining pieces of Byzantine evidence see Liebs (1987)
220—44. 56 Liebs (1987) 246—66, 269—76.

57 van der Wal (1964) i64ff.; Liebs (1987) 223, 232—4.

58 Simon et al. (1977) 1—29, supplemented by Liebs (1987) 223, 232—4.

59 Authenticum', also in the sequence of the fourth collection: CIC hi, but only the upper Latin text,
if identified as Authenticum and supplied with its original numbering. 60 CIC hi.

61 Simon and Troianos (1989). 62 See p. 258 below, n. 1 13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW SCHOOLS 253

V. LAW SCHOOLS

Roman law was taught outside Rome and Italy even from the second or
third century a.d. However, until the early fifth century Rome remained
pre-eminent and, if they could, law students made their way there from all
parts of the empire, even from the east. However, from the middle of the
fifth century their preference was for Beirut or Constantinople. We know
rather little about law teaching in Rome in late antiquity, although there is
some evidence reaching into the seventh century. 63 It would seem that it
was maintained even beyond that period, albeit at a modest level, and that
in the eleventh century it was possible for scholars in Bologna to perceive
a continuity between their school and that of Rome, perhaps through a
connection via Ravenna. There were certainly professors paid by the state
in Rome in the sixth century, 64 and probably long before. From the early
third century law students in Rome were exempted from liturgia so long as
their studies lasted. This exemption did not then apply elsewhere, 63 but
about 286 it was extended to Beirut, though limited to those under twenty-
five. 66 From 370 all students at Rome were obliged to complete their study
by the age of twenty. 67 The exemption from liturgies also applied to law
teachers in Rome from the early third century, though not elsewhere. 68 An
inscription survives from the grave in Rome of the law teacher Floridus,
who died in 427, aged sixty-two. 69 The teaching proceeded on the basis of
the classical legal literature and the collections of imperial constitutions,
but until the middle of the sixth century we do not have precise informa-
tion. Justinian sent the Institutes, the Digest and the Codex to Rome without
delay, and from the 5 40s onwards there is good evidence of teaching based
on those books and the Novels, on the same system as in Constantinople. 7 "

The law school of Beirut must be mentioned next. Roman law was
taught there at a high level from the second century. 71 In the fifth century
it overtook Rome. In the fifth and sixth centuries there were two chairs lib-
erally maintained by the state; 72 and in addition to the two antecessores there
were perhaps other law teachers since Digest, Const. Omnem is addressed to
eight law teachers. After a devastating earthquake in 5 51 the law school
found a home for a while in Sidon and later evidently in Antioch, where
Athanasius taught. 73 Known figures from the fifth century are Cyrillus,
Domninus the Younger, Demosthenes, Eudoxius, Patricius and Leontius. 74

63 Liebs (1987) 195—220, 246—82. 64 Cass. Var. ix.21.5 (a.d. 533); Nov. lust. App. 7.22 (554).

65 Fragmenta iuris Vaticana 204 (in Kruger et al. (1890) 1— 106): Ulpian referring to Caracalla.

66 CJ x.50.1; for the exact dating see Honore (1994) 1 50 n. 74; 181 n. 5 5 5. 67 C.Th. xiv.9.1.

68 Digest xxv 1 1 . 1 . 6 12 (Modestinus, about a.d. 230); others: Fragmenta iuris Vaticana 1 50 (Ulpian, about
210). 69 CILvi 31 992 = Carm. Epigr. 686.

70 Digest Const. Omnem 7 init.; cf. Liebs (1987) 124b, 195—220, 246—82.

71 Collinet (1925); cf. Liebs (1976) 3 5 6£., Waldstein (1980) 251b n. 64. 72 Collinet (1925) 167—83.

73 Agathias, Hist. 11.1 5.2— 4; Scheltema (1970) 6if. 74 Huschkei?/#/. (1927) 515— 43; Berger (1958a).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

254 9 - r oman law

The leading jurists of the sixth century called them yjpajes, o t rijas
OLKOvp,evrjS SiSaoKaXoL or oi empaveoTaToi SiSdcwaAoi. This shows
that they looked up to them and claimed less importance for themselves.
In Beirut in that period there were Leontius, Dorotheus, Anatolius,
Thalelaeus, Julian (until he moved to Constantinople) and Stephanus. 75

The course of study lasted live years, the academic year running from
early autumn to early summer. The first year was based on the Institutes of
Gaius together with four Him singulares (in fact, parts of longer works of
LTlpian or Paul) on dowry, guardianship, wills and legacies. The students
were called dupondii. In the second year they became edictales, and they then
dealt with sources of law and the structure of the courts, together with
some civil procedure, property, delict and, above all, contract. This study
was based on the high classical commentaries on the edict, especially that
of LTlpian. In the third year property, delict and contract were studied in
great depth, using a selection (eight out of nineteen books) of the opinions
of Papinian ( Digesta response i ) . The year began with the celebration of a feast
in honour of Papinian, and the third-year students were called Papinianistae.
In the fourth year, in which the students were called Aurai, the responsa of
Paul served as the foundation for the analysis of complex cases. 76 In the
fifth year the imperial constitutions were read.

Law teaching in Constantinople began later. Professors paid from the
public purse were established only in 42 5 . As in Beirut, there were then two
chairs, which were confirmed in 529 and 5 34 - 77 The restructuring of legal
education in 5 3 3 was directed to eight teachers of law, but that does not
mean that the establishment in both schools had been doubled, since the
codification perhaps required assistants, or here too there may have been
supemumerarii , 78 From the fifth century we know of Leontius and Erotius
and, from the sixth, Theophilus, Cratinus and Julian. 0 The curriculum was
the same as in Beirut. After Justinian’s death in 5 65 the overstretched exche-
quer was compelled to make many reductions in its commitments. As a
result the expensive professoriate was abolished, and legal education was
simplified and put in the hands of practitioners on a part-time basis. 80

Private teaching of law was carried on in the east until 5 3 3 in Athens,
Caesarea in Palestine and in Alexandria, but was then forbidden by
Justinian. 81 In the west it is evidenced in fifth-century Narbonne. The fact
that the town was incorporated into the Visigothic kingdom in 462 evidently

75 A.nthologia Graeca xvi-32b; CJ 1. 17.2.9; cf. Kruger (1912) 408, 410 n. 26; van der Wal and Lokin
(1985) 41—2; Berger (1958); PLRE in 773 s.v. Leontius 1, and PLRE n 772 s.v. Leontius 22 (confusing
different people). 76 Digest Const. Omnem 1— 5 ; cf. Inst. Const. Imperatoriam 3 ; Zach. Life of Severus intro.

77 C. 7 A xiv.9. 3.1 = 67x1.19.1.4. 78 Scheltema (1970) 3f.

79 C.Th. vi. 21. 1 (a.d. 425); 1. 1.6. 2 (a.d. 435); CJ 1. 17 .2.9; Anthologia Graeca xvi-32b; Hanel (1 873) pp.
xxxvn, xxxixf.; Liebs (1987) 220—46; PLRE n 669 s.v. Leontius 7.

80 Scheltema (1970) 8f.; Pieler (1978) 429b; van der Wal and Lokin (1985) 5 5—8.

81 Digest Const. Omnem 7. Athens: Malalas p. 451.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LEGAL LITERATURE

255

did not have any adverse effect. 82 Law teaching presumably survived even
the fateful year 507. In Lyons law may also have been taught, at least in the
Burgundian period: 83 legal manuscripts suggest significant activity, since a
fifth- or sixth-century copy of the Codex Theodosianus, a late-sixth- or early-
seventh-century Theodosian manuscript, and the seventh-century manu-
script, now divided between St Petersburg and Berlin, which contains
decisions of a Gallic council, the Notitia Galliarum, a papal letter and the
Constitutiones Sirmondianae , all probably originated in Lyons. 84 In Carthage,
too, it is probable that law was taught in the third and fourth centuries.
Presumably there was one paid teacher endowed by the town itself, his post
perhaps surviving into the period of the Vandals. 85

VI. LEGAL LITERATURE

In the fifth and sixth centuries there was a modest output of legal writing,
mostly in Greek. 86 In 430 there appeared a private collection of imperial
enactments relating to ecclesiastical law, the so-called Constitutiones
Sirmondianae. This probably emanated from Gaul. 87 Also from Gaul, in 445 ,
comes the so-called Consultatio veteris cuiusdam iurisconsulti, a collection of
authorities on the theme of settlement from the pseudo-Pauline Sententiae
and from the codices of imperial constitutions, which was put together for
use in a lawsuit. 88 A papyrus of the fifth or possibly the fourth century con-
tains the remains of a Greek collection of Latin technical terms, the so-
called Collectio definitionum . The Beirut teacher Anatolius also composed a
dialogue with a student in the sixth century. 89 To the fifth or sixth century
or even later belongs The Taws and Customs of Palestine of Julian of Ascalon,
a collection of authorities relating to the law of building in Palestine. It sur-
vives only in fragments. 90 Of similar provenance is The Taws of the Christian
and fust Kings, the so-called Sententiae Sjriacae, which is an unsystematic col-
lection of 102 short propositions on diverse subjects taken by their
unknown author mostly from constitutions of Diocletian, but also from
the Pauli Sententiae, occasionally from constitutions of Constantine and at

82 Sid. Ap. Carm . xxm.446— 54, 464—74; Ep. 11.13.1.

83 Sid. Ap. Ep. v.5 to Syagrius a.d. 469; also 1.3; v.17.2 for Filimatius. Liebs (1987) i6if. for legal
work at Lyons.

84 Parisinus 9643, CLA 591; Vaticanus reginae 886, CLA no; Berolinensis Philipps 1745, formerly
the Cathedral Library of Lyons, CLA 1061.

85 Liebs (1993) 19b, 119; Halban (1899) 11.71— 7; Wolff (1936) 398-420, esp. 417.

86 Heimbach (1868); Kruger (1912) 361—5, 406—15; Wenger (1953) 549—53, 681-92; Scheltema
(1970); Pieler (1978) 341—428; van der Wal and Lokin (1985) 20—62, 121—30.

87 Ed. by Mommsen, in Cod. Theod. pp. 907—21; cf. Liebs (1993) 109—14.

88 Ed. by Kruger (1890) 199—220; Huschke etal. (1927) 485—514; cf. Schindler (1962); Wieacker (1955)
92, no— 14; Gaudemet (1979a) 84. On the dating: Liebs (1993) 142 n. 52.

89 Pieler (1978) 390. Collectio definitionum , ed. Arangio-Ruiz, PSI 1348. Cf. Schulz (1953) 308; Liebs

(1971) 87—8. 90 Cf. Nicole (1893) 65—75; Ferrini (1929); Saliou (1996).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

256

9. ROMAN LAW

least twice, towards the end, from constitutions of Leo. There survives only
a Syriac translation of what was evidently in origin a Greek text.

Similarly, it is only through Syriac, Arab, Armenian and Coptic transla-
tions of the Greek original that we know the so-called Syro-Romano Law
Book, a supposed collection of constitutions of Constantine, Theodosius
and Leo. The author is unknown. It contained a comprehensive collection
of constitutions of the fourth and fifth centuries up to 472, matched up
with short extracts from juristic writing too — 130 items in all, covering
various subjects. It also belongs to the late fifth or early sixth century. 91 The
De actionibus, a small book in Greek, similarly anonymous, collects forty-
three short opinions concerning the claims that could be made on different
facts. It dates at the earliest from Justinian’s time and, like the other items
already mentioned, was undoubtedly directed at the practitioner. 92

There were also teaching materials which for the most part were not
intended for publication. (The Consultatio was also probably not so
intended.) Among these are the many commentaries on the texts studied
in the curriculum, from juristic writings, collections of constitutions or the
volumes of Justinian’s corpus iuris. Our knowledge of this class of literature
is sparse and comes mostly from schools in the west teaching in Latin. Thus
the Lex Romana Visigothorum contains a much abbreviated paraphrase of
the Institutes of Gaius, the Liber Gaii? 1 ’ It stems from teaching-activity in
about 460, presumably in Narbonne. Roughly to the same time and place
belong the Interpretationes to the pseudo-Pauline Pauli Sententiae, also pre-
served in the Visigothic Lex Romana? 11 ' With these also stand the commen-
taries on an extract from the Codex Gregorianus and a very short piece of the
Hermogenianus , 95 and, most important, that on the Theodosianus 96 and the
post-Theodosian Novels ? 1

By contrast, from Sicily or northern Italy come the so-called Antiqua sum-
maria, a thin work on the full Theodosianus from the later fifth century. The
second half survives. 98 From the school in Rome in 545 some observations
on Justinian’s Institutes for a first-year course, the so-called Turin gloss. 99
From the same source come, about 560, the so-called Paratitla to Julian’s
epitome of the Novels, giving short accounts of the changes which
Justinian’s novels introduced. This comes from a course on the Novels based

91 Bruns and Sachau (1880) (the German translation is no longer satisfactory); Sachau (1907). Cf.
Selb (1964), (1965); Kaufhold (1966); Voobus (1972), (1975); Memmer (1990). Sent. Syr.: Selb (1990).

92 Sitzia (1973), with Simon’s review (1975).

93 Ed. Hanel (1849) 3 T 4 — 37 > Kiibler in Huschke et al. (1927 ) 395—431. Cf. Archi (1937), with Nelson
(1995), review of Archi.

94 Ed. Hanel (1849) 338-444; Kaser and Schwarz (1956); cf. Schellenberg (1965).

95 Ed. Hanel (1849) 444— 51; Kruger et al. (1890) 221—35; cf- Kreuter (1993).

96 Ed. Mommsen, in Cod. Theod. 97 Ed. Meyer (1905).

98 Ed. Manenti (1887) 257—88; (1888) 141—57; (1889) 203— 31 1. New edn Sirks (1996b). Cf. Liebs
(1987) 177—88; Sirks (1991) 247—50, 345—50, 38 o£, 416—20; Sirks (1996c).

99 Ed. Kruger (1868) 44—78; Alberti (1933); cf. Liebs (1987) 195—220.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LEGAL LITERATURE

2 57

on the Epitome Juliani , 100 Finally from late-sixth-century Rome come the
Glossae, which are later summaries of Julian’s Epitome giving brief accounts
of the contents of his chapters . 101

A first-year course in Alexandria based on the Institutes of Gaius may
have been the source of the Greek marginal comments on the fourth-
century Florentine fragments of the Institutes found in Antinoe in Egypt . 102 And
a second-semester course in Alexandria or Beirut on dowry and guardian-
ship based on Ulpian’s Ad Sabinum lihri (books 31— 6 a on dowry, 3 6 b— 40A
on guardianship) is the source of the Sinaitic scholia from the middle of the
fifth century. These form part of a detailed and learned exposition of
books 35—9 of Ulpian’s work by an unknown teacher and another called
Sab . . , 103 This Sab . . . had also discussed legacies, which were studied at
the end of the first year . 104 A third-year course based on Papinian’s responsa
in Alexandria in about 500 accounts for the scholia to the Berlin and Paris
fragments of book 5 discovered in Egypt . 105

Justinian’s reformed curriculum yields, from courses in Constantinople:
the paraphrase of the Institutes by Theophilus, which was aimed at begin-
ners in their first year and survives in full ; 106 expositions of the first nine-
teen books of the Digest by Theophilus and presumably similar expositions
of the Digest by Kobidas , 107 aimed at the courses for the end of the first
year and the two following years of the curriculum; Julian’s Collectio , a
unique text from teaching based on the Codex, and the Veronese scholia to
the Codex, both directed to the fifth year ; 108 to the courses at the close of
the fifth year belong Julian’s Latin and Greek explanations of Justinian’s
Novels and his De Consiliariis Dictatum, which offers advice to those complet-
ing their studies . 109 From the corresponding activity in Beirut come the
diverse expositions of Digest text's, from Dorotheus (soon after 542), Isidore
and Stephanus , 110 from whom we have also the meagre remains of his lec-
tures on the Codex, supplemented with rather more from Thalelaeus,
Isidore and Anatolius . 1 11 To one or other of these leading schools must also

100 Ed. van der Wal (1985) 102—37; Liebs (1987) 246—59; and cf. ibid. 259-64.

101 Hanel (1873) 208—17. Cf. Liebs (1987) 269—73.

102 Ed. Arangio-Ruiz, PSI 1182 ( CLA 292) 6—17; Levy (1934) 262—4, in the footnotes. Cf. Nelson
(1981) 63 f. and Nelson and Manthe (1999) 7—9 and 547—9.

103 Ed. Kruger et al. (1890) 265—82; Huschke etal. (1927 ) 461—84. Cf. Schulz (195 3) 325—6.

104 P.Ryl. 475, 1. 16. Cf. Wenger (1953) 627—8.

105 Ed. Kruger et al. (1890) 288—91, in the footnotes; CPA 1037 .

106 Ed. Ferrini (1884—97). Cf. Scheltema (1970) 17— 21; Nelson (1981) 267—93; van der Wal and Lokin

(1985) 4of., 125. 107 Cf. Scheltema (1970) 30b; Scheltema (1966).

108 Ed. Zachariae von Lingenthal (1873) 313—55; cf. Scheltema (1962) 252b; CPA 513. Collectio ed.
Hanel 1873: 2oif.; cf. Liebs 1987: 244—6.

109 Dictatum ed. Hanel (1 873) 198—201; cf. Liebs (1987) 235—44. Greek course, ed. Simon et al. (1977).
Latin courses, ed. Hanel (1 873) 21—177, 69—146 earlier footnotes ( lemmata ), 178—84; cf. Scheltema (1970)
47—60; Liebs (1987) 220—34.

110 Wenger (1953) 686; Pieler (1978) 422. Scheltema (1970) 24—30; Simon et al. (1979).

111 Scheltema (1970) 32—42; van der Wal and Lokin (1985) 42—4, i25f. Pieler (1978) 423—4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

258 9- roman law

belong the lectures on the Digest by Cyrillus and an earlier anonymous
writer. 112 Theodorus Scholasticus from Hermopolis, who was a leading
advocate, left comments on the Codex and Novels in the post-Justinianic
period. He probably lectured in Constantinople on a part-time basis. 113

All these texts on Justinian’s corpus, presumably dictated to students by
the lecturer, were short and modest, some of them very short. They do not
compare with the wealth of learning in the Sinaitic scholia, which make many
citations of classical juristic literature and imperial constitutions. Justinian
had indeed forbidden recourse to the earlier materials, as well as criticism
of his own. In particular he had outlawed commentaries and allowed only
literal translations ( Kara TroSas), brief surveys of contents ( indices ) and
observations on passages relevant to a given title (jrapdTiTXa ) or a given
text ( 'jraparroixTral or rrapaypaffial). The Byzantine lawyers did not keep
strictly within these constraints. Many indices are free restatements of the
texts, and numerous expositions, especially those of Stephanus, are
nothing if not commentaries based on the familiar blend of doctrine and
exegesis.

VII. CONTINUITY, VULGARIZATION, CLASSICISM

The development of the law in the Roman empire between 425 and 600 did
not follow a simple linear path. At the beginning of the period there was a
phase in which the main task was to unite the law inherited from the clas-
sical past with the more recent imperial law. This phase is represented in
the west by the enactment relating to the sources of law and in the east by
the Codex Theodosianus, and it reflects the presence once again of increasing
numbers of jurists in the administration. That then leads to a remarkable
improvement in the level of legal science, especially in Beirut but also in
Constantinople, Rome and Narbonne.

The level of legal scholarship finally presented Justinian with the oppor-
tunity to overhaul and restore the law in all its aspects. And that mighty
project was in turn bound to enhance the role of law in social life. The finds
of papyri in Egypt show that documents recording legal transactions were
few and far between in the fifth century but that the number once again
increased greatly in the sixth, especially from the beginning of Justinian’s
reign. After his death the evidence of dynamic legal science falls back, as
also of the further advancement of the law and of individuals having
recourse to law to resolve their disputes.

Between the 1920s and the 1960s the view was taken, especially among
German scholars, that long before the collapse of the western empire into

112 Sontis (1937). New evidence ed. Burgmann (1986).

113 Pieler (1978) 436; van der Wal and Lokin (1985) 3 7 F. . 128F

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONTINUITY, VULGARIZATION, CLASSICISM 259

competing barbarian kingdoms the law had become vulgarized, i.e.
simplified and popularized by local practice without positive enactment.
On this view, the process of vulgarization went back to the early fourth or
even to the late third century, ran throughout the empire and infected even
the central administration and legal pronouncements emanating from the
emperor. Only the east was able in the fifth century to free itself from this
deterioration by a classicizing return to the law and legal science of the
principate. 114 Not everyone was convinced by this diagnosis: Italian
Romanists especially resisted it. But in the meantime it seemed as though
Ernst Levy and Max Kaser had looked for and found vulgarization in every
quarter. 115 Vulgarization therefore became a convenient means of explain-
ing every imaginable difficulty.

It is undeniable that there were some breaches with received tradition.
For example, in the early fourth century Constantine broke with many legal
principles long regarded as sacrosanct. Nevertheless, the received legal tra-
dition proved to be very strong, and the necessity of keeping in contact
with it and developing the law from it could not be denied. Even under
Constantine and in the middle and late fourth century, and also in the fifth,
this is so evident that it is no longer possible to speak of a collapse of the
legal tradition. This is true even in the west throughout the period in which
the emperor remained at the head of the legal system, continually develop-
ing the law by interpretative and legislative pronouncements. Such utter-
ances still had authority for Romans now living under federated Germanic
kingdoms such as the Visigothic and Burgundian kingdoms, and even for
those under the wholly independent Vandal rulers. As this control at the
top first weakened in the 460s and 470s and then fell away altogether, pro-
vincial peculiarities and simplifications, already numerous, began to domi-
nate. The communities of Romans were now thrown back on themselves,
and the application of Roman law was invaded by vulgarizing tendencies. 1 16
However, even in the sixth century the aspiration of the Roman popula-
tion throughout the west to continue in the inherited tradition of Roman
law was not extinguished.

114 Levy (1963a) 1.161—320; Levy (1945), (1951), (1956); Wieacker (1955), (1964); Kaser (1967)
1283—304; Kaser (1975) 11.

115 Critical: Wieacker (1983b) 232-8; Wieacker (1955) 241—54; Simon (1978) 154—74; Voss (1982);

Kreuter (1993). 116 Vandals: Courtois etal (1952); cf. Wolff (1936) 398—420; Wessel (2000).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 10

LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS BETWEEN
THE FIFTH AND THE SEVENTH CENTURY

T. M. CHARLES-EDWARDS

Anyone seeking to write an account of law in the western kingdoms
labours under two great difficulties . 1 The student of Roman law can find
comfort in the knowledge that his legal tradition was the creation of a polit-
ical elite which prided itself upon its literary accomplishments. It was both
a tool of government and one of the proudest manifestations of a literate
culture . 2 In the post- and non-Roman kingdoms, such comfortable assu-
rance is only forthcoming in modest portions. The study of Roman law
rests upon rich materials that have been analysed by some of the best minds
of every generation since, in the eleventh century, Irnerius set out to teach
the law of Justinian at Bologna. The written materials for a history of law
in the western kingdoms are, however, much patchier and their relationship
to the practice of law more uncertain . 3

The second great difficulty is partly a consequence of the first: the almost
irresistible temptation to judge all other laws in late antiquity by their rela-
tionship to Roman law. Moreover, this temptation may take a particularly
pernicious form if one is induced to think of Roman law as, in some sense,
‘modern’ in outlook, so that the other laws can then be judged as relatively
modern or primitive according to how closely they resembled Roman law.
One form of this dangerous preoccupation is the ancient conception —
already well expressed, for his own purposes, by Cassiodorus — of the culture
of Europe as a fruitful mixture of Roman and Germanic (or Gothic). This
imposes upon the subject an over-simple dichotomy: the scholar is prompted
to scrutinize the texts for manifestations either of Roman or of Germanic
legal tradition. According to his particular preference, or those of his politi-
cal masters, he may be prone to exaggerate either the one or the other.

Although this traditional approach has considerable elements of truth
— more, perhaps, than its opponents allow — it ignores several crucial

1 In this chapter ‘Law’ with an upper-case initial letter will refer to a text of law; thus Salic law is the
law of the Salian Franks whether written or unwritten, but Salic Law is the text known as Pactus Legis
Salicae. I have been much stimulated, not always in directions of which they would approve, by the con-
versation and the written work of Ian Wood and Patrick Wormald.

2 When the slave Andarchius of Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.46 is encouraged by his senatorial master, Felix,

in their joint literary pursuits, these are specified as ‘the works of Virgil, the books of the Theodosian
Law and arithmetic’. 3 Wormald (1977); Nehlsen (1977 ).

260

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS l6l

considerations. One assumption which needs to be questioned is that the
Roman empire desired or, if it did desire, was able to impose its law in a
complete and thoroughgoing fashion upon all its provinces. In the west
we do not have the evidence provided by Egyptian papyri to demonstrate
that provincial law might take a form very different from that prescribed
by Roman jurists and emperors . 4 The last fifty years have seen notable
studies showing that late Roman law was not identical with that taught by
the great jurists, but this has been done by developing the notion of a
vulgar as opposed to a classical Roman law. Moreover, the vulgarisms
have not been revealed by an examination of legal practice in remote
regions of the empire but by a close reading of the Theodosian Code.
Emperors, rather than mere provincials, were the prime vulgarizers . 5 It is,
no doubt, very uncertain how much weight one can put on evidence from
a much later period, but one body of evidence does at least raise serious
questions about what went on among those remote western provincials.
Welsh (earlier called British) law is mainly known from texts of the twelfth
and thirteenth centuries ; 6 yet it was the law of a people whose ancestors
had formed part of the population of a Roman province, and a people,
moreover, which had escaped being subsumed into a kingdom founded
by barbarians from beyond the Roman frontier. Admittedly Gildas
remarks that they superficially accepted Roman law, harbouring inner
resentment, but he implies that they accepted it none the less . 7 One might
suppose that the law inherited by the Britons should have been a debased
descendant of Roman law; moreover, there are reasons for thinking that
elements of Roman law did indeed survive the end of Roman power in
Britain ; 8 yet by the twelfth century its resemblances to Irish law were far
more obvious than was any debt to Rome; they underline what Gildas
described as the superficial nature of their adherence to Roman law . 9 If
we allow that legal traditions may endure for centuries — so that they are
not simply remade with each generation — Welsh medieval law can be used
to give weight to the suggestion that, at least in one part of one western
province, what survived Rome was remarkably un-Roman. Already in the
sixth century Venantius Fortunatus could contrast the iura Britannica
imported to Armorica from Britain with publica iura , 10 A study of law in
the western kingdoms must, therefore, extend all the way from
Theoderic’s Ravenna to the western parts of Britain and over the Irish

4 On Egypt, Jolowicz and Nicholas (1972) 405—6.

5 Levy (1951) 29—34 on Constantine and the distinction between dominium and possessio; but see above,
pp. 25 8—9, for a critique of Levy’s views.

6 Jenkins (1986) provides an excellent translation and commentary on some Welsh legal texts;
Charles-Edwards (1989) gives a brief survey of the texts. 7 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae c. 5.

8 Davies (1982). 9 For some examples, see Binchy (1956).

10 Venantius Fortunatus, Opera Poetica ed. Leo, MGH AA iv.i (Berlin, 1881), in. 5, praising Felix,
bishop of Nantes.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

262

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Sea. The variations in degrees of romanitas prevailing before a single bar-
barian king established his throne on the soil of the empire must not be
forgotten.

I. LAW AND ETHNIC IDENTITY

The notion that a law may endure as a distinct tradition within, and long
after, the empire, from the Iron Age to the late Middle Ages, runs counter
to one strong tendency in contemporary scholarship. As a reaction against
the notion of a single ‘Germanic’ cultural tradition, analogous to the family
of Germanic languages, scholars have argued that the peoples of early
medieval Europe were political entities created out of varied elements by
particular historical circumstances. A people, gens, of this period was, par-
adoxically, often most obviously revealed to be a political creation by the
origin-legends that traced it back into the remote past. Moreover, as the
Lombard king Rothari’s Prologue to his Edict illustrates, a conception of a
legal tradition could be entwined with just such an origin-legend: he
brought together a conception of Lombard legal tradition, a king-list
extending back long before the migration into Italy, his own genealogy and
a brief note on the Lombard occupation of Italian land . 11 In the shorter
Prologue to the Salic Law, usually dated to the last third of the sixth century,
we even have a specifically legal origin-legend, a story to show what Salic
law should be by telling how it came into existence. Just as the origin-legend
of a people might need to pay heed to the disparate elements that made up
its population, so also, to take one example, Burgundian law might be much
less purely Burgundian than a first reading might lead one to suppose . 12

There is, then, a possible gap between perception and reality arising from
two truths — namely, that laws were often conceived as the laws of distinct
peoples and that ethnic identity was especially fluid during the migration
period. There is a further problem in that it was possible for the written law
of one people to borrow extensively from that of another. An extreme
example, from after our period, is the wholesale borrowing from the fifth-
century Code of Euric into the eighth-century Law of the Bavarians, the
Bavarians being a leading example of an ethnic identity constructed in our
period . 13

The link between ethnic identity and the possession of a distinct law
varied greatly in strength. From the end of our period, both from within and
from the periphery of the Frankish kingdoms, come examples of laws which
did not claim to be the laws of a gens. The Ribuarian Law is the law of a duchy

11 Edictus Rothari Pref. (ed. Beyerle (1962) 16—17).

12 For example, Liber Constitutionum 2.1 (ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg . , MGH Leg. 1, 11.1 (Hanover, 1 892), p.

42): c Si quis hominem ingenuum ex populo nostro cuiuslibet nationis aut servum regis, nadone dun-
taxat barbarum, occidere damnabili ausu praesumpserit . . .’ 13 See esp. Zeumer (1898).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EDICTS AND JUDGEMENTS

263

within Austrasia, one division of one Frankish Regnum} A MthcVaexhx’?, Law
became the first document of Kentish law, but the Cantware were the people
of Kent, the land of a former British civitas, the Cantii; for some purposes
they might be anxious to assert their kinship with the Jutes of the Isle of
Wight and Hampshire, but they called their law Kentish, not Jutish . 15 It is
approximately true that the further south we go in western Europe the more
the Laws are Roman in construction and language but ethnic in scope.

Although the effects of migration upon conceptions and formulations
of law might be considerable, there are cases in which they appear to have
had no effect whatsoever. In Ireland we have a legal tradition from outside
the empire: although some Irish had settled in Britain, their first written
laws did not come from the colonies but from the homeland . 16 In this case,
law was central to the conception of the Irish as one people, but in a quite
different way from the relationship of law and ethnic identity in southern
Europe, for the law transcended the limits of any one kingdom.
Admittedly, the sense of Irish national identity was probably strengthened
by the process of migration and conquest. Yet the results are seen in the
homeland rather than in Irish colonies in Britain.

For Rothari, however, the Lombards’ entry into Italy may have recalled
the people of Israel entering the Promised Land; as that migration saw the
foundation of the Law of Moses, so Rothari considered it his duty to
correct current legal practice just as all previous kings had done in their day,
including Alboin, who led the Lombards into Italy ‘by divine power’ just as
Rothari led them into Liguria in the very year in which he promulgated his
edict . 17 There was, then, great variety in the historical context of law in the
period between the fifth and the seventh century. Some laws may indeed
have undergone a major reshaping; yet the tradition was not necessarily
always broken, as illustrated by the law of one people, some of whom were
settled in the west and whose ancient traditions were, as we have seen, of
peculiar interest to migrating peoples: the Jews . 18

II. EDICTS AND JUDGEMENTS

In order to grasp the wide variety of law, it is helpful to extend the scope
of the enquiry into the seventh century; in that way one can include the ear-
liest European laws preserved in the vernacular, those from England and
Ireland. A broad classification of the material (leaving aside such texts as

14 Ewig (1976) 1.462—71.

15 Bede, HE 1.15; iv. 16/14. For examples of Cantware in the laws, see Hlothhere and Eadric,
Prologue, 16; Wihtred, Prol. For drthelberht’s Law see now Wormald (1995).

16 Cf. the preoccupation with Tara and Patrick shown by Corns Bescnai, ed. Binchy (1979) 527.14—28;
cf. Charles-Edwards and Kelly (1983) §§31—3 and Di Chetharslicht Athgabala, ed. Binchy (1979) 356.5—6.
Kelly (1988) surveys the contents of the early Irish laws. 17 Edictus Rothari Prologue.

18 Cf. Edictum Theodorici c. 143, ed. Baviera 11.708.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

264

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

the Formulae and the Edictum Theodorici ) will give us provisional guidance.
There are four main types:

1 Manuals of instruction written in the vernacular by judges for aspirant
judges. This category is characteristic of Ireland.

2 Collections of decrees written in the vernacular, without any overt sub-
divisions marked by ‘titles’ — i.e. headings that group together a series of
decrees. This type is found in Kent, and later elsewhere in England.

3 Collections of decrees written in Latin and with titles, but with numer-
ous vernacular glosses, and also vernacular terms given Latin inflexions.
This type is exemplified by the Pactus Legis Salicae.

4 Collections of decrees written in Latin with titles, with some vernacular
terms but without vernacular glosses. This category is exemplified by the
Fiber Constitutionum of the Burgundians, promulgated in 517 by king
Sigismund.

As can easily be seen, these types are largely progressive — for example, in
the amount of vernacular allowed into the text; and they also show varia-
tion from north to south. They suggest, as we shall see, that the influence
of Roman models declined as one moved away from the Mediterranean. I
shall follow this suggestion by organizing my account of the different Laws
geographically, beginning in the north and proceeding southwards towards
the Mediterranean. One reason why this is the best approach is that the date
of some crucial texts is debatable. For that reason a chronological approach
will tend to make too many assumptions.

In order to understand a law from the inside, it is necessary to grasp the
central ideas used by legislator, judge and litigant alike. It is here, rather than
in the details of any given rule, that it may be possible to make the connec-
tion between lawbook and law as it functioned in society. A good place to
begin is with the construction of the individual decree in the Frankish sphere
of influence. That will make it possible both to analyse the structure of texts
and also to gain some notion of the way the law was used in court. Here it is
particularly appropriate to proceed from north to south: since iEthelberht’s
Law and those of his seventh-century successors as kings of Kent were in
the vernacular, they offer a better insight into the terms used in court and
council than can be gained by analysing only Latin texts. 19 Bede also offers
an interesting account of iEthelberht’s Law, while the Law of Hlothhere and
Eadric (673—85) has a prologue which exhibits the legislators’ stance towards
their predecessors. Bede represents iEthelberht’s law-making as a royal activ-
ity on behalf of his people, the Cantware, by whom the laws were observed,
Bede says, up to the time at which he was writing. 2 " The laws themselves are

19 For the inclusion of zFlthelberth’s Kent within the Frankish sphere, see Wood (1983) and (1992).

20 Bede, HE 11. 5 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EDICTS AND JUDGEMENTS

265

called, in a difficult phrase, decreta iudiciorum, literally ‘decrees of judgements’.
What Bede seems to be doing is combining two ideas which we would expect
to be kept quite separate: the edict of the lawgiver, the decretum, and the judge-
ment of the court, indicium. Plummer observed that Bede had Old English
domas, ‘dooms’, in mind when he used the word indicia, but this still leaves
unexplained the link with the other term, decreta , 21 A clue is offered by the
prologue to Hlothhere and Eadric, which declares that the two kings added
to the law (a) that their forefathers made ‘these domas that follow hereafter ’. 22
A dom is, therefore, as much a decree promulgated by a king as a judgement
which a judge, dema, might judge, demand 3 What Bede was doing with his odd
phrase, decreta iudiciorum, was to render the two aspects of the one English
word, dom, both royal decree and judge’s verdict. One may compare the way
in which Gregory of Tours writes of ‘the judges’ promulgating an ‘edict’
concerning a tine for late appearance on a military expedition . 24

Much later, in the early tenth century, it would also be possible to use the
word domboc — ‘doom-book’ — for Alfred’s lawbook, which provided the
fundamental text to which later kings added further decrees, very much as
iEthelberht’s Law seems to have been the fundamental text for seventh-
century Kent. Such notions of a royal lawbook — a book of domas which
might be compared on the one hand with the Burgundian Liber
Constitutionum, ‘The Book of Decrees’, and on the other with the Visigothic
Liber Iudiciorum, ‘The Book of Judgements’ — cannot, however, be imported
into seventh-century Kent without severe qualification, for Wihtred, at the
end of the century, could speak of boca dom, without further qualification,
to refer to a rule in books of church law . 25 Wihtred’s law was carefully dated
and situated in a place, with its authority buttressed by a list of great men
who had met together on that occasion — all this going to show that it was
primarily the law promulgated in a royal assembly. The same contrast
between oral and written is part of contemporary perceptions of Irish law:
the ‘law of the written word’ is a term for ecclesiastical law . 26

Bede’s decreta iudiciorum may therefore be compared with the notion,
implicit in Hlothhere and Eadric’s Law, that they were promulgating domas
which were also to be the domas pronounced by judges, deman. Both suggest
an intimate relationship between royal legislator and local judge. Yet Bede
also says, in a much-discussed phrase, that iEthelberht was legislating

21 In the comment on this passage in his edn, Baedae Opera Historica 11.87.

22 Liebermann, Geset^e, p. 9. dE, like riht, is collective, ‘law as a whole’, and thus entirely distinct from
dom, ‘decree, judgement, fame’. The derived sense of ‘fame’, namely the judgement of contemporaries
and later generations upon a person, is already attested in Gothic doms\ Skeireins , ed. W. Streitberg, Die
Gotische Bibel, 4th edn (Heidelberg, 1965) 459, 467 (11.17, vi.16).

23 Cf. Cantwara deeman, Hlothhere and Eadric, c. 8, ed. Liebermann, Geset^e p. 10.

24 Greg. Tur. Hist, vii.42. 25 Wihtred, c. 5, ed. Liebermann, Geset^e, 1.12.

26 Corpus Iuris Hibernici ed. Binchy, p. 346; also ed. and trans. R. Thurneysen, ‘Aus dem irischen Recht,
IV’, Zeitschrift fur celtische Philologie 16 (1927) 175.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

z66

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

‘according to exempla of the Romans’, and this has suggested to some that
the conception of the king as legislator was not already traditional in
fEthelberht’s time; on this view, fEthelberht’s Law was a conscious attempt
to adopt, on a small scale, the legislative role of an emperor. According to
Wallace-Hadrill, fEthelberht was putting into writing ‘just that fraction of
custom that seemed enough to satisfy royal pride in legislation ’. 27 What was
promulgated, on this view, was not so much the particular dom — that was
already customary — but an image of a royal lawgiver.

This is certainly not what Bede meant to convey, for he declares that
fEthelberht promulgated his laws for the sake of his people and also that
the laws were observed by them up to Bede’s own day. It is also rendered
unlikely by the particular situation that Bede has in mind. According to him,
fEthelberht’s laws were enacted with the advice of his wise men. This term,
sapientes, recurs in Bede’s account of the Northumbrian royal council at
which Edwin and his sapientes debated whether or not the king and his
councillors should, all together, accept the Christian faith. What Bede had
in mind was the situation also implied by the late-seventh-century pro-
logues to the laws of Wihtred and of Ine . 28 Although in the former the
council is said to make the laws, while in the latter the king makes them with
the advice of his wise men, both are probably alternative descriptions of
the one process: the king took the advice of his councillors and then made
a declaration, more or less formal, of his decision, to which they gave their
assent . 29 The same process of decision-making lies behind early English
charters and explains why they could be described by Bede both as cartae
and as royal decrees promulgated in a council . 311

The process of legislation was, therefore, oral. For kings to satisfy royal
pride in legislation it was not necessary that those laws should be commit-
ted to writing . 31 What did matter was that the political elite should put their
collective weight behind legislation promulgated by the king with their
advice and in their presence. Writing the law down, if it happened at all,
was an entirely secondary matter; for precisely the same reason, writing a
charter was a secondary matter. This pattern of legislative action provides
a context in which the concept of a dom, at once edict and judicial verdict,
makes complete sense. As edict, the dom is a decree promulgated by the king
in his council; as judgement, it is the decision promulgated by judge or
judges in the court.

The same pattern is exemplified among the Franks by the decrees of
Childebert II, promulgated at the annual assembly on i March /’ 2 The extant

27 Wallace-Hadrill (1971) 37 . 28 Ed. Liebermann, Geset^e 1.12, 88.

29 Cf. Ganshof (1961) 35—40, 52—62.

30 Bede, Epistola ad Ecgberhtum cc. 12, 13, 17, ed. Plummer, Baedae Opera Historica 1.41 5—21.

31 The legislation of Earconberht, mentioned by Bede, HE in. 8, may never have been written.

32 Pactus Eegis Salicae ed. Eckhardt (1962) 267—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EDICTS AND JUDGEMENTS

267

decrees only begin nearly twenty years after Childebert’s accession — that is,
after the death of Guntram in 593, when Childebert had succeeded his
uncle as the dominant ruler of the Franks. 33 From then until his own death
in 5 96, every spring saw legislation which is not only precisely dated but sit-
uated in a place within Childebert’s kingdom: 594 at Andernach, 595 at
Maastricht and 596 at Cologne. Childebert also makes it clear both that he
has discussed the issues with his nobles and that he himself is promulgat-
ing the outcome. So the second decree at Andernach in 5 94 begins with an
awkward combination of the two elements, noble counsel and royal prom-
ulgation:

Subsequently, however, it is agreed with our lender, we have decreed . . .

The same pattern is also attested among the Burgundians. 34

It may even be behind full-scale codes. Rothari’s Edict was promulgated
in 643, and the elaborate dating clause which opens the text places the
promulgation at the royal palace in Pavia. ’ 5 The year 643 saw a major
Lombard campaign which resulted in the conquest of Liguria, hitherto a
Roman province; 36 and it has very plausibly been suggested that Rothari’s
great legislative achievement, with its reminder of the divinely providential
entry into Italy seventy-six years before, was intended as an assertion of
Lombard identity. This was coupled with royal concern for the poorer
element among the Lombards, before the campaign got under way. 37 What
may have mattered most in 643 was the way in which Rothari’s Edict was
set before the Lombard army as an expression of their solidarity as a
people, their identification with their kings and their claims to rule in Italy.
Even when it came to the practical effectiveness of individual rules of law,
royal legislation was likely to be sensitive to the political context: in the end,
it rested on the combined strength exerted by the authority of the king and
the consensus of his great men.

It is also possible to grasp how contemporaries understood the internal
structure of individual decrees. Title 57 of the Frankish Pactus Legis Salicae
is devoted to the rachinburgii, the sworn panel of men required to declare
the Salic law in judgement. They are depicted as discussing the causa which
divides the parties; and the Pactus is concerned lest the rachinburgii should
refuse to declare the law. They may, therefore, be solemnly requested by a
disputant ‘that you declare the law according to the Salic law’. The partic-
ular verdict should thus be according to the law as a whole. This suggests

33 For this reason the judgement of Eckhardt (1954) 139, that the Decretio Childeberti was solely a ter-
ritorial law for Austrasia, is open to question.

34 Constitutiones Extravagantes, xxi, ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. 119. 35 Beyerle (1962) 16.

36 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang, iv.45, e d- L. Bethmann and G. Wait2, MGH , Scriptores rerum Langobardicarum
et Italicarum y saec. HI— IX (Hanover 1878), p. 135. On the date of the campaign, see Bognetti (1966—80)
11. 3 13 n. 37 Bognetti (1966— 8b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

z68

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

the same binding together of law and judicial verdict that was implied by
the Old English word dom, but also its distinction between the individual
dom and the collective a or riht, law in general . 38 Further hints are given by
the origin-legend of Frankish Law contained in the Shorter Prologue
(usually dated to the late sixth century ). 39 Four wise men are said ‘to have
met together in three courts, malli, and to have earnestly discussed all the
starting-points of causae, and to have decreed a judgement about each, as
follows’ (and then begins the text). This tale elevates the wise men to the
exclusion of the king whom they might have counselled; but, again, it com-
bines decree and judgement in one: they decree a judgement. Apparently,
then, the individual Frankish judge is expected to follow the judgement
already decreed by the wise men — a conception which agrees with the dis-
putant’s demand that the rachinburgii declare a law (corresponding to Old
English dom ) in accordance with the Salic law (Old English a or riht). In
effect, the wise men of the Shorter Prologue are a legendary embodiment
of all that rachinburgii ought to be, but within a conception of judgement
determined by decree.

The causa is both the dispute and the complaint that brings one party to
court. A plaintiff may ‘ mallare his causa according to the laws ’. 40 In this sense
of pleading a case, mallare corresponds well to its cognate, Old English
mathelian, derived from mcethl, a court . 41 The verb, mathelian, is used in
Beowulf for making a solemn speech, and similarly mcethl itself may mean
‘speech’. The pattern of derivation (m alius — > mallare, mcethl — ■> matheliaii) and
the semantic development (‘court’— > ‘speech appropriate to a court or
assembly’) are thus closely similar in Frankish and English, though what we
have in the Frankish cases are Latinized forms. What this range of usage
suggests is that a particular linguistic register was expected in court, and
that the verb for this style of grave pleading was extended to any weighty
speech before an assembly. A causa, then, is what a disputant tries to mallare
and the rachinburgii are expected to judge . 42

The language used to describe the pleading and judgement of cases is
echoed in the structure of the individual decree. The commonest form of
a decree in the Salic Law consists of a conditional sentence:

If anyone should have done X, let him be judged liable to pay Y.

The first clause, ‘If anyone should have done X’ is a generalized form of a
causa, the statement of what has happened which forms the basis of the

38 Cf. Schmidt-Wiegand (1987).

39 PLS Prologue (pp. 2—3); Eckhardt (1954) 170—2, but Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 108 is inclined to
date it to the seventh century. 40 Pactus Legis Salicae ed. Eckhardt (1962) 105.2 (p. 261).

41 Cf. maplfrip in jEthelberht, c. 1, an medle oppe pinge, Hlothhere and Eadric, c. 8. Gothic map Us
likewise used in Mark 7.4 to translate agora (Latin forutn).

42 Causa may render sace in sacebarones etc. (cf. OE sacu).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAWBOOKS AND CODES

269

plaintiffs case. The second clause is the judgement upon the causa. The
logic of pleading and judgement implied by the principal concepts used at
the time may be simply stated (assuming that the identity of the offender is
known):

1 The plaintiff comes with a narrative of his causa.

2 The narrative is understood as an instance of a general category: ‘If
anyone does X’.

3 The rachinburgii then state the Salic law: ‘If anyone does X, then let him
pay Y’, which immediately leads to the individual liability of the defen-
dant. The general dom gives the particular verdict.

There is no reason to suppose that a typical case proceeded in quite so
expeditious a manner as this scheme suggests. What it implies, rather, is that
this process was the central thread around which argument might develop.

The standard form of decree in Lex Salica is, however, slightly different
from the last step (no. 3). The second clause goes, not ‘let him pay Y’, but
‘let him be judged liable to pay Y’. ‘Let him pay’ is the judges’ dom, addressed
to the disputants and to the court; ‘let him be judged liable to pay’ is the
legislator’s dom addressed to the judges and purporting to determine their
verdict. What we have, therefore, in the Salic Law is the legislator’s dom,
addressed to the judge, as opposed to the judge’s dom addressed to the dis-
putants. Yet the important thing is how close they are. We may take a
straightforward example: 4 ’

If someone has killed a Roman required to pay tribute (for the malloberg [= court-
hill] they are walaleodi [= Roman people]), let him be judged liable to pay 2,500
denarii which make 6 2 Vi solidi.

The only change we need in order to make this legislator’s dom into a judge’s
dom is to replace ‘let him be judged’ by ‘he is’. Moreover, in a case such as
this one there ought to be no need to prove who killed the Roman: unless
it is the much more serious offence of secret killing, dealt with elsewhere,
the killer should have admitted publicly to his action. 44 True, once guilt is
acknowledged and the court has delivered its verdict, the business of secur-
ing a settlement may only just be beginning, but such issues are not clarified
by the wording of individual decrees and will be discussed later. 45

III. LAWBOOKS AND CODES

In principle, then, there is a close link between decree and judgement: the
decree prescribes the judgement; and it does so by closely echoing the

43 PLS \\.\ 0 .

44 Compare the way in which Chramnesind placed Sichar’s body on a fence-post and set off to plead

his case before the king: Greg. Tur. Hist, ix.19. 45 Cf. Wood (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

270 IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

standard form of judgement. Matters begin to be a litde more compli-
cated, however, when we turn from the individual decree to the way in
which decrees are combined into ‘titles’. Up to now the consideration of
decrees has not presumed that such decrees were written down: the texts
have been scrutinized in order to understand what men thought law was,
and this has been done on the assumption that most law was oral and
remained oral. 46 Once units larger than the decree come into play, we have
to confront the difficult issue of written law.

In their organization of decrees into larger units, Frankish and Kentish
law part company. There are groups of related decrees infEthelberht’s Law,
but they are not marked as such by being put under separate titles. The Salic
Law, however, follows the model of the Theodosian Code; and decrees are
therefore put under titles. So, for example, the decree about the killing of a
Roman tributarius is the tenth decree under Title 41, ‘Concerning killings of
free men’.

The issue of larger textual units is all the more important because there
is nothing inherently necessary in the grouping of decrees of the kind dis-
cussed hitherto. If they were perceived as individual legislative acts,
responses at a particular place and time to circumstances of which we know
nothing, such an origin would not naturally engender any systematic organ-
ization of the material. Once such decrees had been put into written form,
they might be expected to constitute a series of separate unordered decrees.
This expectation might then lead to a further claim — namely, that just as the
titles of the Salic or the Burgundian Laws were a device borrowed from the
Theodosian Code, so too any ordering of these decrees would probably
have been a habit of mind introduced via the participation of Romans in
the compilation of barbarian laws. Such figures are indeed well attested,
notably in a letter from Sidonius Apollinaris, written about 469, mocking an
aristocrat of consular descent, Syagrius, for his cultural collaboration with
the Burgundians. 47 Syagrius had gone so far as to learn Burgundian, to play
the three-stringed lyre and to astonish the Burgundian elders by acting as a
judge, with the result that he was acclaimed by the barbarians as a new Solon
in the discussion of their laws. Similarly, it has been observed that
Childebert II’s last edict is attested by Asclepiodotus, previously a referen-
dary to Guntram, and clearly, to judge by his name, a Gallo-Roman. 48

This argument — that Roman participation was necessary before decrees
could be grouped together — is, however, difficult to reconcile with
fEthelberht’s Law, where, in spite of the absence of titles, there is consid-

46 I would not accept Wormald’s definition — (1977) 107 — of legislation as meaning ‘written decrees
by secular authority with ostensibly general application’; Nehlsen (1977) 456—65 argues against the pre-
viously widely held view that references in the texts to Lex Salica were always to a written text of Salic
Law. 47 Sid. Ap. Ep. v.5; Syagrius 3 in PLRE 11.1042.

48 See Asclepiodotus 3 and 4, PLRE in. 134.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EVOLUTION OF FRANKISH WRITTEN LAW

2 7 I

erable evidence of ordering. 49 This is achieved in three ways, in addition to
simple collocation. First, there are decrees which themselves act as virtual
titles: thus, c. 8, ‘The king’s mundbyrd [= protection] of fifty shillings’, pro-
vides a basis for cc. 9—12. Secondly, the use of the definite article and of
personal pronouns is normally to refer from one dom to another within
such a group. 5 " Finally, groups of decrees may be marked by syntactical
variation, especially a change from the dominant conditional sentence to
another construction. 51 More elaborate ordering — of one group of decrees
with another — could be achieved by ellipsis. Thus, in a series of groups
depending on decrees which act as virtual titles (‘The king’s mundbyrd . . .’;
‘the eorl’s mundbyrd . . .’, ‘the ceorl’s mundbyrd’), the middle one, specifying the
eorl’ s mundbyrd, is omitted but can be automatically supplied by anyone who
appreciates the structure of the text. fEthelberht’s Law is exceptionally
terse but also both subtle and consistent. It is, therefore, unlikely that the
Gregorian missionaries, with their recently acquired knowledge of the lan-
guage, could be responsible for the way in which the text is organized. Later
Kentish legislation is more varied in syntax; also, individual decrees are
longer and more complex — a development which may plausibly be seen as
symptomatic of a shift from oral to written modes of expression.

IV. THE EVOLUTION OF FRANKISH WRITTEN LAW

The history of the Salic Law is long and complex and, for that very reason,
instructive. Indeed, it has recently become longer and more difficult
because of the convincing argument put forward by Grierson and
Blackburn that the monetary equivalence of forty denarii to one solidus
asserted throughout the main text, but not in most of the capitularies
added at the end, is only appropriate to the early fifth century. 52 This con-
clusion creates an immediate difficulty for those who would ascribe the
main text in its original form to Clovis. The general, though not universal,
opinion has been that the earliest version, the A Recension, of the Pactus
Legis Salicae was compiled after the battle of Vouille in 507, when Clovis
defeated and killed Alaric, king of the Visigoths, and probably before
Clovis’ own death in 5 1 1 , 53

Apart from the coinage, there are three main considerations which must
form any judgement on the date of the Salic Law. First, the main text is part

49 An analysis is proposed by Wormald (1995) 971—2.

50 So hio and sio in c. 1 1; similarly, 16, 25, 46 etc.

51 The series of decrees in c. 1 are distinguished by being nominal sentences and by the instrumen-
tal use of Xllgylde etc.; the pairs cc. 70—1 and 72—3 are marked by the combination of a conditional sen-
tence and a simple sentence, the latter with a prepositional phrase doing duty for the protasis of the
conditional.

52 Grierson and Blackburn (19 86) 102—6. Capitulary V is the only one to share this equivalence.

53 Eckhard (1954) 206—7, following Brunner (1906, 1928) 1.440.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

272

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

of a collection including, in most manuscripts, the Pactus pro Tenore Pads of
Childebert I and Chlothar I, sons of Clovis, and sometimes the Decretio
Childeberti, which we have already met, a series of three annual decrees
promulgated in the last three years of Childebert II’s reign. By then he had
succeeded his uncle Guntram as the leading king of the Franks. The col-
lection does not include legislation by Guntram, nor that of Chlothar II. 34
Part, at least, of the textual tradition was Austrasian and bears comparison
with the Austrasian Letter Collection, which stretches from the time of
Clovis to the Austrasia of Childebert II. Its emphasis is on legislation
affecting all the Salian Franks, whether by the authority of a leading king or
by an agreement between two, as with the Pactus pro Tenore Pads, an agree-
ment between Childebert I and Chlothar I on measures to keep the peace.
Moreover, the collection is laid out chronologically, as what has aptly been
called code and coda: 55 in other words, the original text is initially added to
rather than revised, so that the coda is chronologically subsequent to the
code and is itself chronologically organized. Leaving aside the capitularies
in the coda, which do not bear indications of date, the entire collection, in
its Austrasian form, is as follows: (1) Pactus Legis Salicae (the code); (2) the
Pactus pro Tenore Pads (probably between 548 and 5 58, when Childebert I
and Chlothar I ruled the Franks between them); (3) the Decretio Childeberti
(594 6).

Secondly, there is a clear difference between the code and the coda in
their religious standpoints. Legal protection is given to pagan worship in
the code, but no corresponding protection to Christianity. 56 Admittedly,
the ‘sacred gelded boar’ which is the subject of the Salic Law’s attention is
still there in the K Recension, revised after Charlemagne’s imperial corona-
tion. 57 But that must attest an extreme reluctance to abandon any portion
of the old law, however outdated; the attitude is consistent with the pref-
erence shown by most sixth-century kings for adding to rather than revis-
ing the text of Salic Law. They were ready to change the substance of a rule
in practice, but left the old text where it was.

The problem of how pagan elements survived is not, therefore, the same
as the problem of how they were included in the first place. On the face of
it, the original A Recension was the work of a pagan. Admittedly, it has
been argued that Title 35.1 (about what is to happen when one slave kills
another) is an application of an idea derived from Exodus 2 1.3 5. 58 Even if

54 The Edictus Chilperici is extant only in one MS (K17 = A17 for the capitularies) but was in the
exemplar of its sister MS (Ai) since it occurs in the table of titles. But, since they are sister manuscripts,
the textual tradition cannot confirm that Chilperic’s edict was in the archetype. The Decretio Childeberti
is in those MSS and also in C6 and the D, E and K-Recensions. 55 Daube (1947) ch. 2.

56 The C Recension is a clear contrast: it has a few Christian decrees, notably PLS 5 5.6—7 .

57 PLS 2.16 = K Recension, 2.14 (ed. Eckhardt (1956) 474). Brunner (1906, 1928) 1.435 n - 39 argues

on the basis of Greg. Tur. De Passione et drtutibus S. luliani c. 3 1 that this reference may be Christian,
but Gregory refers simply to animals given to the church of Brioude. 58 Nehlsen (1972) 280—3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EVOLUTION OF FRANKISH WRITTEN LAW 273

this is true, the rule has no specifically Christian content — nothing which
might offend the most fervent pagan. It may perhaps be taken as suggest-
ing the influence on the text of a Christian Roman, who applied Exodus’
rule about one ox lulling another to the situation when one slave kills
another, but it does not weaken the argument derived from the total
absence from the A Recension of any Christian content, such as we find
even in fEthelberht’s Law.

The third argument stems from Title 47. The issue is the procedure to
be followed when one person claims to recognize his property in the pos-
session of another, who may, of course, have bought it, or received it as a
gift, in good faith. The parties are to fix a date at which all those involved
in any relevant exchange of the property in question may come together.
If the parties live within limits defined by the forest known as the
Carbonaria (near Brussels) and the Loire, the meeting is to occur after forty
nights; if one party lives beyond those limits, the meeting is postponed so
that it occurs after eighty nights. 59

This text has been read in two quite different ways. On the one hand, it
is argued that only after Clovis’ defeat of Alaric in 507 and the subsequent
conquest of Aquitaine would Franks live beyond the Loire; hence the usual
date for the Salic Law of 507 to 51 1. 60 On the other hand, it is also pointed
out that those boundaries were crucial for Clovis before his defeat of Alaric
and before, at some time after 507, he took over the kingdom of Sigibert
the Lame, centred at Cologne. 61 At that stage, the silva Carbonaria separated
Clovis’ Salian kingdom from Sigibert’s eastern domain, which included
most at least of the other Frankish peoples, the Chamavi, Bructeri and
Ampsivarii. Moreover, the presence of Franks beyond the Loire before 507
is not impossible: they had been active in the Loire valley for fifty years
before 507 and had even briefly taken Bordeaux in 49s. 62 Nevertheless, it
is difficult to reconcile the numismatic evidence as interpreted by Grierson
and Blackburn with Title 47; if the former is held to rule out a date after c.
450, it may be necessary to ask whether Title 47’s reference to the Loire may
not be a later insertion.

The difficulties over the date of the Salic Law arise in part from uncer-
tainty about its character. Thus Ewig is inclined to date it between Clovis’
destruction of the other Salian kings — Ragnachar, Rignomer and Chararic
— and his taking of power over the Rhineland Franks. 63 For him this
explains why it is a law for all the Salians but not for the other Frankish

59 PZA47.1, 3. 60 Eckhardt (1954) 202— 3. 61 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 112.

62 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.18—19; Continuatio Havniensis Prosperi s.a. 498, ed. Mommsen, Chronica Minora
1.33 1: Ann. xnn ‘Alarici Franci Burdigalem obtinuerunt et a potestate Gothorum in possessionem sui
redegerunt capto Suatrio Gothorum duce.’

63 Ewig (19 88) 30; this involves a major revision to Gregory of Tours’ chronology, since he placed
the acquisition of Sigibert the Lame’s kingdom east of the Carbonaria before the conquest of the Salian
kings.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

274 IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

peoples. If one sees the Salic Law as a code promulgated by royal author-
ity, this view has a great deal to be said for it, particularly if the other Salian
kings had been disposed of before Clovis’ conversion. This would then
explain both the pagan character and the geographical scope of the law. 64
Yet, working still on the assumption that the Salic Law was promulgated
by royal authority, there are objections arising from the letter in which
Remigius, bishop of Rlieims, welcomed Clovis’ accession to power. 65 In it
he implies that Clovis’ authority, and that of his father before him,
extended over the whole of the Roman province of Belgica Secunda. This
province included Cambrai, which is where Gregory of Tours placed
Ragnachar. Moreover, one element in Clovis’ authority, inherited from
Childeric, was his role as judge, which Remigius perceives in completely
Roman terms. 66 The Angers material used by Gregory of Tours also
shows that Cliilderic’s activities were on a much larger scale than one
would expect from a mere king of Tournai. 67 Childeric appears to have
been in close collaboration for part of his career with Aegidius, magister
militum , while Remigius’ letter suggests that he had found it possible to
work well with the bishops. It is not therefore necessary to assume that
Clovis must have disposed of the other Salian kings before the promulga-
tion of the Salic Law.

On these grounds and on the basis of the numismatic evidence, the pos-
sibility remains that the Salic Law belongs to the time not of Clovis but of
Childeric. Childeric would then have promulgated the law as principal king
of the Salian Franks; its Roman characteristics — principally its organiza-
tion into titles — would be explained by his connections with men such as
Aegidius and Remigius, while its complete lack of any support for
Christianity would pose no problem at all. On the other hand, it is difficult
to see how an earlier dating than Childeric’s reign could be reconciled with
Title 47’s implied reference to Salian Franks who lived beyond the Loire. In
the reign of Chlodio in the second quarter of the fifth century — a date
which would fit perfectly the numismatic evidence as interpreted by
Grierson and Blackburn — the Salian Franks had only just established a per-
manent presence west of the silva Carbonaria. One must therefore assume
that the equation of forty denarii with one solidus was still accepted among
the Salian Franks in the third quarter of the fifth century. The implication
is that both the Salic Law and the Code of Euric, to which we shall come
later, belong to about a generation after the Theodosian Code and were
perhaps, in some sense, local responses to that great compilation.
Furthermore, there is no reason to suppose, as has been the near-universal

64 This is not Ewig’s view; he retains the date given to the conversion by Gregory of Tours.

65 Epist. Austras. ed. Gundlach, no. 2, in Epistolae Meromngici et Karolini A.evi, MGH (Berlin, 1892),

p. 1 1 3 . 66 ‘Iustitia ex ore vestro procedat . . . praetorium tuum omnibus pateatur.’

67 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.18-19.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EVOLUTION OF FRANKISH WRITTEN LAW 275

opinion, that Germanic written law began with Euric and the Visigoths.
Frankish written law may be just as old.

It is also worth asking the fundamental question, however, whether Salic
Law was indeed promulgated on royal authority. The Shorter Prologue was
added when the C Recension was made. 68 It presents an account of the
genesis of Lex Salica, which, while it is plainly legendary, conceives it as
being the creation of men learned in the law and fails to mention any royal
involvement. If we compare it with the Burgundian Liber Constitutionum of
5 1 7 the differences are very obvious. In the latter case, not only is there a
prologue declaring the text to have been promulgated by Sigismund in the
second year of his reign, there are also several other royal decrees, dated
and often also located. 69 Moreover, the concerns of the king are regularly
proclaimed. To give only one notable example, judges are firmly said to be
royal appointees. 7 " There are no laws within the text of Lex Salica itself
which are, in the same fashion as the Burgundian decrees, overtly royal. Yet
there are several in the texts attached to Lex Salica in one or more manu-
scripts: the Pactus pro Tenore Pads of Childebert I and Chlothar I, the edicts
of Chilperic I and of Childebert II. The contrast becomes all the more
striking when we look at the texts of these royal decrees and compare them
with Lex Salica. None of them follows the standard form of the main law:
‘If anyone has done X, let him be judged liable to pay Y.’

There are indeed texts attached to Lex Salica which normally follow this
form, but they are as innocent of overt royal features as is Lex Salica itself.
The earliest is the one called Capitulary V by Eckhardt (though placed last
in his edition, it is the only one frequently to give penalties in denarii as well
as solidi and to use the equivalence of forty denarii to one solidus ); there are
numerous parallels between its contents and those of Lex Salica\ it has not
a single reference to the king. If we go outside the Lex Salica and its
appended texts to Frankish royal legislation preserved elsewhere, the con-
trast remains: overtly royal texts are not dominated by the dom type of
decree. 71 The Frankish pattern is thus quite different from the Kentish. The
difference is underlined by comparison with the church councils. In the

68 A probable terminus post quern for the C Recension is the link with c. 22 of the Council of Tours,
567. This cites not just the Old Testament but also the Interpretatio to the Codex Theodosianus on inces-
tuous unions. The same passage is cited in PLS 13.1 1: see Eckhardt (1954) 216—17. The terminus ante
quern proposed by Eckhardt, namely the somewhat different treatment of incest in the Decretio Childeberti
1.2, is hardly compelling, since, in its general command to the bishops to reform by their preaching the
remaining incestuous unions, it may simply be referring back to the Council of Tours.

69 Liber Constitutionum ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg . , MGH Leg. 1, 11.1 (Hanover, 1892), or ed. F. Beyerle,
Germanenrechte, x (Weimar, 1936), xlii, xlv, lii, lxii (date only), lxxvi, lxxix. On the ascriptions to
Sigismund and Gundobad, see Beyerle (1954) 2 4 ~ 7 -

70 Liber Constitutionum xc, ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. no.

71 Capitularia Regum Francorum i.i, ed. A. Boretius, MGH , Capit. (Hanover, 1881), no. 2, Childeberti I
Regis Prae cep turn (pp. 2—3); no. 5, Guntchramni Regis E dictum (pp. 10—12); no. 8, Chlotharii II Praeceptio
(pp. 18—19); no. 9, Chlotharii II Edictum (pp. 20—3).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

276

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

very period in which most scholars would place LexSalica there is ecclesias-
tical legislation which is as open in its acknowledgement of royal authority
as one could wish, the first council of Orleans in 5 1 1 . 72

There are, however, arguments in favour of seeing LexSalica as royal leg-
islation. The text begins with a decree about persons who neglect a
summons to the court, the mallus. The summons in question is said to be
legibus dominicis, ‘according to the king’s laws’. 73 It has also been argued that
the very construction of a title may show whether it is a collection of royal
decrees or of customary maxims. 74 There are, moreover, some turns of
phrase which suggest legislation: thus quae lex . . . conuenit obseruari 1 ^ and hoc
conuenit obseruare 76 are reminiscent of the Decretio Childeberti’s repeated use
of conuenit and likewise its ita iussimus obseruari and placuit obseruari , 77

The difficulty with this argument is that there are two senses in which a
rule can be said to be royal in character. On the one hand, the king may
promulgate a traditional and customary rule, whether because he wishes to
assert his authority over the law or because the rule in question is being
flouted. The king gives his authority to the rule, but it does not originate
with him. On the other hand, the rule may be royal in a stronger sense —
namely, that the royal promulgation made something law when it had not
previously been law; in other words, the rule originated with the king. Title
5 5, on spoliations of corpses, offers a good example of new law alongside
old. In the C Recension of the Salic Law, rules were introduced into this title
in order to protect Christian tombs and churches; but they naturally fol-
lowed the pattern of the old laws in the title and are thus indistinguishable
in form. Similarly, in the Law of fEthelberht, which was certainly royal in
the sense of being promulgated by a king, there are new rules at the begin-
ning to protect the church; yet, the rule protecting the peace of a church,
ciricfrith, follows exactly the form of the rule protecting the peace of the
court, mcethlfrith? 8 Things become still more problematic when it is a ques-
tion, not of a single rule, but of an entire text. One might well admit that
some of the rules in Lex Salica appear to be royal in form without thereby
being committed to regarding the entire code as a royal promulgation. 79

The difficulty is to strike a just balance. On the one hand, Salic Law con-
tains leges dominicae\ the king’s authority stands behind the law, for they are
his laws whatever their origin. On the other hand, the relationship between

72 Concilia Galliae, A.. jii—A. 69 ed. C. de Clercq, CCSL 148A, p. 4.

73 Unsurprisingly, this tide is seen as royal law by Brunner (1906, 1928) 1.432 n. 1.

74 Beyerle (1924). 75 PLS^z.i. 76 PLS^G.i.

77 Decretio Childeberti: for conuenit , passim '. ; ita iussimus obseruari , 11.3; decreuimus obseruari, 11.5; placuit obser-
uari, hi. 7. Similarly, Edictus Chilperici, passim. 78 The Law of iLthelberht, c. 1.

79 There is a difficulty in Beyerle’s distinction (1924) between two types of dom (both dominated by
the conditional clause), one of which he regards as a royal decree, namely that texts such as the Edicts
of Chilperic and Childebert II are not dominated by the conditional clause at all, but by the form conue-
nit ut . . .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EVOLUTION OF FRANKISH WRITTEN LAW 277

king and law is evidently variable, strong in the case of such edicts as those
of Chilperic I or Childebert II, more distant in most of Lex Salica itself.
Moreover, the king could show his authority in other ways than by insist-
ing on his role as promulgator of the law. The rachinburgii are said to pro-
claim the law ; 811 but some cases will be heard ‘before the king ( theuda ) or the
thungfnus' , 81 In Francia, then, putting law into writing did not entail making
it overtly royal; moreover, the Pactus Legis Salicae is notably less royal than
either the early English laws to the north or Burgundian law to the south.

Since the numismatic evidence now argues for a very early date, it is
tempting to date Lex Salica before Clovis’ destruction of the other Salian
kings, such as Ragnachar of Cambrai. With divided kingship, no one king
controls the law, although all support it and preside over legal processes.
When, later, there is overtly royal legislation, it seems to come, as in the case
of Childebert II, when a single king is clearly dominant or two kings made
a treaty. Written law in Francia was still presumably the outcome of a col-
laboration between barbarian and Roman, but it also reflected the author-
ity of men recognized for their knowledge of the law . 82 Their expertise in
Salic law, only partly embodied in the text of Lex Salica, was mainly couched
in rules of the dom style; the king, perhaps Childeric using an authority
exalted over other kings of the Salian Franks by his acceptance as ruler of
Belgica Secunda, seems at most to have taken over a body of material
assembled by experts, added some further decrees, and ordered it to be put
into writing in a form imitating the Theodosian Code. But it is also possible
that the absence of any parade of authority by a single king is because there
were at the time several Salian kings, no one of whom had the power to
promulgate law for all the Salians.

The question whether the Salic Law was promulgated by a king as a
written text should not be confused with a quite separate question, whether
kings played a major role in legal processes. Gregory of Tours provides
several examples both of people who were prepared to travel considerable
distances to seek royal justice and of local cases which were remitted to the
king . 83 Remigius of Rheims emphasized, in very Roman terms, the judicial
role expected of the king . 84 One cannot avoid the recently much-discussed
question whether written law had any role in the Frankish court — whether,
to use Peter Classen’s question, ‘one should imagine a Frankish judge of the

80 PLS 57-

81 The thunginus is likely to be the Frankish counterpart to th tgepungen mta of Ine, c. 6 . z, pace Wenskus
(1964), who would see him as a minor king; he is coupled with the centenarius in 44.1, 46.1, 4, but with
the theoda in 46.6 (reading ante theuda rather than anttheoda , which is only supported among the A and C
MSS by A2 ’s anteuda , itself a mechanical error, ante(te)uda). Theuda for the expected theudan is probably
a West Frankish form influenced by the loss of final — n in Latin.

82 Even in Burgundy Syagrius talked law with the curua senectus , not with the king: Sid. Ap. Ep. v. 5 .

83 Greg. Tur. Hist, vi.i 1, 37; vn.232; ix.19.

84 Epist. Tiustras. ed. Gundlach, no. 1 (MGH, Epistolae Merowingici et Karolini A.evi, pp. 112— 13).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

278 IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

sixth or the eighth century presiding over a judicial assembly with a copy
of Lex Salica under his arm ’. 85 Yet this is not to be confused with the ques-
tion whether, when kings (or wise men) promulgated law orally, such prom-
ulgation had any effect on the court. The content of a lawbook might
influence court proceedings even when the book itself did not.

V. FROM NORTH-WEST EUROPE TO THE MEDITERRANEAN

As will be clear already, when we leave northern Gaul for the south we enter
a very different legal world. It is worth, however, making a detour west-
wards to the Loire valley and to the Breton frontier. The first stop on this
journey will be the region west and south of Paris, including Chartres,
Chateaudun, Orleans and Blois, the setting of one of Gregory of Tours’
tales of violence. Gregory’s story may be compared with the Pactus pro
Tenore Pads promulgated by two sons of Clovis, Childebert I and Chlothar
I, a text which was added, as we have seen, to Lex Salica ? 6 The Pactus con-
sists of four sections: first there are two brief introductory sentences, fol-
lowed by an edict of Childebert; then comes Chlothar’s edict, and, finally,
a concluding statement, from both kings, permitting, in particular, pursuit
of thieves across the boundary between their regna. The concluding section
of the Pactus assumes an organized enforcement of the law based upon the
trustis , the king’s comitatus , and upon the centena , the hundred . 87 Chlothar’s
edict expected these centenae to prevent collusion between thieves and those
charged with the night-watch. His scheme was that the centena to which the
victim of the theft belonged had the responsibility of securing restitution.
The victim’s centena might itself find the stolen property by following tracks
(livestock was presumably intended, especially perhaps cattle-rustling); it
could also follow the tracks across the boundaries of its own territory into
that of another centena , whereupon it would give formal notice to the other
centena of what it had found and of the consequent duty of the other centena
to find the stolen goods. This second centena might subsequently do the
same to a third. There is, therefore, a framework of law-enforcement and
clear provisions to determine where responsibility lay.

It is odd that Childebert’s edict contains nothing as remarkable as the
provisions in the name of his younger brother, even though Childebert’s
role as chief among the Merovingian kings of his generation seems so clear
in the legislation of the church councils. There is a clear reference to a
canon of the first council of Orleans (which itself refers back to the
Theodosian Code), yet even this is part of Chlothar’s edict . 88 The most
interesting rule in Childebert’s section of the text is one declaring that the

85 In a letter to H. Nehlsen quoted in Nehlsen (1977) 451. 86 PLS 79-93 (pp. 250—2).

87 For a discussion of the origins of the centena and Chlothar’s use of it, see Murray (1988) esp. 75—93.

88 PLS 90.1; council of Orleans, 51 1, c. 1 (ed. de Clercq, Concilia Galliae, pp. 4—5).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM NORTH-WEST EUROPE TO THE MEDITERRANEAN 279

victim of theft is not to be party to a private reconciliation with the thief,
and, if he does attempt such a private settlement, the victim is to be con-
sidered as much a thief as the initial wrongdoer.

The Pactus pro Tenore Pads, therefore, attempts to buttress the legal
defences against theft by ensuring that the victim should always have
someone from whom he can secure restitution. In particular, it charges the
centena of the victim with his indemnification if it should fail to secure res-
titution from elsewhere, either the thief or another centena . The trustis was
given an interest in catching the thief by being offered a share in his ransom.
Finally, this method of securing both the welfare of the victim and a com-
munal interest in apprehending the thief was not to be hampered by polit-
ical boundaries; and here, of course, both kings had to agree to put their
authority behind the whole process. Not only could the pursuit move from
the territory of one centena to another, it could also move from one regnum
to another.

Gregory of Tours’ story about the minor war in 5 85 between the people
of Chateaudun and Chartres, on the one side, and those of Orleans and
Blois on the other, illustrates some of the issues that had earlier preoccu-
pied Childebert I and Chlothar I. 89 The immediate context was the death
of Chilperic in 5 84, but also relevant, in all probability, was the war between
Chilperic and Guntram two years earlier in 583. Chilperic had become the
most powerful of the Frankish kings and had taken possession of Clovis’
cathedra regni, Paris; with Paris came Chateaudun, the possession of his
brother Sigibert I until he was murdered in 575, and therefore claimed by
Sigibert’s son, Childebert II. Chilperic’s hegemony had been threatened,
first by defeat at the hands of Guntram in 5 83, and secondly by the forging
of a new alliance in 5 84 between Guntram and Childebert. Orleans and
Blois belonged to Guntram ’s regnum but were particularly exposed to attack
by Chilperic’s forces and had probably suffered considerably during his
attack on Guntram in 583.

When Chilperic was, in his turn, murdered, the men of Orleans and
Blois descended upon the territory of Chateaudun, removed everything
that could move and burnt the rest. The tracks of the invading force were,
however, followed by the men of Chateaudun and Chartres; yet the pur-
suers were not content to remove their stolen property but inflicted the
same thoroughgoing harrying on the men of Orleans and Blois as the latter
had meted out to them. They ‘left nothing in the houses or outside the
houses or of the houses’. On the other hand, Gregory, who was not nor-
mally restrained in his descriptions of riot and bloodshed, does not say that
anyone lost his life as these Gallo-Roman civitates proceeded to inflict so
much hard exercise on each other’s livestock. Violence did, however,

89 Greg. Tur. Hist. vn. 2 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

28 o

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

threaten when the men of Orleans took up arms to wreak vengeance upon
their attackers; but then the counts on both sides intervened and imposed
a peace ‘until the hearing, that is, so that, on the day on which judgement
should be given, the side that had unjustly resorted to force against the
other should pay compensation, justice mediating between them. And thus
there was an end of the war.’

This, then, was a little war, not the night-time thief envisaged by the
Pactus pro Tenore Pads but whole dvitates resorting to plundering their neigh-
bours’ goods. And, since whole dvitates were in action, the counts of those
dvitates rather than any mere centenarii were required to put an end to the
trouble. Yet it is in many respects the same world as the Pactus. Men follow
the tracks of the livestock, not just across civitas boundaries but out of what
had been Chiliperic’s kingdom into Guntram’s. More strikingly still, the
death of a king and the uncertainty about who would succeed to his author-
ity around Paris permitted a major outbreak of violence which had been
repressed while he was alive. The king might be killed by the assassins’
knives at Chelles, but while Chilperic still lived his capacity to repress vio-
lence was a very real social force. Nor was it treated simply as an outbreak
of vengeance by the dead king’s victims on those who had been his sub-
jects: both counts took the line that the men of Orleans and Blois, who had
started the affair, should pay compensation, and yet they were Guntram’s
subjects who had, in 583, probably suffered from the men of Chateaudun.
Peace had been re-established after the war of 5 83 and the men of Orleans
and Blois were not entitled to stir up old grievances.

From further west, in Brittany, comes a short text in two recensions,
plausibly dated by Fleuriot to the sixth century but which could be of the
seventh or even perhaps the eighth century. 90 One of the recensions is enti-
tled ‘Excerpts from Laws of the Romans and the Franks’; the authenticity
of this title and the truth of the claim it embodies are both difficult to sub-
stantiate; but in form it is much closer to the additions to Lex Salica (other
than the overtly royal Pactus pro Tenore Pads and Decretio Childeberti) than it
is to Irish or, later, Welsh law. It looks as though it may be the product of
some local assembly which took upon itself legislative authority; it is a val-
uable reminder of what might be happening in an independently-minded
province under intermittent Frankish hegemony.

The Formulae Andegavenses of c. 600 similarly give a clue, of a rather
different kind, to what was happening on the ground. 91 In many ways this
was a very Roman world, a civitas still retaining its Gesta, the record of
official transactions. Legal acts were not just remembered by a court, as

90 The so-called Canones Wallici , ed. Bieler (1963) 136—59; Fleuriot (1971); Dumville (1984) is scepti-
cal about the sixth-century dating.

91 Zeumer (1886) 4— 25 ; on pp. 2—3 Zeumer shows that real documents were used as models for this
collection.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM NORTH-WEST EUROPE TO THE MEDITERRANEAN 281

they would be further north for centuries to come, but written in the
record. The Formulae were thus directly useful in a local context, for they
told the notary how he should write the documents that would then be
recorded in the Gesta. In a legal context, Angers remained the focus of
Anjou; there one would find both court and notary, and there would be the
record of past legal acts. The court, however, seems to have a large element
of communal self-help about it: it may be presided over by the abbot of the
monastery or by another important figure — perhaps this helps to explain
why Lex Salica uses the general term thunginus, ‘eminent man’, for a presi-
dent of the court . 92 Finally, even here, on the edge of Aquitaine, which
would in the seventh century emerge as Romania and a land of Roman law,
we meet rachinburgii , 93 Significantly, they appear in a document about hom-
icide and the threat of feud. Many of the formulae in the collection may be
as early as the reign of Childebert II ; 94 this one is probably a somewhat later
addition and may be an instance of growing Frankish influence on the legal
practices of the Loire region.

In the neighbouring Tours, Gregory himself was involved in attempting
to settle a feud between natives of the Touraine; and, moreover, he acted
together with the count and the other iudices, the latter perhaps rachinburgii , 95
While, however, Gregory’s problem was to bring peace to a feud in which
everyone knew who the killers were, in the Angers document the homicide
was the much more serious secret killing — that is, murder. The person
accused of the offence in Angers is said to have denied it ‘absolutely and
with vigour’. Faced with uncertainty, the public court of Angers did not
resort to the ordeal, beloved of the Franks , 96 but to Gregory’s own favoured
answer to cruel uncertainty, the power of the holy dead conjoined with that
of his neighbours. The accused man was to swear an oath with twelve others
as compurgators that he was as innocent as he claimed. The formula for the
official notification of the oath prescribed the following declaration:

By this holy place and all the divine powers of patronage {patrocinia ) of the saints
who rest here, inasmuch as the man . . . and his brothers . . . have accused me of
killing or asking to be killed on some occasion their kinsman . . ., I have not killed
him, nor have I asked anyone to kill him, nor was I in the know, nor was I ever a
consenting party to his death, and I owe nothing in respect of this claim, except
that I have undergone, in accordance with the laws, this appropriate oath, which
has been assigned to me in judgement.

The accusers were not always content to accept such oaths , 97 which may
explain why the formula seems to resonate with fear, not just of the powers

92 For the abbot, see Formulae Andegavenses ed. Zeumer, nos. 7, 10 etc; for the agens, apparently of the
church, nos. 1 1, 28; for the prepositus , no. 24. 93 Formulae Andegavenses ed. Zeumer, no. 50.

94 Buchner (1953) 50. 95 Greg. Tur. Hist, vi 1.47. 96 Bartlett (1986) 4— 5.

97 Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.23, where procedure corresponds closely to the Angers document, but the
accusers remain unconvinced; and v.32, where the father’s oath also fails to convince.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

282

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

of those who live with God, but of the vengeance of men who could not
in honour be satisfied until they had found the killer of their kinsman.

VI. BARBARIAN AND ROMAN LAW

The combination in the Formulae Andegavenses of elements from different
sources raises, in a usefully sharp form, the old question of the relationship
between barbarian and Roman laws. In Tours Gregory, the bishop, paid
many of the church’s solidi to heal a blood-feud, in the context of desperate
efforts within and without the court, by judges and by the bishop himself,
to make peace. 98 For the sake of the peace of the civitas, therefore, the
bishop became the friend of the killer and paid wergild on his behalf.
Gregory in the role of go-between was, although a bishop of proud sena-
torial descent, working in a legal world closer in some respects to that of Lex
Salica than to the Theodosian Code. Romans feuded among themselves; so
did Jews; Romans feuded with Saxons. 99 Yet the will of Remigius, bishop of
Rheims, who died c. 532, reveals something different: the document itself
rests directly on a particular provision in the Theodosian Code. 100 Similarly,
the bishops assembled by order of Clovis at Orleans in 5 1 1 appealed in their
first canon to secular law as well as to the authority of earlier councils, but
the secular law to which they appealed was the Theodosian Code. 1 " 1 In the
early sixth century the Theodosian Code was in use throughout Gaul. 102

There is a scatter of general pronouncements on the legal relationship
of barbarian to Roman, the upshot of which is that cases between Romans
were settled by Roman law, while cases between barbarians or between bar-
barian and Roman were settled by barbarian law. 103 More complex,
however, is the rule — plainly a royal constitutio — in Lex Ribuaria\ XM

We also decree the following, that Franks, Burgundians, Alamans or of whatever
nation someone is who has taken up residence within the Ribuarian province and
is impleaded at law, he should give answer according to the law of the place (locus)
where he was born.

This passage explains why the common inclusion in a single manuscript of
different national laws might be useful, but it also raises problems, first by its

98 Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.47; Wallace-Hadrill (1962); James (1983).

99 Greg. Tur. Hist, m.33, vi.17, vn.3.

100 Testamentum Remigii ed. B. Krusch, MGH SRM 111.336—47 and CCSL 117/1, 473—9, a PP ea ls to

C.Th. iv.4.7; Jones, Grierson and Crook (1957); for the date of Remigius’ death see PLRE 11.938; Wood
(1993). 101 Concilia Galliae ed. de Clercq, p. 4.

102 The legal knowledge of the ex-slave Andarchius, legis Theodosianae libris eruditus , helped to recom-
mend him to King Sigibert: Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.46.

103 Lib. Const. Pref. 3, 8; cf. 22 and 5 5, Constitutiones Extravagantes 20 (ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. 31, 32, 90,
1 19); Preceptio of Chlothar II, c. 4: ‘Inter Romanus negutia causarum romanis legebus praecepemus ter-
minari’: Capitularia Regum Francorum ed. Boretius, 1.1, MGH, Leg. 11 (Hanover, 1881) 1.19.

104 Lex Ribuaria 35.3, ed. Beyerle and Buchner, MGH, Leg. 1, in. 2 (Hanover, 1954), p. 87.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BARBARIAN AND ROMAN LAW 283

use of the phrase ‘the law of the place’, lex loci, and secondly by its implica-
tion that the law under which a case is judged depends on the nationality of
the defendant. The first suggests that legal nationality had come to depend
on a version of the Roman concept of origo: as one belonged to a given civitas
by having been born there, whatever the origin of one’s parents, so here a
defendant born in Burgundy (apparently whether or not he would have been
regarded as a Burgundian according to Burgundian law) is to plead accord-
ing to Burgundian law, but his children, if they were born in Ribuaria, would
plead according to Ribuarian law. The second implication of this passage is
that a case between, say, a Burgundian plaintiff and a Roman defendant would
be judged by Roman law; this contradicts the provisions of the Burgundian
Liber Constitutionum , 105 It may well be that the rule in Lex Ribuaria represents
a crucial stage in the process of the territorialization of national identity in
Francia: by the eighth century, natives of the lands north of the Loire, apart
from the Bretons, were Franks, while those to the south were Romans
(Aquitanians). While in the fifth and sixth centuries Remigius could live and
die a Roman in one of the Frankish capitals, this was increasingly difficult for
his successors in the seventh century and impossible by the mid eighth . 1 " 6

The rule distinguishing between the jurisdictions of Roman and
Burgundian law applies to cases in which two parties are in dispute.
Disputes, however, are only one part of the law; another component con-
sists of those devices which people may use to give legal effect to their
wishes, such as gifts or sales. These legal acts are mostly never the subject
of a dispute. Here there seems to be more room for manoeuvre. Thus the
Burgundian Liber Constitutionum allows a barbarian who wishes to make a
donation to confirm it either according to Roman custom, by a written doc-
ument, or in the barbarians fashion, by witnesses . 107 Such a liberty to
choose would likewise make perfect sense of the Frankish Formulae which
contain model texts for all sorts of legal acts, very probably available just
as much to Franks as to Romans.

Some law promulgated by barbarian kings was intended to apply as
much to Romans as to barbarians: this is evident, for example, from the
preface to the Edictum Theodorici where it is made clear that the edict does
not abrogate from the leges and ius publicum — that is, Roman law — and that
the edict’s provisions are to be followed by Roman and barbarian alike . 1 " 8
The same is true of the Edict of Athalaric . 109 The identity of those subject

105 p r i ma Constitutio 3, where the leges nostrae which have been emendatae would appear to be the Liber
Constitutionum itself, since c. 8 refers to cases between Romans being judged by Roman law as if the
latter was quite distinct from leges nostrae. 106 Ewig (1958).

107 Liber Constitutionum 50.2 (ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. 92).

108 Edictum Theodorici Regis ed. Baviera, p. 684. The identity of the Theodoric who promulgated the
Edict is disputed: see Vismara (1967), who favours Theoderic, king of the Visigoths; in favour of
Theoderic the Ostrogoth is Nehlsen (1972) 120—7; Nehlsen (1969).

109 Ed. Mommsen, Cassiodori Senatoris Variae , MGHAA xii, ix.i 8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

284

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

to a law cannot, however, be inferred from the occurrence of the word
‘edict’ in the title: Chilperic’s Edict appears to apply to Franks living to the
south of the Garonne . 110 Like the Pactus pro Tenore Pads of Childebert I and
Chlothar I, it refers expressly to Lex Salica. The Edict of Rothari contained
lex. xn For the Franks and the Lombards, therefore, the Roman distinction
between lex and edictum did not persist in the same way as it did under the
Ostrogoths.

An essential distinction when discussing die question of who was
subject to a particular law is between primary and secondary rules — that
is, between rules that apply direcdy to the population in question and rules
directed at judges and other officials concerned with the administration
of die law. Burgundian law has, as we have seen, a particularly clear state-
ment of the respective jurisdictions of Roman and barbarian law;
Burgundy also provides us with a text of Roman law, the Lex Romana
Burgundionum , which makes no such appeal to royal authority as does die
Liber Constitutionum } x 2 Yet the Burgundian kings naturally had no hesita-
tion in making secondary rules which applied as much to Roman officials
as to Burgundians . 113 The distinction between primary and secondary
rules is therefore valuable for overtly royal legislation. It must, however,
be handled with care when dealing with Frankish law. The normal rule in
Lex Salica was, as we have seen, of die form, ‘If anyone has done X, let
him be judged liable to Y’; it is therefore a rule addressed to judges. Yet it
is not secondary in the same sense as a royal decree directed at officials.
The standard secondary rule is a normal part of a bureaucratic state with
a central authority seeking to direct a body of officials. Lex Salica is mainly
a set of instructions from men admitted to be wise in the law addressed
to those who need training in knowledge of the law. It is not so much a
part of a bureaucratic state as a partial written expression of the way in
which a legal tradition is handed on.

VII. BURGUNDIAN AND GOTHIC LAW

Among the southern barbarian kingdoms, the law of the Burgundians
made the most overt challenge to the imperial monopoly of law. In form
and style, and also in its perception of itself, it aped the imperial constitu-
tions collected together in the Theodosian Code . 1 14 The legislator refers to

110 Beyerle (1961). 111 Edictus Rothari Prol.; cc. 12, 171, 386.

112 Thus the evidence for royal responsibility for the Lex Romana is to be found in the Pref. (c. 8, ed.
de Salis, Leg. Burg. 32) to the Liber Constitutionum rather than in the Lex Romana itself.

113 Constitutiones Extravagantes xix (in the form of a letter from Gundobad to all counts), xxi.i 1 (ut
omnes comites, tarn Burgundionum quam Romanorum).

114 Liber Constitutionum is the original name of the code: Pref. ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. 30.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BURGUNDIAN AND GOTHIC LAW

285

himself and is even liable to offer lofty justifications for particular
decrees. 115 He has no doubt that his decrees have the status of lex, they
were not mere edicts. 116

The laws ascribed to the Visigothic king Euric, and by modern scholars
called after him the Codex Euricianus, are preserved only in part. 117 Enough
survives, however, to show that they have a very different character from
the Burgundian Liber Constitutionum. They consist of a series of numbered
sections broken up by titles which are, however, not themselves num-
bered. 118 The title thus has a less central position then it does in the struc-
ture of the Theodosian Code and the Liber Constitutionum. There is little
self-referential language and no lofty justifications. 119 In formal terms the
Codex Euricianus is closer to the Ostrogothic Edictum Theodorici than to the
Burgundian Liber Constitutionum. On the other hand, it does seem to con-
ceive of itself as /kv rather than as edict. 120 This is not surprising: Theoderic
the Ostrogoth needed to take up an ambiguous stance allowing him to
appear to be part of the empire; for that reason it was politic for him to
issue an edict like a magistrate of the past. The Visigoths, on other hand,
had not been formally attached to the empire since the beginning of Euric’s
reign in 466. 121 The promulgation of the Breviarium Alarici at the end of the
reign of Euric’s son, Alaric II, demonstrates that Roman law had remained
in force for the Roman subjects of the Visigoths. Euric’s legislation thus
served to give Gothic law the dignity of a written form in good legal Latin,
while it also expressed the authority of an independent monarch.
According to Levy, ‘it may safely be called the best legislative work of the
fifth century . . . superior to the Code of Theodosius, which was a mere
anthology, superior to the contemporary imperial decrees with their
obscure verbosity’. 122

Yet although Euric intended his rules to have the full status and title of
law, the substance of the law holds a balance between Roman and barbarian.
We have already seen that, when it comes to confirmation of a donation, the

115 Liber Constitutionum 52.2; 53.1; 5 4. 1 ; 74. 1 ; 75 . 1 .

116 For example, Liber Constitutionum Pref. cc. 9— 1 1; Sigismund talks of nostra lex as well as of prae-
sentia edicta in Constitutiones Extravagantes 20 (ed. de Salis, Leg. Burg. 1 19).

117 Codex Euricianus ed. d’Ors (i960), and in Zeumer (1902) 3—32. Nehlsen (1972) 1 5 5—6 n. 1 8 places

it between 469 and 476/7 on the basis of Sid. Ap. Epp. 11.1.3; vm.3.2. A useful survey with bibliogra-
phy is Nehlsen (1984). I do not understand H. Wolfram’s argument in favour of attributing the Codex
to Alaric: Wolfram (1988) 196. 118 Thus Tit. De Venditionibus is prefixed to cclxxxvi.

119 In cclxxvii Euric refers to himself and to his father: Antiquos vero terminos \sic\ stare iubemus,
sicut et bonae mem[ori]ae pater noster in alia lege praecepift].’ Cf. Levy (1963b).

120 cclxxvii, cccxxvii (ed. Zeumer (1902) pp. 5, 6, 25).

121 Sid. Ap. Ep. vin. 3, to Leo of Narbonne, associating military prowess and legal achievement:
‘Sepone pauxillulum conclamatissimas declamationes, quas oris regii uice conficis, quibus ipse rex incli-
tus . . . modo per promotae limitem sortis ut populos sub armis, sic frenat arma sub legibus.’ This
passage has given rise to the suggestion that Leo participated in the redaction of the Codex Euricianus.

122 Levy (1963b) 209.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

z86

IO. LAW IN THE WESTERN KINGDOMS

Burgundian Liber Constitutionum perceives written evidence as the Roman
custom, while witnesses are characteristic of barbarian tradition. It is to be
noted that this is a matter of distinctive customs as to how a transaction may
be guarded against the possibility of subsequent dispute, not an issue about
the validity of a gift or a sale: Roman law required neither documentary
confirmation nor witnesses in order to make a gift or sale of movables
valid . 123 In the Ostrogothic Edictum Theodorici it is declared that a donation of
movable wealth may be confirmed by written evidence while a donation of
immovable property, whether urban or rural, required to be confirmed by a
document containing the subscriptions of witnesses — in other words, a
charter — and that it was to be recorded in thcgesta municipalia. 124 Euric, treat-
ing of a sale rather than a donation, allows confirmation either by written
document or by witnesses without any observation as to whether one was
Roman and the other barbarian . 125

The end of the empire in the west brought about the extension of written
law to the barbarian setders. Initially, Roman law itself remained in force,
alongside the laws of the various nations, even as far north as Cologne.
Only in Britain did Roman law virtually disappear; to judge by the later
Welsh law, as well as by Gallic attitudes to Bretons in the fifth and sixth
centuries, that may have been because of its weak hold on the Britons. In
Gaul, there is a marked contrast between the Roman pretensions of the
Burgundians, perhaps derived from the political ambitions of Gundobad
in the earlier part of his reign, and the Frankish tradition of law. Among
the Franks, the legal tradition remained attached to the constituent peoples
of the Frankish federation, to the Salians rather than to the Franks as a
whole. This was associated with a less overt role for the king in law-
making: until some date in Clovis’ reign the Salians had more than one
king. Among the Burgundians, however, a kingship that was much more
assertive in the legal sphere also ensured that one law prevailed for all the
Burgundians and any other barbarians within their kingdom. At the level
of Frankish or Burgundian identity, rather than, say, Salian identity,
Burgundian law is more ethnic precisely because it is more Roman and
more royal. Gregory of Tours says that Gundobad made laws for the
Burgundians, although he never says as much about any Frankish king . 126
When rulers such as Gundobad asserted their independence as legislators
vis-a-vis the empire, they did so as kings of their own peoples; hence the
less overtly royal character of the Lex Romana Burgundionum as compared
with the Liber Constitutionum. Barbarian kings were most anxious to pro-

123 Cf. Lex Romana Burgundionum 35.2. 124 Edictum Theodorici cc. 51—2, ed. J. Baviera, p. 692.

125 Codex Euricianus cclxxxvi, ed. Zeumer (1902) p. 11. Cf. Classen (1977b) 20—5; Zeumer (1899)
20. 126 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.33.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BURGUNDIAN AND GOTHIC LAW 287

claim their role as legislators for their own peoples when their kingdoms
lay in the more Romanized south: they, much more than Franks and
Anglo-Saxons, needed to assert a political independence of the empire;
and, in the legal sphere, they asserted that independence by opposing a
king’s law for his gens to the law of an empire.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 11

THE ARMY, e. 420-602

MICHAEL WHITBY

The late Roman armies of the fourth and early fifth century are relatively
well documented: Ammianus and other narrative historians describe them
at work in their main theatres of operations on the Rhine, Danube and
Persian frontiers, as well as in Britain and North Africa; the Theodosian
Code preserves a range of laws pertaining to their creation, sustenance and
functioning; the Notitia Dignitatum offers a view, albeit complicated by
partial revision, of the structure and disposition of forces in both east and
west. 1 The year 420 marks a convenient break: between then and the
Persian wars of Anastasius’ reign (502—7), recorded by Procopius and
Joshua the Stylite, there is little reliable narrative of Roman military action,
and no Notitia', also, there are few relevant laws, since only seven of the 175
titles in Theodosian Code vii, the book devoted to military matters, date
from after 420, though eleven laws among the Novels of Theodosius II and
four of Valentinian III can be added. During these years the western
Roman army ceased to exist as a state institution, being superseded by the
military forces of the successor kingdoms in Gaul, Spain, Africa and finally
Italy, none of which maintained a standing army. In the east, however, the
army, and hence the empire, survived in a recognizable form through to the
early seventh century. The nature and causes of these distinct develop-
ments require explanation; but first, an overview of the late Roman army.

1. troops: categories, conditions of service, numbers

The Roman element in the late imperial army was divided into garrison or
territorial units and mobile troops, a distinction that broadly accords with
that between limitanei and cotnitatenses-. the former were assigned to frontier
regions, the latter notionally to the company of the emperor. The distinc-
tion was not absolute, since units might be transferred without necessarily
being recategorized, but it does reflect ways in which armies were perceived
and functioned. The limitanei were under the immediate command of duces,
in charge of a sector of the frontier, but for operational purposes they could

1 For discussion see, Jones, LRE 607—54; Hoffmann (1969); Tomlin (1987).

288

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

troops: categories, conditions of service, numbers 289

be incorporated into the mobile armies led by magistri militum. The relatively
static limitanei naturally dug themselves in to their localities. Service in the
imperial army gave influence and a desirable status in places where the mil-
itary risk was slight: units at Syene in Egypt and Nessana in Palestine in the
sixth century reveal considerable family continuity among their members, 2
and, though this can be explained by the legal requirement for veterans’ sons
to enlist in place of their fathers, enrolment was a privilege for which a fee
was payable, like entrance to a club. On some frontiers, if not on all (the evi-
dence is eastern), limitanei were assigned lands to ensure their maintenance,
and such properties were sufficiently desirable to be coveted by outsiders. 3

The quality of limitanei was open to criticism, particularly by observers
eager to accuse an emperor of inadequate attention to provincial safety;
stationary units might be allocated the weaker members of a draft of con-
scripts and were accorded less advantageous tax exemptions for their fam-
ilies. On the other hand, they guaranteed an imperial presence in frontier
regions, thereby helping to protect local security and communications and
to define the sphere of Roman authority. The cost was moderate, since the
soldiers were partly supported by the territories they directly protected, and
eastern emperors sensibly took steps to maintain the limitanei'. Theodosius
II legislated in 443 that numbers and training be kept up, various abuses
eradicated, and an annual report submitted by the magister officiorum in the
imperial consistory; Justinian re-established them in Africa to protect the
frontiers of the newly reconquered provinces. When Attila wished to
secure his authority over the Huns, he demanded that an uncultivated no-
man’s-land five days’ journey in width should be created south of the
Danube: Roman presence at frontiers mattered, since this helped to control
all cross-border movement, whether hostile, commercial or transhumant. 4

The comitatenses can be divided into two broad categories, those in the
central or palatine forces that were based in the vicinity of the imperial cap-
itals, Ravenna and Constantinople, and were commanded by a fnagister
militum praesentalis, and those in regional armies commanded by magistri
militum with a geographic specification. At Constantinople there were two
praesental armies, probably billeted on either side of the Bosphorus; there
were three regional commands in the east (Illyricum, Thrace and Oriens)
and one in the west (Gaul); there was still a smaller, but significant, group of
comitatenses in Africa commanded by a comes, although comparable units in
Spain, Britain and the western Balkans had probably ceased to exist by 420.
When not on active campaign, units of mobile armies were often billeted in
cities, a procedure open to considerable exploitation in spite of the legisla-
tion intended to regulate abuses. Units stationed closest to the imperial

2 Keenan (1990); Remondon (1961); Kraemer (1958). 3 Theodosius II, Nov. 5.3; 24.

4 Theodosius II, Nov. 24; CJ 1.27.2.8; Priscus fr. 11.1.11— 14 (Blockley).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

290

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

centre were naturally more prestigious than regional units, but there were no
legal distinctions within the comitatenses , in contrast to indications of their
superiority to limitanei.

Both categories of troops were recruited through a mixture of the obli-
gation to hereditary service imposed on veterans’ sons and traditional con-
scription applied on the basis of provincial tax registers. Conscription was,
not surprisingly, unpopular both with landowners who might lose essential
farm labour and with potential conscripts threatened by service at a remote
location. Monetary commutation of recruits ( aurum tironicuni) offered an
escape from the burden, and was accepted at the government’s discretion,
especially when there was no desperate need for manpower and from areas
whose inhabitants did not have a military reputation. All recruits received
a certificate of enrolment and were assigned to a particular regiment, after
which they became subject to military law: desertion during the conscrip-
tion process could be excused, but not thereafter. 5

Mobile armies were stiffened by the recruitment of non-Roman troops
to meet particular military demands, and palatine forces also benefited
from the presence of imperial guards. Non-Romans served in the army
under various arrangements: some were volunteers, for whom imperial
service offered regular pay and relative security and prosperity; others came
from tribes defeated by the Romans or constrained by other circumstances
to surrender, who had accepted a military obligation as part of their peace
settlement. In the latter case, lands might be granted to provide support
during military inactivity and stabilize the tribesmen in an accessible loca-
tion. Both methods of acquiring non-Roman soldiers continued in opera-
tion, but the most prominent way of employing tribesmen during the fifth
century was as federate units. These functioned as ethnic contingents
under the leadership of their own chief — basically a tribal, or quasi-tribal,
war-band which might vary in size from a few hundred to the 1 0,000 or so
controlled by each of the Theoderics in the Balkans in the 470s. The com-
mander received a Roman title — tnagster militum for the powerful and suc-
cessful, with the consulship as the ultimate accolade — and this gave the
tribesmen access to Roman salaries and provisions. Roman traditionalists
like Vegetius, or those with an axe to grind like Synesius, viewed the
employment of ‘barbarians’ as a disgraceful weakening of the army. In
reality, exploitation of the military potential of neighbours had been an
accepted strategy from the Republic onwards, as a method of annexing
external resources and defusing potential hostility. Roman reliance on fed-
erates, however, had disadvantages in that the mechanics of the agreements
served to increase the independent power of non-Roman leaders: their
strength as patrons grew through disbursement of Roman resources, while

5 Jones, LRE 614-19; Carrie (1986); Whitby (1995) sec. 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

troops: categories, conditions of service, numbers 291

they remained outside the institutional structures and discipline of the state
army. In the west in the fifth century independent action by federates on
various occasions contributed significantly to the collapse of central
authority. 6

The main units in the imperial guard were the scholae, five regiments in
the west, seven in the east, each 500 strong under Justinian. In the east there
was also a small unit of candidate, forty in total, who served as a personal
bodyguard for emperors, a duty which they ceded to the excubitores, a corps
of 300 formed by the emperor Leo to protect the palace entrances. Close
attendance upon the emperor was a privilege, so that individuals might pay
to enlist in the scholae for social rather than military reasons, a tendency that
Justinian exploited by enrolling four supernumerary regiments. The candi-
date acquired an important ceremonial role at imperial receptions and pro-
cessions in Constantinople, but this does not mean that they, or the scholae,
lost all military competence as Procopius and Agathias allege in criticizing
Justinian, since individuals are attested on active service. The excubitores,
however, remained the elite guards into the seventh century, and their com-
mander, the cotnes excubitorum, became one of the most important men at
court, a virtual heir presumptive or close member of the imperial family
from Justin II to Heraclius. 7

Remuneration for soldiers was provided in a mixture of money and kind,
the proportions of which might vary according to availability or the needs
of the army. Donatives at imperial accessions and quinquennial anniversar-
ies, at least until allegedly abolished by Justinian, constituted an important
part of the cash element: eastern emperors from Leo to Justin I paid an acces-
sion donative of five solidi plus a pound of silver, and this was clearly a stan-
dard amount, since the nine solidi paid by Tiberius represent this sum (with
the silver commuted to gold). 8 Ration allocations ( annonae ) formed the basis
for the calculation of salaries, with officers and those with special respon-
sibilities being accorded multiple units. Annonae could either be supplied in
kind or commuted into cash, a flexibility which probably improved the theo-
retical efficiency of the army by ensuring that soldiers received what they
needed; but this also introduced the possibility of military exploitation of
producers/tax-payers, since prices, and hence possible commutation tariffs,
were bound to vary throughout the year. Clothing, financed by a special tax
levy, was provided from the production of state clothing factories, though
commutation of five-sixths of this distribution too was sanctioned by a law
of 423. Military equipment, including the provision of cavalry horses, was

6 Jones, ERE 61 1— 1 2; Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops chs. 2—4; Vegetius 1.28; Syn. De Regno 22—6;
Cameron, Mediterranean World ch. 4; cf. ch. 18 (Wood), pp. 505—6 below.

7 Frank (1969); Procop. Secret History 24.1 5—23; Agathias, Hist, v.i 5.2—6, with Mary Whitby (1987)
465—6. For the fasti of comites excubitorum , see PERE m.i 510.

8 Durliat (1990b) 46—9; Hendy, Studies 175—8, 481; John Eph. HE m.ii.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

292

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

the state’s responsibility in the fifth century, but commutation was permitted
at some stage. Cash substitution clearly benefited soldiers, since Maurice’s
attempt in 5 94 to reintroduce state provision contributed to a mutiny in the
Balkan army. 9 Overall, supplying the army, and especially an army on cam-
paign, represented by far the largest, costliest and most complex single
element in the administration of the empire, and so would be the first to
falter at times of crisis or dislocation.

Calculation of numbers in the late Roman army is a game with enough
variables to make a definite solution impossible. John Lydus in the sixth
century offers a global figure for the Diocletianic establishment two centu-
ries previously: 3 89,704 in the armies, 45,562 in the fleets, a total of 435,266.
Precision may lend credibility. Writing slightly later, Agathias offers 645 ,000
as the total military establishment at an unspecified date, which he contrasts
with the effective Justinianic fighting force of only 1 50,000, but he had an
axe to grind about Justinian’s supposed military neglect. 10 Justification of,
or extrapolation from, these figures on the basis of details of types of units
recorded in the Notitia is circular, since the sizes of individual units are not
recorded. The detailed calculations of Jones, however, produce a plausible
balance, with the eastern establishment outnumbering the western in a
ratio of 7:5. Umitanei constituted about two-thirds of eastern forces, but
only a half of western, and here the Notitia ’ s record of Gallic and African
Umitanei drafted into the mobile armies reveals the impact of the collapse
of the Rhine and Danube frontiers after 406. But precise numbers are less
certain. 1 1

Global figures, if known, might help to determine the cost of the mili-
tary establishment, 12 but do not reveal the empire’s disposable military
strength, which depended on its ability to concentrate and provision troops
in particular locations. The largest armament attested for the fifth or sixth
century is the naval expedition mounted by Leo against Vandal Africa in
468, supposedly 100,000 strong, an unsuccessful outlay of men and money
from which the east took time to recover: the cost is recorded as over seven
million, or nine million, solidiP On land, the rebel Vitalian is said by
Marcellinus to have led more than 60,000 men, while the eastern army of
52,000 in 503 is described by Procopius as the largest before or after. The
extraordinary nature of this army is suggested also by the special measures
needed to ensure provisions: a praetorian prefect, Apion, supervised sup-
plies, the inhabitants of Edessa received wheat to be baked for the troops,
and finally Apion returned to Alexandria to organize further supplies, while
a replacement prefect, Calliopus, controlled arrangements on the frontier.

9 Jones, LRE 623-30; Carrie (199;) sec. 2; Theophylact vii.i.

10 John Lydus, DeMensibus 1.27; Agathias, Hist, v.13.7— 8.

11 Jones, LRE 683— 4; Whitby (1995) sec. 3. 12 Calculations in Hendy, Studies 173— 8.

13 Procop. Wars tit. 6 . 1 , with I lendy, .Studies 221.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

NAVIES

293

This massive army could only move slowly, and the scope of military oper-
tions was severely curtailed by logistical problems: this was one reason why
Anastasius’ generals demanded the construction of Dara on the eastern
frontier as an accessible base from which to move against Nisibis. 14 A more
normal size for a large army on the eastern front was 20,000, as at
Callinicum in 530; 10,000—1 5,000 was perhaps a normal maximum in the
Balkans, where repeated invasions had undermined the administrative sub-
structures for large-scale deployment away from the Danube, which the
Roman fleet controlled. 15

Campaigns away from normal lines of supply required careful prepara-
tions. For Belisarius’ expedition against the Vandals, supplies of bucellum,
biscuit, were prepared, but inadequate firing caused this to deteriorate and
when the fleet reached the Peloponnese, Belisarius requisitioned supplies
from local inhabitants to avert starvation and disease: receipts must have
been issued, to be offset against future tax demands, part of the bureau-
cratic palaver of the late Roman army on the move. 16 Movement by land
was harder and slower, and expeditions would have been supported by
extended wagon-trains: against the Bulgars in 499, Aristus’ army of 1 5,000
campaigned from Constantinople with 520 wagons, while the vulnerability
of such transport is illustrated by the Roman ambush in 479 which cap-
tured 2,000 wagons from a Gothic column that must have stretched over
five miles or more. 17

II. NAVIES

Relatively little is known about Roman fleets in the fifth and sixth century,
partly because there were few major sea battles. Vandal naval dominance
after their arrival in Carthage, a surprising achievement for a Germanic
group, posed a threat with which the western empire could not cope;
Sicilian and Italian coasts were regularly raided, which contributed
significantly to western collapse. In 45 5 the proximity of Geiseric’s large
fleet encouraged the overthrow of Petronius Maximus, and the Vandals
then thoroughly pillaged Rome. In 456 Ricimer defeated Vandal raiders on
the plains of Agrigento in Sicily, and on Corsica, but each time he seems
only to have achieved a land victory: these perhaps resembled the success
in Campania under Majorian when the Vandals, though prevented from
ravaging, could flee to the safety of their ships. In 45 6 the Vandals deployed
sixty ships and, in spite of reverses, retained control of the sea and inter-
rupted the food supply of Rome, which contributed to the unpopularity

14 Marc. Com. s.a. 514; Procop. Wars 1.8. 1—5 (Marc. Com. s.a. 503 records 15,000 men, but this
perhaps relates to only part of the overall force); Joshua 54, 70, 77; Zachariah vn.6.

15 Procop. Wars 1.18.5; Marc. Com. s.a. 499, 505. Whitby (1995) sec. 6.

16 Procop. Wars hi. 13. 12— 20. 17 Marc. Com. s.a. 499; Malchus fr. 20.226— 48.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

294

and subsequent overthrow of Avitus. 18 At some point a storm in the straits
of Messina overwhelmed some ships along with their crews, presumably a
naval squadron; if these were Romans it would help to explain their inca-

• 1 q

pacify at sea.

Majorian is praised for initiating a massive ship-building programme in
Italy, but in 460 he still chose to campaign against the Vandals by the land
route through Spain, partly perhaps as a means of asserting his authority
along the Mediterranean fringes of Gaul and Spain, but partly because of
the difficulty of confronting the Vandals on the open sea. A fleet of 300
ships was assembled for the crossing to Africa, but Geiseric managed to
capture or destroy enough to thwart the invasion; Majorian was soon
deposed, the third imperial victim of Vandal naval power. 20 When Sidonius
praised Anthemius in 468 he referred to the enormous Vandal navy that
annually threatened destruction, but hoped that the new emperor would at
last activate the unused fleets — to no avail; without substantial naval help
from the east, nothing could be achieved. 21 A Roman fleet survived at
Classis, the port of Ravenna, down to Ostrogothic times, and this could be
mobilized against fears of attack from the east, but the Vandals dominated
the western Mediterranean: in 5 3 3 Gelimer could despatch 1 20 ships to
recover Sardinia. 22 In the English Channel and down the Atlantic coast of
Gaul, Saxon pirates were the major threat, but the Visigoths maintained a
fleet in the Garonne to deter them; we hear of this under the command of
the Aquitanian Namatius. 23

The eastern Mediterranean was dominated by the Roman fleet, which
from its dockyards on the Golden Horn ensured the safety of
Constantinople and prevented problems in Europe spilling over into Asia,
and vice versa. In 51 5 the rebel Vitalian gathered 200 ships from Thracian
ports, but these were dispersed in the Bosphorus when the praetorian
prefect Marinus attacked them with some sort of chemical incendiary
agent. In 626 the professionalism of the Roman fleet saved Constantinople
during the Avar siege, since naval patrols prevented the Slav monoxyla from
transporting Shahvaraz’s Persian army to the European side and from
outflanking the capital’s mighty land walls by attacking down the Golden
Horn. 24 The Hellespont was similarly protected: in 400 Fravitta with a
squadron of light libumae overturned the rafts on which Gainas was
attempting to ferry his men to Asia, and in a similar operation Germanus

18 Priscus fr. 31.1; Hydat. Chron. 177, 176; Sid. Ap. Carm. 11.367—70, v. 3 8 8-440.

19 Priscus fr. 31.2.

20 Sid. Ap. Carm. v.441— 8; Priscus fr. 36.1; John of Antioch fr. 203; Mar. Avent. s.a. 460.

21 Sid. Ap. Carm. 11.348— 50, 384— 6; Priscus fr. 39. 22 Procop. l%rr.r m.i 1.23.

23 Sid. Ap. Ep. vni.6.13— 17.

24 Malalas 403.3—405.20; Evagr. HE 111.43 (515). Chron. Pasch. 722.14— 725.1; Theodore Syncellus
307—8, 310—12; George of Pisidia, Bell. Avar. 441—74 (626).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WESTERN COLLAPSE 295

prevented the Kotrigurs in 5 5 8 from outflanking the Long Walls across the
neck of the Gallipoli peninsula. 25

The eastern empire could also despatch large naval expeditionary forces
to the west: against Africa Leo allegedly sent 1,100 ships, while in 533
Belisarius’ expedition consisted of 92 dromons, warships with single banks
of oars rowed by men from Constantinople, which escorted 500 troop-
transports crewed by sailors from Egypt, Ionia and Cilicia; Anastasius sent
100 dromons plus 100 other ships to ravage southern Italy in 5 07/8. 26 The
navy preserved links with armies in Italy when, at the height of the Gothic
counter-offensive in the 540s, the Roman hold was restricted to the coastal
fringes where sea-power allowed isolated garrisons to hang on. Its most
regular military duty, however, was probably in the Balkans, where control
of the Danube was vital for the maintenance of frontier outposts.
Sirmium, briefly recovered by the Romans in the 570s, could resist the
Avars until access up the Danube and Sava was blocked by the construc-
tion of bridges, and Singidunum was similarly threatened in the early 5 90s
until the Roman navy arrived. Naval superiority also facilitated Roman
assaults against Slavs and Avars, and Maurice’s Strategikon includes recom-
mendations for the conduct of amphibious operations beyond the
Danube. 27 The Avars had no maritime skill, and relied on Slavs or
Lombards to produce their boats, but they appreciated the role of the
Roman fleet, since they attempted to control the Danube Cataracts: here
occupation of the river banks could prevent ships from being towed
against the strong current, which would thwart naval operations further
upstream. 28 The eastern navy may receive little attention in the sources, but
it was clearly well organized and contributed importandy to the empire’s
security.

III. WESTERN COLLAPSE

In the western empire the cohesion of imperial armies was progressively
undermined by a combination of tribal invasions and civil wars. At the start
of Honorius’ reign western armies appeared to be sufficiently strong to
defend their traditional Rhine and Danube frontiers, 29 but the massive
movement across the Rhine in December 406 changed the picture.
Honorius’ inability to protect his territories prompted local commanders
or governors to assert their own power, often in combination with one of

25 Zos. v. 20. 3— 2 1 .4; Agathias, Hist. v. 2 1 .7—2 3.1.

26 Procop. Wars m.6.1 with Theophanes 11 5.21— 30; Procop. Wars 111.10— 1 1; Marc. Com. s.a. 508.

27 John Eph. HE vi.24, 30—2; Theophylact vi.4.1— 2, vii.io— 1 1; Maurice, Strat. xn.B.21.

28 Paul. Diac. Hist. Eang. iv.20; Theophylact vm.5.5— 7; Whitby, Maurice 87—8, 1 5 3—4.

29 Elton (1992) 168.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

296

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

the tribal groupings whose military success had contributed to the destruc-
tion of confidence in the emperor. These revolts could only be suppressed
with the assistance of other tribes, whose loyalty had to be purchased with
grants of territory — in effect, recognition of their squatters’ rights. Units
of limitanei were drafted into the mobile armies and most military action
now occurred well within the nominal Roman frontiers, thereby placing
further strains on the economic and military system, as imperial forces in
Gaul and Spain desperately tried to limit the extent of tribal control.

In Italy Honorius’ death in 423 revealed the weakness of the armed
forces available to an emperor. The usurper John, supported by the magis-
ter militum Castinus, had to confront an eastern army marching to install
Honorius’ sister Placidia and her young son Valentinian III. John failed to
rally western provincial armies, and his only hope of safety was the
despatch of Aetius to the Huns to collect allies. These arrived just too late,
and for the third time in a generation the eastern army overthrew a western
usurper, but this time there was no need for a grand battle: Aspar indeed
succeeded in spite of bad weather that disrupted his naval forces and led
to the capture of his father Ardabur. 3 "

Over the next two decades the demise of western armies as a public
institution was hastened by the clash of local military interests, and by the
personal ambitions of individual commanders. Initially, the ultimate prize
for generals was the post of magister militum praesentalis , which gave predom-
inance at the Ravenna court, but a reasonable substitute was a secure local
power base. In this competition remnants of the Roman mobile and garri-
son armies played their part, but the allegiance of tribal groups was crucial:
Aetius’ influence was based on his ability to recruit Huns, while Boniface
defended his control of Africa by summoning the Vandals as supporters,
with a share of the African provinces as reward. ’ 1 Boniface and Aetius
could produce armies to fight for control of Italy while the Vandals overran
Africa and Visigoths and Burgundians consolidated their positions in Gaul,
but neither the emperor nor his ministers could easily deploy reinforce-
ments across regional boundaries to uphold imperial interests. The admin-
istrative problem is expounded in a Novel of Valentinian III in late 444: the
empire desperately needed an army, but this required regular supplies
which could not be squeezed from the western economy — the serene mind
of the emperor was in turmoil over the remedy required by the crises. 32 The
western emperor no longer commanded a mobile army.

Valentinian’s problem was that the state no longer controlled sufficient
resources: in 41 5—16 the Visigoths in Spain had been starved into submis-
sion, and then bribed with food to enter Roman service. Such experiences,

30 PLRE 11 s.v. Aetius 7, at p. 22; Bury, LRE 1.221— 5. 31 PLRE 11 s.v. Bonifatius 3.

32 Valentinian III, A Jov. 1 5 pref.; also Nov. 6.2—3, for contemporary recruitment problems.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WESTERN COLLAPSE

2 97

however, showed migrating tribes that the key to safety was the occupation
of land, which they might hope to secure through successful participation
in Roman civil strife. 33 Although it has been argued that tribes were allo-
cated no more than the tax revenues for certain territories, it is much more
likely that they took possession physically of land: the tribesmen needed
somewhere to live and so would take up residence in the areas which sus-
tained them. The difference between a grant of tax income and of real
estate was perhaps not significant, since, whatever the legal arrangement,
the individual tribal warriors supported themselves as a military elite
through the labours of others. The impact on imperial administration
would also have been similar: control over the land and tax wealth of a
specific area was lost, either directly through the cession of land or indi-
rectly through allocation of tax revenues whose extraction the tribesmen
would have to supervise in the absence of effective imperial control. 34

The result of this process was that by the 440s only Italy and southern
Gaul were under imperial control, and even in these areas it was difficult to
exploit human or economic resources without the consent of local elites.
A military challenge could be met only by the construction of a coalition
of local interest groups — for example, the alliance of Gallic military
resources, tribal as well as Gallo-Roman, brought together by Aetius to
oppose the common challenge of Attila’s Huns, or on a smaller scale the
grouping organized by Anthemius to fight the Visigoths under Euric. 35 The
aristocracy of Rome was long accustomed to being protected by the efforts
of others, and so was reluctant to take the actions or make the concessions
that might have preserved a western emperor at Ravenna. Outside Italy,
however, local aristocrats, including in some cases bishops, could organize
effective armed forces, such as Ecdicius, the brother-in-law of Sidonius
Apollinaris, in the Auvergne, Syagrius at Soissons, or the elite of Saragossa
in Spain, but their range of action was limited: 36 it was not that all western
Romans had lost the ability or will to fight, but that the state could not
deploy this military potential, since the complex system for raising, paying,
supplying and moving armies no longer functioned.

Valentinian attempted to assert imperial authority by personally killing
Aetius with the help of the chamberlain Heraclius, but participation in mil-
itary affairs removed him from the safety of the palace and he was assassi-
nated by two of Aetius’ former retainers on the Campus Martius. 37
Thereafter the army of Italy was controlled by its magister militum Ricimer,

33 Heather, Goths and Romans 220—1 .

34 Allocation of tax revenues: Goffart, Barbarians and Romans , though he accepts that tribesmen soon
became landowners {ibid. ch. viii); Barnish (1986); Heather, Goths and Romans 220—3.

35 PLRE 11 s.v. Aetius 7, at pp. 27—8; also Elton (1992) 171— 3.

36 Sid. Ap. Ep. 111.3.7—8 with Elton (1992) 173—4, and Harries (1992b); Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.27.

37 Moss (1973) 729—30; Marc. Com. s.a. 45 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

298

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

who made and unmade a succession of emperors until his death in 472; as
the fate of Majorian showed, active campaigning by an emperor might not
receive the full support of his main general. The army of Italy was com-
posed largely of non-Roman federal units, off-shoots from the tribal
groups dominant in Gaul and Spain or elements who preferred imperial
money to Hunnic dominion on the Danube. These troops, like the armies
of the emerging post-Roman tribal kingdoms, wanted the stability that only
land ownership could afford in times of financial shortage. When their
demands were refused in 476 by the patrician Orestes, father of the
emperor Romulus Augustulus, they disposed of the last western emperor
and elected as king the Scirian officer Odoacer. 38

Odoacer’s career reveals the problems of war-band leaders in the migra-
tion period: the loyalty of a military following depended on success in
exploiting the Roman need for soldiers and/or in rivalries with the leaders
of other war-bands. Odoacer was proclaimed king to satisfy his soldiers’
demands, but the arrival in Italy of a more powerful leader, Theoderic the
Amal, brought defeat and death/’ 9 The formation of post-Roman king-
doms reflected the success of certain leaders in institutionalizing their tran-
sient military authority: the ability to grant land to their followers, and then
to dispense patronage through the successful exploitation and defence of
resources, created new military structures that revolved around a dynasty,
as opposed to a succession of chiefs elected by the assembly of armed
men. Theoderic the Amal’s career illustrates the process, and its limitations.
In the Balkans in the 470s Theoderic led one of two Gothic war-bands that
competed for imperial patronage, with the relative strength of the bands
fluctuating according to their leaders’ personal success — thus Theoderic
Strabo could seduce followers from Theoderic the Amal, while in due
course the latter annexed the followers of Strabo’s son Recitach. In Italy
Theoderic appeared to have established a stable Amal dynasty which also
controlled the Visigothic kingdom in Spain and could challenge the Franks
in Gaul. Lack of a son, dissension within the family and then failure against
Belisarius’ invasion caused the Goths to return to military election in an
attempt to find a victorious leader. 40

The Goths in Italy and the Vandals in Africa created kingdoms based on
armed forces that were purely tribal — the war-band established on con-
quered territory and then campaigning when required by their king. In
neither province had the native Romans, and especially their aristocracy,
developed a tradition of participation in warfare, so that there could be no
military fusion of Romans and war-band. As a result the tribal army
remained an occupying force that could be supplanted by an alternative

38 Moorhead (1992) 6— 11. 39 PLRE 11 s.v. Odovacer; Moorhead (1992) ch. 1.

40 Heather, Goths and Romans chs. 8—9; Heather (1995); Moorhead (1992) ch. 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WESTERN COLLAPSE

2 99

army: military forces were external to society, and fought for the control of
a passive population . 41 In Italy the situation only began to change during
the protracted wars of reconquest: in 546/7 a powerful local landowner,
Tullianus, enrolled Lucanian peasants, whom he commanded in the
defence of their province — though they were reinforced by the presence
of 300 Antae. 42

By contrast, in Frankish Gaul, and perhaps too in Visigothic Spain,
though evidence is lacking there, the founders of post-Roman kingdoms
managed to combine the strengths of the war-band with the military
potential of the surviving Roman population: in these areas constant inse-
curity had stimulated local military initiatives in ways that had not been nec-
essary in Italy or Africa. The resulting Roman— tribal blend may have
contributed to the greater stability of the Frankish and Visigothic states,
which were better able to survive military defeat, incompetent leadership
or a dynastic minority. In Gaul both Frankish chiefs, who will have included
a number of non-Franks assimilated into the war-band, and Gallo-Roman
magnates gave oaths of allegiance to their king and organized their local-
ities to provide troops on demand, so that the Merovingian kingdom was
protected by a combination of strong local loyalties and duties to the
central power. Clovis and his Merovingian successors managed to exploit
the resources and public institutions of their part of the Roman world
more effectively than any other tribal leader. 43 Their armies were, however,
very different animals from their Roman predecessors: there was no stand-
ing army, the component units were territorially based, and allocation of
land rather than disbursement of pay was the mechanism for attracting
service. These changes entailed, or reflected, complementary changes in
the nature of the state.

In the west the empire’s military institutions failed to survive the tribal
challenge. Distinctions between limitanei and comitatenses became irrelevant
when frontier conditions prevailed throughout all provinces; the authority
of the centre evaporated together with its ability to provide pay and orga-
nize supplies, while military force was provided either by the tribal war-
bands whose federate status became increasingly nominal or by local
leaders with the capacity to marshal the military potential of their particu-
lar region. If Merovingian Gaul represents the successful realignment of
Roman military structures around a new provincial leader, the fate of
Noricum Ripense in the 460s and 470s as revealed in the Life of St
Severinus illustrates the processes of Roman decline. Here the frontier
population struggled to exist in the face of constant tribal raiding. Town
walls only provided temporary protection since there were few troops to

41 Wickham (1981) 25.

42 Procop. Wars vn.22; Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 78 for other examples of this development.

43 James (1982) ch. 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

300 I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

offer resistance and these were demoralized by lack of pay — part of the
garrison of Pessau set out for Italy to collect arrears of pay, but were lulled
in an ambush en route. Severinus gave spiritual leadership, made defences as
efficient as possible, and arranged relief for refugees from sacked towns or
starving inhabitants who had watched their fields being ravaged. Such
measures, however, only delayed the end. In 488, six years after Severinus’
death, Odoacer ordered the surviving Roman population to abandon their
homeland and migrate to Italy; they obeyed the command of their non-
Roman overlord and retreated south with Severinus’ relics in the lead. 44

IV. THE EASTERN ARMY: MEN AND RESOURCES

By contrast, the east managed to survive with its military institutions rela-
tively intact, although in the Balkans it experienced many of the same prob-
lems and developments. There, Hunnic destruction of cities in the 440s had
undermined the basis for Roman control, and for the next half-century the
countryside was dominated by Gothic tribal bands. On occasions these
notionally constituted the Roman army, but their presence still inspired
terror in the inhabitants of surviving cities such as Thessalonica or
Dyrrachium. Arrangements for local defence might be efficient, as at
Asemus, but these could cause conflicts of interest with the emperor: the
men of Asemus captured Huns whom Theodosius wanted to surrender to
make peace with Attila, whereas the Asemites were determined to retain
them as hostages for the return of some of their own people from the
Huns. 45 The key to Roman authority lay in the control of supplies: the war-
bands of the two Theoderics lacked secure territory to make them self-
sufficient, and so food and agricultural land were powerful bargaining
counters for Roman commanders. The emperor, safe inside Constantinople,
could control the distribution of food supplies by sea, and divert resources
from other areas to support administrative reorganization when this became
practical. 46

The eastern army of the sixth century in theory preserved the traditional
distinction between limitanei and comitatenses ; the latter could be referred to
under the generic term stratiotai, soldiers, 47 although this does not indicate
that the former had no military function or status. Indeed, in reconquered
Africa Justinian acted to re-establish limitanei-. he sent one unit of limitanei
from the east and ordered Belisarius to enrol other units from among suit-
able provincials. These were to receive lands, and so contribute to the culti-
vation of frontier districts and ensure their security; the comitatenses stationed
in Africa were available as a reserve force. The same complementary roles

44 Alfoldy (1 974) ch. 12; Thompson (1982) ch. 7; cf. ch. 18 (Wood), pp. 506, 513, 524 below.

45 Malchus fr. 20.5—19, 63—87; Priscus fr. 9.3.39—80.

46 Heather, Goths and Romans &i. 8; cf. ch. 23 (Whitby), pp. 713— i4below. 47 Justinian, Nov. 103.3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EASTERN ARMY: MEN AND RESOURCES 301

can be seen in Libya Pentapolis, for which Anastasius’ regulations survive:
the provincial garrison contained five units of comitatenses , but supervision
of movements across the frontier and security along the roads were
entrused to the castrensiani or garrison forces. At Palmyra, however, where
Justinian established a regiment of comitatenses alongside the garrison of lim-
itanei , the distinction may have become less clear, since comitatenses at a stable
posting acquired the same range of social and economic connections with
local society that limitanei naturally had. 48

The comitatenses were grouped into units known as numeri or arithmoi ,
‘numbers’, sometimes loosely referred to as katalogos, ‘list’; in due course
tagmata, ‘formation’, or bandon, ‘flag’, became current. Where evidence is
available, the basic unit on active service numbered between 250 and 500
soldiers, who were grouped into larger moirai, units of 2,000—3,000 men,
which might then be brigaded into mere, contingents of 6,000—7,000 men.
Eastern Roman armies were raised from a variety of sources, which
ensured that no single group could dominate, as the tribal war-bands could
in the west. 49 The most effective Roman soldiers were drawn from the bel-
licose inhabitants of various mountainous regions of the eastern empire,
notably the central Balkans, the Taurus range in southern Anatolia (Isauria
and Pisidia) and the Armenian highlands. It was the emperors’ ability to
control and exploit this manpower which permitted the survival of the
eastern army as a Roman institution. For leading Isaurians Tarasicodissa,
the future emperor Zeno, showed the way to prominent positions at court,
while their followers entered the guards units and the regular army, a devel-
opment that was unpopular with those who regarded the Isaurians as more
barbarian than the Germans or saw threats to their own power base. 50 After
Zeno’s death the Isaurians might have reverted to their lawless ways, but
Anastasius’ repression of Isaurian revolts ensured that central authority
was upheld. An analogous development can be traced in Armenia, where
the personal advance of men like Narses and Sittas was accompanied by
widespread recruitment into the armies. At the same time local administra-
tion was reformed to increase direct Roman authority at the expense of
semi-independent princes. 51

The best elements in the eastern armies were the federates and various
other units of non-Roman peoples. In contrast to the west, where feder-
ates eventually supplanted Romans, in the east federates came to be
recruited from Romans as well as non-Romans. Procopius alludes to this

48 CJ 1.27.2.8; SEG ix.356; Malalas 426.1— 5; Jones, ERE 661—2.

49 Jones, ERE 659—60; for use of terminology, see for example Maurice, Strategikon (consult index)
to the Dennis/Gamillscheg edn (1981) for the different terms.

50 Malchus fr. 22; cf. ch. 17 (Whitby), p. 477 below.

51 PERE in s.v. Narses 1 and Sittas 1; Malalas 429.16— 430.8; Justinian, Nov. 31; Jones, ERE 280—1;
Whitby (1995) sec. 7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

302

I I . THE ARMY, C . 42O— 602

change in the context of the Vandal expedition of 533, but the precise
significance of the development is uncertain. Large numbers of tribesmen
were now settled within the empire, 52 and it is possible that federates were
soldiers of recognizably Germanic or Gothic origin, drawn from internal
as well as external sources. Their quality remained superior to that of stan-
dard Roman units, since they were marshalled less deeply in the battle line, 53
and the availability within the empire of such recruits contributed to the
eastern emperors’ success in dominating a potentially autonomous, non-
Roman element. Justinian in particular was quick to exploit the military
potential of regions brought under his control. The Tzani, neighbours of
Armenia, and the remnants of the Vandal army were both incorporated
into the regular structure of the Roman army: the emperor increased the
resources under his direct control, while the potential for local revolt was
reduced. 54 By the end of the sixth century, a new ‘foreign legion’, the opti-
mates , had been constituted alongside the federates: the optimates, as their
Latin name might suggest, were the best unit in the army, drawn up only
five or seven deep and accompanied by armed retainers who were them-
selves worthy of inclusion in the battle line. 55

In addition to federates and optimates, there were allied units from outside
the frontiers, Saracens organized under a Ghassanid phylarch who
patrolled the Syrian and Arabian desert fringes, 56 Huns, Bulgars and
Lombards recruited on the Danube for service elsewhere in the empire.
Many of the best non-Romans found their way into the bucellarii, the private
bodyguards of individual generals, who were enlisted from men conspicu-
ous for bravery or other talents. 58 Armies on campaign were composed of
a mixture of units: garrison troops might be requisitioned for field service,
though their officers would be mindful of their local responsibilities;
higher-grade Roman units drawn from Isauria or Illyricum would share the
burden of fighting with federates, who had the responsibility of holding
the centre of the battle line; other allied contingents might be in atten-
dance, depending on the area of operations and sometimes — for example,
in the case of the Saracens in 573 and 581 — on the mood of their leader.
The general was accompanied by his personal bodyguard, ready to impress
enemy ambassadors with their discipline, to protect their commander in
battle, and to execute his personal orders. 59

The standard scholarly view is thatjustinianic armies differed from their
late Roman predecessors in being composed of volunteers rather than

52 Jones, LRE 663—6; Haldon (1984) ch. 1, 96—118; Procop. Wars hi. 1 1.3— 4.

53 Maurice, Strat. 11.6.17— 29. 54 Procop. Wars 1.1 5.25; iv.14.17— 18; Malalas 427.17— 428.4.

55 Maurice, Strat. 11.6.29—40.

56 Isaac, Limits of Empire 235—49; Shahid (1957); Parker (1987) 822—3.

57 E.g. Procop. Wars v.27.1— 2; viii. 26.11— 13.

58 Gascou (1976a); Liebeschuet2, Barbarians and Bishops 43—7 ; Whitby (1995) sec. 9.

59 Whitby (1995) sec. 7 and 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EASTERN ARMY: MEN AND RESOURCES 303

conscripts, at least for the mobile units. 60 Closer examination, however, of
the military provisions in the Justinianic Code reveals that the traditional
dilectus or compulsory levy was sdll operated, and that recruits could still
be furnished by units of tax-paying landowners ( temones or capitula)\ the
collective responsibility for providing the recruit was delegated in turn to
a president, an onerous burden {protostasia, prototypia), from which exemp-
tions were sought. Monetary commutation of this obligation was allowed
for imperial lands. 61 This system represents a degree of imperial control
that was signally lacking in the western empire in the early fifth century,
when landowners had been able to demand concessions and emperors
forced to entice volunteers with bribes whose fulfilment was uncertain. Of
course, volunteers were not rejected from eastern armies, and on occa-
sions when it was necessary to raise troops quickly for a particular cam-
paign a commander would have to travel round, cash in hand, to attract
the men he needed, rather than wait for the slower procedures of the pro-
vincial dilectus , 62

In addition to conscription there was an element of hereditary service in
all Roman parts of the army. This is demonstrable in the case of limitanei
and static units of comitatenses in Egypt, Palestine and the exarchate of north
Italy, where papyri attest family succession; it probably also applied to the
mobile army, since in 5 94 Maurice proposed to give preferential enrolment
to sons of deceased veterans, and this was regarded as a welcome aspect of
an unpopular package of reforms. 63 Recruitment was supervised by the
imperial bureaucracy, which would issue instructions about the numbers
needed to bring units up to strength, and then individual approvals would
be sent to the particular regiments to sanction the inclusion of a new name
on their regimental muster. Such a complex system was obviously open to
abuse, but energetic emperors like Anastasius and Justinian were prepared
to risk unpopularity by legislating against corruption and arranging detailed
inspections of regimental strengths and effectiveness. 64

It is difficult to quantify the advantages of soldiering in terms of pay and
conditions of service, since much depended on the nature of the military
action to be undertaken. Membership of a unit of limitanei in upper Egypt
was sufficiently attractive to merit payment of an entry fee, at least by those
who could not claim a hereditary place; for such men, guard duty beyond the
Danube represented a severe punishment, exile to active service in a distant
and dangerous land. 65 In the static units automatic promotion through

60 Jones, ERE 668—70; Haldon (1979) 20. 61 Whitby (1995) sec. 4; CJ x.42.8; 62.3; xi.75.3.

62 Procop. Wars vii.10.1— 3.

63 Haldon (1979) 21; Keenan (1990); Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 85—6. Theophylact vii.i.

64 P.Ryl. 609; SEG ix. 3 5 6; Procop. Secret History 24.5— 11; Procop. Wars vn.1.28— 33; Agathias, Hist.
v. 14; Jones, ERE 661—2.

65 P Monac. 1, with Keenan (1990) 144; Justinian, Edict 13.1 1.1 = CJ 111.785.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

304 I I . THE ARMY, C . 42O— 602

length of service provided pay increases, and Anastasius was prepared to tol-
erate the retention for life on military rolls of a proportion of each unit;
Justinian was criticized for abolishing this concession to military inefficiency,
but his expectation was that a combination of graduated pay plus some tax
benefits for veterans constituted sufficient provision for retirement. In
mobile units, life must have been less comfortable, but on successful cam-
paigns these men could benefit from booty: its attraction tended to lead to
undisciplined looting and disputes about proper apportionment. 66 For the
majority of recruits, even the bellicose Armenians, service far from home
was unpopular and might occasion dissent. The process of conscription was
disliked, and legislation against poltroons was required. On the other hand,
the right general in the right place could find volunteers through personal
connections and disbursement of money, as Belisarius in Thrace in 544,
Narses in the Balkans in 551/2, or Maurice in Cappadocia in 578. 67

Justinian is alleged to have deprived limitanei of their pay, and declassified
them from the status of soldiers, but this criticism in Procopius’ Secret
History probably misrepresents his actions. He may have instituted a system
of payment only for active service, or service away from a unit’s particular
area, whereas normal sustenance was provided by the estates attached to
each unit. The experience of an Illyrian contingent in Italy points to the
importance of estates in terms of remuneration: the men returned to the
Balkans after suffering serious arrears of pay, presumably in the belief that
they could support themselves there. 68 On the other hand, mobile troops
continued to receive annual cash payments which represented the mone-
tary commutations for their annona or ration allowance, if this had not been
supplied in kind, and for their uniform and arms. This was probably paid
when the troops were in winter quarters, or on the point of marshalling for
the next season’s campaign, to provide a stimulus for prompt reporting and
enthusiastic service. Although arms, horses and uniforms were not issued,
soldiers were probably expected to acquire them ultimately from the state
factories or stud farms. In spite of regulations that officers had to super-
vise the proper equipping of their men, with severe penalties for failure,
allowances were not spent fully on their intended objects: when Maurice in
594 attempted to reintroduce issues in kind, the Balkan army mutinied.
There was certainly a reluctance to expose precious possessions to extra
danger, as concern for their horses was one reason why the mutinous army
in 602 refused to spend the winter north of the Danube. 69

The eastern army was underpinned by a massive administrative system
that ensured the collection and distribution of money and supplies as

66 Jones, LRE 675; Procop. Secret History 24.8; Maurice, Strat. v; Theophylact 11.4.1— 3, vi.7.6— 8.3.

67 Sebeos ch. 10; Digest 49. 16.4. 12; Procop. Wars vii.10.1— 3, vm.26.5— 17; John Eph. HE vi.14.

68 Procop. Secret History 24.12—14; Warsstw. 11.13—16; Whitby (1995) sec. 8.

69 Jones, LRE 670—2; Maurice, Strat. 1.2; Theophylact vii.i, vm.6.2 with Whitby, Maurice 166—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EASTERN ARMY: MEN AND RESOURCES 305

needed. The empire’s logistical organization was certainly capable of sup-
porting the army in peacetime, mainly because troops were dispersed to
individual towns and cities from which they had to be reassembled for
service in a mobile army. Large-scale military campaigns required advance
preparations and on occasions, as at Edessa in 503, special measures, but
the fact that through into the seventh century imperial commanders were
capable of marshalling and manoeuvring very big armies is a tribute to the
overall functioning of the system. Availability of supplies was an important
criterion in the selection of sites for winter quarters, when officers were
responsible for ensuring adequate provisions. Eastern armies — for
example, in 503 — tended to break up into their constituent elements and
return to their provinces or the individual cities where they were billeted,
although in the 580s, after the development of Monocarton near
Constantina (Viranshehir), a large part of the army might remain there. 70

In the Balkans the poverty of the countryside provided extra problems,
and in the 580s and 590s it seems that armies retired south-east for the
winter, to the Black Sea towns of Tomi or Odessus or towards the Sea of
Marmara to Drizipera, Tzurullon or even Heracleia, where the shipment of
essential supplies must have been easiest. At the same time, armies might
deliberately be sent to winter in dangerous places, since overwinter billeting
was a method of imposing control on recalcitrant subjects, as the Avars did
to the Slavs. 71 The process of reconstituting an army from scattered ele-
ments presupposed the existence of an efficient system of mustering the
troops. In Italy in the seventh century, and Dalmatia in the eighth, there is
evidence for the gathering of scattered local garrisons and militias to form
a mobile army, and the sequence of the Balkan campaigns in the 590s sug-
gests that, not surprisingly, proper arrangements existed there, too; on the
eastern front it is possible that a general would instruct his troops to reas-
semble for a communal celebration of Easter. 72 Problems could occur, as
when the fugitive Lombard Ildigisal was able to defeat disorganized forces
in the Balkans, or when the commanders of contingents from Lebanon in
Belisarius’ eastern army in 542 imposed a time limit on their co-operation.
The success of Khusro’s march to Antioch in 540 can be attributed to the
difficulty of assembling an army very rapidly to respond to an unexpected
attack: in such a crisis, local Roman commanders might pay more attention
to the interests of their garrison towns and ignore, or affect ignorance of,
commands from the centre. The military machine moved too slowly to
respond in such circumstances. But overall, the system generally worked and
there are few signs of armies being immobilized by bureaucratic failures. 73

70 Joshua 65; Theophylact in.i.i— 3.

71 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 89 n. 17; Theophylact vi.6.3; Fredegar iv.48.

72 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 92; Theophylact vn.1.3, 7.1.

73 Procop. Wars vm. 27. 1— 18; n. 1 6. 1 6—1 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

306 I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

One indication of the underlying strength of eastern arrangements was
the empire’s ability, at least in the short term, to surmount the ravages of
the Great Plague, which struck first in 541/2 and then flared up in various
parts of the empire throughout the rest of the century. Mortality was cer-
tainly highest in the large cities, which were of limited relevance to the
recruitment or supply of armies, but there were also deaths among farmers
and disruption to agriculture, and concentrations of soldiers must also
have been liable to high casualties. Thus, although the overall severity of
the plague may be debated, it would have destabilized a system that was
already insecure. In fact, however, it is difficult to detect any direct or imme-
diate impact.' 4 There is no apparent decline in the size of eastern armies
after the 540s: few precise figures are available, but in the Strategikon of
Maurice a force of between 5 ,000 and 1 5 ,000 is considered to be well pro-
portioned, which accords with the sizes of Justinianic expeditionary forces
for the west in the 530s. Complaints about shortages of soldiers under
Tiberius and Maurice were caused in part by simultaneous campaigns on
two or more frontiers: diversion of resources to the east left the Balkans
and Italy vulnerable, but this problem of juggling available manpower to
meet different commitments had existed since the reign of Augustus. 75

There is also no clear increase in the proportion of non-Roman troops
serving in the armies, another possible sign of a decline in available Roman
manpower. Here definitions are important, since Roman armies had tradi-
tionally contained a large number of soldiers whom a blue-blooded aristo-
crat in Rome would have regarded as uncivilized, but who nevertheless
originated from within the empire — and it is this which is the crucial con-
sideration for an emperor’s ability to control and organize military recruit-
ment, whereas subjective judgements on barbarization are less relevant.
Thus, soldiers might be Goth or Armenian by racial origin, but be subject
to the Roman emperor as tax-paying inhabitants. Emperors recruited from
outside their frontiers when necessary, but such foreigners were merely one
element within an army that was already heterogeneous . 76 The largest single
foreign recruitment was probably that initiated by Tiberius in 574, when it
was essential to rebuild the eastern armies very quickly and a new force of
Tiberiani, numbering perhaps 15,000, was raised . 77 Otherwise, emperors
continued a pragmatic policy of exploiting the military potential of avail-
able tribes or war-bands but without creating a non-Roman army: enlist-
ment of Lombards, Goths and even Anglo-Saxons in the late sixth century
was balanced by recruitment from Cappadocia or Mesopotamia, as carried
out by Maurice in 578 and Philippicus in 5 84.

74 Whitby (1995) sec. 6.

75 Maurice Strat. m.8, 10; Menander frr. 21, 22; for problems in the early fifth century, cf.

Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 129. 76 Whitby (1995) sec. 7.

77 Evagr. HE v.14 with Theophanes 251.24—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EASTERN ARMY: MEN AND RESOURCES 307

Emperors were not desperate for manpower, but they naturally acted to
control human resources that might be useful in the future. The Herul king
Grepes was told to return home after his baptism at Constantinople and
await the imperial call. Subsequently, Justinian gave the remnant of this bel-
licose, but rather barbaric, tribe territory in the vicinity of Singidunum,
from where they could be enrolled when needed; descendants of these
Heruls were perhaps among the inhabitants of Singidunum who were
saved from resettlement by the Avars in the 5 90s (an example of the Avars
trying to annex Roman population resources). Justinian permitted the
Lombards to dwell in Noricum and Pannonia, provinces so remote that his
acquiescence was a formality, but the establishment of Bulgar Kotrigurs or
the Lombard group led by Ildigisal in Thrace were definite acts of patron-
age, and anticipated a large settlement of Bulgars by Maurice. A final
example of this policy was being contemplated in 602 when Maurice, in
order to create an army of 30,000 Armenians in the Balkans, apparently
ordered the resettlement of the same number of families in Europe. 78 Such
actions reveal a continuity of imperial concern, which can be traced
throughout late antiquity (e.g. Gothic settlements in the Balkans in the
fourth century), not a new development consequent on the plague. In the
east, land was used constructively at different levels to sustain an imperial
army: limitanei received plots of land which contributed to their mainte-
nance, while potential members of elite units also had properties on which
they resided when not required for active service — the military strength of
the empire was supported at a reasonable cost. 79

Finance was the key constraint. It has been claimed that in the early fifth
century the east kept its armed forces relatively small as a solution to prob-
lems in financing and controlling troops. 8 " This assertion cannot be cor-
roborated, and in fact the relative lack of problems may indicate that rising
prosperity in Asia Minor, Syria and Egypt allowed emperors to avoid
serious arrears of pay, and hence indiscipline. Under Anastasius a substan-
tial financial reserve was created, which undoubtedly facilitated Justinian’s
expansive diplomatic and military activity. This, coupled with expensive
building works in Justinian’s last decade, caused a crisis of liquidity, but
unpopular retrenchment under Justin II again created a surplus for his suc-
cessor to exploit. Tiberius was notorious for generosity, and lavish spend-
ing allowed him to create an army in 574/5. The see-saw progress of
imperial finances meant that Maurice was faced by a severe shortage of
cash: he seems to have built up his armies in the 5 80s through determined
conscription, carried out by scribones, but as soon as he had to pay a large
army in the Balkans in addition to the eastern field army, he was forced to

78 Procop. Wars vn.33.10— 13; vm.19.3— 5; 27.8; Michael the Syrian x.21, vol. n pp. 363—4; Sebeos
ch. 20. 79 Whitby (1995) sec. 8. 80 Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

308 I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

attempt a highly unpopular reduction in military pay in 5 88. 81 It is possible
that the empire’s economic resilience, which in tax-producing terms meant
its agricultural base, was gradually declining towards the end of the century,
as repeated visitations of plague, extensive invasions in the Balkans and
protracted campaigning in the east combined to take their toll. But, if so,
the trend was gradual, since in the seventh century Phocas — and Heraclius,
down to the loss of the major revenue-generating provinces of Syria and
Egypt — had funds to give bribes to the Avars and finance field armies in
the east.

V. EASTERN SURVIVAL

Eastern emperors controlled the commanders and officers in their armies,
not just the manpower, and here too the contrast with the west is
significant: the army remained an institution under imperial authority, not
an independent force capable of dictating to its nominal masters. The
eastern counterparts of Ricimer and Odoacer were the magistri militum
Aspar and his sons Ardabur and Patricius, Armatus and his son Basiliscus,
and Ulus: these generals dominated emperors and attempted to manipulate
the imperial succession by placing proteges on the throne or by insinuating
their families into the imperial house (both Patricius and Basiliscus were
proclaimed Caesar). But, whereas Ricimer killed Majorian, Leo disposed of
Aspar’s family inside the palace, while Zeno had Armatus lulled when
leaving the palace to enter the Hippodrome and overcame Illus in civil
war. 82 Other powerful military families, like that of the Goth Areobindus,
married into the aristocracy: the younger Areobindus fled Constantinople
rather than accede to popular requests that he champion orthodoxy and
supplant the Monophysite Anastasius, perhaps to the disgust of his wife
Anicia Juliana, daughter of the western emperor Olybrius. 83 In the sixth
century, generals were often imperial relatives or members of the palatine
staff. Military unrest tended to be generated from the lower ranks disgrun-
tled about lack of pay or other specific grievances, and was led by junior or
middle-ranking officers, Stotzas in Africa in the late 5 30s, Germanus in the
east in 588 or Phocas on the Danube in 602. The salient exception, the
sequence of revolts against Anastasius led by Vitalian, comes and then mas-
ter militum, had a religious motivation and in any case ultimately failed. 84

Another aspect of the survival of the eastern army as a public institu-
tion is the emperors’ ability to keep control of soldiers in private service.
Prominent Romans had always possessed retinues with a capacity to act as

81 Evagr. HE v.14; Michael the Syrian x.21; Theophylact 111.1.2 with Evagr. HE vi.4.

82 For career details, see PLRE 11. 83 PLRE 11.143— 4 s.v Areobindus 1; Malalas 406.22— 408.1 1.

84 Career details in PLRE hi; discussion in Kaegi (1981) chs. 3—4, esp. 60—2. Cf. ch. 17 (Whitby),

pp. 473—5 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EASTERN SURVIVAL

3°9

bodyguards, and imperial legislation prohibiting private citizens from car-
rying arms had been directed against such personal militias. 85 The comm-
utation of such arrangements into the late empire is no surprise, but
whereas in the west there was a tendency towards the privatization of mil-
itary resources, in the east the private capabilities were kept accessible to
the state. 86 In part this was achieved by direct legislation against the main-
tenance of private guards in cities and on estates: a law of Leo from 468
was incorporated into the Justinianic Code, while Justinian himself legis-
lated in 5 42. 87 But the inevitability of such guards could also be exploited.
In 528 Justinian had despatched senators ‘with their forces’ to defend
various eastern cities, and at the climax of the Nika riot Justinian ordered
those senators who had gathered in the palace to return to their own homes
and guard them, since the mopping up of rioters would be much easier if
they were denied access to the massive semi-fortified mansions of the
elite. 88 In Egypt some large landowners, like the Apion family, had bucella-
rii who appear to have received a public salary and could be used for official
administrative purposes. 89

Within the armies individual commanders might build up large retinues
of bucellarir. Belisarius is credited with 7,000 retainers, probably an exagger-
ation, but even a less distinguished figure, Valerian, could command 1,000. 90
But these men owed allegiance to the emperor as well as their commander,
and they might not follow their general through all the vicissitudes of his
career: thus some of Belisarius’ retinue stayed behind in Africa in the 5 30s,
and when in 5 44 he was moved from the eastern frontier to Italy he was not
permitted to transfer his bodyguards, as he subsequently complained to
Justinian. Prospects for better employment could also outweigh loyalty to an
individual general: thus in 5 50 Germanus, possible heir to the throne and well
equipped with money, could attract guards from less advantaged patrons
when preparing to march to Italy. 91 Bucellarii made a significant contribution
to the performance of eastern armies: they might be used for special mis-
sions, or assigned to a place of danger in battle, or expected to help maintain
discipline, but it is misleading to regard this as a dangerous and inevitable
tendency towards semi-private armies. Rather, they could have a beneficial
impact on the mass of ordinary troops, by establishing higher standards of
appearance and conduct, and by dangling the rewards of preferential treat-
ment to stimulate others to bravery. It was for this reason that an official
manual such as the Strategikon of Maurice paid attention to their existence. 92

85 Cameron and Long (1993) 21 1 n. 62.

86 Whitby (1995) sec. 9; Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 43— 7 .

87 CJ ix.12.10; Nov. 1 16; cf. also Feissel and Kaygusuz (1985). 88 Malalas 442.8—16.

89 Gascou (1976a). 90 Procop. Wars vii. 1.18—20; 27.3.

91 Procop. Wars iv. 10.4; vii. 10.1, 12.10; 39.17.

92 Procop. Wars 111.17.1; 19.23— 4; Maurice, Strat. 1. 2.10; 9.29— 35.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

310 I I . THE ARMY, C. \ZO— 602

The eastern armies preserved the Roman military reputation through to
the end of the sixth century by capitalizing on available resources and
showing a capacity to adapt to a variety of challenges. Not all battles were
won, but two successful tribal kingdoms in the west (Vandals, Ostrogoths)
were destroyed; Persian aggression in the east was contained and a substan-
tial increase in Roman territory achieved on the north-eastern frontier; the
Danube, which Hunnic attacks appeared to have removed from Roman
control, was re-established as a frontier and held in spite of Bulgar, Avar
and Slav incursions. Correct tactics played their part, since the Romans
were sufficiently professional to realize that different opponents had
different strengths and weaknesses to be encountered or exploited: these
were observed and carefully listed in Maurice’s Strategikon xi under four
headings: Persians; Scythians — namely, Avars, Turks and comparable
Hunnic tribes; the fair-haired races such as the Franks and Lombards; and
finally the Slavs and Antes. Guidance was offered on the best tactics for use
against each. The Romans also noticed military ideas that could be adopted
from their enemies, with the Avars being the most influential example in
the sixth century: their bows, tents and body and horse armour were highly
regarded, and their flexible battle array was thought to be superior to the
traditional single lines favoured by the Romans . 93

The best individual soldiers in the Roman army were undoubtedly cav-
alrymen: Procopius, in the introduction to his Wars, selected the mounted
archer as the epitome of the modern warrior, perhaps in part because this
was such a contrast to the traditional Roman legionary equipped with shield
and sword. The archer’s skill as a horseman and the power of his heavy bow
may have been borrowed from the fifth-century Huns, and Huns contin-
ued to serve throughout the sixth century, but training in archery was also
recommended for all recruits . 94 But the army possessed a variety of skills:
in conflicts with Persians the Romans were advised to rely on the superior-
ity of their charge, which points to the existence of high-quality heavy
cavalry armed with lances; against the Avars infantry were needed to lend
stability to the battle line in its severest test, an indication that good foot
soldiers were also available. Undoubtedly the heterogeneous origins of sol-
diers contributed to the range of their specialities, but it was intended that
these abilities be taught to the internal Roman elements in the armies.

An important contribution to Roman superiority, at least over enemies
in Europe, was their ability to construct and defend powerful fortifications.
Roman torsion-powered siege engines were sufficiently complex to be
beyond the skills of most tribal groups, unless like the Huns they managed
to acquire assistance from Roman captives or deserters. Apart from the
Huns, the only tribal group with an effective siege technology were the

93 Maurice, Strat. 1.2, 11.1. 94 Procop. Wars 1. 1.8— 16; Maurice, Strat. 1.2.28— 30.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EASTERN SURVIVAL

3 1 1

Avars, who should probably be credited with introducing into European
warfare a simple type of siege engine, a counter-weighted stone thrower,
that was propelled by human muscle power. But even the Huns and Avars
also had to rely on human waves to overcome defences, and the ability of
their leaders to force subject populations to suffer the enormous casualties
of such assaults was a significant demonstration of their authority. These
mass attacks involved the assembly of very large numbers of men, and it
is perhaps not surprising that the Avars were incapable of maintaining a
long siege outside Thessalonica or Constantinople, where the defenders
could exploit their control of the sea to supply themselves. 95 Other tribal
groups had to rely on protracted blockade, inducements to treachery, or the
luck of a surprise assault, as is revealed in the numerous sieges during the
Roman reconquest of Italy or in the Slav migrations into the Balkans. 96

In Europe strong defences coupled with a determined garrison tended
to thwart attackers: Roman armies were reluctant to risk heavy losses in
frontal assaults, while their tribal enemies could usually find easier sources
of booty. In Africa after the Justinianic reconquest the importance of
defences is revealed by the attention devoted to the construction and repair
of forts: from these bases a relatively small garrison could hope to with-
stand Moorish raids, and hence retain control of the province. 97 On the
eastern frontier the balance of power and skills was much more even. The
Persians had the technical capacity and logistical organization to sustain
long and active sieges of fortresses and walled cities: in 502/3 Amida fell
after three months, while in 573 it took six months to capture Dara. Here
the solution for the Romans was to keep all defences in good order since,
as the fall of Antioch in 540 demonstrated, the Persians were quick to
exploit any weakness. It is not surprising that Anastasius and Justinian, but
particularly the latter, achieved reputations for constructing major
fortifications, since both had to react to successful Persian aggression. 98

Discipline was a recurrent problem, and there was a sequence of muti-
nies in eastern armies which culminated in the military revolt that toppled
Maurice and placed the officer Phocas on the throne in 602." Part of the
problem was caused by the variety of allied contingents present. Belisarius
en route to Africa executed two Huns at Abydus, a punishment that nearly
provoked their compatriots to mutiny; Narses in Italy in 552 found his
Lombard allies a mixed blessing, and immediately after the defeat of Totila
he paid them off and sent them back to their Balkan homes. Roman recruits,
however, were far from perfect: Belisarius complained of the inexperience

95 Whitby, Maurice 172—3 ; Chron. Pasch. 717.1—726.10; Miracula S. Demetrii 1.1 56—60, 11.21 2— 13.

96 Procop. Wars vii is dominated by accounts of sieges; see Thompson (1982) 82—6.

97 Pringle (1981) 89—120; Procop. Buildings vi. 5— 7.

98 Procop. Wars 1.7.29; John Eph. HE vi.5; Procop. Wars 11.8; Procop. Buildings n— m.

99 Discussion in Kaegi (1981) chs. 3—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 1 2

I I . THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

of his new Thracian recruits in 544, and in the 570s both Justinian and
Maurice acquired reputations as disciplinarians after having to cope with
significant influxes of new troops. 100 But accusations of declining standards
are a familiar theme in Roman, indeed in all, military history, and criticism
needs to be assessed in the light of the armies’ performance in the field.

The main causes of poor morale and indiscipline in the sixth century
were, unsurprisingly, lack of pay or supplies and military defeat. The army
was such a complex and expensive institution to support that the existence
of some problems was inevitable, especially at times of financial strin-
gency. Armies serving in areas that could not locally support the troops
were particularly liable to suffer, hence the difficulties in the expeditionary
armies in Africa and Italy when counter-offensives prevented the organized
exploitation of local resources, and in the Balkans, an area renowned for
impoverishment but with a large military establishment. Mutineers were
treated with the same mixture of exemplary harshness and general pardon
as in previous centuries: soldiers had always been too valuable to squander
if they could be cowed into obedience. There is no evidence that Roman
traditions in this respect had been forgotten in the sixth-century army,
whether because of difficulties over manpower or creeping ‘barbarization’
of the military. 101

Eastern armies fulfilled their defensive functions through to the end of
the sixth century. It seems unlikely that the late Roman army was ever orga-
nized in accordance with some grand ‘scientific’ strategy for protecting the
empire: frontiers did not operate as rigid exclusion zones, and field armies
tended to be marshalled after the appearance of a threat (as in 540) rather
than maintained, at much greater cost, in a state of permanent readiness.
But the protection of the empire was not as amateurish as might be con-
cluded either from the lack of good maps and regular intelligence about
threatening neighbours, or from the absence of discussions of strategic
matters in Graeco-Roman literature, especially in the tradition of military
handbooks. Generations of observation and experience ensured that
Roman armies, officers and emperors, part of whose duty it was to protect
the empire, were aware of the likely origin, nature and direction of
threats. 102 Most military forces — obviously, Hunnic or Avar cavalry or a
Persian grand army under the king’s command, but also a Slav war-band
when accompanied by wagons — were constrained to move along recog-
nized routes where travel was easy and supplies available.

The Romans organized their defences as particular needs emerged.
Problems of campaigning on the eastern front stimulated the construc-
tion of Dara by Anastasius, and after the loss of Dara in 573 the same logic

100 Procop. Wars hi. 1 2.8—22; vm. 3 3.2—3; Theophylact 111. 1 2.7; Menander fr. 23.3.

101 Maurice, Strat. 1.6.19—22; Whitby (1995) sec. 6, contra Kaegi (1981) 72.

102 Contrasting views in Luttwak (1976), Isaac, Limits of Empire ch. ix and Lee (1993) esp. ch. 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EASTERN SURVIVAL 3 I 3

dictated the development of Monocarton. The need to increase the secur-
ity of the Armenian frontier led Justinian to strengthen Martyropolis and
construct a new fortress at Citharizon: these eastern forts were focal
points for future campaigns, an indication of their strategic impact. 103 In
the Balkans, the Danube had a number of known crossing points which
Roman garrisons could observe, and south of the frontier there were rel-
atively few passes over the Haemus, Rhodope and Pindus ranges, so that
Roman defenders, if well prepared, could anticipate the movements of
raiding parties and attack when appropriate. 104 No emperor could afford
to neglect his armies for long, and although it might make good propa-
ganda to blame problems on a predecessor’s mistakes or inaction, such
accusations need to be treated cautiously.

Diplomacy was an essential element in the structure of Roman defences,
its efficacy depending on the availability of military force to back up prom-
ises, and its operations often being conducted by, or at least in conjunction
with, military commanders. Relations with Persia were organized sysemat-
ically, as befitted long-standing neighbours who were bound by a number
of common interests as much as antagonized by points of dispute.
Diplomatic exchanges were structured, with minor embassies following
major missions and envoys travelling according to a schedule and being
welcomed in Constantinople in set form. 105

Throughout most of the fifth and sixth centuries the Romans remained
on the defensive in the east: emperors had pressing concerns in the Balkans
and the west and little expectation of territorial gain in Mesopotamia or
Armenia, so that the combined objective of diplomacy and military
defences was to deter Persian aggression, or terminate a war quickly once
fighting had begun. The exception was Justin II’s aggression in 572, when
Persian difficulties with Armenians and Turks appeared to offer the
Romans an escape from having to begin annual cash payments to Persia,
the concession they fought hardest to avoid, since it could imply an accep-
tance of inferior tributary status. 106 Both empires accepted that local
squabbles between clients could involve their patrons in wider conflict,
willingly or unwillingly; the peace-time ideal — enshrined, for example, in
the Fifty Years’ Peace of 5 6 1/2 — was for the military authorities on both
sides of the frontier to co-operate in the rapid elimination of such aggra-
vations. 107 Diplomatic contacts across European frontiers were less gov-
erned by long traditions, but had the same basic objectives of protecting
Roman interests and defusing threats without resort to the uncertainty and
expense of war. Here there was always a danger that reluctance to fight
would be interpreted as weakness, and hence merely act as an incitement to

103 Zachariah vn.6; Procop. Buildings 111.2— 3; Whitby, Maurice 209—13. 104 Whitby, Maurice 70—9.

105 Whitby, Maurice 21 5—18; Lee (1993) 166—70; Blockley (1992) 1 51—63.

106 Whitby, Maurice 250—3. 107 Details in Menander fr. 6.1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

314 II. THE ARMY, C. 42O— 602

further demands, as happened with the Huns in the 440s and the Avars in
the 570s and 580s. Selective patronage of tribes or war-bands had to be
accompanied by visible strength in the vicinity of the frontier, so that inva-
sion of Roman territory did not become an easy option for those under
threat in their own lands.

‘I know that war is a great evil, and worse than evils’ is part of the pre-
amble to a discussion on strategy that should probably be dated to
Justinian’s reign, but attention to the army was an essential part of an
emperor’s work, as the deranged Justin advised Tiberius at the latter’s proc-
lamation as Caesar. 108 The army had always been the most expensive
element within the Roman empire, but without an efficient military system
an emperor would quickly be seen to be naked, as occurred in the west in
the early fifth century. Even in the wealthier east, constant attention and
adaptation were required to maintain arrangements for recruitment, supply
and training without the distortions that inevitably crept in as customary
practice became petrified or abused. A general must not have to confess,
“I did not expect it”’ is one of the maxims in Maurice’s Strategikon, a work
that itself demonstrates the close attention that was devoted to military
organization. 109

In the sixth century the eastern empire had managed, not without
difficulty, to maintain its basic integrity and even regain territory in the
western Mediterranean. Luck played its part, as with the departure to
Sardinia of the Vandal fleet in 5 3 3 or the Persian civil war of 5 90—1 , but the
Roman army remained an effective fighting force. In the seventh century
civil war, the traditional threat to imperial prosperity, shattered the balance:
in 602 and 610 coups at Constantinople distracted the armies on the eastern
frontier and permitted the Persians to make significant gains, while in 641
a further bout of imperial strife helped the Arabs to consolidate their
control over newly-won territories. During these decades, however, a suc-
cession of Roman armies was raised and manoeuvred by emperors and
their commanders. The result was often defeat, but the sheer ability of the
Roman military machine to function through a series of catastrophes
greater than anything experienced since the Hannibalic War of the third
century b.c. is impressive. By the mid seventh century, however, the perma-
nent loss of the major revenue-producing provinces of Egypt and Syria
necessitated a fundamental change in the nature of military organization,
and the impoverished empire had to exploit its greatest remaining asset,
land, in order to fund its defence forces. The result was the theme system
of territorial organization which defined the nature of the middle
Byzantine army. 110

108 Anon. Peri Strat. 4.9; Theophylact 111. 1 1 . 1 1 . 109 Maurice, Strat. viii . 1 .26.

110 Cf. ch. 7 (Barnish, Lee, Whitby), pp. 203—6 above, and ch. 17 (Whitby), pp. 494-5 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 12

LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

BRYAN WARD-PERKINS

I. THE ISSUES AND THE EVIDENCE

The vast majority of the population of the Roman empire, as in all pre-
modern societies, worked on the land. There is a great deal we would like
to know about these people: exactly how many they were; how many others
they fed (whether artisans, soldiers and clergy, or idle rich); which areas they
cultivated, and with what crops and which methods; to what extent their
agriculture was specialized and tied into commercial networks of exchange;
what types of settlement they lived in; and how tightly their labour was con-
trolled — how many agricultural workers were free peasants cultivating their
own plots, and how many dependent tenants of great landlords, wage
labourers, or even slaves?

In looking at these questions for the fifth and sixth century we are often
moving from a period in which the data are severely restricted into one in
which they are almost completely absent. However, by combining written
and archaeological evidence, and with the aid of some informed guess-
work, we can sometimes at least refine the questions, even if we cannot
honestly provide any very firm answers to them. 1

Over the last thirty to forty years, our picture of the Roman and late
Roman countryside has been gready enhanced, and in some areas trans-
formed, by archaeology. When, in 1964, Jones published his magisterial
account of the late Roman empire, he was still able largely to ignore archae-
ological evidence when discussing rural life. 2 Nowadays one is more likely
to find accounts that bypass the contemporary written texts, or dismiss
them as hopelessly unreliable.

Archaeology has contributed to our understanding of the ancient land-
scape partly through the excavation of individual sites, but mainly through

1 Some of the questions I have raised (e.g. specialization and commerce in agricultural production)
are discussed in the next chapter; others (e.g. choice of crops and methods of cultivation) I have had
to mention only in passing, for reasons of space and because it is impossible to generalize across the
Roman world. There is an excellent account of agricultural methods in Byzantium in Kaplan (1992)
5—87, nothing as wide-ranging or recent for the west. In both chapters 1 2 and 13 I have kept references
to a minimum, citing wherever possible recent surveys that give access to further literature.

2 Jones, LRE 767—823: archaeology makes a belated appearance on p. 823.

3 X 5

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 1 6 12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

regional surveys of standing remains (where they survive), and through the
practice of field-walking, which involves the systematic plotting and dating
of lost settlement sites by the recovery on the surface of pottery and other
datable items. Surveys of this kind have filled out the map of the Roman
world with thousands of villages and scattered rural settlements, whereas
before only the larger and more spectacular sites were generally known to
scholarship. However, there are still vast areas of the empire where system-
atic survey has never been carried out (for instance, in the whole of Asia
Minor, modern Turkey); and even amongst those surveys that have been
published there are enormous differences in the sophistication of the work
and in the consequent quality of the results. For example, surveys in the
near east seldom discuss the way the data have been collected, and gener-
ally brand all ‘late’ sites as ‘Byzantine’, without any attempt to subdivide the
huge date range from a.d. 300 to 700+, and they give little consideration
to the size of individual settlements. On the other hand, state-of-the-art
surveys, such as that carried out in Boeotia in Greece, discuss these impor-
tant matters in exhaustive detail. 3

Field-survey is a very good tool for charting the distribution and even
the size of settlement in periods, such as the Roman, when material
goods are both abundant and often readily datable. However, as we shall
see, it is less successful in providing a clear picture of rural settlement in
periods when material objects are much scarcer. It is also, of course, only
indirectly informative about the fields that were cultivated from these
settlements and about what was grown on them — though some reason-
able inferences can always be made on the basis of the possibilities and
limitations dictated by soil, climate and prevalent market-conditions
within the surrounding territory. However, only rarely do we get more
direct and detailed information about agricultural methods and products
— where ancient field-systems have survived and been studied, as on the
moors of south-west England or in the wadis of the Libyan pre-desert;
or where careful modern excavation and subsequent analysis have pro-
duced evidence from a site in the form of bones and carbonized or
waterlogged vegetable material, of the particular plants and animals con-
sumed on it.

Archaeology finds ‘things’, and from these things it is often possible to
reconstruct the human processes and structures that brought them about.
However, some aspects of human life can only be very tentatively and inse-
curely explored from material evidence. In particular, the social structures
that bind people together, willingly or unwillingly, are not normally revealed
very explicitly in their houses and rubbish-dumps. For instance, there is as

3 Throughout this and the following chapter I use ‘near east’ to describe the eastern provinces
between Egypt to the south and Asia Minor to the north. For Boeotia: Bintliff ( 1985 ).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ISSUES AND THE EVIDENCE 3 1 7

yet no satisfactory way of telling whether a small house in the countryside
with an array of local and imported pottery was inhabited by a free peasant,
a tied tenant or a slave. Here, in dealing with social relations, documentary
evidence becomes essential. Unfortunately, such evidence is very limited
from our period. The law codes of both the Roman empire and the bar-
barian successor states do provide some vital information on the ties that
bound together the rural population. However, as we shall see, it is impos-
sible to tell how generally and successfully such prescriptions from above
were applied in practice on the ground.

For detailed local information on the organization of estates and on the
status of agricultural labourers, we rely (except in Egypt) on very patchy
and scattered written information which, even when it is roughly contem-
porary, tends to derive from very different types of document. What we
lack are sequences of similar data, which would allow us to make reliable
comparisons, either through time or across the Roman world at any one
moment. For instance, from the years around 600, we have an important
will from Gaul, listing the estates and tenants of a single great private land-
owner (Bertram of Le Mans, who died in 6 1 6) ; a smattering of letters relat-
ing to papal estates, primarily in Italy and Sicily (preserved in the Register
of Gregory the Great, 590—604); and some passing references to villagers
in a saint’s Life from central Anatolia (in the Life of Theodore of Sykeoti ). 4 Only
the documents on papyrus excavated in Egypt provide an extensive and
varied corpus of material relating to a single region of the empire; but even
here the survival of documents is necessarily haphazard, and the data do
not compare to the articulated and complementary information that we
might expect, say, from manorial and taxation records in late medieval
western Europe.

Archaeology can provide important information on broad economic
structures affecting the countryside, which will be explored in the next
chapter (in particular, on the import of goods into rural contexts and on
the export of rural products). But the available archaeological and docu-
mentary evidence cannot provide much information on the all-important
local economic structures within which agricultural work was performed.
For instance, we would like to know whether some peasants had a small
specialized sideline in the rearing of, say, chickens, exchanging their surplus
eggs with a neighbour who perhaps had a similar local specialization in the
making and repair of basic agricultural implements. Equally, we would like
to know whether some smallholders supplemented the produce of their
own land by selling their labour to the owners of larger holdings at times
of high demand, such as the harvest and the vintage. Even in Egypt we

4 Bertram will: discussed in Jones, LRE 782—3, and in Wood Merovingian Kingdoms 207—10. Greg. Reg.
ed. D. Norberg, 1982 (= CCSL 140). Life of Theodore of Sykeon , ed. and French trans. Festugiere (1970),
partial English trans. in Dawes and Baynes (1948); discussion in Mitchell, Anatolia 11.122— 50.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

[A] 10°W

> 20° E [f] 30° E ) [F] \40°E

^Bordeaux ( /
\ v — Lyons r

S>Giovanni 1
O di Ruoti l

Constantinople^

AnastasiopoTTs^

AFRICAN

PROCOIW

SULARIS\

- SylceSnY^ Ancyra /cf> £

^ "Vy r<y) D®hes]

. ' A LIMESTONE], j

LVC / 4 ( Antioch 0 ^^MASSIF \\

Land over 1000 metres

SCALE /

0 250 / 500 750 1000 km

OxyrhynchusoofcynoBolis

Map 7 Settlements of the fifth and sixth century (sites and regions discussed in chapter i z)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ISSUES AND THE EVIDENCE 3 1 9

cannot tell, because these types of small transaction, vital though they
might be to the well-being of peasant households and to the smooth
running of the agricultural economy, do not show up archaeologically, and
are ‘below’ the level of information that is habitually recorded in docu-
ments. 5

In examining the life of the countryside widi the scattered and partial
information available to us, the best we can do, then, is work with die con-
stant awareness that the data may be deceiving us, and in the certain
knowledge that new evidence and new dieories will soon alter what we at
present believe. In 1953 Georges Tchalenko published a jusdy famous
survey of die late Roman villages of northern Syria, whose limestone
buildings are wonderfully preserved, and sometimes dated by inscrip-
tions. On the basis of these inscriptions, Tchalenko assumed, very rea-
sonably, that the villages were abandoned in the seventh century; and,
inspired by the Pirenne thesis, he constructed a hypothesis that they had
depended on the production of olive oil for the Mediterranean market (a
trade supposedly halted by the Arab invasion of the region in die 630s and
640s). However, subsequent excavation in one of these villages, Dehes,
has shown that although no new dated houses were constructed, the
buildings that were sampled continued to be inhabited right into the ninth
century. What is more, diey were being used by people widi enough
copper coins and pottery to suggest that they were still actively involved
in a vibrant regional economy. 6

Written evidence is also, as we have seen, very patchy, and may well be
equally deceptive. Until recently it was argued that the papyri from Egypt
supported the view (derived from the law codes) that late antique rural
society was dominated by the estates of the great and powerful, who used
their public and private might to hold their tenants in rigid subjection.
However, this impression was heavily dependent on the survival and study
of the estate documents of a single great family’s holdings around
Oxyrhynchus. Recently, attention has been drawn to the very different
picture that papyri from Aphrodito provide: here there was no single great
landlord, but rather a fiercely independent group of small and medium
landholders. 7 There is no way of knowing exactly how prevalent these two
very different situations were in late antique Egypt. But without the chance
survival and subsequent study of both these archives, we would naturally
jump to a single conclusion that was, in fact, incorrect.

5 We do, however, know that Egyptian monks earned money, for charity and for their institutions,
by working at the harvest, because several of their recorded sayings refer to this: The Sayings of the Desert
Fathers {Apophthegmata Patruni) (trans. B. Ward, 1975), ‘John the Dwarf’ nos. 35 & 47; ‘Isaac of the Cells’
7; ‘Lucius’ 1; ‘Macarius’ 7; ‘Pior’ 1. 6 Tchalenko, Villages-, Sodini etal. (1980) for Dehes.

7 Apion estates around Oxyrhynchus: Hardy (1931); Gascou (1985). Aphrodito: Keenan (1993) and
ch. zic (Keenan), pp. 63 3—6 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

3 20

12 . LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

ii. population; the spread of settlement; demographic

DECLINE?

It would greatly help our understanding of the economy, and indeed of the
whole society of the late Roman world, if we could come up with even
rough estimates of total population. These would give us figures to
compare with later and better-documented periods, and thereby allow us
to form a more accurate impression of the scale of operations within the
Roman period. They would also help us to put into context some of the
late Roman institutions to which it has been possible to attach rough esti-
mates of numbers of people. For instance, estimates for the size of the
Roman army at the end of the fourth century can rise as high as 600,000
men. 8 This is indubitably a very large figure, and certainly points to the exis-
tence of a heavy state structure. But exactly how large and how heavy
depends very much on what one thinks the total Roman population was —
if it was 20 million, then perhaps more than one in forty of the total pop-
ulation (around one in ten of adult males) was maintained under arms by
the state; but, if the population was 200 million, the proportions drop to a
less impressive one in 400 of the total population and one in a hundred of
adult males. Similarly, a very rough estimate for the size of the population
of Constantinople in around a.d. 450 is 300,000—400,000 souls 9 — a very
large number of people, involving a massive system of supply. But quite
how heavily this weighed on the eastern empire depends very much on how
large one thinks its total population was at this time.

However, in the absence of census or tax returns, we unfortunately have
no overall recorded figure for the total population of the empire in any
period. Few have yet ventured even regional estimates on the basis of the
ever-increasing archaeological evidence. The main imponderables are
whether all sites (even if identified with confidence and shown to be
roughly contemporary on pottery dating) were in reality all occupied at
exactly the same time, and, more seriously, how to estimate from surface
finds the numbers of households present on a site, and how then to decide
the correct multiplier to use for individuals per household.

In the one province, Britain, where a number of archaeologists have
recently been bold enough (or foolhardy enough) to attempt independent
estimates, the suggested figures for Roman population are high, and have
tended to rise over the last decades, as more archaeological data emerge.
The estimates range between two and six million people, which are very
different figures, but are none the less roughly within the same order of
magnitude as estimates for the population of England in the period around
and after the Domesday survey of 1086. 10 It seems possible that the land

Treadgold (1995) 43— 59. 9 Mango, Developpement 5 1 . 10 Millett (1990) 181— 6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

population; settlement; demographic decline? 321

of Roman Britain supported the same order of population as it did in the
later Middle Ages.

In other provinces, estimates of population are rarer; but, wherever
intensive field-survey has been carried out, extensive and dense rural set-
tlement patterns, similar to those discovered in Britain, have always been
found in at least part of the Roman period. However, recent work has
revealed striking differences between the various regions of the empire
when it comes to the precise period of the greatest spread of Roman set-
tlement.

In the northern and western provinces, the clearest evidence for large
rural populations comes from before the beginning of our period in 425:
in Italy apparently under the early empire; in Gaul and Spain perhaps in the
late first and second century; in Britain and Africa possibly in the fourth.
By contrast, in both modern Greece and the near east, which are the only
two east Mediterranean regions where a large number of field-surveys have
been carried out, it is within our period, in the fifth and sixth century, that
the highest number of sites and the greatest geographical spread of settle-
ment are recorded. 11

Indeed, in the late antique near east, some areas were densely settled
which are very marginal for conventional agricultural exploitation and
which for the most part have never subsequently been as intensively used
again — in particular, the limestone uplands of northern Syria and the basalt
region of the Hauran around ancient Bostra, both rocky landscapes in
which the areas of arable soil are severely restricted (see Fig. 5) and, even
more striking, the wadis of the Negev in southern Israel, where the sur-
rounding landscape is bare rock, and where the rainfall is both very sea-
sonal and very low. 12 In Egypt, evidence from the papyri of an increasing
number of water-lifting devices from the fourth century onwards suggests
a similar late antique spread of agriculture into less readily cultivable areas,
and a similar rise in population. 13

In the east, therefore, it seems certain that the fifth and sixth centuries
were the period of both the greatest spread of settlement in Roman times
and of the highest population density and overall numbers. Furthermore,
in these regions population levels were almost certainly unmatched until
very recent times (perhaps not until this century).

The spread and intensification of settlement in the eastern provinces,
and the growth of the population until at least a.d. 500, seem clear and are
not disputed. What is much more open to both doubt and dispute is what

11 General surveys of the evidence, with further bibliography: Greene (1986) 98—141; Lewit (1991)
27—36. Greece: Alcock (1993) 3 3—92 (though focused on the earlier Roman period). Near east: Dauphin
(1980).

12 Northern Syria and Negev: useful review article of recent literature in Foss (1995)- Hauran:

Dentzer (1985) and Sartre (1985). 13 Bagnall, Egypt 17—18.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

322 1 2. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

Fig. 5 The late antique village site of Bamuqqa in the north Syrian limestone massif. Ancient
buildings are in black; areas of cultivable soil, in pockets surrounded by bare rock, are in grey.
(After Tchalenko, Villages ii, pi. xcii)

happened after the early sixth century. In 54 1/2 a dreadful plague hit the
east, subsequently spreading to the west and also recurring intermittently
through the sixth and seventh centuries. The impact of this disease on
Constantinople was graphically described by the historian Procopius, who
witnessed it there and claimed that at its peak it lulled over 10,000 people a
day, while for Antioch the local historian Evagrius provides not only the
detailed information that it had recurred four times in the city by the time
of his writing in 5 94, but also the irrefutably circumstantial evidence that it

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

population; settlement; demographic decline? 323

had hit his own family very hard. He himself survived the plague as a child,
but his wife and ‘many’ {pollous ) of his relatives had died of it, most recently
a daughter, along with her own child. 14

There is no doubt that this plague was harsh, nor is there any doubting
the degree of personal tragedy that it wrought on many like Evagrius. But
it is harder to be confident about its broad demographic impact. 15 The
problem is that there are two possible models for the impact of such an
epidemic, and both could be applied to the sixth-century plague on the
basis of the limited information available to us. In the absence of fuller evi-
dence, which model one accepts will depend largely on how far one prefers
to explain demographic change in terms of random ‘acts of God’, or to
play these down in favour of slower changes brought about by human
agency.

Either the sixth-century plagues were a series of demographic hammer-
blows comparable to the Black Death of 1348—9 (which probably killed at
least a third of the population of fourteenth-century Europe), or their
impact was more closely comparable to that of the epidemics that hit
Europe in the sixteenth and seventeenth century (most famously, London
in 1665). These were devastating locally, and wiped out entire families, but
they did not affect all regions and settlements concurrently. Even within
affected towns and communities, outbreaks hit some parishes and some
families very much harder than others. Despite the death in England from
plague of perhaps three-quarters of a million people between 1470 and
1670, over the same period the population of the country probably
doubled. 16 Perhaps, like Samuel Pepys, Procopius saw plague at its very
worst in the crowded metropolis of Constantinople, where rats and human
beings were densely packed together. And perhaps Evagrius’ family was
one of the very unfortunate ones. Indeed, he himself tells us in some detail
that the impact of individual outbreaks of plague varied a great deal,
between cities, between urban districts, and even between individual house-
holds.

Uncertainty over the impact of plague on population levels in the sixth-
century east is but one aspect of the central and knotty problem of how to
detect population decline. It is generally assumed that the population of the
west, or at least of most of its provinces, declined under the later empire (in
the third and fourth century), and then fell markedly in the immediately post-
Roman centuries (the fifth to seventh). In the Byzantine east, as we have

14 Procop. Wars 11.22— 5; Evagr. HE iv.29. It was also witnessed, in the near east, byjohn of Ephesus,
whose description survives in fragmentary form (it is published only in the original Syriac, but is used
and discussed by Conrad (1986) 144—7). There is a good general discussion of the plague in the east in
Patlagean, Pauvrete 87—91. For the plague in the west: Biraben and Le Goff (1969).

15 As questioned by Durliat (1989). For a general discussion of sixth-century eastern demographic

change: Whitby (1996) 92— 103. 16 Black Death: Hatcher (1977). Later plagues: Slack (1990) 53—195.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

324 12 . LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

seen, demographic decline is presumed to have begun much later; but here
too, after 542 or at the latest in the seventh century, it is normally thought
that the population dropped considerably, perhaps even dramatically.

In the absence of good written records, we are basically dependent on
the archaeological evidence for these impressions of a falling population.
However, this evidence is deeply problematic. Archaeology, and field-
survey in particular, finds people through their durable material objects. If
people owned abundant and readily recognizable things that survive well in
the soil (as they did in the Roman west, and in the fifth- and sixth-century
east), then the population shows up well in the modern landscape, as scat-
ters of tile and pottery, or even as mosaics, silver treasures and standing
ruins.

However, excavation has shown that both fifth- and sixth-century
westerners and seventh-century Byzantines generally lived in much less
imposing and more ‘biodegradable’ surroundings than their Roman prede-
cessors: with pottery that is less abundant and more difficult to identify
than that of the preceding periods; in houses that were often of perishable
materials; and with the public buildings and churches of former ages,
rather than with new ones. All this means that post-Roman people can
easily escape surface-detection. 17 For instance, the great sixth/seventh-
century royal estate-centre and rural palace at Yeavering in Northumbria
(termed by Bede a villa regid) was a settlement from the very top of the social
pyramid and was home to perhaps hundreds of people; but it was built
entirely of wood and other perishable materials and, despite full and metic-
ulous excavation, produced only small quantities of pottery, all of it friable
and close in colour to the soil. 18 The site of Yeavering was discovered
through the good fortune that its post-holes and ditches showed up well in
air-photography. It is a sobering but important realization for those inter-
ested in the history of post-Roman population levels that, without this,
Yeavering might well have escaped even careful field-survey. By contrast, a
tiny Roman farmstead, home to perhaps only ten individuals from much
lower down the social ladder, will normally be readily spotted, dated and
plotted on the archaeological map from the evidence of its pottery. There
is no constant correlation between the number of archaeological sites
detected and the number of sites that once existed; rather, the discovery-
rate of sites will vary according to the nature of each period’s material
culture.

Nor, even when we have detected the sites, is there a constant multiplier
that can be applied in order to move from identified dwellings to the
number of people who lived in them. Modern experience shows that in

17 For the details: ch. 13, pp. 350—62 below. For discussion of this archaeological problem: Lewit
( I 99 I ) 37 — 46; Millett (1991). 18 Hope-Taylor (1977) 170—200 and plates 3 and 4.

Cambridge Flistories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

population; settlement; demographic decline? 325

complex, prosperous societies, people use wealth in the pursuit of greater
living space and in the purchase of more than one house; while in strait-
ened circumstances, they retrench, housing, for example, elderly parents
and young adult offspring within the family home. Similar variables may
well have applied in antiquity and the early Middle Ages. Indeed, there is
some archaeological evidence to support this, in the Roman dwellings
found to have been crudely subdivided in post-Roman times (see, for
example, that in Fig. 6). 19 Some of these remains, often dismissed in the
past as ‘squatter occupation’, may show the descendants of the original
owners living in a more densely packed and less comfortable way than their
ancestors. Charting such subtle but important shifts in the practices of
society is essential if we are to document demographic change at all reli-
ably from the archaeological evidence; but they will certainly not show up
in field-survey, and they may well be missed even in excavation.

The very real problem with the evidence is readily demonstrated from
the example of Italy. Large parts of the peninsula have been surveyed in
intensive and often sophisticated field-surveys over the last forty years, and
many of the recent surveys have been specifically interested in discovering
early medieval settlements — but, for the most part, they have drawn a com-
plete, or almost complete, blank for the late sixth to the eighth century. If
the archaeological record was straightforward, there would be no one living
in huge tracts of early medieval Italy. This is self-evidently nonsense: there
must have been people living in these areas, and we just cannot find them.
And since this is so, we are scarcely in a strong position to begin speculat-
ing as to how many of them there were.

It is not only a close examination of the archaeological evidence that
urges caution before producing too confident an account of post-Roman
demographic collapse. When (for the first time in the Middle Ages) we have
documents that allow local population estimates to be made, the so-called
polyptychs of ninth-century Carolingian church estates (most famously
that of 806/29 from the abbey of Saint-Germain-des-Pres in the lie de
France), these reveal remarkably large rural populations. 2 " The tradition
amongst economic historians of the Middle Ages has been to play this
down by describing these ecclesiastical estates as exceptional pockets of
dense population within a much emptier and undocumented landscape.
But this argument smacks a bit of preconceptions and special pleading
(designed perhaps to highlight a later, eleventh- and twelfth-century eco-
nomic and demographic upturn). If instead we accept that both Roman
and Carolingian Europe supported large rural populations, there is less
room left for the traditional model of what happened to population in

19 Nador: Anselmino et al. (1989). For other examples (at Carthage, Ptolemais and Dehes): Ellis
(1985); Ward-Perkins et al. (1986); Sodini et al. (1980).

20 Lot (1921); and, for further discussion and bibliography: Doehaerd (1971) 85— 1 13; Rouche (1983).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Fig. 6 The fortified farmstead of Nador in Mauretania. On the left, as originally built in the fourth century; on the right, with the additional subdivisions of fifth- and
early- sixth-century date. The defences seem to have been conceived of as pardy functional, partly decorative, since the facade received much more attention than the

equally vulnerable sides and rear. (After Anselmino etal. (1989) 228, fig. 50)

Cambridge Histories Online <© Cambridge University Press, 2008

RURAL SETTLEMENT (VILLAGES, FARMSTEADS AND VILLAS) 327

post-Roman times: cataclysmic collapse, followed by painfully slow recov-
ery up to around i ,000 (when real economic and demographic growth, as
well as decent documentation, begin).

The archaeological evidence available at present, therefore, cannot prove
dramatic demographic decline, while the Carolingian evidence shows that
the rural population could well have been large in the ninth century.
However, there is still plenty of room within the archaeological record and
within the four centuries between 400 and 800 for a substantial fall in pop-
ulation in post-Roman times. Indeed, on balance I believe that the popula-
tion did drop, perhaps even dramatically (i.e. to half — or even less — of its
previous, Roman levels). My reasons for thinking this have got less to do
with the evidence directly relevant to population levels (whose unreliabil-
ity I have stressed) than with my understanding of the workings of the
Roman and post-Roman economies, as set out in the next chapter. There I
argue that many Roman and late Roman farmers were involved in commer-
cialized and specialized production, and that this both opened up marginal
land for exploitation and settlement and allowed other land to be exploited
in a more specialized and efficient way. If so, the land in the Roman period
is likely to have produced more, and in consequence the population is likely
to have risen. Equally, if, as I believe, these conditions did not persist into
post-Roman times, then the population supported by the land is very likely
to have dropped substantially.

III. RURAL SETTLEMENT (VILLAGES, FARMSTEADS AND VILLAS)

Both the archaeological and the documentary evidence are rather fuller
when it comes to another fundamental aspect of rural life: the pattern of
settlement. But even here the evidence is by no means entirely satisfactory.
The written record consists mainly of incidental references to settlements,
sometimes very obscure because we no longer know precisely what con-
temporaries meant by some of the terms they used. Did ‘villa’ in sixth-
century Frankish usage, for instance, mean an estate, a luxurious country
dwelling, a farmstead, a village or any one of the four in different con-
texts? 21 Meanwhile, the archaeological record, at least until recently, has
been heavily weighted towards sites that are likely to produce beautiful and
impressive results. Fortunately, in the near east this weighting has included
the magnificent mosaic pavements of village churches in modern Israel
and Jordan, and the wonderfully preserved stone village churches and
village houses of regions like the Negev, the Hauran and the north Syrian
limestone uplands. 22 But in most of the empire, archaeological interest has

21 See, for instance, Heinzelmann (1993).

22 See p. 321 above, n. 12. For the mosaics and churches of Jordan and Israel: Piccirillo (1985) and
(1993); Ovadiah (1970).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

32 8

12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

focused away from villages, either towards towns or towards the luxurious
and isolated rural dwellings of the rich.

Despite gaps in the available evidence, it seems clear that there was some-
thing of a contrast between rural settlement in the east and in the west. In
the east, settlement appears to have been dominated by the compact village,
with little evidence of dispersed farmsteads through the countryside,
including little evidence for luxurious country dwellings of the aristocracy,
while in the west dispersed settlement was common, and there is consider-
able written and archaeological evidence for aristocratic rural houses.

The papyri of Egypt show conclusively that country life in the Nile
valley revolved around the village. A similar picture emerges from saints’
Lives from Asia Minor, such as the Life of Nicholas of Sion, describing events
in south-western coastal Lycia in the mid sixth century, and that of
Theodore of Sykeon, from central Anatolia near Ankara, covering the
period around a.d. 6oo. 23 Villages, not dispersed settlements, are the back-
drop to both saints’ lives, and both men deal with people who are very often
described as being from a particular village.

Archaeological work in the eastern Mediterranean, particularly in the
provinces of the near east, has revealed hundreds of late antique villages
(see Fig. 7), with large and elaborately decorated churches of the fifth and
sixth century, and with fine houses that suggest that not only peasants but
also the owners of sizeable (but not immense) estates preferred to live
within village communities rather than in isolation on their land. 24 Eastern
surveys have also failed to reveal much evidence for luxurious rural dwell-
ings, whether in villages or isolated in the countryside. This suggests that
landlords of very large estates in the eastern Mediterranean, who certainly
existed and who in the west would have maintained both an urban and a
rural residence, preferred to live within the cities or in suburban houses, like
the spectacular villas of Daphne just outside Antioch, with their rich mosaic
floors. 25

Villages in the eastern provinces, of course, varied greatly in size and
importance, from tiny settlements to large agglomerations which are tech-
nically ‘villages’ only because they did not have the administrative status to
make them Roman civitates or poleis , 26 Modern scholars have, indeed, some-
times been both confused and confusing in writing of these villages as the
‘cities’ of the Negev or the ‘villes mortes’ of Syria. The confusion is,
however, an understandable one. Some of these villages were sizeable, like
Kaper Pera, north of Apamea, which boasted five churches (see Fig. 8) and

23 Egypt: Bagnall, Egypt 1 10—47; Keenan (1984). For Theodore, see p. 3 17 above, n. 4; for Nicholas:
The Life of Saint Nicholas of Sion ed. and trans. I. Sevcenko and N. Patterson Sevcenko, 1984.

24 Villages are, however, much less apparent in the surveys carried out in Greece, where dispersed

setdement seems to have been common. For larger houses in (or just outside) villages: several exam-
ples in the north Syrian uplands, Tchalenko, Villages pi. cxxv— cxli; and in the Hauran, Villeneuve (1985)
113—16. 25 Levi (1947). 26 Dagron (1979); Kaplan (1992) 90—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Epiphania

330 1 2. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

Fig. 8 The late antique large village of Kaper Pera (modern el-Bara) in the north Syrian limestone
massif. (After Tchalenko, Villages ii, pi. cxxxix)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

RURAL SETTLEMENT (VILLAGES, FARMSTEADS AND VILLAS) 3 3 1

Fig. 9 South elevation and plan of the baths built in 473 by Julianos and his wife at the village of
Sergilla, in the Syrian Jabal Zawiye. The plan shows the cistern and raised water conduit to the south.
(L = latrine; after Butler (1920) ill. 134)

probably exceeded in size and splendour many ‘true’ civitates in the interior
of central North Africa, where the Romans had established their local
administration in a large number of very small centres. Villagers in the east
could also act corporately to enhance their village environment and to
defend their interests, in ways that we would more normally associate with
the classical city, and that can rarely be documented in the contemporary
west. A mosaic inscription of 473, for instance, excavated in the small
public baths of the village of Sergilla in Syria (see Fig. 9), tells us that they
were built in honour of his home village ( patre ) by a certain Julianos, in
conjunction with his wife Domna, and records the gratitude of the village
(home) towards its benefactor. 27 Almost a century later, in 547 and 5 50, the
villagers of Aphrodito, a large Egyptian settlement (which, admittedly, had

27 Inscriptions (1929— ) iv, no. 1490. There is a recent discussion of this bath in Charpentier (1994).
For the plan of another Syrian village, with three churches, see Fig. 42, p. 925 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

332 12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

once held the status of an independent polls), were sufficiently united and
organized to send two embassies to Constantinople to defend their privi-
lege of autopragia, the right to collect their own taxes and to account for
them directly to the provincial governor, independently of the polls within
whose jurisdiction they now fell . 28

It is not surprising in local sources, like saints’ lives, to find villagers
identified by the name of their village. But even when in distant lands, some
easterners still chose to identify themselves as inhabitants of specific vil-
lages, rather than as inhabitants of the wider and much better-known polls
which contained them. We see this in the fifth-century mosaic floor of a
church at Aquileia in northern Italy, where three separate inscriptions in
Greek record gifts by donors with Semitic and Greek names, who all
describe themselves as being of particular villages ( apo komes . . ,). 29 Eastern
villagers associated themselves with their home villages in ways that in the
west can only be readily documented for cities. Such pride is also shown
(admittedly, some time after our period) on the mosaic floor of an eighth-
century church at Um-er-Rasas (ancient Kastron Mephaa), near Madaba.
Here a number of important local cities were depicted, all identified by
name; but also very prominently illustrated (opposite the Holy City of
Jerusalem) is a representation of the village of Kastron Mephaa itself.
Except for its name ( Kastron , fortress) this representation is indistinguish-
able from those of the great cities of the region — indeed, it is larger and
more splendid than any of them . 30

In the west, villages seem to have played a lesser role. In some areas, this
was for the simple reason that they were rare, and that the basic pattern of
settlement was of scattered farmsteads. For instance, an extensive survey
of the countryside north of the city of Rome revealed very few villages in
the Roman period and large numbers of farmsteads, and a similar picture
emerges for the region around Ravenna from the private documents that
survive from the sixth century onwards . 31 Even where they did exist,
western villages seem to have carried less social and political weight than
their eastern counterparts. Certainly, they show up far less in the epi-
graphic, literary and excavation records. This lack of prominence may be
because middling landowners, even in regions where there were villages,
preferred to live in isolated farmsteads, and because parts of the country-
side were also dominated by the great houses of the very rich.

However, that villages existed in parts of the Roman west is gradually
becoming clear from detailed archaeological work, and has long been

28 Jones, LRE 407—8; MacCoull, Dioscorus 5— 1 1. 29 Caillet (1993) 167—72, nos. 6, 7 and 13.

30 Piccirillo (1993) 218—31 and 238—9.

31 South Etruria survey (area north of Rome): Ward-Perkins (1968) (at some point in the early
Middle Ages nucleated villages replaced these scattered farmsteads; but at present this is believed to
have happened primarily from the tenth century onwards). Ravenna: Castagnetti (1979) 169—79.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

RURAL SETTLEMENT (VILLAGES, FARMSTEADS AND VILLAS) 333

apparent in some areas where written accounts survive. Gregory, bishop of
Tours, writing at the end of the sixth century, mainly about the Auvergne
and the Touraine, happens to mention in his works of history and hagiog-
raphy seventy different villages (, via ): they were clearly a standard feature of
the countryside. From Gregory we also learn that at least thirty-six of these
via had their own church, some of them dedicated by Gregory himself . 32
As in the east, where the evidence lies in the survival and excavation of so
many village churches, villages in the west were also clearly emerging as one
important element in the organization of Christian life — an element which
from the ninth century onwards was to develop into the fully-fledged
parish system.

The countryside of the western provinces in Roman times had always
also contained the houses of landowners, which, if they reveal some dec-
orative features in the Roman style, modern scholars have tended to call
‘villas’. The fate of the villas in the disturbed circumstances of the fifth-
and sixth-century west remains somewhat mysterious, despite considerable
archaeological attention. The most complete archaeological evidence is
from the far north, Britain and northern Gaul, where it seems that villas in
the Roman style disappeared early in the fifth century, though there is
sometimes continued use of the same sites with buildings of much
humbler materials . 33

Further south, some impressive late villas have now been excavated and
published (see Fig. io), but we still rely heavily on literary references for
evidence of the widespread survival in the fifth and sixth century of an
aristocratic lifestyle centred on comfortable and marbled villas in the
antique manner. For example, the poems and narrative sources from
Vandal Africa clearly demonstrate that the new Vandal landlords readily
adapted to this way of life; and, from southern Gaul as late as the second
half of the sixth century, the poems of Venantius Fortunatus testify to
building-works on three separate villas by a rich Gallo-Roman bishop of
Bordeaux . 34

Probably in the fifth and sixth century there emerged a cultural
difference between the northern and southern regions of the west, with the
division running roughly along the line of the Loire: to the north, archae-
ology demonstrates that Roman-style villa buildings had already disap-
peared; to the south, the literary evidence, even allowing for some
rosy-tinted exaggeration in the poetic descriptions, makes it quite clear that

32 Touraine and Auvergne: Longnon (1878) 16—19; Pietri (1983) 793—6 (for the rural churches).
Similar evidence for villages in Maine, and in south-west Gaul in general: Latouche (1967) 64—72;
Rouche (1979) 221 . 1 and others are here making the assumption that vicus= ‘village’, which may prove
over-optimistic. 33 Lewit (1991) 37—46; Van Ossel (1992) 79—84.

34 Africa: Rossiter (1990). Gaul: Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. 1.18—20; and the discussion of the late
Gallic villa in Percival (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

334

12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

Fig. io The villa at San Giovanni di Ruoti as it might have appeared in the late fifth century.
(Reconstruction drawing by E. Haldenby, from Small and Buck (1994) fig. 133)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

RURAL FORTIFICATIONS

335

they persisted. In the seventh century, the history of rural settlement in the
two regions again merges, with the disappearance of the ‘villa’ as a tradi-
tional style of building even in the southern provinces, and the persistence
of the word in contemporary usage only to describe estates or villages.

Many questions about late villas, however, still remain, to which it would
be very nice to have clear archaeological answers. Quite how large, sump-
tuous and classical were the villa buildings so lovingly described by
Venantius Fortunatus in the sixth century (or indeed those similarly
described by Sidonius Apollinaris a century earlier)? And what exactly did
a sixth-century royal ‘villa’ in northern Francia look like, such as the one at
Berny-Riviere near Soissons, where Gregory of Tours was tried in 5 Bo?
Was it a recognizably ‘Roman’ building, or something that we might term
‘sub-Roman’; or was it perhaps principally a great series of timbered halls,
like the roughly contemporary Northumbrian villa regia at Yeavering? 35

IV. RURAL FORTIFICATIONS

One feature of settlement in the countryside, which affected most of the
late antique world, was an increase in the number of fortified sites. The
third century had, of course, introduced war to many previously peaceful
areas, and frontier-zones remained exposed to attack through the follow-
ing centuries. The collapse of the frontiers in the west at the beginning of
the fifth century, and the emergence here of new and often unstable polit-
ical groupings, meant that in much of the former empire warfare became
endemic. Unsurprisingly, these changes are reflected in the emergence of
fortified rural sites.

Once again, the evidence is both documentary and archaeological. The
documentary evidence is still very useful: for instance, from Gaul it pro-
vides us with information about rural fortifications sponsored by aristo-
crats, which seem to have combined the luxurious living-quarters of the
traditional villa with the security of strong walls and towers. 36 But this lit-
erary evidence consists of individual snippets of information, which
cannot on their own be fitted into a broad pattern of settlement. For this
we must again rely on archaeological survey and excavation.

The archaeological record reveals a wide variety of different types of
fortified rural site in the fifth and sixth century, with considerable regional
variation in the precise type used: farmsteads and villages surrounded by a

35 Gregory gives few clues, though Hist, v.50 refers to an atrium , and to a new supertegulum , presum-
ably the apex of a tiled roof. On the archaeological and literary evidence for late rural setdement in
Gaul, including Villas’, see also Samson (1987).

36 Sid. Ap. Carm. xxn (on the burgus of Pontius Leontius on the Garonne, written probably in the
460s); Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. 111.12 (on the castellum of Nicetius of Trier on the Moselle, written
in the 560s).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

336

12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

ditch-and-bank; reoccupied and refortified Iron Age hill-forts; villas with
towers and surrounding wall (see Fig. 6, p. 326 above); and settlements built
around strongly fortified refuge-towers. 37 However, the prevalence of
fortified sites in the late and post-Roman rural landscape should not be
exaggerated: in some regions particularly exposed to raiding, like southern
Tripolitania, it does seem as though rural fortresses were ubiquitous, but in
most of the empire, even in the confused fifth- and sixth-century west, the
vast majority of sites seem to have been only very lightly defended or not
defended at all. 38

The pattern of rural defence in our period is perhaps best understood
in terms of the emergence of selected strongholds, leaving most settle-
ments undefended, rather than as a widespread attempt to fortify every
rural dwelling or to move people into enclosed defensible sites. 39 The fifth-
and sixth-century countryside did contain fortifications that had certainly
not existed before, but it did not yet resemble the landscape of, say, late
medieval central Italy, dominated by fortified hill-villages. Even in the
unstable world of seventh-century northern Britain, the kings of Bernicia
did not site their villa at Yeavering within the security of the nearby late
Iron Age oppidum, but seem to have preferred to retreat, in times of
danger, to the impregnable fastness of their coastal fortress at Bamburgh,
leaving Yeavering and their other rural estate-centres to be burnt to the
ground. 40

V. THE PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; THE STATUS OF

PEASANTS

When looking at how the land was shared out, and at the legal and social
ties that bound many at the lower levels of society to that land, we are
dependent mainly on written sources for our information. Patterns of
landholding and the status of rural dwellers can sometimes be revealed in
the archaeological record: for instance, it is probably reasonable to infer
that an excavated house which proves to have been expensively decorated
was inhabited by an owner rather than a tenant. But often we are left guess-
ing whether or not a small farmstead or a whole village, known only from
archaeology, was part of a larger estate, and whether its inhabitants were
free or tied to the land.

37 For some examples of these types of fortification, and other variants: Van Ossel (1992) 163—4;
Alcock (1972) 174—94; Demians d’Archimbaud (1994); Alfoldy (1974) 214—20; Brogiolo (1994) 151—8;
Anselmino et al. (1989); Mattingly and Hayes (1992); Mattingly (1995) 147—8 and 194—209.

38 Tripolitania: Mattingly (1995) 147—8 and 194—209.

39 The long list of (largely unknown) fortresses iphrouria) built or restored by Justinian in the Balkans,
according to Procopius ( Buildings iv.4), may be evidence of a different policy — of helping to provide
or enhance defences for large numbers of villages and other settlements.

40 Hope-Taylor (1977); Bede, HE 111.16 and 17.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; STATUS OF PEASANTS 337

The largest accumulations of land must have been in the hands of rulers,
both in east and west; but better documented are the growing estates of the
church, for which we have a fair smattering of information from most parts
of the Roman and former Roman world. Except in Egypt, where the doc-
umentation is uniquely rich, it is the prinicipal churches and monasteries
that happen to dominate the sources, rather than smaller landholding insti-
tutions. 41 The Great Church at Constantinople, unsurprisingly, held land
throughout the east, and had separate departments in its estate-office for
its different regional holdings. The church of Rome, lavishly and widely
endowed already by Constantine after his capture of the city in 312, must
have lost some of its outlying holdings during the troubles of the fifth
century; but at the end of the sixth century it held land, administered by
locally based rectors, not only in Italy, Sicily, Sardinia and Corsica, but also
in Africa, Gaul and distant Dalmatia. 42 Some idea of the scale of this land-
holding can be deduced from the annual figure of 25,200 solidi, which the
emperor Leo III directed into his own treasury from the papal estates in
Calabria and Sicily when in dispute with the papacy in the 730s. 4 ’ For com-
parison, the huge and sumptuous church of S. Vitale at Ravenna cost
26,000 solidi to complete in the sixth century.

A bishop of one of the greatest sees might have very large sums of
money under his control, much, though not all of it, derived from rural
estates: the Life of John the Almsgiver, bishop of Alexandria at the begin-
ning of the seventh century, tells us that at his accession John found a vast
quantity of gold in the bishop’s house, which he proceeded to spend on
pious causes. 44 Lesser sees commanded lesser, but still substantial,
incomes and estates: Sidonius Apollinaris tells how bishop Patiens of
Lyons, during a famine in the second half of the fifth century, filled the
roads and rivers with his transports bringing grain into the city; and
Gregory of Tours records that one of his predecessors, in the mid sixth
century, gave to the poor 20,000 solidi left by the previous bishop. 45 The
desire and need to provide landed endowments for bishoprics could, on
occasion, lead to dubious practices. Bishop Paul of Merida, in the later
sixth century, promised a massive legacy to his own church, but only if his
nephew succeeded him as bishop. 46

41 Egypt: Wipszycka (1972).

42 Jones, ERE 781—2; Kaplan (1992) 143—4 (for the church of Constantinople).

43 Theophanes, Chron. a.m. 6224 (trans. C. Mango 1996). The passage is not crystal clear: although
this is not stated, it seems reasonable to suppose that the sum mentioned was an annual payment; but
it is less clear whether it was of rent or tax. For our purposes, either shows that the estates were massive.

44 Life of John the VUmsgiver 4 5 (trans. Dawes and Baynes (1948) 256). The exact figure mentioned is
implausibly high: 8,000 pounds of gold, well over half a million solidi (enough to build more than twenty
S. Vitales).

45 Lyons: Sid. Ap. Ep. 6.12. Tours: Greg. Tur. Hist, ix.41 (the money was either saved from church
income, or derived from the personal estate of the previous bishop).

46 Vita Sanctorum Patrum Emeretensium 1v.ii.14— 1 8; iv.iv.4; iv.v.2— 3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

338

12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

By the fifth and sixth century, major monasteries were also accumulating
sizeable and ever-increasing landed endowments. The monastery of the
Holy Cross founded in Poitiers by Radegund apparently housed, at the time
of her death in 5 87, some 200 nuns, many of whom were of high social
status and so unquestionably in need of a substantial troop of servants. All
this required a large endowment, and when in 5 89 the nun Chlothild ejected
the rightful abbess, unsurprisingly she is recorded to have appointed her own
ordinatores (presumably stewards) and to have seized the villas monasteriif

It is clear that, as in later periods of history, church estates were vulner-
able to encroachment from the great and powerful: Theodore of Sykeon,
while bishop of Anastasiopolis, only managed to eject a local magnate from
some of his church’s estates with the help of villagers in armed revolt.
The insistence with which hagiographers like Gregory of Tours stressed
that the saints would protect their own property and strike down intruders
is only explicable in the context of a world where abuses of this kind hap-
pened all too often.

The boundaries between ecclesiastical and secular landholding may on
occasion have become blurred. The man that Theodore expelled was not
only a local aristocrat, but also held an official appointment as administra-
tor of the episcopal estates. Was this a purely professional arrangement that
Theodore now wished to undo, or had it been an act of patronage by the
bishop of Anastasiopolis, wishing to buy the favour of a local magnate?

For monasteries in this period, we know remarkably little about any con-
tinuing relationship between them and the families of their aristocratic
founders and benefactors. This may, however, only reflect the limitation of
our sources for late antique monasticism (dominated by saints’ Lives and
Rules, rather than the land-deeds and books of commemoration that
survive from later centuries). That they could serve as places of family com-
memoration and burial is shown by the mosaic inscriptions discovered in a
small sixth-century monastery at Scythopolis (see Fig. 1 1). This was built for
a monk, Elias, but was also intended as the burial place for one of its
patrons, a certain Mary, and of any of her family ‘at any time’ who wished
to rest there. 49 That families might not lose all control of the lands of one
of their foundations is revealed in the exceptionally well-documented world
of Egypt, where we learn of the small monastery of the ‘Holy Christ-
Bearing Apostles’, founded by the entrepreneurial land-manager Apollos of
Aphrodito. Here Apollos himself became a monk, without by any means
fully retiring from business; and here his son Dioscorus served as guardian

47 200 nuns: Greg. Tur. Gloria Confessorum ch. 104. Chlothild: Greg. Tur. Hist, ix.41. For the lands of
the great ‘White Monastery’ in Egypt, see ch. 21 c (Keenan), p. 620 below.

48 Theodore: Life ch. 76 (ed. Festugiere (1970); English trans. Dawes and Baynes (1948) 139—40).

49 Fitzgerald (1939). Another patron, John ‘the ex-prefect’, and two of his brothers were also com-
memorated in inscriptions (and an excavated tomb is thought to have been John’s).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; STATUS OF PEASANTS 339

SC.ALE OF METRES

Fig. 1 1 The sixth-century monastery of a holy man, Elias, excavated at Scythopolis, in Palaestina II.

A is a hall or perhaps an open courtyard; B is the chapel. Many of the rooms had fine mosaics,
including inscriptions commemorating the patrons and asking for God’s blessing on them. The
intended tomb of one patron, ‘Maria’, was within the chapel (which she paid for); another patron, ‘John
the ex-prefect’, is thought to have been buried in the small chamber C. (After Fitzgerald (1939) pi. 11)

(phrontistes) and protector ( kouratm ) long after his father’s death . 511 This looks
remarkably like a small aristocratic ‘Eigenkloster’, of a kind very familiar in
the early medieval west, and designed to provide for both the spiritual and
the material needs of a family.

For the estates of the secular landowning class, the information at our
disposal is limited — except, again, in Egypt. Here, from the papyri, a rich
and varied picture can be built up. There were some huge Egyptian estates,
such as that of the Apion family, who perhaps held as much as two-fifths
of all the land in the neighbouring districts (nomes) of Oxyrhynchus and

50 Keenan in ch. 21 c, pp. 633—4 below; Thomas (1987) 61 and 64.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

340 12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

Cynopolis, and who employed twenty stewards for their Oxyrhynchite
lands alone. But in Egypt there is also plenty of evidence of smallholders
farming their own land, and of a sizeable group of middling landowners in
between, like the family of Apollos and Dioscorus, whose sixth-century
archive survives from Aphrodito. The Egyptian evidence is sufficiently
detailed and nuanced to show that landholding was very varied, and that
the land market was active and fluid — with scope for entrepreneurs like
Apollos and Aurelius Phoibammon to do very well out of lending money
to farmers and landowners, leasing land from absentee landlords, and sub-
letting the same to free tenants. 51

In the other eastern provinces, there is nothing approaching Egypt’s
wealth of documentation. However, the fine but scarcely luxurious houses
of northern Syria, and the active Anatolian villagers of the Life of
Theodore of Sykeon (alongside some references here to powerful secular
aristocrats), suggest that a varied pattern of landholding that included small
and middling landowners was not just a feature of the Nile valley. 52 In the
west, however, smallholders, and even middling landlords, are more
difficult to find in the sources. They are best documented in texts that either
record their undoing, such as Salvian’s attack on the oppression by great
landlords of the free farmers of Gaul (written probably in the 440s), or that
are very generalized and impossible to illustrate in detail on the ground,
such as the early-sixth-century Salic Law, which certainly seems to have
been designed for small-scale communities of free farmers. 55

Small freeholders and middling landlords existed in the west: common
sense and the texts cited above suggest as much. We simply do not have the
detailed evidence to detect them, let alone to begin to say how common
they were. But in our period, lack of evidence of people below the highest
reaches of society certainly is no proof of their absence. In the 1920s,
forty-five written tablets of the late fifth century were discovered in the
south of Africa Proconsularis, which revealed the presence of small-
holders in Vandal Africa cultivating land on perpetual and alienable leases
(by right of a centuries-old Roman law, the Lex Manciana). Without the
chance survival and discovery of these tablets, we would have had no
reason to suppose that such smallholders existed in fifth-century Africa,
where surviving literary texts and mosaics point much more to a world of
luxurious villas and rich landlords. 54

51 Egypt in general: Keenan in ch. 21 c, pp. 629—36 below. Apion estates: p. 319 above, n. 7; Jones,
LRE 780 and 784. Small and middling owners, and leasing: Keenan (1980); Keenan (1985); Bagnall,
Egypt 1 14—21.

52 Mitchell, Anatolia n 122—50. For powerful aristocrats at Anastasiopolis: Life of Theodore (ed.
Festugiere (1970) chs. 76 and 78 (English trans. Dawes and Baynes (1948)). For other evidence of
(over)mighty landlords in late antique Asia Minor: Feissel and Kaygusuz (1985) 412—13.

53 Salv. De Gub. Dei v. 3 8—4 5 ; Pactus Legis Salicae ; Wickham (1992) 233.

54 Albertini tablets: Courtois et ah (1952). Villas: see p. 333 above, n. 34.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; STATUS OF PEASANTS 341

The only western landowners who are reasonably well documented in
our period are those who held large quantities of land, whether ecclesias-
tical (who have been touched on above), royal or aristocratic. The proper-
ties of the latter are occasionally mentioned or alluded to in the narrative
sources, as when Orosius and Olympiodorus tell us of the significant body
of troops that two Spanish brothers were able to raise and finance in 409
just from their rural and domestic slaves, and as when Procopius records
the huge estates, and even greater land-hunger, of the wealthy Ostrogoth
Theodahad. 55 But our best evidence for the pattern of big estates comes
from Gaul, where a number of wills detailing different aristocratic holdings
survive from the end of the fifth century onwards. From these we learn
that some individuals owned vast quantities of land, but that these large
holdings were made up of scattered properties of very varied size, rather
than concentrated blocks. Bertram of Le Mans, for instance, on his death
in 616 disposed of about 300,000 hectares of land made up of more than
135 separate units (including sixty-two villae and thirteen groups of villae),
dispersed through the territories of over fourteen civitates , 56

Bertram’s estates were widely spread (from Paris to Provence, and from
Bordeaux to Burgundy), but they were all within Francia. In the west it is a
feature of our period that, as political power fragmented, the even more
widespread landholding, which had characterized the senatorial aristocracy
of the fourth century, became impossible. Indeed, the scatter of Bertram’s
holdings throughout Francia was unusual for the sixth and seventh century,
and the result of exceptional circumstances. Like all aristocrats, Bertram
was compelled when necessary to take sides during the frequent wars
between rival Merovingian kings, and earlier in his career he lost estates
within hostile territory. In 616 he owned so many geographically scattered
estates only through the great good fortune that he happened to have
backed the right king, Chlothar II, and that Chlothar had (quite anoma-
lously) come to rule an undivided Francia. Even in supposedly ‘friendly’
territories, the papacy found it very difficult to hold estates outside the
borders of the empire. Gregory the Great (590—604) and his predecessors
had enormous problems in getting adequate revenue out of the Roman
church’s southern Gallic estates (by then under Frankish control), and
indeed after 613 the Gallic patrimony is never heard of again. 57

Although the evidence is very patchy, and therefore unreliable, it is none
the less possible that there was something of a contrast between the late
antique east and west, with large landowners playing a more prominent role
in the latter. It is tempting to draw a connection between this possibility and
the evidence, which we will explore in chapter 13 (pp. 350—61 below), of

55 Spanish brothers: Olympiod. Frag. 13.2 (ed. and trans. R. C. Blockley (1983) 172—3); Oros. vn.40.
Theodahad: Procop. Goth. 1.3.2 (see also Cass. Var. iv.39, v - 12 and x - 5 )- 56 S ee P- 3 T 7 above, n. 4.

57 Papal estates: Richards (1979) 310 and 316.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

342 12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

greater eastern prosperity in the fifth and sixth century. Did small freehold-
ers more readily seize economic opportunities than great landowners?
Unfortunately, the data are such that we really cannot tell. That smaller
landholders could create and take advantage of economic growth is, I
think, clear from their evident presence in the east, and from the equally
evident and growing prosperity of the region. It is also supported by scraps
of written evidence, such as a passing reference in the fifth century by
Theodoret of Cyrrhus to a village in the Lebanon of small freeholders
(they are described as farmer-proprietors, kaigeorgoi kai despotai), who spe-
cialized in growing nuts which they sold to merchants . 58

However, there is no reason to suppose that large landowners were any
the less aware of economic opportunities than their smaller brethren.
There are indeed suggestions in the scanty documentary evidence that
owners of large estates might sometimes be better placed to exploit oppor-
tunities because of their greater access to the capital and labour necessary
for investment and innovation. In Egypt it is on the large estates (such as
those of the Apion family) that complex and extensive water-lifting devices
are most commonly recorded ; 59 and, roughly contemporaneously (in the
later sixth century) but at different ends of the ancient world (the region
around Trier, and Mesopotamia where it borders on Armenia), two eccle-
siastics are recorded to have laid out new vineyards. The vineyard in the east
is known to have soon attracted wine-merchants (from Cappadocia), and
it, at least, must have been planted with the potential profits of commerce
firmly in mind . 60

If there really was a difference between east and west in the average size
of estates, the effect is perhaps more likely to have been fiscal, and felt by
the state, than economic, with an impact on regional standards of living.
Although it is difficult to prove, and although small landowners could club
together to buy a powerful patron in order to defend their interests, it is
nonetheless almost certainly true that the great in late antiquity were those
best able to escape or mitigate the fiscal demands of the state . 61 If so, the
western empire in the fourth and fifth century, and the barbarian succes-
sor states of the fifth and sixth, may not have been as well equipped to
exploit their tax base, on which so much of their power depended, as the

58 Theodoret of Cyrrhus, Hist. Mon. (ed. and French trans. P. Canivet and A. Leroy-Molinghen
1977—9) xvii. 2. The holy man (Abrahames) came to the village disguised as a merchant wanting to buy
nuts, and rented a house there in order to ply his business. 59 Bonneau (1970) 49—50.

60 Trier: Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. m.12, lines 39—40 (the bishop, Nicetius of Trier, also built a
watermill on the estate). Borders of Armenia: John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints , Syriac text and
English trans. E. W. Brooks, 3 vols. 1923—5 (= PO xvii.i, xvm.4, xix.2), 1.1 29—30 (on Addai).

61 For villagers acquiring powerful patrons, the classic text is Lib. Or. xlvii (esp. XLV11.4). Here the
protection was given by military commanders against the villagers’ landlords. Theodoret of Cyrrhus,
Hist. Mon. xvii. 3, however, reveals a village of freeholders in the fifth-century Lebanon, brutalized and
powerless in the face of a tax demand (until saved by an advance secured by a well-connected holy man).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; STATUS OF PEASANTS 343

rulers of the east. In the west there were perhaps more great landlords
standing between the state and the resources of the land which it wished
to tax. 62

The texts, particularly the surviving wills, also give some indication of
the status of the labourers who worked the estates of both east and west.
Slaves had probably never been very common on the land in the east (by
contrast with their ubiquitous role in domestic service), and they do not
feature in large numbers in the late antique papyri from Egypt. 6 ’ In the west
they appear much more frequently as agricultural labourers. 64 However, in
contrast to the situation in some parts of the early empire, by late and post-
Roman times there seems to be no evidence of great centralized troops of
slaves, housed together in barrack-blocks. Rather, the slaves we meet in the
documents seem to be in small groups on scattered, medium-sized farms,
or even settled individually on single plots of land. Just possibly this was an
improvement in their lot. It is hard to say, and certainly slaves could, as
always, be terribly abused: in sixth-century Francia, one sadistic master
buried alive two household slaves who had contracted a sexual union
against his will, and regularly used boys in his house as living candlesticks,
insisting that they hold the candles between their bare legs until they burnt
themselves out. 65

Coloni also feature frequently in the sources: agricultural workers whom a
series of imperial laws, beginning in 332, tied (or at least tried to tie) to the
land, in order to facilitate the process of raising both the land-tax and the
poll-tax. 66 The evidence of the laws shows that the status of coloni continued
to decline during our period, until in a law of Justinian one category of colonus
is said to be very much on a par with slaves. Coloni were certainly a sizeable
and oppressed group, and their oppression undoubtedly contributed to the
powers of their masters. But exactly how significant they were in late antique
society is open to dispute, since we lack both the information to tell us what
proportion of all agricultural labour were coloni, and the detail of how a
master —colonus relationship worked out on the ground. That modern schol-
arship has used quite so much ink on them may be for reasons of its own.
Coloni have attracted two particular groups of scholars: those who wish to
see the late empire as a dinosaur, brought down by the increasing inflexibility
of its own social skeleton; and those who see in the colonus the ancestor of
the tied serf of the Middle Ages, and hence evidence for Marx’s theory of a
direct transition from a ‘slave’ to a ‘feudal’ mode of production.

62 A suggestion made by Jones, LRE 1066—7. 63 Bagnall (1993).

64 MacMullen (1987); Vera (1995) 346—56; Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 202—4 (for sixth-century
Italy); Bonnassie (1991) 71-4 and 93-6 (for Visigothic Spain).

65 Greg. Tur. Hist, v.3 (the human candlesticks are termed pueri , who may not have been slaves). For
a general discussion of brutality to slaves: Bonnassie (1991) 19—21.

66 Useful recent discussions: Whittaker and Garnsey in CAH xm, ch. 9, pp. 287—94; Vera (1995)
35 3—4; Garnsey (1996).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

344

12. LAND, LABOUR AND SETTLEMENT

In the west coloni may have been common: they certainly appear fre-
quently in the surviving wills. It is also possible that their numbers were on
the increase: Salvian states that many free persons were driven to become
coloni during the troubles of the fifth century — though he also states that
other peasants were able to escape oppression, by fleeing to the greater
freedom of bagaudic or barbarian rule. 67 But the apparent prevalence of
coloni in the west may partly be because western sources are focused so
heavily on large estates. In Egypt, coloni also appear on the great estates, but
balanced by considerable evidence of a free peasantry elsewhere. Is this
fuller Egyptian evidence representative of the whole of Egypt, represen-
tative of the east in general, or even perhaps representative of the entire
empire?

As with the possible connection between different patterns of landhold-
ing and different economic fortunes, it is tempting to link the apparently
greater freedom of the east with the undoubted greater prevalence there of
villages. Were villagers perhaps better placed for collective action, in order
to fend off the claims of the aristocracy on their lands and their liberties?
But again, when looked at in any detail, this possible connection is not
readily sustainable. Libanius, in later-fourth-century Antioch, provides
good evidence that there was no necessary correlation between types of set-
tlement on the one hand, and the size of estates and the level of dependence
of the peasantry on the other. He writes of villages with many owners (each
with a small holding), but also of other villages under the control of a single
proprietor. 68 Indeed, while it is easy to see that the community of the village
could provide the focus for collective resistance to outside forces, it is also
perfectly possible to suggest that, in different circumstances, it might
provide the ideal context for centralized repression. 69

In both patterns of land ownership, and in the social bonds that tied
many people to the land and to their landlords, there may have been
important differences between east and west; but it is much more difficult
to detect changes and developments through time in either geographical
region. It is possible that, in its social organization, country life really did
alter very litde, even in the west, which saw the collapse of Roman power
and the advent of new barbarian masters and landlords. It is certainly
remarkable to discover farmers in late-fifth-century Africa holding their
land under a centuries-old, and very Roman, local form of land-tenure,
and to find the Gallic wills of c. a.d. 600 populated by servi and coloni. As
far as we can tell, these people (and the documents that describe them)
would fit happily into the world of some three centuries earlier. Such

67 Salv. De Gub. Dei v.43— 5 and 21—6. 68 Lib. Or. xlvii.i 1.

69 As in parts of the medieval west, like Latium, where the appearance of nucleated villages, replac-
ing dispersed setdement, is currendy explained as a manifestation of the rising power of territorial lord-
ship from the tenth century onwards: Toubert ( 1973 ).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PATTERN OF LAND OWNERSHIP; STATUS OF PEASANTS 345

apparent stability is striking testimony to the way that the barbarian
invasions, although bringing new political masters and a Germanic aristoc-
racy demanding a share of the land, by no means necessarily upset the
social apple-cart.

However, as so often, a word of caution is also needed. It is always pos-
sible that the terminology of the formal documents that we rely on for evi-
dence was highly conservative, and that this gives an exaggerated
impression of lack of change. Even if there really was considerable stabil-
ity in the social structures of the late antique countryside, this fact should
certainly not lead us to embrace a view of rural life and rural dwellers in
our period as entirely conservative, passive and unchanging. As we shall see
in the next chapter, such a view will not fit the archaeological evidence that
we now have for the broad nature of the economy, including the rural
economy. Cultivators in the fifth and sixth century had to accommodate to
a rapidly changing economic world, which, indeed, they themselves were
often responsible for shaping.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 13

SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

BRYAN WARD-PERKINS

I. DIFFICULTIES AND EVIDENCE

Writing about complexity within the economy of the fifth to the seventh
century will never be straightforward, partly because there has been so
much debate about the nature of the ‘classical’ Roman economy that pre-
ceded it. Was the ‘Roman economy’ really a series of local economies,
linked into a broader structure only by the demands of the state and by
some limited trade in luxury products? Or was it a unified system in which
even quite basic goods were produced by specialists, and traded by mer-
chants across long distances? In examining economic activity in the late
Roman and post-Roman period, we are inevitably measuring it against the
classical economy that preceded it; but the measuring-stick itself is con-
stantly being altered. 1

As with evidence for the exploitation of the land examined in the last
chapter, much of our information on economic specialization now derives
from archaeology. However, the written record can also produce isolated
but very valuable nuggets of information. For example, just before our
period, Gregory of Nazianzus happens to tell us, in a poem on the events
of his own life, that one of his enemies in Constantinople in 379/ 80 was a
priest who had come to the city from Thasos, with money supplied by his
church in order to buy ‘Proconnesian slabs’ (prokonesias plachas). These must
have been slabs for a chancel-screen in the marble of the island of
Proconnesos (very close to Constantinople), of a type which was widely
diffused in late antiquity (see Fig. 1 5 , p. 359 below).

This tiny scrap of information, which entered the written record only
by chance, is very useful. It confirms what we can infer from archaeology:
that the Proconnesian quarries were engaged in commercial activity
(alongside work for the state). But it also shows us, which we could not at
present demonstrate any other way, that one buyer (admittedly from a
town not too far distant in the northern Aegean) purchased his marble by
the rather laborious process of visiting the region of the quarries, rather
than doing it all from home via a middleman. There is much that we would

1 See p. 369 below, nn. 38—40.

346

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

DIFFICULTIES AND EVIDENCE

347

still like to know: after reaching Constantinople, did the priest have to
travel out to the quarries themselves, or could he find what he needed
within the city? Did he buy direct from an agent of the quarry, or from an
independent trader? Did he purchase from stock, or did he have to place
an order? And did he travel back with his new chancel-screen, or have it
shipped? Our source, Gregory, was writing an apologia of his own life, not
an economic analysis of the late antique marble trade. So we should not
expect too much of him, but rather thank him for the useful information
that he does provide. 2

Such occasional references in the written sources provide details of
human motivation and behaviour that can only be inferred from the
material evidence that archaeology uncovers. However, for our purposes,
the archaeological evidence is often more useful than the literary. It con-
sists of clusters of information, which are not only ever growing in
number, but which can also often be compared one with another. This
ready comparability is precisely what is so difficult to achieve with small
chunks of written evidence derived from very different types of source,
and is an essential basis for any broad picture of developments and of
regional differences within the Roman world of c. 425—600.

In looking at agricultural specialization and exchange, we have to note
that some very important products (like wheat and wool) rarely survive in
the soil and, even when found, generally give no clue as to their place of
origin. But other things have left much better and much clearer archaeolog-
ical traces. It is our particular good fortune that the ancients transported
two of the most important products of the Mediterranean, oil and wine, in
amphorae, and that the broken sherds of these vessels, which survive well
in the soil, can often be attributed to a specific period and a specific region
of production. ’ An individual amphora fragment will not tell us why it was
transported across the Mediterranean nor how precisely it was moved. But,
as the overall picture becomes clearer, revealing patterns of distribution
that change through time, it even becomes increasingly possible to specu-
late intelligently about why and how these products came to be on the
move.

As with the products of the land, artisan production can also only be
documented archaeologically for those (comparatively few) items that
have left material traces. Pottery, in particular, is found in vast quantities
in excavation and field-survey, since pots are easily broken and yet the
individual sherds are then virtually indestructible in the soil. Further-
more, the broken fragments are rarely affected by human intervention,
since they can neither be melted down (like metal and glass) nor reworked

2 Greg. Naz. Carmen de Vita Sua lines 875—7 (PG xxxvn.1089). For the priest travelling to
Contantinople for his purchase, compare the buying of silverware in Life of Theodore of Sykeon 42 (ed.
Festugiere (1970); English trans. Dawes and Baynes (1948)). 3 Peacock and Williams (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

348 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

(like stone). Fortunately, pottery not only survives well, but also offers the
economic historian enormous benefits. It can generally be dated and
assigned to a particular manufacturing centre, and its quality and finish
diemselves tell us something of the level of sophistication that went into
its production.

The pottery trade, within the wider economy, was never of great impor-
tance, but the considerable evidence we have for it can perhaps be used as
an indicator of broader economic trends. Since pots are everyday products
in universal use (whether cooking-pots, storage-jars or tableware), rather
than rare or luxury items, it is, I believe, reasonable to use the pottery trade
as an index of the wider role of specialization and exchange within the
economy. If pottery was being produced by sophisticated potting indus-
tries and was being traded widely, reaching even distant and inland rural
areas, then it is highly likely that other comparable industries, that have left
few or no archaeological traces (making tools, clothing, farming equip-
ment, etc.), were equally sophisticated. Conversely, if all pottery was poorly
made and local in manufacture, then other products too are likely to have
been of a similar lack of sophistication. Furthermore, shipwreck evidence
shows that no pots, except amphorae, ever travelled alone in single ship-
ments; so it is also possible to use finds of imported pottery as a trace-
element of the shipment of goods that have themselves left no mark in the
soil.

A major problem with the archaeological evidence of pottery and other
products is that higher-quality goods and long-distance exchange have (not
unnaturally) attracted far more archaeological attention than less spectacu-
lar regional industries, even though these were almost certainly of as great,
if not far greater, economic significance. It is, for example, now possible to
study in some detail the distribution within the Mediterranean of the fine
marble and high-quality tablewares which were fashionable in late antiquity,
but it is not yet possible to study the local and regional industries that pro-
duced the bulk building-materials (stone, brick, tile, mortar, etc.) nor the
industries that produced the myriad different types of local cooking- wares . 4

One further area of archaeological evidence — the quantities of coin
found on different sites — sheds some light on the intensity of local exchange
but is difficult to use in detail. There is good evidence from the Roman
period of the widespread and frequent use of coins in everyday life, so their
presence or absence can be an index of commercial exchange. However,
coins were not primarily produced by the state in order to facilitate private
economic activity. Rather, they were minted in order to ease the process of
raising taxation and of paying imperial servants (in particular, the military).
So, in their production and diffusion (and hence in patterns of discovery in

4 Marble: Dodge and Ward-Perkins (1992). Tablewares: Hayes (1972); Hayes (1980); Atlante (1981).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

i R. Dan'fi/-'

Constantinople"
\Thasos„ f r^~~

ThessalonicaK y'V)

X y SykeonjC--
Proconneisos\~^ \

L. 1 »fy r

°Docimium

oSardisl q j

^Athens < ^-D E P hesus V/ cMU

^ ® OAphrodisias

Caesarea 6 Qq Pella

r°Gerasa

,-^Aphrodito

Map 8 Specialized production and exchange (sites and regions discussed in chapter 1 3)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

35° 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

modern dmes), there were administrative factors at work which were not
primarily economic . 5

Similarly, although archaeology has now shed much light on urban set-
tlement and prosperity, this evidence too is often very difficult to integrate
into a broad picture of the economy. The prosperity of towns in the
Roman and post-Roman periods was not simply dependent on economic
activity, but was also highly influenced by social and administrative change.
For example, the disappearance of towns in post-Roman Britain must in
part reflect economic change; but it was also caused by the disappearance
of a town-based aristocracy and a town-based secular and ecclesiastical
administration . 6

II. THE GENERAL PICTURE

Very broadly, the evidence currently available suggests that the focus of
intensive, specialized and sophisticated economic life shifted gradually,
between the fifth and the seventh century, further and further southwards
and eastwards. In the next few pages we will review this evidence briefly,
starting with two extreme case studies: Britain, in the far north-west, and,
at the other end of the empire, the provinces of the Near East and Egypt.
These surveys are necessarily done with a very broad brush and ignore
much detail and local variation, a point I shall return to later.

There is some debate about whether the economic decline of Britain
started within the fourth century itself (and therefore before the arrival of
the Saxons). But most scholars would agree that, at least in the early fourth
century, the province of Britain was flourishing, with a rich villa economy
in the countryside, and a network of towns which included not only admin-
istrative capitals ( civitates ), but also secondary production and marketing
centres whose prosperity depended primarily on economic activity. Copper
coins are frequently found in excavation and were clearly in widespread use,
and the province had a number of specialized potting industries, produc-
ing standardized high-quality products, and capable of distributing them
even over long distances (see Fig. 12).

By the end of the fifth century (at the vest latest) all this economic
sophistication had disappeared. There were no towns, no villas and no
coins. Specialized production and long-distance exchange were almost
entirely restricted to very high-value goods which were produced as much
to mark status as for their functional purpose, and which travelled perhaps

5 For the state and coinage: Hendy, Studies. For coins in commercial use: Millar (1981) 72—4; and the
useful overview in Greene (1986) 44—57 and 61—3.

6 See Durliat (1 990a) for an extreme view of the essentially ‘artificial’ nature of Roman cities.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE GENERAL PICTURE 3 5 I

Fig. 12 The distribution of one type of pot (Form C51) produced by the third/fourth-century
Roman potteries located in the area of modern Oxford. (From Peacock (1982) fig. 56)

more commonly as gifts and objects of political exchange than as objects
of commerce. 7

The nature of the early Anglo-Saxon economy is well reflected in the
Sutton Hoo ship-burial of c. a.d. 625 . This contained items both wonderful

7 Esmonde Cleary (1989); Millett (1990) 1 57—230.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

352 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

and exotic: superb local jewellery, defensive weaponry from Scandinavia,
gold coins and garnets from Francia, and silver- and bronze-work from the
Byzantine eastern Mediterranean. But amongst the grave -goods there was
also one very poorly made pottery bottle. The unimpressive quality of this
bottle, made on a slow wheel and highly irregular as it is, already tells us
much about the base of the economy which sustained the marvels of Sutton
Hoo. But it is, in fact, probably itself an exotic import, since it was made on
the wheel, and since there is no evidence that any native pottery was wheel-
thrown in the early Anglo-Saxon period. Until the development in the
eighth and ninth century of the Ipswich potteries, the people of East Anglia
used only hand-shaped pots. 8

The king who was buried at Sutton Hoo had access to goods from all
over the known world, and had goldsmiths working for him able to
produce objects that perfectly exploited their expensive materials. But this
high-level activity was going on against the backdrop of a broader
economy characterized by only the most basic production.

The Near East and Egypt

The situation in the contemporary Near East and Egypt was strikingly
different, as we have already seen in chapter 12 (pp. 315—45 above). The
Egyptian papyri reveal a world in which complex financial and commercial
activity was both commonplace, and recorded in written documents; and
the tax returns for one area, Aphrodito, reveal steadily mounting govern-
ment demands for tax in coin, which were apparently met without undue
difficulty until the very end of the seventh century. The archaeological
surveys of the Near East show that the fifth and sixth centuries were a high
point in settlement. Settlement was not only extensive, reaching into areas
that were normally highly marginal agriculturally; it was also intensive and
dense. Furthermore, although one might expect signs of miserable poverty
at least in some of the more barren areas, with a large population pressing
on the margins of the cultivable land, these people seem rather to have
been prosperous, as evidenced by a mass of new churches and church dec-
oration and by the imposing and solid houses in which they lived. These
latter are so well built that they must have been produced by specialized and
paid craftsmen (see Fig. 13 and p. 954, Fig. 54). 9

The inhabitants of the late antique Near East were involved in the long-
distance exchange of agricultural goods (a subject to which we will return
later). They were also at the centre of thriving local and regional exchange
networks, testified to by the existence of abundant and diverse pottery and

8 Bruce-Mitford (1975— 83) (vol. 3. 11.597—607 for the pottery bottle).

9 See ch. 1 2, pp. 321 and 340 above, nn. 1 2 and 51 . Aphrodito tax: Remondon (1965). However, using
different evidence, Bagnall (1985) argues for stable levels of taxation in Roman Egypt.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE GENERAL PICTURE 353

Fig. 13 A group of stone houses in the late antique Syrian village of Dehes. (From Sodini et al (1980)

1 8 1, fig. 243)

by the presence of numerous copper coins, even on rural sites (see Fig. 1 4) . 10
In c. a.d. 500 the contrast between the economies of the Near East and
Britain was enormous, and much more marked than it had been in c. 350.
Since the fourth century two things had occurred: the economy of Britain

10 See, for example, the finds of pottery and coin from the village-site of Dehes: Sodini et al. (1980)
234—87; Orssaud (1992). Or from the town-site of Pella: Walmsley (1988) 1 52—5; Watson (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

354 : 3- SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

had become much more basic, while that of the Near East had continued
to grow in scale and complexity.

There has been some recent debate about whether this eastern prosper-
ity continued up to the end of the sixth century and into the seventh
century, or whether decline set in around the time of the Great Plague of
541— 3. 11 At present the information available cannot resolve the question
satisfactorily, since it is often incomplete and very little of it can be closely
dated.

Partial information can certainly be deceptive. As we saw in chapter 1 2
(p. 319), the excavations at Dehes have now disproved earlier theories
(based on the disappearance of building inscriptions) that the limestone
villages of northern Syria were abandoned after around a.d. 600. Since new
houses were not being built, it is probable that the great period of expan-
sion had ended, but this is not necessarily the same as the start of a period
of decline. 12

Recent work in the Near East also tends to emphasize diversity within
the region, which makes generalizations about specific periods of time
extremely hazardous. For example, it is possible that northern Syria lost
some of its prosperity in the later sixth century and that some cities of the
coast, like Caesarea Maritima, declined quite rapidly after the Arab con-
quest; but in the same period other areas, like the Jordan valley, seem to
have been doing very well indeed into the seventh century and even
beyond, as is shown by the evidence of rural churches, and of urban set-
tlement at Pella and Gerasa. For instance, Arab-period Gerasa (Jerash) had
abundant Byzantine and Islamic copper coins, at least one solid mortared
stone house, and substantial potting industries producing a range of good-
quality wares. It is possible that, in comparison to the Near East of c. a.d.
5 50, the Near East of c. 650 had declined; but in comparison with the rest
of the Roman world it certainly still stood out as a region of quite excep-
tional economic sophistication. 1 ’

Italy

Britain and the Near East are extreme cases, and the economic history of
the regions that lay between them geographically is also somewhere
between them in character. For the provinces to the north of the
Mediterranean, I am best qualified to write about Italy, but the economic
histories of Gaul and Spain are probably broadly similar.

11 As argued by Kennedy (1985).

12 Abandonment: Kennedy (1985) 160—2. Dehes: Sodini et al (1980).

13 Caesarea: Holum et al (1988) 201—15. Rural churches: Piccirillo (1985). Jerash: Zayadine (1986)
107—36 and 41 1—59; Bellinger (1938) (for the coins).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE GENERAL PICTURE

355

In Italy, the large number of field-surveys that have been conducted in the
centre and south of the peninsula suggest that there was a gradual but fairly
steady decline in rural prosperity through the third, fourth, fifth and sixth
centuries, to a point where, in the seventh and eighth centuries, it is very
difficult from field-survey and even from excavation to find any trace of set-
tlement at all. 14 In chapter 1 2 (p. 325), I considered whether this apparent dis-
appearance of people from the landscape was ‘real’, and caused by dramatic
population decline, or ‘archaeological’, and caused by the disappearance of
the material objects by which settlements are normally found and dated. But,
even if the disappearance of the rural population is only archaeological, this
would still suggest that rural dwellers were very impoverished, since they
have not left the material remains that enable us to find them.

Specialized production and exchange certainly declined markedly. Late-
sixth- and seventh-century sites in Italy have, in general, far fewer pots,
drawn from a far narrower geographical and typological range, than sites
of the earlier Roman period. But some specialized production and regional
exchange in low- value goods did persist — something that did not happen
in Britain. For example, different quarries and production centres in the
Alps seem to have produced vessels in a soft soapstone {pietra ollare )
throughout late antiquity and the early Middle Ages and to have traded
them widely in the Po plain. 15

There is other evidence to suggest that local and regional exchange was
far less important than in the contemporary Near East. Fig. 14 compares
the number of coins found on an urban site in northern Italy, ancient Luna,
with those found on a small rural site in the limestone massif of northern
Syria, Dehes. The comparison is made much more striking when we realize
that the Luna coins derive from the excavation of a massive area of the
town, much of it certainly still occupied into the sixth and seventh century,
while those from Dehes derive only from a small number of trenches
opened into a selection of houses. To form a real comparison, the Dehes
figures would have to take account of the far smaller sample area, and
would therefore need to be multiplied by a factor of at least one hundred.
Coins were clearly common in sixth- and seventh-century rural Syria, while
they had virtually disappeared even in an urban context at Luna.

Africa

To the south of the Mediterranean, in the central provinces of Roman
North Africa (modern Tunisia and Algeria), the high point of sophistication

14 Greene (1986) 103—9; Lewit (1991) especially 172—5 and 188—92.

15 La pietra ollare (1987); Brogiolo and Gelichi (1996).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

NO. COINS PER YEAR OF REIGN

COINS FROM LUNI

COINS FROM DEHES

500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850

Fig. 14 A comparison of the coin-finds from the town of Luna (modern Luni) in Liguria, Italy, and from the village of Dehes in the limestone massif of
northern Syria. The coins derive from excavations on a very different scale (those at Luna were far more extensive than those at Dehes). The information is
expressed as numbers of coins found from each possible year of the period of issue. (Based on the coins published in Frova (1973) and (1977), and in

Sodini et al. (1980) 276—87)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE GENERAL PICTURE

357

and evident prosperity may have come just before our period, in the third
and fourth century. The evidence for this is unfortunately rather impression-
istic, since there are very few closely dated sites and surveys available for
study. However, Carthage itself, which served as the administrative, political
and cultural capital and as the principal port of central North Africa, has
been the subject of a recent international research-project. Unlike some
other great towns of this period, Carthage was never an imperial residence,
and its prosperity must have depended heavily on the wealth of Africa, rather
than on massive injections of cash from elsewhere in the empire (as in the
case of imperial cities like Trier and Constantinople). The history of
Carthage perhaps reflects reasonably accurately the history of its African
hinterland.

In the fourth and early fifth century, the people of Carthage erected a
large number of very substantial churches, and the recent excavations
(many of them focused on the edge of the settlement) have shown that the
city was at its largest at the time of the building of its great wall in the 420s,
in the face of the Vandal threat. 16 Carthage was a very large and very rich
fourth-century city, a phenomenon which in the contemporary western
Mediterranean can otherwise only be found in the great aristocratic and
imperial capitals of the empire (Trier, Milan and Rome).

Evidence from the interior, such as it is, confirms the picture from
Carthage. Two dated and partially published surveys, though on a small
scale, show rural settlement to have been at its densest and most extensive
in the third and fourth century; and, although well-dated evidence is gen-
erally lacking, it seems that a number of the towns of the interior, such as
Cuicul (Djemila), reached their greatest extent during the fourth century,
when they were embellished with both churches and rich aristocratic
housing . 17

What happened after 400 is not yet clear, because there has been so little
closely-dated archaeological work: many buildings are still dated on the
very fluid chronology of mosaic style. But the two datable rural surveys and
the excavations at Carthage suggest a gradual but steady loss of wealth and
the abandonment of settlements through the fifth and sixth century,
though the Vandal conquest in the 420s and 430s does not seem to have
caused any sudden decline. 16

This general picture of slow and steady decline is probably mirrored
in the history of die two African exports which have left abundant
archaeological traces: oil (documented through the amphorae in which it
was carried) and the tableware known as African red-slip ware. African
oil and African pottery dominated the western Mediterranean in the third

16 Carthage: e.g. Carandini et al. (1983) 16—18.

17 Segermes and Kasserine surveys: Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 19 1—3. Djemila: Lepelley, Cites

11.402— 1 5. 18 Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 209—13 for a useful account of recent work.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

358 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

and fourth century, and also had some success in the east. The Vandal
conquest seems to have caused some decline and some redirection of
exports, but by no means ended the distribution overseas of African
products: rather, they continued to be extremely important throughout
the fifth- and sixth-century western Mediterranean. However, very
slowly the areas reached by African amphorae and red-slip ware became
more and more restricted, and the quantities involved diminished, so
that, for instance, by the end of the sixth century, African red-slip ware,
although still found on many sites in the western Mediterranean, now
only appears on sites near the coast and generally in small quantities (see
Fig. 16, p. 372 below). 19

By 600, at the latest, the African provinces displayed far fewer evident
signs of economic sophistication than they had done in the fourth century;
and, although this cannot be stated with confidence (because of the
difficulties of dating and of comparison), it may well have been the case
that during the fifth century the provinces of the Near East had already
overtaken Africa as the richest part of the empire.

The Aegean world

The period of the fourth, fifth and at least the early part of the sixth
century seems to have been characterized by a flourishing and complex
economy in the lands around the Aegean sea. Rural settlement in Greece,
as revealed in a number of field-surveys, was far more extensive than in the
early Roman period (the exact opposite of the situation documented in
Italy). Towns, too, seemingly prospered in both Greece and western Asia
Minor, as is shown by the building of some traditional public monuments,
of churches and of aristocratic houses. However, the evidence from the
towns presents a problem worth noting: we know far more about impor-
tant centres (such as Corinth, Athens, Thessalonica, Ephesus, Aphrodisias
and Sardis, as well as Constantinople itself) than we do about more ‘ordi-
nary’ small towns, which have attracted far less archaeological attention. We
also know much more at present about western Asia Minor, near the
Aegean coast, then we do about the interior and the east. 20

The Aegean region was, in the fourth to sixth century, involved in a wide
overseas exchange network. For instance, the quarries of the island of
Proconnesos in the Sea of Marmara (and, to a lesser extent, the other
eastern quarries of Thasos, Thessaly and Docimium) came in late antiquity
to dominate the production and trade of marble in the whole
Mediterranean. Columns, capitals and bases in the grey-striped marble of
Proconnesos, and in particular chancel-screens (because they weighed less

19 Fentress and Perkins (1988); Reynolds (1995) 6—34 and 40—60.

20 Rural surveys: Alcock (1985). Towns: Claude (1969); Spieser (1984); and particular studies such as
Frantz (1988) on Athens and Foss (1979) 3—99 on Ephesus.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE GENERAL PICTURE

359

Fig. 1 5 Distribution of recorded finds of one type of late antique chancel-screen. The marble used
is not always noted when the screens are published; but the vast majority were undoubtedly in the
grey-streaked marble of Proconnesos, an island in the Sea of Marmara near Constantinople.
(After Sodini (1989) 184, fig. 11)

but made an immediate liturgical and visual impact), travelled widely, even
reaching inland sites in the Negev desert, and churches in the western
Mediterranean (where the marble of Luna had formerly dominated the
market for white stone) (see Fig. 1 5). As we shall see later on, much of this
marble was produced for the state’s own ends (for instance, for the imperial

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

j6o 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

buildings of Constantinople), but much was almost certainly produced and
sold commercially. 21

This period also saw the rise of a substantial potting industry in Asia
Minor that produced a fine tableware now known as Phocaean red-slip
ware, which is found throughout the Aegean and the Near East. As usual,
despite their obvious importance, local and regional networks of exchange
are at present more difficult to document than the more spectacular over-
seas trade; but, as in the Near East, the excavated towns of the Aegean
produce large numbers of copper coins from throughout the sixth century,
and indeed into the early seventh century. 22

The economic history of the provinces of Aegean Greece and Asia
Minor is very similar in the fourth to the sixth century to that of the near
eastern provinces in the same period. The difference comes later, with far
more evident signs of decline in the seventh century than can be found in
the Near East. Rural settlements virtually disappear from the archaeologi-
cal maps — perhaps, as in Italy, through a combination of falling population
and the decreasing availability of the manufactured articles that reveal the
presence of people to the archaeologist. In towns, too, there is evidence of
both contraction of settlement and a loss of obvious indicators of pros-
perity (coins, churches, datable buildings, etc.). 23

Possibly the seventh-century Byzantine world was not dissimilar to con-
temporary Italy, but, whereas in Italy the slide down to the simple economy
of the seventh century had been slow and gradual (beginning perhaps in
the third century, or even earlier), in the Aegean the drop came very sud-
denly, after a period of marked prosperity in the fifth and sixth century. On
the evidence currently available, seventh-century Byzantium and seventh-
century Italy look very different from the contemporary (and by this time
Arab) Near East, where there is much more evidence of continued eco-
nomic complexity and prosperity.

In the seventh century the gradual process by which economic sophis-
tication had moved southwards and then eastwards was complete: in
around a.d. 700 only the provinces of the Arab-held Near East had an
economy similar in its complexity and sophistication to that of the Roman
period. Although this is the end of one story, the subject of this volume,
it is also, of course, the beginning of another. For by the late seventh
century and the early eighth, we find the first signs of economic growth in
some of the provinces that had been so badly hit earlier on — with, for

21 Marble: Sodini (19 89).

22 Phocaean red-slip ware: Hayes (197 2) 323—70; Hayes (1980) lix— lxi; Abadie-Reynal (1989). Coins:
Morrison (1986).

23 Rural setdement in Greece (there have been no extensive field-surveys in Turkey): Alcock (1985).
Towns: Foss (1975); Foss (1979) 103—15; Miiller-Wiener (1986); Frant (1988) 82—94; Brandes (1989).
Coins: Morrison (1986). Unsurprisingly, there is much more early medieval coinage and sophisticated
pottery in Constantinople than elsewhere: Harrison (1986); Hayes (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE EXTENT OF THE CHANGE

361

instance, the appearance of new trading networks, and new towns, in both
the North Sea area (as at Hamwic, Dorestad and Hedeby) and the western
Mediterranean (as at Venice).

III. THE EXTENT OF THE CHANGE

Except in the Near East, the changes outlined above were remarkable. The
phenomenon we are looking at is not a simple shrinkage, as if the economy
of the seventh century were essentially similar to that of the fourth, but on
a more restricted scale. Rather, there was a remarkable qualitative change
in economic life, with whole areas of specialization and exchange disap-
pearing and, in some regions, even very basic technology apparently
ceasing to exist.

For example, in Britain a number of skills entirely disappeared, to be
reintroduced from the continent only in the seventh and eighth century.
Some of these, such as the art of building in mortared brick or stone, were
perhaps particularly associated with Roman fashions of display, and so may
have been peculiarly sensitive to political and cultural change. But at least
one skill that disappeared, the art of making pottery on the wheel, is a very
basic technique that speeds up considerably the production of good-
quality pottery. It is hard to understand how such a simple tool as the
potter’s wheel could disappear, but presumably individual potters in the
fifth and sixth century found the demand for pots was so low (because
markets were so localized and so small in scale) that it was not worthwhile
continuing its use (or borrowing it again from the continent).

The scale and impact of change was dramatic, as can be seen if it is
placed in a broad historical perspective. Post-Roman Britain, of the fifth
and sixth century, retained almost nothing of the sophistications of Roman
economic life and, although this is a fact that is initially hard to credit, even
sank to an economic level well below that reached in the pre-Roman Iron
Age. In the pre-Roman period, southern Britain was importing quantities
of Gallic wine and pottery, and sustained a number of native potting indus-
tries (some of them producing wheel-turned wares) whose products were
distributed quite widely. It also had the beginnings of towns, some of
which (like Hengistbury) were clearly dependent for their existence on
commerce, as well as on their defensive and political importance; and it had
a silver coinage, produced in such quantities that it was almost certainly
used for economic as well as political transactions . 24

Post-Roman Britain of the fifth and sixth century had none of these
things, either in Anglo-Saxon or in British areas, with the single exception
of a small-scale trade in Mediterranean pottery and wine amphorae that

24 Iron Age Britain: see, for example, Cunliffe (1978) 1 57—9, 299—300 and 337—42.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

362 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

reached the west of Britain. It was only long after the end of the Roman
period, in the seventh and, in particular, in the eighth century that eco-
nomic conditions in southern Britain again resemble those attained in the
pre -Roman Iron Age, with the first Anglo-Saxon coins, the first coastal
emporia, the first native pottery industries, and an evident growth of trade
with the continent. 25

The post-Roman economic regression is at its clearest and starkest in
Britain (except possibly in the Balkans, where there has been less archaeo-
logical work to reveal it), but the same phenomenon can be seen widely, if in
a less extreme form, right across the former Roman world. Two closely con-
nected and striking features of early medieval people (whether in Turkey,
Greece, Africa, Italy, France, Spain or Britain) are the unimpressive nature of
their domestic material remains and the considerable difficulty archaeolo-
gists have in finding traces of their settlement (unless they had the decency
to bury themselves with grave-goods or to leave good crop-marks). In the
past, problems in finding early medieval people have undoubtedly been exac-
erbated by a lack of interest in their culture and a consequent ignorance
about the nature of their material remains. But the example of countries like
Britain and Italy, where a lot of sophisticated effort (much of it fruitless) has
now been put into looking for post-Roman remains, shows quite clearly that
the problem is no longer just the result of not knowing how to look.

Pre-Roman people in countries like Italy show up well in field-survey
and in excavation, with scatters of recognizable pottery; and in areas like
Greece and Asia Minor they of course left spectacular domestic and mon-
umental remains. Roman people all over the empire broadcast their pres-
ence to the archaeologist with large quantities of pottery and, often, tile,
brick and mortar. It is only early medieval people who seem to have owned
so few material objects that they have often disappeared entirely from the
archaeological map. Even in Italy, which had been the very heart of the
empire, it is much easier to document local production, overseas trade,
flourishing urbanism and extensive exploitation of the land in the Etruscan
period than it is in the seventh century a.d.

IV. BEYOND THE FRONTIERS OF THE EMPIRE

The general picture of economic decline sketched out above — of a high
point of sophistication sometime in the Roman period sinking to a low
sometime between 400 and 700 — is based on work within the boundaries
of the former empire. Interestingly, if we step beyond the old frontiers,
things look rather different.

In Scandinavia, the first millennium a.d. is marked by steady exploitation
and very slow economic growth throughout the period, without the dramatic

25 Hodges (1989) 69— 104.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

REGIONAL AND LOCAL VARIATION

Roman boom followed by the even more dramatic post-Roman crash seen,
for example, in Britain. In Ireland it is the ^wf-Roman period, the fifth
century a.d. onwards, that produces evidence (through pollen-analysis, and
in church buildings, metalwork and a huge number of fortified enclosures)
of increasing exploitation of the land and of a rising complexity in economic
life. Similarly, beyond the eastern frontier, in Armenia, although the only evi-
dence we have so far comes from church building, the seventh century (the
very period that saw the collapse of the Byzantine economy in neighbour-
ing Asia Minor) is a high point in innovation and construction . 26

The evidence from Ireland calls into question the model I have proposed
so far, of a movement in economic complexity exclusively southwards and
eastwards. Possibly a movement outwards in general is a more appropriate
image: from a rich Italy in the first century b.c. and the first century a.d.; to
Gaul and Spain in the second and third century; to Britain and Africa in the
third and fourth; to the eastern provinces in the fifth and sixth; and finally,
beyond the old frontiers, to Ireland and Armenia in the sixth and seventh
century. As Randsborg has rightly pointed out, the slow and steady growth
of the Scandinavian economy raises even more fundamental questions,
about the long-term benefits of romanization . 27 Southern Britain, as we
have seen, lost in the fifth century a.d. much more than its Roman
economy: it reverted to a pattern of economic life simpler and more basic
than that of the pre-Roman Iron Age. Without the Romans, might not
Britain’s economy have developed in a more sustained, if slower, way, like
that of Scandinavia? Viewed in the very long term and with the benefit of
a perspective from beyond the frontiers, the economic history of Roman
Britain can be portrayed as a blind alley, before the population settled back
to a pattern of steady growth comparable to that of the pre-Roman Iron
Age.

V. REGIONAL AND LOCAL VARIATION

The surveys I have given above are very generalized, in order to bring out
and illustrate the broadest underlying trends within the economic history
of this period. For this purpose, it is, I hope, excusable to lump together
vast areas, like the whole of Gaul, Spain and Italy, and to illustrate their eco-
nomic history with a few choice examples drawn from Italy alone (indeed,
primarily from the north of Italy). But it is also important to realize that
the process of generalization and simplification necessarily ignores very
important local variation.

In both Gaul and Spain, for instance, there was probably a major
difference between the experiences of the south and of the north, where

26 Scandinavia: Randsborg (1991) 72—81; Randsborg (1992). Ireland: Mitchell (1976) 136—7 and
159—71; Edwards (1990) 6—33; Mallory and McNeill (1991) 181—225. Armenia: Mango, Byzantine
.Architecture 1 80—9 1 . 27 Randsborg (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

364 13 ■ SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

dislocation was certainly greater politically, and probably also greater eco-
nomically. But even within slightly more defined regions, like ‘the north of
Gaul’, there were undoubtedly big differences between areas such as
Brittany and traditionally more commercialized lands such as the Rhine
valley, where, for instance, a pottery industry capable of producing good-
quality wares survived from late Roman into early medieval times. Equally,
within ‘the south of Gaul’, while most towns certainly stagnated and prob-
ably declined in this period, at least one centre, Marseilles, seems to have
been flourishing, with large churches, close contacts with the Mediteranean,
and its own sixth-century copper coinage . 28

Even within the selected case study, Italy, the sketch I have produced is
undoubtedly much too simple when subjected to closer examination. As in
Gaul and Spain, there was in Italy probably a basic north— south divide,
again in favour of the south. Although it is stated above that copper coins
virtually disappear, the change is, in fact, much less dramatic in the south,
where, for instance, the mints in Sicily issued large quantities of copper
coins in the second half of the seventh century. Similarly, the decline in
specialized artisan production is again less evident in the south than in the
north. Mainland southern Italy, despite a relative dearth of archaeological
work, is the region where it is at present easiest to document a continuity
of production of decorated wares with a regional distribution right into the
seventh century and beyond . 29

Even within the north of Italy (the Po valley and Liguria), from which
most of my knowledge and the bulk of my examples derive, there were, of
course, important local differences of experience. Ravenna, for instance, as
an important capital and port close to the mouth of the Po, kept its broad
Mediterranean contacts (in the form of imported pottery and amphorae)
and retained the use of copper coins until a much later date than did other
northern Italian towns. In some cases, the difference of experience might
be very localized indeed. In Liguria, for example, rural sites of the fifth and
sixth century are generally characterized by buildings constructed of per-
ishable materials and by tiny quantities of miserable pottery; but a walled
site at S. Antonino near Finale Ligure has, by contrast, from the very same
period produced imposing stone defensive walls and both imported
pottery and copper coins. jfl

In Liguria and at S. Antonino we have evidence both for the broad
regional picture and for an exception which stands out against it. This, of

28 Loseby (1992).

29 Coins: Grierson (1982) 129—38. Pottery: Arthur and Patterson (1994). Recent archaeological work
on early medieval Rome has revealed (perhaps as we would expect) that it too had economic sophisti-
cations like coinage, and imported pottery and foodstuffs: Paroli and Delogu (1993).

30 Ravenna: e.g. Bermond Montanari (1983). Liguria: Ward-Perkins, Mills, Gadd and Delano Smith
(1986) 120. S. Antonino: Murialdo et al. (1997).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

‘prosperity’ and ‘sophistication’

365

course, allows us to speculate that the experience of S. Antonino was a
special one, due presumably to the stationing there of a Byzantine garrison
supplied with coin and goods from the sea. Eventually, and ideally, it should
be possible in all areas to know the broad picture, against which can then
be set a mass of significant regional and local variation. But this state of
knowledge is a very long way off at present.

It would, in fact, be strange if any broad pattern was entirely untouched
by particular circumstance. In ‘northern’ lands there were certainly areas
where economic complexity survived much longer than in contiguous
regions: southern Italy and Sicily (perhaps because of their closer African
and eastern links), Ravenna and Rome (because of their political and eccle-
siastical importance), and the Marseilles— Rhone— Rhine corridor (because
it was an obvious funnel for any surviving interregional trade, and perhaps
because of the purchasing power of the new Frankish aristocracy).

Conversely, there were almost certainly areas in the southern and eastern
Mediterranean which, for particular reasons, did not share in the prosper-
ity of the fourth to the sixth century. One such area is the eastern North
African littoral, Tripolitania and Cyrenaica, which suffered badly from bar-
barian raiding in late antiquity and which has produced much less evidence
of fourth- to sixth-century prosperity than have the contemporary central
North African provinces. 31

In short, any model of economic movement southwards and eastwards
needs to be loose enough to accommodate considerable local and regional
variation. This meant, for instance, that, in a.d. 5 50, Marseilles, on the
north-western shores of the Mediterranean, was probably a much larger
and richer town than Lepcis Magna, in the south-east; something which
had probably not been the case two hundred years earlier.

vi. ‘prosperity’ and ‘sophistication’

In the preceding pages, in describing different economies and economic
processes, I have often used terms loaded with value judgement, like ‘pros-
perous’, ‘poor’ and ‘economic decline’. Under the influence of anthropol-
ogy (one of whose fundamental assumptions is that cultures are different,
but equal), such terms have become profoundly unfashionable in historical
writing. The various changes (including the economic) that took place at
the end of the Roman empire, which were once happily described as symp-
toms of ‘decline’, are now generally seen as neutral ‘transformations’, or
even as willed ‘alternative strategies’. 32

There are, indeed, problems with words that imply a generally ‘better’ or
‘worse’ state of the economy: they suggest that individuals were in every

31 Mattingly (1995) 1 71— 217. 32 E.g. Carver (1993) 46—61.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

j66 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

way materially better off (and maybe also happier) under one dispensation
than under another. This was not necessarily the case, because, while
archaeology gives us a good indication of the availability and diffusion of
some consumer durables (bricks, pottery, etc.) and some cash-crops, it does
not give us an accurate picture of individual diet, individual health or the
amount of individual effort needed to sustain these. It is perfectly possible
that peasants in sixth-century Britain, living in wooden huts and using only
hand-shaped pottery, or nomads in seventh-century North Africa, living a
pastoral life in tents, ate better, lived longer, worked less and perhaps felt
better than did their Roman predecessors tied into a market-economy,
despite their fine pottery, their solid houses and the coins jangling in their
purses.

There is, at present, no satisfactory way of measuring these experiences
against each other; and our view of them inevitably reflects the mixed feel-
ings that we, from a position of great privilege, hold towards the extreme
complexity and materialism of the modern world. If we did want to know
more about individual physical well-being and longevity, we would have to
put more effort into establishing the study of human bones on a sure footing
and on recovering datable and well-preserved groups of skeletons. Perhaps
we might then know who lived healthier and longer lives — though even then
we would not know who had to work the hardest and who was ‘happiest’.

It is therefore important to realize that in these pages ‘poor’ and ‘rich’
necessarily refer to ‘poor’ and ‘rich’ in those material objects which are
readily identifiable archaeologically. Because these words are problematic, I
have often tried to use more specific and less loaded terms to describe eco-
nomic conditions: in particular, ‘economic complexity’ or ‘sophistication’
and its opposite, ‘economic simplicity’. These terms do not imply that
everyone was in every way ‘better off within a sophisticated economy, but
merely that they were tied into a more complex network of economic activ-
ity, which allowed for more specialization of production and more
exchange, both locally and over long distances.

There is, of course, a relationship between complexity and wealth, but it
is a relationship that does not necessarily favour the individual, particularly
the individual at the bottom of society. A complex economy, because it
allows different areas and groups of people to specialize in producing crops
or goods that they are perhaps particularly suited to grow or make, can
undoubtedly support a larger population, give wider access to specialized
products and produce more overall, than an economy in which each
peasant community produces its own beer, its own tools, its own pots, etc.
It will therefore make for a ‘richer’, more variegated and more specialized
region. However, as we well know from nineteenth-century experience in
Europe and twentieth-century experience elsewhere, this does not neces-
sarily mean that all individuals within a complex system are ‘better off.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

‘prosperity’ and ‘sophistication’

367

In order to imagine them more vividly, the complexity and sophistica-
tion of the Roman economy need to be placed in a very broad and com-
parative historical framework. In comparison to many other ancient and
medieval economies, the Roman economy was highly developed. High-
quality and exotic goods are probably available in all societies, as we have
seen from the example of Sutton Hoo, but only for rulers and the very
highest in the land. What is striking about the Roman period is the large-
scale availability of standardized high-quality goods, many of them
imported from afar, for a substantial middle and lower market well below
this extreme upper-crust. The African pottery industry, for instance, pro-
duced literally millions of pots to a uniform high quality and to a range of
standardized designs, and somehow distributed them to households of all
sorts within much of the Mediterranean region and beyond. Such bulk and
breadth of operation was characteristic of the Roman period, and not to
be seen again for very many centuries.

However, it is also important to realize that, despite its undoubted
sophistication, the Roman economy remained, from the perspective of
modern prosperous nations, highly underdeveloped and very precarious.
This is best seen by looking at agricultural production and at the agricultu-
ral labour needed to sustain it.

Mechanization of agriculture in the Roman and medieval worlds was
extremely limited, and crops had, for the most part, to be laboriously
coaxed from the soil by massive armies of agricultural labourers. For the
Roman period there is no way of telling accurately what proportion of the
population worked in the fields, but the overall balance between agriculture
and ‘industry’ was probably not dissimilar to that of later medieval Europe.
And, in later medieval Europe, figures from England (where we are fortu-
nate to have the returns of both the 1086 Domesday and the 1377 poll-tax
surveys) suggest that nine-tenths of the population lived in the country-
side, of whom almost all were primarily engaged in agricultural work.

It is necessary to appreciate this basic economic pattern in order to
understand the underlying nature of the Roman (and late medieval) econ-
omies. Their considerable sophistications, in terms of trade, specialization
of artisan production and use of coin, which impress us when we visit
museums, Roman sites and medieval cathedrals, were all achieved on the
back of immensely laborious agricultural production which tied the vast
majority of the population to the land. The agricultural surpluses that were
needed to sustain the craftsmen, the aristocrats, the state and all the other
sophistications that we associate with ‘Rome’ were only produced by enor-
mous numbers of people working the land for returns that would seem
paltry in a modern prosperous economy.

Furthermore, when we talk of Roman ‘industries’, such as those of the
later Roman period that produced African red-slip ware or, on a much

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

368 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

smaller scale, Oxford ware (see Fig. 1 2, p. 351 above), these were not, as far
as we can tell from the archaeological record, centralized factory-based
concerns of the modern type but, rather, collaborative ventures of groups
of artisans. It may even be a mistake to imagine craftsmen as entirely ded-
icated to one specialized activity; potting, for instance, could have been sea-
sonal, depending on the availability of fuel and on the availability of labour,
freed during slack periods in the fields. 33

The Roman economy was not only highly underdeveloped in modern
terms, dependent as it was on a vast agricultural labour force; it was also
precarious, since crops could and did fail, often with disastrous results.
Cash-crops (oil and wine) and some artisan products (such as fine pottery
for the table) seem to have moved widely around the empire, in what appear
to have been large quantities; but it is not likely that there was much long-
distance commerce in grain and other basic foodstuffs.

Probably the only regular large-scale shipments of grain over long dis-
tances were those organized by the state in order to provision its army and
the major cities (in particular, Rome and Constantinople), and even these
efforts were not always successful. 34 When a basic food-crop failed, trans-
port and marketing structures were not in place to ensure that the gap was
quickly and easily filled with the crop of another region, particularly if the
area affected was inland. 35 Rather, people starved to death, and many of the
debilitated survivors subsequently died of disease.

The so-called ‘Chronicle of Joshua the Stylite’ gives a graphic and harrow-
ing picture of such a disaster in its account of the famine which affected the
region of Edessa in 499—501, after a swarm of locusts had consumed the
wheat harvest and a second havest, of millet, had failed. The cost of bread
rose; people were forced to sell cheaply their other possessions in order to
buy it; many fled the region altogether; others, particularly those too weak to
travel far, flocked into the city to beg. Here disease killed many, but there was
still far too little to eat (and not nearly enough to feed the crowds of beggars).
Some were reduced to eating the flesh of the dead, and in the countryside
people tried in vain to fill their bellies by eating the lees from the vintage. In
the town, the poor ate leaves and roots, ‘sleeping in the porticoes and squares,
and day and night they howled from their hunger, and their bodies wasted
away and grew thinner so that they came to look like corpses’. Many more
died, particularly those who were sleeping rough during the cold nights of
the winter, and the streets were filled with the dead. More disease followed. 36

33 Roman pottery production, with useful discussion of modern analogies: Peacock (1982). Some of
the state-run fabricae may well have been more like modern factories.

34 Garnsey and Sailer (1987) 83—103; Durliat (1990a).

35 Garnsey (1988) 22—3, quoting and discussing a passage by Gregory of Nazianzus.

36 Joshua the Stylite: trans W. Wright 1882 (from the Syriac into English), 26—34; ed. and trans. (into
Latin) J.-B. Chabot 1949, 193—9- Quoted in English, and discussed by Garnsey (1988) 3—6 and 20—37.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE DISTRIBUTION OF GOODS AND WEALTH 369

All this misery took place in Mesopotamia in a period when the near east
seems to have enjoyed unprecedented prosperity. Edessa itself clearly
benefited from this prosperity and was a very wealthy city, as can be seen
from the amounts of tribute that it was (repeatedly) able to pay the
Persians: 2,000 pounds weight (more than five times the cost of S. Vitale in
Ravenna) promised in 503 soon after the end of the famine; 200 pounds
paid in 540; and 500 pounds more in 544. All this gold did not spare the
poor from misery and death in 499— 501. 37

VII. THE DISTRIBUTION OF GOODS AND WEALTH WITHIN THE
LATE ANTIQUE ECONOMY: THE ROLE OF OVERSEAS COMMERCE

No one would or could dispute that wealth and goods travelled widely
within the Roman empire. However, the relative importance of the state
and of commerce in the distribution of goods and wealth has been much
debated. Historians (taking written texts as their point of departure) have
tended to emphasize non-commercial mechanisms to explain the move-
ment of both goods and wealth. They have played down the role of a free
market and stressed, above all, the role of the state, as a power that raised
substantial taxes in both coin and kind and then spent these in selected
parts of the empire. They have argued that, even when goods were trans-
ported over a distance and sold, this happened only because they were able
to travel at no cost (or at least at a heavily subsidized rate) in state-financed
shipping. 38

They have also pointed to private estate management as a means of dis-
tributing goods between the scattered holdings of landlords with property
in several different parts of the Mediterranean. According to this latter
model, a dish in African red-slip ware or an African oil amphora found in
Italy could have reached its destination at the command of a rich aristocrat
who ordered the transfer of goods from one of his African estates to one
of his Italian ones. 39

Archaeologists, by contrast, tend to see things in more modern and more
commercial terms, and talk blithely of ‘trade’ whenever they see an
imported piece of pot. This difference of opinion has led to a lively debate
between those who see the movement of goods in the Roman world as
essentially commercial and those who emphasize non-commercial modes
of distribution. 40

37 503 promise (not in the end delivered): Joshua the Stylite, trans. Wright, 5 3, and trans. Chabot, 213.
540: Procop. IF£rr.r 11.12.34. 544: Procop. Wars ii.z-j. 4.6.

38 Finley (1973) 17— 34; Jones, LRE 465 and 824— 58. 39 Whittaker (1985).

40 The argument for trade as important, and for archaeological evidence as vital in revealing it, has
been made most forcefully by a group of Italian archaeologists: see the papers by Carandini and others
in Giardina, Societa romana hi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

37° 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

In part, this is a debate born out of the nature of the evidence.
Archaeologists find a mass of imported pottery and no indication of how
it got there and, not unnaturally, think in terms of the obvious modern
means of distribution: trade. The ancient texts, by contrast, tell us much
about aristocrats and the state, but are notably silent about many of the
products that archaeologists discover, so that we are often forced to make
do with a cumbersome modern term (‘Oxford ware’, ‘African red-slip
ware’, etc.) for a common archaeological find. Between the abundance of
the archaeological evidence and the silence of the texts, there is obviously
room for much debate.

In recent years there has been some convergence of the ‘historical’ and
the ‘archaeological’ positions. 41 It does indeed seem likely that both mech-
anisms of distribution (commercial and non-commercial) were of great
importance, probably to mutual advantage. For instance, in the fifth- and
sixth-century east, it is not unreasonable to hypothesize that a great deal of
the Phocaean red-slip ware that reached the near east was taken there com-
mercially in empty ships returning to Egypt, whose main purpose had been
to carry grain for the state to Constantinople.

Similarly, it must have been the building projects of the emperors that
principally sustained the quarries of Proconnesos, in the Sea of Marmara
near Constantinople, since Proconnesian marble was the main fine material
used for both secular and ecclesiastical imperial projects throughout the
fourth, fifth and earlier sixth century. It is also possible that some of the
Proconnesian marble found in non-imperial buildings was a gift from
the emperor to influential patrons whose good will was worth cultivating.
Anicia Juliana for her church of St Polyeuktos in Constantinople, and
Julianus Argentarius and Theoderic the Ostrogoth for their many buildings
in Ravenna, perhaps received as gifts the large quantities of Proconnesian
marble that they needed. 42

However, it is equally possible that these rich patrons had to buy their
marble from the imperial quarries. Certainly, at a humbler level, it is far
easier to explain the very extensive distribution of basic architectural ele-
ments in Proconnesian marble, like capitals and chancel-screens, in terms
of commerce rather than political favour, and, as we have seen at the begin-
ning of this chapter, there is even a scrap of literary evidence to confirm
this (see Fig. 1 5, p. 359 above). State production and distribution and com-
merce may indeed have been closely interlinked. The commercial sale of
Proconnesian probably depended on a state-run quarry, and it was certainly
the massive imperial projects which set the fashion for humbler patrons to
emulate; yet the state quarries perhaps also needed sales to a wider private
market in order to maintain large-scale production.

41 E.g. Hopkins in Garnsey et al. (1983) ix— xxv; Garnsey and Sailer (1987) 43—63; Peacock and
Williams (1986) 54—63.

42 St Polyeuktos: Harrison (1989) 77—124. Ravenna: Angiolini Martinelli et al. (1968—9).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE DISTRIBUTION OF GOODS AND WEALTH 371

The fifth and sixth century are particularly interesting in any debate
about the relative importance of the state and of commerce in the dis-
tribution of goods overseas. In this period, the eastern Mediterranean
remained under the control of a single political power (the Roman
empire centred on Constantinople), but the former western empire
broke up into entirely independent states and local aristocracies. The
pattern of exports within the west, before and after the collapse of
Roman power, should therefore tell us whether the existence of state
mechanisms of distribution were essential for the distribution of goods
over long distances.

The importance of the state in the distribution of goods does indeed
show up in a sharp fall, around the time of the Vandal conquest, in the
quantities of African red-slip ware reaching western sites (see Fig. 16). 43
Since red-slip ware may often have been carried ‘pick-a-back’ in grain ships
financed by the state (at least in the early stages of its travels), such a fall
could be expected with the ending of Rome’s African annona. But what is
also striking is that considerable amounts of African red-slip, as well as
large quantities of African oil amphorae, continued to reach sites all over
the western Mediterranean throughout the Vandal and early Byzantine
periods. Quantities did gradually decline, and the area served did become
more restricted. But this was a very slow change, which is more easily
explained in terms of slowly declining purchasing-power in the north-
western provinces than in terms of any Vandal-imposed changes to
systems of production and distribution.

African amphorae and African red-slip ware, in the fifth and sixth
century, must have travelled for commercial reasons — as must also have
been the case for the eastern Mediterranean amphorae which appear on
western sites in large quanties in the same period. 44 The impressive scale of
this commerce and its persistence in the difficult times of the fifth and sixth
century suggest very strongly that commerce and the lure of financial gain
were important elements in the distribution of goods, not only in this
period, when they are exposed by the disappearance of the unified state,
but also in the earlier Roman period, when they were operating alongside,
and were perhaps partly masked by, state-operated mechanisms of distri-
bution.

As in all centuries before the advent of the railway, proximity to navi-
gable waterways and, above all, to the sea were obviously essential for the
long-distance trading of bulk goods. However, the evidence also suggests
that ‘proximity’ needs to be understood quite widely, since it seems that the
import and export of goods might spread remarkably far inland. For
instance, the landlocked settlements of the Negev desert imported in this

43 Fentress and Perkins (1988), which is a pioneering work, since it attempts to show changes in
absolute quantities of imported pottery, rather than changing proportions of different imported wares.

44 Eastern amphorae: Reynolds (1995) 70—83.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

% per annum % per annum

372 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

Fig. 16 Quantities of African red-slip ware recorded on five sites (or regional surveys) in the western
Mediterranean. B is a consolidation into a single graph of all the data presented in A. (From Fentress
and Perkins (1988) figs. 2 and 3)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE DISTRIBUTION OF GOODS AND WEALTH

373

period marble fittings from Proconnesos and probably exported at least
some of their wine overseas through Gaza . 45

But land transport undoubtedly added considerably to cost, and those
who did not have reasonably good access to waterways undoubtedly stood
at a disadvantage if they wished to sell their produce away from their home
region. For instance, the landowners of central Asia Minor are described
byjohn Lydus, in the time of Justinian, as unable to sell their crops because
they were ‘far removed from the sea’; while, by contrast, Agathias in the
mid sixth century describes the Lazi, on the Black Sea coast of Asia Minor,
as wealthy since ‘they put out to sea whenever possible and carry on a thriv-
ing commerce ’. 46 For many producers, commercial viability must have been
dependent on their access to water transport.

Even if it is accepted that commerce, as well as imperial and aristocratic
distribution, was one means whereby goods travelled overseas in the
Roman world, it still remains to be seen how important this commerce was
within the overall economy. Is it impressive only because archaeologists
have concentrated their attention on it, since it both strikes the imagination
and shows up so clearly in the archaeological record?

There is certainly much to be said for such scepticism, and there is no
doubt that we now need detailed studies of regional and local industries
and networks of exchange to set beside the work that has already been
done on long-distance distribution. For line tablewares, some of this
research has already appeared. To set alongside the information on African
red-slip ware, it is already possible to form some impression of more
regional industries, producing pottery of comparable style and quality, such
as the various types of south Gaulish terre sigillee grisef ' 1 On a humbler and
more basic level, however, we know as yet very little about the plentiful
buff-coloured and grey tablewares and cooking-wares of the Roman, late
Roman and early medieval centuries, partly because they are often undec-
orated and difficult to distinguish.

Although regional and local economies undoubtedly deserve emphasis
and more research, it would none the less be a mistake to dismiss long-dis-
tance trade as peripheral to the main base of the economy. For there is a
very striking coincidence that cannot be avoided. Periods of rural prosper-
ity in a particular region seem to coincide closely with periods in which the
same region’s products show up in the archaeological record as exports
overseas.

This is true of Italy in the first century b.c. and the first century a.d.,
when Italian wine, pottery and marble were exported all over the western

45 Gaza wine: Riley (1979) 219—22. See also ch. 12, p. 342 above, n. 60, for Cappadocian merchants
travelling overland to northern Mesopotamia to buy wine.

46 John Lydus: discussed by Hendy, Studies 295—6. Agathias Hist. in. 5. 3.

47 Gaulish sigillata: (1981) 5-7; Reynolds (1995) 36—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

374 : 3- SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

Mediterranean, and when, from the evidence of field-survey, rural settle-
ment was at its most extensive and prosperous. It is also true of southern
Gaul and Mediterranean Spain at a slightly later date, at the end of the first
century and through the second century. Moving closer to our period, the
third and fourth century seem to have been the high point of wealthy rural
and urban settlement in Africa, and they were also centuries when exports
of African red-slip ware and African amphorae were very high. The fifth
and sixth century then saw the gradual but distinct shrinkage of these
exports, and also probably a gradual decline in rural and urban settlement
in Africa itself. 48

For the fifth and sixth century, it is very striking that Gaza wine ampho-
rae appeared in quantity on eastern and even western sites at the very
period that the small towns and villages of Gaza’s desert hinterland, the
Negev, reached their greatest size and displayed their most evident signs of
prosperity. It is equally striking that the period of extensive and large-scale
export of the amphorae known prosaically as Late Roman i, which were
produced in the region around Antioch (as well as in Cilicia and on Cyprus),
coincides with the period of the best evidence for settlement and prosper-
ity in the nearby Syrian limestone massif. Neither the Negev nor the lime-
stone massif ever again sustained a large population, and yet in the late
Roman period both were extensively settled by people who seem to have
been well-off. Furthermore, in fifth- and sixth-century western texts
Syrians are often referred to as traders, to the point that the very word
‘Syrus’ appears to have acquired the partial meaning of ‘merchant’: so that
Sidonius Apollinaris, describing a topsy-turvy world in Ravenna in 468,
could write ‘the clergy lend money, while the Syrians sing psalms’,
confident that his audience would understand the paradox. 49

If combined, the evidence from rural survey, amphora finds and texts
strongly suggests that the prosperity of the fifth- and sixth-century near
east was, at least in part, based on an ability to sell its products overseas,
sometimes over very long distances. Overseas demand seems to have put
cash and spending power into a region. It also probably encouraged, in the
exporting regions, the development of specialization of production for
those goods that could be sold. This is best seen in the opening up of mar-
ginal land. For instance, the Syrian limestone massif, though reasonably
well watered, is very rocky, with soil restricted to basins of arable in the
valley bottoms and to pockets of earth in the hill slopes (see Fig. 5, p. 322

48 Overall summaries of the rural evidence: Lewit (i 991); Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 1 89—96 and
21 1 (for Africa). Summary of pottery and amphora evidence: Panella, in Giardina, Societa romana
m.431— 59.

49 Setdement in the Negev and limestone massif: see ch. 1 2, p. 321 above, n. 1 2. Amphorae: Reynolds
(i: 99 5) 71—83 and figs. 1 5 5—60; Riley (1979) 219—22 (Gaza/ZJLd4); Empereur and Picon (1989) 236—43
(LRAi). Texts: Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.8; Lambrechts (1937); Pirenne (1939) ch. 11 pt 2; Ruggini (1959) (who
righdy points out that by no means all easterners in the west were involved in trade).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE DISTRIBUTION OF GOODS AND WEALTH

375

above). 5 " It is a region that can sustain a population engaged in mixed
farming, but only in small numbers and at the margins of prosperity; and
yet in the late Roman period the limestone massif was both densely settled
(see Fig. 7, p. 329 above) and very prosperous. There is no way of proving
how this exceptional state of affairs came about. But the known demand
for Antiochene (Late Roman 1) amphorae, the presence of late antique
olive-presses around the villages of the massif, and the possibility of plant-
ing trees in the tiny but numerous pockets of soil, together strongly suggest
that increased demand opened up this region to the specialized cultivation
of the olive.

This does not, of course, mean that all, or even the greater part, of the
oil of the limestone massif was produced for an overseas market. Producers
in all exporting regions must also have been growing to satisfy local and
regional demand, as well as the needs of their own households. Long-dis-
tance trade, regional trade and local trade are indeed likely to have been
closely interlinked and mutually sustaining. For instance, the growth of a
regional trade in oil could create the structures to enable an overseas trade
to develop; while conversely, if some oil went overseas, this might encour-
age the growth of a regional market in order to satisfy the regional need nor-
mally supplied by the exported product. Both overseas and regional trade
might, in their turn, stimulate local demand, by helping to create a more
prosperous and more numerous peasantry. The possible ramifications in the
flow of goods and wealth are endless, and can never be thoroughly sorted
out, if only because it is impossible to do so from the archaeological record.
However, the archaeological record does suggest that overseas trade was
one important element at work in the creation of regional wealth.

Just as we do not need to believe that every peasant in an exporting area
worked directly for the overseas market, so we do not need to imagine spe-
cialized areas of production as massive zones of monoculture, in the
manner of the modern American wheat-belt. The limestone massif, for
instance, would never have been an area exclusively of olive trees, import-
ing all other necessities from elsewhere. Rather, it was probably an area
where there were many more olive trees than the local population needed,
and where there were many more people living, at a higher level of pros-
perity, than the soil could possibly have maintained without extensive com-
merce and specialization. But, in amongst the olive trees, the peasants
would certainly have kept up as mixed and extensive a range of cultivation
as the landscape could support, with vegetable plots, fruit trees, small areas
of arable, and as many animals as possible.

I have argued that overseas trade, on a scale large enough to enrich those
who were exporting their goods, is the easiest way to explain the coincidence

50 The discussion that follows is based on Tchalenko, Villages , and Tate (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

376 13 - SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

in time between the prosperity of certain regions of the ancient world and
the spread of their products overseas. This does, however, raise a very basic
question, to which there is no obvious answer, at least at present. Why did
products like wine and oil, so long established in the Mediterranean and so
widely produced there, come to be so favoured from particular provinces at
particular times; and why, given the obvious additional costs of transport,
did not local products compete successfully? If the peasants, landlords,
marble -workers and potters of Italy lost out in the fourth and fifth century
to those of Gaza, Antioch, Africa and Proconnesos, why did they not re-
establish the extremely successful and widely exported Italian production of
the first centuries b.c. and a.d.?

To answer these questions adequately would require more information
than we will ever have. For instance, we would need to know about relative
labour-costs across the empire and how they changed through time; about
who organized and financed export-trades; and about consumer-percep-
tion of different goods and how these perceptions altered.

The archaeological evidence does suggest that a sophisticated Roman
economy had produced a large market of discerning consumers; and if so,
like supposedly discerning consumers today, they are likely to have been
very much at the mercy of the dictates of fashion. Indeed, in the case of
wines, we do know, from the written record, that some Italian wines were
always prized and that some eastern wines (such as that of Gaza) became
so in late antiquity . 51 But, as far as I am aware, there is no evidence
specifically from late antiquity to show that consumers shared the modern
perception of olive oil as of different qualities, with further potential as a
status symbol; let alone whether (as with modern Tuscan ‘estate -bottling’)
this was as much a question of historical perception, marketing and pack-
aging, as of ‘reality ’. 52 Sadly, there is no information to tell us whether pur-
chasers in the large and all-important Roman ‘middle market’ felt that a
plate of real African red-slip ware was superior to a comparable local
product in terre sigillee grise — let alone whether they prized their Gaza wine
more highly if it was still in its original, and distinctive, amphora . 53

An even more fundamental question will also never receive an answer:
were there other products as important as wine, oil and pottery — perhaps
even of greater importance — that were regularly exported overseas in large
quantities, but which we have no knowledge of simply because they have
the misfortune to be archaeologically invisible? For example, in the Life of

51 Gaza wine: see the sources cited in Riley (1979) 219—22.

52 From the earlier empire several texts discuss the quality of oil from different types of olive and
from different regions: e.g. Columella, Rust, v.8.3— 5; Pliny, HN 111.60 and xv.15— 27; Athenaeus,
Deipnosophists n.66f— 67b.

53 However, see from the early empire Trimalchio’s ostentatiously labelled, one-hundred-year-old
Falernian: Petron. Satyricon 34.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

STATE AND ARISTOCRATIC DISTRIBUTION

377

Melania the Younger , the holy woman persuades her over-zealous and
uncomfortable husband to abandon wearing sackcloth and to switch to
unostentatious cheap Antiochene cloth .’ 4 The story is set in Rome at the
beginning of the fifth century. Was Antiochene cloth perhaps the usual
material for the mass-market of the city, chosen for her husband by
Melania (and by the author of her life) because it was a clear and widely
recognized item of lower-class dress? If it was common in Rome, was it
also widely exported elsewhere, both within the regional economy of the
Near East and within the broad Mediterranean economy? Unfortunately,
we shall never know.

VIII. STATE AND ARISTOCRATIC DISTRIBUTION; THE EFFECTS
OF TAXATION ON THE ECONOMY

To argue for the importance of commerce is not to argue that the role of
the state (and to a lesser extent the aristocracy) in redistributing goods and
wealth in the Roman world was negligible, nor to argue that there was no
change here in the fifth and sixth century. The importance of state spend-
ing is, for instance, very clear just before our period, in the fourth century,
when a large army and the presence of the emperors themselves in
favoured residences near the frontier (such as Trier, Sirmium and Antioch)
concentrated great wealth in the frontier regions, some of which were not
by nature rich. Huge piles of gold, raised in the peaceful interior of the
empire, were collected and spent along the Rhine and Danube, and along
the eastern frontier. There is plenty of evidence — for instance, in the rich
urban and rural houses of the fourth-century Trier region — to show how
important this was as a mechanism for distributing wealth and encourag-
ing local demand. Similarly, we have plenty of evidence, from the fourth
and early fifth century, of the accumulation of widely scattered estates by
wealthy aristocrats, which must have led to substantial transfers of wealth
from region to region, and perhaps also to transfers of goods . 55

A major change in the way that the state distributed its revenues,
which took place just before our period, almost certainly had a marked and
generalized effect on the Mediterranean economy. The establishment of
Constantinople as an exceptionally privileged city in the fourth century, the
diversion to it of the Egyptian annona , and its emergence at the end of the
century as the pre-eminent eastern imperial residence, all helped create a
new, stable and substantial focus of consumption in the east. Furthermore,
the definitive break of the empire into two halves at the end of the fourth
century undoubtedly spared the eastern provinces from pouring resources
into the troubled fifth-century west. The creation of an autonomous

54 Discussed by Jones, LRE 850. 55 Trier: Trier Kaiserresiden^ (1984). Estates: Jones, LRE 782.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

378 13 - SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

eastern empire, with its own established capital at Constantinople (devel-
opments which were in place by the start of our period in 425), were prob-
ably essential foundations to the very different economic histories of the
west and the east in late antiquity.

The other side to this same coin was the loss to Rome, and the western
provinces in general, of the resources of the east. Any drop in imperial
spending certainly had a negative effect on the regions that had formerly
received the emperor’s gold. We can see the consequences of this in the
gradual abandonment of the paid army, first along the Rhine and upper
Danube in the fifth century, and then along the lower Danube in the sixth
century: from being areas with economies greatly enriched and stimulated
by imperial pay and largess, they became peripheral zones, and, unless they
had alternative sources of income, very poor ones.

The beneficial effects of state spending and the negative impact of its
abolition are well illustrated in sixth-century Asia Minor, where two
sources, John Lydus and Procopius, provide complementary accounts of
the result of Justinian’s cuts in the cursus publicus (the system of state-main-
tained transport) along the military road which linked Constantinople to
the eastern frontier. The local effects of these cuts were apparently devas-
tating. While the cursus publicus flourished, local landlords had supplied their
taxes in kind to feed the grooms and horses of the cursus, and, by selling it
additional food, had also been able to make money from the state. After
the drastic curtailment of the cursus, the state no longer paid out gold, but
rather demanded it in taxation, despite the fact that cash was extremely
difficult to obtain in an inland region far from the commercial opportu-
nities of the sea. While the state was spending money along the military
road, all was well for the local landlords; but when that spending stopped
and turned into a demand for cash, life became much more difficult. 56

The great imperial residences of the empire were another obvious area
where state spending had been concentrated, and they certainly suffered
markedly in this period from a decline in state revenue. As provinces and their
tax revenues were lost, so imperial cities inevitably declined in both wealth
and splendour. Despite considerable imperial and Ostrogothic attempts to
sustain it, Rome gradually shrank through the fifth and sixth century to a tiny
proportion of its former size; not only was there no longer the government
money to sustain it, but it also inevitably lost out from the shrinking overseas
holdings of its senatorial aristocracy. Much later, at the end of the sixth
century and in the seventh, Constantinople, which had increased in popula-
tion, wealth and splendour in the very period that Rome declined, itself
underwent a dramatic period of impoverishment and shrinkage. 57

56 Quoted and discussed by Hendy, Studies 294—6.

57 Rome: Krautheimer (1980) 3—87; Ward-Perkins, Public Building 38—48. Constantinople: Mango,
Developpement 51—62.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

STATE AND ARISTOCRATIC DISTRIBUTION

379

The fragmentation of power in the west, of course, created in the fifth
and sixth century a scattering of smaller political capitals within the terri-
tories of the former empire. Although we know very little about them
archaeologically, these towns, such as Toulouse for the fifth-century
Visigothic kingdom, Paris for the sixth-century Merovingians, and Toledo
and Pavia for the sixth- and seventh-century Visigoths and Lombards,
must have benefited from their new status. It is, however, notable that none
of these new capitals (except Ostrogothic Ravenna) has so far produced
the spectacular signs of wealth (imposing defensive walls, rulers’ palaces,
numbers of large churches, splendid aristocratic houses and secular mon-
uments) that are so obvious in the new imperial residences of the fourth-
and fifth-century empire (as at Milan, Trier, Ravenna, Thessalonica etc.).
Indeed, the only new capital to have been extensively excavated in recent
times, Carthage, seems to have declined in size, wealth and splendour
through the fifth century, despite becoming in this very period the centre
of a new Vandal kingdom which no longer needed to send the vast tax
revenue of Africa to Rome. Perhaps Carthage and the other new capitals
did gain from their new status, but only in relation to other, smaller centres;
and perhaps this gain does not show up readily in the archaeological and
monumental record because it was swallowed up in the massive overall
decline in urban prosperity which took place in the fifth- and sixth-century
west.

The areas that directly benefited from state spending in the Roman
world were always limited. LTnlike a modern state, which spends on a wide
range of salaries and capital projects (for health-care, transport, etc.) and
which often tries to share out the benefits of government money both geo-
graphically and socially, the late Roman state spent most of its wealth on
one sector alone: the army. And much the greater part of the army was
located in one — admittedly very large — region of the empire, the principal
frontier zone which stretched from Antioch in the south-east to the Rhine
mouths in the north-west. As we have seen in the case of land contiguous
with the military road through Asia Minor, other restricted areas within the
interior of the empire could also benefit from state spending; but, for the
most part, the provinces at peace simply paid up and got little in return,
except, of course, the all-important gift of peace.

Rates of taxation were high in the late Roman world. Land around
Ravenna in a.d. 5 5 5 paid more to the state in tax than it did to its landlords
in rent; and in the mid seventh century, the proportion paid to the state
from the Sicilian lands of the Ravennate church was only slightly less:
1 5 ,000 solidi in tax were sent annually to Constantinople, and 1 6,000 in rent
to the church treasury at Ravenna. It has, indeed, been argued that rates of
taxation in late antiquity may have been responsible for pushing some land
out of cultivation. The extensive archaeological evidence we have of an

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

380 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

expanding and prosperous rural population in certain regions (particularly
in the east) shows that this did not happen universally; but it is possible that
heavy taxation was a real problem in poorer parts of the emire . 58

Even if rates of taxation were perhaps not often so harsh as to ruin local
economies, the decline of tax, which seems to have happened in many
regions of the west during the fifth and sixth century, should have
benefited all those areas that had been net-contributors to the Roman
state’s finances, just as it damaged those areas that had been net-
beneficiaries . 59 However, strangely enough, in no case that I know of can
the ending of taxation in a particular region be linked to any evident rise in
that region’s prosperity. The establishment of a Vandal kingdom in Africa
in the early fifth century, for instance, must have meant that no taxes in gold
and kind now went overseas to Rome, to Ravenna and to the armies north
of the Alps, and that all the former tax revenue of the region was now being
consumed locally. Yet, despite some evidence that goods once sent to
Rome in tax were now sold elsewhere, the ‘Vandal boom’ that should have
followed is apparent neither in the well-dated excavations at Carthage nor
in the more impressionistic evidence from the interior . 60

Similarly, the slow decline of taxation in Gaul through the sixth and
seventh century is exceptionally well documented in Gregory of Tours’
Histories and in hagiographical material . 61 In this case, the beneficiaries
should have been the peasantry and the local towns, who previously had to
forward their taxes to the various Merovingian kings. But, again, there is no
trace in the evidence that towns like Tours and Poitiers boomed in the late
sixth and seventh century as a result of the exemptions they had obtained,
nor that this period was a golden age for the peasantry of Gaul. One sug-
gested answer to this problem is that the new wealth of the untaxed regions
was real, but is invisible to us, because it was consumed in ways that do not
show up archaeologically: by peasants eating better, and by aristocrats dis-
playing their wealth through perishable goods, such as clothing, and
through items, like jewellery, which have not survived because they were
later melted down . 62

As argued above in discussing prosperity, that peasant diet improved is
perfectly possible, though not at present demonstrable. However, I think it
is very unlikely that the sixth- and seventh-century aristocracy had more
perishable luxuries than their Roman predecessors, if only because we
know that the Roman aristocracy revelled in every available luxury item

58 Rates of taxation: Jones, LRE 819—21; Wickham (1984) 1 1— 12; Agnellus, Lib. Pont. Eccl Rav. cap.
hi (seventh-century Sicilian estates). Impact of taxation: Jones, LRE 819—23.

59 Durliat (1 990b) argues for continuing taxation and a continuing paid army in the early medieval
west; but see Wickham (1993) for what I believe to be a convincing demolition of this thesis.

60 Shift in direction of African exports: Reynolds (1995) 112—16; Fentress and Perkins (1988) 213.

61 Lot (1928); Goffart (1982). 62 Wickham (1988) no and 121— 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CAUSES OF ECONOMIC DECLINE: A CONSIDERATION 3 8 1

(silks, gold-embroidered robes, ivories, silverware, jewellery, wasteful and
exotic foods, the slaughter of imported wild animals, etc.). There were
important shifts in modes of aristocratic display during our period; for
instance, from the great silver dinner-services, so characteristic of late
antique Roman hoards, to the gold- and garnet-encrusted weaponry of the
highest-status Frankish graves. But I very much doubt that, within these
shifts in kind, there were absolute shifts in quantity, in favour of the
untaxed aristocrats of sixth- and seventh-century barbarian Europe.

The only solution I can think of to the very real problem of where the
tax wealth went, once it was no longer collected and forwarded to the army
and to the emperors, is to suggest that any obvious financial gains from the
ending of tax were swallowed up in a more general decline of the economy.
Perhaps there was more food per head, and perhaps people no longer had
to work so hard; but perhaps, also, there were no longer the economic
structures in place to convert surpluses of food into coins, into pots, into
mortared walls, etc.

There may, in fact, be circumstances in which tax demands (particularly
if in coin) can stimulate an economy rather than depress it: because they
encourage producers to specialize and sell in order to raise their tax-
money . 63 If demands for tax in coin can help awaken an economy, is it also
possible that the ending of such demands can help it settle down into self-
sufficient slumber? However, I would not like to argue very strongly in
favour of this idea, since any suggestion that taxing in coin is necessarily a
stimulant to economic growth is called into question by what happened at
the beginning of the fifth century. At this date, the whole empire, both
western and eastern, moved away from taxation in kind (favoured in the
fourth century) towards taxation in coin, but with curiously divergent
results. According to the model proposed above, the change should have
stimulated economic complexity and growth throughout the empire. This
did, indeed, occur in the eastern Mediterranean, at more or less the right
time. But in the west, this same period saw widespread and generalized eco-
nomic decline . 64 It may be that the model is not universally applicable, but
only works when underlying economic conditions are favourable, as they
were in the early-fifth-century east (but not in the west).

IX. CAUSES OF ECONOMIC DECLINE: A GENERAL
CONSIDERATION

We have already encountered some possible causes of economic decline
(heavy taxation, the ending of state spending, and the failure of some

63 A model proposed by Hopkins (1980a) for an earlier period of Roman history.

64 Wickham (1984) 10 n. 13. For the move to tax in coin: Jones, LRE 460.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

382 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

regions to compete commercially); in the next few pages we shall meet
some more. However, before we look further at individual causes, an
important general point needs to be made. A central and essential pre-
requisite for understanding the decline of the Roman economy is, I believe,
the acceptance that it was a closely interlocked structure in which com-
merce and regional specialization, as well as the redistributive power of the
state, all had an important part to play. If we see the Roman economy in
the way that, for instance, Finley did, as a series of essentially autonomous,
very local economies, then it is extremely hard to understand the broad
trends that seem to have swept through whole regions. But, if we accept
that regional and overseas contacts mattered, it is then much easier to see
how this complex network might slowly unravel. 65

For instance, if Italy was important to Africa as a market for some of its
oil and some of its pottery, then the impoverishment of Italy in the fifth
century, through the loss of the revenues of empire and through the
ravages of war (and perhaps also in part through its own failure to compete
successfully in the Mediterranean market), will have markedly reduced
demand for Africa’s produce. This reduction would adversely affect both
the direct producers of oil and African red-slip ware, and those Africans
whose wealth depended, within the regional and local economies, on sup-
plying these producers with African products, like grain, chickens, build-
ing-materials, etc.

This argument for interdependence does not necessarily require us to
see the economic fortunes of all parts of the Mediterranean, let alone all
parts of the empire, as tightly interlinked. As we have seen, the fifth century
is a period of growing prosperity in the east and of marked economic
decline in the west. Western proserity was clearly not an essential prerequi-
site for eastern growth. Rather, it looks as if one half of the Mediterranean
could exist in great and growing prosperity, largely independently of the
other. The Mediterranean in about a.d. 600 is indeed strikingly similar to
the pre-Roman world of around 300 b.c. — with a highly evolved and com-
mercial economy in the east that extended westwards into southern Italy,
Sicily and the Carthage region, and which coexisted with a much more
backwards north-west. The comparison even extends to the existence in
both periods of important gateway communities (like Marseilles) between
the two economic zones.

Though not quite on a Mediterranean-wide scale, multifarious but neces-
sarily fragile links between different peoples and different economies were
almost certainly very important in encouraging specialized production and
in sustaining the great achievements of the Roman world. As we have seen
earlier, there was no major technological, industrial or agricultural revolution

65 See p. 369 above, n. 38.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WAR, DISRUPTION AND ECONOMIC DECLINE 383

in the Roman period. Rather, the methods of production used were essen-
tially the same as those of the pre-Roman Iron Age and of the early Middle
Ages. The achievements of the Roman economy depended on developing
tiny surpluses and small-scale production into something much bigger,
through complex and efficient structures. But these structures were fragile,
and if they decayed or were disrupted, nothing of the impressive edifice was
left.

To understand the far-reaching effects of the disappearance of this
edifice, it also helps if we believe that the Roman economy had been able
to encourage specialization of production to the point where consumers
depended for very many of their goods on highly skilled and specialized
producers (who in turn depended for their livelihood on sales over a wide
area). Ironically, if (as in the modern world) economic complexity has
accustomed us to getting what we need by purchase from specialized pro-
ducers, when this supply is disrupted, we have no basic skills to fall back
on. This may explain why, say, in fifth-century Britain, a province which had
had highly specialized potting-industries in the third and fourth centuries
reverted to the use of pottery that is technologically far less sophisticated
than that produced by the regional industries of the Iron Age.

X. WAR, DISRUPTION AND ECONOMIC DECLINE

The period 400—650 is marked by the spread of war to almost all regions of
the empire, which had previously (with a rude interruption in the third
century) enjoyed peace for some four hundred years. The relationship
between the arrival of war and the decline of the economy clearly requires
detailed investigation.

Rather than conquest, it was probably war itself and the disruptions that
it caused which brought about change for the worse. As we have seen in
the cases of Vandal Africa and the Arab near east, the arrival of new
peoples (even very different new peoples) did not necessarily cause rapid
economic decline. This is, in fact, unsurprising, since, in all the cases we
know about, the incoming barbarians came to enjoy, not to destroy, the
benefits of Rome. In government and administration, they were certainly
able and happy to employ local ‘middlemen’ to operate those systems of
exploitation that they did not necessarily themselves immediately under-
stand. Though this is not so well documented, it is likely that they did the
same with the economy.

War and raiding, however, could certainly be very disruptive and damag-
ing to local production, to systems of distribution and to demand. The Life
of Saint Severinus provides detailed examples of such disruption from a fron-
tier province on the upper Danube in the dark days of the late fifth century.
At one moment the citizens of Batavis begged the saint to intercede with

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

384 13- SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

the king of the Rugi, who dominated the countryside around the town, to
persuade him to allow them to trade. The market they wished to set up was
probably to satisfy a purely local need: to exchange their own wares with
the foodstuffs produced in the surrounding countryside. On another occa-
sion, the saint intervened to fill a gap caused by the disruption of long-dis-
tance trade: he gave to the poor of Lauriacum a dole of oil, because
merchants were now bringing so little to the region . 66

In parts of the empire, the advent of war and the collapse or, at least,
decline of a sophisticated economy do seem to have coincided quite
closely. This is the case in fifth-century Britain, in late-sixth-century Greece
and in seventh-century Asia Minor. It is, admittedly, possible that the coin-
cidence of date between documented warfare and archaeologicallv-attested
disruption was not always, in reality, quite as close as it now seems. In
periods when datable archaeological materials (such as coins and fine table-
wares) were disappearing or becoming very scarce, archaeological pro-
cesses, which in fact took decades to occur, may all seem to have happened
at one single moment (when the last datable object was deposited).
However, there is no doubt that war and economic decline came at roughly
the same time in all these three areas. And, conversely, it is equally striking
that the period of the east’s most evident economic prosperity (the fifth
and early sixth century) is one of exceptional peace for the region (with the
important exception of the Balkans).

In other parts of the empire, however, war and peace were probably
more contributory than principal factors in their changing economic for-
tunes. For instance, in Italy and Africa there was no lack of trouble (from
Visigoths, Vandals, Berbers, Ostrogoths, Byzantines, Franks and
Lombards — to name only the principal protagonists); and there is sufficient
documentary evidence to prove that warfare and raiding did harm the
economy. There were also protracted periods of peace (for example, in
Italy, forty years under the Ostrogoths). However, the underlying pattern
in both Africa and Italy is more of slow and steady decline (in Italy prob-
ably starting well before the main period of invasion) than of marked
downward and upward steps coinciding closely with known periods of
insecurity and of peace. This is a pattern best explained in terms of longer-
term changes . 67

It is, indeed, worth wondering, even in the case of those regions whose
economies do seem to have been knocked out by war, why they did not sub-
sequently recover. Both in late antiquity and in other periods of history,
other economies appear to have been more resilient. Greece, for example,

66 Vita S. Severini ed. R. Noll (Berlin 1963), caps. 22 and 28 (English trans. L. Bieler, 79 and 83).

67 Within the basic pattern of a downhill slope, there may also be some steps down (possibly attrib-
utable to known periods of insecurity, such as the Gothic and Lombard wars in Italy). At present the
available data are insufficiently detailed to reveal them unambiguously.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WAR, DISRUPTION AND ECONOMIC DECLINE 385

was badly hit by violent destruction during the troubles of the third
century, and yet in the fourth and fifth century the evidence from both
town and countryside suggests a period of unprecedented prosperity.
Europe in the ninth and early tenth century was devastated by Vikings,
Hungarians and Saracens: trading-towns were deliberately targeted and
destroyed, booty and tribute were extorted, and slaves were seized. Yet
there is no sign that in the long term the underlying growth of the
European economy was disrupted; indeed, the Vikings and Saracens were
quite rapidly absorbed into a growing international network of exchange
and commerce.

War and the disruption it brings will perhaps explain the precise moment
of decline, but it is likely that underlying causes will also be at work if the
decline persists. If not, why did western economic history in the fifth and
sixth century not follow the pattern of the ninth and tenth centuries, espe-
cially given the remarkable cultural assimilation of the barbarians? And
why did Asia Minor in the seventh century not follow the example of
fourth-century Greece?

If we look again at the evidence of Noricum, we can note, as well as dis-
ruption, the resilience of the traders of Batavis, who were ready to set up
their stalls once more, and the surprising fact that some oil was reaching
the upper Danube despite the appalling conditions. Why, when Lauriacum
and Batavis finally fell and perhaps found slightly improved political and
military conditions, did not these economic links continue and perhaps
grow? Probably because other factors were also at work and, in particular,
because neighbouring regions which once might have helped in the regen-
eration of a devastated province were also going through hard times. We
learn, for instance — once again from the Life of Severinus — that during the
fifth century all pay from Italy stopped reaching the troops in Noricum: this
was the end of Roman financial involvement in Noricum and the end of
the redistributive power of the state, spreading the gold of interior regions
into the frontier zone . 68 A more secure and prosperous Italy might have
helped pull Noricum back into economic complexity and prosperity.

It may be wrong to view the relationship between military failure and
economic decline as a simple, one-way process. The ‘barbarians’, both the
Germans in the fifth- and sixth-century west and the Arabs in the seventh-
century east, were unpaid part-time fighters, whereas the Roman army was
made up of professionals, and so depended for its strength on taxed wealth
and (ultimately) a healthy economy. Was the fall of the west in the fifth
century a consequence (as well as a cause) of economic decline? Can
Justinian’s reconquest of the west in the first half of the sixth century be
understood in part as the eastern Mediterranean flexing its new economic,

68 1 Vita S. Severini ed. R. Noll (Berlin 1963), cap. 20 (English trans. L. Bieler, 78).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

386 13 - SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

and hence also military, muscle? And did subsequent economic decline in
the east help cause the military problems of later-sixth- and seventh-
century Byzantium? It is important to bear these possibilities in mind and
to continue to investigate them — even if, at present, the data (particularly
relating to the western and later eastern military collapses) tend to be too
hazy to provide any firm answers. For instance, it is not yet clear whether
we can confidently identify widespread economic decline in the western
provinces (which included a seemingly very rich Africa) before the great bar-
barian incursions of 406.

XI. CLIMATE, THE ENVIRONMENT AND THE ECONOMY

As well as warfare, climatic change or environmental change is sometimes
blamed for the decline of the Roman economy. Climatic change at this date
was an ‘act of God’, unaffected by man, while environmental change could
be caused either by changes in the weather or by the human impact on the
landscape. 69

Strangely enough, despite its importance in present-day environmental
debate, climatic change is not currently much favoured as an overall reason
for Roman economic decline. 70 It would, indeed, be very difficult to find a
change of climate that could explain the extraordinary and localized
fluctuations of wealth visible between the fourth and the seventh century.
What change in climate could have benefited Ireland, Armenia and the near
east in the sixth and early seventh century, while at the same time devastat-
ing Britain, Italy and Asia Minor?

Even looking at highly marginal areas, which must be the first to be
affected by any change in climate, changes in human activity, rather than
broad changes in the weather, often provide more plausible reasons for
fluctuations in settlement and wealth. The dry semi-desert of the Negev
was, as we have seen, densely settled and prosperous in the fifth and sixth
century, which might be explained in terms of a period of exceptional rain-
fall. However, in this same period, the closely comparable wadis of
Tripolitania (in modern Libya), which were prosperous and densely settled
at an earlier date (the later first and second centuries a.d.), seem to have
been largely abandoned. Since the Libyan pre-desert and the Negev must
share roughly the same climate, and since they were certainly exploited in
very similar ways, their very different histories strongly suggest that it was
human opportunity and human pressure that most influenced these two
marginal regions, rather than some external change in the weather. 71

69 For a useful brief discussion of the issues raised in this section, with further references: Greene
(1986) 81—6.

70 The issue is, however, debated in relation to specific regions: see e.g. Rubin (1989) for the Negev.

71 For Libya: Mattingly (1995) 144-5 3-

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CLIMATE, THE ENVIRONMENT AND THE ECONOMY 387

Environmental change is more current amongst the explanations
recently proffered for the decline of the Roman economy, and for under-
standable reasons . 72 It is quite clear that, during the Roman period, farming
was everywhere intense, and that in all regions it was extended into margi-
nal areas that were previously uncultivated. In the process, a great deal of
clearance must have taken place. Did this perhaps cause erosion and soil-
loss in the higher lands, and the consequent dumping in the valley bottoms
of enormous quantities of potentially damaging alluvium? Indeed, does
the over-intense exploitation of the land explain the remarkable
fluctuations in regional prosperity which I have outlined above, so that a
new region took over the mantle of intense agricultural exploitation until
it, in its turn, was ruined by the very process of wealth-creation? 7j

This picture is certainly not just a figment of the ecologically conscious
imagination, since geomorphologists, studying the sequence of river sedi-
ments, have found widespread evidence of a post-Roman phase of alluvi-
ation, which dumped immense quantities of soil in the valley bottoms and
left a number of formerly coastal cities, like Ephesus, landlocked (as they
are today). However, it may be a mistake to see this evidence as conclusive
proof of a late Roman and post-Roman environmental disaster that can be
widely used to explain the period’s economic problems. Firstly, it is nor-
mally impossible to establish, on the basis of the information currently
available, exactly when and over how long a period, within the very wide
‘late Roman and post-Roman’ periods, such alluviation took place — or even
whether the process had not begun earlier: Strabo, for instance, in the time
of Augustus, already gives a detailed account of the problems of siltation
in the harbour of Ephesus . 74 Sequences of alluvium are difficult to date,
and many more closely-dated cases are needed before we can satisfactorily
relate alluviation to economic decline.

Secondly, and more seriously, as with population decline, which we shall
investigate next, on closer investigation the links between human activity,
environmental decay and economic decline become complicated. Erosion
(and consequent alluviation) may, for instance, have been caused less by the
clearance of woodland cover to create fields and terraces than by the later
abandonment of these terraces and field systems. If so, erosion and alluvia-
tion become as much a consequence as a cause of economic decay. Equally,
even if alluviation did cause very real problems for settlements like Ostia and
Ephesus, we need to question why, in late and post-Roman times, the inhab-
itants did not respond to the challenge more successfully. If the human
resources of these settlements had been stronger, Ostia and Ephesus would
surely have coped with environmental change (just as successful cities survive

72 Greene (1986) 85—6. The pioneering Mediterranean-wide work was Vita-Finzi (1969).

73 As argued by Randsborg (1992) 13—14. 74 Strab. xiv.1.24.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

388 13. SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

earthquakes or great fires), and would perhaps even have improved their
circumstances by draining the new alluvial plains for agriculture.

Attractive though it is at first sight, environmental disaster is also implau-
sible as an explanation for the shifting prosperity, from region to region, of
Roman agriculture. It is hard to envisage, in a period before mechanization,
environmental devastation on a scale sufficient to destroy a province’s
entire agricultural prosperity — and certainly difficult to see how it could
have extended into areas of activity (such as potting and marble-quarrying)
which are only indirectly linked to agriculture, but which seem to have
shared the same patterns of prosperity and decline as the countryside.

To argue against environmental decay as a simple and global explanation
for late Roman economic decline is not to deny it any importance in the
transformation of the economy in the fourth to the seventh century. The
Romans made a dramatic impact on the landscape, and it is therefore likely
that environmental changes ensued. When human resources were weak-
ened for other reasons, many of these changes may well have had a marked
negative effect. 75

XII. POPULATION CHANGE AND ECONOMIC CHANGE

A major fall in population is often considered an important cause of eco-
nomic decline in the late Roman and post-Roman worlds. Since rises and
falls in population have an obvious effect on the availability of labour and
on the size of overall demand, there is indeed little doubt that the number
of people living within the empire would affect the economy. However, the
relationship between population growth and economic growth, on the one
hand, and population decline and economic decline, on the other, is not in
fact as straightforward as is often suggested. 76

Firstly, in certain circumstances, a fall in population, far from being a dis-
aster, can even be an economic boon. In later medieval England the pop-
ulation may have been reduced by as much as a half between the outbreak
of the Black Death in 1348 and the end of the century. But this does not
seem to have brought about economic regression. Before 1348, high overall
demand may have been diverted into producing miserable quantities of the
most basic foodstuffs in order to feed a large population, and much of the
labour force may have been tied down to extracting appalling returns from
unsuitable land. After the period of mortality, the surviving peasants were
almost certainly individually better off than before, since they were now
able to abandon the cultivation of less productive land. In these circum-
stances, the overall scale of the economy shrank, since there were fewer

75 See Hendy, Studies 5 8—68. 76 For example, in Hodges and Whitehouse (19 83) 20—5 3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

POPULATION CHANGE AND ECONOMIC CHANGE 389

producers and fewer consumers around. But qualitatively the economy may
even have improved, since individual peasants were able to produce greater
surpluses and to convert them into more coins and into more specialized
products. 77

Precise circumstances in late antiquity were certainly different to those
current in fourteenth-century England: for instance, the densely-settled
marginal lands of the fifth- and sixth-century near east appear, at least from
the archaeological record, to be characterized by prosperity rather than by
the misery documented on marginal land in pre-plague England. However,
if there was a marked fall in population in the sixth century (as there may
have been in the plague of 541—3), whatever the detailed local circum-
stances, it should have been a relief to abandon some of the harsher lands
(like the wadis of the Negev) and to concentrate on more productive and
less difficult cultivation elsewhere. A substantial fall in population would
certainly have led to a shrinkage of the total scale of the economy, and
hence, for instance, to a fall in the profits of both the state and of land-
lords; but it should not have affected the base of the economy, except
perhaps positively.

Another major problem in assuming that population growth caused eco-
nomic growth (and, similarly, that population decline caused economic
decline) is the probability that the causal relationship was often the other
way round. Some population changes — in particular, the universal plague
of 541—3 — cannot readily be related to specific economic circumstances,
and were perhaps truly random acts of God. However, what seems to have
been a much more gradual decline in the population of the west and north
through the centuries of late antiquity is most simply explained as a conse-
quence of the economic decline of these areas, just as the apparent rise in
rural settlement and population through the fourth and fifth century in the
east was perhaps the result of economic prosperity.

As argued earlier, some areas of the ancient world seem, in particular
centuries, to have been much more prosperous and more commercialized
than other areas. These same areas also produce evidence of both inten-
sive and extensive settlement in the countryside. Conversely, periods of
economic simplification correspond to periods of declining evidence of
rural settlement. Prosperity and a rising population (and poverty and a
falling population) do seem to have been related in our period; but it also
seems likely that it was fluctuations in prosperity that were the prime
movers in the relationship. 78

77 Hatcher (1977).

78 Since, as I argued in ch. 1 2 (pp. 324—7 above), it is at present almost impossible to disentangle evi-
dence for rural population numbers from evidence for changing rural prosperity, the apparently tight
connection between the two may, however, be deceptive.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

13 . SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION AND EXCHANGE

39 °

XIII. ECONOMIC decline: some conclusions

I hope I have shown that ‘the decline of the Roman economy’ was a very
long process that took place with marked differences of effect and chronol-
ogy between regions, and was, in fact, never ‘completed’. Even during the
post-Roman period of decline in the northern provinces, there are signs of
growth just beyond the old frontiers; and long before the ‘ancient
economy’ of the near east disappeared in the eighth century (if it did, since
even this is controversial), there are clear signs of economic growth in the
northern world and in the western Mediterranean.

But I hope I have also shown that economic decline, when it happened,
was dramatic, leading to a drastic simplification in production and
exchange, and to a remarkable regression in material culture. The large
Roman middle and lower market for high-quality basic goods was substan-
tially destroyed, and with it went most commercial activity and specializa-
tion.

No process so remarkable and so variegated can possibly be fully
explained, let alone on the basis of the scanty evidence available to us. And
certainly no simple monocausal explanations will ever do. Such explana-
tions are intrinsically implausible, and, as I hope I have shown, they cannot
be made to fit the varied and different histories of every region.

For myself, in order to begin to understand its decline, I find it necessary
to believe, first, that the Roman economy (through both commerce and the
state) linked local, regional and overseas networks of specialization and dis-
tribution into impressive but fragile overall structures. It is then possible to
investigate a number of different factors that may have weakened these
structures.

Individual ‘causes’ of economic decline were, probably, themselves
closely interlinked. For example, the decline of state spending in Noricum
was caused in the end by failure in war; but this military failure was itself
perhaps caused in part by economic decline in the west (which made the
taxation needed to support the soldiery more difficult to raise). The aban-
donment of state spending in Noricum then went on to cause further
problems along the line, both in Noricum itself (which was devastated) and
in other regions (because Noricum was no longer an attractive market for
their goods). If we see both regions of the empire and causes of decline as
closely interlinked, it becomes much easier to see how the Roman economy
could have become caught in a general spiral of decay.

There are good reasons to continue to investigate the ‘decline of the
Roman economy’. It is a fascinating intellectual process, because we are
much more used to looking at economic development and at the ways that
different strands feed into growth than we are to investigating the progres-
sive unravelling of such systems. It was also a dramatic change that had a

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

economic decline: some conclusions 391

marked effect on the material conditions of peasants and kings alike, and
whose influence reached beyond the purely ‘material’ into all areas of life
that are affected by levels of prosperity (as diverse as the size of the state
or the scale of artistic production ). 79 Furthermore, the unravelling of the
centuries-old Roman (indeed, often pre-Roman) system raises the funda-
mental question of whether the complex material and economic world
which we take for granted today could, in the right circumstances, also
come unstuck . 80

79 For this reason I often find myself out of sympathy with modern historiography, which is fasci-
nated by ideological and intellectual change, and often treats these as though they took place in an eco-
nomic vacuum.

80 Very many people have helped me with ideas, criticisms, comments and references, for both ch.
12 and ch. 13 ; but I must thank, for their particularly generous help, Jairus Banaji, Sam Barnish, Gian
Pietro Brogiolo, Thomas Charles-Edwards, Ros Faith, Sauro Gelichi, Peter Heather, Simon Loseby,
Peter Sarris, Michael Whitby, Chris Wickham and Greg Woolf.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 14

THE FAMILY IN THE LATE ROMAN WORLD*

ANDREA GIARDINA

I. CHRISTIANITY AND LAWS ON THE FAMILY

Before Constantine, no Roman emperor, not even Augustus, had displayed
such a strong ambition to reshape family legislation and initiate thereby an
extensive project of moral reconstruction: pudor tutus, munita coniugia was
how a panegyrist pithily expressed it as early as 321. 1 In some respects,
Constantinian legislation merely brought to completion tendencies that
had been operative for some time; in others, it was more innovative. On the
whole, it aimed at asserting principles of rigour, order and temperance in
family relationships. Often it revealed a somewhat darker side, betraying
both acute perception and ill-concealed pessimism, and alongside the
wishful imperatives we also find realistic laws concerning concrete situa-
tions. The frequency and variety of these measures testify to the impor-
tance of political policy on these issues.

Constantine’s laws had three principal aims, all closely interlinked: to
safeguard celibacy, to encourage the matrimonium iustum and to protect
infants and minors. The first was accomplished by repealing the Augustan
marriage laws, which had penalized celibates and childless couples (by
restricting their ability to receive inheritances and legacies) and provided
incentives to matrimony and procreation. A variety of measures contrib-
uted towards achieving the second aim: socially mixed unions and concu-
binage were repressed; greater significance was attributed to the promise
of marriage; abduction was severely punished; accusations of adultery
could no longer be made by outsiders, but only by the husband or by the
wife’s close male relatives; adultery was punished by death. The third aim
was the object of measures concerning the patria potesta, tutores and curatores,
donations and inheritance, infant exposure and the cession of minors.
Implementation of these policies reached its peak in the year 331, when the

* Editors’ note: this chapter spans a wider period than that covered by the rest of the volume, in
order to provide a broad thematic coverage of an important subject which is best treated on a wider
chronological scale, and which was not specifically covered in Cambridge Ancient History volume xiii.

1 Pan. Cat. 10 . 38 .

39 2

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHRISTIANITY AND LAWS ON THE FAMILY

393

most sensational measure was passed: the abrogation of the ancient law
whereby a marriage ceased with the withdrawal of consent of just one of
the spouses. Repudium'wzs thus authorized only in cases of extreme gravity.
Admittedly, there were other situations in which the bond could be dis-
solved, but the responsible party incurred heavy sanctions: the wife lost her
dowry, relinquished all claim to her possessions in the marital house and
suffered deportation; the husband, on the other hand, had to return the
dowry and, if he remarried, his former wife could take possession of his
second wife’s dowry. Wives, moreover, were explicitly denied the right to
repudiate their husbands on general grounds of immorality . 2

In so far as the moral code of a minority group can be expected to
influence the laws and ancient traditions of a large empire in a short space
of time, this set of measures unequivocally shows the mark of
Christianity . 3 Nevertheless, certain historians, even in recent times, have
tended to deny that Christian morality had any influence on Constantine’s
family legislation, or at least to minimize its influence considerably; some
have even extended their scepticism to cover much of late antique legis-
lation. In so doing, however, they would appear to be conditioned not
only by an abstract concept of ‘Christian legislation’ (i.e. one more or less
consciously based on the twelfth- and thirteenth-century collections of
canon law) but also by the relations between the papacy and the European
states in the Middle Ages. In their search for symmetries, they claim that
Christian influence is attested only where there is a ‘perfect identity’
between Christian doctrine and Roman law; they emphasize the
deficiencies and excesses of imperial law; they suggest that a decisive con-
tribution was made by pagan philosophical doctrine and that the imposi-
tion of a stricter morality reflected a revival of traditional Roman values;
finally, they appeal to the independent evolution of the law . 4 None of
these arguments are new, for, broadly speaking, the same ground was
covered almost a century and half ago by the debate on Troplong’s work . 5
And there are, in fact, two good reasons why the two conflicting opinions
have been periodically confronting one another ever since then. The first,
which in itself carries no negative implications, is that the subject itself
inevitably leaves a wide margin for interpretation. The second, which is
undeniably detrimental, is that the general terms of the problem are inad-
equately defined.

2 C.Th. hi. 1 6. i.

3 For a balanced account of the effects of Constantine’s conversion on his legislation, see
Liebeschuetz (1979) 277 (on the family, in particular p. 295).

4 Among the more recent works, see, for example, with varying degrees of emphasis, Gaudemet

(1978a); Castello (1983); Sargenti (1986); Bagnall (1987); Evans Grubbs (1995); for the position of
women, see in particular Arjava (1996). 5 Troplong (1843).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

394 J 4- the family in the late roman world

Though useful in counterbalancing the exaggerated claim that Christianity
systematically uprooted wide sectors of Roman law by virtue of its sheer
independent strength, 6 the interpretations that deny, or significandy mini-
mize, Christian influence on secular law have a common failing: that of
excessive fragmentation. We observe this in two ways: firstly, the different
issues on which the various emperors acted are analysed separately; secondly,
the family laws are considered in isolation from the whole legislation in
favour of the Christian religion. Such a splintered approach inevitably dimin-
ishes the validity of the overall evidence.

In order to play down the influence of Christianity on imperial legisla-
tion, historians sometimes resort to the argument of coincidence. In other
words, the measures originated from specific needs that had nothing to do
with, and just happened to be compatible with, Christian morals. For
example, it is plausibly argued that the above-mentioned Constantinian
measure abolishing the Augustan penalties on celibacy intended (in perfect
agreement with Christian morality) to rehabilitate the condition of celi-
bates, widows and divorcees who had not remarried; and also, perhaps, to
encourage bequests in favour of clerics. 7 On the other hand, it is pointed
out that the Augustan legislation had never been popular and had failed to
achieve the intended results; quite the reverse, it had spread the phenome-
non of informers, a problem considered as intolerable above all by the
property-owning classes. According to this argument, therefore,
Constantine was merely taking stock of a de facto situation and his law was
principally aimed at restoring full rights of ownership and putting an end
to the scourge of delation. Eusebius, Constantine’s biographer, friend and
adviser, held a very different opinion. He (as others after him) viewed this
provision as proof of the emperor’s Christian devotion. 8 But Eusebius, it
is objected, at the time of writing the Vita Constantini, would have known
nothing of Constantine’s real intentions in the year 320 and simply gave,
like many modern historians, a religious interpretation to a law that in fact
had quite different motivations. 9 This reading, however, does not account
for the likelihood that Eusebius’ opinion dated to the time of Nicaea,
when, both in the official assemblies and at the various meetings on the
fringe of the council, Constantine had ample opportunity not only to tell
the bishops about his Christian feelings but also to inform them of how
such feelings had been officially and formally implemented. Even if (for
the sake of argument) at the moment of repealing the Augustan laws, by a
strange form of dissociation, the emperor had managed not to feel the

6 As is well known, the key historical work representing this position is Biondi (1952—4).

7 See in particular Humbert (1972) 360—73 and bibliography.

8 Eus. Vita Constantini iv.26.2— 4; see also S02. HE 1.9.3— 4; Cass. Hist. Tr. 1.9.

9 Recently, Evans Grubbs (1995) 123!?. Spagnuolo Vigorita (19 84) does not deny Christian influence
but attributes more importance to the aspects of tax policy.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHRISTIANITY AND LAWS ON THE FAMILY

395

slightest concern for Christian values, we cannot escape the fact that the
very same measures were susceptible to Christian interpretation only a very
few years later. Thus, while we may deny Constantinian legislation the
status of ‘subjective’ Christianity, we must at least grant it that of ‘objec-
tive’ Christianity. And, above all, we cannot forget that the morality of a
man awaiting ‘divine judgement’ was something irremediably new, no
matter how pervaded by traditional elements it may have been.

The affinity between certain traditional values and the inspiration of
many late antique constitutions is, in fact, an argument often used to
negate the influence of Christian ethics on secular law. This, however,
does not place the phenomenon of historical continuity in its true
context. In nearly every manifestation of late antique society, living sur-
vivals from the past are readily detected, and even its dead fossils. They
appear in institutions, social relations, general behaviour, material culture,
art and thought. And yet late antiquity was clearly a new age. Continuity
may be displayed by individual details, but it is the discontinuity that
shows up when we observe the system as a whole.

Another frequent means of negating the Christian influence on certain
family laws is to accentuate the concrete, and not the spiritual, objectives
of the legislators. We have already seen this in the case of the Augustan leg-
islation on marriage. In the case of the Constantinian law punishing the
unmotivated breach of betrothal, its Christian inspiration has been mini-
mized by stressing the difference between the secular punishment and the
religious sanction. Fines, it is claimed, were foreign to Christian prescrip-
tions 10 — an argument that verges on the absurd, for it implies that in
Constantine’s day a secular power could impose religious sanctions and that
a religious power could inflict material punishment.

A similar interpretation has even been advanced to explain the laws lim-
iting unilateral repudiation and penalizing second marriages, laws that most
people would quite rightly see as Christian-inspired. But since the emper-
ors sometimes explicitly invoked the favor liberorum and not the respect of
morals and religion, it has been inferred that the principal, if not sole, aim
of such laws was to protect children from the property point of view . 1 1 But
surely it is not at all surprising that a legislator should stress the aspects that
bore upon Realien, or that he should highlight the argument to which most
citizens could relate, regardless of their faith and the depth of their relig-
ious convictions. Indeed, such an approach was all the more necessary in
matters like divorce and second marriage, for these were issues on which
the imperial citizens were more traditionalist (as we shall see below).
Besides, in the history of the family, questions of morality and property are

10 Gaudemet (1978a) 196.

11 Gaudemet (1950) 186; Bagnall (1987) 51ft.; Arjava (1988); Brown (1988) 430.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

396 14 - the family in the late roman world

bound to overlap and influence one another so closely that separate treat-
ment is often not so much arbitrary as impossible.

Laws are like signifiers with numerous signiiieds; in other words, the
same law may respond to various needs, both moral and material. Naturally
there can also be laws motivated by purely ethical needs. This, at least,
seems to have been the case with Constantius II’s measures confirming the
ban on marriage between uncle and filia fratris sororisve (making it punish-
able by death) or Theodosius I’s law prohibiting marriage between cousins-
german. 12

The relationship between Christian ethics and the laws restricting
divorce must in any case have been very clear to the pagan Julian when he
re-established the former conditions. 13 And if, as some believe, the docu-
ment attesting Julian’s nostalgic measures should prove unreliable, para-
doxically this would actually enhance the value of the evidence, for it would
suggest that the pagan Julian was widely expected to repeal the divorce law
of the Christian Constantine. And it is surely no coincidence that Julian
should fully revive the Claudian senatus consultum , which Constantine had
modified in one important aspect. 14

The crucial issue in the debate on Christian influence is the divorce leg-
islation. According to one argument, the remoteness of divorce laws from
the evangelical principle of indissolubility is proof that the secular legisla-
tors were deaf to the appeals of the church. Yet if Constantine’s restric-
tions on divorce were distant from evangelical principle, they were even
further removed from the sensibilities of the vast majority of his subjects.
After all, he was the first to legislate against a practice that was taken for
granted not only by the whole of contemporary society but also in all the
societies of preceding ages. As in many other areas of his political activity
— and as often happens in ‘revolutionary’ situations — he intervened too vig-
orously and too dramatically. And by doing so, he heavily conditioned the
future. For a long time to come, divorce was the most important and trou-
bled issue in the dialogue between human law and the evangelical message.
Among the many problems tackled in the late antique imperial constitu-
tions, perhaps none was the subject of so much rethinking, particularly in
such fundamental aspects as the identification of sufficient motives for uni-
lateral repudiation and the penalties for those who break the matrimonial
bond without just cause.

Though unmotivated repudiation was punished by imperial legislation,
this did not mean that a marriage broken without just cause remained valid
before the law. Continuity was also preserved by admitting consensual
divorce. For though the Council of Carthage of 407 had expressed the hope

12 C.Th. hi. 12. 1 (341); Epit. 48.10; Ambr. Ep. 60.8; see Shaw and Sailer (1984) 440.

13 Mention of Julian promulgating such a law is given in the so-called Ambrosiaster: CSEL L.322.

14 C.Th. iv.12.5 (362).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHRISTIANITY AND LAWS ON THE FAMILY 397

that a lex imperialis would be promulgated against second marriages , 15 con-
sensual divorce was a custom evidently taken for granted by a very high
number of citizens (by pagans and Christians alike, including that broad
frontier region linking and separating the two religions). It was Justinian who
first declared the illegality of consensual divorce, except where chastity vows
were involved. He also established the few causes justifying repudiation. The
husband could divorce if his wife failed to inform him of a conspiracy
against the emperor; if she made an attempt against her husband’s life or
failed to disclose plots schemed by others against him; if she committed
adultery or behaved indecently in public. The wife could divorce if her
husband conspired against the emperor or failed to disclose to her the plots
of others; if he made an attempt against his wife’s life or failed to disclose
plots by others against her; if he falsely accused her of adultery; if he
attempted to induce her to prostitution; if he brought another woman to live
in the marital house or if he repeatedly frequented the house of another
woman . 16 Once again, therefore, the law was aiming to constrain social
habits, thereby creating a wide margin for disobedience. The inevitable result
was that Justinian’s immediate successor, Justin II, was obliged to resurrect
the principle according to which the foundation of marriage was mutual
affection and to re-establish legitimacy of consensual divorce . 17

The uneven, syncopated development of the divorce legislation from
the fourth to the sixth century perfectly expresses that tangle of concor-
dances and discordances involving Christian doctrine, the conciliar canons,
papal decretals, imperial legislation and social behaviour at large. The late
antique emperors had no handy corpus of canon law to serve as a basis for
reference. Though some of the local councils, notably that of Elvira, did
emanate norms on sexuality, marriage and the family, and did establish
appropriate religious sanctions for transgressors, their resolutions on
specific points were often different, in spite of basic agreement on general
orientation . 18 And as for the opinions of the church Fathers, again there
were significant differences even on key issues, such as the consequences
of the wife’s adultery on the permanence of the bond . 19 Finally, since
church legislation inflicted penalties on priests who blessed unlawful mar-
riages, we deduce that such unions were not uncommon.

And when it came to actually imposing religious sanctions on the faith-
ful, the bishops often availed themselves of their considerable discretion-
ary powers, departing from the strict letter of the law to meet the needs of
individuals. In celebrating the figure of Fabiola, a Roman noblewoman
who had died in an aura of sanctity, Jerome could not help recollecting a
youthful sin: she had left her first husband, whose dissolute life disgusted

15 CQZ.ciL.21 8. 16 Just. Nov. 1 17.8-10 (542). 17 Justin, Nov. 140 (566). 18 Bagnall (1987) ;o.

19 In general, Crouzel (1971); for the long duration of the doctrinal uncertainties on the nature of
the marriage bond, Gaudemet (1970) and (1978b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

398 14 - the family in the late roman world

her, and had remarried. This was a grave sin, Jerome admits, and rightly
merited harsh expiation. But she had been forced into such action by neces-
sity and had not been wrong in preferring a second marriage to a life of sol-
itude full of uncertainties (echoing Paul’s admonition ‘it is better to marry
than to burn’). 2 " The ladies of high society may well have enjoyed extenu-
ating circumstances, but it would be a mistake to explain such leniency
solely as a class issue. Rather it should be viewed in terms of the tormented
relations between evangelical principle and the human factor: a real soci-
ological constant not only in late antique society but also much later. And
so, while Jerome himself contended that in Christian marriage ‘certain are
the laws of Caesar, others those of Christ’ and that Christians were
expected to obey the latter , 21 the vast majority of the faithful must have felt
that there was no need to have harsher restrictions than those established
by the moral code of their own class and by imperial legislation. The ten-
sions between ‘pastoral humanity’, on the one hand, and decisions of ‘an
abstract, almost mathematical character’, on the other, were destined to be
an enduring trait even of Byzantine and medieval family history . 22

The clarity of the religious prescriptions was also clouded by the exis-
tence of mixed marriages between pagans and Christians. Since such
unions, which were still very common in Augustine’s day, constituted an
important vehicle for religious conversion, the church’s attitude was stricter
in theory than in actual practice. And inevitably, the presence of religious
differences between married couples will have made it plain that absolute
rigour in matrimonial affairs was beyond the reach of most Christians.

Finally, brief mention should be made of the episcopalis audientia, for his-
torians have hitherto ignored this institution’s role in the arduous process
of adapting social behaviour to the prescriptions of Christian morality (as
expressed in the writings of the Fathers, the sermons of preachers or die
conciliar canons). In his capacity as index, the bishop was expected to
ensure compliance with the terrena iura, the rules established by imperial
legislation. Again, this was a field in which the Christian emperors of late
antiquity had to temper the excesses of Constantine’s enthusiasm, this
time by reducing the scope of the bishops’ jurisdiction. Nevertheless, the
episcopalis audientia still commanded considerable authority on civil matters
at the beginning of the fifth century. 2 ’ To the majority of the faithful, the
idea of a bishop judging cases involving family relationships in accor-
dance with human (and not divine) laws must have seemed a legitimate

20 Hier.£/>. 77.3. 21 Ibid.

22 For Byzantium, Karlin-Hayter (1992) 134; see also Vogel (1982). For the west, see for example
Bishop (1985).

23 As is shown in Augustine’s new Ep. 24* ( CSEL lxxxviii.i 26£): Lepelley (1983). On the relation-
ship between marriage legislation and the episcopalis audientia , see for example CJ 1.4.16 (472) and 28
(5 3°)-

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW AND SOCIETY

399

and feasible compromise between evangelical perfection and the hard
realities of life.

It is incidentally worth noting that the difference between the religious
and legal sanctions was not always a matter of the former being stricter
than the latter. The formula certainly holds true for divorce, an area in
which the secular legislators long evaded the aspirations of the church. On
other issues, however, it was the imperial laws that applied unduly severe
criteria, which the church preferred to avoid. For the crime of abduction,
for example, an imperial law specified the death penalty , 24 while two
Basilian ‘canons’ merely inflicted penances of a few years, not to mention
the additional possibility of contracting a lawful marriage . 25 Such severity
in the secular legislation must also have contributed (in the form of addi-
tional psychological pressure, if nothing else) to strengthening the bishop’s
role as a mediator, as a man who healed family conflicts and did his best to
avoid the extreme consequences that would ensue if the interested parties
became involved in the sphere of criminal law.

From today’s perspective, centred as it is on our view of the modern
state, the relationship between Christianity and the law is invested with an
importance that the late antique church authorities would hardly have
shared. To them, Christianization could take many forms, and there was
nothing that made the collaboration of the secular legislator the most
effective instrument or even, for that matter, an essential requisite.

It is unrealistic, therefore, to measure the Christianization of family legis-
lation against the rigid criteria of doctrine. What the term ‘Christianization’
can — indeed, must — suggest is an extremely slow process accompanied by
deviations, corrections, accelerations, delays and short-lived measures: in
other words, all the elements we generally associate with the major phenom-
ena of acculturation. It was not an already formed system that inexorably
pervaded the whole of society, but a formative process. And to pose the
problem of the coherent Christianization of family law in the fourth, fifth
and sixth century is simply anachronistic. Even a half-millennium later, in
both east and west, the process was anything but complete.

II. LAW AND SOCIETY

Dialogue between the two powers, the religious and the secular, was difficult,
but was aided by the fact that both shared the same culture of control, one
that extended from public life to the intimacy of the couple.

24 C.Th. ix.4.1 (326); in C.Th. ix.4.22 (349) the summum supplicium inflicted by Constantine was
replaced by the capitalis poena. The severity of the punishment has been used to deny the influence of
Christian morality on these laws: Castello (1988); Evans Grubbs (1995) 191. The combination of repres-
sive and protective aspects in Constantine’s law has been rightly emphasized by Beaucamp (1990) 1 13.

25 Bas. Ep. 199, can. 22 and 30; Karlin-Hayter (1992) 138; Laiou (1993) i34ff., with particular refer-
ence to the matter of the woman’s consent.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

400 i4- the family in the late roman world

Though late antiquity produced an extraordinary mass of laws, culmi-
nating in Justinian’s formidable attempt at reducing them to order, what it
did not do was to create a new juridical doctrine of marriage. 26 A large
obstacle lying in the way of the authorities’ efforts in this direction was the
persistence of the ideas of marriage as consensual, along with a weak for-
malization of the wedding itself. The exchange of premarital gifts, the
dowry, the signing of the tabulae nuptiales bearing a list of the bride’s dowry
and property clauses in the event of divorce, the religious ritual and the
family festivities were all moments of social significance and by no means
devoid of juridical implications. But they were not indispensable to the
conclusion of a matrimonium iustum , 27 Informal marriages, such as were
widely contracted among the poorer classes, were indistinguishable from
concubinage, which made it difficult to stamp out practices such as bigamy,
unjust breaking of the bond and adultery, and hence to establish the legit-
imacy of children with any certainty.

Increasing attention, therefore, was paid by both powers to the constit-
utive phases of the bond: betrothal and the wedding ceremony. As regards
betrothal, imperial legislation inflicted economic penalties on defaulters, a
measure that had the effect of making the promise of marriage more
binding. At the same time, Christian preachers tried to endow the moment
with a moral significance not unlike that of matrimony itself. This is well
illustrated by the case of St Macrina, who proclaimed herself a widow after
the death of her fiance and refused to accept another man as husband. 28
Though her behaviour could be construed as a cunning ploy to avoid mar-
riage, her justification does suggest that a new perception of betrothal was
making slow inroads into contemporary culture. While for obvious biolog-
ical reasons the minimum age for marriage remained generally stable (four-
teen for the bridegroom, twelve for the bride), that of betrothal was
lowered considerably. The Isaurian Code of 741 set the lower age-limit at
seven years for both sexes, prescribing also the consent, or absence of
dissent, of the two parties. In practice, however, such early betrothals and
binding promises effectively reinforced parental control and emptied the
notion of consent of all meaning, making it merely a tool for furthering
matrimonial strategies. 29

The wedding ceremony was the only moment in the couple’s married life
when the church exerted a solemn, public role. Even if matrimony was not
yet a sacrament in the modern sense, various factors helped to establish the
priest’s elevated moral authority over the bond: the Christianization of the
ancient pagan ritual, the blessing and, later, the matrimonial mass itself

26 Wolff (1950). In the late antique period, the tendency to consider the various aspects of family leg-
islation as distinct and separate fields persisted, and nothing comparable to a ‘family law’ emerged. For
a different view, see Volterra (1967) 724. 27 Treggiari (1991) ch. 5.

28 Greg. Nyss. Vita Macrinae 4— 5; see Giannarelli (1980) 40b 29 Ecloga 2.1; Patlagean (1973).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW AND SOCIETY

401

(attested for the first time in Rome in 4 3 2/40). 30 Concordia pronuba, the
goddess traditionally invoked to foster the harmony of the couple, was
replaced by Iesus pronubus , 31 The Christianization of the betrothal and
wedding may also have had an impact on marriage in two other respects:
by orienting the couple’s subsequent behaviour; and by involving the com-
munity of the faithful, whose sentiments could in turn exert pressure on
the couple. In reply to a query raised by a Spanish bishop, pope Siricius rec-
ommended taking every possible step to prevent betrothals from being dis-
solved: ‘when the blessing given by the priest to her who is about to marry
is violated by a transgression, the faithful feel that there is sacrilege’. 32
Siricius, however, was judging from a Roman point of view, and his opinion
cannot be generalized. In fact, the persistence at a popular level of pagan
ritual was such that it survived long after the full Christianization of the
wedding ceremony. So while the bishops and councils of the fourth
century inveighed against the faithful who celebrated their marriages
according to lascivious pagan customs,” in the Carolingian age we still find
a bishop cautioning his clergy against taking part in wedding festivities
(which he likened to the frequenting of taverns and other base entertain-
ments). 34

As for written contracts, these could not exceed limits fixed by eco-
nomic constraints. A law promulgated by Justinian in 538 laid down,
among other things, the formal requisites for stipulating a legitimate mar-
riage, which varied according to the social standing of the couple and the
amount of property involved. Members of the higher ranks of society
were expected to perform all the duties consonant with their position, par-
ticularly those regarding betrothal gifts and the dowry. Public officials,
merchants and those engaged in respectable activities had the option of
avoiding such complex procedures, but were required to sign a contract
before the ekdikos of a church in the presence of at least three clerics. The
document could be preserved in the church archives. Those who led very
base lives and belonged to the lowest ranks of urban society (even if they
may have been moderately well-off) were absolved from drawing up a
written document. Also exempt were peasants and soldiers — a category

30 The requisites indicated in 458/9 by pope Leo, Ep. 167.4, PL Liv.i204f. - i.e. the free condition
of both spouses, the dowry and the public wedding — were not, as is usually assumed (see, for example,
Orestano (1951) 297b), needed for any legitimate marriage, but only to define the passage from concu-
binage with a woman of lower rank to legitimate matrimony. The dowry was indicated as a condition
of legitimate matrimony by Majorian in 45 8 {Nov. 6.9), but the measure was short-lived (Sev. Nov. 1, of
463). For the later developments, see Lemaire (1929).

31 Paul. Nol. Carm. 25.1 51 £; for the same transformation in Byzantine art, see Kantorowicz (i960)

7 ff.

32 Siricius, Ep. 4, PZ.LXXXiv.632; Siricius meant that the marriage blessing was contaminated because

the nuptura had violated a former engagement: Anne (1941) 13 1; for later developments, with particu-
lar reference to the west, see now Vogel (1977). 33 Ritzer (1981) 94ff., i3off.

34 PZ.cx1x.712f.; see Toubert (1977) 274.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

402

14 - the family in the late roman world

the legislator describes as ‘ignorant of civil affairs’. Families belonging to
this group were defined solely by cohabitation, and the legitimacy of chil-
dren depended on whether they lived under the same roof as their father. 35
It was social and economic classifications, therefore, that determined
whether families were constituted by a formal act and by recourse to a
written document or whether they came into being as a fait accompli, merely
by mutual consent and cohabitation. From this we deduce that most fam-
ilies enjoyed a juridical existence only for as long as conditions of stability
remained.

Over the centuries the traditional Roman notion of consent retained an
important function. It appears strikingly in a famous document, the
Responsa ad consulta Bulgarorum, a letter written by pope Nicholas I in the year
866 in reply to certain queries raised by the tsar of Bulgaria. After going
through the iura nuptiarum, i.e. the various matrimonial duties and ceremo-
nies generally performed in Rome at the time, the pope specified that these
were not indispensable for establishing the legitimacy of the union. Bonds
contracted outside the iura nuptiarum (mainly for economic reasons) were
equally valid, and their validity was dependent solely on consent: per hoc
sufficiat secundum leges solus eorum consensus, de quorum coniunctionibus agitur? G
Here, therefore, the concept of consensus, the traditional foundation of the
matrimonium iustum (i.e. the honourable union of respectable couples and
free citizens), had been transfigured by Christian morality to legitimate
above all the marriages of the underprivileged.

The history of the Roman family, it is often repeated, is inadequately
explained if we merely tell the story of imperial legislation. It is equally
poorly served, we might add, if we just narrate the history of the conciliar
canons and papal decretals. In reconstructing the ways in which the culture
of control manifested itself (in both the religious and secular spheres) his-
torians are particularly bound to the ritual observance of posing the fol-
lowing question: to what extent did the laws actually influence general
behaviour? For the question to be at all meaningful, we must remember
that the law can also fulfil a function of concealment, which implies a
certain margin of failed application (to a greater or lesser extent, as the case
may be). As it is generally the law that follows social behaviour and values,
and not vice versa, the gap between the law and custom tends to increase,
slowly and gradually, until new laws are tailored to the new customs. 37
However, the law can also anticipate widespread social behaviour and
values. This occurs especially when the ideology of a minority influences
the decisions of government, even if only in certain fields. Late antique leg-
islation on the family is a case in point. The relationship between the law

35 Just. Nov. 74.4.1—3; see Patlagean, Pauvrete 1 i6ff.

36 MGH y Epistolarum vi, Epistolae Karolini Aevi iv, Berlin 1902, no. 99, 5 6 8 ff . , in particular §3; see,

more recently, Laiou (1985). 37 Sailer (1991b) 29.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW AND SOCIETY

403

and society is thus a matter of particular significance in this specific area of
research and in this historical period.

Even before beginning to assess his information, the historian knows
very well that in most cases all he can do is to compare the legal texts with
a few literary documents or papyri; and that the results of such compari-
sons are likely to offer a few tenuous confirmations, as many tenuous ref-
utations and one or two fresh doubts. On the one hand, the imperial
constitutions and religious prescriptions are, we suspect, proposing lists of
desiderata rather than statements that can be translated into actual collec-
tive behaviour. On the other, the sources that really do talk about people
and individual experiences have the annoying habit of being few in
number, and those few not only refer almost exclusively to the upper
classes but are also very widely scattered over a large geographical area and
an extremely long time-span. As for the main Christian writers who tackle
the family from the ethical and theological points of view, their approach
is generally prescriptive. As with the legal sources, doubts are often raised,
for again there is no satisfactory way of measuring the distance between
the model and life itself. And so, while we may certainly agree that ‘it is
highly unlikely that the ascetic values so prominent in the apocryphal Acts
and other Christian literature are separable from wider moral develop-
ments in society ’, 38 we are singularly ill-equipped to translate this statement
into orders of magnitude — even very approximately.

Augustine’s work, however, is of exceptional interest. Alongside his
observations of a specifically doctrinal and theological cast, a large quantity
of data on contemporary family life may also be gleaned from informative
passages, allusions and oblique references. These unassuming, and appar-
ently banal, data are of great value to the social historian, because they show
the African family through the eyes of an exponent of the lower ranks of the
regional upper class. The family emerges as a complex of relationships grav-
itating towards a central core, the nuclear group. The father — responsible for
order, concord and the administration of the property — exerted his strong
authority not only over the individual members of his domus (wife, children
and slaves), but also over a much wider, contiguous yet external, social space.
In the domus he would resort to corporal punishment, to the extent that the
whip practically became the symbol of his authority. Such paternal severity
— no matter how much it might have been offset by love and charity — tended
to isolate the father emotionally from the rest of the family and to strengthen
the affective bonds between mother and children or between siblings . 39

There was nothing new about any of these features, either singly or in
their various combinations. The behavioural, emotional and organizational

38 Cameron, Rheotoric of Empire 1 16.

39 Shaw (1987a); for family affectivity in the Roman west, see also ch. 1 5 (Wood), pp. 420—4 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

404 14 - the family in the late roman world

aspects of the family reflected in Augustine’s writings were in fact essen-
tially traditional. Significantly, the environment described (Numidia) was
one where ancient customs survived strongest. Literary evidence for other
areas sometimes suggests that there also existed less oppressive situations,
in which tenderness played a more prominent role. But even these families,
ruled more by affection and respect than by fear and intimidation, were
essentially traditional. In other words, these sources do not give us the
impression that Christianity had substantially modified the existential con-
ditions of women and children in late antiquity. 40 Where we do find the
display of new and subversive behaviour, among some of the more for-
midable figures of this period (for instance, certain women of the eastern
and western aristocracies), theirs was not so much a struggle in support of
a new family model as a struggle against the very notion of the family. 41

But to explore the space separating the level of prescription (legal and
moral) from that of real life, we really need to consider evidence of a much
colder nature: those documents in which the specificity of the individual
dissolves into repetition and plurality. While the information from papyri
has been much scantier and less interesting than anticipated, 42 that from
funerary epigraphy has been sufficient to generate fundamental assess-
ments. And though the data are fragmentary and poorly distributed (both
geographically and socially), the results of recent methods of investigation
cannot be underestimated.

Analysis of the family relationships attested in the inscriptions from
western sources in the first three centuries of the empire has shown that in
a clear majority of cases (c. 80 per cent) Roman society was characterized
by the nuclear family — Roman society being a ‘peculiar nexus of urban
centres, whether village, town or city, and their rural territoria, that were
integrated into the political power structure of the Roman state’. 4 ’ The
dominant relationship is that between husband and wife, whereas the
descending and ascending elements within the nuclear family are repre-
sented more or less equally; siblings, on the other hand, hardly feature. 44

The same method, applied to western Christian epigraphy between the
fourth and the seventh century, shows certain changes in the family rela-
tionships, though within a framework of substantial continuity. First of all,
the nuclear family is further strengthened, now becoming practically the
sole focus of family life and affectivity ( c . 97 per cent of cases). Secondly,
we find a larger number of commemorations between spouses and (to an

40 Cameron (1993) 1 28fF. 41 Recently, Giardina (1994), with bibliography.

42 The lack of documents on divorce for this period is particularly significant: see Bagnall (1987),
who none the less claims there was a ‘significant continuity, in substance and phraseology, from the
time before Constantine to the late sixth century, through numerous changes in imperial laws’ (56); see
also Bagnall, Egypt 193b For the patrimonial aspects, Beaucamp (1992b) yoff. The private letters on
papyrus show no significant changes in family sentiment through Christian influence: Joxe (1959).

43 Shaw (1984) 489. 44 Sailer and Shaw (1984).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LAW AND SOCIETY

405

even greater extent) in the descending line between parents and children.
What is taking shape with increasing clarity, therefore, is the ‘parent-to-
cliild descending triad that is most typical of “modern” nuclear family
structure ’. 45 Finally, the inscriptions record a widespread collapse of inter-
est in the memory of personal reladonships. The sheer size of this phe-
nomenon suggests that it was the result of deliberate, ideological choice:
for in death even more than in life, the Christian devalues his earthly ties
in favour of the heavenly bond. The same tendency is confirmed in the
iconography, with a gradual disappearance of matrimonial scenes from
sarcophagi . 46

An examination of the inscriptions commemorating children who had
died before the age of ten has shown significant differences. The percent-
age of such dedications reaches its highest levels in the cities of northern
Italy and, above all, in Rome and Ostia; the lowest levels are found in the
less urbanized regions. The tendency to commemorate children increases
in the Christian inscriptions: in the areas where it was already high in early
times, the percentage rise is less pronounced; elsewhere it is more substan-
tial. Commemorations of the elderly (in their seventh decade of life), on
the other hand, show an opposite trend: the highest percentages relate to
the rural, non-Christian populations, the lowest to the urban, Christian
areas. As regards the preference for male, as opposed to female, memori-
als, comparison among the urban populations shows a gradual tendency
for the phenomenon to decline, if not disappear altogether. It has been
rightly observed that, as a whole, these inscriptions reflect the sensibilities
of the freedmen — that is, individuals who had no ascendant family tradi-
tion, but none the less wished to emphasize their status as Roman citizens
who shared the stability of an affective and legal structure (the nuclear
family). With respect to these tendencies, which had already existed for
some time, Christianization seems to have had the effect of ideological
strengthening — hence as a factor of continuity and reinforcement, not of
novelty . 47

In the past it has been held that Christian funerary inscriptions give evi-
dence of a changed attitude to the correct marrying age for girls, raising it
from its former, pagan levels. There would have been two reasons for this:
as a means of championing virginity and to reduce the number of young
girls dying in childbirth . 48 As it happens, however, the inscriptions taken as
indicative of ‘Christian’ orientation (mainly from the city of Rome) were
merely demonstrating that the lives of hitherto concealed strata of the
population were beginning to be reflected in the documents . 49 And what

45 Shaw (1984). 46 Frugoni (1977). 47 Shaw (1991); cf. Zanker (1975).

48 Recently, Pietri (1979), on the basis of data collected and analysed by Carletti (1977).

49 Shaw (1987b) 41 f.; for a reassessment of the data referring to the previous centuries, see Sailer
(1994) ch. 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

406 14. THE FAMILY IN THE LATE ROMAN WORLD

they actually convey is that throughout the entire Roman imperial period
there was a substantial continuity in the mode of family formation among
the less affluent classes of the population.

The Christian epigraphy of Asia Minor also shows that Christianity did
not, as has sometimes been held, make a significant contribution to demo-
graphic regression, at least as far as the fourth century is concerned. Using
such material as demographic evidence has enormous, often insurmount-
able, limits, but what clearly emerges from a well-selected sample is that the
birth rate of Christian families belonging to the middle strata of the pop-
ulation remained extremely high, very likely no lower than in the previous
centuries . 50

According to a recent theory, already in late antiquity Christianity played
an epoch-making role in the history of the western family by imposing and
spreading an exogamic model of matrimony, as opposed to the endogamic
model traditional to the Mediterranean cultures. Within this tendency, the
demands of morality combined with those of material expediency, for the
interdiction of endogamy (along with restrictions on adoption, concubin-
age and second marriage) also favoured bequests of property to the
church . 51 The evidence of western inscriptions, however, has shown a very
strong prevalence and continuity of exogamy throughout the imperial
period, among Christians and pagans alike. Besides, archaic Roman society
had prohibited marriage up to the sixth degree inclusive , 52 and even after
the lifting of the ban, parallel and cross-cousin marriages continued to be
very rare in every rank of the pagan population. Hence the widening of the
concept of incest (imposed by the Christian authorities and incorporated
into imperial legislation) can hardly have had the devastating effect ima-
gined . 53

50 Patlagean (1978) (the biggest weakness of this kind of enquiry is the lack of information on the
marriage rate). 51 Goody (1983) and (1990); for the traditional opinion, Weiss (1908).

52 Bettini (1988).

53 Shaw and Sailer (1984); cf. Sailer and Shaw (1984), Shaw (1984). The available evidence reveals
marriages with a parallel cousin, either german or more distant, on the father’s side; whereas those
between cross-cousins or parallel cousins on the mother’s side remain concealed (Shaw and Sailer
(1984) 435, 437). This fact has been pointed out by Moreau (1994) 67, in a brief criticism of Sailer and
Shaw’s works. However, the quantity of data produced by these authors on the rarity (which doesn’t
necessarily mean absence) of marriages between parallel cousins in the pre-Christian west is decisive
in one respect: it rules out the possibility that Roman marriages between parallel cousins on the father’s
side were very rare, while instead those between parallel cousins on the mother’s side — or even other,
closer, forms of endogamic marriage — were very frequent. In fact, the Roman rules of marriage either
forbade or permitted marriages between cousins outright, without specifying further: ‘Les differences
de relation de cousinage ne constituent ni pretexte a un interdit, ni privilege preferential ou prescriptif,
dans le champ matrimonial’, a situation that is also perfectly reflected in the terminology (Bettini (1994)
234). Moreau (1994) 67 also argues that the legal interdiction of consanguineous marriages would be
inexplicable if such marriages were very rare. Sailer and Shaw, however, claim that they were rare in the
west, while taking it for granted that they were widespread in the east. Reservations on the epigraphi-
cal analyses are also expressed in Corbier (1991).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

NEGATIONS OF THE FAMILY

407

III. NEGATIONS OF THE FAMILY

One of the most conspicuous factors of discontinuity between the earlier
centuries and the late antique period concerns one particular aspect of
family history: the negation of the family. The behaviour associated with
this phenomenon can be classified into two broad categories. The first,
which centres on the absolute primacy of virginity in the system of values,
includes the rejection (expressed both before and after marriage) of the
sexual act, of childbirth and of family life. 54 The second includes the fol-
lowing: the inability to form a new family through lack of economic
resources; the practices of exclusion considered criminal, such as infanti-
cide and the custom of the ius vitae ac necis, now (at least from 318) likened
to parriddium ; 55 and, finally, the actions deriving from the exercise of patria
potestas, which principally meant the exposure and sale of infants, the tem-
porary cession of grown-up children and the forced entry of daughters —
and, to a lesser extent, sons — into monastic life. In the first category, moral
motivations strongly prevailed over material conditioning; in the second,
the opposite held true.

The lowering of the minimum age for entry into monastic life (and,
though to a lesser extent, into anchoritism) was a development that par-
alleled the lowering of the minimum age for betrothal. 56 We learn, for
example, that Symeon Stylites the Younger mounted his first pillar at the
age of seven. Considered individually, this and other similar feats 57 could
be taken as exaggerations aimed at establishing a heroic model: that of the
saint who displayed a fully mature devotion to God in earliest childhood
and an almost primordial purity in adulthood. Symeon, it is worth remem-
bering, was still in his mother’s womb when John the Baptist appeared to
prescribe the ascetic diet on which the future child was to be raised. 58 But
in fact such stories substantially agree with the data from the legal docu-
ments, which suggest that the phenomenon was widespread: a conciliar
measure of 692 fixed the lower age-limit for entry into a monastery at ten
years. 59 Significantly, the monastic world was strongly pervaded by family
lexis (which was used to describe the system of relationships within the
community) and the monastery itself often ended up by carrying out many
of the functions of a nuclear or extended family. 6 ”

Unlike other practices, the exposure and sale of children, as well as the
hiring-out of sons, was a type of negation of family that often implied entry
into another family: as adopted children, as slaves or as hired labour. A small
proportion of the exposed were either forced into prostitution or intro-

54 See ch. 26 (Brown), pp. 791—5 below. 55 Harris (1986) 92.

56 See above, p. 400. Another problem concerns the imposition of monastic status for punitive
reasons: Goria (1975) 13 iff. 57 VitaSym. Styl. Jun. 15; Patlagean (1973). 58 Vita Sym. Styl. Jun. 3.

59 Cone, in Trullo 40. 60 Talbot (1990).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

408 14. THE FAMILY IN THE LATE ROMAN WORLD

duced to the harsher and more marginal sectors of slave exploitation; some
were subsequently resold. The laws on these issues provide valuable evi-
dence clarifying the general orientations of legislation and moral teaching
on the family.

Evidence from the Severan period suggests that infant exposure had
already, for quite some time, been provoking censure and unease in the pagan
community (or at least among the classes that voiced their opinions in our
documents ). 61 But it was only with the Christian emperors that any attempt
was made to discourage and, subsequently, stamp out the phenomenon.
Alongside certain flimsy attempts at prevention in situations of emergency
(in the form of aid to needy families), there were also some more realistic
measures, which tried to limit the scourge of exposure by authorizing the
cession of children while at the same time not excluding the possibility of
recovery. This was an option already provided for in traditional Roman law,
but few can have availed themselves of it. It was not so much a practical
proposition as a valuable psychological opening that alleviated the trauma of
separation. At the same time, it acted as a moral palliative in what was clearly
the thorniest aspect of the law on exposure: the fact that, in contrast with
one of the basic principles of Roman law, an individual of free birth could
be reduced to slavery by the wishes of another person.

The flexibility of this approach, however, was soon superseded by the
opposite tendency, and the laws not only withheld the possibility of recov-
ery but even made infant exposure punishable by death if the parents were
free citizens. The results of these measures were, we suspect, negligible. A
wide parallel documentation attests how deeply rooted and widespread the
phenomenon was, for it thrived well into the Middle Ages in the west and
into the Byzantine period in the east, even surviving in the recent history
of industrial urbanism . 62

The failure of strict legislation is indirectly confirmed by a subsequent
law passed by Justinian: it guaranteed all exposed children the condition of
freedom and denied those who received them the power to enslave them
or to reduce them to any other form of dependence, or even to place them
in a relationship of patronage. Justinian explained that the measure
intended to make a clear moral distinction between the desire for illicit
profit and a mere act of compassion. At the same time, those abandoning
a child were to be denied the right to recover him with the object of enslav-
ing him . 63 If actually enforced, this law would surely have provoked a con-
siderable increase in the death rate of the exposed. But it is fruitless to pose
problems of this kind, or even to try to relate the individual laws to specific
demographic or economic situations . 64 In such cases the legislation was

61 Harris (1994). 62 Boswell (1989). 63 C/vm.51.3 (529); see also Nov. 1 53 (541).

64 For example, Bianchi Fossati Vanzetti (1983) 223.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

NEGATIONS OF THE FAMILY 409

clearly very low in practical impact and very high in ideological content.
From the emotional point of view, exposure was a central issue round
which far too many sins and far too much wretchedness gravitated. It
turned parents into putative infanticides (often enough the infant’s fate was
death). It laid bare the macabre power of uncontrolled sexuality, of both
free citizens and slaves, within and outside marriage. It disclosed the avidity
of those who exploited the theoretically charitable act of taking in a child
as a means of gaining ownership over a human being. Finally, it projected
on to the whole of society the shame and contamination of incestuous
contact, which could occur anywhere: in brothels as in lawful marriages, in
the beds of concubines and adulterers alike. All things considered, the
actual survival and subsequent fate of the exposed children were just one
aspect of the problem, perhaps not even the most important.

In the abstract, exposure was a serious crime with associations closely
resembling those of infanticide. But in the vast majority of cases the
offence had compelling material causes that constituted objective condi-
tioning. Raising these issues questioned the whole problem of responsi-
bility: is it better to allow a child to die of hunger or to expose him in the
hope that others might take him in? To differentiate the law by introduc-
ing a typology of motivations — i.e. distinguishing abandonment caused
by indigence from that caused by pettier or less constrictive reasons —
would have had the dual effect of undermining the moral principle that
the law aimed to uphold and of disrupting the very foundations of the
juridical system. Once exposure had entered the province of the law, the
only option was to repress it without distinction. The material constric-
tions, however, doomed the laws to failure; and failure, in turn, provoked
even stricter prohibitions and severer punishments. In this way, the law
ended up by carrying out, almost exclusively, the functions of a moral
imperative.

The laws on exposure can be considered together with those on the sale
of infants and the locatio of children of working age. The latter was strictly
speaking locatio operarum , though the laws, in view of the overall context of
relationships of dependence, sometimes represented it and classified it as
a sale . 65 The legislation thus responded to a need constantly referred to in
late antique legislation: that of preserving the family nucleus. In other
words, in situations of long-term economic difficulty the break-up of the
family could be prevented by the temporary cession of a child. The relin-
quished child, who would then be housed in the domus of a proprietor
sufficiently rich to be able to rent labour, would surely be no worse off than
before. The possibility of a subsequent return to the nuclear family could
also have a dissuasive effect on exposure.

65 Humbert ( 1983 ).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

410 14 - the family in the late roman world

The landlords who were forced — by sheer necessity — to expose or sell
the children of their slaves would have been farmers with insufficient
reserves to face up to famines or similar adversities. We are therefore
dealing with small farms where there was close, daily contact with the
slaves. In such contexts, the cession of a sanguinolentusbotn of slaves tended
to generate an emotional climate similar to that between free citizens. The
right of redemption, which admitted the possibility, at least in theory, of
future reunion, helped to reduce the trauma of the event, exactly as it did
in the case of free citizens. This established the humanitarian principle that
recognized the aspiration of slave family nuclei to remain united, without
impairing thereby the right of the domini to dispose freely of their res. Like
other arguments calling for a more humane treatment of slaves, this one
had also had its advocates in the past. But it was only under Constantine
that it was clearly and formally defined. The humanitarian inspiration of
the Constantinian legislation is confirmed by a law on the fundi patrimoniales
vel enjyteuticarii. The dismemberment of the possessions, the emperor stipu-
lated, must be carried out in such a way as to safeguard the integrity of the
servorum agnatio, for ‘who could tolerate that children should be separated
from parents, sisters from brothers, wives from their husbands ?’ 66

The strengthening and diffusion of such moral scruples, combined with
the decline in the slave supply and the impoverishment of the free farmers,
had paradoxical consequences on family stability, for it would appear from
certain documents that the slave agnationes were more stable than the fami-
lies that were free but poor. The new epistles of Augustine indicate that the
phenomenon intensified in the western areas during the early decades of the
fifth century. As a judge, Augustine found himself handling a difficult jurid-
ical problem, concerning cases of children illegally sold by free parents and
of free adults who had fallen into the hands of slave-dealers. On the subject
he appends a revealing note: ‘the ?nangones deport those they buy, almost all
of whom are free citizens . . . Very rare, on the other hand, are the cases of
real slaves sold by their lords .’ 67 In the same years, the I ita of Melania the
Younger cites another episode that was an eloquent sign of the times: it told
of slaves, freed in large numbers by their lords, rejecting their freedom and
carrying their opposition to the verge of revolt . 68 Here it was clearly a case
of ‘cottaged’ slaves ( casarii ), divided into ‘family’ nuclei not substantially
unlike those of the coloni, as far as economic functions were concerned. For
such people, especially when they belonged to a powerful domus unit, slavery
offered many advantages, principally that of stability. Freedom, on the other

66 C.Th. ii. 25. i = CJ hi. 38. 1 (325: Seeck (1919) 88). Though this constitution specifically concerns
Sardinia, the principle was certainly general; see Giardina (19 88) 138. For confirmation of this princi-
ple, in connection with the needs of the census, CJ xi.48.7 (371: Seeck (1919) 13 1).

67 Aug. Ep. 10*, CSEL Lxxxvm.46ff.

68 Pall. Hist. Laus. 61.5; 1 /ita Melaniae iof. (SChret. 90); Giardina (19 82) i28f.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WEST AND EAST

41 1

hand, entailed all the uncertainties and risks of being uprooted. Cassiodorus,
celebrating the opulence of the great annual fair of Marcelliana in Lucania,
was to recollect all those pueri and puellae exhibited for sale not because they
were slaves but because they were free ( quos non fecit captivatas esse sub pretio, sed
libertas ). 69

IV. WEST AND EAST

It is customary to distinguish the western model of the family, based on the
nuclear unit and strongly featuring exogamic matrimony, from that of the
east, centred on extended households, agnatic lineages and endogamous
marriage patterns. A key role in this distinction is played by Egypt, a region
thought to exemplify eastern kinship for many reasons, though particularly
because of the custom of marriage between siblings-german. As regards
late antiquity, the extent of the Egyptian contribution to this interpretative
picture needs to be radically reconsidered. The documents clearly show
that, following the Constitutio Antoniniana 1 " and the spread of Christianity,
such marriages became increasingly rare and eventually disappeared alto-
gether. And that is not all. A recent, plausible explanation for the custom
has traced its origin to the settlements of the Greek colonists, who adopted
a policy of strict closure towards the indigenous population. 71 If, therefore,
the phenomenon is explained as an ethnic decision determined by specific
historical circumstances, we can obviously no longer use it as evidence
either for the specific and primordial nature of Egyptian kinship or for the
eastern tendency for siblings-german to intermarry.

The generalization linking close-kin marriages with the eastern empire
is too imprecise and needs clarifying. For a start, it would not have occurred
to the ancients themselves. In the year 5 3 5 /6 Justinian issued a law to check
the spread of gamoi athemitoi , ‘unlawful marriages’, in the provinces of
Osrhoene and Mesopotamia. The marriages in question were consanguin-
eous unions punishable by death: principally those between siblings and
between uncle and niece (those between cousins were not prohibited by
Byzantine law). While confirming the ban for the future, the emperor
agreed to be lenient over past transgressions: those at fault (he said) were
peasants who had been led astray by the customs of neighbouring popula-
tions (the Persians above all) and whose lives had been disrupted by the
numerous recent invasions. 72 A similar measure, this time referring to
Mesopotamia, Osrhoene and the Euphratensis, was issued in 566 by Justin
II, who again referred to ignorance of the law and to corruption from

69 Cass. Vdr. vm.33.4. 70 Hopkins (1980b).

71 Shaw (1992). On the problem of Egyptian specificity, it is also worth noting that in Egypt the
marrying age of girls was in line with the average in the rest of the empire: Bagnall, Egypt 1 89.

72 Just. Nov. 1 54.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

412 14 - the family in the late roman world

contact with peoples such as the Persians and Saracens. 73 Hence, whereas
modern historians have tended to attribute close-kin marriage very broadly
to the ‘Romans’ of Constantinople along with many other peoples of the
eastern empire, the Byzantine emperor himself regarded such marriages as
geographically and socially confined to the rural populations that were alien
to Roman laws and customs.

‘East’ is thus a singularly vague label, one expected to cover areas as dis-
similar as Greece, Lycia, Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Armenia and Mesopotamia.
No less vague, however, is the term ‘close-kin marriage’, which is quite inad-
equate to describe the differences in family structure between east and west.
The modern term covers not only marriages between siblings or between
uncle and niece or aunt and nephew, but also those between cousins. But
the distance between two cultures that held conflicting views on marriage
between cousins (e.g. Roman Africa and Greece in the fifth century a.d.)
was not necessarily any greater than that separating a culture that practised
marriage between cousins (e.g. Greece) and another that practised marriage
between even closer relatives (e.g. Byzantine Mesopotamia).

The most significant distinction between east and west, therefore, con-
cerned marriage between cousins. Theodosius I punished such unions with
death. In the year 396 Arcadius confirmed the prohibition but considerably
mitigated the punishment. But the law must still have met with strong resis-
tance in the east, for eventually Arcadius lifted the ban (in 405). At the time
of Justinian, marriage between cousins was still considered legitimate in
Byzantium. In the west, on the other hand, the ban remained in force, as is
attested by a law of the year 409. 74 That the disparity in the legal situations
of the two parts of the empire actually reflected differences in marriage
customs is confirmed by Augustine: marriage between cousins, he
declared, was rare (in most of the western regions, we infer) even before it
was prohibited by law: propter gradum propinquitatis fraterno gradui proximum
quam raro per mores fiebat, quod fieri per leges licebatJ 5

73 Justin, Nov. 3; the expression gamoi athemitoi was not so much a ‘euphemism’ (Lee (1988) 407) as a
general indication comprising all consanguineous marriages except those between cousins (which were
permitted by Byzantine law). It is questionable whether it refers only to marriages between brothers and
sisters and between parents and offspring, and not also (or indeed above all) to those between uncles
and nieces. In this connection, see Theodoret, Ep. 8, SChret. 40.80, where the custom was considered
typical of the Persians. On Iranian customs, see the recent Herrenschmidt (1994); on late antique rep-
resentations of Persian marriage customs, see Chadwick (1979); for Dura, see Cumont (1924).

74 For Theodosius’ law, seep. 396 above, n. 12; C.Th. m.12.3 = CJv. 5.6 (396); CJv. 4.19 (405); C.Th.
hi. 10. 1 = CJ v.8.1 (409); Just. Inst. 1. 10.4. The opinion expressed in Patlagean, Pauvrete n8ff. (i.e. the
banning of marriage between cousins in response to a ‘resserrement des liens conjugaux et familiaux’)
is contradicted by the widespread, traditional practice of marriage between cousins in the Greek world:
Bresson (1985) 266. On later developments in Byzantium, Laiou (1992) ch. 1. On the continuity, in the
Byzantine age, of the traditional position of the grandfather and the maternal uncle in the Greek family,
see Bremmer (1983).

75 Aug. Civ. xv. 1 6. Roda (1979) emphasizes imperial derogations. On the avunculate in the Celtic
world, with particular reference to the family of Ausonius, see Guastella (1980).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WEST AND EAST

413

This polarity between east and west is part of the old problem of
eastern influence on Roman law. In late antiquity, this can also be seen in
the problem of identifying the different trends in each part of the empire
and establishing the connection between these trends and remote anthro-
pological constants. Deducing the area of application of the imperial
constitutions from their place of emission or publication is a debatable
procedure in any case, but it is especially so for much of the fourth
century, given the incompleteness of the documentation and the princi-
ple of imperial unanimitas. But even laying aside such scruples, we are
forced to recognize that the source material often contradicts, when it
does not actually confute, the theses one might wish to prove. For
example, it has been held that the post-Constantinian legislation directed
against mixed-status unions was catering to western needs, which were
closer to the tradition of Roman law . 76 But it was a western emperor,
Valentinian, who legislated that illegitimate children should have the right
to at least a share of their father’s inheritance. And it was an eastern
emperor, Valens, who disapproved of that law, which was promptly
repealed (by Valens himself or his successor ). 77 In other cases, the exis-
tence of customs that are typically, or prevalently, eastern (and conse-
quently the natural subject of the legislators’ special interest) is simply
assumed and by no means adequately confirmed by the documents. A
case in point is the requirement, to ensure the validity of a marriage, of a
written contract specifying the dowry and marriage gifts. Interpreted by
some historians as a Greek or eastern custom, it has been correctly
ascribed to the church’s need to exercise control over the institution of
marriage . 78 According to the Claudian senatus consultum, a free woman who
was a slave’s concubine could be reduced to slavery provided she had been
warned three times. The warning clause was removed by Constantine, and
then reinstated byjulian . 79 It has been claimed that Constantine’s measure
betrays the influence of Greek customs, which were in favour of auto-
matically reducing women to slavery, and that Julian’s reaction was
influenced by western customs. But this interpretation is simply not borne
out by the sources . 80 As for Constantine’s law banning the presence of a
concubine in the same house as a lawful marriage, there is nothing to
attest that in late antiquity this form of polygamy was so widely spread in
the eastern provinces of the empire — and so thinly distributed in the

76 Evans Grubbs (1995) 302b

77 C. Th. iv.6.4; cf. Lib. Or 1. 145 ; 1 95—6. It was only in the fifth century that western legislation started
to become more restrictive than that of the east: see below.

78 Mitteis (1891) 226, 290; Volterra (1937) 248; for a different opinion, Wolff (1939) 83ffi; for the
classic problem of the arrhae sponsaliciae and the alleged eastern influence on Constantine’s betrothal
legislation, see the balanced assessment in Evans Grubbs (1995) i74ff

79 C.Th. iv. 1 2.4 (331); iv. 1 2. 5 (362); see also above, p. 396.

80 Mitteis (1891) 364ffi; Gaudemet (1948) 670; for a different view, Beaucamp (1990) 187.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

414 J 4- the family in the late roman world

western parts — as to be a typically eastern phenomenon . 81 The same can
be said of abduction . 82 Even the tendency to consider betrothal as a
definitive choice has been attributed to eastern, particularly Judaic,
influence ; 83 it is more convincingly explained as the result of a combina-
tion of widespread economic, social and moral factors. These examples
clearly show the extent to which historical judgement is conditioned by
ideology, especially in a subject such as this. That one or other of these
customs was more widely spread in one or other part of the empire is
undeniable. What is much more difficult, however, is to distinguish an
eastern anthropology from a western one on the basis of the imperial
constitutions of the fourth and fifth centuries.

From the doctrinal point of view, there are no significant differences in
the records between east and west as regards attitudes to fundamental
issues such as betrothal and marriage , 84 and for many centuries the func-
tion of the religious rites associated with these events remained substan-
tially the same in Rome and Byzantium . 85

However, from the first decades of the fifth century, in certain respects
western legislation began to take a firmer line than that of the east. This
tendency — which was not absolute and included important exceptions 86 —
is particularly evident not only in the prohibitions of consanguineous mar-
riage but also in the legislation on both divorce 87 and the inheritance of ille-
gitimate children . 88 Instead of resorting to the argument of ‘eastern
specificity’, we prefer to see the matter as dependent on the different rela-
tionships existing between the secular and the religious powers in the two
parts. In the east, where the state was stronger, imperial law was able to
withstand the demands of the ecclesiastical authorities and to represent the
sensibilities of the majority of its subjects more effectively. In the west,
exposed as it was to internal and external threats, the state was more amen-
able to the pressures of the bishops.

With the fall of Rome and the establishment of the Romano-Germanic
kingdoms, the history of the Roman family was separated into two parallel,
yet interlinked, processes, each of which was further divided into a myriad

81 For a different view, Wolff (194;) 4of.; Evans Grubbs (1995) 299; see in particular Vatin (1970)
204.

82 Evans Grubbs (1989) 6yff. greatly underestimates the importance of the data from the Latin rhe-
torical works. On other aspects of this problem, see Volterra (1937). 83 Cohen (1949).

84 See, respectively, Anne (1941) 31 and Gaudemet (1978b) 27.

85 The most significant changes occurred in Byzantium in the ninth century when decisive impor-
tance was attributed to betrothal and the marriage blessing: L’Huillier (1987).

86 See, for example, the provision introduced by the western emperor Majorian in 458: an attempt
to promote marriages between the nobility, to encourage the remarriage of widows and to stop parents
from consigning virgins to convents for patrimonial reasons (Nov. 6).

87 The greater leniency of eastern legislation on divorce can be observed by comparing C. Th. 111. 1 6.2

(421; modified in CJ ix.9.34) with Theod. Nov. 12 (439), CJ v.17.8 (449), Val. Nov. 35.11 (452) and CJ
v.17.9 (497). In general, see Volterra (1975). 88 C.Th. iv.6.6 (405); iv.6.7 (426/427); iv.6.8 (428).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

WEST AND EAST

individual situations both in the Mediterranean world and in continental
Europe. Anyone wishing to devote a single book to the subsequent chap-
ters of the history of the ideal-types that we call the ‘eastern family’ and
the ‘western family’ faces a truly demanding task. For apart from negotiat-
ing the labyrinthine links between individual instance and general rule, he
would also be expected to classify modes of acculturation, identify soci-
ological constants, propose historical comparisons and reconstruct actual
relationships. It is perhaps not difficult to see why these parallel lives still
await their Plutarch.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 15

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

IAN N. WOOD

At the beginning of the fifth century the senatorial aristocracy of the late
empire seemed well assured of its future. Its great dynasties, the Anicii and
Symmachi among them, appear full of confidence in the letter collections
of the period — those of Symmachus himself, but also of Jerome,
Augustine and Paulinus of Nola . 1 Nor were they much shaken by the
initial break-up of the western empire, despite panic-stricken reactions to
the arrival of the barbarians and to the invasions of the Huns. At the end
of the fifth century the Italian aristocracy appears as confident as ever in
the inscriptions of the Colosseum 2 and in the letters of Ennodius of
Pavia. Its Gallic counterpart, a little less grand in status, but of nearly com-
parable wealth, dominates the letter collections of Sidonius Apollinaris,
Ruricius of Limoges and Avitus of Vienne, as well as having a significant
profile in that of Ennodius (Provencal by birth, albeit Italian in his
career ). 3 By the mid sixth century, however, the greatest of these dynasties
were no longer a power in the west: Justinian’s Ostrogothic wars had
destroyed their Italian base, although the Anicii themselves were still of
some importance in Constantinople. However, while the front rank of the
aristocracy had collapsed in Italy, in the successor states of Gaul its pro-
vincial counterpart survived , 4 as is again evidenced by a letter collection,
this time the poetic epistles of Venantius Fortunatus . 5 In all probability it
had also managed to hang on to much of its wealth. Moreover, these fam-
ilies had not held themselves aloof from the political changes which fol-
lowed the failure of the western empire; instead they, or at least individual
members of the Gallo-Roman aristocracy, were involved in the new king-
doms of the Visigoths, Burgundians and Franks, whether at a local level
as bishops, or at the level of the state, as counsellors . 6 As such they appear
in the Ten Books of Histories of Gregory of Tours, who was himself a

1 See above all, on the aristocrats, Matthews (1975); Arnheim (1972) 103—42; on friendship, Brown
(1992) 45—6; White (1992); Clark (1990) 1 1—42; on Paulinus of Nola, Fabre (1949); on the letter collec-
tions, Matthews (1974) 58-99. 2 Chastagnol (1966). 3 Wood (1993a); Mathisen (1981).

4 Stroheker (1948) remains the classic work. 5 Brown (1996) 103.

6 For a study of one individual and his family in the first half of this transitional period, see Harries
(1994); more generally, Mathisen (1993).

416

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 417

member of the traditional senatorial class. 7 This combined evidence pro-
vides an opportunity for considering the history of the family, in its aris-
tocratic guise, during the transition from the Roman empire to the
successor states.

At a lower social level, if one coniines one’s enquiries to the Roman and
sub-Roman population in the west, the history of the family is much less
informative. In north-east Italy and in Istria mosaic panels on the floors of
fifth- and sixth-century churches, recording donations, show apparently
ordinary families acting together to make gifts. 8 Some saints came from
among the non-aristocratic property-holders. Just occasionally, evidence
like that provided by St Patrick on his father and grandfather in Britain
throws light on a lesser family group — though here the problem of dating
makes it difficult to determine whether the information relates largely to
the fourth century or to the fifth. 9

The evidence for the new Germanic population entering the empire is
at first sight similar in distribution. Certainly at the very highest level — that
is, at the level of royalty — the evidence is relatively good. The two greatest
Gothic families, the Amals and the Balts, the ruling dynasties of the
Ostrogoths and the Visigoths respectively, are well attested for the late fifth
and early sixth century, even though much of the evidence relating to those
dynasties was clearly elaborated at the hands of Theoderic the Great and
Cassiodorus. 10 From the 480s, at least, the Merovingians provide a wealth
of salacious stories which give an entree into the family life of Frankish
royalty. Among the Franks the next level of society — the non-royal aristoc-
racy — is invisible in the fifth- and sixth-century legal evidence, so much so
as to have prompted the question as to whether it existed at all. For all the
silence of the legal sources, the regular discovery of Frankish high-status
graves from this period suggests that this is an evidential lacuna rather than
proof of any real absence of an aristocratic class. 11

While the Frankish aristocracy presents a problem of interpretation, the
law codes of the successor states shed light on the family structure of the
rank and file, among the Franks as among other barbarian peoples. 12 This
makes it possible occasionally to look beyond the highest classes of society,
the kings, their immediate family and the traditional senatorial aristocracy.
For the most part, however, the ensuing discussion will concentrate on the
most powerful families in the fifth- and sixth-century west. It will look first
at the senatorial aristocracy, essentially that of Gaul, where the evidence is
most extensive, at the senatorial familia, and at its possessions. Thereafter, the
criteria used by the senatorial aristocracy in defining itself will be considered:

7 Mathisen (1984). 8 Caillet (1993), esp. 447-8.

9 Patrick, Confessio 1, ed. R. P. C. Hanson, SChret. 249 (Paris 1978); see also the discussion, ibid.
pp. 24—8, although the argument in favour of an early date is not persuasive.

10 Wolfram (1988); Heather (1989). 11 James (1988) 219— 24. 12 Murray (1983).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

4l8 15. FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

types of descent groups, together with broader approaches to the definition
of the family, as suggested by literature and religion. Comparison will then
be made with the Frankish and Burgundian evidence for family structures
and attitudes. Before concluding, a sideways glance will be cast in the direc-
tion of the other great bond in late antique and early medieval society — the
bond of friendship, which worked in parallel to the bonds of family, and
which is likewise documented in the letter collections.

The Roman or sub-Roman household or familia of the fifth and sixth
century was a large group. Where it is possible to reconstruct a family tree 13
it is clear that a high birth rate was common and that families could be size-
able — something perhaps exacerbated by the absence of child exposure in
a Christian world . 14 Apart from parents and children, the familia, at least of
the greater families, included officials and servants of various sorts, among
them household slaves . 15 One such slave, whose history is related by
Gregory of Tours, was Andarchius, a member of the household of the
Auvergnat aristocrat, Felix. Flaving impressed his master by his intelligence
and learning, he dispossessed him and married his daughter, only to be
lulled by other slaves in the household, who objected to his usurpation of
status and his arrogant behaviour . 16 The story provides a vignette of life in
a great household, from Felix and his daughter to the learned, clever and
ambitious Andarchius and down to his fellow slaves, who preferred the
status quo to the more open social world implied by the upward mobility of
their former companion.

Andarchius had his eyes on the property of Felix, as well his daughter. In
all likelihood this property would have been scattered in numerous estates
across a large geographical area. Before the fall of the western empire the
geographical distribution of land held by members of the late Roman sena-
torial aristocracy was extraordinary, as can be seen from comments on the
estates of Melania the Younger, the distribution of which stretched from
Spain to Italy and Britain to Africa 17 — or even the estates of Paulinus of
Pella, who held lands in both halves of the empire until he lost control of
them as a result of the migration and settlement of the barbarians . 18
Although such holdings were no longer possible in the late fifth century,
Gallo-Roman aristocrats still held properties which were widely scattered
within the provinces of Gaul: the lands of their successors were similarly dis-
persed across the kingdom of the Franks throughout the following centu-
ries . 19 In the fifth century most will have possessed urban villas, as, to judge

13 See, for instance, the genealogies in Stroheker (1948).

14 For child exposure in the Roman empire, Garnsey and Sailer (1987) 138.

15 Compare Garnsey and Sailer (1987) 126—47.

16 Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.46. Compare the reaction of the slaves in Vitas Patrum Emeritensium 3, ed. J. N.

Garvin (Washington 1946). 17 Vta Melaniae 11, 19, ed. D. Gorce, SChret. 90 (Paris 1962).

18 Paulinus of Pella, Eucharisticos lines 408—19, ed. C. Moussy, Paulin de Pella, Poeme d 'Action de Graces
et de Priere, SChret. 209 (Paris, 1974). 19 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms (1994) 206—11.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 419

by his references to Lyons, did Sidonius Apollinaris , 211 though it is possible
that a city residence became less desirable as the amenities of urban life
declined. More important were the rural estates, some of them of consider-
able pretension, like the lakeside villa of Avitus, Gallo-Roman senator and
subsequently emperor, at Aydat , 21 or the hilltop fortress of Pontius
Leontius . 22 From Sidonius’ descriptions, even allowing for the fact that they
are literary set-pieces, 2 ’ it is possible to see these houses as working units: in
some cases one can even see some of the minutiae of spatial arrangements
— for instance, the division of a library, where there was an area for the men,
with books of philosophy, and another for the women, with books of devo-
tion . 24 A century later, Venantius Fortunatus described some aspects of the
properties of the sixth-century Gallo-Roman aristocracy and indeed of their
Germanic counterparts, including their oratories and their gardens. Among
the aristocrats so feted were the descendants of Pontius Leontius . 25 Estates
and their transmission from generation to generation were as important to
the senatorial aristocracy of the sixth century as they had been over a
hundred years earlier, when Salvian saw desire for property and its transmis-
sion to the next generation as central to the vices of the rich of his day . 26

This concern with family and inheritance can also be seen in mirror
image in the early history of monasticism, since monasticism challenged
the notions both of a family line and of inherited property . 27 The early
bewilderment at Paulinus of Nola’s decision to opt out of the traditional
pattern of senatorial life shows exactly how much the aristocracy valued
continuity of blood . 28 The blatant inversion of social norms performed by
ascetics at the end of the fifth century continued to meet with opposition.
John of Reome left Burgundy for Lerins . 29 He was subsequently recog-
nized, and brought back on the instructions of the bishop of Langres to
his district of origin. There he founded a monastery, but still refused to
have any but the most formal contact with his mother . 30 John, moreover,
is one of those saints who takes us a degree down the social scale — still
within the ranks of property-holders , 31 but no longer within the senatorial
aristocracy. As elsewhere, extreme asceticism throve on an exact contradic-
tion of social norms. Its rejection of family and heirs, which can also be
seen in the sixth-century history of Patroclus of Bourges , 32 and its attempt

20 Harries (1994) 36—47. 21 Sid. Ap. Ep. 2.2, ed. W B. Anderson (London 1936—65).

22 Sid. Ap. Carm. xxii. 23 Harries (1994) 10.

24 Sid. Ap. Ep. 2.94-5. For a study of comparable material in Africa, Thebert (1987) 313—409.

25 Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. 1.14—16, ed. F. Leo, MGH, AA 4 (1) (Berlin 1881).

26 Salv. Timothei ad Ecclesiam Libri //// ed. G. Lagarrigue, SChret. 176 (Paris 1971).

27 Van Uytfanghe (1987) 31,72—4. 28 Matthews (1975) 152—3.

29 Jonas, Vita Iohannis 4, ed. B. Krusch, MGH, SRM 3 (Hanover 1896).

30 Jonas, Vita Iohannis 6; Van Uytfanghe (1987) 31, 74.

31 Jonas, Vita Iohannis 1; Van Uytfanghe (1987) 169.

32 Cf. Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum ix. 1 , ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 1 (2) (Hanover 1885). For a dis-
cussion of later Merovingian examples, Van Uytfanghe (1987) 186—92.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

420

15- FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

to divest itself of family possessions may, therefore, be taken as illustrative
of the normal endorsement of those aspects of aristocratic or propertied
life.

Land could and did pass through both the male and the female line. This
is clear enough at the beginning of the fifth century from the case of
Melania, and more generally from the evidence of the Theodosian Code . 33
It is also implied by what we know of the estates held by the family of
Gregory of Tours in the sixth century. After his father’s death Gregory and
his mother lived on their estates in the Auvergne and Burgundy . 34 The
Auvergnat estates are likely to have come from Gregory’s father, but the
Burgundian lands must have been in the possession of Gregory’s maternal
kin. It is not, therefore, surprising that the evidence suggests that kin
groups were essentially cognatic — that is, that maternal relatives had con-
siderable significance — even if modern reconstructions of family trees
tend to emphasize the paternal line. Indeed, the most famous late Roman
family of all, the Anicii, died out in the male line in the course of the fourth
century, and the name was passed on through the female line . 35 Moreover,
although sixth-century Gallo-Roman families have been accorded such
names as Apollinares, Aviti and Ruricii, there is very little evidence that such
appellations were commonly used in Gaul after the fifth century. While it
is true that patterns of name-giving can be established for various families,
most individuals in the sixth century are referred to by a single name only,
even when they are known to have had more than one. All in all, while it is
often possible to reconstruct a patrilineal gens, this was not the only way of
categorizing the family in the sub-Roman west.

The clearest assessment of matrilineal and patrilineal kin comes from
Sidonius Apollinaris. Writing to his friend Aper he says that ‘In any state-
ment of one’s genealogy the father’s side takes a privileged position; nev-
ertheless, we owe a great deal to our mothers as well; for it is not right that
some slighter honour should be given to the truth that we were our
mother’s burden than to the fact that we are our father’s seed .” 6 Sidonius
goes on to describe Aper as the scion of the families of both his parents,
and celebrated his joint origins in the Auvergne and the Autunois . 37 It was
doubtless easier to present both sides of the family as significant because
of the social status of Aper’s maternal kin. Most aristocrats of the fifth and
sixth century, however, appear to have married within their own social
group. Again, a glance at the genealogies which have been reconstructed
for the period reveals how intertwined were those families about whom

33 C.Th. viii. 1 8 (see also 11.24.2; v.1.5; vm.19.1; ix.14.3; ix.42.1; xvi.5.7), ed. T. Mommsen, 2nd edn
(Berlin 1954). 34 Wood (1994) 8. 35 Demandt (1989) 82.

36 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4. 2 1. 1, trans. Anderson.

37 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.21.2. For Sidonius’ own maternal kin, see Harries (1994) 31; for similar attitudes
already in Pliny, see Garnsey and Sailer (1987) 128, 141.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

421

anything is known . 38 It is perhaps significant that Ennodius does not name
the parents of his nephew Parthenius, since the boy’s mother seems to have
married below her social station . 39 Marriage within a confined social group
seems to have continued to be the norm among the aristocracy for much
of the sixth century. It is clear that both sides of Gregory of Tours’ family
were of the same status, and that he held his maternal and paternal relatives
in equal regard. Among the clerics he revered in his family were a paternal
uncle, Gallus of Clermont , 40 and a maternal uncle, Nicetius of Lyons , 41
each of whom was partially responsible for his upbringing . 42 Gregory, who
was encouraged to write by his mother , 43 offers a very even coverage of
both sides of his family in his Ten Books of Histories, and in his hagiogra-
phy . 44

Gregory provides evidence for numerous generations of his family,
theoretically going as far back, in one case, as the second century . 45 The
letter collections of the fifth and sixth century are not so wide-ranging in
their chronological coverage, although they perhaps give more intimate
insights into attitudes towards the family. Sidonius’ comment on the pater-
nal and maternal kin of Aper might be seen as something of a rhetorical
flourish. Not so his outburst after some peasants had accidentally disturbed
his paternal grandfather’s grave, which led him to horsewhip them, and
then to consider setting up a proper monument . 46 On his own parents he
is remarkably silent, more so than on his father-in-law, although this may
say more about power and patronage than about family structures, since
Avitus was not only Sidonius’ father-in-law but also, briefly, emperor, and
as such, inevitably, Sidonius’ patron . 47 More intimate are Sidonius’ letters
to and about his son Apollinaris, which describe his attempts to provide
him with a literary education, teaching him Terence, and which lament his
failure . 48 These are all the more interesting because the letter collections of
Ruricius and Avitus of Vienne reveal Apollinaris as an arbiter of taste in
the next generation , 49 suggesting that some of Sidonius’ lessons ultimately
did bear fruit.

For Avitus of Vienne, Sidonius, probably his maternal uncle, was Sidonius
meus , 50 For Ruricius of Limoges Sidonius was a more distant relative , 51 but

38 Stroheker (1948); Wood (1992) 10-11.

39 Ennodius xciv, ed. E Vogel, MGH,AA 7 (Berlin 1885). 40 Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vi.

41 Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vm. 42 Van Dam (1993) 52—62.

43 Greg. Tur. Liber de Virtutibus sancti Martini 1 pref., ed. B. Krusch, MGH, SRM 1 (2); Greg. Tur. Hist.
pref., ed. B. Krusch and W. Levison, MGH, SRM 1 (Hanover 1951). 44 Van Dam (1993) 50—81.

45 On Vettius Epagathus, Greg. Tur. Hist. 1.29, 31. On his relationship with Gregory’s family, Greg.
Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vi. 1 . 46 Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.12; Wood (1996). 47 Harries (1994) 31.

48 Sid. Ap. Epp. 4. 1 2.1; 9.1.5. On the significance of literature for the Gallo-Roman aristocracy of
the fifth and sixth century, Mathisen (1993) 105—18.

49 Ruricius, Epp. 2.26.41, ed. B. Krusch, MGH, AA 8 (Berlin 1887); Avitus, Ep. 51, ed. R. Peiper,

MGH,AA 6 (2) (Berlin 1883). 50 Avitus, Ep. 51. On the relationship, Mathisen (1981) 97—100.

51 On the relationship, Mathisen (1981) 101— 3; Stroheker (1948) 209—10.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

422 15 - FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

the association was treasured: he was Sollius noster , 52 suggesting that distant
kin could be worth cultivating, if they were of high enough status or repute.
This is not to say that Ruricius or Avitus were mercenary in their family
affections. Avitus supported Sidonius’ son Apollinaris, in so far as support
was possible, given that they lived in mutually hostile kingdoms. 5 ’ The dis-
memberment of the western empire and the division of Gaul into rival
states during the late fifth and early sixth century could present very con-
siderable problems for those wishing to maintain family ties and old friend-
ships across new borders: the creation of frontiers within the old empire
brought with it a heightening of suspicion and the possibility of treason
accusations — as can be seen not just from the problems faced by Avitus
and Apollinaris, but also by Caesarius in their own generation 54 and
Sidonius Apollinaris a generation earlier . 55

Ruricius’ correspondence does not record such problems. His attach-
ments are at their most apparent in his letters written to Namatius and
Ceraunia, the parents of his daughter-in-law, after the girl’s death. Here the
bishop of Limoges reveals depths of emotion not always apparent in his
often over-literary writings . 56 His lament for the deceased shows some-
thing of his attitude towards the next generation of the family: she was ‘a
solace of life, hope for the future, ornament of the family, joy of the heart,
light of the eyes’. Nor did the family connection end with the girl’s death;
Ruricius continued to correspond with both Ceraunia and Namatius, sep-
arately as well as together . 57 Ennodius of Pavia showed a similar concern
with the next generation. He took a considerable interest in his nephews.
He was concerned about his sister Euprepia, and her son Lupicinus, after
the death of Euprepia’s husband . 58 Following the death of another sister,
he took it upon himself to ensure that her child, Parthenius, had a good
education, recommending him to the great rhetor Deuterius at Rome . 59 In
so doing, Ennodius also provides us with precious information on the sur-
vival of schooling in Rome through to the beginning of the sixth century
— evidence which is complemented for Gaul by Ruricius’ references to the
education of the children of his circle at the hands of the rhetor
Hesperius, 6 " but which contrasts with the home-based education which
Sidonius had given to Apollinaris for at least a part of his upbringing . 61
Ennodius unquestionably had his eye on future generations of his family.
As a childless cleric he obviously had to look beyond his own immediate
descent group; more specifically he was active on behalf of his sisters’ chil-
dren: once again, his actions were those of maternal kin.

52 Ruricius, £/>. 2.26. 53 Avitus, Epp. 24, 36, 51, 52.

54 Vita Caesarii 1. 21 , ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 3 . 55 Sid. Ap. Ep. 9. 3 . 1 ; 9. 5 . 1 .

56 Ruricius, Ep. 2.4. 57 Ruricius, Epp. 2.5, 1 5, 50, 62. 58 Ennodius lxxxiv.

59 Ennodius xciv, ccxxv, cclviii, ccclxix. On the intellectual world of Ennodius see also Kirkby
(1981). 60 Ruricius, Epp. 1.3— 5. 61 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.1 2.1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 423

Apart from the letters addressed to Sidonius’ son, the now fragmentary
letter collection of Avitus also includes letters to his own brother, another
Apollinaris . 62 Clearly the two brothers were extremely close. Equally close
was the relationship between the two brothers and at least one of their two
sisters, even though no correspondence of Avitus to any one of his female
kin survives. In a remarkable letter Apollinaris describes to his brother a
nightmare, in which a blood-red dove appeared to him, something he expe-
rienced after he had forgotten to commemorate the death-date of one of
their sisters . 63 It is a letter which is paralleled by an equally arresting letter
of Ennodius of Pavia, who saw a ghost of his relative Cynegia, which rep-
rimanded him for not composing an epitaph for her tomb, an omission he
instantly remedied . 64 The vision and the ghostly visitation suggest that,
among the senatorial aristocracy, the relationship between the family and
its members drew on much that lay beyond the terms of reference of the
New Testament. Two Christian bishops of the early sixth century were
overcome with guilt in the face of manifestations of their dead relatives.
Their reactions seem to draw on pagan assumptions about ancestral spirits;
Sidonius’ anger at the desecration of his grandfather’s grave might reason-
ably be placed in the same context . 65

The absence or near-absence of letters addressed to women in the letter
collections of Sidonius, Avitus and to a lesser extent Ruricius is worth noting
— though its significance is by no means apparent: letters, after all, are only
likely to cast light on the relationships of those living some distance apart.
Clearly, women were not insignificant to Sidonius, Avitus or Ruricius.
Ruricius’ circle of female correspondents is slightly wider than those of the
other two, though not gready so. Ceraunia he wrote to jointly with her
husband Namatius 66 and separately as a would-be ascetic . 67 He wrote to two
other husband-and-wife teams, Eudomius and Melanthia , 68 and Parthenius
and Papianilla . 69 By contrast, Ennodius corresponded with a number of
women, as well as his sisters. This comparative absence of female correspon-
dents in the collections of Sidonius, Avitus and Ruricius is highlighted not
only by the greater number of female recipients of the writings of Ennodius,
but also by the clear importance of women among the recipients of the
poems of Venantius Fortunatus. In Avitus’ works the absence is, however,
compensated for by one of the great expressions of family piety, the epic
poem the Consolatoria de castitatis laude, which is nothing more nor less that an
exploration of the history of virginity among the bishop’s female relatives . 761
Moreover, these virgins were, in the eyes of the bishop, the outstanding
saints of the family, easily eclipsing the virtues of their male counterparts.

62 Avitus, Epp. 13, 14, 27, 61, 71, 72, 87, 88 . 63 Avitus, Ep. 13; see also 14; Wood (1996).

64 Ennodius ccclxi, ccclxii; Wood (1996). 65 Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.12. 66 Ruricius, Epp. 2.1, 2, 3, 4.

67 Ruricius, Epp. 2.1 5, 50. 68 Ruricius, Ep. 2.39. 69 Ruricius, Ep. 2.37.

70 Avitus, Carm. vi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

424 15 - family and friendship in the west

Through a remarkable religious inversion, virginity, not fecundity, has
become the salvation of the family. Indeed, it may be symptomatic of Avitus’
perspective that we know nothing of one sister who may have had children . 71

Avitus’ poem is not only remarkable for the light it sheds on the bishop’s
family, but also for what it implies about the origins of what have been
called Adelsheiliger, aristocratic saints. The Adelsheiliger are often associated
with the Germanic aristocracy of the late Merovingian and Carolingian
periods . 72 The origins of a concern with saintly relatives must, however,
long antedate this. The Consolatoria de castitatis laude constitutes the most
remarkable hymn to sanctity among the members of a late Roman family.
Moreover, in his concern to commemorate the death-date of his sister,
Apollinaris was intent on celebrating a date which could easily have devel-
oped into a saint’s festival . 73 Nor does Avitus provide the earliest example
of family interest in holy relatives. Sidonius had already noted the impor-
tance of Frontina to Aper’s family . 74

The writings of Gregory of Tours throw complementary light on the
phenomenon of family saints among the aristocracy in the mid to late sixth
century, illuminating the issue through narrative. Not only could Gregory
boast relationship with seventeen previous bishops of Tours , 73 he could
also claim descent from one of the Lyons martyrs of 177, 76 and he por-
trayed as saints his great-grandfather, Gregory of Langres , 77 as well as two
uncles, Gallus of Clermont 78 and Nicetius of Lyons . 79 Although he is
careful to avoid too bald a statement of his relationship with the saints of
his family, it is clear that for Gregory the sanctity of his kin was a matter of
considerable pride and importance. 8 " Few Germanic families of the eighth
or ninth century could boast as many saints as could that of Gregory of
Tours. From the seventh century, only the hagiography relating to Gertrude
of Nivelles seems concerned with the notion of a family saint . 81 For the
seventh-century Pippinids and their descendents, the eighth-century
Carolingians, Gertrude had a significance not unlike that of the female rel-
atives of Avitus of Vienne. In short, the Adelsheiliger, aristocratic saints,
were a development of late Roman family piety — perhaps more specifically
of the piety of the Christian aristocracy of sub-Roman Gaul. They were
not, in origin, Germanic.

In its development of the notion of Adelsheiliger, the Merovingian aristoc-
racy of the seventh and eighth century seems to have drawn on traditions

71 Avitus, Carm. vi lines 19—23 refers to the four children of Audentia: three of them, Avitus,
Apollinaris and Fuscina, are well evidenced in Avitus’ works. 72 Graus (1965); Prinz (1967).

73 Fuscina was indeed remembered as a saint: Vita Fuscinulae , ed. Catalogus codicum hagiographicorum lat-
inorum in Bibliotheca Nationali Parisiensi in (Brussels 1 893) 563—5. 74 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.21.4.

75 Greg. Tur. Hist, v.49; Mathisen (19 84). 76 Greg. Tur. Hist. 1.29.3 1; Liber Vitae Patrum vi 1.

77 Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vii. 78 Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vi.

79 Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum vm. 80 Wood (1994) 36— 46.

81 Vita Geretrudis, ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 2 (Hanover 1888).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 425

already established by the senatorial aristocracy of fifth- and sixth-century
Gaul. In other respects, too, the Germanic family shared much with its
Roman counterparts. At the highest of social levels Germanic and Roman
families even intermarried, despite imperial legislation to the contrary. 82 The
starting-point for an investigation of the Germanic family, however, must be
the codes of the early Germanic kingdoms. At least four of these antedate
the mid sixth century, among them the Frankish Pactus Legis Salicae, whose
first recension seems to have originated in the years prior to 507, 83 and the
Liber Constitutionum of the Burgundians, issued in 517. 84 The codes them-
selves are deeply influenced by Roman law, 85 but on the other hand there is
no reason to believe that the picture given of the Germanic family is any-
thing other than accurate. In general, the laws define a system of kinship
dominated by men and by paternal kin, but not exclusively so — to see the
system as agnatic does not reflect the full range of the evidence, which
implies a cognatic pattern of kinship, and often the dominance of the
nuclear family. 86 Certainly, within the Frankish context there was a type of
land defined as Salic land, which could only be inherited by males. 87 There
were, however, other types of property, including land, which could be
inherited by females. 88 Further, the special status of Salic land was removed
by Chilperic I in the second half of the sixth century. 89 It is, in fact, likely that
this land was not of a type traditional among Germanic peoples, but was
rather land which was in origin associated with the military arrangements of
the later Roman empire, and thus necessarily confined to males. 9(1

Inheritance patterns, even among the Franks, do not, therefore, imply a
simple patrilineal society. Early-sixth-century Germanic legislation relating
to sexual intercourse, on the other hand, suggests rather more indulgence
towards male than towards female sexuality. For a Frankish male to have
sex with his own female servant was apparently not frowned upon,
although sex with someone else’s female servant incurred a hefty fine, 91 and
a man who married the female slave of another was supposed to be
reduced to servitude. 92 Even the status of the offspring of a king could be
questioned if the mother was a slave. When Guntram had a son by the slave
girl Marcatrude, Sagittarius, bishop of Gap, perhaps following Roman
rather than Frankish law, seems to have claimed that the child was the prop-
erty of the girl’s master. 93 Not that Roman and Germanic law necessarily
differed greatly over the issue of intercourse between slaves and free.
Constantine ordered a free woman cohabiting with a slave to be executed

82 Demandt (1989) 76—80 for the contrary legislation of C.Th. 111.14.1 and its Germanic derivatives.

83 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 108—13.

84 Wood (1986) 10; the two other codes are the Code of Euric and the Edictum Theodorici.

85 Wormald (1977). 86 Murray (1983); see also Ausenda (1995).

87 PLS 59, 6, ed. Eckhardt (1962). 88 PLS 59,1—5. 89 PLS 108. 90 Anderson (1995).

91 PZJ’35,1— 2. 92 PLS 13,9.

93 Greg. Tur. Hist, v.20; C.Th. iv.6.3; iv.6.7; iv.8.7: xii.19.1; see also PLS 13, 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

426 15- FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

and her partner burnt . 94 In both the Frankish and the Burgundian king-
doms intercourse between a male slave and a free woman was also regarded
as heinous: among the Burgundians, if the woman had not consented to
having sex, the slave was to be killed; if she did consent, both were to die. 9 ’’

In most instances, but not in all, the woman was less free in sexual
matters than the male. This does not mean, however, that women were less
important to the family line than were males. Indeed, one might argue that
the need for them to confine their sexual activity only emphasizes their cen-
trality to the family and the descent group, which depended upon their
sexual purity. This is clear from the importance accorded to virginity at the
time of marriage, and from the morgengab owed by the husband to his wife
on taking that virginity . 96 It is also clear from the value placed on nubile and
pregnant women in the law codes . 97 It is clearest of all in the alarm caused
by the circulation of slurs directed against the virtue of Chilperic I’s queen,
Fredegund, slurs which necessarily called into question the legitimacy of
the king’s heirs . 98 From a legal point of view, women were thought of pri-
marily as wives and mothers . 99 Among the Burgundians, a woman who left
her husband, apparently as an act of divorce, was smothered in mire . 1 " 11 In
the seventh century, however, women of the Merovingian kingdom had a
little more say than is apparent in the early law codes. Legal formulae, many
of which were based on Roman law but which seem to have served gener-
ally as models for regional communities within the Romanized areas of the
Frankish kingdom, recognized the possibility of divorce by mutual
consent . 1 " 1 Also in the early seventh century, Chlothar II explicitly
acknowledged that a woman might refuse to marry if she desired to follow
the religious life . 102 In certain limited respects Germanic women had
gained some of the rights of their male counterparts.

At the highest level of Germanic society the queen was always a figure
of considerable importance, and not simply as the recipient of the sperm
of the royal male. On a number of occasions in the late sixth and seventh
century the person of the queen seems to have been crucial to the succes-
sion: this can be argued for Goiswinth among the Visigoths , 103 Gundiperga
among the Lombards 104 and Bilichildis among the Franks . 105 Nor was it

94 C.Th. ix. 9.1; see also iv.12.1, 3—7 where the woman is enslaved.

95 PLS 13, 7—8; Liber Constitutionum xxxv, 1—2, ed. L. R. de Salis, Leges Burgundionutn , MGH , Leges 2
(1) (Hanover 1 892). It seems that this legislation was expected to apply to the whole population of the
kingdom, both Germanic and Roman: Wood (1986) 1 1.

96 PLS 13, 1 4; Liber Constitutionum xxiv, 1. 97 PLS 6 ~/ e. 98 Wood (1993b) 257—9.

99 For a general exploration of these issues see Stafford (1983); Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 1 20—39.

100 Liber Constitutionum xxxiv, 1.

101 Marculf, Formulae 11.30, ed. K. Zeumer, MGH , Formulae Merowingici etKaroliniA.evi (Hanover 1886);
Formulae Turonenses 19, ed. Zeumer.

102 Chlothar II, Edictum 1 8, ed. A. Boretius, MGH , Capitularia Regum Francorum 1 (Hanover 1883).

103 Nelson (1991) 469. 104 Fredegar, iv.50, 51, 70, ed. B. Krusch, MGH, SRM 2 (Hanover 1888).

105 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 223.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

427

only at the royal level that descent could be seen in female terms. In the
early eighth century, bishop Hugo of Rouen, although the son of a
Pippinid male, was remembered as the descendant of his maternal grand-
mother, Anstrude . 106 Nevertheless, a queen’s power depended largely on
her association with a living king, whether as wife or as mother — it was this
association which provided her with her opportunities. When her husband
died, or her son ceased to be dependent on her, she was very nearly pow-
erless. The importance of royal or aristocratic women was not, however,
simply biological. Much of a queen’s influence was related to her control
of the royal household, as well as her role in the provision of a king’s
heirs; 10, in short, she was responsible for the continuity of the royal family
and for its possessions. Traditionally, at least, women were also thought of
as the guardians of the family’s status in another sense: they are often
depicted as the forces driving men towards the blood-feud, whether or not
this was actually the case . 108 By contrast, they could help to preserve the
peace through the role they played in marriage alliances . 109 As we have seen,
they would also come to play a substantial role in another aspect of family
status, its holiness.

While the significance of women within the family was rather more than
might seem implied by certain laws, the position of men was rather more
constrained than might be assumed. Essentially what was at issue was the
protection of family and household units. These were not challenged when
a man had sex with his own slaves, but they were in almost every other
sexual act outside the marriage bed. Legislation against adultery was, there-
fore, ferocious: in the Burgundian kingdom adulterers caught in the act
were to be killed ; 110 among the Franks rape of a betrothed girl elicited a
heavy fine , 111 while the adulterous association of a man and a woman
whose husband was still living was treated on a par with murder, and also
incurred a heavy financial composition . 1 12 In other words, the law cham-
pioned the family rather than any individual — male or female — within it.

This did not, however, limit the sexual unions of the early Merovingians.
The main point of doubt is whether the Frankish royal family practised
serial monogamy, polygamy or concubinage. This in its turn is linked to the
question of whether the Merovingians made a distinction between mar-
riage and informal liaisons. Some kings, like Sigibert I , 113 seem to have
taken marriage very seriously. Others went in for a succession of liaisons,
and this had an impact on the question of inheritance. Could the offspring

106 Ibid. 261. 107 Stafford (1983) 93—114, 143—65.

108 E.g. Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.6; see Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 43.

109 For Theoderic’s marriage alliances, Procop. Wars v.i 2.21— 2, ed. and trans. H. B. Dewing (London
1914— 28); A.non. Valesianus 11.63, 68, 70, ed. J. Moreau, Excerpta Valesiana (Leip2ig 1961); Jord. Get. 58
(297—9), ed. T. Mommsen, MGH, AA 5 (Berlin 1882).

110 Eiber Constitutionum lxviii, 1 ; compare Eiber Constitutionum xliv. 111 PES 13,14.

112 PLS 15,1. 113 Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.27.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

428 15 - FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

of a king and a slave girl be regarded as royal? Gregory of Tours appears
to have thought so, but Sagittarius disagreed — and he certainly had the law
on his side. 114 Not all kings, however, wanted to acknowledge their
offspring: Chlothar I denied, probably falsely, that he was the father of
Gundovald. 115

A mere glance at the royal genealogy reveals that a string of liaisons with
women of all classes was the norm for most Merovingian kings. They
indulged in nothing like the social snobbery of the Gallo-Roman aristoc-
racy. Among the wives of the sixth-century Merovingians were foreign
princesses 116 and the daughters of a wool carder. 117 In the case of
Theudebert I, he associated with Deuteria, despite the fact that she was
already the wife of a Gallo-Roman aristocrat. Although he was persuaded
to set her aside for a while, it was ultimately her decision to arrange the
death of her own daughter, who she thought might prove too appealing to
the king’s eye, that finally ended the relationship. 118

There is little to suggest that Tacitus’ view of the sexual purity of the
early Germans held true in the sixth century, despite the savagery of the
laws against divorce and against the intercourse of woman and slave.
Although the Franks, or more particularly the kings of the Franks, provide
the worst examples of excess, there are examples from other classes and
other peoples as well. Among the most interesting cases is one recorded in
the Liber Constitutionum of the Burgundians, concerning Aunegild and
Balthamod. 119 Aunegild, a widow, was betrothed with the consent of her
parents to the king’s sword-bearer, Fredegisil, but, even after receiving her
bride-price, she fell for Balthamod and regularly had intercourse with him.
The crime was thought worthy of death, but since the case was judged at
Easter — the very Easter court of 517 at which the Liber Constitutionum of
the Burgundians was issued — leniency was granted, and Aunegild had to
pay her blood-price to Fredegisil, while Balthamod had equally to pay his
wergild unless he could prove that he was unaware that the woman was
already betrothed. Not that such behaviour should be seen as the preserve
of the Germanic peoples. In his Histories Gregory of Tours records the
long, and not very salubrious, story of a Gallo-Roman pair, Eulalius and
Tetradia — a story which involved adultery, elopement and finally murder. 120

For all this, there are examples of very genuine affection within the fam-
ilies of the Germanic kings of the late fifth and early sixth century. Both
Avitus of Vienne and Remigius of Rheims had occasion to write letters of
condolence to their respective rulers. Avitus addressed the Burgundian
king, Gundobad, in somewhat brutal terms, insisting that his daughter was

114 Greg. Tur. Hist, v.20. 115 Greg. Tur. Hist, vi.24; Wood (1993b) 264; Bachrach (1994) 6—8.

116 For Chlothild, Galswinth, Brunhild, see Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.28; iv.27— 8.

117 Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.26. 118 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.26. 119 Liber Constitutionum lii.

120 Greg. Tur. Hist. x.8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 429

destined for heaven, whilst brusquely telling the king to turn his mind back
to the matter of government . 121 So, too, Remigius counselled the Frankish
king, Clovis, against excessive grief following the death of a sister, and
reminded him of the necessity of ruling . 122 Perhaps unexpectedly,
Germanic kings of the migration period were genuinely overcome with
grief at the loss of close female relatives. Nor is it only the grief of kings
about their womenfolk that is recorded in the sources: Radegund’s sorrow
at the death of her cousin, Amalfred, in far-away Byzantium is preserved
in a poem of Venantius Fortunatus , 123 while Brunhild’s concerns for her
daughter, Ingund, and her grandson, Athanagild, who also died in
Byzantine territory, are the subject of numerous letters . 124

Clovis’ concern for his family involved more than his immediate kin —
though it did not extend to distant cousins . 125 His attitude towards his
ancestors seems to have been a factor in his initial unwillingness to convert
to Catholicism. Avitus of Vienne congratulated him on abandoning their
beliefs . 126 The bishop’s positive comments suggest that Clovis had reserva-
tions about abandoning his predecessors much as Radbod, king of the
Frisians, is said to have done in the eighth century: on hearing that they
would remain in hell while he would be welcomed to heaven, Radbod opted
for their company, according to a somewhat picaresque story, which cannot
be historically accurate in its current form, but which may reflect a genuine
dilemma for Germanic peoples on the verge of Christianity . 127 Oddly
enough, having abandoned the religion of his father, Childeric, Clovis and
his successors seem quickly to have forgotten the exact whereabouts of
Childeric’s grave 128 — which contrasts rather sharply with Sidonius’ concern
for the burial place of his grandfather. It is all the more remarkable in that
feasts at the graves of the dead were a continuing problem for those intent
on the Christianization of the Germanic peoples — suggesting that the
grave and continuing rituals associated with it were a central focus even for
the non-aristocratic family . 129

Comparison between the Roman and the Germanic family, at least at the
highest level of society, does not suggest a simple contrast between
complex Roman structures and clear-cut, agnatic, Germanic structures.
This is true even if one considers a practice supposedly central to the kin-
based structures of Germanic society and, one might assume, absent from
a society ordered by the rational processes of Roman law: the feud. The
feud could be, as has long been recognized, a force for order rather than

121 Avitus, Ep. 5. 122 Epist. Austras. i, ed. W. Gundlach, MGH, Epistolae 3 (Berlin 1892).

123 Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. Ad Artachin (Appendix hi).

124 Epist. Austras. 27, 28, 43, 44, 45. 125 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.42. 126 Avitus, Ep. 46.

127 Vita Vuljramni 9, ed. W. Levison, MGH , SRM 5 (Hanover 1910); Lebecq (1994).

128 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 44. The fact that a church of St Brice was later built in the neighbour-
hood may, however, indicate that some tradition of Merovingian association with the cemetery
remained. 129 Concilium Germanicum 5, ed. A. Werminghoff, MGH , Concilia 2 (Hanover 1906—8).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

43° 15- FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

for chaos. It was in the interests of the kin-group not to lay itself open to
the possibility of retaliation for killing, and therefore to encourage and
support an offer of financial compensation. 130 Perhaps the relative absence
of stories relating to the feud are an indication of the success of the mere
threat of retaliation. On the other hand, those examples of feud known
from the fifth and sixth century do not suggest that the feud, when it did
break out, was prosecuted on a vast scale, involving a widespread kin-
group.

The two most eye-catching feuds of the sixth century may not have been
feuds at all. The idea that the Frankish destruction of the Burgundian
kingdom in the 520s and 5 30s resulted entirely from a deep-seated grudge
held by queen Chlothild against her cousin Sigismund and, more particu-
larly, her uncle Gundobad, whom she blamed for her father’s death, is an
idea which is scarcely sustained by events, even though the interpretation
was first set out in the early Middle Ages. 131 Nor is there any early evidence
for thinking that much of the political unrest of the second half of the
sixth century resulted from queen Brunhild’s desire to avenge herself on
Chilperic, who had murdered her sister Galswinth, in order to return to his
liaison with Fredegund. 132 Both these interpretations may have more to do
with the gradual recasting of history as epic than with the realities of sixth-
century politics.

There are, however, two very much more squalid tales which might be
seen as illustrative of the reality of the blood-feud. The better-known of
them is that of Chramnesind and Sichar. In fact, Chramnesind’s family was
not involved in the earliest stages of the conflict, which began with the
murder by an unnamed man of the servant of a friend of Sichar. When
Sichar attempted to take vengeance, he was met by Austregisl, who lulled
four of his servants. At this point the case went to law and Austregisl had
to hand over for safe-keeping the gold and silver taken in the course of the
conflict. It was only at this stage that Chramnesind’s family became
involved, and in the first instance merely as safe -keepers of the gold. Sichar,
however, was determined to get the treasure back before the case went to
court, and did so, lulling the father, uncle and brother of Chramnesind in
the process. Gregory of Tours, as the local bishop, then intervened with
offers of compensation, which Chramnesind rejected, until a further
attempt had been made on Sichar’s life and more of his servants had been
lulled. Thereafter Sichar and Chramnesind became friends. It was not until
Sichar, in his cups, insulted Chramnesind, by pointing out how much his
friend had gained financially out of his father’s murder, that the latter felt
obliged to take revenge. 133 This is no clear-cut feud, with well-defined

130 Wallace-Hadrill (1962) 125—6. 131 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 43. 132 Ibid 127.

133 Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.47; ix.19.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 43 I

groups of kin lined up on either side. Such feuding as there is is inextricable
from the failed attempts to deal with the conflict through the normal
process of the courts. Innocent bystanders get dragged into the mayhem,
and the most numerous casualties are the servants, whom even Gregory of
Tours seems to have seen as expendable. In the final stages it is a tale of
compensation, drunkenness and hurt pride.

There is a second story which might equally have been cast as a tale of
feud. The archdeacon of Langres, Peter, was thought to have been respon-
sible for the death of the bishop-elect of the diocese, Tetricus. As a result,
Tetricus’ son, Silvester, murdered the archdeacon . 134 This second story is
never described as a story of feud, for it concerns Gallo-Romans: Peter was
the brother of Gregory of Tours; moreover, the conflict was confined to
a single kin-group, for both Silvester and Peter were relatives of Tetricus.
It is, nevertheless, a story of kinship-based vengeance. Indeed, conflicts
were as likely to take place within kin-groups as between hostile families, as
can be seen easily enough from the history of the Merovingians them-
selves. By the mid sixth century the family-orientated behaviour of the
Gallo-Romans was not necessarily different from that of their Germanic
counterparts.

However different Frankish and Gallo-Roman family structures may
once have been, they were increasingly bound by the same law. Incest leg-
islation, in particular, affected both groups equally. As defined by secular
sources, incest could include marriage to a distant cousin 136 or even to ‘con-
sanguineous relatives’ tout court } 1 ’ 1 By the end of the sixth century the pun-
ishment for such a marriage was death. It was not only secular legislation,
however, which impinged. The church canons, and more particularly the
canons of councils held within the Burgundian and Frankish kingdoms,
dealt regularly with incest . 138 In this the Gallic church was strikingly more
determined than other churches of the period.

The legislation scarcely had any impact on the Merovingian family itself.
In our narrative sources, which cover the highest levels of society, incest is
rarely identified as a problem: there is only one case of marriage between
cousins in the Merovingian kingdom, and that took place in the mid
seventh century for political reasons . 1 j9 The liaisons of Chlothar I first with
Ingund and then, concomitantly, with her sister, Aregund, ought to have
been branded as incest, but if they were, the condemnation scarcely

134 Greg. Tur. Hist. v. 5 .

135 p or comments on the absence of real distinction between the civilized and the uncivilized,

Goffart (1988) 212. 136 PLS 13 6, 11.

137 PLS , capitulare 6, 1,2; compare Liber Constitutionum xxxvi.

138 Orleans (5 1 1) c. 18; Epaon (517) c. 30; Lyons (518—23) c. 1; Orleans (533) c. 10; Clermont (535)

c. 12; Orleans (538) c. 11; Paris (556—73) c. 4; Auxerre (561—605) c. 27—32; Tours (567) c. 22; Macon
(581—3) c. 1 1; Lyons (5 83) c. 4; Macon (5 85) c. 1 8; Paris (614) c. 16; Clichy (626—7) c. 10, ed. C. de Clercq,
Concilia Galliae A.jii—A.. 69 j, CCSL 148A (Turnhout 1963). 139 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 223.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

4J2 i5- family and friendship in the west

affected that uxorious monarch. 14 " The one case of incest which caused a
religious and political crisis was the marriage of Stephanus to Palladia, the
sister of his dead wife, shortly after 518. Stephanus, who was presumably a
Gallo-Roman, was the treasurer of the Burgundian king Sigismund, whose
decision to support his treasurer led to a withdrawal of co-operation from
his bishops. 141 It may be significant that the case followed shortly after the
council of Epaon, the council which saw the first detailed legislation

149

against incest.

Although it was a Gallo-Roman official who fell foul of this legislation
at the council of Lyons, it is likely to have been at the lowest end of the
social scale that the canons caused most difficulties. The upper classes of
late and sub-Roman Gaul had contacts over a wide region, and marriage
outside their immediate kin can have presented few problems. Among the
lower orders of society, marriage outside a confined geographical area or
social group would have been almost impossible — it may well not have
been desirable, if families wanted to keep the few possessions they had
within a closed circle. As a result, they are likely to have been affected by
incest legislation more consistently than their masters. 14 ’ In the course of
the early Middle Ages, the church defined and redefined what constituted
the prohibited degrees of marriage. Whether one accepts that this was part
of a deliberate policy developed by the church 144 or whether one sees it as
a rather less calculated attempt to define marital purity, the net result is
likely to have made legal marriage in small communities more and more
difficult.

The chief division in family practice in the fifth and sixth century is,
therefore, less likely to have lain between Roman and Germanic — despite
all the individual quirks of the senatorial aristocracy or of the Merovingians
— than between the relatively closed worlds of village or peasant life and
the very much more open world of royalty and the aristocracy. The pea-
santry had limited geographical horizons and a very small array of strate-
gies for preserving their land and property. At the upper level of society the
horizons were much wider, and the strategies available more numerous.

In considering the family of the monarch and the aristocracy it would be
wrong to concentrate solely on the bonds of marriage. The familia included
the whole household, and it also spilt over into the world of clientship. In
the Roman world the clientela of an aristocrat was central to his status.
Because the carrying of arms was legally restricted before the fifth century,
this clientela was necessarily civilian. The practice of civilian patronage con-
tinued throughout the fifth and sixth century — Ruricius and other
members of his circle made great play of addressing those of their fellows

140 Greg. Tur. Hist. iv.3. 141 Council of Lyons (518— 23) c. 1.

142 Epaon (517) c. 30. It should be noted that Agde (506) c. 61 was thought by Munier to be an inter-
polation, COL 148. 143 Rouche (1987) 470-1. 144 Goody (1983) 134— 46.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 433

who had helped them in any way as patronus , 145 and it can be seen more seri-
ously in the letters of recommendation written by Sidonius 146 and
Avitus. 147 Bishops played an increasingly important role as patrons in the
fifth and sixth century. 148 The career of Venantius Fortunatus in the mid
sixth century depended on patronage: it was for his patrons that he, as a
foreigner without personal status and with no kin to protect him, wrote the
majority of his earlier poems. 149 Such support might easily have been exer-
cised by the senatorial aristocracy of the fourth century.

In other respects patterns of patronage changed in the fifth and sixth
century, most notably with the militarization of society. It would have been
legally impossible for a Roman aristocrat of the fourth century to have
gathered the private following which Sidonius’ brother-in-law Ecdicius put
together to relieve the Visigothic siege of Clermont, even if it numbered
only eighteen men. 150 Such a force must have been raised from tenants on
Ecdicius’ own estates and from others indebted to him in one way or
another. The private followings of such Gallo-Romans as Mummolus who
feature in the pages of Gregory of Tours 131 must likewise have been com-
posed of clients of one sort or another. Nor is it possible to distinguish
between the military following of a Gallo-Roman like Mummolus and that
of a Frank like Rauching. 152 In part, this is a question of evidence: no detail
survives to help us understand the recruitment of private armies. Precious
little, indeed, survives to illuminate the recruitment of the personal follow-
ing of a king, his antrustiones, though the Frankish king Theudebert I is seen
offering money to potential followers after the death of his father,
Theuderic I, in 5 3 3. 153 Despite the lacunae in our evidence it is not difficult
to see in these developments parallels between the exclusively civilian
bonds of clientship of the Roman period and the military bonds of fidelitas
of later periods.

Clientship evolved in the face of the military changes which beset the
west during the fifth and sixth century. Patronal relations were also affected
by religious developments, and not just at the etherial level of the relation-
ship between a patron saint and his congregation. 154 In the course of the
sixth century baptismal sponsors appear in our narrative sources. Gregory
of Tours forgave Eberulf because he was godfather to the man’s son. 155
Guntram Boso sought protection from bishop Ageric of Verdun, thinking
that he had special influence as godfather to the king. 156 Queen Brunhild
offered clemency to Berthefred on the grounds that she was his daughter’s
godmother. 157 In 6 1 3 Chlothar II spared his godson Merovech, while killing

145 See for example Ruricius Epp. i.i, 2, 7, 8, 9, etc. See also Faustus, Epp. 7, 8, 14, ed. B. Krusch,
MGH,AA 8. 146 E.g. Sid. Ap. Ep. 6.4. 147 Avitus, Ep. 11. 148 Mathisen (1993) 93-7.

149 George (1992) 22—34. 150 Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.3, 3. 151 Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.38.

152 Greg. Tur. Hist. vm. 26. 153 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.23. 154 E.g. Brown (1996) 64.

155 Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.22. 156 Greg. Tur. Hist. ix.8. 157 Greg. Tur. Hist. ix.9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

434 1 5 • FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

the boy’s brothers . 158 In seventh-century England baptismal sponsorship
came to play a very significant role in power politics . 159 In sixth-century
Francia it had not been so fully exploited, but Guntram made a point of
standing as baptismal sponsor to his nephew, Chlothar II . 160 Baptismal rela-
tionships, however, were not always open to manipulation, for increasingly
in the eighth century they were subjected to the laws of incest, alongside
relationships determined by blood or marriage . 161

Parallel to patronage, which was the bond between those of unequal
status, there was friendship, essentially the bond between those of equal
status. The one could draw on the ideology of the other, as in the descrip-
tion of a long-established friend as patronus. The majority of our evidence
for late Roman and for early medieval friendship comes, as does our evi-
dence for affection within the family group, from the letter collections of
the period. The letters of Symmachus provide one model for the under-
standing of friendship in the fourth century ; 162 those of Sidonius, Ruricius,
Avitus and Ennodius are models for the late fifth and early sixth century . 163
As a pagan, Symmachus’ approach to friendship was necessarily, if only
subtly, different from that of the Christian letter-writers. Central here was
the use of the term caritas, with its Christian resonance, alongside the tra-
ditional amicitia. Perhaps especially significant in the evolution of this
Christian friendship was Paulinus of Nola . 164

The Christianization of friendship, however, went deeper than the intro-
duction of a Christian vocabulary. Friendship depended on the meeting, or
even joining, of two souls , 165 and the soul was definitely within the field of
theological speculation. The most sophisticated theological debate to have
taken place in Gaul in the fifth century concerned the nature of the soul. An
anonymous letter, actually written by Faustus of Riez, argued for the soul’s
corporeality . 166 Sidonius Apollinaris, not realizing that the letter was by his
old mentor Faustus, asked Claudianus Mamertus, brother of the bishop of
Vienne, to consider the argument : 167 Claudianus replied with the De statu
animae , arguing for the incorporeality of the soul . 168 Although the argument
between Faustus and Claudianus is not couched in terms of an exploration
of friendship, the question of whether the soul was or was not corporeal
necessarily had implications for the contemporary understanding of the
working of friendship. In the letters of Avitus and Ruricius, the souls of
friends often overcome physical separation in one way or another . 169 It is not,

158 Fredegar iv.42, ed. B. Krusch, MGH, SRM 2 (Hanover 1888).

159 Angenendt (1986); more generally, Angenendt (1984). 160 Greg. Tur. Hist, vm.9; x.28.

161 Lynch (1986) 219-57. 162 Matthews (1974). 163 Wood (1993a).

164 Fabre (1949); see also White (1992) 146—63. 165 See for example Ruricius, Epp. 1.1; 2.10, 52.

166 Faustus, Ep. 20.

167 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.2; Claudianus Mamertus, De Statu Animae , praef., ed. A. Engelbrecht, CSEL xi

(Vienna 1885). 168 On the debate, Fortin (1959).

169 E.g. Ruricius, Epp. 1.6, 9, 10, 18; 2.1, 2, 3, 4, 10, 32, 52; Avitus, Epp. 50, 52, 77, 78, 79, 93.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST 435

therefore, surprising that this, the most original theological debate of fifth-
century Gaul, should have emerged from the literary circle of Sidonius —
both Faustus and Claudianus were his correspondents — which throve on the
exercise of friendship, expressed through the medium of letters.

Nor was the debate over the soul the only point where theology and
friendship overlapped. Pope Gelasius also drew on notions of friendship
when comparing the bonds that bound the orthodox and those that bound
the heretics. Between the orthodox the bond of friendship, amicitia , could
rightly be described as Cantus', relations with the heretics ought to be rela-
tions of hatred, odium, for their friendship was like a disease, contagium , 170
Friendship was, therefore, not just a pleasurable adjunct to Christian life,
but central to it — just as it had been for the senatorial aristocracy of the
Roman empire , 171 only now it regularly had a religious colouring.

As in the case of Symmachus and his friends, the exercise of friendship
through correspondence continued to be central to the cohesion of a par-
ticular class. The cultivation of bonds of friendship was as important as the
exploitation of family ties to the survival of the senatorial class of late
antique Gaul. In Sidonius’ case this can be seen in his careful lobbying of
friends during his exile, making sure that he had allies at the court of
Euric . 172 Indeed, friendship may well have played a more vital role in the
crises of the fifth century than it had done before, since the very survival
of a class and a social structure might have been in question. It is not, there-
fore, surprising that Gallo-Roman letter-writers of the sixth century came
to include Germanic magnates, and even kings, among their correspon-
dents. These new arrivals could not be ignored even by the senatorial aris-
tocracy. Already by the early years of the sixth century Avitus of Vienne
was in correspondence with Gundobad, and not merely on purely formal
issues . 173 He would subsequently correspond on yet more friendly terms
with Gundobad’s son Sigismund . 174 Remigius of Rheims corresponded
with Clovis . 175 Remigius’ letters survive in a collection put together in the
east Frankish court, probably at the end of the sixth century, and the col-
lection, the Epistolae Austrasiacae, may have been used as a manual of model
correspondence, as may have been the case also with the letters of Avitus
and Ruricius . 176 Among the Epistolae Austrasiacae are letters from members
of the Germanic aristocracy as well as from Gallo-Roman bishops . 177 Also
writing in the late sixth century, Venantius Fortunatus further elaborated
the cult of friendship in his verse-letters to his patrons, to Gallo-Roman
and Germanic aristocrats, and to members of the royal family. He needed

170 Gelasius, Ep. 7, 4, ed. A. Thiel, Epistolae Romanorum Pontificum Genuinae (Brunsberg 1868); see also
Wood (1993a) 35—6. 171 Matthews (1974). 172 Sid. Ap. Epp. 4.22; 8.3; 8.9.

173 Avitus, Ep. 5. 174 Avitus, Epp. 23, 31, 32, 45, 49, 76, 77, 79, 91, 92.

175 Epist. Austras. 1—2. 176 Wood (1993a) 40.

177 See the letters of the regent Gogo, Epist. Austras. 13, 16, 22, 48.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

436 15. FAMILY AND FRIENDSHIP IN THE WEST

their patronage, but he also gave the cult of friendship a particular twist,
through his use of verse, and through his penchant for the word dulcedo,
which he sometimes used as an alternative to amcitia or caritas , 178 Moreover,
the tradition of amicitia exercised through letters continued into the seventh
century, down to the correspondence of Desiderius of Cahors, where
friendship still provided the cement holding together a peer group, now
scattered throughout the Merovingian kingdom, and away from the royal

170

court.

Friendship worked alongside the family and indeed helped to preserve
the social influence of the family at the upper ends of society. Its networks
came to include the new Germanic aristocracy of the fifth and sixth
century, and even royal families. It was part of the process of social amal-
gamation which took place in the sub-Roman period. On the other hand,
this social amalgamation may not have been as major a shift as one might
have expected. There were enough points in common between the leading
Germanic families and their Gallo-Roman counterparts to facilitate mutual
understanding — and despite the senatorial aristocracy’s social pretensions,
even marriage and other liaisons between the two groups followed. At a
royal, and thus in some respects atypical, level, the marriage of Galla
Placidia and Athaulf provided an early model , 180 the association of
Theudebert and Deuteria a later, more sexually-charged example. For both
groups the realities of survival and accommodation were more important
than any abstract structure of kinship which may once have provided a
norm. At its most revealing the evidence takes the reader into a world of
real emotions, whether grief, friendship or simple lust, showing that they
could be as important as many of the social traditions which made up the
notion of family during the transitional period from empire to successor
states.

178 Not that Fortunatus was the first person to use dulcedo in this way: see, for example, Ruricius, Epp.
1. 18; 2.37 . See Curtius (1953) 412—13. 179 Wood (1993a) 42.

180 For a fuller study of such marriages, Demandt (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 16

STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE
WEST (c. A.D. 400 - 600 )

PETER HEATHER

This chapter will examine some of the overlapping groups — communities
— in which individuals acted for different purposes, and the transformation
of these communities, in the period c. 400—600. It is focused on the west,
because it was here that the greatest changes in our period took place, and
where there was least continuity through imperial institutions such as the
army and administration. The chapter draws on, and is intended to reflect,
recent work on the social history of the early medieval period, and exam-
ines both horizontal ties, bonds between relatively equal peer groups, and
vertical ties, such as those of patronage and support between lord and fol-
lower. 1 It is divided into two parts. The first section focuses on the different
sense of community operating at the level of the political centre: the
Roman empire as a whole and the kingdoms which succeeded it. The spot-
light is then transferred to more local communities. The two types of com-
munity are, of course, closely linked. An overall theme of the whole essay,
indeed, is that socio-political transformations at the centre had profound
effects upon the construction of local community, and vice versa.

I. THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

In c. 400, western Europe was dominated by the Roman empire. Britain
south of Hadrian’s Wall, France, the Iberian peninsula, the Benelux coun-
tries, Italy and much of Germany and Austria were under its direct rule.
Roman power also loomed over the empire’s neighbours. By c. 600, this
European superstate had given way to a series of far from stable successor
states: kingdoms built around Franks and Burgundians in France and
Benelux, Visigoths and Sueves south of the Pyrenees, Ostrogoths and
Lombards in Italy, Anglo-Saxons in southern and eastern Britain. The first
half of this essay is concerned with the transformations in political
economy which accompanied this fundamental revolution in European
history. How did these new kingdoms compare, as states, to their Roman

1 It is also byway of an essay: a first attempt at descriptive analysis rather than an authoritative treat-
ment, which makes no claim to comprehensive knowledge of the relevant literature.

437

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

438 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

predecessor, and how had they generated political boundaries in the minds
of their subjects, where previously there had been none?

1 . Imperial heritage

In the late Roman empire, central government was exercised from central
imperial courts, 2 local government from civitas capitals: urban centres con-
trolling dependent rural hinterlands. Situated between court and civitas were
regional administrative centres — praetorian prefectures, sometimes in their
own capitals — and a non-uniform range of assemblies, from provincial
level upwards, in which local elites would periodically gather. From c. 400,
two regional forums had particular importance in the west: the Gallic
council in Arles and the Roman senate in Italy. 3

The fourth century had seen the ever tighter linking of these levels, both
formally and informally. Traditionally, cities had been governed by councils
of city landowners: decurions or curials. From the third century onwards,
however, curials tended to graduate to imperial bureaucratic service,
leaving many fewer decurions available to undertake the numerous tasks
which the imperial authorities continued to assign to local councils. The
new imperial bureaucracy which thus had emerged by c. 400 a.d. made
Roman emperors powerful on two levels. It gathered and processed infor-
mation, and wrote legislation, redistributing large amounts of wealth, and
making much of the empire operate as some kind of a unity. It was also a
patronage machine. By c. 400 a.d., around 3,000 very good bureaucratic
jobs (those leading to senatorial status) existed in each half of empire, and
the total size of the bureaucracy was around 24,000. The system also
encompassed long waiting-lists for established posts and ever decreasing
lengths of service; both these features maximized the number of jobs avail-
able.

Bureaucratic numbers largely increased through consumer demand. In
the fourth century, it was increasingly in central government, rather than
cities, that money was to be made, and bureaucratic service also brought in
its wake senatorial status and a series of other rights and privileges. By 400,
these honours defined a class of retired imperial servants — honorati — who
constituted a new local elite, whose dominance depended precisely on par-
ticipation in central structures of the empire. 4 The political communities
generated around this changing structure were complex. Local pre-emi-
nence demanded that western landowners made efforts to become honorati.
Those who failed might fall into a second grade of local landowner. The

2 From the time of Valentinian and Valens (364) two imperial courts became the norm: an eastern
one at Constantinople, and a western at Trier or Milan, and later Ravenna.

3 General survey: Jones, LRE chs. 1 1, 19. For a more political treatment, Heather (1998).

4 In more detail, Heather (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

439

peers of the honorati were to be found to some extent among the other fam-
ilies of their civitas who had responded to the new challenges, but for the
most part at the regional level. Contact between such men might be estab-
lished during the phase of life spent in imperial service. Above them, there
remained a higher elite who dominated the top offices at court, and the suc-
cessful honoratus would seek their patronage. 5

Local success thus demanded a considerable investment of time and
effort in imperial structures. Indeed, the sine qua non for entry into the impe-
rial bureaucracy was a traditional classical literary education, which required
ten years or more of private schooling with the grammaticus , 6 Thus, much
of the childhood, let alone the adult life, of even ordinary members of the
late Roman elite was shaped by the need to be successful in a political game
whose rules were dictated from the centre. Local and regional political
communities all the way from Britain to North Africa continued to have
great importance, but this is hardly surprising. Much more noteworthy is
the fact that there was a real sense in which all Roman landowners, marked
out by their specific literary culture, were made at least potentially part of
one community by imperial political structures and their accompanying
ideologies. 7

2. Transformations in political economy

By a.d. 600, a series of royal courts had replaced one imperial centre. None
of the successor kingdoms occupied an area as big as a late Roman prefec-
ture, let alone the western empire as a whole. In former Roman Britain, the
political landscape consisted of a host of small kingdoms, British and
Anglo-Saxon, many occupying only part of an old Roman civitas . 8 In sheer
physical distance, therefore, the new states did not face the communica-
tions problems of the old empire. On a whole series of other levels, their
difficulties were serious and manifold.

Not least, the new states had to establish political boundaries — on the
ground and in people’s perceptions — where none had previously existed.
The new political boundaries did not coincide with Roman regional boun-
daries, and, in the first instance, surviving Roman landowners maintained
contacts across the new frontiers. 9 Indeed, the political elites of the new
kingdoms were made up of disparate groups of at least two kinds. The

5 By the fifth century, senators were graded in three ranks: clarissimi, spectabiles and illustres , in order
of seniority. Increasingly, the first two became honorific, with most privileges and active membership
of the senate accruing to illustres alone: Jones, LRE ch. 15. 6 Kaster (1988) esp. chs. 1—2.

7 Not, of course, that the empire managed to integrate all the elites within its notional borders to
the same degree.

8 On Anglo-Saxon and Celtic Britain, see respectively Bassett (1988) and Dark (1994).

9 E.g. ch. 1 5 (Wood), pp. 434—6 above; cf. the letter collections of Ruricius of Limoges and Sidonius
Apollinaris.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

44° l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

successor states were actually created by a mixture of military and diplo-
matic aggression on the part of armed groups of outsiders, labelled
Goths, Franks, Burgundians, etc., in our sources. On the other hand, they
all also contained large numbers of indigenous Romans, in many cases
even members of the former Roman landowning elite, who — close to the
Mediterranean, at least — survived imperial collapse in significant numbers.

In traditional historiography, the outsiders were categorized as ‘barbar-
ians’ (using the Romans’ own terms of reference: see below) and seen as
ethnically distinct groups (both from each other, and from Romans) whose
mind-sets were totally inimical to the Roman way of life. More recently, it
has been stressed that most of them had long been in contact with Roman
civilization, even if originating in areas beyond the frontier, and that many
had graduated to independent statehood of their own via a period in the
military service of the empire. The unchanging nature of their identities —
previously largely assumed — has also been questioned . 111 There is much to
be said for these revisionist points, and their overall implication. The
process of state formation involved transformations as much for the
incomers as for the inhabitants of the former Roman empire.

There is a danger, however, of losing sight of the revolution that the
appearance of these successor states represents. They were born in vio-
lence, and while some Romans were ready to accommodate themselves to
the new powers in the land, many others resisted with determination . 1 1 I
would also argue that the group or ethnic identities of some of the intrud-
ers, even if subject to on-going transformation, were substantial historical
phenomena whose nature shaped that of the states they formed. The
kingdom-forming Visigoths and Ostrogoths, for instance, were new polit-
ical units created in the process of migration, but seem to have consisted
largely of groups who were already identified by others and by themselves
as ‘Goths’. They were dominated, indeed, by a numerous — if still minority
— elite caste of freemen, who gave them coherence and became — in the
first instance, at least — the major military and political force of the new
kingdoms. Some of the law codes promulgated in the new kingdoms like-
wise assign much higher status, measured in terms of wergild, to full (i.e.
‘free’) members of the intruding force than to surviving Romans . 12 Thus,
in many cases old mind-sets had to be changed and new patterns of alle-
giance and political action built up, particularly among elites, if the new
kingdoms were to flourish. The task was made more difficult by a series of

10 The revisionist impulse started in many ways with Wenskus (1961) and continued on the conti-
nent in the work of Herwig Wolfram and the Vienna school around him. A more radical approach from
a different direction can be found in e.g. Goffart (1981), (1989) and Barbarians and Romans esp. ch. 1 and
conclusion. 11 Heather (1995 a).

12 Goths: Heather (1996) esp. ch. 10; cf. Heather (1995b). Lex Salica and Ine’s Law both assign sur-
viving natives wergilds one-half of those of the now dominant intruders.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM 44 1

transformations which shifted the balance of power between centre and
locality substantially in favour of the latter.

(a) The militarisation of landowning elites

Defence in the later Roman empire was the province of a professional
army of several hundred thousands. It was paid for by large-scale taxation,
particularly of agricultural activity (a land-tax). The raising of these reve-
nues required a powerful state machine, voluminous records and a basic
willingness to pay. The state endeavoured to foster such a willingness by
stressing that tax paid for the army, and hence for security; it is generally
considered by modern scholars that most revenue was targeted in that
direction. 13 By c. 600, the landowning elites of western Europe were pro-
viding military manpower directly, however, instead of paying for profes-
sionals to do the job. That new landowners from the immigrant groups
(Goths, Franks, etc.) continued to light, once settled, has never been
doubted. Wherever they survived, however, Roman landowning elites, or
rather their descendants, also came to be drawn upon for military service. 14

For Frankish Gaul, the most useful source is the writing of Gregory of
Tours. Fie never specifies the precise military obligation enforced by
Merovingian kings, but there certainly was one, since he reports its appli-
cation to particular individuals. 15 Much of the fighting in the sixth century
was done by forces drawn directly from civitates, and a particular story about
the war of 568 between Sigibert and Guntramn makes it clear that these
were not garrison troops but citizen militias. In this case, a military reverse
suffered by a contingent from Clermont-Ferrand caused the death of many
of the city’s leading men. And when the particular militias that Gregory
happens to mention are plotted on a map (see Fig. 17), most fall outside the
areas of substantial Frankish settlement. 16 Likewise, the main royal officers
in the cities — counts ( comites , singular comes) and dukes (duces, dux) — clearly
had military as well as administrative and legal roles. The names and biog-
raphies of many of the men holding such positions show that descendants
of Roman landowners, as well as Franks, regularly filled them. 17

In the case of Visigothic Spain, legal materials likewise demonstrate that
military obligations were applied to Roman and Goth alike. Gothic kings

13 Jones, LRE ch. 17; Elton (1996).

14 The current orthodoxy, in so far as one exists, portrays surviving Roman landowners retreating
to villas, libraries and episcopal sees: e.g. Van Dam (1985); Mathisen (1993); Heinzelmann (1976).

15 Punishments for those failing to appear: Greg. Tur. Hist, v.26; vi.12; vn.42; cf. Lam of the
Ripuarian Franks 68.1—2.

16 War of 568: Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.30. Gregory mentions citizen militias from Agen, Angouleme,
Clermont, Bayeux, Blois, Bordeaux, Bourges, Chartres, Chateaudun, Le Mans, Nantes, Orleans,
Perigueux, Poitiers, Saintes, Toulouse, Tours and Vely; cf. Bachrach (1972) 66—7.

17 Gallo-Roman dukes and patricians: e.g. Agricola, Amatus, Asclepius, Celsus, Desiderius,
Ennodius, Gedinus, Mummolus, Nicetius: on all of whom see relevant entries in PLRE in. The mili-
tary aspect of the office of count is demonstrated by e.g. Greg. Tur. Hist, iv.30; vin.36.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

44 2 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

Fig. 17 City territories of Gaul known (from Gregory of Tours’ Histories) to have raised troops in

the sixth century

were already enforcing this before their loss of southern Gaul, since ‘sen-
ators’ (i.e. Roman landowners) fought for them at Vouille (or Voulon) in
507. 18 Italy, of course, was eventually divided between Lombards and
Byzantines. 19 For the Lombard kingdom we lack early sources. All one can
say is that, if any Roman landowners did survive the invasion period, they
quickly came to be treated as an integral part of the kingdom and were
expected, as in Gaul and Spain, to provide the same services for their kings
as descendants of original Lombards. For Byzantine Italy, the situation is
harder to read. Justinian’s wars had adverse effects upon the senatorial land-

18 1 /isigothic Code 9.2: detailed laws on levying, esp. 9.2.8— 9 which specify the liability falling on
Romans as well as Goths. Vouille/Voulon: Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.37.

19 During the interlude of Ostrogothic rule, many Romans served in garrison forces, but (with
certain exceptions) field army service seems to have been reserved for Theoderic’s Gothic followers:
Heather (1996) ch. 8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

443

owning class, but some, at least, survived. By 600, however, they cease to
figure in the higher social and political echelons around Rome and
Ravenna, which were dominated by a new class of militarized landowners.
Whether this represents a transformation of the old elite, the rise of a
brand new one, or something in between, is unclear. The old senatorial elite
proclaimed itself by naming-practices which celebrated familial connec-
tions. Around 600, however, a new practice, based on a limited canon of
saints’ names, came to predominate. It is hard to know, therefore, whether
the old class had survived by militarizing itself and adopting new naming-
habits, or whether an entirely new elite had replaced it. 20 Either way, Italy
essentially repeats the pattern already observed in Gaul and Spain, whereby
a militarized landowning elite, whatever its provenance, came to domi-
nance in the social landscape. For Britain, we have still less evidence.
Nevertheless, although processes of transformation are again difficult to
chart, it seems clear that any members of the Romano-British elite who had
managed to survive into the sixth century had undergone a similar trans-
formation into military landowners. 21

The rise of militarized landowning elites across western Europe obvi-
ated the need for professional armies (although the elites of Byzantine Italy
remained much more professional than their counterparts in the Germanic
kingdoms). 22 This had important political effects upon the nature of the
successor states. For, although the main point of the Roman army had been
defence against outsiders, it could also be used to maintain internal order,
as the massacre in Thessalonica and the fears aroused by the riot of the
statues in Antioch, two fourth-century examples, demonstrate. 23 Once mil-
itary forces ceased to be independent of local elites, the political problems
inherent in fighting local dissidents became more acute. There was also the
problem that the elites of any dissident area would themselves be armed,
and hence more difficult to subdue. This is not to say that post-Roman
kings could not use their new-style military forces to counter internal
dissent. In the sixth century, for instance, the Frankish king Guntramn
overcame the pretender Gundovald, who had the support of certain ele-
ments in the Frankish elite, and, in the seventh, the Visigothic king Wamba
defeated Paulus, whose power base lay north of the Pyrenees. 24 Indeed, all
kings probably still had some essentially professional household troops.
Nevertheless, the militarization of landed elites did swing the balance of
power away from the centre and towards localities.

20 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers esp. ch. 2 and 4.

21 A subject much explored in the works of Leslie Alcock; see esp. Alcock (1987) and (1989).

22 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers ch. 4, 6, 8.

23 Thessalonica: Soz. HE vii.25; cf. Larson (1970). Antioch: Heather (1994) 30—1. The fourth
century also saw the suppression of revolts in Britain: e.g. Amm. Marc, xxvii. 8.6—10; xxvm.3.1— 8.

24 Gundovald: PLRE 111.566—7; Paulus: Julian, Hist. Wamb. in MGH, SRM 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

444 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

(b) The decline of taxation

The post-Roman period also saw a decline in the taxation of agricultural
production . 2 ' 1 This had a number of causes. In some areas, the highly
trained groups responsible for the sophisticated record-keeping and cur-
rency-management necessary for its assessment and collection were, in all
probability, simply swept away in the chaos of the invasion period. It is hard
to imagine, for instance, their survival in post-Roman Britain. Linked to
this, whether as cause or effect is the collapse of some crucial elements of
the economy — particularly coinage and exchange — which rendered the
extraction of an agricultural surplus in usable form much more difficult.

The decline in taxation was also linked to the disappearance of profes-
sional armies. If landowners were now directly responsible for their own
defence — the basic justification for taxation under the empire — why should
they also pay land-tax? Some successor-state kings did inherit rights to tax,
but then gave them away. Judging from Gregory of Tours, for instance, tax-
ation was a major issue in sixth-century Gaul. His narrative includes not
only examples of kings extracting revenues but also of kings coming under
considerable pressure to remit them. A major element in explaining this, on
the face of it, rather odd phenomenon is that kings seem never to have
taxed their original Frankish, Gothic or other followers. Thus, as similar
military services came to be demanded as well from the descendants of
Roman elements of the population, so the political pressure built up for
similar tax breaks all round . 26 Administrative difficulties and political pres-
sures may well have combined. As tax became more difficult to collect,
both administratively and politically, it became easier for kings to buy
support via grants of tax remission, than to raise revenue in the form of
coin and produce and then redistribute it.

The erosion of tax structures, like the disappearance of professional
armies, significantly altered the balance of political power in the post-
Roman world. Drawing on the largest sector of the economy, the land-tax
had brought in large sums of annually renewable income. All of one year’s
income could be spent without reducing revenue for the next. Once taxa-
tion ceased to be a major factor in royal finance, however, kings were often
forced to rely on grants of land from the royal fisc to reward or buy
support. Once a piece of land had been alienated, however, a king could
no longer derive any income from it. Thus, when a political economy
comes to rely on land itself (economic capital) rather than recycled inter-
est on it in the form of taxation, it becomes much more difficult for kings
to reward followers in one year without reducing their own income for the
next. The traditional orthodoxy, indeed, is that the operation of such a

25 Durliat’s arguments to the contrary (1990b) are not convincing; c£ Wickham (1993b).

26 Cf. Wickham (1984); Wood (1990).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

445

dynamic led inexorably to shifts of wealth from kings to their noble sup-
porters. This model has been applied particularly to the Merovingian
dynasty in Gaul, held to have lost first its land and then its power.

The contrast is, of course, too simple. In the Roman empire, most tax
revenue was committed to paying a professional army (although the exis-
tence of this force was a significant level of power: see p. 443 above), and
the state often had to fall back on unpopular extra taxes (superindictions). 27
Medieval kings, likewise, had some sources of renewable revenue (customs
and tolls, for instance) and other types of reward with which to attract
support: confirmations of title, grants of office (whether ecclesiastical or
secular) and so on. Moreover, royal fiscs could grow as well as diminish.
Many gifts had to be made at the beginning of a reign to establish good rela-
tionships with the men of power in the localities who would be crucial to its
long-term success. But, on the other hand, processes such as confiscations
from defeated opponents would bring other land back into the fisc in the
course of the reign. The wife of the dead Mummolus, for instance, was left
destitute after the Gundovald affair. Hence, a long-lived king might recoup
much, if not all, of his initial expenditure. Nevertheless, the tendency, in
other than a very successful reign, is likely to have been towards royal impov-
erishment and the enrichment of noble supporters, and a series of civil wars
or early royal deaths might lead to large losses to the fisc. 28

In the successor states, the militarization of landowning elites also com-
bined with losses of function to reduce the size and importance of bureau-
cratic structures. The need for bureaucrats to run tax-machinery and
monitor spending, for instance, steadily diminished. In most areas,
however, kings continued to employ some bureaucrats who maintained
some Roman traditions. Parthenius, for instance, related to an emperor of
the mid fifth century, was magister officiorum et patricius for the Frankish king
Theudebert in the mid sixth. The vast network of late Roman bureaucratic
openings, however, had ceased to exist. It is impossible to estimate
numbers accurately, but each royal court probably maintained a few tens,
rather than thousands, of bureaucrats. The number of jobs at the local level
was similarly reduced. The workhorse of royal government on the ground
was the count of the city ( comes civitatis), but there was only one such post
per civitas. In total, there were only 122 civitates in Gaul, not all of which sur-
vived as units into the post-Roman period, and therefore 122 comites , to
whom can be added a few, seemingly aci hominem, higher commands (duces).
Central and local bureaucratic structures, which had previously focused the

27 It was a superindiction which generated the riot of the statues in Antioch: cf. p. 443 above, n. 23.

28 Model and its critique: Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms esp. ch. 4; several of the essays in Davies and
Fouracre (1986) (esp. those of Fouracre, Wood and Ganz).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

446 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

attention of thousands of leading landowners per generation in western
Europe on the state, lost much of their political importance. 29

In sum, the successor states were not copies on a smaller scale of the
Roman empire. As states, they operated in different ways, without large-
scale taxation, professional armies or extensive bureaucracies. Hence, the
post-Roman world generated many autonomous, if not independent, local
communities, and a related tendency towards political fragmentation.
Indeed, where early medieval kingdoms did successfully retain their coher-
ence over the long run, the influence of outside factors can often be
detected. Periods of relative Frankish and Visigothic monarchical power,
for instance, coincided with expansionary campaigns, giving kings access
to additional sources of wealth. Or, the reverse side of the coin, the
Lombards seem to have recreated their monarchy in Italy when the threat
of Frankish invasion made an overall ruler useful. 30 In other circumstances,
however, the elites of post-Roman Europe had much less reason to take
account of the political centre than their Roman predecessors.

3 . Court and community in the post-Roman west

None of this means that successor-state kings were powerless, and the
history of post-Roman Europe cannot be understood simply as the failure
of the state. Manipulating and building upon Roman elements other than
taxation, defence and bureaucracy — as well, probably, as non-Roman tra-
ditions (although these are harder to penetrate) — the successor states, to
greater and lesser extents, bonded their constituent landowners together
into political societies based as much on consent as on the calculation of
individual ambition.

Not least, of course, the courts of successor kings remained centres of
patronage, even if royal income was on a reduced scale. And a king’s gifts
could have a more than straightforward significance. A striking feature of the
period is the garnet-encrusted cloisonne jewellery often found in burials, at
least some of it gifts from royal treasuries. The garnet was the precious stone
closest in colour to the imperial purple of Roman emperors and was thus
used by them in their regalia. Justinian appears with some of this jewellery
in the San Vitale mosaic. Apart from being a rich gift, therefore, such jewel-
lery also made a symbolic claim to power and authority: a manipulation of
the mental heritage created by nearly half a millennium of domination
wielded by purple-clad emperors. 31 To illustrate this further, I will examine,

29 Parthenius: PLRE 11.83 3— 4. General survey: Barnwell (1992). Ostrogothic Italy was something of
an exception, but the Variae of Cassiodorus should not be taken as face-value proof of Roman conti-
nuity, even if Barnwell (1992) ch. 1 5 pushes his critique too far.

30 The arguments of Reuter (1985) and (1991) can certainly be applied to Merovingian contexts; cf.
Collins (1983b). On Lombard Italy, see Wickham (1981) 28ff.; Harrison (1993) passim.

31 Arrhenius (1985).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

447

in the sections which follow, how the manipulation of the Roman heritage
in religion and law, to take two fundamental aspects of kingship, helped bond
together the elites of the successor kingdoms.

(a) Religion

According to the ideology of the late empire, the Divinity (after
Constantine, the Christian God) was the chief upholder of the state, and
the state existed to further the divine plan for mankind. Emperors were
thus much more than secular rulers, and the fully-fledged Byzantine
definition of the emperor as God’s vicegerent on earth was only the final
stage in a long process of development: the combination of New and Old
Testament images and Hellenistic concepts of kingship.’ 2 The end of
empire in the west substituted several kings for one emperor, but led to
little diminution in the ideological claims being made. Visigothic and
Ostrogothic kings, Frankish, Burgundian and others, all, as they converted
to Christianity, presented themselves as appointed by God.” In the longer
term, this ideological stance had some entirely practical effects in heighten-
ing a sense of community in the new realms.

Monarchs were responsible, for instance, for calling church councils.
Particularly in the Visigothic kingdom of the later sixth and seventh
century, and the Merovingian of the sixdi century, this resulted in a
regular sequence of councils when a large proportion of the religious
leadership of the kingdom gathered together to discuss and legislate on
the issues of the day. There was an international dimension to such activ-
ity, of course, because the church always regarded itself as not confined
by political boundaries. A kingdom’s extent, however, both decided par-
ticipation — which bishops should attend — and dictated certain formal
elements of behaviour. Surviving proceedings suggest, for instance, that
councils opened with prayers for die king, whatever his brand of
Christianity. Thus a Catholic Roman synod of 499 began with prayers for
the Arian Theoderic. The priests shouted thirty times ‘Hear us Christ.
Long live Theoderic.’ 34 Where a regular pattern of assemblies was estab-
lished, religious leaders became used to operating as a defined body and
to responding to a particular leadership. On these levels, assemblies added
a sense of religious community to the political boundaries of the new
kingdoms. 35

32 See, for instance, Dvornik (1966) esp. ch. 8, 10—12; Liebeschuetz (1979) 197#.

33 The Variae of Cassiodorus and Ennodius’ Panegyric make this claim about Theoderic; cf. Heather

(1993). Julian of Toledo’s Historia Wambae and the councils of Toledo are some of many texts making
the same claim about Visigothic kings: cf. Collins (1977). Merovingians: Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms
66ff. 34 Acta synh. habit. Romae 1 , in MGM, AA 1 2, p. 40 5 .

35 On Merovingian and Hispanic councils, see respectively Pontal (1989) and Orlandis and Ramos-
Lissen (1981). Anglo-Saxon church councils were less restricted to individual kingdoms, but royal
influence, and particularly that of overkings, was still substantial: Cubitt (1995) 39#. This may well have
contributed to the development of a wider Anglo-Saxon (later English) consciousness.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

448 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

That Catholic kings, at least, also appointed bishops reinforced the links
between political and religious community. In practice, any would-be
bishop had to make himself known at court, moving outside his own local-
ity. Bishop Gregory’s election at Tours, for instance, was opposed by the
archdeacon Riculf, who seems to have been a local candidate. But Gregory
was physically at court (that of Sigibert), his family had a much higher polit-
ical profile, and it was Gregory who got the job. This close association of
king and bishop also posed potential problems. The root of Gregory’s
difficulties with king Chilperic was the fact that he was the appointee of
Chilperic’s brother Sigibert and hence an object of suspicion when Tours
passed into Chilperic’s hands. Bishops served for life and must often have
outlived the kings who appointed them. 36 Even so, the practical power to
appoint bishops meant that — at higher levels, at least — the religious life of
any kingdom revolved around kings and their courts. 37

At first sight, these patterns of the later sixth and seventh century do not
apply to the preceding century or so. Between a 450 and 5 50, the monarchs
and a substantial element of the political elite of many of the new and
emerging successor states (the Ostrogothic, Burgundian and Vandal king-
doms, and Visigothic Spain before its conversion to Catholicism at the
Third Council of Toledo in 5 87) did not subscribe to Catholic Christianity,
but were so-called Arian Christians. Some of these kingdoms, particularly
that of the Vandals under Geiseric and Huneric, ’ 8 witnessed periods when
Catholics were persecuted, but perhaps more striking is the extent to which
the observations already made remain applicable.

The Ostrogothic king Theoderic was concerned in all his propaganda
and in every ceremonial act to stress that his rule was divinely ordained, and
that he stood in a particular relationship to God. He was involved in the
calling of church councils, and maintained, for the most part, good rela-
tions with the Catholic church. The papacy called upon him to settle dis-
puted elections, and consulted him on ending the Acacian schism with the
Greek east. Caesarius of Arles, likewise, obtained his papal vicariate
through Theoderic’s intervention, and exploited the political unification of
his religious province by the Ostrogoths in the 520s (previously it had been
partly under Burgundian rule) to initiate a series of reforming councils. In
the Ostrogothic kingdom, even the king’s Arianism did not prevent
Catholic churchmen from working around and through his power. 39

36 See generally Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms ch. 5 .

37 This tendency was very partially countered by the existence of the papacy and the concept of a
universal church. Churchmen were well aware of belonging to a wider Christian community, and con-
siderable prestige attached to the papacy. But, as Peter Brown has recendy put it, the western church
consisted of ‘Micro Christendoms’: Brown (1996) esp. ch. 13.

38 Famously described by Victor of Vita, CSEL 7.

39 Heather (1996) ch. 8; cf. Moorhead (1992) i94ff. on the Acacian schism, and Klingshirn (1994)
ch. 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

449

Even persecuting non-Catholic kings were, on occasion, motivated by
the same ideological heritage; in their view, of course, they were the ‘ortho-
dox’, and so-called Catholics the heretics. In 484, the Vandal king Huneric
unleased a religious offensive which was quite unlike his father Geiseric’s
preceding moments of persecution. A council of all religious, Catholics
and non-Nicenes, was called in Carthage, a definition of faith pushed
through, and action taken to enforce adherence to that definition. As the
form of his royal edicts underlines, Huneric was acting in all this like those
fourth-century emperors who subscribed to and enforced a variety of relig-
ious settlements in the aftermath of the Council of Nicaea. 40 The under-
lying idea was that there should be a single definition of Christian faith for
the realm, and that state power should be used to enforce it. The policy of
the Visigothic king Leovigild in the 5 80s was very similar. It was designed
not to crack down on Catholics so much as to establish a uniform religious
settlement — in this case, based on a doctrinal compromise — for the entire
kingdom. 41

As these examples show, when pushed through against the wishes of a
critical mass of the population, or its religious leadership, policies designed
to promote religious unity could themselves create division, as they had
done in the fourth-century empire as a whole and were doing in the fifth-
and sixth-century east. In papyri from Italy, however, the Arian religion is
referred to as lex Gothorum , and this may provide a key to the religious
harmony that largely prevailed outside the Vandal kingdom. Where
Arianism was treated by kings as the religion of the intruding conquerors
(Goths, Burgundians, etc.), then it was possible to have peace. Churchmen
such as Caesarius of Arles could respond by taking the ‘render unto Caesar’
passage to mean that all earthly rulers were appointed by God for some
reason and, wherever possible, should be honoured. 42

In the longer term, Arianism was destroyed by Byzantine or Frankish
conquest (respectively of the Vandals and Ostrogoths, and of the
Burgundians) or undermined by the conversions to Catholicism which fol-
lowed on from prolonged co-existence with Catholic, former Roman, pop-
ulations. 43 By 600, therefore, Catholicism was almost universally accepted,
and the old Roman idea of the kingdom as a religious unit became even less
problematic. Kings and churchmen could get on with the business of gen-
erating community through the regular religious ceremonial life of the
kingdom and the scramble for higher church appointments.

40 Viet. Vit. Hist. Pers. bks 2—3.

41 Thompson (1969) 78#. argued that Leovigild was being deliberately divisive, but this seems mis-
taken; cf. Collins (1983a) ch. 2.

42 Lex Gothorum : Tjader (1982) 268 n. 3; cf. Klingshirn (1994) 88ff. Gregory of Tours, by contrast,

often vents his hatred of Arians, but if Gregory had lived under Arian kings, his opinions would prob-
ably have been more moderate. 43 The case with the Visigoths; cf. Thompson (i960).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

450 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

(b) Law

That a sense of legal community should play a similarly important role in
the new realms was a further adaptation of Roman heritage. Ideologically,
the Roman educated classes saw written law as the main factor
differentiating their society from that of ‘barbarians’ beyond the frontier.
In the Roman view, only men who had graduated to the higher level of
rationality generated by a classical education (whether in Latin or Greek)
were able to subordinate their immediate desires to a legal structure which
treated all alike and which, by that fact, achieved the best possible outcome
for all. Nor was law — in imperial circles, at least — seen as something created
by men for human convenience. Rather, it was essential to the divine plan
for the cosmos, since it was both cause and effect of realizing that state of
higher rationality which was the Divinity’s overall aim for humanity. The
Christianization of the empire merely heightened the religious significance
attached to written law as the generator of ‘correct’ social order — the pow-
erful example of the Old Testament reinforcing established Roman views.
By contrast, ‘barbarian’ societies, where divinely-inspired written law failed
to prevail, were anarchies, where individuals pursued immediate sensory
pleasure, living more like animals than men . 44

Some vestiges of this ideology influenced most successor states. Most
obviously, it stimulated the production of written legal texts for groups
who had not previously possessed them. Visigoths, Burgundians, Franks,
Anglo-Saxons and Lombards all produced written legal texts through
direct or indirect contact with Roman example. In part, written law could
be used to emphasize the legal role of monarchs, enhancing kingship, but
written texts also demonstrated that the group concerned were not mere
‘barbarians’. The Ostrogothic king Theoderic made the same claim by not
producing a separate Ostrogothic law code, since he could present his
regime as preserving Roman law unchanged.

In some successor states, this ideological heritage found more profound
expression in an overt public approach taken to law. Since law, after the
Roman example, symbolized divinely ordained social order and consensus,
both the rhetoric in which texts were couched and the ceremonies sur-
rounding their publication reflected these ideas. Prefaces to the many law
codes generated in the new states commonly refer to the deep care for the
kingdom on the part of king and great men — religious and other —
expressed in the act of producing a text. Examples of such language can
be found in Burgundian, Lombard and Visigothic texts amongst others,

44 In more detail, with primary refs.: Heather (1993) 324, 329—30. Hence law figures centrally in late
antique comparisons of Roman and barbarian: Orosius’ account of Athaulf (Hist, ad Pag. vn.42.3— 3:
he could not replace Romania with Gothia because the Goths were too uncivilized to obey law), and
Priscus’ conversation with the Roman merchant turned Hunnic warrior (the latter finally agrees, in tears
that written law guarantees the superiority of Roman life: ed. Blockley fr. 1 1.2, p. 272, lines 508—10).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM 45 I

with the Lex Salica of the Franks providing an interesting variant. Its earli-
est preface mentions no king and credits its production to four wise law-
givers, although later versions and modificatory edicts revert to a more

traditional style, and emphasize again the co-operation of king and great
45

men.

In some cases, rhetoric was matched by public ceremonial. Different
seventh-century revisions of the Visigothic legal code (the Forum Iudicuni)
were presented by the reigning king to various of the periodic public
assemblies of the great religious and secular magnates of the Spanish
kingdom which gathered at Toledo. 46 The Liber Constitutionum of the
Burgundians, similarly, has a Preface sealed by more than thirty comites —
leading lay magnates — of the kingdom. We must surely imagine a formal
signing, or rather sealing, ceremony conducted at the Burgundian court
when the text was first promulgated. In the Frankish kingdom, likewise, the
three surviving edicts of Childebert (dated i March 5 94, 5 9 5 and 5 96) were
all presented at assemblies, and those of Guntramn (585) and Chlothar
(614) published in the aftermath of church councils. 47

Written law was thus an expression of divinely ordained order and con-
sensus, and its rhetoric and ceremonial presentation stressed its role in gen-
erating a sense of community within the different kingdoms. The degree to
which practical legal structures (courts, judges, etc.) provided a further
social cement, making successor states actual legal communities in the
everyday practice of dispute settlement, is harder to estimate. In some
cases, a unified structure of real importance was created. The Visigothic
Code was regularly updated to incorporate new royal rulings. The text itself
was required to be used; cases it failed to cover were to be referred to the
king; and there existed a network of royally certified courts and royally
appointed judges. The Islamic conquest of the kingdom means that no pre-
eighth-century charters survive to confirm that the text’s demands were
being fulfilled, but its prescriptions were followed very closely in the
Carolingian period — the first moment we can check. 48 In Italy, likewise, a
similar royally authorized network of courts operated in the Ostrogothic
kingdom of the sixth century, and the Lombard kingdom developed com-
parable structures in the later seventh and eighth century. 49

North of the Alps and Pyrenees, the pattern is not so clear. Frankish and
Anglo-Saxon kings issued law codes and modificatory edicts, but it is
unclear whether these were part of a coherent, centrally directed legal struc-
ture. References in both Frankish law codes — Lex Salica and Lex Ribuaria —
imply that these texts were originally viewed as partial collections, behind

45 On all these texts, see further ch. io (Charles-Edwards), pp. 260—87 above.

46 Cf. Collins (1983a) 24!?. 47 Cf. Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms, ch. 7.

48 Structure: Wormald (1977); King (1972); Collins (1983a) 24!?. Law in practice: Collins (1985) and
(1986). 49 Ostrogothic Italy: Moorhead (1992) 75 ff. Lombards: Wickham (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

452 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

which stood a much larger body of unwritten customary law. References to
law — lex/ leges — in actual cases from seventh-century Gaul suggest the same.
Legal authority was held to reside in local men learned in Frankish law (the
so-called rachinburgii), rather than in a centrally controlled system of courts
and justice. 50 Little is known of early Anglo-Saxon systems, but it seems
unlikely that they more resembled the Gothic and Lombard kingdoms than
the Frankish. Even so, written law does seem to have been used north of
the Channel to push through Christianization. 51

Indeed, even where central legal structures were much less developed,
there could still be one important sense in which the kingdom might func-
tion as a legal community. Of this, some late Merovingian placita — docu-
ments recording the final settlement of particular cases — provide an
excellent illustration. On a series of occasions in the later seventh century,
substantial numbers of secular and ecclesiastical magnates gathered at the
royal court to witness disputes between two or more of their number. The
king convened the case, the assembly of magnates helped him judge it, and
all put their names to the final settlement. For the case of the orphan
Ingramnus against Amalbert in February 692 or 693, for instance, some
twelve bishops and another forty secular magnates (together with many
unnamed followers) gathered at the court of Clovis III. 52 Many of these
magnates may have run their own localities like mafia bosses, but the fact
that disputes between their number were fought out before their peer
group, in a meeting convened by the king, guaranteed a real sense of legal
community within the realm.

4. Involvement, identity and ethnicity

The Roman inheritance in law and religion thus provided an ideological
justification for some sense of community at the highest level in the new
states of western Europe. More important, the pursuit and presentation of
these ideologies generated a series of occasions and modes of behaviour
which allowed the kingdoms’ constituent landowning elites to function in
reality as a single body. Would-be bishops and counts had to make themselves
known, whatever their familial background, to their kings; kings convened
more or less regular assemblies of secular and religious magnates; and the
great of the kingdom might gather under the chairmanship of the king to
settle their disputes. All of these activities led substantial numbers of the elite
of any kingdom to meet and, in certain cases, to act as one body. Such occa-
sions provided a real social cement for the new kingdoms — the moments
when ties were forged between members of their landowning elites.

50 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms ch. 7; Wood (1986).

51 Cf. Wormald (1977); modified now by Wormald (1995).

52 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 262—3; cf. Fouracre (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COMMUNITY OF THE REALM

453

These moments were supplemented by a number of other mechanisms,
not least the tendency for successor-state kings to itinerate. Whatever their
other functions, such cycles of movement allowed kings to make contact
with considerable numbers of the landowners within the kingdom. This
imposed royal government in areas which might be beyond its normal
reach. Fredegar’s description of the crowds in Burgundy, flocking to win
legal redress from Dagobert when he arrived in the region, is a classic illus-
tration. Itineration also generated a series of social occasions which rein-
forced senses of community among the elite: everything from formal
displays of royal sovereignty to feasts, to hunting . 53

In the later Roman empire, landowners came to court (physically or
metaphorically) to maintain their elite status. In the post-Roman west,
monarchs visited the landowners to assert their royalty; and, as we have
seen, there were other ways in which central power was structurally weak-
ened in the transformations associated with the end of the Roman empire.
Nevertheless, the mechanisms available to successor-state kings were pow-
erful enough to work one major transformation of their own: the dissolu-
tion of any ethnic divide between the Roman and non-Roman elements out
of which most of the kingdoms had originally been constructed.

By c. a.d. 650, perhaps earlier in some kingdoms, a fundamental transfor-
mation in perceptions of identity had worked itself out. Ethnic terms were
still used: ‘Burgundian’, ‘Goth’, ‘Frank’, etc., on the one hand, ‘Roman’ on
the other. The words had lost, however, their old significance. In the
Hispanic kingdom, ‘Goths’ were the elite landowners of the realm, what-
ever their biological origins. The politically enfranchised class of freemen,
the definers and bearers of ‘Gothicness’ in the migration period, had been
broken up, as immigrant Gothic and indigenous Roman landowners made
common cause to create a new elite. Visigothic legislation mirrors the
process: picking out ‘greater’ and ‘lesser’ freemen, who eventually came to
be ascribed different wergilds . 54 Elsewhere, the evidence for the process is
less good, but it does appear to have happened wherever Roman landown-
ers survived the initial chaos of invasion. Thus the seventh-century ‘Franci’
of Neustria were a nexus of some half-dozen or so leading landowning
families of the region who engaged in political competition with one
another at the highest level. And already in the early-sixth-century
Burgundian kingdom, legislative provisions reflect both the dominance of
a relatively small Burgundian elite — rather than an extensive freemen caste
— and its intermixing with surviving Roman landowners . 55

53 Some different aspects of itineration: Ewig (1963); Leyser (1979); Charles-Edwards (1988).

54 Heather (1996) 283 ff., commenting on the original and revised versions of the Visigothic Code at
8.4.16.

55 Franci: Gerberding (1987) 167—8. Burgundians: Amory (1993) (who to my mind overstates the
speed of intermingling and the amount of confusion it generated).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

454 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

A number of factors had brought about this ethnic redefinition. One
mechanism was intermarriage. Only the Visigoths are known to have main-
tained a formal ban on intermarriage between Roman and Goth, but it was
probably never very effective, and was overturned under Leovigild (572—86:
Visigothic Code 3.1.1). Marriages across ethnic lines would only have been
constructed in the first place, however, because common interests had
already formed between Roman and immigrant, so that other factors must
first have been at work. Not least important was the actual process of set-
tling outsiders on former Roman territory. In some cases, the Roman tax
system, or elements of it, played a role; but the process always, to my mind,
primarily involved redistributions of land. We do not know how the land
was allocated among the immigrant groups, but differences of status
already existed (see pp. 462—3 below), so that, as has long been suspected,
it is most unlikely that land was distributed equally to all immigrants. 56 This
provides a convincing context for assimilation on two levels. First, partic-
ularly at the upper levels of society, Roman and non-Roman landowners of
equivalent wealth would have had much in common. Second, as wealth
differentials grew, vertical bonds of patronage within the incoming
freemen classes would have increased in importance (see p. 463 below).
One can well imagine them hardening sufficiently over time to break up the
ethnic unity of incoming groups of freemen: the process reflected in
Visigothic legislation. To this essentially economic explanation, we can also
add a growing similarity of function and culture, as military service was
demanded of Roman landowners (or their descendants), and immigrants
adopted such aspects of the Roman heritage as Latin Christianity and
written law, and themselves sought profitable bishoprics.

Perhaps above all, however, since identity is generally created and hard-
ened in conflict, the disappearance of the Roman state removed the force
which had sustained the old separate identities and drawn a firm line
between Romans and outsiders. From 476, new and more immediate
conflicts, between the inhabitants of different parts of Gaul, Italy and
Spain, served to create new identities. And in all this, the new royal courts
of the successor states played a fundamental role. Their kings may have
had fewer and weaker levers of central power, but it was still at court that
office, secular and ecclesiastical, was sought, struggles for power were
fought out, elite marriages concocted, and elite children, whatever their
background, inculcated with a common martial, but also Latin Christian,
culture. Thus, just after Toledo III, Claudius, a royal military officer of
Roman background, put down a revolt by Goths against the Gothic king
Reccared. By 650, terms such as Goth, Burgundian and Frank designated

56 Goffart, Barbarians and Romans produced an argument, which has had considerable influence, that
incomers were given not land but a share of tax proceeds. I, among many others, am unconvinced; cf.
Wood (1990); Barnish (1986). Processes of distribution were highlighted by Thompson (1963).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES 45 5

the elite landowners of a particular region, rather than a politically distinct
caste of militarized immigrants. The royal courts of the post- Roman west
were central to this transformation. 37

II. PEERS AND lords: LOCAL COMMUNITIES

The basic local political unit of the Roman empire was the civitas (city),
encompassing both an urban centre and a dependent rural territory. Within
this unit, taxes were allocated and collected, and smaller legal issues settled
by the defensor civitatis (an innovation of the mid fourth century). The urban
centre also acted as a religious, political, economic and, indeed, cultural
focus for the population of its dependent territory. Officially at least, the
later Roman empire continued to value the classical urbanism it had inher-
ited from the Greeks, and saw the public institutions fora, etc.) and com-
munal amusements (bath, theatres, etc.) of the self-governing town as the
ideal type of human community. 58

The fourth century had seen both the growth of an imperial bureaucracy
and wholesale transfers of financial assets away from the cities (see p. 438
above), but the civitas continued to shape basic senses of local community.
Most of the new imperial bureaucrats retained strong roots in their local
communities. Periods of service were short, and the imperial authorities
used retired honorati for important jobs in their localities, such as supervis-
ing tax reassessments. Honorati likewise tended to have made good contacts
while serving at the centre, and were thus in great demand as patrons. While
there was no longer one council of landowners (the curia), the administra-
tive functions focused upon the civitas (tax, law, etc.) continued to make it
the local community par excellence for honorati, principales and all other
members of the empire’s landowning classes. 59

1 . The end of the civitas?

In part of the post-Roman west, local civitas communities continued to play
roles of fundamental importance. Sixth-century Visigothic Spain, for
instance, provides the examples of Cordoba and Seville, which threw off
central government and acted entirely independently — the former for
twenty-two years. 60 In Italy, taking a longer perspective, the city remained a
vital structure in the landscape to the end of the first millennium and

57 Claudius: Lives of the Fathers of Merida , CCSL 1 1 6, 5.10. Different visions of intermixing: Heather
(1996) 284ff. (Visigothic kingdom); Halsall (1995) 26—32 (Frankish); Amory (1997) esp. ch. 3
(Ostrogothic), although I would argue that Theoderic’s Goths brought many of their women with
them, and were dominated by a political elite of free warriors (Heather (1996) 170— 2andApp. 1). Hence
they were originally more coherent than Amory would allow.

58 With strongly Christian overtones, this ideal still suffuses the mid-sixth-century Buildings of

Procopius. 59 E.g. Liebeschuetz (1972) esp. pt v; Heather (1994) 25 ff. 60 Collins (1980).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

456 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

beyond. Nor were these towns merely collections of buildings; they oper-
ated as real centres of community, serving a variety of legal, economic,
political and cultural functions for the surrounding countryside. The
Lombards settled their sub-groups within city units, and hence themselves
subsequently became city-based. Thus, in eighth-century Lucca, over half
the twenty or so largish landowners of the territory seem to have lived
within the city itself. In most of sixth-century Gaul, likewise, curias contin-
ued to exist, municipal archives charted patterns of local landholding, and,
on the basis of this information, taxes continued to be raised. Sixth-century
Merovingian saints’ lives also identify their heroes by civitas of origin. 61

As we have seen, civitas contingents, comprising levies of landowners
and their dependants, became central to the military capability of the new
kingdoms. The leading men of each city territory were thus given a whole
new series of reasons and occasions to work together to their common
interest. Indeed, city contingents sometimes operated on their own
account. Gregory’s Histories, for instance, record an attack by the men of
Orleans, allied with those of Blois, on Chateaudun and Chartres (Hist.
vii. 2). It seems likely that the military organization of other successor
states, particularly Visigothic Spain, also encompassed such contingents.
Here, at least, the enforcement of recruiting laws was the task of city
authorities, and, as we have seen, Merida and Seville were able to field their
own independent military forces. 62

The city likewise remained a centre of local legal community. Alongside
the defensor civitatis, the remit of episcopal courts, in secular as well as relig-
ious matters, had been recognized and progressively defined from the time
of Constantine, the bishop being expected to reconcile rather than assign
penalties when settling disputes. 63 Both civil and religious courts continued
to operate in the civitates of the post-Roman west. Most successor states
appointed officers to individual cities: comites civitatis (counts of the city) in
Merovingian Gaul, Gothic Spain and Italy, and duces among the
Lombards. 64 Responsible for financial and military affairs, the count also
presided over a court of first resort. At the same time, bishops’ courts con-
tinued to function, and even became more prominent, as bishops them-
selves gradually acquired powers (see pp. 457—9 below). The city remained,
therefore, a centre of local legal community.

Ideally, one would like to cite detailed case histories at this point. Most
accounts of legal practice in the early Middle Ages are provided by char-
ters, however, and little such material is available for the immediate post-
Roman period. The legal role of bishops is well documented, however, in
sixth-century Merovingian Gaul, and fortnulae provide some material for

61 See generally ch. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 229—36 above, with refs. 62 As above, n. 60.

63 Jones, UtE ch. 14.

64 Comites civitatis'. Barnwell (1992) 35—6, 80—1, 88, 108— 1 1, 1 51—2. Daces'. Wickham (1981) 8off.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES

457

reconstructing the operations of a comital court. The first formula in a sur-
viving collection from Clermont, for instance, mentions a vir laudabilis, pre-
sumably the count, who presided over the meeting, the defensor ( civitatis ),
and the presence of numerous local notables ( honorati ). The practice in
both late Roman and Carolingian times was for the president of the court
to make and enforce critical decisions in consultation with the assembled
local landowners. There is every reason to think that this would also have
been the procedure in the intervening period . 65 A picture of civitas- based
episcopal and comital courts dominating local dispute settlement is pre-
cisely that suggested by the most famous post-Roman case of them all: the
feud which broke out in Tours in the time of bishop Gregory. The men
involved were of sufficient standing for the case eventually to make its way
to the king, but, in the first instance, a tribunal of Touraine citizens, the
count’s court and even the bishop attempted to halt the feud’s progress.
Noteworthy, too, is the way that Gregory acted against the letter of the law,
offering church funds to promote reconciliation . 66 Some bishops at least,
then, continued the established Roman traditions of their courts.

In his proper sphere, too, the steadily rising profile of the bishop in the
post-Roman west reinforced the importance of the city to local senses of
community. The establishment of episcopal sees substantially followed the
administrative pattern of the Roman empire, each civitas having its own
bishop. One obvious reflection of the increasing importance of the bishop
and of Christianity was the changing architectural face of the late antique
city. Post-Roman cities in the west tended to be dominated by episcopal
complexes: of cathedral and satellite churches, bishop’s palace, and bapis-
tery, and perhaps with attendant urban monasteries and lodgings for pil-
grims . 67 Much has rightly been written about the rise within the town of the
bishop’s secular power, which this physical domination reflects, but the
bishop’s role within the Christian hierarchy also made the city the religious
centre of the local community.

The fourth century had seen the rise of the holy man: self-appointed
religious authorities whose lives and posthumous cults potentially chal-
lenged the dominance of bishops. In the late and post-Roman west, this
and other challenges to the bishop were met head-on. The later fourth
century saw a switch of hagiographical emphasis towards the monk-
bishop — most famously in Sulpicius Severus’ Life of Martin of Tours. At
the same time, bishops exercised their rights to regulate asceticism.
Gregory of Tours preserves a nice example of a would-be stylite tearfully

65 Late Roman procedure: Heather (1994) ajff. Carolingian procedure emerges clearly from Davies
and Fouracre (1986) esp. 2i4ff. Clermont: Formulae Avernenses 1 , MGH, Fegum 5, with Wood (1986) nff.;
cf. James (1983).

66 Greg. Tur. Hist vn.47; ix.19. For commentary from a different angle, see Wallace-Hadrill (1962).

67 See e.g. ch. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 209—10, 217—19 and 230 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

458 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

accepting episcopal authority as the bishops lured him down and then
smashed his pillar {Hist, vm.i 5). Bishops also acted to regulate the cults
of martyrs and other saints within their dioceses, many such cults coming
to centre on dead and often related predecessors in local episcopal office.
There was nothing particular about Gaul in this respect. The Lives of the
Fathers of Merida reveal a similarly close association between the bishops
of that city and the martyr cult of Eulalia. Liturgy too could be used to
keep the religious community whole in the face of a proliferation of
different saints’ cults within individual civitates. Processions, for instance,
were used as a device to ensure that, on special occasions, every church
and cult centre of a city could be incorporated into the one celebration.
The congregation would start at the bishop’s cathedral and move round
the different cult sites, emphasizing that all operated under the one epis-
copally controlled umbrella.

Aristocrats posed a different challenge. As the political cohesion of
curias broke up, the tendency increased for aristocrats to live on country
estates. Hence sixth-century Gallic church councils ordained that aristo-
crats should celebrate the major festivals of the religious year in towns. In
similar vein, a major feature of the conversion of northern Europe (north
and south of the Channel) was a period of aristocratic monastic founda-
tion in the countryside. These rural religious institutions, at least in part,
superseded episcopal structures. Thus, the former civitas territory of Trier
was broken up into four pagi (German Gaue), in each of which aristocratic
monasteries, such as Echternach and Prum, acted as new religious centres.
The extent to which such foundations created alternative religious commu-
nities, functioning independently of bishops, is unclear. Did aristocrats’
dependants receive their Christianity, such as it was, via their lords’ foun-
dations? In seventh-century Anglo-Saxon England, this may have been so,
since the foundation of monasteries coincided with a shortage of
bishops. 68

Elsewhere in the post-Roman west, however, bishops again responded
very positively to the challenge of spreading Christianity to the country-
side. The old episcopal monopoly on preaching was broken by the bishops
themselves. A council chaired by bishop Caesarius of Arles in 529 was the
first to allow priests to preach in the countryside, and the practice gradu-
ally spread through Gaul and Spain as the century progressed. This devel-
opment was vital if the new religion was to be spread outside of urban
centres, allowing preaching to take place simultaneously at many centres
within one diocese: necessary, controlled devolution rather than an under-
mining of episcopal power. At the same time, bishops of Tours, at least,

68 For a general introduction to these developments, see e.g. James (1982) chs. 2, 4, 9; Hillgarth
(1986); Brown (1996) esp. chs. 6—8. More specific contributions: Rousseau, Ascetics; StanclifFe (1983);
Heinzelmann (1976); Van Dam, Leadership and Community pt 4; Van Dam (1993) ch. 2; Collins (1980).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES

459

were tackling the problem from another angle, establishing satellite relig-
ious centres in the countryside. By Gregory’s death, there were over forty
such establishments in the Touraine, and there is no reason to think Tours
unique. A proto-parish system was already emerging in the countryside of
sixth-century Europe, allowing Christianity to spread under the bishop’s
co-ordinating eye. 69

The civitas thus continued to shape senses of local political, legal and
religious community in large parts of Gaul, Spain and Italy in the immedi-
ate post-Roman period. There were, of course, also discontinuities. The
disappearance of secular public buildings marked the end of a long tradi-
tion, the displacement of a whole way of life. Peer landowning groups in
local society no longer gathered as a curial body in city council chambers
but expressed solidarity and pursued rivalries when gathered to fight
together in city levies or as assessors in the courts of the local count. There
was, moreover, wide regional variation. In some areas, the old Roman cities
failed to survive even the first shock of the end of empire. In Britain and
north-eastern Gaul, violence and social revolution combined to remake the
political landscape. Neither the boundaries of the host of small Anglo-
Saxon kingdoms which had emerged by c. 600 nor, perhaps more surpris-
ingly, those of their British counterparts bore much relation to the civitas
geography of the Roman period. Bishops did survive among the British,
though not among the pagan Anglo-Saxons, but their sees were also not
based on the old civitates , 70

North-eastern Gaul did not witness political fragmentation on the same
scale, but, here too, new patterns were generated. The area throws up not
co mites civitatis but grafios in charge of pagi, and even where larger solidarities
emerged, they did so on new bases. Several former Roman units combined,
for example, in the Champagne, creating, amongst other things, a military
group who tended to act together like the city-based levies to the south and
west. While the settlement of outsiders in Spain, southern Gaul and Italy
was dictated by, or at least does not seem to have disrupted, the existing
civitas structure, further north there was much greater discontinuity. 71

Moreover, even where civitas units did survive the invasion period, there
were other forces at work which, in some places at least, eventually disman-
tled them. The Roman civitas had many roles. Of central importance was
its position as the local administrative centre for the state: the unit of tax-
ation, the court of first resort, and so on. As we have seen, the post-Roman

69 Preaching: Klingshirn (1994); cf. Hillgarth (1980). Proto-parish systems: the essays of Stancliffe
and Fouracre in Baker (1979) with the studies collected in Cristiani^ga^ione (1982). Much recent work
on the establishment of parish and proto-parish systems has been done in England, where these pro-
cesses did not take place within civitas structures: see generally Blair and Sharpe (1992).

70 Political structures: as p. 439 above, n. 8. Ecclesiastical structures: Davies (1982) ch. 6.

71 See generally James (1982) 58—62; Halsall (1995) esp. ch. 8—9 provides a detailed case study.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

460 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

world witnessed a considerable simplification in state machinery. In broad
terms, the state increasingly imposed less pressure on local societies to act
through the unit of the civitas, and, with the removal of this outside stimu-
lus, different collectivities could assume greater importance.

This was a far-reaching process, and no comprehensive survey of it can
be attempted here. The way it tended to work, however, can be approached
through an examination of powers of taxation. One important mechanism
leading to a general decline in the importance of taxation was the granting
of immunities. The effect of such grants is summarized in the Frankish
king Chlothar II’s praeceptio and edict of 614. This forbade royal agents to
demand payment of taxes and other public charges from the lands of
immunists. The formulary of Marculf goes into further detail:

no public agent may enter [the land of an immunist] to hear legal proceedings, to
take the peace-money \fredus \ , to procure lodgings or victuals, or to take sureties,
or, for one reason or another, to use force ... or to demand payments . . , 72

Thus a grant of immunity removed a block of land from its existing admin-
istrative unit — usually a civitas and its count — making the immunist directly
answerable to the king for his remaining obligations, such as military
service. Where such grants proliferated, civitas communities would obvi-
ously fragment.

Immunities have long formed part of the ‘sacred rhetoric’ of early med-
ieval western historiography, and have been seen as central to the erosion
of Merovingian state power and the rise of the Carolingians. But immu-
nists, as a group, owed special allegiance to the king, and should perhaps
rather be seen as favoured royal supporters. Much more to the point for
present purposes is whether immunities were granted to lay as well as eccle-
siastical landowners in the Merovingian period. The sources show that in
principle they might be, but no specific example survives from the sixth or
seventh century. However, documents from this period survive only spas-
modically, and essentially via church archives, so the absence of lay immu-
nists from the documentary record is perhaps only to be expected.
Certainly, by late Merovingian times, many civitates had lost their cohesion.
The early-eighth-century correspondence of Boniface, for instance, seems
to reflect a world of small, administratively independent lordships.
Likewise, seventh-century kings restricted their rights to exercise a free
choice in appointing counts and bishops to civitates , agreeing to confine
their choice to local men. This development seems inconceivable if huge
amounts of territory, as in the sixth century, were still controlled from civitas
centres. Kings were probably willing to exercise less control over cities only

72 Form. Marc. 1.4, ed. A. Uddholm, Uppsala 1962, trans. James (1982) 62. The text refers to an eccle-
siastical immunist, but Chlothar’s edict refers to grants being made to both secular and ecclesiastical
potentes.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES 461

because cities were exercising control over a smaller percentage of the
kingdom. 7j

Outside Frankish Gaul, such processes took longer to unfold. In
Lombard Italy, the state continued to operate through the civitates to a much
greater extent. Only with the collapse of Carolingian rule, and the incastel-
lamento of the later ninth century and beyond, did the Roman administra-
tive landscape finally fragment. ' 4 For Spain, there is at present a much less
clear picture. There is a little evidence, however, that, although strong in
certain areas of the peninsula in the sixth century (see p. 45 5 above), in
others the civitas structure had begun to break down. The Life of St Emilian
(26) refers in passing to a mysterious ‘senate of Cantabria’ (not a pre-exist-
ing Roman unit) whose independence was suppressed by Leovigild. A
chance survival from the late sixth century likewise demonstrates that tax-
ation was then being assessed on several cities as a group and levied by royal
officials, rather than as the responsibility of individual civitates and their
curias. 73 The Islamic conquerors of the kingdom also made a treaty in 713
with a Visigothic noble named Theodemir, whose semi-independent lord-
ship was acknowledged over seven towns of south-east Spain. 76 Whether
this fief represented another late Visigothic grouping of previously inde-
pendent civitates or an ad hoc creation of the Arab invasion period, however,
remains unclear.

Across post-Roman Europe, then, there were wide variations in the
history of the civitas. In some areas, the fifth-century invasions delivered a
coup de grace. In others, civitates survived to play important roles in the suc-
cessor states, sometimes for many centuries. Everywhere, however, the role
of the city community was, if gradually, undermined by the disappearance
of those state institutions which had demanded the creation and mainte-
nance of the civitas network. There is reason to think that this process of
communal dissolution was paralleled by an increase in the degree of private
dominion being exercised by at least the larger landowners. It is to this
subject that the final part of this essay will turn.

2. Local lordship and its limitations

As we have seen, die erosion of the state in die post-Roman period gen-
erated some increase in local autonomy. More than that, it led to adjust-
ments in the social bonds operating at all levels of local society. The
evidence strongly suggests tiiat, in the longer term, the post-Roman

73 I generally follow here James (1982) 62—4. For revisionist views, Fouracre (1995); cf. Ganz (1995)
12—16. 1 am not, however, totally convinced that the lack of documented lay immunists is significant.

74 See e.g. Wickham (1981) 1 63 fF.

75 The so-called De Disco Barcinonensr, for discussion, see King (1 972) 69—70.

76 Collins (1983a) 153-4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

462 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

west was transformed by the appearance of increasingly rigid social
stratifications, themselves based firmly upon further transformations in
the rural economy.

(a) Freemen and nobles

Across the different successor states, a free class seems to have been char-
acterized by certain rights and obligations: a particular status defined by rel-
atively high wergild, attendance at public assemblies (for legal and other
matters), and a personal military obligation. 7. The relevant law codes
mention the fraud of the Merovingian kingdoms or the arimanni of the
Lombard. Freemen are also prominent in the Visigothic codes, and, among
the Ostrogoths of Italy, Procopius distinguishes an obviously large class of
notables who should probably also be identified as freemen. 78 Weapon-
burials in early Anglo-Saxon England probably also reflect not so much
fighters perse, as men claiming the same critical free status. 79 This legal cat-
egorization was not just confined to immigrant warrior groups, but also
extended to resident Roman populations. The Pactus Legis Salicae, for
instance, assigns to different categories of Romans wergilds half the value of
the equivalent Frankish group. 811

Over time, this initially prominent class disappeared as a major political
force. It seems probable, indeed, that the decline of centralizing state struc-
tures into largely autonomous lordships was accompanied by a breakdown
in the legal homogeneity of the free class. The unity of this group was orig-
inally upheld by the state (or common public consent, in less sophisticated
contexts) for a number of purposes: most obviously defence but also, via
assemblies, political unanimity. It was a unity artificially imposed upon men
among whom there already existed significant differences in wealth. In
Roman society, for instance, inherited differentials of wealth and status had
by c. a.d. 400 separated out the landowning class, as we have seen, into a
number of layers: honorati, principales and ordinary curials. Hence Gregory
of Tours identifies many Roman families of sixth-century Gaul as ‘senato-
rial’, even if the law codes do not assign senators a separate, higher wergild.
Archaeological investigations of Germanic societies of the Roman Iron
Age likewise suggest a picture of considerable and increasing social
stratification. This would be entirely in tune with the literary evidence from
the migration period. More and less powerful individuals clearly existed
among the sixth-century Franks, and something akin to a noble class can
be seen within Gothic society from the fourth century onwards. 81

77 The old view, based on rather partial readings of Tacitus, that the Germanic groups of the migra-
tion period were composed almost entirely of such men has been superseded. A good historiographi-
cal survey is Wickham (1992). 78 Heather (1996) App. 2. 79 Harke (1990) and (1992).

80 Compare on freemen, for instance, LexSalica 41 . 1 and 5, with 4 1.8 and 9; cf. 4 3. 4 equating Romans
with freedmen and boys, or Decretio Childeberti 3.7.

81 Roman Iron Age: Hedeager (1987) and (1988). Franks: Irsigler (1979); Grahn-Hoek (1976).
Goths: Heather (1996) 57—8, 299^

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES 463

As the public institutions of the successor states became less able to
shape local society, it seems likely that these inherent economic inequalities
(among both Romans and non-Romans) prevailed. As a result, lesser (i.e.
essentially poorer) freemen entered into tighter and more subservient rela-
tions with their richer neighbours, prompting a diminution in their status
and the rise of entrenched local high-status groups. Once such groups had
established their superiority to such an extent that it was heritable, then we
can start usefully to consider them as ‘nobilities’.

In Frankish Gaul, the new lordships of the seventh century seem to have
been associated with precisely this kind of social redefinition. A range of
archaeological and literary evidence, for instance, suggests that the
Frankish heartland of Austrasia saw noble families entrench their hold on
local society to an unprecedented degree around the year 600. We have
already come across the franci of late-seventh-century Neustria, not as a
large group of freemen warriors, but as a small group of noble families. 82
Elsewhere, the pace of change varied. Visigothic laws of the sixth century
distinguish lesser and greater freemen, but, at that time, despite vertical ties
of patronage, all shared the same wergild. Only later in the seventh century
were they ascribed different wergilds — probably marking the moment at
which status became essentially an inherited attribute. 83 In Italy, we have
seventh-century references to a few great Lombard families, and the laws
clearly expect that lesser Lombard arimanni might be bound by grants of
land to greater freemen. Only in the eighth and ninth centuries, however,
do arimanni disappear. 84

These kinds of processes were not everywhere triumphant. Ninth-
century east Breton society was composed of self-governing small-scale
communities — plebes — where all free landowners, no matter how small their
holdings, played a considerable part in the running of local affairs. Processes
of dispute settlement are best evidenced in the surviving material, and the
likelihood of an individual taking on particular roles (judge, assessor, expert
witness, surety, etc.) did vary with wealth, but only slightly. In this society,
the key right was to be recognized as a free local landowner, and greater
lordship played no dominant role. Even here, however, there is a caveat.
This society is made accessible by the survival of the charter collection of
the great Benedictine house of Redon, founded in the area in 832. The
monastery’s archive preserved material about the plebes only because they
later became part and parcel of its own title deeds. In the later ninth century,
Redon became the dominant landowner in the region, acquiring consider-
able powers of lordship. This material thus illustrates both the long-term

82 Halsall (1995) ch. 9. 83 Heather (1996) 283 ff.

84 Great families: Rothari’s Edict pref.; cf. Laws of Liutprand 62 on greater and lesser freemen. More
generally, Wickham (1981) 1 34ff. None the less, it is likely that substantial numbers of smaller free land-
owners survived very generally in Carolingian Europe beneath a politicked aristocratic elite: Wickham
(1992) with refs.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

464 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

survival of a world where it was chiefly important to be a free landowner,
but also the kinds of processes which might lead to its destruction. 85

(b) Freedmen

A second feature of the social structures of the post-Roman west is the
prominence and redefinition of a class of freedmen ( liberti ). Such a cate-
gory had long existed within Roman society, but, in the post-Roman period,
it evolved a new form. This was characterized by a permanent inherited
dependence of freed persons and their offspring towards the manumitter
and his or her descendants. The offspring of Roman freedmen, by contrast,
acquired total freedom. In Gaul, the new type of freedmen had become an
important social grouping by the end of the seventh century at the latest.
In the early-eighth-century will of Abbo of Provence, they form the most
numerous category of persons mentioned. In Spain, the church seems to
have made considerable use of this new style of manumission in the early
seventh century, with lay lords following suit later. From Italy there is less
evidence, but the mid-seventh-century edict of Rothari again includes a
series of provisions concerning this class. 86

What prompted the evolution of a class of new, permanently dependent
liberty For Visigothic Spain, it has been argued that they were generated in
an attempt to square the demands of Christian ethics with an existing
pattern of material, especially landed, wealth. Emerging Christian morality
declared the freeing of slaves to be a good thing, particularly for saintly
bishops. This tended to dissipate church assets, however, since people were
as important as land in agricultural production. Permanently dependent
liberti thus offered Christian gentlemen — ecclesiastical or lay — the oppor-
tunity to make their manumissions while, at the same time, preserving the
tied labour force which was central to their wealth. 87 There is an obvious
plausibility to this picture.

I suspect, however, that the new liberti may also have something to do
with the militarization of society in the post-Roman world. According to
Visigothic law codes, all liberti were required to fight with their lords when
the army was mobilized. This prescription applied to only a percentage —
5 per cent, raised to 10 per cent by king Wamba — of full slaves. A similar
distinction operated in the Merovingian kingdom, where liberti seem to
have been classed among the arms-bearing groups of society and expected
to fight, again under the aegis of their lord. 88 The popularity of freedmen

85 Davies (1988) esp. chs. 3—7. Whether this peasant society represents unbroken continuity from
the late Roman world is unclear.

86 Will of Abbo: Geary (1985) 91—9. Spain: Claude (1980). Rothari’s Edict passim on aldii, esp. 76—102.

87 Claude (1980).

88 Visigothic Code 9.2.8— 9. Salic Raw 26.1; although Laws of the Ripuarian Franks 60—1 distinguishes
church freedman from other liberti.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES 465

for landlords, therefore, may well have had something to do with the neces-
sity — as military obligations became generalized in post-Roman society —
of building a body of armed retainers with the requisite military traditions
and expertise.

Such upward social movement on the part of some slaves was paralleled by
a decline in the status of some formerly free peasants. We have already
encountered the long-term decline of poorer freemen in the Lombard,
Visigothic and Frankish kingdoms. Not dissimilar processes were already
working themselves out in late Roman society, which witnessed a major
decline in the status of formerly free tenant farmers ( coloni ), who did not
own the lands they worked. This particular group of coloni — in technical
terms, the adscripticii — were tied to their lands by the Roman state in an
attempt to turn the countryside into stable units of agricultural production,
and hence facilitate the collection of taxes. For the same reason, the impe-
rial authorities also forbade agricultural slaves to be sold separately from
the land they worked. And as differences between the rights of some for-
merly free tenants and some slaves started to disappear, the power of land-
lords over the adscripticii increased. From 365, adscripticii were denied the
right to alienate any property without the landowner’s permission. In 371,
landlords were made personally responsible for collecting their taxes,
removing any contact adscripticii may have had with imperial officials. In
396, they were debarred from suing their landlords (except for extracting
more than the customary rent), and, from the early fifth century, they
required their landowner’s consent to be ordained or to enter a monastery.
Hence, in the sixth-century east, Justinian could reasonably claim to see no
difference between adscripticii and slaves. 89

There is no way of knowing what percentage of the rural population was
composed of adscripticii , and hence whether this evolution marks a general
strengthening of the social, legal and economic dominance of the landlord
classes. In fact, this transformation was only one among several, some very
long-term, which, as we have seen, were all leading, if slowly, towards a
greater predominance of vertical ties of lordship in the local communities
of the post-Roman west. The break-up of the civitas unit, the decline in
status of lesser freemen, the appearance of liberti and a general shift in pat-
terns of slavery — all were probably just as important as the fate of the late
Roman coloni in generating the rise of a class of dominant landlords.

Lurking not very far in the background here is the thorny problem of
manorialization: the spread of what is often considered the characteristic
form of medieval estate organization. The classic medieval manor was a

89 Jones, LRE 795—803 remains the essential starting-point for any discussion of the late colonate.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

466 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

landed estate divided into two parts (hence ‘bi-partite’). One was worked
by the tenants of the estate to provide for their own sustenance. The other
part — the demesne — provided for the needs of the lord and was worked
by the tenants, who, in addition to various renders of produce, owed sub-
stantial labour services to the estate. 90 Did late and post-Roman develop-
ments mark an important stage in the formation of this characteristic rural
production unit of the medieval period?

There is some reason to think that at least its first foundations may have
been laid in the late Roman period and after. Detailed information on estate
organization in western Europe in the period 400—600 is rare to the point of
non-existence. No estate surveys survive, and very few charters, and there is
little to compare to the rich evidence provided by papyri from contemporary
Byzantine Egypt. However, an isolated piece of evidence reveals that in the
territory of Padua in c. a.d. 5 50, tenants ( 'colon i) of the church of Ravenna
were obliged to undertake heavy labour services on their lord’s demesnes,
amounting to between one and three days per week (in addition to various
renders). As always, it is difficult to know what to make of an isolated
example. There is no other Italian evidence for characteristically manorial
organization for another two centuries, and the tenants of the papacy’s
Sicilian estates in c. 600 seem to have owed only renders and no labour
service. 91 On the other hand, it is wildly unlikely that chance has preserved
evidence from the only manorially organized estate of sixth-century Italy.

More generally, although this is again a much disputed question, it has
been argued that some (not necessarily all) villas in the late Roman period
were tending to become centres of rural population rather than remaining
the dwelling-places of individual landowners. Agache’s aerial surveys in the
Somme basin in northern France showed that many villages of the region,
deserted later in the medieval period, had a Roman villa underneath.
Arguments have also been advanced from place-name and other evidence
for seeing Roman villas as the generators of medieval villages across much
of the rest of the Frankish kingdom. If so, this would suggest that in the
late and post-Roman periods, the Roman villa in Gaul at least underwent a
transformation highly comparable to the process of nucleation observable
later in other areas of Europe, when dispersed rural populations gathered
in concentrated settlements. 92 As we have seen, the diminution in status of
tenant cultivators — the adscripticii, at least — was also creating, at broadly the
same time, a labour force highly subservient to the landowning class. It is
at least worth suggesting that a nucleation of settlement around some villas
in our period was accompanied by an extension of landlord control over
the relevant parts of the rural population.

90 A good historiographical introduction is Rosener (1989) 9—28. 91 Wickham (1981) 99—100.

92 Agache (1970); c£, more generally, Percival (1976) esp. chs. 8—9. Some bibliographical orientation
on nucleation and manorialization: Cheyette (1977); Blair (1991) ch. 1; Hildebrandt (1988).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PEERS AND LORDS: LOCAL COMMUNITIES 467

The argument cannot be pressed. It is entirely possible to have a marked
increase in vertical bonds of lordship within a society, without, in the first
instance at least, generating a world of nucleated great estates. In the Metz
region of north-eastern Francia, an established nobility, passing on inher-
ited status, seems to have emerged in the eighth century, but bi-partite
manors only in the ninth. 9j Nucleation of settlement can also occur
without generating any increase in the powers of landlords. Villages existed
across much of the Mediterranean region in the Roman period without
manors coming into existence, and, acting as human collectivities, they
could even frustrate the designs of landowners . 94

Indeed, across much of northern Europe, it was only long after the fall
of Rome that processes of nucleation and manorialization worked them-
selves out. The subject has been explored to greatest depth for Anglo-
Saxon England, where these processes can be dated, in the arable lands of
central and southern England, between the seventh and the ninth century;
further north it was still under way in the twelfth. In the Frankish kingdom,
the Carolingian polyptychs demonstrate the existence of bi-partite estates
on monastic holdings in its north-central heartlands by the ninth century,
but the system was clearly not new at that point. The seventh and eighth
centuries have been suggested as the moment of their evolution.
Elsewhere, the position is far from clear, but the eighth and ninth centuries
would seem to have been an important period of bi-partite estate forma-
tion in Lombard Italy. Outside Roman Europe, the demonstrable date for
nucleation is generally even later. Nucleated rural settlements in Saxony, for
example, seem to have resulted from the imposition of Carolingian lord-
ship there in the ninth century and beyond . 95 Nevertheless, a local society
dominated by an elite of free peasants survived in parts of Brittany well
into the ninth century, and such societies had probably prevailed across
much of western Europe up to the Carolingian period . 96

Conclusions can only be tentative, but some broad outlines of develop-
ment seem clear. In the long term, the rural landscape was remade into a
series of estate units, under the domination of a powerful landlord class.
These formed the primary local communities for medieval peasants. Some
of the necessary transformations underlying this process were already
under way in the late imperial period, and some late Roman landlords may
have already essentially turned their estates into manors. Where the migra-
tion period saw substantial settlements of outsiders, such as around Metz,
these processes were probably halted or even reversed as lands were

93 Halsall (1995) 262fF.

94 The experience of Libanius in Antioch: Liebeschuetz (1972) 67—71 with refs. On all these issues,
see further ch. 12 (Ward-Perkins), pp. 327—33 above.

95 Anglo-Saxon England: Unwin (1988). Carolingian polyptychs: e.g. Duby (1974). Italy: Wickham

(1981) iooff. Saxony: Nitz (1988). 96 Brittany: see above, n. 85; cf. Wickham (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

468 l6. STATE, LORDSHIP AND COMMUNITY IN THE WEST

divided between members of the intruding freemen classes. As we have
seen, however, the importance of the freemen class was eventually eclipsed
everywhere by the rise of a stable class of larger landowners, perhaps by as
early as c. 600 in the Frankish kingdom, although actual manorialization
may have followed rather later. It remains an open but interesting question
whether surviving manorially organized late Roman estates presented the
more powerful freemen among immigrant groups with exciting new ideas
about how to extend their social pre-eminence.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 17

ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER
ROMAN WORLD

MICHAEL WHITBY

The Roman empire was a structure created and sustained by force that had
to be available for deployment both against external threats to the state’s
existence and against any of its inhabitants who attempted to reject or
avoid its authority. But for its first 250 years the empire managed to main-
tain a considerable separation between civilian and military spheres: sol-
diers were legally and socially distinct from civilians, and to a large extent
geographically as well, since most major concentrations of troops were
located along the empire’s frontiers. As a result, many of the ‘inner’ prov-
inces could appear demilitarized: 1 soldiers might pass along the arterial
roads or be on hand when a new census was held, but they were outsiders,
in the main recruited from, stationed in and demobilized into other less civ-
ilized (i.e. less urbanized) parts of the empire, either the periphery or the
uplands and other marginal areas. There was also, however, a close mutual
interdependence: the army consumed much of the surplus product of the
prosperous peaceful provinces, so that soldier and civilian were tied eco-
nomically; the emperor was both commander-in-chief of the armies and
the ultimate source of law, political authority and social status; provincial
governors and most other commanders of armies were members of the
senate, the pinnacle of the civilian social structure.

In the late empire this tidy picture was greatly complicated, primarily as
a result of extensive tribal invasions: provinces and cities that had once
been unmilitary had to remilitarize themselves; the army became an
important potential means of political and social advancement, successful
tribes created new centres of power where new rules governed relation-
ships; all the time the military had to extract resources from an economy
that was often suffering the effects of war. Over all, the military became
increasingly prominent in the different parts of the Roman, or former
Roman, world, but at differing speeds. What was happening in much of the
west in the fifth century only became noticeable in the east about 1 50 to
200 years later, after a period when the east appeared to be moving in the
opposite direction. This progression parallels that of the Graeco-Roman

1 Cornell (1993) 165—8; cf. Rich in Rich and Shipley (1993) 6.

469

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

47° 17 - armies and society in the later roman world

cities 2 — not surprisingly, since the civilian ideals enshrined in urban life
were being challenged by the militarization of local elites, while this
process of militarization reflected the changing social and economic bal-
ances within individual communities.

This chapter investigates the ways in which the army, as well as less
official types of military force, influenced political and social change in the
fields of imperial or royal authority, the preservation of public order, the
relationships of core and periphery, and the links between soldiers and
civilians. In most of these aspects it is a case of pointing to and explaining
the separate development of eastern and western parts of the empire
(though with the Balkan provinces regularly being close to the western
model).

I. military power and authority

At the very centre of society the military played a key role in determining
who wielded power, by involvement in accession ceremonies or usurpa-
tions, and by maintaining law and order; those who commanded and
deployed military force on such occasions naturally expected to reap
benefits in terms of increased influence and status. Within the Roman
empire the army (or groups purporting to represent it) participated in the
choice and confirmation of new emperors. For the east, where imperial
succession was relatively well-ordered until the bloody usurpation of
Phocas, many of the accession ceremonies are recorded in Constantine
Porphyrogenitus’ Book of Ceremonies or in contemporary writers. 3 The suc-
cession of Marcian to Theodosius II in 450 was performed at the parade
ground at the Hebdomon, and the new emperor was probably elevated cer-
emonially by soldiers, in spite of the fact that his betrothal to Theodosius’
sister Pulcheria provided dynastic legitimacy. 4 The ceremonies for Leo’s
accession in 457 also demonstrate the centrality of the army: Leo was
crowned first by Busalgus, a quartermaster ( campiductm ), at which point the
military standards that had been placed on the ground were lifted up; Leo
attributed his selection to ‘God the almighty and your decision, most brave
fellow soldiers’. The responding acclamations from the spectators empha-
sized the position of the army — ‘The army, with you as ruler, victorious;
the army, with you as ruler, fortunate’ — and Leo’s first thoughts were about
rewarding the troops. 5

Subsequent eastern accessions were centred on the Hippodrome and the
adjacent palace, and units of the palace guards, the scholae, candidati and excu-
bitores, naturally played a more prominent part, even to the extent of

2 Cf. ch. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 207—10 above. 3 MacCormack (1981) 111.9; Olster (1993) 159—63.
4 Chron. Pasch. 590.8—12; cf. Burgess (1993/4). 5 De Caer. 1. 91, pp. 410—12.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MILITARY POWER AND AUTHORITY 47 1

fighting each other during the deliberations that preceded the elevation of
Justin I in 5 1 8, 6 the only occasion between Leo I and Phocas when there
was no clear dynastic successor. The changes in ceremonial location and in
the military units involved might indicate that the field army lost influence
while the palace guards increased in importance; this, however, should not
be inferred solely from accession ceremonies, since in the 450s the ascen-
dancy of the general Aspar in Constantinople may have ensured extra
prominence for the mobile army. There had always been tension between
the ‘inside’ power of the imperial guards — originally the praetorians in their
camp on the outskirts of Rome — and the provincial armies: greater prox-
imity normally allowed the guards to decide inheritance within a dynasty, as
with Claudius in 41 and Nero in 54, whereas the greater muscle of the fron-
tier legions would conclude non-dynastic succession, as in the year of the
four emperors in 68—9 or in the civil war which followed Commodus’ assas-
sination in 192. Thus, the prominence of the guards at successions in
Constantinople after Leo is one token of the east’s ability to arrange a more
civilian and orderly presentation of the continuity of imperial rule: the
accession ceremonies were public demonstrations of the links that held
together the overlapping spheres of imperial, religious, civilian and military
authority.

In the west, both in the remnant of the Roman empire and in the tribal
kingdoms, the military were regularly prominent at the moment of succes-
sion. In 425 Valentinian III could only inherit his grandfather’s throne with
the support of a large eastern army which ousted the usurper John from
Ravenna. In 45 5 Avitus was placed on the throne of Italy through the
support first of the Visigoths under Theoderic at Toulouse, which was then
backed up by the Gallo-Roman aristocracy at Ugernum. After the deposi-
tion of Avitus by the Italian army in 456, all subsequent successions were
determined either by the tnajyster militum in Italy (first Ricimer, then
Odoacer) or by the intervention of the eastern emperor, whose nominee
Anthemius and representatives Olybrius and Julius Nepos all briefly held
power. Military force determined who occupied the throne, or indeed
whether it should be left vacant, until Theoderic the Amal captured
Ravenna and created the Ostrogothic kingdom by conquest.

Most of the tribal kingdoms reveal a conflict between the dynastic aspi-
rations of the dominant family and the military claims of their associates
and retinues. This is most clear in Merovingian Gaul, where the successive
partitions of Clovis’ spear-won territory between his sons, and then his
grandsons, were determined by military might. A son, such as Theuderic’s
heir Theudebert I in 533, would need the support of his leudes, or military
following, to counter the ambitions of uncles or cousins; a royal claimant

6 De Caer. 1.93.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

47 2 17 . ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

would be eliminated when abandoned by his military backers, as Gundovald
discovered at St Bertrand-de-Comminges in 585; an ambitious heir like
Chramn might even attempt to pre-empt his father’s death by carving out a
personal kingdom. Lombard Italy was another society whose political
superstructure was dominated by its military nobility: after the deaths of
Alboin and Cleph, the nobles decided to do without a king for ten years until
military needs led them to proclaim Cleph’s son, Authari, in 5 84. 7

Ostrogothic Italy during Theoderic’s long reign might appear more civ-
ilized and civilian than other kingdoms, but this was an impression deliber-
ately fostered by the regime and propagated to its civilian Italian subjects
by its spokesman, Cassiodorus. Theoderic seems to have appreciated the
benefits of cultivating the non-military ingredients of royal power, perhaps
in imitation of contemporary developments at Constantinople, but his
daughter Amalasuintha’s attempts to give her son Athalaric a Roman edu-
cation were frustrated, since the majority of Goths were not prepared to
move so rapidly from the traditional warlike ethos of their society.
Theoderic had never forgotten the military basis of his position, as is indi-
cated by his concern, like a Persian monarch, to ensure that his military sub-
ordinates attended court regularly to receive the king’s gifts. 8 After his
death, Amal authority quickly disintegrated, to reveal the fragility of the
dynastic aspects of his power. Theodahad could rely on disgruntled
members of the nobility in his manoeuvres against Amalasuintha, and,
after his own military ineptitude became clear in the early stages of the
Byzantine reconquest, the Goths chose a sequence of warriors as kings:
Vitigis, Ildibad, Eraric (who indeed was Rugian rather than Goth),Totila
and Teias.

The military units which helped influence the choice of royal or impe-
rial master also enhanced the standing of their commanders, so that
warfare was an important determinant of social prominence. The fifth
century appears as a period of warlords and kingmakers in both halves of
the empire. For two decades the west was dominated by the patrician and
magister militum Aetius. Although his father Gaudentius held military
command, it was Aetius’ personal connections with sources of troops that
made him important: Huns, recruited perhaps through contacts estab-
lished while serving as a hostage, permitted him to survive his involvement
with the usurper John and various later mishaps; he may also have annexed
the followers of his rival Boniface, whose wife and estates he certainly took
over. Aetius’ career as military protector of Valentinian III appeared to
achieve the dream of many late Roman soldiers — namely, marriage into the
imperial family — when his son Gaudentius was betrothed to Valentinian’s

7 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 56—60; Bachrach (1972) 31; Wickham (1981) 30—2.

8 Heather (1995 b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MILITARY POWER AND AUTHORITY

473

daughter Placidia. But, as so often, success was quickly followed by disas-
ter when Valentinian, perhaps urged on by the aristocratic senator
Petronius Maximus, personally murdered Aetius. The eastern equivalent of
Aetius was the family of Ardabur, whose son Aspar was the dominant
figure at the accessions of Marcian and Leo I, and whose grandson
Patricius was married to Leo’s daughter Leontia and proclaimed Caesar —
at which point the family was eliminated at the emperor Leo’s instigation.
The western rivalry of Aetius and Boniface was paralleled in the east by that
between Aspar the Alan and Zeno the Isaurian. As with Aetius, both rivals
had access to sources of power independent of the state: the Ardabur
family was linked to the Gothic war-leaders Plintha and Theoderic Strabo,
while Zeno’s background opened connections to a range of Isaurian sup-
porters of varying reliability.

It is possible to construct a complex family tree that incorporates into a
single seemingly unified stream most of the prominent military men and
ruling families from the fourth century to the sixth , 9 but this apparent
family unity reflects the truism that rulers wanted to annex potential
sources of military support, while war-leaders desired the social prestige
and economic rewards that the emperor controlled. The family of
Anastasius illustrates the mutual interdependence of the different elites . 10
The army was only one of the avenues to social advancement, while the
existence of large secular and administrative hierarchies provided alterna-
tive routes and ensured that education remained almost as important a
vehicle for social mobility as military prowess. This is most clearly the case
in the complex society of the eastern empire, but even in the west a stable
kingdom used its power of patronage to attract civilian supporters: sena-
tors who served the Ostrogothic court were rewarded with land grants in
the Po valley, while the Visigothic court at Toulouse might offer employ-
ment to an expert in Latin letters . 11 Although many generals did come from
professional military backgrounds, the hypothesis of Carrie that there was
a definitive separation of civilian and military careers relies too heavily on
the anti-military and anti-barbarian rhetoric of Libanius and Synesius. The
thesis cannot be substantiated, at least in the east: the families of military
men like Areobindus and Armatus attempted to establish themselves in
civilian society, while the holders of palatine offices like Celer, Tiberius or
Maurice might command armies in the field . 12

The potential political threat from military commanders could be
reduced by the choice as generals of relatives or close associates. In this
respect a turning-point was marked by Zeno’s success in ousting the
usurper Basiliscus and breaking the power of his former supporter, the

9 Demandt (1989). 10 Cameron (1978). 11 Schafer (1991); Harries (1994) 130— 1.

12 Carrie (1986) 485—7, relying on passages like Lib. Or. 11.37— 40 an d Syn. De Regno (on which see
Cameron and Long (1993) ch. 4). For details on individuals see PLRE 11 and m.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

474 x 7 - armies and society in the later roman world

Isaurian Illus; thereafter, throughout the sixth century, eastern emperors
retained control of their military establishment. Emperors did not cam-
paign in person, with the exception of a planned expedition by Zeno and
two sorties into the Balkans by Maurice, but most had some experience of
active command before reaching the throne. Relatives of Anastasius,
Justinian, Justin II, Maurice, Phocas and Heraclius regularly served as gen-
erals. Members, particularly officers, of the imperial bodyguard could also
be expected to be loyal after promotion to independent command:
Belisarius and Sittas under Justinian, Comentiolus under Maurice. Thus,
Belisarius declined to exploit his African or Italian successes against
Justinian, even when Justinian’s unpopularity gave hope of success. A
further source of reliable generals were the leaders of relatively small tribal
groups, especially those with a short history of contact with the Romans,
men such as the Gepid Mundo, the Slav Chilbuldius or the Herul Philemuth.
Eunuchs were another type of dependable outsiders: Solomon, a former
retainer of Belisarius, was Justinian’s most successful commander in Africa
after the reconquest, while the Persarmenian Narses, an outsider in two
senses, controlled distant Italy from 5 52 until his death in Justin II’s reign.

It is difficult to cite comparable examples from the western empire,
where the military tended to dominate civilians, in contrast to the east,
where civilians managed the military. The career of Belisarius, the rival of
Aetius as the most famous general in this period, illustrates the latter point.
Belisarius’ origins were sufficiently obscure for his parents’ names to be
unrecorded, but service in the bodyguard of the future emperor Justinian
led to military command in 527. In due course, glamorous victories in the
west brought him a devoted army, enormous wealth and the chance of a
royal throne at Ravenna, but he could still be humbled by the emperor, sym-
bolically in the triumph that commemorated his Vandal victory when he
performed obeisance to Justinian beside the captive Gelimer, and effectively
in 542 when he lost control of his personal following. It is possible that per-
sonal weakness and indecision, faults noted in Procopius’ Secret History ,
played a part in Belisarius’ failure to assert himself more fully, but his posi-
tion was also undermined by the sheer size of the eastern empire and the
diversity of its armed forces: these ensured that the dominance of any great
figure was always likely to be challenged. Belisarius’ problems with uncoop-
erative colleagues or subordinates in Italy in the late 5 30s and 540s can be
paralleled by dissension in the eastern army in 502—3, and again in the 570s
and 5 80s: the issue was not confined to one individual.

The ability of the civilian elite to marginalize the general is relevant to
the ultimate failure of conspiracies and usurpations in the east until those
of Phocas and Heraclius. Only the attempt of Basiliscus achieved brief
success, and this was virtually a dynastic squabble, since he was the brother
of Zeno’s mother-in-law, Verina; even so, Zeno quickly mobilized sufficient

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE MAINTENANCE OF ORDER

475

support in the east to regain control. Other substantial revolts, such as
those of Ulus against Zeno and Vitalian against Anastasius, achieved
success in one particular region but could not then extend their success to
other areas. Mutinies by particular armies, in Africa in the 5 30s and the east
in 588—9, remained confined to their area of operations. Some of the most
serious threats to imperial control were posed by non-military members of
the court: the bankers’ plot in 562, the suspected actions of Aetherius in
5 60 and again in 566, or the conspiracy by a group of officials, senators and
guardsmen against the outsider Phocas in 605.''’ These reflect the belief of
civilians that they could control society and, presumably with the co-oper-
ation of some powerful officials or members of the imperial family (as in
the planned Persarmenian coup of 548), change their master. Even the
success of Phocas’ own coup in 602 can lend support to this picture of an
essentially civilian society, since the mutinous army seems to have can-
vassed other candidates as the replacement for Maurice before turning
finally to its own leader. Heraclius, too, after the deposition of Phocas,
stressed the role of the senate in his coup and in the choice of new

emperor.

II. THE MAINTENANCE OF ORDER

Far from undermining imperial power, military force in the east was a
crucial element in the maintenance of authority. Law and order in the
capital and other major cities had to be upheld by a combination of per-
sonal display and the occasional deployment of violence. 15 Imperial pro-
cessions were accompanied by guards and other soldiers to magnify the
impact of the emperor’s appearance and to restore order if the spectators
turned to violence, as on Maurice’s procession to Blachernae at Candlemas
602. The extreme instance is the Nika riot of 532 when Justinian, faced by
massive popular upheaval and the desertion of parts of the imperial guard,
appealed for help to the troops stationed outside the city; these men, pre-
sumably drawn from the units commanded by the magister militum praesen-
talis which were quartered conveniently close to the capital, had to fight
their way through the city to the imperial palace, after whichjustinian could
at last take the initiative and plan the destruction of the rioters. Like
Anastasius when confronted by fierce religious rioting in 51 2, Justinian
attempted to calm the mob by appearing in the kathisma, but, after this
failed, troops were sent to the Hippodrome to massacre those present. The
death toll was exceptional, but the mechanics of urban control were not:

13 Malalas 493.1—495.5 with Exc. de Insid. fr. 49 and Theophanes 237.15—238.18; PLRE hi s.v.
Aetherius 2; Chron. Pasch. 696.6—17 with Theophanes 294.27—295.13, 297.12—298.4.

14 Theophylact vm.8.5; Nicephorus ch. 2 with Chron. Pasch. 708.4—9.

15 Lintott (1968) chs. 7— 11; Nippel (1984).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

476 17- armies and society in the later roman world

personal intervention by a senior official — the comes excubitorum, curopalatus
or city prefect — would be backed up by action by the excubitores, who would
be supplemented, if necessary, by regular troops. 16

Rioting in the capital city had extra significance, since the manifestation
of anarchy on the streets had implications for the emperor’s reputation, but
other major cities in the eastern empire had analogous problems. After the
Vandal sack of Rome in 45 5, however, no city in the west had the critical
mass to sustain a comparable urban explosion, though a specific grievance
might provoke uproar, as when the inhabitants of Trier lulled the unpopu-
lar tax-gatherer Parthenius. 17 The riots at Antioch are best attested, though
even here the evidence only reveals exceptional cases of violence. 18 The
task of maintaining order fell to the comes Orientis and the prefect of the
watch. Their regular resources were insufficient to impose peace, as the
riots of 507 revealed when, in spite of the presence of a Gothic guard and
the support of the Blue faction, the prefect of the watch, Menas, was dis-
embowelled by the Greens and the comes Procopius fled the city. 19 A new
comes could restore order, but he presumably arrived with a draft of rein-
forcements from outside, and there is no evidence that there was a large
garrison permanently stationed inside the city: certainly in 540 it was nec-
essary to move troops into Antioch in an attempt to thwart the Persian
attack. The troubles a century later at the end of Phocas’ reign highlight the
same issues. The comes Orientis Bonosus and the general Cottanas could not
initially quell Jewish disturbances in the city, during which the patriarch
Anastasius had been killed, but after withdrawing to gather troops they
could impose order with the help of the local Blues. 20

In Alexandria the standard problems of policing a megalopolis were
compounded by religious issues. The patriarch could organize considerable
violence through his patronage of monks and other ascetics, violence
which could be exported to other cities, as Dioscorus demonstrated at the
‘Robber’ synod of Ephesus in 449. Further, the doctrinal affiliation of the
mass of Egyptians was often at odds with the emperor’s preference, and
this opposition generated violence. Proterius, successor to the deposed
Dioscorus, could only be installed through the support of troops; initially
the rioters, led by members of urban guilds, forced the soldiers to retreat
into the Serapaeum, which was then set on fire with considerable casual-
ties, and order was only restored by the arrival of 2,000 reinforcements
from Constantinople; but Proterius was never accepted, as the emperor
Marcian admitted in a letter to the praetorian prefect in 4 5 5 when the pen-
alties against Manichees were extended to his opponents, and he was even-
tually lynched by his flock in 4 5 7. 21 As at Antioch, there were limits to what

16 Malalas 394.11— 395.5 ( c . 500— 7); 483.9— 13 (547); 490.16— 491.17 (561); Exc. de Insid. Malalas fr. 51
(565). 17 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.36. 18 Isaac, Limits of Empire 270—7. 19 Malalas 395.20— 398.4.

20 Theophanes 296.17—25; Doctrina Jacobi 1.40. 21 Frend, Monophysite Movement 148—55.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE MAINTENANCE OF ORDER

477

soldiers could do in the long term to impose order on a reluctant popula-
tion in a megalopolis, a problem not confined to antiquity. 22

Maintaining provincial law and order has been seen as a primary func-
tion, along with external conquest, of the whole Roman military machine. 23
Any special event might require the despatch of troops to maintain control:
when Symeon Stylites died on his column in 459 the people of Antioch
demanded his body to act as a talisman against earthquakes, and the comes
Orientis Ardabur had to send a guard of Gothic soldiers to ensure that the
body was not torn apart by relic-hunters between Qalat Seman and the
city. 24

Even in the more urbanized east there were areas that remained on the
edges of imperial authority in the fifth century, the most notorious being
Isauria, a traditional area where altitude conferred immunity from unwel-
come official demands. 25 Here the involvement of the bellicose mountain-
eers in central imperial politics between the 440s and the 490s — namely,
during the career of Tarasicodissa-Zeno — stimulated closer links with
empire -wide developments, symbolized by the construction of the lavish
churches at Alahan. But when centralist ambitions were thwarted, regional
rebellion flared. In 484 Zeno’s attempt to dominate Illus led to four years
of fighting. Illus attracted the support of Leontius, the Isaurian magster
militum per Thraciam, whom Zeno had sent against him, and of client satraps
of Armenia; he had Leontius proclaimed emperor, but Zeno’s generals
managed to isolate the rebels in the fort of Papyrius; the transfer of the
property of Illus’ relatives to the cities of Isauria will have helped to under-
mine his local support. The failure of the Isaurians to secure the throne in
49 1 caused renewed fighting: Anastasius had Zeno’s brother Longinus rel-
egated to Egypt, but two other unrelated Isaurians, Longinus of Cardala
and Longinus of Selinus, sustained a revolt in Isauria until 498, relying on
weapons and money stored there by Zeno. Anastasius eventually reasserted
imperial control, and the transfer thereafter of Isaurians to Thrace
imposed order, or at least ensured that problems remained sufficiently local
to escape notice. 26

The Tzani and the Samaritans were other upland peoples reluctant to
accept imperial authority. The Tzani were only fully subjected to Roman
control in 528/9, but a brief revolt in 558 required the intervention of
troops from the Roman army in Lazica. Order was restored by Theodore,
himself a Tzan by birth, whose military career illustrates the overall success
of Justinian’s policy of incorporating this people. 27 In Samaria the primary
function of troops was the suppression of religious strife. The Samaritans,

22 Bagnall, Egypt 164. 23 Isaac, Limits of Empire ch. 1—2. 24 Malalas 369.10—16.

25 For fourth-century troubles here, see Matthews (1989) 35 5—67.

26 PLRE 11 s.v. Illus 1, Leontius 17, Zenon 7, Longinus 3 and 4.

27 Procop. Buildings 111.6; Agathias, Hist, v.i— 2; PLRE m s.v. Theodorus 21.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

478 17 - armies and society in the later roman world

stirred to revolt in 529 by religious persecution, managed to proclaim a
brigand leader, Julian, as emperor and capture Neapolis. It took a little time
for Theodore, dux of Palestine, to co-ordinate the official reaction with
John (probably a fellow dux) and the leader of a local Arab tribe, but the
Samaritan resistance in the mountains was then suppressed with consider-
able bloodshed. A Samaritan revolt in 5 5 6 appears to have been confined
to Caesarea, although the death of the local governor during the troubles
again illustrates the fact that authorities rarely had sufficient forces on hand
to quell violence immediately. 28

Many eastern provinces were afflicted by lower levels of disorder, as is
indicated by Justinian’s overhaul of provincial administration that began in
the 5 30s. The intention was to strengthen administrative control by eliminat-
ing conflicts between civilian and military authority: in Pisidia and Lycaonia
the governor was upgraded to the rank of praetor, an enlarged Paphlagonia
also received a praetor, while a moderator was appointed to an enlarged
Helenopontus — salaries were higher, and civil and military power combined.
In Thrace the amalgamation of two vicariates into a praetorship was
intended to stop quarrelling and improve the defence and administration of
the hinterland of Constantinople. Brigandage, however, remained a
problem, as malefactors migrated across provincial boundaries to evade
justice: in 548 a supra -provincial authority had to be introduced in the Pontic
provinces, a vicar who controlled soldiers as well as financial and civil
officials, and in central Asia Minor a biokolutes, preventer of violence, was to
co-ordinate action in Lycaonia, Lycia, Pisidia and the two Phrygias. 29 In some
parts of the empire, such as the Sinai peninsula, where wandering Arabs
caused problems, troops regularly had to provide protection for travellers. 30

Brigandage could describe various activities, and the diverse nature of
the challenge to authority is indicated by a Justinianic law relating to
Honorias and by the problems of Cappadocia. A law concerning the sup-
pression of brigands was addressed to the large and small proprietors of
the city of Adrianople: this stipulated that no landowner was to have more
than five men in his retinue, whereas ten had been allowed at the time of
an earlier investigation. These retinues of lance-bearers or horsemen
allowed the individual landowner to take the law into his own hands. In
Cappadocia there were large imperial estates managed by the praepositus sacri
cubiculi, whose influence at court might have guaranteed efficient control,
but the province also contained several very wealthy landowners whose
armed retainers might annex imperial property and intimidate the local
governor and his subordinates. 31

28 Just. Nov. io3;Malalas 445.19— 447.21; 487.10— 488.3.

29 Jones, LRE 280—2, 294; in 5 5 3 the biokolutes 1 authority was confined to Lycaonia and Lycia.

30 Isaac, Limits of Empire 205 .

31 Feissel and Kaygusuz (1985) 399—401, 410—15 (cf. Nov. 30); Just. Nov. 30.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE MAINTENANCE OF ORDER

479

The efficient exercise of imperial or royal authority required a substan-
tial community of interest between such local grandees and the monarch.
In the east, the emperor preserved the balance in his own favour. Even in
the Balkans, when the obscure Scamareis took advantage of the severe dis-
ruption caused by Slav invasions to rob an Avar embassy, Tiberius could
identify the guilty and restore some of the property; under Maurice a
savage brigand chief was persuaded by a personal letter from the emperor
to stop his activities and come to court . 32 Brigands might well be people of
some local prominence who had become marginalized, perhaps through
no particular fault of their own, and whom it was important for emperors
to reattach to the proper channels of authority: a good example of the
process is the fourth-century Gallic brigand Charietto, a man whose
support for an unsuccessful usurper destroyed his connections with the
imperial centre, but who was then brought back into the fold by Julian.

In the west, the inability of the emperor to maintain such control led to
the emergence of ‘warlordism ’. 33 Local groups had to undertake their own
protection with scant regard to central interests: depending on the point of
view of the source, their leaders might be termed ‘kings’, as were Aegidius
and Syagrius in their principality at Soissons, or the groups dismissed as
bagaudae, whether it is correct to interpret these contentious people as the
Gallic equivalent of the private retinues of magnates in Asia Minor or as
peasant communities that had relocated themselves away from areas of
regular fighting. The members of such communities may well have
acknowledged imperial authority in theory, but have been more reluctant
to accept it in practice, especially if their preferred emperor was no longer
in control . ,4 The establishment both of the Visigoths in Aquitaine and,
more certainly, of Alans in northern Gaul has been seen as an imperial
response to such loss of civilian authority in parts of Gaul, and Aetius was
prepared to use the Alans to regain control of subject Romans; if this
hypothesis is correct, the strategy brought no more than short-term relief,
since the main beneficiaries were the tribes . 35

Within the emerging tribal kingdoms, rulers faced similar problems of
authority, albeit on a smaller scale. In Visigothic Spain, kings had a funda-
mental problem in attempting to make royal authority anything more than
nominal outside the immediate location of the court: in the mid sixth
century the inhabitants of Cordoba could rout the king, appropriate his
treasure and, like Merida, maintain virtual independence for several years.
Such determined conduct required joint action by local Romans and
Visigoths against their supposed master . 36 The king had no less difficulty
than a Roman emperor in retaining full control over his military following

32 Menander fr. 1 5.6; Farka (1993—4). 33 Whittaker (1994) ch. 7.

34 Van Dam, Leadership and Community ch. 1.3; Drinkwater (1992); cf. ch. 1 8 (Wood), pp. 502—9 below.

35 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 8—1 2; Burns (1992) 56—7. 36 Collins (1980) 198— 201.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

480 17 - ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

once it had been given its own property. In Merovingian Gaul, Theuderic
employed his army to discipline the Auvergne, probably in 523, after a false
rumour of the king’s death had led some Arvernians to switch allegiance
to Childebert; even the royal army found it difficult to capture fortresses
with their local garrisons. This campaign reveals the complexities of royal
authority: the army, disgruntled by Theuderic’s refusal to join his half-
brothers in an attack on the Burgundians and seeking an alternative source
of booty, forced the king to conduct the punitive invasion; thus,
Theuderic’s regional assertion of authority was combined with a demon-
stration of the power of the military over the king. 37 The Merovingian
kingdom had emerged from the amalgamation, often forcible, of the
heterogeneous war-bands that dominated northern France in the late fifth
century, and this fact conditioned the subsequent relationship of kings and
army.

Theoderic the Amal was well aware of the same problem, since in his
early days in the Balkans he had experienced the crisis of a recalcitrant
war-band when his followers threatened to switch allegiance to Theoderic
Strabo, who at die time appeared to be a better patron; in due course
Theoderic could turn to his advantage a war-band’s fluidity, when he won
over the followers of Strabo’s son, Recitach. As an establishment figure
at Ravenna, Theoderic had to reward his following with the land grants
for which they had struggled so long in the Balkans. This dispersal of the
war-band might well have encouraged the emergence of local centres of
power, but Theoderic appears to have countered this centrifugal danger
by demanding the regular attendance at court of the members of his
army. 38

III. LOCAL AND CENTRAL

The role of armies in maintaining order was crucial for the image of a par-
ticular regime. Preservation of internal stability and external security were
fundamental elements in the ideology of the Roman emperor, and were
largely adopted in the tribal kingdoms, since failure by any ruler to guaran-
tee protection was an invitation to others to intervene, either locals orga-
nizing self-help or new protectors arriving from outside. The physical and
literary rhetoric of Justinian’s building works proclaimed that the emperor
was ensuring the defence of frontiers and the protection of the empire’s
inhabitants: for example, with regard to the Balkans, Procopius asserted
that Justinian had re-established the Danube as the boundary, and provided
protection throughout the interior of the provinces by constructing
towers, while for reconquered Africa Justinian legislated to reintroduce an

37 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 52— 3; Bachrach (1972) 20— 2. 38 Heather (1995b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LOCAL AND CENTRAL

481

efficient garrison of frontier troops with some central reserve. 39 Theoderic
the Amal made arrangements for the defence of his kingdom’s coasts when
a naval attack from the east was rumoured, while Carcassonne was
rewarded by the Visigoths with urban status in recognition of its impor-
tance as a frontier town and strategic fortress for protecting Spain. 40

Rulers had to appear to be concerned for their subjects or face the con-
sequences. It is no coincidence that the end of Roman rule in Britain is
regarded as the withdrawal of Roman garrisons by Honorius, since an area
that had to defend itself could not be expected, or forced, to contribute
taxes to the imperial treasury, although it was only in retrospect that any
such move could be seen as decisive and final. 41 Tiberius came close to sig-
nalling the abandonment of Rome in 578/9 when he instructed the sena-
torial ambassadors who brought the traditional payment in gold to mark
his accession to take the money back and spend it locally on their own
defence, but here imperial interest did not disappear completely. 42 The Avar
Chagan understood the connection. At Anchialus in 588 he donned the
imperial robes dedicated there by the empress Anastasia, and challenged
Maurice’s authority over the Balkans by offering the cities the chance to pay
their taxes to the Avars in return for protection/’ The only regime that bla-
tantly took little interest in the safety of its civilian inhabitants was the
Vandal kingdom. Here, city fortifications were officially slighted, putting
locals at the mercy of Moorish raiders, but from the Vandal perspective it
was more important to eliminate potential centres of resistance than to
court the good will of subject Romans.

Weakness at the centre entailed a remilitarization of local society. In
some cases this had imperial sanction, as in 440 when Valentinian III
responded to Vandal naval attacks by encouraging local organization of
defences, but more often initiatives reflected local despair at imperial inac-
tion. At Clermont-Ferrand, Sidonius’ brother-in-law Ecdicius, with eight-
een companions and presumably numerous lesser followers, rescued the
city from the Visigoths; at the time, Sidonius still believed that the empire
was interested in retaining control of the Auvergne, but he was soon to be
disabused. 44 In the early empire, the imposition of a garrison on a city can
be seen as detrimental, a drain on local resources, 45 but in the late empire
any disadvantages were outweighed by the greater military threats and the
closer integration of soldier and civilian: the Roman world had reverted to
a condition in which warfare was much more familiar to a wider range of
its inhabitants than at any time since the late republic. Remilitarization of

39 Procop. Buildings iv.i.i— 14; CJ 1.27.2.8; cf. Bagnall, Egypt 161—72, contra Isaac, Emits of Empire
393—4. 40 Cass. Vdriae v.17; James (1980a) 226.

41 Whittaker (1994) 239; cf. ch. 18 (Wood), pp. 504—6 below. 42 Zos. vi.io; Menander fr. 22.

43 Michael the Syrian x. 21, p. 361. 44 Val. Nov. 9; cf. also C.Th. vii. 18.14, ix.14.2. Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.3.

45 Poulter (1992) 120.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

482 17 - ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

the countryside affected patterns of settlement, by encouraging people to
move from the vulnerable lowland sites and return to more defensible,
often pre-Roman, hill-top sites, or to attach themselves to the protection
of a local patron, the landowner who would soon become warlord. 46

Towns and cities showed interest in retaining control of ‘their’ troops.
The classic case here is Asemus, a small town just south of the Danube
frontier which had a strong tradition of self-help: in the 440s the locals pro-
tected themselves against Attila’s Huns, while in 592 under the leadership
of their bishop they barricaded the city against Maurice’s brother Peter
when he attempted to enrol the impressive local garrison in his field army.
The consequences of the loss of a garrison are illustrated by the fate of
Topirus, where the Slavs killed the professional defenders after luring them
outside the walls and then overcame the resistance, however fierce, of the
local civilians; at Thessalonica in 586 the gravity of the Avar attack was
heightened by the absence of the praetorian prefect with his troops on a
mission to southern Greece. 47 The desire to control troops locally lies
behind one of pope Gregory’s quarrels with Maurice. The emperor had
used Gregory as a channel for transferring money for the pay of the sol-
diers at Rome, but he was then extremely vexed when Gregory personally
distributed the cash, since this would imply that the pope was now paymas-
ter and so affect the soldiers’ sense of priorities; Gregory’s recurrent com-
plaints about the lack of a garrison at Rome and the different interests of
the exarch at Ravenna are directly relevant to this dispute. 48

A similar process had probably been under way in the west during the
fifth century. Here there is an apparent discrepancy between the paucity of
Roman troops available for combating major threats, such as Attila’s inva-
sion in 451, when the bulk of Aetius’ army comprised federates and allied
Visigoths, and the existence of local Roman units whose continuing
efficacy is indicated by accounts of their actions in the sixth century. In the
Burgundian kingdom there appears to have been a fusion of Gallo-Roman
and German military elements, which permitted this area to support a
standing army that was commanded by patridi, often Gallo-Romans; this
may have originated in an essential similarity between Gallo-Roman and
German aristocrats, men who possessed personal military followings, but
the structure was sufficiently stable to survive the elimination of
Burgundian leadership, since Merovingian rulers continued the pre-exist-
ing arrangements for organization and command. 49

In the main parts of the Merovingian world there is a noticeable military
division between the north-east (Austrasia) and the south and west
(Neustria and Aquitaine): in the latter, local levies, usually based on towns

46 Wightman (1985) 246-50; Casey (1993) 266-7; c h. 18 (Wood), p. 51 1 below.

47 Priscus fr. 9.3.39—80; Theophylact vn.3; Procop. Wars vn.38.9— 23; Miracula S. Dem. 1.128.

48 Greg. Reg. v.30, 34, 36, 38—9. 49 Bachrach (1972) 23, 41; cf. Bachrach (1993) 58.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

LOCAL AND CENTRAL

483

or cities but on a provincial footing in the case of Champagne, contributed
significantly to military activity, whereas in the former there is no evidence
for locally-based forces (Fig. 17, p. 442 above). This distinction is likely to
have originated in the different fates of these areas during the invasions and
migrations of the late fourth and early fifth century: nearer the Rhine fron-
tier, urban life was overwhelmed whereas, in the hinterland, communities
often had the time to organize themselves on a new military footing, which
was then preserved under Visigothic and Merovingian control.

The new ‘urban’ troops will have had diverse origins: in some cases the
local elite may have supplied the men, but at Bazas in 414 there is evidence
for a small group of Alans attaching itself to the town. 3 " These urban levies
constituted an important part of royal military resources, and it was essen-
tial for Merovingian kings to retain control of them through the local mag-
nates who commanded them. They appear to have operated on a seasonal
basis, with campaigns lasting a few weeks or months, and not to have been
deployed outside the kingdom — for example, on expeditions to Italy or
Spain — but for the defence of their locality and attacks on neighbouring
regions they were highly effective. Furthermore, these remilitarized Gallo-
Romans were no less enthusiastic than their Germanic contemporaries
about fighting when booty was in prospect. Numerous inhabitants of
Tours joined their levy’s expedition against Gundovald, though the men of
Poitiers ambushed them and dashed their hopes. 51

Toleration or encouragement of local military organization was bound
to challenge the operation of central power. If this development is one
aspect of imperial disintegration in the west in the fifth century, there are
signs that the east could have experienced the same fate. At Thessalonica
in 478/9 the inhabitants’ distrust of the emperor boiled over into a riot in
which they overthrew Zeno’s statues and threatened to dismember the
praetorian prefect and burn down his palace; the situation was calmed by
the local clergy, who helped the citizens to arrange the protection of their
own city, with custody of the keys being transferred from the prefect to the
archbishop. 52 A century later Thessalonica still had an efficient system for
mobilizing the urban population to man the walls. 5 " The inhabitants of the
Balkans, like those of the west, had to cope with regular insecurity. As a
result, local society became more militarized, but if these local military men
were not in receipt of imperial salaries — and the interruption of salaries to
limitanei suggests that they were not — loyalties to the centre would be
eroded.

The infrequency of military action on the eastern frontier throughout
the fifth century ensured that cities there did not develop local military

50 Paulinus of Pella, Euch. 377— 98. 51 Bachrach (1972) 65—8; Greg. Tur. Hist, vn.28.

52 Malchus fr. 20.5—19. 53 Miracula S. Dem. 1.107.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

484 17 - armies and society in the later roman world

organization so quickly, and Anastasius’ reassertion of a more civilian
style of government was also a deterrent. But here too resistance to
Persian attacks in the sixth century regularly involved die co-operation of
imperial troops and local civilians: eastern landowners had been given
permission to build defences, and at Amida in 502/3 part of the wall
circuit was guarded by local monks, while at Antioch in 5 40 and Jerusalem
in 614 it was the local circus factions who exhibited the fiercest opposi-
tion to the Persians. 54 In diese three instances the Persians overcame the
Roman defenders, and diis may point to another reason why there is less
evidence for die damaging centrifugal consequences of local military
action on the eastern frontier than in the Balkans and the west. Warfare
against the Persians usually entailed the deployment of an imperial army
which could repress separatist tendencies, as Edessa experienced in
602/ 3, and there was little hope that a city or region could sustain an inde-
pendent existence in the face of Persian might — deportation to southern
Iraq was a more plausible fate for the Romans, while massacre and pillage
terminated a brief period of autonomy at Persian Nisibis in 602. 55 The
direct clash of the two great powers of die ancient world helped to ensure
diat their common frontier was an area of strong central control, not of
disintegration.

Religion and imperial expenditure were the keys to preserving attach-
ments to the centre, sometimes in combination, as at Sergiopolis and the
monastery at Mount Sinai, where major religious shrines that served as a
focus for a mobile population received substantial imperial benefactions
which fulfilled both pious and strategic purposes. 56 At Edessa the story of
the acheiropoietos image, the miraculous representation of Christ that was
believed to guarantee the city’s safety, created a local focus for loyalties. But
the city had also received lavish gifts from the imperial family after the dev-
astating fiood of 525, and it knew Persian strength at first hand. In the relig-
ious version of the repulse of the Persian attack in 5 44, the icon’s power
was linked to the united efforts of soldiers and citizens in effecting the
destruction of the Persian ramp. In the 5 80s an acheiropoietos image accom-
panied the mobile army at Solachon in 586, where Philippicus first paraded
the icon to improve his troops’ morale, and then consigned it to a local
bishop who led neighbouring civilians in prayers for a Roman victory,
another successful tripartite combination. 57 On the Persian side of the
frontier, religion was no less important: Persian kings were sensitive to the
extension of Christianity, they encouraged the spread of Zoroastrian

54 Procop. Wars 1.7.22, Zachariah, HE vn.4; Procop. Wars 11.8.28—9; Antiochus Strategus chs. 2—3, 5.
Isaac, Limits of Empire 252—6; Segal (1955) 1 13.

55 Anon. Guidi 6—7; Chron. Seert-/ 4—5 (PO xm.507— 13).

56 Procop. Buildings 11.9, v.8; Cameron, Procopius 96—8.

57 Evagr. HE iv 27; Theophylact n.3.4— 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN 485

practices in Christian Armenia and Iberia, and monitored the behaviour of
bishops at major frontier cities like Nisibis and Chlomaron. 58

In the east the situation was changed by two factors in the early seventh
century: the repeated destruction through civil war and Persian victories of
the Roman mobile armies, and the development by Khusro II of a relig-
ious formula for weakening allegiance to Constantinople — those who
would subscribe to Jacobite or Nestorian doctrines would be left unharmed
by the Persians, and only the Chalcedonians with their perceived attach-
ment to the emperor would be victimized. 59 This development is undoubt-
edly relevant to Heraclius’ attempt to reunite the Christian churches after
his triumph over the Persians. Heraclius only managed to conquer the
Persians through propaganda that transformed the conflict from a secular
struggle into a religious crusade. 60 Once imperial authority was reasserted
over the east, Heraclius set about reintegrating the divided Christian com-
munities. The discussions with the Monophysites are the better known,
since these produced the heretical Monothelete and Monergist formulae
which split Roman Christendom, but the overtures to the Nestorian hier-
archy that resulted in the catholicus Isho-Yahb III participating in a
Chalcedonian service in Constantinople were just as significant. Emperors
appreciated the importance of reliable and competent bishops in control
of key cities, especially in areas of military insecurity, as shown by Maurice’s
request to pope Gregory for permission to replace a demented bishop at
Justiniana Prima. 61 Heraclius, however, lacked the time to recreate a reliable
episcopal structure after 628. Crusading zeal saved the empire once, but it
was difficult to repeat the feat against the Arabs. The presence or expecta-
tion of an imperial army would stimulate resistance, but otherwise the will-
ingness of the Arabs to tolerate Christians and the disruption caused by
Heraclius’ recent christological initiatives combined to undermine central
allegiances. 62

IV. SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN

Religion could serve to unite soldier and civilian in the defence of their
country. There is also, however, plenty of evidence that points to severe
tensions: this is not surprising, since a sizeable body of soldiers, young men
trained to be combative, will seldom be popular with the members of the
civilian society with which it has to interact, whether in Aldershot or
Edessa. The military ethos would encourage contempt for the non-
fighters, whose main function, from the military perspective, was to feed,
water, house and generally support the more important activities of the

58 Procop. Wars 1. 1 2.3—4; Whitby, Maurice 216—1 8. 59 Agapius, PO vm.460.

60 George of Pisidia, Heraclias. 61 Greg. Reg. xi.29; cf. Dagron (1984a) 16—17.

62 Kaegi (1992) 213—18 (with reference to the subsequent search for scapegoats).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

486 17- ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

military. Troop movements inevitably generated friction and complaints,
which are attested in the surviving evidence, but the problem is to estab-
lish what was the normal state of affairs. Narrative histories focus on excep-
tional cases, while papyri record particular disputes, almost invariably from
one prejudiced side, but these may not illustrate the less acrimonious rela-
tionship of the longer term: a British colonel who drove a regiment of
tanks across a north German field of asparagus generated a storm of local
protest that belied the overall nature of links between occupying army and
natives. These caveats need to be remembered while reviewing the negative
evidence. Soldiers did bring some benefits to the places where they served,
and the local civilians may not have been above attempting to exploit the
military for their own ends. Soldiers had possessions which might be stolen
by the hosts on whom they were billeted, while it was the economic vulner-
ability of soldiers as a captive market that had underlain the promulgation
of Diocletian’s Prices Edict . 63

The Roman world had always been a violent society with a tradition of
permitting a considerable element of self-help, sometimes physical, in the
resolution of disputes . 64 Roman law had developed around this foundation
as a means of curtailing its damaging consequences, and the great legal
enterprises of Theodosius II and Justinian represented the culmination of
these attempts; they ensured that the rule of law could be presented as
characteristic of Romans, a feature of civilization and power which
differentiated Rome from the tribal monarchs, who might, though, be
stimulated to imitation . 65 But legal pronouncements could not eliminate
violence, and the various parts of the Roman and post-Roman world
reveal, not surprisingly, its acceptance and exploitation at all levels of
society. Custodians of the law were not above resorting to illegal force
when necessary. The emperors Leo and Zeno both used assassination to
remove the rival families of Aspar and Armatus, Valentinian III was per-
sonally involved in the murder of Aetius, and Theoderic the Amal permit-
ted the bludgeoning to death of Boethius. If Justinian was more civilized
in treating those accused of plotting against him, his rise to the throne had
been accompanied by a deployment of urban violence against potential
rivals that was difficult to repress at the start of his reign. Brute force was
always an option when dealing with recalcitrant opposition: Belisarius used
threats to remove pope Silverius from Rome and subsequently colluded in
his elimination; shortly before the Fifth Oecumenical Council pope
Vigilius was dragged to a meeting with Justinian from an altar where he had
taken refuge, with such violence that the altar collapsed on top of him;
Monophysites constructed a catalogue of the oppression to which they had

63 Bagnall, Egypt 172—80, 219—25; Frank (193 3—40) v.307— 421, with Whitakker (1994) 1 1 1.

64 Lintott (1968) chs. 1—2.

65 Priscus, fr. 6.2.419—510; cf. ch. 10 (Charles-Edwards), pp. 284—7 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN

487

been subjected . 66 In the provinces local officials might take the law into
their own hands: Dioscorus of Aphrodito complained against the depre-
dations effected by the pagarch Menas’ henchmen — though here, as often,
it is essential to remember that we only have the ‘victim’s’ side of the
dispute . 67

Churchmen also deployed violence for their own ends. Dioscorus
brought soldiers to Ephesus to ensure the ratification of his doctrinal
views, while Severus of Antioch obtained support for his Monophysite
views from Asiaticus, the dux of Phoenicia Libanensis, who expelled the
bishops of Epiphania and Arethusa for insulting Severus. Severus was also
assisted by Conon the bandit-chaser, lestodioktes, who had received instruc-
tions from Calliopus, a deputy magister militum and correspondent of
Severus . 68 Hilary of Arles, when making ordinations in outlying parts of his
diocese, was accompanied by an armed escort to see that his nominees were
imposed. Such use of force in church affairs was prohibited by pope Leo;
Valentinian III backed the pope and required provincial governors to co-
operate in disciplining unruly bishops, but at local level, violence appeared
normal and effective. If a bishop did not use force to secure his nomina-
tions, it was quite possible that a magister militum would use troops to install
his man: bishops were important leaders of secular society, a dual role sym-
bolized by Germanus of Auxerre’s decision to retain his general’s cloak as
a reminder of his previous career . 69

Leading clerics used violence, and others used it against them. Bishop
Cautinus of Clermont abandoned an annual pilgrimage to Brioude for fear
that the prince Chramn’s men would not respect the holy occasion; rules of
sanctuary were manipulated to the benefit of the powerful, so that
Merovech and Guntram Boso camped with their armed followers in
Gregory’s church at Tours, bringing royal retaliation on the city, while
Guntram moved his daughters in and out of sanctuary according to the
vagaries of his career ; 70 murder might be committed in the forecourt of a
church, and the cleric Quintanus was killed at the altar . 71

Army, church and court were the three great consumers of resources in
the late Roman world, with the army as the greatest of these, a highly
complex mechanism for the appropriation, consumption and hence redis-
tribution of resources, economic and human; its requirements affected
every tax-payer, or even tax-defaulter. In these days of military retrench-
ment and consequent hopes of extra resources for reallocation, it is worth

66 Procop. Secret History 1.14; Liber Pontif. Silverius, Vigilius; John Eph. Lives 24 (John of Tela), 25
(John of Hephaestopolis), 47 (refugees in Constantinople).

67 MacCoull, Dioscorus 23—8. 68 PLRE 11.164 s - v - Asiaticus and 11.252— 3 s.v. Calliopus 6.

69 Heinzelmann (1992) 241—2, 246; Van Dam (1992) 326.

70 Bachrach (1972) 48—9; Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 83.

71 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 75, 82; each story included an element of divine retribution which
marked historiographically what was acceptable behaviour.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

488 17- ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

stressing that military inactivity had costs for the Romans. 72 Along the
Danube and Rhine frontiers, any perceived weakness in defences would
embolden those outside to attack or demand more peace-money, as for
example the Avars did in 578, whereas successful action could allow troops
to support themselves from the profits of conquest — or so Maurice
believed when ordering the Danube army to winter north of the river in
602. Even on the more stable Persian frontier, where cross-border traffic
was regulated by treaties, an impression of power would help to restrain
Arabs and other clients and deter opportunist Persian aggression.

Troops required regular supplies, and one of the determinants for the
location of major military concentrations, and hence for the siting of fron-
tiers, was the availability of the necessary goods and services — hence a
preference for river frontiers, with their greater ease of transport. 73 The
frontier armies were a crucial element in the empire’s complex circulatory
economy, receiving the surplus product of provinces in the hinterland and
serving to stimulate agriculture and other forms of production there. 74
Units had always supervised the acquisition of some of their supplies,
which might be produced from neighbouring lands under their control —
hence the absence of villas in north Britain — or acquired through the kind
of long-distance operations attested in the Vindolanda tablets. 75 Greater
reliance on payment in kind as a result of disruptions to the economic
system in the third century affected the nature of the process, since the mil-
itary might now be involved in the acquisition of their pay as well as their
food. That this caused problems is evident from the numerous laws in the
Theodosian and Justinianic Codes about taxes in kind, subsistence allow-
ance, and requisitioned services: use of incorrect measures, fixing of com-
pulsory purchase prices, adjustment of proportions between cash and
kind, and excessive exactions of transport all caused problems. 76 An officer
might often have the power to flout the law, however strictly it was drafted:
when Rome was besieged in 5 46 the garrison commander, Bessas, specu-
lated in grain at the expense of the civilians. 77

Whatever the problems, however, the fiscal— military system continued
to function in most of the eastern empire — the stomach that fed the arms,
to adopt the imagery of Corippus. The ideal was for each military region
to be self-supporting as far as possible. Anastasius attempted to ensure that
each diocese produced sufficient supplies for its own ordinary require-
ments through payment of the land-tax in kind. He acknowledged,
however, that in Thrace the numerous troops could not be supplied in this
way because of the disrupted state of local agriculture, and so permitted
the regular continuation of compulsory purchases, coemptio. But even here

72 Cf. Lieu (1986). 73 Whittaker (1 994) ch. 4. 74 Hopkins (1980a).

75 Breeze (1984) 264—86; Bowman (1994) 42—9.

76 C.Th. xi.i, vn.4; Isaac, Limits of Empire 285-97. 77 Procop. Wars. vn. 17; 19.14.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN

489

the emperor’s ability to produce or deny supplies was a vital element in
dealings with Gothic war-bands. One of the advantages of the Justinianic
quaestura exercitus which connected the administration of Thrace and the
more settled areas of Caria and the Aegean islands was that this permitted
a greater degree of self-sufficiency within an administrative unit. Problems
could still occur, and troops delayed outside Adrianople in 5 5 1 experienced
hunger. 78 Later in the century Tiberius, granting a 25 per cent reduction of
tax payments in gold for the next four years to celebrate his elevation to
Caesar, maintained levies in kind and specifically referred to the continua-
tion of such payments from Mesopotamia and Osrhoene for storage and
military purposes. 79 The western empire failed to sustain this centralized
economic— military system, a cause as well as a symptom of its decline.
There the transformation of the military into groups supported by settle-
ment on land represented a major change in the nature of the state, its
authority and ability to collect and deploy resources. 80

People also had to be moved from the civilian to the military sector. In
normal circumstances recruitment probably worked fairly smoothly,
through a combination of hereditary service, volunteering and conscrip-
tion from within the empire, coupled with the employment of foreign mer-
cenaries. But even a smooth operation might have significant consequences
for individuals: the fact that the father of St Saba was drafted from his
native Cappadocia into a unit of Isaurians who came to be stationed in
Alexandria meant that the saint’s mother accompanied her husband to
Egypt and the young Saba was brought up by relatives. 81 At times of pres-
sure, and especially military crisis, harsher methods had to be used, as
potential recruits tried to evade enrolment by self-mutilation or attachment
to a powerful patron. Under Maurice in the 5 80s even monasteries did not
provide safe refuge, as recruiting officers were sent in to obtain the desper-
ately needed soldiers by force. 82

If troops in fixed locations created problems for civilians, their movement
aroused even more: supplies would have to be found along their route, and
accommodation provided. In the east the tax system was efficient enough to
see that supplies were available for distribution, either through the storage of
regular receipts in kind or through the exaction of supplementary levies.
Arrangements for provisioning the public transport system were claimed to
be beneficial to remote rural areas, which might lack an alternative market
for their produce. 8 ’ The billeting of troops, however, generated a significant
body of legislation, and an inscription from the Thebaid in Egypt attests the
construction by local inhabitants of a hostel specifically for the needs of sol-
diers; restoration of the building was supervised by the local bishop. 84 In the

78 Corippus 11.249— 53; 6/ x.27. 2.10; Procop. Wars vii.40.39; Jones, ERE 280. 79 Nov. 163.

80 Cf. Wickham (1981) 40. 81 Cyr. Scyth. V. Sabae 1. 82 Michael the Syrian x.2i,vol. up. 362.

83 Bagnall, Egypt 172—3 ; Procop. Secret History 30.1 1; Hendy, Studies 606—8. 84 Gascou (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

49° 17 - armies and society in the later roman world

west, where the complex fiscal system could not have survived the tribal
migrations of the early fifth century and the allocation to war-bands of sub-
stantial territories for settlement, the passage of troops was bound to be
more disruptive. A signal distinction of Clovis’ attack on the Visigoths in 507
was his order forbidding his followers to plunder church lands along their
route: only grass and water could be taken, and a transgressor was person-
ally killed by Clovis (a similar story is told of the Persian king Hormizd IV). 85
On the campaign against Septimania in 585 the Frankish army, which con-
tained various urban contingents, killed, burned and pillaged even before
entering enemy territory, and after the expedition’s failure the churches
around Clermont near the main road were stripped of their plate; the
journey from Paris to Spain of the princess Rigunth in 5 84 was almost as
destructive through the combination of casual pillaging and unpaid requisi-
tioning. In the Balkans in the 480s the Goths of Theoderic, allegedly the
friend of Zeno, drove off cattle and killed farmers in Thrace. 86

Armies might pillage their own side, but the depredations of an enemy
were far worse: from Antioch in 540, Dara in 573, Singidunum in 595,
Jerusalem in 614 or Cyprus in 649/ 50 thousands of captives were led away,
along with transportable booty that might extend to marble columns and
mosaic tesserae ? 1 Decades of fighting in Italy resulted in destruction at
almost every important city and fortress, with the exception of Ravenna,
and had a long-term impact on settlement patterns. 88 Casualties would have
been as great. Outside Naissus the bones of those killed in the city’s capture
by Attila were still littering the river bank years later, and any successful
besieging army was likely to go berserk once inside a place that had resisted
their efforts, as at Amida in 502 or Dara in 573 . Only speedy surrender could
avoid such destruction, though the bargain might not always be kept, as
Apamea discovered in 540 after opening its gates to Khusro. Few trans-
ported captives would ever return. In Persia they would be settled in special
communities, such as Khusro ’s New Antioch, while north of the Danube
they would be incorporated in the subject populations of the Hun or Avar
federations, perhaps as the basis for a separate military unit, as with the
tribe led by Maurus/Kouber; the Slavs had the reputation of being abnor-
mally kind to their captives, who might choose not to return home if
offered the chance. 89 A long-delayed home-coming had its own problems,
as revealed by the survivors of the Hunnic sack of Aquileia who discov-
ered that their wives had innocently remarried. Invasions created refugees:

85 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.37; Tabari 265—8 (Noldeke). Cf. Belisarius in Africa: Procop. Wars m.16.1— 8.

86 Malchus fr. 18.4.2—7; Greg. Tur. Hist, vm.30; vi.45.

87 Procop. Wars n.9.14— 18; John Eph. HE vi.6— 7; Theophylact vi.io.i; Antiochus Strategus 9—17;

Chrysos (1993) 10. 88 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 39—42.

89 Priscus fr. 1 1.2. 51— 5; Joshua 5 3; John Eph. HE vi. 5— 6; Procop. Wars n. 14. 1—4 with Theophylact
v . 6 .i\—-j .y, Miracula S. Dem. 11.286—8; Maurice, Strat. xi.4.8— 16. Thompson (1982) 84—6, 100—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN 491

the men of property whose attempted escape from Salona precipitated
their city’s capture by the Croats, the fugitives from Naissus and Justiniana
Prima who spread terrifying stories about the Avars’ siege engines, the
abbot Eustathius driven by the Persian storm from his monastery near
Ankara and deprived of his books, or the starving common people who
gathered for help at the monastery where the patriarch Eutychius was in
exile in Pontus. 90

The sudden arrival of troops would disrupt the economic structure of
even the best-organized cities. Famine in Antioch in 363 is plausibly con-
nected with the presence of Julian’s army en route to Persia, and the troubles
caused at Edessa when it became the base for the eastern army during the
war of 502—5 are detailed in the Chronicle of Joshua : each household had to
supply ten pounds of iron for last-minute repairs to the defences, wheat
was provided for a compulsory baking of bread for the soldiers, while there
is a catalogue of abuses committed by the quartered defenders upon their
hosts — robbery, violence, rape, drunkenness and murder — until the
aggrieved citizens posted complaints against the general. 91 In Egypt the
monk Shenoute denounced soldiers for pillaging towns, fields and monas-
teries, and for despoiling people; this contributes to a centuries-old tradi-
tion of complaints about soldiers giving a ‘shaking down’ to civilians. The
official army is only one aspect of military activity, 92 and if the officers of
a garrison army were reluctant to punish their soldiers’ crimes, it is not sur-
prising that misbehaviour by an individual soldier outside the group would
also be condoned. The story of Euphemia and the Goth narrates how a
soldier attempted to obtain a slave by promising marriage to a young
Edessene, who only discovered that he was already married after she was
far from home; naturally this Christian tale has a happy ending, and the
proud Goth was punished by the laws of the Romans. But soldiers did not
always escape military punishment: at Corinth two imprisoned bucellarii of
the prefect (presumably of Ulyricum) scratched on the wall a plea for divine
help in achieving their freedom. 93

At Edessa, though, it was admitted that not all soldiers were guilty of
misbehaviour, and it is worth reviewing the benefits that military activity or
presence might bring. Protection is the most obvious, and even billeted
troops might provide this, as Paulinus of Pella bemoaned when his house,
at whose exemption he had originally rejoiced, was sacked. 94 Travel would
be made safer on those roads that were regularly patrolled. Booty enriched
the successful soldier: Maurice’s Balkan army was affronted when the

90 Thomas the Archdeacon 26—7; Miracula S. Dem. 11.200; letter of Antiochus the monk, PG
Lxxxix.1421— 8; Eustratius, Life of Eutychius , PG lxxxvi.2, col. 2344B. 91 Joshua 86, 93—6.

92 Patlagean, Pauvrete 3 1 3—1 5 ; Bagnall, Egypt 1 80.

93 Segal (1970) 140— 1, quoting Burkitt (1913); Feissel and Philippidis-Braat (1985) p. 361 no. 22.

94 Paulinus of Pella, Euch. 281—90.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

49 2 17 . ARMIES AND SOCIETY IN THE LATER ROMAN WORLD

emperor tried to annex its personal profits, and it was something which
required special protection on campaigns. The lucky officer could become
very wealthy, like the Isaurian Arbazacius in 404/ 5 or the rapacious Bessas
at Rome in 546; civilians might also benefit, as when the landowners of
Martyropolis stripped Persian corpses outside their city. 95 Captives could
be used to resettle underpopulated areas — for example, the Persian
Christians from Arzanene who were sent to Cyprus to revitalize that island.
Veteran soldiers, or groups of foreign mercenaries between bouts of activ-
ity, could perform a similar function while helping to protect their newly
acquired lands. These would ideally be settled with wives and families to
ensure stability and commitment to the region, as with the 30,000
Armenian families that Maurice was alleged to have planned to move to
Thrace. A group of warriors without women remained volatile, as for
example the 300 followers of the Lombard Ildigisal who could quickly
abandon their settlement on imperial property when their leader was
insulted. 96

Military expenditure was also a benefit. The proximity of major concen-
trations of troops has been suggested as one of the factors that contrib-
uted to the prosperity of the Syrian countryside throughout late antiquity. 97
The creation of Dara introduced a very large sum of imperial money into
a frontier region: employment was provided to numerous local civilians
during the construction, and a large new market was created that stimulated
the agricultural development of the plain below the city, which is crossed
by a complex irrigation network. On the Tur Abdin plateau above the new
city villages flourished, with substantial new constructions under the
impact of imperial salaries and new building skills. Dara is an exceptional
case, partly for its size, partly for the survival of the physical evidence, but
fortification work at many other sites would have had proportionate effects.
It seems, contrary to earlier imperial traditions, that the army might rely on
civilian labour for military constructions, since the attempt to fortify
Mindon and the clearance of the moat at Carthage both used civilians. 98

Where troops remained stationed for any length of time, they soon
established close links with local society. Quite apart from specific lands
which were allocated to certain categories of troops, but which might be
appropriated by civilians, soldiers regularly owned property in their own
right or married people who did, as the epitaph of Flavia, wife of the
tribune who perhaps commanded the garrison at Larissa, records. 99 The
economic life of the Theodosian camel corps stationed at Nessana in the

95 Theophylact vi. 7. 6—8.1; Maurice, Strat. v; PERE 11.127—8; Procop. Wars vn.17; Malalas 469.1—3.

96 Theophylact m.i 5.13— 1 5; Evagr. HE v.19; De Rebus Bellicis 5; Sebeos 20; Procop. Wars

viii. 27. 1— 18. 97 Liebeschuetz (1972) 80.

98 Zachariah, HE vi.6; Procop. Wars 1. 13.2—3; m.23.19.

99 Avramea and Feissel (1994) 361—2 no. 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN

493

Negev is revealed by a dossier of documents. Part, at least, of the unit was
recruited locally and it formed a stable social group; its members were nat-
urally involved in local transactions of houses and land, which would be
registered at the civilian record office in nearby Elusa; this land, owned by
the soldiers in a private capacity, was subject to normal taxation. 1 "" Such
landowning soldiers did not necessarily become soldier-farmers, whose
military activities might be curtailed by the rhythms of the agricultural year;
rather, they were like other men of status, rentiers who could cultivate their
lands through tenants or other dependants. From Egypt, there is evidence
both for the itinerant soldier Flavius Taurinus leasing out his property
through middlemen, and for Flavius Donatiolus, a member of the equites
Mauri scutarii at Hermopolis, leasing arable land from a local landowner. 101

Static units in Egypt reveal patterns of economic integration compar-
able to Nessana. The fourth-century Abbinaeus archive provides evidence
for a local military commander as the recipient of petitions, in some cases
from civilians, who should not have been presenting their complaints to
him. The units stationed at Syene, Philae and Elephantine in the late sixth
century were the dominant members of local society, who combined non-
military activities such as that of boatman with membership of their regi-
ments. These units might appear underemployed, with property and other
financial transactions and the supervision of the grain supply as their main
concerns, 102 but there were serious frontier threats in the fifth century from
the Blemmyes and Nobades, and the rural unrest in the Delta c. 600 for
which we have evidence is unlikely to have been unique. In Italy the
Byzantine army of occupation quickly dug itself into local society, provid-
ing evidence for the coalescence of military, property and administrative
power. 103 Everywhere soldiers, and especially officers, will have been pow-
erful people whose influence inevitably undercut that of other patrons and
generated the disgruntled outburst of Libanius about the improper beha-
viour of soldiers in the hinterland of Antioch. 104 His strong self-interest
needs to be remembered when assessing his complaints, and also the fact
that Antioch, an imperial residence for much of the fourth century, may
have been exceptionally affected by the spending power of officers’ sala-
ries. But soldiers could be victims as well as exploiters. Busas at Appiaria
was refused ransom by the town’s inhabitants, allegedly because one prom-
inent individual had seduced his wife. 105

Another positive aspect of the Roman army, at least in the east, where a
balance was maintained between internal and external recruits, was its con-
tinuing power to civilize outsiders. In the west, where the Germanic noble

100 Isaac Limits of Empire 209; Nessana doc. 24 in Kraemer (1958).

101 Bagnall, Egypt 1 51 n. 12; Jones, ERE 662. 102 Jones, ERE 662; Whittaker (1994) 144—5, 263.

103 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 101— 8. 104 Cf. Bagnall, Egypt 173 and ch. 6; Lib. Or. xlvii.

105 Theophylact 11.16.7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

494 x 7- armies and society in the later roman world

with his war-band was the dominant military figure, it is probable that the
remnants of Romano-provincial forces, under the command of their land-
lord-warlords, adopted ‘barbarian’ attitudes and ideals. Peter Brown has
pointed to an ill documented change in lifestyle that brought to a provincial
nobility, now isolated from the imperial court, more frequent opportunities
for fighting. 106 Nevertheless, even in post-reconquest Italy, an extremely
debilitated society, there is evidence in property transactions and legal dis-
putes for the continuing fusion of the remnants of Theoderic’s Goths with
Romans, and it is likely that the Bulgar mercenaries in the Byzantine armies
also rapidly assimilated themselves. 107 Elsewhere in the west, the process
was not all one way: Arbogast, a descendant of the Frankish magister militum
Arbogast of the late fourth century, held office as comes Trevirorum and
received letters from Sidonius which praised his Latin culture; he asked
Sidonius to compose a work of scriptural exegesis, without success, and
ended up as bishop of Chartres. 108

The rise to power of local commanders had a much greater impact on
local society, and indeed the overall operation of the empire, than the
much-discussed issue of the gradual introduction into territories under
Byzantine control of the ‘theme system’, the term used to designate the ter-
ritorial administrative units that underpinned the main Byzantine armies
after the mid seventh century. 109 Themes can be seen as the inescapable
administrative corollary of the gradual change in the nature of Roman mil-
itary organization that had been under way, intermittently, for over two cen-
turies. In the tribal west, armies had been localized at an early stage in the
process, when war-bands took control of specific areas. In the eastern half
of the empire, the Balkan provinces tended to follow the western model,
and territory was allocated, or alienated, to tribal groups during the fifth
and sixth century, a process which culminated in the establishment of Slav,
Serb, Croat and Bulgar groups within the Danube frontier in the seventh
century with only nominal imperial sanction. On the eastern frontier, the
greater vitality of urban life dictated a different development. Here the
imperial presence was strong and the type of fragmentation and piecemeal
allocation of territories to war-bands was impractical: conquest and appro-
priation of territory would either be on a vast scale, as the Persians achieved
in the period 610—28 and the Arabs in the 630s, or at a very local and unsus-
tained level, as with the Persian capture of Amida in 502/ 3 or Dara in 573.
But once the Roman armies had been driven out of this urbanized sector
and forced to regroup to the north-west in central Anatolia, the nature of
their deployment had to take account of the very different structures of
provincial society in these areas: cities were few and far between, and the

106 Brown, Religion and Society 233. 107 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 75—6, 70.

108 PLRE 11.128—9, with Heinzelmann (1982) s.v.

109 For this see Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century ch. 6; Hendy, Studies 619—62.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SOLDIER AND CIVILIAN

495

powerful landowners whose depredations of imperial property Justinian
had tried to check were dominant. The eastern and Armenian armies re-
established themselves in areas where they had to create their own infra-
structure for provision of supplies, recruits and pay. The result was a
territorially based army, which provincial magnates undoubtedly found it
opportune to join; the nature of military organization then determined the
organization of civilian authority.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 18

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

IAN N. WOOD

The period between the accession of the Roman emperor Valentinian III
in 42 5 and the death of the Visigothic king Leovigild in 5 86 inevitably occu-
pies a central position in the debates relating to the transition from classi-
cal to medieval in western Europe, and more specifically to the questions
of continuity and discontinuity. 1 There is, however, another way of reading
this century and a half, and that is as a period in its own right. Several his-
torians working on fifth- and sixth-century Britain have, for instance,
argued that between the history of the late Roman province of Britannia
and that of Anglo-Saxon England lies a shorter but none the less distinct
period that has been called ‘sub-Roman’. 2

Britain can, of course, be seen as experiencing a history radically different
from that even of the other parts of western Europe. Its western half was
one of only two areas of the erstwhile Roman empire to witness the re-
emergence of Celtic kings, and the other area where a similar development
occurred, Brittany, had a history inseparable from that of Britain itself.
Meanwhile, or perhaps subsequently, Latin language and culture were more
thoroughly destroyed in the Germanic kingdoms of eastern Britain than in
any other part of what had been the Roman west. Yet the distinctions
between Britain and the rest of western Europe may seem clearer to us now,
when examined with the benefit of hindsight, than they were at the time.
Other regions in western Europe passed through an intermediate ‘sub-
Roman’ phase between the collapse of imperial Roman government and the
establishment of a new barbarian regime: this is clear for Gallaecia in Spain,
Aremorica and the area controlled by Aegidius in Gaul, as well as Noricum.
Certainly there are chronological differences between the sub-Roman
periods in each of these regions. In Britain it started earlier and lasted longer
than in most places: in Soissons it began with the murder of Majorian in 46 1
and ended with the defeat of Aegidius’ son Syagrius at the hands of Clovis,
in c. 486: in Noricum it was a relatively late development, and its end is
unclear, because the history of Noricum Ripense after the departure of the

1 E.g. Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul.

2 The notion of a discrete period was central to Morris (1973): see more recendy Esmonde Cleary
(1989); Higham (1992); Dark (1994).

497

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

498 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

disciples of Severinus in 488 is totally lost to us. Nevertheless, it is worth
comparing the sub- and post-Roman histories of these regions, not because
they form a geographical unit, which they do not, but because they consti-
tute a particular development in the history of western Europe. 3

The sources also make comparison between these regions possible.
Although no detailed chronicle source survives for the whole region,
Hydatius provides an account primarily of Gallaecia, which shows some-
thing of the confused nature of this ‘sub-Roman’ period in that region.
Rather sketchier, but valuable for Aremorica and Britain, is the Chronicle of
4J2. Although the narrative history of Britain composed by Gildas in his De
Excidio Britanniae leaves much to be desired, it provides points of compar-
ison, on the one hand with Patrick’s works, and on the other with those of
the moralizing theologians writing in Gaul in the first half of the fifth
century. Also crossing this geographical divide is the Vita Germani, the Life
of a bishop of Auxerre written by a priest of Lyons, Constantius, in c. 480.
As a work of hagiography this last text stands comparison with various
other stants’ Lives, notably those of Severinus of Noricum, the Fathers of
Jura, Genovefa of Paris and Vedast of Arras. With these last two texts we
come to the mainstream of Frankish history, and to a comparative pleth-
ora of sources. At the same time the Vita Germani itself offers connections
with an earlier, more southerly and more Roman world, since Constantius
was a close friend of the Gallo-Roman aristocrat and later bishop of
Clermont, Sidonius Apollinaris, who dedicated his letter collection to him. 4

It would be misleading to suggest that these written sources for the
north-western fringes of the Roman world in the mid and late fifth century
are plentiful. It would be equally misguided to assume that they are easy to
interpret, not least because their authors all had their own agendas. Even the
chroniclers, in their meagre annals, offer an interpretation rather than an
account of the events they were living through, and their inspiration is theo-
logical rather than historical. 5 Other genres of writing were yet more open
to manipulation. 6 It is particularly unfortunate that for many of the devel-
opments in northern Gaul and in Noricum we are dependent almost
entirely on works of hagiography for our information. It may be sympto-
matic of the period that hagiography is central to our understanding — but
there is always the possibility that a historical interpretation based upon the
Lives of saints has mistaken theological or pastoral meditation for fact, and
that experiences in these frontier areas were rather closer to those described
in Sidonius’ letters, some of which do indeed relate to northern Gaul.

3 Some of the similarities were explored by E. A. Thompson in his numerous articles on Britain, as
well as in his articles on the Suevic kingdom and Noricum: see, in particular, Thompson (1982). See
also Brown (1996) 76—92.

4 Sid. Ap. Epp. 1. 1, 7.18, 8.16, ed. W B. Anderson (London 1936—65): Harries (1994) 7—9.

5 Muhlberger (1990) 267—71. 6 For the evidence for southern Gaul, see Wood (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

499

Alongside the literary texts there is the witness of archaeology. On the
whole, however, the archaeological material for the period, rich though it is,
illuminates general trends, particularly in burial custom and living condi-
tions. Such information is not easily combined with a written record that
deals primarily with matters ecclesiastical and political. Despite the vast
numbers of cemeterial finds from the fifth and early sixth century, it is rare
to find a grave that is so firmly dated that it can be fitted into a precise his-
torical context: the one obvious exception is the grave of the Frankish king
Childeric at Tournai, which is especially valuable because it is the grave of a
known individual whose career is recorded and whose death can be ascribed
with some certainty to the year 48 1 or thereabouts. Leaving aside the ceme-
tery evidence, that of treasure hoards is also awkward. Of the British
hoards, Mildenhall, Water Newton and Hoxne antedate our period, though
in the latter case, only just. The hoard from Traprain Law in Scotland may,
however, belong to the early fifth century, and show something of the
Roman treasure available to a native prince, living in what had been the fron-
tier zone of the Roman province. From the continent, the hoard from
Kaiseraugst seems to belong to the mid fourth century, and the treasure
named after Sevso, its owner, who lived apparently in Pannonia, may be
dated a little later. There is, in any case, always a danger in trying to associate
a hoard, or indeed a destruction layer in a villa or town, with an individual
crisis, unless the archaeological finds and the literary texts can be shown to
dovetail precisely. Even a text as precise about urban destruction as the Vita
Sevetini is difficult to correlate with the archaeological evidence currently
available for Noricum. In Britain the discoveries of sub-Roman structures
built in timber at Wroxeter and Birdoswald are reminders of how much may
have been missed by earlier generations of archaeologists. 7 Urban archaeol-
ogy in France is also shedding increasing light on the history of the late
Roman town, and it seems likely that over the period as a whole there was
a marked urban decline, although at the same time, in parts of Gaul at least,
this went hand in hand with the development of new suburban foci, notably
around the increasingly significant shrines of martyrs and saints. 8

Although it is possible to construct a narrative for the period, it can at
best be a sketch of a time of intense military activity and social change. In
406 or 407 the Rhine frontier broke, and hordes of Vandals, Alans and
Sueves crossed first into Gaul and then into Spain, where they fought each
other as much as they plundered the Roman province, until the Vandals
departed for Africa in 429. In 41 1 the Visigoths left Italy, in the first
instance for Aquitaine. They too moved on to Spain, only to be recalled to
Aquitaine in 41 8 or 41 9. 9 From their base in Toulouse they usually acted as

7 On Wroxeter, Barker (1990). 8 See in general the volumes of Gauthier et al. (1986—).

9 On the question of the date Wood (1992) 1 5 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

0 50°N 0 10°\

Land over 1000 metres/

[ Wroxeter
■^^Caerleonj

^Arras O Tournaiy

Cambrai^ BlLGICA
Soissons SjcCUNDA

Le Mans n

_Angersi Orleans

/ C 4 /V*

°Rheims /Trier

BourgesO n ' 6 1 1 0 J ,

\\ k Di /^'

\ j V C* Chalon-^
'oulon^ I /sur-Saone

\ \ 9 uiaion-^-r RAETIA /

OVoulon^ I I /sur-Saone J

Clermont o/ ( Genevan^, /.

— Lyons \

r Vienne d'Agaune

^ L \ X X

— ^^vOuintanis R U G I J

°/gsbu r //v/Favianis Co /knis

f Lorclyp

/ ( a \ S AsturisX

J y 9 KuchM, NORICUM />

f "" — ’ RIPENSEX

/& Ravenna ^ ^

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 501

agents for the empire, regularly attacking the Sueves, but also occasionally
turning against their Roman masters. Meanwhile, the high seas were also
routes for piracy: Britannia, which was under threat from Piets in the north,
was plagued by Irish in the west, who took, among other captives, the
young Patrick — not that the British themselves were above piracy, as can
be seen from Patrick’s letter to Coroticus. Nor were the Irish merely plun-
derers. The ogham stones of south-west Wales reveal the existence of an
Irish settlement in Demetia (Dyfed) in the fifth century, a segment of
which seems to have split off subsequently to found the kingdom of
Brycheiniog (Brecon). 10 To the south of Britain, maritime Franks and
Saxons presented a constant threat, as they did to the coasts of Gaul. 11
Heruls are even known to have raided the coast of north-western Spain. 12
Presumably they had set sail from Denmark, where part of the tribe was to
be found in the sixth century. 13

Imperial control of much of northern Gaul and Spain can only have
been intermittent after die first two decades of the century, 14 and it seems
to have depended increasingly on the use of barbarians federates, not only
the Visigodis in Toulouse, but also from the late 430s or early 440s the
Alans in Aremorica and the Burgundians in Sapaudia. 15 Britain, which had
effectively had to fend for itself since 407, was left to its own fate, and its
decision to copy imperial policy in employing Saxons backfired badly with
a Saxon revolt. 16 On the continent, however, the policy was successful
enough for Aetius, or rather his Gallic henchmen, to be able to put
together a sizeable confederacy to oppose Attila at the Catalaunian Plains
in 4 5 1 . 1 7 In the event, this was to prove the lastmajor intervention of the
Huns within the lands of the western empire — and although the west sur-
vived, it did so only just, and, to judge by the hagiography of the period,
with a considerable scar on its psyche. The murder of Aetius in 454, or,
perhaps more important, that of Valentinian III a year later, undermined
what fragile unity still remained. Avitus, as a Gallo-Roman, and Majorian
had some short-lived successes in Gaul and Spain, but the rapid turn-over
of emperors in the ensuing period exacerbated the divisions between die
Romans and their federates, and from the 460s onwards individual bar-
barian groups carved out kingdoms for themselves. The Vandals had
already done so in Africa, as had the Sueves in Spain, but now in the 470s
the Visigoths under Euric followed suit, to be followed after 476 by the

10 Thomas (1994) 51— 87, 113—62. 11 Wood (1990); Haywood (1991).

12 Hydat. Chron. n. 164, 189, ed. R. W Burgess, The Chronicle of / {ydatius and the Consularia
Constantinopolitana (Oxford 1993), pp. 106—7, no— 11.

13 Procop. Warsv 1.15, ed. H . B. Dewing (London 1914—40). 14 Wood (1987) 256—60.

15 Chronicle of 4/2, 124, 127, 128, ed. T. Mommsen, MGH, AA 9 (Berlin 1892).

16 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 23, ed. and trans. M. Winterbottom, Gildas: The Ruin of Britain and
Other Works (Chichester 1978).

17 Jordanes, Get. 36.191, ed. T. Mommsen, MGH, AA 5 (Berlin 1882).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

502

l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

Burgundians. 18 North of die Loire, independent Roman and Frankish
enclaves, notably diose of Aegidius and Childeric, were established. 19 On
die Danube, Noricum Ripense also passed out of imperial control. This
fragmentation was, however, only momentary — at least in Gaul, where die
emergence of the Merovingians under Cliilderic’s son, Clovis, reunited
die north in a single kingdom. In the course of the first half of the sixth
century Aquitaine and, in time, Burgundy and the Rhone valley were
attached to this northern core. Squeezed out of most of their Gallic pos-
sessions, the Visigoths turned their attention to Spain, and by the end of
die sixth century they had control of almost the whole of the peninsula,
having destroyed the Suevic kingdom in the process. In Spain and north-
ern Gaul the fifth and early sixth centuries were a time of dissolution and
reunification. In Britain the unification was to be a long while in die
future.

Although there is a case for seeing this period of dissolution and
reunification as something specifically ‘sub-Roman’, it is useful to begin
with what is often taken to be a late Roman problem: the bagaudae.
Bagaudae are attested in the third century, but above all in the fifth, coming
to the fore around the year 410 and lasting as a significant threat until the
440s. In the problems that they pose, and in their relations both with the
imperial government and with the barbarians, they introduce and shed
some light on the problems of the sub-Roman world.

According to the Chronicle of 442, in around the year 435 a man called
Tibatto led a Bagaudic rebellion, apparently in Aremorica — that is, north
of the Loire. This rebellion was put down two years later. Germanus of
Auxerre’s attempt to avert bloodshed at this stage of the proceedings is
recorded by his hagiographer, Constantius. 211 Nevertheless, again according
to the Chronicle of 4/2, another bagauda flared up some eleven years later.
Meanwhile in Spain Hydatius recorded that the dux utriusque militiae
Asturius lulled a large number of bagaudae from Tarraconensis in 442. 21
Bagaudae are also mentioned in Spanish Aracelli in 443, 22 and Basilius is
said to have gathered a group of bagaudae, who then lulled some federates
as well as bishop Leo in the church at Tyriasso. 23 It is possible to add to
these fragments evidence relating to Britain, since Zosimus records that the
rebellion of the British against the government of Constantine III, which
took place sometime after 407, was the model on which the Aremorican
rebellion was based. 24

18 Harries (1994) 222—38. 19 Harries (1994) 223—4.

20 Constantius, 1 Vita Germani 28, 40, ed. R. Borius, SChret. 112 (Paris 1965). On the implications of
this for the death of Germanus, see Wood (1984) 14—16. 21 Hydat. Chron. n. 1 17.

22 Hydat. Chron. n. 120. 23 Hydat. Chron. n. 133.

24 Zos. vi. 5. 2-3, ed. F. Paschoud (Paris 1971—89).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 503

We may also be able to go some way towards understanding the nature
of the bagaudae: according to the Chronicle of j}2 they were mainly servile;
according to Salvian of Marseilles, writing in the 440s, they were essentially
those oppressed by social circumstances, the government and the law. 25 It
might be possible to go further still, if we add to this information that of
a unique late Roman comedy called the Querolus , which describes a lawless,
egalitarian society north of the Loire. 26 An all-embracing interpretation of
peasant unrest can be squeezed from these diverse clues. 27

There are, however, grave problems with this reading. First, there is
nothing in the evidence for Britain to suggest that the rebellion was class-
based. It seems rather to have been a rebellion against Constantine III,
intended to facilitate renewed contact with and help from Honorius at
Ravenna. 28 If the Aremorican rebellion really was modelled on the British,
then it is unlikely to have been a servile movement: if it were a servile move-
ment, which may be implied by the Querolus, then Zosimus’ linking of the
two events is likely to be wrong. As for the rebellion of Tibatto in the 430s,
this could be lower-class, but by 437 the rebels were seeking an accord with
the emperor, or rather with Aetius. The subsequent rebellion in the late
440s was led by a doctor, Eudoxius, whom the Chronicle of 4.J2 seems not to
have seen as servile. With regard to the Spanish bagaudae, nothing about
them, other than their geographical origin, is known, though the fact that
Basilius teamed up with the Suevic king Rechiarius may suggest that he was
a capable warlord rather than a peasant.

There is a second point: our knowledge of the bagaudae is transmitted
through a series of texts, each of which has a very different agenda. The
Querolus was written to please the circle of Exuperantius, who had subdued
a bagaudic revolt in Aremorica in 417: 29 its author could afford to laugh at
the libertarians north of the Loire. The concerns of the De Gubernatione Dei
are entirely different: Salvian’s explanation for the disasters of his own time,
like that of other Gallic and Italian moralists of the period, involved a
radical critique of the social, economic and moral structures of the fifth-
century empire, and for Salvian the bagaudae afforded one opportunity to
expose Gallic corruption. Hydatius, himself a bishop, knew of bagaudae
as the murderers of a bishop — not surprisingly, they receive no sympathy
from him. These pieces may all belong to different jig-saws.

We are on safer ground, with regard to the bagaudae, if we place them
within a much broader spectrum of reactions to the failure of Roman rule. 3 "

25 Salv. De Gub. Dei v.22, 24—6, ed. F. Pauly, CSEL 8 (Vienna 1883).

26 Querolus sive Aulularia ed. G. Ranstrand (Goteborg 1951) p. 7: see Thompson (1952) 11—23. Most

recendy, and critically, see Drinkwater (1992). 27 E.g. Thompson (1952). 28 Wood (1984) 5—6.

29 Rutilius Namatianus, De reditu suo 1 lines 213—16, ed. E. Doblhofer (Heidelberg 1972—7).

30 Van Dam, Leadership and Community 25—56; Drinkwater (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

504 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

Some aspects of this were long-standing: there is nothing new in the injus-
tice described by Salvian; all that was new was the opportunity to opt out,
an opportunity afforded specifically by the crisis in Gaul in the 430s and
440s. Those opting out might on occasion have belonged to the lower
orders of society, but others among the disaffected could have been regional
potentes looking to create a local power structure in a vacuum left by a failing
imperial government. These bagaudae may have had something in common
with the rebellious Nori and Juthungi mentioned by Hydatius, 31 who were
active further east before being put down by Aetius, and with the other
bandit groups of the region who appear later in the Vita Severini ? 2 Yet not
everyone wanted to opt out: the Britons, in their rebellion against
Constantine, were apparently looking for a rapprochement with Honorius.

Further south we also find a debate, albeit of a somewhat different kind,
over whether to remain inside the empire or to opt out. As the emperors
failed to protect their subjects, the extent to which one should co-operate
with the barbarians became an increasingly significant issue. The question
appears to have been central to Sidonius at the time of the trial of
Arvandus, sometime praetorian prefect of Gaul, who seems not to have
regarded as treasonable correspondence with Euric, urging him to attack
the British supporters of the emperor Anthemius and to divide Gaul with
the Burgundians . 3 ’ In other words, there was a range of possible reactions
to the failure of imperial governmental structures, and it is the opening up,
and the subsequent closing down, of these possibilities which is the hall-
mark of this ‘sub-Roman’ period.

To investigate this further, it is useful to consider reactions to the failure
of the military, not least because this failure is one of the central criteria for
the end of the Roman world, 34 a point that was already perceived in the
early sixth century: Eugippius, for instance, explicitly links the survival of
the empire with the payment of Roman troops, 35 And Sidonius may have
come to similar conclusions a generation earlier. 36 The run-down of the
Roman army was something which affected different provinces at different
moments. Britain, having seen the majority of its troops withdrawn to the
continent by Constantine III in c. 407, was apparently appealing for mili-
tary aid, without success, around 410; in other regions of the north-west a
Roman military presence was spasmodic until the 450s, 37 and in Noricum
it seems to have lasted even longer. The end of the Roman army and the
lack of a standing army in the successor states was to have a momentous
effect on social and economic structures. The barbarian kingdoms founded

31 Hydat. Chron. nn. 83, 85: compare Chronicle of 452 106 (431).

32 Eugippius, Vita Severini 10 ( scamarae ) ed. P. Regerat, SChret. 374 (Paris 1991); see also 2.

33 Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.7; Harries (1994) 159—66. 34 Cf. the seminal article of Wickham (1984).

35 Eugippius, Vita Severini 20, 1, ed. P. Regerat, SChret. 374 (Paris 1991). 36 Sid. Ap. Ep. 2.1, 4.

37 Wood (1987) 258—60.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 505

in the late fifth and the sixth century depended not on a paid army but on
the personal followings of kings and aristocrats, as well as on military obli-
gations. Gone was the need for heavy taxation, and hence much of the
rationale of the late Roman state. 38

The initial responses to the absence of a Roman army differed radically
in different regions. After their rebellion against Constantine III, the
Britons appear to have asked Honorius to send troops to help defend them
against barbarian raids. The emperor, however, who was in no position to
spare soldiers in 410 or thereabouts, responded by repealing the Lex Julia
de Vi Publics, the Britons were now allowed to bear arms and defend them-
selves. Even if we conclude that Zosimus was wrong to associate this act
with Britain rather than Bruttium, 39 Gildas appears to imply a similar set of
measures — and he may be thought to confirm Zosimus’ narrative. 40
Indeed, Gildas actually goes further, in saying that the Romans instructed
the Britons in various military strategies. 41

Clearly, the Britons did organize their own self-defence. Apparently in
429 they were able to defeat a combined force of Piets and Saxons, even if
they required military advice from bishop Germanus of Auxerre, suppos-
edly resorting to the somewhat unusual tactic of shouting ‘Hallelujah’ at
the enemy. 42 The role of Germanus here, as of Lupus and Severinus in the
later military histories of Troyes and Noricum, is difficult to assess. It may,
but does not necessarily, support the cases that Germanus and Severinus
had significant secular, and even military, careers before entering the eccle-
siastical life. 43 It may merely reflect an extraordinary extension of ecclesias-
tical influence in a period when power structures were ill-defined, or it may
be no more than a literary or hagiographic topos.

Whatever the reason for the success of the Britons against the Piets and
the Saxons in 429, 44 a decade or more later a new military crisis occasioned
a further appeal to the imperial court. 45 The crisis may have been caused by
a revolt of Saxon federates, or alternatively the failure of the appeal may
have led to the employment and subsequent revolt of the federates. 46 In
either case, Britain was still working along firmly Roman lines as late as the
440s. An appeal to Aetius was certainly an appeal to re-enter the military
structures of the Roman empire, while the use of barbarian federates was

38 Wickham (1984) 19—20.

39 See, however, the dismissal of the possibility by Thompson (1977 ) 31 5 n. 43.

40 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 17— 1 8; Wood (1984) 5. 41 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 1 8.

42 Constandus, Vita Germani 17—18; on the possibility that much of this story is symbolic, Wood
(1984) 11— 12.

43 On Germanus’ early career, Constandus, 1 Vita Germani , ed. R. Borius, SChret. 1 1 2 (Paris 1965) 33—5;
on Severinus’ early career, Eugippius, Vita Severini, ed. P. Regerat, SChret. 374 (Paris 1991) 96—102.

44 On this issue see Myres (i960); Morris (1965); and especially the critical comments of

Liebeschuetz (1963) and (1967). 45 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 20.

46 On the problems of squaring the chronology of Gildas with the Chronicle of Wood (1984)
19—20.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

506 18. the north-western provinces

a long-standing Roman policy. It was also a policy which in the fifth century
brought with it considerable danger, as the Britons found to their cost
when the Saxons revolted. The decision of one group of Britons, under
the leadership of Ambrosius Aurelianus, to rely on its own military
strength, rather than on that of Rome or on federates, marks a move away
from the policy of reintegration into the imperial sphere, apparently
espoused by Vortigern and the council of the Britains, in their appeal to
Aetius. 47

By contrast with Britain, Spain seems to have seen no such emergence
of a native military tradition, outside the bagaudae and various brigand
troops, 48 despite the decision of two Spanish aristocrats loyal to the
emperor Honorius to arm their slaves in opposition to the forces of the
usurper Constantine III. 49 For the most part, military operations in the
north-western part of the peninsula, and probably further south, were con-
ducted by Roman generals, their barbarian federates or by independent bar-
barian groups. Once, we hear of a crowd repelling a Herul raid against the
coast of Lugo, 50 but more often the Hispano-Romans appear as unarmed
civilians, suffering at the hands of barbarians. The population of Noricum
is also, for the most part, merely the butt of barbarian and brigand raids,
though we hear something from Eugippius of their use of Fluchtburgen
(refuge sites). 51 In Comagenis, at least in the earlier part of Severinus’ time
there, the civilian population were guarded by federates — and the federates
were none too popular: their panic, caused by an earthquake, and their
ensuing massacre of each other were regarded as a miraculous salvation.'’ 2
Moreover, for as long as they were paid, there were other troops in
Noricum, but according to Eugippius they depended on the advice of
Severinus. 53 Only on one occasion do we hear of a force of locals attack-
ing an enemy. 54

For the most part, Gallaecia and Noricum appear to have followed the
pattern which can be found in Britain before 410 — they depended on
Roman troops or federates, and otherwise sought shelter as best they could.
Federates were also much in evidence in Gaul: famously in the settlement
of the Visigoths in Aquitaine, and later of the Burgundians in Sapaudia and
the Alans in Aremorica and Valence. 51 The most northerly of these settle-
ments, that in Aremorica, is remarkably well evidenced because it is not
only recorded in the Chronicle of 4.J2, but also in the Vita Germani : the region
was deliberately handed over by the central government to the Alans

47 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 25. 48 Hydat. Chron. nn. 117, 120, 133.

49 Oros. Hist. Ad. Pag. vii.40.5— 7, ed. C. Zangemeister, CSEL 5 (Vienna 1882); compare Zos. vi.4.

50 Hydat. Chron. n. 164. 51 Eugippius, Vita Severini 25.3; 30.1.

52 Eugippius, Vita Severini 1.2; 2.1. 53 Eugippius, Vita Severini 4.2—5; 20.

54 Eugippus, Vita Severini 27.1—2.

55 Chronicle of 4/2 124, 127, 1 28, ed. T. Mommsen, MGH , AA 9 (Berlin 1892); see Thompson (1956).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 507

because of the bagaudic uprising of Tibatto . 56 The subsequent activities of
the Alans seem to have been somewhat high-handed, to say the least — they
dispossessed the landowning classes (< domini), which may or may not have
been what Aetius wanted . 57 Perhaps rather closer to the experience of the
people of Comagenis was that of Sidonius in Lyons, where he objected to
the Burgundians stationed in his house . 58

In parts of Gaul it is also possible to find parallels to the more aggres-
sive policies of Ambrosius Aurelianus. While Sidonius, by this time bishop
in Clermont, raised the morale of his flock — much as numerous other
bishops seem to have done — his brother-in-law Ecdicius broke the
Visigothic siege of the city, apparently with only eighteen men , 59 a number
subsequently reduced yet further by Gregory of Tours to a mere ten. 6 "
Ecdicius showed what a man with military experience and a private follow-
ing could manage in central Gaul . 61 For such a man Nepos’ cession of
Clermont to the Visigoths would have been nothing short of betrayal . 62
Another independent military figure, albeit one whose career as a warlord
grew directly out of imperial service, was Aegidius. Effectively left without
an emperor to follow after the murder of his patron Majorian, he ploughed
his own furrow in northern Gaul with the troops he had with him at the
time of his master’s death . 63 As a result, he was able to set up something
like a kingdom of his own, based on Soissons, though how far beyond that
it stretched must be open to doubt . 64 There is certainly nothing to suggest
that Aegidius or his son Syagrius ruled over the Aremoricans, whose sub-
mission to the Franks is noted, somewhat obscurely, in the pages of
Procopius . 65

The one other late Roman military leader in northern or central Gaul in
the second half of the century of whom we know anything more than his
name was the Briton Riothamus, who sailed from Britain or Brittany and
proceeded to Bourges with substantial forces, even if not with the 1 2,000
spoken of by Jordanes. He is said to have done so in response to an appeal
for help from the emperor Anthemius . 66 Riothamus was defeated by the
Visigothic king Euric, and retired to the Lyonnais with his remaining
troops, where they were still numerous enough to cause problems for the
local inhabitants . 67 Almost everything about Riothamus is a mystery. If he
indeed came from Britain, why should a man with so many troops abandon
the island at a time when the Saxons were not apparently dominant? Does
he represent a legitimist faction, determined to stay within the empire at all

56 Constantius, Vita Germani 6.28; 7.40; Chronicle of 442 117, 119, 127. 57 Chronicle of 442 127.

58 Sid. Ap. Carm. xii; compare Ep. 3.4.1 for a more general assessment of the threat posed by fed-
erates. 59 Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.3.3; see the comments of Harries (1994) 228—9.

60 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.24, ed. B. Krusch and W Levison, MGH, SRM 1 (Hanover 1951).

61 On this private army, Harries (1994) 228—9. 62 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.7.5.

63 Elton (1992) 172— 4. 64 James (1988) 67— 71. 65 Procop. Wars, v.12.12— 1 5.

66 Jord. Get. 237-8; cf. Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.7.5. 67 Sid. Ap. Ep. 3.9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

508 18. the north-western provinces

costs? That, at least, seems to be the implication of his fighting for
Anthemius.

What Riothamus cannot illustrate is the formation of Brittany. On the
continent he is associated with Berry and the Lyonnais. The migration of
Britons to western Aremorica is curiously difficult to trace. While it is true
that the region came to be called Britannia by the late fifth century, and that
there were British ecclesiastics and saints there from that period onwards, 68
there is no clear evidence for a large-scale migration — and there is no good
reason to read Gildas as describing one, even though he does state that
some people fled overseas during the Saxon uprising of the mid fifth
century. 69 It may well be that the migration of a limited number of power-
ful families, within what had long been a single cultural province, uniting
western Britain and Brittany, was enough to provide western Aremorica
with its new name and to prompt certain linguistic developments.

While Riothamus and Ecdicius may represent groups intent on remain-
ing within the empire, Aegidius in Gaul and Ambrosius Aurelianus in
Britain apparently represent groups willing to opt out. Aegidius seems to
have remained loyal to the memory of Majorian, but he was certainly not
loyal to succeeding emperors. Gregory of Tours, writing in the 570s, could
remember Aegidius’ son Syagrius as a king of the Romans, Romanorum rex? Q
Ambrosius is often represented as a more Roman figure than Vortigern,
because of the latter’s involvement in the settlement of Saxons in Britain,
yet in employing federates Vortigern was not necessarily breaking from the
empire, while Ambrosius was undoubtedly behaving in as independent a
fashion as was Aegidius. Moreover, if Gildas is right to say that Ambrosius’
parents wore the purple, 71 he came from a family of usurpers.

It is possible to see Aegidius and Ambrosius as transitional figures in a
development of ‘sub-Roman’ kingship, a development which came to frui-
tion in western Britain, but which was stopped short in Gaul with the defeat
and execution of Aegidius’ son, Syagrius, at the hands of the Frank,
Clovis. 72 Clearly there were Celtic elements in the lifestyle and in the some-
what relaxed attitude towards holy orders of the five sixth-century kings —
Aurelius Caninus, Constantine, Cuneglasus, Maglocunus and Vortipor —
castigated by Gildas, 73 but they were also heirs to a Roman past. 74 Two of
them had ostentatiously Roman names and Vortipor may have been the
Voteporix commemorated as Protector by the Latin memorial stone at
Castell Dwyran. 75 Equally Roman is the remarkable group of inscriptions

68 The evidence is collected by Jackson (1953) 12—16, and Chadwick (1969) 193—226. The case for
substantial numbers migrating, however, depends on assumptions about the differences between
British and Gaulish and on the nature of the linguistic impact of the British.

69 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 25. 70 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.27.

71 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 25. 72 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.27.

73 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 28— 36; Kerlouegan (1987) 526—45. 74 Dark (1994) no.

75 Thomas (1994) 82.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 509

from Penmachno, in the mountains of north Wales. 76 Already in the mid
to late fifth cetury Britain could boast at least one more warlord, Patrick’s
bete noire, Coroticus — probably a pirate rather than a representative of any
legitimate institutional power, but nevertheless another example of the mil-
itary life made possible by the withdrawal of the Roman army, and the
exhortation to self-help. The continental counterpart to Coroticus may not
have been Aegidius, but rather a bagaudic leader, such as the Spaniard
Basilius. 77 Yet British pirates are only one end of a spectrum of military
possibilities opened up by the failure of the imperial government to protect
its citizens.

In certain areas of northern Gaul, as in Britain, military failure was
accompanied by governmental failure. Although the Merovingian kings of
the Franks managed to govern with something like a Roman administra-
tion, and even to tax their Gallo-Roman subjects in the late sixth century,
there is no reason to assume that there was absolute governmental conti-
nuity throughout northern Gaul up to that time. 78 In discussing the period
of barbarian invasion Salvian records the destruction or devastation of
Cologne, Mainz and Trier. 79 His account may be largely hyperbolic, and
there was certainly some continuity in all three places: in Cologne it may
have been considerable. 80 In Aremorica the normal structures of govern-
ment and society are likely to have failed during the fifth century, even if
the Franks managed to put the clock back to the east of modern Brittany
half a century later. Salvian’s picture of the free society north of the Loire
suggests anything but the normal functioning of administrative institu-
tions, and the narrative of events in the Loire valley in the 460s provided
by Gregory of Tours, who was apparently dependent on a chronicle com-
piled in Angers, suggests something like total military chaos in the region
of Angers, Bourges and Deols. 81 By the last quarter of the century there
were Frankish enclaves not only in Tournai, where Childeric was buried,
but also in Cambrai, and perhaps, although by no means certainly, as far
west as Le Mans. 82 Further, gaps in some episcopal lists may suggest that
there was some disruption in the ecclesiastical organization of north-
eastern Gaul at the time, although other interpretations of the lacunae are
possible. 83 Certainly it should be noted that such a gap may be no more
than an evidential hiccup. Nevertheless, other societies have been tempo-
rarily broken apart by war, and patched together again subsequently. It is
as well to remember that the continuities apparent from the vantage point

76 Dark (1994) iio. 77 Hydat. Chron. 133.

78 The fullest discussion of Merovingian taxation is Goffart (1989).

79 Salv. De Gub. Dei vi.39, 72—7, 82, 85—9.

80 Ewig (1954) 56—60; Heinemeyer (1979); Wightman (1985); Schutte (1995).

81 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.18—19; for the Angers origin of the material, note the use of the verb venire in

ch. 18. 82 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.42. 83 Griffe (1964—6) 11.134—6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 io

l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

of the later sixth century may have been completely invisible a century
earlier.

Mixed in with this picture of collapse, however, is a picture of remark-
able continuity. Writers in the south of Gaul presented the early fifth
century as a period of calamity, but their successors in the second half of
the century chose to emphasize the continuance of Roman tradition. 84
Archaeology supports the written word in suggesting continuity in such
southern cities as Vienne, Arles and Marseilles. At the same time, despite
the crises in the Loire valley in the 460s, Sidonius continued to number
northern bishops and aristocrats among his correspondents. Among the
bishops were Agroecius of Sens, 85 Euphronius of Autun, 86 Lupus of
Troyes, 87 Nunechius of Nantes, 88 Perpetuus of Tours, 89 Principius of
Soissons, 90 Prosper of Orleans 91 and Remigius of Rheims. 92 Agroecius and
Euphronius he consulted over the election of Simplicius to the see of
Bourges, while he informed Perpetuus of the result. Along with Paulinus
of Perigueux, he supplied Perpetuus with verses for the newly rebuilt
church of St Martin. 9 ’ This church was being built during precisely the
years that Aegidius, Childeric, Paul, the Saxon Odoacer and the Visigoths
were fighting in the Loire valley — it was truly a capsule of eternity in a very
unstable world. 94 Aegidius himself may have been a benefactor of St
Martin’s, but of him Sidonius says not a word. 95 Sidonius did nevertheless
correspond with Principius, the bishop of Soissons, which seems to have
been Aegidius’ power base. Perhaps even more remarkable, Sidonius’
friend Volusianus set off for his estate in the Bayeux region in the late
460s. 96

Among Sidonius’ northern correspondents, Remigius provides a valu-
able thread through the chaos of the late fifth century. Unfortunately many
of the sources for Remigius are late, not least the Vita rewritten by
Hincmar in the ninth century. Nevertheless, he appears as a correspondent
of Sidonius in 471 or thereabouts. 97 In the ensuing years the civitas of
Rheims must have fallen into the hands of the Frankish king Childeric,
since Remigius wrote to the king’s son, Clovis, when he took over the prov-
ince of Belgica Secunda in succession to his father. 98 The letter presup-
poses a good deal of organizational continuity in the province. Remigius
was later to baptize Clovis, 99 and to play some role in church appointments
in the last years of his reign. 100 The bishop’s will, preserved like that of his

84 Wood (1992) 9-10. 85 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7. ; . 86 Sid. Ap. Epp. 7.8; 9.2.

87 Sid. Ap. Epp. 6.1; 6.1 1. 88 Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.13. 89 Sid. Ap. Ep. -j.y.

90 Sid. Ap. Epp. 8.14; 9.10. 91 Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.1 5. 92 Sid. Ap. Ep. 9.7.

93 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.18.4—5; Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.14; Harries (1994) 1 1 6; Van Dam (1993) 18, 314—16.

94 Van Dam, Leadership and Community 230— 5 5: Brown (1996) 64. 95 Harries (1994) 98— 9, 247— 8.

96 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.18.2. 97 Sid. Ap. Ep. 9.7.

98 Epist. Austras. 2, ed. W. Gundlach, MGH, Epistolae 3 (Berlin 1892). 99 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.3 1 .

100 Epist. Austras. 3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 5 I I

predecessor Bennadius, 101 is a remarkable document of the continuation
of senatorial landholding in the north. 102

It is, in fact, impossible to generalize over the question of continuity and
discontinuity in Gallia and Germania: even within Noricum Ripense the
fate of individual towns, as described by Eugippius, varied. At Lauriacum
(Lorch) religious life lasted beyond the days of Severinus, 103 and the case
for continuity is yet stronger further west in Augsburg, 104 and stronger still
at Chur in Rhaetia. 105 Britannia, too, presents a remarkably mixed picture.
The sheer variety is perhaps clearest in south and west Wales, where the
newly created Irish kingdom of Demetia bordered the more Romanized
south, with its renowned monastic centre of Llanilltud Fawr (Llantwit
Major), which appears to have been a significant centre of Latin education
into the sixth century. 106

In other places of the north-west for which we have anything like a detailed
narrative, the sources highlight the ecclesiastical management of social crisis,
rather than any governmental continuity, at least during the period of barbar-
ian migration and of the establishment of the successor states. This is appar-
ent as far south as the Rhone valley, where Patiens, bishop of Lyons — himself
the dedicatee of Constantius’ IT ta German! — supervised the distribution of
corn. 107 At Orleans Anianus was supposedly responsible for the ransoming
of prisoners, 108 as well as the organization of the city’s defences against
Attila. 109 He was regarded as a plausible subject for Sidonius’ literary skills. 110
Lupus of Troyes was likewise credited with saving his flock from the ravages
of Attila’s Huns, and he did so, interestingly enough, by instructing them to
reoccupy a hill-fort outside the city 111 — a policy which might be compared
with the use of Fluchtburgen in Noricum 112 and the revival of hill-forts in sub-
Roman Britain. In part, the activity of bishops such as Patiens of Lyons,
Lupus of Troyes or — slightly later and further south — Caesarius of Arles 113
may reflect the very real powers they had been given since 3 12. 114 Yet the
sources do not confine their comments on such social leadership to bishops.
Severinus was apparently offered a bishopric, 115 but his actions were those of
a charismatic leader. As such, he organized the management of corn distri-
bution at Favianis until more supplies arrived from Rhaetia, 11 ' 1 he arranged

101 Flodoard, Hist. Eccles. Remensis 1.9, ed. J. Heller and G. Waitz, MGH, Scriptores xm (Hanover 1881);
Harries (1994) 218—19.

102 Testamentum Remigii, ed. B. Krusch ,MGH, SRM 3, pp. 3 36—47; Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 2 1 1— 12.

103 Wolfram (1987) 57. 104 Wolfram (1987) 1 1 5-17. 105 Wolfram (1987) 1 13-1 5.

106 Vita Samsonis 7—20, ed. R. Fawtier, La Vie de saint Samson: Essai de critique hagiographique ,
Bibliotheque de l’Ecole des Hautes Etudes 197 (Paris 1912). 107 Sid. Ap. Ep. 6.12.5.

108 VitaAniani 3, ed. B. Krusch MGH , SRM 3 (Hanover 1 896); for a possible early date for the life,
see Griffe (1964— 6) 11.54— 5. 109 VitaAniani 4. 110 Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.1 5.2.

111 Vita Lupi 6, ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 3; for an early date for the Vita Lupi , see Ewig (1978).

112 Eugippius, Vita Severini 25. 3; 30.1. 113 Vita Caesarii , ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 3.

114 Heinzelmann (1976); Scheibelreiter (1983). 115 Eugippius, Vita Severini 9.4.

116 Eugippius, Vita Severini 3 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

512

l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

for the collection of clothes, 117 and more generally of a tithe, to support the
poor. 118 He was constantly occupied in the ransom of Roman captives. 119
More miraculously, he ended the threat of floods at Quintanis, 1211 and he pro-
vided the poor of Lauriacum with oil. 121

It was not, however, only churchmen who emerged as charismatic
leaders in this period of crisis. We hear of the virgin Genovefa, who is said
to have organized famine relief in Paris, 122 and also to have freed prison-
ers, much to the aggravation of the Frankish king, Childeric. 12j The Vita
Genovefae may well cast its heroine rather unrealistically in the mould of a
bishop, 124 but it appears to have been written as early as 5 20, 125 and the
actions it attributes to the saint may not be fiction. Stripped of its literary
models, what is extraordinary about the career of Genovefa is not her lay
status but simply the fact that she was a woman, the only one to achieve
such prominence as a saint in the north in this transitional period. Patrick
thought the Gallo-Romans notable for the ransoming of captives. 126 In
addition to his exploits in raising the siege of Clermont, Ecdicius was
remembered for relieving a famine in Burgundy out of his own resources;
he was rewarded, according to Gregory of Tours, with the heavenly
promise that neither he nor his heirs would ever lack food. 127 Charisma was
not confined to churchmen or even, in the case of Ecdicius, to saints.

Where churchmen and saints held an advantage was in their ability to
make moral capital out of the situation in which they found themselves.
The message of Salvian and the other Gallic moralists sprang very precisely
from the crisis of the fifth century — it was a reaction to disaster. Not sur-
prisingly, a model of safety achieved through prayer, fasting and good
works was put forward. The Britons defeated the Piets and Saxons after fol-
lowing Germanus’ instructions that they should receive baptism. 128
Genovefa was said to have saved Paris from Attila by persuading its female
citizens to fast, 129 and Orleans was also supposedly saved from the Huns
because Anianus instructed the people to pray and process round the
city. 130 A similar tactic would be used against the Franks a century later,
when the population of Saragossa went into mourning and carried the
relics of St Vincent round the walls to counter Childebert’s siege. 131 One
of the most influential of all processions, the minor Rogations, was insti-
tuted in Vienne about the year 470 by Bishop Mamertus, though to ward
off earthquakes rather than barbarians. 1 ’ 2 By 473 Sidonius was following

117 Eugippius, Vita Severini 29. 118 Eugippius, Vita Severini 17. 119 Eugippius, Vita Severini 9. 1 .

120 Eugippius, Vita Severini 1 5 . 121 Eugippius, Vita Severini 28.

122 Vita Genovefae 35, 39, 40, ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 3. 123 Vita Genovefae 26.

124 Wood (1988) 378. 125 Heinzelmann and Poulin (1986).

126 Patrick, Epistola ad Milites Corotici 14, ed. R. P. C. Hanson, SChret. 249 (Paris 1978).

127 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.24. 128 Constantius, Vita Germani 17. 129 Vita Genovefae 1 2.

130 VtaAniani 8, 9. 131 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.29.

132 Sid. Ap. Ep.14.1-, Avitus, hom. 6, ed. R. Peiper, MGH,AA 6 (2) (Berlin 1883).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 5 I 3

suit in Clermont, though he seems to have been thinking more about bar-
barians than natural disasters . 133

The Vita Severini provides yet more examples of religious actions per-
formed to avert crisis. Asturis was destroyed because its people would not
fast when the saint told them to; news of its destruction made the people
of Comagenis more inclined to obey him: their fasting was also rewarded
with the destruction of the federate troops who were bothering rather than
defending them . 134 In Favianis, Severinus urged penance to avert a
famine . 135 Fasting ended a plague of grasshoppers at Cucullae (Kuchl ). 136
Later, prayer protected the burgi of Noricum from the Heruls . 137 At
Lauriacum, prayer, fasting and alms-giving preceded Severinus’ miraculous
provision of oil to the poor . 138

On many of these occasions, Eugippius points the moral by introduc-
ing a dissident into the story: the people of Asturis who would not fast and
were destroyed; Procula, whose greed kept her from providing corn for the
people of Favianis; those inhabitants of Quintanis who were killed when
they refused to evacuate their town, despite Severinus’ advice — for one of
the saint’s skills was that he knew when to give up ; 139 and the man of
Cucullae who went to inspect his fields rather than pray — naturally, it was
his crops that were eaten by the grasshoppers. In his case, Severinus seized
on the man’s misfortunes to point the need for prayer. The anecdote, as
recounted by Eugippius, may well reflect a genuine tendency on the part of
the charismatics of the period to exploit whatever incidents supported
their call to repentance.

In all this we are not far from Salvian, on the one hand, or Gildas, on the
other. Even more than Severinus, Salvian and Gildas preached repentance
— and although the ultimate fate of Britain, and indeed Gildas’ own prob-
able departure for Brittany, may imply that his message fell on deaf ears , 149
the narrative of the De Excidio Britanniae does suggest that twice in the fifth
century some sort of moral crusade did have an impact on British morale . 141
In the ninth century, if not earlier, Germanus, possibly a British saint
Garmon rather than the bishop of Auxerre, was remembered as having rep-
rimanded Vortigern . 142 That the British church was powerful is also appar-
ent from Patrick’s Confessio , 143 although both Patrick and Gildas suggest that
the majority of churchmen were lacking in moral stature . 144 To emphasize
the moral crusaders may indeed be to fall for the religious propaganda

133 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.1; Harries (1994) 227—8. 134 Eugippius, Vita Severini 2.

135 Eugippius, Vita Severini 3 . 136 Eugippius, Vita Severini 1 2. 137 Eugippius, Vita Severini 24.

138 Eugippius, Vita Severini 28. 139 Eugippius, Vita Severini 27; compare 22.

140 Cf. the reading of Bede, HE 1.22, ed. B. Colgrave and R. A. B. Mynors, Bede’s Ecclesiastical History
of the English (Oxford 1969). 141 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 20, 25.

142 Historia Brittonum 24, ed. D. N. Dumville, The Historia Brittonum, The Vatican Recension (Cambridge
1985). 143 Patrick, Confessio 10, 13, 26, 27, 37, ed. Hanson SChret. 249.

144 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae 66— 91 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

514 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

which lies at the heart of much of the hagiography, as well the moral dia-
tribes, of the fifth and sixth century. Nevertheless, the consonance between
a widely scattered group of sources does suggest that we should recognize
the association of charismatic preaching and survival as a factor in the pecu-
liarly unstable days of the mid and late fifth and early sixth century.
Moreover, even if we deny the actuality of what is described in the vitae of
fifth-century saints, many of the texts themselves were written in the fifth
or early sixth century, and the image they present must have had some res-
onance. In other words, whether as reality or literary construct, the fifth
century had its charismatic leaders.

Living saints seem therefore to have played a significant role in amelio-
rating the experiences of Romans during the crisis period of the barbarian
migration and settlement. Dead saints could also have an influence. That
their lives were recorded is in itself an indication of the importance attached
to their memory. Of wider impact were the cults which grew up around the
tombs of holy men. The development of the cult of St Martin by Perpetuus
is only the most eye-catching example of what was common in much of
fifth-century Gaul and elsewhere: the propagation of saint-cults to provide
foci of consolation in an age of fragmentation and uncertainty. Already at
the turn of the century Victricius of Rouen had made much of the relics in
his care . 145 Elsewhere in the north, Euphronius of Autun developed the cult
of the martyr Symphorian ; 146 Gregory of Langres was responsible for the
promotion of the cult of Benignus of Dijon and perhaps also of a host of
associated cults . 147 In so doing he, like other bishops of the time, provided
his diocese, and indeed the surrounding dioceses, with a whole new
Christian past. The hagiographers were not above fabricating information
about the saints they promoted, some of whom may have been invented ex
nihilo. Further south, cities like Clermont under Sidonius bristled with saint-
cults. 148 A generation later, Lyons could be described as being defended by
its basilicas, each of which housed the relics of saints, rather than by its
defences . 149 The relics of saints, in Gaul as elsewhere, were a very present
help against external threat. Not surprisingly, Germanus of Auxerre, when
in Britain, interested himself in the cult of Alban, identifying the tomb,
removing some relics from it and installing other relics of continental saints
in their place; in so doing he may not only have been thinking about the
safety of Britain — it is likely that he wished to signify that Alban was a
martyr of the whole church, and not the patron of Pelagian heretics . 150 On
his return to Auxerre he may well have commissioned the first Passio of the

145 Victricius, De laude sanctorum ed. J.-P. Migne, PL xx, cols. 443—5 8.

146 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.15; he may also have been responsible for the composition of the Passio
Symphoriani, A.cta Sanctorum , August iv (Brussels 1 867), pp. 491—8.

147 Greg. Tur. Liber in Gloria Martyrum 50, ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 1 (2) (Hanover 1885).

148 Harries (1994) 197—202. 149 Avitus , hom. 24. 150 Wood (1984) 12—13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 5 I 5

British martyr . 151 In Britain itself, Alban continued to be revered down to
the days of Gildas, who also noted the cult of Julius and Aaron, probably
based at Caerleon . 152

Bishops and charismatics established themselves, or at least were
remembered as establishing themselves, not only in the eyes of their own
congregations and colleagues, but also in the eyes of the barbarians . 153
Their vitae record numerous confrontations between kings and holy men.
Germanus seized the bridle of Goar’s horse, and his action gained him the
admiration of the king . 154 His contemporary, Lupus of Troyes, wrote to the
Alaman king Gebavult, rebuking him for his raids and persuading him to
release the captives taken . 155 Again, however, the largest number of anec-
dotes relate to Severinus. The Rugian king Flaccitheus and his son
Feletheus turned to the saint for advice . 156 Feletheus’ wife, Giso, however,
was unimpressed. She urged on her husband the baptism of Catholics as
Arians and also the capture of Romans. She ignored Severinus’ appeal to
stop her wickedness, but was punished when captive goldsmiths held her
son to ransom. Nor was Feletheus always easy to deal with. Hearing that
many Romans had taken refuge in Lauriacum, he marched against the
town, intending to move them closer to his own power centre, in order to
impose tribute on them. He saw these Romans as his people, and wanted
to ensure that the Thuringians and Alamans did not get their hands on
them. Even so, Severinus persuaded the king to let them return to their own
homes . 157

Before he died, the saint admonished Feletheus and Giso once again , 158
and he also attacked the king’s brother, Ferderuchus, for taking Romans
captive . 159 The prince nevertheless went so far as to plunder Severinus’
monastery after the saint’s death — but he was soon lulled by his nephew,
who in turn was defeated by Odoacer and fled to Theoderic the Amal . 160
Nor was it only with the Rugi that Severinus had to deal. He also arranged
the return of numerous prisoners taken by the Alaman king Gibuld —
perhaps to be identified with Gebavult in the Vita Lupi. xbx

In the Vita Severini we see a society gradually slipping out of Roman rule,
but never quite becoming part of a barbarian state. Feletheus regarded the
people of Noricum Ripense as his subjects ( subiectos ) — or, to be more
precise, he was determined that no other barbarian ruler should profit from
them 162 — but he did not actually annex their territory. Technically speak-
ing, at least, the province was not part of a barbarian kingdom while
Severinus was alive. Predatory barbarians are also in evidence in the chron-
icle of Hydatius, but in Gallaecia there appears to have been no charismatic

151 Wood (1984) 13. 152 Gildas, De Excidio Britanniae io. 153 Brown (1996) 77.

154 Constantius, Vita Germani vi.28. 155 Vita Lupi 10. 156 Eugippius, Vita Severini 5,8.

157 Eugippius, Vita Severini 3 1 . 158 Eugippius, Vita Severini 40. 159 Eugippius, Vita Severini 42.

160 Eugippius, Vita Severini 44. 161 Eugippius, Vita Severini 19. 162 Brown (1996) 77.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 1 6 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

opponent to the kings of the Sueves. Hydatius, who was more than aware
of his own inadequacies, 163 was himself taken prisoner, only to be released
after three months through the grace of God. 164 There is no sense here of
a dramatic confrontation between cleric and barbarian, just sadness at the
destruction of the church of Aquae Flaviae and relief that the traitors who
had organized his capture caused no further damage. 165 Hydatius’ world is
one not of charismatics but of unsuccessful legations, each of which failed
to tame the Sueves, and of military operations by Romans and later by
Visigothic federates, which usually proved equally unproductive. Even the
fact that, for a while, the Sueves were ruled by a Catholic monarch, and not,
like the majority of the barbarians, by an Arian, was no comfort. Rechiarius
was as bad as the rest of them, invading Gallaecia as soon as he became
king, 166 then celebrating his marriage to the daughter of the Visigothic king
Theoderic with a raid on Vasconia. 167 The same year, 449, he joined the
bagaudic leader Basilius in a raid on Caesaraugusta. 168 After a few years in
which he is absent from Hydatius’ chronicle, he reappears, plundering
Tarraconensis and taking the prisoners back to Gallaecia. 169 He had,
however, overreached himself, and the emperor Avitus sent Theoderic
against him. The result was defeat for the Sueves, and although Rechiarius
escaped, he was captured and murdered. 170 Hydatius comments that the
kingdom of the Sueves was ‘destroyed and brought to an end’. Interesting
here is the chronicler’s contemporary recognition of barbarian kingdoms
( regna ) within the Roman empire (itself a regnuni). He uses the word regnum
in his description of Athaulf’s succession to Alaric in 410, and for all sub-
sequent Visigothic successions. 171 So, too, the Alans are described as having
a regnum as early as 41 8, 172 and the Vandals a decade later. 173 Suevic succes-
sion is also described in regnal terms, 174 and although their kingdom was
supposedly destroyed with the defeat of Rechiarius, it reappears in 457. 17:1
Hydatius knew that the empire’s frontiers were about to fall, 176 but there
were already kingdoms within the empire, and he watched helplessly as
something which he regarded as very like the Last Days unfolded before
his eyes.

Hydatius’ bleak picture of wars, embassies and embryonic kingdoms,
present even while the emperor was trying to re-establish his power, may
have been closer to the experience of most fifth-century Romans in Spain,
Gaul, Noricum and Britain than the more colourful worlds described in the
Vita Germani, the Vita Sevetini or the Vita Genovefae — although even those

163 Hydat. Chroti. praef. 164 Hydat. Chron. 196 (460), 202.

165 On the tone of the chronicle, see Muhlberger (1990) 212—45. 166 Hydat. Chron. 129 (448).

167 Hydat. Chroti. 132 (449). 168 Hydat. Chron. 134 (449). 169 Hydat. Chron. 165 (456).

170 Hydat. Chron. 166, 168 (456—7).

171 Hydat. Chron. 37 (410), 52 (416), 62 (419), 145 (451), 148 (453-4), *34 (466-7).

172 Hydat. Chroti. 60 (418). 173 f lydat. Chroti. 79 (428). 174 Hydat. Chron. 106 (438), 129 (448).

175 Hydat. Chron. 180 (457). 176 Hydat. Chron. praef. 6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 5 17

are somewhat doom-laden landscapes. On the other hand, it may be that
Gallaecia suffered precisely because no charismatic religious leader
emerged to outface the Suevic kings.

Gallaecia may have been unusual among the peripheral zones of the
Roman west in not having a charismatic leader. In the south Spanish city of
Merida a line of bishops established themselves as leaders of their commu-
nity, although their holiness was perhaps secondary to the economic
resources they built up. 177 Nor was the periphery the only area where there
were saints capable of taking on, and supposedly outfacing, barbarians.
Caesarius of Arles was a match for Theoderic the Amal, 178 and, already in
the chronicle of Prosper of Aquitaine, pope Leo is said to have impressed
Attila. 179 A century earlier, of course, Ambrose had outfaced Theodosius.
In general, however, the role of the charismatics in the transition from
Roman empire to barbarian kingdom in southern Gaul and Italy seems to
have been less than it was in some of the more peripheral regions. Yet here,
too, bishops generally played a very conspicuous role in the many diplo-
matic negotiations which went on during this period. Epiphanius of Pavia,
for instance, negotiated with Euric as well as with Gundobad. 180 Equally
significantly, four bishops were entrusted with negotiating the final stages
of the cession of Clermont to the Visigoths. 181

Although our sources suggest that it was charismatic clerics who stepped
into the breach caused by the failure of the Roman empire, there were other
individuals who attempted to use the remnants of imperial authority. The
barbarians themselves often acted as officials of the old empire, both
before and after becoming kings — and their kingdoms were built on
Roman foundations, which in the south had been less shaken than further
north. These southern leaders, the Ostrogoths in Italy, the Visigoths in
Aquitaine and the Burgundians in the Rhone valley, were also drawn to
some extent into the established social patterns of the upper classes of the
late Roman empire. We can see this as early as the mid 450s in Sidonius’
picture of the daily routine of the Visigothic king Theoderic: church atten-
dance and official duties, followed by inspection of the stables, hunting, the
midday meal, then a short siesta — or, even better, a game of dice — then a
resumption of royal duties before dinner. As Sidonius remarked, it was
advisable to lose a game against the king to get one’s suit preferred. 182
Theoderic’s brother, the rather more rebarbative Euric, was in time the
focus of an equally Romanized court, centred on the Roman city of
Toulouse, where the verses of Sidonius were well received. 183 Meanwhile,
at the same court, more northerly barbarians — Saxons, Franks, maritime

177 Vitas Sanctorum Patrum Emeretensium ed. J. N. Garvin (Washington 1 946).

178 Vita Caesarii 1.36—8. 179 Prosper, s.a. 452, ed. T. Mommsen, MGH,AA 9 (Berlin 1892).

180 Ennod. Vita Epiph. 85—94, 136—77, ed. F. Vogel, MGM, AA. 7 (Berlin 1885).

181 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.6.10. 182 Sid. Ap. Ep. 1.2.4— 10. 183 Sid. Ap. Epp. 4.8.1; 8.9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5i»

l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

Heruls and Burgundians, as well as Ostrogothic insurgents against the
Huns — queued for audience. 184

The expansion of the Visigoths under Euric, particularly in the early
470s, finally broke imperial power in Gaul. Yet this most disruptive of the
barbarian kings to rule in Gaul also played a significant role in the continu-
ance of certain aspects of Roman government, for it is he who is the earli-
est barbarian king known to have issued a law code. 185 In terms of the
preservation of Roman tradition, his son went one degree further, issuing
an abridgement of the Theodosian Code, the so-called Breviary of Alaric, for
his Roman subjects in 506. Despite the Arianism of these two monarchs,
and despite the brief period of persecution experienced by the Catholic
church in those areas captured by Euric in the 470s, 186 they were largely on
good terms with their Gallo-Roman bishops, who met under Alaric II’s
aegis at Agde in 506 and who opened the council with prayers for the king. 187
This apparently flourishing sub-Roman kingdom, however, was brought to
a sudden end in 507 with Alaric’s defeat and death at the hands of Clovis at
the battle known as Vouille, although it was probably fought at Voulon. 188

The equally Romanized kingdom of the Burgundians, based on the
Rhone valley and centred on the towns of Chalon-sur-Saone, Geneva and
Lyons, survived a little longer. The Burgundians, or what remained of them
after their defeat at the hands of Aetius, 189 had been settled in Sapaudia, the
territory between Geneva and Neufchatel. 190 While there, they took advan-
tage of the crisis following the deposition of the emperor Avitus to make
a special arrangement with the senators of Gaul. 191 The new emperor,
Majorian, however, forced them back, presumably to Sapaudia. 192 We next
meet the Burgundians controlling Lyons and Geneva as Roman officials.
Chilperic acted as mapfster militum of Gaul under the emperor Glycerius
and, as such, appears in the letters of Sidonius Apollinaris. In the changing
political circumstances of the 470s the job was not an easy one, not least
when Glycerius was superseded by Julius Nepos. 193 In such circumstances
Chilperic’s government was wide open to criticism: he was as liable to the
admonitions of a holy man as were his Rugian contemporaries. Lupicinus,
one of the so-called Jura Fathers, rebuked him for his harsh treatment of
the poor, calling him an impostor. 194 Chilperic was naturally impressed.

184 Sid. Ap. Ep. 8.9.5. 185 Wolfram (1988) 194-5.

186 Sid. Ap. Ep. 7.6: a letter which should be understood as both rhetorical and belonging to very
specific circumstances.

187 Council of Agde (506), praef., ed. C. Munier, Concilia GalliaeA.fip-A.jo6 , CSEL 148 (Turnhout

1 963). 188 Gerberding (1987) 41. 189 Chronicle of 4J 2 118(436).

190 Chronicle of 4J2 128 (443); on the problem of the date, Wood (1992) 14—15.

191 Marius of Avenches, s.a. 456, ed. J. Favrod, La Chronique de Marius dAvenches (444—481) (Lausanne

1991). 192 Sid. Ap. Carm. v. 5 64— 71; Harries (1994) 85-6. 193 Sid. Ap. Epp. 5.6.2; 5.7.1.

194 1 Vita Patrum lurensium 92—5 (=11.10), ed. F. Martine, Vie des Peres du Jura , SChret. 142 (Paris 1968);
see also Greg. Tur. Liber Vitae Patrum 1.5, ed. Krusch, MGH, SRM 1 (2).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 5 1 9

This may well be more than a hagiographic tripos', the Burgundian is known
from Sidonius’ letters to have worked happily with the Catholic bishop of
Lyons, Patiens. More specifically, he is said to have praised the bishop’s ban-
quets, while his wife admired his fasts. 195

Nor was Chilperic the last Burgundian ruler to have a Roman title and
to act in concert with his Catholic clergy. His own rule came to an end in
unclear circumstances in c. 474. At about that time Gundobad, son-in-law
and successor to the magister militum Ricimer, left Italy, and established
himself, with his brothers, as ruler of that part of Gaul controlled by the
Burgundians. 196 In time, Gundobad was to dispose of his brothers. Even
as king, despite the absence of an emperor in the west, Gundobad appears
to have kept the title of magister militum. On his death, his son Sigismund
wrote to the emperor Anastasius, asking to take over his father’s office. 197

Like many of the kings of the period, including his uncle Chilperic,
Gundobad had to deal with a charismatic cleric — this time the Italian,
Epiphanius of Pavia, who demanded the return of prisoners taken by the
Burgundians in a raid on Italy. 198 Also like Chilperic, Gundobad was closely
associated with his bishops, notably with Avitus of Vienne, with whom he
corresponded regularly. He did so despite the fact that he is the only king
of the Burgundians known to have ruled as an Arian. Avitus was also a
close confidant of Gundobad’s son, Sigismund, who converted to
Catholicism before his accession. Interestingly, despite his Catholicism, he
fell foul of his bishops, who effectively withdrew their support from him
over a case of incest, which he apparently condoned. 199 Not long after, his
kingdom was the object of a Frankish invasion, and he was handed over to
king Chlodomer, who had him thrown down a well. 2110 His body was later
transferred to the monastery of St Maurice d’Agaune, where he became the
focus of the first royal saint-cult of the Middle Ages. 201

Although to posterity Sigismund was important as a saint, the most
important action of his reign was arguably the compilation of the Liber
Constitutionum of the Burgundians. 202 This law book, which was issued at the
Easter court of 517, includes a number of edicts promulgated by the king’s
predecessors. Both in the form of its legislation and in its contents, the Liber
Constitutionum is a very much more Roman document than the Pactus Legis
Salicae issued by Clovis, probably a decade or more earlier. 203 The laws of the
Liber Constitutionum were addressed to the leading officials of the kingdom’s
cities, the comites of the civitates , both Burgundian and Roman. 204 They were

195 Sid. Ap. Ep. 6.12.3. 196 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.28. 197 Avitus, Ep. 93.

198 Ennod. Vita Epiph. 136—77. 199 Council of Lyons (519), ed. R. Peiper, MGH, AA. 6 (2).

200 Greg. Tur. Hist 111.6. 201 Paxton (1993). 202 Wood (1986) 10.

203 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 108—13.

204 Eiber Constitutionum , prima constitutio ed. L. R. von Salis, Leges Burgundionum , MGH , Leges 2 (1)
(Hanover 1892).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

520

l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

to be enforced on the whole population of the kingdom, Roman or barbar-
ian, by officials who represented the continuance of fifth-century regional
government.

The Burgundian kingdom, like the kingdom of Toulouse, could build
directly on the Roman past. What disruption there had been was less severe
than the disruption further north, despite a civil war in 500 culminating in
the siege of Vienne. 205 Like the kingdom of Toulouse, however, the
Burgundian kingdom fell prey to the Franks — momentarily, in 5 24, when
Sigismund was handed over to Chlodomer, and permanently, after 534,
when Childebert I and Chlothar I took over the kingdom. 206 Thereafter it
was to be one of the major units in the Merovingian kingdom of the
Franks.

The Frankish kingdom of the mid sixth century enclosed a sizeable area
of land stretching from Germany east of the Rhine to the Pyrenees, and
from the Alps to the North Sea. It was a kingdom of infinite variety, and
not just because it was divided into a series of separate units centred on
Paris, Orleans, Soissons and Rheims. Geographically, it included land
which had never been part of the Roman empire, together with regions that
had suffered greatly during the migration period, and other regions which
had scarcely suffered at all. In Burgundy, in Aquitaine, which had been part
of the kingdom of Toulouse, and perhaps above all in Provence, there was
considerable continuity from the imperial past. Whatever the variety, the
Merovingians came more and more, in the course of the sixth century, to
cultivate an image of romanitas. Indeed, it is often not possible to say
whether we are dealing with Roman continuity or revival.

A use of Roman forms is apparent even at the lowest levels of govern-
ment. Collections of formulae , particularly from Clermont, Angers and
Bourges, 207 show that the town archives were still in use for the registration
of property. In fact, we know more about the functioning of the town
archives of Gaul in the Merovingian period than under the Roman empire.
From the will of bishop Bertram, made at the start of the seventh century,
we know that the gesta municipalia were in operation in the city of Le
Mans. 208 Such documentation suggests remarkable continuity, even in the
north — though it may not be prudent to extrapolate the evidence for one
city and apply it to all. It is, however, clear that Frankish cities were usually
managed by comites, acting as their predecessors had done in the fifth
century, although in a number of places, and increasingly, the power of the
comes passed to the bishop. The reasons for this transfer of power are by no
means clear and were probably varied, depending on the traditions of a see
and the relations of an individual bishop with the king. Whether in the

205 Marius of Avenches, s.a. 500; Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.32— 3. 206 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.6, 1 1.

207 Ed. K. Zeumer, MGH , Formulae Merowingici et Karolini A.evi (Hanover 1886); Wood (1986) 9.

208 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 208.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

5 2I

hands of the bishop or the comes, however, local administration was largely
derived from Roman antecedents.

There are other indications of continuing Roman practice at a higher
level of government, not least in tax collection, which continued in atten-
uated forms, apparently organized by Gallo-Romans. Theudebert, who
ruled over the east Frankish kingdom with his capital at Rheims, had as his
right-hand man the Roman aristocrat Parthenius. On Theudebert’s death,
those who had suffered at Parthenius’ hands, Franks who thought they
should not be subject to taxation, took advantage of the absence of royal
protection and lynched him. 209 His case is an interesting one, for it shows
a Roman aristocrat involving himself in governmental affairs. Clearly, he
was attempting to keep certain types of Roman administration running;
but he was also thought to be doing something new in taxing the Franks. 210
This was something more than mere continuity. The same may be true of
Chilperic’s attempts to collect taxes: not content with old tax registers, he
attempted to draw up new registers. In Limoges, at least, the attempt was
not appreciated, and the tax-gatherer, Mark, narrowly escaped lynching. 211
Although Chilperic is described as imposing new taxes, Childebert II is said
to have revised the tax registers not long afterwards, merely to make them
more equitable. 212

In the course of the sixth century romanitas did not merely continue. It
was positively cultivated, perhaps even revived, at the Frankish court. On
Childeric’s death, the Gallo-Roman bishop of Rheims, Remigius, wrote to
his son, Clovis, advising him of his duties as governor of Belgica
Secunda. 21j Twenty-seven years later, in 508, Clovis was supposedly hailed
as consul aut augustusA Childeric had belonged to a transitional world: pre-
sumably Remigius addressed him much as he was to address his son, but
his grave reveals him as being at least as much a pagan warrior as a Roman
federate. 215 Clovis, at the end of his reign, appears far more Romanized, as
well as Christian. While his father had been in conflict with Genovefa,
Clovis is said to have freed prisoners at her request, and ultimately built a
church in her honour. 216 Like Feletheus on the Danube, he is said to have
sought the advice of holy men, notably of Vedast, later bishop of Arras, 217
but it is clear from the letters of Remigius that Clovis often got his own way
with the clergy. 218

Saints continued to advise and inveigh against Merovingian kings in the
sixth century, 219 but the background to their confrontations was by then a
well-established state rather than war-torn Paris or the undefended banks

209 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.36. 210 Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.36. 211 Greg. Tur. Hist. v.28.

212 Greg. Tur. Hist, ix.30. 213 Epist. Austras. 2. 214 Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.38.

215 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 40. 216 1 Vita Genovefae 56: Daly (1994) 629—31.

217 Jonas, 1 Vita Vedastis 3, ed. B. Krusch, MGH , SRM 3. 218 Epist. Austras. 3.

219 Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 73.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

522 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

of the Danube. Nevertheless, there is nothing to suggest that Clovis’
immediate successors were as concerned with Roman titles as was their
contemporary, Sigismund of the Burgundians. A generation later, however,
things looked very different. Clovis’ grandson, Theudebert, deliberately
cultivated an imperial style, not least in the context of his involvement in
the Ostrogothic wars in Italy. To the annoyance of the Byzantines, he
started to issue gold coins with his own portrait. 220 His son, Theudebald,
was concerned to demonstrate the extent of his hegemony to the
Byzantine ruler Justinian. 221 So too were other Merovingian rulers. 222 At the
same time, they started to hold horse races in true imperial style. 223 Clovis’
grandson, Chilperic I, restored circuses in Paris and Soissons for that
specific reason. 224 The romanitas of the Merovingians of the second half of
the sixth century is even more apparent in the poetry of Venantius
Fortunatus, not least in his epithalamium for the marriage of Chilperic’s
half-brother, Sigibert I, and the Visigothic princess, Brunhild. Under one
of the descendants of Sigibert, a collection of letters was made, providing
evidence of and models for the cultivation of letter-writing at court. 223

After the catastrophe of the fifth century, the sixth century — in Gaul, at
least — was a time of revival. So much so that it is by no means clear where
there is total continuity and where restoration. In most places continuity is
likely at the most basic of administrative levels. Higher levels of govern-
ment are more likely to have been subject to a process of re-creation. The
same is likely to be true for Spain as well. Here the evidence is markedly less
good than for Gaul. Our best source is Hydatius, and he is concerned pri-
marily with the north-west, and his chronicle comes to an end in 469.
Thereafter the evidence is distinctly fragmentary. The precise chronology,
and even the geography, of the Visigothic settlement of Spain is a matter
for speculation. Nor does the collapse of the kingdom of Toulouse, and
the subsequent transfer of the Visigothic centre of power to Spain, imme-
diately lead to an increase in our documentation. One or two cities are well-
evidenced — above all, Merida, which in the pages of the Vitas Patrum
Emeretensium , at least, does not seem to have been affected much by the
initial settlement of the Goths. 226 The complex theological changes
espoused by Leovigild in the 570s apparently had more impact on the city,
or rather on its bishops.

Leovigild’s religious policies were only one aspect of a highly energetic
reign which also saw the final crushing of the Suevic kingdom of
Gallaecia, 227 which had survived, despite the defeat of Rechiarius, and

220 Procop. Wars, vii.33.5— 6. 221 Epist. Austras. 20. 222 Procop. Wars, vm.20.9.

223 Procop. vii.33.5. 224 Greg. Tur. Hist. v.17. 225 Wood (1993) 40.

226 1 Zitas Sanctorum Patrum Emeretensium , ed. J. N. Garvin (Washington 1946).

227 Isidore, Historia Gothorum, Wandalorum, Sueborum 49, ed. T. Mommsen, MGH , AA 1 1 (Berlin
1894).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 523

which, in the course of the sixth century, under the episcopal leadership of
Martin of Braga, had become rather more civilized than Hydatius could
have hoped. More significant for Visigothic kingship was Leovigild’s devel-
opment of a royal style, modelled much more closely on imperial style than
that of his predecessors. Like Theudebert, half a century before him,
Leovigild paid attention to the iconography of his coinage . 228 He also
adopted a new regalia and took to sitting on a throne . 229 He even founded
a city, Reccopolis, named after his son Reccared. 23 " More so, apparently,
even than the Merovingians of the second half of the sixth century,
Leovigild recreated Roman style. His successors were able to go further. In
abandoning Arianism they were able to harness to their cause a number of
highly talented Hispano-Romans, not least Isidore of Seville.

In the course of the sixth century the Visigothic kings of Spain, like the
Merovingian kings of the Franks, came to present themselves in a guise
that looked back to the Roman empire. After the disruptions of the fifth,
the sixth century turned out to be a period of rebuilding. It could not be a
perfect re-creation, for too much had changed in the course of the migra-
tion period; nevertheless, the style of these kings and their kingdoms was
largely Roman. In the far west, however, Brittany continued its own rather
eccentric pattern of development, as did Britain itself across the Channel.
Whereas Merovingian Gaul fell back into the social and governmental tra-
ditions of the later Roman empire, in Britain and Brittany the more open
structures of the mid fifth century continued. In western Britain there
emerged a curious fusion of Celtic and Roman, in which the Celtic pre-
dominated but without entirely obliterating a sense of romanitasP x In
eastern Britain, the developments of the late fifth and early sixth century
are unfortunately almost invisible. Given the varieties of experience on the
continent, it would be unwise to assume that a single cultural, political or
social model held good for the whole of what would become England.
Places where federates were stationed may have experienced little more
than a sharp military coup, perhaps disguised, as related by the ninth-
century Historia Brittonum, by a marriage alliance . 232 Some British enclaves
may even have survived for some while in the new Saxon-dominated
world . 233 Elsewhere there will have been conquest and, probably further
west, assimilation and acculturation. It is, however, only with the establish-
ment of new Germanic kingdoms in the later sixth and seventh centuries,
and with their conversion to Christianity, that eastern Britain re-enters the
historical stage — as the land of the English. The creation of the English
kingdoms effectively brought an end to the ‘sub-Roman’ period, which
continued in the west of the island for longer still. Whatever continuities

228 Hillgarth (1966). 229 Isidore, Historia Gothorum, Wandalorum, Sueborum 5 1 .

230 Isidore, Historia Gothorum, Wandalorum, Sueborum 51. 231 Dark (1994); Dumville (1995).

232 Historia Brittonum 24. 233 Bassett (1989) 21— 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

524 l8. THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

there were between Roman Britain and Saxon England were transmitted
through a ‘sub-Roman’ world rather different from what had come before
or what came after.

Even more than that of sixth-century Britain, the history of post-
Roman Noricum is a blank. After the departure of the followers of
Severinus, with the body of their master, to Italy in 488, there is only the
occasional reference in Procopius and Paul the Deacon to barbarians
settled in or passing through the region. Unlike Visigothic Spain or
Merovingian Gaul, Noricum did not weather the crisis of the fifth century
in such a way as to be able to reconstruct something of the Roman world.
Yet in many respects its experiences during the migration period were not
so different from those of Britain, north-eastern Gaul or Gallaecia. It was
the subsequent absence of a power capable of re-creating something of
the earlier systems of government and organization that proved crucial to
its distinctive development. Whereas the Franks in Gaul and the Visigoths
in Spain look like the heirs of the Roman empire, their contemporaries in
Britain and Noricum do not. The extent to which a region saw reconstruc-
tion in the sixth century was as important in the development of what had
been the north-western provinces of the Roman empire as were the dislo-
cations of the fifth.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 19

ITALY, A.D. 425-605

MARK HUMPHRIES

In 425 , in the circus at Aquileia, the emperor Valentinian III watched the
ritual humiliation and execution of the defeated usurper John. This bloody
spectacle celebrated the restoration of Italy to its rightful place as the centre
of Roman imperial rule after two years of secessionist government . 1 Less
than two centuries later, in 605 , the Constantinopolitan emperor Phocas
ratified a series of treaties with the Lombards which acknowledged, impli-
citly if not explicitly, that large areas of Italy had been lost to imperial rule . 2
Between these events occurred the dismemberment of Roman Italy,
together with its increasing marginalization in the empire. At the outset of
this period, Italy was still the centre of the empire; by its end, however, it
had become a frontier province, fought over by Lombard potentates and
Byzantine military governors.

This chapter will trace this political fragmentation and show how it was
reflected in the transformation of local society throughout Italy. The polit-
ical disintegration has long been known. Certain stretches of Italian history
in the fifth and sixth century are narrated in detail by contemporary histo-
rians and chroniclers, although overall the coverage is rather patchy, while
the epistolary, exegetical and hagiographical works of Gregory the Great
present a haunting vision of Italy after decades of debilitating wars. At an
institutional level, the letters of Cassiodorus give valuable insights into the
administration of Ostrogothic Italy, while inscriptions, though not so
numerous as for earlier periods, add further detail to the picture, announc-
ing the ambitions of rulers or recording the achievements of local aristo-
crats. Such sources, of course, present their own interpretative problems,
as factors like ideology impinge on their credibility . 3 We must look else-
where for insights into the more mundane realities of life in Italy in the fifth
and sixth century. From Ravenna, a remarkable dossier of papyrus docu-
ments illuminates the daily concerns of Italian landowners . 4 For the meta-
morphosis of local society throughout the peninsula, however, much new
detail has been provided by the greatly increased scope and sophistication

1 McCormick, Eternal Victory 59—60. 2 Paul. Diac. Hist. Eang. iv.35.

3 See e.g. Rouche (1986) on Gregory’s letters; cf. Petersen (1984) on the Dialogus.

4 Tjader (1954— 82).

525

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

5 26

of Italian archaeology over the last three decades. Both excavation and
regional survey have helped qualify the picture presented by the literary
sources, although archaeological survey, because it is most useful in detect-
ing processes over the longue duree, is less demonstrative in showing short-
term change than historians might wish . 5 By reading archaeological,
documentary and literary evidence side by side, it is possible to achieve a
wide-ranging picture of Italy’s fate in late antiquity, fatting political devel-
opments — which often seemed cataclysmic to the participants — into a
broader context of Italian social evolution. It will emerge that the process
is one of gradual metamorphosis, which saw the growing entrenchment of
local society, punctuated by moments of sudden rupture, such as the
Justinianic wars or the Lombard invasions.

It cannot be doubted that the fifth and sixth century witnessed a sub-
stantial transformation of Italian society. Under Valentinian III, Italy was
still united by social, economic and communications networks much as it
had been since the days of the late republic. During the middle empire, to
be sure, this unity had come under pressure, but it was only in our period
that Italy split asunder . 6 Italy’s political unity had outlived the ostensible end
of Roman rule and survived intact under Ostrogothic government. In this
sense, the initial serenity of Italy’s post-imperial experience stands in
marked contrast to the instability which engulfed the rest of western
Europe in the fifth century . 7 Only in the decades after Justinian’s decision
to bring Italy back into the empire was the peninsula torn apart by war and
invasion. The social, economic and cultural horizons of local communities
contracted, and although the old Roman roads, which had helped unite the
peninsula, were still used, much of their traffic now consisted of Lombard
and Byzantine armies competing for Italian territory.

I. ITALIAN INTERESTS AND THE END OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE

(425-76)

Valentinian Ill’s restoration seemed to guarantee the re-establishment of
the old political order in Italy. But the system was in reality falling apart,
with the relationship between Italy and the rest of western Europe becom-
ing strained. This facet of imperial collapse was reflected in the tension
between Italian interests and non-Italian, especially Gallic, incumbents of
the throne. Just as Italy was becoming politically isolated from the rest of
the west, so too it had to rely increasingly on its own economic and mili-
tary resources. The Vandal conquest of Africa was a crucial catalyst. First,
while trade between Africa and Italy certainly continued, Rome could no
longer depend on the region as the major source of its corn dole. Hence,
the city was forced to rely more on Italian resources, transforming the eco-

5 Barker (1991) 53— 4. 6 Dyson (1990) 215—44. 7 Cf. ch. 18 (Wood), pp. 499— 517 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ITALIAN INTERESTS AND END OF THE WESTERN EMPIRE 527

nomic relationship between the city and the rest of the peninsula and
Sicily. 8 Secondly, Geiseric’s success in organizing a fleet opened Italy to bar-
barian attack from the south as well as along its traditional frontier in the
north. Vulnerability from north and south was frighteningly realized with
the invasion of Italy by Attila and the Huns in 452, soon followed by the
Vandal sack of Rome in 455.

It is no accident that these events precipitated a series of political crises
in Italy, with emperors and leading generals being chosen and disposed of
according to how their actions pleased Italian opinion, an issue complicated
by the complex and sometimes divergent interests of groups within the
ruling elite. Under Valentinian, the new Vandal threat to Italy prompted the
fortification of Naples and Terracina on the Tyrrhenian coastline. 9 In 454,
the magster militum Aetius was executed, probably a victim of Valentinian’s
need to placate Italian interests. During the Hunnic crisis, Aetius had failed
to defend Italy from Attila, in stark contrast to the energy he displayed in
protecting Gaul; furthermore, he had even suggested that the emperor
should abandon Italy. The next year, Valentinian was himself murdered by
two of Aetius’ former associates. His replacement, Petronius Maximus, did
not last long, and by the time of Geiseric’s attack on Rome, Italian fortunes
were once more in non-Italian hands. With the throne now occupied by a
Gallic aristocrat, Avitus, who failed to defend Rome and Italy against the
Vandal onslaught, the situation was ripe for a violent confrontation between
the two interest groups. At Placentia (Piacenza) in 456, Avitus was defeated
and deposed by the generals Majorian, who subsequently became emperor,
and Ricimer. 10 As emperor, Majorian strove to unite the disparate interests
of Gaul, the Visigoths and Italy against the Vandal threat. Whatever the
initial successes of his enterprise, it ended in the capture of his fleet by
Geiseric, followed by his deposition and execution at Ricimer’s hands at
Dertona (Tortona) in 461. 11

Ricimer’s new choice of emperor, the Lucanian aristocrat Libius
Severus, reveals the extent to which he depended on Italian support to
maintain his supremacy. To be sure, Majorian had also courted the favour
of Italy, but Ricimer — who first came to prominence as a commander
defending Italy against the Vandals — made it the foundation of his regime
and the focus of his policies. For much of the 460s, he devoted his ener-
gies to neutralizing the Vandal threat by diplomacy and military action. 12

When Severus died in 465, Ricimer made no move to replace him, and
for almost two years he dominated Italian affairs without any rival. In the

8 Trade between Africa and Italy after 439 is a vexed problem: Wickham (1988) 190—3 on continu-
ity (cf. ch. 20 (Cameron), pp. 5 56—7 below). For other areas: Wilson (1990) 3 30— 1; Arthur (1989) 133—4;
Barnish (1987); Small and Buck (1993) 28—9. 9 Christie and Rushworth (1988) 81—7.

10 Harries (1994) 76—80.

11 For very different appraisals of Majorian, cf. Harries (1994) ch. 4 and O’Flynn (1983) 104— 1 1.

12 O’Flynn (1983) 104-28.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 z8

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

end it was the eastern emperor, Leo I, who precipitated change, despatch-
ing a naval expedition against the Vandals and sending the eastern general
and patrician Anthemius to Italy as its new Augustus. Anthemius seemingly
attracted considerable support in Rome itself: the city held out for five
months on his behalf when it was besieged by Ricimer’s forces in 472. 13 But
the hostility between him and Ricimer was never more than thinly dis-
guised, and it seems — if Ennodius’ reference to Ricimer as princeps can be
taken seriously — that by the end Ricimer ruled what was in essence an inde-
pendent northern Italy. 14 Again it seems that Ricimer relied on an Italian
power base. When his hostility to Anthemius became open with the con-
demnation and accusation of his associate Romanus, Ricimer seems to
have pursued his own independent Vandal policy, a move which surely
would have cultivated favour in Italy. 15

LTltimately Anthemius was ousted, and his replacement provides a final
indication of Ricimer’s dependence on Italian loyalties. The new emperor,
Olybrius, was a pleasing candidate to the Italians. He came from the Anicii,
a prominent senatorial clan, and was therefore a more attractive personal-
ity to the Italians than the Greek Anthemius. Moreover, Olybrius had
strong family connections with Geiseric, so his elevation promised the ces-
sation of Vandal hostilities. 16 Such hopes were short-lived: Ricimer died
soon after making his new appointment, and Olybrius followed him to the
grave after a reign of only seven months. 17 But the later stages of Ricimer’s
ascendancy did more than fail to resolve the Vandal problem: they also
highlighted the increasing strain between Italian interests and those of the
eastern emperors. Neither Olybrius’ appointment, nor that of his succes-
sor Glycerius, was accepted by Constantinople.

Similarly, eastern candidates proved to be unacceptable emperors in
Italy. The last to be sent, Nepos was expelled by his magister militum Orestes,
who set up his own son, Romulus, on the throne. But Orestes failed to
appreciate the power of the army in Italy, and when he rejected its demand
for land, the soldiery looked to another of its commanders, Odoacer, as
champion. Orestes was slain at Ticinum (Pavia), while Romulus was
deposed and sent into retirement in Campania. Odoacer was proclaimed
king by the troops, and the decision was accepted by the senate, which sent
a delegation to persuade the eastern emperor Zeno to ratify the arrange-
ment. Unsurprisingly, Zeno refused, but with Odoacar’s elevation as king,
Italy had taken a fateful step: it was now effectively independent of
Constantinople, and all peaceful efforts to restore it to the empire would
end in failure. 18

13 Joh. Ant. fr. 209.1. 14 Ennod. Vita Epiph. 53; cf. O’Flynn (1983) 119— 21.

15 Joh. Ant. fr. 207. 16 Clover (1978). 17 Marc. Com. Chron. s.a. 472.2.

18 Procop. Wars v.1.2— 8; Malchus fr. 14 Blockley.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ODOACER AND THEODERIC (476—526) 529

Map 10 Late Roman and Ostrogothic Italy 425—535

II. ODOACER AND THEODERIC (476—526)

Odoacer was to enjoy his new kingdom for thirteen years before Zeno
could interfere again in Italian affairs. His policies, like those of Ricimer
before him, were geared to consolidating the defence of Italy. He achieved
an early diplomatic success with the Vandals, securing the return of Sicily
— apart from the area of Lilybaeum — from Geiseric. He also sought greater

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 30 1 9 - ITALY, A.D. 425—605

security in the north, campaigning against the Rugi. 19 Within Italy, he did
much to ensure the continuation of normal life, and those who enjoyed the
fruits of his government were aristocratic and senatorial clans. Odoacer
had won his position by force of arms, but he maintained a show of legal-
ity by seeking recognition from the eastern emperor. 211 Then, in 486/7, he
miscalculated, and invaded Illyricum at precisely the same time as Ulus
raised the banner of revolt against Zeno. For Zeno, this provided a
welcome excuse to restore Italy to direct imperial control and to solve the
problems presented by the Ostrogoths in Pannonia. He gave Theoderic the
Amal, magister militum and patrician, the task of disciplining Odoacer.
Theoderic accepted the task with relish, and late in 488 he and his Gothic
army turned west towards Italy. 21

Ostrogothic successes came swiftly, as Theoderic’s invasion force drove
back and defeated Odoacer’s armies. By the end of 489, Odoacer was
blockaded in Ravenna, where he remained for most of the next four years.
Despite some minor reverses, Theoderic was able to bring Odoacer to a
negotiated surrender, and Ravenna opened its gates to the Ostrogothic
army in October 493. Odoacer plainly expected clemency, but shortly after
his submission he was slain by Theoderic himself, and a bloody purge of
his surviving relatives followed. 22 Meanwhile, Theoderic set about consol-
idating his authority in Italy. First, as he had come to Italy under Zeno’s
instructions, some form of eastern recognition was desirable. As soon as
he entered Ravenna, however, the Gothic troops unilaterally proclaimed
Theoderic as their king. This was an honour which, it seems, they conceived
of in purely Gothic terms: Theoderic’s uncle had established Amal leader-
ship and become king of the Pannonian Goths in the 450s. 2 ’ Nevertheless,
it complicated Theoderic’s dealings with Constantinople. Not until 497/8
did Anastasius recognize Theoderic’s position by sending him royal insig-
nia, and only then with the insistence that the eastern emperor’s supremacy
should be maintained, even to the extent that his name should be acclaimed
before that of the Gothic king. 24

In Italy itself, however, Theoderic soon acquired unrivalled authority.
This was no inconsiderable achievement, bearing in mind the diverse
groups of peoples under his jurisdiction: Romans, Goths and the follow-
ers of Odoacer. He also managed, as an Arian himself, to secure the alle-
giance of a largely Catholic Italy, while also defending minority groups
such as the Jews. 25 From the time he had forged the various Pannonian
Goths and assorted Danubian tribes into the people customarily desig-
nated as the Ostrogoths, Theoderic had shown a genius for uniting seem-

19 Anon. Val. 10.48. 20 Chastagnol (1966); Barnwell (1992) 134—5, 155—6.

21 Heather, Goths and Romans 295—308. 22 Anon. Val. 1 1.5 5— 6; John. Ant. fr. 214a.

23 Anon. Val. 12.57— 8; Jord. Get. 52.268—71; cf. Heather, Goths and Romans 240—2, 311— 12.

24 Wolfram (1988) 284—8. 25 Moorhead (1992) 97—100.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ODOACER AND THEODERIC (476—526) 5 3 I

ingly disparate groups. 26 In Italy, he displayed this flair to its greatest
extent, creating what, for at least one chronicler, could be seen as a golden
age of peace and prosperity. 27

First, the Goths. Much modern study of Theoderic’s authority over his
Gothic followers has been misled by the elaborate Amal genealogy
worked out by Cassiodorus and reflected in Jordanes’ Getica. While the
construction of such a lineage gave Theoderic’s rule a firm ideological
underpinning, the maintenance of his leadership mainly depended, as it
always had done, on his accomplishments as a warrior. In this respect,
Theoderic had shown his skill by the series of campaigns culminating in
the conquest of Italy. Thereafter, successful campaigns in Dalmatia, the
Rhaetian Alps and southern Gaul, which led to the enlargement of the
Ostrogothic kingdom, helped preserve the image of Theoderic as a suc-
cessful military leader. 28

As well as seeing Theoderic as a triumphant warrior, the Goths looked
to their king for other benefits. The army which had invaded Italy was
perhaps as large as 25,000; together with its dependants, this means a very
large Gothic population demanding sustenance. While some have argued
that Theoderic sought to maintain this contingent purely through the
mechanism of tax allocations, it is hard to image such a large Gothic pop-
ulation entering Italy without receiving land to settle. 29 There would cer-
tainly have been garrisons in major cities such as Rome and in frontier
zones such as the Julian Alps. Gothic settlement was more extensive than
this: archaeological, literary and toponomastic evidence points to the pres-
ence of Goths scattered throughout Italy, with notable concentrations
around Ravenna, in the upper Po valley and above all in Picenum. 30 As well
as being their source of land, Theoderic was the fount of justice and pat-
ronage. That legal redress and political and social advancement depended
on Theoderic helped to cement his authority throughout his long reign. 31

The majority of Theoderic’s subjects were the Roman inhabitants of
Italy, and his ultimate success in consolidating his kingdom would depend
on his ability to integrate them. Like Odoacer, he relied heavily on local
elites as the backbone of his administration. When his kingdom expanded
into southern Gaul and Dalmatia, he exploited the existing links that the
north Italian aristocracy had with those regions. ’ 2 He was conscious, too,
of his image as ruler. He could be clement: coming as an Arian Goth to
a largely Catholic Italy, he never gained a reputation as a persecutor, in
marked contrast to his Vandal co-religionists in Africa. 33 Moreover, he

26 Heather, Goths and Romans 320-3. 27 A.non. Val. 12.59—62; cf. Jahn (1989).

28 Heather (1995) 145—52; Heather (1996) 230—5.

29 Barnish (1986) contra Goffart, Barbarians and Romans 58—102.

30 Esp. Bierbrauer (1975); cf. Battisti (1956). 31 Heather (1995) 158-65.

32 Barnwell (1992) 155—65; Barnish (1988) 134—5. 33 Moorhead (1992) 89—97 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 J 2 19 - ITALY, A.D. 425—605

could wear an appealingly Roman mask. While, like Odoacer, he most
usually called himself rex, he seems not to have objected when, on an
inscription recording the restoration of the Via Appia at Terracina, a
hyperbolic official called him ‘king Theoderic, forever Augustus’ (rex
Theodericus semper Augustus). In a similar vein, the Romans supposedly
diought of Theoderic as a new Trajan or Valentinian. Theoderic fostered
such images by basing life at his court on models drawn from imperial
ceremonial. 34

It would be misleading, however, to claim that Theoderic’s attempts at
integrating the disparate elements under his rule resulted in unqualified
success. Among the peoples that accompanied him from die Balkans, for
example, the Rugi refused to intermarry with the king’s Gothic subjects,
preserving an independence which lasted until die dying days of the
kingdom. Even among his Gothic subjects, Theoderic’s authority could
amount to litde more dian ratifying decisions they made independendy of
him. 35 The greatest area of tension was the king’s relationship with die
Roman population. Despite the images of harmony preserved by
Cassiodorus, Ennodius and die Anonymus I 'alesianus, it is clear that diere
had been the potential for confrontation from very early in Theoderic’s
Italian career. At die time of his arrival, he had threatened to confiscate
senatorial properties if the owners did not abandon allegiance to
Odoacer. Moreover, Theoderic’s own expressions of romanitas had been
tempered by the uneasiness of his relationship with Constantinople. 36 In
the end, the result proved catastrophic for members of the Roman elite
whose cultural activities had led diem into close contact with
Constantinople. In the last two years of his reign, when various aspects
of his government seemed to have fallen into disarray, Theoderic turned
on sections of the Roman aristocracy, suspecting them of treasonable
contact with Constantinople. 37

Despite these problems, the kingdom left by Theoderic at his death in
526 was a remarkable achievement. Whereas barbarian take-over in Spain,
Gaul and Britain had resulted in considerable social dislocation, Italy had
slipped almost imperceptibly from empire to kingdom. Even so, the situa-
tion at his death was ominous. The man who had rewarded Cassiodorus’
elaborate reconstruction of the Amal genealogy had failed signally to
produce an heir of his own. Ultimately his choice devolved on his grand-
son, Athalaric. 38 But when Theoderic died, the new king was still a child.
This provoked a power struggle among the Gothic elite which led to the
eclipse of the Amal line, starkly revealing how fragile was the unity to which
Theoderic had devoted so much of his energy.

34 CIL 10.6850—1; cf. Anon. Val. 12.60; Heather (1996) 221— 35.

35 Procop. Wars vn.2; Cass. Var. vm.26. 36 Heather (1996) 227— 30.

37 Moorhead (1992) 212—45. 38 Heather (1995) 165—72.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE END OF THE OSTROGOTHIC KINGDOM (526—68) 533

III. THE END OF THE OSTROGOTHIC KINGDOM (526—68)

Foremost among those contending for influence was Theoderic’s daughter
and Athalaric’s mother, Amalasuintha. Although her position was precari-
ous, she showed herself to be a shrewd manipulator, and for eight years the
machinery of government acted smoothly under her guidance in
Athalaric’s name. She pursued further the pro-Roman policies of
Theoderic’s earlier years, ensuring that Athalaric received a full Roman edu-
cation and seeking to make reparations for the deterioration in
Go tho— Roman relations in the mid 520s. Yet behind this serene fa9ade
there lurked a deep unease. At the time of a conspiracy hatched against her
by members of the Gothic elite, she loaded a ship with supplies and treas-
ures in readiness for sudden flight to the east. 39 Her relationship with the
new Byzantine emperor Justinian went further. During Belisarius’ cam-
paigns against the Vandals in 5 3 3—4, Byzantine forces were able to use
Ostrogothic Sicily as an important staging-point on the way to Africa. 4 "
Already during these campaigns, however, there were indications of the
traumatic period that was about to engulf Italy. Gothic forces took advan-
tage of Vandal disarray to seize Lilybaeum, which had been held by the
Vandals since 476 and possession of which had been confirmed by
Theoderic as part of his diplomatic initiatives in 500. Belisarius protested
at the illegality of the move, threatening hostilities if the Goths did not give
up their new conquest. 41

The tenuousness of Amalasuintha’s domination was exposed by
Athalaric’s death in October 5 34. She elevated her cousin Theodahad in an
effort to maintain control, but within two months, she had been incarcer-
ated; by the next spring, she had been murdered. Theodahad’s reign proved
disastrous. Frankish power increased north of the Alps as Ostrogothic
influence there faded. More seriously, a breach with Constantinople
seemed likely. In the course of 535, Sicily succumbed to Byzantine forces,
allowing Belisarius to enter Syracuse in triumph on 3 1 December; mean-
while, Justinian’s armies eroded Ostrogothic possessions in Dalmatia. But
if it seemed that such reverses might provoke Theodahad to negotiate sur-
render, a major Gothic victory at Salona in 5 36 gave the king the bravado
to repudiate Justinian’s diplomatic overtures. The result was a more vigor-
ous Byzantine counter-offensive. Dalmatia was swiftly cleared of its
Ostrogothic garrisons, while a large army under Belisarius crossed the
straits of Messina from Sicily. The war for the conquest of Italy had begun.

Theodahad’s reaction was to wait in Ravenna. By the time he chose to
take the field, in response to Belisarius’ capture of Naples, the Gothic elite

39 Procop. Wars v.2.22— 9. 40 Procop. m.14.5— 6.

41 Procop. Wars iv.5.1 1— 25; cf. Wilson (1990) 336—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

5 34

was thoroughly disillusioned with him. Encamped near Terracina, they
reverted to the old principle of choosing a leader of established military
skill as their king: their choice fell on Vitigis, a proven warrior. Theodahad
fled for Ravenna, but Vitigis’ agents overtook and murdered him. For the
next four years, Vitigis sought to check Belisarius’ advance through central
Italy. By 540, however, he found himself blockaded in Ravenna, with little
option but to surrender to the Byzantine army.

With the capture of Ravenna, it might well have seemed that the war was
over. Just as well: in the east, a revival of Persian fortunes was posing severe
problems for Justinian. 42 Any confidence about the Italian situation proved
ill-founded. Shortly after Vitigis’ surrender, two Gothic leaders in northern
Italy, Uraias and Ildibad, raised a revolt. While this posed a new threat to
Byzantine ambitions, it also demonstrated the inherent disunity of the
Gothic forces by this stage of the war: Ildibad had Uraias assassinated, but
not long afterwards was himself murdered by the Rugian leader Eraric. In
turn, Ildibad’s nephew, Totila, engineered Eraric’s death, and afterwards
found himself proclaimed king.

In Totila, the Goths found a leader who was able to stand up to
Byzantine aggression. The war for Italy entered a new phase. For much of
the 540s, Totila was successful in dismembering Belisarius’ conquests,
although it seems that he never lost sight of obtaining a negotiated settle-
ment to the war. 43 But in 551 the Persian war ended with a peace treaty, and
Justinian was able to devote most of his attention to Italy. The new
Byzantine commander there, the Armenian eunuch Narses, proved a
match for the daring Totila, and his army was far larger than any that the
Goths could put into the field. In mid 552, Totila’s army was defeated in the
Apennines, the king himself dying of a wound sustained in battle. Once
again, however, the Goths proved tenacious in their resistance: the full sub-
mission of Italy was not achieved until Narses took Verona and Brescia in
562.

Justinian celebrated the conquest of Italy with grandiose propaganda.
An inscription on the Ponte Salario just outside Rome proclaimed ‘the res-
toration of the liberty of the city of Rome and the whole of Italy’, while
an anonymous chronicler asserted that, through Narses’ victories, Italy had
been restored to its ‘former happiness’. 44 The memory of the Ostrogothic
kingdom was obliterated. Depictions of the king and his courtiers were
removed from the mosaics in Theoderic’s great church of S. Apollinaire
Nuovo at Ravenna. Some even went so far as to claim that the Goths were
expelled from Italy, though this is plainly untrue. 45 But the euphoria which
engendered such claims and actions was misplaced. Italy had not emerged

42 Moorhead (1994) 86—98. 43 Heather (1996) 267—9.

44 CIL, 6. 1 1 99; Auctarii Havniensis Extrema 3 (ed. Th. Mommsen, MGH , AA 9.337).

45 Procop. Wars vm.35.36— ■ 7; but cf. Agathias 1.1.1. Cf. p. 548 below, n. 118.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FORGING THE LOMBARD KINGDOM (568—605) 535

from Justinian’s wars in a condition of restored happiness: there had been
considerable destruction in major cities such as Naples and Rome, and
members of local aristocracies had been compelled to flee their homes. In
the countryside slaves had abandoned rural estates to join one or other of
the opposing armies, and many places — even the rich Po valley — had been
afflicted by famine. 46 Surveying the devastation, pope Pelagius I lamented
the ransacking of papal estates. 47

IV. FORGING THE LOMBARD KINGDOM (568—605)

Justinian’s dream of restoring the western empire had brought Italy little
more than misery. How bitter, then, that the achievement should prove so
ephemeral. In 5 68 the Julian Alps were breached once more, as a Lombard
army led by Alboin — whether at the invitation of the Byzantines or out of
fear of increasing Avar power in Pannonia — descended on Venetia and the
Po valley. 48 The reaction in Italy to this incursion typified the exhausted
condition of the peninsula after thirty years of war. Byzantine resistance
was the strongest, as imperial armies fought to retain the territory recon-
quered less than a decade before. Soon it became clear, however, that
Byzantine resources were insufficient to halt the Lombard advance.
Alliances were forged with other barbarians, as when Tiberius II induced
the Franks to invade Italy in 5 77. 49 Ticinum (Pavia) put up a dogged resis-
tance until 572, but elsewhere Italian communities capitulated without any
notable struggle. The only alternative to surrender was flight. As Alboin’s
army entered his city, archbishop Honoratus of Milan fled across the
Apennines to Byzantine Genoa. Venetia, in particular, experienced consid-
erable displacement of its population. While many undoubtedly continued
to occupy old settlements such as Altinum (Altino) and Opitergium
(Oderzo), others, often under the leadership of their bishops, sought safety
in the islands of the lagoons, leading to the foundation of new centres,
such as Torcello and Heraclia. Even Aquileia, once the greatest city of the
region, shared this fate, as archbishop Paulinus moved the apparatus of his
see to Grado. 50

The Lombard advance was rapid, and by the end of 5 69 most of the Po
valley had fallen under their control. Only the Byzantine territories around
Genoa, Ravenna and along the coast of Venetia, as well as some isolated
inland areas, offered any significant resistance. 51 As compared with the

46 Cities: Procop. Warsv. 10.28—9 (Naples), vin.33.14 (Rome). Runaway slaves: P. Ital. 13. Famine:
Procop. Wars vi.20.18— 21. 47 Pelagius I, Ep. 49 (in MGH Epistolae 3.73).

48 Christie (1995) 60—3, in favour of a Byzantine initiative; cf., however, ch. 5 (Collins), p. 130 above.

49 Men. Prot. 25, 29; cf. Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 111.13.

50 Leciejewicz, Tabaczynska and Tabaczynski (1977), esp. 1—7, 287—94; Rando (1994) 1 3 — 34.

51 Wickham (1981) 31; Christie (1990).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5j6 19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

Ostrogothic achievement a century earlier, however, the Lombard con-
quests lacked coherence. Theoderic, while he relied in large measure on the
acquiescence of his Ostrogothic followers, had been a strong ruler capable
of welding the disparate elements in his kingdom into a united whole.
Alboin, it seems, never enjoyed such unchallenged leadership. Just as the
Lombard conquests divided Italy into Byzantine and non-Byzantine
regions, so the lack of Lombard unity contributed to the territorial dis-
memberment of the peninsula.

The inherent disunity of the Lombards was apparent already, according
to Paul the Deacon, in the army that Alboin led into Italy. 52 In order to con-
solidate his conquests, therefore, Alboin set up his nephew Gisulf as duke
(dux) of Friuli at Cividale in 569. Gisulf was charged with the defence of
the Julian Alps, in which task he was to use various leading Lombard
kinship groups (fame), presumably in an effort to forge some sort of unity
out of the diverse Lombard group by establishing ties of dependence with
Alboin’s family. 53 Any such unity, however, was an illusion, and in 572, inter-
nal Lombard dissension — encouraged, it seems, by the Byzantines — led to
Alboin’s assassination at Verona. His successor, Cleph, lasted only two
years, after which there was an interregnum of ten years, during which
Lombard power in northern Italy was split between dukes in the major
cities. 54

The emergence of Lombard duchies in central and southern Italy may
also point to disunity among Alboin’s followers. By 570 a certain Zotto had
established himself as duke of Benevento: little is known about him, and
it is not clear whether his Lombard war-band campaigned in the south with
or without Alboin’s blessing. 55 Another Lombard duchy developed at
Spoleto during the interregnum. It first appears in our sources when the
duke, Faroald, led his army against Ravenna’s harbour suburb, Classe,
prompting the suspicion that Faroald originally may have commanded
Lombard federates serving with the Byzantines. 56 Certainly, Gregory I
mentions several Lombards serving in the Byzantine army, highlighting
their lack of ethnic solidarity. 57

LTnited or not, the Lombards proved a fatal blow to Byzantine dreams
of a united Italy under imperial rule. Time after time, Byzantine armies
failed to contain the Lombard advance, and by the end of the century, the
territorial encroachment of Lombard power was seriously threatening the
integrity of those remaining Byzantine possessions in Italy. The new duchy
at Spoleto controlled the ancient Via Flaminia, the easiest crossing-point of

52 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 11.26: ‘In fact it is certain that Alboin led with him to Italy a multitude made
up of different peoples led either by their own or other kings.’ 53 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 11.9.

54 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 11.27— 32. Cf. Gasparri (1978) 12—17, 48 (for a duke Alboin at Milan during
the interregnum). 55 Gasparri (1978) 86. 56 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. in. 13; cf. Gasparri (1978) 73.

57 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 70—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FORGING THE LOMBARD KINGDOM (568—605) 537

Map 1 1 Lombard and Byzantine Italy c. a.d. 600

the Apennines, jeopardizing communications between Rome and the
Byzantine enclaves in the Pentapolis and the exarchate of Ravenna. In
response, the Byzantines consolidated a more northerly route through
Perugia, the Via Amerina, fortifying the mountain passes along its length . 58
South of Rome, the rising Lombard power at Benevento confined

58 Cf. Schmiedt (1 974) 591-604.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

538

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

Byzantine possessions to the duchies of Calabria (modern Apulia), Naples
(comprising coastal Campania and modern Calabria south of the river
Crati) and Sicily. 59

The instability which had marked Lombard politics after the death of
Cleph was overcome with the reinstatement of the monarchy by Authari
in 5 84. His resolute defence of Lombard possessions in the north against
combined Byzantine and Frankish assaults prepared the ground for his
dynamic successor, Agilulf (5 90—616), to restore unity to Lombard posses-
sions in the Po valley and encroach still further on the Byzantine territories.
Elsewhere, however, he was less successful. Benevento and Spoleto
retained their autonomy, and Tuscany remained in the hands of quasi-inde-
pendent dukes. 60 In the face of Lombard successes in the north, the
Byzantine authorities could do little other than accept that Justinian’s
dream of a restored imperial Italy had come to nothing. Smaragdus, the
exarch of Ravenna, had already made peace with Authari. In 603 and 604
he made further treaties recognizing the extent of Agilulf’s kingdom.
Then, in 60 5 , the emperor Phocas himself ratified these arrangements. 61 In
so doing, the Byzantines admitted that the total reconquest of Italy was
beyond their grasp.

Like the Gothic wars which had preceded them, the Lombard conquests
brought further devastation to Italy. As has been shown, the development
of internal frontiers altered settlement patterns in Venetia. It also provoked
the construction of new fortifications in the Apennines, not only on the
Via Amerina but along the limits of the duchy of Genoa. 62 In the country-
side, the presence of the invaders had provoked famine, so that on one
occasion the emperor Justin II had to supply Rome with corn from Egypt.
The foul weather and plague which afflicted much of Europe in the 5 80s
brought further misery. 63 Even allowing for a certain apocalyptic exagger-
ation, it is easy to sympathize with Gregory the Great’s vision of Italy: ‘Our
cities are destroyed; our fortresses are overthrown; our fields are laid waste;
and the land is become a desert.’ 64

V. ITALY transformed: the ruling elite

The fifth and sixth centuries saw the utter transformation of Italian polit-
ical fortunes. At the outset, Italy had been the centre of an empire, albeit a
crumbling one. With its metamorphosis into a conglomeration of
Byzantine marches and Lombard principalities came a radical realignment
of its ruling elite. Under Valentinian III, Odoacer and Theoderic, the

59 Diehl (1888) 6— 78. 60 Wickham (1981) 32— 4. 61 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 111.18; iv.28, 32, 35.

62 Christie (1990).

63 Egyptian corn: Lib. Pont. 1.308. Natural disasters: Coronatus, Vita Zenonis 9; Greg. Mag. Dial

3.19.2; Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. hi. 23. 64 Greg. Mag. Horn, in E^ech. z.G.iz.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ITALY transformed: the ruling elite 539

senate was still feted by the court. 65 It was not, however, quite so powerful
as it had been in the fourth century. The shrinkage of the empire meant
that there were fewer offices open to senators. Moreover, officials were
increasingly selected from outside its ranks, among local Italian elites or
educated professionals. As a result, the senate’s influence outside Rome
contracted, forcing its members to look increasingly inward. Some turned
to cultural pursuits, preserving the literary heritage of Rome. Others turned
to the church, but not to the same extent as their fellow aristocrats in Gaul.
In Rome, the alliance suffered periodic breakdowns; one such, the
Laurentian schism (499—507), led to lasting recrimination. The Gothic
wars, with their several sieges of Rome, had a devastating effect on the city
and its institutions, and the increasing Lombard threat reduced the impor-
tance of civilian administrators. By the late sixth century, the senate itself
had ceased to function as an institution, and in the early seventh, the curia
was converted into a church. Members of the senatorial order lived on, but
they did so now on their rural estates, particularly in southern Italy and
Sicily. For some, the trauma of post-imperial experience was too much, and
they left Italy for the surviving empire at Constantinople. 66

The retrenchment of some members of the senatorial aristocracy points
to one of the major transformations of the ruling elite in this period. Local
aristocrats became increasingly important, not just in their own regions but
as agents of the ruling power. Some, such as the Cassiodori of Squillace or
the Opiliones of Patavium (Padua), sought to infiltrate the senatorial aris-
tocracy, either by marriage or by holding office at Rome. They also main-
tained a strong interest in the affairs of their home provinces, where they
were particularly prominent as patrons of the church. Lfftimately, most saw
their destinies on their estates rather than at Rome: when Cassiodorus
retired to his monastic foundation at Squillace, he was acting in a fashion
typical of his class. Others, however, never even saw Rome as a political
goal, and, like Parecorius Apollinaris, governor of Venetia and Histria and
sponsor of the basilica apostolorum at Aquileia, they limited their ambitions
to their native regions. 67

By the early seventh century, however, power was moving away from such
traditional elites to a new military aristocracy. To an extent, this had been
prefigured by the dominance of important military figures in the last days of
the western empire, such as Ricimer, Orestes, Odoacer and Theoderic. But,
by c. 600, even the most mundane business of administration was being
invested in military officials, who acted as judges in a variety of civilian and
ecclesiastical matters. This ascendancy in military and civil affairs was
enhanced as leading members of the army came to possess considerable

65 Chastagnol (1966).

66 Barnish (1988) 120—30; Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 21—38; Matthews (1967) 502—5.

67 Barnish (1988) 130—66; Pietri (1982); Schafer (1991).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

54 ° 19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

tracts of land. As this circumstance grew more entrenched, and as patterns
of settlement in Byzantine territories increasingly focused on fortified castra,
the distinction between the new military aristocracy and local elites became
blurred. The system was reflected in the upper echelons of government too,
with the duties of governor entrusted to the exarch, an office which, if its
remit was unclear at first, was unequivocally military by c. 600. 68 A similar
development occurred under the Lombards, particularly in the frontier
duchies like Friuli: well into the seventh century, weapons are a major feature
of Lombard burials in such areas. 69 Although they had started out from very
different positions, Lombard and Byzantine societies in Italy had come to
look essentially similar by the seventh century, with both dominated by a mil-
itarized landed aristocracy.

VI. THE CHURCH AND THE PAPACY

Just as the traditional aristocracy of Italy was transformed in this period, so
too was the position of the church, especially at Rome. Some elements in
the transition were evident already by the 420s. During the Gothic inva-
sions of Italy in the early fifth century, bishops such as Chromatius of
Aquileia and Maximus of Turin had shown considerable skill as civic
leaders, rallying their congregations at times of crisis. 7 " The uncertain times
of the later fifth and sixth century accelerated this process, and in many
places by the time of the Lombard invasions the bishop had become the
most prominent citizen. Hence, it was bishop Felix of Tarvisium (Treviso)
who negotiated his city’s surrender to Alboin in 568, while Gregory the
Great exhorted the bishops of Terracina, Misenum and Cagliari to main-
tain their towns’ defences. 71 There can be no more graphic demonstration
of the rising social prominence of the church than the topographical
changes which occurred in many Italian cities, whereby the civic centre
came to be focused on the main church building. Aquileia provides a stark
example of the phenomenon: in 4 5 2 the city was sacked by Attila, and when
it rose again it was enclosed by a smaller circuit of walls which left the old
Roman civic centre, the forum, outside, but which contained the cathedral
church at its heart. 72 Beyond the confines of individual centres, the church
inherited the old Roman administrative and social networks which under-
lay the development of episcopal dioceses. 73 In response to its increased
prominence in society, the church developed an elaborate bureaucracy.
Although this evolution is best attested at Rome, the existence of local net-
works is demonstrated by the dedications of defens ores ecclesiae in a sixth-
century basilica excavated at Trieste. 74 For all his dreams of a restored

68 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 46— 60, 101—25. 69 Christie (1995) 126—39.

70 Lizzi (1989) chs. 4 and 5. 71 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. 11.12; Greg. Mag. Epp. 8.19; 9.21, 195.

72 J^ggi ( I 99 °)- 73 Otranto (1990) 16—21, 79—93; Rando (1994) 21—34. 74 Zovatto (1966).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CHURCH AND THE PAPACY

541

empire, Justinian had little choice but to accept the new role of the church.
In the Pragmatic Sanction of 554, which outlined the provisions for the
government of Italy, much of the minutiae of administration was devolved
upon its bishops. 75

The change was most spectacular at Rome. Since the episcopate of
Damasus I (366—84), the Roman church had sought to extend its influence
over much of Italy and beyond. In the mid fifth century, the process was
given a boost by the activities of Leo the Great, whose term as pontiff
(440—61) included the Hunnic invasions and the Vandal sack. Both pro-
vided him with an opportunity to behave as a statesman, acting as protec-
tor of his community. As Attila advanced on Rome, Leo met him and
secured the deliverance of the Eternal City, and after Geiseric’s Vandals had
ransacked it, he did much to restore confidence. At the same time, Leo’s
pontificate saw a more elaborate formulation of Petrine supremacy, grant-
ing his relationships with bishops in Italy — and beyond — a firmer ideolog-
ical basis. None was more unremitting in his defence of this supremacy
than Gelasius I (492—6), even to the extent of berating the emperor on
issues of authority and power; he was no less doctrinaire in his dealings
with the Italian episcopate. 76

As defender of Rome against its enemies and guarantor of its ideologi-
cal supremacy, the papacy was coming to fill the role once performed by
the emperors. Another expression of this was the way in which the Roman
church came to administer corn distributions in the city, and, as a necessary
buttress to this activity, administer sizeable estates throughout Italy.
Excavations at Monte Gelato revealed a site dating to the fourth, fifth and
sixth centuries which comprised a church and associated agricultural build-
ings. 77 The widespread existence of papal estates is confirmed by refer-
ences to donations, by the emperor and aristocratic notables, in the Liber
Pontificalis, and by constant reference to them in papal correspondence.
This points to another area of administration where the papacy was replac-
ing the secular government: whereas previously the corn dole had been
organized by imperial and then Ostrogothic officials, increasingly it was
coming under the control of the church. To be sure, this would have been
a natural development of Christian charity, but by the early seventh century
it was clearly an important element in the administrative machinery of the
Roman church. Indeed, it did not always go smoothly: pope Sabinian
(604—6) made himself unpopular when he chose to alleviate famine by
selling corn from papal granaries, rather than distributing it free. 78 This
transformation of papal power can be observed in unique detail in the
pontificate of Gregory the Great (590—604), whose surviving letters

75 Moorhead (1994) 111, 118. 76 Richards (1979) 20—5, 62—7; Otranto (1990) 95—107.

77 King and Potter (1992) 168—9.

78 Paul. Diac. Vita S. Gregorii 29 (PL lxxv. 5 8); cf. Lib. Pont. 1.3 15.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

542 19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

provide a rare insight into the administration of the Roman church and its
estates. Gregory’s pontificate coincided with the final phase of the territo-
rial dismemberment of Italy, and the interests displayed in his writings
reflect the process clearly: on him devolved the task of organizing military
defence, diplomatic missions to the Lombards, and the supply of water and
grain to the people of Rome. 79

The popes were not the only bishops to consolidate their position in the
uneasy days of the sixth century. Throughout Italy, bishops sought to
promote the prestige and influence of their sees. In Apulia, the develop-
ment of the cult of the Archangel Michael on Monte Gargano gave the
bishops of nearby Sipontum considerable clout in local ecclesiastical poli-
tics. Moreover, the development of the Archangel’s sanctuary as a major
pilgrimage centre gave Sipontum sufficient prestige to grant it a relatively
untraumatic transition from Byzantine to Lombard political control. 811 The
growth of Sipontum is but one example of an explosion in episcopal pat-
ronage of the cult of saints in Italy. It had occurred with papal blessing:
none other than Gelasius I had supported Laurentius of Sipontum’s devel-
opment of the sanctuary. Elsewhere, however, the cult of saints could
provoke certain tensions between local churches and papal claims of
supremacy. In northern Italy, both Aquileia and Ravenna developed tradi-
tions of apostolic foundation which threatened the ecclesiastical supre-
macy of Rome. Indeed, the cult of St Apollinaris gave Ravenna’s church
enough prestige for Constans II to grant the see autocephalous status in
666. 81 The fragmentation of Italy in late antiquity was manifesting itself,
then, in how the church was developing as a political and administrative
institution.

Ecclesiastical developments also mirrored Italy’s transformation from
notional centre of empire to Byzantine frontier province, particularly in the
relationship between the papacy and Constantinople. This reflected
Constantinople’s claim, as the New Rome on the Bosphorus, to equal pres-
tige with the Old Rome in the west. Already in 3 8 1 , the bishop of the eastern
capital was accorded ‘an honorary seniority after the bishop of Rome’
because of Constantinople’s status as the New Rome, a decision amplified
at the Council of Chalcedon in 4 51. 82 Constantinople even sought to rival
Rome’s apostolic primacy. As popes from Damasus I onwards invoked the
Petrine succession as a major buttress of Roman supremacy, so the church
of Constantinople sought to increase its own prestige by association with
the apostle Andrew. 83 So far as the bishops of Rome were concerned,
however, such claims were vitiated by Constantinople’s absence from the list

79 For what follows, see esp. Richards (1980). 80 Otranto (1983).

81 Picard (1988); Markus (1981).

82 Council of Constantinople (381), canon 3; Council of Chalcedon, canon 28.

83 Dvornik (1958).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CHURCH AND THE PAPACY

543

of primatial sees established at the Council of Nicaea in 325, however much
the eastern episcopate might acclaim Constantinople’s ‘honorary seniority’
at later councils. 84

The division of the empire in 395 exacerbated these tensions between
Rome and Constantinole. To a pope like Leo I, the removal of the impe-
rial presence from Rome only served to highlight God’s plan for the
Christian greatness of the city, and efforts to give Constantinople a status
similar to that of Rome met with strong opposition. 85 In this climate,
conflict, when it came, was severe. In 484, pope Felix III excommunicated
bishop Acacius of Constantinople because of his communion with anti-
Chalcedonian, Monophysite clergy such as Peter Mongus, patriarch of
Alexandria. This hard-line attitude towards Constantinople was maintained
by Felix’s successor, Gelasius I, but with the accession of the Chalcedonian
Justin I in 518 conditions were right for a settlement between the
churches. 86 Nevertheless, as the presence at Rome from the mid 490s of
the Scythian monk Dionysius Exiguus shows, the Acacian schism had not
led to a complete severing of links between eastern and western churches.

Links between Rome and Constantinople persisted under the
Ostrogoths, but it was not until the last years of Theoderic’s reign that the
relationship — like that between Roman senators and the eastern capital —
was perceived to have had any political character. 87 With the accession of
Justinian, however, political co-operation between the papacy and the
empire grew stronger, as the emperor sought the advice of pope Agapitus
(535—6) on matters of orthodoxy. Yet the honeymoon did not last: follow-
ing the Fifth Oecumenical Council in 553, Agapitus’ successor, Vigilius,
found himself coerced into accepting the condemnation of the writing
known as the Three Chapters. Many western bishops — chief among them
the north Italians and Istrians led by Paulinus of Aquileia — now repudiated
the leadership of the papacy, initiating a schism that afflicted the Italian
churches until 607 and forcing the church of Rome into a deeper political
alliance with Constantinople. 88

After Vigilius’ death, the relationship between the papacy and the empire
was guided as much by secular as by ecclesiastical concerns. Under
Justinian, the weight of the Byzantine army in Italy was manoeuvred in
support of the papacy’s condemnation of the Three Chapters, as when
Narses acted as protector of Pelagius I’s investiture as pope in 556. With
the arrival of the Lombards, however, the relationship began to change. As
Byzantine concerns focused primarily on the defence of imperial territo-
ries against Lombard encroachment, the papacy found that it was increas-
ingly thrown back on its own resources — and, for a time, those of the

84 Meyendorff (1989) 156—8, 179—84. 85 Leo I, Sermo 82. 1; Meyendorff (1989) 59—66, 148—5 8.

86 Dvornik (1966) 59—67; Richards (1979) 100—13. 87 Moorhead (1992) 235—42.

88 Herrin, Formation of Christendom 119—27; Meyendorff (1989) 235—45.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

544

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

church of Ravenna — in its defence of the condemnation of the Three
Chapters. 89 By the pontificates of Pelagius II (579—90) and Gregory the
Great, the position of the papacy was becoming increasingly beleaguered.
In Italy, the church of Ravenna was no longer a malleable ally, while in the
east the bishop of Constantinople, using the title ‘oecumenical patriarch’,
was once more challenging the Roman church’s apostolic primacy. Co-
operation between Rome and Constantinople was always seen as desirable,
and throughout his pontificate, Gregory the Great sought to achieve peace-
ful coexistence while at no time compromising his conviction of Roman
pre-eminence. Gregory was a realist, and his dealings with the eastern court
reveal a pragmatic politician seeking to secure imperial support for papal
supremacy. It was this pragmatism that led him to write with enthusiasm to
the new emperor Phocas, shortly after he had deposed and executed his
predecessor Maurice, a man whom Gregory had befriended in his years as
pope Pelagius II’s legate in Constantinople. 90

By the age of Gregory and Phocas, the relationship between Rome and
Constantinople epitomized the post-jus tinianic status of Italy in the empire.
While the papacy existed in that part of Italy under Byzantine control, the
Roman church was by no means submissive to Constantinopolitan dictates,
whether imperial or ecclesiastical. In part, this reflected the administrative
importance of the pope, which at times was recognized by the emperor, as
when Phocas yielded to Boniface Ill’s request that Rome be recognized as
apostolic and the ‘head of all churches’ ( caput omnium ecclesiarum) and gave
the Pantheon to Boniface IV for use as a church. 91 During the seventh and
eighth centuries, links between Byzantium and the papacy remained strong:
many popes were themselves easterners, and they maintained close links
with the opponents of Monotheletism and iconoclasm. Yet there can be no
denying the uneasiness in relations between pope and emperor in the
seventh century. Popes could be uncompromising in the defence of their
apostolic prestige, while emperors were as ruthless in their treatment of
obdurate popes as they were with inefficient provincial governors, periodi-
cally deporting to Constantinople those who caused the imperial authorities
trouble. 92

VII. SETTLEMENT AND SOCIETY

The transformation of the ruling elite and the transformation of the
church were significant aspects of social change in fifth- and sixth-century
Italy, and, as has been seen, the process had ramifications for patterns of

89 Markus (1981) 567—73.

90 Greg. Mag. Epp. 13.34, 42; for commentary, see Herrin, Formation of Christendom 179—181 contra

Richards (1980) 226—7. 91 Eib. Pont. 1.317 ; Paul. Diac. Hist. Fang, iv.36.

92 Herrin, Formation of Christendom 250—90.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SETTLEMENT AND SOCIETY

545

landholding. Indeed, changes in settlement throughout Italy reflect social
evolution at its most basic level. Between the mid fifth and the early seventh
century, the cities of Italy underwent a profound transformation. As noted
above, ecclesiastical building had substantially altered the sacred topogra-
phy of Italian cities, reflecting the enhanced social profile of the church.
Patronage of such ventures varies from centre to centre. In the municipal-
ities, church construction was largely an expression of patronage by local
secular and ecclesiastical elites. 93 In administrative centres like Rome,
Ravenna or, later, Pavia, much building was undertaken at the expense of
the ruling power, whether Roman, Ostrogothic, Byzantine or Lombard. 94
Imperial and royal patronage also made its mark on cities in terms of
secular architecture. Ravenna, for example, was the seat of late Roman,
Ostrogothic and Byzantine government, so that in addition to fine
churches, it also boasted mausolea and palaces for its rulers, venues for
public entertainment, and buildings such as warehouses necessary for the
upkeep of a major court centre. Palaces were found elsewhere: Theoderic
had residences at Verona and Ticinum (Pavia), while the Lombards
favoured Pavia, Milan and Monza. 95

Cities were susceptible to rather more ominous changes. After 535, war
became a basic fact of life for many communities. The narratives of
Procopius and Paul the Deacon and the correspondence of Gregory the
Great are littered with references to sieges and the renovation or construc-
tion of fortifications. Sometimes the consolidation of existing defences
was not enough. As has been seen, the citizens of many cities in Venetia
chose to abandon the old sites of their towns and move to safer locations
in the lagoons. Elsewhere, the response was to move to higher ground,
sometimes occupying old fortresses first used in the late Roman period.
Excavations of such sites at Invillino in Friuli and Castelseprio near Milan
have yielded very few Germanic artefacts, suggesting that they were occu-
pied mainly by Roman populations. 96 Meanwhile, in the Byzantine territo-
ries of central and southern Italy, the sixth century saw the development of
well-defended military castra , some of which attracted substantial civilian
populations seeking refuge in uncertain times. 97 Northern parts of Apulia
seem to have suffered considerable urban decline in the wars, with major
centres like Canusium (Canosa) becoming dependent on their neighbours
in the secular and ecclesiastical administration of the region. 98

Change in terms of religious ethos, which had prompted extensive
church building, also brought different social habits which could impinge

93 Ward-Perkins, Public Building 51—84; Caillet (1993).

94 Ward-Perkins, Public Building, esp. 236—45; Wharton (1995) 105—47.

95 Ravenna: Deichmann (1969); Johnson (1988). Other centres: Anon. Val. 14.82, 87; Ward-Perkins,

Public Building 1 57—70. 96 Christie (1991). 97 Brown (1978).

98 Martin (1993) 146—60; Otranto (1990) 251—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

546 19 - ITALY, A.D. 425—605

on the fabric of cities. In many places, for example, the practice of intra-
mural burial became common, and not just for the relics of saints; as a con-
sequence, one of the traditional divisions between city and surburb came
to be eroded." Yet none of this means that the fifth and sixth century saw
a total break with the Roman past, and while there was a certain amount of
contraction in terms of city populations, there was also a great deal of con-
tinuity throughout late antiquity and into the Middle Ages. In many centres,
particularly in the Po valley, the urban fabric proved remarkably resilient to
change well into the Middle Ages. Indeed, even today, Roman street grids
are well preserved at Cremona, Pavia, Verona and Padua, to name only a
few, reflecting the control exercised by civic authorities over urban con-
struction. 11111 Such urban continuity is not altogether surprising: even after
the Lombard invasions, towns and cities remained the centres of com-
merce and administration. 101

There was change in the countryside, too. Some form of prosperity in the
south might be expected as a result of the increased economic reliance of
Rome on the region after the loss of Africa. There is abundant evidence in
Cassiodorus’ Variae that southern Italy did indeed flourish. 1 " 2 This was not
empty rhetoric, for it is reflected in the archaeological record. Evidence of
increased rural settlement in the survey area around S. Giovanni di Ruoti, the
discovery of pig bones in many late antique sites, and the identification of
amphorae types specifically identified with the region’s wine industry confirm
Cassiodorus’ testimony that the south prospered under the Ostrogoths. 103 It
was not the only region to do so; in the far north-east, Histria — rich in oil,
vines and corn — came to be known as Ravenna’s Campania. 104 Following the
Byzantine invasion of 535, however, this prosperity was severely compro-
mised. Belisarius’ forces, on crossing from Sicily, ravaged first the rich lands
of Bruttium and Lucania. As the war dragged on, agricultural life through-
out Italy was disrupted, leading in some years to famine. Again, the archaeo-
logical record confirms the picture: in Lucania there is an appreciable decline
in rural settlement from the middle of the sixth century. 105

In some places, such apparent rural decline must be set against the per-
sistence of activities which stretch back into prehistoric times. This is par-
ticularly so in the mountainous regions of central and southern Italy, where
ancient drove -roads connecting winter and summer pastures continued to
be used throughout late antiquity. 106 Other continuities can be observed. In

99 For Rome: Meneghini and Santangeli Valenzani (1993); cf. Sicilian examples in Wilson (1990)
331—2. 100 Ward-Perkins, Public Building 179—86. 101 Harrison (1993); Ward-Perkins (1988).

102 Notably his eulogy at 1 Var. vm.3 3.3 of ‘industrious Campania, or wealthy Bruttium, or Calabria
rich in catde, or prosperous Apulia’.

103 Small and Buck (1993) 22, 28; Barnish (1987); Arthur (1989) 134—9.

104 Cass. Var. xii. 22.3; cf. xn. 24; xii. 26.2— 3.

105 Cass. Var. xii.5.3; Procop. Wars vi.20.21; Christie (1996); Small and Buck (1993) 22, 28—9.

106 Gabba (1985) 381—7; but cf. Staffa (1995) 328.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SETTLEMENT AND SOCIETY

547

various parts of the Po valley, for instance, extensive tracts of Roman cen-
turiation have survived into modern times. As this entails the maintenance
of both drainage ditches and land divisions, its persistence probably indi-
cates the continued vitality of agricultural life in these zones. Many of these
rural survivals occur close to towns and cities where Roman street grids
were conserved into the Middle Ages and beyond, suggesting that urban
and rural continuity were interdependent . 107 As in so much else, the picture
varies from region to region. Moreover, such changes cannot always be
blamed on social decline: natural phenomena also played a role. At
Aquileia, the silting up of the river Natiso rendered the city’s harbour more
and more unusable after the fourth century . 108 Likewise, stagnation set in
much earlier than the sixth century at some places: the Gubbio basin in the
central Apennines, for example, began its decline in the third century . 109 At
Luna (Luni) on the Tyrrhenian coast, a flourishing early imperial agricultu-
ral system had been abandoned long before the start of our period . 110
Recent archaeological survey in the Biferno valley in southern Samnium
shows a similar pattern of decline, retrenchment and disappearance of set-
tlements. 1 1 1 Often it is difficult to attribute these changes to specific events,
emphasizing the extent to which such results derived from survey repre-
sent a picture of the historical longue duree. Indeed, some places may have
experienced little change at all: Sicily, spared most of the fighting which dis-
rupted the rest of Italy, seems to have remained prosperous into the early
Middle Ages . 112

The pattern of entrenchment throughout Italy extends to what can be
elucidated about inter-regional trade in the fifth and sixth century.
Cassiodorus once boasted that Rome ‘was fed by supplies furnished even
from far off regions, and that this imported abundance was reserved for
it ’. 113 Despite the disruption caused by the Vandal conquest, long-distance
trade seems to have been maintained in the coastal cities of Italy in the later
fifth century: deposits of African red-slip ware are found at Rome, Naples
and Luna, as well as in their immediate vicinities . 114 Inland, however, the
situation shows a marked change, particularly in the sixth century.
Excavations in central Italy have shown a marked increase of coarse ware
fragments in pottery assemblages, while African red-slip ware is found less
frequently and in smaller quantities. This does not represent a drop in
demand for non-local goods, however, since at precisely the same time
local potters in southern Italy started producing vessels which imitated
African designs. Rather, it seems that the supply was no longer penetrating

107 Ward-Perkins (1988) 23. 108 Schmiedt (1978) 236—42.

109 Malone, Stoddart et al. (1994) 181. 110 Ward-Perkins et al. (1986).

111 Barker et al. (1995) 236—40; cf. Staffa (1995) 317—18, 322.

112 Brown, Gentlemen and Officers 27—8. 113 Cass. Var. xi.39.1.

114 Hodges and Whitehouse (1983) 36—42; Moreland (1993) 95—6, 99—101; Staffa (1995) 326.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

548

19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

inland areas by the later sixth century, suggesting a contraction of long-dis-
tance trade within Italy . 115 Once again, the political fragmentation of Italy
was being felt in other areas of life.

VIII. ITALIAN IDENTITIES IN LATE ANTIQUITY

Under Valentinian III, Italy was still, fundamentally, a Roman territory. To
be sure, there were plenty of non-Romans about, particularly in the
army , 116 but the identity of the region as Roman had remained essentially
unchanged since the early empire. By the time of Phocas and Agilulf that
situation had changed entirely: large swathes of Italian territory were under
the control of Lombard or Byzantine Greek overlords; the old aristocracy
had contracted; the unity of Italy had been shattered. This process was
accompanied over two centuries by a constant renegotation of Italian iden-
tity, as the peninsula’s population came to terms with the radical transfor-
mation of politics, society and the economy.

Of course, it would be erroneous to suggest that there was such a thing
as a single Italian identity, even under Valentinian III. The distinction
between the aristocracies of northern Italy, who had strong connections
with Gaul and Dalmatia, and those in Rome and the south are reasonably
clear . 117 In Rome itself, the religious identity of the senatorial order devel-
oped from the heady paganism of the late fourth century to the entrenched
Christianity of the sixth. But Roman aristocrats never lost sight of their
cultural heritage, pagan though it was, and many of them devoted their
energies to preparing editions of the Latin classics. To an extent, this was
a consolation: from the mid fifth century, the influence of the senate was
in decline, and though Odoacer and Theoderic might court its allegiance,
their gestures were primarily cultural, not political. Of course, cultural iden-
tities could become fused with notions of political resistance — the dark
days at the end of Theoderic’s reign were enough to show that — but
effective power now lay elsewhere, in the hands of Germanic warlords,
local aristocrats or Byzantine administrators.

This is not to say that Roman identity was unimportant. Theoderic and
his successors were concerned to depict themselves as inheritors of the
empire just as much as the Roman population of Italy. The mosaics of S.
Apollinare Nuovo in Ravenna showed Theoderic in a very Roman palace,
surrounded by the paraphernalia of Roman court ritual . 118 Even the
Lombards, less Romanized than Theoderic’s Goths, learned the value of
certain aspects of Roman culture, particularly court ceremonial . 119 Roman
identity was central, too, in the propaganda of the Byzantine reconquest,

115 Moreland (199$) 96—8. 116 E.g. Mazzoleni (1976). 117 Barnish (1988) 134—8.

118 Heather (1996) 222— 7. 119 McCormick, Eternal Victory 284— 96.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ITALIAN IDENTITIES IN LATE ANTIQUITY

549

as emperors from Justinian to Phocas claimed to be restoring Italy’s ancient
libertas. Such declarations found only partial sympathy in Italy. In 5 91, to be
sure, some bishops from the diocese of Aquileia wrote to the emperor
Maurice begging for the restoration of imperial rule. But their conception
of Roman rule was a religious one, contrasting the Byzantine sancta res
publica with the Lombard yoke. 1211 The letter originated in the context of
north Italian resistance to Justinian’s condemnation of the Three Chapters,
and the ultimate fate of the Aquileian church reveals how fragile Roman
identity was by the early seventh century. In 6 1 o, the episcopal election was
split. One group elected Candidianus, residing at Grado and loyal to Rome
and Constantinople. An opposing group, still refusing to accept the con-
demnation of the Three Chapters, elected their own candidate, John, and
left Grado for old Aquileia, where they placed themselves under the polit-
ical protection of duke Gisulf of Friuli. 121

Nor did all Goths or Lombards share their rulers’ enthusiasm for things
Roman. When Amalasuintha chose to give Athalaric a Roman education,
she provoked disapproval among the Goths of Italy. 122 Even after the col-
lapse of their kingdom some Goths retained a discrete identity as late as
the eighth century. 123 And of course, the Ostrogoths — in stark contrast to
the later behaviour of the Visigoths or the Lombards — never became
Catholic Christians, but held fast to their Arianism down to the demise of
their kingdom. Under the Lombards, the vestiges of Roman culture were
fewer still. While the figure of Agilulf on the crown from the Val di Nievole
in Tuscany depicts him as dominus noster and flanks him with Victories, such
echoes of Roman ceremonial are tempered by the king’s beard, droopy
moustache and the sword on his lap, all very Germanic. 124 The Lombards,
too, retained elements of their Germanic culture. While some aspects of
their administration, such as the office of duke, had Roman antecedents,
other elements were wholly alien to Italian soil, such as the use of farae to
govern subdivisions of the duchies. Moreover, while the kings and dukes
quickly adopted Latin as their language of government, other Lombards,
such as those who scratched the runic graffiti at the Archangel’s sanctuary
on Monte Gargano, retained their own tongue. 125 Such resistance to the
Latin culture of Italy was to have far-reaching consequences. The overlay
of Germanic elements in Lombard territories, and, indeed, Greek ones in
the Byzantine provinces, assisted the linguistic transformation of Italy,
creating the wide diversity of regional dialects which were a characteristic
of the country until comparatively recently. 126

120 Greg. Mag. Reg. 1.16a. 121 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang, iv.33. 122 Procop. Wars v. 2.6—1 7.

123 Schiaparelli (1929—3 3) 11.279 ( no - 22 ^) records a certain Staviles ‘living according to the law of the
Goths’ ( legem uiuens Gothorum) near Brescia in 769. 124 McCormick, Eternal Victory 289—91.

125 Tides: Wickham (1981) 39; Christie (1995) 110—26. Graffiti: Otranto (1990) 200—2.

126 Devoto (1978) 137-47, 177-89.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 5° 19. ITALY, A.D. 425—605

IX. CONCLUSION

Under Lombards and Byzantines, then, Italy was very different from the
territory restored to Valentinian in 425. The pace of change had varied
from region to region, but, overall, Italy underwent a process markedly
different from the rest of western Europe. Whereas Gaul, Spain and Britain
had experienced considerable disruption in the fifth century, with the res-
toration of some form of equilibrium in the sixth, the situation in Italy was
almost completely the reverse. The deposition of the last emperor passed
almost without notice. Under Ostrogothic government the peninsula saw
considerable continuity with the Roman past, even if not all members of
the Roman elite acquiesced in Theoderic’s regime. The forcible reintegra-
tion of Italy into the empire by Justinian, however, belatedly brought to
Italy its share of cultural, economic, social and political dislocation.

To a major extent, of course, Roman Italy had always been a conglom-
eration of regions united by the veneer of Roman civilization and govern-
ment. Under Theoderic that veneer had held firm, but Justinian’s
reconquest set in motion a sequence of events that caused the structures
of the Roman state to collapse and the peninsula to disintegrate into sep-
arate regions. 127 The tumultuous events of the later sixth century saw Italy
torn apart between the new reality of Lombard power and the outmoded
aspirations of the imperial government in Constantinople. Such contradic-
tions were echoed at the beginning of the seventh century by the complex
reactions of Phocas to the new state of Italian affairs. In one sense, Phocas
tacitly recognized that Italy was largely lost to the empire when he ratified
Smaragdus’ treaties with Agilulf. Yet if by such actions Phocas seemed to
acknowledge the changed nature of Italian political realities, he was prone
to ideological conservatism. In 608, Smaragdus erected a column and
gilded statue in Phocas’ honour by the Rostra in the Roman forum. On its
base an inscription claimed that Phocas was ‘triumphator, forever
Augustus’ who had achieved peace and libertas for Italy: 128 the rhetoric is
substantially the same as that of Justinian.

By the early seventh century, the very act of setting up the column, statue
and inscription represented an anachronistic view of Rome and Italy and
their place in the empire. While the shift in power from Ravenna to
Constantinople meant that Italy was now a mere frontier province of the
Byzantine empire, the idea that it was an imperial possession continued to
beguile the emperors of Constantinople, and sixty years after Phocas one
last attempt was made to restore Italy to the empire. In 662, Constans II
came to Italy in person, aiming to wrest Italy from Lombard hands. Despite
some early successes in southern Italy, Constans failed to achieve his ambi-

127 Wickham (1981) i— 5, 9— 14. 128 CILG.izoo.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CONCLUSION 551

tion. The fiscal cupidity of his regime — which included the despatch of
Roman treasures to Constantinople — aroused contempt in Italy and Sicily,
and few will have mourned his death, by an assassin’s hand, in his bath at
Syracuse in 668. 129 With Constans’ death imperial ambitions in Italy came
to an ignominous end. Byzantine territories were eroded further by the
Lombards in the seventh century. Romuald of Benevento (671—87) con-
quered most of the duchy of Calabria, apart from the area around
Otranto. 1311 In the north, king Rothari (636—52) had already obliterated the
duchy of Genoa and extended Lombard possessions in Venetia before
Constans’ western campaigns. 131 Although Byzantine interest in Italian and
papal affairs continued in the succeeding centuries, and a rump province
existed — and even expanded — in Apulia until the beginning of the second
millennium, it was clear that much of Italy’s destiny lay outside the
empire. 132 Constans’ failure was followed by a more lasting peace treaty in
c. 680 which made clear what Phocas had acknowledged in his ratifications
of 605: the wars fought between Lombards and Byzantines had brought
ancient Italy to an end. 133

129 Paul. Diac. Hist Lang, v.i i; Lib. Pont. 1.343. Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century 59—61.

130 Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang. vi.i. 131 Fredegar, Chron. iv.71; Paul. Diac. Hist. Lang, iv.45.

132 Kreutz (1991) 62—6; Brown (1995) 320—48. 133 Dolger (1924) no. 240.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 20

VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

AVERIL CAMERON

The period from a.d. 425 to the eve of Islam was a momentous one for
North Africa. At its start, what is now seen to have been one of the most
prosperous and urbanized of Roman provinces, even if that development
came somewhat later than elsewhere, passed without real struggle into
Vandal control. The monarchy then established lasted until a.d. 533/4,
when a Byzantine force under Belisarius re-established Roman rule, again
with surprising speed. The new province established by Justinian’s
Pragmatic Sanction of 5 34 endured in theory, if not fully in reality, until the
fall of Carthage itself to the Arabs in a.d. 698; even though Arab armies had
defeated and lulled a Byzantine exarch in 646— 7 1 and founded an Islamic city
at Kairouan in 662, ties between the province and Constantinople were not
entirely broken.

These changes of fortune also implied political, religious and economic
changes which have been the subject of much recent discussion. The main
stimulus for this re-examination has come from archaeology — first and
foremost the important series of excavations conducted by a number of
national teams at Carthage during the 1 970s under the general auspices of
UNESCO; these have provided, in many cases for the first time, reliable
information at least about parts of the city and its development during this
and other periods, and have stimulated and made possible further impor-
tant developments in such disciplines as the study of ceramics. In turn, the
results of these excavations, even though not all are yet fully published,
have contributed to the re-examination of issues such as long-distance
trade and its place in the Mediterranean economy in the sixth and seventh
century. One result has been that the period of Vandal rule in North Africa
is no longer seen as one of severe economic decline; rather, overseas trade
continued as before. In assessing the level of this exchange, historians have
depended heavily on the recently developed study of late Roman pottery,
and in particular of late Roman African slipwares. But recent work on
Justinian’s fortifications in North Africa, survey evidence and work on
some major sites, if as yet only incomplete, is also enabling historians to

1 Gregory: PLRE 111.5 54, s.v. FI. Gregorius 19.

55 *

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE VANDAL CONQUEST AND VANDAL RULE (429—534) 553

revise old views of the impact of Byzantine reconquest. A further impor-
tant change has been the discarding of the colonial model of interpreta-
tion, which had long dominated the study of Roman Africa. Often
regarded as ‘western’, and therefore neglected by Byzantinists, North
Africa is at last beginning to be recognized as an area of major importance
for the general history of the late sixth and seventh century. 2

I. THE VANDAL CONQUEST AND VANDAL RULE (429—534)

Led by their king, Geiseric, the Vandals crossed the Straits of Gibraltar and
entered Roman Africa in a.d. 429. Hippo Regius, on the coast near the
border between modern Algeria and Tunisia, the site of Augustine’s bish-
opric, was burnt in 43 1 , only months after Augustine’s death in late August
429. In 435 parts of Numidia were conceded to the Vandals by treaty, and
in 439 they occupied Carthage; a second treaty in 442, hastily agreed after
a Vandal fleet had reached Sicily and threatened Italy, gave them
Proconsular Africa, Byzacena, Tripolitania and part of Numidia, while
plans were set in hand for a marriage between Geiseric’s son Huneric and
Eudocia, the daughter of Valentinian III. 3 A band probably totalling in 429
no more than 80,000, including non-combatants, 4 thus went almost
unchecked by the provincial armies. External attempts to check or over-
throw them — in particular, naval expeditions planned by Majorian in 460
and Leo I in 468 — also failed disastrously. Meanwhile, the Vandals had
gained control of Corsica, Sardinia and the Balearics, and in 45 5 even
sacked Rome and took the empress Eudoxia and her daughters Eudocia
and Galla Placidia prisoners (Viet. Vit. Hist. Pers. 1.24; Procop. Wars
hi. 5. 1— 6); Mauretania and Sicily also came under Vandal sway. After 468
there was little chance of further action against them from the west, and
they were raiding the coast of Illyricum when the eastern government
under Zeno concluded a peace with them in 475 ; 5 this peace lasted until
Belisarius’ expedition. Geiseric was succeeded in 477 by his son Huneric
(477—84); after him came Gunthamund (484—96), Thrasamund (496—523),
Hilderic (523—30), the son of Huneric and Eudocia, and Gelimer, the last

2 See Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 209—13 for an excellent survey, with rich bibliography; also
Duval (1990), (1993). The standard works on Vandal and Byzantine Africa are still Courtois (1955) and
Diehl (1896) (on Courtois, see Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 210; Lepelley (1989) 30). For the literary
sources for the Byzantine period see Cameron (1982), an early attempt at a synthesis; Pringle (1981) is
a valuable and detailed study of military aspects. Fundamental on the prosperity of late Roman Africa
are Lepelley, Cites and Lepelley (1989). For methodology, and for the limitations of archaeological evi-
dence, see Roskams (1996).

3 Main sources for the period: Victor of Vita, History of the Vandal Persecution trans. Moorhead (1992);
Procopius, Wars in. 1 — 9 (on which see Goffart, Barbarians and Romans 62—9); Prosper, Chron.\ Hydatius,
Cont. Chron.) see also Ferrandus, Vita Fulgentii and Victor of Tonnena, Chron. In general see Courtois
(195 5); Diesner (1966); narrative in Bury, LRE 1.

4 For the number see Goffart, Barbarians and Romans 231—4. 5 Malchus fr. 5 Blockley.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

554

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

Vandal king (5 30—4), who walked as a captive in Belisarius’ triumphal pro-
cession in Constantinople. 6

Like barbarian settlers elsewhere in the western empire, the Vandals
were greatly outnumbered by the existing population. As the self-
appointed chronicler of Catholic persecution by the Arian Vandals, Victor
of Vita, who seems himself to have accompanied the Catholic clergy exiled
by Huneric, emphasizes the damage done by the invaders and the prosper-
ity that had gone before. 7 The unpopularity of the landowning class may
have meant that the arrival of the Vandals was not unwelcome to some sec-
tions of the population, 8 and the invaders were able to rely on Roman
Africans such as Fulgentius, who was later to become bishop of Ruspe and
a leader of the Catholic opposition, to maintain their administration.
However, much of our literary evidence for the period comes from hostile
Catholic churchmen, and the picture is necessarily mixed: moreover, direct
Vandal influence was concentrated in the Proconsular province. As a con-
sequence, the so-called sortes Vandalorum , the lands which they allocated to
themselves and which represented a division between Vandals and
Romans, by no means affected all Roman landowners. 9

According to his biographer, although Fulgentius’ grandfather had fled
to Italy when the Vandals took Carthage, his father and uncle had suc-
ceeded in recovering the family estates near Thelepte in Byzacena, and
Fulgentius spent his early life managing the estates and holding the posi-
tion of procurator , ln The Tablettes Albertini, wooden tablets on which are
recorded in ink acts of sale from a.d. 493—6, demonstrate the continuance
of late Roman landowning practice and indicate that new trees are being
planted. 1 1 While it is hard to find evidence of continuing curial patronage
after the Vandal conquest, signs of continuity include attestations of a
number of flamines perpetui and sacerdotaler, even though Christian, the
Roman elite continued to hold the traditional titles, whether the imperial
cult had been appropriated by the Vandal kings, who called themselves reges,
or whether the titles still carried an imperial connotation. 12 A law of
Huneric (484) lists the Roman hierarchy in traditional terminology, 13 while
the Vandal kings used the mint of Carthage to issue coins with titulature
and iconography derived from imperial usage. 14 By the end of the Vandal
period, poets such as Luxorius and Florentinus, whose poems survive in

6 Gelimer and his life in exile: Cameron (1989).

7 Viet. Vit. Hist. persec. 1.3— 12, with 11.28, 32; cf. also Possidius, Vita Augustini 28. Despite 1.1, which

seems to refer to a.d. 488—9, most indications in Victor’s work point to 484 as the date of composition:
Moorhead (1992) xvi— xvii. 8 E.g. Diesner (1966) 5 iff.; Frend (1978) 480—2.

9 For the sortes , see Procop. Wars hi. 5 . 1 1— 1 5 ; Viet. Vit. Hist, persec. 1. 1 2—14, both highly coloured (see
Goffart, Barbarians and Romans 68); Clover (1982a) 667—8. 10 Ferrandus, Vita Fulgentii 1.13, 8—10.

11 Courtois et al. (1952); cf. Bonnal and Fevrier (1966—7).

12 Chastagnol and Duval (1974); Clover (1982a), (1989). 13 Viet. Vit. Hist. persec. 111.3— 14.

14 Clover (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE VANDAL CONQUEST AND VANDAL RULE (429—534) 555

the Latin Anthology , were praising Vandal rule in a style reminiscent of
imperial panegyric; there was clearly also some cultural and linguistic inter-
mingling, even if on a limited scale. 15 But life under such a regime was not
easy: even if there was a semblance of continuity, the curial patronage so
amply documented for the period before the Vandal conquest seems to
have come to an abrupt end, and there are no public inscriptions from the
Vandal period. When the Vandals employed Catholics in the royal palace,
the Catholics found it politic to dress like Vandals, 16 and the Roman poet
Dracontius fell foul of Gunthamund and was imprisoned for it. 17

The Catholic hierarchy, fresh from its recent harsh measures against the
Donatists, soon itself experienced periods of persecution from the Arian
Vandals. As a result, it developed a strong sense of identity, defined by
opposition, which was to continue into the Byzantine period. 18 Geiseric
had made the church a target at first with an eye to its wealth, but his suc-
cessor Huneric went further and tried to enforce Arianism, calling a council
reminiscent of the anti-Donatist Council of 41 1, and following it with a
general edict against Catholics in 483 and 484; 19 Geiseric had left the see of
Carthage vacant from 440 to 454, and again from 457 to 481, and forbade
ordinations in Zeugitana and Proconsular Africa. The extent to which
Victor’s evidence can be trusted in detail is uncertain, but the policy of per-
secution and exile continued under Gunthamund and Thrasamund, in
whose reign Fulgentius of Ruspe became a leader of the bishops exiled to
Sardinia and elsewhere. On their side, the Catholic hierarchy used pamph-
lets and propaganda to enhance their sense of living under a tyranny. A
bishops’ list with additional notations, known as the Notitia provinciarum et
civitatum Africae, whose reliability has been doubted, gives the number of
466 for the bishops attending the conference in 483, with their subsequent
fates; most were allegedly exiled, either within Africa itself or in Corsica. 2 "
Fulgentius, who had been exiled himself, later engaged in formal debate
with Thrasamund on points of doctrine. 21 The experience of harassment
and exile served to strengthen the resolve of the bishops; at the end of the
Vandal period a council held at Carthage in 525 under the more tolerant
Hilderic was able to deal with issues internal to the Catholic church in
Africa, and prepared some of the ground for the stand it was later to take
against Justinian. 22 More immediately, however, the Byzantine victory in
5 34 was accompanied by the public overthrow of Arianism and the rein-
statement of the orthodox.

15 Luxorius: Rosenblum (1962); Florentinus ( Anth . Lat. 371): Clover (1982b); Clover (1986) 9—10;
Cameron (1982) 30. 16 Viet. Vit. Hist.persec. 1 1.8. 17 Clover (1989) 62— 6. 18 Parsons (1994).

19 Viet. Vit. Hist. persec. 1.29— 51; 11.23, 395 Huneric as persecutor: Procop. IFSzr.f 111.8.3— 5.

20 Parsons (1994) ch. 6.

21 Ferrandus, Vita Fulgentii 19—21; cf. his Tres libri ad Thrasamundum and Responsiones contra Arianos,

CCSLyi, 9 1 a. Thrasamund: Procop. Wars 111. 8.8—10. 22 Courtois (195 5) 304—10.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

556 20 . VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

The attempt to trace the impact of Vandal rule from the material
remains yields ambiguous results, and certain developments perceptible in
the fifth and sixth century, such as increased ecclesiastical building and
signs of encroachment on traditional public spaces, are common to other
areas in late antiquity . 2 ’ The evidence of the archaeological record is inev-
itably incomplete and often hard to interpret. At Carthage itself, some
monuments may have been falling into disrepair or partly destroyed; Victor
of Vita claims that the Vandals completely destroyed the odeon, the
theatre, the temple of Memoria and the Via Caelestis, and some archaeo-
logical confirmation has been found in the case of the circular monument,
the odeon, the theatre, the Byrsa and to some extent also for the
Theodosian wall, the circular harbour and the circus . 24 The fifth and early
sixth century have not yielded mosaic floors comparable with those of the
fourth-century villas . 25 But city life continued, the Vandal kings themselves
engaging in building enterprises, and Vandal nobles possessed fine houses
and suburban villas with gardens . 26 Against Victor of Vita we may cite the
fulsome eulogy of Carthage and its buildings by Florentinus in the Latin
Anthology ? 1 Church building also continued; the large basilica at Bir el
Knissia, Carthage, for example, which underwent substantial alterations in
the later sixth century and was still flourishing in the seventh century, was
built in the late Vandal period . 28 Outside the cities, important recent evi-
dence comes from archaeological surveys, notably (for the central areas) at
Segermes and Kasserine, with important results also from Caesarea in
Mauretania and the Libyan valleys; not all the final results are as yet pub-
lished . 29 These allow a far broader approach than before to North African
agricultural systems — in particular, the effects of water installations; they
do not suggest a sharp change in the Vandal period, which continued to
benefit from the enormous growth in sedentarization in earlier periods,
which brought with it economic growth on a major scale, and from the
wealth of Roman Africa in the fourth century. Fortified farms or other
small rural buildings, probably private in origin, are a feature which was to
develop further in the Byzantine period.

The understanding of the role played by Vandal Africa in general pat-
terns of long-distance Mediterranean trade has been revolutionized in the
last generation by the scientific study of African pottery (ARS, African
red-slip ware) from this period, beginning with the fundamental work
of John Hayes; similar results have been obtained using other evidence

23 Humphrey (1980); Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 210. Cities: Brett and Fentress (1996) 79—80.

24 Viet. Vit. Hist. persec. 1.8; see Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 210. 25 Lepelley (1992).

26 Clover (1982b) 13— 1 5 ; the epigrams of Luxorius make it clear that games and entertainments were
still popular: Rosenblum (1962). 27 Anth. Lat. 376. 28 Stevens etal. (1993).

29 References and general discussion in Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 189—96; an important kiln
survey is also under way.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE VANDAL CONQUEST AND VANDAL RULE (429—534) 557

— for instance, lamps . 30 Far from being cut off from the rest of the
Mediterranean, African exports continued throughout the period, and
indeed up to the seventh century; interpretation of the evidence remains
controversial, but while there is evidence of decline from the mid fifth
century, combined with a significant increase in imports of eastern
amphorae to the west, the argument is one of scale. Geiseric’s aggressive
policy against Italy cannot have helped the cause of African exports; yet
kiln evidence shows that at Lepti Minus, for example, production was
continuous. Indeed, the ending of the annona at Rome, which had acted
as a stimulus to African production but also deprived the province itself
of much of die grain which it produced, may have increased local
resources during the Vandal period. It is not clear to what extent the level
of long-distance exchange was affected by the substitution for Roman
currency exports to North Africa of a local Vandal coinage and the con-
tinued use of fourth-century bronze . 31

30 See ibid. 200— 5, with Panella (1989), (1993); in general, Giardina (ed.), Societa romana in; Fulford, in
Fulfordand Peacock (eds.) (1984). Discussion in Wickham (1988), especially at 190— 3; Mattingly (1988).

31 References in Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) nn. 386—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

558

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

The study of Vandal and Byzantine Africa, as of Roman Africa, has been
dominated in the past by attitudes derived from the modern experience of
colonialism, which has indeed provided the researchers and their milieux, as
well as their subject matter. Notions of a thin veneer of civilization estab-
lished by some process of ‘Romanization’ over a large native population, or
ideas of frontiers as protective barriers instead of zones of contact, have
been central to this approach. The processes first of recognizing the models
applied in older scholarship and then of deciding in what direction to
replace them are still in their early stages. 32 As yet, neither Vandal nor
Byzantine Africa has featured as prominently in this debate as has the
Roman period; nor has either been the subject of the same level of discus-
sion about ethnic and cultural definition as have other geographical areas in
late antiquity, notably Egypt and the near east. For a variety of reasons, the
level of scholarship with regard to North Africa on such questions remains
undeveloped, even in relation to topics like Donatism that are comparatively
well-studied. But with the impact first of the Arian Vandals and then, with
the Byzantine conquest, of the eastern armies and administration, new
levels of complexity were added to an already complex situation. In their
important survey, Mattingly and Hitchner argue for a move away from the
existing models of two cultures, or of resistance and reaction, towards a
more integrated and African’ approach, replacing that of much of the
earlier modern literature, which, as they point out, has tended to adopt the
bias inherent in the contemporary Roman and Byzantine sources. 33

Outside Vandal territory the picture is varied. Attempts were made to
compensate Roman landowners for their losses at the hands of the
Vandals, 34 and there is evidence for fine houses and mosaics at
Cuicul/Djemila and Cherchel, but elsewhere, as at Lepcis and Sabratha to
the east, things were less secure. A central phenomenon of the Vandal and
Byzantine periods is the increasingly important role played by the Mauri or
Berber ‘kingdoms’ in the mountains of the Aures and to the south and
south-east of the Vandal areas; one of these groups, the Leuathae, still
pagan, came from the east, from the area of Cyrenaica, but others — for
instance, in Mauretania — were already Christianized, and used Latin.
Though the Byzantines were able to win a spectacular success over the
Vandals, they found some of these groups more formidable opponents;
they feature far more prominently in Arab accounts of the Islamic con-
quest of Africa in the seventh century than do the Byzantines, and were
destined to have a far longer history in the province. Corippus’ Iohannis, a
Latin hexameter poem in eight books praising the campaigns of the
Byzantine general John Troglita in the 540s, is a major source of informa-

32 Ibid. 169—70, 209; Roskams (1996) 175—80.

33 See e.g. their comments on the historiography of Donatism, Mattingly and Hitchner (1 99 5) n. 43 9.

34 Nov. Val. 34 (a.d. 451).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 559

tion about the Berbers, who are as yet imperfectly understood; 35 during
John’s campaigns the heavily-armed Byzantine cavalry met an enemy who
were camel-riders and for whom they were unprepared. Pastoralists, and
comprising both transhumants and sedentaries, these tribal groups had
benefited from the loosening of control during the period of Vandal rule,
and the advent of the Byzantines presented a direct challenge to them.
Already, before the end of the Vandal period, the Leuathae were estab-
lished in Byzacena, but it seems unlikely that their importance was appre-
ciated by Justinian and his advisers when they decided to send an army to
Africa in 5 3 3. 36 But by the mid century, and with John Troglita’s campaigns,
the Byzantines had achieved some success, pushing back the Leuathae and
destroying the main cult centre at Ghirza, south of Lepcis.

II. THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE

Whether late Vandal Africa already represented a run-down and struggling
province when Justinian decided to invade depends, therefore, on what evi-
dence one chooses to use; it was certainly ripe for the picking. The
Byzantine expedition, consisting of some 1 5 ,000 infantry and cavalry, set
sail from Constantinople in the summer of 533 under the command of
Belisarius; after putting in at Sicily and receiving the news that Gelimer was
himself away from Carthage, and that most of his army had been sent to
Sardinia, the Byzantines landed at Caput Vada (Ras Kapoudia), on the east
coast of Tunisia/’ 7 The campaign was a useful distraction after the Nika
revolt of the previous year, and hostilities with Persia had recently ended.
Besides, Justinian had a pretext: Hilderic, who had been well-disposed
towards Byzantium, had been deposed and imprisoned in 5 30 by Gelimer,
who had responded haughtily to Justinian’s protest. 38 The first encounter
took place at Ad Decimum outside Carthage, and on the day after the feast
of St Cyprian (14 September) Belisarius led his troops into Carthage, sat on
Gelimer’s throne and feasted on food prepared for the Vandal king in his
palace; among those who were present was the historian Procopius, who is
our main source. 39 Meanwhile, Gelimer had had Hilderic lulled and had fled
himself.

The two armies met at Tricamarum in December, and again the Byzantines
prevailed. Gelimer fled to the mountains and soon gave himself up: the
Vandals were defeated. 40 A praetorian prefect of Africa was established, to

35 See Frend (1978) 484—5; Pringle (1981) 1.13—16; cf. the series of articles by G. Camps, e.g. Camps
(1984), with Moderan (1991). Brett and Fentress (1996) puts the subject on a new footing; see especially
70—80. 36 The wisdom of the decision was questioned, according to Procop. Wars hi. 10.2— 6.

37 For the campaigns that followed, see Pringle (1981) 1.16—22. 38 Procop. 111.9.5—26.

39 Procop. Wars 2.0—

40 Justinian assumed the tides of Vandalicus and Africanus as early as 21 November 533, before the
batde of Tricamarum: Const. Imp. maiestatem , CIC 1, Inst., xxi, and cf. CJ 1.27.1 (a.d. 5 34).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

560

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

oversee in addition Sardinia, Corsica, the Balearics and Septem, at the tip of
Mauretania Tingitana; the eunuch Solomon was appointed to this position,
and was given military powers as well when Belisarius returned to
Constantinople with the captive Gelimer to celebrate a great triumph and to
answer in person insinuations made against him. 41 In a ruthless and efficient
move, the Vandal males were settled in the east and exploited as military man-
power, thus effectively destroying the former governing elite.

But almost at once Solomon had to face Berber attacks in Byzacena and
Numidia, while the uncertainties surrounding property rights and imperial
action on religious matters in the newly restored province led in 536 to
serious rebellion within Solomon’s army; many soldiers had married Vandal
captives, and had an interest in the family property of their wives, while
others were Arians, whose religion had been forbidden by a law of 535 , 42
Such was the danger that Solomon and Procopius fled to Sicily, while
Carthage was sacked by its own garrison. The situation was only relieved
by incisive action by Justinian’s cousin Germanus, sent to Africa in 536, and
Solomon was reappointed in 539; he was killed at Kasserine in 544- 43 The
Berbers in Numidia had played an equivocal role as they watched the
warring parties; Solomon therefore lost no time in driving them back
towards Mauretania and, in doing so, gained control of the old Mauretania
Sitifensis, although Byzantine Africa remained smaller in extent than
Roman North Africa. Meanwhile, already in 5 35 a church council had been
held in Carthage on the question of whether the former clergy who had
converted could be received into the Catholic church, and whether their
baptism was valid.

Except on certain ecclesiastical matters, we are poorly informed about
internal affairs in North Africa in the sixth and still more in the seventh
century. The account in Procopius’ Wars focuses firmly on the Byzantine
army rather than the local population (though he gives a different, if highly
coloured, account in the Secret History (1 8.1—21)). At WarsNiw. 17.20— 1 (a.d.
5 5 3—4) Procopius sums up the story of Byzantine rule to date, admitting
the high cost to the country of years of war and mutiny; for most of the
period the Byzantines faced rebels within their own army as well as
having to fight off Berber attacks. Solomon’s nephew Sergius, appointed
in 544, utterly mishandled the military situation and was recalled to
Constantinople in 5455a new commander, Areobindus, fought unsuccess-
fully against Guntharis, a further rebel, who thus gained possession of
Carthage in the winter of 545—6; Areobindus was treacherously murdered
by him, only for Guntharis to be assassinated in turn. 44 The campaigns of

41 Events: Stein, Bas-Empire 11.3 1 8—28.

42 Just. Nov. 37, 6—8; the mutiny of Stotzas: Pringle (1981) 1.22—7.

43 For Procopius’ narrative and allusions to internal affairs, see Cameron, Procopius 176—8.

44 PLRE in. 1 07— 9, s.v. Areobindus 2; 111.574—6, s.v. Guntharis 2.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 5 6 1

John Troglita in 546—8, praised in Corippus’ Iohannis, restored quiet for a
time, 45 but the same poet writing in 566—7 refers to the miseri Ajri . 46 In the
Iohannis, he tells little beyond the sphere of military campaigns, though we
learn that he was directing his poem at the proceres of Carthage {praef., 1),
perhaps as an apologia for the Byzantines and their previous military fail-
ures. 47 Both Procopius and Corippus operate within crude categories
which permit little understanding of the real ethnic and cultural circum-
stances, and both relegate the Berber tribes simply to the realm of barbar-
ians; 48 neither shows any awareness of the indignant response of the
African church to Justinian’s religious policy in the 540s (see below).

During the 570s and 5 80s fighting with the Mauri continued, claiming the
lives of several Byzantine generals; however, Gennadius, appointed magister
militum Africae by Tiberius II in 578, lulled their leader, Garmul, and strength-
ened Byzantine fortifications. 49 By the end of the century, after the reforms
of Maurice (5 82—602), the province was relatively prosperous and peaceful.
A detailed list of towns, bishoprics and metropolitan sees is given in what
remains of the Descriptio urbis Romani by an early-seventh-century writer,
George of Cyprus. 50 The Armenian-born patrician Heraclius, who became
exarch before the deposition of the emperor Maurice in November 602,
was able to mint coins, engage mercenaries and despatch a naval force to
Constantinople against the tyrant Phocas in 609—10 under his son, also
called Heraclius, and an army under his nephew Nicetas. The two-pronged
attack was successful, and Phocas was overthrown, whereupon Heraclius
the younger became emperor. 51 Little more is known, however, of internal
affairs in Africa until the time of Maximus Confessor, who spent two
periods in Carthage, culminating in his successful debate there in 646 with
the Monothelite Pyrrhus, the former patriarch of Constantinople, after
which he left Africa for Rome, where he was the leading mover at the
Lateran Synod of 649. Shortly after the debate between Maximus and
Pyrrhus, the exarch Gregory seems to have declared himself emperor in a
bid against Constans II, only to be defeated and lulled by the Arabs near
Sbeitla in a.d. 647. 52 The Byzantine sources tell us little or nothing about
Africa in the later seventh century, though this is partly or wholly attribut-
able to their general inadequacy. Although coin hoards from the late seventh
century suggest that the government in Constantinople was still interested
in North Africa, Byzantine historical sources are reduced to a few laconic
notices in the ninth-century chronicles of Theophanes and Nicephorus.

45 PLRE 111.644—9, s - v - loannes 36, qui ^/Troglita. 46 In laudem lustini , Pan. Anast. 37.

47 So Cameron (19 8 2) 37—9.

48 Cameron (1982) 39—40 (Corippus); Cameron, Procopius 184—7 (Procopius).

49 Pringle (1981) 1.40— 1; see Durliat (1981) no. 28 (Khenchela).

50 Ed. H. Gelzer (Leipzig 1 890); see Pringle (1981) 1.42—3. The lists are found today as part of a later
compilation. 51 Sources: PLRE 111.584—7, s.v. Heraclius 3 and 4; see Pringle (1981) 1.43—5.

52 Pringle (1981) 1.46-7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

562

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

The end came in a.d. 698 after an unsuccessful attempt by the Byzantines
to save Carthage from capture by the Arabs. 53

Within a decade of Belisarius’ triumph, Justinian’s religious policy pro-
voked indignation among the African bishops. Traditionally looking
towards Rome, diey reacted with shock and concern when they found
that, in his anxiety to placate the Monophysites, the emperor was pre-
pared to condemn writings they themselves held in respect. North
African bishops including Reparatus of Carthage, Facundus of Hermiane
and Primasius of Hadrumetum were among the leaders of the opposi-
tion to Justinian’s condemnation of die Three Chapters; these and others
were summoned to Constantinople after they had formally condemned
pope Vigilius in 5 50 at a council in Carthage, and were given summary
treatment in the years that followed. 54 Those who had not succumbed,
meanwhile, were equally staunch in dieir opposition to Justinian’s final
dieological initiatives in the last year of his life, in die course of which he
deposed the patriarch of Constantinople. This protracted struggle
between African bishops and Constantinople led to many of the African
clergy, including the bishop of Carthage, being deposed and replaced by
others who would be more amenable. 55 As in the case of the Catholics
under Vandal persecution, surviving accounts are written to a large degree
in order to heroicize the objectors; yet enough of their own theological
treatises are preserved and enough is known about the Three Chapters
affair and the Fifth Oecumenical Council in 5 5 3—4 to show that die
general outline is reliable.

Late in the sixth century, fitful light is shed on North African Christianity
by some letters of pope Gregory I (590—604) which may indicate the con-
tinuing influence of Donatism, unless indeed they tell us more about
Gregory’s own assumptions and worries. 56 But the next substantial amount
of documentary evidence conies from the seventh century, and tells again
of the African church, or parts of it, taking up a stance of opposition
towards Constantinople. By then, Greek was the language used by the
eastern monk, theologian and religious leader, Maximus Confessor, in his
letters to clerics and members of the administration, and in his public
debate with Pyrrhus of Constantinople. Maximus spent two periods in
North Africa, first in the 620s and 630s and again in the 640s. Fie influenced
a strong North African contingent to follow him to Rome, where the
Lateran Synod was held in 649, and he was prominent in its deliberations

53 Coins of Constans II: Guery, Morrisson and Slim (1982); events of a.d. 698: Theoph. Chron ,
p. 370 de Boor.

54 Cameron (1 982) 46—8. A main source is the Chronicle of Victor of Tonnena, who was among those
imprisoned. 55 Viet. Tunn. Chron. s.aa. 5 5 3—5; for the African bishops see Maier (1973).

56 Cameron (1982) 49— 51, with Markus (1964), (1979). Against the view of Donatism as identifiable
with rural resistance (Frend (1952)) see Mattingly and Hitchner (1995), works cited in n. 439.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 563

and in the composition of its acta , 57 Maximus’ older friend Sophronius,
himself the pupil of John Moschus and another link with the Greek mon-
asteries of Palestine (he was to become patriarch of Jerusalem, 634—8), had
been in Egypt before it was overrun by the Persians in 617. From there, a
stream of refugees fled towards Carthage, which with the rest of North
Africa escaped Persian conquest. Eastern monasteries were by now estab-
lished in the city, and it was from one of them that Maximus wrote during
his first stay in Carthage of his disapproval of the emperor Heraclius’ order
for forced baptism of Jews in 632 and of the new danger from the Arabs.
A Christian dialogue, the so-called Doctrina Jacobi nttper bapti^ati, probably of
the late 630s, claims to tell the story of a converted Jew who had been
engaged in trade in Carthage. 58 During the 640s Maximus emerged as the
champion of religious opposition to the Monothelete policies of Heraclius
(610—41) and his successor, Constans II (641—8), and for a brief period there
was intense communication between Rome, Constantinople and Carthage.
After the Lateran Synod and the exile and death of pope Martin I (65 3),
Maximus was himself exiled to Thrace (65 5) and then to Lazica, where he
died (662) . Although the emperor Constans II spent the last part of his reign
in the west, in Italy and Sicily, where he was murdered in 668, little more is
heard now of Byzantine North Africa. Maximus’ departure for Rome in the
late 640s coincided with the defeat and death of the exarch Gregory in
battle against an Arab army; the Islamic misr or garrison-city of Kairouan
had been founded by 670, and accounts of the final conquest in Arabic
sources are more interested in the mysterious Berber queen, the Kahina,
than they are in the Rum, as the Byzantines are termed. 59

Unlike the beginning of Vandal settlement, which had been the result of
the arrival of a new population group from outside the province, the
Byzantine conquest, it seems, brought soldiers and officials into the prov-
ince, rather than family groups. To what extent the overall level of popula-
tion may have changed is unclear; in the early seventh century, while some
refugees arrived from the east, there may have been some degree of depop-
ulation. 6 " The departure of Maximus and his supporters for Italy before
649 may itself have been a sign for further emigration in the direction of
Sicily and south Italy, where Greek-speaking monks and clergy from the
east became an increasingly significant element during the seventh and
eighth century. 61

The available evidence does not permit us to trace the full impact of the
Byzantine or ‘Roman’ reconquest as fully as one would like, but some light

57 Chadwick (1974); further, Cameron (1993).

58 Ed. Deroche in Dagron and Deroche (1991); see also Dagron in ibid. 59 See Brett (1978).

60 Settlement: Sjorstrom (1993).

61 Cameron (1 993); Cuoq (1 984) 122—72. For evidence of possible depopulation in Byzantine Africa
see also Pringle (1981) 1.114.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

lo Caesarea/
Cherchel

MAURETANIA s

MAURETANIA

\ 3 TINGITANA

— __ \ Volubilis ^

Asm ' "//

MAURETANIA

CAESARIENSIS

SITIFENSIS /'Thamugadi '

: cnmgad) Aures Mts\-

1 N U M I D I A

. t | a =

A 7 E

10° E E

\ Sabratha

\ Lepcis U ^^ ;

Magna

TRIPOLITANIA

\ o

\ Ghirza

Land over 1,000 metres

SCALE

0 100 200 300 400 km

100 200 miles

CYRENAICA

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 565

can be shed on particular aspects . 62 The use of Greek and the presence of
eastern officials, for example, are attested by their official seals, which survive
even though the documents themselves have perished. 6 ’ Some Greek names
appear among the funerary epitaphs, and eastern saints, who have already
begun to feature in the North African evidence, become more numerous;
there is evidence of the deposition of their relics at North African sites on
a number of occasions in the sixth and seventh century , 64 though we lack evi-
dence of the cult of images which was now of growing importance in the
east. The letters of Maximus Confessor indicate the existence of a number
of monasteries, apparently with monks and nuns of eastern origin . 65 Other
scraps of evidence from the late sixth century point to the continuing exis-
tence of Latin in monastic life, even if only to attest the carriage of manu-
scripts and the transplantation of monks from North Africa to Visigothic
Spain . 66 Justinian established a praetorian prefect for North Africa, with
responsibility for seven governors in charge of Proconsularis, Byzacena,
Tripolitania, Numidia, Mauretania Sitifensis, Mauretania Caesariensis and
Sardinia. Solomon, the first prefect, also held the military command, with
five military duces under him. Some of the territory assigned to the duces was
more theoretical than real, but they were instructed to attempt to recover as
much as possible of the former Roman areas that had been lost under the
Vandals . 67 The restoration of property taken by the Vandals was also
decreed, including churches taken over by Arians; this led initially to discon-
tent and even rebellion in the army, as we have seen. By the end of the
century an exarch had replaced the magister militum, but there was still a prae-
torian prefect in addition in pope Gregory’s day . 68 A major role of the new
imperial administration was naturally to exact taxes from the provincials; this
proved highly unpopular at first , 69 but there is little evidence as to its later
impact, and appeals made by African landowners in the later sixth century
against Justinian’s relaxation of the law pertaining to adscripticii show an equal
concern with the continued availability of labour . 711 There is equally little evi-
dence for the survival or renewal of municipal and provincial organization;
a defensor urbis is attested at Ammaedara, but references to local notables in
general, as to the involvement of bishops with urban organization, suggest
that towns were increasingly run by the combined influence of the bishop

62 See the discussion in Pringle (1981) 1. 109— 20. 63 Morrisson and Seibt (1982).

64 See Duval (1982) 1, nos. 106, 112, 126; 11.561#., 657—70. Funerary epitaphs, largely still Latin:
Ennabli (1975), (1982) (Carthage); Prevot (1984) (Maktar); Duval and Prevot (1975) (Haidra); Pringle
(1981) 1. 1 16— 17, with Cameron (1982) 50—1 and Cameron (1993).

65 Maximus’ letters are to be found mosdy in Migne, PG xci. 66 See Cameron (1982) 52—3.

67 Jones, LRE 1.273—4; according to Durliat (1979) the office of magister militum Africae came into
being only in the late 570s. For detailed discussion of the military and provincial organization as a whole
see Pringle (1981) 1.5 5— 89.

68 Jones, LRE 1.3 13; the administrative reforms of Maurice: Pringle (1981) 1.41— 3.

69 See Procop. Wars in. 19. 3— 4. 70 Justin II, Nov. 6 (a.d. 570); Tiberius II, Nov. 13 (a.d. 582).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 66

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

and the local possessores , 71 A degree of local euergetism evidently continued,
both in relation to church building and decoration and to secular monu-
ments, including fortifications. 72

The latter constitute one class of material evidence which has been rel-
atively well studied of late, a full survey and gazetteer by Denys Pringle and
a corpus of dedicatory inscriptions from works of defence by J. Durliat
having appeared in the same year; in addition, Saharan and coastal fron-
tier fortifications have been studied by P. Trousset. 7 ’ Procopius’ Buildings
gives a detailed but incomplete description of Justinian’s works of defence
in North Africa up to the date of its completion in a.d. 5 5 3 — 4; 74 however,
the work is an imperial panegyric, and therefore tends both to exaggerate
the degree of imperial achievement and to ascribe everything possible
directly to the emperor. Justinian’s programme in North Africa had two
main aims, the defensive and the religious, the latter including a church of
the Virgin at Carthage and another (one of five churches) at Lepcis; in addi-
tion, imperial initiatives were directed towards certain prestige urban sites,
including Carthage, where building included stoai, a bath and a fortified
monastery, 75 and Lepcis, where the old imperial palace was restored. 76 City
walls whose construction or repair is attributed to Justinian include those
of Carthage and Hadrumetum; Procopius names no less than twenty-eight
cities which he says the emperor fortified, as well as seven forts, 77 while J.
Durliat’s catalogue of inscriptional evidence from works of defence
amounts to some thirty-eight items. 78 However, only two fortresses have
been fully excavated (Ksar Lemsa and Timgad). 79 The size of the army sta-
tioned in Africa is difficult to compute from the size and layout of these
installations, which vary greatly; Timgad provides the best-investigated
example and one of the largest so far (0.75 ha). 8 " The initiative and the
responsibility for defensive works were shared: the imperial authorities
sought to control and monopolize major defensive building, to the extent
that twenty-four inscriptions attest the activity in this regard of Solomon
as praetorian prefect, acting on behalf of the emperor. 81 Later, the respon-
sibility lay ultimately with the magister militum Africae, although local initia-

71 See Pringle (1981) 1.1 17— 1 8; tribuni , attested as the commanders of town garrisons, may also have
acquired some civil roles.

72 Examples are cited by Pringle (1981) 1.1 1 8. Individuals named in inscriptions on defensive works
include imperial officials, civilians and bishops; however, the last two groups may also have been acting
as agents for funds that came from elsewhere (Pringle (1981) 1.90—3).

73 Pringle (1981); Durliat (1981); Trousset (1985), (1991).

74 Procop. Buildings vi.2— 7, with commentaries by Rubin (1954), Piilhom (1977); discussion in

Cameron, Procopius 180—7. 75 Procop. Buildings vi. 5 .8— 1 1 . 76 Procop. Buildings vi.4. 5 .

77 Pringle (1981) 1.80, in the context of a discussion of the garrisoning of the province; for detailed
discussion see Pringle’s valuable gazetteer of fortified sites (1981) 1.171— 313, with corpus of inscrip-
tions at 31 5—39, and Appendixes 2 and 5, pp. 123, 126—7. 78 Durliat (1981).

79 See Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 212—12; Pringle (1981) 1.85.

80 Discussion: Pringle (1981) 1.83— 9. 81 Durliat (1981) 93— 8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 567

tives were not ruled out . 82 Similarly, the cost might be found either from
central funds or by the local communities or possessors or priores themselves;
a castrum at Ain Ksar was erected by local tives, at their own expense, in the
reign of Tiberius II, with a list of their names inscribed on the stone . 83

The actual extent of building attested, whether by Procopius or by the
existence of inscriptions, may have been less than it seems: walls repre-
sented an important element of what defined a city in ideological terms,
and despite Procopius’ claim that the Vandals dismantled all existing
Roman defensive installations in Africa, they allowed local communities to
construct defences against the Mauri ; 84 it is also Procopius’ habit to claim
building operations as novel rather than as restorations, in order to shed
more glory on Justinian. Fortified villas and villages, moreover, owe more
to local initiative than to central impetus, and perhaps also to a move
towards rural settlement . 85 Nor is it plausible, even though the literary
sources may suggest it, to think of Byzantine fortifications in North Africa
in terms of lines of defence designed to keep invaders out ; 86 the Mauri who
now posed the principal threat were in fact established well within the
restored province, as well as outside its borders.

Justinian’s emphasis on churches as well as works of defence 87 is in a
sense indicative of the changing urban topography, here as elsewhere,
though generalization is made more hazardous than usual by the fact that
it is normally only ecclesiastical and defensive structures that are datable . 88
Eastern influences have been detected in capitals and mosaics, and church
building and restoration continued in several places, as at Sbeitla, and some-
times on a large scale, as in the case of the basilicas at Kelibia and Belalis
Maior . 89 At Sbeitla, however, the churches coexisted with fortified dwell-
ings, and by the seventh century an oil press sat squarely over what had
been the main Roman thoroughfare. Procopius claims that the city of
Lepcis, deserted and buried in sand, was restored by Justinian, even if not
to its former size; Sabratha, too, was fortified and benefited from church
building, though its public spaces, like others elsewhere, were overlaid with
houses and shops . 90 ‘Encroachment’ on to the open spaces and late antique
civic areas was a feature of Byzantine Africa, as in other parts of the
Mediterranean, and has been detected in a number of the areas excavated

82 Durliat (1981) 98—100. 83 Durliat (1981) no. 29.

84 See Durliat (1981) 109— 1 1. For the size of the areas enclosed by walls see Pringle (1981) 1.1 19— 20.

85 See Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) n. 490.

86 So Diehl (1 896); see, however, Pringle (1981) 1.94—9. Pringle points out that Diehl’s model in fact
depended pardy on the supposed example provided by the Euphrates frontier; however, the nature of
late Roman defences in this area has recendy been reassessed itself (see Isaac, Limits of Empire).

87 See the statement of policy at Procop. Buildings vi . 2 . 1 8— 1 9 .

88 As remarked by Pringle (1981) 1.1 18.

89 Sbeida: Duval (1964); for the basilica and the striking inscribed font at Kelibia, see Cintas and
Duval (1958); Mahjoubi (1978).

90 Procop. Buildings vi.4.1— 5, 1 1— 13; cf. Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 212.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

568

20. VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

at Carthage where, as at other sites, it is accompanied by increasing
numbers of burials within the city itself; 91 similar changes can be observed,
for example, at Setif. 92

Carthage itself provides an instructive example, even though the archae-
ological evidence is concentrated in certain areas of the city, thus making a
general view difficult. The new administration naturally undertook certain
projects in the city, especially in the early years; thus, the Theodosian wall
was repaired and a ditch dug there, and building work undertaken at the cir-
cular harbour, as well as the north side of the harbour and the island,
although there is room for disagreement as to the fit between Procopius’
account at Buildings vi. 5 . 8— 1 1 and the new archaeological evidence; as yet,
the identification of his ‘maritime agora’, church of the Virgin and
‘Mandrakion’, described as a fortified monastery near the harbour, remains
unclear, and the persuasiveness of his account partly depends on his claims
as to the level of destruction or neglect in the Vandal period. 93
Nevertheless, the Byzantines were clearly ready to invest, at least in
Carthage, in urban construction that was not solely defensive or religious. 94
Large urban dwellings were still in use during the sixth century, but several
of those working in the UNESCO project, especially the LTniversity of
Michigan and Canadian teams, have reported later subdivision and inhu-
mation within the city. 95 While some of these developments have been
ascribed to an influx of refugees from Egypt in the early seventh century,
it is also clear that, irrespective of its particular circumstances as the polit-
ical and administrative centre, the city of Carthage was experiencing the
same changes that were happening on other urban sites. 96

When the Arabs arrived in North Africa in the middle of the seventh
century, they found a province still rich in oil and corn production. Corn
was still going from Africa to Constantinople in the reign of Heraclius,
although the state bread distribution there was formally ended in a.d. 618;
the Persians took Egypt, the main source of grain for this purpose, in the
following year. 97 Goods were still being exported from North Africa to the
eastern Mediterranean in the middle of the seventh century, but to a lesser
extent than before; 98 by the second half of the seventh century, imports to
the province from the east, which had grown steadily by the end of the sixth

91 See Humphrey (1980) 1 13— 16.

92 Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 213; further remarks by Pringle (1981) 1.118—20; Cameron (1989)

180— 1.

93 Procop. Buildings vi.5.1— 7; summary and references at Mattingly and Hitchner (1995) 21 2; on the
limitations of ‘Justinianic Carthage’ see Gros (1985) 124—6; on Procopius, see Cameron, Procopius

181— 2. 94 Roskams (1996) 162—3.

95 See Humphrey (1980); reports and other information from the various excavations have been
published regularly since 1987 by the Institut National d’Archeologie et d’Art de Tunisie in its CEDAC
Carthage Bulletin.

96 Humphrey (1980) 117; cf. Roskams (1996) 163—4 (‘settlement shift’), 166—7 (‘seventh-century

demise’). 97 Chron. Pasch. p. 71 1 Bonn, s.a. 618. 98 Fulford (1984).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE BYZANTINE CONQUEST AND BYZANTINE RULE 569

century, now fall off dramatically." The explanations both for the growth of
this extensive long-distance exchange involving North Africa and for its
eventual decline, as for the role played by trade and the activities of large
landowners, are as yet still unclear; within the space of two centuries African
landowners had had to adjust, first, to Vandal occupation and with it the ces-
sation of the grain annona and all that it meant in terms of production and
costs, and then to a reconquest or ‘restoration’ of Roman government, with
its centre at Constantinople rather than Rome — a restoration, moreover,
which reimposed the land-tax and encouraged the development of an axis
between North Africa and the eastern Mediterranean. After apparent
success in the late sixth century, the province experienced a progressive
reduction in the degree of Byzantine involvement, a process hastened by
the Persian and Arab invasions of the eastern Mediterranean. 100

99 Anselmino et al (1986) 191— 5; cf. Panella (1986) 454—9; Panella (1989) 138—41. North African
pottery in the Aegean, sixth to seventh century: Abadie-Reynal (1989) 156—8.

100 See Wickham (1988) 190—3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 21 a

ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

CHARLOTTE ROUECHE

I. SOURCES

The literary evidence for the history of Asia Minor and Cyprus is abundant
for every period, but it suffers to some extent from too much familiarity:
Asia Minor and Cyprus were the homeland of so many writers and readers.
There was nothing exotic about this area, the heartland of the eastern
empire, and so authors felt little need to describe it; much has to be deduced
from what they assume. Furthermore, the chief characteristic of Asia
Minor and Cyprus in the fifth and sixth century was that they were at peace,
so that there was little to recount in historical narratives. The exception,
here as in other things, is Isauria, whose turbulent history in the fifth
century brought it into the history of the empire.

The lack of ‘historical’ events can therefore convey a spurious air of
immobility. In such a situation, the contribution of archaeological evidence
is particularly important; and as the archaeology of this region in this
period has developed, it has revealed more and more evidence of marked
change. The majority of early excavations concentrated on city sites, and it
was common for the late Roman material to be dealt with cursorily during
the search for ‘more interesting’ periods. More recently, excavators have
come to treat such material more attentively; moreover, since the 1950s,
archaeologists have been surveying the countryside, and their work is start-
ing to provide a more balanced picture of this very large area. Recent work
on Roman defences and fortifications has also produced a great deal of evi-
dence for the period. Because of the changes in approach and emphasis,
and also because so much archaeological work is going on at present, it is
necessary to look at the most recent work possible, while remembering that
one year’s observations are sometimes reversed by those made a year later. 1

1 For Asia Minor, regular reports in English are to be found in Archaeology in Anatolia’, edited by
Professor M. Mellink, in the American Journal of Archaeology, and normally in Anatolian Studies', regular
summary articles, Archaeology in Asia Minor’, appear every five years \x\ Archaeological Reports, published
with the Journal of Hellenic Studies. An important source of information is the reports on current work
— in various languages, but usually in Turkish — which are given by excavators at the annual symposia
organized by the Turkish Department of Antiquities. For Cyprus, the principal source is the annual
Report of the Department of Antiquities in Cyprus', summary reports also appear every five years or so in
Archaeological Reports.

57°

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 5 7 1

Inscriptions continued to be set up in many cities of the region, but there
is an enormous decrease in quantity between the Roman and the late
Roman period. As a result, at very many sites there are only a few late
Roman inscriptions, which are sometimes hard to find and even harder to
evaluate in the epigraphic corpora . 2

In assessing both inscriptions and archaeological material there is a
recurrent problem of terminology: one author will describe as ‘Byzantine’
what another will call ‘late Roman’, and it is necessary to be extremely
careful in reading such descriptions. It is also true that, because the archae-
ology of this period has developed relatively recently, the criteria for dating
material within the late Roman period are still rather hazy; but each season’s
work is increasing archaeological accuracy in such matters. This is a held
where our understanding may be radically different in another ten years.

Archaeological discoveries have therefore broken the silence of the his-
torical sources. The picture which they provide complements that provided
in the saints’ Lives; these texts, which emerge as a literary genre in late antiq-
uity, provide a new kind of information by focusing on individuals who lived
outside the world of the urban elite. While they are written with no intention
of informing us about social and political issues, much can be learned from
their assumptions and from the incidental events which are mentioned in
them. Lycia in the mid sixth century is brought alive by the Life of Nicholas of
Sion, just as Galatia at the end of the same century is evoked in the Life of
Theodore of Sjkeon, and in both cases archaeological work in the area con-
cerned confirms the witness of the text . 3 What becomes clear is that, while
few events worthy of ‘official’ history were taking place, the way of life for
individuals and communities in the area was changing significantly . 4

II. THE POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY

Asia Minor is a term of convenience. The large land mass which corre-
sponds roughly to the Asian territory of modern-day Turkey was never in
antiquity a historical and cultural unity; it was inhabited by various peoples,
speaking a number of different languages, who were from time to time con-
trolled by a single political authority. Over the millennia, this authority had

2 The only collection of such material, Gregoire (1922), was intended to be the first volume of a
series, which never materiali2ed. It is still worth consulting; but the best current source of information
on such material is the section on Christian epigraphy in the ‘Bulletin epigraphique’, a survey of Greek
inscriptions published annually in the Revue des Etudes Grecques. The easiest source of information in
English is the ‘Review of Roman Inscriptions’ which normally appears every five years in the Journal of
Roman Studies.

3 The Eife of St Nicholas of Sion ed. Sevcenko and Sevcenko (1 984); The Life of Theodore of Sykeon trans.
Dawes and Baynes (1948).

4 For central Asia Minor this is brought out, with an exemplary use of both archaeological and
textual evidence, by Mitchell, A.natolia n. For the best account of Cyprus in this period see Chrysos
(1993), and, for the end of the period, Cameron (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

572 21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

most often been located outside Asia Minor. The Hellenization which fol-
lowed the conquests of Alexander provided the first unifying cultural
force; all over the region, cities developed on the Greek model, where
Greek was spoken, and local cults were interpreted through Greek religion.
From the first century a.d. the whole area came under the single political
control of the Romans, and experienced several centuries of remarkable
security and prosperity.

But the apparent uniformity of public institutions did not eliminate
ancient distinctions. When the large Roman units of government were
broken down into smaller provinces under the tetrarchy, the new provinces
were based on ancient tribal units and kingdoms — Phrygia, Lydia, Caria, etc.
— because these still represented real entities; Phrygian, for example, was still
being spoken in the fifth century a.d. 5 Local myths and foundation stories
were still being recorded in local histories at the end of the fifth century, and
many are reflected in Nonnus’ fifth-century poem, the Dionysiaca. For all the
importance of the cities, therefore, there was also an underlying tradition of
older and larger political units. Indeed, the replacement of the huge admin-
istrative units of the Roman empire by smaller provinces, especially in Asia
Minor, seems to have meant that those provinces came to be increasingly
important to their inhabitants. It is striking that by the sixth century many
people chose to describe themselves as inhabitants of their province — as
‘the Lydian’ or ‘the Cappadocian’ — rather than as citizens of particular
towns. In so doing, they were using elegant archaism, since the smaller prov-
inces were largely based on older historical units; but the usage may also
reveal something as to where their loyalties now lay.

During the second and third century, the demands, above all, of defence
had drawn emperors to set up headquarters in the east — for example, at
Antioch; but it was only under the tetrarchy that this process started to be
formalized, with the development of several ‘capitals’, including one in
Asia Minor, at Nicomedia. The political ecology of the whole region was
transformed when this process culminated in the establishment of a per-
manent imperial capital at Constantinople in 324, which had particularly
profound implications for Asia Minor: for the first time for many centu-
ries, the ruling power of the entire area was located on the borders of Asia
Minor itself. From 395 the eastern part of the empire was governed from
Constantinople; in 476, the deposition of the last western emperor left
Constantinople as the only capital of the Roman empire.

This transformation had a major impact on the ruling classes of the
cities of Asia Minor. Membership of the imperial senate now no longer
involved long and complicated journeys. Moreover, over the same period,
the nature of imperial administration in the region had been transformed.

5 Socr. /ffiv. 23 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

0 25°E

/.<>?-' V—

/ v/ Constantinople .

p,G O N > A

HELENOPONTUS

£3

~hellespontus-h —

1 I

Nicomedia

U> CT3 I \

°Nicaea \

BITH YNI A \

1 J

ARMENIA I

I ' /

x I

oPergamum I

\ V

l \

Sykeon gal.Atia I

OAnastasiopolis
\ ° >

Germia o \ Ancyra ?

GALATIA \

ARMENIA II

PHRYGIAN SALUTARIS

/ SALUTARIS

N sO Amorium

) Smyrna oSardis l

Mannasia A.

Magnesia ^ I

MHetusVOo on the u Aphrodisias
a_. . Pp“Maeander /IT 0 !

^Didymar? Q ^ / , V

*£=*:•'« W

•o 1 \ ^ V i

'! >\ —
<? < V V\ . V

n i , "! s '' uioiao /fT° 1 5 >*r

. V Sagalassos \

«'< H'

\ A- Cremnao ^

^ j^PH YLI A V v

V ^6enoanda ° ° 7 ' v> f^ ^~\o

iv . . w ~. J rbion( 9iHp\

Xanthos o LYCIAo rfp hase |j s
Arycanda 0 >

Land over 1000 metres

LYCAONIA / o- /

f I 2 ^ X

o 1 aoV

T A U R,U S\ W . I

■<; ~~ — -r ^

Seleuceia
on the
Calycadnus

° / y

° / / ARM!

5* ° Caesarea

9~ ' <f

/ ?

ARMENIA III

ARMENIA IV

/ CILICIA II

MESOPOTAMIA

1 E

OSRHOENE

&SYRIA I

/Antioch

CYPRUS^

h — o Curium

-S Salamis-Constantia

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

574

21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

The creation of newer small provinces started in the third century and took
shape under Diocletian, but the process continued to the end of the fourth
century. This development had met an increasing demand by men of
eastern origin to serve in the imperial administration in the east; the crea-
tion of new provinces created many new posts for them, and the new
senate at Constantinople grew very rapidly during the fourth century. Such
service, however, was likely to draw them away from the public life of their
own cities, and is probably a factor to be taken into account in considering
the decline in traditional civic life discussed earlier . 6

Beyond the further subdivision of provinces, there were no significant
reorganizations in the administration of Asia Minor until the sixth century,
when Justinian initiated a programme of reforms. He slightly reduced the
number of provinces in Asia Minor by combining Honorias with
Paphlagonia, and Helenopontus with Pontus Polemoniacus, but he
increased the provinces of Armenia from three to four. He abolished the
post of vicar — the administrative office between the praetorian prefect and
the provincial governors. Recently discovered evidence suggests that this
formalized a change which had already taken place. In several provinces of
Asia Minor — Cappadocia I, Galatia Prima, Lycaonia, Phrygia Pacatiana and
Pisidia, and the newly expanded Helenopontus and Honorias — he gave the
governors new titles, higher salaries, and both civil and military authority.
It is not easy to assess how important these alterations were for the life of
the provincials. Of all his reforms, one of the most elaborate was perhaps
the legislation which brought the provinces of the Greek islands, of Caria
and of Cyprus all under the quaestor exercitus, based in Thrace, so that those
rich and easily accessible provinces could provide the supplies for the army
at the Thracian front; this suggests both the continuing prosperity of these
areas and also the overriding importance of military finance in determin-
ing administrative decisions . 7

Since the third century, the subdivisions of provinces had stimulated
rivalry between cities as to which was to be the metropolis of a new prov-
ince, with all the benefits which that could convey. An apparently
significant change was made in Cyprus; the island continued to constitute
a single province, but the city of Paphos, which had been the provincial
capital since the creation of the Roman province, was demoted after the
earthquakes of the mid fourth century, and the provincial administration
moved to the city of Salamis, renamed Constantia. It is clear, however,
from the recent excavations that Paphos remained a rich and important city.

By the fifth century, such issues in the secular provincial administration
were largely resolved, but rivalry continued over status within the church

6 See ch. 1 6 (Heather), pp. 437—68 above, and Heather (1994).

7 Just. Nov. 8, 24, 25, 28, 29 (all of 535), 30, 31 (536).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE HISTORICAL FRAMEWORK

575

hierarchy. Thus, the ancient and traditional conflict between Nicaea and
Nicomedia, which had continued throughout the Roman imperial period,
survived at an ecclesiastical level and had to be resolved at the Council of
Chalcedon (451). The Council of Nicaea had formalized an arrangement
by which the metropolis of a secular province was also the metropolitan
archbishopric of a coterminous diocese, and this continued to be the
general rule. By the sixth century, the system seems to have stabilized, so
that when Justinian combined several provinces he specified that this
should not affect the church administration. 8

It is arguable that the coincidence of diocese and province further
enhanced the sense, mentioned above, of ‘belonging’ to a province. The
council of bishops of a province could meet regularly and form an effective
pressure group. The most striking example of this is provided by the
bishops of Cyprus, who petitioned the Council of Ephesus (431) to
confirm their right to select and consecrate their own metropolitan bishop,
giving their island a unique status within the church. When this status was
called in question again, in 488, the metropolitan Anthemius was guided by
a dream to discover the body of St Barnabas, buried with his own copy of
the gospel according to St Matthew; this evidence of apostolic foundation
was sufficient to ensure the continued independence of the archbishopric,
together with particular privileges from the emperor Zeno, including the
right to sign documents, as the emperor did, in red ink. Such developments
may have been far more significant to the inhabitants of a province than
modifications in the imperial administration, and they must have reinforced
the local authority of bishops. 9

III. THE HISTORICAL FRAMEWORK

Asia Minor differs most strikingly from other parts of the empire at this
period in one crucial respect: it was virtually unaffected by war. During the
anarchic years of the third century, Goths had harried coastal cities, and
the forces of Palmyra had at one stage invaded the peninsula. But by the
end of the third century Roman control was secure, and would continue
to be until the Persian attacks of the early seventh century. During the
fifth century, as huge areas of Roman territory came under foreign
control, Asia Minor was untouched by external threats; not only was it
buffered by Armenia and Syria to the east, and Greece and Thrace to die
west, but the strategic position of Constantinople, powerfully fortified
by land and in control of crucial sea-routes, offered vital protection.
The security of this area must have reduced the contemporary sense of

8 For secular rivalry see Roueche, Aphrodisias ; for rivalries within the church hierarchy, Jones, LRE
873—94; for Cyprus, Jones, LRE 873 and Hill (1949) 276—8.

9 ACO i.ii.vii, 1 1 8—22, with Jones, LRE 873.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

576 21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

catastrophe, and contributed to a sense diat the other losses were ones
that could be made up.

That is not to say that Asia Minor was entirely at peace. There had
always been tensions between the comfortable city-dwellers and die
inhabitants of the countryside; and from the diird century onwards, diere
are indications that the less urbanized tribes in parts of the peninsula were
giving increasing trouble. Chief among these were the Isaurians, of
soudi-eastern Asia Minor, who had been pacified with some difficulty in
die first century b.c.; diey revolted again in the 270s, and developed their
activities furdier during the fourth and more particularly the fifth century,
when they are reported as attacking settlements as far away as Cappadocia
and Pamphylia. By the fifth century, this situation was reflected in the
administrative organization of the area: the Notitia Dignitatum shows a
comes and troops stationed in Isauria at the end of the fourth century, and
by the later fifth century there were also military commands in the three
adjacent provinces of Pamphylia, Pisidia and Lycaonia, in response to die
increasing threat from this source. 1 " Despite these arrangements, here as
in other parts of the empire local magnates tended increasingly to ensure
dieir own security and control by maintaining bodies of armed retainers;
during the sixth century there was more than one attempt by the imperial
government to restrain this development in Asia Minor (see further
below).

Like other warlike enemies of Rome, the Isaurians also produced sub-
stantial numbers of troops for the Roman armies. In 474 this tradition
acquired political significance when Tarasicodissa, an Isaurian who had
risen to power by his military career, became emperor and took the name
Zeno. The difficulties which he then faced were characteristic of such a sit-
uation; once Zeno had been elevated, other Isaurian chieftains felt them-
selves to be no less qualified to run the empire than he was. Throughout
his reign, Zeno had to deal with revolts in which power was brokered
between himself and other Isaurian and barbarian chieftains. He defeated
the first attempts with the support of the Isaurian general Ulus; but a few
years later, in 483, Illus himself revolted, relying on power and connections
in Isauria and Cilicia, and perhaps inspired by the success of Odoacer in
taking power in Italy in 476. But the Isaurians, for all their strength, and the
impregnability of their local terrain, were essentially less of a threat than
the other barbarian forces whom the empire deployed, in that they had no
kinship with powers beyond the Roman borders and no access to foreign
frontiers; Illus negotiated ineffectively with the Persians and the
Armenians, but he was defeated by Zeno in 488, and Isauria was finally
reduced and pacified under Anastasius in 49 8. 11

10 CJ xii. 59. 10.5 of 471—2. 11 See further ch. 2 (Lee), pp. 50—3 above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES

577

However, although Asia Minor and Cyprus do not appear in the histori-
cal records as involved in any other major military undertakings, they were
perhaps more vulnerable than we might assume to the effects of war beyond
their borders. The former patriarch of Constantinople, Eutychius, in exile
at Amasea in the early 570s, had to cope with a famine created by a sudden
influx of refugees fleeing the Persians. 12 In 578 the emperor Tiberius settled
Armenian prisoners of war in Cyprus; 13 and throughout the sixth century
there are hints that people displaced by war were moving westwards. The
Life of Theodore of Sykeon is chiefly taken up with local events in the vil-
lages of his area; but Theodore had been conceived in an inn on the main
military road which led from Constantinople to Ancyra and the eastern
frontier, and the later chapters of his life are full of intimations of disaster,
as the reign of Phocas began and the Persian raids on the east intensified.
When the Persians finally broke into Asia Minor, their attacks were the cul-
mination of several decades of progressive destabilization.

IV. THE CITIES

Despite this, it is clear that Asia Minor and Cyprus were essentially at peace
in the fifth and sixth century. This is of particular importance, since it is
clear that many aspects of life in the area did change; these changes cannot
therefore be explained as principally the result of pressure from external
forces, as in other provinces. One development that does suggest an
increased sense of insecurity is the building or rebuilding of fortifications
which took place in a considerable number of cities during the late Roman
period. Such structures are extremely difficult to date, and in earlier years
there was a tendency to date them all in the third century, which was seen
as a ‘difficult’ time, when it seemed reasonable for cities to adopt
fortifications; this is apparently what did happen at, for example, Ancyra
and Miletus.

But at many sites closer study has made it clear that the situation is much
more complex, although many fortifications remain undatable. In some
peaceful areas, such as Galatia and Lycaonia, Hellenistic fortifications were
rebuilt, but not very carefully. At Aphrodisias, city walls were built for the
first time in the fourth century, and repaired in the fifth; they seem to have
followed the outline of the Roman city, as did the late walls, of indetermi-
nate date, at Nysa on the Maeander. At Smyrna, the walls were built or
repaired under Arcadius. At Sagalassos, the late Roman walls appear to
have been built in the early fifth century, probably as a defence against the
inroads of the Isaurians; they enclosed most, but not all, of the Roman city,
as did the late Roman walls at Oenoanda. Amorium was substantially

12 Eustratius, Vita Eutychii 6 1 (PG’lxxxvi.2, 2344B). 13 See Chrysos (199$) 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

57 «

21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

fortified under Zeno — again, probably in response to the Isaurian threat.
It was apparently only at the end of the period, in the early seventh century,
that fortifications were limited to the most defensible part of the city — as
in the case of the Acropolis at Aphrodisias and Phaselis, or the later walls
at Side, and the small circuit at Magnesia. Work on this subject is continu-
ing, and the identification of phases of construction is likely to become
more precise . 14 It may be that at some places — for example, Aphrodisias —
where we do not know of any substantial threat, the new fortifications were
intended as much to add to the prestige of the city as to provide for its
defence; but it is also worth considering that such fortifications might be
intended to meet not a serious ‘political’ threat, worthy of record in the his-
torical narrative, but an overall increase in small-scale brigandage and
robbery. The new walls may reflect a gradual shift in the relationship
between the ‘city’ and the ‘country’ (see further below ). 15

The fortification or refortification of many of the cities of Asia Minor,
and also the extensive re-use of materials in late Roman building, tended
to lead earlier scholars to see an overall decline of the cities from the end
of the third century. Recently, however, the subject has received closer
attention as a result of the work of Clive Foss. As well as publishing studies
of the later Roman period at three important cities — Ancyra, Ephesus and
Sardis — he drew attention to the flourishing condition of many other cities
during the fifth and sixth century. In his view, this period of prosperity
came to a sudden end with the Persian invasions of Asia Minor and Cyprus
in the second and third decades of the seventh century, leading to the
virtual extinction of the cities, or their reduction to fortified castra. While
this explanation has been disputed (see further below), a result of his work
has been to draw the attention of historians and archaeologists to the late
antique period at a wide range of sites . 16

Some sites clearly fell out of use in late antiquity — most obviously, those
such as the oracle at Claros, or the shrine of Leto at Xanthos, where the
whole focus of the place was on pagan religious activity. These develop-
ments were, however, paralleled by the growth of new Christian pilgrim-
age sites, which became the recipients of substantial patronage. Thus the
emperor Zeno provided a substantial new church for his local cult of St
Thecla near Seleuceia on the Calycadnus; the life and miracles of Thecla
were presented in a new Greek text of the same period. Justinian visited
the shrine of St Michael at Germia, whose church also probably dated

14 Important progress in the understanding and dating of such structures is being made by David
Winfield and Clive Foss; see Winfield and Foss (1987).

15 On the problems of peacekeeping in the Roman and later Roman period in Asia Minor see
Hopwood (1983) and (1989), with bibliography.

16 Foss’s general arguments were set out in two overview articles, Foss (1975) and (1977a), as well as
in studies of Ankara, Ephesus and Sardis. These and other articles are usefully reprinted in Foss (1 990).
For an update on the debate see Russell (1986), Whittow (1990) and Foss (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES

579

from the late fifth century, as does the great pilgrimage complex at Alahan.
These major centres received imperial patronage, and drew large numbers
of visitors . 17

The majority of cities continued to exist, but also changed internally.
Certain structures fell out of use, and spolia from such buildings were used
for new constructions. Most noticeably, of course, temples were aban-
doned; thus at Sagalassos one temple was used to make a tower in the
fortifications, and the temple of Antoninus Pius, the most impressive
building at Sagalassos, had its gables and cornices carefully removed and
stored in rows, in order to re-use the frieze blocks in other buildings. Some
temples were used as quarries for building materials over a considerable
period, as at Ephesus and Sardis; but from the early fifth century onwards
some abandoned temples were converted into Christian basilicas, as at
Aphrodisias, Pergamum and Sagalassos. These were not just lazy adapta-
tions of existing structures, but careful feats of engineering; at Sagalassos,
the blocks of the temple of Dionysus, re-used in a fifth-century basilica,
were apparently numbered during dismantling for easy reassembly. At
other sites churches were built over temples, as at Side. Elsewhere,
churches were established in imposing positions which did not necessarily
have significant associations, but were carefully chosen and prepared: thus
the basilica at Soloi was placed in a dominating position, requiring substan-
tial terracing . 18 Such imposing building programmes were matched by the
accumulation of treasures by churches, exemplified by the rich sixth-
century silver treasure found at Kumluca in Lycia . 19

Even more striking than the location of churches is the sheer quantity
of church buildings which can be dated to the fifth or sixth century: thus
at Anemurium four churches were built within the city, and at least five
more in the immediate vicinity; at Cremna a considerable number of basil-
icas were inserted into the residential area of the city. Churches appear in
unexpected places, such as the small church constructed in part of the
theatre at Side, presumably to commemorate martyrs who had died there;
this may be paralleled by the painting of Christian frescoes, perhaps in the
first half of the sixth century, in the corridor behind the stage of the theatre
at Aphrodisias. All these developments, of course, reflect the growing pres-
ence of Christianity, and are paralleled by the increasing status of the
bishops in civic society. The basilica at Curium, constructed in the first half
of the fifth century, was built with generous provision for catechumens and
a large baptistery, suggesting that mass conversions were under way at this
time. But building activity was not restricted to the Christian community;
the synagogue at Sardis was repaired and improved throughout the period,

17 For the fullest account of such a centre in Asia Minor see Gough (i 985); on its function see Mango
(1986) and (1991). 18 On the impact of such changes see Cormack (1990a).

19 See Boyd and Mango (1992), especially 1—88 and plates.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

580 21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

although less lavishly during the sixth century, and the synagogue at Side
was being repaired in the late fourth and early fifth century.

Although the great civic temples were disintegrating during the fifth
century, it is clear that pagan worship did continue in Asia Minor and
Cyprus throughout the period. The mentions of Christ and of Apollo on
the fifth-century mosaics of the house of Eustolius at Curium are par-
alleled by invocations of Aphrodite in inscriptions from Aphrodisias in the
late fifth century. It is rash to place too much weight on the use of pagan
imagery and language, when this was the normal means of expression for
all educated people. But at Aphrodisias we know of an avowedly pagan
circle, at least among the elite, who welcomed the pagan philosopher
Asclepiodotus of Alexandria when he came to settle there. Such people
might have been the owners of small pagan statuettes and two figures of
Egyptian divinities found in the excavation of a lavish house, probably of
the fifth century.

These discoveries might only suggest a taste for the old-fashioned at
Aphrodisias, but recent excavation has uncovered a striking series of
sculpted portraits of philosophers from the late fourth or fifth century in
a substantial and centrally-located building. This seems to confirm the evi-
dence that Aphrodisias was a centre for Neoplatonist teaching at this
period, where Asclepiodotus would have had a valuable contribution to
make. He and other philosophers travelled throughout the eastern
Mediterranean, and were concerned to keep alive the traditions of pagan
worship — thus Proclus, who originally came from Lycia but made his career
in Athens, visited Lydia, both to study and to encourage proper pagan relig-
ious practice there. Paganism could even have political significance: pagans
at Aphrodisias made sacrifices for the success of the revolt of Ulus in
Isauria. But perhaps more significant than this activity in the upper levels
of society is the fact that when John of Ephesus was working as a mission-
ary in the 540s, he could claim to have baptized 80,000 pagans in Asia,
Caria, Lydia and Phrygia; this suggests that in some cases cities with an
apparently ‘Christianized’ civic centre might be surrounded by a relatively
unaltered pagan countryside. 20

Even if a cultivated elite retained an interest in philosophy, however, the
old idea of a civic education for all the young men of a city seems to have
evaporated in the third century, and there seems to have been no further use
for the great gymnasia of antiquity, which were expensive to run. In at least
two abandoned gymnasia at Ephesus, churches were built. But the bath com-
plexes which were often associated with gymnasia stayed in use; thus at
Salamis-Constantia in the fifth century, while the ruins of the gymnasium

20 Lydia: Marinus, Life of Proclus 1 5, with Fowden (1990); Ulus: Zacharias of Mitylene, Life of Severus
40; John of Ephesus, Lives of the Eastern Saints ( PO xvm.681). For a discussion of paganism in Asia
Minor at this period see Trombley, Hellenic Religion 11.52— 133.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE CITIES

5 8l

were redeveloped, the baths were cleared of debris and put back into use, and
a similar redevelopment took place at Sardis. At Anemurium, the palaestra
was abandoned and built over by houses and shops; but two bath complexes
were maintained, and a third, smaller, one was built. It was apparently in the
early fifth century that Scholasticia restored the bath complex beside the
street of the Kuretes in the centre of Ephesus. Baths continued to be repaired
and maintained at many other sites, such as Aphrodisias, Didyma and
Oenoanda, where, as at Side, the aqueduct was also repaired in this period.
Theatres largely remained in use, although stadia tended to be altered; recent
excavations have revealed a church built into the substructure of the stadium
at Ephesus.

Along with these developments came the construction of new kinds of
buildings for new purposes. One new category was that of the residential
and administrative complexes required for the new church hierarchy; such
buildings are coming to be recognized at various sites, although they may
sometimes be hard to distinguish from the similar buildings which were
also constructed at about the same time for governors at provincial capi-
tals. These buildings themselves are also closely related to the large and
lavish private houses which were built or restored in many cities of Asia
Minor and Cyprus in this period, as for example Sardis, Aphrodisias or
Salamis; particularly striking are the houses at Paphos, which were richly
decorated with mosaics in the fifth century.

Parallel with the development of large private houses in this period was
the extensive building of shops and other small-scale (presumably private)
structures. A typical complex is that of the Byzantine shops at Sardis, con-
structed in the fifth century and destroyed in the seventh; even if they were
less formally organized than shops of the Roman period, they represented
new investment. There is considerable evidence for continuing and lively
trade in this period. This is brought most vividly alive by the inscriptions
from the cemetery at Korykos, in southern Asia Minor, where members of
a very large number of different trades recorded their professional status
on their tombstones; the interest of these texts — which appear to be largely
of the fifth century — is not just as evidence of economic activity, but also
as showing the importance of such activity to a man’s status in society. The
recent excavations at Sagalassos have uncovered an important centre for
the manufacture of pottery: ‘The position of at least ten kilns has been
identified. They range in date from the Late Hellenistic period to the early
sixth century a.d. The extent of the quarter makes it clear that Sagalassos
must have been a major production centre in Southern Turkey working for
an export market .’ 21 At several coastal settlements in Lycia granaries and
other storage facilities were being built in late antiquity . 22

21 Mitchell, Owens and Waelkens (1989) 74; cf. Waelkens (199$) 48. 22 Foss (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

5 8i

21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

Shifts in priorities produced another fundamental change in the appear-
ance of the cities during this period — the abandonment of a number of
public spaces. At Phaselis, probably in the fifth century, a large basilica —
almost certainly a church, but just possibly a secular building — was built in
the agora, in the middle of an open space; similarly, a large Christian basil-
ica was built in the centre of the agora at Iasos, perhaps in the sixth century.
It is easy to see that many of the functions of an agora — in civic self-gov-
ernment and pagan religion — may have been less relevant to this period,
while energetic commercial life still used the pattern of streets lined with
shops. This is exemplified at Ephesus, where the great open Staatsmarkt'AXC'i.
at the upper part of the site, which had been the centre of religious and
political life, was abandoned and occupied by small dwellings; spolia from
the public buildings there were used elsewhere on the site. But, during the
late fourth and early fifth century, the main streets in the lower, western,
part of the site were retained and even remodelled — most strikingly, the
great Arcadiane, leading from the theatre to the harbour, which was
equipped with street-lighting. Moreover, the agora in the lower town was
restored in the late fourth century, and remained in use — even if perhaps
only for commercial purposes.

In general, after a slack period in the early fourth century, the fifth and
the sixth century saw energetic building activity at many cities, such as Side,
Aphrodisias, Anemurium and the cities of Pamphylia and Pisidia. Recent
excavations at Amorium are uncovering a city which received new city
walls, and a new lease of life, principally under the emperor Zeno. At
Miletus, this surge of activity seems to have come even later: ‘Work has
demonstrated that, after a period of stagnation in the 4th and 5 th centuries
a.d., Miletus once again enjoyed a period of lively building activity in the
6th and 7th centuries.’ 23

One of the biggest changes in the late Roman period is the enormous
reduction in the number of inscriptions. As a result, we know less than we
would like about the government of these cities. But, after the end of the
fourth century, the traditional formulae naming the Council and People as
the governing entity disappear. Instead, works are undertaken by the
council, by local benefactors, or by the bishop of a city — reflecting devel-
opments in the legislation, where civic matters come increasingly to be
entrusted to bishops and local landowners. It is worth noting that this
change may be reflected in the archaeological record described above,
where church buildings, commercial activities and private houses invade
some of the previously civic spaces.

At many sites, as has been shown, new buildings used spolia from pre-
vious structures, now redundant; but this should not overshadow the

23 W Muller-Wiener in Mitchell (19 85) 85.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CITY AND COUNTRYSIDE

583

achievement of the civic governments in maintaining their splendour well
into the sixth century. At Aphrodisias, for example, when parts of the
colonnade of the so-called portico of Tiberius collapsed, apparently in the
sixth century, the western side was reconstructed by a single generous
donor, while several others contributed to the restoration of the south side.
Some of the architrave blocks had been damaged; they were carefully
replaced with blocks, several cut from spolia, which attempted to copy the
sculpture of the original monument.

V. CITY AND COUNTRYSIDE

Different, but undoubtedly related, changes can be detected in the archae-
ology of the countryside. As travel in the area has become easier, especially
since the Second World War, archaeologists have found more village sites
of the late Roman period. Many of these apparently started to develop in
the third century a.d., and flourished until the end of the sixth, some even
growing into cities.

This has provoked a debate which is far from being resolved: did such
settlements grow at the expense of the cities or in response to the prosper-
ity of the cities themselves? The evidence is still being uncovered, and is
not simple to evaluate; it also varies between regions. One of the first of
such surveys to be published was of the Troad, where a large number of
new village sites — some of which may have developed from villas — seem
to have been established in the late second or third century, and grew stead-
ily in size. ‘Roughly speaking, the fifth— sixth century would seem to be the
critical time in which the balance was being tipped from the cities to the
rural settlements . . . We have the impression that churches must have been
built in many places around the sixth century. On the archaeological evi-
dence we should consider that period to be one of the most flourishing in
the history of the Troad.’ Meanwhile, the ancient city of Ilion appears to
have been inhabited until the sixth century, when it was abandoned . 24 A
similar pattern is emerging from recent survey work in western Cyprus. But
the extent of rural survey in Asia Minor is still very limited, and our under-
standing is dangerously dependent on small amounts of undatable
material, and anecdotal evidence.

In Lycia, several village sites in the hills immediately behind the coast
showed important growth, and the first stone buildings at these sites —
some of them very impressive — were built in the fifth and sixth century.
But further inland, small towns were dwindling into rough settlements,
probably under pressure from brigandage. There is considerable debate as
to how this evidence should be interpreted; Martin Harrison detected a

24 Cook (1973) 369-73 (villages), 102 (Ilion).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

584

21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

retreat from the coastal cities to settlements in the immediate interior, while
Clive Foss sees the prosperity of these settlements as created by movement
towards the coast as the interior became less secure. One enigmatic site is
that of Arycanda, an ancient settlement in one of the Lycian valleys; there
the city remained in good repair into the sixth century, but during the fifth
century a fortified town was established on the adjoining hill (at Arif),
which coexisted for some time with the earlier city before the latter was
abandoned at the end of the sixth century. 25

Moreover, the countryside was being fundamentally altered by the
spread of monasticism; monastic communities were spreading into rural
and perhaps into undercultivated land. Many of the impressive monaster-
ies which developed all over Asia Minor at this period will have been built
on the property of rich landowners, as in the case of the communities
founded by the family of Basil of Caesarea. The monastery of Holy Sion
in Lycia seems to have been set up by a rich local benefactor, apparently on
family land, in the first half of the sixth century, and the Life of Nicholas of
Sion records the saintly life of its first hegumen , the nephew of the founder.
But monastic foundations were also established by humbler patrons, and
yet other communities evolved around the activities of a holy man, such as
that which developed around Theodore of Sykeon.

The development of a monastic centre would seem to have provided a
new focus for the local rural communities; during the plague and famine of
the 540s Nicholas went round the villages in the area, providing food. In
the account of his life, the nearest city, Myra, which was also the provincial
capital, appears as relatively unimportant; the mission of the saint takes
place in a well-populated countryside, confirming in the descriptions the
archaeological evidence, mentioned above, for rural buildings in fifth- and
sixth-century Lycia. Similarly, in the world of Theodore of Sykeon cities
play no important role, but, like Nicholas, he has extensive dealings with
village communities. In both Lives it is made clear that there is tension
between the city-dwellers and the country communities: in the Life of
Nicholas the inhabitants of Myra accused Nicholas of encouraging country
farmers to cut off supplies during the Justinianic plague. Later in the sixth
century, Theodore of Sykeon was forced to resign the position of bishop
of Anastasiopolis, apparently because he was accused of encouraging peas-
ants on church property to resist unfair demands for rent.

All this evidence waits to be explained; it may be that the country settle-
ments grew to the detriment of the cities, but this may be too simple an
explanation, since there was not necessarily a clear divide between town

25 Arycanda/Arif: Harrison and Lawson (1979). For a very lucid summary of work on Lycia, with a
useful bibliography, see Foss (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE END OF THE CIVIC ERA

585

and country in antiquity: one way of understanding the raison d’etre of many
of the cities which acquired substantial public buildings in the second and
third century is to see them as the monumental civic centres for groups of
villages. Equally, the owners of the country estates are likely to be the same
people as the rich residents of the city houses — and also, perhaps, the sen-
ators of the Constantinople senate.

Such landowners had always been concerned to defend their property,
and it has been mentioned above that local security seems to have been an
increasing problem; an inscription recently found in Paphlagonia, together
with laws in the imperial codes, shows that the imperial government was
very concerned to control the development of private militias by landown-
ers . 26 In such circumstances, imperial office could be used to provide legit-
imacy for the status quo. The new power structure may be illustrated by the
career of Marthanes, a Cilician landowner who was appointed by Justinian
with imperial authority to keep the peace in his own province of Cilicia —
an appointment which broke all the earlier regulations preventing the
appointment of local citizens to such office, and enabled Marthanes to
exercise tyrannical power. Similarly, but less dramatically, a governor of the
late fifth or early sixth century at Aphrodisias, Vitianus, was honoured there
as being a local citizen. It seems likely that the ruling class of the provinces
were now in a position to use imperial office to reinforce their control, and
had less and less need of the old civic political system.

VI. THE END OF THE CIVIC ERA

Recent research has shown, at site after site, that buildings fell out of use,
and settlements contracted, in the late sixth or early seventh century.
Considerable energy and acrimony have gone into discussions of the
exact date and the causes of this change. It may be that this question, like
others discussed here, cannot yet admit of solution — or of the same solu-
tion for every site. The most striking phenomenon is the building of new
fortification walls at many sites, protecting a far smaller part of the town
than before (see above); unfortunately, such fortifications are often pecu-
liarly hard to date closely. At Sagalassos, the centre for the manufacture
of pottery which had flourished for several centuries came to an end in
the early sixth century, and no material later than the early sixth century
has been found on the site. For whatever reason, it was apparently at
about this time that the inhabitants moved to the neighbouring site of
Aglasun, where a small settlement developed, preserving the name of the
older city. At Paphos, the ‘House of Theseus’ was probably abandoned in

26 Feissel (1985); Just. Ed. 8, Nov. 29, 30.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

586 21 a. ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

die late sixth century; similarly, a substantial town house at Sardis, which
appears to have been developed and extended until the end of the fifth
century, seems gradually to have fallen out of use during the sixth. At
Anemurium, buildings apparently fell into disuse — even churches, built in
die preceding centuries, and baths, which had been maintained since
Roman times — at a date around 5 80. While not all such changes can be
closely dated, several can be shown to have occurred before the uphea-
vals of the early seventh century.

From 603, for twenty years, the Persians dominated the east and made
several raids into Asia Minor; from 610 onwards, Asia Minor was also the
base of operations for Heraclius and his army. Those areas, such as Cyprus,
which were not the centres of military activity were affected by a steady
flow of displaced persons — such as John the Almsgiver, patriarch of
Alexandria, who fled home to his native Cyprus in 619. There can be no
doubt as to the debilitating effect of this long campaign. The advance of
the Arabs in the 630s brought new pressures. We have a particularly dra-
matic account of what was to follow in an inscription found in the basilica
at Soloi, recording the Arab invasions of 649 and 650, when it is claimed
that 120,000 and 50,000 prisoners were carried off; but it must also be
pointed out that the inscription was set up, in a newly restored basilica, by
655. Such explicit evidence is, however, exceptional, and much is left for us
to deduce.

For a thousand years in Asia Minor, Graeco-Roman life was concen-
trated on cities; even for the many who lived in the country, almost all lived
within the orbit of a city, and probably went there at least once a year, to
participate in the religious festivals which were part of the self-definition
of such communities. During the third century a.d., civic life altered — as
is most drastically illustrated by the diminution in inscriptions — and it
appears that the relative importance of rural communities began to grow;
the spread of the new, universal religion of Christianity offered such com-
munities an opportunity to establish religious centres equivalent to those
found in the cities. Cities continued to provide an important economic and
social function, not least as the seat of the bishops; but it is clear that, at
some sites, such activity was dwindling even during the sixth century. 27 The
cataclysms, firstly, of the plague in the mid sixth century, and of the wars
of the early seventh, seems to have speeded up this process. But in some
senses, perhaps, it did not matter as much as may appear. Asia Minor was
to continue to be the power-house of the empire based in Constantinople
for another five hundred years. The institutions which withered in the late
sixth century or the early seventh were no longer important. The rural

27 See Brandes (1988). On this process throughout the empire see ch. 8 (Liebeschuetz), pp. 209—10
above.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE END OF THE CIVIC ERA 587

society which had always been essential to the cities now made a different
use of them; some were abandoned, but many survived as places of refuge
and small-scale trade centres, although no longer as the focus for public
display or political interaction. What had ended was the ‘civic’ period of the
polis as a political and social entity; the details of that transformation will
continue to be illuminated by further archaeological discoveries in Asia
Minor and Cyprus.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 2 lb

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

HUGH KENNEDY

The eastern seaboard of the Mediterranean and its hinterland comprised
some of the richest areas of the eastern Roman empire in late antiquity.
Geographically, the area is most easily understood as a series of different
climatic zones running north— south. Along the Mediterranean seaboard
there is a well-watered strip which provides rich agricultural lands. In the
north, this belt is comparatively narrow where the mountains of Syria and
Phoenica Maritima come down almost to the sea. Only in a few places, like
the vicinity of Antioch and inland from Tripolis, are there extensive fertile
plains. In Palestine the fertile area becomes more extensive, though increas-
ingly arid in the south. The mountains themselves vary greatly in character.
In Syria II the mountains along the coast are poor and sparsely inhabited,
and further south the high summits of Phoenicia Maritima form an
effective barrier between coastal cities like Berytus and inland Damascus.
In Palestine, on the other hand, the hills are gentler and more densely
settled with villages and towns, including Jerusalem.

Inland, the rift valley runs all the way north— south from Syria I to
Palestine III. In the north, where the Orontes flows through it, the rift
valley is bordered on the east by the limestone massifs — rounded, rocky
hills which supported intensive settlement in late antiquity. Further south,
both the Biqa valley around Heliopolis (Baalbek) and the Jordan valley
were well populated and included such important cities as Tiberias and
Scythopolis (Baysan, Bet She’an). Even in the arid lands of the Wadi
'Araba south of the Dead Sea, the Byzantine period saw important settle-
ments.

East of the rift valley, there is a belt of watered fertile land which
includes such populated areas as the Auranitis (Hawran) around Bostra and
the hills of Moab. The eastern frontier of this land is represented by the
200 mm isohyet (the limits of the area with an annual rainfall of 200 mm)
which marks the furthest boundary of settled agriculture. This line bulges
eastward to include the Hauran in the south, and in the north extends as
far as the Euphrates. Here the grain-growing plains of Euphratensis,
Osrhoene and Mesopotamia, between the anti-Taurus to the north and the
Syrian desert to the south, supported numerous towns and villages. This

588

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

589

area was, however, sadly exposed to attacks from the east; no natural
barriers separated it from the lands of the Persian empire, and its exposure
always meant that the towns and villages of this area suffered badly in any
hostilities between the two empires.

The people of these areas were separated into distinct but mingling
groups, divided by language into Greek, Syriac (a north Syrian and
Mesopotamian version of the Aramaic lingua franca of the ancient near
east which also developed as a literary language) and Arabic speakers. The
division was partly a geographical one: on the whole, Greek was spoken in
the settlements along the Mediterranean coast, whereas Syriac was wide-
spread in the hinterland, especially in Syria and the north-eastern provinces.
The division was partly social as well, the inhabitants of large towns
tending to speak Greek while Syriac was the language of the villages.
Having said that, it is clear that Syriac was also spoken in towns, and we find
examples of people with clearly Semitic names erecting inscriptions in
Greek . 1 Arabic remained essentially the language of the nomads and those
along the fringes of the desert, though it seems to have been expanding by
the end of the sixth century . 2

There were also important Jewish communities in many of the main
cities like Antioch and Edessa in antiquity, but little is known of their
history in the later fifth and sixth century . 3 They were also to be found in
the small villages and towns of Galilee, the Golan (Gaulanitis) and parts of
southern Palestine. Historical narratives and religious polemic tell of per-
secution and rebellion, but the archaeological record gives a more positive
picture. True, ‘the numbers of churches in the Land of Israel constructed
during this period is close to three hundred whereas only a few score syn-
agogues were built at that time ’, 4 but good-quality buildings continued to
be constructed throughout, with activity peaking in the late third and early
fourth century, and again during the sixth. Many of these were in small
country towns and villages, suggesting the survival of numerous Jewish
communities in quiet rural prosperity . 5

1 See Sartre (1985) 142—9 and the ‘index onomastique’, 165—276 for numerous examples; also
MacAdam (1986) 101—46.

2 For the settlement of Arabs in the villages of Syria along the fringes of the desert and the
Damascus area after the break-up of the Ghassanid federation in 581, see Sartre (1982) 19 1—2; for a
more general account of the Arab presence in Syria in the early seventh century, Donner (1981) 101— 1 1;
for Arab expansion in Iraq in the sixth century, Morony (1984) 214—23. Further, ch. 2 zc (Conrad), p. 691
below, and in general Shahid (1995).

3 For the meagre evidence for Jewish life in Antioch, Downey (1961) 571; in Edessa, Segal (1970)
103—4. Sartre (1985) 158—9 found no evidence of Jews in Bostra after the early fifth century, and the
same seems to be true of Scythopolis: see Binns (1994) 135—7; f° r Caesarea, Levine (1985) 135—9.
Further, Cameron (1996).

4 Hachlili (1988) 370, 399—400. For a general survey of the synagogues in Palestine, Levine (1981),

which concentrates on archaeological and artistic aspects; the most recent discussion is Urman and
Flesher (1995). 5 See, for example, the communities of the Golan described in Urman (1985).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

590 2lA SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

The Samaritans 6 comprised a much smaller minority, concentrated in the
area around Neopolis (Nablus) and the site of their ancient temple at Mt
Gerazim. In the third century, under the leadership of Baba Rabba, they
had experienced a period of prosperity and religious revival but, like the
Jews, they found the Christian empire of the late fifth and sixth century
increasingly oppressive.

Syria in late antiquity, or at least until the mid sixth century, enjoyed
something of a golden age. True, there were famines and riots, and the lot
of the peasantry was frequently one of toil and indebtedness, but it was
also a period of comparative peace and prosperity and considerable
achievement in intellectual and architectural matters. And if you were to be
asked which part of the ancient world you would like to live in as a peasant,
you could do worse than opt for one of the villages by the great monastery
of St Symeon Stylites, in the northern Syrian hills between Antioch and
Aleppo, in the reign of Anastasius (491—518).

The administrative geography of the area was essentially that of
Diocletian’s reforms, with some later alterations. The whole area was
included within the diocese of Oriens, and the comes Orientis, based at
Antioch, was in theory the leading figure in the civil administration, but by
the sixth century his office was often united with that of the governor of
Syria I, and the provinces were more or less autonomous. The area under
discussion was divided into a number of provinces. From north to south
along the eastern shore of the Mediterranean was Syria I, with its metrop-
olis at Antioch. In about 425, in the reign of Theodosius II, Syria had been
divided and Syria II established with its capital at Apamea, though this was
sometimes subordinate to Syria I. In about 529, for reasons which are not
clear, Justinian arranged a further division when he created a new small
province of Theodorias with its capital at Laodicea (Lattakia) which incor-
porated the small coastal towns of Paltos Gabala (Jeble) and Balaneai
(Banyas) in Syria I and Syrian II. 7

Further south were the two Phoenicias, Phoenicia Maritima (metropolis
Tyre) and, inland from that, Phoenica Libanensis, the capital of which was
Damascus and which stretched far to the east to include Palmyra (Tadmur)
in the heart of the Syrian desert.

From about 425 onwards, Palestine was divided into three provinces,
Palestine I, the metropolis of which was Caesarea and which included most
of the coastal lands as well as Jerusalem and Judaea, and Palestine II, which
was ruled from Scythopolis in the Jordan valley and which covered Galilee
and the Golan. In the south, Palestine III stretched from the Mediterranean
around Gaza eastwards to include the Negev, the southern rift valley and
the hills of Edom. In theory, the capital was at remote Petra but, in prac-

6 There is little recent discussion of the Samaritans in late antiquity but see Crown, Pummer and Tal
(1993); for Samaritan revolts see pp. 593 and 598 below. 7 Malalas p. 448 Bonn.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 5 9 1

tice, Elusa in the Negev seems to have been the most important centre in
the fifth and sixth century. 8 The province of Arabia, originally established
by Trajan in 106, had been truncated in the south by the creation of
Palestine III. 9 Bostra remained the capital in late antiquity, but the province

8 See Gutwein (1981).

9 The borders of the province in late antiquity are discussed in Sartre (1982) 64—75.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

592 lib. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

only included the southern Hauran, the hilly area around Gerasa (Jerash)
and Philadelphia (Amman), and the mountains of Moab.

Inland from Syria I lay Euphratensis along the west bank of the great
river which gave it its name. Its capital was the ancient cult centre of
Hierapolis (Manbij). Across the river lay Osrhoene, centred on Edessa
(Urfa), and to the north of that on the southern fringes of Armenia lay
Mesopotamia with its metropolis of Amida (Diyarbakir).

The eastern frontiers of the empire were undefined in many years. The
northernmost section of frontier, as it had been determined by Jovian’s
treaty of 363 with the Persians, ran from the upper Tigris in a generally
south-easterly direction along the flanks of Mount Izala (the Tur Abdin) in
such a way that the mountains were in Byzantine hands while the plains
belonged to the Persians. Here the boundary was well known, and at two
points Byzantine fortifications directly confronted Persian ones. The first
of these was where the fort of Rhabdion overlooks Persian Sisauranon,
just five kilometres away, and the second some seventy kilometres to the
west, where Dara was placed to observe movement westward from Nisibis
(N us ay bin). 10

Further south, where lack of water meant that large armies could not be
maintained, there was no frontier as such, but we can trace the most east-
erly outposts of Byzantine control. On the Euphrates, at its junction with
the Khabur, Circesium was the most advanced Byzantine outpost, while
the Sasanians held Dura Europas, which Shapur had taken in 256. Further
defence was provided by fortifications at Birtha (Halebiye) and Callinicum.
Across the Syrian desert the frontier was unmarked, but the Byzantines
controlled the outposts on Strata Diocletiana, which ran south from
Callinicum through Sergiopolis to Palmyra, and then south-west to
Damascus, though it is unlikely that all these outposts were garrisoned in
the sixth century, when responsibility for security passed into the hands of
the Ghassanids after about 5 30. South of Damascus, the eastern frontiers
of Byzantine control marched with the limits of the settled lands as far
south as Aila (‘Aqaba) on the Red Sea. The frontier forts which had been
constructed on such sites as Lejjun were mostly abandoned by the sixth
century, and the Byzantine empire was defended by diplomacy and subsidy
rather than force of arms in this area. 11

The overall command of the armies in the east was entrusted to the magis-
ter militum per Orientem, who was based in Antioch, where he had his praetor-
ium. There were duces to command the local forces, although it is not clear

10 For the frontier in this area see Whitby (19 86) and Whitby Maurice 197— 213; also Palmer (1990)
4—6.

11 For the Ghassanids see Sartre (1982) 177—88 and Shahid (1995). The disbanding of the limitanei is
claimed by Procopius ( Anecdota xxiv.12— 14) and some would see the archaeological evidence as
confirming this; see Parker (1986); for evidence of the decay of the fortress at Lejjun in the mid sixth
century, Parker et al. (1987). Sartre (1982) 195—6 notes the almost total absence of fortifications in the
Negev in the early seventh century.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

593

that every province had one, and in 528 additional duces were established at
Circesium in Mesopotamia and Palmyra in Phoenicia Libanensis to defend
obvious invasion routes. As in other areas of late Roman administration, the
hierarchies and responsibilities were not rigidly adhered to. The emperor
communicated directly with provincial governors and duces, and on occasion
the magister militum constructed buildings in Antioch, while the comes Orientis
was put in charge of the development and garrisoning of Palmyra. One comes
Orientis , Ephraemius, even became patriarch in 527. Justinian seems to have
been concerned to maintain the status of the civilian governors vis-a-vis the
duces, and in 535—6 the governor of Palestine I became a proconsul and those
of Arabia and Phoenicia Libanensis were honoured with the new title of
moderator. It is likely that the regular succession of officials continued at least
until the Persian invasions of the early seventh century, but the evidence for
this is very scanty and, for example, we do not know the name of any of the
duces of the province of Arabia after Flavius Paulus in 5 80. 12

The degree of military preparedness seems to have varied from time to
time and place to place. Those provinces which directly bordered on the
Persian empire — Mesopotamia, Osrhoene and Euphratensis — must have
had permanent garrisons of numeri of the imperial army, at such strong
points as Amida, Edessa and Circesium. Palmyra was garrisoned by numeri
early in Justinian’s reign. In the sixth century, major fortifications were built
at strategic places on the Persian frontier and the remains of these can still
be seen at Dara, Birtha on the Euphrates and Sergiopolis. 13

Other areas seem to have had few regular troops: in the major Persian
invasion of 5 40, Hierapolis, Beroea (Aleppo) and Apamea all paid ransoms
to the invaders, having, it would appear, insufficient garrisons to defend
them. Antioch, faced by the same invasion, was poorly defended and was
dependent on 6,000 troops hurriedly summoned from Lebanon and on
volunteers from within the city. Their combined efforts could not save it
from the horrors of pillage and mass deportations. 14 The governors and
duces of Scythopolis and Caesarea seem to have been equally ill- prepared to
face the Samaritan revolts of 529 and 5 5 6, and it is said that, after the rebel-
lion of 529, the governor of Scythopolis, Bassus, was executed and the dux
Theodoros removed from office and put under arrest. 15

The ecclesiastical administration echoed the civilian one. At the start of
the period, all the churches in the area were subordinate to the patriarch of
Antioch, just as the secular administration was presided over by the comes
Orientis. In each province, the church was governed by a metropolitan
based in the capital and bishops in all the main towns. 16 At the Council of

12 Sartre (1982) 108—12 discusses the evidence for the sixth-century governors of Arabia.

13 On Dara: Whitby (1986b) and the comments in Cameron, Procopius 107—8; on Zenobia: Lauffray
(1983); on Rusafa: Karnapp (1976).

14 See Procop. Wars n and Downey (1961) 533—46; Liebeschuetz (1977) and Cameron, Procopius

152—70. 15 Malalas pp. 445— 7 Bonn. 16 These structures are detailed in Devreesse (1945).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

594

lib. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

Chalcedon in 451, however, this tidy system was disrupted when Jerusalem
became an independent patriarchate presiding over the bishops of the
three Palestinian provinces, including the metropolitan of Caesarea, who
had previously been his superior. 17 When Theodorias was made into a sep-
arate province by Justinian, it did not acquire a separate ecclesiastical iden-
tity, and the bishop of Laodicea remained subordinate to Antioch.

A further and more serious confusion in the ecclesiastical organization
was the establishment of an alternative and parallel hierarchy in the patri-
archate of Antioch in the wake of the Monophysite schism. This rival hier-
archy was largely a result of the missionary efforts of the Monophysite
Jacob Baradaeus — hence the designation of the Syrian Monophysite
church as Jacobite. Originally under the patronage of the empress
Theodora, Jacob travelled extensively in the provinces of Syria and Asia
Minor between 542 and 578 consecrating metropolitans, bishops and
priests. This rival hierarchy took the established ecclesiastical titles, includ-
ing that of patriarch of Antioch, but they were seldom able to reside in the
cities from which they took their titles. Many of them were monks from
rural monasteries in Syria and Mesopotamia and lived either in their mon-
asteries or as wandering preachers. 18 The Monophysite hierarchy was also
supported by the Ghassanids, and in the province of Arabia there were two
bishops of Bostra, a Chalcedonian one in the city and a Monophysite one
in the Ghassanid encampments. 19 Despite intermittent attempts at com-
promise, the divisions hardened in the late sixth and early seventh century,
and the great majority of Syriac-speaking monasteries and villages
remained loyal to the Jacobite patriarch, based on the monastery of Gubba
Barraya, east of Aleppo. Although there is no evidence that the
Monophysite populations aided or encouraged the Persian invasion of 61 1
which swept away the Byzantine political structures, the Jacobite patriarch
of Antioch wrote to his colleague in Alexandria: ‘The world rejoiced in
peace and love, because the Chalcedonian night has been chased away.’ 20

Only once did these provinces and their armies play a major role in the
making and unmaking of emperors. Zeno came from neighbouring Isauria
and served as magister militum per Orientem before ascending the imperial
throne in 474. In 482—4 the rival Isaurian leader Ulus made Antioch his base
in an attempt to put Leontius on the imperial throne. Although his claims
were accepted in the city, his troops were easily defeated, and he fled to his
native Isauria, where he was eventually lulled in 488. Apart from this

17 On the status of Jerusalem in this period see Honigmann (1950); before Chalcedon: ibid. 238,
245—6. 18 See Honigmann (1954), a study of one important monastery.

19 Honigmann (1951); see also Meyendorff (1989) 229—30 and 266—71; ch. 27 (Allen), pp. 824—33
below. For Bostra: Sartre (1985) no— 12.

20 Severus b. al-Muqaffa’, History of the Patriarchs ed. and trans. Evett (PO 1 (1907) 481), quoted by
Meyendorff in his discussion of this period (1989) 270—1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

595

episode, which may suggest that Syria was not a viable power base, the
political history of this area is restricted to the comings and goings of the
conrites Orientis in Antioch, occasional urban riots and the sporadic rebel-
lions of the Jews and Samaritans in Palestine.

The main threat to the peace and stability of this area between 425 and
600 was from Persian invasions. Persian armies never used the direct desert
crossing to Palestine or Arabia but always attacked through the settled areas
of Euphratensis, Osrhoene and Mesopotamia, and it was these areas, along
with Syria I and II, which bore the brunt of the invasions. After a long
period of peace, hostilities broke out in 502—3 when Kavadh attacked and
captured Amida, slaughtering a large number of its citizens, and went on
to besiege Edessa and ravage the surrounding country. The casus belli in this
instance was that the emperor Anastasius had, from 483, refused to con-
tinue the subsidy previously paid to the Persians for the defence of the
Caucasus passes on the grounds that the Persians had refused to return
Nisibis, which they claimed had been ceded to them by Jovian in 363 for
1 20 years. In 503 and 504 large Roman armies counter-attacked, and Amida
was restored to imperial control. 21 In 505 a seven-year truce was signed, and
Anastasius began the building of the great fortress at Dara, later improved
by Justinian, immediately across the frontier from Nisibis.

Hostilities broke out again in the Caucasus in 527 at the end of the reign
of Justin I and spread to Mesopotamia, where the then magister militum per
Orientem, Belisarius was defeated at Callinicum in 531. The fighting was
ended by the death of Kavadh and the accession of Khusro I Anushirvan
in 532, and a peace agreement by which the Romans paid a lump sum in
commutation of the subsidy. This peace lasted until 540, when Khusro,
attracted by the weakened defences of the eastern frontier while Justinian’s
efforts were directed to the west, invaded again, apparently more interested
in money than in conquest. Most of the cities, including the provincial cap-
itals of Edessa, Hierapolis and Apamea, duly paid, but as a result of impe-
rial promises of military support and divided counsels within the city (it
seems that the patriarch Ephraemius wanted to agree to peace but was pre-
vented by commissioners sent by Justinian) Antioch attempted to resist.
The result was the most serious military disaster to afflict Syria in this
period. Antioch fell, the city was burned and large numbers of its inhabi-
tants forcibly resettled in Iraq.

After this catastrophe, hostilities soon petered out, and there is no sign
that Khusro sought to make permanent conquests. The outbreak of plague
in the Roman east in 542 and the successful defence of Edessa by Roman
forces in 544 resulted in a truce in 545 in which Justinian again agreed to a

21 Malalas pp. 3 98— 9 Bonn; for a full and vivid narrative of these campaigns W Wright, The Chronicle
of Joshua the Sty lite (London 1882) caps, xlviii— Ixxxi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

596 21 b. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

substantial cash payment. This peace lasted until 572, when the Romans
attempted to take advantage of perceived Persian weakness in Armenia and
Nisibis, and open warfare again broke out. Unfortunately, the Romans
underestimated their opponents’ strength, and Khusro retaliated in 573 by
raiding and sacking Apamea, the capital of Syria II. 22 In the same year, the
Persians also took the key frontier fortress of Dara. Hostilities dragged on
for some twenty years after this, even during the years of truce from 574 to
578. In 591, however, Khusro II was obliged to ask Maurice for help in
recovering his throne and was happy to return Dara and Martyropolis,
which had been handed over to the Persians by treachery. 23

The close of the sixth century saw the frontier very much as it had been
in 425. The Romans were in control of Dara but never regained Nisibis.
The Persian wars had been a burden on the central treasury but, apart from
a few major disasters — Amida in 503, Antioch in 540, and Dara and
Apamea in 573 — and intermittent ravaging of the countryside of Osrhoene
and Mesopotamia, they do not seem to have caused major damage to the
provinces and there were many years of uninterrupted peace.

The only other external threat came from the desert. The desert fron-
tiers of Syria and Palestine were very difficult to defend: frontier forts were
easily bypassed by swiftly moving bands of bedouin raiders. From the fifth
century onwards, the imperial authorities had realized that it was important
to secure bedouin allies and increasingly turned to diplomacy and subsidy
as a cheaper and more effective way of defending the settled areas than mil-
itary force. From the end of the fourth century, the leaders of the tribe of
Salih seem to have been recognized as phylarchs or managers of the Arab
tribes allied to the empire. 24 At the end of the fifth century, the Sallhid phy-
larchy, about which we have very little information, was challenged by the
arrival of two new tribes in the area, Kinda and Ghassan. In 491 Emesa
(Homs) was sacked by the Arabs and in 498 Ghassan raided Palestine and,
although they were defeated by the dux Romanos, they continued to pose
a threat. Probably in 503, Salih were replaced as phylarchs by the chiefs of
Ghassan and Kinda. From 503 to 528 it seems as if each province had its
phylarch working alongside the dux, and in 529 the dux of Palestine was
assisted by the phylarch of the province in the suppression of the
Samaritan revolt.

In 5 3 1 Justinian recognized al-Harith b. Jabala the Ghassanid as chief
phylarch, in overall charge of the defence of the frontier between the
Euphrates and the Red Sea, probably to give him power and status equal to

22 The sack is described by John of Ephesus, HE (ed. with Latin trans. E. W. Brooks, CSCO , Scriptores
Syri 54 (Louvain 1952)), vi.6. The wealth and importance of Apamea in this period have been confirmed
by recent excavations, on which see Baity (1981).

23 See Whitby, Maurice 276—304 for a full account of the Persian wars of this period.

24 On Salih: Sartre (1982) 146—9, 153—62, and Kawar (1958); Shahid (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

597

the Lakhmid kings of al-HIra, who performed a similar role on the desert
frontiers of the Persian empire. For fifty years the Ghassanids more or less
kept the peace on the desert frontier, defeated the Lakhmids of al-HIra
(notably at Halima near Chalcis in 5 51), and formed an important contin-
gent in Byzantine armies fighting the Persians, as at Callinicum in 531. When
al-Harith died in 5 69, he was succeeded by his son al-Mundhir. In 5 8 1 the
emperor Tiberius ordered the arrest of the phylarch al-Mundhir b. al-Harith
because he feared the Monophysite sympathies of the Ghassanids and their
general unreliability. The Ghassanid system collapsed, and in 5 83 their sup-
porters attacked Bostra, the capital of Arabia, and ravaged the surrounding
area. 25 The defences of the desert frontier were left in disarray, and tribes
which had followed them dispersed. The Byzantines still retained allies
among the bedouin, some of whom, like the Judham of southern Jordan,
fought vigorously against the first Muslim incursions. Members of the
Ghassanid ruling house fought in the armies of the empire at the battle of
the Yarmuk in 636, but there can be no doubt that the disappearance of the
Ghassanid system was one reason why Muslim forces were able to penetrate
Byzantine Syria so effectively from 632 on. 26

While the politics of the area were comparatively placid, the same cannot be
said of the religious history. The area was the birthplace of Christianity, its
bishoprics were amongst the oldest Chritian institutions in the empire, and
its monasteries and ascetics were rivalled only by those in Egypt. By 425 the
majority of the towns were at least nominally Christian, the public perfor-
mance of pagan rites had been outlawed and some of the major temples
destroyed. 27 Pagan cults persisted with considerable vigour in some places,
notably at Carrhae (Harran), right through the period. 28 In Edessa, in many
ways the spiritual centre of Syriac Christianity, sacrifices were still being
made to Zeus at the end of the sixth century. The magister militum per Orientem
Ulus promised to restore pagan cults during his rebellion against the emperor
Zeno (481—8), and this attracted some support, though it is not clear
how widespread this was. 29 John of Ephesus says that the Christians of
Heliopolis were a small and oppressed minority and that when an imperial
agent came to put an end to the persecution they were suffering, he uncov-
ered a pagan network in which the vicarius of Edessa and the patriarch of
Antioch, no less, were alleged to have been implicated. 3 " In the countryside,

25 John Eph. HE m.40— 5, 56; Sartre (1982) 189—94; Shahid (1995) (a different view).

26 For the situation at the time of the Muslim conquests, Kaegi (1992) 52—5; in general, Shahid
(1995), with ch. 22 c (Conrad), pp. 695—700 below.

27 For the destruction of the temple of Zeus at Apamea ( c . 390) and the Marneion at Gaza in 402
see Trombley, Hellenic Religion 1. 1 2 3—9 and 1. 1 87—24 5 .

28 For Harran, where the pagan cult is well attested from Islamic times, see Green (1992). For the

cults of Syria in general: Drijvers (1982). 29 Trombley, Hellenic Religion 81—4, 93—4.

30 John Eph. HE 111.27— 34; see Bowersock, Hellenism 35—40.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

598 21 b. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

too, paganism persisted, especially in remote areas: the Christianization of
the limestone massif east of Antioch was largely complete by 420, whereas
pagan cults survived in the rural Hauran until the late sixth century. 31

In the late fifth and sixth century, tensions between the Jewish and
Samaritan communities in Palestine and the Christian authorities seem to
have been increasing. The Samaritans had not traditionally been militant
but, apparently because of Christian attempts to remove sacred relics from
Joseph’s tomb, they raised a revolt in 484. Churches which had been built
on their sacred Mt Gerazim and in Neapolis were destroyed, and they
crowned one Justus or Justasas as their king. Caesarea was taken, many
Christians were killed and Justasas celebrated victory games, but their
success was short-lived. Troops sent by the emperor Zeno put down the
rebellion, and Justasas was executed. In 529 there was another revolt. In
June communal riots between Samaritans, Christians and Jews broke out in
Scythopolis, and many parts of the city were burned by the Samaritans (at
least, according to the account of the Christian chronicler Malalas). 32
Fearing the emperor’s wrath, the Samaritans broke into open rebellion.
Again they crowned a king/messiah called Julian, churches were burned
and the provincial capital of Scythopolis taken and held. When Justinian
reasserted Byzantine control, large numbers of Samaritans were lulled, and
the Ghassanid phylarch is said to have taken 20,000 boys and girls and sold
them in Persia and India (probably, in fact, south Arabia or Ethiopia) as
slaves. Malalas alleges that there were 50,000 Samaritan exiles at the Persian
court who encouraged Kavadh to invade Byzantine territory, promising to
hand over their own land, all Palestine and the holy places. There may well
be no truth in these accusations, but they illustrate the kinds of inter-com-
munal tensions which could arise in the sixth century.

On the whole, the Jews were more passive, even in the face of the
increasingly hostile legislation of Justinian, but there are signs of growing
militancy in the late sixth century. In 5 5 6 Samaritans and Jews allegedly took
advantage of trouble between the Greens and the Blues in Caesarea to
attack the Christians, and succeeded in killing the governor and storming
his palace/” There are a number of reports which claim that the Jews joined
the Persians in attacking the Christians in the invasion of 614. However,
recent scholarship has shown that the evidence for this is based almost
entirely on Christian polemical writing of the early Islamic period and has
more to do with explaining Christian defeat than with historical accuracy. 34

In contrast to the comparative tranquillity of political life, church life in
this area was always vigorous and was marked by passionate disputes. 35 The

31 Trombley, Hellenic Religion 34—5. 32 Malalas pp. 445—7 Bonn; cf. Binns (1994) 138—9.

33 Malalas pp. 487— 8 Bonn. 34 See Cameron (1994) and (1996); Schick (1995).

35 For full accounts, Frend, Monophysite Movement, Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 165—292; and ch. 27
(Allen), pp. 824-8 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

599

theological issues raised by the Monophysite controversy are discussed
elsewhere in this volume (see pp. 818—3 3 below), and it is the political and
social dimensions which are to be addressed here. The Monophysite con-
troversy affected all the churches of the empire in one way or another, but
nowhere else did it cause such violent dispute as in the patriarchate of
Antioch, because here it became associated with other social and cultural
divisions which aroused popular passions.

The dispute over the definition of orthodoxy accepted by the Council
of Chalcedon in 451 expressed deep divisions over the understanding of
the central Christian mystery of the incarnation. The contrast between the
full humanity of Christ stressed by the Dyophysites (who of course
accepted his divine nature as well) contrasted with the emphasis on the
single, divine nature of Christ upheld by the Monophysites.

There was also something of a linguistic divide. Monophysite doctrines
were espoused and expounded in the main by Syriac speakers and writers.
Even in the case of Monophysite thinkers fully educated in the Greek tra-
dition, like Severus of Antioch (d. 538), their writings have survived in
Syriac versions. Others, like Severus’ radical ally, Philoxenus of ffierapolis
(d. 523), and the historian John of Ephesus, wrote only in Syriac. In general,
Chalcedonian Christianity found its popular support in the cities and
among the Greek-speaking elite, especially within the ambit of the patriar-
chate of Jerusalem, while the Syriac-speaking small towns and villages,
away from the coast and towards the Persian frontier, were more solidly
Monophysite.

The Monophysite movement in Syria found its staunchest adherents
among the monks. Even before Chalcedon, monks like Mar Barsawma (d.
459), who spoke no Greek, were openly hostile to episcopal authority.
Syrian monasticism tended to be anarchic and individualist, 36 and many
monks objected to being subordinate to a hierarchy, especially if the hier-
archs spoke a different language and held questionable theological views.
The monastic nature of the Monophysite community became even more
pronounced after 518, when imperial pressure ensured that all the estab-
lished bishops were firmly Chalcedonian. It was Monophysite monks,
especially those of the frontier monastery at Qartmin, near Dara, who
ensured that the council called by the patricius John, on the orders of Justin
II, to try to resolve the issue at Callinicum in 567, ended in failure. 37

There were also notable regional differences. By the mid sixth century,
when the alternative Monophysite hierarchy was being established, we can
see that Syria I, Euphratensis, Osrhoene and Mesopotamia had large, prob-
ably majority, Monophysite communities. In contrast, Syria II and the
Phoenicias were mostly Chalcedonian. However, the Ghassanids were firm

36 See Vodbus (i 9 5 8-9) for the full richness of the Syrian ascetic tradition.

37 Palmer (1990) 1 50.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

600 2 l/ 7 . SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

supporters of the Monophysites. Adherents to the Monophysite creed
were subject to bouts of persecution but, despite rumours that
Monophysite monks had betrayed Amida to the Persians in 503, it would
be wrong to see the movement as anti-imperial or in any way ‘nationalist’
or separatist: the Monophysites simply wanted to be part of a Christian
empire which was, in their sense, orthodox. 38

The balance of power between the communities in the patriarchate of
Antioch reflected political changes in Constantinople as well as local
opinion. From 451 to 518 the key issue was the control of the office of
patriarch itself, for the patriarch alone had power to consecrate new
bishops and so change the complexion of the hierarchy. Until his death in
488, the key figure among the Monophysites of Antioch was Peter the
Fuller, who was patriarch no less than three times, interrupted by two
periods of exile. At this stage, much of the population of the city itself
seems to have had Monophysite sympathies, and the unfortunate
Chalcedonian patriarch Stephen was stabbed to death by his own clergy,
using sharpened reed pens, in 479. ,9

In 482 the Henotikon of Zeno provided a framework within which the
two parties could agree to differ, and some of the violence went out of the
dispute. This tolerant policy was continued by Anastasius. In 512, however,
Severus became patriarch of Antioch and succeeded in winning over the
emperor Anastasius to a more militantly Monophysite position, while
Philoxenus of Hierapolis won Euphratensis for the cause. From 5 1 2 to 518
the Monophysites were supreme in Antioch, though opponents remained
in Syria II and among the monks of Phoenicia II, who went so far as to
write to Rome seeking support. The accession in 518 of Justin I, a west-
erner seeking reconciliation with Rome, led to a violent reversal of policy.
The hierarchy was swiftly changed: Severus was obliged to retire to
Monophysite Alexandria and the new patriarch Paul, called ‘the Jew’, began
active persecution of the Monophysites, until removed by the emperor for
his excesses. Monophysite bishops were replaced and Monophysite monks
expelled from their monasteries to find even more austere retreats in the
mountains and deserts.

The years 531 to 536 saw a relaxation of persecution because of die
pro-Monophysite actions of the empress Theodora but, as Justinian
sought to win over the implacably Chalcedonian church of Rome, after
536 the persecution was started up with renewed intensity. This seems
finally to have convinced Severus, still the spiritual leader of the
Monophysites, to accede to the demands of militants like John of Telia

38 On which see Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 251—4; the loyalty of Monophysite communities to the
empire in the late sixth century is noted by Whitby ( Maurice 213— 1 5). Ghassanids: Shahid (1995).

39 Malalas p. 3 8 1 Bonn.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 6oi

(martyred in 536) and Jacob Bar’Addai to begin die consecration of an
alternative Monophysite hierarchy, which set the seal on the schism. For
the rest of die century, die northern provinces of the patriarchate of
Antioch saw continuous strife between an officially supported urban hier-
archy and a rural populace which largely rejected it and sought their spir-
itual leadership elsewhere.

The dispute took a very different turn in the patriarchate of Jerusalem.
The bishop at the time of Chalcedon, Juvenal, had gone to the council with
Monophysite convictions but seems to have been persuaded to change his
mind by the erection of his see into an independent patriarchate, some-
thing previous bishops had tried but failed to achieve. On his return, he was
execrated as a traitor by the Monophysite populace and had to be guarded
by imperial troops, while the bishop of Scythopolis was murdered for his
Chalcedonian views; however, opinion gradually shifted in favour of
Chalcedon. This was partly a question of local ecclesiastical pride: to anath-
ematize Chalcedon, as the Monophysites demanded, would be to under-
mine the patriarchal status of Jerusalem which had been agreed there. The
church in Palestine was also much more influenced by Constantinople and
the west because of the constant arrival of overseas pilgrims, some of
whom stayed and became monks. The monasteries of the Judaean desert,
the spiritual power-houses of the patriarchate of Jerusalem, were very
different from those in Syria. While Syrian monasteries recruited men of
local experience from the local areas, the Judaean monasteries attracted
recruits from all over the empire. The greatest of these, Euthymius (d. 473)
and Mar Saba (d. 5 32), founder of the famous, still surviving, monastery in
the Judaean desert which bears his name, were firm supporters of
Chalcedon. In this way, despite setbacks like the deposition of the
Chalcedonian patriarch Elias during the high noon of Monophysite power
in 516, Jerusalem remained as firmly and completely committed to
Chalcedon as the Egyptian church did to the Monophysite cause. 40

The disputes of Chalcedon gathered pace against a background of
expanding settlement and over-all economic (and probably demographic)
growth. The evidence for this can be found in the unique archaeological
record of the region, which is unrivalled in this period for its extent and
scope but is not always easy to interpret. There are a number of problems
in the use of archaeological evidence for the assessment of economic pros-
perity. The most obvious of these is the chronology. Much of the dating of
sites rests on ceramic evidence which is not clear enough to make distinc-
tions between fifth, sixth and seventh century or even between Byzantine

40 See Patrich (1995); Binns (1994); and Honigmann (1950) 247—61. For the archaeology of the
Palestinian monasteries, Hirschfeld (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

602 lib. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

and early Islamic. 41 There is also a tendency among historians to see the
Byzantine period as a sort of plateau and the Persian and Arab invasions of
the early seventh century as marking a dramatic break in the social and eco-
nomic life of the area: 42 in reality, economic and social change probably
occurred over a much longer time-span. While it is sometimes possible to
be certain when buildings were constructed, it is much more difficult to
know when they fell into ruin or disuse. Furthermore, it is not always clear
what archaeological evidence tells us about economic prosperity: the build-
ing of monasteries, for example, could be an indicator of economic expan-
sion as people endowed the church with their surplus wealth, or it could be
a sign that monasteries were expanding their lands at the expense of impov-
erished or depopulated villages. Equally, the intrusion of poorly built struc-
tures on to public open spaces like streets and squares, which seems to
happen in the sixth century in Antioch, Apamea, Scythopolis, Gerasa and
Madaba, among other sites, could show the general decay of urban life or,
conversely, that increased commercial pressures meant that every part of
the urban area had to be exploited to the full. 43 All generalizations about the
economic history of this period have to be treated with some caution.

The fifth and early sixth centuries were characterized by continued
building activities in major cities and the expansion of settlement into mar-
ginal lands in mountainous and semi-arid zones. The planned city with its
broad, paved, usually colonnaded streets remained the ideal of urban build-
ers. When Justinian rebuilt Antioch after 540, Procopius describes how ‘he
laid it out with stoas and agoras, dividing all the blocks of houses by means
of streets and making water-channels, fountains and sewers, all of which
the city now boasts. He built theatres and baths for it, ornamenting it with
all the other buildings by which the prosperity of a city is wont to be
shown.’ 44 When Anastasius constructed the fortress of Dara, he equipped
it with ‘two public baths, churches, colonnades, warehouses for storing
grain and two cisterns for water’. In the archaeological record, the clearest
evidence for large-scale street layout in the period is emerging at
Scythopolis, capital of Palestine II, where the city-centre streets were
rebuilt and extended in the early decades of the sixth century. 45 There is

41 For example, both Orssaud using ceramic material from the limestone massif of northern Syria
and Watson using the material from Pella have recendy emphasized that the pattern is one of continu-
ity and slow evolution and that there are no clear breaks between the early sixth and the mid eighth
century; see Orssaud (1992) and Watson (1992) and the table ronde ‘De la ceramique Byzantine a la
ceramique Omeyyade’ in Canivet and Rey-Coquais (1992) 195— 212.

42 Tchalenko’s discussion in Villages of the economic life of the villages of the limestone massif is
based on the assumption that this society collapsed with the Muslim conquests. For a recent example
of the same attitudes, see Shereshevski (1991) 222—3; the critique in Cameron (1994) 91—3; for a
helpful overview of the debate see Foss (1995).

43 Kennedy (1985); also Kennedy (1986a) and the recent discussion in Di Segni (1995). For building
and architecture see ch. 31 (Mango), pp. 918—71 below. 44 Procop. Buildings 11. 10.2— 25.

45 Tsafrir and Foerster (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 603

further evidence from Jerusalem, where Justinian laid out or extended a
broad, new colonnaded cardo or main paved thoroughfare to lead to the
portico of his Nea church. 46 Chroniclers of the period also record numer-
ous instances where the emperors sent money or remitted taxes to aid
rebuilding after earthquakes or other disasters.

A particular problem is posed by the buildings at Androna (al-Andarin)
and Qasr Ibn Wardan (ancient name unknown), on the fringes of the desert
north-east of Hama. At Androna there is a series of churches, two of
which are dated to the sixth century, and a square barracks built by ‘the
most estimable Thomas’ in 558. At Qasr Ibn Wardan there is a church,
palace and barracks complex of great elegance and sophistication with an
inscription of 5 64. Unfortunately, nothing more is known of Thomas, and
we have no idea of the name of the builder of Qasr Ibn Wardan. 47 Given
the complete absence of literary or epigraphic evidence, there is no reason
to assume that these buildings were imperial fortifications, especially as
there is little evidence for imperial building of any kind in the near east in
the last decade of Justinian’s reign. We should probably ascribe these large-
scale projects to local initiative — the governor, a local magnate or the
Ghassanids.

Government patronage extended to individual buildings, although after
the mid fifth century these are mostly churches. Among the most impres-
sive projects were Zeno’s patronage of the building of the great church of
St Symeon Stylites in the limestone hills between Antioch and Aleppo {c.
476—91) and Justinian’s vast Nea (dedicated 543) in Jerusalem, 48 both of
them new foundations, but humbler establishments also benefited, as can
be seen from the example of the monastery of Qartmin, on the remote
Tigris frontier, where the main church, which still survives, was con-
structed by the emperor Anastasius. 49

Imperial building activity can also be seen in fortifications. The threat of
Persian attacks meant that Justinian’s government reconstructed the walls
of Antioch and Apamea. In Edessa the damage done by the disastrous
flood of 525 was repaired by Justin I and Justinian, who restored the walls
and the cathedral and built a dam to divert the flood- water of the river
Scirtos which still exists today. 50 Imposing fortifications were constructed
at Sergiopolis in the Syrian desert and Birtha on the Euphrates. At
Sergiopolis, these consisted of a vast rectangle of walls 500x400 metres
which contained the city with its churches, including the great basilica of
the Holy Cross, dedicated in 559. At Birtha, a triangle of impressive walls

46 Avigad (1984) 213—29.

47 The best discussion of these buildings is still in Buder (1907—20) Section B, pp. 47—63.

48 On the building history of the shrine of St Symeon: Tchalenko, Villages 1.223—76; for the Nea:

Avigad (1984) 229—46; on Syrian stylites and their architectural remains: Pena, Castellana and Fernandez
(1987). 49 Palmer (1990) 113-48. 50 Segal (1970) 187-9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

604 21 b. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

about 400 x 300 metres, with a citadel at the apex and the shorter side along
the river, enclosed a small garrison town with a forum, baths and at least
two churches. 51

Imperial patronage was largely confined to provincial capitals and fron-
tier fortifications. Cathedrals and churches were often built at the instiga-
tion of bishops. 52 The great cathedral at Bostra, one of the most important
buildings in the entire area, was dedicated in 51 2/13 by bishop Julianus and
there is no mention of imperial patronage. 53 As far as we can tell, the fine
series of churches at Gerasa, which continue through to the early-seventh-
century church of bishop Genesius (61 1), were all constructed by local
patrons. 54 At Gerasa it was the bishop Placcus who built new, smaller,
public baths in 454— 5 to replace the vast classical thermae which had fallen
out of use. 55 Major church-building schemes from the sixth century have
also been revealed at Apamea, where the cathedral was reconstructed in the
5 30s by bishop Paul, and a round church and an atrium church were built
at about the same time. In Edessa in the fifth century a whole series of
churches were built by bishops. Bishop Hiba (436—57) was especially
renowned for his lavish patronage: in 437—8 he gave a great silver altar to
the cathedral and built a magnificent new church of the Twelve Apostles
and an extramural church of St Sergius. His successor, bishop Nona, built
extensively, including a church of St John the Baptist, with thirty-two
columns of red marble, and an infirmary for the poor outside the south
gate. As late as the time of the emperor Maurice, bishop Severus built
himself a palace and a street called the New Portico. 56

It was not, however, in the greater cities that the true vitality and pros-
perity of the late antique near east can be seen, but in the villages and small
country towns of the area. Our knowledge of these is derived almost
entirely from archaeological sources. The most important evidence is to be
found in marginal areas, including the uplands of the limestone massifs of
northern Syria (the so-called ‘Dead Cities’), the basalt areas of the Hauran
and the Negev areas of Palestine III. 57 In all these areas, settlement was
more extensive in the fifth and early sixth century than it had been under
the principate. In all these areas, too, the communities have common fea-
tures. The largest settlements can be called towns, but they are very
different in character from the poleis of the classical period or, indeed, from
a contemporary provincial capital like Scythopolis. Typical examples like
Kapropera (al-Bara) in northern Syria, Umm al-Jimal (ancient name

51 Seep. 592 above, n. n.

52 For church architecture in Palestine see Crowfoot (1941) and Tsafrir (1993); for Syria: Lassus

(1947). 53 Sartre (1985) 124-5.

54 For the superb series of churches at Gerasa see Kraeling (1938) 171—262.

55 Kraeling (1938) 265— 9. 56 For building in Edessa: Segal (1970) 183— 91.

57 For the villages of the limestone massifs see Tchalenko, T 'illages, and Tate (1992); for the Hauran:
Villeneuve (1985); for the Negev: Shereshevsld (1991). In general: Cameron and King (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 o 6 21/7. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

unknown) in the southern Hauran and Soboda (Subeita) in the Negev have
common characteristics: there is no formal urban planning at all, and the
streets are narrow winding lanes, without porticoes and bordered by the
mostly windowless outer walls of the houses. The only public buildings are
churches, of which all the settlements have two or more, but the houses are
sometimes large and well-built, centred on internal courtyards. All these
settlements expanded greatly during the fifth and sixth century, and most
of the surviving building can be dated to these centuries. The unplanned
village-town is the characteristic feature of late antique settlement in the
near east.

The economic foundation of this prosperity was clearly agriculture,
though some towns, notably Tyre, were probably in some sense industrial . 58
The apparent prosperity of communities in such unpromising agricultural
areas as the limestone hills of northern Syria has been the subject of some
discussion. In his pioneering work on these areas, Tchalenko 59 suggested
that this wealth was based on a monoculture of olives, and that the hill vil-
lages exported oil to Antioch and the Mediterranean world and bought in
grain and other necessities from the rest of Syria. All this prosperity, he
claimed, was brought to an abrupt end by the Persian and Muslim invasion
of the early seventh century, which cut off the area from its Mediterranean
markets. This vision of a specialized, market-orientated agricultural
economy is attractive but has been challenged more recently, and it now
seems that agriculture was probably more mixed than Tchalenko sug-
gested. Tate has pointed out that very few olive presses have been found in
the area, certainly no more than would be needed for local consumption;
that finds of animal bones suggest that animal husbandry was an impor-
tant element in the local economy; and that settlement did not come to an
end in the early seventh century but continued into the early Islamic
period . 60 He argues for mixed peasant farming rather than a specialist
economy based on cash crops, but this does not entirely explain the evident
prosperity of the area in late antiquity in contrast to a lack of detectable
settlement during the first three centuries a.d. and the apparent depopula-
tion of the eighth, ninth and tenth. Villeneuve 61 notes the importance of
vineyards in the Hauran, and this is supported by references in the early
Islamic sources to the trade in wine and other agricultural products
between the Hauran and Arabia in the late sixth century . 62

There were also significant regional variations. In the limestone massifs
of northern Syria and the Hauran, most of the evidence comes from
inscriptions on standing buildings. In the area of modern Jordan, however,

58 See Rey-Coquais (1977) 1 52—61; for prosperity see also Walmsley (1996).

59 Tchalenko, Villages', his general theories are discussed in 1.377—438.

60 See Tate (1992). See also the extended excavation report from Dehes, a small village in the lime-
stone massif, Sodini et al. (1980). 61 Villeneuve (1985) 1 21— 5. 62 See Paret (i960).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 607

the most important sources of information are the mosaic floors of
churches whose built structures have almost entirely disappeared. These
have revealed an astonishing upsurge of building activity lasting until after
the Islamic conquests. The most famous of these are probably the mosaics
of Madaba (including the famous map of the Holy Land) and Mount
Nebo. 63 An illustration of the importance of archaeological evidence in
this enquiry can be seen at Petra. Until recently it was thought that Petra in
late antiquity was something of a ghost town, 64 but the discovery in 1990
of a major church with high-quality mosaics and marble furnishings must
lead to a reassessment of this verdict. 65 At present the church is dated to
the late fifth and early sixth century and may have been abandoned after
the earthquake of 551. The silence of the literary sources should not lead
us to assume that there was no cultural or economic activity in an area.

In Palestine, pilgrims and imperial subsidies for church building must
have brought money into the area. Wealthy refugees from the west, like
Melania the Younger (d. 439), settled in the area and distributed their vast
assets in pious benefactions. The most famous of these patrons was the
empress Eudocia (d. 460), who settled in Jerusalem from 441 onward.
Though estranged from her husband and the imperial court, she still
enjoyed huge wealth, with which she endowed the churches and monaster-
ies of the region. 66 Melania and Eudocia seem to have no parallels in the
sixth century, but pilgrims continued to arrive from the west, like the
Piacenza pilgrim whose account of his journey (c. 570) still survives, 67 and
they must have contributed to the local economy in a more modest way.
Justinian’s building projects in Jerusalem, the extended cardo and the great
Nea church, must have brought in revenue as well.

Using this material to examine the general economic history of the area
is fraught with problems, and the results of new excavations, like the
church at Petra, can suddenly upset accepted hypotheses. At present it
looks as if the period from the early fifth century to about 5 40 was one of
gradually expanding settlement and extensive new building of both domes-
tic houses and churches, though there may have been exceptions to this in
areas like the countryside around Edessa which were subject to destructive
Persian attacks. After the mid sixth century, this expansion of settlement
ceased in many areas and regional variations become much more notice-
able.

There is some evidence for the decline of the coastal cities, though
because of repeated rebuilding, the evidence here is very difficult to assess.

63 See Piccirillo (1989) and Donner (1992). 64 Gutwein (1981) 13.

65 For a preliminary publication see Fiema (1 99 3) 1— 3 ; an important find of sixth-century papyri pro-
vides new evidence of local economic life. 66 See Holum, Empresses', Hunt, Holy Land Pilgrimage.

67 Antonini Placentini, Itinerarium ed. P. Geyer ( CCSL 175, pp. 127—74); English trans. Wilkinson
(i977) 79~ 8 9-

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 o 8 21/7. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

There is an almost total absence of literary, archaeological or epigraphic
evidence from this area in the second half of the sixth century. Berytus,
which had grown in importance in late antiquity, was severely damaged by
an earthquake followed by a lire in 5 50—1, and when the Piacenza pilgrim
passed through in about 570 the bishop told him that the famous law
school had ceased to function as a result of the earthquake. 68 Smaller towns
like Tripolis, Botrys and Byblos are also said to have suffered badly. 69 It may
well be the case that the shift of population and economic activity away
from the coast to inland towns, like Damascus, Homs and Aleppo, so
noticeable in the first century of Muslim rule, may have begun earlier.
Further south, Tyre, capital of Phoenicia Libanensis, seems to have pre-
served some urban life, and the Piacenza pilgrim noted textile manufacture
and brothels in the city; 70 its inhabitants put up a vigorous resistance to the
attacks of the Persians in the early seventh century. Caesarea, 71 too, seems
to have maintained some sort of urban life down to the Muslim conquests,
and Arab sources 72 mention a garrison and markets there, though whether
this included all the vast area of the antique city or only the restricted
fortified perimeter around the theatre is unclear.

The evidence from inland cities is problematic. We can say with some
certainty that there is no evidence, literary or epigraphic, of significant con-
struction in the provincial capitals of Apamea, Bostra or Scythopolis after
540, and we know that Apamea was sacked by the Persians in 573 and
Bostra by the Arabs in 583. Antioch was rebuilt on Justinian’s orders after
the Persian conquest of 540 and the earthquake of 542, though the archae-
ological and literary evidence for this rebuilding is limited. It is also impor-
tant to stress that we have virtually no information on cities like Beroea and
Damascus which may well have been late antique ‘success stories’.

Demographically and economically, the rural areas may have been more
resilient. The evidence from the limestone massifs of northern Syria seems
to show that domestic building virtually ceased after the mid sixth century:
in the small but prosperous village of Refada by the monastery of St Symeon
Stylites, for example, there is a series of elegant houses, some with columned
porticoes, dated from 341 to 516, but nothing from the second half of the
sixth century. 7 ’ It seems, however, that the building of churches and monas-
teries still continued: for example, the monastery of Braij, in the country sur-
rounded by its own fields, seems to have been built in the late sixth century. 74

68 Antonini Placentini, Itinerarium cap. i, p. 129; cf. Agathias, Hist. 11.1 5.

69 See Malalas p. 485 Bonn. 70 Itinerarium cap. 2, pp. 129—30.

71 For a pessimistic assessment of Caesarea in late antiquity see Levine (1985) 135—9.

72 al-Baladurl, Futuh al-Buldan ed. M. J. de Goeje (Leiden 1 866), pp. 14 1—2. al-Baladurl also notes (pp.
1 1 7—1 8) that Umayyad rulers made efforts to rebuild and repopulate the coastal cities of Tyre and Acre,
which are described as being in ruins, but whether this was the result of the invasions of the early
seventh century or a more gradual decline is not clear. 73 Tchalenko, Villages 1. 194—7.

74 Tchalenko, Villages 124—5, 1 5 8 — 9, 173.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 609

It may be that church building demonstrates continuing prosperity but there
are other possible explanations. One is that the division of the church into
separate Monophysite and Dyophysite communities meant that more
churches were required to accommodate divided congregations. It is also
possible that demographic decline, possibly caused by plague, allowed
churches and monasteries to build up large landholdings.

The position in Jordan seems to have been very different, with evidence
of large numbers of new, or at least newly decorated, churches from the
sixth and seventh century. This prosperity was maintained here in a way in
which it was not in the north, especially in the villages and rural monaster-
ies which provide us with the evidence. 75 It may well be that increasing
trade with Arabia, notably in wine, oil and grain, was responsible for this,
and that the archaeological record confirms the importance of this trade
reflected in the early Islamic literary tradition. 76 The evidence from the
Negev gives us much less in the way of chronological information, and the
Jordanian tradition of mosaic floors seems to have been entirely absent. It
is by no means clear whether the depopulation of these settlements was a
product or a prelude to the Islamic conquests. The remains of a small
mosque beside the entrance to the south church in Subeita 77 suggests that
the town was still inhabited in the mid seventh century and that the Muslim
settlers were, initially at least, small in number and accepted peacefully.

The causes of change were a combination of natural disasters and
foreign invasion. Of the natural disasters, the plague was the most wide-
spread, appearing in the area in 542 and reappearing with grim regularity
throughout the late sixth century and, indeed, later. 78 There has been some
tendency in the recent literature to play down the effects of plague on
society, but there seems no reason to doubt that the loss of life was enor-
mous and that the recurrent outbreaks make it difficult to envisage a sus-
tained demographic recovery. It is also probable that densely populated
cities and villages would have suffered worse than nomad areas.

The demographic effects of plague were compounded by a period of
violent seismic activity. The most famous earthquakes were those which
destroyed Antioch in 526 (in which Malalas estimated that 250,000 people
died) 79 and Berytus and other cities of the Lebanese littoral in 5 5 1 . It seems

75 See the fine series of mosaic floors published in Piccirillo (1994); Whittow (1990).

76 See p. 604 above, n. 5 5 . The existence of this or any other trade in late pre-Islamic Arabia has
recendy been questioned by Crone (1987), but, while most scholars would accept that the overland
incense trade with South Arabia had long since disappeared, it seems clear that there was still a more
localized trade between the pastoralists of the desert and the agriculturalists of the settled areas in such
mundane goods as wine, wheat and hides; see ch. 22 c (Conrad), pp. 686—8 below.

77 Shereshevski (1991) 74.

78 The best account of the plague remains Conrad (1981). See also Conrad (1986). For a sceptical

view of the importance of the plague, Durliat (1989) in Hommes et richesses and the response by J.-N.
Biraben in the same volume, pp. 121— 5. The importance of the plague has been reaffirmed in Conrad
(1994). 79 Malalas pp. 419— 20 Bonn.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6lO 2l/7. SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

that, despite imperial aid, neither Antioch nor Berytus fully recovered from
these disasters. These were only the most destructive (and best recorded)
of many tremors at this period. The Persian conquests of Antioch in 5 40
and Apamea in 573 both resulted in widespread destruction and large-scale
deportations.

The end of expansion did not mean that the survivors were necessarily
impoverished, and it is possible that some individuals may have become
more prosperous as they took over vacant land, but it did mean, as in
Europe after the Black Death, that many marginal lands were lost to settled
agriculture.

The early seventh century saw dramatic changes in the political status of
the Byzantine Near East. From 603 Khusro II began his great offensive,
ostensibly to avenge the deposition of the emperor Maurice the previous
year. This invasion was much more far-reaching than any of its predeces-
sors. 80 Edessa was taken in 609, Antioch in 61 1 and Jerusalem and Tyre in
614, a campaign in which the Persians were allegedly helped by an uprising
of the Jewish population. Persian rule lasted until 628, when Heraclius
defeated the Persian armies in Iraq and caused them to withdraw from the
Roman near east. The historical sources for the Persian conquest are very
poor and the archaeological evidence is not much more helpful: apart from
a set of polo goal-posts in the hippodrome at Gerasa, there are no monu-
ments which can be ascribed to the period of Persian rule with any cer-
tainty. The extent of the destruction they caused is also problematic, and
the nature of the evidence makes it impossible to distinguish damage done
by the Persians from that which resulted from the Muslim conquests from
632 onwards. 81

The Muslim conquest is often seen as a major rupture in the historical
continuity of the area, but there is in fact little evidence of widespread
destruction. The Arabic sources for the conquests, though full, are often
confused about chronology and contain numerous topoi, so the detail on
specific conquests needs to be treated with some caution, 82 but the general
outlines are clear. The earliest Muslim raids seem to have begun in 63 3, the
year after Muhammad’s death. The invaders avoided confrontation with
large Byzantine forces but took over much of the land on the fringes of
the desert. Probably in 634 Khalid b. al-Walld arrived with reinforcements
from Iraq, and the Muslims began to besiege and take urban centres
including Bostra, Scythopolis and Damascus. This provoked a response
from the Byzantine authorities, and Heraclius despatched units of the
imperial army. However, these were defeated at the battles of Ajnadayn,
near Pella, and the Yarmuk between 634 and 636. After this, the way lay

80 A somewhat lurid narrative account of the Persian conquest is given in Stratos (1968) 107— 1 1.

81 For the problems of assessing the impact of the Persian invasions, Schick (1992) 107—19; Schick

(1995). 82 See North (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA 6ll

open for the occupation of the rest of the country, including the coastal
cities and Antioch itself. By around 647—8 the whole of Syria was in
Muslim hands. 83 After the defeat of the Byzantine field armies, most cities
surrendered peacefully on easy terms. Only at Damascus and Caesarea
does there seem to have been any prolonged and organized resistance.

Our understanding of the Muslim conquests is determined by the view
we take of the Near East at the time of their arrival. In the present state of
historical research, it is possible to suggest that a major military victory, at
the battle of the Yarmuk in 636, was followed by the largely peaceful pen-
etration of a sparsely populated land by nomad or semi-nomad tribesmen,
and many of the changes often ascribed to the Muslim conquests, like the
decline of the coastal cities and the evolution of new patterns of urban
planning, were continuations of trends already established in late antiquity.
The Muslims certainly brought a new ruling class, and a new dominant
religion and language eventually replaced the Christian Greek and Syriac
world of antiquity, but even so, the conquests were only one factor among
many in the long evolution of the economic and social life of town and
country.

83 See Donner (1981) 91— 1 5 5 and Kaegi (1992); ch. 22 c (Conrad), pp. 695—9 below.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 21 c

EGYPT

JAMES G. KEENAN

By the year 425, Egypt had achieved a provincial arrangement that would
last for well over a century. 1 A single province under the principate, it had
come under Diocletian to be divided into three smaller provinces. It all
began in the last decade of the third century when a new province of
Thebaid, coterminous with the old Theban epistrategia, was created out of
the southern part of the original province of Egypt (Aegyptus); subse-

1 Literary and legal notices for the history of Egypt after 425 are scattered; some will be found in
the text and notes below. A text of Justinian’s Edict xiii is included in Corpus Iuris Civilis , vol. in
( Novellae ), 6 th edn, by R. Schoell and W Kroll (Berlin 1954)? 78°— 95. The fourth-century record of
monastic traditions, preserved in Greek, Latin and Coptic texts, yields in the fifth century to the Coptic
writings of Shenoute and Besa. What is unique about Egypt, in this as in other periods, is its wealth of
documentary evidence preserved on papyrus. Any account of Egypt must rely heavily on this. The
years 425—600 are represented by a few papyri in Latin and Coptic, by a great number in Greek, some
from the fifth century, but most from the sixth. Important editions include: P.Monac. (revised as
P.Munch .), P.Lond. v. 1722— 37 (for Syene’s Patermuthis archive); P.Cair.Masp. 1— 111, P.Lond. v, P.Flor. 111
279—342, P.Mich. xiii, P.Michael. 40—60 (for Aphrodito); BGU xn, P.Herm. (for Hermopolis); P.Oxy. 1
and xvi, and PSI vm (for Oxyrhynchus); Stud.Pal. in, vm, xx, SB, especially vol. 1, BGU {passim ), and
some volumes in the CPR series, most recendy x and xiv (for the Fayum). Papyri from these and other
editions are cited according to the conventions set out in J. F. Oates, R. S. Bagnall, W. H. Willis and K.
A. Worp, Checklist of Editions of Greek and Latin Papyri, Ostraca and Tablets 4th edn ( Bulletin of the American
Society of Papyrologists Suppl. 7: Adanta, GA, 1992).

The papyrus evidence, despite its richness, has its limitations. One is that it derives from a limited
number of sites, none of which can be taken as typical of Egypt as a whole. The most important of
these are (from south to north): Syene, Aphrodito, Hermopolis, Oxyrhynchus and the Fayum
(Arsinoite nome). Of these, Oxyrhynchus has drawn the most scholarly attention, the Fayum (the state
of whose documentation is improving, but still in great disarray) the least.

Besides its geographical spottiness, the papyrus evidence is limited in other, equally important ways.
The papyri mostly concern local and regional, rarely imperial events. The plague of 542, for example,
extensively described in Procopius {Wars 11.22— 3), finds but one obscure and probably figurative allu-
sion in the papyri ( P.Cair.Masp . 111 67283 with ed. intro.). When papyri do refer to seemingly important
events, it is necessary to resort to speculation in seeking their ‘fit’ into the larger imperial scheme. See,
for example, Maehler (1976). Similar, though probably more successful, have been efforts to find the
‘fit’ between the documentary papyri and the late imperial law codes (esp. C.Th., Cf, Just. Nov), though
see the remarks of A. H. M. Jones, JHS 71 (1951) 271, on how hard it is ‘to weave together the bits and
patches of the papyri with the tangled skein of the Codes and Novels’.

For bibliographical guidance beyond what is provided here, see A. Bataille, Les papyrus (Paris 1955:
Traite d’etudes byzan tines 11); O. Montevecchi, Ea papirologia, 2nd edn (Milan 1988), pt 4, esp. 259—61,
578 (for papyrus archives); H.-A. Rupprecht, Kleine Einfuhrung in die Papyrus kunde (Darmstadt 1994),
passim. My thanks to Terry G. Wilfong for the map that locates places mentioned in this discussion and
for advice on Coptic and other late sources.

612

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT 613

quently, Libya was separated off to become its own province. Each new
province had its own governor, but all three — Aegyptus, Thebaid, Libya —
were subject to the plenipotentiary authority of the Augustal prefect, resi-
dent in Alexandria.

By the latter part of the fourth century, when Ammianus Marcellinus
was penning his well-known digression on Egypt (22. 1 5—16), the threefold
division into Aegyptus, Libya and the Thebaid seemed to the historian to
have dated ‘to ancient times’ ( priscis temporibus)\ other subdivisions were the
creations of more recent times ( posteritas ). A province of Augustamnica, a
revival of the short-lived Aegyptus Herculia, consisting of the eastern
Delta and the old Heptanomia, had been created out of the territory of
Aegyptus, which retained the western Delta, including the city of
Alexandria; and the province of Libya had come to be divided into
Pentapolis (Libya Superior) and ‘Drier’ Libya (Libya Inferior) .

At some time verging on 381, Egypt’s cluster of five provinces became a
self-standing diocese, and shortly after, probably between 386 and the
century’s end, yet another province was created: Arcadia, named for the
emperor Arcadius (d. 408), was deducted (mostly) from Augustamnica. First
mentioned in the papyri towards the very end of the fourth century, the new
province found inclusion in the lists of Egyptian provinces in the Notitia
Dignitatum, in parts that were probably revised in 3 9 5 or shortly after. 2 It was
roughly equivalent to the old ‘Seven-Nome Region’, Heptanomia, but
lacked the important middle Egyptian city of Hermopolis, which belonged
to the Thebaid. 3

The six-province nomenclature (Libya Superior, Libya Inferior,
Thebaid, Aegyptus, Arcadia, Augustamnica) is, then, the one that is found
in the Notitia Dignitatum. A A half-century later, the same provinces, in a
different order, in terms closer to Ammianus’ but less correctly spelt, are
represented in the Laterculus of Polemius Silvius, a.d. 448. 5 All six provinces
were directly subject to the Augustal prefect as head of the Egyptian
diocese and, through him, subject to the praetorian prefect of the East. It
was not until 539 that new, major changes were effected, this time by
Justinian. The details were recorded in the emperor’s Thirteenth Edict, 6
and from what survives of the edict’s damaged text, it is clear that already

2 Kramer (1992); Notitia Dignitatum ed. Seeck, Or. 1.85, 11.29, XXIII -6 = 13; Jones, LRE Appendix n.
Cf. Keenan (1977). See now P.Ozgi. lxiii 4371, 4385, with introductions; 4386, 10 n.

3 SB 1 5337 mentions five Arcadian cities and one district: Herakleopolis, Cynopolis, Memphis,
Letopolis, Nilopolis and ‘the Arsinoite’.

4 Or. xxin. 1— 14; Augustamnica was mistakenly excluded from Or. 1.80—5 and 11.24— 9, cf. Jones, LRE
1417.

5 Not. Dig. ed. Seeck, pp. 25 9—60 ( Aegyptus , Augustamnis, Thebaida, Libia sicca, Libia pentapolis, A.rchadia),
cf. Jones, LRE 1451, 1461.

6 For the vexed question of the edict’s date, see Remondon (195 5). For papyrus fragments of the
edict, see now P.Oxy. lxiii 4400.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

614

210 EGYPT

Fig. 1 8 Leaf from the Notitia Dignitatum. Fifteenth-century copy of a Carolingian original. Insignia of
the comes limitis A.egypti (Count of the Egyptian Frontier) with a schematic map of the Egyptian delta
region. The Bodleian Library, Oxford. MS Canon. Misc. 378 , fol. 1 i 3 r. (Photo: courtesy of the

Bodleian Library)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT 615

some of the Egyptian provinces — Aegyptus, Augustamnica, Thebaid — had
been divided in two. By Justinian’s reforms, the Augustal prefect was
deprived of control over the Egyptian diocese. His exercise of military and
civil authority was restricted to Aegyptus I and II, and he had a subordinate
civil governor for Aegyptus II. An Augustal duke of the Thebaid had mil-
itary and civil authority over that province, but with subordinate civil
governors for both its upper (southern) and lower (northern) halves. Libya
had a duke with a subordinate civil governor.

For the remaining three provinces — Augustamnica, Pentapolis, Arcadia
— speculation is needed, because the parts of Edict XIII that concern
Augustamnica are damaged, while those that concerned Pentapolis and
Arcadia are lost. It has been assumed that Augustamnica, subdivided into
I and II, was treated like the Thebaid, Pentapolis — if it was included in the
reform — like Libya. 7 The papyri are not as helpful as one might have
expected in filling the gaps, if not for Pentapolis, 8 at least for Augustamnica
and Arcadia. It is clear none the less from papyri of (mainly) Oxyrhynchite
provenance that Arcadia was not subdivided. It had a civil governor, a
praeses', papyri available to date do not mention a military governor, a dux
Arcadiae, until a.d. 636. 9 It is therefore possible that Arcadia’s treatment in
Edict XIII was unlike that of any other province. It may simply have had a
civil governor with some coercive police authority; its duke may have been
a later creation, perhaps in response to crisis. ln

In theory, the Egyptian provinces were independent of one another and
individually subject, again as for most of the fourth century, to the praeto-
rian prefect of the East. In practice, however, it is difficult to assess the
extent to which the subdivided provinces — Aegyptus, Augustamnica,
Thebaid — were effectively distinct; and without question, the collection of
grain for Constantinople, eight million artabs a year according to Edict XIII
(chapter 8), required co-operation among all the Egyptian provinces, under
the general supervision of the Augustal prefect in Alexandria. Alexandria,
strictly speaking, was limited to being the senior capital of the two prov-
inces of Aegyptus; but regardless of its restricted provincial embrace, it
remained Egypt’s chief city and one of the great metropolises of the
eastern empire, an often turbulent centre of education and religion, a thriv-
ing centre for manufacture, banking, commerce, shipping and law. 11

Each Egyptian governor, whether Augustal prefect, duke or praeses, had
of course his own staff ( officium , t^dyj. A typical civil staff like that of the

7 Jones, ERE 281. 8 Pentapolis in the papyri: P.Cair.Masp. n 67168 — a rare glimpse.

9 P.Prag. 1 64. 10 Keenan (1977).

11 Bowman (1986) ch. 7; Chuvin, Chronicle esp. 105— 11; The Coptic Encyclopedia (New York 1991)
1.95— 103, s.v. Alexandria in late antiquity (H. Heinen); P.Oxy. 1 144 (= FIRA 111.156) and 151;
P.Cair.Masp. 11 67126, with Keenan (1992); PSI 1 76, with Keenan (1978).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Land over 500 metres

o\Memphis sS

ARSINOITE NOME „ . /

(FAYUM) ^J™ am 7 (

Arsinoe<y . . ) \

•~^/~vHawara >

TebtunisOXt/Nilopolis

r^Herakleopolis Magna i

arcXdIa

(HEPTXN'OMIA)

Oxyrhynchus Xd Cynopolis

I,. .. I,4p Antinoopolis
Hermopolis Magna u r

^^Lykopolis

^ Aphrodit^ Antaiopolis

‘^oPanopoIis

1 — - 1

p Omboi

Elephantine A

D Syene

Philae S

Map 17 Egypt

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT 617

praeses of Thebaid had, according to the Notitia Dignitatum , 12 a chief (prin -
ceps), adjutants ( comicularius , adiutor), an accountant ( numerarius ), several
types of clerks ( commentariensis , ab actis, a libellis, exceptores) and other officials
( cohortalini ). The papyri serve to confirm and extend, and to some extent
clarify, the often confusing vocabulary of late imperial bureaucracy, but
their evidence almost exclusively derives from the provinces of Arcadia
and Thebaid. This is due to the often-remarked accidental nature of the
finds. Arcadia is familiar because Oxyrhynchus, its capital , 1 3 is a rich source
of late papyri. The Thebaid is well-known because of papyri from its
capital, Antinoopolis, but more so because of papyri from other Thebaid
provenances, especially Hermopolis and Aphrodito.

This papyrus evidence tends to be casual and scattered and private in
nature. A herald [praeco ) on the staff of the praeses in Antinoopolis, for
example, borrows money from an Antinoopolite widow; a clerk ( scriniarius )
on the staff of the duke of the Thebaid, originating from Hermopolis, buys
part of a house in Antinoopolis; a ‘stenographer’ (tacugr# op on the
staff of the praeses of Arcadia, whose home is in the Arsinoite, rents a flat
in Oxyrhynchus, no doubt to secure a residence near his workplace . 14 But
there are occasions when the evidence on staff officers is more focused. In
one private letter, for example, a stenographer ( exceptor ) is seen travelling in
the company of his superior, the provincial governor ( TCWT), probably
the praeses of Arcadia; the stenographer writes to his mother in
Oxyrhynchus. The letter indicates that communication, official and private,
was being conducted through aides called symmachoi (armed messengers)
and singulares (despatch riders). Another letter, addressed to an exceptor,
mentions a praeses ( fCWT), probably (again) the governor of Arcadia, and
various members of his officiunr. an ab actis, a numerarius and officiates}^ Still
more important is a late-fifth-century list of officials belonging to the staff
of the praeses of the Thebaid: two lawyers ( scholastic i) and an assistant lawyer,
three chief clerks ( proximi ), an ‘assistant in the secretariat’, an ‘under-
assistant’ ( subadiuva ), two stenographers ( exceptores ), five despatch riders
( singulares ) and one or more ‘couriers’ ( cursored) } b

Given the variety of titles, it will not be surprising to learn that there were
distinctions in grade and rewards among these civil servants, partly depend-
ing on the importance of the staff to which they were assigned, partly on
whether their work was clerical or not . 17 This is well illustrated in two wills.
In one, from sixth-century Oxyrhynchus, Flavius Pousi, a courier [cursor)
attached to the praesidial (i.e. civil) officium of Arcadia, leaves shares of his

12 Or. xliv 6—1 5 , cf. Jones, LRE 593—6.

13 P. Oxy. lviii 3932.6 n., citing Georgius Cyprius, Descriptio orbis romanicd. H. Gelzer (Bibl. Teubner),

745. 14 P.Mich. xi 607 (569), PBerlZill 6 (527/65), P.Oxy. xvi 1965 (5 53).

15 P.Oxy. lviii 3932, P.Mich. xi 624 (both sixth century).

16 CPR xiv 39 (late fifth century); cf. P.Cair.Masp. 1 67054, P.Oxy. viii 1108. 17 Jones (1949).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 1 8

21 C. EGYPT

house to a religious institution (one half), his wife (one quarter) and
another woman (one quarter). His wife receives, in addition to her own
clothing and personal ornaments, all the household furniture. The mystery
woman receives specified articles, including a platter, three spoons and a
third share of the testator’s winter and summer clothing; two of Pousi’s
fellow couriers are assigned the rest of his wardobe. One half of his
pension is set aside for burial expenses and, by a common practice, for
endowment offerings (pros 0 T 3 <) for requiem masses and eucharists
( gctpai) for his soul’s repose. 18 The other half goes to his wife. Pousi’s
elaborate autograph signature to his will, recapitulating its essential terms,
is full of mistakes, suggestive of serviceable but unrefined training in
letters. Among the witnesses is Pousi’s ‘boss’, the chief ( primicerius ) of the
provincial office’s school ( schola ) of heralds. 19

The second will, from several indications a draft, not a final copy, was
drawn up in Antinoopolis on 31 March 567. 20 The testator is Flavius
Theodore, stenographer ( exceptor ) on the ducal officium of the Thebaid, son
of a deceased lawyer ( scholasticus ) of the Forum of the Thebaid. 21 The will,
in prolix style, names as heirs (1) the monastery of Apa Shenoute in the
Panopolite nome, (2) a subsidiary monastery named for Apa Mousaios and
(3) Theodore’s maternal grandmother, Herais. By its provisions, the
Shenoute monastery is to receive the bulk of Theodore’s landed property,
in the Hermopolite, Antinoopolite and Panopolite nomes (and elsewhere),
and urban properties in Antinoopolis and Hermopolis, the yearly income
and rents from all these to be expended on ‘pious distributions’. A house
in Antinoopolis, with its stable, inherited from Theodore’s father, is to be
sold by the monastery, the proceeds to go for the ransoming of prisoners
and other ‘pious distributions’. Property that had come to Theodore by
inheritance from his deceased wife is to be sold off to finance good works
in her name. Theodore’s movable property is assigned to the Apa Mousaios
monastery and is at least partly to be devoted to the remission of his sins.
Grandmother Herais is to receive a farm (kt rra) whose name and loca-
tion are left blank in the text. Theodore frees all his slaves; they get to keep
their ‘nest eggs’ (peculia ) and are assigned cash legacies of six solidi apiece.
Finally, by another legacy, Theodore’s nurse and her daughter are to receive
by way of trust a yearly pension of twelve solidi from his monastic heirs.

The contrast between the estate of Pousi, a non-clerical official on a civil
staff, and the estate of Theodore, a stenographer on a ducal staff, can hardly

18 For the practice and for the link between offerings and masses: Wipszycka (1972) ch. hi, esp.
65—70. Cf. P.Cair.Masp. 1 67003. 19 P.Oxy. xvi 1901.

20 P.Cair.Masp. hi 67312; PLRE niB.125 3 (FI. Theodorus 27).

21 Theodore’s name and his position in the ducal officium are badly damaged in the papyrus. The
editor considered the one ‘probable enough’, the other ‘doubtful’; there is no doubt that, whatever his
position, the man was a civilian official on the duke’s staff. For convenience’ sake the name and tide are
retained in the discussion that follows.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

619

be more striking. In Pousi’s, three spoons merit mention; in Theodore’s, the
properties are apparently so extensive that no effort is made to describe
them in detail. It is no wonder, then, that Pousi has been judged ‘a poor
man’, ‘a humble civil servant’, Theodore ‘a man of rank and substance’. 22
There is no way, however, to determine whether either estate is in any way
typical of what a praesidial courier or a ducal stenographer might be
expected to have inherited or acquired and bequeathed; but there is a sense
that Theodore’s substance outstripped his office and that the reverse was
true for Pousi. Nevertheless, both wills, but especially Theodore’s, raise for
any description of late antique Egypt issues of broad concern, to which
attention may now be drawn.

First, both wills give evidence of thorough Christianization in sentiment
and in fact. Although Christianity by tradition made an early appearance in
Egypt, its progress in the countryside is virtually imperceptible in its first
three centuries. The most striking documents, so-called libelli of the Decian
persecution, a.d. 250, are in effect negative evidence (though implying a
corresponding positive). These certificates of pagan sacrifice attest that the
individuals concerned sacrificed, poured libations and tasted the sacrificial
meats — that, accordingly, they were not Christian. 23 It is only in the fourth
century that Christianization, following the great persecution of 303—4,
experienced a ‘take-off of such magnitude as to leave a noticeable imprint
in the documentary papyri. As the fourth century progresses, the papyri
present increasingly numerous references to churches and clergy, while
implying for the latter a hierarchical structure of bishops, priests and
deacons. 24 There were later pagan survivals. A festival of the Nile, though
perhaps conducted without blood sacrifice, is evidenced as late as 424. 2s
Pagans continued to teach philosophy at Alexandria through the fifth and
into the sixth century. These included, before his conversion, Flavius
Horapollon, native to the village of Phenebythis of Egypt’s Panopolite
nome, whose metropolis was a hotbed of late antique paganism. 26 The
temples on the island of Philai, including the famous Isis temple, remained
open and active till their destruction byjustinian’s general Narses in the mid
sixth century. Nevertheless, Christianity had become virtually universal in
Egypt in the fifth century, thoroughly universal in the sixth, penetrating, as
a variety of evidence attests, as far south as the First Cataract frontier. 27
Elsewhere, but only by way of example, twelve priests and five deacons,
implying the existence of from twelve to seventeen churches in the sup-
posedly declining village of Karanis in the Fayum, are evidenced in a

22 Jones, ERE 595—6, 895, 599 (in that order). 23 POxy. lviii 3929, with intro.

24 Bagnall, Egypt ch. 8, for this and for much that follows. 25 P.Oxy. xliii 3 148.

26 P.Cair.Masp. 111 67295, PLRE 11.569—70 (FI. Horapollon 2). Cf. Remondon (1952).

27 MacCoull (1990).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

620 21 C. EGYPT

papyrus of a.d. 439. A century later, ten churches (at least), named for
Mother Mary, for the Holy Apostles and for various saints (mainly martyrs),
were to be found in the middle Egyptian village of Aphrodito. 28 Churches
like these need not have been large either in their physical structures or in
their congregations, but they were apparently everywhere.

So also were monasteries — of various kinds and in assorted environ-
ments: hermitages in natural caves or in rock-cut Pharaonic tombs on the
line of desert hills above the Nile valley; underground dwellings in the
desert plains near Esna (ancient Latopolis) in Upper Egypt and at Kellia
(‘Cells’) off the western Delta north of Wadi Natrun (ancient Seeds; Fig.
49, p. 944 below); Pachomian foundations for communal (cenobitic) living
on the sites of deserted villages in the Thebaid; Melitian and orthodox
monasteries on the Fayum’s desert edge near Hawara; but it just so happens
that in Theodore’s will an especially renowned Coptic monastery comes
into play. For the monastery of Apa Shenoute, heir to most of Theodore’s
estate, was none other than the famous White Monastery (Deir el-Abyad),
built around 440 on the ‘mountain of Athribis’ on the edge of the western
desert hills near present-day Sohag. 29

Like other monasteries, the White Monastery early on counted on
bequests of necessities to help feed and clothe its monks and nuns in a cen-
obitic community reported to number some 4,000 souls; but as time passed
it became an economic force in its own right, able to support by charity thou-
sands of refugees in times of famine and turmoil. 30 By the sixth century, the
properties of the White Monastery and other religious institutions in Egypt
had become substantial. Besides what it acquired by Theodore’s will, the
White Monastery under its abbot (‘archimandrite’) owned land in the arable
area of the village of Phthla (‘the Cultivation’) near Aphrodito in the
Antaiopolite nome. 31 Through a lay steward (proroht V), it leased this land
out to a local entrepreneur named Aurelius Phoibammon. He in turn, as
middleman, guaranteed the land’s farming through a series of sub-leases and
work contracts. Similar arrangements must have been in place for the lands
the monastery inherited from Theodore. The monastery as landlord would
have been, like Theodore himself when alive, an absentee. 32

Possibly ironical in all of this is that Theodore’s will is a most decidedly
representative Byzantine Greek document, dictated in Greek for writing in
Greek. 33 It favours a community whose early heads — Pgol, Shenoute, Besa

28 P.Haun. hi 58 (re-edited byj. R. Rea, ZPE 99 (1993) 89—95); P.Cair.Masp. hi 67283.

29 In addition to Bagnall, Egypt ch. 8: Jones (1991); 1 Zita prima sancti Pachomii 1 2, 54; SB 1 5174— 5, with

McGing (1990); Gascou (1990). White Monastery: The Coptic Encyclopedia 111.761—70. Monastery loca-
tions: Timm (1983). 30 Shenoute, Opera ed. J. Leipoldt, 111.67—71; Leipoldt (1902—3); Kuhn (1954).

31 P.Ross.Georg. hi 48 (sixth century). 32 Keenan (1980) and (1985a).

33 Like P.Cair.Masp. 11 67151 (570), the will of Flavius Phoibammon, chief doctor of Antinoopolis.
Contrast MChr. 319 (sixth century), the will of bishop Abraham of Hermouthis, dictated in Egyptian
for transcription in Greek.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

621

Fig. 1 9 Relief from the upper half of a limestone grave-marker showing a bearded monk with hands
raised in prayer. Saqqara, sixth or seventh century a.d. Dumbarton Oaks BL-270. (Photo: courtesy of
Dumbarton Oaks, Washington, DC)

— were Sahidic-speaking Copts. The second of these, Shenoute, exhibited
in his day a virulent antipathy toward ‘Hellenes’, that is, Hellenized
Egyptians of the upper classes, who would have included in their numbers
imperial bureaucrats like Theodore . 34 Moreover, Theodore’s will was not
only in Greek, but in a very florid Greek. This floridity, construed by earlier
scholars as a mark of pomposity and extravagance, servility and degeneracy,
is nowadays more likely to be seen as an artful and purposeful extension of
the classical rhetorical tradition . 35 Part of the training behind such exercises
in the writing of Greek, especially when connected with the study of law,
entailed the study of Latin even when it was no longer strictly required.

A natural result was the proliferation of Latin loanwords in late Greek
documents from Egypt . 36 One interesting example in Theodore’s will is
stabi on Latin stabulum. It will be recalled that Theodore’s house in

34 Cf. Trimbie (1986) 268. 35 MacCoull, Dioscorus , esp. ch. 2; Kovelman (1991).

36 Maas,y<?/»» Lydus 13, 25, 27, 29—30 and passim. Loanwords: Daris (1991).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

622

21 C. EGYPT

Antinoopolis had a stable, a word that suggests, at the very least, that
Theodore owned and kept horses; at most, that, like other landlords of dis-
persed properties, he had his own ‘postal service’ ( cursus velox)? 1 He may
even have kept racehorses for the circus, a wildly popular entertainment,
not only in a megalopolis like Constantinople or Alexandria, but also in
Egyptian provincial capitals like Oxyrhynchus and, Theodore’s own home-
town, Antinoopolis. A unique codex leaf excavated there in 1914 contains
a fragmentary painting of five charioteers in Roman dress, wearing the
colours of three of the four circus factions (red, blue, green). The physical
remains of Antinoopolis’ circus suggest it was second in Egypt only to
Alexandria’s in size and magnificence. 38

More to the point in Theodore’s will, however, is its technical legal
vocabulary, which included loanwords like codicilli (‘codicils’), epistula
fideicommissaria (‘fideicommissary letter’) and peculium (‘nest egg’); but most
extraordinary among these words is the reference to a ius Falcidium
(‘Falcidian right’) based on a Roman law over six hundred years old, the Lex
Falcidia of 40 b.c., whose purpose was to limit legacies to three-quarters
the value of an inheritance. In his own will, Theodore seemingly envisages
his grandmother complaining that the will’s legacies were too great; but he
must also have sensed that in any litigation his will should have withstood
challenge because so much had been set aside for the kinds of ‘charitable
purposes’ (piae causae) favoured in Justinian’s legislation/’ 9

Much time has so far been spent on Theodore’s will, but its value as a mech-
anism for identifying phenomena typical of late antique Egypt has not
quite been exhausted. Three more items are worth remark.

First, in the will’s final clauses, Theodore manumits his slaves and estab-
lishes trust funds for his nurse and her daughter. Apparent in these meas-
ures is a fundamental characteristic of Egyptian slavery in this as in earlier
periods of history — that is, slavery was an urban rather than a rural phe-
nomenon. Egypt was a land whose agriculture, even as conducted on great
estates, depended on the toil of a large class of peasants, not the efforts of
gangs of agricultural slaves. What slaves there were — and these were seem-
ingly much fewer in late than in early imperial times — tended rather to be
domestic slaves owned by those in society’s higher reaches. 40

Second, some of the proceeds of Theodore’s estate were to be devoted
to the pious cause of ransoming prisoners. 41 The will does not specify, but

37 Esp. P.Oxy. 1 138 (610/11), Apiones of Oxyrhynchus.

38 In general: Cameron, Circus Factions', Antinoopolis: Turner (1973) (the codex leaf); Humphrey
(1986) 513—16.

39 Berger (1953) 552 s.v. Lex Falcidia (citing Inst. 11.22, D. 35.2; 3; CJ vi.50) and 629—30 s.v. piae causae

(citing CJ 1.3). In general: Hagemann (1953). 40 Bagnall, Egypt ch. 6. Cf. Fichman [Fikhman] (1973).

41 Cf. Just. Nov. 65 (5 38), 120.9 ( 544)5 Shenoute, Opera ed. Leipoldt, 111.69—77. In general: Amirante
( T 9 57 )*

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

623

Fig. 20 Fragment of a papyrus codex with illustration of five charioteers
(and part of a sixth) wearing jackets in the colours of three of the four circus
factions. Antinoopolis, c. 500. (Photo: courtesy of the Egypt Exploration Society)

the original editor and those who have followed him assume that the pris-
oners in question were persons kidnapped by desert nomads, especially the
Blemmyes, in raids on the Nile valley. Toward the close of the third century
Diocletian had secured Egypt’s southern frontier , 42 but there were later
break-throughs, and the full length of the Nile valley could not, in any
event, always be safeguarded. The Thebaid was especially vulnerable to
attack, and there are indications that the second quarter of the fifth century

42 Procop. H'Szr.f 1. 19.27— 37.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

624

21 C. EGYPT

was a time of special tribulation. One Blemmyan captive in this period was
the exiled ex-patriarch Nestorius. 43 There followed a revolt by the
Blemmyes and Nobades, suppressed by the Romans in 451 and concluded
by a treaty whose terms included the ransom-free return of Roman cap-
tives. 44 The treaty was soon violated. Sixth-century papyri point to more
trouble with the desert tribes, establishing that ‘in the olden times of our
parents’, probably around 500, ‘the vile Blemmyes’ had ransacked
Antaiopolis in middle Egypt, destroying its basilica and its public baths;
that the Blemmyes had likewise, later in the sixth century, pillaged the city
of Omboi in upper Egypt. By mid century a unit of ‘Justinian’s Numidians’
( Numidae Iustiniani), 508 men strong, had been stationed by the emperor’s
orders at Hermopolis for the purpose of protecting the Thebaid and for
the ‘repulse of every barbarian attack’. 45 But events and measures like these
and like the third Blemmyan war (563—8) must in the end be set against the
backdrop of generally peaceful relations between Romans and Blemmyes,
the peace achieved by Athanasius, duke of the Thebaid, in the early 570s
not long after the drafting of Theodore’s will, the tranquil conduct of busi-
ness between Romans and Blemmyes in Latopolis, and the apparent calm
in the First Cataract frontier zone with its garrisons of local militia at Syene,
Elephantine and Philai. 46

Third, Theodore’s position shows him to have been a bureaucrat who
served in the same provincial government as his father, that of the
Thebaid, under its duke. His father, dead by 5 67, had been a lawyer ( scholas -
ticus) of the ‘Thebaid’s Forum’, forum Thebaidos. Another document may
establish that Theodore had a brother serving the same provincial court
that his father had served. 4 ' This tendency of sons to follow their fathers
into government service is evidenced elsewhere in the papyri. 48 It was a
natural and easy course, but it was also one that came to the attention of
late imperial social legislation, especially in the fourth century. 49 By one
view, the laws, and particularly C.Tb. vn.22.2 (331), aimed to enforce hered-
itary service among staff officials; but by another, the aims were more
limited. They were to keep officials from jumping from one officium to
another, to ensure that sons enrolled in the same officium in which their
fathers had served, and to see to it that wealthy staff officials on retirement
did not escape certain financial obligations to the crown. 511

43 W.Chr. 6, in the new edition by Feissel and Worp (i 988) (p. 104 for Nestorius’ captivity); Shenoute,
Opera ed. Leipoldt, 111.67—77, with Leipoldt (1902—3). 44 Priscus fr. 21 (Dindorf).

45 Antaiopolis: P. Cair.Masp. 1 67009 v 1 6—20; Omboi: P. Cair.Masp. 1 67004; Hermopolis: P Cair.Masp.
hi 67321, P.Lond. v 1663, SB v 8028.

46 Gascou (1975) esp. 206; P.Cair.Masp. 1 67097 v bc, with MacCoull, Dioscorus 1 13— 1 5 (Athanasius);
BGU hi 972 (Latopolis contract); Keenan (1990) esp. 144—5.

47 P.Cair.Masp. 11 67169 + hi 67169 bis. 48 P.Lond. v 1714; BGU 1 306 + SB vi 9592.

49 Generally, Keenan (1975).

50 Jones, Roman Economy ch. 21, 396—418, at 403— 4; Jones, LRE 594—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

625

Theodore’s following his father in service in the same officium thus fits
both an expected familial pattern and a pattern sanctioned by late imperial
law. But where did provincial staff officials like Theodore ultimately come
from? The answer, reasonable but more assumed than proven, is that they
belonged to the provincial elite, and in many cases were men of the curial
class who in earlier times would have sought recognition through service
as members of municipal councils. Although the councils apparently con-
tinued to function down into the reign of Anastasius (491—518), the
papyrus evidence disappears shortly after 370 when the records for the
Oxyrhynchus council (boul ) come to a close. 51 The curial class, from
which members of the municipal councils had been and perhaps contin-
ued to be drawn, persevered and sometimes prospered in Egypt to the end
of Byzantine rule. Some of its members became counts, others reached
high office, many were substantial landowners. 52 Still others must have
sought political advancement through government service at the provin-
cial, or even higher, level in a world where despite, or rather because of, the
fragmentation of provinces, ‘power was more tightly channeled toward the
imperial center at Constantinople’. 53

In this gesture of following his father into bureaucratic service,
Theodore, whether of the curial class or not, 54 typified the provincial elite
of his age; but he is — finally — representative in yet one last and perhaps
most important respect — namely, in representing the common link
between private wealth and public service. The wealth, as typical of antiq-
uity as a whole, took the form of landed estates run by agents and stewards
for their absentee owners. In fact, the very existence of the provincial polit-
ical and cultural elites of late antiquity, and of the bureaucracies they
served, depended on the possibility and fruits of absentee landlordism.
Late antique Egypt presents many examples of this on various levels, 55 but
far and away best known is that presented by the Apion family of
Oxyrhynchus.

Although the history of the family can be notionally traced back to the mid
fifth century, the first known household head with the name Apion only
comes into evidence toward the close of the century, and then he appears

51 Bagnall, Egypt ch. 2; Maas, John Lydus 1 9. Later evidence is scrappy and sometimes indirect:
Geremek (1990).

52 Counts: P.Oxy. xvi 2002, Stud.Pal. xx 21 8. High office: Bernand (1969) 11.216 (decurion who is dux
et Augustalis of the Thebaid). Curiales as landlords: e.g. P.Cair.Masp. 1 67113, SB vi 9587 , Stud.Pal. 11 21 8
(sixth- and seventh-century land leases), P.Cair.Masp. n 67134, 67135, in 67327, PSI vm 935 (sixth-
century rent receipts); further (assorted fifth-century evidence): P.Michael. 33, P.Oxy. vi 902, 913.

53 Maas,y^« Lydus chs. 1—2. (The quotation is from p. 20.)

54 If P.Cair.Masp. n 67169 + in 67169 bis concerns his brother, then Theodore’s grandfather would
have been a count {comes). 55 Discussion and examples: Keenan (1974) 284—6 and notes.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6z6

21 C. EGYPT

as a landlord, not at Oxyrhynchus, but at Herakleopolis Magna. 56 It is this
Apion’s son, Flavius Strategius, who first appears as a great landlord
(geouc0n magnus possessor) at Oxyrhynchus in a document dating to 497. 57
The father, still alive, had been honoured with consular rank; the son had
attained high, though perhaps purely honorary, military rank as a ‘count of
the most devoted domestics’ ( comes devotissimorum domesticoruni). Apion the
father has been identified with Apion the Egyptian’, the leading patrician
who served as ‘quartermaster-general’ for the army Anastasius despatched
to relieve the town of Amida from Persian siege in 503. 58 The expedition
failed. Apion, when at Edessa, was relieved of his duties. In May 504 he
was, by one account, 59 summoned from Alexandria to Constantinople and
charged with having conspired against the expedition’s leading general,
Areobindus. He apparently spent the next several years in the imperial
capital, until the exile that led to his compulsory ordination at Nicaea in 5 1 1 .

In 518, the accession of Justin I returned Apion to favour and raised him
promptly to the praetorian prefecture of the East, perhaps following upon
a conversion from Monophysitism to Chalcedonian orthodoxy. The office
was not long held. Apion is last mentioned as prefect on 1 December 518;
his successor was in place by 19 November 519. 6,1 He apparently survived
into the early years of Justinian’s reign, dying by 5 32 or at some early date in
533. If this is the Apion who is to be credited with having founded his
family’s fortunes, that effort must have been made in the fifth century, before
his sixth-century service and detention abroad, and by means that are lost in
the documentary record. It is likelier, though sheerly speculative, that he was
not the founder but the inheritor of the family fortune, and that the work of
accumulation had been that of his father or grandfather, unknown to us but
active in the middle third of the fifth century or even earlier.

Strategius, the son of this Apion, is named in Edict XIII (chapters 1 5 ,
16) as having been prefect of Egypt around 523. He reappears in a text of
uncertain date as a m agister militum (St T 3 t hi eft hVi with consular rank, both
seemingly honorary titles, to which another, the patriciate, was added by
530. At the same time, he was a ‘leading citizen’ (prwte j WT) of both
Herakleopolis and Oxyrhynchus. 61 In 5 32 he presided over a synod of

56 SB vi 9152 (492), StudPal. xx 129 (497); cf. (perhaps) P.Oxy. xvi 1877 ( c . 488). Discussions on the
family and its members: P.Oxy. xvi 1829.24 n.; Hardy (1931) and (1968); PLRE 11.1 10—12 (Apion 1,
Apion 2, FI. Apion 3), 1034—6 (FI. Strategius 8 and 9) and Stemma 27 on p. 1325; Gascou (1985) esp.
App. 1 (pp. 61—75), with full presentation of the evidence. An earlier generation of the family has been
recendy identified. See P.Oxy. lxiii 4389 (439) and references in the note to line 1.

57 P.Oxy. xvi 1982. A possible earlier (489) appearance is in P.Flor. hi 325 (cf. Gascou (1985) 63 n.
356) where Strategius (restored) appears as a politeuomenos , i.e. curialis , of Oxyrhynchus and magnus pos-
sessor (g eouc0rj.

58 Hardy (1931) 25—6, Gascou (1985) 62, PLRE 11.11 1— 12 (Apion 2); contra P.Oxy. 1829.24 n.

59 Josh. Styl. Chron. (Wright) 58. 60 CJ vn.63.3; v.27.7.

61 P.Oxy. xvi 1984; xxvii 2779, similarly in xvi 1983 of a.d. 535. The significance of the term
prwt^wnis unclear: Hardy (1931) 32 n. 4; Gascou (1985) 64; PLRE 11.1036.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

627

Monophysite and Chalcedonian bishops at Constantinople. Shortly after,
he began service as the empire’s chief financial officer, count of the sacred
largesses. Besides duties that must have included overseeing the financing
of the construction of St Sophia, Strategius served on several occasions as
Justinian’s roving ambassador. It is assignments like these that suggest that
the ordinary consulship bestowed in 5 39 upon his son, Flavius Apion (II),
was a reward or memorial for the father’s distinguished career, an honour
to the family more than to Apion the man, who — to judge from the por-
trait medallion on his consular diptych, discovered in 1 860 in the cathedral
at Oviedo (Spain) — was still quite young, destined to survive his own con-
sular year by nearly forty more. 62

With this appointment, the Apion family reached its political zenith.
Flavius Apion II first appears in the papyri in 5 43 as consul ordinarius and great
landlord at Oxyrhynchus. As late as 577 he appears as former ordinary
consul, patrician and great landlord. His death fell between 577 and 579. 63 It
is to be presumed that Apion spent the earlier part of his public career in
the imperial capital, but returned to Egypt toward mid century, 548/50, to
take up his post as duke of the Thebaid. 64 After that, he served for a long
time as pagarch in the pagarchy of the Arsinoites and Theodosiopolites (the
old Arsinoite nome) where some of his ancestral property lay. In this office,
his primary responsibility was the collection of taxes for those parts of the
district that were not specifically excluded from his authority by imperial
grants of ‘autopragia’. 65 Apion appears first in this office, and also as magis-
ter militum, in 556; subsequently as pagarch and ex-consul. 66 The extent to
which he exercised his duties as pagarch by proxy, rather than in person, is
an insoluble problem. He was still pagarch at the time of his death, by which
time (unless it was a posthumous honour) he had also been named ‘first
patrician’ {protop atricius ), perhaps implying his presidency of the senate in
Constantinople. 67 Following his death, his estate went undivided to his heirs,
the most important of whom was his son, another Strategius, Strategius II,
about whom little is known. 68

It is the usually unnamed heirs of Apion II who prevail in the family’s
documentary record from 579 till 586/7, when they at last escape from ano-
nymity. 69 When they do, the heirs turn out to be Flavia Praeiecta, a woman

62 Hardy (1931) 32; Gascou (1985) 6 y,PLRE iiib.i 200— 1 (Strategius). Apion diptych: CIL 11.2699 =
Dessau, ILS 1.1310; medallion: Schefold (1945) with plates 3 and 4; career: PLRE niA.96— 8 (FI.
Strategius Apion Strategius Apion 3). 63 P.Oxy. xvi 1985; 1896; 1 135.

64 P.Oxy. 1 130, with P.Eond. v 1708.79 and the long discussion in the relevant note, together with
Gascou’s equally long discussion of the attendant dating (and other) problems: (1985) 66 n. 370.

65 Liebeschuetz (1974). Synoptic discussion and full bibliography: The Coptic Encyclopedia vi.1871— 2,
s.v. Pagarch (B. Verbeeck). 66 BGU 1 305, CPR xiv 10.

67 P.Oxy. xvi 1976 (582) and other documents; Gascou (1985) 66 and references in n. 374.

68 P.Oxy. xvi 1 829 is the key proof, though far from problem- free, of Strategius II’s position as prin-
cipal heir to Apion II. 69 P.Oxy. 1135, many other refs, in Gascou (1985) 68 n. 382.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6z8

21 C. EGYPT

of consular rank ( t p3tissa, fenrina consularis), either the wife or the sister
of Strategius II (who had apparently died), and her two sons — another
Apion (Apion III) and George, both with honorary consular rank. 7 "
George appears so far only once in the papyri; Praeiecta and Apion appear
in tandem in papyri of 590 and 591, the mother acting with and possibly
on behalf of her son, still a minor. 71 By 593, Apion is acting on his own and
Praeiecta has disappeared. 72 His marriage to Eusebia, daughter of a Roman
aristocratic family with friendly ties to the future pope Gregory the Great,
must already have taken place. 73

Apion III appears in documents of 593 and later as sole owner of die
family’s estates in Oxyrhynclius and as honorary consul. By 604/ 5 he had
attained die patriciate and continued to hold that dignity till (at least) mid
year 619. He was dead by the very beginning of 620, but his ‘glorious
household’ continued as an economic unit for another year or so, fading
from history early in die decade of the Persian conquest and occupation
(619— 29). 74 Apion III had, among other children, a son, Strategius (III),
still a youth at the turn of the century, and no longer confused (as he once
was) with anodier Flavius Strategius, a contemporary of Apion III, who
was apparently from a collateral line of the family that was more active in
the Arsinoite and Herakleopolite nomes than in the Oxyrhyncliite. This
older Strategius, first mentioned in a papyrus of 5 91, 75 and now com-
monly referred to as ‘pseudo-Strategius IIP, was himself an honorary
consul, and eventually a patrician. He is perhaps best known from docu-
ments of the first decade of the sevendi century that show him as pagarcli
of the Arsinoite and Theodosiopolite pagarchy, as Apion II had been
before him. 76 A person of eminence, he is credited with having prevented
a schism between the Egyptian Monophysite and Syrian churches at an
Alexandrian synod in 6 1 6; 77 but like Apion III, pseudo-Strategius III and
his household disappear from history in the early years of the Persian
occupation.

It is clear from this summary that the Apion family had a long and distin-
guished history, traceable for some six generations from the late fifth into
die early seventh century. If there are any trends to be perceived in all this,

70 P.Oxy. xviii 2196; PLRE niB.1049 (FI. Praeiecta 2). Praeiecta appears in most discussions (and
stemmata) as Strategius II’s wife; for arguments that she was his sister: CPR xiv, p. 43 n. 1.

71 PLRE 111A.51 5 (FI. Georgius 10); P.Oxy. xix 2243, xvi 1989—90, P.Erl. 67.

72 P.Oxy. xviii 2202, additional refs, in Gascou (1985) 70 n. 387, to which may be added numerous
new references in P. Oxy. lviii.

73 Cameron (1979) 225—7; Gascou (1985) 70; PLRE niA.98— 9 (FI. Apion 4). Eusebia and her mother
figure often in Gregory’s episdes, but leave no imprint in the documentary papyri.

74 Details in P.Oxy. lviii 3939.4—5 n., 3959 intro. 75 P.Oxy. lviii 3935.

76 Gascou (1985) 70—1 and n. 392; CPR xiv, pp. 41—8; PLRE niB.1203— 4 (FI. Strategius 10).

77 Hardy (1931) 3 5 — 6, Gascou (1985) 70—1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

629

one is that earlier household heads were more prominent than later ones
on the imperial political scene; Apion I and Strategius I must often have
been away from home on foreign assignment. It was once thought that
the later Apiones had retrenched, content with honorary dignities and
provincial or local offices, possibly becoming more Egyptian than their
predecessors, possibly reconverting to Monophysitism, choosing to live
in Egypt instead of die imperial capital. It is now thought diat the family’s
glory remained undimmed and that its members continued to move in
Constantinople’s social circles, spending more time away from than in
Egypt. 78

What the papyri contribute to the corporate history of the Apion family
is a rough but, as new papyri come to be published, increasingly refined
chronological outline of births and deaths, of offices held and honours
bestowed. This in itself is an important contribution, but it is rather to an
understanding of the economic foundation for the Apion social and polit-
ical success, the family’s landed wealth and its management, that the papyri
contribute most. A full treatment cannot be given here, but a sketch of the
Apion holdings at Oxyrhynchus (the best-known) and the principal fea-
tures in their management cannot be avoided. 79

Although hard statistical evidence is lacking, one estimate, with an indi-
rect basis on payments in kind for the ntDOl (grain shipments for
Constantinople), puts the extent of Apion holdings in the Oxyrhynchite
nome and the neighbouring Cynopolite at 1 1 2,000 arouras (75 ,000 acres) out
of a total available 280,000 arouras, roughly two-fifths the arable land in
those districts. 80 The presence of twenty stewards, prorohtay in an
account for Apion holdings just in the Oxyrhynchite is another telling if
imprecise indication, as is the fact that each pronoetes normally had charge
of several ‘estates ’ (kt rtata). 81 Apion holdings in the Arsinoite and
Herakleopolite nomes are assumed also to have been large, but the docu-
ments give no inkling whatsoever of their measure. Whatever their size, the
usual view is that the Apion estates did not conform to modern notions of
what estates are. That is, they did not form in any given area a coherent ter-
ritorial block. Instead they were scattered through various rural hamlets
( pcxki a) in the orbits of nome villages. The spread of the Apion proper-
ties, not only in the Oxyrhynchite and neighbouring Cynopolite districts,
but also in the Herakleopolite and Arsinoite, together with the frequent
absenteeism of the family heads, necessitated for their operation an exten-
sive private bureaucracy of agents (doikhta< ), clerks ( chartularii ), stewards
( pronoetai ), and bankers. It also required a communications network that
included both an ‘express post’ (cursus velox) and a slow post by land, with

78 Gascou (1985) 74—5; Cameron (1979) 225—7, es P- 22 5 n - 22 > 22 7 n - 34-

79 I rely heavily on Hardy (193 1) for what follows. 80 Jones, LRE 780, 784.

81 P.O>y. xvi 2032, 1 136 (= WChr. 383).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

630

21 C. EGYPT

their stables and riders ( symmachoi , messengers), and estate boats with their
sailors (HB tai) for river travel and transport. 82

The earliest document from the Oxyrhynchite part of the archive, a.d.
497, includes features that show that the Apion estate system was already
fully developed and brings the realization that, despite efforts to the con-
trary, 83 barring new discoveries, there will never be any way for the histo-
rian to trace its origins or early development. The document in question 84
is of a type common in the archive, a so-called receipt for agricultural
machinery. In its formulaic structure there lies an embedded narrative, a
little drama: 85 an Apion tenant acknowledges that he has found need of a
piece of agricultural machinery, in this case (as in many others: presumably
axles were most liable to wear or breaking) a new axle for a water wheel
(nincan ). He has ‘gone up’ from his rural hamlet ( pcxkior), part of an
Apion estate (kt na), to the city, Oxyrhynchus, and received the needed
part. He promises to irrigate faultlessly a plot of land called Thryeis. He
will in due time pay his rents to the estate account.

Typical features include the Apion ownership of the ‘means of produc-
tion’ — not just the land, but the estate’s more expensive equipment: the irri-
gation machines and their spare parts, in addition to the oil presses, mills
and bakeries evidenced in other documents. The Oxyrhynchus estate’s
‘company store’ lies in the city, but the farmlands are outside. Typical is the
formulary on which this specific document is based: the resulting document
turns out to be more like a formal contract between two parties, landlord
and tenant, than would seemingly be required in the normal course of oper-
ating an agricultural enterprise, where a verbal agreement or a short written
receipt should have sufficed. The formula is not only elaborate, but long-
lasting; it is found as late as 616. 86 Most significant is that the tenant farmer
is styled an rap gra a/ge/vrg Vin the Greek text, a term which is a lin-
guistic equivalent to a Latin term found in the late imperial law codes: colonus
adscripticius. The laws proclaim that the status of such individuals was barely
distinguishable from that of slaves. 87 They were, it seems, ‘tied to the soil’;
but this, according to a recent argument, 88 was accomplished, not by public
intervention, but by a process of private registration or listing ( pogra<p ).
The tenant first entered upon a contractual arrangement with his landlord
(a work contract, a lease). The landlord then agreed to pay his tenant’s taxes
for him and the tenant came to be registered in his landlord’s census.

Curiously, nearly all enapographoi in the papyri are to be found in docu-
ments from Oxyrhynchus, 89 and most of these Oxyrhynchite documents

82 See esp. P.Oxy. i 136 (= WChr. 383), contract for hire of a pronoetes , a.d. 583.

83 Fikhman (1975). 84 P.Oxy. xm 11982. 85 Hardy (1931) 127-8. 86 P.Oxy. xvi 1991.

87 E.g. CJ xi.48.21 (5 30), Jones, LRE 801; but for the realities, see Fikhman (1991) and Sirks (1993).

88 Sirks (1993).

89 Exceptions: SB xviii 13949 (541): Oxyrhynchite landlords, two enapographoi from a Herakleopolite
hamlet.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

631

concern the Apions and their tenants. Besides showing Apion coloni going
up to die city for machinery parts, they frequendy show them being
sworn for in documents that have come to be called sureties or guaran-
tees ( cautionnements , Biirgschaft-urkundeti)? 1 In some of these the formulary
is, like that for agricultural machinery receipts, surprisingly elaborate and
equally long-lived . 91 In a leading example of die genre , 92 an Oxyrhynchus
lead-worker named Aurelius Pamoutliius goes bail for a colonus named
Aurelius Abraham from the Apion estate ( ktema ) of Great Taroutliinas in
the Oxyrhyncliite nome. Pamoutliius guarantees that Abraham will
remain on his assigned estate together with his ‘family and wife and
animals and furniture’. If Abraham’s presence is required by his landlords
(the heirs of Apion II), Pamoutliius will ensure Abraham’s production in
the same public place where he received him, ‘the jail of the said glorious
house’.

The mention of the jail of the glorious house suggests that the Apiones
exercised a coercive authority that impinged on the official coercive author-
ity of the government. This, in fact, was reinforced by their employment
of soldiers known as ‘doughboys’ or ‘biscuit eaters’, bucellarii? 1 ’ These in
Apion estate accounts appear often to be of foreign, sometimes Gothic,
origin; they were paid in kind (in grain, meat, wine and oil) and in cash, and
served the glorious house as a mercenary police force.

The presence of an estate jail and the employment of bucellarii are at first
glance shocking because these were two practices, following upon that of
patronage, that late imperial legislation tried vainly to check — yet the
Apiones were closely connected to the imperial court . 94 And these two
practices, added to the existence of great estates farmed by coloni adscripticii
(‘serfs’), are most responsible for the impression that the Apion household,
that Oxyrhynchus with its other great landlords, that late antique Egypt as
a whole was ‘feudal’ in the medieval sense of the term, and that the great
houses of Egypt were resistant to and in conflict with the imperial govern-
ment . 95 Nowadays, it is argued that the Apion and other great houses of
Egypt were not working in conflict with the imperial government, but
rather with its (eventual) approval and sanction. It is not only that bucellarii
may have been at least semi-official in character , 96 privately mustered with
government approval, but that if private interests in Egypt had not (for
example) assumed the upkeep and repair of the irrigation works, the
economy would have collapsed and the imperial capital itself would have

90 Summary discussion with a list of parallel documents in Fikhman (1981).

91 Latest example, P.Oyy. lviii 3959 (Persian period, 620).

92 P.Oyy. 1 135 (579), with several reprintings: WChr. 384, Meyer, JJP 51, Sel.Pap. 1 26, FIRA hi 13.

93 Hardy (1931) esp. 60—71, cf. Robinson (1968); Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 43—7; Schmitt

(1994). 94 Keenan (1975) esp. 243—4 and n. 14.

95 Early and most influential presentation of the ‘feudal model’: Bell (1917). See Keenan (1993).

96 Gascou (1985). Cf. on the bucellarii Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops 43—7 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

632

210 EGYPT

yi^nii>i)jc vfa

■^V ' ■ i- H*.iiit'-rr t .

' i^^'rarcW' v'4 d | 4'^^I - f

;J, #&* 4<i(v# -*- - #• &^A**-* vT My,/

Fig. 21 Deed of surety sworn by a lead-worker, Aurelius Pamouthius, on behalf of Aurelius
Abraham, colonus adscripticius to the heirs of the Oxyrhynchus landlord, Flavius Apion, 579. P.Oxy.
135. (Photo: courtesy of the Egypt Exploration Society. Copyright: The Egyptian Museum, Cairo)

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

633

become vulnerable to famine. 9 ' The new view may in effect be more a
refinement than a rejection of the feudal model. Whether the new view is
right or not (it does seem to fly in the face of some of the legal evidence),
the old one was wrong in laying too much stress on, and generalizing too
much from, the evidence from Oxyrhynchus, to the neglect of other sites:
Hermopolis, for example, one of whose estates was judged on the basis of
a long agricultural ledger to have been ‘managed with great wisdom and
great humanity’, 98 and even more so the middle Egyptian village of
Aphrodito.

The sixth-century history of that village and its regional and imperial con-
nections can be partially reconstructed thanks to the survival of an archive
preserved by one Flavius Dioscorus." Although Dioscorus himself was
probably not born until around 520, the archive includes a few papers
of earlier date. The family’s Egyptian roots are intimated by the name of
its earliest known member, ‘old man Psimanobet’, 100 who presumably
reached his prime in the mid fifth century. Psimanobet, whose Egyptian
name signified ‘son of the gooseherd’, had a son, Dioscorus, who in turn
had children, including a son named Apollos. It is this Apollos, father of
Flavius Dioscorus, whose activities come to light initially in the Dioscorus
papyri. He first appears in 514 as a village headman (prwtokwmthyi of
Aphrodito, appearing later, in the 5 30s, as a member of the village’s board
of ‘contributaries ’ (sirtd esta<), jointly responsible for the village’s tax
collection. 101 He may also have served the local great landlord, count
Ammonius, as ‘collector’ ( t pod kthyj ; 102 but all the while he was operat-
ing as an entrepreneur in his own right, taking land in lease concurrently
from many absentee landlords — from curiales of Antaiopolis, from bureau-
crats and lawyers from Panopolis and (probably) Antinoopolis, and from
one of the village churches. He sublet these parcels or saw by other means
to their being worked by a local force of free tenant farmers. 119 ’ In the last
decade of his life, by 538, Apollos became a monk, 104 without fully retiring
from worldly business. The year 541 found him in the imperial capital in
the company of his fraternal nephew, a priest named Victor. There the two
villagers took out a loan of twenty solidi from a banker named Flavius
Anastasius, a ‘waiter of the sacred table’, due for repayment four months

97 See on the irrigation works, their operation and maintenance, Bonneau (1970), with special atten-
tion to the Apiones. 98 Schnebel (1928).

99 Discussions of the village and its chief family: Bell (1944); Keenan (1984a); MacCoull, Dioscorus
esp. 1— 15; Gagos and van Minnen (1994). Dioscorus’ career: PLRE 111A.404— 6 (FI. Dioscorus 5),
differing in some details from what is presented here. 100 P.Lond. v 1691.1 5—16.

101 First appearance: PFlor. hi 280; Apollos’ career: Keenan (1984b).

102 Hardy (1931) 144; Thomas (1987) 61, 72, approved by MacCoull (1993a) 21 n. 2. Count
Ammonius: PLRE 111A.56— 7 (FI. Ammonius I).

103 A critical documentis P.Cair.Masp. hi 67327; discussion: Keenan (1985a), cf. Thomas (1987) 72—3.

104 PSI viii 933.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

634

21 C. EGYPT

later in Alexandria. 105 Before his death in 547 Apollos founded a monas-
tery named for the ‘Holy Christ-Bearing Aposdes’, appointing his own son,
the family’s second Dioscorus, as the foundation’s lay ‘curator’ (cpfOn
tist V ). 106

This Dioscorus, so it seems, received a fine literary, rhetorical and legal
education, paid for by his entrepreneurial and upwardly mobile father. It is
usually assumed that this educational polish was applied in Alexandria, a
flourishing, cosmopolitan ‘university town’, where, in Dioscorus’ day, a
major intellectual figure would have been John Philoponus, 107 the prolific
grammarian, philosopher and theologian. So it is perhaps a bit ironic that
in Dioscorus’ first dated occurrence in the papyri, in a.d. 543, he appears
as victim of a typically rustic trespass: the standing crops in a field he was
holding, apparently under lease from a local monastery, had been trampled,
uprooted and mired, thanks to an unruly drover who had run his sheep
through them. 108 Like his father before him, Dioscorus travelled to
Constantinople. He was there in 551 to defend the right of Aphrodito to
collect its own taxes (the privilege called ‘autopragia’, ‘self-collection’)
without interference from the district’s pagarch. It was on that visit that he
and some fellow villagers secured a rescript from Justinian and hired two
exsecutores negotii (‘executors of the business’), one of them a count of the
sacred consistory, both of them citizens of Leontopolis in Cappadocia, to
assist in enforcing the village’s claimed rights against the pagarch’s alleged
violations back home. 109 That in Constantinople he met Romanos the
Melodist, and in later retrospect commemorated the occasion with an
acrostic poem in his honour, is an attractive but problematic bit of specu-
lation. 1 10

Back in Egypt, Dioscorus had by a.d. 5 66 taken up residence in the pro-
vincial capital, Antinoopolis. There he put his legal training to use, settling
disputes and drawing up contracts and other documents in Greek and in
Coptic, 1 1 1 including the will of Flavius Theodore discussed above. This was
one of many papers Dioscorus brought back to Aphrodito on his return
in 573. The remarkable thing about the documents written in Antinoopolis
is that they were often on very large sheets of papyrus which Dioscorus
saved for scrap. On their versos he composed, in autograph drafts showing

105 P.Cair.Masp. 11 67126; discussion: Keenan (1992).

106 See esp. P.Cair.Masp. 1 67096, cf. Thomas (1987) 64, 73.

107 RE ix.2 (1916) 1764—95 (Kroll). 108 P.Cair.Masp. 1 67087, with Keenan (1985b).

109 Critical documents include P.Cair.Masp. 1 67024 (rescript), 67032 (contract with exsecutores negotii ,
also accessible as Meyer, JJP 52 and FIRA in 179), SB iv 7438 (letter of recommendation for
Dioscorus); synoptic discussion with pertinent references: Keenan (1975) 244—6. Further, esp. on
P.Cair.Masp. 67024: Geraci (1979) with extensive bibliography.

110 Kuehn (1990) (for the connection); van Minnen (1992) esp. 97—8 (opposed).

111 MacCoull, Dioscorus esp. ch. 2 (pp. 16—56); cf. MacCoull (1981) and (1986b) (= MacCoull (1993b)
chs. xii and x).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

635

corrections, what were once judged the last and worst Greek poems —
birthday and wedding poems, panegyrics, encomiums and ‘salutations’
(CairdiSROX) — antiquity had produced; but these are now being re-
evaluated with a new sense of their artistry that largely stems from a new
appreciation for the Weltanschauung they reveal . 112 They are the bookish
poems of a scholar whose library included codices and rolls of Homer,
Aristophanes, Menander (including a likely lawyer’s favourite, the arbitra-
tion scene from the Epitrepontes ) 1 1 3 and Eupolis, the poetry of Anacreon, a
life of the orator Isocrates and a Greek— Coptic glossary . 114

This archive, then, was the collection of an educated, bilingual, perhaps
even trilingual, lawyer; it is full of information on Dioscorus’ general
milieu, but also on more mundane matters like his village’s society and
economy. In this evidence we find that, in contrast to the great landlords
of Oxyrhynchus and their coloni, Aphrodito’s core was its small landhold-
ers . 115 ‘For the village consists of smallholders (I qrtokt tore))’, accord-
ing to a long petition to the duke of the Thebaid , 116 and wretched though
they at times claim to have been (when it suited their purposes ), 117 they
seem on the whole to have been prosperous and well-organized: prosper-
ous enough to send delegations to Constantinople to plead their case
before the crown, and organized into a ‘ collegium of village headmen (pfW-
tokwmtai), contributaries (sirtel esta<) and landowners (kt tore))’ to
represent the village in its formal business . 118 The village claimed, besides,
the special protection of the ‘divine house’ ( divina domus) of the empress
Theodora and could gather as signatories in a report to her: eleven priests,
a reader, a deacon and a monk; twenty-two landholders and a village
headman; two notaries; the heads of the guilds of smiths, fullers, carpen-
ters, weavers, boatwrights, wine merchants — and more . 119

The village itself , 120 a former nome metropolis since demoted, domi-
nated a number of surrounding satellite villages. Located on a tell in the Nile
flood-plain, it was surrounded by land in quarters (psJ cfcie) named for the
four main compass points. The land was sometimes classed as estates
(kt rrata), farms (ge rgia) and pastures (bosk rrata), in an apparently
descending order of value. Estates, sometimes amply described, included
such things as cisterns, wine vats, towers, vegetable gardens, vineyards and

112 Early (negative) appraisal: Maspero (1911). Current standard edition for most of the poems:
Heitsch (1963) 1 27—52; a new edition byJ.-L. Fournet is in preparation. See further Viljamaa (1968). Re-
evaluation: Baldwin (1984) 11.327— 31; MacCoull, Dioscorus esp. ch. 3 (pp. 57—146); Kuehn (1995).

113 This point is made in Gagos and van Minnen (1994) 3 3—4.

114 List of works: Bell (1944) 27; Homer: P.Cair.Masp. n 67172—4; life of Isocrates: P.Cair.Masp. 11

67175; Anacreon: P.Cair.Masp. 1 67097 v F, with MacCoull, Dioscorus esp. 1 19—21; glossary: Bell and
Crum (1925). 115 For much of what follows: Keenan (1984a). 116 P.Lond. v 1674.95—6.

117 E.g. P.Cair.Masp. 1 67002.2. 118 P.CairMasp. 1 67001.

119 Divina domus-. Zingale (1984—5); signatories: P.Cair.Masp. in 67283 with intro, and Jones, LRE
847-8. 120 Topographical and other data in Calderini (1966) 303-414.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 3 6

21 C. EGYPT

orchards with trees of various kinds — date palms, olives, mulberries, citrons,
acacias . 121 There were monasteries outside the village and numerous
churches within. Also within were private houses, some of reputed gran-
deur, and in one part of town, houses owned or formerly owned by a shep-
herd, a vetch-seller, a cook, a smith, a headman and a priest . 122 There must
also have been houses or shops in which artisans plied their crafts — smiths,
fullers, carpenters, weavers, the boatwrights who made wickerwork skiffs for
canal and river travel — and where wine merchants sold their wares . 123 There
were walled-in gardens in the residential areas; a record office, storehouse,
threshing-floor, guardhouse; an olive works on Isis street; potteries and a
monastic hostel . 124

The sense conveyed by all of this — when added to the agrarian dealings of
Apollos, the literary efforts of his son, and the villagers’ journeys to
Constantinople — is one of vitality, activity and variety, not, as was once
maintained, ‘appalling dullness’; and the sense of variety might be further
developed by appealing to other archives: the Taurinus archive from
Hermopolis, for example, with its landowning soldiers and bureaucrats, or
the Patermuthis archive from Syene (modern Aswan), with its border
guards and boatmen, house sales and inheritance disputes. 125 The
Dioscorus archive ends with unfortunate abruptness with a document of
no great significance, a pasture lease dated to 5 April 5 85 ; 126 but Dioscorus’
village reappears in the early eighth century with another important (and
final) Greek-Egyptian archive, embodied in the correspondence between
the district pagarch, Flavius Basilius, and the Arab governor of Egypt,
Kurrah ibn Sharik. There the linguistic shift from administrative Greek to
Arabic is clearly seen to be under way. 127

The intervening years, in particular those down to 642, were marked by
a turbulent and confusing rush of events, of great significance for Egypt
and for the Byzantine empire at large. The record, especially for events set
forth in the damaged, biased but invaluable Chronicle of John, bishop of
Nikiu, 128 gives an unremitting series of examples of courage and cowar-
dice, carnage and cruelty on all sides. There was, of course, the familiar
street violence in Alexandria, ignited by politics and religion, tempered at

121 See esp. P.Mich. xm 666, cf. PCair.Masp. i 67097 r, 111 67300.8—9, P.Lond. v 1695.4—9, P.Michael.
48.16—17. 122 PCair.Masp. 1 67002 11 24 (grand old houses); P.Mich. xm 665.

123 Evidence in MacCoull (1 984) (= MacCoull (1 993b) ch. xx). Comparable variety in other Egyptian
locales: Fikhman (1965) (in Russian).

124 Calderini (1966) 303—414: P.Lond. v 1691, PCair.Masp. 1 67109 (gardens); P.Flor. m 285 (olive
works).

125 Taurinus archive: BGU xii, with extensive introduction by H. Maehler, cf. now also Palme (1 994).

Patermuthis archive: P.Munch., P.Lond. v 1722—37, with Farber (1986) and the series of articles in BASP
27 (1990) 1 1 1—62. 126 PCair.Masp. m 67325 iv r. 127 See e.g. P.Lond. iv, cf Abbott (1938).

128 Charles (1916).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

EGYPT

637

times by the charities of John III, ‘the Almsgiver’, the revered
Chalcedonian patriarch, 610— 19. 129 Just before his patriarchate, Alexandria
was thrown into turmoil by the revolt of Heraclius against the unpopular
emperor Phocas. The very end of his patriarchate was attended and fol-
lowed by the Persian invasion and occupation of 619— 29. 130 This in turn
was prelude to the Arab invasion and the final occupation of Egypt,
639—42, under ‘Amr ibn al-'Asi. In these last-mentioned years began the
process whereby Egypt and its people adopted the Arabic language and
became overwhelmingly Islamic in faith. So also began the process
whereby Greek culture in Egypt disappeared and the indigenous Coptic
culture was much eclipsed. 131 As a result of the Arab conquest, in addition
to the magnificent city of Alexandria, the Byzantine empire forever lost
Constantinople’s principal source of food and a substantial portion of the
annual imperial revenues. 132 The human toll, especially at the beginning of
this transformation, was, by all accounts, enormous. The story of what
happened in that period was, at the beginning of the twentieth century, bril-
liantly reconstructed and retold, but in an old-fashioned, largely pre-
papyrological way. 133 That story, which continues the one sketched above,
now begs retelling with a full accounting for the papyrological evidence. 134

129 Monks (1953).

130 The Coptic Encyclopedia vi. 193 8— 41, s.v. Persians in Egypt (R. Altheim-Stiehl).

131 MacCoull (1989) (= MacCoull (1993b) ch. xxvi); and see also Samir (1986).

132 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century esp. 10— 1 1; Haas (1997) 3 37—51; Fraser (1993) [1995].

133 Buder (1978), cf. The Coptic Encyclopedia 1.183—9, s - v - Arab conquest of Egypt (P. M. Fraser).

134 For the evidence see Fraser’s extensive ‘Additional Bibliography’ in Buder (1978), with Bagnall’s
review, Classical Journal 75 (1979—80) 347—8; also: MacCoull (1986a) (= MacCoull (1993b) ch. xii). An
important, recendy published seventh-century document: Gascou (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 22 a

THE SASANID MONARCHY

ZE'EV RUBIN

I. ROMANS AND SASANIDS

A chapter dealing with Iranian feudalism in a distinguished series dedicated
to The Rise and Fall of the Roman World bears the title Iran, Rome’s Greatest
Enemy. This title is more than merely a justification for the inclusion of a
chapter on Iran in a series whose subject is Roman history. It also reflects
a host of fears and prejudices fostered for long centuries in the Roman
world, since the trauma of Crassus’ defeat by the Parthians at Carrhae. Not
even extended periods of decline and internal disarray within the Parthian
monarchy, in the course of which it was repeatedly invaded by the Roman
army, could dispel the myth of the uncompromising threat posed by Iran
to the Roman order. The replacement of the Parthian Arsacid dynasty by
a new vigorous one, based in Fars, namely the Sasanid dynasty, at a time
when the Roman empire itself was facing one of its severest crises, only
aggravated its inhabitants’ deeply rooted fear of Iran. Ancient writers in the
Roman oikoumene passed on this attitude to modern western scholars . 1

It is the Sasanid bogeyman which has left a deep imprint in modern
historiography. The Sasanid state is widely regarded as a much more cen-
tralized and effective political entity than its Parthian counterpart, with a far
better army. The great pretensions and aspirations of its monarchs are
believed to have been fed by the fervour of religious fanaticism, inspired
by the Zoroastrian priesthood, which is commonly depicted as a well orga-
nized state church. No wonder that such a state posed the gravest threat to
its greatest rival — the other great power of late antiquity . 2 Each of these
accepted beliefs raises a multitude of problems, and a fundamental revision
is called for. Only a few of the more salient points can be dealt with in the
present brief survey.

The Sasanid empire embraced two distinct geographical areas, the very
fertile lowlands of Mesopotamia and the Iranian uplands, which were separ-
ated from each other by the mighty Zagros chain that stretched from the

1 Widengren (1976). In general, see the contributions in Yar-Shater (1983); also Schippmann (1990),
Herrmann (1977), Christensen (1944). There are detailed bibliographic essays in Wiesehofer (1996)
282—300. 2 Howard-Johnston (1995); Lee (1993) 1 5— 25.

638

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ROMANS AND SASANIDS 639

Kurdistan highlands to the fringes of the Persian Gulf in the south. 3
Mesopotamia, where a complex irrigation system permitted dense settle-
ment, was the economic heart of the Persian realm, whose rich agriculture
generated the largest part of the Sasanid state’s tax revenues and supported
a network of major cities: Ctesiphon, the capital; Veh Ardashir, on the west
bank of the Tigris opposite Ctesiphon, which was founded by the first
Sasanid monarch; Perozshapur on the Euphrates, which commemorated the
site of Shapur Ps victory over Gordian and exploited the large number of
Roman captives secured then; and Veh Antiok Khusrau, which was a similar
foundation by Khusro I to celebrate his capture of Antioch on the Orontes
and provide a home for the captives and booty from his successful 540 cam-
paign. By contrast, the Iranian plateau was sparsely settled, with the main
centres of habitation clustered around and along the sources of water
emerging from the Zagros: rainfall is low, and beyond the reach of rivers and
qanats (underground water channels) lay the expanse of the Gedrosian
Desert in the south-east, where much of Alexander’s army had perished in
324 b.c., and the salt desert of the Great Kavir to the north. On the fringes
of the Sasanid world were further distinct areas of considerable military
importance: the sub-Caucasian zone in the north-west, where Iran competed
for influence with Rome among the nobilities of Armenia, Lazica, Iberia and
Albania and attempted to control movements across the Caucasus passes,
and the wide expanses of Transoxiana, where Iran had to confront its tradi-
tional enemies, the succession of nomadic federations of the Central Asian
steppes, the Hephthalites or White Huns who dominated the frontier in the
fourth and fifth century and the Turks who co-operated with Khusro I in the
elimination of their mutual enemy, the Hephthalites, in the 5 50s and then
rapidly emerged as a much more powerful threat during the rest of the sixth
century. The vast barrier of the Zagros restricted communications to a
limited number of major passes, so that the structural backbone of the
empire was simple: from the economic and political heartland of lower
Mesopotamia, routes up the Tigris led to the area of conflict with Rome in
the north and north-west, while the road to the east crossed the Zagros into
Media and then continued along the southern flanks of the Elburz range,
another major defining mountain range, towards Khorasan and the frontier.

The Sasanid heartland was located in Fars, the relatively fertile region at
the south-western end of the Iranian plateau, where the family combined
positions of religious authority (the chief priesthood of the temple of
Anahita at Istakhr) and secular power (governorship of Darabjird). After
two decades in which a strong local power base was transformed into author-
ity over the Iranian plateau, Ardashir descended to the Mesopotamian low-
lands, overthrew the Arsacid monarch and was crowned King of Kings at

3 Comprehensive discussion of all aspects of Iranian geography in Fisher (1968).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

' Theodosiopolis

45°B-— 5 l

CASPIAN

TRANSOXIANA

ArridaX / ARMENIA

c^Edessa r 1 ODara^
^Carrhae^LA"" Nisibis

s KURDISTAN

TURKESTAN

j ADHARBAIJAN e// Jf

GURGAN

Palmyra o

O ,k X ^^ZagrosX ^ /

, ^ Gates \ J

X Perozshapur^^(f Ct e^iphon/ / V > — - r — ' f
k' _ A^Veh Arda4irl \CZagros Mts

<j» Rayy^

PARTHIA

Great Kavir
Salt Desert

Hira o V% The Susa

ASHURESTANt^a^ac/S C^- X

Dasht-i Lut

PersepolisS

| | Land over 1000 metres

SCALE |

0 100 200 300 400 400 km

0 100 200 300 miles

A >V> ( I

X \fars

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ROMANS AND SASANIDS

641

Ctesiphon in 226. Military success, and in particular conflict with Rome, was
an important mechanism for demonstrating the legitimacy of the new
regime. The initial thrusts of the two first Sasanid monarchs, Ardashir I
(224—40) and Shapur I (240—70), against the Roman east turned out, in the
long run, to be little more than a series of wars of plunder: the Romans were
defeated three times in the field, with the emperor Valerian being captured
at Edessa in 260; the great cities of Nisibis, Carrhae and Antioch were
sacked; and ravaging extended into Cappadocia and Cilicia as well as Syria —
but there were no permanent gains. 4 Under their immediate successors,
aggressive initiative seems to have passed momentarily to the Romans. The
conflicts between the two empires at that time brought to the foreground the
problem of Armenia, which was to be a major bone of contention for most
of the following century. The attempt of king Narseh (293—302) to regain
the upper hand ended in humiliating defeat by the Romans in 297, followed
by a no less humiliating treaty. The tide was partly reversed during the long
reign of Shapur II (309—79). The wars fought between the two powers at the
time were largely over contested frontier lands — first and foremost Armenia
and northern Mesopotamia. Stability began to emerge after Julian’s invasion
in 363 permitted the Persians to regain Nisibis and other territories in upper
Mesopotamia, and this was reinforced by the treaty between Shapur III
(383—8) and Theodosius I in 384, which arranged the division of Armenia. 5

This ushered in a long period of relative quiet in the relations between the
eastern Roman empire and Persia, apart from two brief conflicts, in 421—2
and 440—1. On the first occasion, the dispute was caused by the Roman
reception of Christian fugitives, especially from the Arab tribes allied to
Persia: Yazdgard I (399—421) had been favourably disposed towards
Christians and other minority religious groups within his kingdom, but ener-
getic Christian missionary activity seems eventually to have forced him to
permit persecution; an Arab chief, Aspabad, was instructed to prevent the
flight of Christian converts to the Romans, but he in fact joined the exodus,
converted and, now renamed Peter, became bishop for the wandering tribal
groups in the desert. 6 Persian demands for subsidies towards the cost of
defending the Caspian passes (the so-called Gates) caused the second
conflict, when Yazdgard II (438—57) attempted to exploit Theodosius’
concern over the Vandal capture of Carthage. On each occasion Roman
armies checked Persian attacks and peace was rapidly restored, with renewed
treaties that contained clauses to regulate the alleged origins of the war. 7

A plausible explanation for the change from persistent warfare in the
third and fourth century to peaceful relations in the fifth is provided by the

4 Sources in Dodgeon and Lieu (1991) 9—67.

5 Rubin (1986); Frye in Yar-Shater (1983) 1 5 3—70; Blockley (1992) 39—45; Whitby, Maurice 197—218.

6 Cyril of Scythopolis, Life of Euthjmius 10, on which see Rubin (1986) 679—81 and Blockley (1992)

199 n. 28. 7 Blockley (1992) 56—61; Frye (1984) 320—1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

642

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

other external problems which faced successive rulers: developments in the
west and the Balkans, as well as internal problems in Isauria, commanded
the attention of the emperor at Constantinople, while Sasanid kings had to
contend with the equally serious threat posed by the Hephthalites on their
north-east frontier. This Sasanid problem is not regularly reported in our
sources. The succession of Greek classicizing historians from Priscus of
Panium through to Theophylact Simocatta narrate diplomacy and warfare
that involved Romans and Sasanids, but only rarely extend their horizons
further east. 8 Sasanid sources are mostly preserved for us through compi-
lations from the Islamic period, of which the most important are the Annals
of al-Tabari in Arabic and the Shahnama or Book of Kings of Firdawsi in new
Persian. Both date from the tenth century and depend on lost Iranian
sources in which anecdotal material had substantially ousted reliable infor-
mation, so that the resulting narratives are dominated by charming and
exotic stories. Though al-Tabari attempted to cut his way through the more
sensational of his source material and produce a sober historical narrative,
he still incorporated two parallel versions of Sasanid history; it is not safe
to trust his information uncritically. 9 Furthermore, these Iranian sources
are more informative for the royal court and internal affairs and, like their
Roman counterparts, are silent about a difficult frontier relationship in
which the Persians were often at a disadvantage. Only for the reign of
Peroz (459—84) is there substantial information about Persian— Hephthalite
relations, partly because Peroz was defeated in 464/ 5 when the Roman
ambassador Eusebius was accompanying the royal army, partly because
two decades later Peroz perished with much of his army in a catastrophic
attempt to reverse the previous humiliation. 1 "

The death of Peroz was followed by a period of dynastic weakness in Iran:
Peroz’ brother Valash ruled for four years (484—8) before being overthrown
by Peroz’ son Kavadh (48 8—96), who relied on Hephthalite support. Kavadh,
however, was in turn ousted by the nobility and replaced by his brother
Zamaspes (496—8), but he was returned to power (498—531) with
Hephthalite assistance, after marrying the king’s daughter. His reign wit-
nessed the rise of the Mazdakite ‘movement’ (see p. 65 5 below), which advo-
cated communal rights over property, and perhaps also women; it appears to
have received some support from the king, and can be interpreted as an
attempt to undermine the entrenched power of the hereditary aristocracy.
An indirect consequence of Kavadh ’s dynastic problems was the resurgence
of warfare with Rome: Kavadh undoubtedly needed money to repay the
Hephthalites and to enhance his position as supreme patron within Persia,
and this led to a request to the Romans for contributions towards the costs

8 Discussions in Blockley (1981); Cameron (1969/70); Cameron, Procopius', Blockley (1985); Whitby,
Maurice. 9 Howard-Johnston (1995) 169—72. 10 Procop. Wars 1.3—4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ROMANS AND SASANIDS 643

of defending the Caspian Gates. Anastasius’ refusal provided a pretext for
war (502—5), in which Kavadh secured considerable prestige and booty
through the capture of Theodosiopolis and Amida during his first campaign,
whereafter Roman generals gradually stabilized the position. 11

In the sixth century, Roman— Persian relations are characterized by two
opposite tendencies: the recollection of the relatively harmonious fifth
century, during which elaborate diplomatic practices for managing rela-
tions had emerged, and international rivalry caused both by weaknesses in
the position of the Persian king and by mutual suspicions of each other’s
intentions. Towards the end of Kavadh’s reign, in 527, war again broke out:
tension was already increasing because of competition for the allegiance of
the sub-Caucasian principalities, where acceptance of Christianity by local
rulers threatened to weaken loyalties to Persia, but the flashpoint came
when Justin I refused to co-operate with Kavadh’s plans to ensure the suc-
cession of his third son, Khusro. Overall, the Persians were on the
offensive, but a sequence of invasions failed to result in the capture of any
major Roman city, and two pitched battles, at Dara in 5 30 and Callinicum
in 531, resulted in one victory for either side. Hostilities were concluded in
the Endless Peace of 5 32, when the new Persian king, Khusro 1(53 1—79),
accepted a lump sum of 1 1 ,000 pounds of gold in lieu of regular contribu-
tions for the defence of the Caucasus. 12

Peace did not last. Justinian exploited the quiet on his eastern frontier to
launch the reconquest of Africa and Italy, but his startling victories were
brought to Khusro ’s attention; jealousy fuelled suspicions about Justinian’s
long-term intentions, and Khusro exploited a dispute between client Arab
tribes to attack in 5 40. After spectacular Persian successes in this first cam-
paign, the Romans organized their defences, and after 545 a truce confined
lighting to Lazica. The respective Arab allies continued their own conflict
until in 5 54 the Ghassanid allies of Rome secured a decisive victory near
Chalcis, in which the Lakhmid king al-Mundhir, the scourge of Roman prov-
inces for the previous half-century, was killed. Peace finally came in 562 with
an agreement that was intended to endure for fifty years; the detailed terms,
which illustrate the range of disputed issues that might provoke conflict, are
preserved in an important fragment of Menander Protector. 13 Peace lasted
for a decade, but on this occasion the Romans were the agressors: Justin II
objected to paying for peace (at the rate of 30,000 solidi per year) and believed
that he could count on the support of the Turkish federation in Central Asia,
which had replaced the Hephthalites as Persia’s north-eastern neighbours, to
crush their common enemy. Two decades of fighting were concluded when
Khusro I’s son and successor, Hormizd (579—90), was overthrown in a palace

11 Joshua the Stylite 43—66; Procop. Wars 1.7— 10; Theophanes 144—9; Zachariah 151—64. Blockley
(1992)89—96. 12 Procop. Wars i.ii—zz; Malalas 427—73.

13 Procop. Wars 11; Menander fr. 6. 1 (Blockley).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

644

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

coup; Hormizd’s son, Khusro II (590—628), was almost immediately chal-
lenged by Vahram, who had gained great glory from defeating the Turks and
was the first non-Sasanid to secure the throne. Khusro sought assistance
from the emperor Maurice, was reinstated by a Roman army in 591, and
peace was again arranged. 14

The final conflict of the two great rivals of the ancient world broke out
in 602, when Khusro took advantage of the murder of his benefactor
Maurice and the arrival in Persia of Maurice’s eldest son Theodosius (or at
least a plausible imitator); Khusro could shed the image of Roman client,
present himself as the supporter of international ties of gratitude and
friendship, and obtain significant booty and military glory into the bargain.
For twenty-five years the conflict ranged across the whole of the near east,
from Chalcedon on the Bosphorus to Canzak on the Iranian plateau, until
a daring counter-offensive by the emperor Heraclius prompted the Persian
nobility to overthrow Khusro in 628. 15 Once more peace was restored, but
the defeated Sasanid dynasty lapsed into a bout of rapid turnover of rulers
(eight rulers within five years, including, for forty days, the Christian and
non-Sasanid Shahvaraz). The last Sasanid ruler, Yazdgard III (63 3—51), had
only just ascended the throne when he had to confront Islamic attacks; the
diminution of royal prestige and the weakness of his armies after a quarter
of a century of unsuccessful warfare against the Romans made Persia par-
ticularly vulnerable, and Yazdgard was forced to flee to the north-east,
where he was eventually killed.

Wars and animosity loom large in the record of the relations between
Rome and Persia, both of which presented a claim to universal ascendancy.
The imprint they have left on the Roman sources tends to obscure the fact
that both sides could also exploit a rhetoric of peace and co-operative rela-
tions. The Sasanids, who had to contend with a succession of nomadic and
semi-nomadic powers along their long continental frontiers, tried to
impress on the Romans in their diplomatic dealings that they were defend-
ing these frontiers for their mutual benefit. This claim justified repeated
demands for diplomatic subsidies, but Sasanid internal propaganda
depicted these as tribute, which aggravated Roman resistance to the pay-
ments: 16 international prestige was one of the factors that individual
Sasanid monarchs used in order to balance the divergent constituencies
within their realm and preserve their own supreme position.

II. ROYAL LEGITIMATION

The best evidence for examining Sasanid royal ideology comes from the
first century or so of the dynasty, and, although it is possible to detect

14 Theophylact i— v; Whitby, Maurice 250—304. 15 Howard-Johnston (1994); Stratos (1968).

16 Rubin (1986); also Braund (1994) 270—1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ROYAL LEGITIMATION 645

developments thereafter, the basic principles apply throughout the regime’s
history. Shapur I was the first to claim the title King of Kings of Iran and
non-Iran, whereas his father, Ardashir, had contented himself with the title
King of Kings of Iran only. The legitimation of the new royal dynasty in
its own realm was the immediate task that the early Sasanids had to face,
and it is to this subject that we ought to turn first. The great official state
inscriptions from the early Sasanid period do not conceal the newness of
the dynasty. The Res Gestae Divi Saporis— a list of the exploits of king Shapur
I (240—70), on the so-called Ka'ba of Zardusht (Cube of Zoroaster), an
Achaemenid tower at Naqsh-i Rustam, a royal Achaemenid burial area near
the ancient capital of Persepolis — traces the royal geneaology back three
generations, through his father Ardashir to his grandfather Papak. On the
Paikuli inscription, set up by king Narseh (293—302) in commemoration of
his successful bid for supreme power and his victory over his nephew
Bahram III, there is only one significant addition. The dynasty is described
‘the seed of the Sasanids’, elucidating to some extent the role of ‘the lord
Sasan’, mentioned in the Res Gestae Divi Saporis as a recipient of an honorary
cult, but not explicitly as a forebear of the dynasty. None of the other
remaining six inscriptions that allude to the genealogy of the Sasanid kings
adds anything of significance. 17

The great pictures that accompany many of these inscriptions present
the key elements of legitimate royal authority: the king and his entourage
unseat their rivals in a dramatic joust; foreign enemies demonstrate their
submission, including in some scenes the Roman emperor, who arrives at
speed to acknowledge Sasanid mastery, kneels before his conqueror or lies
prostrate at his feet; and the proper transfer of power at each accession is
symbolized by grand ceremonies involving king and court; in some pic-
tures, divine investiture is symbolized by the figure of Ahura Mazda or
Anahita handing over a diadem to the king. 18 The monuments present a
self-fulfilling legitimation. Supernatural sanction for the Sasanid house is
demonstrated by the sequence of royal victories through which the
Sasanids have achieved power; royal gratitude for this divine support is dis-
played by the establishment of a series of ritual fires. It is noticeable that
no attempt is made to conceal the totally aggressive character of the king’s
bellicose activity. This self-glorification in divinely sponsored aggression is
repeated three times in the Res Gestae Divi Saporis. According to the ideol-
ogy enunciated in this document, wars of conquest are the duty of a good
king and military success proves legitimacy. 19

Externally, or at least with regard to the Roman empire, which is the only
area for which we have evidence, Sasanid strategies for legitimation were
slightly more complex. Victory was still crucial, but warfare ought to have

17 Back (1978) 284—371 (Res Gestae ); Huyse (1999); Humbach and Skjaervo (1983) (Paikuli).

18 Pictures in Ghirshman (1962) 135— 201. 19 Whitby (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

646

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

some justifiction. In his Res Gestae , two of Shapur’s three expeditions
against the Romans are presented as responses to Roman aggression; one
of the three versions of the inscription is in Greek, and its contents were
probably proclaimed to the inhabitants of the Roman empire, or to its
former inhabitants resettled in Iran . 20 More significantly, three historians
writing in the Roman empire — Cassius Dio (Lxxx.3.3) and Herodian
(vi.2.1— 5) from the third century, Ammianus Marcellinus from the fourth
(xvii. 5.3—8)— record how Sasanid envoys presented territorial demands on
the Romans in terms of the revival of the old Achaemenid empire . 21 The
repeated Roman refusal to return what rightly belonged to the new dynasty
was sufficient justification for war.

If the Achaemenid heritage was important in their western diplomatic
dealings, there is no evidence that it was significant for internal legitima-
tion. Although Ardashir and Shapur I chose to glorify themselves at
Naqsh-i Rustam, near Persepolis, a site rich in Achaemenid association , 22
the possible connection is not voiced in their public inscriptions. The site
was chosen for its monumental and awe-inspiring nature, and there is no
evidence that those who beheld these monuments were aware of their
specific Achaemenid associations, or indeed of the pristine greatness of
the Achaemenids themselves. The modern name of the site, Naqsh-i
Rustam (with its reference to the hero of Iranian epic tradition), indicates
the extent to which folk memory can msirepresent the true nature of such
sites. When Shapur I refers to his ancestors’ domain in his Res Gestae , this
is merely to state that exiles from the Roman empire were settled in Iran on
crown lands — specifically in Fars, Khuzistan and Ashurestan. Again, this is
not a reminiscence of the Achaemenid empire or a claim to legitimation as
their heirs . 23

It has been alternatively suggested that the Sasanids’ claims to legitima-
tion harked back not to the Achaemenids but to the Kayanids, the heroic
mythical rulers of Iran long before the historical Achaemenids . 24 However,
this hypothesis is not supported in the inscriptions: Shapur I only traced
his genealogy back to his grandfather Papak, and did not claim universal
kingship before his own reign (he is the first ‘King of Kings of Iranians
and non-Iranians’). More striking is the absence of any allusion to the
dynasty’s Kayanid origin in Narseh’s Paikuli inscription, precisely in the
context where its description as the ‘the seed of the Sasanids’ invited a link

20 English translation, based mainly on the Parthian and Middle Persian versions, in Frye (1984)
37 1 — 3 *

21 Whitby, Maurice ; Potter (1990) 373 argues that Persian demands were reshaped to fit the presup-
positions of Roman historiographical traditions.

22 Wiesehofer (1994) 207—8 and (1996) 27—8, 154—5; Lee (1993) 21—2.

23 As suggested by Wiesehofer (1994) 208, cf. 220—1; (1996) 155, 165—6; cf. also Lukonin (1961) 23
for a less extravagant interpretation of this passage.

24 For a full development of this hypothesis, see Yar-Shater (1971).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SASANID KINGS AND THE ZOROASTRIAN PRIESTS 647

with a more glorious house. Kayanid names (e.g. Kavadh, Khusro) only
enter royal nomenclature in the late fifth century and probably reflect a
change at that time in strategies for dynastic legitimation. Furthermore, it
is the mythological Kayanid link which eventually introduces into royal
genealogies an Achaemenid element that had not been present in previous
centuries. This Achaemenid link was clearly derived from the Alexander
Romance, which had become popular at the Sasanid court in the first half of
the sixth century. The Sasanid genealogies preserved in Arabic and New
Persian sources that derive from lost Pahlavi historiography reflect, as
often, the conditions and traditions of the last century of Sasanid rule; little
genuine knowledge was preserved . 25

III. SASANID KINGS AND THE ZOROASTRIAN PRIESTS

Divine sanction was an important part of royal legitimation, and it is there-
fore necessary to investigate the relations between monarchs and the
Zoroastrian priesthood, the repository of pristine mythological traditions.
The orthodox view that Sasanid kings relied on the support of the
Zoroastrian priesthood, whose beliefs they in turn actively encouraged and
whose power within their realm they enhanced, has been largely modified
in recent decades . 26 True, the term ma^desn, ‘Mazda-worshipping’, recurs
frequently on the Sasanid monuments as a royal epithet, but this need not
imply automatic recognition of one organized priesthood as sole exponent
of this deity’s cult. Kings could perhaps best consolidate royal power by
fostering variety, both inside the ‘Zoroastrian church’ and between
different religions.

For the orthodox view, difficulties arise already with the personality of
the founder of the dynasty, Ardashir I. According to the Zoroastrian tradi-
tion enshrined in the Denkard, a post-Sasanid Zoroastrian encyclopedia,
this monarch ought to be considered as the great restorer of the
Zoroastrian faith, under whose aegis the priest Tansar collected the scat-
tered remnants of the Avestan books that had survived though the period
after Alexander’s conquests . 27 The picture that emerges from the Res Gestae
Divi Saporis is rather different: it makes no mention either of Tansar or of
any other member of the Zoroastrian priesthood except Kirder, whose
appearance is rather inconspicuous. Ardashir himself can reliably be
described as a worshipper of Anahita of Stakhr, whereas evidence of his
attachment to Ahura Mazda is more equivocal. As worshipped by the early
Sasanids, Anahita was the goddess of victory at whose shrine the severed
heads of vanquished enemies were habitually dedicated. If the devotion of

25 Cf. Noldeke (i 887) 87—8; (1920) 13. 26 For a survey of views, see Schippmann (1990) 92—102.

27 Shaki (1981).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

648

iza. THE SASANID MONARCHY

Ardashir and of his immediate successors to this goddess can be consid-
ered as part and parcel of a Zoroastrian orthodoxy, then this orthdoxy must
have been entirely different from the kind of orthodoxy assumed in his
glorification in the Denkard?*

The absence of any clear reference to an organized clergy in the Res
Gestae Divi Saporisis at odds with the role ascribed by modern scholars to a
‘Zoroastrian church’, at least under the early Sasanid kings. This gap is not
filled by the far-reaching claims made in four inscriptions celebrating the
career of Kirder, the one priestly character who does figure on Shapur’s
monument. Kirder was promoted within the Zoroastrian priesthood from
a mere herbed under Shapur I to the rank of a mobed ( mgnpt , i.e. chief magus)
under his immediate successors, Hormizd I, Bahram I and Bahram II.
Bahram II bestowed additional honours and supposedly authorized Kirder
to enforce Zoroastrianism and persecute heresies and other religions. This
only indicates that this king was attached to the kind of Zoroastrianism
preached by Kirder, which is more than can be said of Shapur I. 29

The extent of Shapur I’s Zoroastrian piety as it emerges from his own
Res Gestae is not entirely clear. He was indeed the founder of many fire-
temples throughout his realm, according to his own testimony as well as to
Kirder. Yet fire-temples were sacred not only to Ahura Mazda but also to
Anahita, and Shapur’s favourable attitude to Zoroastrianism should be con-
ceived in the framework of a religious eclecticism that could also accom-
modate Manichaeism. 311 Furthermore, the fact that he granted Kirder
sweeping powers to conduct the affairs of his religion, without matching
these powers with the appropriate titulature {herbed, whatever its meaning,
appears to be a rather modest title), suggests that Kirder was a court-priest,
not the designated head of a powerful church. Some tension between
Kirder in this function and some of his brethren cannot be ruled out.
Kirder’s statement, reiterated on his inscriptions as a refrain, that under his
leadership many of the magi (not all of them) were happy and prosperous,
implies an attempt to mute the voices of an opposition. The early Sasanid
monarchs, far from depending on an already powerful organization for
vital support, may rather have helped Zoroastrian clergy to improve their
position in a fluid and competitive religious milieu.

It is usually assumed that under Narseh (293—302) the influence of the
Zoroastrian priesthood declined, but that it regained much of the lost
ground under Shapur II (309—79). The figure of Aturpat, son of
Mahrspand, looms large in the post-Sasanid Zoroastrian literature, where
he is depicted as a model of Zoroastrian orthodoxy who submitted himself

28 Chaumont (1958); Duchesne-Guillemin in Yar-Shater (1983) 874—97.

29 Back (1978) 384—488; Duchesne-Guillemin in Yar-Shater (1983) 878—84.

30 Wikander (1 946) 52— 124; Chaumont (1958) 162— 3; Lieu (1994) 24—5, 35— 6 for Manichaeism in the
Sasanid empire.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SASANID KINGS AND THE ZOROASTRIAN PRIESTS 649

to the ordeal of molten metal to refute heretics whose precise doctrine is
disputed. It would have been quite natural to visualize Aturpat as standing
at the head of a mighty Zoroastrian hierarchic organization, authorized by
the king himself to administer the institutions of the only fully recognized
official state religion. On the other hand, the hierarchy within what we
habitually conceive of as ‘the Zoroastrian church’ probably did not become
fully established until much later. It is only under Yazdgard II (439—57) that
the high priest Mihr-Shapur, who had already distinguished himself under
previous reigns as a persecutor of Christians, is called modaban mobad ( magu -
patan magupat), the earliest reliable attestation of this title. But even then the
relative positions of mobeds and herbeds in the organization of Zoroastrian
clergy are not entirely clear. The title herbedan herbed, conferred upon
Zurvandad, the son of Yazdgard’s powerful prime minister, Mihr-Narseh,
has been interpreted as evidence for a hierarchy distinct from that of the
mobeds within the Zoroastrian church.

The Zoroastrian priesthood appears to have gained a truly undisputed
position as the sole representative of the one and only state religion in the
course of the fifth century. It is precisely at this time that a sudden prolife-
ration of Avestan names borne by members of the royal house, and the
appearance of the title kavi ( kay ) on the coins of its kings, mark a crucial
stage in the fabrication of the Kayanid genealogy as a source of legitima-
tion of the Sasanid dynasty. Yet the Zoroastrian priesthood was soon to
suffer a severe blow under Kavadh I (488—96; 499—531), during the
Mazdakite revolt (on which, see p. 65 5 below). The reign of Khusro I
appears to have been a period of harmony between the monarchy and the
Zoroastrian priesthood, but it was a priesthood restored by the king fol-
lowing the Mazdakite debacle, and consequently more dependent on the
king than before. Under Khusro’s successors, Zoroastrian influence seems
to have declined: Khusro II (590—628), rather than follow his predecessors
in the grand-scale establishment of tire-temples staffed with a vast multi-
tude of herbedan, relied heavily on Christians, who included his favourite
wife, his finance officer and his chief general; Zoroastrian tradition, as
reflected in the apocalyptic composition Jamasp Namagh, branded him as an
unjust and tyrannical king. 31

The personality of Mihr-Narseh, Yazdgard II’s prime minister, highlights
the problem of orthodoxy and heterodoxy in the Zoroastrian religion of
the Sasanid period. From Armenian sources dealing with the persecution he
launched against the Christians in Armenia, it is plain that he was an adher-
ent of Zurvan i Akanarag — that is, Infinite Time: 32 his son’s name,
Zurvandad, is certainly a theophoric name, celebrating this rather shadowy

31 Duchesne-Guillemin, in Yar-Shater (1983) 896; cf. Boyce in Yar-Shater (1983) 1160.

32 Elishe Vardapet in Langlois (1869) 190— 1; cf. Eznik of Kolb in Boyce (1984) 97—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

650

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

divine personification (such names seem to have been common among the
Iranian nobles under the Sasanids). The role of this divinity in the
Zoroastrian pantheon is much disputed, but represents a trend in
Zoroastrian religion which attempted to provide a unifying monistic frame-
work for its fundamentally dualistic theology: Ohurmazd, the good princi-
ple, and Ahriman, the evil principle, were depicted as the twin sons of
Infinite Time. There is, however, little reliable information: the Pahlavi
Zoroastrian literature of the post-Sasanid period is virtually silent, whereas
contemporary non-Sasanid and non-Zoroastrian sources suggest that this
doctrine was the orthodoxy endorsed by the Sasanid kings. 33

Various attempts have been made to overcome the discrepancy. It has
been postulated that the orthdoxy reflected in the extant Zoroastrian liter-
ature triumphed only after the collapse of the Sasanid monarchy, in the
context of rivalry between supporters of the old national religion and the
new Islamic monotheism, so that the former monistic orthodoxy was
deliberately suppressed. 34 According to another view, the story of
Zurvanism is one of intermittent success: whereas under some kings it was
indeed the accepted orthodoxy, under others the pendulum swung in the
opposite direction and the dualistic trend became dominant. Dualism was
finally triumphant under Khusro 1(53 1—79), whose reign also constitutes a
decisive stage in the canonization of the surviving Avestan Nasks and in
the development of Zoroastrian theological literature. Attempts have also
been made to play down the significance of Zurvanism, either as a fad
entertained by the upper classes or as a popular version of Zoroastrianism,

and, at any rate, as nothing tantamount to a heresy in its familiar Christian

sense.

Perhaps the best way of approaching a solution is to get rid of the notion
of a Sasanid Zoroastrian church analogous in its position to that of the
Christian church in the late Roman empire, intent upon using secular
support to impose a uniform doctrine within its ranks. The truth may well
have been that although the early Sasanid kings had found Zoroastrianism,
as represented and propounded by the estate of the magi, the most potent
religious factor in many of their domains, they were not always prepared to
allow it to become the sole officially dominant state religion. Thus, for
example, Anahita, who seemingly fades out after the reign of Narseh,
springs again into prominence under the last Sasanids, from Khusro II to
Yazdgard III (633— 51). 36

Furthermore, the fact that some Sasanid kings, like Shapur I, were pre-
pared to unleash the Zoroastrian priesthood against the Christians in the

33 Christensen (1944) 149— 54; Boyce (1979) 112— 13, 160— 1.

34 Boyce (1979) 160— 1; cf. Boyce (19 84) 96—9.

35 Zaehner (195 5); reaction in Boyce (1957), (1990); Frye (1959), (1984) 321 with n. 27; Shaked (1979)

xxxiv.6. 36 Wikander (1946) 5 5—6; Duchesne-Guillemin in Yar-Shater (1983) 897.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

KINGS AND NOBLES

651

service of their own policies does not mean that they themselves subscribed
to any version of Zoroastrianism as the binding orthodoxy. Attitudes
towards this religion appear to have varied according to circumstances and
the tempers of individual kings. A sober monarch like Shapur I was quite
capable of striking an alliance of convenience with the Zoroastrian clergy
while keeping his options open by toying with Manichaeism. Shapur II, a
notorious persecutor of the Christians, may well have played off dualism
against Zurvanism precisely in order to check the growth of an excessively
strong, unified priestly caste. Yazdgard I (399—421) was favourably inclined
towards Christianity and Judaism for most of his reign. 37 On the other hand,
such kings as Bahram I and Bahram II may be described as truly pious
Zoroastrians in the version adhered to by Kirder — probably but not cer-
tainly that of dualism.

The attitude of the Sasanid monarchs towards Nestorian Christianity is
another consideration against the interpretation of their religious policy
exclusively in terms of their Zoroastrian piety. After it had been con-
demned as a heresy at the Council of Ephesus in 43 1 , believers in this creed
found a relatively safe haven in the Sasanid empire. A Nestorian school was
founded in Nisibis by fugitive Nestorian teachers from Edessa, Bar Sauma
and Narsai, in 457, and flourished in that city, particularly under the king
Peroz (459—84), when the Zoroastrian priesthood appears to have been at
the peak of its power. There was no danger in a policy of toleration towards
a religious sect which was banned within the eastern Roman empire while
its emperors were either Chalcedonian or inclined to Monophysitism. On
the other hand, even a king like Khusro I, who could afford to be tolerant
without marring his relations with a Zoroastrian priesthood which was
firmly in his control, could not or would not prevent persecution, even of
Nestorians, after war against Rome flared up in 540. Khusro II is habitu-
ally described as philo-Christian, but the picture is more complex: he
astutely played off Monophysites, whose cause was advocated at court by
his favourite wife, Shirin, and her influential physician, Gabriel, against
Nestorians, who found a faithful champion in his powerful finance minis-
ter, Yazdin. Towards the end of his reign, when his empire succumbed to
a Byzantine invasion, he reversed his policy of general toleration, and
threatened a wave of persecutions. 38

IV. KINGS AND NOBLES

The Sasanid monarchy has a reputation for better organization and greater
centralization than its Arsacid predecessor. But the notion that the Arsacid

37 Widengren (1961) 139-42; Rubin (1986) 679—81.

38 Duchesne-Guillemin in Yar-Shater (1983) 889—90; Khu^istan Chronicle chs. 8, 1 1, 18, 26.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

652

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

kingdom was in essence a cluster of largely independent political entities,
held together in little more than a semblance of formal allegiance to a
shadowy central royal authority, may have its roots in tendentious Sasanid
traditions. These treat the whole of the Seleucid and Arsacid periods as that
of the ‘petty kings’ or ‘tribal kings’ (rnuluk al-tawa’if) and, in clear contrast,
depict the Sasanid monarchy established by Ardashir as a coherent and
effective political and military power. In the Sasanid sixth-century histori-
cal romance, the Karnamag Ardasher i Papakan, the fragmentation of
Alexander’s empire into 240 small states is the foil to Ardashir’s expoits; the
impression produced by the Khwaday-namag tradition, as reflected princi-
pally by al-Tabari, is that Ardashir’s rise to power was in effect a long suc-
cession of wars for the unification of Iran. 39

Greek and Latin sources give the point of view of contemporary outside
observers, which helps to modify this distorted picture, especially with
regard to the Parthian empire. These sources, though, also suggest that the
establishment of the Sasanid monarchy was a dramatic development: the
new energetic drive displayed by an incipient power is all too easy to con-
trast with the patchy picture of a lethargic Parthian kingdom. The result is
a widespread consensus among modern scholars that the statehood of the
Sasanid monarchy was more advanced than that of the Arsacid one. A
more balanced picture emerges when Sasanid institutions are examined
without being distorted by the propagandistic vein that prevails in many of
the extant sources: the dynasty was new, but many of its structures were
inherited.

The territorial extent of the Sasanid empire was vast but the control exer-
cised by central government was not uniformly effective. 40 Evidence for the
foundation of cities by the Sasanid monarchs after Ardashir, chiefly on the
detailed data preserved by Tabari, indicates that their activity was confined
to a rather limited area. It basically comprised territories conquered by
Ardashir I during his wars against the Arsacids and their vassal kinglets — i.e.
the provinces of Fars, Meshan, the Sawad and Mah (Media): Sasanid kings
did not encroach upon territories held by the great lords of the realm, some
of whom belonged to houses whose roots reached far back to the Parthian
era (see further below). To this rule, only one exception can be shown.
Occasionally, cities were established in newly acquired border zones where
the king’s lordship by right of conquest could not be contested, or in remote
provinces where royal authority was being re-established. A notable example

39 KarnamakArtakhshir-i Papakan ed. Edalji Kersaspji Antia (Bombay 1900) ch. 1, 1—5 (English trans.)
and Noldeke (1878) 35—8 for annotated German trans.; Tabari 813—20 (Leiden edition) = Noldeke
(1879) 1—22 (German trans.); also Bosworth (1999) 1— 18 for an annotated English translation.

40 The efficacy of royal control is stressed by Howard-Johnston (1995), but his model is based on a
hypothetical interpretation of archaeological finds rather than the more explicit literary evidence.
Limitations on ability to tax: Altheim and Stiehl (1954) 47—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

KINGS AND NOBLES

653

is the foundation of Ram Peroz in the region of Rayy, Roshan Peroz on the
border of Gurgan and the Gates of Sul, and Shahram Peroz in Adharbaijan:
all these were clearly foundations of Peroz (459—84) and were located in
areas affected by his wars against the Hephthalites. 41 Foundation of a city
represented a substantial investment of manpower and resources, and kings
only undertook these in locations where they would benefit themselves, not
one of their overmighty nobles.

The picture of a well-ordered hierarchic society, controlled and regu-
lated by a strong monarchy, has to be reassessed. This picture emerges from
later literary sources from the Islamic period, such as al-Tabari, al-Mas’udi,
Ps. al-Jahiz 42 and The Tetter of Tansar, a letter attributed to the powerful
third-century herbed but probably composed three centuries later, which is
preserved in Ibn Isfandyar’s Ta’rikh-i Tabaristan, the use of which involves
serious problems of Quellenforschungf 3 But these complex issues can be
avoided, since the epigraphic sources from the earlier Sasanid period,
notably the third century and the first half of the fourth, anticipate and cor-
roborate this later testimony. The inscriptions suggest that already under
Shapur I the framework of a social hierarchy had been formally estab-
lished. The highest rung, immediately below the King of Kings, was that
of the shahrdaran, virtually independent kings, whose number seems to
have been much lower under the Sasanids than the Arsacids; they tended
to be senior members of the royal dynasty, officially ruling their kingdoms
as royal apanages. Below them ranked the vaspuhragan, apparently princes of
the royal family who held no official post in the royal court. Third in rank
were the vu^urgan. This group comprised the members of the great noble
houses Suren, Karin, the Lords of Undigan, and others. As late as the end
of the fifth century, the unruly heads of these houses admitted only a
nominal allegiance to the central power but were virtually independent in
their hereditary territorial domains. The fourth and the lowest rung docu-
mented on the inscriptions was the a^adan, minor gentry of free status, dis-
tinct from the other nobility but probably also dependent on them in many
cases; from this lesser nobility were recruited the mounted warriors, asava-
ran , who were the core of the Sasanid army. 44

The stratification that emerges from the later, literary sources is more
general and reflects the (post-Sasanid) Avestan concept of social
stratification. The priests ( asronan ) appear at the top of the ladder. They
are followed by the military estate ( artestaran ). The third estate is that of

41 Altheim and Stiehl (1954) 12—18; cf. Lukonin (1961) 12—19, specifically on the foundations of
Ardashir I and Shapur I.

42 Tabari 821 (Leiden) = Noldeke (1979) 21. al-Masudi, Muruj al-Dhahab (ed. De Maynard and De
Courteille) 2, 1 56—63; al-Jahi2, Kitab al-Taj 21—8 (ed. Ahmed Zeki Pacha) = Pellat (1954) 51—6 (French
trans.). 43 Boyce (1968).

44 For these categories, see Schippmann (1990) 82; cf. Wiesehofer (1994) 228—43; ( T 996) 171—6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

654 22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

die royal bureaucracy ( dibiran , i.e. scribes). Finally, the commoners are
enumerated, subdivided into peasants ( vastaryoshan ) and artisans ( hutux -
shati). If the two hierarchies, inscriptional and literary, are to be amalga-
mated, the inscriptional hierarchy of nobility should be seen as an
expansion of the second estate in die literary sources; on the other hand,
die literary hierarchy may not be contemporaneous, since there is no evi-
dence for a separate priesdy caste in the early period.

Royal power and induence depended to a large degree on effective
control of the shahrdaran as well as on the active support of the majority
of the vutfurgan, or equivalent groups, whatever their names in later
periods. Their co-operation would be needed for the recruitment of the
asavaran who owed allegiance to them, and their consent would be required
for the imposition of royal taxation within their domains. Sasanid military
organization has been described as ‘feudal’, basically similar to its Arsacid
predecessor, and this definition may help us to understand how the
Sasanid system functioned. From our meagre information about remuner-
ation for the professional core of soldiery, we may conclude that it was
supported through land grants rather than paid in money or kind. Thus it
is tempting to accept the notion of enfeoffment, which by its very nature
entails bonds of trust and dependence that may be described as ties of vas-
salage. Yet, if this picture provides a fairly accurate idea of the relationship
between the king and warriors conscripted in his own domain, as well as
of that between the grandees and their own warriors, it does not reveal the
realities of the links between king and grandees. The latter’s domains
might have been considered as fiefs from the former, but in most cases
this status would only have been theoretical, since forfeiture of such ‘fiefs’
to the crown could hardly be enforced by means of a simple legal proce-
dure, without the need to resort to arms: as in any feudal monarchy, there
was no guarantee that every Sasanid king could control all the grandees all
the time.

V. TAXATION AND MILITARY ORGANIZATION

In an empire which minted a stable silver coinage, the drahm, throughout
most of its history, this continuing resort to grants of land in return for
military service calls for an explanation. The drahm was the only denomina-
tion in constant circulation, which raises the question whether such a
simple economic system can be described as a truly advanced monetary
economy. Gold dinars were issued occasionally — not, so it seems, for pur-
poses of monetary circulation, but rather in commemoration of solemn
events. Bronze change seems to have been issued only very intermittently,
perhaps in response to specific demands, as at Merv; the volume progres-
sively decreased, which poses problems for the mechanics of everyday eco-

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TAXATION AND MILITARY ORGANIZATION 655

nomic exchanges. 45 The assumption that Arsacid copper coinage was still
used in many parts of the Sasanid kingdom is unconvincing, 46 and the con-
clusion must be that much economic activity was based on barter.

This situation explains a good deal about the Sasanid system of taxation
before the beginning of the sixth century. It was based on crop-sharing, the
exaction of agricultural produce proportionate to annual yield, as assessed
by royal tax-collectors on the spot, and levied in kind. In addition, a poll tax
was imposed on most subjects, which may largely have been paid in money,
though part was perhaps commuted to goods. The system was inefficient
and wasteful, especially with regard to the land-tax; it was subject to fre-
quent fluctuations, and allowed little scope for advance financial planning.
The necessity of waiting for the tax-collector with the crops untouched in
the field or on the tree involved the risk that some would be damaged or
destroyed before being enjoyed by farmers or the king. Only lands held
directly by the king could be effectively taxed in this manner, but even on
royal domains the avarice of corrupt tax-assessors will have hampered col-
lection. 47

Towards the end of the fifth century, the burden of taxation on the pea-
santry seems to have become increasingly oppressive: the complex rela-
tions with the Hephthalite khanate, the threat of which loomed in the east,
resulted in heavy demands when recurrent famines were compelling kings
to grant occasional, and not entirely adequate, tax remissions. This oppres-
sion contributed significantly to the popularity of Mazdak, a heretic
Zoroastrian priest, who advocated the economic equality of all human
beings and regarded the higher classes of the Sasanid kingdom as the worst
enemies of his doctrines. For some time he managed to enlist the support
of king Kavadh himself, who appears to have used this movement precisely
to humble his recalcitrant nobility. 48 When he ultimately turned his back
upon the movement and allowed his son to put it down, the battered nobles
needed royal support to recuperate and regain a fraction of their former
grandeur. They were obviously in no position to form a viable opposition
to the one serious attempt to introduce a tax reform in the Sasanid realm,
begun apparently towards the end of Kavadh I’s reign (5 3 1) and continued
by his son Khusro I Anushirwan. 49

On the basis of a general land survey, a new system for exacting the land-
tax was devised. Fixed rates of tax were imposed on agricultural land

45 See Gobi in Altheim and Stiehl (1954) 96—9; cf. Gobi (1971) 25—30; Gobi in Yar-Shater (1983)
328—9. On Merv, see Loginov and Nikitin 1993.

46 Gobi in Altheim and Stiehl (1954) 98; also Gobi (1971), where continued circulation is only sug-
gested for the earlier period, and no explanation is offered for the subsequent mechanics of exchange.

47 For a very different picture, see Howard-Johnston (1995), who postulates the existence of an
efficient tax-raising system not dissimilar to that in the Roman empire.

48 For summary and bibliography on Mazdak, see Guidi (1992); Crone (1991).

49 For more detailed discussion of sources, see Rubin (1995).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 5 6

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

according to its size and according to the kind of crops raised; the tax was
calculated in the drahm currency, but some at least probably continued to
be levied in kind, calculated according to the current value of the produce
in drahm. This new system, if efficiently applied, would enable a monarch
to anticipate incomes and budget expenses. It might be seen as oppressive
on the peasantry, primarily because the fixed drahm rates apparently disre-
garded fluctuations in agricultural yield caused by drought, other natural
calamities or war, but this is to ignore the best testimony about the reform:
if a distinction is drawn between the reform’s institution and operation in
Khusro’s reign, and what it subsequently became, the system appears rea-
sonably efficient and fair. It considerably augmented crown revenues, but
also included a mechanism that enabled constant revision and made tax
rebates and remissions possible where and when necessary.

The fiscal reform was accompanied by an agricultural reform.
Dispossessed farmers were restored to their lands, financial help was avail-
able to enable them to restart cultivation, and a mechanism was instituted
to assist farms affected by natural disasters. The overall result should have
been to maintain a system of small farms that might be easily taxed, and to
prevent the growth of huge estates whose powerful owners might accumu-
late privileges and immunities, and obstruct effective taxation.

Khusro’s reform was meant to have a lasting impact on Sasanid military
organization by providing the king with a standing army of crack units of
horsemen ( asavaran ), under his direct command and permanently at his dis-
posal, who received a salary, at least when on foreign campaign. This body
of palatini was recruited among young nobles as well as the country gentry,
the dehkanan, who wished to start a military career. On the frontiers, troops
recruited from the nomadic periphery of the Sasanid empire (e.g. Turks),
as well as from semi-independent enclaves within it (e.g. Daylam in the
mountainous region of Gilan), might be employed to repel invasions or
check them until the arrival of the mobile crack units.

Khusro’s system appears to have enjoyed moderate success for a few
decades, until the difficulties that beset the Sasanid monarchy exposed its
weaknesses. In the fiscal area, its proper functioning depended on internal
stability, external security and continuing financial prosperity, backed up by
revenues other than the land and poll taxes (e.g. taxes on international trade,
especially the silk trade, booty from foreign wars, tributes and diplomatic
subsidies, etc.). These supplementary sources of income were necessary to
ensure the smooth running of the control mechanism that was integral to
Khusro’s system. However, its stability as a whole depended too much on
a delicate balance which only a very powerful monarch could maintain at
the best of times, and in the vast Sasanid monarchy, with its long continen-
tal frontiers, it was exposed to the dangers that threatened the empire itself.
Growing military commitments increased financial demands and pressure

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TAXATION AND MILITARY ORGANIZATION 657

on the tax-payers, thereby threatening the system; if central government
lost effective control, abuse and corruption might swamp arrangements.

A neglected source which appears reliable on this issue, the Sirat
Anushirwan embedded in Ibn Misqawayh’s Tajarib al-Umam, indicates that
Khusro, towards the end of his reign, was hard put to keep his system func-
tioning. 5 " The control mechanism proved to be as susceptible to corrup-
tion as the taxation machinery that had to be controlled. Furthermore, the
strained relations between soldier and civilian, especially in the remoter
zones, exacted their toll. In effect, the king could restrain only the soldiers
under his direct command from despoiling the rural tax-payers, as is shown
by the restrictions imposed by Hormizd IV (579—90) on a journey to Mah.
It is probable, however, that already during the last days of his father many
of the cavalrymen no longer owed direct allegiance to the king, but had
become again retainers of greater and virtually independent landlords. A
brief glance at the aftermath of Khusro’s military reforms may provide the
clue to understanding what happened.

The fragility of the financial arrangements that underpinned the stand-
ing army militated against enduring success for Khusro’s reforms. If, as
suggested above, the Sasanid economy was never fully monetized, the need
to provide for the soldiers’ everyday needs, at times mostly in goods, will
have encouraged the reinstitution of enfeoffment as the standard military
contract, even among the lower ranks. Thus, following a limited period
when Khusro seriously attempted to sustain his new standing army, already
in his own lifetime the asavaran were increasingly reverting to an enfeoffed
estate, even though the tendency of such allotments to become hereditary,
with the consequent problems caused by alienation, had to be faced. 51
Khusro’s reforms were, at best, of such limited duration and impact that
their scope and intent might be questioned.

From the royal perspective, the high nobility was a more serious problem
even than the cavalrymen. The Mazdakite revolt and its aftermath made pos-
sible a feudal system more directly dependent on the king than ever before:
the nobility restored by Khusro himself was firmly beholden to the king, so
there could be no doubts about the origin of its estates and the nature of the
services owed to the crown. But the nobility soon returned to its pristine
positions of power. The notion that the supreme military commanders and
ministers of state were now salaried civil servants is contradicted by the
limited available evidence. Thus, for example, Khusro’s nominees as spahbads
— the four supreme military commands he created to supersede the old office
of the artestaransalar— must have been mighty territorial lords right from the

50 Discussion in Rubin (1995) 237—9, 2 79 — 84.

51 Theophylact in. 1 5 .4 states that Persian troops did not receive a proper salary during service within
the kingdom’s borders, but had to rely on ‘customary distributions’ from the king. This contradicts the
hypothesis of a salaried standing army in Howard-Johnston (1995).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

658

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

start, as the very territorial nature of their command suggests. The same is
true about the mar^bans, the commanders of the frontier provinces.

The delusion that the direct dependence of Khusro’s nobility on the
king as its restorer and benefactor would make it enduringly more tractable
and obedient shatters in view of the role played by people of this class
under subsequent reigns, quite apart from the revolts in Khusro’s first
decade. Vahram Chobin of the noble house of Mihran, the first serious
pretender outside the royal house since the establishment of the Sasanid
dynasty, was supported by many disgruntled nobles. Khusro II overcame
him with great difficulty in 591, but only with the expensive support of the
Byzantine emperor Maurice. 52 Later, the Sasanid monarchy was rocked by
other major revolts, such as those of Bistam and Bindoe, Khusro’s relatives
and allies turned his foes, and of his powerful general, Shahrvaraz, who was
to depose his grandson Ardashir III and claim the throne. 53 By the time of
the Arab conquest, local rulers, especially in the east and in the Caspian
provinces, had become virtually independent. The same is indicated by the
confused Arabic traditions concerning Yemen after its conquest by the
Persians in the last decade of Khusro Anushirwan’s reign. The growing
independence of the great landlords meant that sooner or later they would
inevitably control not only their own retinues of fighting men but also
independent taxation in their own domains. Thus, for example, according
to Dinawari, the rebel Bistam instituted taxation in the territories under his
rule (Khorasan Qumis, Gurgan and Tabaristan) and in the process remit-
ted half the land-tax. 54 Other potentates, not in direct revolt against the
king, may have acted less openly but may not have been impelled by the
requirements of war propaganda to be as generous.

Under Khusro II, oriental sources record impressive data about royal
revenues, which might suggest that the machinery devised by Khusro I was
still operating smoothly, and that Khusro II made even better use of it than
his grandfather. 55 But the full narrative of Tabari conveys a different
impression: the revenues were not the product of regular taxation but are
to be explained, in part, by the influx of booty from Byzantine territories
(the rich spoils of Alexandria and Jerusalem), and in part by extreme meas-
ures of extortion. It was primarily as an efficient operator of the taxation
machinery that Khusro’s Nestorian finance minister ( vastaryosbansalar ),
Yazdin, endeared himself to his lord; the favourable Khu^istan Chronicle
insists on the vast amounts of money that he sent to the treasury from the
sunrise of one day to the sunrise of the next. 56 Such extortions seem to
have involved not only the imposition of an unbearable burden on tax-

52 Theophylact iv— v; Whitby, Maurice 276—308. 53 Whitby (1994) 252—3.

54 Dinawari p. 102 (ed. Guirgass).

55 Altheim and Stiehl (1954) 41—2; Altheim and Stiehl (1957) 52—3.

56 Khu%. Chron. 23; Tabari 1041— 3; cf. Noldeke (1879) 35 I— 6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SASANID COLLAPSE

659

payers in the royal domain but also an attempt to reintroduce direct royal
taxation in the domains of grandees, who had by now come to regard this
as a blatant encroachment upon their privileges: the nobles proved to be
the ultimate cause of his downfall. Thus Khusro II’s riches cannot be
attributed to the tax reforms of Khusro I.

VI. SASANID COLLAPSE

The last decades of the Sasanid dynasty are the story of a chain of violent
upheavals, which expose all the inherent weaknesses of the huge empire. The
reforms of Khusro I did constitute a serious attempt to cope with these weak-
nesses and to re-establish the king’s position on a firmer basis. They failed in
the long run because they strove to superimpose the framework of a fully
centralized state, with a salaried civil bureaucracy and army, financed by an
efficient and easily manageable taxation apparatus, on a realm which proved
too weak to carry these heavy burdens. The political and military organiza-
tion of its vast territories was too flimsy, the economic infrastructure was too
primitive, and the social structure was fixed by traditions that could not be
easily transformed. Khusro’s own conservatism was a characteristic
reflection of these traditions, for it was Khusro who did a lot to restore the
battered nobility to its traditional powers after the Mazdakite interlude.

Warfare had always been the primary activity of the Sasanid state, but
even by its own standards the last century of its existence witnessed a sus-
tained intensity of campaigning that may have weakened the structures of
society. After the outbreak of war against Justin I in 527, there were only
twenty-eight years of formal peace with Rome until the conclusive victory
of Heraclius in 628 — and this is to ignore the recurrent tensions which
embroiled the Arab satellites of the rival empires, Sasanid involvement in
the affairs of the Arabian peninsula and the struggle to maintain control in
sub-Caucasian principalities such as Suania and Albania. We know much
less about the sequence of campaigns on the north-eastern frontier, but
these were probably more debilitating. Khusro’s apparent triumph over the
Hephthalites in the 5 50s was only achieved through alliance with the rising
Turkish federation, which now replaced the Hephthalites as Persia’s neigh-
bours and soon constituted a far more powerful threat during the 570s and
5 80s. 57 No less than Justinian, Khusro was repeatedly involved in wars on
more than one front, and the expenses of eastern campaigning probably
proved much heavier than the gains from spoils, ransoms and payments
stipulated in his treaties with Rome.

The success of the state depended ultimately on the character and rep-
utation of the king, and there was a recurrent danger that such a personal

57 Menander fr. 10.3; 13.5 (Blockley); Theophylact 111.6.9— 14.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

66o

22 a. THE SASANID MONARCHY

monarchy would experience bouts of severe dynastic competition: thus,
the long reigns of both Shapur I and Shapur II were both followed by
shorter periods of instability. This danger may have been increased in the
sixth century by the withdrawal of Persian kings from regular active partic-
ipation in warfare, a move which fundamentally changed the nature of
royal legitimation. Early rulers from the house of Sasan had demonstrated
divine favour for their rule through personal victories, but the successors
of Khusro I relied on others to win their wars. 58 From the royal perspec-
tive, legitimacy ran in the family, but the nobility and armies might prefer
to give their loyalty to a successful commander such as the non-Sasanid
Vahram Chobin or Shahvaraz. The existence of substantial minority relig-
ious groups, Jews as well as Christians, allowed an established ruler to
secure his position by balancing their different claims against the majority
Zoroastrians, but it also meant that a rival could promote himself by
seeking the support of one particular group: Vahram Chobin is known for
his links with the Jews.

In spite of the attempted reforms of Khusro, the Sasanid state remained
a fairly simple structure in which much economic and military power rested
with the feudal nobility. Royal authority was bolstered by a supremacy of
patronage, but this required a regular inflow of wealth for redistribution.
Wars against the Romans provided considerable short-term gains, and
Roman peace payments under the Endless Peace (5 32) and the Fifty Years
Peace (562) were also important, but it is impossible to calculate how much
of this wealth drained eastwards, almost immediately, to the Hephthalites
or the Turks. The monetarized heartland of the Sasanid state (as of its
Achaemenid antecedent) lay in the rich agricultural lands of Mesopotamia
and lower Iraq, areas susceptible to attack from the west, and it seems to
have been impossible to increase their tax revenues in the long term.

It is ironic that the most successful Sasanid conqueror, Khusro II, must
also bear responsibility for the monarchy’s subsequent rapid collapse. In
the first decade of his reign, his status as a virtual puppet of the Romans
must have contributed to support for the long-running rebellion of Bistam
in the east. 59 The overthrow of his patron Maurice in 602 gave Khusro an
opportunity to assert his independence, and the disorganization of Roman
defences, particularly during the civil war between supporters of Phocas
and Heraclius in 609—1 1, permitted Khusro to transform the sequence of
traditional lucrative frontier campaigns into a massive expansionist thrust
towards the west. But, whereas a war of pillage replenished royal coffers,
the annexation of territories reduced the inflow of funds and meant that
the newly acquired resources had to be devoted to the maintenance of

58 Whitby (1994).

59 Niyayat al Irab , Ms. Qq.225, fol. 185a; summarized in Browne (1900) 240; Firdausi, Shanamah
2791-6 (ed. S. Nafisy); trans. Jules Mohl, vol. vn (1878) 143—50.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

SASANID COLLAPSE

66 1

troops in remote regions. Furthermore, Khusro’s successful armies had
little direct contact with their distant monarch, but were tied more closely
to their victorious commanders: as a result, the soldiers of Shahvaraz sup-
ported their general when he was threatened by the king. In the 620s,
Heraclius’ campaigns into the heart of Persia exposed the fragility of
Khusro’s achievements, and prompted a palace coup that introduced the
most severe bout of dynastic instability that the Sasanid state had ever
experienced. The return of booty to the Romans combined with the
destruction caused by campaigns in Mesopotamia to leave the monarchy
short of wealth and prestige at the very moment when the Arabs started to
raid across the Euphrates. Yazdgard III (633—51) was forced to abandon
Iracj in 638/9 and thereafter lacked the resources and reputation to chal-
lenge the new Islamic superpower: the Iranian nobility abandoned the
Sasanids and transferred their allegiance to the Muslim rulers, who offered
stability, while the rural majority continued to pay their taxes to support a
new elite.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 22 b

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

R. W. THOMSON

‘Armenia’ has always had an ambiguous place between the major powers,
be they the east Roman empire and Sasanian Iran, the Byzantine empire
and the caliphate, or the Ottoman empire and the Safavids. Armenian loy-
alties have not been consistent, either in support of a coherent internal
policy or with regard to external diplomacy. The very definition of
‘Armenia’ highlights the problem. Does the term refer to a geographical
entity — and if so, what are its borders? Or does it refer to a people with
common bonds — and if so, are those bonds linguistic, religious, cultural or
political ? 1

1 The emphasis in this chapter will be on Armenian reactions to events as expressed by the native
historians. The principal Armenian sources for the period are:

Agathangelos : an anonymous history, written at the end of the fifth century, which gives the traditional
account of the conversion of king Trdat and the missionary activity of St Gregory the Illuminator at
the beginning of the previous century. Although replete with legendary tales and hagiographical com-
monplaces, it is important for the Armenian Arsacid reaction to the overthrow of the Parthian Arsacid
dynasty by the Sasanians.

The Bu%andaran\ this traces the history of Armenia from the death of king Trdat c. 3 30 to the divi-
sion of the country into Roman and Iranian spheres c. 387. The author is unknown. The work is a com-
pilation of epic tales describing the gestes of the Arsacid dynasty, the noble house of the Mamikonean
family (which played the leading role in the fourth and fifth century), and the descendants of Gregory
in the patriarchate. It is the last witness to the disappearing Iranian traditions of Armenia, although the
Christian author did not himself comprehend the original significance of all the aspects of social and
political life which he described.

Koriwn : a disciple of the inventor of the Armenian script, Mashtots. His biography of the master is
probably the earliest original composition in Armenian.

Moses of Khoren : author of a history of Armenia from the days of Noah to the death of Mashtots,
whose pupil he claims to be. Very important as the first account of Armenian origins, in which oral tra-
ditions are integrated into the schema of Eusebius’ Chronicle , it is the most learned of early Armenian
histories. Moses used many Greek, Jewish and Syriac sources (via Armenian translations). But his
strong pro-Bagratid bias and his clear distortions of previous writers suggest a later authorship than
that claimed. The date and authenticity are hody contested. But it is significant that the Bagratids did
not gain their ultimate prominence until the eighth century, and Moses’ history is not quoted until the
tenth.

Elishe: unknown author of a history describing the revolt against Yazdgard II in 450—1 , the defeat of
the Armenian army led by Vardan Mamikonean at Avarayr, and the ensuing imprisonment of surviv-
ing Armenian nobles. This is probably not an eye-witness account as claimed, but a rewriting of the
shorter version of these events in Lazar. Its great importance is the adaptation of the story of the
Maccabees to the Armenian situation, and the identification of Christian with patriotic virtues. A
sophisticated literary work, it shaped Armenian attitudes to the interaction of religion and politics
down to the present time.

662

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 663

Despite the conversion of king Tiridates to Christianity, probably in
3 14, 2 and the establishment of an organized church, the continuing
strength of Iranian traditions and the cultural and kinship ties of the
Armenian nobility to Iran made Armenia an uncertain ally for the Romans.
Yet since the Armenian monarchy was a branch of the Arsacid dynasty
which had been overthrown by the Sasanians in 224, relations between
Armenia and Iran were already strained. Tiridates’ conversion com-
pounded an already difficult situation, for the shahs naturally became sus-
picious of the future loyalty of Armenians to their Iranian heritage. 3 In the
fifth century, attempts by the shahs to impose Zoroastrianism led to armed
conflict — while to the west, the Armenians found their relationship with
fellow Christians increasingly marred by their involvement in the struggles
over orthodoxy. The division of Armenia c. 387 into two monarchies and
two spheres of influence — a large Iranian sector east of the forty-first par-
allel of longitude, and a much smaller Roman sector west of that line up to
the Euphrates — did not solve ‘the Armenian question’. 4 Both powers were
to find Armenia a difficult neighbour.

In the Roman sector (Inner Armenia) king Arshak soon died. His sub-
jects were straightway placed under direct imperial rule through a comes
Armenia e\ on the other hand, the traditional rights of the Armenian princes
in that area were not abrogated. 5 They enjoyed immunity from taxation,
and no military garrisons were imposed. Procopius claims that it was this
military weakness that later led Justinian to tighten his control. He observed
that Armenia was always in a state of disorder, and for this reason an easy
prey for the barbarians.’ 6 He might have added that social, religious and cul-
tural ties with their kinsmen across the border could not enhance security.

La^arof P’arp: author of a history of Armenia from 387, picking up where the Bu^andaran ends, to
the appointment of Vahan Mamikonean as governor of Persian Armenia in 484. His history is an enco-
mium of the Mamikonean family. But despite its bias, it is valuable as an account by someone who knew
the major participants. (Most other early Armenian histories are by unknown authors and of uncertain
date.)

Sebeos : a ‘History of Heraclius’ by a bishop Sebeos is mentioned by Armenian authors of the tenth
and later centuries, but their quotations do not match the untitled text discovered in the early nineteenth
century and published as the work of Sebeos. This anonymous work is important, none the less, as a
product of the seventh century by an author familiar with events in the Armenian patriarchate. The
emphasis is on Armenia in the context of Byzantine— Iranian rivalry from the time of Maurice
(582—602) to the accession of Muawiya as caliph in 661.

Book of Betters', a compilation of documents dealing with ecclesiastical matters from the fifth to the
thirteenth century. Of particular importance are the letters exchanged between official representatives
of the Armenian church and foreign dignitaries of the Greek-speaking imperial church in the Byzantine
empire, of the Syriac-speaking church in Iran, and of the church in Georgia.

2 This is the usually accepted date for the consecration of Gregory at Caesarea, which marks the
beginning of the formal organization of the church in Armenia. For the origins of Christianity in
Armenia see Thomson (1988/9).

3 For the Iranian heritage in Armenia see Garsolan (1976), and for the religious background Russell

(1987). 4 For this division and the geographical setting see Adontz (1970) ch. 1.

5 Toumanoff (1963) 133— 4. 6 Procop. Buildings 111.1.16. Loeb translation.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

664 lib. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

Not until the sixth century did Justinian do away with the traditional rights
of the Armenian princes in a series of moves between 528 and 535.
Armenian lands west of the border with Iran were then fully integrated into
the empire as the four provinces of Armenia I— IV. 7

It was in eastern Armenia — the sector under Persian suzerainty, which
composed about four-fifths of the earlier kingdom — that the major cultu-
ral and religious developments of this period had their origin. Yet the
border between the two sectors was no solid wall. Although Armenian
writers rarely refer explicitly to the border, through the communities in the
west contacts between the imperial capital and Persian Armenia were pro-
moted and sustained.

In eastern Armenia the centrifugal tendencies of the leading princely
families rapidly overcame the weakened monarchy. The rights and privi-
leges of the noble families, jealously guarded over generations and consid-
ered more fundamental than royal authority, had been recognized by the
Arsacids and legitimized. The office of sparapet, or chief military officer, for
example, was the perquisite of the Mamikonean family, which played the
leading role in politics during the fifth and sixth century. The role of coro-
nant belonged by hereditary right to their principal rivals, the Bagratunis,
who did not attain the leading role until the eighth century.

In Arsacid Armenia there were some fifty noble families of varied size
and power, each with its own military forces. 8 Cities played little political or
cultural role, despite their economic significance. 9 The focus of noble life
was the family holdings. The territories of the Mamikoneans were in Tayk’,
Bagrevand and Taron — i.e. much of north central Armenia. The homeland
of the Bagratunis was in Sper, but they gradually acquired territories to the
south-west. A branch of this family was established in eastern Georgia
(Iberia to the Greeks, K’art’li to the Georgians). To the south-east of Lake
Van another family, the Artsrunis, were settled. They acquired land
between Lake Van and the Araxes, and were later to become the principal
rivals of the Bagratunis. After the demise of the royal line, these families
pursued their own interests with regard to Rome or Persia, conducting, as
it were, an individual foreign policy. Eastern Armenia was thus not a stable
unity.

This traditional pattern of society was reinforced by the growth of an
organized Armenian church. Armenian historians of the fifth and sixth
century often stress the ‘national’ role of the church and the leadership of
the patriarchs. But they do not explain that the bishoprics were established
in the princely families, reinforcing the authority of the princes. This

7 See further p. 672 below.

8 Toumanoff (1963) 147—259 is devoted to ‘The states and dynasties of Caucasia in the formative
centuries’, with detailed information on the different noble families.

9 Garsoi'an (1984/ 5). For the economic situation see Manandian (1965) ch. 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 665

Armenian pattern, reflecting Armenian society of the time, was very
different from that in the empire, which was based on the relative impor-
tance of the cities where the bishops were resident. Furthermore, the
Armenian patriarchate until the death of Sahak in 439 was itself regarded
as a hereditary perquisite of the Pahlavuni family, just as were other offices
of state in other families. 10

Unhappy with any diminution of their privileges, the magnates of
eastern Armenia quarrelled with king Khusro (who had been installed in 3 87
when Arshak moved to western Armenia) and succeeded in having him
deposed in favour of his son Vramshapur. The weaker the monarchy — from
their point of view — the better, and soon the princes came to regard the
shah himself as their immediate sovereign. On Vramshapur’s death his
father was briefly reinstated; then Yazdgerd I appointed his own son,
Shapur. On Yazdgard’s death in 420 Shapur failed to win the succession to
the Sasanian throne. Vram V permitted Vramshapur’s son Ardeshir to reign,
but he too was unpopular. In 428 Vram agreed to accept the direct submis-
sion of the Armenian princes. The monarchy was abolished, and a Persian
governor, the mar^pan, installed at Dvin. 11 The marapan was responsible for
collecting taxes; the princes provided military service to the shah in person
with their private armies. In their own lands they were autonomous.

In this way, the shah took advantage of age-long Armenian practices to
increase Persian control of Armenia. Recognizing the importance of the
church in that valuable province, he attempted to strengthen his hand even
more by deposing the patriarch Sahak, who represented continuity with the
past through his descent from St Gregory the Illuminator and whose
outlook allied him to Greek cultural interests. Sahak was replaced by an
insignificant appointee, to be succeeded by two Syrians. 12 Vram’s policy with
regard to the political administration of Armenia was moderate and suc-
cessful. But his interference in ecclesiastical affairs was less well received.
And his successor’s harsher measures, aimed at integrating Armenia more
closely into the Sasanian empire, eventually sparked outright rebellion. The
passion of those who resisted — resistance was by no means unanimous —
reflects the increased Armenian allegiance to the church and to Christianity
as their birthright. The terms ‘patrimonial’ or ‘ancestral way of life’ origi-
nally used for the secular realm — where they applied to personal estates or
the monarchy — were adapted by early Armenian historians to the religious
sphere, where they now defined Christianity and the church within an
Armenian context.

Yet Christianity was hardly ‘an ancestral way of life’ in fifth-century
Armenia. The anonymous historian known as Agathangelos, who gives the

10 Garsoi'an (1984) esp. 233—5. 11 F° r this office see Christensen (1944) 13 1—9.

12 For these three — Surmak, Brkisho and Shmuel — see Garitte (1952) 99—102.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Map 1 9 Armenia and its neighbours

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

667

standard account of the conversion of the country, claims that Gregory
visited the whole Caucasus, baptized millions of Armenians and estab-
lished hundreds of bishoprics. 13 But he was too optimistic. The process of
conversion took many generations, and the church met with opposition on
many fronts. The Bu^andaran paints a vivid picture of the pro-Iranian ten-
dencies of many noble families, whose allegiance to the shah was strength-
ened by the acceptance of magism. For many the Christian message, which
reached Armenia from Syria in the south and from Asia Minor to the west,
was a foreign faith. 14 The fact that no written medium for the Armenian
language existed in the fourth century added to the difficulty of strength-
ening the church’s position and overcoming resistance to this alien innova-
tion. So the invention of a script for the native tongue c. a.d. 400 by
Mashtots marked a very significant stage in the conversion of Armenia,
though it was not in itself the last step in that process.

Mashtots had received a Greek education and rose to a prominent posi-
tion in the royal chancellery, but withdrew in order to lead a hermit’s life.
In due course he attracted disciples and, with support from the patriarch
Sahak and king Vramshapur, formed a script based on the Greek model —
i.e. a fully alphabetical script with separate characters for each consonant
and vowel. With only minor modifications, it has remained in continuous
use down to the present day. His disciples were sent to Syria and Asia Minor
to learn Syriac and Greek and to make translations of books needed for the
church. Rapidly a corpus of biblical, liturgical, theological and historical
texts was made available. The circle around Mashtots began to create orig-
inal works as well, and their interests soon extended to secular studies as
pursued in the contemporary schools and universities of the eastern
Mediterranean — they produced works of philosophy, grammar and rheto-
ric, and of scientific enquiry. 15

The development of a specifically Armenian literature — in the broadest
sense of the term — brought several consequences: an increasing sense of
solidarity among Armenians on either side of the Roman— Iranian border,
a stronger voice in national affairs for church authorities as a body that
spoke for interests broader than those of individual families, and a greater
involvement in the ecclesiastical questions that were shaking the eastern
Roman empire. Armenia’s liturgical practice was gready influenced by
Jerusalem. Many from Armenia and Georgia made pilgrimages to the Holy
Land, and some stayed on as monks. The theological exegesis of Syria

13 For a comparison of the various recensions and versions of this history see the introduction to
Thomson (1976).

14 There is no general study in a western language of the impact of the Syrian strain in Armenian
Christianity more recent than that of Ter-Minassiantz (1904). Aspects of Syrian liturgical influence are
brought out by Winkler (1982), which has a good bibliography.

15 For a survey of the early period see Thomson (1980) and in general Renoux (1993).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

668 lib. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

made a great impact, and the Greek fathers of the fourth century were well-
known. As the Armenians forged their own traditions in matters of prac-
tice, their attitudes with regard to matters of faith were sharpened by
involvement in the burning issues of the day. This heightened sense of
commitment to a faith associated with the Roman empire could only be
regarded with concern by the rulers of the Sasanian world in which most
of Armenia lay.

Yazdgard II’s attempt to impose magism by force in 4 5 o prompted imme-
diate resistance by the church authorities; popular resentment coalesced
around the prince of the Mamikonean family, Vardan. He was related by
marriage to the patriarch Sahak, whose daughter his father had married, and
his family played the leading role in contemporary Armenian politics. Like
many other Armenian princes, Vardan had earlier temporized by submitting
to magism when summoned to court. But he agreed to lead the revolt, and
one of his brothers went with a delegation to seek aid from Theodosius II.
The latter died in July, and Marcian refused to become involved in Armenia,
having many distractions closer to home in the Balkans. 16

For that first year the Armenians held off the Persian forces. But faced
with dissension in their own ranks, they could not resist a large Persian
army sent to Armenia in 451. In June, Vardan and many nobles met their
deaths on the field of Avarayr in eastern central Armenia; other leaders,
both clerical and lay, were taken in captivity to the region of Nishapur.
Resistance in a military sense was thus ended. But Armenia was a valuable
asset to the Sasanian empire, and calmer views prevailed. Forced conver-
sion to magism was dropped, and an uneasy peace marked the next gener-
ation. During the reign of Peroz (459—84) the imprisoned leaders of the
rebellion were released.

The close ties between Armenia and Georgia were the indirect cause of
the next attempt to loosen Iranian control. A daughter of Vardan
Mamikonean, Shushanik, had married the governor of the neighbouring
province of Gugark’, Vazgen. But he accepted magism, in return for which
he was given a royal princess to wife. His first wife, Shushanik, died of sub-
sequent ill-treatment, and was to become a martyred saint revered on both
sides of the Armenian— Georgian border. 17 Her Life is the first original com-
position in Georgian, a script for that language having been formed in the
early fifth century (by Mashtots, according to Armenian writers). The
Georgian king, Vakhtang-Gorgasal, eventually put Vazgen to death in 482,
thereby incurring the immediate wrath of his lord, shah Peroz. In this emer-
gency Vakhtang sought aid from Huns beyond the Caucasus and from his

16 This revolt is not mentioned in contemporary Greek sources. For the date of Elishe’s classic
description and its relation to the version of Lazar see the introduction to Thomson (1982).

17 Peeters (1935) discusses the original text by Jacob of Tsurtav and later versions in their historical
setting.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 669

Christian neighbours to the south. Vardan’s nephew, Vahan Mamikonean,
now the leading prince of that family, thus found himself at the head of the
Armenian forces engaged in another rebellion, thirty-one years after his
uncle’s death.

Military success was no more possible now than it was earlier. Armenian—
Georgian co-operation was marred by mutual antagonisms, brought out
clearly by the historian Lazar, who describes this period in detail — Vahan
being the patron and hero of his History. The Armenian troops were forced
to withdraw to the mountains of north-western Armenia. They were rent
by internal dissensions, the Persians always finding supporters among the
Armenian nobility. On the other hand, the Persian forces were not at full
strength, since Peroz had taken a large army to attack the Hephthalites. His
unexpected defeat and death on the battlefield in 484 entirely changed the
situation. Anxious to placate their fractious subjects, whose Christian ties to
the Roman empire were a potential source of danger, the Persians removed
their governor. In his place, the prince of the most prominent local noble
family was appointed marypan. Thus Vahan Mamikonean gained the
measure of internal autonomy for which his uncle Vardan had died in 451.

The attention of Armenian historians moves rapidly from Vahan’s
success to the involvement of Armenia in the Byzantine— Persian wars of
the late sixth and early seventh century. In doing so, they ignore the growing
estrangement of the Armenian from the imperial church — a rift with cul-
tural and political consequences of the first magnitude.

The increasing importance of the church as a cultural institution follow-
ing the abolition of the monarchy in 428 is not of itself surprising. It was
the only institution that cut across factional lines, and it was the only
medium through which literary and artistic endeavours could be realized
on any meaningful scale. Individuals with financial backing would still
attend the universities of the eastern Mediterranean; Greek and Syriac as
well as Armenian sources attest to the presence of Armenian students in
Antioch, Beirut, Alexandria, Athens and elsewhere. But government
service as a career for the educated was no longer an option after 428; the
only major patron of education and learning was the church, and only the
church could offer advancement for the ambitious and a haven for the stu-
dious. The complaints of Anania of Shirak in the seventh century that his
fellow countrymen did not admire learning suggest that without patronage
a teaching career was difficult. 18 There were cities in Armenia, but they did
not play the cultural role of an Antioch or an Athens, with organized
schools and subsidized professorial chairs.

The relationship of the Armenian church to the larger Greek world was
thus of importance. Armenians were always admirers of Greek learning,

18 His short ‘Autobiography’ is a unique document in early Armenian literature.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

670 lib. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

but their attitude to Constantinople was ambivalent. In part, such an atti-
tude reflected the political situation; a pro-Greek attitude could arouse sus-
picions of disloyalty to the shah. Some part was played by the very different
backgrounds of Armenians and Greeks — and, not least, the strong Syrian
strain in Armenian ecclesiastical life, church ritual and theological exegesis
prevented any automatic acceptance of things Greek. An official break
between the churches was long in coming. But the steps which led to that
eventually irrevocable rupture deserve a brief review.

Luckily, the Armenian reaction to the theological questions that divided
the Greek oikumene — debates which gave the Armenians an opportunity to
define more carefully their own position — is well documented in the Book
of Betters. The first three sections of this unique collection of official doc-
uments comprise exchanges of letters between Armenian ecclesiastical
authorities and members of the imperial church of the eastern
Roman/Byzantine empire, representatives of the Syriac-speaking church
in Iran, and ecclesiastics in Georgia, covering the fifth, sixth and seventh
century. The earliest is a letter by Acacius, bishop of Melitene, written soon
after the Council of Ephesus, held in 43 1. 19

Melitene had been one of the cities where the pupils of Mashtots had
pursued their study of Greek. Acacius had met Mashtots on the latter’s
travels in Roman territory, and was well informed of events in Armenia.
He had recently played a significant role in the Council of Ephesus, where
Nestorius and other Antiochene theologians had been condemned. So he
took alarm when he heard that works by Theodore of Mopsuestia were
being read in Armenia. For Theodore was a prominent biblical exegete of
the Antiochene school, whose interpretation of the Incarnation had been
rejected at Ephesus. But Armenian interest in Theodore was not surpris-
ing, since the tradition he represented had been strong in Edessa, the centre
of Syriac-speaking Christian culture. It was to Edessa that Mashtots had
gone in his search for an Armenian script, and it was in Edessa that many
of his pupils studied. The reply to Acacius’ letter, signed by Sahak as prelate
of the Armenian church, was polite but guarded, denying any Armenian
involvement in heresy yet not specifying any heresy by name. A second
letter was sent by Acacius to the secular authorities of Armenia. It had been
prompted by Syrian priests who reported that the influence of ‘Nestorian’
ideas in Armenia was continuing. But it passed without response.

Of greater impact was a letter from the patriarch of Constantinople,
Proclus. This time it was not foreign Syrians, but two pupils of Mashtots
who had taken the initiative. While in the capital to translate Greek texts,
they approached the patriarch for an authoritative interpretation of the

19 For the Armenian correspondence with Acacius and the patriarch Proclus see Tallon (195 5). The
Armenian reaction to the theological disputes is discussed in Sarkissian (1975). For the debates within
the eastern Roman empire see in general Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 671

doctrine of the Incarnation. That this was not an official solicitation by the
Armenian authorities is clear from an apology by a third Armenian disci-
ple, Eznik, who had studied in Edessa before going to Constantinople.
Proclus responded by addressing a detailed exposition of the matter to the
bishops of Armenia. The Armenian reply was signed by both Sahak and
Mashtots. After defining their own faith, they assured the patriarch that no
heretical ideas attributable to Theodore were circulating in Armenia. The
letter of Proclus, however, was to remain a keystone of Armenian orth-
doxy, and this early emphasis on the Council of Ephesus had a profound
impact. Ephesus, rather than the Council of Chalcedon, held twenty years
later, would be the rallying-cry of Armenian theologians.

The Fourth Oecumenical Council — held across the Bosphorus in
Chalcedon in 451 — did not bring peace to the warring parties or solve the
theological question of defining the Incarnation in a manner satisfactory to
all. The patriarch of Armenia was not represented at Chalcedon, though
bishops from Armenian provinces on the Roman side of the frontier were
in attendance. 21 ’ Somewhat surprisingly, the early Armenian historians pass
over both the Second Council of Ephesus in 449 and that of Chalcedon in
451. It was the emperor Zeno’s Henotikon, promulgated in 482, that
Armenians emphasized as orthodox. (As noted above, in that year Vahan
Mamikonean was engaged in open rebellion against the shah, a situation
resolved by his eventual appointment as marppan) Bypassing the recent divi-
sive Council of Chalcedon, in their official pronouncements the Armenians
were happy to pledge their allegiance to Nicaea and Ephesus. As they devel-
oped their own traditions in ecclesiastical architecture and moulded an indi-
vidual Armenian literature, they were not at the turn of the century acting
in deliberate opposition to what was then the orthodoxy of the empire.

At a council held in 505/6 in Dvin, the residence of the marppan and the
main city of Persian Armenia, a group of Syrians from the Persian empire
appeared, requesting episcopal consecration for one of their monks,
Simeon. These Syrians were not members of the church in Persia which
enjoyed the shah’s official recognition, but were Monophysites. The
Armenian bishops consecrated Simeon and recognized the orthodoxy of
these Syrians as being in conformity with their own faith and that of the
Greeks. But the zealous Simeon, an opponent of the official church in
Persia, persuaded the Armenians to anathematize the Council of
Chalcedon as expressing the views of Nestorius. 21 The Armenians did not
anathematize the Greek church as such; the Henotikon of Zeno was still in
force, and he was regarded by the Armenians as ‘the blessed emperor’. 22

20 Garsoi'an (1989). 21 For the career of Simeon see Shahid (1971) 1 5 9 — 79-

22 In the Book of Betters , Zeno is called ‘blessed’ (49, 140, 268); ‘pious’ (141 , 142, 328); ‘orthodox’ (1 26,
262, 277); ‘benevolent’ (266, 267, 269). For this council in Dvin see Sarkissian (1975) ch. 7: ‘The rejec-
tion of the council of Chalcedon’.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

672 lib. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

But this apparent unanimity of the Greek and Armenian churches was
misleading. Zeno’s policy of compromise with the opponents of
Chalcedon was reversed on the accession of Justin. After 5 1 8 the imperial
church of Constantinople made peace with Rome and stood firmly behind
the definitions of Chalcedon. As the sixth century progressed, the
Monophysites in Syria and Egypt became more coherently organized,
thanks mainly to the labours of Jacob Baradaeus, while their theology
found definite expression in the works of Severus of Antioch. The
differences apparent at the time of Chalcedon had now become quite clear-
cut, and compromise was increasingly difficult. 23

The Armenians do not seem to have taken any definite steps to repudi-
ate the Greek return to Chalcedonian orthodoxy until they were prompted
to do so by another Syrian delegation from Persia, which appeared at
another council held in Dvin in 555, again requesting consecration for one
of their company. These Syrians were members of a splinter group within
the Monophysite church, the Julianists, who held that Christ’s body had
remained ‘incorruptible’. 24 The Armenian patriarch, Nerses II, and his
bishops found the Syrians’ profession of faith orthodox and consecrated
Abdisho. The impact of Julianist ideas was not the most important result
of this encounter in 555; in later years there was no unanimity among
Armenian theologians on that issue. The significant fact was that the
Armenians not only rejected Chalcedon again; they also, for the first time,
specifically anathematized the Greek church for upholding that council —
which to Armenian eyes had approved the ideas of Nestorius. 25

Despite these important developments, whose significance was perhaps
not obvious at the time, Armenian historians have remarkably little to say
about Armenian affairs during the reigns of Justin and Justinian. The first
Persian war, which ended in 5 32, brought no change to the frontiers or the
status of the divided country. Even the reorganization of the Armenian
territories in the eastern Roman empire by Justinian is passed over by
Armenian sources. In 528 the right of Armenian princes to maintain their
private military forces was abrogated when the office of m agister militum per
Armenian/ was created. The civil standing of the princes was diminished
when their traditional rights of inheritance were brought into line with
imperial practice. In 5 36 Armenian territory was reorganized into Armenia
I, II, III and IV at the expense of neighbouring land in Cappadocia. The
use of the name ‘Armenia’ is an indication of the strongly Armenian pres-
ence west of the Euphrates, which had been increasing rather than dimin-
ishing. Now, not only were the Armenians inside the imperial borders

23 For Severus see Frend, Monophysite Movement 201—20, and for Jacob Baradaeus ibid. 284—7, with ch.
21 b (Kennedy), p. 594 above. 24 For this controversy see Draguet (1924).

25 For this second council of Dvin and the correspondence preserved in the Book of Betters see
Garitte (1952) 130—75.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 673

deprived of their long-standing rights and governance by traditional
princely families (which had been guaranteed in the original treaty), but this
significant portion of the total Armenian population was lost to Armenia
proper. Imperial authorities did not speak Armenian or encourage alle-
giance to the Armenian church, as Justinian attempted to impose imperial
orthodoxy on his realms. Armenians were useful to the empire in many
ways, especially in the army. But an individual Armenian culture flourished
henceforth only on the Persian side of the frontier.

Justinian’s treatment of his Armenian nobles led to complaints to the
shah 26 and Armenian involvement in a conspiracy against the emperor. 27 In
540 hostilities between Byzantium and Persia reopened. Antioch was cap-
tured, but Dara resisted the invading Persians. Military operations were
confined to Mesopotamia and Lazica during the war, save for an encoun-
ter at Dvin in 543. The peace of 545 was one of many made during the long
confrontation, which continued into the following century.

There was no overt sign of unrest in Persian Armenia until the latter part
of the sixth century. When trouble did break out, it seems to have been
caused by the attitude of the Persian marppan of the time, Suren, not by the
official policy of the shah. In 571 Suren set up a fire-temple in Dvin and
attempted to impose Zoroastrianism on the country. The reaction was par-
allel to that of 450. Led by Vardan, prince of the Mamikoneans (not to be
confused with the leader of the fifth-century revolt), the Armenians
rebelled. When Suren returned the following year with reinforcements, he
perished in the encounter. However, the Persians retook Dvin, and Vardan
fled to Constantinople. Now, for the first time, the consequences of the
religious differences became clear. Vardan had to accept communion with
the imperial church, while the patriarch, who had fled with him, remained
at Constantinople under the cloud of submission to Chalcedon until his
death in 574- 28

Justin II gave Vardan military forces, and Dvin was retaken. But Roman
success was not lasting. In 576 Persian forces under Khusro crossed
Armenia but failed to capture Karin (Theodosiopolis). After advancing as
far as Sebaste, Khusro withdrew and sacked Melitene, but after a confron-
tation there, he fled back to Persia in confusion. During negotiations the
following year, the Roman general Justinian was defeated by Tam Khusro
in Basean and Bagrevand, 29 and the Persians retained the frontier fortress
of Dara, which they had captured in 573. 30

But Roman fortunes revived in 5 90 when the general Vahram Chobin
seized the Sasanian throne on the murder of shah Hormizd. The legitimate
heir, Khusro II, son of Hormizd, appealed to the emperor Maurice for

26 ToumanofF(i963) 175; Procop. Wars 11.3.56. 27 Adontz (1970) 1 60— 1 ; Procop. Wars 11.5.51.

28 This rebellion and the ‘union’ of 572 is discussed in Garitte (1952) 183—275.

29 Sebeos7i. 30 Whitby, Maurice 264—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

674 22 b. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

help, promising in return to cede to the empire all of Armenia as far as Lake
Van and Dvin, plus part of Georgia. The offer was accepted, and the
Armenians under Mushegh, prince of the Mamikoneans, sided with
Khusro and the Byzantines. Their combined forces defeated Vahram the
following year at Gandzak in eastern Armenia. Installed as ruler of Persia,
Khusro fulfilled his promise: Armenia west of the Hrazdan and Azat rivers
passed to Byzantium.

This success for the eastern Roman empire was fraught with a number
of consequences for the Armenians. Maurice attempted to integrate
Armenia more securely into the empire. He deported significant numbers
of Armenians to the Balkans to strengthen his borders there and weaken
resistance to imperial rule among Armenians now incorporated into the
empire. The Armenian general Mushegh Mamikonean was lulled in
Thrace . 31 But Maurice sometimes encountered resistance by Armenian sol-
diers. The Bagratid prince Smbat rebelled and was condemned to the arena.
Saved by his strength, according to the Armenian historian (by the clem-
ency of the empress, according to a Greek source), he was exiled to
Africa . 32 But it was not long before he was in the east, serving the shah.

The plight of the Armenians between shah and emperor is well
expressed in an apocryphal letter which the Armenian historian known as
Sebeos claims was sent by Maurice to Khusro: ‘They are a perverse and dis-
obedient nation, who stand between us and disturb us. I shall gather mine
and send them off to Thrace. You gather yours and order them to be sent
to the east. If they die, it is our enemies who die. If they kill, they lull our
enemies. Then we shall live in peace. For if they remain in their own land,
there will be no repose for us .’ 33

But the most significant aspect of his policy was the attempt to enforce
imperial orthodoxy in the newly acquired territories. The Armenian patri-
arch was summoned to a synod where the union of the churches might be
effected — that is, where the Armenians would accept Chalcedon and com-
municate with the Byzantines. Moses II refused to go and remained in Dvin,
just across the border. On this occasion he is credited with a riposte that
clearly expressed Armenian resistance to assimilation. It is preserved in a
rare pro-Chalcedonian document of Armenian origin: ‘I shall not cross the
Azat; I shall not eat bread baked [in the oven]; I shall not drink warm water.’
The Azat was the river marking the border and is a pun, the word meaning
‘free’. The other two comments refer to the differing practices of the liturgy,
since Armenians used unleavened bread and did not mix warm water with
the wine . 34 Matters of doctrine may figure more prominently in the written
records of historians and theologians, but the development of different
rituals was no less potent a factor in the estrangement of the churches.

31 Sebeos 90—1. Whitby, Maurice 127—8, notes that Sebeos’ account seems to be a conflation of
several campaigns. 32 Sebeos 93; cf. Whitby, Maurice 127. 33 Sebeos 86.

34 For the ‘union’ of 591 and the comments of Moses II see Garitte (1952) 225—54.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 675

Nevertheless, the Armenian bishops in Byzantine territory did go to
Constantinople and accept communion, thus causing a schism in the
Armenian church. An anti-patriarch, John, was established by Maurice on
his side of the Azat, at Avan. Until the death of Maurice, the dissension
continued. But once Byzantine forces withdrew, then Armenian unity was
restored. This pattern recurred in the time of Heraclius and again under
Justinian II, but proved no more lasting than under Maurice. Despite the
fact that many sympathized with the position of the Greek imperial church
— and significant groups of Chalcedonian Armenians existed in the suc-
ceeding centuries 35 — reunion between the Byzantine and Armenian
churches was never effected.

Yet the time of Maurice was remembered as a time of peace. The
curious text known as ‘Pseudo-Shapuh’ — a medley of tales dating from the
ninth to the twelfth century, and not the lost work of the ninth-century his-
torian — refers to the proverb: As in the time of Maurice, when one lived
untroubled.’ It also reports that when Maurice summoned his father David,
who lived in Armenia, the latter said: ‘I cannot come. I prefer my small
garden to the Roman empire.’ But by cutting off the heads of the largest
cabbages in his garden, he indicated to his son’s messengers how Maurice
should treat his magnates. 36

Just as Maurice used Armenian arms in the Balkans, so did those
Armenian princes on the Persian side of the border continue to provide
military service to the shah. The most notable example is the career of
Smbat, prince of the Bagratunis, who served at different times both
emperor and shah — Armenian loyalties being rarely unequivocal and per-
manent. Just as Maurice settled colonies of Armenians in the west, so did
Smbat find Armenians, Greeks and Syrians deported to Hyrcania when he
was serving as governor there for Khusro II. Sebeos notes that the
Armenians had even forgotten their own language, and that Smbat reme-
died this by arranging for the ministry of a priest. 37 The role of language
and religion as a means of preserving Armenian identity in colonies outside
the homeland was already clear.

At the same time, the Armenians were estranged from their northern
neighbours. The Georgians under the Catholicos Kyrion disavowed the
Armenian rejection of Chalcedon and henceforth remained firmly commit-
ted to the orthdoxy of Constantinople. The final rupture occurred after a
series of bitter exchanges. At another council held in Dvin in 608, the
Armenians excommunicated the Georgians. 38 But contacts between the two
peoples could not be stopped by fiat, not least because of the extensive

35 For Chalcedonian Armenians in later centuries see Arutyunova-Fidanyan (1980).

36 Ps. Shapuh 49, 51. Cf. Adontz (1934). 37 Sebeos 96—7 .

38 The Armenian— Georgian correspondence in the Book of Betters has not been translated, but many
of the documents were quoted by Ukhtanes and may be read in the English rendering of that later his-
torian. But see now Garsoi'an (1999).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

676 lib. ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

bonds of consanguinity linking noble families on both sides of the frontier.
Pro-Chalcedonian Armenians were particularly numerous in Tayk’ and
Gugark’, where the two peoples mingled.

The downfall of Maurice in 602 gave Khusro an opportunity to recover
the Armenian lands ceded to his earlier supporter. The reign of Heraclius,
however, was to see the final defeat of Sasanian Persia and the rise of a new
power in the near east. These truly epoch-making events lie beyond our
present scope. Here it may suffice to note that by the turn of the sixth
century the basic structures of an independent Armenian culture had
already been created.

Many years earlier Tacitus had referred to the ambivalent role of
Armenia and the Armenians between Rome and Parthia: A people from
the earliest times of equal ambiguity in character and geography . . . placed
between two great empires, with which they differ frequently.’ He described
their dealings with both sides, and he knew that fundamentally the
Armenians were closer to Iran than to Rome. 39 In Sasanian times as well,
the value of Armenia as a vassal state was recognized by the two sides: the
eastern Roman empire and Sasanian Iran both sought to control Armenia,
to engage its troops and to profit from the gold mines and other natural
resources. After the division of the country and the abolition of the mon-
archy, attempted control became attempted integration — more successful
in Roman Armenia than in the much larger eastern sector.

The conversion of the Armenians to Christianity gradually changed
their relationship with Iran, but slowly and painfully. The various strands
of Christian practice from Jerusalem, Syria and Asia Minor were moulded
into a national tradition. But their faith and practice kept the Armenians
apart from the imperial church of Constantinople. Armenian scholars
created a national literature that was overtly patterned on the Christian lit-
eratures in Syriac and Greek, reflecting also the influence of late antique
culture which Armenians of the fourth and later centuries absorbed in the
schools of the eastern Mediterranean. But the Iranian background was not
easily shaken off, and Persian motifs reappeared throughout the centuries.
Many Armenians found fame and fortune in the Byzantine empire, 411 but
Armenia as a whole was never integrated into the Greek-speaking empire.

When Armenians later reflected on their individuality and the formation
of their unique culture, they concentrated on a few specific episodes: the
conversion of kingTrdat (Tiridates), the invention of the Armenian script
and beginnings of a literature in the vernacular, and the heroic resistance
to Sasanian attempts to impose magism. The interpreters of those events,
no matter how far removed or tendentious, became the classic authors par

39 Tacitus, Annals 11. 5 6; xm.34. My translation.

40 Cf. Charanis (1963) and for a later period Ka2hdan (1975).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 677

excellence. And the images of those events as expressed in the classic histo-
ries gave meaning to succeeding generations who sought to understand the
role and fate of Armenia in an unfriendly world.

Armenia may have played a larger role in the politics of the near east in
the time of Tigran the Great, as Moses Khorenatsi rightly stated: ‘He
extended the borders of our territory, and established them at their
extreme limits in antiquity. He was envied by all who lived in his time, while
he and his epoch were admired by posterity .’ 41 Yet Tigran and military
success were not the typical models in terms of which Armenians thought
of their present and their future. Imagery of a ‘golden age’ described the
harmony of king Tiridates and St Gregory the Illuminator, while wishful
prophecies foresaw the eradication of present woes by the restoration of
the descendants of the one to the Arsacid throne and of the descendants
of the other to the patriarchate. More powerful than the memory of the
heroic Tigran was the model of the Maccabees, whose defence of ances-
tral customs and an individual religious culture evoked a strong response in
Armenian minds . 42 So in the fifth and sixth centuries the image of an
Armenian ‘classical’ age was created. Perhaps exaggerated in retrospect, it
none the less depicted a people who could not be assimilated into either of
the imperial powers.

41 Moses 1.24 — though he has dated this Tigran far too early.

42 See the introduction to Thomson (19S2) for the details. Such imagery was applied by the tenth-
century Thomas Artsruni to the Muslim rulers, and is frequently found in later Armenian writers.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 22 c

THE ARABS*

LAWRENCE I. CONRAD

i. introduction: the question of sources

In the present state of our knowledge it is not difficult to describe the phys-
ical setting for pre-Islamic Arabian history, and new archaeological discover-
ies in Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Jordan and the Gulf are producing much
valuable and unique evidence. Over the past century a vast body of epigraph-
ical material — some 50,000 north and south Arabian inscriptions and the
inscribed sticks now emerging by the hundreds in northern Yemen — has pro-
vided a wealth of information on the societies of the peninsula, especially
the bedouins. 1 But all this seldom provides a coherent picture of the course
of events, as opposed to vignettes and bare details, and thus does not replace
a literary historical tradition. There are external epigraphic records of the
Arabs and Arabia, and historical sources — especially in Greek and Syriac —
are often helpful. 2 But this information too is profoundly discontinuous, and
in any case represents the perspective of outsiders who regarded the Arabs
as barbarian marauders and most of Arabia as a menacing wasteland. 3

There is voluminous material on the subject in the Arabic sources, but
herein lies the problem. 4 The relevant accounts, including a vast bulk of
poetry, are frequently attributed to the pre-Islamic period or otherwise pre-
sented as describing events and conditions of that time, but apart from the
Qur’an the sources containing these accounts are at least two centuries
later. In times past it seemed reasonable simply to compare the various
accounts to determine which seemed most likely to be true. More recently,
however, it has become clear that the Arabic sources on the Arabs in pre-
Islamic Arabia — and indeed, on the first century of Islamic history as a
whole — represent a fluid corpus that adopted a range of argumentative
views on issues important at the time the accounts were being transmitted
and the sources compiled; the result was the colouring and reshaping of

* I would like to thank Fidelity and William Lancaster and Michael Macdonald for their valuable
comments and suggestions.

1 See, e.g., Robin (1991); Macdonald (1995a).

2 See Papathomopoulos (1984); Segal (1984); MacAdam (1989).

3 On the distorted image of bedouins among settled folk, see Shaw 1982—3.

4 Two still-valuable overviews are Olinder (1927) 1 1— 19; Caskel (1927—30).

678

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ARABS IN LATE ANTIQUITY

679

much early and possibly genuine material and the creation of many new
accounts . 5 Most importantly, pre-Islamic Arabia played an important role
in early Islamic kerygma. In explanation of the success of Islam and the
Arab conquerors, Muslim scholars and transmitters interpreted Islam’s
emergence from Arabia as part of God’s divine plan . 6 Part of this concep-
tion involved presentation of the pre-Islamic Arabs as naive coarse barbar-
ians — ragged ignorant nomads and eaters of snakes and lizards, for
example — and Arabia as a quintessential wasteland. This contrasted sharply
with the powerful and sophisticated peoples of the empires to the north
and the richness and fertility of their lands; obviously, the Arab victories
against such formidable foes could only have been won by God’s permis-
sion and as part of his plan for mankind . 7 This paradigm is manifestly ker-
ygmatic, and while it may at various points correspond to historical reality
it does not spring from that reality. In each case, then, the historian must
judge — often on insecure grounds — the extent to which the motifs and
stereotypes of this kerygma have affected his sources . 8

II. THE ARABS IN LATE ANTIQUITY

Extant references to Arabs’ begin in the ninth century b.c ., 9 and in ensuing
centuries attest to their presence in Arabia, Syria and Iraq and their inter-
action with the peoples of adjacent lands, encouraged in part by the Roman
and Persian policy of using Arab groups to protect their desert flanks and
perform military functions as confederates and auxiliaries. In Syria, Arab
presence was prominent all along the fringe between the desert and the
sown, 1 " and inscriptions and literary sources confirm that many Arabs took
up settled life in rural villages . 1 1 The hinterlands of inland Syrian cities were
partly populated by Arabs, and major cities such as Damascus and Beroea
(Aleppo) had significant Arab populations. In such situations Arabs cer-
tainly knew Greek and/or Syriac, and perhaps as their first languages . 12
Arabs were also to be found through the pastoral steppe lands of northern
Mesopotamia, where monks in the Jacobite and Nestorian monasteries
occasionally comment on them. 1 ’ In Iraq there were large groupings of

5 Ahlwardt (1872); Husayn (1927) 171—86; Caskel (1930); Blachere (1952—66) 1.85—127, 166—86;
Birkeland (1956); Arafat (1958); Caskel (1966) 1.1— 71 (with the review in Henninger (1966)); Crone
(1987) 203—30. 6 See the discussion in Conrad (forthcoming).

7 Conrad (1987b) 39—40 and n. 46; (1998a) 238.

8 The gravity of the source-critical problems is stressed in Whittow (1999), a detailed critique of the
volumes on ‘Byzantium and the Arabs’ by Irfan Shahid (specifically, Shahid (1995)), which, though full
of valuable information, pose serious problems and need always to be used with caution.

9 Eph'al (1984) 75—7; Macdonald (1995a).

10 Dussaud (1955) 51—161; Mayerson (1963); Sartre (1982).

11 MacAdam (1983); Millar (1993b) 428—36.

12 Nau (1933) 1 9— 24; Trimingham (1979) 116—24; Shahid (1989) 134—45.

13 Nau (1933) 15—18, 24—6; Charles (1936) 64— 70; Trimingham (1979) 145—58.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

68o

2 2 C. THE ARABS

Arabs; settled Arabs lived as both peasants and townsmen along the
western fringes of Iraq, and al-HIra, the focus of Arab sedentary life in the
area, was deemed an Arab town. Most were converts to Christianity, many
spoke Aramaic and Persian, and they were largely assimilated to Sasanian
culture . 14

The sources referring to the Arabs describe them in various ways. In
Greek and Syriac they were most usually called sarakenoi and tayyaye, terms
which refer to their tribal origin or to their character as travellers to the
inner desert . 15 In Arabic, interestingly enough, the terms ‘ arab and its plural
arab are generally used to refer to tribal nomads. Though the settled folk
of Arabia shared much in common with the nomads, they nevertheless
drew a sharp distinction between themselves and the bedouins (and rightly
— a tribesman is not necessarily a nomad). It is true that by the sixth century
a.d. the Arabic language had spread through most of Arabia (if not so
much in the south) and engendered a common oral culture based largely
on poetry of often exceptional quality . 16 But in none of this should one see
evidence of a supposed archetype for Arab unity in any ethnic, geograph-
ical or political sense.

The basis for Arab social organization was the tribe . 17 Genealogical
studies in early Islamic times were already elaborating the lineages and
interrelationships of the tribes in great detail. The Arabs comprised two
great groupings, northern and southern; the former were traced to an
eponymous founder named ‘Adrian and the latter to a similar figure called
Qahtan, and both were further divided into smaller sections and sub-
groupings. Ancient Arab history is routinely presented in the sources as
determined by these tribal considerations , 18 but modern anthropology has
cast doubt on this and has raised the question of whether such a thing as a
‘tribe’ even exists. While the term is problematic, it seems excessive to
resolve a conceptual difficulty by denying the existence of its object . 19 The
notion of the tribe, however ambiguous, has always been important in tra-
ditional Arab society; in pre-Islamic Arabia there can be no doubt that
kinship determined social organization. 2 " The problem can perhaps best be
formulated as revolving around the questions of how far back this was
meaningfully traced, and how stable perceptions of kinship were.

14 Charles (1936) 5 5— 61; Morony (1984) 214—23.

15 Macdonald (1995b) 95—6. Other views: Christides (1972); Graf and O’Connor (1977); O’Connor

(1986). 16 Fuck (1950) 1— 28; Blachere (1952— 66) 1.66— 82; Gabrieli (1959b); von Grunebaum (1963).

17 See Caskel (1962); and for modern parallels, Musil (1928) 44— 60; Jabbur (1995) 261—8, 286—306.

18 Caskel (1966) 1.1-71.

19 Inter alia, Schneider (1984). Cf. the discussion in Crone (1986) 48—5 5; (1993) 354— 63;Tapper (1990)
60-4.

20 Even with respect to Arabs from south Arabia, where Dostal’s hypotheses (1984) would lead us
to expect social organization along other lines. Note that in all three of the early Arab urban founda-
tions in Egypt and Iraq, the Arab conquerors — even Yemeni contingents — organized themselves
according to tribe. See Pellat (195 3) 22—34; Djai't (1986) 73—135; Kubiak (1987) 58—75.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE ARABS IN LATE ANTIQUITY

68 1

Individuals were very often aware of their primordial tribal affiliations,
and took pride in the achievements, glories and victories of their ancestors.
Similarly, personal enemies often vilified the individual by calling into ques-
tion his tribe as a whole. In practice, however, the vast tribal coalitions
rarely acted as a unified whole, and the socially meaningful unit was the
small tenting or village group tracing its origins back four or five genera-
tions at most. The perception of common descent was not unimportant to
the cohesion of such groups, but even more vital were considerations of
common interest. In order to maintain itself, the group had to be able to
defend its pasturing grounds, water supplies and other resources from
intruders, and its members from injury or harm from outsiders. Dramatic
changes in kinship affiliations could occur when, for example, the require-
ments of contemporary alliances or client relationships dictated a reformu-
lation of historical genealogical affinities . 21 Such shifts could even occur at
the level of the great tribal confederations , 22 and were facilitated by the fact
that no loss of personal or legal autonomy was involved — a ‘client’ tribe
was not in the state of subservience implied by the western sense of the
term . 23

Through most of Arabia, the welfare of the individual was secured by
customary law and the ability of his kin or patron to protect him. If a
member of a group were molested or killed, this dishonoured the group as
a whole and required either retaliation or compensation. Individuals thus
adhered to at least the minimum standards required to remain a member of
their group, since an outcast could be killed with impunity . 24 This system
provided security and guaranteed the status of tradition and custom . 23
Violence in the form of warfare, feuding and raiding did occur, but the last
of these has given rise to much confusion, and its scope and scale have
often been exaggerated : 26 there was no glory in raiding a weak tribe or rav-
aging a defenceless village, and fatalities on either side posed the immedi-
ate risk of a blood feud. Prowess in battle was without doubt a highly
esteemed virtue, and Arabian society was imbued with a martial spirit that
elevated the raid, or gha^w, to the level of an institution . 27 Still, this usually
involved one powerful tribe raiding another for their animals , 28 and the vio-
lence involved was limited by considerations of honour, by the ordinarily
small size of raiding parties, and — where weaker groups were concerned —
by networks of formal arrangements for protection.

21 Ibn Khaldun, Muqaddima 1.238.

22 Goldziher (1967—71) 1.92, 96; Caskel (1953) 8, 15; (1966) 1.3 1—2, 43—4; 11.22— 3, 72, 448; Lancaster

(1997) 16—23, 32—4, 1 51—7. Cf. Gellner (1973). 23 Lancaster (1997) ix, 73, 128—9.

24 Musil (1928) 426—70, 489—503; Fares (1932) esp. 44—101; Chelhod (1971) esp. 231— 341; Stewart
(1994) esp. 130—44. 25 Cf. Stewart (1994) 139—43.

26 Most notoriously in Lammens (1928) 181—236; cf. also Meeker (1979) 1 1 1—50.

27 Musil (1928) 504— 661; Jabbur (1995) 348—5 5; Lancaster (1997) 140-5.

28 Sweet (1965) 1138—41.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

68z

22 C. THE ARABS

Headship of a tribal unit was vested in a shaykh (‘chief’, ‘elder’; other
terms were also used), but the powers of this office were seriously limited,
and the shaykh remained in power as long as the tribe felt this was to their
benefit. He was expected to lead the tribe, protect its prerogatives and inter-
ests, mediate among its members and with other tribes, and serve as an
exponent of murunwa , an ethic of masculine virtue bound up in such traits
as courage, strength, wisdom, generosity and leadership . 29 While the chief
had no power to enforce his decisions, it was of course not in the interest
of the group to maintain a leader in power and yet regularly defy his deci-
sions. The shaykh led by example and by exercise of a quality of shrewd
opportunistic forbearance called hilrrr he was a mouthpiece of group con-
sensus whose reputation required assent to his judgement . 30

The exception to all this was the south, where plentiful rainfall, carried
by monsoon winds, allowed for levels of agriculture, population and sed-
entary development not possible elsewhere. The numerous small towns of
the region thrived on the spice trade and enjoyed the stability of a highly
developed agrarian economy with extensive terrace farming and irrigation.
The towns were closely spaced settlements of tall tower-dwellings, often
with a distinct ‘centre’, and their organization tended to promote commer-
cial and professional bonds at the expense of large-scale kinship ties. Out
of this stability there arose a number of coherent regimes with
indentifiable political centres: Ma'ln, Saba’, Qataban and Hadramawt,
based respectively at Qarnaw, Ma’rib, Tamna' and Shabwa. The most
dynamic of them was Saba’, which by the third and fourth century a.d. had
managed to annex the territories of all the others.

The south Arabian entities were ruled by figures early on called mukar-
tibs, or ‘federators’. It has long been held that this office was hereditary and
had a distinctly religious function, but this now seems unlikely . 31 Not unex-
pectedly, social differentiation reached levels unknown in lands to the
north. The sedentary tribes were led by powerful chieftains known as qayk,
and at the other end of the spectrum both serfdom and slavery were well-
established institutions. Nomads were held in check by granting them lands
in exchange for military services, thus rendering them dependent upon the
regime.

III. ARABIAN RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS

The social organization of pre-Islamic Arabia was closely bound up with
considerations of religion, and it is in this area that problems of methodol-
ogy and source criticism are most acute. Issues such as borrowing from

29 Goldziher (1967— 71) i.i i— 44. 30 See Pellat (1962-3), (1973). Cf. also Lancaster 1997, 87-9.

31 Robin (1991) 52, 55.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARABIAN RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS 683

more advanced civilizations, the starting-points and relative antiquity of
religious forms, the roles of animism and totemism, and differences
between sedentary and nomadic peoples have been and remain highly con-
troversial, and in many cases important arguments involve value judge-
ments about nomads and, similarly, supposed distinctions between ‘high’
and ‘low’ forms of religious expression. There is also the problem that the
Arabic sources, where the vast bulk of our source material is to be found,
can hardly be said to offer an objective view of pre -Islamic religion. The
folly of idol-worship and the credulity of its adherents are routinely
stressed in stereotyped ways. One tale describes how a tribe fashioned an
idol out of hays (dried curd mixed with dates and clarified butter) and wor-
shipped it for a time, but eventually devoured it during a famine, leading to
a poet’s wry comment:

The tribe of Hanlfa ate their lord
When dearth and hunger swept the land,

Fearing naught for consequences
From their lord’s avenging hand . 32

Inspired by Qur’anic criticisms , 33 Arabic sources also present ‘bedouins’ as
indifferent to matters of faith . 34

Arabian polytheism took several forms , 35 one of which was stone-
worship. Greek and Syriac sources presented this as adoration of lifeless
rocks, but such objects were not deities in themselves, but their dwelling-
places or the focus of the rituals of the cult. Offerings were made at the
site, and ritual observances included circumambulation of the stone. The
best-known example is of course the Ka'ba in Mecca, but we are told that
other places had such cultic foci . 36 These foci were often surrounded by a
sacred territory, usually called a haram in the north and a hawta in the south.
These were precincts associated with the sanctity of worship and sacrifice,
and violence and killing, including hunting, were forbidden there. Holy
men were in charge of these precincts, and their descendants enjoyed a
special religious esteem . ,7 Also prominent was religious observance revolv-
ing around idols — again, with the idol probably representing the deity being
worshipped. The names of many idols are known from ancient poetry and
from later prose works drawing on this verse, and important new details
pertaining to Yathrib (Medina) may be indicative of a more general pattern.
Here clans each had an idol in a room belonging to all of the clan. The idol
was venerated there and sacrifices were made to it. People also had wooden

32 Ibn Qutayba, Ma ‘ drif 621 .

33 Surat al-Tawba (9), v. 90 (= Arberry, 1 89—90): procrastinators, liars, malingerers; w. 97—8, 101 (—
Arberry, 190— 1): hypocrites, stubborn in unbelief, opportunists; Surat al-Fath (48), v. 11 (= Arberry,
; 32): dissemblers, malicious, corrupt; Surat al-Hujurat (49), v. 14 (= Arberry, 5 38): superficial in belief.

34 Cf. Bashear (1997) 7—14. 35 Arafat (1968).

36 'l l: is is made especially clear in I .ughda al Isfahan!, Bilad at- ‘arab 32. 37 Sergeant (1962).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

684

2 2 C. THE ARABS

idols in their homes, and made similar observances at that level. To offend
the idol was an offence against the honour of the head of the house and a
matter for retaliation, and there is some evidence that these idols were
intended to be figures of ancestors. There was thus a hierarchy of idols,
corresponding to the social status of their owners. 38

There is good evidence of star-worship and astral divinities as well. The
widely venerated al-Lat (a sky goddess) and al-'Uzza (possibly the morning
star) may have been representations of Venus, and Byzantine polemics
against Islam claim that the Islamic slogan Allahu akbar, ‘God is great’, has
as its origin a cry of devotion in astral religion/’ 9 The worship of astral
divinities has also been connected with the veneration of idols.

The attitude of the ancient Arabs toward their gods was entirely empir-
ical and pragmatic. Though they did consider problems of human exis-
tence and the meaning of life, 40 they did not look to their deities for the
answers. They regarded their gods as the ultimate sources of worldly phe-
nomena beyond human control, such as disease, rain, fertility, and personal
and communal adversities of various kinds; they worshipped the gods in
expectation of their assistance, but they did not revere them or consider
that they owed unwavering commitment to them. 41

Monotheistic religion was also known in Arabia from an early date. The
influx of Jews into Arabia is difficult to trace, but probably had much to do
with the failure of the Jewish revolt and the destruction of the Temple in
a.d. 70, and the gradual spread of Christianity over the next three centu-
ries. In south Arabia, Judaism enjoyed considerable success in the fifth and
early sixth century, and to the north there were important Jewish commu-
nities at various places, primarily Yathrib. There Judaism seems to have had
deep and powerful roots, if one may judge from reports that in pre-Islamic
times the Jews there had three times as many fortified compounds ( qusur )
as all the other non-Jewish clans combined, 42 and that in the latter half of
the sixth century the Jewish clans of Qurayza and al-Nadlr collected taxes
from the other tribes. 4 ’ The question of Jewish influences in Arabia and on
Islam has become highly sensitive in modern scholarship, but there can be
no doubt that such influences were profoundly important; the Qur’an itself
contains many tales and accounts of Jewish origin, as also do early Islamic
religious lore and scholarship. 44

38 Lecker (1993). 39 On this see Rotter (1993); Hoyland (1997) 105— 7.

40 E.g. the ephemeral joys of youth and the ultimate fate of either death or senility: Zuhayr, Dlwan
29; al- c Askari,^4«4f ; V/ 1.57.

41 Wellhausen (1897) 213—14; Crone (1987) 237—41.

42 Ibn al-Najjar, Al-Durra al-thamina 325. Cf. Conrad (1981) 22.

43 Ibn Khurradadhbih, A.l-Masdlik wa-l-mamdlik 128; Yaqut, Mu c jam al-buldan , iv.460. Cf. Kister
(1968) 145-7.

44 On the Jews of pre-Islamic Arabia, see Newby (1988) 14—77; an d on influences, Geiger (1833);
Rosenthal (1961) 3—46; Nagel (1967); Rubin (1995) esp. 32, 217—25.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ARABIAN RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS 685

The Christianization of the Roman empire in the fourth century opened
the way for the large-scale spread of the faith along and beyond the empire’s
frontiers, including Arabia. 45 Along the Syrian desert fringe from the Red Sea
to the Euphrates, it spread to the Arab tribes via monasteries and wandering
missionaries, primarily Monophysite. In some cases, as with the Taghlib and
Ghassan, entire tribes converted; tribal settlements such as al-Jabiya and
Jasim, south of Damascus, became ecclesiastical centres too. These tribes
were familiar with at least basic observances, yet remained completely within
Arab tribal culture as well. 46 Along the Iraqi frontier the spread of Christianity
was somewhat slower, perhaps because a network of Nestorian monasteries
in the area took longer to appear than had been the case among the
Monophysites. 47 Still, al-HIra, the Lakhmid base, was the seat of a bishopric
by a.d. 410. 48 Further south, there were major Christian communities at such
centres as Najran and San'a’, and small ecclesiastical outposts along the
Arabian coast of the Persian Gulf. In such centres, specifically Monophysite
or Nestorian forms of Christianity were practised, but elsewhere the Arab
tribesman’s main contact with the faith was via individual monks and hermits,
and there confessional boundaries may have been less sharply drawn. 49

Other currents influenced byjudaism and Christianity remained distinct
from both. These trends revolved around two notions: that of a ‘high god’,
and a belief in what was called hanifiya. Little can be said about belief in a
‘high god’ in ancient Arabia, apart from the fact that, as elsewhere in the
Near East, 50 some held that a god called Allah held a certain dignity and
status above the other deities of the Arabian pantheon and was extolled as
a deity to whom one could turn in case of particular need. 51 On hanifiya
there is more information. 32 The Qur’an makes it the religion of Abraham
and associates it, on the one hand, with belief in a single God and, on the
other, with rejection of idolatry and repudiation of worship of the sun,
moon and stars. In particular, and most importantly, it reflects not the prag-
matic attitude toward religion described above, in which the individual wor-
ships his god(s) in expectation of services with respect to worldly needs
beyond his control, but rather a submissive devotion to and faith in God
for his own sake. Hanifiya is also distinct from Christianity and Judaism; in
several passages its adherent (a hanif) is equated with a Muslim, and in one
variant to the Qur’anic text hanifiya replaces Islam as the ‘true religion’. 53

45 For an overview, see Charles (1936); Trimingham (1979).

46 For a valuable anthology of the verse of early Arab Christian poets, see Cheikho (1 890). Cf. also

Conrad (1994) 30, 31, 51. 47 Cf. Brock (1982). 48 Synodicon orientale 36.

49 On the Qur’anic evidence, see Ahrens (1930); Michaud (i960); Parrinder (1965); Bowman (1967);
Robinson (1991). The relevant Qur’anic verses, with the commentaries from many tafsirs, are assem-
bled in Abu Wand! et al (1996). 50 Teixidor (1977) 17, 161—2.

51 Watt (1979); Welch (1979); Rubin (1981).

52 For differing interpretations, see Gibb (1962); Rubin (1990); Rippin (1991).

53 Jeffery (1937) 32, ad Surat Al 'Imran (3), v. 19; = Arberry, 47.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

686

2 2 C. THE ARABS

Other sources suggest that there were hanlfo in various parts of Arabia, that
the movement was one of individuals rather than religious communities,
and that Mecca was important to its adherents. Other details are less reli-
able, and there is no evidence to link hanifiya with south Arabian inscrip-
tions attesting to worship of a god called al-Rahman, ‘the Merciful’, one of
the Islamic names for God. But the fact that the tradition on the hanifo
makes some of them doubters or enemies of Muhammad suggests that it
should not be dismissed entirely as later prophetic annunciation or the
tidying up of a pagan past.

Of interest in this respect is the testimony of Sozomen (d. before 448),
who from the vantage point of Gaza in southern Palestine offered the fol-
lowing comments on Arab religion:

It seems that the Saracens were descended from Ishmael, son of Abraham, and
hence were originally called Ishmaelites. Their mother Hagar was a slave, so in
order to hide the shame of their origin they took the name of Saracens, pretend-
ing to be descended from Sarah, the wife of Abraham. As such is their descent,
they practise circumcision like the Jews, abstain from eating pork, and adhere to
numerous other Jewish observances and practices. In so far as they in any sense
diverge from the observances of that people, this arises from the passage of time
and their contacts with other neighbouring peoples ... It seems likely that with the
passage of time their ancient customs fell into disuse as they gradually took to
observing the customs of other peoples. Eventually, when some of their tribe
came into contact with the Jews, they learned from them the facts of their true
origin and returned to observance of Hebrew custom and law. In fact, even at the
present time there are some of them who live their lives in accordance with the
Jewish law . 54

The connection with Judaism may reflect an inclination to associate false
belief with the machinations of Jews. 55 As to the Abrahamic religion
attested in the text, while the connection is circumstantial and Sozomen
wrote long before the testimony of the Qur’an, the Islamic scripture may
refer to continuing monotheistic trends in Arabia that it wishes to distance
from earlier monotheistic faiths now viewed as rivals.

IV. ECONOMIC LIFE IN ARABIA

It is difficult to generalize on the notion of an Arabian ‘economy’, since the
internal economic situation in the peninsula varied from place to place and
depended on whether a community was settled or nomadic. As noted
above, the south had a lively village economy based on terrace farming and
irrigation; but even here, production was primarily limited to foodstuffs and

54 Soz. HE vi. 38. 10— 14. Cf. Cook (1983) 81; Millar (1993a) 42—4.

55 On the topos of the scheming Jews, see Schafer (1997).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ECONOMIC LIFE IN ARABIA

687

use-value goods. South Arabian spices and incense were much sought-after
items for centuries, and undoubtedly fortunes were made from trade in
them , 56 but overland trade in such goods appears to have collapsed by the
first or second century a.d. 37

In the rest of the peninsula the economy was far more rudimentary. The
interior of the peninsula consists of various types of steppe land where, in
most years, no major cultivation can be sustained because of lack of water.
Reliable water supplies come from wells and oasis springs, and it was
around these that Arabia’s towns developed. The date palm dominated
agriculture in many places, and this and other crops were often cultivated
in large walled gardens ( hawait ) scattered over whatever patches of arable
land there were in or around a settlement. Goats and sheep were kept, and
items produced for sale included hides and leather, wool, cloth, dairy prod-
ucts, raisins, dates, wine, and utensils and weapons of various kinds. Gold
and silver were mined, but often figured as a replacement for currency
rather than as an export item; perfume was produced, especially in Aden
and Najran, but beyond the Arabian and Syrian markets it could not
compete with the cheaper products of such Byzantine centres as
Alexandria . 38 Arabian traders in late antiquity were thus known to their
neighbours — in Palestine, for example — as bearers not of costly luxury
items, but rather of animals, wool, hides, oil and grains . 59

Bedouins, on the other hand, were largely herders and pastoralists,
though members of many tribes settled for varying periods of time and
others engaged in opportunistic agriculture — for example by sowing on a
fertile watered plot on their way somewhere else, and then reaping when
they returned. Tenting groups travelled in recognized tribal territories, their
schedules and movements (and willingness to encroach on the lands of
other tribes) largely dictated by the needs of their animals. Those who lived
along the desert fringes tended sheep and goats, as well as the single-
humped dromedary camel; groups venturing into the depths of the
Arabian steppe lands did best with camels, but on occasion are known to
have taken goats and sheep as well. For barter or sale, nomads could offer
such animal products as hides, leather, wool and dairy products.

The symbiosis between village-dwellers and nomads was important to
the whole economic structure of Arabia. Leather, for example, was an
extremely important product and was the plastic of its day; everything from
buckets to items of clothing was made from it, and agriculture could not
have been maintained without huge supplies of leather for ropes, irrigation

56 Groom (1981). 57 The last reference to it is in the Periplus maris erythraei xxvii.

58 Dunlop (1957) 37—40; Crone (1987) 87-97.

59 Krauss (1916) 335—6; Kraemer (ed.), Excavatons at Nessana in: Non-Literary Papyri 251—60 no. 89.
The Palestinian church at Dayr al- £ Adasa, dedicated in 621, has a mosaic floor bearing various rural
scenes, including one of a caravan of camels carrying oil or wine jars; see Baity (1989) 149—51.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

688

2 2 C. THE ARABS

equipment, harness and so forth. Apart from exchanges (often quite
complex) of goods and services, bedouins played a major role in economic
development. There is evidence, for example, that parts of different tribes
concluded sharecropping agreements and worked together to promote and
protect agriculture . 60 Certain villages also specialized in serving the needs
of nomads, and oases and springs where herds could be watered attracted
settlements that thrived on trade with the nomads. Relations were further
dictated by the need of settled merchants to move their goods through
lands controlled by nomads, and hence to remain on good terms with the
tribes . 61

Arabian domestic trade thus consisted of caravans of camels organized
by settled merchants and protected and guided by bedouins who con-
trolled the lands through which the caravans passed. Seasonal fairs were
often held, especially around religious shrines, and security at such impor-
tant times was guaranteed by the declaration of sacred periods during
which no raiding or fighting was to occur . 62 The goods being traded were
for the most part not costly items, but rather the basic goods and com-
modities that people needed to live. This in turn limited the distance and
duration that the caravans could travel, since the longer the journey was,
the more expensive the goods would be at their destination ; 63 that is, the
longer the contemplated journey was in both distance and time, the more
precious the goods being carried would have to be in order to generate
sufficient income to make the journey feasible economically. The internal
trade of Arabia thus seems to have involved the transport of goods on
short or medium-length journeys, and it is probably this factor that
accounts for the proliferation of market centres. The sources present a
picture of lively markets dotting the steppe landscape of the peninsula;
wells, springs and small villages were all attractive sites for established
market activities, though the scale of such operations was probably
small . 64 In some cases, commerce was encouraged by banning private land
ownership within the market precinct (thus preventing dominance by a
few successful merchants) and suspending taxes and fees on traders and
visitors . 65

60 Al-BakrI, Mu jam ma sta c jam 1.77—8. Cf. Kister (1 979) 70 on similar arrangements at the time of the
Prophet. The same system is still widespread today.

61 See Simon (1989) 78—86; Morony (1984) 21 8—19; Donner (1989) 77—8; and for modern examples,
Jabbur (1995) 1—2, 5—8, 32—8, 250. Cf. also Nelson (1970).

62 Wellhausen (1897) 84—94; Brunschvig (1976) 1.1 13—18; Crone (1987) 87—108.

63 Jones (1955) 164; Hendy (1986) 5 56—7. Cf. also Crone (1987) 7. Not all trade was profit-driven,
however; see Villiers (1940).

64 Lughda al-Isfahanl, Bilad al- 'arab e.g. 224, 227, 243, 333—4, 335, 345, 358, 361, 397; Muhammad ibn

Habib, Muhabbar 263—8; al-Marzuql, Kitab al-a^mina wa-l-amkina 161—70. Cf. also al-Afghanl (i960);
Hammur (1979). 65 Kister (1965); Dostal (1979); Lecker (1986).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

IMPERIUM AND IMPERIAL POLITICS

689

V. IMPERIUM AND IMPERIAL POLITICS

It will be seen from the above that there was little in Arabia to attract the
attention of the great powers of late antiquity, and at first it was only
Arabia’s role athwart the route to the east that lent it any importance to
them. This factor alone was sufficient to make Arabia a focus of imperial
manoeuvring and power politics, but trade operated in conjunction with
other factors as well. The spread of Christianity and to a lesser extent
Judaism in Arabia reflects the interest of external powers from an early
date. In fact, it was the great triad of politics, trade and religion that deter-
mined the course of events there from late antiquity onward, with trade
providing an imperial momentum later transferred to the other two.

All around the peripheries of Arabia the impact of imperium was being
felt. Behind the Roman presence advancing in the north came Roman
roads, way stations and forts, reflecting an increasing interest in control of
what lay beyond. Far more vigorous, however, were the inroads by the
Sasanians, who, with their capital at Ctesiphon, the rich agricultural allu-
vium of Iraq, and the Persian Gulf trade to consider, had a more immedi-
ate stake in Arabia. Settlements were founded up and down the Gulf, and
Oman was annexed by Shapur I (reigned 241—72). In the fourth century,
Arab raids provoked a punitive expedition that reached as far as the Hijaz.
Discovery of silver and copper in the Najd led to the foundation of a
Sasanian outpost at Shamam. 66

The rivalry between the two powers was exacerbated by several factors.
The establishment under Constantine of a Christian empire based at
Constantinople made competition with Persia more immediate and pro-
vided yet another arena for intrigue and dispute. But more important by far
was the evolution of the rival polities themselves. From largely decentral-
ized and culturally diverse empires tolerant of a broad range of contradic-
tory ideologies and traditions, both developed into world powers using
political, economic and military strength, justified by elitist ideologies and
spurred by aspirations to universal dominion, to pursue imperial aims
increasingly dictated from the capital. These states, the empires of
Byzantium and the Sasanians, competed for control of the west Asian
heartland and adopted more global strategies in efforts to promote their
own interests and undermine those of their rival. 67 Thus, while the rise of
Christianity led to the collapse of the market for the incense consumed so
massively and ostentatiously by pagan Rome, 66 the demise of this formerly

66 Noldeke (1879) 5 6; Dunlop (1957) 40; Crone (1987) 46.

67 Fowden (1993) esp. 24—36, 80—137, though the focus on monotheism and the stress on premedi-
tated planning from the centre seem overstated. Cf. Crone (1987) 47.

68 Muller (1978) 733—64; Groom (1981) 162; Crone (1987) 27.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

690

220 THE ARABS

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

IMPERIUM AND IMPERIAL POLITICS 691

crucial aspect of the eastern trade was more than replaced by new rivalries
of an unprecedented intensity.

The new level of conflict ushered in by the escalating competition
between the two great powers manifested itself in several ways where
Arabia and the Arabs were concerned. First, a pronounced religious
element was introduced into the struggle, primarily in the southern part of
the peninsula and surrounding lands. Monophysite missionary activity 69 led
to the conversion of Ethiopia to Christianity in the fourth century and the
spread of the faith in Yemen and elsewhere in south Arabia. The Christian
presence noted frequently in the Qur’an was probably the result of com-
mercial contacts with Syria. The Sasanians, on the other hand, supported
the spread of the rival confession of the Nestorians and also encouraged
the Himyarites, a predominantly Jewish regime which ruled most of south
Arabia and had influence elsewhere. Religious rivalries played instrumental
roles in an Ethiopian invasion of Yemen in about 5 1 8 and shortly thereaf-
ter a civil war among the Himyarites between Christian and Jewish factions.
This struggle led to a persecution of Christians in south Arabia under the
Himyarite Dhu Nuwas, and in the 520s culminated in the massacre of the
Christians of Najran. Ethiopia responded with a second invasion, killed
Dhu Nuwas, and once again installed a puppet regime in Yemen. The
power of the Ethiopian governor, however, was soon usurped by a certain
Abraha, who established himself as the paramount authority in the south;
among the Meccans he was remembered as the leader of an expedition that
they viewed as a campaign against themselves, but that in fact was a move
(in 5 52) against tribal forces to the east.

Second, the peninsula was gradually encircled and penetrated by external
forces. The Sasanians established trading posts beyond the Straits of
Hormuz as far as Aden and in the sixth century occupied Yemen. Persian
authority extended as far as Yathrib, where taxes were collected by the Jewish
tribes of Qurayza and al-Nadlr and in part sent on to a Persian ‘governor of
the desert’ ( mar^uban al-badiyd)? {) Byzantium, on the other hand, still had
trade through Clysma and Ayla to protect, 71 and sought a sea route to the
east that would not be subject to Persian taxes and interference. It thus tried
to extend its influence down the Red Sea and battled against pirates and
adventurers to maintain control of ports and customs stations; epigraphical
evidence places Byzantine forces nearly 1,000 km south of Damascus in the
mid sixth century. 72 It also used its new Christian ally, Ethiopia, to pursue its
economic interests and intervene militarily in the affairs of the south, and
encouraged the Himyarites to attack Persian interests. 73

69 Altheim and Stiehl (1971— 3) 1.393— 431; Shahid (1971) 252—60.

70 Christensen (1944) 373-4; Altheim and Stiehl (1957) 149-50; Whitehouse and Williamson (1973);

Frye (19 8 3). 71 E.g. Wilkinson (1977) 88.

72 Cf. for example, Abel (1938); Seyrig (1941); Simon (1989) 34. 73 Smith (1954) 427.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

692

2 2 C. THE ARABS

Third, both powers used tribal allies in Arabia to further their own inter-
ests, protect their Arabian frontier zones, and confront the tribal forces of
the other side. Such a tactic was not new. Rome and Persia had routinely
used tribal auxiliaries in various capacities , 74 and in the late fifth and early
sixth century the Himyarites in Yemen co-opted the great north Arabian
tribal confederation of Kinda into acting in their interest and controlling
caravan traffic along the routes from Yemen to Syria and Iraq. Kinda even-
tually extended its control over all of central Arabia, as well as part of the
Hijaz and areas along the Persian Gulf coast, and in the early sixth century
it was attacking both Byzantine and Sasanian targets along the desert
fringes of Syria and Iraq. Seeking to avoid further incursions and gain a
strong tribal ally against forces acting for the Sasanians, the Byzantines
reached an understanding with the confederation and on several occasions
sent embassies to promote good relations. Kinda thus became an ally of
Byzantium; turning against the Sasanians, it gained considerable authority
in the hinterlands of south-western Iraq and even occupied al-HIra for a
time . 75 Its primary sponsors remained the Himyarites in Yemen, however,
and as this regime declined, so also did the fortunes of Kinda.

The Sasanians’ main tribal ally was the Lakhmids, a tribe that had estab-
lished itself in north-eastern Arabia by the fourth century a.d. and founded
a stable base at al-H!ra. There had been contacts and relations between the
two sides in the past, but the combination of deteriorating relations with
Byzantium and the spectre of powerful Kinda forces allied to Byzantium and
positioned within easy striking distance of Ctesphon and the agricultural
plains of Iraq led the Sasanians to support and encourage the Lakhmids with
renewed vigour. The latter had long been subordinate to Kinda, and double
marriages between them had been arranged at least twice in the past.
Nevertheless, by about 504 the new Lakhmid chieftain al-Mundhir III ibn al-
Nu'man (reigned 504—54) was able to rid himself of Kinda suzerainty and
launch operations against the confederation with a well-organized army. 76
Fighting over the next two decades ended with the utter disintegration of
Kinda and the extension of Lakhmid authority over their rival’s former
clients among the Arab tribes. By the 540s the Lakhmids held sway over
many of the tribes of central Arabia and over towns as far west as Mecca. 77

Byzantium was thus forced to turn to other Arab clients for the pro-
tection of its position and interests. Its choice fell on the Ghassanids, a
south Arabian tribe, closely related to the Kinda, that had migrated to
northern Arabia and Syria in the fifth century and established itself as

74 On Rome, see Shahid (19 84) 52—63; and on the fifth-century Salihids in particular, see Shahid
(1958), (19 8 9) (to be used with caution).

75 Olinder (1927) 32—93; Simon (1989) 42—6; Lecker (1994); Shahid (1995) 1.148—60.

76 Rothstein (1899) 134— 8; Altheim and Stiehl (1957) 117—23; Kister (1968) 165—7.

77 Rothstein (1899); Simon (1967), (1989) 27—30, 42—6, 5 5—8, 149—52; 'Abd al-Ghanl (1993) 11—23.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

IMPERIUM AND IMPERIAL POLITICS 693

the pre-eminent power on the desert fringe there. Compared to the
Lakhmids, the Ghassanids were a more nomadic group; diough they were
often associated with the camping-ground called al-Jabiya sixty-five km
southwest of Damascus, diey had no real fixed centre comparable to that
of the Lakhmids at al-HIra. Their induence was not as broad-ranging as
that of the Lakhmids, and though they had trading connections with Iraq
through Nisibis and Dara, their control over the relevant routes was
tenuous. Nevertheless, Byzantium granted the Ghassanid shaykli the tide
of phylarch and showered him with honours, privileges and money. In
return, it was expected diat the chieftain would keep his own tribe under
control and protect imperial interests from other tribes as well. 78

The Ghassanids and Lakhmids, confronting one another across the Syrian
desert, were thus drawn into the series of great Byzantine— Persian wars that
began in 502 and ended with a decisive Byzantine victory in 628. Significant
fighting between them began in the 5 20s and continued sporadically for sixty
years, with dire consequences for the agricultural infrastructure of both Syria
and Iraq. Several observers describe the destruction in Syria, 79 and whatever
survived the passage of raiding parties and military expeditions was exposed
to the brigands and outlaws hovering around such forces. 811

The military strife tends to overshadow other developments in which the
two sides were variously involved. The Ghassanids were responsible for the
establishment of several small towns in the hinterlands south of Damascus
and perhaps also for some of the so-called ‘desert palaces’ of the Syrian
steppe. 81 Sponsors of Monophysite Christianity, they also erected numer-
ous churches and monasteries. In Iraq, al-HIra grew from a camp (which is
what the name means in Arabic) into a lively Arab town noted for its
churches and monasteries, impressive residential compounds and taverns.
Persian Gulf shipping could sail up the Euphrates as far as al-HIra, and
Lakhmid income included proceeds not only from raids but also from agri-
cultural rents and produce, trade, and taxes from tribes they controlled.
There also seems to have been a nascent literary tradition emerging there. 82
Both sides, especially the Lakhmids, were also major patrons of Arab oral
culture, and some of the most important poets of pre-Islamic times gained
generous support from Ghassanid or Lakhmid shaykhs. 83

78 Noldeke (1887); Simon (1989) 27—32, 55—8; Sartre (1982); Peters (1984). On the term phylarch,
which originated as a post in the provincial administration, not necessarily relating to nomads, see
Macdonald (1993) 368—77.

79 John Moschus, Pratum spiritual 2957—8, 2995—8, 3023—4 nos. 99, 133, 155; Delehaye (1927) 23—4;
al-Tabari, Tarikh 1.1007 (cf. also Noldeke (1879) 2 99 n - 4 )> al-Washsha 5 , Kitab al-fadil fol. 105^ Cf. also
Foss (1975); (1977) 68—71; Schick (1995) 25, 31—3.

80 Abu l-Baqa 3 , Al-Manaqib al-masyadiya 1. 105— 6. Early Islamic works on jihad also mention the prob-
lems posed by these elements. 81 Gaube (1984).

82 Much valuable material is collected in 'Abd al-Ghanl (1993) 25—138.

83 Nicholson (1907) 38—54; Blachere (1952—66) 11.293—356; c Abd al-Ghanl (1993) 365—469.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

694

2 2 C. THE ARABS

The history of the Arab client regimes is important, but they were not
central in the imperial planning of either Byzantium or Persia, in which they
figured mainly as threats that had to be countered. 84 Little is known from
the Lakhmid and Persian side, but Byzantine emperors, political strategists
and historians like Procopius certainly held the Ghassanids in low esteem.
The Byzantines had little faith in the abilities, motives or intentions of their
Arab allies. The treaty of 561, for example, expresses dissatisfaction with
Saracen adherence to treaty terms in the past, comes close to calling them
smugglers and traitors, and warns of harsh punishment for lawbreakers. 85
When Ghassanid phylarchs refused to adhere to Chalcedonian orthodoxy,
they were exiled. Byzantium made overtures to the Lakhmids when it suited
them to do so, and the lack of trust and commitment worked both ways: the
capture of Dara by Khusro Anushirvan (reigned 531—79) probably involved
some negotiations with the Ghassanid phylarch al-Mundhir ibn al-Harith
(reigned 569— 8 2). 86

Neither side survived the manoeuvrings of their patrons or the broader
conflict engulfing the Near East in the sixth century. In 581 al-Mundhir
was arrested by the emperor Tiberius (reigned 578—82) and exiled to Sicily
in a religious dispute, and in 5 84 his son and successor al-Nu'man joined
him. Fragmented by the emperor Maurice (reigned 582—602) into a host
of smaller entities and riven with dissension and conflict over the depo-
sition of two leaders within four years, the Ghassanid phylarchate rapidly
fell apart. Forces from the tribe are mentioned in accounts of die Arab
conquest of Syria, but not in a leading role. 87 The Lakhmids survived a
while longer, but during the reign of Khusro II Parviz (reigned 590—628)
they were displaced in favour of a similarly decentralized system. The
Sasanians also promoted the position of the Banu Hanlfa, which roamed
in the desert on their southern flank. 88 Later, when a force of Persian
troops and Arab auxiliaries sought to quell a desert revolt in about 610,
die imperial army was beaten at Dliu Qar, thus marking the first time that
die tribes had been able to defeat die Sasanians in battle. 89 It also illus-
trates how the demise of die Arab client regimes marked not the shift
from one system of frontier defence to another, but rather die opening
of a great power vacuum extending from the desert fringes of Syria and
Iraq all the way to central Arabia. Inhabitants of the peninsula remem-
bered that they had once been ‘trapped on top of a rock between the two
lions, Persia and Byzantium’. 911 But as die next decade was to reveal, these

84 Important discussion in Whitby (1992). 85 Menander fr. vi.i.320— 2, 332—40.

86 Whitby, Maurice 257—8. Cf. also the Nemara Inscription of a.d. 328, which has Arabs in the eastern
Hawran in contact with both the Romans and the Persians; Bowersock (1983) 138—47; Bellamy (1985).

87 Noldeke (1887) 33-45; Shahid (1995) 1.455—71,634—41,648—51.

88 Al-A'sha, Diwan 72—87 no. 13, esp. 86 w. 47—9; Abu 1 -Faraj al-Isfahanl, Aghani xvn.3 1 8—22.

89 Noldeke (1879) 332— 5; Rothstein (1899) 120—3.

90 Qatada (d. 735) in al-Tabari, Az/j/r ix.145, ad Surat al-Anfal (8), v. 26. Cf. Kister (1968) 143-4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MECCA, MUHAMMAD AND THE RISE OF ISLAM 695

days were gone forever and the Persian setback at Dhu Qar was but a hint
of things to come.

VI. MECCA, MUHAMMAD AND THE RISE OF ISLAM

In about 5 52 91 a boy named Muhammad ibn 'Abd Allah was born into a
minor clan of the tribe of Quraysh, which was settled in and around the
shrine centre of Mecca in the Hijaz, about 900 km south of Syria. A trader
by profession, he participated in the caravan trade of Arabia and visited
Syria on several occasions. In about 610 he began to preach a monotheis-
tic faith called ‘submission to God’, or Islam, and summoned his fellow
Meccans to prepare for the Last Judgement. Difficulties in Mecca and the
erosion of vital support had by 622 reached the point where he was obliged
to move to Yathrib, 300 km to the north. This shift, the hijra 92 proved to
be of crucial importance, for in Yathrib, henceforth called Medina (al-
Madlna, probably referring not to ‘the city’, but to the Prophet’s house), the
ranks of his followers increased dramatically. Raids on the caravans, camps
and villages of his enemies met with success and further expanded his
support. He returned to Mecca in triumph in 630, and by the time of his
death in 632 his authority extended over much of Arabia. The rest was
brought under control by the first caliph, Abu Bakr (reigned 632—4), and
Muslim forces went on to campaigns of conquest that in less than a century
created an empire extending from Spain to central Asia.

How all this occurred and why it focused on Muhammad, Mecca and the
late sixth century are questions that early Muslims took up themselves, 93
and that have comprised a major concern of modern historical research. In
the 1 9 50s Watt proposed a socio-economic solution. Mecca was a major
centre for overland caravan trade, and its merchants and others grew
wealthy on the profits from commerce in such precious items as incense,
spices, gemstones, gold and so forth. This widened the gap between the
rich and the poor and led to social malaise as crass materialism eroded tra-
ditional values. Muhammad’s message was essentially a response to this
crisis. 94 More recently, however, serious challenges have been made to the
notions of a lucrative Arabian trade in luxury items, of Mecca as an impor-
tant entrepot, and hence of some serious crisis provoking a religious
response. 95 It may thus be useful to indicate the ways in which points made
above contribute to the discussion.

91 For the date, see Conrad (1987a). 92 Crone (1994).

93 But not immediately; see Donner (1998) 75—85.

94 Watt (1953) 1—29 and in numerous publications of his thereafter. Cf. the review by Bousquet

95 Simon (1975), trans. Simon (1989); Peters (1988); Crone (1987). Cf. the highly polemical review of
Crone in Serjeant (1990) and the reply in Crone (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

6 9 6

2 2 C. THE ARABS

Mecca, a place completely unknown to any non- Arabic source of the
pre -Islamic period, lies off the main routes of communications in western
Arabia. The site itself is barren, inhospitable and incapable of sustaining
agriculture for more than a minuscule population. Even had there been a
lucrative international trade passing through the Hijaz in the sixth century,
it would not have found an attractive or logical stopping-point at Mecca,
which owed its success to its status as a shrine and pilgrimage centre. As at
certain other shrines in Arabia, pilgrims came to circumambulate a rock, in
this case associated with an unroofed building called the Ka'ba, and
perform religious rituals with strong affinities to those of Judaism:
offerings and animal sacrifice, washing and concern for ritual purity, prayer,
recitation of fixed liturgies and so forth. 96 There are indications that, early
on, there was little resident population at the site: ‘People would perform
the pilgrimage and then disperse, leaving Mecca empty with no one living
in it.’ 97

The success and expansion of Mecca were due to the administrative and
political skills of its keepers, the tribe of Quraysh. The Ka'ba seems to have
been a shrine of the god Hubal, 98 but in the religiously pluralistic milieu of
pagan Arabia it must not have been difficult to promote it as a place where
other deities could be worshipped as well. A greater achievement was con-
vincing other tribes to honour the sanctity of the haram of Mecca and to
suspend raiding during the sacred months when pilgrims came. As agricul-
ture was not possible at Mecca, it had to bring in food from elsewhere and
so was at the mercy of nearby tribes in any case. The very fact that Mecca
survived, much less prospered, thus reflects the diplomatic skills of
Quraysh. The Islamic tradition, of course, makes much of the a priori
importance of Quraysh, but this is surely something that emerged within
the paradigm of a sedentary tribe seeking to protect and promote its inter-
ests through skilful manipulation of relations with the nomadic tribes
around it. There was mutual advantage in the prosperity of Mecca: trade
with pilgrims, import and marketing of foodstuffs and other necessities,
and collection and distribution of taxes levied in kind for feeding and
watering pilgrims. 99

It may even be that Quraysh was able to organize a profitable trade with
Syria, perhaps as a result of disruption to the agricultural productivity of the
Levant caused by the destruction of the Persian wars, numerous droughts
in Syria, 100 and the repeated visitations of bubonic plague after 541. 101

The message that Muhammad preached in the milieu of a prosperous
Mecca was in many ways a familiar one, and in others quite a novelty. 102 His
summons to the worship of one God recalled the notion of a ‘high god’,

96 Hawting (1982); Rubin (1986). 97 Al-Bakri, Mu c jam ma sta c jam 1.89, citing al-Kalbl (d. 763).

98 Cf. Wellhausen (1897) 75—6; Crone (1987) 187—95. 99 E.g. Ibn Hisham 1.1, 83.

100 Butzer (1957) 362. 101 Conrad (1994), (1996b). 102 Cook (1983) 25-60.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MECCA, MUHAMMAD AND THE RISE OF ISLAM 697

and his identification of Islam as the religion of Abraham had important
associations with the doctrines of hanifiya. As can be seen from the testi-
mony of Sozomen, his call for the restoration of a pristine faith, free from
the corruptions that had crept into it, was already a time-honoured tradi-
tion in Arabia. The observances he advocated were also well known from
either pagan Arabian or Jewish practice: prayer and Friday worship, fasting,
pilgrimage, ritual purity, almsgiving, circumcision and dietary laws. 103

Where Muhammad broke with tradition was in his insistence on abso-
lute monotheism and his advocacy of a relationship with God that aban-
doned traditional pragmatic views of religion and summoned man to
unconditional commitment and faith in response to God’s creative
munificence and continuing solicitude. The rejection of pagan eclecticism,
however, threatened the entire social and economic position of Quraysh
and thus earned him the enmity of their leaders, and among the public at
large his message, with its corollaries of reward and punishment in the
hereafter, seemed extreme and delusory and evoked little positive
response. 104 In order to gain support he had to prove that his God was a
winner, and this he achieved by moving to Yathrib (Medina), where he used
his expanding following to disrupt Meccan commerce and food supplies. 105
His military success made him a force to be reckoned with: the tribal
arrangements so carefully nurtured by Mecca over the years soon fell apart
in the face of this challenge, while the victories of the new religion pro-
vided the worldly success which Arabs demanded of their gods and also
appealed to the Arabs’ warrior ethic. Islam also had a broad appeal on other
grounds. The Qur’an presented itself as a universal scripture ‘in clear
Arabic speech’, 106 and thus took advantage of the position of the Arabic
language as the common cultural tongue of Arabia and a basis for common
action. 107 Arabs could also identify with one another, despite their tribal
distinctions, on the basis of a shared participation in Arabian tribal organ-
ization and custom, a heritage of similar cultural and religious experience
in pagan systems and folklore, and a long history of trade and commerce,
revolving around fairs and religious shrines, that engendered a certain
feeling of familiarity around the peninsula.

It has often been asserted that the Arab conquests were of essentially
Islamic inspiration. The kerygmatic tradition of Islam of course sees
things this way, and the Armenian chronicle (written in the 66os), attrib-
uted to the bishop Sebeos, also has Muhammad urging his followers to
advance and claim the land promised to them by God as the descendants

103 Goitein (1968) 73—125; Bashear (1984) 441— 514; Rippin (1990—3) 1.86—99.

104 Cf. Izutsu (1966) 45—54. 105 Discussion in Donner (1977).

106 Surat al-Nahl (16), v. 103; Surat al-Shu'ara 5 (26), v. 195 (= Arberry, 100, 379). Cf. also Surat
Ibrahim (14), v. 4 (= Arberry, 246).

107 Blachere (1952—66) 11.230— 41, (1956); von Grunebaum (1963); Bashear (1997) 54—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

698

2 2 C. THE ARABS

of Abraham. 108 It therefore seems probable that there was a religious
agenda to the conquests from the start, and it is certainly true that without
the unifying factor of Islam there would probably have been no conquest
at all.

But the arguments of leaders and advocates are one thing, and the
response of the fighters themselves is another. Even in Mecca and Medina
the teachings of Muhammad and the text of the Qur’an were still known
in only fragmentary fashion, and it is difficult to see how most tribesmen
elsewhere could have had more than a vague and trivial knowledge of
either so soon after the Prophet’s death. Many warriors who joined the con-
quest forces had only recently fought against the Prophet himself, or
resisted the effort of the first two caliphs to bring Arabia under their
control. It is also implausible that tribal warriors all over Arabia could so
quickly have abandoned the pragmatic and worldly attitude toward religion
that had prevailed for centuries, in favour of one that expected genuine
commitment to the one God. There is, in fact, good evidence on the con-
quests showing that this was not the case at all. 109

This is not to detract from the centrality of the message of Islam to
Muhammad’s own sense of mission and purpose, and probably to that of
others around him. One may also concede that Islam enabled the Muslim
leadership to mobilize warriors in a way that transcended important
differences, and it is likely that Islamic slogans and admonitions of various
kinds were frequently inspiring to fighters on the ground. But if the faith
played an important role in uniting and mobilizing the tribes, it was never-
theless waves of tribal forces, motivated primarily by traditional tribal
ambitions and goals, that broke over Syria, Iraq and Egypt, beginning in the
630s.

It is unlikely that either Syria or Iraq could have withstood the advance
of forces of this kind, given the constitution of their defences after the end
of the last Persian war in 628, only six years before the first Arab advance.
The Arab armies were not simply marshalled in Medina and then sent forth
with the caliph’s instructions; providing food, fodder and water for an army
of thousands of men and animals would have been extremely difficult. The
norm was rather for small contingents gradually to expand as other groups
joined them on the march; the sources make it clear that commanders were
expected to engage in such recruiting along the way, to ensure that the new-
comers were armed and equipped, and to ‘keep each tribe distinct from the

108 Sebeos, Histoire d’Heraclius 95—6. Cf. also the quotations from Dionysius of Tell Mahre (d. 845)
in Michael I QindasI, Chronique de Michel le Syrien 11.403— 5 (trans.); iv.404— 8 (text); Chronicon ad annum
Christi 1234 pertinens 1.227—30 (text); 1.178—80 (trans.). Discussion in Crone and Cook (1977) 8—10;
Hoyland (1997) 124—30.

109 E.g. al-Walld ibn Muslim (d. 810) in Ibn 'Asakir 1.461—2; al-Tabari, Ta’rikh 1.2922; al-MaqrizI,
Kbit at 1.75.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MECCA, MUHAMMAD AND THE RISE OF ISLAM 699

others and in its proper place’. 110 In this way a small force could soon swell
to thousands as warriors joined its ranks in expectation of adventure,
fighting and plunder.

The situation was made more difficult by the fact that confronting the
Arabs on this scale posed entirely new military problems. Both powers
were accustomed to dealing with Arabs as bands of raiders and had
planned their frontier defences accordingly. Watchtowers and forts, many
of them abandoned for centuries in any case, were inadequate to deter the
forces that now swept past them, and whereas the old Roman system had
anticipated incursions by single uncoordinated bands, it was now con-
fronted by penetration at many points simultaneously. It was probably also
difficult to determine exactly where the enemy was at any given time, for
when battle was not imminent an Arab army tended to fragment into bands
of warriors roaming the countryside.

Finally, and as the above example shows, Arab strategy was often highly
reactive and thus difficult to counter or predict. Incursions into Iraq, for
example, seem to have begun when the tribe of Rabl'a, of the Banu
Shayban, was obliged by drought in Arabia to migrate to Iraqi territory,
where the Sasanian authorities permitted them to graze their herds on
promise of good behaviour. But the presence of these tribal elements
eventually led to friction, which the Rabl'a quite naturally interpreted as
unwarranted reneging on an agreed arrangement. When they called on
their kinsmen elsewhere for support, the crisis quickly escalated into full-
scale conflict between Arab and Persian forces. 111

It is difficult to guess whether either of the great powers would have
been able to stem the military momentum that was building in Arabia, even
had they correctly gauged the threat it posed. With Kinda, the Ghassanids
and the Lakhmids all in a state of either collapse or disarray, the growing
strategic power of Islam was able to develop in what otherwise amounted
to a political void; the real source of the danger confronting the empires
was effectively beyond their reach from the beginning. Byzantium and
Persia could fight armies that violated their frontiers, but could not stop the
process that was generating these armies in the first place. Initial victories
over the Arabs at Mu’ta in Syria in 632 and the battle of the Bridge in Iraq

in 634 thus proved no deterrent, as in earlier times would have been the
112

case.

What overwhelmed the Byzantines and Sasanians was thus the ability of
the message and charismatic personality of Muhammad to mobilize the
tribal might of Arabia at a level of unity never experienced among the
Arabs either before or since. Unprepared for defence on the scale required

110 Ibn ‘Asakir 1.446. 111 Ibn A'tham al-Kufi, Kitdb al-futuh 1.88—9.

112 Donner (1981) 105— 11, 190—202; Kaegi (1992) 71—4, 79—83.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

700

2 2 C. THE ARABS

to counter this new threat and unable to marshal tribal allies of their own
to strike at their foe in his own heartlands, both were forced to fight deep
within their own territories and suffered defeats that simply encouraged
further incursions on a larger scale. Greek and Persian field armies were
crushed in one disastrous battle after another, leaving cities to endure sieges
without hope of relief and encouraging resistance everywhere else to evap-
orate in short order . 113

113 Donner (1981) 1 19— 220; Kaegi (1992) 88—180.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 23

THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420-602

MICHAEL WHITBY

I. INTRODUCTION

The 420s mark a turning-point in the history of the Balkan provinces of
the Roman empire. Since the 370s the region had been under pressure from
various tribes who were themselves being stimulated to challenge the
strength of imperial defences by the threat posed to them by the westward
movement of the awesome Huns across the south Russian steppe. By 420,
but not much before, the Huns had reached the Danube, establishing
themselves on the Hungarian plain, asserting their authority over other
tribal groups along the Danube, and beginning to challenge Roman impe-
rial authority in both west and east. 1 South of the river, the prosperity of
urban and rural life varied. Most cities survived the period of Gothic rav-
aging and settlement, partly because Goths were not skilled besiegers, but
rural hinterlands upon which the vitality of cities depended had been seri-
ously affected. This stimulated a significant change in the pattern of settle-
ment, with the abandonment of isolated rural villages that previously had
served as nuclei for exploiting the countryside and a migration of popula-
tion to the safety of urban defences or upland refuges. 2 Some cities might
benefit from an influx of wealthy rural inhabitants who now relocated their
grand villas inside the walls, while others in more exposed places received
impoverished country people but lost their elites. Walls were strengthened
or rebuilt, perhaps to enclose a restricted, more defensible, circuit, though
habitation might still extend beyond the central defended area, as at Athens.
Urban and rural prosperity basically increased with distance from the
Danube, in areas which had been less intensively ravaged in the fourth
century and where, as for example in the Thracian plains, the expansion of
Constantinople stimulated interest in the countryside and made agricultu-
ral land a desirable commodity.

North of the Stara Planina, however, and particularly in Pannonia, con-
ditions were very different. Although some areas seem to have remained
prosperous until the Hun raids of the mid fifth century — for example, Upper

1 Heather, Goths and Romans 227—30; Heather (1995); Whitby, Maurice 66—7.

2 Amm. Marc, xxxi.6.4; 15.15; Poulter (1983b) 90.

IOI

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

702 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

Moesia 3 — others were already suffering depopulation in the fourth century,
and hence were available for settlement by numerous tribesmen who had to
be accommodated under the agreements reached by Theodosius I.
Contrary to previous practice, these incomers remained under the control
of their own leaders and retained their individual identities, so that they were
less susceptible to Roman authority. The creation c. 420 of the new post of
comes foederatorum, whose first known holder was Areobindus, 4 may have
been intended to remedy this, but in the north civilian life remained inse-
cure, even within walled cities: the start of the transfer of Nicopolis ad
Istrum from an open site in the Yantra valley to Tsarevets hill at Veliko
Trnovo, a secluded site protected by river and ravines, is dated to this period.
The dangers are revealed by the fate of Noviodunum in Scythia which was
seized in the 430s by Roman allies, the Rubi (probably Rugi) under Valips,
who deterred a Roman counterattack by placing the children of his captives
on the ramparts. ’’ The efficacy of Danubian defences was undermined both
by the presence of these potentially unruly elements to the south of the
river and by the loss of Pannonia, where Roman authority had been shaky
since the late fourth century. Pannonia controlled the main military route
between the eastern and western parts of the empire that ran from
Singidunum (Belgrade) up the Sava valley towards Aquileia at the head of
the Adriatic, and occupation of this area by Goths or Huns gave them easy
access in both directions; it took time for the Romans to readjust to this fact,
but the route of Olympiodorus’ embassy to the Huns, which seems to have
proceeded from Constantinople by sea to Aquileia and then on by land to
the middle Danube, may reflect the threat to road travel. The fate of
Pannonia is illustrated by the decline of Sirmium from a major provincial
capital and occasional imperial residence to an impoverished refuge where
the local population sought shelter in decaying buildings. 6 Claudian’s pane-
gyric of Stilicho optimistically describes Pannonian life, but also hints at the
urban blockade experienced by the Pannonians rather than any restoration
of imperial control. After 420 Pannonia was only attached to the empire
briefly and intermittently.

An anecdote in Olympiodorus is suggestive of the fate awaiting the
Balkans: Valerius, governor of Thrace under Constantius (421—3), dug up
three silver statues of captive barbarians that had been buried facing north;
shortly afterwards, Goths poured over Thrace and Huns and Sarmatians
over Illyricum and Thrace. Stories of the damaging removal of prophylactic
emblems are common, and the chronology of Valerius’ supposed action can
be disputed, 7 but it reflects a belief that Balkan life had dramatically changed.

3 Mocsy (1974) 351. 4 Jones, LRE 665; PLRE 11.145-6.

5 Poulter (1983b) 96—7; Priscus fr. 5.

6 Mocsy (1974); Eadie (1982); Bavant (1984); Claudian, II Cons. ii.i9iff.

7 Olympiod. fr. 27; for date, see PLRE 11.1 144 s.v. Valerius 4.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

INTRODUCTION 703

It also illustrates a problem in the evidence available for understanding devel-
opments. For the fifth century there is no complete historical narrative,
although the fragments of Priscus and Malchus, primarily devoted to diplo-
macy, contain important information about relations with Huns and Goths
and some incidental, but revealing, comments about the situation within the
Balkans. For the sixth century, the literary evidence is rather better: although
Procopius did not consider Balkan warfare worthy of separate treatment, he
did record significant events and there are signs in Wars vm that he had real-
ized the importance of the Balkans; his narrative was continued by Agathias,
who narrated the Kotrigur invasion of 558/9, Menander, whose fragments
record Roman diplomacy with the expanding Avar federation, and
Theophylact, whose account, often obscure, covers the last major Roman
campaigns on the Danube frontier. Their information can be supplemented
by Procopius, Buildings iv, a panegyrical description of works in the Balkans
attributed to Justinian; a few laws that proclaim changes in administration;
and the Strategikon attributed to Maurice, which describes tactics for use
against the two main Balkan enemies in the late sixth century, the Slavs and
the Avars. These sources share a Constantinopolitan perspective, but some
breadth is provided by the Miracula of St Demetrius and the Chronicle of
Monemvasia, which describe actions from the viewpoint respectively of
Thessalonica and the Peloponnese, and the letters of pope Gregory, which
shed some light on ecclesiastical administration in Illyricum.

Archaeology is a vital, but often frustrating, addition. Decline in urban
fabric can be illustrated by destruction of and repairs to buildings; changes
to the organization of urban space reflect living conditions; and the discov-
ery of hill-top settlements reveals new patterns of habitation; but few sites
have been thoroughly excavated, publication of results lags far behind, and
the fragmentary remains of late antiquity have not always attracted the
attention of investigators. A particular problem lies in the classification of
material as Roman or non-Roman: poor-quality ‘squatter’ dwellings may
represent a movement either of non-Roman tribesmen on to a site or of
rural refugees whose living standards might not resemble those tradition-
ally associated with Romanized urban dwellers; they may also have housed
the impoverished remnants of the urban population. Similarly, pottery
identified as ‘Slavic’ may not be such an accurate diagnostic tool, and
brooches and buckles could belong just as well to German recruits in
Roman service as to tribal war-bands. Archaeological discoveries will con-
tinue to improve our understanding of the development of the Balkans in
this period, but it would be unrealistic to expect dramatic or rapid progress:
there is a long-term need to build up a series of local pictures from which
eventually a new synthesis can be attempted. 8

Baratte (1984); Popovic (1975), (1978); also other contributions to Villes.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

704 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

II. THE HUNS

The Huns, by origin nomads from central Asia, were the warrior elite of a
federation whose strength rose and fell with the assimilation and subse-
quent revolt of a variety of tribal groups, Huns, Sarmatians, Goths and
other Germans. Their period of supremacy on the Danube lasted no
longer than a generation, from the 420s to the 450s, but this was sufficient
for them to have a profound effect on both halves of the empire. Before
the 420s Huns had been strong and ambitious but the Romans had been
able to cope, as is shown by the fate of Uldin: a leader of the Hun tribes
near the Danube, after fighting for the Romans in Thrace and Italy he
invaded the empire on his own account, and rejected peace terms on the
grounds that he could subjugate every region of the earth that was illu-
mined by the sun; however, his subordinate commanders were seduced by
Roman diplomacy, and he fled in defeat as his followers deserted. 9 The
significant development in the 420s was the consolidation of authority
within a single ruling family, that of Rua, who was succeeded by his
nephews Attila and Bleda, the sons of Mundiuch; after Bleda’s death in 445 ,
probably in a power struggle within the ruling family, Attila wielded sole
authority until his death in 453, after which dissension between his sons
quickly caused his federation to disintegrate as important constituents
asserted their independence. Within this generation, the dramatic rise of
Hunnic power is reflected in the annual payments from the eastern empire:
in the 430s Rua obtained an increase from 3 50 to 700 pounds of gold, there
may have been a further rise in 442, and in 447 the annual payment was set
at 2,100 pounds of gold, just over 150,000 solidi, and the Romans were
required to pay outstanding instalments assessed at 6,000 pounds of gold.
These payments were represented as the provision of supplies for a Roman
general, a rank that was accorded Attila to save face, 10 but they were not the
only peaceful gains for the Huns, since their envoys regularly received gifts.
With the involvement of Attila in the west and his subsequent death, the
eastern emperor Marcian terminated payments, and Attila’s sons could not
again enforce them.

Hunnic success depended upon the personal authority of their leader,
which was founded on success in battle, as is suggested in the stories about
the discovery and presentation to Attila of the sword of Mars, or the alle-
gorical substitution of Attila’s bow for the man. 11 It was consolidated by
control of patronage — for example, the distribution of Roman gifts which
Attila ensured were widely spread through deliberate variation in the com-
position of embassies — and by honorific treatment at the royal court. The

9 Soz. HE ix. 5 .

10 Priscus frr. 2.35—8; 9.3.1— 10; 11.2.627—31; Zuckerman (1994) 166 doubts the increase in 442.

11 Jord. Get. 35.183; Priscus fr. i2;Jord. Get. 49.254—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE HUNS 705

latter is well illustrated by Priscus’ own experiences as envoy to Attila in
448: at a ceremonial banquet Onegesius sat to the right of Attila, the posi-
tion of honour, and his status was also reflected in the size of his com-
pound, which contained a Roman bathing suite with skilled attendant, by
Attila’s courteous treatment of his wife and by his employment on an
important mission to the Akatziri. 12 But the key to the long-term preserva-
tion of authority was a controlled terror that made it impractical to plot
against Attila and impossible to escape his revenge: the lesson of Uldin’s
fate had been learnt. As a result, Romans could not employ traditional
tactics of diplomatic subversion. A Hun envoy, Edeco, was prepared to
accept bribes from the cubicularius Chrysaphius to assassinate Attila, but on
returning to court revealed the plot: loyalty was strengthened by awareness
that his fellow ambassador, Orestes, might report him to Attila. Onegesius,
a man through whom the Romans hoped to influence Attila, preferred loyal
servitude among the Huns to Roman wealth. 1 3 The Romans were consis-
tently denied the chance to acquire friendly Huns who might be used to
subvert Attila’s position, and this was the principal reason why the return
of fugitives was a regular demand in negotiations. 14 Attila was not con-
cerned about a leakage of precious manpower, since his military resources
were ample as long as his authority was unchallenged, and the numbers of
fugitives seem to have been comparatively small, capable of being recorded
on lists and once being specified as seventeen; 15 rather, it was a demonstra-
tion to all followers that no one could escape his clutches. On one occasion
when the Romans were obliged to return fugitives of royal descent, Mama
and Atakam, they were at once impaled, even before they had been
escorted back to Hunnic territory. It is likely that most fugitives were from
the class of leading men, identifiable individuals from tribes under Hunnic
control who might hope that association with the Romans would lead to
their reinstatement as tribal leaders. In these ways Attila dominated the
social pyramid of the Hun federation: the leaders at court, Attila’s advisers,
diplomats and military commanders, were loyal and they preserved the alle-
giance of the units under their control. Disobedience was punished swiftly
and publicly, with the guilty being impaled or gibbeted and left as warnings
to others. 16

Military success, patronage of leading men, and terror ensured that
Hunnic control extended over all the tribes along the Danube and the
northern shore of the Black Sea. In part, this has to be inferred from the
process of the disintegration of the Hun federation, when Gepids, various
groups of Goths, and Bulgar tribes emerged to trouble the Romans, but it

12 Priscus frr. io; 13. 1.33— 7; 11.2.361—72, 378—85, 241—3. 13 Priscus fr. 11.2.126— 31, 536—41.

14 E.g. Priscus frr. 2.6—7, 2.9 — 3 1 ; 6.1.8— 9; 9.1.3; 9.3.1— 10, 35—8; 10.2; 11.1.6—7; 11.2.181—3, 195— 201;
15.4.10. 15 Cotf/ra Thompson (1948) 177— 8; Priscus fr. 11.2.12— 13.

16 Priscus frr. 2.40—3; 1 1.2.343; 14.58—65; cf. Zuckerman (1994) 163.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

706 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

is also apparent from the composition of Attila’s army at the battle of the
Catalaunian Plains, where a large contingent of Goths fought for him.
There are hints about how this control was imposed. Rua’s first attested
diplomatic contact with the eastern empire came when he learnt that
certain Danubian tribes — the Amilzuri, Itimari, Tunsures, Boisci and others
— were planning to enter Roman service at a time when he was determined
to dominate them himself . 17 The process of asserting Hunnic control is
revealed in the description of the submission of the Akatziri: an error in
Roman diplomacy had insulted the leading king of this people, Kuridach,
who summoned Attila to help against his fellow kings; his colleagues sub-
mitted, but Kuridach himself then refused an invitation to meet Attila and
so preserved his own power; the remainder of the Akatziri were placed
under the control of Attila’s eldest son, Ellac, whose installation was
entrusted to Onegesius . 18 Thereafter, the manpower of the Akatziri would
be available for use on Hunnic campaigns.

Key elements in Hunnic success against the Romans were their diplo-
matic perceptiveness and a proficiency at siege warfare that distinguished
them from most of Rome’s other tribal enemies. Some aspects of Attila’s
diplomacy have already been mentioned: his control over ambassadors’
actions even at a distance and his careful distribution of rewards and oppor-
tunities. The denouement of the Roman attempt to subvert Edeco reveals
his tactical skill: after learning of the plot, Attila bided his time, laying a trap
for the interpreter Vigilas, the Roman go-between in the affair, so that he
was caught in possession of money whose purpose he could not explain.
This ensured maximum embarrassment for Theodosius and Chrysaphius:
Attila’s envoy, Eslas, could berate the emperor in public with little prospect
of contradiction, and hostility towards the powerful eunuch cubicularius
would be reinforced among those who now saw that his unsuccessful plot-
ting had endangered their lives . 19 Attila’s personal behaviour kept Roman
envoys at a psychological disadvantage: his rapid changes of mood might,
superficially, seem the irrational behaviour of a barbarian, but Priscus’
description of their impact on his fellow ambassadors suggests that Attila
knew what he was doing. The chief ambassador Maximinus, downcast at
the apparent futility of his whole journey, lay on the grass in despair while
Priscus attempted to rescue the mission by flattering Scottas, a leading Hun;
the ambassadors were then subjected to contrasting outbursts of rage and
displays of hospitality as they attempted to win favour with people of
influence at Attila’s court. Attila had established himself as diplomatic
patron, with the Roman envoys as suppliants grateful for modest tokens of
favour, for which they waited outside the royal compound like a traditional
Roman client. Ambassadors from the western empire were simultaneously

17 Priscus fr. 2.1—4. 18 Priscus fr. 1 1.2. 241— 59. 19 Priscus fr. 15.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE HUNS

7°7

Adriatic

^Singidunum

_.Viminacium

, -w . Danube \ -

{M Ci Margustt \y Cataracts I A,

\ 7 s Mo\\r \ Vn Da

a) S\\r- cT /^S \ Appiaria-^o-^T

i S \\< £ / C^ SVl

A '» QifRatiaria

\ AL'PNaissus MOESIAI J l"?,

I ^’ C '\ ^ Nicopolisr

" ) ^ C \ ad lstru , n y f

AJustinianf O -2, I X, tSTARA PLANING

Primal ' Serdica'A f^T^din

^JK § / ^ AlA^THRA

-A / >T A l V,„ Hebrus \ /

!>■ / 1

O qConstantia

CO 7 I

Marcianopolis

HeracleiaX^A

n Lyncestis

\% °xv AdrianopoMs

7. K

Arcadiopoljs Long Walls
^^Selymbria^ — -- — i

T-^^f^Sea of Constantinople

& Marmara <CTcz> I

CHERSONESE//

W^wrvJt eba fWi ( A e j

\ Corinth ^ „ \ATTICA\

L <n. i-s? \tf ^

Land over 1000 metres

SCALE

0 100 200 300 400 km

Map 21 The Balkans and Greece

subjected to the same treatment . 20 But Attila knew that diplomacy with the
sophisticated Romans could not rely just on personal passion, and ensured
that he was supplied with people of suitable education to present his
written messages to emperors in appropriate form. Aetius had furnished

20 Priscus fr. 1 1 . 2 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

708 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

two secretaries for Attila, both called Constantius; the first, a Gaul, had
proved treacherous and was crucified, whereas the second, an Italian, was
rewarded by having Attila pursue on his behalf a disputed marriage with a
leading eastern family; the latter Constantius had an assistant, Rusticius, a
captive from Moesia, whose learning earned him the privilege of writing
letters for Attila. 21

Attila also seems to have possessed a strategic diplomatic awareness,
which allowed him to synchronize his challenges with severe problems for
the empire: his first major assault in 441, when Viminacium and Naissus
were captured, occurred when a large naval expedition had left
Constantinople to fight the Vandals in Africa, while his diplomatic
demands and subsequent invasions in the late 440s coincided with pressure
on other frontiers of the eastern empire. 22 The range of Attila’s knowledge
and contacts is impressive, as befitted his ambitions to universal authority:
in the east, he knew that Persia could be attacked across the Caucasus, and
had some information about the geography of the route and the military
capabilities of the Persians; in the west, quite apart from close links with
leading Romans like Aetius, his contacts with the Vandal king Geiseric and
with Frankish leaders kept him informed of relations between the diflerent
tribal groups. 23 Against this background, Attila’s decision to use an offer of
marriage from the western princess Honoria as a basis for claiming a half
share of the western empire does not appear extravagant; similarly, the
assessment of informed associates that a Hunnic attack on Persia would be
followed by the subjugation of the Romans and imposition of harsher
terms was also realistic. After his capture of Milan, an imperial capital,
Attila redesigned an imperial portrait that had depicted a Roman triumph
over barbarians to display the humiliation of Roman emperors bringing
tribute to himself. 24

Diplomacy that lacked the support of military muscle was ineffective, as
the Romans repeatedly discovered in their dealings with Danubian tribes,
but for Attila success in war complemented negotiations. The Huns fought
as mounted warriors, using composite bows, whose efficacy remained
famous into the next century, 25 swords and lassoes, and were protected by
body armour; speed of movement assisted their reputation for ferocity.
These attributes ensured success against other Danubian tribes and over
Roman field armies, which had a substantial component of Germanic
tribesmen whose fighting capabilities and equipment were likely to be
similar to those of tribesmen north of the river. But what distinguished the
Huns and rendered their impact on the empire much more serious than
that of ordinary invaders was their ability to capture strongly fortified and

21 Priscus frr. 1 1.2.329—43; 14.1— 51. 22 Priscus fr. 10; chronology: Croke (1983).

23 Priscus fr. 1 1.2.596— 619; Jord. Get. 36.184; Priscus fr. 20.3. Discussion in Clover (1973).

24 Priscus frr. 20; 1 1.2.620— 35; Suda M.40 5. 25 Procop. WarsM. 2 . 7 . 27; vi. 1.9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

stoutly defended Roman cities, the centres of Roman power, wealth and
administration that had been able to withstand the earlier Gothic incur-
sions. Some places fell through treachery, as when Margus was handed over
by its bishop, but accounts of attacks on Naissus and Aquileia indicate that
the Huns had access to quite sophisticated siege technology, probably sup-
plied by military captives or the remnants of the Roman population of
Pannonia, whose best chance of lucrative employment was now in Hunnic
service. 26 At Naissus, Priscus describes towers that could be wheeled up to
the ramparts and provide protection for attacking archers, substantial bat-
tering rams and assault ladders; although there are signs that his account
has been affected by historiographical traditions of siege narrative, there is
no justification for dismissing the narrative as invention: Naissus was cap-
tured and thoroughly sacked. At Aquileia there is less detail about the tech-
nical equipment, and the siege may have lasted longer, 27 but Attila was still
able to collapse a section of the defences and storm the city. Apart from
mechanical devices, it is clear that Attila, controlling large reserves of
subject manpower, was content to sacrifice lives in frontal assaults. The
results are recorded in the sources: in the northern Balkans most of the
major cities succumbed, Naissus being joined by Viminacium, Ratiaria,
Philippopolis, Arcadiopolis and Constantia; the destruction was so exten-
sive that it could be claimed that only Adrianople and Heracleia on the Sea
of Marmara survived. In the sixth century Procopius could comment on
the Huns’ inexperience at siege warfare, but there is no justification for
reading this assessment back into the fifth century. 28

The consequences for the Romans were serious: Hun ravaging, which
extended as far south as Thermopylae, depopulated parts of Illyricum and
Thrace; urban defences no longer offered a secure refuge for inhabitants
and their wealth. In spite of being strengthened in 443, the Roman frontier
on the Danube ceased to exist from Pannonia as far east as Novae in
Thrace. Attila demanded that along the whole of this distance a stretch of
land five days’ journey wide must be left uncultivated; the place for com-
mercial exchange in Illyria should no longer be on the Danube but at
ravaged Naissus, itself adjudged to be five days from the river. Thus Roman
territory was to be clearly separated from Attila’s, which would reduce the
chances for Roman interference in Hunnic affairs; on the other hand, Attila
might choose to use this region for hunting, an activity that provided a con-
venient disguise for military preparations. 29 To counter this threat, new
fortifications were built: Constantinople had already been provided with a
massive set of new land walls earlier in Theodosius’ reign (413), and these

26 Mocsy (1974) 357-

27 Priscus fr. 6.2; Blockley (1981) 54;Jord. Get. 42.220; Procop. Wars 111.4.^0—y

28 Theophanes 102—3; Procop. Buildings iv.3.21— 2; contra Croke (1978) 257.

29 Theod. Nov. 24; Priscus frr. 11.1.9— 14; 11.2.74—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

710 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

Fig. 22 The walls of Thessalonica. (After Spieser (1984a))

were reinforced in the late 440s by the construction of Long Walls, which
ran from the Black Sea to Selymbria on the Sea of Marmara; another long
wall was built at the Isthmus of Corinth, to deny access to the Peloponnese,
and the defences at Thermopylae were probably also strengthened at this
time. The administration of the Illyrian prefecture was moved from
Sirmium to Thessalonica, which was provided in the early 440s with a
massive set of walls that are largely extant (see Fig. 22); in due course these

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

were complemented by the construction of major administrative buildings
and grand churches. 311 The economic consequences of the transfer to the
Huns of thousands of pounds of gold were serious, and, although Priscus’
sorrow for the plight of senators selling their furniture and wives’ jewellery
may not be deserved by these traditional exploiters of privilege, all tax-
payers will have had to contribute at a time when revenues from the Balkan
provinces were curtailed by extensive ravaging. The wealth that was distrib-
uted to notables like Onegesius or wives like Hereka, or that was evident
on the banquet tables at Attila’s court, was in large part lost to the Roman
empire; only a portion will have filtered back south, through the markets
established during various negotiations, whereas much remained outside
and contributed to the impressive Hunnic-period treasures discovered
beyond the Danube. jl Imperial authority was severely damaged, and in
those cities which survived there are signs that local interests would be
placed above those of the empire: at Asemus, the garrison ambushed a
Hunnic convoy of booty and prisoners, and the inhabitants then resisted
demands that liberated captives should be restored or at least ransomed,
even though this complicated negotiations at a higher level. Local initiative
protected this fortified settlement, though even here the general level of
insecurity is revealed by the fate of certain children who had been captured
while pasturing flocks outside the walls. 32

Hun invasions were a disaster both for the Roman state and for individ-
ual Romans, and there is no justification for the theory that lower-class
Romans gave the Huns an enthusiastic welcome or that traders in the
eastern empire regarded the mercantile opportunities of Hunnic power as
sufficient to offset their destructiveness. 3 ’ It is true that the survivors of the
Romanized population of Pannonia will have passed into Hunnic control
in the 430s, so that wealth and power had now to be achieved through pat-
ronage from the Huns: this explains the prominence at the Hun court of
upper-class Romans like Orestes, the father of the future western emperor
Romulus. Also some ordinary Romans served the Huns after being cap-
tured, and benefited as a result, but it is dangerous to generalize from the
few examples that Priscus encountered during the embassy to Attila.
Rusticius the secretary had expert knowledge which made him a valuable
asset, while the anonymous trader from Viminacium whose knowledge of
Greek attracted Priscus’ attention was scarcely an ordinary individual, since
it was military prowess in Hunnic service that secured him liberty and a
respectable place in the retinue of Onegesius. 34 Thus the trader’s com-
plaints about Roman failings, to which in any case Priscus provided a long
and moving response that prompted the trader to admit tearfully the

30 Croke (1981); Spieser (1984a); Whitby (1985); Gregory (1992).

31 For illustrations, see Gertnanen parts 3—5 and Wolfram (1985). 32 Priscus fr. 9.3.

33 Thompson (1948) 54—6; 184—203. 34 Priscus fr. 1 1.2.422—35.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

712 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

benefits of Roman law and life, have to be interpreted carefully: they do
not prove that life was better for everyone under the Huns, and it must be
remembered that far more Romans ended up as bleached skeletons, such
as those that made it difficult for Priscus and his fellow envoys to find a
clean camp site outside Naissus even seven years after the city’s sack, 35 than
as privileged Hun servants.

III. FROM THE HUNS TO THE AVARS

The fragmentation of the Hun federation following Attila’s unexpected
death changed but did not remove the threat to the Balkan provinces, since
in place of a unified group whose leader was usually amenable to negotia-
tions, there emerged a complicated array of competing tribal groups. This
state of affairs persisted from the mid fifth century until the Avars began
to reimpose unity under the authority of their Chagan in the 5 60s. On occa-
sions the Romans could turn disunity to their advantage: for example, in
the 460s Roman generals blockaded a heterogeneous tribal group; an
officer of Hunnic descent in the Roman army, Celchal, persuaded the
Goths among the starving enemy to attack their Hunnic comrades by
reminding them of the exploitation to which Huns normally subjected
Goths, and the Romans took advantage of the consequent massacre. But
on other occasions Romans suffered from the fragmentation, since instabil-
ity north of the Danube prompted tribesmen to regard Roman territory to
the south as an escape route or a resource to be exploited: the movement
of the Amal-led Goths into the empire in the 460s has plausibly been attrib-
uted to their inability to achieve conclusive domination in power struggles
north of the river, while in 5 5 1 the Gepids summoned help from the
Kotrigurs, but when 1 2,000 troops arrived too early for action against their
intended foes, the Lombards, the Gepids ferried them across the Danube
to gain satisfaction in Roman territory. A separate problem in these years
was the emergence of the Vandal navy as a threat to southern Greece in
the 460s and 470s, when the Ionian islands, the western Peloponnese and,
probably, Athens all suffered. 36

It was the Gepids who effected the collapse of Hunnic power when they
led a coalition of Germanic tribes which defeated their former masters at
the river Nedao in Pannonia in 454; thereafter, they established themselves
as masters of Pannonia, and achieved the status of Roman allies, although
their loyalty was not exceptional. Attila’s sons failed to co-ordinate their
actions, and no son emerged as sole leader, so that the mighty Huns rapidly
descended to the level of other tribal groups. Two Gothic groups, each of

35 Priscus fr. 1 1.2.52—5.

36 Priscus fr. 49; Heather, Goths and Romans 247—50; Procop. Wars vin.18; Frantz (1988) 78.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM THE HUNS TO THE AVARS 7 1 3

about 10,000—1 5,000 fighting men, emerged as the main tormentors of the
Balkans from the 460s to 489. The two leaders, Theoderic Strabo and
Theoderic the Amal, were rivals for the allegiance of their followers and
the grant of territory and imperial titles, with their associated salaries; their
competition was exploited by the emperor Zeno, but in return the Goths
could take advantage of Zeno’s insecurity and win concessions by partici-
pating in the civil strife of his reign. 37

The accounts of Gothic movement provide some information about con-
ditions within the Balkans. Places in which Gothic contingents were settled
for any length of time were likely to be suffering from depopulation, since
Goths were regularly interested in land which they could work — demands
for food were only a short-term remedy. 38 This might have been inferred
about the land north of the Stara Planina, which had suffered most from
earlier invasions, where the Amali based themselves from 474 to 478 in the
vicinity of Novae and Marcianopolis, but the presence of Strabo’s troops on
the Thracian plain south of the mountains suggests that there were empty
lands there as well; Strabo had probably contributed to this, since Zeno later
complained about how he had ‘damaged the inhabitants of Thrace, cutting
off their hands . . . and displacing all farmers’. 39 Depopulation is explicitly
mentioned in Dardania, which Zeno offered to Theoderic the Amal in 479
as having ‘much beautiful and fertile land, lacking inhabitants, farming which
he could support his army in abundance of everything’. Elsewhere, ravaging
ensured the destruction of agriculture: in 478, as they were being pushed out
of the Thracian plain, the Amali devastated the area near Rhodope, ‘all the
best of the land in Thrace’, where they drove off herds, killed what they could
not take and obliterated all agriculture — it is not recorded whether the
suffering farmers were Romans or followers of Theoderic Strabo. 40
Prosperity, however, was possible in areas that escaped ravaging for any
significant length of time: in 479 Lychnidus could be described as ‘a pros-
perous city full of old wealth’, and towards the Adriatic in Epirus and near
the Dalmatian coastline there are signs of continuing wealth. 41

In their search for food and land the Goths inevitably came into conflict
with the cities and other fortifications, since these offered security and were
storehouses for local agricultural surpluses. The latter point is illustrated by
the Amali’s experience outside Heracleia in Macedonia, probably Heracleia
Lyncestis: the Amali were utterly destitute, but during negotiations with
Zeno they were provided with supplies by the local bishop; at their depar-
ture they demanded grain and wine for their journey towards Dyrrachium,
but the local population had taken refuge in a strong fortress, from where

37 Malchus frr. 15.31—6; 18.3.15—16; 22.16—17.

38 Malchus fr. 18.3.5—7; cf- fr- 20.54—5, 204; Heather, Goths and Romans 258—9.

39 Malchus frr. 18.2.13; 15.18—20. 40 Malchus frr. 20.202—4; 18.4.4—7.

41 Malchus fr. 20.141— 2; Popovic (1984); Wilkes (1969) 419—20.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

714 23 ' THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

they rejected the Goths’ request, and the Goths’ only response was to burn
the deserted city before departing. 42 Theoderic Strabo had a comparable
experience in 473 when, although he managed to capture Arcadiopolis by
starvation, his own army was also afflicted by famine: it was no easier to
find food outside a beleaguered city than inside. The emperor’s command
of food reserves was an important factor in negotiations with the Goths.

The bishop of Heracleia’s behaviour is an example of a local leader
taking the initiative in securing the well-being of his own people, and there
are other signs of the defence of local self-interest being combined with a
lack of confidence in the emperor. In 478 the inhabitants of Thessalonica,
suspecting that Zeno wanted to give their city to the Amali, overthrew
imperial statues and attacked the prefect and his office; they were calmed
by the clergy, but insisted on removing the keys of the city gates from the
prefect and entrusting them to the archbishop, and they organized them-
selves into a guard. Shortly afterwards, at Dyrrachium, Theoderic was able
to exploit similar apprehensions when he sent Sidimund with a fake
message to warn the inhabitants that the Amali were about to move into
their territory with Zeno’s approval and that they should contemplate gath-
ering their possessions and seeking refuge on islands or in other cities; the
trick worked, and Theoderic occupied the city. 43

The opportune death of Theoderic Strabo and his son Recitach’s inabil-
ity to hold the loyalty of his followers permitted the consolidation of the
Gothic groups under Amal control, and the new dynasty set about invent-
ing a long history to justify its current pre-eminence. 44 Theoderic the
Amal’s Goths were encouraged to depart to Italy, which gave limited respite
to the Balkan provinces. New tribal groups emerged on the Danube, but it
took time for these to consolidate their positions and in the meantime the
new emperor Anastasius, a native of Dyrrachium, was gradually able to
reassert Roman authority along and within the Danube frontier. This was
a slow business, and most progress seems to have been made along the
lower Danube, especially in Scythia Minor, where there is evidence for
reconstruction at several sites; the Roman navy’s ability to control the Black
Sea and the Danube was probably an important element in this process.

Beyond the Danube there was no single dominant tribal group. In
Pannonia the Gepids acted as federate allies, and were probably used to
observe and pressurize the Ostrogoths, who controlled Dalmatia. But when
in 5 37 Justinian recovered Dalmatia, relations with the Gepids deteriorated,
and Justinian made an alliance with the Lombards, neighbours and rivals of
the Gepids. One other important group was active in this region, the Heruls,

42 Malchus fr. 20.35—42, 94—100; cf. 1 VitaS. Hypatii (pp. 61. 1 1—63.8) for a castellum acting as a food dis-
tribution-point to country dwellers impoverished by Hun attacks. 43 Malchus fr. 20. 5—1 9; 20.63—98.

44 Heather (1989); Heather, Goths and Romans 322—30; Burns (1984) chs. 2—3 is far too credulous,
Wolfram (1988) 248—58 more sceptical.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM THE HUNS TO THE AVARS 7 1 5

who achieved the distinction of being called ‘the most evil of all mankind’.
Part of this tribe, perhaps as many as 4,500 fighting men, had been settled
in Illyricum by Anastasius, and then in the vicinity of Singidunum by
Justinian, who secured the conversion and baptism of the leading men; their
brutality made them useful recruits for imperial armies. 45 Further east on
the lower Danube, the main hostile groups were now Bulgars and Slavs. The
Bulgars were Hunnic and comprised a number of groups, those nearer the
Danube being remnants of Attila’s followers, while others known as
Kotrigurs and Utigurs dwelt farther east, north of the Black Sea; these were
being disturbed by tribal reshuffling caused ultimately by the Avars, who had
begun to re-enact the westward movement of the Huns. Under Zeno and
Anastasius, Bulgars served in Roman armies, but in the 540s and 5 50s the
Kotrigurs ravaged widely, reaching the land walls of Constantinople and the
Isthmus of Corinth. Justinian’s main response was to manipulate the rivalry
between Utigurs and Kotrigurs, and in due course to accept the Avars as a
new diplomatic pawn in the trans-Danubian game; the Kotrigurs are later
found as a sub-group within the Avar federation. 46

In the long term, the Slavs, were the most significant of the new groups
on the Danube, which they had reached by the start of the sixth century,
though the exact course of their migrations cannot be specified since it is
notoriously difficult to identify Slavs archaeologically. 47 They lived in
simple agricultural communities in forest clearings — small villages of huts
which might have subterranean entrances, often located close to rivers;
under threat, they might take refuge in woods or lakes and marshes. Their
social structure was rudimentary, and the normal unit of organization was
probably the family group or a few such groups combined into a clan, who
might share a common hill-fort. 48 They were adept fighters on their chosen
ground, and some Slavs — for example, Chilbuldius — achieved prominence
in Roman service. For military purposes they might combine into larger
bodies, but as with many of Rome’s tribal neighbours, leaders of such units
possessed relatively little personal authority and were dependent upon the
co-operation of their leading men, the heads of family groups. Roman
writers could identify two distinct groups, Slavs and Antes, the latter living
further from the Danube frontier and perhaps being more socially
advanced than other Slavs, in that they had a money- and slave-owning
society and a recognized leadership with whom the Romans could nego-
tiate, a type of diplomacy that was rendered impractical by the anarchy of
other Slav groups. 49 It is likely that, as with other tribal groups, proximity
to the Roman empire and regular warfare, against Bulgars and Avars as well

45 Procop. Wars vi. 14.36; vii. 34.43; Croke (1982) 132.

46 Procop. Wars viii.18— 19, 25; Agathias, Hist, v.n— 25; Menander fr. 12.5.90—3.

47 Baratte (1984); Gimbutas (1971) ch. 1—4 for their previous history. 48 Gimbutas (1971) ch. 7.

49 Maurice, Strut, xi. 4; Procop. Wars vn.14; Jord. Get. 23.119.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

716 23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

as Romans, stimulated considerable social and political change among the
Slavs during the sixth century. The chronology of their invasions is difficult
to establish, since their attacks may have coincided with those of other,
more prominent, tribes such as the Bulgars, and hence may be concealed. 50
The earliest attested incursions were in 517; there was extensive raiding in
5 30 at a time of Bulgar attacks; and in 545 a Slav group was defeated in
Thrace by Herul federates. In 549 3,000 Slavs ravaged Thrace and
Illyricum, defeating imperial cavalry and capturing the city of Topirus; in
551 a Slav band was intending to assail Thessalonica but was diverted
towards Dalmatia by the fortuitous presence of an army under Germanus,
who was recruiting troops for service in Italy; in the same year other Slavs
reached the Long Walls of Constantinople and devastated the Thracian
plains, and in 5 5 2 Slavs plundered Illyricum and then escaped with the assis-
tance of the Gepids, who saved them from Roman pursuit by ferrying
them across the Danube for a solidus per person. 51

In spite of the best efforts of emperors, especially Anastasius and
Justinian, the Balkan provinces remained an unsettled area. Anastasius’
actions in the eastern Balkans were undermined by the troubles associated
with Vitalian’s revolt, which was centred on the lower Danube and the
Black Sea coast, while under Justinian the Balkans had to cede precedence
to military activity elsewhere in the empire: after the start of the western
reconquest this became a serious problem — Balkan military commanders
are found in action in Italy and large numbers of troops were recruited in
the Balkans for service in the west. Germanus in 549/50 and Narses in 551,
both en route for Italy, encountered invaders in the Balkans but concentrated
on their western missions rather than attend to the immediate threat. 52
Agathias, in a highly critical assessment of Justinian’s policies in the context
of Zabergan’s invasion, complains of demoralized soldiers cheated of their
pay, drastically reduced troop numbers, and remaining forces transferred
elsewhere; 53 accounts of Slav and Bulgar raids give an impression of an
empty land across which invaders could move with impunity. An illustra-
tion is provided by the exploits of Ildigisal, a Lombard who had been
settled with 300 followers in Thrace: in 552, discontented by his treatment
in Constantinople, Ildigisal fled with a few companions to Apri, where they
joined other Lombards, raided the imperial horse pastures, defeated the
Kotrigurs settled in Thrace who attempted to oppose them, fled across
Thrace without further opposition, and escaped to the Gepids after killing
the commanders of a Roman force in Illyricum. 54 There was clearly empty
land available for the settlement of contingents like these Lombards and
Kotrigurs, as well as the Heruls mentioned above.

50 Lemerle (1954) 284; Ferjancic (1984) 88— 9. 51 Procop. Wars vn.38; 40; vm.25.

52 Procop. Wars vii. 3 9— 40; Agathias, Hist. 1. 1 9.1; Procop. Wars vn.40; vm.21.

53 Agathias, Hist. v. 1 3.7—14.4. 54 Procop. Wars vin.27.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM THE HUNS TO THE AVARS 717

The grimness of the situation should not, however, be exaggerated. The
ability to find troops to recruit is an indication of some sort of successful
habitation, even if some recruits were tribesmen newly introduced for that
purpose. Viewed from the outside, the Balkans were still a land of milk and
honey, as is revealed in the Utigurs’ complaints about Justinian’s reception
of their Kotrigur enemies. Justinianic legislation suggests that land in the
Balkans was a desirable commodity, an asset that unscrupulous lenders
might attempt to obtain from their debtors in Haemimontus and Illyricum;
legislation against this applied to both soldiers and civilians, and a law about
redeeming captives from barbarians reveals that there was an active market
for land. 55 Decades of impoverishment had undermined administration,
especially in Thrace, but attempts to remedy this were initiated by
Anastasius and taken further by Justinian: Thrace was joined with more
prosperous regions — Cyprus, Caria and the Aegean islands — in a unit
known as the quaestura exercitus , and was provided with a new rank of gov-
ernor, a Justinianic praetor, with enhanced powers and a specific duty to
attend to local defences. 56 In Illyricum, where the greater security and pros-
perity of the southern areas would have helped the prefect in Thessalonica
to control the more threatened northern parts of his prefecture, Justinian
attempted at a moment of confidence to move some aspects of adminis-
tration further north: a separate metropolitan see was created at his new
city of Justiniana Prima, supposedly for the convenience of the inhabitants.
Bishops provided secular as well as spiritual leadership, as can be seen from
the complaints of the citizens of Thessalonica about the absence of their
archbishop during a crisis in 5 3 5. 57

Diplomacy and fortifications were emperors’ twin strategies for defend-
ing the Balkans. Lombards were incited to act against Gepids, Antes against
Slavs, Utigurs against Kotrigurs. Tribal groups or smaller war-bands could
be solicited into imperial service, to be rewarded with lands and military
titles that brought salaries or provisions. Critics of Justinian complained
that such policies merely encouraged tribes to cause more trouble in the
expectation of greater rewards from the supine empire, but Menander
offered a positive assessment of his preference for avoiding war. The fre-
quent failure of large armies during Anastasius’ reign, and again in 529—30,
to crush opponents in the Balkans tends to support Menander’s judge-
ment. 58 Pressure along the frontier was eased sufficiently for Justinian to
reinforce Roman control of the Danube as far upstream as Singidunum,
and the operations of the Roman fleet and the ability of Roman command-
ers to watch known crossing-points could restrict, if not ultimately prevent,
fresh invasions.

55 Procop. Wars vm.19; Nov. 32, 33; 65. 56 Nov. 41; 26; Hendy, Studies 397—404.

57 Nov. 1 1; Life of David, cited by Hoddinott (1963) 89*?.

58 Menander fr. 5.1—2; Cameron (1970) 125—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 i»

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

The defences of Balkan cides and towns were strengthened both by
Anastasius and Justinian. The latter’s contribution is more prominent,
thanks to the panegyrical account in Procopius, Buildings iv. This offers the
names of about 600 places in the Balkans at which Justinian is said to have
organized building work; two long lists of constructions in Illyricum and
Thrace can plausibly be traced to official lists, 59 so that Procopius may have
had reasonable information about imperial intentions, though the extent
to which these were realized remains in dispute. It is impossible to corrob-
orate Procopius’ evidence, and probably always will be, both because many
of the places mentioned have not been identified and because in the
absence of inscriptions it is difficult to date construction work precisely or
show that an emperor financed work executed during his reign. Critics of
Procopius tend to seize on rhetorical pronouncements about the extent
and efficacy of Justinian’s achievements, the type of propaganda that is
also evident in Novel 1 1 , or assume that there was a strategic programme
underlying the information that Procopius organizes into administrative
areas. 60 A more balanced approach is possible. Justinian was interested in
the Balkans: it was Iris birthplace, the central area where many of the
fortifications were located possessed substantial mineral wealth, and the
whole region’s security affected the safety of Constantinople and its
suburbs. As a result, Justinian instructed his new praetor to attend to con-
struction works and report any that required substantial expenditure.
Frontier defence was accepted as an imperial duty, but did not entail the
existence of a grand strategic plan: 61 rather, existing sites would be
fortified, strengthened or repaired, depending upon what appeared best at
a local level or was requested by local inhabitants. As a result, various types
of site are probably recorded in Procopius: frontier fortresses in the vicin-
ity of the Danube which constituted the empire’s front line; settlements
along the main roads that ensured the maintenance of imperial communi-
cations but also offered invaders avenues for penetrating the interior;
major cities; and upland refuge sites to which the harassed population of
the Balkans had been moving since the Gothic incursions of the fourth
century. Few new settlements were created by Justinian, but his actions
were perhaps important for reintegrating within the empire the scattered
communities that had been created as populations shifted from the low-
level cities and roadside sites to safer upland locations. The new city and
ecclesiastical capital at Justiniana Ptima, plausibly identified with the
remains at Tsaricin Grad (see Fig. 23), represents an exception in the
broader context of Justinian’s activity in the Balkans. These fortifications,
with a few exceptions such as the walls at Thermopylae, Corinth or the

59 Besevliev (1970) 74—7 .

60 For a hostile assessment see, for example, Wozniak (1982); for discussion, Whitby, Maurice 71—8.

61 Nov. 26.4; for criticism of modernizing notions, see Isaac, Limits of Empire ch. 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM THE HUNS TO THE AVARS 719

Fig. 23 Tsaricin Grad (Justiniana Prima). (After Bavant in Villes et peuplement) For a different
reconstruction of the walled circuit, see Fig. 41, p. 922 below

Chersonese, were not intended by themselves to prevent the movement of
invaders but to shelter the local population and ensure that when danger
passed there were people who could return to the cultivation of the sur-
rounding country. Only significant garrison troops, or a mobile army,
could oppose roving war-bands directly, whereas for a city to commit its
limited local resources outside its defences might court disaster, as at
Topirus, which was captured by Slavs after its armed men had been lured
from the walls and killed . 62

62 Procop. Warsvu.$%.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

720

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

Towards the end of Justinian’s reign, a new tribal group entered Roman
horizons — the Avars, who were introduced to the Roman commander in
Lazica by the Alans, an approach which indicates that they were currently
located near the Caucasus; although displaced westwards by the rise of
Turkish power in the central Asian steppes, they appear to have had a for-
midable military reputation, analogous to that of the Huns. Justinian wel-
comed them as recruits to the trans-Danubian diplomatic game, rewarded
them with presents, and encouraged them to attack tribes hostile to the
Romans; Bulgar and other Hunnic tribes were crushed, and the Antes were
plundered. 63 These successes increased Avar strength and confidence, so
that they extended their control west from the Caucasus towards the
Danube, but their power was still modest, since Justinian was able to keep
the Danube defended against them, and at Justin II’s accession the new
emperor rebuked Avar envoys in public without provoking immediate
retaliation. Avar involvement in a new round of strife between Lombards
and Gepids led to the departure of the former to Italy, the subjugation of
the latter, and the acquisition of the whole of Pannonia, which henceforth
constituted the Avar homeland. New recruits and military successes, on the
Danube and against the Franks, allowed the Avars to create a federation, a
successor to that of Attila and with comparable strengths and weaknesses.
Baian, the Avar Chagan, dominated through terror an increasing number
of subject groups such as Kotrigurs, Gepids, Slavs and even a unit of
Romano-natives; archaeological investigations in Hungary have discovered
cemeteries of Avars or subject groups, the Avars being equated with
Mongol-type burials. 64 Symbols of power and gifts for patronage to follow-
ers were important to the Avars, and these were extorted from the Romans
as diplomatic gifts or payments for peace; the Chagan’s pretensions might
be enhanced by imperial robes, whose export to northern barbarians was
prohibited in later centuries. 65

From 568 the Avars disputed possession of Sirmium with the Romans,
who had only recently recovered the city from the Gepids. In the early 570s,
before the outbreak of war in the east, the Romans could force the Chagan
to retire from the city walls without reward, even if they were defeated in
battle. But the transfer of resources away from the Balkans, especially after
Tiberius recruited a large army there in 574/ 5 , weakened defences along the
Danube. The first to take advantage were Slavs near the lower Danube who
were probably prompted by a desire to escape from the encroaching power

63 Menander fr. 5.1—3; Kollautz and Miyakawa (1970) 1. 134—47.

64 Mirac. S. Dem. 11.284—6; Laszlo (195 5); Lengyel and Radan (1980) 408—16; Kollautz and Miyakawa
(1970) 1.184-99.

65 Theophylact 1.3.8—13; Menander 12.5.56—68; Michael the Syrian xi.21; Constantine
Porphyrogenitus, De Administrando Imperio 13. Germanen part 6 for illustrations of the wealth of burial
treasures.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROMAN TO POST-ROMAN

7 21

of the Avars. Widespread Slav raiding began in 577, and Tiberius’ only
response was to employ the Avars, who had their own quarrel with the
Slavs, to attack Slav territory. This revealed the extent of Roman weakness,
and the Avars renewed their attempts on Sirmium, eventually capturing the
city in 581/2 after a three-year blockade. 66 In the first decade of Maurice’s
reign the Avars re-enacted the attacks of Attila’s Huns: like them, they were
capable of capturing fortified cities, at least north of the Stara Planina, and
as long as the Persian war continued, there was little that the Romans could
do but purchase a peace, at a price that rose from 80,000 to 100,000 solidi in
5 84. At the same time Slav raiding continued, partly encouraged by the
Avars but also partly stimulated by fear of them. Slav bands reached the
Long Walls of Constantinople in 5 84, Thessalonica was briefly attacked in
5 86, and their raiding extended as far south as Athens, Corinth and into the
Peloponnese. 67 In the 590s the termination of the Persian war allowed a
greater concentration on Balkan affairs, and the narrative of Roman cam-
paigns suggests a gradual reassertion of control across the countryside to
the south of the Danube, the reopening of communications with isolated
cities that had survived the years of ravaging, and the extension of the war
to the north of the Danube to instil in Slavs and Avars a fear of Roman
power; attention was paid to their enemies’ military capabilities, aspects of
Avar organization and equipment were copied, suitable tactics and strate-
gies were devised, and by 602 it appeared that the Romans had begun to
dominate the Slavs on the lower Danube and to create dissension within
the Avar federation based in Pannonia. 68

IV. FROM ROMAN TO POST-ROMAN

So far, the progress of this chapter has been dictated by the sequence of
invaders whose activities determined the pace and direction of develop-
ments. On the other hand, although lack of evidence makes it difficult to
analyse the region’s history from the perspective of its Roman inhabitants,
some attempt must be made if the fundamental changes in population and
organization that occurred at the end of the Roman period are to be under-
stood. If in the early fifth century the northern Balkans were already a war
zone trampled by tribal bands and Roman armies, the southern Balkans
and in particular peninsular Greece had as yet escaped severe damage. A
survey of the history of Athens from the Gothic attack in 396 to the Slav
arrival in the 5 80s is divided into three phases — ‘prosperity, decline and dis-
aster’ — and, although Athens had certain unique features, this paradigm is
clearly of much wider application in the southern province of Achaea. 69

66 Menander frr. 21, 25, 27. 67 Theophylact 1.3. 1—7.6; Whitby, Maurice 140—51.

68 Whitby, Maurice 156—65, 176—81. 69 Frantz (1988) ch. iv.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

722

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

Archaeological field surveys in Greece are increasingly building up a picture
of considerable intensification of settlement and land use in the fourth and
fifth century after more than half a millennium of abatement: in Boeotia
the density of rural settlement was striking, and, though this may be
explained to an extent by a decline of smaller townships and the transfer
of population to rural estates, the results belie Zosimus’ complaint (v.5.7)
about the area’s continuing impoverishment. Surveys in other areas — for
example, the Argolid — have confirmed this resurgence of the Greek coun-
tryside; marginal land was being reoccupied, and it is even possible to talk
of a return to the population density of classical times. Attica shared this
trend. 70

In Athens itself, the long-running investigations of the Agora have
revealed rapid rebuilding after the destruction associated with Alaric’s
Goths in 396 (see Fig. 24); indeed, the recovery appears more substantial
than in the aftermath of the Herul attack in the third century. Two factors
made Athens special — the prosperity of its Neoplatonic philosophy school
and an imperial marriage. The reputation of Athens as a centre for philo-
sophical education was re-established by Plutarch, who died in the early
430s, and continued by its most famous representative, Proclus, who led
the school for almost half a century until his death in 485. Although
Synesius, writing to his brother, probably in 410, had poked fun at the
Plutarchean sophists who attracted students with Attic honey rather than
the fame of their eloquence ( Ep . 136), the Athenian intellectuals made a
significant contribution to the local economy — like a modern university in
a small town such as Lampeter or St Andrews. The teachers themselves
may not have been sufficiently wealthy to own the large houses excavated
on the north slope of the Areopagus, but they were closely connected with
the members of the local elite who lived there, and with the provincial
officials who could finance major building works: thus the restoration of
the Library of Hadrian was organized by the praetorian prefect of
Illyricum, Herculius, whose statue was placed on the facade by the sophist
Plutarch. 71 The educational establishment was relevant to the imperial mar-
riage: Athenais, selected as Theodosius II’s bride in 421 and renamed
Eudocia, was daughter of Leontius, a teacher at Athens. A plausible sug-
gestion is that the grand Palace of the Giants, which occupied most of the
central portion of the old agora (see Fig. 25), was built to mark the promo-
tion of this local family to imperial dignity; at any rate, Eudocia’s brother
Gessius was praetorian prefect of Illyricum in the 420s, and a statue of
Eudocia stood in front of the palace. 72 It is possible that the one-third

70 Bintliff and Snodgrass (1985) 147—8; Runnels and van Audel (1987) 319—20; Alcock (1989) 13;
Fowden (1988) 54—5.

71 Frantz (1988) 57—8, 37—49 (modifications in Fowden (1990) 495—6); Cameron and Long (1993)

56—7. 72 Frantz (1988) ch. 5 (by Homer Thompson), with Fowden (1990) 497—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Fig. 24 Athens in the fifth century a.d. (After Frantz (1988))

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

7 2 4

reduction in taxation in Achaea, authorized in October 424 (C. Th. xi. 1 . 3 3),
was a consequence of the province’s imperial contacts.

Possession of philosophers and an empress made Athens a little different,
but its development was not out of line with that of other provincial cities.
The inscriptions of Corinth from the fifth and sixth century reveal a wide
range of activities: agriculture, including goatherds, pheasant-rearing and
market gardening, trade, including tailors, cobblers and furriers, and the
retinue and support services required by the presence of the provincial gov-
ernor — there is even a graffito by two of the praetorian prefect’s bucellarii
asking for divine help in their release form imprisonment. Smaller provincial
towns naturally produce very few inscriptions, and the few that record pro-
fessions are dominated by the church. 73 Athens was not immune to the

73 Feissel and Philippidis-Braat (1985) part 1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROMAN TO POST-ROMAN

7 2 5

growth in power and visibility of Christianity, and it is possible to infer from
inscriptions that there was a gradual but significant conversion in the century
350—450. The philosophers remained solidly pagan, but they may not have
determined the religious affiliations of their fellow citizens: Proclus had
briefly to retire from Athens to Lydia in the late 440s, and a plausible specu-
lation is that he was evading Christian pressure; there is no firm evidence for
the religious views of ordinary Athenians, but Proclus’ devotion in attend-
ing the rural shrines of Attica on their feast days was probably abnormal. A
church of a striking tetraconch design was built in the courtyard of the
Library of Hadrian in the early fifth century (see Fig. 26), and it may be right
to connect this with Eudocia, who was an intellectual in her own right but
also a convert to Christianity with a record of church building and other ben-
efactions; two basilicas were constructed in the south-eastern part of the city
by the Ilissos stream. A significant blow to pagan morale would have been
struck when the cult statues were removed from the Parthenon and
Asclepieion and access to the temples prohibited, a development which
probably occurred towards the end of Proclus’ life. 74

At Athens, continuity of occupation makes it impossible to identify all
the new Christian buildings that were erected, but from elsewhere in

74 Frantz (1988) 72—3; Fowden 499—501; Trombley, Hellenic Religion ch. iv.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

726

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

Fig. 27 Garrmgrad (Acquis), sixth-century church within the ruins of the palace of Galerius.
(After Bavant in 1 Villes et peuplement 268)

Greece there is plenty of evidence for the erection and decoration of sub-
stantial churches and other ecclesiastical structures — for example, at
Distomo and Kirra in Phocis, or Nea Anchialos in southern Thessaly,
where there was clearly a flourishing Christian community; in Macedonia,
at Kitros and Makryialos, late Roman basilicas have been discovered within
the past decade, while at Philippi the decoration of the episcopal palace has
revealed that the bishop lived in conditions to match the impressive group
of basilicas in the centre of his town. 73 At Thessalonica, as at Athens, the
late fifth century seems to have been the crucial period for the monumen-
tal establishment of Christianity at the centre of the city: the city’s patron
saint and protector, Demetrius, received a grand church, the unused mau-
soleum of Galerius was converted into a church to St George with lavish
mosaic decorations, and there were also churches for St David and the
Panaghia Akheiropoietos; these are just the structures that survive. 76 As
Christian buildings were becoming more prominent in the provincial cities
and towns, so the bishops were emerging as the dominant local figures: the
role of the bishops at Thessalonica and Heracleia during the passage of
Theoderic’s Goths in 478 has already been noted; this is matched at a lesser
level by bishop Epiphanius who was responsible for a construction at

75 All information reported in Archaeological Reports for 1990— 1991. 76 Spieser (1984a).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROMAN TO POST-ROMAN

7 2 7

Thebes, or the learned bishop Peter commemorated in verse on a mosaic
inscription. 77

Those areas of the Balkans less accessible to northern invaders pre-
served their prosperity, or at least avoided serious decline, until the sixth
century, but thereafter there is a rapid and catastrophic collapse: held
surveys note the almost complete abandonment of the countryside, while
in towns and other significant sites the level of material culture dropped
dramatically and the fabric of society appears to have unravelled. In penin-
sular Greece, Athens may have led the decline, depending on what impact
Justinian’s prohibition on pagan participation in teaching in 529 had on the
local economy: the careful concealment of pagan statues at one of the large
houses on the Areopagus at about that date is suggestive, but should not
be pushed too far. 78 In the mid sixth century Bulgars ravaged northern and
central Greece, and by the 5 80s central Greece and the Peloponnese had
also become the targets for Slav attacks and the location, perhaps, of some
Slav settlement. By the late sixth century it is no longer possible to identify
a north/ south divide in the Balkans, since the whole region was suffering
from extreme disruption as raiders caused considerable depopulation and
destruction, with no respite for recovery.

In some cities the population departed en masse-, thus at Lissus in
Dalmatia and Euria in Epirus, local clergy seem to have led their flocks to
safety, in Italy and Corfu respectively, in the 590s. 79 For the Peloponnese,
the Chronicle of Monemvasia records migrations to Italy, Sicily, offshore
islands or isolated refuges such as Monemvasia, at which a bishopric was
now established; the Chronicle also asserts that the Peloponnese passed out
of imperial control in 587/8, only to be recovered in the early eighth
century. Although the status of this text is much discussed and its informa-
tion may well be exaggerated in certain respects, the general impression of
developments is at least credible; this literary evidence coincides with the
picture of utter desolation recorded in the Argolid field survey. 80 On the
other hand, all was not lost until after 600 and the termination of energetic
campaigning along the Danube under Phocas and the transfer of troops to
Asia Minor by Heraclius: in 592 pope Gregory could refer to a general
recovery in Illyricum from the effects of invasions, which encouraged him
to reorganize the church’s possessions there, and his letters suggest the sur-
vival of ecclesiastical order in Macedonia, peninsular Greece and along the
Adriatic coast. 81

Those who managed to flee into exile were the lucky ones, since both
Slavs and Avars are known to have removed large numbers of captives for

77 Avramea and Feissel (1987) nos. 6 and 7.

78 Frantz (1988) 84—92; caution in Fowden (1990) 496. 79 Greg. Reg. 11.37; vm.32; xiv.7— 8.

80 Charanis (1950); Whitby, Maurice 125—6.

81 Reg. 11.23; m -6, 38; vi.7; ix. 1 56; Whitby , Maurice 1 12— 1 5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 z8

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

exploitation in their homelands; though these might be liberated through
military action, their allegiance to the empire was thereafter considered
suspect, so that even release was a mixed blessing. 82 The Slavs’ reputation
for kind treatment of captives, and opportunities for lucrative service with
the successful Avars, will have weakened the attractions of loyalty to Rome.
More importantly, perhaps, the region was experiencing a steady process of
demographic and cultural change as the settlement of Germanic and
Hunnic tribesmen within the Balkans since the fourth century blurred dis-
tinctions between inhabitants north and south of the Danube. The inva-
sions must have caused heavy casualties, particularly as the Avars, like the
Huns, were capable of undertaking sieges and organizing effective block-
ades: an inscription from Sirmium, in poor Greek, attests the agony of this
city in 5 80: ‘Lord Christ, help the city and smite the Avars, and watch over
Romania and the writer; Amen’; the prayer went unanswered, and the Avar
Chagan had no compunction about taking false oaths on the Bible. 83 Even
Slavs could overrun the walls of Topirus in 552, and defences of the lower
cities at Athens and Corinth c. 5 82. The absence of Thessalonican coins in
northern Illyricum has been suggested as an indication of lack of eco-
nomic activity in the sixth century, possibly of major depopulation; granted
the link between coinage production and army pay, this absence probably
reflects a lack of soldiers, or at least of soldiers whose units were still
closely attached to the imperial system, unlike the unpaid garrison at Pessau
in Noricum or the soldiers at Asemus. 84 Maurice believed that there was
sufficient room in Thrace for the settlement of 30,000 Armenian families,
which would each provide a new soldier. 85

In this period of uncertainty, urban settlements were in fundamental
conflict with the invaders, 86 partly because city walls protected the sur-
pluses of food and reserves of wealth that interested tribesmen, partly
because the movement of tribes into an area destroyed agricultural pros-
perity, constricted a city’s vitality, and prompted the flight of leading inhab-
itants to places of greater safety: at Salona, attempted flight by the upper
classes prompted the city’s fall in 638/9, while the refugees from Serdica
and Naissus at Thessalonica c. 620 were probably similar people. 87 Cities
might be choked to death as the more Romanized elements of their pop-
ulation departed, and it is significant that at many Balkan sites the last
phases of ‘Roman’ occupation are difficult to distinguish from ‘barbarian’
control, with so-called squatter inhabitation of ruined buildings. Part of
the problem is the lack of publications of seventh-century structures,
which are usually unprepossessing and appear uninteresting, and the ten-
dency of archaeologists to date material to the fifth/sixth century on the

82 Maurice, Strat. xi.4.131— 6. 83 Menander fr. 25.1.76— 87.

84 Metcalf (1984); cf. Lemerle (1984) 520. Life of Severinus 20.1; Theophylact vn.3.

85 Sebeos 8. 86 Lemerle (1984) 516; contra Howard-Johnston (1983).

87 Thomas the Archdeacon 26—7; Mirac. S. Dem. 11.200.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FROM ROMAN TO POST-ROMAN 729

basis that civilized life had collapsed by the seventh century, so that there
could be no significant archaeological evidence thereafter. In addition, at
Isthmia, one of the best-published sites in southern Greece, which has pro-
duced the first quantity of Slavic pottery outside a cemetery context, it has
proved impossible to establish the identity of the inhabitants: they may
have been Greeks who chose to use ‘Slavic’ pottery, or settled Slavs who
maintained close contacts with the Byzantine authorities at nearby
Corinth. 88

Travel and communications were now endangered throughout the
Balkans, which will have enhanced the separatist tendencies already evident
in the north in the fifth century. Pope Gregory wrote to the bishop of
Corinth in 5 9 1 with a specific request that he assist with a papal messen-
ger’s journey to Constantinople ( Register 1.26). Avar envoys returning from
Constantinople were ambushed by Scamareis, who stole horses, silver and
other equipment; the identity of these Scamareis is unknown, though the
fact that Tiberius could track down the culprits and recover some of the
goods suggests they were an identifiable community, perhaps analogous
to the western bagaudae. An Avar ambassador was murdered by Slavs
within the empire, and injustinian’s reign the Slavs are reported to have iso-
lated the Roman city of Adina in Scythia Minor. 89 Outside cities there was
considerable insecurity. At Appiaria a local leader was captured and held to
ransom after a hunting expedition took him away from the walls, a repeti-
tion of the fate of Asemus’ shepherds in the 440s. Asemus itself survived
beyond the end of the sixth century and provides the best example of local
separatism: in 5 94, with their bishop as leader, the inhabitants barricaded
their city against an imperial army and mocked the general Peter, the
emperor Maurice’s brother, because he had attempted to enlist their garri-
son — local safety came first, and Asemus had learnt to fend for itself during
a decade without imperial contact. At nearby Novae, Peter was received
more favourably, though the insistence with which he was pressed to
remain to celebrate the festival of the local martyr Lupus may also reveal
consequences of isolation: his presence could allow the citizens to com-
memorate their saint without fear of surprise attack. The importance of
bishops in maintaining morale is demonstrated at Justiniana Prima, where
Maurice intervened in an attempt to have a demented bishop replaced
quickly, lest the city fall to the enemy through lack of ecclesiastical guid-
ance. The first book of the Miracles of St Demetrius was composed by
bishop John of Thessalonica in the early seventh century, when his city was
coming under such severe pressure that it was dangerous to venture beyond
the walls and the inhabitants desperately needed reassurance that their man
at the heavenly court would continue to protect them. 90

88 Gregory (1993) 1 56— 9. 89 Men. frr. 1 5.6; 25.2.32— 6; Procop. Buildings wq. 13; Farkas (1993— 4).

90 Theophylact vn.3.1— 10, 2.17— 1 8; Greg. Reg. xi.29; Whitby, Maurice 1 1 5—17.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

73 °

23. THE BALKANS AND GREECE 420— 602

The Life of Gregentius, although a fictitious text, presents a convincing
picture of living conditions: Gregentius, a native of the Balkans, avoided
capture during a tribal raid by taking refuge in a fort, but those inhabitants
who did not reach a nearby town were captured or slaughtered. Only after
a tribe was firmly established in an area were more stable relations possible
with Roman communities which survived: at Singidunum the Avars appear
to have been happy to permit survivors to remain in their captured city until
the reappearance of a Roman army disturbed the arrangement, and at the
height of their power in 5 89 the Chagan offered security to city-dwellers if
they paid taxes to the Avars instead of the Romans. 91 Near Thessalonica in
the seventh century good relations were gradually built up between the cit-
izens and local Slavs, particularly between leaders on each side, as some
Slavs came to appreciate the benefits of Roman civilization. Thessalonica,
however, was a rarity in surviving as a Roman city beyond the mid seventh
century, as the restoration of Roman authority in Maurice’s second decade
was undermined by the resumption of eastern war and imperial dissension;
apart from the immediate hinterland of Constantinople, Roman control
was soon restricted to coastal areas where small communities could
support and defend themselves. An expedition led by Justinian II suffered
heavily in an ambush while returning from Thessalonica to the capital in
688 (Theophanes 364.11—18).

In much of the Balkans there was a complete break between the Roman
and post-Roman worlds. In Bulgaria there was some continuity of language
and administrative skills in the short term, probably transmitted by the
inhabitants of cities along the Black Sea, but the majority of the territory
north of the Stara Planina was already occupied by Slav tribes when
Asparuch led in the new Bulgar ruling elite in 680. In peninsular Greece
enough of the native population survived for the reconnection of this area
with the Byzantine world to be an unremarkable process, but many had
probably had to take refuge in the mountains and other safe areas; there
may already be signs of the process of incorporation into the Byzantine
cultural world in the seventh-century settlement at Isthmia, where the
inhabitants were sedentary agriculturalists inhabiting buildings partly built
of stone. Throughout most of the Balkans, however, the future lay with the
non-Roman elements: Croats and Serbs were settled in the north-west
during Heraclius’ reign, the Bulgars controlled the north-east, while the
Slavs spread into whatever land was available. Centuries of Graeco-Roman
influence and control disappeared, and the new groups with their own lan-
guages and identities were only brought slowly into a Christian common-
wealth through considerable missionary activity. 92

91 Theophylact vii.io— 1 1; Michael the Syrian xi.21.

92 Howard-Johnston (1983); Obolensky (1971) chs. 2—3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 24

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

STUART GEORGE HALL

I. BISHOPS AND PATRIARCHS

The fifth-century church inherited an organization matching that of the
empire. 1 Each community usually had its bishop, though increasingly pres-
byters or sometimes deacons deputized for the bishop in governing con-
gregations. Above the local bishop stood the bishop of the metropolis, the
metropolian ( j u,7]T ( oo77oAtT7ys'), whose position had been codified at Nicaea
in 325. Superior to the metropolitan, the city which was the centre of an
imperial diocese {errapx^a) attained comparable status in the church, and
its bishop was called ‘archbishop’ (apxieTTLOKonos). This term was fre-
quently used of the bishops of Rome, Alexandria and Antioch at the
Council of Ephesus in 43 1, the same sees which had been named as exer-
cising territorial superiority in the canons of Nicaea in 325 . The term ‘arch-
bishop’ was limited to those of such standing till about 500. After that it is
more widely used, first of metropolitans, then of others whose indepen-
dence was being asserted. The term ‘patriarch’ ( 'jraTpLapxrjS ) then began
to be applied to the bishops of the greater sees. ‘Patriarch’ was first used of
the ancient biblical figures, and had been adopted for leading officers by the
Jewish communities before Constantine’s time. Its rare use for Christian
figures began to be extended to the superior bishops in documents asso-
ciated with the Council of Chalcedon in 4 51. 2 That council also specified
that the metropolitan bishops of the imperial dioceses of Pontus, Asia and
Thrace should be ordained by the bishop of Constantinople; thus the met-
ropolitans of Cappadocian Caesarea, Ephesus and Philippopolis, who
were to ordain bishops in their respective imperial provinces and any
pendent sees among the barbarians, were declared subordinate to the
capital. 3 Chalcedon also rewarded the conversion of Juvenal of Jerusalem
(422—5 8) to the imperial theology by upgrading his see to rank among the
patriarchates: he was confirmed in control of the metropolitans of the

1 Jones, ERE 873 — 937, and the related notes, can only be admired and palely imitated in the space
available here. Baus, Beck, Ewig and Vogt (1980) is also useful, especially chs. 13—21, 27 and 28—31. See
also Ducellier, EEglise bj^antine, especially for the relations of church and emperor.

2 See PGLs.v. apxi€ 7 TLOK 07 TOS, 7 raTpLapXTjS- 3 Canon 28.

73 1

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7J2 24- THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

three Palestines, Caesarea, Scythopolis and Petra; ‘Arabia’ (Bostra) would
be added in 553. Thus five ancient patriarchates enjoy super-metropolitan
powers: Rome, Constantinople, Alexandria, Antioch and Jerusalem. These
are consistently referred to in the documents of the sixth century, and con-
stitute the ‘pentarchy’. 4

There were, however, different perceptions of this patriarchal system.
Rome remained pre-eminent in the west, being the only western apostolic
see — that is, founded (as was believed) by the apostles themselves. Its
bishops, however, regarded their primacy as extending to the east, and
steadily enlarged both its theory and practice. Celestine of Rome in 430
commissioned Cyril of Alexandria to depose Nestorius if he would not
repent, ‘appropriating to yourself the authority of our see, and using our
position’. 5 So Cyril acted as and for the bishop of Rome. Sixtus III
(432—40) of Rome in 43 3 ratified the Formula of Union by which the dis-
orders of the Council of Ephesus were resolved, acting in concert with
Alexandria, Antioch and Constantinople, but emphasizing the importance
of agreeing with the tradition of Peter. 6 His successor Leo I (440—61) con-
demned Eutyches in 448—9. Eutyches was not only christologically
unsound, but rejected the Formula of 43 3 as an improper addition to the
Nicene Creed.

Leo intensified the idea of Petrine tradition by using the principle of
inheritance, claiming that the bishops of Rome inherited the bishopric and
primacy of Peter: Peter was not only the source of Roman tradition, but
was present in his heir and successor. The primacy of Peter among the
apostles was the same as the primacy of his successors among the bishops.
Leo not only preached this view, but advanced it in practice. His greatest
success was in bringing to heel bishop Hilary of Arles, an ascetic trained in
Lerins, who expected the highest standards of his fellow bishops. Hilary
held councils and deposed and ordained bishops without reference to
Rome. He went beyond his immediate jurisdiction in the province of
Viennensis. Leo not only argued his case to the bishops, emphasizing his
authority as successor of Peter, but achieved an imperial Constitutio from
Valentinian III in 445, ratifying his own sentence. Hilary was allowed to
remain a bishop in Arles, but deprived even of his normal metropolitan
powers. The Constitutio forbade the bishops of the Gallic or other prov-
inces to do anything without the authority of ‘the venerable Pope of the
Eternal City’, and the enactments of the apostolic see were to be law for
all. 7

With the collapse of imperial order in the west, Constantinople became
for most purposes the centre of Christendom, as well as of the empire.

4 See Gahbauer (1993), (1996).

5 Celestine, Ep. 1 1.3— 4 ( ACO 1.1.1. p. 76); for a fuller account see ch. 27 (Allen), pp. 811—34 below.

6 Sixtus III, Ep. 6. 7 See generally Studer (1991).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BISHOPS AND PATRIARCHS

733

Constantinople lacked the territorial superiority affirmed in the canons of
Nicaea in 325 for Rome, Alexandria and Antioch, as well as the apostolic
name claimed by them. Among its bishops, John Chrysostom had been
deposed because he interfered to suppress simony in churches in Asia,
where his writ did not run, and heard appeals against the condemnation by
Theophilus of Alexandria of Origenist monks. Nestorius similarly
incurred the hostility of senior colleagues by seeming to hear appeals
against the judgements of Alexandria and Rome, 8 and by intervening in
parts of Asia Minor and also in Macedonia, where the bishop of
Thessalonica’s special relation to Rome made it particularly sensitive. 9
Constantinople’s standing was clarified at the Council of Chalcedon, as
already stated. Along with territorial jurisdiction went a primacy of honour
as second to ‘great and elder Rome’, asserted in 381 at the Council of
Constantinople and strengthened in 451 at Chalcedon. It was then claimed
that the Fathers in 3 8 1 ‘gave equal privileges to the most holy throne of
New Rome, judging with reason that the city which was honoured with the
sovereignty and senate, and which enjoyed equal privileges with the elder
royal Rome, should also be magnified like her in ecclesiastical matters,
being the second after her’. 10 Leo rejected this formula, which expresses
the civic grounds of ecclesiastical primacy at the expense of its theological
ground. He based his rejection on the canon of Nicaea which gave such
honour only to the apostolic sees; Nicaea could not be challenged merely
on civil grounds. 11 Emperors and bishops in Constantinople would alike
ignore Leo’s repudiation.

The affirmation of Constantinople in 451 was not unopposed in the
east. Alexandrian bishops had complicated local constituencies to
manage, with ecclesiastical rivalries, competing doctrines, communal ten-
sions, non-Christian religion and culture, and large and quarrelsome
monastic communities throughout their diocesan territory. With this they
must reconcile the need to assure themselves that they would not be iso-
lated in the empire. Cyril’s quarrel with Nestorius was essentially over
jurisdiction: Nestorius gave ear to the appeals of persons condemned by
Cyril in disciplinary hearings, thus implying appellate power. 12 Cyril’s suc-
cessor Dioscorus tried to reaffirm Alexandria’s hegemony, succumbing to
Constantinople and Rome in 451. In Egypt itself after Chalcedon only
imperial force could impose Proterius as bishop until his assassination in
457. Timothy Aelurus (457—77) thereafter enjoyed wide local support,
while his Chalcedonian rival Timothy Salophakialos (460—82) had only a
few families hostile to the Dioscuran party and one powerful monastery

8 The non-doctrinal aspects of this dispute are emphasized in McGuckin (i 994) ch. 1 .

9 Leo, Ep. 98.4; 105.2; 106.5. 10 Canon 28; cf. Leo, Ep. 98.4. 11 Leo, Ep. 98.4; 105.2.

12 The story is often told: recendy by McGuckin (1994) ch. 1; also the introduction to Wickham
(1983) and Wickham’s article in TRE 24. For developing conciliar theory, see Sieben (1986) 231—69.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

734 2 4- the organization of the church

at Canopus. Peter Mongus (477—90), succeeding Timothy Aelurus, by
judicious patronage and pressure balanced reconciliation with the empire
by subscribing to the Henotikon , won over rival ‘Monophysite’ factions,
and destroyed the remaining strongholds both of non-Christian cult and
of Chalcedonian theology at Canopus. 13 The defection of Juvenal of
Jerusalem to supporting the empire at Chalcedon confirmed patriarchal
standing for his see, but split his local churches between Chalcedonians
and Monophysites. Syria also, and the great prize of Antioch, suffered
continual changes in response to shifts of imperial policy and local rival-
ries. But in neither of these areas was the superiority of Constantinople
challenged constitutionally.

Another issue for Constantinople was the quarrel about the title ‘oecu-
menical patriarch’ (TTaTpLapxys 0LKovp,evLK0s). ‘Oecumenical’ means
‘worldwide’, but it is used technically to refer to the imperial (i.e. worldwide)
authority of a body or person: so there are imperially ratified ‘oecumenical
councils’, and after Justinian abolished the philosophical schools in 529
there are ‘oecumenical teachers’ at Constantinople. Dioscorus was
addressed as ‘oecumenical patriarch’ in 449, being seen as restorer of the
true conciliar theology; so was Leo I when appealed to by Dioscorus’
enemies, and later Roman popes by eastern appellants. When first taken by
a patriarch of Constantinople, John the Faster in 5 9 5 , it was seen at Rome
as usurping a Roman title, and furious opposition resulted. 14

The bishop of Constantinople was near the seat of power. The promo-
tion of his see was of interest to the emperor, and communication was easy.
Communication and influence from further afield were possible but could
be very expensive, or liable to interception and suppression. But the patri-
arch was also subject to imperial pressure, much more than his Roman col-
league. 5 36 was a critical year. Constantinople had been divided from Rome
in the Acacian schism (484—519). Its healing had been accompanied by the
condemnation and exile of leading figures, who nevertheless continued pro-
moting their cause, as Severus of Antioch did in Egypt. By 5 3 1 the emperor
was attempting a reconciliation with the Monophysites, using the new patri-
arch, Anthimus, but his eirenic scheme foundered through the arrival of the
pope Agapitus I in the spring of 536 as ambassador from Theodahad.
Agapitus refused communion with Anthimus, ostensibly because he had pre-
viously been bishop of Trebizond: translations were frequent enough, but
since 325 could always be denounced. 15 In 536 Anthimus was dropped by
Justinian, and Agapitus’ policy was implemented by the new patriarch Menas
(536—52), who anathematized leading Monophysites like Theodosius of

13 See Haas (1993).

14 PGLs.v. OLKOvfievLKOS, TTCLTpiapxrjS ; thorough analysis in Tuilier (1966).

15 Council of Nicaea, canon 1 5; cf. the first part of Schol2 (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

BISHOPS AND PATRIARCHS

735

Alexandria and even Severus. These events precipitated the setting up of
independent Monophysite churches in Egypt and Syria: Theodosius from
the capital supervised by letter his Egyptian congregations, and in 542
ordained missionary bishops for the Arabian and Syrian provinces. These
were Theodore of Arabia and Jacob Baradaeus (Bar’Addai). The latter,
though chiefly responding to pastoral need in ordaining many hundreds of
priests before his death in 578, also consolidated the divisions by ordaining
Sergius of Pella as patriarch of Antioch in 557/8. The Monophysite churches
(always fissiparous) were now separate from the imperial.

The imperial and patriarchal system was again tested by the controversy
over the Three Chapters. 16 The initial document of 543/ 5 and the anathe-
mas pressed upon the bishops in 5 5 1 had only Justinian’s authority. The west
was hostile, and the papal apocrisarii withdrew from communion with Menas.
Vigilius of Rome (5 37—5 5) was required to attend in Constantinople in 547.
His repeated shifts and contradictions are notorious. Justinian exposed
Vigilius’ prevarications to the council, which expunged his name from their
prayer-diptychs without excommunicating him. Vigilius at the end of 5 5 3
gave full assent to the condemnation of the Three Chapters, and was finally
allowed to travel home. He died in 5 5 5 before reaching Rome. His succes-
sor Pelagius, who gave Justinian what he wanted in order to gain the
appointment, was to change sides again when he returned to the west. 17

All of this shows how hard it was to unify the Christian body of the
empire. Justinian expected to govern the church in his domain; but he was
frustrated by the religious passions of the easterns and by the inflexibility
of Rome. That see was acknowledged to hold a necessary or primary place
in settling worldwide affairs; but it was tied by its own traditions, theologi-
cally grounded in Peter, and by its western constituency, unable to take the
steps which would enable the emperor to come to terms with the eastern
dissidents. The expedient of a council also failed: it could not satisfy both
pope and emperor, whose assent and enforcement are understood parts of
the process, or engage the theological dissidents of the east. To achieve
church unity more flexible views of tradition and dogma were needed. The
bishops of Rome increasingly became a point of stability, as was recog-
nized even by unsympathetic overlords. Theoderic II at Ravenna, acting as
a Christian monarch, took pains to settle the Laurentian schism in 498,
hearing the parties and arranging a compromise. Appeal was repeatedly
made to him by Laurence’s supporters, and it was not until 506 that
Symmachus was finally confirmed as bishop and got possession of all the
church buildings in the city. 18

16 See ch. 27 below. 17 Beck in Baus, Beck, Ewig and Vogt (1980) 452—5.
18 Baus in Baus, Beck, Ewig and Vogt (1980) 620—1.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7j6 24. THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

II. COUNCILS AND CLERGY

Each bishop ruled his own church as final judge, and his judgement could
not be undone by another. His sanction against offenders was excommu-
nication, a grave matter affecting the whole life and career of the person
concerned. Appeal could be made higher in the church, and the fifth canon
of Nicaea established a system for this: the metropolitan must assemble his
bishops twice a year, before Lent and in the autumn, to review and nor-
mally to ratify all decisions. The system was not scrupulously applied, and
the rule had often to be repeated. Of the bishop’s council or the metro-
politan’s we get only occasional reports, and few full records. They were of
local and temporary interest. Only when wider national or imperial con-
cerns led to special assemblies from more than one province do the records
sometimes survive.

This state of affairs is well illustrated from Merovingian Gaul. Most
councils engaged more than one metropolitan province; only two are pro-
vincial and one diocesan. Surviving records reflect the fact that major coun-
cils were often called by royal power. The model is provided by Constantine
and Nicaea; so Clovis, who from his conversion in 496 becomes a ‘new
Constantine’, constitutes his state church with the Council of Orleans
(51 1). The council acknowledges that it meets at his command, and seeks
his approval of its decrees. Its first three canons deal with a matter of civil
concern: the right of criminals to asylum. Only then does it turn to the
more usual occupations of councils — largely rules for the clergy and
monks, and some liturgical items. The relation to royal authority had
already figured large in the holding of councils. The total of fourteen prov-
inces never met together until the Fifth Council of Paris in 614; but thir-
teen were represented by the sixty- five bishops at Orleans V in 549. We
have records of only one diocesan synod, the undatable Auxerre, and of a
number limited to the province of Arles, which was lively and large, with
twenty-three dioceses. 19

The bishops often repeat decrees of earlier councils. Already in the
Council of Agde in 506 the compilation called Statuta Ecclesiae Antiqua plays
an important role. 20 The modern editions trace the parallels from council
to council. 21 These same documents illustrate the concerns of the bishops.
One is always the purity of the clergy. Minimum ages (twenty-five for a
deacon, thirty for a presbyter) are stipulated. Slaves may not be ordained
without enfranchisement. From 524 (Arles IV can. 2) laymen could not be
ordained direct to the diaconate or presbyterate. Acceptability to the civil
authority is required, but only rarely is there any concern for educational

19 Gaudemet and Basdevant (1989) 33—4 differs slightly from the count in Wallace-Hadrill (1983)
94—5. 20 Ed. Munier (1963a).

21 For the concerns of the councils, Gaudemet and Basdevant (1989) 44—59.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COUNCILS AND CLERGY

737

qualifications. If married, clergy must abstain from sexual intercourse, and
may not retain a female other than a close relative in their house. Clergy
may not be twice married, and their widows must stay single. Clergy may
not attend the circus or hunt. Liturgical occasions must be properly
observed, and these are imposed especially on bishops, along with their
pastoral, homiletic and charitable duties, the giving of absolution to the
penitent and the writing of recommendations. Jurisdictional questions
figure largely. Property might be held in one diocese by persons resident in
another, and if churches are built and staffed there, ecclesiastical allegiance
must be sorted out. This is especially tricky where the property is owned by
another bishop. The disposal of church property is frequently an issue, and
there are stringent canons about what happens on the death of a cleric. The
duty of metropolitans to call provincial synods annually, or more fre-
quently, is prescribed. Potential bishops must have their discipline and their
faith tested before election. They must not (like Caesarius of Arles) be
chosen by their predecessors. New ecclesial offices arise to deal with the
problems of organization: archpresbyters, archdeacons, and even archsub-
deacons appear. Relations with the kings sometimes figure, and the royal
prerogative in appointing bishops can sometimes be asserted (Orleans V,
549, can. 10) and sometimes repudiated (Paris III, 546/573, can. 8); the part
in elections of the people, the clergy, the bishops and the metropolitan are
repeatedly affirmed. Where the laity are concerned, marriage rules loom
large: the fear of incest is obsessive. 22 Marriage or other contact with here-
tics and Jews is banned or restricted. Only rarely are doctrinal matters
tackled; the classic exception is Caesarius’ Council of Orange in 529, when
the Augustinian position was comprehensively asserted against the semi-
Pelagians. Such matters do not come to the fore, even when regimes are
changing from Arian’ to Catholic overlords. 23 Much of this may be inter-
preted inversely: where a practice is repeatedly banned, it is presumably
common. The influence of the civil power led to many worldly men being
appointed to the clericate, and the constant concern of councils with clergy
discipline, as well as with the doctrinal competence of bishops, reflects this
fact.

A remarkable absentee in the Merovingian canons is the pope. The only
reference appears to be the right to consult the apostolic see through the
metropolitan about the date of Easter. 24 This reflects political conditions,
and perhaps the absence of any primacy among the metropolitans further

22 Gaudemet and Basdevant (1989) 57.

23 The Council of Epaone in 517, presided over by Avitus of Vienne after Sigismund’s rise to power,
had only two references to heretics and their buildings. The same applies to the momentous Council
of Toledo III in 589, after Reccared’s conversion (see Orlandi in Orlandi and Ramos-Lisson (1981)
95—117, esp. 110-11).

24 Orleans iv, 541, can. 1 (not can. 2 as in Gaudemet and Basdevant (1989) 48 n. 4).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

73«

24 . THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

north. Caesarius at Arles (bishop 500—43) exercised the papal vicariate, and
exchanged letters with the bishops of Rome about conciliar decisions in his
area. When in 533 his council at Marseilles condemned and deposed
Contumeliosus of Riez, this drew a rebuke from Agapitus of Rome. 25

The patriarchal system provided a further point of consultation, appeal
and decision. Disputes between metropolitans or charges against them
came to the patriarchal bishop. When support was needed, he could assem-
ble metropolitans and bishops to meet. Each case was unique: there were
no metropolitans in Egypt, and the heads of churches were summoned to
Alexandria from time to time. Two particular arrangements deserve
mention. Rome had its own metropolitan authority in central Italy, Roma
suburbicaria, whose leaders formed the Roman Synod. But this advised the
pope on matters affecting the wider church: for example, Celestine I in 430
and Leo I in 449 in relation to the chris tological crises in the east. At
Constantinople, which had no such traditional province, the unique phe-
nomenon of the synodos endemousa or ‘Resident Synod’ arose: the archbishop
would assemble to advise him the bishops (and sometimes others) who
were at that time in the capital. These might be quite numerous. The
Resident Synod would meet regularly, but could take major decisions, such
as condemning Eutyches in 448. 26

Much more is known about the councils intended to be ‘oecumenical’,
especially those of Ephesus in 431 and Chalcedon in 451, of which full
records survive. From these we know that they were called by imperial
mandate. In spite of his commission from Rome, Cyril in 430 could not
begin his council at Ephesus until he had induced the emperor’s represen-
tative, Candidianus, to read out the imperial sacra authorizing the meeting. 27
The same document stipulated the various roles of the participants: good
order and the exclusion of strangers were an imperial responsibility, doc-
trine was ecclesiastical. The history of this and the other great councils
shows that the two could not be so readily separated. Once an agreement
had been reached, however, the assembly would announce its decisions to
the emperor, and he would enforce what was decided. Procedure was mod-
elled on that of the senate. 28

From the perspective of our documentation one might assume that
councils and controversies occupied much of the time of ancient church-
men. This is not the case. Some of their work and preoccupations can be
deduced from material like the Merovingian councils.

Occasionally we get closer insights about the clergy. An investigation of
the church at Mopsuestia in preparation for the Oecumenical Council of

25 But see Langgartner (1964).

26 Jones, LRE 890 translates ivhr)fiovaa as ‘visiting’, but the word indicates its permanent (or
domestic) character: Baus in Baus, Beck, Ewig and Vogt (1980) 245: Hajjar (1962).

27 McGuckin (1994) 74—9. 28 Dvornik (1934) and (1966).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

COUNCILS AND CLERGY

739

5 5 3 showed that there were seventeen presbyters and deacons above fifty
years old. This might suggest a total of fifty. Besides them, there were sub-
deacons, acolytes and readers, all counted as in clero. These minor offices
were sometimes filled by young men: six of the older clergy had been in
clero at less than eleven years old and one as young as five, though readers
of under eighteen were now forbidden. This is a large number for a modest
town. Justinian limited the clerical staff of four churches in Constantinople
itself to sixty priests, a hundred deacons, ninety subdeacons, a hundred and
ten readers, twenty-five singers, a hundred doorkeepers and forty deacon-
esses. 29 Age restrictions were not rigorously applied. At the age of eighteen
the charismatic and ascetic monk Theodore of Sykeon was tonsured and
ordained reader, subdeacon, deacon and presbyter on successive days. His
bishop recognized that this act was uncanonical, but justified it from scrip-
ture, and expressed the confidence that he would rise to become a bishop. 311
There is no evidence that most clergy were trained except by experience in
the work. They were normally expected to rise through the minor orders
to the presbyterate. They would therefore be hearing and reading the scrip-
tures and liturgical texts, and hearing the preaching of the bishop and pres-
byters quite regularly. The need for regular direction in their functions is
reflected in the growth of new offices, such as archpriest, archdeacon and
archsubdeacon.

The bishop might, especially in Gaul, be drawn from secular life because
of his gifts or his family connections. Sidonius Apollinaris (43 i—c. 486), son
and grandson of prefects of Gaul, married the daughter of Avitus and
went with him to Rome in 456. After Avitus’ fall and Maiorinus’ death, he
retired to his estates in the Auvergne and cultivated literature and friend-
ships, writing classically correct verse and ornate prose. Called to be city
prefect at Rome in 468, he retired again, and was probably a priest before
his ordination as bishop of Clermont-Ferrand (Arvernum) in 471. As
bishop, he encouraged resistance to the Visigoths but, after an exile, sub-
mitted. 31 Venantius Fortunatus (c. 535— f. 610), a north Italian poet and
orator educated at Ravenna, went to Gaul on pilgrimage and was ordained
at Poitiers, where he was asociated with queen Radegund’s convent and suc-
ceeded as bishop in 597. 32 The historian Gregory of Tours (c. 5 38—94) was
of a senatorial Gallo-Roman family, with twelve bishops in his family’s past.
In 573 he became bishop of Tours, which St Martin’s relics made a great
spiritual centre. He moves fluently and lives dangerously amid warring
Merovingian kings and queens. 33 The bishop at this period is more likely to

29 Jones, LRE 910—14 and Wickham (1995) 4—6; I have used Wickham’s reading of the Mopsuestia
evidence, against Jones. 30 Vie de Theodore de Sykeon ed. Festugiere (1970) 28.

31 Pricoco (1990), (1967); Harries (1994).

32 Navarra (1990); Brennan (1985); George (1992).

33 Pietri (1985) has full documentation; see also Van Dam (1993).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

740 24- THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

have risen among the monks, and then been promoted among the clergy.
This meant that he had usually opportunity for biblical and patristic learn-
ing, and would be a spiritual man of whom miraculous powers might be
expected. Such, for example, was the patriarch Eutychius (c. 513— 82). 34 At
the age of twelve he was sent from Augustopolis in Phrygia to
Constantinople for his secular education. Becoming a monk, he was
pressed to become bishop of Zaliches, but gave himself to the bishop of
Amasea, who was at Constantinople. He was made a reader and tonsured,
then deacon, and at the minimum age of thirty was ordained presbyter. He
lived in the monastery at Amasea, and was responsible for its administra-
tion, with the title Catholicus. After ruling his monks for eighteen years he
was sent to Constantinople for the council on the Three Chapters. His bib-
lical skill commended him to the authorities, especially when he found a
biblical precedent for condemning heretics who had died in full commun-
ion with the church. He was appointed patriarch in place of Menas in 552.
We need not follow the later vicissitudes of his career, but only note that
at varous stages, but especially in exile in Amasea, his miraculous gifts are
displayed, at least according to his biographer. Promoting a holy monk,
even with stupendous miraculous gifts, could be a disaster if he lacked
administrative skills, as occurred with Theodore of Sykeon. Having alleg-
edly acquired miraculous gifts and holy orders as the result of terrible pen-
ances in his youth, Theodore was demanded as bishop by the ‘clergy and
landowners’ of Anastasiopolis. But he soon had to be allowed by patriarch
and emperor to demit office, despite his continuing miracles and the reluc-
tance of his metropolitan. 35

In the west, aristocratic background and monastic training often
combine. Eucherius of Lyons (died c. 449) was probably of a senatorial
family. In middle life he retired to Lerins, the new centre of ascetic learn-
ing, with his wife, and became a noted writer on the ascetic life before
becoming bishop of Lyons before 441; his two sons shared his retreat and
both became bishops (Veranus at Vence and Salonius at Geneva). 36
Caesarius of Arles is more than an ordinary bishop, but rises in typical
fashion. Born in 470 of a noble family of Chalon-sur-Saone, he joined the
minor clergy at eighteen, and in 490 fled to Lerins. Moving to Arles, he
joined a community of monks in a noble household. Eonius the metropol-
itan, a relative, had him trained in rhetoric, then about 499 ordained him
deacon and priest, and sent him to reorganize a community of monks. In
502 Eonius before his death got the agreement of clergy and of the
Visigothic king Alaric II (484—507) to Caesarius’ succession. As bishop,
Caesarius dealt successfully with rulers like Theoderic. He visited Rome

34 Eustratius, 1 Vita S. Eutychii , ed. Laga, CCSG 25; Cameron (1990).

35 Vie de Theodore de Sykeon ed. Festugiere (1970) 5 8, 73—8.

36 Documents and life in Wickham (1982a).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

FINANCE

741

and received the pallium, the scarf signifying metropolitan power, from
pope Symmachus (496—514), and superiority not only over the Gallic
churches but over Spain as well. The combination of asceticism and nep-
otism apparent in his own rise appears also in his famous convent. The first
abbesses were his sister and his niece. He rebuilt it after the siege of 508
and transferred church property to endow his foundation, in defiance of
existing canons, though with authorization from Rome. He lived there, and
endowed it in his will. 37

in. FINANCE

The wealth of the church affected the economy of the whole empire. 38
The clergy in the cities enjoyed regular pay. In country areas the presbyt-
ers and deacons might have to work at farming or other gainful craft. A
church’s income derived from two chief sources: the offerings of the
faithful, and endowments in the form of rents. There were also govern-
ment grants, but these seem to have been mainly charitable funds admin-
istered by the church. ’ 9 The biblical tenth or tithe was not imposed, but
was seen as a model of voluntary generosity. 40 Endowments began seri-
ously with Constantine I, but were soon huge, especially in Rome and
Constantinople. A constant stream of gifts, including the estates of
deceased clergy, swelled the property. In the sixth century, popes, Gallic
councils and the emperor Justinian all forbade the setting up of new
churches without sufficient endowment to pay the clergy. 41 The Register
of Gregory I shows that the pope gave much attention to the management
of his estates, ‘the Patrimony of Peter’, through agents in Sicily, Italy and
Gaul. His administrative efficiency enabled him to deal effectively with the
immense social and humanitarian problems which afflicted Rome as a
result of war and plague. Bishops were supposed not to alienate lands or
goods, but often did. Various forms of simony, such as a candidate for the
episcopate promising to give church lands to those who support him, were
rife and often banned, notably at Rome under Odoacer and Theoderic.
The emperor Leo in 470 decreed against it at Constantinople, and this rule
was variously repeated by Anastasius and Justinian. 42 Protection of the
church’s property was an important reason for the attempts to impose cel-
ibacy on the clergy. Reluctantly approving the appointment of a married
bishop in Syracuse, pope Pelagius I (5 56—61) insisted on a complete listing

37 Caesarii A.relatensis Opera Omnia ( CCSL 103—4: 2.292—343 for the ancient Vita Caesarii). For litera-
ture see Collins (1981); Klingshirn (1990). See also Beck (1950).

38 The chapters by Jones in LRE and The Roman Economy are indispensable and rarely superseded,
though occasionally his interpretation is challenged, as by Greenslade (1965) 222.

39 Jones, ERE 898—9.

40 A special penance at the second council of Tours; recommended as a neglected practice at the

second council of Matisco in 585. 41 Jones, LRE 900. 42 Jones, ERE 896—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

742 24- THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

of his private property, so that on his death he did not bequeath ecclesias-
tical goods to his children. 43 City churches were often under the direct
control of the bishop, and were called in the west tituli. Independendy
endowed churches (parochiae or dioceses) existed in some, usually more
rural, areas. The bishop might control the central funds himself, or (as
the twenty-sixth canon of Clialcedon required) appoint a manager
(oLKovofxos)- Funds were shared between the staff, the buildings and
charity in varying proportions. In earlier times the bishop’s control was
absolute. In their Suburbicarian province the popes now had the bishops
divide all income into four parts, for the bishop, the clergy, the mainte-
nance of the cathedral and its tituli, and the poor. Other places had a three-
fold division, without the poor, or gave endowment income to the bishop,
while he shared other offerings with the clergy. Similarly, practice varied as
between fixed stipends and equal shares: multiplying clergy on stipends
could impoverish a church. 44 The biggest differences in clergy pay were
caused by differences in church wealth. Justinian’s grading of sees below
the patriarchates ranged from those worth (probably to the bishop person-
ally) over thirty pounds gold per annum to those with less than two pounds.
Cyril could find 2,500 pounds to spend on his campaign against Nestorius,
plus gifts in kind. Theodore of Sykeon got a solidus a day, about five pounds
per annum, at Anastasiopolis. The episcopally paid clergy of cathedral and
tituli were usually better off than their colleagues in the independent paroch-
iae, benefiting from better endowments and congregations. 45

IV. TEACHING

Christianity is a doctrine, historical, philosophical and practical. Dedicated
bishops always set store by teaching. Caesarius illustrates this in the late
empire. He delegated financial duties to free him for preaching. The doors
of Arles cathedral were shut to make people stay for the preaching, and
when absent he had the clergy read his sermons in his place. He urged the
duty of preaching on fellow bishops, and had copies of his sermons dis-
tributed in Gaul, Spain and Italy. Collections of sermons were therefore
made in his lifetime, many of which survive. They have strong moral
emphasis: common sins like lying and adultery are rebuked, and simple
religion encouraged, notably repentance, tithing, almsgiving, and Bible-
reading. Homiliaries thereafter became familiar books in churches, the
Gallican, Roman and Toledan being influential examples. 46 Caesarius’ rule
for the nuns was imitated all over Gaul. 47 This story of the high-born

43 Pelagius, Ep. 33 to Cethegus; cf. Vogt in Baus, Beck, Ewig and Vogt (1980) 65 3.

44 Jones, ERE 900—4. 45 Jones, ERE 905—7.

46 Sermons in CCSE 103—4 and SChrei. 175, 243, 330; also Gregoire (1966).

47 Caesarius of Arles, CEuvres monastiques 1 ( SChret . 345); McCarthy (i960).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

TEACHING

743

Christian who learns the ascetic life, is promoted in the church, deals with
governments and writes improving literature has many lesser parallels in his
own area, such as Eucherius of Lyons and Gennadius of Marseilles. The
influence of the literary activity involved should not be underestimated.
There flows out from centres like Lerins and Arles a steady stream of
books. All of these provide bases for Christian living, and are used at all
levels to promote morality and holiness. They include copies of the scrip-
tures, martyrologies and saints’ lives (increasingly concerned with the
achievements of ascetics), works of notable Fathers on exegesis, morality
and doctrine, and, increasingly, liturgical texts and collections of canons.
Comparable things may be said of other centres, old and new: in the west,
Cassiodorus’ foundation at Vivarium deserves notice, and in the east
Constantinople and Jerusalem rise steadily, alongside Alexandria and
Antioch (notably under Severus).

The rise of Gregory I as bishop of Rome (590—604) brought various
developments in the west. He was well qualified. 48 He numbered two
bishops of Rome among his ancestors. His father was a senator, and he
himself became prefect of Rome. He founded the monastery of St
Andrew in Rome, and dedicated all the family estates at his disposal to
endowing monasteries; his sisters had all become nuns. In 579 Pelagius II
(579—90) sent him to Constantinople as papal apocrisarius, and he stayed on
bad terms with the patriarchs till 5 86. He returned to his monastery, and
was forced out by popular demand to become bishop in 5 90. In war-torn
Italy he served the city well by negotiating peace with the Lombards. He
tried to re-establish a semblance of unity in the Italian churches, where
competing imperial and Lombard (‘Arian’) policies aggravated church ten-
sions, as in the Three Chapters controversy. His Register reveals worldwide
interests and activities. He clearly had a good administrative mind and made
good appointments. The management of the Patrimony of Peter through
his agents in Sicily, Italy and Gaul helped to strengthen the resources of the
papacy. He used this and other methods to deal with the immense social
and humanitarian problems which afflicted Rome as a result of war and
plague.

His persistent influence lies, however, elsewhere. The Regula pastoralis,
which he composed early in his episcopate, sets out the goals and methods
of a bishop. 49 The spiritual qualifications, and the continuing spiritual train-
ing, of the bishop himself are considered. The third and longest of the four
parts is particularly important, emphasizing the pastor’s educational duty in
training believers of all varieties and levels for their life in the church, and
the temptations they must overcome. This work was transmitted all over

48 Articles with bibliographies: Recchia (1990); Markus (1985); see also Richards (1980).

49 See Rommel and Morel (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

744

24 . THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH

Europe, and has shaped the attitudes and practices of countless clergy.
Gregory’s numerous exegetical works often draw on earlier writers, but are
also original. His Dialogues, which include the biography of Benedict, con-
stitute a justification for the life of ascetic holiness in the face of the
impending end of the world, as well as exhibiting the ascetical prowess of
the western church (notably Benedict) against the eastern . 50 Gregory’s con-
victions flowed from the established law and custom of the church as he
understood it. The Roman church was fortified with a massive set of
records. These had been ably sifted and made accessible by such scholars as
Dionysius Exiguus, who had not only calculated the fundamentals of the
Christian calendar as it exists to the present, but early in the sixth century
had translated and systematized the findings of past councils and the
decrees of past popes . 51

50 Dialogues ed. de Vogiie (1978—80).

51 Bibliography in Richter (1982); see also Dekkers (1995), nos. 652—4; 1284—6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 25

MONASTICISM

PHILIP ROUSSEAU

Devotion to asceticism was a highly visible and in some ways alarming
feature of the late Roman world. That thousands of men and women were
ready to adopt a life of radical simplicity, sexual abstinence and apparent
indifference to wealth, status and power, and that even larger numbers were
willing to admire if not imitate their choice, tells us something remarkable
about the society in which they lived. Restrictions in diet and sexual beha-
viour had been accepted for centuries; and abnegation was frequently
accompanied by a rejection of influence in public affairs and of privilege
and property. Christians, however, from the third century onwards, were
responsible for an unprecedented upsurge in ascetic devotion. The move-
ment transformed town as well as countryside: famous exemplars may have
congregated at first in remoter districts; but a new class of citizen became
more widely evident at an early stage. Distinguished at times by an appall-
ing emaciation of the body, by filth and infestation, by ragged, colourless
and skimpy clothes, large numbers of these ascetics converged, at
moments of crisis, on the cities themselves, forming virtual mobs that were
capable not only of menace but of real power. Within a relatively short
time, they occupied special and prominent buildings, administered success-
ful rural estates, broadcast their views in public fora, and gained the ear of
those in power — invading, in other words, the chief components of the
late Roman polity.

This outburst of negation — against the body, the family, the accepted
canons of economic and political success — demands historical explana-
tion. There was a view of the self and of the world that gave the ascetic
movement its cohesion, its capacity for organic development and its broad-
ening appeal. Conversely, the structure and growth of its institutions at
once encouraged and protected the ascetic urge. To that extent, the phe-
nomenon had a life and significance of its own. Yet ascetics developed also
a subtle relationship with society at large. They regarded their interpreta-
tion of human nature, of psychology and anthropology, as defining both
the power and the destiny of any human person. So the stable society they
created for themselves — its routine, its economy, its sense of order and
authority — stood also as an invitation, a call to ‘conversion’. Ascetics could

745

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

746 25. MONASTICISM

appear eccentric, ‘alternative’, even anarchic. Yet they did not merely
abandon, let alone undermine or destroy, traditional society. They were par-
ticipants in a wide public debate — about the nature of authority and lead-
ership, about the appropriate mechanisms of social formation, about the
very tradition to which Christianity was entitled to appeal. Although their
own system was never likely to usurp or absorb all others, the tolerance and
admiration they inspired was proof of the central role they had to play in
the definition of a Christian society.

In describing and explaining, therefore, the structures of the ascetic life,
we have to recognize the influence of ideology — both the theories proper
to the ascetic communities themselves, and the principles that affected their
relations with the outside world. By the early fifth century, of course, prec-
edents had been established; in particular, a widespread preference for
community life. The earliest archaeological evidence in Egypt, from the
‘Cells’ just south of the Delta, shows how quickly the little brick shelters of
the solitaries made famous in the Sayings of the Desert Fathers were gathered
around common courtyards and buildings within a low perimeter wall, pro-
viding company while preserving independence. 1 It is no surprise to find
that, while more isolated heroes like Antony remained prominent in ascetic
literature, the formal prescriptions of Pachomius and Basil gained increas-
ing allegiance, in both east and west, and for theoretical reasons. If those
ascetics who could read were still content with anecdote and individual por-
trait — and the Greek Sayings themselves, the Pratum Spirituale or Spiritual
Meadow of John Moschus, and a long series of Latin Vitae suggest that that
was the case — they did so amidst a growing crowd of coenobitic colleagues.
It was within that community structure that monks now conducted their
debates as to how they should organize their lives. Should they pursue a
‘contemplative’ or an ‘active’ life? The choice they faced, in the language of
the time, was between ‘theory’ and ‘practice’ (deujpia and -rrpaKTiKrj),
between vision and love, between prayer and reflection on the one hand
and a concern for the ignorant and needy on the other; but, whatever the
option, it was to be embraced in the company of fellow devotees.

If ideology governed structure, we need to arm ourselves from the
outset with a clear understanding of ascetic literature — an understanding
of the varied circumstances, forms and motives that colour the material
upon which we depend. Broadly speaking, we catch in the sources, at
various moments of frozen textuality, what was in fact a developing tradi-
tion, in which ‘rules’ and biographies (not always easily distinguished)
attracted additions, made often undeclared adjustments and abandoned
embarrassing antecedents. Now and again, a writer might look back in a
more ordered and reflective way, and make a calculated statement about

1 Walters (1974) 9L io2f.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

747

spiritual values, effective practices and hallowed or authentic genealogies.
Biographies could serve that reflective purpose also, as well as treatises on
virtue or prayer. Finally, any extended text could then be broken up again,
and pasted piecemeal within the rolling narratives of the ascetic world.

The classic example of such development we have mentioned already —
the Sayings of the Desert Fathers otApophthegmata Patrum. As they stand in our
printed editions, the Sayings date from a period at least a little later than that
studied here. In addition to preserved elements of an originally oral tradi-
tion, gathered from a range of places, but in the first instance, perhaps,
from Egyptian exiles in Palestine, they included brief extracts from longer
Lives, some of which we possess, and collections of embryonic ‘rules’. It is
possible to observe, also, not least by reference to independently preserved
though shorter collections, some of the staggered phases through which
the literary accumulation of the Sayings themselves progressed. 2 In the
matter of ‘rules’ more generally, the work of Jerome on Pachomius and of
Rufinus on Basil, when compared with later compilations, demonstrate the
piecemeal way in which at first such guidance was formulated and dis-
persed: an impression corroborated in biographical accounts. 3

A readiness to add moss to such rolling stones did not die out in later
periods. John Moschus is the best example (died 619). He travelled widely,
collecting stories about ascetics here and there; but he did not attempt to
build, on the strength of that, an integrated picture of the religious life. To
some extent he reflected thereby the conditions of his age. By then, monas-
tic communities were less bound together under the banners of theologi-
cal party than they had been earlier in the sixth century, and more
threatened by the newer and rather different pressure of Persian aggres-
sion. 4 The central motive in Moschus’ work (as, perhaps, in the
Apophthegmata before him) was to record, as quickly as possible and as con-
fusedly as might be necessary, a way of life that seemed at any moment
likely to disappear. It is ironic that such improvisation in the face of appar-
ent decline should contribute, within the framework of monastic literature
as a whole, to a reversal of the process, whereby values challenged in the
sixth-century setting could be recollected and admired with almost canonic
tranquillity in the more assured circumstances of later Byzantine monasti-
cism. Turning back to what Moschus might have regarded as the secure
heyday of the ascetic movement, as recorded earlier in the sixth century by
Cyril of Scythopolis and John of Ephesus, we sense at once that we are
dealing with texts more consciously governed by a thesis (largely doctrinal),
even if anecdote and hitherto scattered literary sources can be detected in

2 The best existing introduction is Guy (1962); but the forthcoming edition of the Sayingshy Chiara
Faraggiana will carry interpretation much further forward.

3 The development of the Basilian ‘rules’ is the best documented, by Gribomont (195 3).

4 Binns (1994) 49.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

748

25 . MONASTICISM

their compositions. These authors were more settled, wedded to the inter-
ests of particular institutions, with access to libraries, albeit modest. They
worked in an atmosphere of enquiry, even scholarship; and their books
were preserved precisely by the survival of the physical resources upon
which they depended . 5

We have to be on our guard, therefore, not to confuse the development
of the literature itself with the development of forms of the ascetic life. A
suspicion, for example, that disjointed anecdotes, passed orally from
hermit to hermit, found their way eventually into the libraries of complex
communities is in any case a simplistic assessment of the surviving texts
and dangerously wedded to the notion that those texts reflect directly the
changing social patterns of the world that produced them. So, for example,
when Cyril describes a ‘return to the cities’ on the part of Palestinian monks
— a development described below — we should not imagine that all monks
in Palestine viewed their world in that way or shared in his delight . 6

When we do try to explain either the pace or the direction of develop-
ment in ascetic society, the lasting and, at times, paradoxical popularity of
Egyptian-based literature can tempt us to adopt a diffusionist view, taking
Egypt as the fount and all other places as dependent. Certainly, Egypt came
to occupy a special place in the Christian understanding of asceticism; and
its practices were adopted more and more elsewhere, supplanting local and
in some cases ancient traditions. That did not happen, however, simply by
transporting the ‘rules’ of Pachomius or any other prescriptive text to
different parts of the empire. By the early years of the fifth century, the
legacy of Pachomius, originating in the Thebaid, had in any case been
modified by his disciples and by transmission northwards within Egypt
itself. Besa’s Life of Shenoute, for example, whatever the attachment of its
hero to rigorous order, shows him operating happily within an ascetic
society quite loose in structure and tolerant of mobility, at one moment
loving solitude, at another in contact with the secular world: more akin to
what we find in Rufinus, Palladius and the Sayings of the Fathers, and sympa-
thetic to the traditions of the north. There is revealing irony in the fact that
a man of Shenoute’s character, recommending the practices he did, could
claim the heritage of Pachomius, from whom, in fact, he differed enor-
mously both in spirit and in monastic discipline . 7

Similar caution will temper our view of early Palestinian asceticism.
Hilarion — supposedly a Palestinian pioneer, made famous by Jerome in a

5 Binns (1994) 57^-

6 For the phrase and its significance, together with appeal to the idiosyncratic character of church
life in Scythopolis, see Binns (1994) i2if.

7 Besa, Vita Shenoudi (CSCO Script. Copt. 16) 119, 123, 144, 173. Shenoute died at an extremely
advanced age, probably in a.d. 466. A useful and fully documented account is provided by Elm (1994)
296— 3 IO -

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

749

brief and partly fictional Life, and founder of an ascetic settlement near
Gaza — was a declared admirer of the Egyptian Antony. Epiphanius, later
bishop of Salamis in Cyprus, had also been to Egypt, was inspired by
Hilarion, and sowed the seeds of another community in the Gaza region.
He continued (uncanonically) to maintain a close interest in Palestinian
affairs. As the fourth century came to a close, an increasing number of
ascetics had begun to leave Egypt, sometimes because of persecution but
also sensing decline, abandoning in particular the more loosely structured
settlements in Nitria and Scetis. Notable among them were Porphyry, the
later bishop of Gaza (leaving in 377), Silvanus, originally from Palestine
(leaving in 3 80), and Esaias (who left soon after 440 and did not die — again,
near Gaza — until 489).

Such men may have preserved at least some Egyptian values in their new
home, passing on stories and traditions to new companions and disciples. 8
Yet even older, according to tradition, was the career of Chariton, originally
from Iconium in Asia Minor. As a ‘foreigner’, he is a fitting archetype of the
enthusiastic pilgrims attracted in ever greater numbers by Palestine’s
growing status as the ‘holy land’, beautified and enriched by imperial gene-
rosity and aristocratic patronage. 9 He eventually settled further north than
Gaza, first in country to the west of Jericho and then south of Jerusalem
beyond Bethlehem, founding what came to be known as the Old Laura
(Greek laura ) or Souka (Syriac shouqa). These words have come to be asso-
ciated with markets or bazaars, with their long, narrow streets of shops and
stalls: thus, in the desert, a precipitous path wound past caves in the wadi
walls, each housing its ascetic. They were not hermits in a strict sense, for
the laura possessed also a communal church and a bakehouse, to which all
repaired on Saturday, sharing in vigils and a meal of bread, vegetables and
dates, and in the Sunday eucharist. Then, having collected fresh material for
basket work and other crafts, and a further supply of food, they returned to
their caves to work and pray alone during the other days of the week. In that
early generation, therefore, most of the characteristics of Palestinian ascet-
icism were set in place — economic as well as social: for its future prosperity
depended for the most part on donations from novices, admirers and high-
ranking patrons (chiefly in cash and food, more rarely in parcels of land),
simple horticulture and handicraft contributing no more than a supplement.

Chariton is presented in hagiography as a rival, indeed a predecessor, of
the Egyptian Antony; but his association with Asia Minor — reared as he

8 Still the fundamental survey is that offered by Chitty (i 966), which may now be supplemented by
Gould (1995) and Binns (1994), although the latter may exaggerate Egyptian influence (1 5 7 f.) .

9 Hirschfeld (1 992) 2, 11,71. For pilgrimage and Christian developments in fourth-century and fifth-
century Palestine, see Hunt, Holy Land Prilgrimage and Walker, Holy City, Holy Places? The. surviving biog-
raphy of Chariton is late and has to be used with caution, since it may justify custom he never foresaw:
see Garitte (1941) and the English translation by Di Segni in Wimbush (1990) 393—421.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

75 °

25 . MONASTICISM

was not far to the west of Basil’s Cappadocia — brought Palestine into touch
with quite another centre of fourth-century ascetic experiment. The great
hero of Palestinian monasticism in the next century, Euthymius, came
from the same part of the world — from Melitene, on the eastern fringe of
Cappadocia: even more within the orbit of Basil and his associates. Before
travelling south, he had served in the household of his local bishop, and
had exercised some authority over nearby monasteries. 111 Several of his first
disciples in Palestine had similar origins. That is not to suggest that he
introduced Basilian monachism into Palestine — far from it: for he long sub-
scribed to the laura pattern, developed an admiration for what he discov-
ered of Egyptian asceticism, and was himself disposed to even greater
withdrawal. (No more did the refugees from Egypt bring with them an
unadulterated admiration for Pachomius, of whom, perhaps, many knew
little.) Nevertheless, ascetic practice in Palestine from the beginning of the
fifth century was open to influence from the north as well as the south, its
original enthusiasms thus overlaid by patterns developed elsewhere.

That makes it a good place to observe the internal debates that came to
enliven ascetic communities. In 41 1, Euthymius, who had been in Palestine
since 405, established with his friend Theoctistus a laura in the Wadi el-
Mukallik, which flows down to the Dead Sea from the Jerusalem— Jericho
road. 11 He himself eventually setded in greater seclusion some 5 km distant.
A contrast was thus established, and acquired the status of an ancient rule:
Euthymius sent new recruits to Theoctistus, who introduced them to the
principles of asceticism — ‘humility and obedience’ — in a tightly controlled
and communal environment; only then were they allowed to graduate to a
more isolated life. The experience of living in a community, numbering
perhaps thirty or forty men, thus became an accepted part of the ascetic
regime, even if regarded as preliminary to higher practice. 12 Conflict between
the two disciplines was in that way avoided: both were to play their part
within one system of personal development. Also involved was a distinctive
relationship between master and disciple: Theoctistus dealt with admirers
and dependants, while Euthymius enjoyed the luxury of secluded prayer.

In spite of Euthymius’ enduring (though often frustrated) attachment to
solitude, one should not underestimate the importance of the community

10 Cyr. Scyth. Vita Euthymii jf. The world of Euthymius and his successors, and of his biographer
Cyril of Scythopolis, is vividly described by Hirschfeld (1992), with copious bibliography; see also Price
(1991). (Cyril enjoyed a link of his own with Cappadocia and with Euthymius, through the latter’s dis-
ciple Cosmas, who was consecrated bishop of Scythopolis in the late 460s.) Hirschfeld’s account of
diet, dress and furniture (82—101) is particularly relevant to later ccenobia ; but his economic descriptions
(102— 1 1) make wide reference and point to a marked contrast with Egyptian monasticism in its
Byzantine heyday.

11 For what follows, see FT Euthym. 8f. For his Palestinian experience hitherto, conscious of Chariton
but geared to productive labour and generosity, see 6f.

12 Cyr. Scyth. Vita Sabae 7. One might compare the attitude of Shenoute, for whom solitude was a
test of virtue and reunion with the cimobium its reward: FT Shen. 3 8 f.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

751

within his system. Weekends were always shared with others; and a laura
developed its own economy, requiring the supervision of a steward and his
subordinates (bakers, cooks and storekeepers), who lived out their period
of office within the communal buildings. The steward would oversee the
collection and distribution of raw materials among the ascetics, and the
marketing of their produce. In the more northern region, topography
could also contribute to integration: for some of the laurai here (although
not that of Theoctistus itself) were established on flatter ground and
acquired more cohesion. Common prayer on Saturdays and Sundays
encouraged complex rituals in well-furnished churches; a feature rein-
forced in monasteries built close to centres of pilgrimage (increasingly
common in the Jericho region, close to the Jordan river). Euthymius wished
his own retreat to become a cambium at his death — a wish fulfilled in 482. 13
Most striking of all, the regular movement from community to solitude was
seen as compatible with a principle of stability: monks should avoid ‘a
feeling of resentment or loathing towards the place where we are and
towards our companions’; and Euthymius retained a ‘fear that our rule be
subverted by change of place’. Nor did he lose entirely a readiness to share
in the pastoral activities of the church, preaching to outsiders, baptizing,
and collaborating with the local bishop — in every respect a precedent for
later developments. 14

Further south, near Gaza, Esaias exemplified the same pattern. He had
lived in a cmobium before moving to Seeds. After leaving Egypt, he shut
himself up in a cell, while Peter, his disciple, dealt with visitors. Yet he was
ready to legislate for more organized followers, and was not untouched by
the controversies of the church in his day. 15 The pattern persisted. Severus,
the later patriarch of Antioch, adopted a solitary life near Gaza but built
also a monastery for his gathering admirers. A more formal stage, perhaps,
is illustrated by the monastery of Gerasimus — another Asian arrival in
Palestine, from Lycia. His cambium, built in the Jericho plain probably
between a.d. 440 and 460, was actually sited in the midst of the cells of the
laura itself, still with the function of training the less experienced.

Sabas, Euthymius’ successor as the dominant monastic figure in
Palestine, was originally from Argaeus, close to Basil’s Caesarea. He first

13 Chitty (1966) idf.

14 Community arrangements: V. Euthym. 17b Liturgy: V. Euthym. 28f. (Note also the implications of
48; and compare FT Sab. 32, 36.) Own cell a ccenobium : V. Euthym. 39 (an ordered liturgy and hospitality
to strangers were to be central). Stability: V. Euthym. 19, tr. Price (1991) 26. Pastoral responsibility: V.
Euthym. 10, 12, 14b Euthymius’ habitual Lenten retreat finds an interesting and contemporary parallel
in Eparchius of Clermont-Ferrand (Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.21). The earliest monastic churches for which
we have archaeological evidence were built no differendy from those in setded centres, and seem
designed to fulfil the same liturgical and pastoral needs: see Walters (1974) 34b

15 For convenience of reference, see Chitty (1966) 73b and Chitty (1971); also Zacharias of Mitylene,
HE (CSCO Script. Syr. 3, 5—6) v.9, vi.3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

752 25. MONASTICISM

practised asceticism, like Euthymius, in his native district, in a large and
well-developed monastery. Again it was Jerusalem — just as in the case of
Euthymius — that first attracted him to Palestine, rather than the Judaean
desert. Like many before him, Euthymius sent him to be schooled by
Theoctistus; and then he practised asceticism in a remoter cave. The
description of his regime sums up the pattern of Palestinian practice:
‘spending the day in physical labour and passing the night without sleep in
giving praise to God, making humility and obedience the root and founda-
tion of his life, and showing aptitude and great zeal in the office of the holy
liturgy’. 16 Once he had attracted disciples of his own, he exercised over
them an authority based predominantly on his own experience — the hall-
mark of the charismatic master in the north Egyptian tradition. He also
acquired in time, however, a Theoctistus of his own — another
Cappadocian, named Theodosius, with whom he divided authority.
Theodosius, near Jerusalem, governed coenobites in the spirit of Basil, his
fellow countryman. By this time, in the 470s, ccenobia were becoming estab-
lished features of the desert fringe: extensive walled communities with
refectories and dormitories for more than a hundred monks, together with
accommodation for visitors and for the sick, the buildings added to decade
by decade. A large church provided the setting not only for the eucharist
but for regular hymns and psalms. Sabas, meanwhile, in his ‘Great Laura’,
closer to the Dead Sea, commanded more scattered ascetics; but he also
developed something akin to ‘rules’, which were general enough to be
imposed upon later foundations as they were established. Here too, prayer
as well as discipline was catered for, the monks in their weekday cells
responding to the same signal that summoned their coenobitic colleagues. 17
So, while leading a life of some freedom and eccentricity, Sabas busied
himself with the material details of an increasingly complex and prosper-
ous empire. Patrons in Jerusalem were a source of regular funds; but he also
travelled on two occasions to Constantinople, in a.d. 5 1 1 — 12 and 531,
where he gained apparently easy access to the court, and returned with con-
siderable wealth for his communities. His own Great Laura thus acquired
a coenobitic offshoot, a hospital and a new church. 18

When it came to relations with bishops, Palestinian monasticism had by
this time adopted a style of administration peculiar to itself, reflecting in
part the small scale of the desert region and its easy access to Jerusalem. 19
The patriarch of the city appointed one ascetic — Sabas being only the most

16 V. Sab. 8, tr. Price (1991) 100. Earlier asceticism: V. Sab. if. First endeavours in Palestine: V.
Euthym. 31; PC Sab. jf.

17 Authority: V. Sab. 16. Relations with Theodosius: V. Sab. 30, 65; V. Jo. Hesych. 6 (see Hirschfeld
(1992) 15, and Binns (1994) 45). ‘Rules’: V. Sab. 42, 74, 76.

18 FT Sab. 18, 25, 32; 27 , 31, 35; 5 if., 71 £; Patrich (1995).

19 Emphasis on a close link between monks and church in Palestine is the chief mark of Binns
(1994). On Jerusalem, see especially 8o£, 178b

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

753

famous — to be archimandrite (that is, overall superior) for all the monks of
the diocese. The communities were thus bound to the patriarch in a single
system. That was why Sabas was in such frequent contact with episcopal
affairs: he was always willing to travel up to Jerusalem, not only to consult
with the bishop but to lodge and dine with him and his associates, enjoy-
ing at least occasionally a comfort that may surprise us.

There had been, for a long time, ascetics in Jerusalem itself. That was
inevitable, given the city’s increasing importance as a centre of pilgrimage.
The most famous were on the Mount of Olives, associated with the name
of the elder Melania, and increasingly disdained by the less clerically orien-
tated Jerome in Bethlehem. Melania encouraged hard work and reflective
reading, in a style of which even Pachomius would have approved. The
Jerusalem communities were marked also by a certain Basilian character
(significantly attractive to ascetics for a time in this very city); a character
associated not only with the proximity of the bishop but also with the
numerous hostels built in Jerusalem, and with a related care for the poor.
The Life of the younger Melania, who reached Jerusalem some forty years
later, provides evidence that such traditions persisted over more than one
generation. Gerontius, her biographer, may disappoint us by dwelling more
on Melania’s personal asceticism than on the details of her monastic ordi-
nance. Yet she had obviously come to value the mutual respect and mod-
erated self-denial encouraged by the common life, and set in place a
detailed routine of liturgical prayer in her communities, which were built
within the city. She also mixed easily with bishops and other churchmen. 2 "

It was with that tradition of urban monasticism and episcopal patronage
that Sabas was now associated (together with his colleague Theodosius),
putting in place an even wider network of authority and dependence that
drew city and desert together. The process was undoubtedly encouraged by
the shifting allegiance of Jerusalem to the Council of Chalcedon (a.d. 451).
The patriarch Juvenal lost, for a time, his authority, following ambiguous
resistance to the decisions of the council; and he was replaced briefly by a
monk. Returning with force in 45 3, Juvenal presided over a period of some
antagonism between himself and ascetics. Euthymius quietly supported his
authority, but was relatively isolated in doing so. 21 Elpidius and Gerontius,
general archimandrites, took the opposing side. The situation was resolved
only with the accession of Martyrius as patriarch in 478, which represented
a victory for the clergy — a victory that Sabas was willing to accept. Esaias

20 Vita Melaniae 36, 4of. Melania had already set up monastic houses for both men and women during
a stay in Africa, under the shadow of another bishop and ascetic legislator, Augustine. In that instance,
Gerontius is frustratingly vague (perhaps he knew less) (22k) but mentions (among the women)
reading, fasting, prayer and spiritual direction. Augustine’s own enterprises will be discussed below.
Gerontius himself was later to achieve prominence in the very same milieu.

21 V. Euthjm. 27. For events in Jerusalem meanwhile, see 28 f.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

754

25 . MONASTICISM

of Scetis and others, correspondingly, withdrew to Gaza. 22 By that time, no
doubt, the growing willingness of desert ascetics to give the cambium per-
manent status, the fact that many more of them remained within commu-
nity walls than graduated to the more independent life of a personal cell,
and the associated emphasis on carefully preserved property and growing
liturgical sophistication, all gave the episcopate an increasing foothold in
monastic circles. Perhaps nothing symbolized the growing liaison more than
the feeling among Sabas’ followers that he could not exercise effective lead-
ership unless he were ordained a priest. 23 That ordination was achieved by
subterfuge in 490; and Sabas succeeded as general archimandrite in 492.

Three features of ascetic experience, therefore, became obvious in
Palestine: submission to the episcopate, a carefully controlled hierarchy of
masters and disciples, and a calculated encouragement of the community
life. While remaining capable of sustaining a variety of styles, the
Palestinian regime betrayed an openness to church life, not only in its sub-
jection to episcopal authority, but also in the associated complexity of its
liturgical celebrations, and in its willingness to undertake the conversion
and pastoral care of people beyond its immediate boundaries.

When we move further north, to Syria proper, and in particular to the
country around Antioch, the scene appears to change. Our chief source of
information for the first part of our period (and, indeed, reaching back
beyond it) is Theodoret, bishop of Cyrrhus and author of an Historia reli-
giosa, which describes the lives of prominent Syrian ascetics. His most
famous subject is undoubtedly Symeon Stylites; and Symeon and his imi-
tators, bizarre and extreme in their ascetic discipline, have tended to dom-
inate the imagination of later readers. 24 Yet very few of Theodoret’s
vignettes depict such lives; and the careful reader soon discerns both the
anxieties of a bishop and the persistent influence of the coenobitic life.
The Syrian church had long been rigorist and demanding in its view of
Christian commitment, probably owing little in the process to anything but
it own reflection upon the gospel. It was at the same time intensely devoted
to the notion of community and to the authority of the bishop; and it
would be surprising to find any contrary emphasis from the pen of one of
its leading churchmen. In story after story, Theodoret refers to the coeno-
bitic background of his heroes. He gives full details of a coenobitic regime,
with reference to the liturgy of monks, their reception of guests (‘the
divine work of hospitality’), their general order and hard work. 25 He

22 Zach. HE 111.4, vi. 1 ; John Eph. Lives 25. See Binns (1994) i89f.

23 V. Sab. 19. Hirschfeld sees Sabas’ promotion as a victory for the desert ascetics ((1992) 14Q; but
it was achieved at a price.

24 Theodoret of Cyrrhus, Historia religiosa xxvi. For Symeon, see the texts translated and introduced by
Robert Doran (1992). The Life of Daniel the Stylite is also of interest (trans. in Dawes and Baynes, (1977)).

25 Theod. HR ( SChret . 234) 11.5, 111.2, 12, v.2, x.3 (liturgy); in. 14, 20 (quoted), vin.2, x.4f (guests);
hi. 22, x.2 (general).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

755

reveals, in a pattern now familiar, the development from a holy man’s soli-
tary cell, through the attraction of disciples, to the establishment of a clear
coenobitic regime . 26 Yet — and here is a Syrian feature that will recur — small
groups that were gathered around a master continued to subdivide the
larger communities . 27

Ascetics also maintained a close relationship with society at large.
Theodoret was anxious to emphasize that proximity to village life was no
impediment to ascetic virtue . 28 Archaeological and epigraphic evidence
corroborates the impression that monastic communities, like ecclesiastical
sites in general, gradually acquired in Syria a central place in the rural
economy, in both alluvial and mountainous country, either by association
with a village or villages or by inclusion within an extensive estate. In the
sixth century, under the influence of growing Monophysite confidence,
churches and hostels of increasing size and grandeur catered for popular
devotion, while extensive farm buildings, often some distance from the
monastery itself, reached out into cultivated land. Cereal crops provided for
monastic and local needs; but the extensive cultivation of olives points to
sale and trade on a considerable scale . 29 There is no reason to suppose that
the process was not under way in Theodoret’s time, although many of the
earliest monastic communities in Syria failed to maintain themselves in the
century that followed — reflecting in part the contemporary shifts in theo-
logical loyalty but also, perhaps, the growing need to develop sites more
conducive to agricultural exploitation and pastoral accessibility. Theodoret
himself welcomed, certainly, a degree of social and even pastoral concern
among monks, 3 " and reported without surprise that it was from ascetic
society that bishops were often drawn . 31

He was ready on several occasions to interfere directly in the lives of
monks, precisely in order to preserve communal discipline and to criticize
idiosyncrasy or self-will. His approach was not always welcomed, and he
could find himself puzzled by some of the practices he discovered . 32 His
treatment of Symeon was particularly charged with hesitation, tempered
only partly by the popularity of the man, which he clearly found hard to
explain or accept. Symeon, after all, had first practised asceticism in a coen-
obitic setting, had proved constantly disobedient and disruptive, and

26 Theod. HR 11.3, 111.4, v.$, vi.13, x.3. A static distinction between two states is very rare: xxvii.i.
Compare V. Sab. 35. 27 Theod. HR 11.6, iv.5. 28 Theod. HR iv.i, xiv.2, 5,xxv.i.

29 See expecially Tchalenko, Villages 1 (in which specifically monastic references are interwoven with
other material), and the Appendix by Andre Caquot, an invaluable gazetteer with bibliography ( Villages
111.63—106).

30 Theod. HR 1.7, xxn.7; and iv.4, 8f. xvn.3 is rare in its ‘mediating’ or ‘patronal’ authority. This is

the context of Peter Brown’s famous analysis, ‘The rise and function of the Holy Man’ (1971), which
is taken by Palmer ((1990) ioyf.) to apply also in the Tur ‘Abdin. Clearly, there are anecdotes which
support the view; but a coenobitic and, indeed, pastoral context is almost always implied: see Rousseau
(1995). 31 Theod. HR 11. 9, hi. 5, v. 8, x.9, xvii. 1, 8. 32 Theod. HR xxi.iof., 33, xxii.6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

756

25 . MONASTICISM

remained, even after his departure, surprisingly restless/ 1 ’ Theodoret came
to regard him as an unwelcome competitor in the exercise of public and
spiritual authority. He unhesitatingly used his subordinates to counter that
influence, and was grudging in his regard for the stylite, quick to hint that
many others might share his disapproval. If we take Theodoret as a guide,
therefore, we have to believe that in Syria, too, the communal life was
gaining some ascendancy, under the increasing watchfulness of episcopal
authority, even while the old loyalties of master and disciple, as in Palestine,
were far from fading.

Taking Palestine and Syria together, therefore, it becomes clear that, by
the middle of the fifth century, a principle espoused by the Council of
Chalcedon was already on its way to acceptance over a wide area of the
eastern empire (and, as we shall see, much the same could be said of the
west). Monasteries — whatever the word might imply in this or that situa-
tion — were to be subject to bishops, at least at their foundation and in their
external relations. Ascetics were not to wander from place to place, at the
risk of their reputation, but to stay in one community, devoting themselves
to fasting and prayer. 34 That monastic preoccupation had gradually eclipsed
(largely because it had absorbed) an older world of virgins and widows,
independent enthusiasts, and the urban households of a pious elite. The
prescriptions of Chalcedon were also drawn up in the context of religious
controversy; and we have to note the extent to which, by that time, ascet-
ics of various sorts had been drawn into the conflicts surrounding
Nestorius and Dioscorus. Such involvement contributed in no small degree
to making the monasteries an integral part of the episcopal world. In
Palestine, the conduct of Euthymius, Saba and their associates had been
closely controlled by their attitude to Chalcedon and to the religious poli-
cies of the emperors Zeno and Anastasius. In addition, however, to distur-
bances in Jerusalem, there was widespread monastic unrest in Antioch
(particularly during the time of Severus, appointed patriarch in 512), and
even more in Alexandria, where alliance between desert and city dated back
to the days of Theophilus and Cyril.

All that helps to explain how we pass from the world of Pachomius and
Basil to that of Theodoret and Sabas. The great fourth-century pioneers of
ascetic discipline might maintain their influence as writers of ‘rules’, not
least as translated into Latin by Jerome and Rufinus; but territorially the
centre of ascetic gravity had shifted away from the Nile and from Pontus
and Cappadocia. The rise of Jerusalem was one factor, already noted; the
other was the corresponding importance of Constantinople — not only a

33 For this and what follows, see Theod. HR xxvi, esp. 12, i4f., 23.

34 Council of Chalcedon, canon 4, Hefele and Leclercq (1907— ) 11.2: 779. The council’s stipulations
marked a climax in a longer process: bishops were held responsible for ascetics, in the Theodosian
Code, as early as a.d. 398: C.Th. 1x.40.16.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

757

new capital for the empire but a capital almost built around the piety, even
the ascetic piety, of its imperial family. 35 Indeed, the irregularities that
Chalcedon was intent upon controlling were most obviously prevalent in
the capital itself.

It was in some ways exceptional. As the city had gained prominence
during the fourth century, so its religious life became at once more
significant and more idiosyncratic. The monks of the city were as much
newcomers as any other citizen, unabashed fortune-seekers from elsewhere
in the empire, cut loose from the controlling bonds of their own commu-
nities, and vigorously opposed to the influence and privilege of clergy in the
city. Both John Chrysostom and Nestorius were famously disadvantaged by
that conflict. 36 From the beginning, in the 380s, ascetics in Constantinople
acquired political supporters among the secular elite. Palladius’ Lausiac
History , written around a.d. 420, both reflected and supported that bid, illus-
trating what had been, since the time of Evagrius, a long-running
infiltration of the educated and governing classes in the east by ascetic dev-
otees. 37 The career of Eutyches in the 440s, protected not least by his asso-
ciation with the powerful eunuch Chrysaphius, followed a pattern to be
repeated through many reigns to follow, most famously that of Justinian. It
was a far cry from the remote rigour of Pontus or the Thebaid. Ascetics in
the capital also took unscrupulous advantage of the notorious piety of the
empress and her sister-in-law, just as Palestinians did later, when Eudocia
was in self-imposed exile after 443 . The result was undoubtedly a loss of dis-
cipline, quite belied by the seemingly ordered and uninterrupted liturgy of
the Acoemitae , the ‘Sleepless Ones’, probably the most famous but least
typical of Constantinople’s ascetic communities. It was the ambitious, more
numerous and less predictable groups that Chalcedon wished to bring
under control: the bishops knew h ow disproportionate and unhealthy their
influence had been in the years during and since the Council of Ephesus
(a.d. 431). Once, of course, prohibitions and regulations had been set in
place, the control and even theological condemnation of ‘wandering’ ascet-
ics became firmly embedded in the legislative agenda of the church. 38

One of our richest sources of information about eastern developments
in the following century remains the Lives of the Eastern Saints by John of
Ephesus, written probably between a.d. 566 and 568. One may find this
surprising, given John’s dedication to the Monophysite cause, which might

35 For the broader background, see Dagron, Naissance\ Krautheimer (1983); Holum, Empresses', and
McCormick, Eternal Victory. Useful light is shed on the temper of the court by Cameron (1982).

36 For a succinct account of the earliest monks in Constantinople see Dagron (1970). A great range
of detail is provided by Janin (1969): essentially a religious gazetteer of the city, covering the whole
Byzantine period, it offers a considerable bibliography and many allusions to development and prac-
tice. 37 Context and bibliography are provided by Clark (1992).

38 See, for example, texts cited in Jones, ERE n (1973) 1389 n. 160, to which add Justinian, Nov. 79
of a.d. 5 39, and, in the west, the Council of Orleans (a.d. 51 1), canon 22.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

75 »

25 . MONASTICISM

prompt one to expect a regime at once tainted by heretical association and
cut off from the mainstream of Christian development. There is no doubt
that the history of monasticism in the sixth-century east was wholly inter-
woven with the progress of the Monophysite controversy. Monks were at
once the most influential leaders of the heretical cause and the most
revered victims of orthodox persecution. Shifts of government policy
under Zeno and Anastasius, and indeed during the reign of Justinian
himself, had a constantly disruptive effect on the practice of the ascetic life
— exile, polemic and pastoral concern being the order of the day. Nothing
can blind us to the fact, however, that significant numbers (perhaps the
majority) of Chrisitans in the eastern empire were willing to accommodate
themselves in some degree to the Monophysite party; and only orthodox
prejudice can lead one to believe that the Palestinian laura had become a
dominant model. The majority of the ascetics described by John were cer-
tainly from Syria and certainly Monophysite in their loyalty; but his account
ranges fully over a great crescent from Thrace to the Nile, and presents us
with an image of monastic practice adopted throughout the eastern prov-
inces of the empire.

A recurrent pattern is easy to discern. Each monastery had its archiman-
drite, and its ‘rule’ in the sense of customary order: there can be no doubt
that, in John’s day, that had become the norm, with complex buildings,
regular hours and a highly developed liturgy. More than once, he admires
explicitly fine craftsmanship in monastic buildings, and the sumptuousness
of their church furniture . 39 A monastery, however, would still bear the
stamp and often the name of the holy man who had found it. The process
of coenobitic development was still based on an original master and the
gradual accretion of disciples . 40 Other patterns occurred: the Palestinian
rhythm, by which one graduated from community to solitary life; and the
development of increasingly ordered forms of devotion among pious fam-
ilies. Within each community — a custom hinted at by Theodoret — masters
could still preside over groups of disciples, and even transfer with them to
other places. More experienced ascetics practised isolated programmes of
self-denial, not always approved of by their peers, but initiated by their own
enthusiasm, and carried out in corners and at odd hours of the day or night.
Such anecdotes add a voice to the jumbled ground-plan of cells and court-
yards revealed by monastic archaeology . 41 John’s chief point was to stress

39 John Eph. Lives 4, 7, 12, 14, 17k, 20, 31, 33, 35, 42, 47. 9, 12 and 58 give particularly full accounts
of buildings and their appointments. For a general survey, see Harvey, Asceticism and Society in Crisis. An
excellent summary of John’s descriptions of the monastic regime is given by Palmer (1990) 81—8; and
his book as a whole provides a superb example (the monastery of Qartmin in south-east Turkey) that
illustrates, in archaeology and in associated documents, many aspects of Syrian asceticism in this
period. Janin’s provincial survey (1975), covering large areas of Greece and Asia, offers again a richly
documented gazetteer. 40 John Eph. Lives 5 f., 22, 27, 34, 54.

41 The narrative is vividly corroborated by the remains at Qartmin: see Palmer (1990) 97—107.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

759

the way in which the community enfolded those endeavours (even that of
stylites), and enjoyed priority of merit. Communities remained open, also,
valuing both hospitality and the care of the poor . 42 On the fringes of that
ordered world, John described wandering ascetics and radically pious lay
persons (in this context women come to greater prominence ), 43 who also
devoted much of their practical energy to the care of the sick and the poor,
and to the entertainment of travellers and strangers . 44 Over all presided the
bishop — one of John’s chief motives was to show that bishops, also, could
be holy! So they exercised their authority over monasteries, characterized
as they were by attachment to a sacramental life . 45

Two things strike one about these vivid accounts. First, monastic order
was not an end in itself. One did not base one’s life on loyalty to a specific
written rule or even to a permanent community. The fundamental social
component of the ascetic life was still the relationship between master and
disciple. The reputation of the master was the stimulus for the formation
and organization of the community in the first place; and the master’s own
practice and advice was the factor that did most to control the ambition and
behaviour of his associates. The monastery and its habitual order were the
extended instrument, or at least the protective setting, of a master’s forma-
tive power. That was why a life governed by ‘rules’ could still acknowledge
some dependence on the biographical tradition enshrined in the Sayings of
the Fathers and its later supplements and imitations. Second, the cambium/
laura relationship observed in Palestine had now entered a new phase, in
that the laura had come to live in the cambium. Within a domestic setting
that catered for a communal life, men who were psychologically, as it were,
hermits pursued in private a programme of prayer and self-discipline
within the communal buildings themselves. At the root of the whole enter-
prise one discovers two fundamental motives: a fear of judgement and a
compassion for the unfortunate. The first engendered an urgent sense of
responsibility for the direction of one’s own life; the second encouraged
mercy for others, equally subject not so much to economic or physical mis-
fortune as to a disappointment or weakness entirely like one’s own.

Such were the perceptions that did most to shape the structure of
eastern monastic life in the fifth and sixth century. Such, also, were the
adaptations visited upon the heritage of Pachomius and Basil. The monas-
tic life continued in Asia Minor — the youthful experience of Euthymius
and Sabas bears witness to that — even though Constantinople and

42 From community to solitude: John Eph. Lives 6 (though in conjunction with other processes), 1 6,
29 (in which solitaries seek winter refuge in communities). Pious families: 21, 56. (A splendid history of
more general character is provided in 5 8.) Masters and disciples: 2, 3, 15, 29, 32f., 3 5 . Eccentricity within
the community: 11, 17, 36, 54. Stylites: 2, 4 (and see the example provided by Palmer (1990) ic>5f.).
Community more meritorious: 3 (very forceful), 4, 13, 15, 19. External relations: 2, 5, 13, 17, 29, 31, 33,
44. 43 John Eph. Lives 12, 27b, 54. 44 John Eph. Lives 31, 39, 45 £, 52k, 57.

45 John Eph. Lives 2, 4, 12, 16, 25.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

760

25 . MONASTICISM

Jerusalem had begun to exert their disturbing pull . 16 In Egypt, where the
outlook of Shenoute had modified Pachomian tradition, and where
Monophysite self-confidence was less severely disturbed and capable of
more organic development, the physical aspects of monastic life in the
Delta and along the Nile were quite startlingly changed, precisely in ways
that Pachomius had foreseen and feared . 47 Rambling walled ccmobia (like
Shenoute’s ‘White Monastery’ near Atripe), more populous and more pros-
perous than before, lay now at the centre of great estates, absorbing the
energies of the monks themselves, and providing employment for local
peasants. They offered material support in time of famine and unrest, and
taxable wealth for the imperial government (which was often returned to
them by donation or remission ). 48 They were drawn, as a result, into the
economy of the church as a whole, sharing under episcopal supervision in
the increasing prosperity of the Christian community generally.

In the matter of legislative development, a distinction seems evident
between east and west. At the opening of the fifth century, the eastern
provinces had already begun to acquire the detailed traditions of order that
were to dominate monasticism in the Greek church and its satellites for
long afterwards. In the west, on the other hand, the rule that seems most
to have influenced later centuries, that of Benedict, would not take shape
for a century or more. The distinction, however, is unreal. ‘The Rule of
Pachomius’ or ‘the Rule of Basil’ did not exist in a hard-and-fast form. The
Pachomian material translated into Latin by Jerome did not form a single,
coherent corpus; and it is unlikely that such regulations were at any time
honoured throughout the coenobitic communities of the Nile valley. Some
even of Pachomius’ own foundations seceded from his federation soon
after his death. The ease with which Shenoute usurped the Pachomian
mantle was itself a sign of how diffuse and even insecure his legacy had
become. Other collections of rules gained competing influence. Several
items in the Sayings of the Fathers fall into sequences that are virtually rules
in embryo . 49 The Sayings focus also on figures like Longinus, superior of the

46 The flourishing establishments in Basil’s Caesarea were sadly depleted by the time of his succes-
sor Firmus, a century later. See Firmus, Letters (SChret. 250) esp. Epp. 12 and 43. John Eph. Lives 31
describes another species of Basilian Nachleben in sixth-century Melitene, on the eastern borders of
Cappadocia.

47 For the tenuous survival of old north-Egyptian traditions, see Chitty (1966) i44f., and Gould
( T 993) 9 f -> l8 5 f -

48 The generosity of patrons, in a society where wealth meant either land and its produce or gold,
was thus locked firmly into the local beneficence of hospitality and welfare. The work of Jones and,
more recently, Hendy provides a general context and access to a wide international bibliography. Much
recent work of an economic nature has focused more on the third and fourth centuries. Useful detail
can still be found in Johnson and West (1949) especially 66f. Walters (1974) discusses surviving material
evidence of refectories, bakeries and water installations, 99^ 2o6£, 209f. and 21 9f., with additional ref-
erence at this last point to handicraft and to labour outside the monastery.

49 For example Moses, 14— 1 8. Such prescriptive dialogues could find their way into narrative sources:
see John Eph. Lives 3 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

7 6l

Ennaton, a large Delta monastery with Pachomian roots. Esaias of Seeds,
another generator and hero of such anecdotes, was not averse to drawing
up rules. He clearly worked in the Pachomian tradition, even though he
sprang from the exiled northern communities of Egypt that probably
created the Sayings themselves. As for Basil, his Regulae circulated at first in
at least two collections, each subject to editing and accretion. They are
notable for saying less about monastic institutions than about the develop-
ment of the ascetic’s spiritual life, or else were designed to meet particular
needs and to answer particular questions as they arose . 511 The memory of
such pioneers survived among the communities they inspired largely
because of their personal reputation, enhanced in Pachomius’ case by a rich
biographical tradition. It may be that the greater influence of Basil was due
precisely to his lesser specificity, the detailed prescriptions of Pachomius’
actual rules being more difficult to transfer unchanged to other settings. So,
even on paper, individual character continued to count for most: one was
loyal to reputations as much as to regimes. Wherever a ‘rule’ does seem dis-
cernible, we find constantly an eclectic tendency: ascetics did not adopt the
practice of one particular place, whether Caesarea or the Thebaid, but rein-
forced the customs and recollections of more immediate instructors, or, at
the very most, responded admiringly to the wisdom of some figure in the
more distant past. Sabas was to prove, in a way that applied to a multitude
of monasteries, a typical example: he bequeathed, in a . d . 5 32, written
instructions to his successor; but they represented not one authority but
‘the traditions handed down in his monasteries’ — only at that late stage,
perhaps, committed to writing . 51

Yet there were developments proper to the west, governed to some
extent by precedents in its own provinces. Before the translated Life of
Antony could gain widespread effect, and certainly before Jerome and
Rufinus began to offer the west their own ascetic works and translations,
bishops in particular were beginning to make formal prescriptions for
ascetic disciples. Eusebius of Vercelli (died 371) and Ambrose of Milan
(died 397) are famous examples. Episcopal initiative and control were
important features of the development: in some cases, indeed, the bishop’s
household became the centre of the ascetic endeavour, with the inevitable
involvement of members of his clergy. Jerome and Rufinus were, indeed,
products of that world; and Augustine (a.d. 354—430) continued the tradi-
tion.

His towering stature within the western Christian tradition can often
encourage us to forget how local Augustine could be in his initial influence;
and that is particularly true of his monastic experiments. Suspicions

50 See Rousseau, Basil of Caesarea 3 54R and Gribomont (1953).

51 Cyr. Scyth. V. Sab. 76, tr. Price (1991) 191.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

762

25 . MONASTICISM

aroused in Gaul by his doctrine of grace, at least in the 420s and 430s, and
the alternative prestige of Lerins and its satellites no doubt help to explain
why his ascetic writings and regulations were slow to make their mark
outside North Africa. It is in later ascetic writers — Caesarius, Benedict and
Gregory the Great — that his ideas can be more readily detected. 52
Nevertheless, while the earliest relevant texts do suggest a narrow audience
and confused compilation, Augustine could justly claim to have been the
first monastic legislator of the west. His ‘rule’ in its primitive form, the so-
called Ordo monasterii, was probably written, perhaps in collaboration with
others in his circle, at the beginning of the 390s, when Jerome and Rufinus
had yet to make known to the west the works of Pachomius and Basil.
Augustine was living at the time in a community at Thagaste, which he had
founded when he returned to Africa from Italy after 388. He undoubtedly
set the tone of the ‘rule’ in the opening section of what was otherwise a
laconic document, emphasizing love of God and neighbour. A cycle of
prayer and work was broken by a period of reading and a late afternoon
meal. Goods were to be held in common, but there was commerce with the
outside world. Obedience was demanded within a hierarchy of pater and
praepo situs . 53 Augustine’s models had been inspired by the east, but were
Italian in origin: he imbibed the tradition at second hand. He also placed
the ascetic endeavour firmly within the context of the church as a whole.
Finally, he developed his devotion to the monastic life alongside his famous
sensibility to what he regarded as the weakness and complexity of the
human psyche: destined for eternal fulfilment, but needing guidance and
authority.

Once established in Hippo in 391, Augustine developed his ideas for a
monastery entirely his own, producing his Praeceptum. He attached charac-
teristic importance to the pattern of life followed by the first Christians in
Jerusalem, as portrayed in Acts. The original church was the perfect mon-
astery, with property held in common, and intense affection among its
members. Given the variety of ability characteristic of human experience,
the only way to maintain that ‘unity of heart and soul’ was to develop a
sense of responsibility for other people, acknowledging dependence upon
the virtuous, and rallying to the aid of the weak. A system of superiors still
monitored behaviour, but in collaboration with the community and for the
community’s sake, conscious always of their own vulnerability in the sight
of God. At the same time, the ‘rule’ had an authority of its own, being read
aloud each week. Prayer was clearly ordered, although the opportunity for
private reflection was still safeguarded, according to the Egyptian tradition.

52 All three will be dealt with below. Caesarius’ Statuta zi ( Quce aliquid ) is a striking example: compare
Aug. Praec. i. 5 £, iii.jf. The relevant Augustinian texts are edited by Verheijen (1967).

53 Love: Aug. Ordo 1. Routine: z{\ see also 9. Common property: 4. External relations: 8.
Obedience: 6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

763

As we would expect of Augustine, obedience in such a world was at once
the exercise and the guarantee of true freedom, not mere submission to a
law. 54 The contrast with developments in Gaul will be striking. Instead of
a monk who later became a bishop, we have a bishop who was learning
more and more what it meant to be a monk. The redeeming security and
necessary order of the church provided the model for the monastic life;
and its function as the household of God was as important as the struc-
tures of authority within it. That social emphasis and reflective skill meant
that Augustine’s influence would transform any preoccupation with daily
order and obedience; and it was to be in the Rule of Benedict that the coali-
tion was finally most perfectly achieved.

Perhaps the most famous ‘monk-bishop’ of an earlier generation was
Martin of Tours (died a.d. 397). 55 In Gaul itself (he was actually born on
the Danube frontier), he appears to have been something of a monastic
pioneer, although he had depended as a young man on encouragement by
Hilary of Poitiers (died a.d. 367). The Rife of Martin by Sulpicius Severus,
written around the time of its hero’s death, and the same author’s Dialogues ,
written a few years later, present us with a vivid though highly tendentious
account. Drawing upon eastern sources, both literary and anecdotal,
Sulpicius’ descriptions of Martin’s ascetic regime may depend as much on
the models he admired as on the reports he received. Nevertheless, he pro-
vides us with good reason to believe that some form of organized, com-
munal asceticism was in place in the region of Poitiers and Tours by the
360s. After his consecration, Martin continued to live a visibly ascetic life
(to the horror of some churchmen), to retreat at times to his own founda-
tions, and to maintain supervision of their progress. Structures appear to
have been loose, each ascetic living in a simple cabin or cave. There is allu-
sion to literary interests, supporting, perhaps, a pastoral and anti-heretical
impulse; but details are sketchy. 56 Martin’s subsequent influence was largely
restricted to the western parts of Gaul. He may have awakened interest in
Britain and Ireland; but there is little evidence that his cult, for all its pop-
ularity and prestige both north and south, was accompanied, at least in the
Gallic cities where it took root, by a specific and corresponding enthusiasm
for anything that could be described as Martinian monasticism.

Of greater importance were developments in south-eastern Gaul, in
the Rhone valley and around Marseilles. Here the pioneer was Honoratus,
who, with die encouragement of Leontius, bishop of Frejus, founded a

54 Influence of Acts: Aug. Praec. i.2f., m.jf., iv.8. Superiors: vii.if. ‘Rule’: vni.2. Prayer: n.if; the
continuum of each ascetic’s inner life was never ignored, in. 2. Obedience: viii.i (the point had already
been made briefly in the Ordo iof.).

55 Still the most authoritative account of asceticism in Gaul is that of Prinz (1965).

56 Most of the information is in Sulpicius Severus, V. Mart. x. Maintaining earlier asceticism: if.
Regular retreats to Marmoutier: jf. Cabins or caves: 5 . Literary pursuits: 6, and note reference to monks
as future bishops: 8f. For Hilary, v.ifl, and churchmen’s horror, ix.3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

764

25 . MONASTICISM

monastery on the island of Lerins (between Cannes and Antibes), and
later became bishop of Arles (in a.d. 426). Honoratus had previously trav-
elled in the east, perhaps even in Egypt and Syria; and he brought to his
Gallic foundation the practices he observed or learnt of on his journey.
This transference of eastern ideas was more direct than in the case of
Martin. Although we have little certain textual evidence of the earliest
regime at Lerins itself — it is likely that the canons of monastic practice
were committed to writing only gradually — it is clear that a regular round
of work and prayer, a system that included both coenobites and solitar-
ies, and a detailed pattern of government under a designated superior
were quickly established according to eastern models. 57 As the century
progressed, a whole series of regulae began to appear, some in the Rhone
valley, some across the Alps, almost all linked with Lerins to some degree,
and all indebted to the heritage of Pachomius and Basil. Thus there
sprang into being on western soil a stream of ideas and practices that
would flow eventually into the prescriptions of Caesarius in Arles and of
Benedict and his predecessors in Italy. 58

From that same south-eastern Gallic milieu come the writings of John
Cassian, an easterner by origin, who, after extensive travels in Palestine and
Egypt, had settled in Gaul and had, by c. 41 5 , founded two monasteries near
Marseilles. For his own monks and for other communities already beginning
to grow nearby (including that of Honoratus at Lerins), he wrote his
Institutes and Conferences, which were greatly honoured and not infrequently
imitated in the centuries to follow. In practical matters, the Institutes concen-
trated on the admission of novices and on the round of daily prayer. The
singing of psalms at evening and in the night hours now became more
ordered, with a split between ‘nocturns’ proper and a dawn service of dis-
puted character, reflecting an amalgamation of Egyptian and Palestinian
practice, but carried to a new level of formality. And instead of leaving the
daylight hours to personal reflection ( meditatio ), brief ‘offices’ that we now
know as ‘terce’, ‘sext’ and ‘none’ provided a more rigid and spaced-out
framework. Enduring vagueness and obscurity, however, remind us that tra-
ditions had yet to congeal into patterns familiar to Benedict a century later. 59

Cassian prescribed otherwise very little. It seems that he felt his duty was
more to describe and gently recommend eastern practices, leaving his
readers (at first envisaged as potential superiors themselves) to decide how

57 Hilary’s Life of Honoratus (something of a misnomer) provides a little institutional information.
Adalbert de Vogue (19 82) argued with vigour that the so-called ‘Rule of the Four Fathers’ was the rule
operating at Lerins from the earliest days. Its connection with the monastery appears to be beyond
doubt; but its date is much less easily discovered.

58 There can be no doubt that, in spite of difficulties in matters of dating and dependence, the account
of this tradition given by De Vogue (1982) is the most cohesive and appealing currently available.

59 Concerning novices, De institutis ( CSEL 1 7) 1 discusses the symbolism of a monk’s clothing and
iv. 1— 7 the experience of renouncing the world. The round of prayer: n and hi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

765

those might best be imitated. They were to govern, in any case, more by
example than by rule. 60 The bulk of the Inistitutes (Books v— xn) was
devoted to spiritual guidance, under the headings of eight vices and how
they might best be countered. The Conferences were similar in effect, report-
ing conversations with well-known ascetics of northern Egypt: offering, in
other words, instruction from the lips of ascetic masters. Where Cassian
did discuss relations between superiors and subjects, his emphasis was on
formation — on the desire of the disciple and the wisdom of the teacher.
The setting evoked, moreover, was predominantly eremitical: the solitary
life was still acknowledged as the ascetic’s characteristic ideal. There can be
no doubt, nevertheless, that Cassian’s intentions, like his audience, were
coenobitic, and that the virtues and practices he encouraged were those
proper to community life. 61 It is one of his claims to genius that he was able
to respect an ancient Egyptian tradition, while nevertheless adapting it
thoroughly to the new monasteries of Gaul. Thus the apparent conversa-
tions of old masters were transformed into an independently available text
with an authority of its own. 62

Once in place, those southern experiments and precedents set the tone
for monasticism in Gaul until the end of the sixth century. (They also pro-
vided a context for interaction between Gaul, Britain and Ireland: Patrick
was to some degree a disciple of Honoratus.) 63 Yet the close relationship
between ascetics and the episcopate in Gaul, already evident in Cassian’s
career, 64 makes it difficult to assess the significance of specifically monas-
tic developments in the province. Lerins quickly became a virtual school
for bishops — not only of Arles, as in the case of Honoratus and his suc-
cessor Hilary (died 449), but of several other dioceses: Eucherius’ Lyons,
for example, and the Riez of Faustus. 65 Such promotions did not represent
merely enthusiasm for ascetic candidates, ‘common assumption’ though
their suitability might have been. 66 The acquisition of a see depended as
much on the patronage of the powerful, and reflected new aristocratic
ambitions within an increasingly isolated province. 67 The men concerned

60 Cassian, Inst, preface 4f., confirmed in Conlationes ( CSEE 13) preface to 1. Inst, iv.17— 18 discusses
food.

61 That emphasis becomes more and more evident as the Conferences proceed, but is heavily accen-
tuated in xix. 62 Cassian, Con. prefaces to xi and xviii. Adaptation to the west: Inst. 1.10.

63 Although it was not as a monk that he journeyed to Ireland and worked there.

64 His prefaces in the Institutes and Conferences bear witness to a complex web of relationships; and
he had come to Gaul in the first place under the patronage of Proculus of Arles. See Rousseau, A.scetics
174 ^, 217b

65 Sid. Ap. Ep. 6.1.3; 9.3.4. Lerins was not the only source of such recruits. Rusticius of Narbonne,
whose episcopate spanned more than thirty years (from a.d. 427), was a monk from St Victor, one of
Cassian’s foundations in Marseilles. It was to him that Jerome wrote, recommending an ascetic career
as the visible guarantee of worthiness for the priesthood: Ep. 125.17.

66 Familiaris . . . pmsumptio\ Boniface of Rome, Ep. Exigit di lectio’, PE xx.669f.

67 See Mathisen (1989), (1993), and Drinkwater and Elton, Fifth-Century Gaul.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

766

25 . MONASTICISM

were members of the social and political elite; and that counted for as much
as their ascetic experience. The notorious conflict between Ravennius of
Arles, for example, and Theodore of Frejus, fostered by the recalcitrant
independence of Faustus, abbot of Lerins before he became bishop of
Riez, hints at more than a debate between priests and monks. Their testy
relations with Leo, the bishop of Rome, add to the implications . 68

We are dealing here with attitudes and events that lie outside the narrow
sphere of ascetic history and acquire their clearest significance in relation to
post-imperial politics. Yet those developments had a direct and perhaps
damaging effect on monastic practice: for the ambitious bishops who thus
retained some trace of monastic formation played out the rest of their
careers, and exercised their enduring patronage of monastic foundations,
within the cities over which they came virtually to rule. Caesarius, in the next
century, belonged very much, as we shall see, in that world (the monastery
governed by his sister Caesaria was built, eventually, in the heart of Arles ); 69
and what we read later in the pages of Gregory of Tours bears witness to
the survival not only of Caesarius’ own prescriptions but of a bond between
bishop and monk that far outweighed in Gregory’s mind any independence
among ascetic institutions. Aurelianus of Arles and Ferreolus of Uzes are
perfect examples of the trend. 7 " The urban monasteries patronized by
Frankish royalty were built on the same species of opportunism: their
founders, whether religious or lay, indulged their piety as one means among
others of reinforcing their hold over cities and their territoria. Partly in the
service of that development, heroic solitaries in the old style, still gathering
about themselves loyal disciples, were sucked into an ecclesiastical system
with more on its agenda than abstemious self-discipline.

The period between Caesarius and Cassian, punctuated as it is by the
regular already referred to, can be brought to life in even greater detail by a
collection of lives devoted to the ‘Fathers of the Jura’, Romanus, Lupicinus
and Eugendus, successive abbots of Condat and its associated houses in
the upper reaches of the Rhone valley system . 71 These three lives present
us with a transition from the virtual isolation of Romanus in his early years
to the highly ordered community of Eugendus, recognizably similar to the
monastery of his contemporary Caesarius (and, indeed, of Benedict and

68 Concilia Galliae A. 314— A. jo6 ed. C. Munier ( CCSL 149) i32f. Faustus became bishop of Riez some
ten years later, after more than twenty-five years as abbot, and died c. a.d. 490. The details of this con-
troversy are treated fully by Mathisen (1989) 173—20 5 ; see especially 1 9 5 f. In this particular instance (a.d.
451), the bishop of Frejus was specifically warned to keep his nose out of the monastery’s internal
affairs: a stipulation that modified significandy the exacdy contemporary strictures of Chalcedon.

69 1 Vita sancti Ccesarii (trans. W Klingshirn, Liverpool, 1994) 1.28 and 35. Aurelianus, his later succes-
sor (a.d. 546—51), followed his example: see following note.

70 For texts and references, see Desprez (1980).

71 The biographies cover the period from c. 435 to the death of Eugendus in 510, and were prob-
ably written shordy after that date. Romanus died c. 460, Lupicinus in 490.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

767

his Italian predecessors). Yet Romanus was fully aware of the rich tradition
within which he had begun to work. Although there is little sign that he
wrote or had access to a rule , 72 details of organization familiar in the east
were taken for granted: individual cells, a place of prayer, a hostel for visi-
tors; attention to fasting and watching; a distinction between the regular
prayer and reading of the solitary and the manual labour of the coenobite;
but, under Romanus, a combination of the two . 73 He, like Cassian, was
chary of subservience to clerics, and was anxious to adapt the practices of
the east to the needs and abilities of his associates . 74 There are hints that
his regime was deliberately more lenient than that of Lupicinus, who had
already begun to make an independent mark in a satellite community . 75

With Lupicinus, we enter a more ordered world. There is specific refer-
ence to a monastic liturgy — the vespertina synaxis of the east. The monastery
possessed an ceconomus-. its relations with visitors and dependants were
becoming more controlled. Lupicinus enjoyed a growing reputation among
secular associates, and could be seen as a threatening critic of civil author-
ity, undermined as it was by sin. Most important, growing attention was
paid to the place of obedience in the community. Custom, the example of
others, and the advice of the abbot were combined to call into question
personal judgement, even when it aimed at more rigorous observance. The
governing principles, however, were the need for balance and the school-
ing of inner motive, not the regimentation of behaviour . 75

Eugendus, finally, offered a contrast, not only in his more detailed
government but also in his settled life: he exemplified a stabilitas loci absent
in the careers of his predecessors — the assumption (reinforced by
Chalcedon) that ascetics would remain in one institution for the whole of
their lives. That sprang in his case, perhaps, from a personal inclination to
study; and, in spite of his reputation as a legislator, Eugendus displayed
other signs of eccentricity. After lire had destroyed the old buildings at
Condat, dating back perhaps even to Romanus’ day, he set the monastery
on a new path, insisting on a single dormitory for all (‘setting aside the
custom of eastern archimandrites’), and on rigorous adherence to a
common life. The author comments on his attachment to Cassian, in pref-
erence to Basil, Pachomius and even Lerins itself, because of that master’s
ability to adapt his recommendations to the conditions of the west. The
actual ‘rule’ of Eugendus is not described: reference is made instead to

72 Note the vagueness of PC Rom. 4, 11, 36; see Martine (1968). Precision was to come with
Eugendus, 59; and Romanus was chary of setting too precise a standard, 32f. But custom was distinct
from the authority of the master himself. 36. 73 PC Rom. 28, 1 5 and 10 respectively.

74 PC Rom. i8f., 28, 33. Hilary of Arles is specifically critici2ed. 75 PC Rom. 17, 24.

76 Eastern observances: PC Lup. 64b Organi2ation: 68. External relations: 92f. (Compare the judicial
influence of the Gallic recluse Eparchius: Greg. Tur. Hist, vi.8.) Obedience: 75 f. Gregory’s rather
different account of Lupicinus and Romanus, PC pat 1, reveals not only his different interests but the
shifting values of monastic Gaul in the sixth century.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

768

25 . MONASTICISM

customs enforced elsewhere. 77 Certainly, there are accounts of an ordered
liturgy, common and regular meals (for some monks at least, two a day),
and abbatial authority. Eugendus tried to control the gifts that the commu-
nity received and the troubled visitors that flocked to its gates. Yet his dying
requests referred in only a general way to the ‘institutes of the fathers’. He
prayed alone in the cemetery or under a favourite tree. His monks travelled,
even to Rome, in search of relics. He allotted tasks in the community
according to the talents of individual monks, exercising that insight into the
character of each subject that was typical of the old charismatic masters of
the Egyptian desert. In some ways, therefore, this coenobitic hero was not
so very different from Leunianus of Vienne, living in the solitude of a cell,
yet ‘ruling monks’ and supervising a nearby convent. 78

The prestige of Lerins and its satellites reached a peak in the career and
writings of Caesarius of Arles (died 543). His monastic formation included
a period at Lerins; and, after becoming bishop in a.d. 503, he wrote a Regula
monachorum and longer and more informative Statuta sanctarum virginum , 79
One has to be cautious about the meaning he attached to regula. Its con-
stant conjunction with other words — institutio regula, discretio et regula —
reminds us that the regula itself was still regarded as part of a wider tradi-
tion — ‘canonical scripture and the books of the ancient fathers’. 80 His
written prescriptions are larded like sermons with exhortations to virtue,
and reflect upon attitude as much as behaviour. 81 The authority of the
abbot or abbess was by now well-established, but balanced by the delegated
duties of a propositus and subject to the influence of seniores. Caesarius
envisaged a fully coenobitic regime, with none of the privacy associated
with the cells of the laura\ and again there is an emphasis on stabilitas loci.
Women are specifically catered for. Extra care is taken to protect their
seclusion. In contrast to their male counterparts, they will pray more than
they work (although they also copied books). The bulk of Caesarius’ Rules
is devoted to fasting and liturgy. The latter, by his day, had reached a high
degree of detailed sophistication, with variations from season to season
and a complex succession of antiphonal and unison psalmody, interspersed
with readings. Overshadowing this regime was the bishop himself (a
significant resolution of debates in the previous century); but his authority

77 De Vogiie (1982) n.452 discusses possible connections between the so-called Regula orientals and
Condat under Lupicinus and Eugendus.

78 Stability: V. Eug. 1 26. Rebuilding and its results: 162, 170 ( refutato archmandritarum orientalium instari ,
ed. Martine (1968), 422), 173. Monastic regime: 129b, 131, 1 51, 171. External relations: 147, 172. Death:
177. His prayer: 129, 1 5 3 f. Travelling monks: 153b Charismatic insight: 149. Leunianus: 128.

79 Note that the numeration and nomenclature of PE lxvii. 1099— 104, 1 107—20 are not always used
by more recent and more reliable editors.

80 Statuta 26 (Et quamvis), 30 {Ad cel lari urn), 35 (at Matri quce), 47 (Te vero)\ Recapitulation 62 {Et licet), 72
{Vos tamen, PL tandern). Compare regulari sceptro in Greg. Tur. V. pat. xvi.i, ed. 275.

81 Reg. mon. ed. G. Morin (Maredsous 1942) 1 51:8b; 1 52:8b {PL 13, 19). See especially Sermons 23 3—6.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

769

was carefully defined, and the domestic liberty of the nuns was fully
respected. 82 Caesarius also made detailed provision for the endowment of
his communities: the preservation of his will allows us a rare glimpse into
such arrangements, as it carefully identifies the blocks of land upon which
future prosperity would depend. 83

In spite of selection, the main development is clear. The east provided
the first models, and preserved the reputation of the ascetic master and of
the laura system. Custom and anecdote provided the authority for order, and
a move away from that tradition was slow and never total. 84 Yet the common
dormitory, the common refectory, the importance of shared labour and the
prominence of the abbot became increasingly the norm. The bishop and
the secular patron retained some ultimate influence, not least because both
shared in the ambition and privilege of the aristocratic elite.

About the following century in Gaul, we gain most from a reading of
Gregory of Tours (died 594). His Histones are less useful than his more
deliberately religious works — the Liber vita patrum and the De gloria confes-
sorum — which have the added advantage of placing clearly coenobitic enter-
prises in a rich context of eccentric variety; but there is one interesting
oddity in his more secular record — Radegund. Royal status made her
circumstance exceptional; but the fortunes of her community show the
pressures that could be brought to bear upon Caesarius’ legacy. 85 In the
hagiographical works, however, predictable patterns emerge. Travellers
from the east continued to reinforce Palestinian and Syrian customs. 86 Men
solitary in spirit and practice lived within communities or in close depen-
dence upon them. They might even be their founders. 87 Such communities

82 Superiors: Reg. mon. ed. Morin, 1 5 1 : 3 £, (PL 11); see also 1 52: if. (PL 16), and Statuta 35 (at Matri
qua ?). Common life: Reg. mon. ed. Morin, 1 50:13 (PL 3); Statuta 9 (Nulli liceat) . Stability: Statuta 2 (at Si qud).
Women: Statuta 39 (Convivium) , 42b (from Illud ante). Bishops: Statuta 36 (Ante omnia propter ), 43 (Ante
omnia observandum)\ Recapitulatio 64 (Illud etiani) , 72 (1 Zos tamen , PL tandem)', and compare Greg. Tur. Gloria
■ 7c ). Books: Vita sancti Caesarii 1.58. 83 Ed. Morin, 283—9. See a ^ so ViE n.8f., 47.

84 Witness the splendid portrait in Greg. Tur. Hist, vi.6 — an eastern ascetic in Gaul who even
imported his own food! One may note how the Apophthegmata , when translated into Latin, were re-
arranged according to theme — though still in no way constituting a rule.

85 For other instances of royal involvement, see Greg. Tur. V. pat. vi and xii; and compare 1.5 with
V. Lup. 92—5 . Gregory’s personal interest in the famous ‘rebellion’ that occurred after Radegund’s death
prompts him to describe the practices of the convent and its endowment with land, which led to the
development of widespread estates with officials and tied labourers, supporting an army of domestic
servants responsible for the upkeep of urban buildings: Hist, vi.29, ix.39f., x.i5f. For a brief but
authoritative account, see Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 136—9.

86 Greg. Tur. V. pat. m (urban and generous), xm and xv (characteristically penitential). See also
Hist, iv.32 (an ascetic who ‘stands’— very Syrian), vi. 6 (a hermit’s imported herbs, and much else), vn. 31
(a merchant with St Sergius’ finger), x.26 (a Syrian bishop), and x.3 1 with 11.39 ( a travelled abbot).

87 V. pat. iv. 3, ix; Gloria 37 (iuxta regulas monasteriorum . . . secretius tamen atque peculiarius, ed. Krusch,
321), 85. Having accustomed ourselves to the often extensive communities of the east, it is worth
attending to hints at scale: three monks, for example, in V. pat. xv; collectis secum paucis monachis in Gloria
79, ed. Krusch, 347. Yet Gregory the Great would attribute Rome’s safety from the Lombards to the
prayers of 3,000 nuns within its walls, Ep. 7.23. A founder: V. pat. ix.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

77° 25. MONASTICISM

were soon endowed with fields and woodland, came under the influence of
royal patronage, and spawned their own dependent foundations. 88 Cassian
and Martin are mentioned still. 89 In Gregory’s anecdotes we see at one and
the same time the development of a rich monastic culture along the reaches
of the Loire and the lasting influence of the Rhone communities, reaching
into areas further north. Economic conditions are faithfully recorded.
Gardens provided for immediate needs; but cereal crops were also grown,
and ascetics worked on the land of others. 90 In a couple of instances, a
more rural monastery and the nearby village appear to have been almost
intertwined, both in close association with the local church. 91 Such vig-
nettes provide us with a more secure image of varied monastic practice in
the sixth-century west (for we shall discover parallels in Benedict’s Italy),
and modify the rigid impression we might gain from the hopeful prescrip-
tions of church councils (presided over, of course, by bishops eager to
maintain a disciplined conformity and to assert their pastoral rights). 92

Both the tone and the motive of those conciliar decrees remind us that
the Gallic church in the sixth century, in ascetic matters as in others, was in
need of reform. Aweary sense of decline, characteristic of the period gen-
erally in both east and west, is evident in many of the specifically ascetic
sources we have examined; and we need not attribute it always to outraged
conservatism or tremulous eschatology. Gregory himself, albeit a bishop
with little experience of monasticism in his own life, and not unsuscepti-
ble to the advantages of local eminence or royal patronage, had an honest
enough sense of the room for improvement. Yet the crucial pressure, in
the case of specifically monastic reform, came from outside the Frankish
kingdoms, and is exemplified most obviously in the career of the Irishman
Columbanus. Born in the 5 40s, he arrived in Gaul just as Gregory was com-
pleting his Histories. After travelling in the Loire region (providing further

88 V. pat. xn. See also the account of Martius, xiv, with subordinate propositus.

89 V. pat. xx.3, following the suggestion of James (1985) 157. Compare possible dependence on
Martin — post maestri dogmata , ed. B. Krusch; 330 — Gloria 56.

90 V. pat. x.i (garden and hired labour), xvin.2 (corn and a mill); Gloria 23 (where the attractiveness

of the garden is also stressed), 81 (bees), 96. 91 Gloria zzf., 56.

92 The council of Orleans (a.d. 51 i) set the tone for the coming century: ‘Abbots should think of
themselves, in the interests of religious humility, as subject to the authority of bishops; and, if in any
matter they act in breach of the rule, the bishops should correct them’ (canon 1 9, ed. C. de Clerq Concilia
Galliae, A..JH—A. 69 j {CCSL 148A) 1963, 10). See also Epaone (a.d. 517), canon 19 (episcopal control
over succession); Orleans (a.d. 5 3 3), canon 21 (vague subjection to episcopal prcecepta ); Arles (a.d. 5 54),
canons 2 and 3 (fairly broad); Tours (a.d. 567), canon 17 (excommunication; but note that canon 7
required the bishop to act in co-operation with other abbots); Narbonne (a.d. 589), canon 6 (against
harbouring criminals); and Auxerre (late sixth century), canons 23—6 (various specific controls). Few
councils in sixth-century Gaul concerned themselves with the internal discipline of monastic commu-
nities. The council of Tours (a.d. 5 67) was unusual in insisting on a common dormitory (rather than
individual or shared cells), and drew up rules for fasting (canons 1 5 and 18). If, on the other hand, a
monk withdrew from a community — ‘to build himself a cell’, for example: a practice viewed with
caution, but allowed for— then he exposed himself to direct episcopal control: Orleans (a.d. 5 1 1), canon
22.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

77 1

evidence of its contacts across the Channel), he established a monastery at
Luxeuil in Burgundy, some 1 50 km north of Condat. It developed eventu-
ally into an important centre of medieval monasticism, together with
Bobbio, which Columbanus founded later in northern Italy. He died in a.d.
615.

There is a certain irony in this startling and far from welcome intrusion.
Fifth-century monks had made a contribution to developments in Ireland,
often via Britain and its more immediate Celtic neighbours: not only
Patrick, but also shadowy figures like Riochatus (a friend of Faustus of
Riez), 93 the disciples and successors of Ninian at Whithorn (the famous
Candida Casa, dedicated to Martin of Tours), 94 and of Illtud and David in
Wales. 95 Now the influence began to flow strongly in the other direction.
Columbanus’ original rules — the Regula monachorum and the Regula ccmobialis
— were written during his earliest years in south-eastern Gaul, before a.d.
610. They owed something to Benedict (proving his growing influence) but
more to the older traditions of Basil and Cassian. Like Cassian,
Columbanus issued more theoretical advice than positive prescriptions.
The harsh and repetitive punishments of the Regula ccmobialis — five blows
for this offence, fifteen for that — are disappointing in their allusions, betray-
ing only in the baldest terms the silence, order and deference expected of
each monk. 96 But more than a century of Irish independence had carried
the monastic society of the island away from the stifling control of the
secular nobility, harnessed it to a more pastoral concern for rural converts,
and charged it with a Celtic vigour and that righteous attachment to high
standards in dedication and observance so obvious in the writings of the
Welshman Gildas (died c. 570). 97 Not surprisingly, the emphasis estranged
Columbanus from royalty in Gaul, especially Theuderic II of Burgundy
and his notorious grandmother Brunhild. Thanks to his admiration for
Gregory the Great and his loyalty to Roman authority generally, he
acquired an increasingly detailed knowledge of Benedict’s achievements in
Italy, continued to introduce his principles into his own regime, and even-
tually crossed the Alps in search of more sympathetic surroundings.

Two issues have, for more than a generation, dominated the study of
Benedict: the relationship between his own Rule and the Regula magistri, and

93 Sid. Ap. Ep. 9.9. 94 Bede, HE 111.4.

95 Illtud may have come from northern Gaul. Much of our information comes from later hagiogra-
phy, which is unreliable; but dedications and archaeology provide useful hints. Ireland is well placed in
the wider European context by Mayr-Harting (1991) esp. (for our purposes) 3 3—9, 78— 85 .

96 Columbanus’ works are edited by G. S. M. Walker (Dublin 1957). Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms , pro-
vides extensive, documented, convenient reference. See also Clarke and Brennan (1981) and the com-
mentaries provided by Adalbert de Vogue (1989) in collaboration with Pierre Sangiani and Sister
Jean-Baptiste Juglar.

97 His preoccupations were not predominantly monastic; but he may have been a pupil of Illtud, and
he travelled abroad as far as Rome in the Ostrogothic period. For some background, see Higham (1994).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

772 25. MONASTICISM

the role of Gregory the Great in making Benedict more widely known,
especially in the second book of his Dialogues. Both investigations have
questioned, in a sense, the originality of Benedict; but the answers given
have shown at once the traditional nature of his contribution and the par-
ticular qualities that mark his genius and lasting significance.

There is now widespread agreement that Benedict drew heavily upon the
Regula magistri, which was probably written in the vicinity of Rome during
the first quarter of the sixth century. By that time, ascetic developments in
southern Gaul were well-known in Italy, and political and ecclesiastical
events — the Ostrogothic settlement and the attempts to solve the Acacian
schism — were encouraging new relationships between the eastern and
western sectors of the empire, represented at the ascetic level, for example,
by the Latin Life of Pachomius written by Dionysius Exiguus, himself an
easterner. So, when Sigismund of Burgundy presided over the foundation
of the monastery of St Maurice at Agaune in 515, eastern relics were
installed and elements adopted from the liturgical practice of the Accemitce
in Constantinople, while prescriptions were borrowed from the heirs of
the Lerins tradition. The monastery was destined to exert considerable
influence during the century and more to follow . 98

The unknown ‘Master’ of the Regula magistri was intent upon preserving
a detailed system, thoroughly protected against the world around it, in
which the common dormitory, refectory and oratory, together with a
garden and outhouses, were surrounded by a wall. Other types of ascetic
community, more open, more loosely structured and more mobile (and
presumably still common), were severely criticized . 99 An abbot, two subor-
dinate and equal superiors, a cellarer, a porter and weekly teams with
domestic duties were described in terms not unlike those of Pachomius;
but hierarchy was valued for its own sake, based on secular models . 100 An
immensely detailed liturgy departed quite significantly from the customs of
Lerins, with great stress on reading and meditatio — ancient qualities reflected
also in the single daily meal. The ‘Master’ appeared to accept clear divisions
in the community, based on literary and technical skill, although he seems
to have been aware that the monastery might thereby encourage within its
own walls the social divisions of the secular world . 101 The features that dis-
tinguish this rule most famously are its careful submission to the authority
of the bishop , 102 and its emphasis within the monastery on the submission
of pupil to teacher. The very title of ‘master’ displays that preference. The

98 The Acmmitce had long had a reputation for attachment to western views of orthodoxy. Among
other later impressions, see Greg. Tur. Hist. in. 5 f. For links with Lerins and the Jura, see De Vogue
(1982) 439f., 447; Theurillat (1954) and Masai (1971).

99 Regula magistri (ed. A. de Vogiie, 3 vols.) ( SChret. ) 105—7)) LI 3 , LXI and lxxviii express typical and
detailed caution. 100 See, for example, Regula magistri xi.5f. 101 Regula magistri L.72, 76k

102 Most clearly formulated in relation to the abbot, Regula magistri xcm.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

773

rule is preoccupied with vertical communication between superior and
subject rather than with relationships among the subjects themselves. The
document is presented as a series of questions and answers, the disciple
seeking guidance, evoking the style of Cassian or Basil, but to different
effect.

Here, then, was one of Benedict’s sources; but one only. He was in many
ways a syncretist, working in a world where Caesarius and his associates
could influence developments in Ravenna as easily as in Poitiers. 103 For
some considerable time, his own Rule was to be popularized most effectively
in conjunction with Caesarius and with the later Columbanus. Even more
important, his use of the Regula magistri was tempered in a fundamental way
by his dependence on the more social emphases of Augustine. Reading his
Rule, one is reminded constantly of the ‘Master’, and yet astonished no less
frequently by the skilfully interwoven attention to community life. In the
combination that did most to characterize his achievement, the community
now balanced, within a trinity of influences, the impact of both the abbot
and the rule. Obviously by the time his own Rule had developed, circum-
stances in Italy had changed once again, with the Gothic kingdom in disar-
ray, the armies and administrators of Justinian increasingly in command,
and the loyalties of Italians at once weakened and divided. It was a world in
which the very definition of community was open to reassessment, and
where the ability to maintain an effective economy was subject not only to
the stress of war but also to the loss of political focus and identity. No
wonder Benedict was more hesitant than his most famous Italian model,
offering in his own Rule no more than ‘the rudiments of monastic obser-
vance’, a ‘little rule for beginners’. Cassian, the Vita patrum and the rules of
Basil were deemed more exhaustive guides. 104

We owe our biographical knowledge of Benedict to Gregory the Great.
The critical problem is whether the portrait provided in the latter’s Dialogues
(completed in a.d. 5 94) has accurately recorded the milieu of the Regula
magistri and of Benedict’s own Rule. Did Gregory, one might almost say,
invent the Benedict who has become so familiar to history? In fact, the cor-
respondences are numerous and convincing. As Gregory wrote himself,
‘his life could not have differed from his teaching’. 105 In so far as doubts
remain, we have no reason to expect that a biographical account, with its
attention to change and incident, should reproduce exactly the impressions
we may gain from a series of static prescriptions. Rules are not biographies

103 See Gregory the Great, Ep. 12.6; Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. viii.i, and Greg. Tur. Hist. 111.7,

VI. 29^

104 Regula Benedicti (ed. A. de Vogue, 6 vols. [SChret. 18 1—6)) lxxiii: initium conversationis . . . hanc
minimam inchoationis regulam , ed. McCann, 160/ 162.

105 G re gory the Great, Dialogues (ed. A. de Vogue, 3 vols. ( SChret . 257, 260, 265)) 11.36: nullo modo potuit
aliter do cere quam vixit , ed. De Vogue, 2.242. Gregory’s own point was that the Rule itself was almost a
biography, a portrait of the man.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

774

25 . MONASTICISM

— a point to bear in mind when we consider the Pachomian corpus or the
vitae of Gallic wonder-workers.

Nevertheless, Gregory did have points to make that were peculiar to
himself. One should not underestimate the complexity of his motives. Like
his Pastoral Care , the Dialogues bear the stamp of the former prefect; of a
man used to the exercise of authority and skilful in political as well as moral
rhetoric. The audience of the work was not merely ascetic, or even clerical:
Gregory wished to present images of practical sanctity to Lombards as well
as Romans, to the powerful of the visible world, with whom he felt he had
now to collaborate. So his portrait of Benedict is somewhat marked by that
context. The irony was that, whether in religious or political terms, neither
Benedict nor Gregory could foresee with accuracy, let alone control, the
Lombard future.

Central to the Dialogues, nevertheless, as to much else from Gregory’s
pen, was a more intimate concern for the relation between contemplation
and action. That could be taken partly, although only partly, as a distinction
between monastery and world. He wrestled with the problem of how one
might make spiritual insight available to a busier society, without losing the
tranquillity and perception of the contemplative state. (As for Benedict —
by no means averse, as we shall see, to concern for the outside world — he
believed that sustained attention to the realm of the spirit would automat-
ically school a monk to usefulness in the service of others.)

The bishop of Rome was also preoccupied with the issue of authority
and leadership. Who was fit to take the helm in yet another set of circum-
stances? — for the Lombards, occupying the vacuum left by Gothic col-
lapse, had done so amidst widespread destruction, which heralded, in
Gregory’s view, the imminent end of the world . 106 Perhaps it was that sense
of urgency that explained his determination to extend the boundaries of
Christendom as far as he could, encouraging at least the beginnings of a
missionary fervour among western churchmen. Monks had been no more
enthusiastic for such an enterprise previously than any other leaders in the
church. Their pastoral endeavours among desert tribesmen or mountain
villagers had represented only tiny movements on the Mediterranean map.
In the seventh century, by contrast, Columbanus and other exiles —peregrini
pro Christo — were to develop a quite new enthusiasm for distant travel, even
beyond the current boundaries of the empire, dragging disciples of
Benedict and other pioneers in their wake. To that extent, at least, they pro-
vided circumstances in which a more deliberately pastoral policy, such as
that of Gregory himself, could find support and promise growth . 1 " 7

Finally, we would not expect a pope to be indifferent to the economic
fortunes of the west, who administered estates under his own jurisdiction

106 Dial. 111.38.3 especially; see also 111.37.21; iv.43.2. That sense of doom is widespread in Gregory’s
writings, especially in the Moralia and his commentary on Kings.

107 Note the judicious caution of Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms 3 1 1 — 1 5 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

775

with laborious scruple, and congratulated in his Dialogues a miraculous
power among holy men that habitually averted flood and disease, enhanced
fertility, and provided abundance in time of famine.

So the Dialogues placed Benedict in a broad ascetic context, much of it
now familiar. 108 Alongside the many monasteries, described in the first book
most of all, Gregory mentioned hermits and near-hermits, 109 and even
ascetics who had come from the east, bringing with them customs that
would not have seemed out of place in the writings of John of Ephesus or
Cyril of Scythopolis. 110 Benedict’s contemporaries and immediate disciples
would have jostled with such assorted company. Among them we may even
include the erudite Cassiodorus (about whom Gregory was silent), an exile
in the east after his distinguished but finally embittered career in
Ostrogothic government, and now returned to found something approach-
ing a monastery at Vivarium. 111 In the matter of authority, bishops had
some pre-eminence, as envisaged by Justinian’s Pragmatic Sanction of a.d.
5 54; but Gregory could be surprisingly cautious about the extent of their
control in monastic matters, and recommended in practise a very literal
adherence to the precedents established at Chalcedon, keeping bishops well
away from the internal affairs of communities, in Gaul as well as Italy. While
the third book of the Dialogues was devoted to the thesis that bishops could
be (or should be) as holy as anyone, and showed them at work among
monks, Gregory did not disguise the fact that they could often be at odds
with superiors, in spite of being sometimes monks themselves or presiding
over ascetic households. 112 Holy men took their own initiatives, founding
communities; 113 and, like the clergy, they claimed a right to judge and
advise. 114 Not least because of that association, they were portrayed as
natural evangelists, as well as supporters of the poor. 115 Laymen exercised a
further patronage meanwhile, setting up buildings and even appointing
superiors, although their generosity was occasionally rejected. 111 ’

Within that framework of establishment, control and social concern,
ascetics of all types worked the land, miraculously and otherwise. While

108 Gregory included his own monastic experience, which may well have become disillusioned,
wedged as it was between the careers of a prefect and a pope. His famous letter to Leander, Ep. 5.5 3 a ,
admitted, in relation to the quies monasterii quia habendo non fortiter tenui, quam stride tenenda fuerit, perdendo
cognovi. See also Dial. 1, preface. 109 Dial. 111.14.2f., 16. if., 17. if., 18. if.; 1v.31.2f.

110 Certainly Isaac the Syrian, living in a church and gathering disciples around himself, Dial.
in. 14.2— 5. Possibly the cave-dwelling Martin criticized by Benedict for wearing chains, in. 16.9.
Probably the Menas of in. 26. if. See also 1v.37.3f, 40.1 of.

111 Whatever justice allows us to think of him as a ‘monk’ has to be based on a reading of his
Institutions (ed. Mynors (1937)), hardly the work of one scienter nesciuA

112 For examples of close bonds between ascetic and clerical careers, see Dial. 1.4.3 k, 9 passim-,

in. 13. 1, 22.1, 36.1; iv.33 passim. Much is implied less directly elsewhere. Gregory’s caution was
expressed mostly in his letters: see Ep. 3.58, 7.12, 13.12. 113 Dial. 1.1.3, 1v.11.1f.

114 Dial. n. 23 and 25 make the connection with Benedict, basing authority on experience and insight.

115 Dial. 1.1.5k, 4.8; in. 1 5.2, 34.2k

116 Dial. n. 35. 1 provides a detailed instance. See also n.22.1, in. 1 5.2. Contrasting caution is betrayed
in in. 14.4k, iv.9.1. A peasant surrendered his goods to Benedict for safe keeping, 11.31.1k

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

776

25. MONASTICISM

some groups were reluctant to accept outside employment (Benedict could
be particularly strict in that regard ), 117 others hired themselves to neigh-
bouring farmers in a fashion long traditional in the east . 118 ‘I can lay claim
to no particular profession’, said one, ‘but I do know how to keep a good
garden .’ 1 19 Gardens figure frequently in Gregory’s account, hinting perhaps
at the commonest form of material support for ascetics, the small-scale
cultivation of vegetables. 12 " Reference to endowment, therefore, need not
suggest large properties ; 121 but olives are mentioned, and some ascetics at
least had land enough on which to grow grain for their annual needs . 122
Gregory’s own correspondence provides useful details of endowments,
especially where urban communities depended on revenue from rural
properties . 123

Benedict was presented also as a contemplative, in Gregory’s special
sense; scienter nescius et sapienter indoctus, to use the famous phrase: ‘ignorant
but informed, untutored but wise ’. 124 Hidden in the ‘desert’ of Subiaco, he
attracted disciples, while worrying about the threat to his contemplatio ; a
whole community of ascetics invited him to be their abbot . 125 His eventual
influence was the inevitable outcome of his early discipline and under-
standing. He represented the era (documented no less by Gregory of
Tours) when miracles were performed once more by the living and not
simply at the tombs of the dead . 126 He founded monasteries of his own in
conjunction with lay patrons, exercising that concern for other ascetics that
was natural in a monk . 127 Nor did he forget to engage in preaching the
Christian faith and alleviating need . 128

Gregory wished to make one basic point. The Rule of Benedict, which
he referred to and had undoubtedly consulted, was designed in his eyes to
make a particular brand of sanctity available to society as a whole — society
being here defined as the Christian church. That sanctity was at once per-
ceptive, powerful and generous, schooled by reflection and service. The
discipline of the Rule itself conformed entirely to that ideal. When it comes
to the order of the monastic day, Cassian, Lerins, Caesarius and the ‘Master’
will have fortified us against surprises: the variations are in most respects
minor and do not touch the essence of the ‘Benedictine spirit’. Gregory’s
occasional references to buildings give solid shape to the way of life

117 Dial. 1.7.5,11.12. 118 Dial 1.4. 12, 11.32. if.

119 Dial. hi. 1.3: artem quidem aliquam nescio, sed hortum bene excolere scio, ed. De Vogue, 2.260.

120 Dial. 1.3.2, 4.7; 11.6.1; 1n.14.6f.; iv.23.1 (produce given to refugees).

121 Dial. 1.7.2. Benedict’s straitened circumstances in 11.21.1f hint at limited agricultural opportu-
nities. 122 Dial. 1.7.5; n.33.2; iv.20.2.

123 Ep. 9.137 especially — a Roman example — and see also 2.10, 9.197, 13.12.

124 Dial. 11, preface. The paradox is repeated in m.37.20. 125 Dial, ii.if.

126 Dial. 11. 1 6. 1. For the insight of the living preferred to the power of the dead, see iv.9.

127 Dial. 11.22 provides a vivid example. For the principle, see iv.i 1.3.

128 Preaching, Dial. 11.8.2, 19.1; generosity, 11.28.1, in the context of 1.3.4 and 1v.23.1f

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

111

demanded in the Rule — the oratory for prayers, the refectory for common
meals, a kitchen, and a hospice for strangers. 129 More important, however,
is Benedict’s constant attention to the foundations of community life. The
abbot was master, but one above all who cared for the weak and was
answerable to authorities beyond himself. He presided over a distinct and
protected society, whose members varied in their strengths and abilities,
although they were not thereby divided according to secular categories and
expectations. This community prayed briefly and intensely, and dedicated
itself otherwise to work and to service, remaining open always to requests
and visitations. It saw itself as making no more than a start in religious
devotion, and acknowledged the rich tradition from which it sprang. 130

The simplicity and earnestness of the Benedictine Rule demands of us,
as it demanded of the monk himself, an answer to the question: what was
the purpose of those institutional experiments? The hesitancy of Benedict
himself, the wealth of Gregory’s Dialogues , the evident variety of ascetic
practice, even at the end of the sixth century, all point to an enduring pola-
rity, a cautious attempt to balance contrasting but compatible ambitions.
On the one hand, one sought guidance in the development of insight and
self-mastery, and preserved a sense of loyalty to ascetic masters and to
fellow devotees. On the other hand, one sympathized with the weak and
the needy, gave them what help one could, and worked to give more.
Obscured at times by demonic fears and eccentric exaggerations, those
motives remain evident in the anecdotal sources that provide so much of
our information about the east. An attachment to discipleship, mutual
encouragement and service was no less evident in western practice. The
proliferation of regula and the textual problems that beset our understand-
ing of their development, coupled with our knowledge that the Rule of
Benedict did eventually gain paramount authority over an extensive and
highly organized system of communities, can blind us to the similarity of
practice and attitude that bound all ascetics together. And that consistency
of motive and principle does most to remind us how asceticism was linked
with and contributed to wider late Roman debates about authority, educa-
tion and tradition.

There was, indeed, a theory of the ascetic life, widely known and con-
stantly appealed to. Its embodiment in practical discipline was developed
in the writings of Evagrius of Pontus (died 399), but the tradition was
rooted in the works of Origen, and was extended in other ways by the con-
temporaries of Evagrius, Basil of Caesarea and the two Gregorys of

129 Dial. 11. 22.1; to which add 11.8.5, 9 an d 10; m.i 5.2.

130 Abbot: Regula Benedicti m.if.; xxvii.6; LXiv.jf.; lxv. Seclusion: 1 and lxi. Categories of person:
11. 12; but compare XLVin.23 with Regula magistri l, and see Regula Benedicti 11.18; xxi.4; Lix.3. See
Gregory’s account in Dial. 11.20. Prayer: xx.3f. Work: preface, 14, 45. External relations: iv; liii.i6; but
lxvi.6£ is more aligned to the Regula magistri.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

77 «

25 . MONASTICISM

Nazianzus and Nyssa. The names of all those men recur constantly in the
ascetic literature of our later period. Cassian was a faithful disciple of
Evagrius; Dorotheus of Gaza, at the other end of the empire and period,
was steeped in the thought of Origen and the Cappadocians. (The date of
Dorotheus’ death is unknown. After apprenticeship under the guidance of
Barsanuphius and John at Thavath — Hilarion’s native village, close to the
settlement in exile of Esaias of Seeds — he established a monastery of his
own c. 540.)

Cassian’s writings were charged with an Alexandrian optimism. The
ascetic was made in the image of God; and the perfection of that image,
the re-establishment of union with the creator, was in some sense a natural
expectation, based on the development of innate qualities. The path to
fulfilment lay in self-knowledge and self-mastery. Knowledge became
accurate and effective when Xoyia/ioi, cogitationes, the constant movements
of thought and imagination, were identified, ordered and focused in tran-
quillity. Mastery, a parallel enterprise, consisted in control of tto-Ool, pas-
siones, the clouded and disturbing movements of the heart. Every external
prescription was seen by Cassian as underpinning that interior task. 131
‘Thought’ and ‘passion’ replaced the demon. The corresponding virtues
were seen as forming a unity. No success against anger, for example, would
weaken the struggle against greed: any step forward would bring its reward
in an integrated drama of self-possession. The result, albeit based on vigi-
lance and effort, was a genuine freedom: freedom from fear of one’s own
inadequacy, of temptation, of judgement; freedom that accepted submis-
sion to others, because it guaranteed trust and affection. The gradual
achievement of that balance represented in part a movement from irpcu<-
TLKTj to deajprjTLKri, from the ‘active’ to the ‘contemplative’ life. It gave
asceticism an historical dimension both personal and social. In the latter
case, the monk acquired a place in the general unfolding of salvation: the
purity of intention that had characterized the early Christians injerusalem,
compromised with time, was restored within the monasteries, set, there-
fore, at the heart of the church. (To that extent, Cassian shared the view of
Augustine.) In the individual’s life, one might pass from coenobitic practice
to the more contemplative life of the hermit. In the event, as we know,
Cassian catered most for community life; and in the very passages where
he creates his more general history, he emphasizes the usefulness of ascet-
icism in the company of others. 132

Moving at once from Cassian to Dorotheus, from Latin back to Greek
and across more than a century, the tenacity of the spiritual tradition is
made obvious by the similarity of their approach. Dorotheus’ allusions to
his Palestinian milieu combine the impression gained from Cyril of

131 Inst.1v.31l. 132 Con. xviii above all; but see also xvi.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

MONASTICISM

779

Scythopolis with the traditions proper to Esaias and the Egyptian exiles
around Gaza. The letters and responses of Barsanuphius continue to
reflect the practices of the fifth and early sixth century: the laura system of
solitaries surrounded by coenobites, served by their close disciples and bad-
gered by the curiosity of laymen and clerics. It seems, however, that against
both the rigour and the disorder of that world Dorotheus eventually
revolted, feeling obliged to set up a community of his own, for which he
wrote the ZliSacwaAtai WvxoofeXels, his Instructions for the Help of Souls.
There was still plenty of reference to the practicalities of the monastic
regime; to hard work and continuous reflection, with a characteristically
eastern emphasis on exile, the life of the ‘stranger’; and to respect for the
traditions of the elders . 133 The more inward attainments, such as that of
humility, Dorotheus’ favourite virtue, were seen as part of a history of sal-
vation, reversing Adam’s pride; and the Evagrian focus on passion and cor-
responding virtue was faithfully maintained . 134 Dorotheus recommended
constant consultation, the disclosure and assessment of XoyLafxoL. The
relation of master and disciple was essentially one of trust, which was the
only acceptable justification for obedience in the Pachomian tradition. 13 '’
Dorotheus was also attentive, like Cassian and Benedict, to relations within
the community: relations at once tactful, instructive and warm . 1 ’ 6 In a
sense, he had reversed the direction of ascetic theory in a way that both
Cassian and Euthymius had recognized: surrendering a passionate desire
for rjovxia, the silence of the solitary life, in exchange for vrjifns, a tranquil
self-possession induced in oneself by the company of others, and then
offered to others as the best encouragement in a common task.

It is refreshing to find so sober and considerate a view of self-improve-
ment surviving amidst the turmoil and untidiness of eastern ascetic prac-
tice. Successfully transplanted to the west in Cassian’s works, it had also
inspired both Benedict and Gregory the Great. Ascetics could be cruel both
to themselves and to others, with little apparent benefit and a considerable
degree of injustice. Yet enough of them paid heed to theoretical principle
and held fast to the challenge of combining self-mastery and usefulness.
The skill lay in pursuing a vision of God that avoided blindness to the needs
and aspirations of others. Basil had known as much, and Pachomius. Nearly
two centuries later, the TarreLvcooLS, the humility of Dorotheus was echoed
in Benedict’s dominici schola servitii, the ‘school of the Lord’s service ’. 137

And for all his concern with theory, for all his emphasis on the inner life,
there is enough anecdote in Dorotheus’ text and enough humanity in the

133 Didasc. xi provides many details of the regime; for other points, i.i i, 11.37, vi.69, xiv.i 5 3.

134 Didasc. 1.7, xn.134.

135 See Didasc. v.6i£, and Ep. 2. The attitude of vii.85 was essential to the ahtaKpiros imaKorj —

so often translated ‘blind obedience’ — of 1.25. 136 Didasc. iv passim , vi-77f., and Ep. i.i8of.

137 Didasc. 1.7; Regula Benedicti preface, 45.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

25 . MONASTICISM

780

man himself to make his work a fitting conclusion to our whole investiga-
tion. For the chief impression given by ascetics in that age is of vigorous
independence. In the end, it is not the eccentricities of the hermit or the
discipline of the coenobite that captures chief attention. In particular, the
history of asceticism in the fifth and sixth century does not revolve around
the relative merits and victories of the eremitic and the coenobitic life.
True, much of ascetic literature adopts a position on one side or the other
in that debate; but that may have been a feature more of texts and their
authors than of less self-conscious devotees. Deeper than those social
configurations, there lay a firm belief in discipleship.

The practical implications of such belief were varied. Most obviously,
imitation and respect, perhaps even obedience, and certainly trust were
central to a disciple’s life. The ascetic was also, along with the master, heir
to a tradition, partly oral, partly written, perceived in either case as ortho-
dox, guaranteed to reflect and fulfil the will of God, encouraging ‘a virtue
and morality that was worthy of the faith ’. 138 Discipleship involved also
continuous application, a life of concentrated labour. Regardless of social
complexities, that labour was universally perceived as a mixture of prayer,
fasting and manual work. The quality above all that set that heritage in
motion was authority: an authority recognized in the master, and acquired
in turn by the disciple.

All else we have observed remained subordinate to those concerns. Even
in the most ordered and crowded community, the individual ascetic had
models to admire and personal goals to achieve; and both admiration and
achievement were often dependent on quite intimate relations. There was,
in the end, a hidden stillness to asceticism that community life, paradoxi-
cally, could only make more intense. Any doubts we may retain about the
reasonableness or honesty of late Roman asceticism rests precisely on the
ultimate inaccessibility of the individual spirit.

What we can discern, however, is the immense variety of behaviour that
resulted. Wherever we capture a close picture of the formed ascetic in
action, we observe an individual, a man or woman recognizably inspired by
widely accepted practices, but bringing to the tasks of self-improvement an
attitude and a taste entirely their own. ‘Holiness’, as understood at the time,
was not a matter of conformity to anything so transient as a regular regime,
but was based on the closest possible engagement with the invisible God.
Among those who might claim to have come nearest success, that inner
victory displayed itself upon the surface of each one’s personality in ways
that no one else could lay claim to. If there was anything, nevertheless, that
they truly shared, it sprang only, in their eyes, from their being disciples of
a common Lord.

138 Zach. HE 11 . 5 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 26

HOLY MEN

PETER BROWN

Some time in the 520s, the Great Old Man Barsanuphius, an Egyptian
recluse, wrote from his cell in the vicinity of Gaza, in order to comfort a
sick and dispirited monk:

I speak in the presence of Christ, and I do not lie, that I know a servant of God,
in our generation, in the present time and in this blessed place, who can also raise
the dead in the name of Jesus our Lord, who can drive out demons, cure the
incurable sick, and perform other miracles no less than did the aposdes . . . for
the Lord has in all places his true servants, whom he calls no more slaves but sons
(Galatians 4.7) ... If someone wishes to say that I am talking nonsense, as I
said, let him say so. But if someone should wish to strive to arrive at that high
state, let him not hesitate.

(Barsanuphius, Correspondance 91, trans. Regnault (1971) 84)

Throughout the Christian world of the fifth and sixth century, the
average Christian believer (like the sick monk, Andrew) was encouraged to
draw comfort from the expectation that, somewhere, in his own times,
even, maybe, in his own region, and so directly accessible to his own dis-
tress, a chosen few of his fellows had achieved, usually through prolonged
ascetic labour, an exceptional degree of closeness to God. God loved them
as his favoured children. He would answer their prayers on behalf of the
majority of believers, whose own sins kept them at a distance from him.
Thus, when the bubonic plague struck the eastern Mediterranean in 542/ 3,
the Great Old Man wrote at once to reassure his monks on the state of the
world:

There are many who are imploring the mercy of God, and certainly no one is more
a lover of mankind than he, but he does not wish to show mercy, for the mass of
sins committed in the world stands in his way. There are, however, three men who
are perfect before God, who have transcended the measure of human beings and
who have received the power to bind and to loose, to remit our faults or to retain
them. They stand upright in the breach (Psalms 105.23) to ensure that the world is not
wiped out at one blow, and, thanks to their prayers, God will chastise with mercy
. . . They are John, at Rome, Elias, at Corinth, and another in the province of
Jerusalem. And I am confident that they shall obtain that mercy.

(Barsanuphius, Correspondance 569, Regnault (1971) 369)

781

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 8z

26. HOLY MEN

Himself a total recluse, Barsanuphius was unusual in the emphasis that
he placed on the power of prayer alone, when offered by such saints. Of
the three that he mentioned, one was studiously anonymous, and the other
two are not known as ‘holy men’ from any other sources.

The modern historian of late antiquity, however, tends to approach the
issue of sanctity from another direction. He is interested in the well-known
phenomenon of the role allotted to living holy persons within the Christian
communities, and, more generally, within the religious imagination of the
period. What he wishes to find — and finds in impressive abundance — are
the writings of those who believed in no uncertain terms that certain
figures, ‘servants of God’, ‘friends of God’, ‘men of God’ (persons whom
for want of a better term we tend to call ‘holy men’), both existed and
should be seen to exist. The historian, in fact, concentrates on sources that
privilege the fully public deeds of holy men at the expense of the equally
intense and effective power of prayer frequently ascribed to more reclusive
persons, to holy women quite as much as holy men. This chapter will follow
the grain of a modern historiographical interest, in that it isolates for exam-
ination one category only of holy persons: it will be about ‘holy men’, about
those ‘servants of God’, that is, whom contemporaries believed to have
been specially chosen by God, in their own time, as in past ages, to show
forth the power of his arm, through the coruscatio , the forceful lightning-
flash, of visible miracles.

Holy men of this kind played a crucial role in the religious imagination
of many late antique persons. They made the Christian God present in their
own age and locality; and they did so to such an extent that disbelief came
to focus less on the existence of the Christian God so much as on his will-
ingness to provide a distant human race — and especially the unkempt
inhabitants of a given region — with the crowning mercy of palpable human
agents of his will. At the same time as Barsanuphius, near Gaza, was writing
his letters, a farmer on the high plateau behind the coastline of Lycia was
unimpressed when told by his neighbour of visits to the holy man,
Nicholas of Sion:

What is this ‘servant of God’? As the Lord God lives, I would not put my trust in
any man on earth. {Life, 22, ed. Sevcenko and Sevcenko (1984) 43)

Lapidary though such statements of belief and disbelief might be, their
very trenchancy served to veil — from contemporaries quite as much as
from modern historians — a whole range of conflicting assumptions that
surrounded the figure of the holy man in late antiquity. The very possibil-
ity that such persons might exist raised basic questions on the relations
between God and human beings that received sharply different answers in
different Christian regions.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

783

That sanctity, when achieved, should show itself at all to the world in the
form of popular and much sought-after physical ‘signs’ — such as healing,
exorcism, successful intercessory prayer for safety from natural disasters,
prophecy, blessing and cursing — was an issue that caused the finest repre-
sentatives of the selfsame ascetic tradition that produced the overwhelm-
ing majority of holy persons to think carefully about what such a gift might
mean to those who had received it, and how it should be best deployed.
Thus Gregory the Great, in Rome, would ‘draw ever new refreshment’
from tales told by old men of the deeds of the holy men and women of his
native Italy, in his Dialogues (Gregory, Dialogi 1.10.20). Yet, in the same years,
he could write to warn the monk Augustine in a.d. 60 1 of the very real spir-
itual perils involved in living up to current expectations as a wonder-
working missionary among the barbarians of Kent:

for the weak mind may be raised up by self-esteem, and so the very cause for which
it is raised on high, through honour from outsiders, may lead, through vainglory,
to an inner fall. (Gregory, Registrum xi. 3 6; also in Bede, HE 1. 3 1)

No agreement was reached on such matters by Christian writers of the
period. From the Iona of Columba (who died in the same year, 597, as
Augustine reached Kent from Rome) to the Nestorian communities of
Mesopotamia, Iran and central Asia (whose representatives reached China
in the same generation) an unmistakably late antique Christian language of
the holy, that expected ‘servants of God’ to make themselves known to the
world at large by ‘signs’, was spoken in a number of quite distinctive local
dialects. Given this situation, the purpose of this chapter is twofold. First,
to use the abundant evidence for attitudes towards the activities of living
holy persons in various Christian regions to bring into clearer focus,
through significant contrasts, the principal outlines of a human geography
of the holy within widely differing Christian communities. The second
follows from this: it is to seize the characteristics of the period as a whole,
from a.d. 425 to around 630, as one stage among many in the long process
of Christianization. For the activities of the Christian holy man provide
precious evidence for the slow building up, in different ways and in different
regions, of what Norman Baynes once called a ‘thought-world’, 1 a thought-
world that came to form the basis of the religious culture of Byzantium,
of the medieval west and of the Christian communities of the middle east.

It is easy to forget how slowly this thought-world took on unambigu-
ously Christian features in the late antique period. Yet part of the fascina-
tion of the Christian hagiography of these centuries is that it enables us to
glimpse Christianity itself against its wider background. Christianity

1 Baynes (i960) 24—46.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 8 4

26. HOLY MEN

appears more clearly in such texts than in any others as a relative newcomer,
perched against a very ancient spiritual landscape, whose principal con-
tours, in the form of notions of the nature and function of the holy, had
existed long before the rise of the Christian church to public favour.
Immovably, if indistinctly, visible out of the corner of the eye in even the
most unambiguously Christian texts, these permanent features were
renamed or subjected to selective inattention through the very act of
recording the hagiographic evidence that has come down to us. As a result,
the writing of the lives of active Christian saints became, for contemporar-
ies, a way of learning how to view the supernatural world in Christian
terms. The very repetitiveness and stereotyped form of the great majority
of our hagiographic sources, qualities which prove tiresome to historians
who have tended to use such sources as precious evidence for the day-to-
day realities of late Roman society, underline their role as part of a far larger
process. Piled one on top of the other over the generations, such stories
insensibly steered purveyor and audience alike towards particular views of
the working of the holy in the world, and tacitly excluded others.

It is not surprising, therefore, that the period should begin with what
would soon become ‘classic’ works of hagiography, designed to capture the
dazzling quality of the heroes of a ‘second Apostolic age’. 2 Sulpicius
Severus’ Life of Martin (of 396) and the further defence of his hero’s repu-
tation in the Dialogues (of 404—6), the Historia Monachorum and Ecclesiastical
History of Rufinus (of 402), the Lausiac History of Palladius (of 420) and
Theodoret of Cyrrhus’ History of the Friends of God (of 440) have a stark,
black-and-white quality about them: we see the late Roman world lit up in
great lightning- flashes coming from the direction of the desert. At the end
of our period, by contrast, we are dealing with a ‘late classical’ flowering of
a hagiography marked, rather, by a sense of the holy that is as infinitely
differentiated as the tints of an autumn landscape. Cyril of Scythopolis, in
his lives of the monks of Palestine (of 5 5 8), 3 Gregory, bishop of Tours
(573—94), in his History and Eight Books of Miracles (of the early 590s), 4 the
Monophysitejohn of Ephesus’ Lives of the Eastern Saints [pi the late 560s),’’
the Spiritual Meadow of the Chalcedonian, John Moschus (of around 614), 6
the Dialogues of Gregory the Great (of 5 93 — 4) 7 and the slightly later Lives
of Symeon the Holy Fool of Emesa and of John the Almsgiver by Leontius
of Neapolis (of 641— 2) 8 show us a world where the full range of the holy
has come to be caught in a fine web of Christian words. A recent study of
the workings of social memory has made plain that stories exist to

2 Ruggini (1981) and Thelamon (1981). 3 Tr. Price (1991); Flusin (1983).

4 Esp. Vita Patrum tr. James; Van Dam (1988).

5 Tr. E. W. Brooks, Lives of the Eastern Saints , in PO xvii— xix (1923—5); Harvey, A.sceticism and Society

in Crisis. 6 Trans. Wortley (1992). Chadwick (1974). 7 Ed. De Vogue, Dialogues.

8 Mango (1984a) and Deroche (1995).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN 785

provide us with a set of stock explanations which underlie our predisposition to
interpret reality in the ways that we do. 9

In the hagiography of the late sixth century, we are dealing with just this.
There is hardly an incident connected with the holy, from Tours to Amida
(modern Diyarbekir, eastern Turkey), which is not placed within a narra-
tive framework whose very banality and strong sense of deja vu serves to
make it seem utterly matter-of-fact — that this is how the holy works, and
in no other way.

It is important to have lingered over the nature of the sources that the his-
torian uses in approaching the holy man. They give the impression that the
‘holy man’ existed largely in the eye of the believer. This, of course, was not
the whole story. Contemporaries believed that sanctity was achieved
through ascetic labour, through humility and through the grace of God,
according to long traditions of spiritual guidance, of which we have more
abundant evidence for this period, the golden age of Christian ascetic
wisdom, than that provided by the vivid Lives of the saints, which form the
basis of modern studies of late antique hagiography. Yet, reassuring — even
infectious — though the undemonstrative sanctity of many Christian men
and women might be to their fellow believers, contemporaries wanted
something more from a holy man. Even though he might be careful always
to present himself as no more than one humble ‘servant of God’ among
many, in the quiet manner of a mature monastic tradition, the holy man was
frequently approached, in his own lifetime, as

a brilliant star, spreading its rays ... an unshakeable column . . . who puts demons
to flight, who gives healing to the sick, a father to orphans, a food-supply to the
poor, a covering to the homeless ... a source of repentance to all sinners and a
staff to the indigent. {Life of Theodore of Sykeon 2, ed. Festugiere (1970) 2)

To find anything else was disappointing. A peasant who had walked in to
Ancona to visit the holy man Constantius was very surprised to be shown
a little man perched half-way up a ladder, busily lighting the lamps of the
shrine. He had, of course, expected to find a grandis homo, a Big Man (Greg.
Dial. 1.5.5).

Certainly, the holy man came to be seen as such in retrospect. He was
almost invariably presented in this manner by those who had developed a
strong interest in his reputation — most often by disciples connected with a
monastic establishment that had grown perilously large in the lifetime of the
saint, and that faced a recession of gifts and visitors once the glory of his
living presence had departed. The Syriac Panegyric on Symeon Stylites
(396—459) was an oratorical performance, designed for the annual gathering

9 Fentress and Wickham (1992) 51.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

786

l6. HOLY MEN

that commemorated the greatest rain miracle of his career. It was a verbal
accompaniment to the spectacular new architecture of the pilgrimage
shrine set up around the base of what was now an empty column — a shrine
complete with baptistery, monastery, guest-hostel and triumphal way
leading up from the plain, that had come to weigh heavily on a once open
site occupied by the living Symeon on the limestone ridge at Telnesin. 111
Besa’s Life of Shenoute of Atripe (385—466) was written for a similar occa-
sion — the annual festival of the great abbot, celebrated beneath the lower-
ing walls of the White Monastery. 11 From Iona to Telnesin and upper
Egypt, the Life of a saint was less a biography than a recital of virtutes, of
deeds of power. It was narrated in such a way as to keep alive the expecta-
tion that such power would remain available to the pious for as long as the
respect once shown to its dead wielder continued to be shown by the
outside world to the monastery that guarded the holy man’s memory. 12

Apart from the precious letters of Barsanuphius and fragments of
sources, such as the ostraka of Epiphanius, a late-sixth-century hermit of
Thebes, we seldom catch a holy man in action through documents that
stem from himself — still less do we hear him talk about himself. As ‘ser-
vants of God’, many holy men simply placed a high value on self-
effacement. But there is more to it than that: a public man in an ancient,
epic tradition, the holy man as we usually meet him in his vita , was con-
demned, by the writers of hagiography, to ‘utter externality’. 13 It is only
where we would least expect it, from the Atlantic coast of fifth-century
Ireland, that we learn from the Confessio of Patricius the Briton (now known
to us as St Patrick) of what it was like to respond, as a slave in Mayo, to the
call of holiness in its late antique Christian form:

But after I reached Ireland, well, I pastured the flocks every day and I used to pray
many times a day: more and more did my love of God and my fear of Him
increase, and my faith grew and my spirit stirred, and as a result I would say up to
a hundred prayers in one day, and almost as many at night; I would even stay in the
forests and on the mountain and would wake to pray before dawn in all weathers,
snow, frost, rain: and I felt no harm and there was no listlessness in me - as I now
realise, it was because the Spirit was fervent within me.

(Patricius, Confessio 16, trans. A. B. E. Hood, St Patrick.

London and Chichester (1978) 44)

What matters for our account, however, as it did for many contemporar-
ies, was how a closeness to God, gained preferably in the wild, was seen to
act in the settled world. On this subject each late antique writer of hagiogra-
phy had his own firm notions of what constituted an appropriate narrative

10 Doran (1992). 11 Besa, Vita Sinuthii i, tr. Bell (1983) 41.

12 A fact seen most clearly in the reception of late antique hagiography in Ireland: Picard (1982) and
Herbert (1988). 13 Bakhtin (1981) 133.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

787

of the emergence and function of a holy person. Let us pass from west to
east, looking largely at the hagiography of the late sixth century, in order to
establish the distinctive features of what folklorists have called the ‘oiko-
type’, the ‘home type’, the ‘locally standardized species’ of accounts that
both justified and delimited the activities of holy persons in differing
Christian environments. 14

The hagiography of Gaul — not only the works of Gregory of Tours but
also earlier sources such as the Lives of the Fathers of the fura lb — suggest a
reticence in the face of living holy men which is, at first sight, surprising in
a world that consciously looked back to the classic study of a holy man in
action, written by an exact contemporary — the Life of Martin by Sulpicius
Severus. But it is easy to forget that, with Sulpicius, the memory of Martin
lingered for more than a generation as the special preserve of a profoundly
alienated segment of the Christian aristocracy of Gaul. 16 Martin’s miracles
were presented by Sulpicius himself as the desperate last gestures of a
prophet in a darkening world. They were performed, in part, to counter the
appeal of Antichrist, who, so Martin informed his disciples, had been born
in the east and was already a boy of eight (Sulp. Sev. Dial. 11.14).

A mood of ambivalence about the claims of living holy persons settled
heavily on the Christianity of Gaul. It went back to the cause celebre of
Priscillian, who had, after all, been known to have prayed successfully for
rain, and yet had ended his life executed as a common sorcerer. 17 The uncer-
tain light of the imagined approach of Antichrist heightened the need for
caution. All too many wonder-working ‘prophets’ came to enjoy a Christ-
like veneration in Gaul and Spain in the course of the fifth and sixth century.
They turned out to be ‘pseudo-prophets’, troubling heralds of Antichrist’s
presence in the world (Sulp. Sev., V. Mart. 24; Greg. Tur. Hist. x.25). In the
panic that accompanied the Hunnish invasion of 4 5 1 , St Genovefa narrowly
escaped being stoned by the citizens of Paris as one such ‘pseudo-prophet’
(Li Genovefae 12, ed. Krusch, MGH, Script, rer. Mer. 3 (1896) 219).

At the same time, devout aristocrats who admired those monks who fol-
lowed in the footsteps of Martin, such as were the late-fifth-century
hermits of the Jura, tended to keep memories of the holy ‘in the family’, as
it were, through intense but inward-looking networks of spiritual friend-
ship. The senatorial lady Syagria, for instance, kept the letters of St
Eugendus locked away in a cupboard ‘to kiss in lieu of the right hand of the
blessed man’, biting on them with her teeth in urgent search for healing (IT
Eugendi, \SPatn fur. 111.12, ed. Martine (1968) 145-6).

One suspects that in Gaul exacting social codes of diffidence among
pious aristocrats — oligarchic codes, partly moulded by envy and by a dislike

14 Fentress and Wickham (1992) 74. 15 Ed. Martine (1968). 16 Stancliffe (1983) 265—312.

17 Chadwick (1976).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

7 88

26. HOLY MEN

of parvenus of any kind, spiritual or social — combined with a sincere monas-
tic fear of vainglory. Elatio might ensue from any display of miraculous
powers, thereby turning the quiet ‘temple of the heart’ into a ‘place of mer-
chandise’. Self-interested drives might creep into the heart of a monk, once
he had the reputation of a wonder-worker to maintain in the face of a noto-
riously exacting audience of clients (V. Lupicini, V. Patr. Jur. 11.15, 114).
Only when dead and in the peace of God’s paradise could those dramatic
manifestations of spiritual power and effective patronage, that had been
latent in the soul of the living holy man, blaze forth for the good of all,
because freed by death from the all-too-human stain of vanity (Id Lupicini,
V. Patr. Jur. 11.16, 117).

When, in the 5 80s, Gregory of Tours began to look back to find mem-
ories of the holy men of his region, his failure to record more than a few
such persons reflected a complicated situation. On the one hand, as a
Gallo-Roman bishop, he had a strong interest in asserting the pre-eminent
importance of the shrine of his own city, that of St Martin of Tours. But,
loyal though he was to the cults of his adopted city and of his family,
Gregory had no insuperable aversion to other forms of Christian sanctity.
Local memory may have let him down. Though holy men and women had
doubtless played decisive roles, in their own lifetime, in extending the reach
of Christianity far beyond the cities into the countryside of Gaul, Spain
and the Rhine estuary, 18 they did not attract memories that were as endur-
ing as those associated, in Gregory’s mind and, one suspects, in the circles
within which he moved, with the urban tombs of the few great, long-dead
bishops. It was around these tombs that the faithful tended to swarm, ‘like
happy bees around their hive’, leaving on them a patina of expectations of
posthumous acts of power, as they begged the custodian priest for

pieces of wax ... a little dust ... a few threads of the tomb-covering, all carrying
off for some specific purpose the same grace of health.

(Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum viii.6)

One need only compare the Lives of the Fathers of Gregory of Tours with
the Life of Euthymius of Cyril of Scythopolis, written in 556, to realize the
extent of the lacuna brought about by the absence, in Gaul, of enduring
‘fixatives’ for the memory of holy living persons. In the monastic commu-
nities of the Judaean desert, memory itself could stand still for over a
century. The miracles that Cyril witnessed in 5 44 at the tomb of Euthymius,
who had been buried in 473, in the underground cave that had served him
as a cell, took place as long after Euthymius’ death as did any which
Gregory witnessed among the tombs of Gaul. But the links between the
generations were stronger in a world of great monasteries than they were

18 See esp. Hillgarth (1987), which corrects Brown (1981) 18—127, and Delaplace (1992).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

789

among the more hesitant Christian communities of Gaul. Memory was
supported by the intense and stable relationship of spiritual fathers to their
disciples: John the Hesychast, the spiritual father of Cyril, had himself been
the spiritual son of Sabas, who had, in turn, been directed, in his choice of
monastery, by none other than Euthymius. In the monastic foundations of
the area, every rock, cave and wadi told its own, unmoving story of former
ascetic occupants. As a result, Cyril, writing at the end of the reign of
Justinian, was able to reach back into the very first decades of the fifth
century (Cyr. Scyth. V. Euthjmii 60).

When Gregory the Great wrote his Dialogues in Rome in 5 9 3/4 (a decade
later, that is, than Gregory of Tours’ Ubri Miraculorum ), he also found
himself confronted with mere shards of local memory. Lombard invasions
in the past twenty years had destroyed many of the sites that had once been
associated with holy men. Benedict’s Monte Cassino had been sacked; the
sieve that hung in the church at Nursia as testimony to his first miracle had
disappeared; Lombard raids had effectively wiped out the ecclesiastical
organization of many of the cities of Campania and the Apennines that
had boasted holy ascetics in more sheltered times. Though he claimed to
write about the ‘modern fathers’ of Italy, Gregory looked back, in much of
his Dialogues, across the chasm of the Lombard invasion to the stormy days
of Totila’s last stand against the Byzantine armies in 546—51 and even,
further still, into the peaceful last decades of unchallenged Ostrogothic
rule. 19 The days were long past when good bishop Boniface of Ferentis had
provided a pair of Goths travelling to the court at Ravenna with a miracu-
lously inexhaustible bottle of wine, and when the holy man Florentius sat
quietly in the hills above Nursia, with a pet bear who knew the time of day
(Greg. Dial 1.9.4; m.15.4). All this must have seemed poignantly distant to
the beleaguered pope of the 5 90s.

Effectively wrenched, by warfare and emigration, from their local
context, the memories that came to Gregory could be organized, by him,
according to an ‘oikotype‘ that existed, largely, in his own, resolutely
Augustinian mind. The Dialogues took the form of a spiritual conversation
between Gregory and his loyal friend, the Roman deacon Peter. No other
writer of the age was in such a position, or had such a firm intention, to
pass local narratives through a theological filter of so line a mesh. 211

With Gregory, miracles were far more than an occasion for vainglory —
as they were also for Gregory of Tours — sensitive though he was to that
aspect of the problem. They were signa, signals sent from a distant God
through human agents on whom he had conferred the strictly temporary
grace of the ability to work wonders and to see, with his own eyes, the
hidden things of his providence. For Gregory, to be holy was to cling to

19 A fact well seen by Cracco (1992). 20 McCready (1989).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

z6. HOLY MEN

79 °

God, to make his will one’s own (Greg. Dial. 11.23. i). Hence the deep relig-
ious dread that might fall on even the most supercilious observer of a holy
man. Abbot Equitius, unselfconsciously tossing hay in his hobnailed boots,
was a man who carried with him nothing less than the awesome weight of
the presence of God (Greg. Dial. 1.4. 13— 14). Yet Gregory was too loyal a
follower of Augustine to believe that an alignment of the human will with
that of God might never waver (Greg. Dial. 11.16.7). No permanent and
ever-increasing effervescence of the Holy Spirit could overcome the daily
ruin of the ascetic’s fallen human nature. Far from it: nothing was more cal-
culated to upset the fragile equilibrium of the soul’s commune with God
than were those outward signs which, from time to time, God willed that a
person of tested sanctity might perform for the good of others. Like the
abrupt flashes of a signalling light, miracles could dazzle those who per-
formed them, even while they arrested the attention of those stubborn
minds who needed the physical challenge of a miracle.

In this attitude, Gregory reached back, through Augustine, to one of the
most austerely intellectualist and anti-materialist traditions of late
Platonism. To perform a miracle was to turn away from the inner, spiritual
Are of contemplation, to view the fainter radiance of God’s workings in
the mere world of matter (Greg. Moralia 11.91 and xxx.8). Prolonged
engagement in the publica operatio of miracles was calculated to place the
unreflective wonder-worker on the edge of a slippery slope. Miracles could
be as certain a cause of the fall of the soul into the world of material cares
as was the burden of public involvement in the fate of the church, under
which, as bishop of Rome, Gregory himself had come to groan, like a giant
straining beneath the oceanic weight of episcopal office. Yet, like bishops,
miracles had their place in God’s scheme for the human race, even in
modern times. Gregory’s unflinching sense of public mission was bol-
stered by a robust faith that, in a harmonious cosmos, material sign and spir-
itual reality were never utterly incommensurable: a miracle might point
without ambiguity to the higher, more enduring, spiritual realities that it
made visible, in a single, stunning moment of time. 21 Lingering with frank
patriotism on the narratives of his native land, Gregory, for all his warn-
ings to the less guarded Peter, allowed himself to take comfort in tarn
iucunda miracula, in so many, sweetly-tempered miracles that showed that
God, at least, had not deserted Italy (Greg. Dial, m.22.4). Only in the chill
shadow of the reign of Antichrist, by contrast with which even Gregory’s
own troubled times might seem, on looking back, times of deep peace,
would the church have to face the world with mere words, stripped of its
present dignity- the gift of miracles (Greg. Moralia xv. 69; xix.16; xxxn.24
and xxxi v. 7).

21 Straw (19 88) 47— 89.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN 79I

A loyal, if careworn, subject of the east Roman emperors, Gregory had
resided for some time in Constantinople. He knew that he did not write in
a vacuum. He was careful to enunciate his own, distinctively Latin, ‘dialect’
of the holy with all the more clarity because he knew that other, subtly
different variants of a Christian language of the holy existed in the east.
What we find, above all in Syria, but also in Palestine, Egypt and a little later
in Constantinople and Asia Minor, are dialects of the holy which, though
they differed greatly among themselves, tended to differ even more from
those current in the west. They invested living persons with a degree and,
above all, with a stability of sanctity that men such as Gregory of Tours
and even Gregory the Great preferred to ascribe only to the holy dead.
Even when we make due allowance for the fact that much of our evidence
reflects the state of mind of great pilgrimage sites, which needed to foster
stable and generous expectations of the powers of their wonder-working
heroes, we are confronted, in the hagiography of the eastern empire, with
a significantly different view of the human person.

The great holy men of the eastern empire were, indeed, ‘mourners’.
They were penitents, publicly crushed beneath the weight of their own sins.
Their fully visible self-mortifications played out, on a heroic scale, the con-
trition and profound sense of human frailty which every believer was
expected to feel, but which few were called upon to experience with such
exquisite sensibility. But repentance of epic dimensions was widely deemed
to have brought holy persons to a state of loving familiarity with God. The
veil which, since Adam’s fall, had descended between mankind and the
angelic hosts around the throne of God had been worn thin by their
prayers. It had become transparent to their tear-worn eyes. Indeed, when
Symeon Stylites first mounted his column at Telnesin and, a little later,
began to sway backwards and forwards, bowing with a dizzying frequency
that riveted the attention of all onlookers — a servant of Theodoret of
Cyrrhus counted up to 1,244 such prostrations before giving up — it was
because, clearly visible to Symeon, an angel was perpetually bowing in just
the same manner before the eucharistic bread that was stored in a little
stone niche on one side of his column (Theodoret, HR xxvi.22; Iff Sym.
Syr. 98, Doran (1992) 171— 2).

For Symeon, perhaps, and certainly for those reared in a mature Syrian
tradition who came to watch him, the holy man was, in himself, a ‘living
sign’. His dramatic way of life was more than the distant blink of a signal
from God. It made present with almost perfect congruence in the visible
world realities that usually lay beyond human sight. It is as if the angelic
world itself had pushed through the veil, to become fully palpable in the
figure perched on his column above the plain at Telnesin. 22

22 Harvey (1988), (1998).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

26. HOLY MEN

792

For a human being to stand, in such an unambiguous manner, as an
‘angel’ among men required a gift of the Holy Spirit more all-consuming
and definitive than that bestowed upon each Christian by the grace of
baptism (or, to put it differently, a more robust emergence of that grace
than was the case with the average believer). Belief in the fervour of the
Spirit, that had stirred in Patricius on the coast of Mayo, was taken for
granted in Syria. It rested on the firm foundations of a prestigious and
long-established theological tradition. It was as bearers of the Holy Spirit,
their whole nature ‘mixed’ with its inspiring energy as inseparably as the fra-
grance of myrrh penetrated the heavy oil base of a perfume, that Syrian
Christians had been accustomed, for centuries, to make Christ present and
palpable in this world.

As a result, claims to which Greek bishops had reacted with instant sus-
picion in the early fifth century, when made on behalf of nameless groups
of believers — who earned from their enemies the heresiological label of
‘Messalians’ (persons who were held to believe that the deep-seated force
of evil might be irrevocably driven from the human soul by unremitting,
fervent prayer) — were taken for granted as underlying the spiritual achieve-
ments of the nouvelle vague of stylite hermits and, a little later, despite initial
resistance, of the analogous Syrian phenomenon of the ‘Sleepless’ monks
(monks, that is, devoted to unceasing prayer). The holy man settled down,
throughout the eastern Mediterranean, as a ‘licensed Messalian ’. 23

In both cases, practices that originated in Syria broke through previous
cultural frontiers, creating an ‘international style’ of demonstrative Christian
sanctity. ‘Stylite’, ‘hermit’ and ‘recluse’ tended to merge in the terminology
of the times. They could be found everywhere. A female stylite is recorded
outside Amasea (Amasya) in Pontus. In Egypt, a male stylite is found,
according to one papyrus, arranging for a donkey driver to bring water in
daily instalments to the monastery that had grown up, apparently at the foot
of his column, at Antinoe. Far to the east, in the foothills of the Zagros
mountains, Monophysite stylites perched ominously, ‘like carrion vultures’,
on the edge of hostile Nestorian villages . 2 1 They had come to stay. Consulted
by a Muslim leader in the course of the civil wars which accompanied the
end of the Umayyad dynasty in the mid eighth century, a stylite attached to
a Palestinian monastery answered:

If I tell thee the truth, thou wilt slay me; yet I will declare what God has revealed to
me. With the measure with which thou hast measured it shall be measured to thee.

He was proved right on both counts.

23 Stewart (1991) and Escolan (1999).

24 Anderson and Cumont (1910) no. 134, 146; Papyri Greek and Egyptian: In Honour of Eric Gardiner
Turner (1981) no. 54, 198—203; Thomas of Marga, Book of Governors in. 8, tr. E. A. W Budge (London
1S93) 330-3 and 363.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

793

When Marwan heard this, he commanded that the pillar should be overthrown;
and he brought down the old man, and burnt him alive in the fire.

( History of the Patriarchs of Alexandria 1. 1 8 , ed. B. Evetts, PO v. 1 5 6)

It is some indication of the shifting frontiers of many such Christian
dialects of the holy that the laus perennis, the ‘sleepless’ chant of the monks,
was soon established in Burgundy and in the Franche-Comte (then, as in
the sixteenth century, a frontier zone of piety between the Mediterranean
and the north). 25 By contrast, Wulfilaic, a Lombard holy man who had
grown up in northern Italy, close to the Byzantine exarchate of Ravenna,
received a cool reception in northern Gaul. The bishop of Trier told him
to get off his column. There was no place for a homo ignobilis such as himself
to become the Symeon Stylites of northern Gaul (Greg. Tur. Hist, viii.i 5).

Given the nature of our sources, it is relatively easy to evoke the various,
agreed local versions of the place that holy persons might occupy in the
memory and expectations of distinct Christian regions. It is less easy to
explain the rise and function of the holy man in terms of the wider social
and religious world in which he was expected to be active. Here we are
faced by a problem of perspective. The foreground of the life and activ-
ities of the holy man is supremely well known to us. Vivid and deliberately
circumstantial evidence presents the holy man interacting with all manner
of persons. The emphasis is placed on specific incidents of healing, good
advice, cursing and successful intercession, both with God in heaven and
with the powerful on earth. Yet, seen in terms of these sharply delineated
actions, the holy man stands out, like a figure in a Chinese landscape,
against an indistinct and seemingly measureless background. How to relate
foreground and background, the known activities of the holy man with
their wider social and religious implications; and hence how to explain their
overall significance for contemporaries and their relative importance in
relation to other forms of religious activity has remained a tantalizing
problem. It is a problem that admits no single, unambiguous solution. Let
us, therefore, begin with what is easiest to know, with the foreground.

It must never be forgotten that the holy man’s activities, though usually
presented in the sources as dramatic and exceptional, were no more than a
highly visible peak in a spiritual landscape that rose gently upwards from
the expectations and activities of ordinary Christians in towns and villages.
A community of believers, endowed by baptism with the gift of the Holy
Spirit, all Christians were potentially ‘holy’. In late antique conditions, this
fact was expected to be shown by the possession of spiritual powers. To
take one well-known example: Augustine’s mother, Monica, took for
granted that she would receive God-given, premonitory dreams; and

25 Wood (1981) 16.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

794

26. HOLY MEN

Augustine himself believed that he had been cured of toothache by the
prayers of his friends at Cassiciacum, not all of whom were even baptized
(Aug. Conf. vi.xiii.23 and 1x.iv.12). What Christian writers felt that they
needed to explain was not so much the miraculous gifts of the holy man
but, rather, why such gifts appeared to contemporaries to have drained
away from the average members of the community of believers on to the
persons of a few recipients of divine charismata ( Apostolic Constitutions vm. 1 :
PG 1. 1061).

Low profile and intermittent expectations of help and comfort from
religious persons (pious men and women and members of the local clergy)
remained usual in any Christian community. The ‘religious person’, the vir
religiosus, the femina religiosa, was watched carefully by his or her neighbours
for evidence of virtue and, hence, of spiritual powers that might prove
useful to others. A layman complained to Barsanuphius about himself that
his retiring disposition, his unwillingness to get involved in local politics
and his unusual sexual modesty when visiting the public baths had already
given him an embarrassing reputation for being a holy person
(Barsanuphius, Correspondance 771, Regnault (1971) 472). The further step,
to a demand for a show of spiritual power, was a short one. Faced by a nest
of angry wasps, the harvesters of Besne, near Nantes, turned to Friardus,
half in jest and half in earnest:

Let the religious fellow come, the one who is always praying, who makes the sign
of the cross on his eyes and ears, who crosses himself whenever he goes out of
the house. (Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum x.i)

Only Friardus had the power to halt wasps.

Healing substances circulated freely. ‘Oil of prayer’ could be obtained
from the lamps around the altar of any number of churches, and might be
applied with the prayers of any person with even a moderate reputation for
holiness. 26 In his exile in Amasea (Amasya, Turkey) the patriarch Eutychius
of Constantinople settled down in his monastery to function, in a small
way, as a wonder-worker. A man blinded for perjury was healed by the
prayers of Eutychius after three days of anointing with oil. A woman who
had difficulties with breast-feeding ended up being able to act as wet-nurse
to all the children of her neighbourhood (Eustratius, V. Eutychii 5 8 and 60:
AGLXXXVI.2.2340A and 2341c).

In this world of unspectacular but constant resort to persons with a rep-
utation for sanctity, women, in certain regions, could be quite as important
as men, if not more so. Living at home or in convents close to the city or
village, safely protected from the very real dangers of the wild in which holy
men were supposed to gain their sanctity, holy women were as central to

26 Till (i960) no. 261, 64.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

795

the supernatural economy of any settled community as was the local well.
It was increasingly difficult to believe that men who had not, at some time,
vanished into the antithesis of settled life could be fully holy. But women
could not vanish from society in this way. Hence the peculiar charge of the
holy woman. Profound sanctity and efficacy in prayer was, as it were,
trapped by the constraints of society, in an almost uncanny manner, just
around the corner. It was enough to look down ‘with worldly thoughts’
from one’s rooftop on to Modegundis at prayer, in her back garden in
Tours, to be struck blind (Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum xix.i).

Female sanctity was an essential feature of urban life. It was good to
come with other married women on Fridays and Saturdays to listen to
Febronia read the scriptures in the chapel attached to the local convent (V.
Febroniae 1.6: Acta Sanctorum, Jun. V. 19B, tr. Brock and Harvey (1987) 1 5 5).
It was reassuring for the matronae of Paris to join Genovefa in the baptis-
tery of the cathedral, to hold vigil as the Hunnish armies swept across the
plains of Champagne (V. Genovefae 12, ed. Krusch 219). Pious women, quite
as much as men, were indispensable nodal points, who transmitted the
energy of their prayers to a continuous circuit of well-known healing sub-
stances, words and gestures which ran through every Christian neighbour-
hood. A vine leaf moistened with her spittle and the sign of the cross made
by her fingers were enough to cure a little boy brought to Modegundis of
an agonizing stomach ache (Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum xix.3).

Thus, when believers went out to a holy man, they often travelled con-
siderable distances and arrived at a site associated, whenever possible, with
the wild antithesis to the settled land. They came as pilgrims, to find

in a ‘far’ milieu, the basic elements and structures of [their] faith in their
unshielded, virgin radiance. 27

What they usually got, in fact, was ‘home cooking’. The supplicants of holy
men received exactly the same banal remedies for their ills as circulated at
home. But these were now applied by hands known without doubt to be
holy, at a place shorn of the disillusionments of everyday life. Precisely
because he was thought to be a ‘living sign’, the holy man could make
present to the believer the fiery angels who were forever transparent to his
own eyes. Solemn angelic figures, that now stood largely unheeded on the
walls of the local churches, became, for an instant, present and active in the
sufferer’s cure (V. Sjm.Jun. 39, ed. Van den Ven (1962) 39).

It was the same with the words of the holy man. Any student of the spir-
ituality of the Christian east, as it achieved classical form in this period,
knows the primary importance of the link between spiritual father and dis-
ciple in the monastic tradition. Centuries of late classical and Christian

27 Turner and Turner (i 978 ) 1 5 .

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

796 26. HOLY MEN

thought on self-formation had produced the conclusion that full knowl-
edge of the self was possible only for those who were prepared, as spiri-
tual sons, to see their own souls through the quiet eyes of an Old Man. 28
The Old Man alone, wrote John of Gaza to a monk in an adjoining mon-
astery, ‘is absolutely not the plaything of demons’ (Barsanuphius,
Correspondance 373, Regnault (1971) 263). Such guidance usually took place
within the narrow confines of a given monastery or monastic region. But
what holy men such as Barsanuphius and John could do at Gaza, and what
Epiphanius did at Thebes in upper Egypt, was to place their authoritative
words at the disposition of a far wider variety of questioners. In a world
where the primary division was not that between the monastery and the
world, or between the clergy and the laity, but the existential chasm between
religious persons and the vast majority who had neither the leisure nor the
inclination for such matters, it was usual for any outstanding person or
monastic establishment to function as a ‘monastery without walls’ for a
wide network of religiously-minded clients ‘in the world’.

Holy men might receive desperate requests for help of every kind, from
words of comfort and prayer to God to direct intervention with the
authorities. This is shown by the ostraka found in the monastery of
Epiphanius at Thebes. A woman whose husband had been carried off by
the barbarians wrote:

Be so good, let thy compassion reach me . . . for my heart is flown forth from me.

(Crum and Evelyn-White (1926) no. 170, p. 199)

An elderly priest also approached the hermit:

broken, lying abed, being carried in and out ... A great grief is in my heart, night
and day ... be so kind as to appoint for me prayers and a [regime of fasting] con-
venient to my sickness and old age, and even be it lying down, I will fulfil them.

(Crum and Evelyn- White (1926) no. 1 1, p. 195)

It was from the Old Men, Barsanuphius and John, that the Christian not-
ables of the Gaza region received advice on all manner of topics. The
codes of Christian deportment proposed in these letters represent the late
flowering of a very ancient delicatesse , issuing now with supernatural author-
ity from behind the permanently closed doors of the cell of an Egyptian
recluse. Not least of the good advice provided by the Old Men concerned
dealings with non-Christians. Should a landowner place his wine press at
the disposal of a Jewish neighbour?

If, when it rains, God causes the rain to fall on your fields and not on those of the
Jew, then you also can refuse to press his wine. But as he is full of love for all
mankind . . . why should you wish to be inhumane rather than merciful?

(Barsanuphius, Correspondance 686, Regnault (1971) 441)

28 Brown, ‘Asceticism pagan and Christian’, in (All xiri, 601—31.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

797

The Great Old Man even provided a specimen letter, declining with civil-
ity an invitation from a notable to a festival in which acts of non-Christian
worship might take place:

Say to him: ‘Your Charity knows that those who fear God hold to his commands;
and your own habits are to hand to convince you of that, because your own
affection for me would never cause you to transgress the precepts of your own
ancestral tradition.’ (Barsanuphius, Correspondance 776, Regnault (1971) 475)

One should have no illusions on one point. As in all other periods of the
ancient world, to cultivate mentors of this kind required wealth and leisure.
Holy men were often appropriated by well-to-do persons. The peasants of
Lipidiacum wanted to keep the body of Lupicinus, a ‘living martyr’ whose
bloody spittle, the result of his austerities, they would scrape from the walls
of his cell as a healing substance. But the body of the dead saint was
impounded by a ‘respectable woman’ from neighbouring Trezelle (Allier):
for she claimed it on the strength of having fed the saint from the produce
of her villa when he was alive (Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum xm.3).

All over the Christian world, notables collected holy men, drawing con-
stantly on their services and, in turn, contributing to their upkeep and their
reputation. Archesilaus of Caesarea Maritima remembered how Zosimas,
a hermit from outside Tyre, was staying with him when the saint burst into
tears, flooding the pavement of Archesilaus’ town house. For Zosimas had
heard the roar of the collapse of Antioch in the earthquake of 526. The
holy man instantly called for a censer and filled the building with perfume,
so as to render it immune from a similar fate. When Archesilaus’ wife
injured her eye with an embroidery needle, Zosimas stood by, praying and
advising the surgeons who handled the injury. But Zosimas declared that it
was another friend of the family, John of Choziba, four hundred stadia
away in the desert of Judaea, to whom God had finally ‘given the grace’ of
healing the injury: it was to John’s prayers that he had listened (Evagr. HE
iv.y).

As a result of patronage by the great, holy men and their disciples found
themselves in a situation that generated permanent anxiety. They were fre-
quently settled on marginal lands. They usually drew to themselves, in the
heyday of their reputation, large bands of disciples and crowds of pilgrims,
many of whom stayed for long periods in their presence. If successful, they
required permanent facilities — such as buildings, a water supply and large
surpluses of food and money for the poor, the sick and the many strang-
ers. Altogether, the holy man came to weigh heavily on the most vulnerable
tracts of the ecology of his region. There was never much wealth or land
to go round, even in the most prosperous regions of the late Roman world.
There is hardly a single account of the successful establishment of a holy
man, from the autobiography of Valerius of Bierzo in seventh-century

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

798 26. HOLY MEN

Galicia, 29 through Benedict and his enemy, the priest Florentius, at Subiaco
(Greg. Dial. 11.8.1—4), to the three thousand monks settled in the Judaean
desert, 30 the huge convents outside Amida (all too easily devastated when
the Chalcedonian authorities cut off the food supplies usually offered to
them by a devout laity), 31 to Nestorian convents in northern Iraq, regularly
pillaged by the Kurds (Thomas of Marga, The Book of Governors v. 1 7, tr. E.
A. W. Budge (London 1893) 563), where we do not meet examples of
savage competition for scarce resources, waged between the new ascetic
settlements and local leaders, clergy and villagers. When it came to the issue
of oblations — the gifts of agrarian produce and of other forms of wealth
(including, of course, small children) offered to the holy man in exchange
for his blessing — the assertion of holiness almost invariably locked the
saint and his disciples (usually more zealous in this matter than their
master) into a zero-sum game. 32

Holy men were frequently dependent on patronage — and often on the
crushing patronage of emperors, kings and great landowners. They had to
justify their position by standing, in the eyes of the world, as the quintes-
sence of good patronage. Hence the vividness and circumstantiality of
those accounts which show holy men rebuking the rich, protecting peas-
ants from extortion, arbitrating in local disputes, and facing down high-
ranking officials, even the emperor himself, in the name of the poor, the
oppressed and the condemned. As a result, it has proved tempting to
explain the rise and function of the holy man in many regions of the
Christian world in terms of the manner in which holy men were believed
by their admirers to have played the role of ‘the “good patron” writ large’. 33

To arrive at a more balanced view of the matter, it is worth while stress-
ing the overall tendency of the sources in which these incidents occur. It was
a tendency to render innocent the undoubted wealth and influence of the
holy man’s ‘establishment’. Put briefly: hagiography achieved its effect by
censoring one side of the gift exchange that took place around the holy man
— the steady, even disquieting, flow of gifts and favours from the outside
world that gave the holy man’s activities their appropriate degree of splen-
dour and public recognition. It presented the holy man’s activities in terms
of the other side of that exchange — the seemingly effortless, ‘gravity-free’

29 Valerius of Biereo, Ordo Quaeremoniae and Replication ed. Aherne (1949).

30 A world now brought alive by Hirschfeld (1992).

31 John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 35, PO xvm.607— 20; Chronicon pseudo-Dionysianum 111.8, tr. R.
Hespel, CSCO 507, Script. Syri 213 (Louvain 1989) 27—8; see also Palmer (1990).

32 LT Sym.Jun. 130, Van den Ven (1962) 122: a Georgian priest who had set up a healing shrine with
a hnana of Symeon was accused of working miracles through sorcery by the priests whose karpophoriai
had been intercepted by his shrine.

33 Brown, ‘Holy man’ 91 (now in Brown, Society and the Holy 1 29) succumbed with gusto to that temp-
tation. What follows should be read as a corrective to the views advanced in that article: see also Brown
(1983) 10—13, ( T 998), with Howard-Johnston and Hayward (1999) and Lane Fox (1997).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

799

flow of divine favours, of acts of successful arbitration, plain speaking and
intercession on behalf of the community as a whole (as in times of drought)
that came from God through the holy man. To be content with one small,
but revealing example. By the 580s, visitors to Symeon the Younger on the
Mons Admirabilis, the Wonder-filled Mountain, outside Antioch (present-day
Samandagi, Symeon’s mountain), could not but have been impressed by a
complex of buildings at the foot of the column of the saint, the splendour
of whose surviving capitals alone reflected a koine of near eastern princely
art that stretched from Constantinople to Kermanshah. Such building,
however, so the biographers of Symeon insisted, was the product of Isaurian
workers who had worked solely out of gratitude to the saint for the healings
that he had bestowed on them. 34 In the same way, the wealth associated with
the growing establishment of the holy man (especially as this was continued,
after his death, by a monastic community) and the support offered to him in
his lifetime by leading persons were frequently explained, in hagiographic
sources, by reference to some incident in which an important person, stand-
ing for the wealth and power of ‘the world’ in its most obtrusive and dark-
ened form, was humbled by the holy man through some miracle. Frequently
this miracle was performed on behalf of the poor who had sought the saint’s
protection against the powerful person in question. Wealth that came to the
holy man’s establishment was made ‘clean’ in this way, by a dramatic story in
which the giver of the wealth was first ‘taught a lesson’ by the saint. 35 Given
this situation, it has been rightly observed that, by the sixth century, the
miracle had become ‘the specific, quasi-institutional mode of action’
through which the holy man impinged on the world. 36

Altogether, holy men tended to be remembered as having been
effectively active in society in a manner that fulfilled, with satisfying con-
gruence, the expectations of any other great patron. They frequently did
so in areas which the historian now knows to have been characterized by a
vigorous rural population which had taken ever more marginal land into
cultivation. This is the case with the astonishing late Roman villages of
northern Syria and with the large churches perched on what is now the
boar-infested plateau of Karabel above Myra (Demre, Turkey) in Lycia. 37
But we must always remember that the very success of the holy man left
his disciples with much to explain. The fact that they did so, and with gusto,
in terms of a carefully censored language of ‘clean’ patronage does not
mean that patronage in itself explains the holy man. It is, rather, to the
wider features of the religious world in which the holy man moved that we

34 V. Sjm.Jun. 96, Van den Ven (1962) 74—5; see Van den Ven (1962) 11.92— 3, who shares my scepti-
cism. On the buildings, see Djobadze, (1986) 57—1 14.

35 Similar narratives concerning the wealth of modern Islamic holy men have been acutely observed

by Gilsenan (1982) 102—3. 36 Flusin (1983) 208.

37 Tate (1992); Harrison (1963); Fowden (1990b).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8oo

26. HOLY MEN

must turn. Let us conclude, therefore, by sketching, inevitably very briefly,
the role of the holy man as ‘arbiter of the holy’ — that is, as one significant
actor among many in the slow and hesitant process of the creation of a
Christian ‘thought world’.

The Christian holy man emerged at a crucial moment in the overall relig-
ious history of post-imperial western Europe and the Byzantine middle
east. He was a figure of genuine spiritual power at a time when the holy
stretched far beyond the somewhat narrow confines of the triumphant
Christian church. It is no coincidence that a figure of the stature of Symeon
Stylites should have appeared in northern Syria at just the time when the
ecclesiastical structures of the region had been in place for some genera-
tions, when the pagan temples had been officially closed for a quarter of a
century, but where a strong form of local religious leadership had not yet
arisen to negotiate an honourable surrender for the gods. Firmly placed on
a column which in itself may have linked his person to ancient memories
of holy stones, 38 administering banal and widely-recognized forms of
blessing (the hnana of the dust from the sacred enclosure beneath his
column), summoning local church congregations through their priests to
what amounted to gigantic revivalist meetings associated with Christian
penitential supplication, Symeon stood on the low slopes of the limestone
ridge as a highly personalized challenge to the ancient pilgrimage site on
top of Sheikh Barakat. Despite the splendid buildings that were lavished
on it after his death, it is not the relatively low-lying area of Telnesin, but
the conical shape of Sheikh Barakat that still catches the eye of the travel-
ler in the Jebel Sem’an as it towers with an immemorial sacrality above the
plain of Dana. In a similar manner, the column of Symeon’s later imitator,
Symeon the Younger, holds in view — but now at eye-level — the opposing
peak of the oracle of Zeus on Mount Kasios.

Symeon negotiated many surrenders of the gods. Bedouin tribesmen
burned their idols in his presence (Theodoret, HR xxvi. 1 3). Whole villages
entered into a ‘covenant’ with him. A polytheist village in the mountains of
Lebanon was told that, if they followed his commands by placing stones
carved with the sign of the cross or blessed by portions of his holy dust on
the four corners of their fields, and if they destroyed their shrines and
household idols, they would enjoy protection from creatures of the wild —
from werewolves and ravenous field mice (V. Sym. Syr. 61 and 63, Doran
(1992) 141 and 143, with comments on 22—3). A century later, villages
touched by the ministrations of Symeon the Younger did not abruptly
convert from ‘paganism’ to ‘Christianity’. Rather, in a Christian empire that
had used many forms of cultural and physical violence against polytheists,

38 Frankfurter ( 1990 ).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN 801

the villagers were edged, a little more gently, through a language of sacred
violence associated with the blessing and cursing of the wonder-working
child-saint in the mountain above them, towards ‘behaving a little more like
Christians’, ^piCTTiavo7rpe7rd)s noXi-Teveodcu (IT Sjm.Jun. 221 and 223, Van
den Ven (1962) 191 and 194; cf. 188— 20, Van den Ven (1962) 166— 9). When
the formidable Shenoute of Atripe prophesied to the villagers of Sment in
upper Egypt that they would lose their gods, they assumed the worst: ‘A
governor will surely come and will oppress us’ (Till (1936) 65). Instead they
got Apa Moyses, whose violence, though spectacular and disastrous for
their temples, partook in an ancient language of the sacred, which rendered
defeat, if not palatable, at least meaningful.

It is for this reason that, all over the Christian world, the countryside in
particular became ‘the locus for the elaboration of cultic choices’. 39 For,
unlike the European missionaries of a later age, the Christian holy men and
women of late antiquity and the early Middle Ages

appeared as representatives of a power superior to that of traditional faiths, but
not as purveyors of a dramatically different world view or type of religion. 40

Filled with the Holy Spirit and more certain than were most Christians of
their position in a hierarchy of heavenly powers, in alliance with which they
upheld the claims of Christ, their God, holy men (unlike those of us who
usually study them) knew spiritual power when they saw it. They frequently
engaged it at dangerously close quarters. Not only were long and intimate
duels with the local sorcerer almost de rigueurin the life of a successful saint;
sometimes one senses that the one is a doublet, rather than an enemy, of
the other (e.g. IT Theod. Syk. 37—8, ed. Festugiere (1970) 32—4). At Neris, in
the Berry, Patroclus found himself faced at the time of the bubonic plague
of 571 by a woman, Leubella, who had received from ‘the devil, falsely
appearing as saint Martin . . . offerings which would, he said, save the
people’. But Patroclus himself had almost succumbed to the temptation to
come down from the hills to save the people as a wonder-worker. Only after
he received a vision of the ‘abominations’ of the world to which he had
been tempted to return did he go back to his cell, to find genuine ‘offerings’
— ‘a tile on which was the sign of the Lord’s cross’ (Greg. Tur. Vita Patrum
ix. 2).

What is often ascribed, in the more pensive and monasticallv orientated
sources of the time, to the unhinging effects of elatio, of spiritual vainglory,
that led to madness in many failed wonder-workers, refers to a far more
gripping and specifically late antique phenomenon than mere conceit. We
are dealing with figures for whom the boundaries between exorcism and
possession, between power over spirits and a quasi-shamanistic power

39 Boesch-Gajano (1991) 115. 40 Kaplan (19 84) 115.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

802

26. HOLY MEN

through possession by spirits, were far more fluid than our texts would lead
us to suppose . 41 Driven by the torrent of cultic experimentation that raced
through many Christian regions, it is not surprising that the mills of hagio-
graphical literature should have come to turn so briskly towards the end of
this period, in an effort to reduce the raw grain of so many, frequently
ambiguous, experiences of the holy to the fine flour of a few, dominant
Christian ‘oikotypes’. Such experimentation would not have aroused so
much interest if it had occurred only among the peasantry. What was at
stake was the putting in order of a Christian ‘thought-world’ that was, if
anything, a more urgent matter for the well-to-do than for the peasantry.
The wealthy and the educated were the patrons of holy men and the
readers of accounts of their lives. Seen in this light, the activities of the holy
man, and especially the manner in which these were recounted in retro-
spect, represent one stage in the long schooling of the imagination of all
classes in late antiquity.

The average well-to-do and thoughtful person lived in many ‘thought-
worlds ’. 42 Potentially exclusive explanatory systems coexisted in his or her
mind. The host of the monk Peter the Iberian, an eminent Egyptian, was
a good Christian; but he was also ‘caught in the error of pagan philoso-
phers, whose ideas he loved greatly’ (V. Petti Iberi, ed. R. Raabe, Leipzig
1895 72). He employed a magician to cure his daughter. Nor were these
systems parallel. They often interlocked as separate parts of a single
process of cure. A notable of Alexandria could go to the healing shrine of
Sts Cyrus and John to receive a cure from their hands. But he claimed to
have done so ‘in order that his horoscope should be fulfilled’ ( Miracula SS.
Cyri et Johannis 28. 8, PG LXXXVH.3504B; and ed. N. Fernandez Marcos
(Madrid 1975) 296).

Holy men themselves did not see the matter in terms of a sharp antith-
esis of Christian and non-Christian. They belonged to a category of
persons who were assumed by their supplicants to have access to knowl-
edge of the holy in all its manifestations. The expectations of the neigh-
bourhood committed them to far more than an exclusively Christian art of
prayer. A respected saint was a person who was allowed to have the last
word in what was usually a long and well-informed discussion of supernat-
ural causality, in which everyone had a say. When Theodore of Sykeon was
conceived, his mother, Maria, dreamed that a brilliant star had descended
into her womb. Her lover (an acrobatic camel-rider on an imperial mission)
was delighted. She would have a baby boy, he said, who would become a
bishop. Next, Maria went to a holy man with second sight in a neighbour-
ing village. He concurred.

41 A gripping incident in John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 15, PO xvn.223— 7; John Moschus in
BZ xxxvin (1938) 360; Barsanuphius, Correspondance 843, Regnault (1971) 501.

42 This is made particularly clear by Dagron (1981).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN 803

A star [he told her] is held to signify the glory of an emperor by those who are
expert in interpreting visions; but with you it must not mean this.

Also consulted by Maria, the bishop of Anastasiopolis, ‘by God’s inspira-
tion, gave her the same interpretation’ (V. Theod. Syk. 4, ed. Festugiere
(1970) 4, tr. Dawes and Baynes (1997) 88—9). When Theodore, sure enough,
grew up to be both a bishop and a holy man, he functioned in a similar
manner:

if any required medical treatment for certain illnesses or surgery or a purging
draught or hot springs, this God-inspired man would prescribe the best thing for
each, for even in technical matters he had become an experienced doctor . . . and
he would always state clearly which doctor they should employ.

(V. Theod. Syk-. 145, ed. Festugiere (1970) 114,
Dawes and Baynes (1977) 182; cf. Harvey (1984) 87-93)

Nor did the information flow only in one direction. Viewing the crowds
of sufferers around the shrine of St Epiphanius at Salamis in the early seventh
century, a ‘philosopher’ informed the bishop that the majority of those
present would be cured by a simple change in diet. Responsible for a crowded
healing establishment, the bishop agreed. The philosopher’s remedy worked
wonders (Anastasius Sinaita , Quaestiones 94, PG Lxxxix.73 3 a). We know of
this from the Quaestiones of Anastasius of Sinai, a monastic writer whose
highly nuanced discussion of divine providence, health and miracles con-
tains, also, the first disturbing hint of yet another rival explanatory system —
that of Islam. Anastasius knew how Arabs could tell from physiognomic
traits which of their warriors would die — presumably as a ‘martyr’ — in battle;
and he had heard of the great she-demon who rose from the earth to devour
the camel-sacrifices heaped up around the Ka'ba of Mecca (Anastasius
Sinaita , Quaestiones 20, PGLXXXIX.521A; Flusin (1991) 404—5).

In normal conditions, the varying layers of explanation tended to group
themselves around the holy man, much as the manifold invisible powers
of the universe, even the demons, fell into ranks beneath the one God
whom he served. But the possibility of conflict was always present, in
which these many layers would fall apart into sharply polarized antithesis.
The most banal of these moments of conflict concerned the use of
sorcery. This is hardly surprising. Within the Christian community itself,
members of the clergy, like the holy man, were frequently deemed to be
bearers of comprehensive knowledge of the sacred. Many had knowledge
of sorcery. Clergy and lay persons alike were urged to use accustomed
Christian healing substances and, above all, to employ names and formu-
lae that were to be found only in the canonical Christian scriptures (Greg.
Tur. De Gloria Confessorum 1 and 39). But it was far from certain that such
a seemingly innocent substance as the ‘oil of prayer’ would be energized
by Christian prayers or by invocations considered to be tainted by sorcery

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

26. HOLY MEN

804

(Shenoute, Contra Origenistas 259, ed. T. Orlandi (Rome 1985) 19; cf. Kropp
(1930) 120).

Though presented as a defence of the faith against ‘heathen’ customs,
and couched in terms of exhortations directed principally at a Christian
laity deemed to be more mired in non-Christian habits than were their
leaders, the long war on sorcery within the Christian community often took
the form of an internecine feud between rival experts on the sacred among
the monks and clergy themselves. It was a Great Old Man, and not a pagan
sorcerer, not even a Christian layman, who shocked Shenoute of Atripe by
recommending a jackal’s claw tied to his right toe as the correct remedy for
his client, a Christian governor (Shenoute, Contra Origenistas 821, Orlandi
62). The middle age of Theodore of Sykeon was troubled by an influential
priest, a great sorcerer and philanderer, known as ‘the Billy Goat of
Bithynia’ (IT Theod. Syk. 159, Festugiere (1970) 134).

Deadly conflict between members of the clerical elites on theological
issues caused the overlapping systems of explanadon to explode. Sorcery
alone could explain the miracles of theological opponents. In the stormy
ecclesiastical history of the fifth and sixth century, we rarely find a holy
man of an opposing party who is not dismissed at one time or another by
his rivals as a mere sorcerer. 43 Occasionally we come upon a precious
moment when a community, as a whole, was forced to make up its mind
as to the meaning of an untoward event. Only then do we realize the
freedom of manoeuvre enjoyed by late Roman persons within the inter-
stices of the explanatory systems that jostled at the back of their minds.
When, in 420, the monk Fronto challenged local noble families and clergy
at Tarragona on an inconclusive charge of sorcery, a servant of count
Asterius burst into the crowded basilica with an armed retinue. Pointing at
Fronto, he roared:

Give me that dog. I will stop his barking . . .

That evening, the servant died of a stroke.

When this happened, all the faithful, frightened by the obvious power of this sign,
ceased to attack me for a little while. But my enemies and the count’s whole house-
hold . . . demanded that I be punished as a murderer, since I had killed a man with
death-dealing spells. There were even a few of those, totally lacking in faith, who
said that it had all happened by coincidence. (Aug. Ep. 1 i*.ij)

Such uncertainty was not surprising. For many late antique Christians,
the sacred was profoundly faceless and ill-defined. Illusion was always pos-
sible. The Great Old Men of the desert had fostered a view of the untrans-

43 Barsauma denounced by the emperor Marcian: Nau (1913) 130; Zu’ura denounced by pope
Agapetus: John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 2, PO xvn.27. The Nestorians were convinced that the
Monophysites had replaced the relics of Mar Mattai by a sorcery-idol: The History of Rabban Hormi^d
xvi, tr. E. A. W Budge (London 1 902) 1 20.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

formed human consciousness as a fragile thing, perpetually ringed by
demonic mirages. In dreams the demons could take the form of holy
figures, Barsanuphius told a worried layman: only the sign of the cross they
could not bring themselves to imitate (Barsanuphius, Correspondance 416,
Regnault (1971) 290). Not every miracle that happened was a true miracle.
The power of the demons, and the imminent presence of Antichrist, had
deprived mankind of the binocular vision needed to discriminate between
holiness and illusion. In the 430s, a monk appeared in Carthage. He applied
to the sick oil poured over the bone of a martyr.

He brought hallucinations to play on the blind and the sick ... so that they thought
that they had recovered their sight and ability to walk. But in departing from hint,
the illnesses in whose grip they were held remained.

(Quodvultdeus, Liber promissionum vi.6.1 1)

He left the city in a hurry. Yet just such cures, also performed with the ‘oil
of saints’, only a generation later made the reputation of Daniel, a Syrian
recluse and later a famous stylite, established beside the busy ferry across
the Bosphorus (near Arnavutkoy and Rumeli Hisar) a little to the north of
Constantinople (Id Danielis zy, with Festugiere (1961) n.m n. 41).
Epidemics of healing could be demonically inspired. They might be pro-
voked by false relics — that is, by relics associated with rival Christian fac-
tions — such as was the ‘polluted’ oil left by mistake by a Monophysite monk
in the chapel of a great Nestorian monastery (Thomas of Marga, Book of
Governors vi.6; Budge 612—14). A stampede of sick persons to a holy man
might be no more than a plot on the part of the demons to disturb the
peace of his monastery (John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 4, PO xvn.65).

Belief was never an easy matter, and in times of acute crisis the explana-
tory system which usually rested on the figure of the Christian holy man
might collapse like a pack of cards. A massive public catastrophe, such as the
onslaught of the plague, swamped the ministrations of the holy man. It was
reassuring to believe that the cloth from the tomb of St Remigius, carried in
a litter around Rheims, had created a sacred circuit that held the bubonic
plague away from the city (Greg. Tur. De Gloria Confessorum 77). But Rheims
was fortunate. When the plague first struck the eastern Mediterranean in 5 42,
resort to the prayers of the saints was not the only — indeed, not the first —
reflex of the afflicted populations. Demons in the form of angels appeared
in Palestine, urging the inhabitants of one city to resume the worship they had
once paid to a prominent bronze statue. Elsewhere, the word got round that

If one throws pots out of the house the plague will go from the city,

so that it became unsafe to walk in the streets by reason of the crockery
raining down from every window {Chronicum Anonymum pseudo-Dionysianum ,
tr. R. Hespel, CSCO 507, Script. Syri 213 (Louvain 1989) 64—5 and 81, trans.
Witakowski (1996) 79 and 97).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8o6

26. HOLY MEN

Such incidents were not simply moments of regression in the face of
overwhelming, but mercifully infrequent, catastrophe. It is important to
realize how little of the public space of late Roman society was occupied
by Christian holy persons. The solid gold of demonstrative sanctity was
spectacular; but it circulated in strictly delimited channels in what had
remained, to an overwhelming extent, a supernatural ‘subsistence
economy’, accustomed to handling life’s doubts and cares according to
more old-fashioned and low-key methods. To take one example: the high
drama associated with the healing of the mentally disturbed through exor-
cism brought into peculiarly sharp focus the particular ‘style’ of supernat-
ural power associated with effective Christian sanctity. For that reason, it
bulks large in all hagiographic literature. But exorcism never achieved
exclusive dominance in the thought-world of contemporaries, nor, when it
happened, was it always perceived in the highly dramatic terms favoured by
Christian narratives of the display of spiritual power. Many of the exorcis-
tic gestures associated with holy men such as St Martin grew naturally out
of recognizable medical practices. Those in a position to visit a shrine or a
holy person associated with exorcism would, in any case, have been a small
proportion of the population. 44

As for the theological controversies that rocked the eastern empire in the
fifth and sixth century, Christian holy men played an important role in the
mobilization of local opinion on either side — all the more so as many
influential lay persons made the habit of taking the eucharist only from the
‘blessed’ hands of known holy men (John Rufus, Plerophoriae 22 and 3 3, PO
viii . 40 and 7 5 ; John Moschus, Pratum Spirituale 188, PG lxxxvii . 3 06 5 d ) . But
their opinions on theology carried little weight with the experts on such
matters. Considering a theological dictum ascribed to St Spyridon of
Cyprus, the great Monophysite theologian Severus of Antioch observed
drily that, while Spyridon might have received the ‘gift of healing’, the holy
old man had evidently not received the ‘gift of wisdom’ (Severus Antioch.
Liber contra impium grammaticum 111.39, tr. J. Lebon, CSCO 102, Script. Syri 51
(Louvain 1952) 181).

Deeply conscious of the ambiguity of the sacred and fully aware of the
limits of its field of action in a complex world, the society that turned to
Christian holy persons was more niggardly than our hagiographic sources
might lead us, at first sight, to suppose in lavishing credulity upon them.
But when they did, they were encouraged to ‘stylize’ their imagination of
the workings of the supernatural in a highly specific way. The holy man was
a ‘servant’ of his God. He was also a ‘patron’ in that he offered petitions to
God on behalf of others. His actions assumed, at a profound level, that the
events of this world were the product of conflicting wills (in which

44 Rousselle (1990) 109—86 and Horden (1993) are decisive on this issue.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN 807

conflict, the supremely wilful envy of the demons played a crucial role) and
that true order meant the ultimate submission of all wills to God, the
supreme emperor of the universe. The intimacy of holy persons with their
Lord could be as tender as that of a son, a familiar friend, even of a lover.
But the overwhelming weight of language, in our texts, presented the holy
man in his public persona as a courtier. For many regions, this attitude
involved far more than an unthinking projection on to the invisible world
of the observed working of patronage within the centralized structures of
the later Roman empire. To see the invisible world in these clear-cut terms
involved making conscious choices between available religious traditions.
In 370 Athanasius wrote that, of course, dreams of the future can be
vouchsafed to Christian devotees at the shrines of the martyrs. What mat-
tered was how this happened. Many Egyptian Christians seem to have
assumed that the martyrs, as ‘unconquered’ heroes who had overcome the
demons of the lower air by their heroic deaths, could now be prevailed
upon, by the prayers of believers, to torture the demons yet further (in a
long Egyptian tradition, by which higher gods bullied and threatened their
subordinates) to reveal their own unearthly knowledge of the future. It was
not like that, Athanasius insisted. God sent the dreams because the martyrs
acted as ambassadors — etreupresbeue — who bore the prayers of the faithful
to his court (Athanasius, Festal Fetters, ed. T. Lefort, CSCO 1 50/1 51, Script.
Coptici 19/20 (Louvain 1955) 65/46—7).

The language of patronage at a distant court, of course, had its limits.
Only simple folk in Egypt believed, on the strength of an imperial model
of the supernatural world, that the Archangel Michael, rather than having
been forever present in his mighty role from the first dawn of the creation,
had ousted Satan in a coup d’etat in the palace of heaven; and consequently
that, like any other Roman consul, Michael was obliged to scatter the
benefits of healing upon his people on the day of his festival, which was,
of course, the day when he had received from God the formal scroll of his
appointment. 45 But the emphasis on the clash of free wills implied in this
model brought a quality of mercy into an otherwise inflexible and poten-
tially profoundly impersonal cosmos.

With the notion of freedom came also the notion of sin. The holy man
was not only a favoured courtier of the distant emperor of heaven, he was
a preacher of repentance. Dramatic changes in health; dramatic changes in
the weather; dramatic shifts in the locus of wealth, as gold, precious
objects, robes, land, even small children passed from the world to the
monastic establishments associated with holy persons: all these highly
visible changes were held to have registered the most amazing of all dis-
continuities — the stirring to contrition of the sinful human heart.

45 Van Lantschoot (1946).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8o8

26. HOLY MEN

The great Lives of the holy men leave us in no doubt as to that basic
Christian oikotype. It did not coincide with other notions of the sacred that
were widespread at the time. Some time after the middle of the fifth
century, Athens was afflicted by a drought. Rising to the occasion, the great
non-Christian philosopher Proclus brought down the rain. The mysterious
drone of the sacred bull-roarer, swung above the city by the wise man,
restored the burning elements to their harmonious pitch. Himself already
something of a lesser god, Proclus’ soul was co-opted, through these rites,
into the quiet and immemorial routine of government, by which the pre-
siding spirits of a small part of the cosmos nurtured the sweet air of his
beloved Attica (Marinus, Vita Procli 28). For a moment, Proclus joined
himself to the loving care of the gods; he did not bow, as a courtier and a
sinner, before the sole emperor of heaven.

A few decades earlier, drought had fallen also on the region of
Jerusalem. The processions of Christian villagers, bearing crosses and
chanting Kyrie eleison, that converged on the monastery of the great
Euthymius were treated to a very different view of the universe.

‘God, Who fashioned us, is good and benevolent, and His pity extends over all His
works. But [Euthymius added] our sins stand between us and Him . . . This is why in His
anger He has brought this correction upon us, so that, disciplined by it, and bet-
tered by repentance, we may approach Him in fear and He accordingly may hear
us.’ On hearing this, they all cried out in unison. ‘You yourself, venerable father,
must entreat God for us.’ [Euthymius then] went into his oratory without making
any promises. Casting himself on his face, he begged God with tears to have mercy
on His creation ... As he was praying, there suddenly blew up a south wind, the
sky was filled with clouds, heavy rain descended and there was a great storm.

(Cyr. Scyth. V. Euthymii 25 , tr. Price (1991) 34-5)

Dramatic though such scenes of intercession might be, they did not
exhaust expectations of the Christian holy man. Behind the standard, wor-
kaday Christian version of a universe made intelligible in terms of sin,
affliction and repentance, there always shimmered the majesty of paradise
regained — that is, an image not only of a God placated by bursts of human
prayer and contrition, offered to him on behalf of others by his favoured
servants, but of an entire world rejoicing in the recovery of its lost order.
In large areas of eastern Christianity (and, if in a more diffident and spas-
modic manner, also in the west) the holy man brought back to the settled
world, from his long sojourn in the wilderness, a touch of the haunting
completeness of Adam. 46 Nature, characterized by great antithetical cate-
gories, fell into place around him. On his pillar at Telnesin, Symeon radi-
ated an order that seeped from his person, standing in prayer before the
court of God, into the column itself and the sacred space around it.

46 Flusin (1983) 126-8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

HOLY MEN

809

Symeon maintained, as if in microcosm, the fundamental boundaries on
which all civilized life was held to depend throughout the near east. 47 The
clutter of stuffed deer, lions and snakes at the foot of the column spoke of
notable breaches in the boundary between the animal and the human world
healed in the name of the saint (V. Sym. Anton. 1 5 and Appendix 21, Doran
(1992) 93 and 225). Further from Telnesin, the blessing of Symeon on the
crosses set up in his name around villages in the mountains of Lebanon
maintained the boundaries of the settled land against the encroaching dis-
order of the wild woods. The sexes, also, were held apart. In the women’s
enclosure at the foot of the terrain that rose towards the column, a female
dragon would take her place, along with the five wives of a visiting Yemeni
sheikh, demurely receiving her hnana, not from the hands of Symeon, but
from the mouth of her male companion (V. Sym. Syr. 79 and V. Sym. Anton.
Appendix 25, Doran (1992) 161 and 227).

Symeon was very much a ‘revivalist’ of a Syrian Christianity that had
always been marked by a strong sense of cosmic order and with a conse-
quent concern for the proper separation of the sexes. But an Adam might
also pass beyond, as well as reinforce, boundaries that bulked so large in the
minds of contemporaries. An ‘angelic’ man, the holy man trembled on the
borderline of those divisions that usually pitted one segment of late
Roman society against the other. Not invariably ordained, he was a layman
to whom bishops bowed in reverence, as one above whom the hand of
God had appeared. Priest or not, his blessing echoed faithfully the domes-
tic practices of any Christian household. He was studiously accessible to
both rich and poor, listening attentively to the humble and surprising the
cultivated with his untutored spiritual insight. Even the charged barriers
between the sexes opened at his touch. When Sabas passed through
Scythopolis in 5 3 1—2, his attention was drawn to a woman who lay in the
colonnade of the main street, isolated even from her fellow beggars by the
stench of an uncontrolled menstrual haemorrhage.

He came over to her in the colonnade and said . . . ‘This my hand I lend to you,
and I trust in the God that I worship that you will be cured.’ Taking the saint’s hand,
she applied it to the hidden part, and immediately the flux of blood ceased.

(Cyr. Scyth. V. SabaeGz, Price (1991) 173)

By such persons, the ‘world’ itself — that dark place of ‘abominations’ so
often decried in the monastic literature of the time — was healed. In this
sense, the holy man was a truly ‘angelic’ figure. Like the towering angels, he
raised his eyes from his clamorous human clientele to contemplate the rich
earth, teeming with the possibilities of life. He was responsible to God for
all created things. Shenoute was able to stir the tardy Nile to give life once

47 Well characterized by Doran (1992) 43—5.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8lO 26. HOLY MEN

again to the land of Egypt; and he did so, not simply as a favoured courtier
of God, but, with an ancient congruence, by first making the life-giving
liquid of his tears fall on the dead sand of his desert retreat beyond the
White Monastery (Besa, V. Shen. 102—5, Bell 7 2— 31 see Thelamon (1981)

383)-

Christian holy persons had been shot into prominence at this time by an
exceptionally stern and world-denying streak in late antique Christianity.
Those who approached them, and those who remembered their activities,
habitually assumed that they would act upon the spiritual world in terms of
expectations that echoed all that was most abrasively up-to-date in the hier-
archical and patronage-ridden social structure of the later Roman empire.
Yet by sharing through their prayers in the concerns of the mighty angels,
holy persons had come to embrace the world. They cradled it, in the
Christian imagination, in terms that did better justice to the notion of a
God who loved his own creation, and so to the tenacious hopes of an over-
whelmingly agrarian society locked in the tyrannical, warm embrace of the
earth. By their intercessions, the Christian holy men joined with St Michael
the Archangel to look with mercy on humanity in all its joys and cares:

[on] the strenuous work of our hands . . . the quietness of the oxen and the growth
of the lambs . . . the wool of the sheep and the milk of the goats . . . the growth
of all the fruits of the field . . . the body of the vine and the fullness [which is] in
the wine . . . the fatness and the savour of the olives . . . the slumber of a man and
his rest by night . . . the union of holy matrimony, wherein men beget their chil-
dren for a blessing ... in war that destroyeth the ungodly, and establisheth peace,
and delivereth the righteous ... in the midst of the brethren [who live together]

. . . and towards those who are weary, and when he giveth them strength.

(Discourse on the Compassion of God and of the Archangel Michael
tr. E. A. W Budge, Miscellaneous Coptic Texts (London 1915) 757-8)

By playing a role in the slow emergence of an imaginative model of the
world that had a place for such wide-arching prayers, the Christian saints
of late antiquity helped to make Christianity at last, and for a short
moment, before the rise of Islam, the one truly universal religion of much
of Europe and the middle east.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 27

THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF
ORTHODOXY

PAULINE ALLEN

The definition of orthodoxy between 425 and 600 finds expression primar-
ily in the decrees or statements of the Oecumenical Councils of Ephesus
I (431), Chalcedon (451) and Constantinople II (553), which to a large
extent were held at imperial instigation. The difficulties of enforcing such
definitions, which often had to be upheld by the legislative, military, and
even theological and liturgical interventions of emperors, prove that ortho-
doxy so defined was by no means acceptable to all Christians in the empire.
This was particularly the case with the Council of Chalcedon, for its recep-
tion and promulgation, or its rejection and condemnation, were played out
not only in imperial and patriarchal circles, but also among great numbers
of monks and faithful. What, in fact, constituted right belief? Both propo-
nents and opponents of Chalcedon laid claim to orthdoxy, tracing their
pedigree in right belief back to the Council of Nicaea (325). An additional
complication in assessing the definitions of orthodoxy in this period and
the manner in which they were enforced is caused by the development and
differentiation in the expression of doctrine. The interpretation of
Chalcedon by its sixth-century adherents, for instance, was to differ from
the perception of orthodoxy among their fifth-century counterparts.
Furthermore, imperial policies adopted for the enforcement of orthodoxy
were often dictated by a desire for ecclesiastical unity rather than for the
preservation of right belief, which in such cases was used as an administra-
tive tool. Increasingly, different perceptions of orthodoxy, and contrary
opinions regarding its enforcement, caused ruptures not only among
Christians of the eastern empire, but between east and west as well.

I. THE COUNCILS OF EPHESUS I AND II

Prior to the First Council of Ephesus two figures dominate the theological
debate concerning orthodoxy — Cyril, patriarch of Alexandria (41 2—44), and
the Antiochene Nestorius, who in 428 was appointed by the emperor
Theodosius II as patriarch of Constantinople. While this was indeed a
conflict of personalities, it was also a confrontation between the Alexandrian
school, with its allegorical interpretation of scripture and its emphasis on the

811

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8l2 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

one nature of the divine Logos made flesh, and the Antiochene school,
which favoured a more literal reading of scripture and stressed the two
natures in Christ after the union. It was Nestorius’ rejection of the title
Theotokos (God-bearer) as applied to Mary and his substitution of the word
Christotokos (Christ-bearer) which particularly drew the ire of Cyril and the
Alexandrians. Celestine, bishop of Rome, was also disquieted by the con-
tents of Nestorius’ sermons. When a complete dossier of the correspon-
dence which had passed between the two eastern patriarchs reached him,
including Cyril’s first and second letters to Nestorius, he and his synod con-
demned Nestorius and charged Cyril with overseeing the doctrinal capitula-
tion of Nestorius or else putting into effect his condemnation (August 430).
On 19 November 430, however, the emperor Theodosius intervened — on
behalf, as he thought, of his protege — and convoked a council which was to
meet at Ephesus on 7 June the following year. Meanwhile Cyril delivered his
ultimatum to Nestorius in the form of a third letter, in which he accused the
patriarch of Constantinople of having ‘injected the ferment of bizarre and
outlandish heresy into congregations not only at Constantinople but all over
the world’. 1 To this document were attached twelve anathemata (Twelve
Chapters) for his enemy to subscribe. Together with his first two letters to
Nestorius, they came to be regarded as a touchstone of orthodoxy in subse-
quent theological debate. 2

Nestorius’ refusal to accept the Twelve Chapters meant that at Ephesus
he would be on trial. As it was, he was condemned and deposed by Cyril
and the Alexandrians in the absence both of John of Antioch and his party,
and of the Roman delegation. Furthermore, Cyril’s third letter and the
Twelve Chapters were inserted into the official proceedings of the council,
and Mary was proclaimed Theotokos. The faith of Nicaea was upheld. The
fact that Cyril and his colleague Memnon of Ephesus were in their turn
anathematized by the Antiochene party when the latter finally arrived did
not help the cause of Nestorius, who was forced to return to Antioch.

Ephesus I was not only a triumph for Cyril and implicitly for orthodoxy
as defined in Cyril’s third letter to Nestorius, but also a defeat for Nestorius
and his christology in Syria. By imperial legislation in 435 Nestorius was
banished from the patriarchate of Antioch; 3 in 448 another imperial edict
ordered all his works to be burnt. 4 While Nestorian Christianity was to take
root beyond the Roman empire in Persia, Nestorius himself was added to
the list of names regarded by orthodox Christians as heresiarchs.

After the demise of Nestorius, the Antiochenes and Alexandrians re-
established unity between their two patriarchates based on a compromise
christological document which became known as the Formula of Reunion.

1 Greek text in Wickham (19 8 3) 12, lines 13—14. The translation is Wickham’s (13).

2 For the text of these anathemata see Wickham (1983) 28—33; on their significance see ibid.

xxxv— xliii. 3 C.Th. xvi.5.66. 4 CJ 1.1.3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

THE COUNCILS OF EPHESUS I AND II 8 1 3

This document is also significant as the first in a series of theological com-
promises in the debates of the next two centuries. While the agreement was
a more successful compromise than most of its kind, the peace effected
after the union was none the less uneasy, not least because of the efforts of
Cyril and his followers to secure additionally the condemnation of the
(deceased) Antiochene theologians, Diodore of Tarsus and Theodore of
Mopsuestia. Although Proclus, patriarch of Constantinople (434—46), was
unwilling to condone this course of action in his christological work, the
Tome to the Armenians, Cyril’s cause was taken up by Dioscorus, his succes-
sor as patriarch of Alexandria in 444, who was both an ardent Cvrillian and
a declared opponent of the Antiochene school. On the other side,
Theodoret of Cyrrhus and Ibas of Edessa defended the Antiochene teach-
ers strenuously. In the attempts of the Cyrillians here to widen Nestorius’
condemnation to include other Antiochenes, we can see the beginnings of
the so-called Three Chapters controversy, which was to be fully articulated
in the reign of Justinian.

Among the influential monastic body in Constantinople, the archiman-
drite Eutyches had acquired considerable support for his christological
views. While these are not known to us with certainty, 5 as represented by his
opponents, such as Theodoret of Cyrrhus, Eutyches implied that Christ was
not consubstantial with human beings. Like the emperor, Dioscorus also
took the part of the archimandrite, who shared his negative views of the pro-
tagonists of the Antiochene school. Eutyches nevertheless met with stiff
opposition from Flavian, who had become patriarch of Constantinople in
446, and the home synod of the capital city, who condemned him for his
views. The archimandrite’s appeal to Leo, bishop of Rome, was backed up
by the emperor, who determined to hold another council at Ephesus on 1
August 449 to restore ecclesiastical order. Indeed, the emperor played a
significant role in the preparations for this council, since he deputed not
Flavian but Dioscorus to convene it, and stipulated the number and nature
of its participants. Furthermore, he banned Theodoret from the proceed-
ings. The papal legates who travelled to Ephesus carried a letter from Leo to
Flavian, the Tome of Leo, in which the bishop of Rome declared his chris-
tological position, affirming Christ to be one single person, but with two
natures, divine and human, each of which interacts with the other. The Tome
was to become both one of the canons of two-nature christology and an
object of hatred by adherents of the one-nature christology. The document
was not read, however, during the aggressive and riotous proceedings of the
council, presided over by the patriarch of Alexandria, at which Eutyches was
rehabilitated, Flavian, Theodoret and Ibas deposed, and Cyril’s Twelve
Chapters accepted. Amid the triumph for Dioscorus personally and for

5 See Wickham (1982b) 562.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

814 27 . THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

Alexandrian christology in general, Leo was in a difficult position in that his
Tome had not been reconciled with Cyril’s Twelve Chapters. The scandalized
bishop of Rome called Ephesus II a latrocinium or robber council, and,
indeed, because it was not accepted in the west as orthodox, the council
never achieved oecumenical status.

II. THE COUNCIL OF CHALCEDON

After the death of Theodosius on 28 July 450, his sister Pulcheria and her
consort, the emperor Marcian, gave new direction to ecclesiastical matters.
Pulcheria had already taken the side of Rome against Ephesus II. Now the
new emperor summoned another council, which met at Chalcedon, across
the Bosphorus from Constantinople, on 8 October 451. The role of
Marcian and Pulcheria in securing new terms for orthodoxy at Chalcedon
was significant: not only were they present at the important sixth session,
but they entrusted the organization of the proceedings to imperial rather
than ecclesiastical officials, thus ensuring orderly procedures. 6 Here the
Tome of Leo was declared to be orthodox — that is, in harmony with the
Fathers and with Cyril; Dioscorus was deposed, and Theodoret and Ibas
restored. The participants also promulgated a definition of faith, which,
while it outlawed the extremes of both schools, namely Eutychianism and
Nestorianism, and attempted a balance between the christological termi-
nology of each, proclaimed Christ ‘in two natures’ as opposed to the
expression ‘from two natures’ favoured by the Alexandrians. This
definition was problematical from the start because in the east it was seen
only as an interpretation of the symbol or creed of Nicaea, whereas for Leo
it was an absolute definition which allowed no addition or subtraction. '
Also critical was the resolution of the council, which later became known
as canon 28, whereby

the one hundred and fifty bishops gave the same privileges to the most holy patri-
archal throne of New Rome, judging with good reason that the city which was
honoured by the presence of the imperial office and the Senate and enjoyed equal
privileges with the older imperial Rome, should also be made powerful, like Rome,
in ecclesiastical matters, and should hold second place after her. 8

As a result of this canon, the influence of Alexandria was short-circuited.
To the bishop of Rome the canon was also unfavourable, and he was reluc-
tant to accept it explicitly. The issues of the formula ‘in two natures’ and
canon 28 were to cause unrest and resentment among Christians in both
east and west in the century that followed, and a lasting division in the
churches of the eastern Roman empire.

6 Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 168. 7 Ep. 145 in ACO 11.4, no. 87, p. 96, 4—6.

8 ACO 1. 1. 3, 89, lines 4—9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

AFTERMATH OF CHALCEDON 8 I 5

III. AFTERMATH OF CHALCEDON

The edict of 7 February 452, by which the emperors Marcian and
Valentinian III enjoined their subjects to obey decisions of the council, 9
was promulgated amid turbulence in Palestine, Egypt and Antioch in the
aftermath of the council. That monks and people also defined and
enforced orthdoxy at this time is clear from such cases as that of Juvenal
of Jerusalem, who lost the support of the influential monks in his see, and
on his return to Jerusalem after the council was forced to flee in the face of
their determined opposition. The amount of popular literature written in
the century after Chalcedon both for and against the council demonstrated
that reaction to the perceived issues was not confined to the imperial or
patriarchal level.

While Marcian had Juvenal restored by force, similar trouble was
brewing in Alexandria, where Dioscorus, condemned and excommuni-
cated at Chalcedon, was replaced by his trusted priest Proterius who,
however, accepted the council. Since the people and monks remained loyal
to Dioscorus and refused to recognize his successor, Proterius could not
consolidate his position, despite banishing his chief opponents, the deacon
Peter Mongus and the priest Timothy, nicknamed by his opponents
Aelurus, ‘the Cat’ or ‘the Weasel’, because he was so emaciated from asce-
tic practices. 10 In 45 5 Marcian was forced to intervene by issuing another
edict, prescribing penalties for those who adhered to the docetic heresies
of Apollinaris of Laodicea and Eutyches, 11 i.e. those who refused to accept
the Chalcedonian definition of Christ’s true humanity and true divinity.
Subsequently Proterius was kept in power by a military presence. When, on
the emperor’s death on 26 January 457, feeling against Proterius height-
ened, Timothy Aelurus was brought back secretly to Alexandria and con-
secrated patriarch. Two months later the people lynched Proterius. It was
the energetic leadership of Timothy Aelurus, who suppressed or removed
bishops who adhered to Chalcedon, 12 which ostensibly prompted
Marcian’s successor Leo and the ambitious patriarch of Constantinople,
Anatolius, to despatch in 457 to Leo of Rome, metropolitans and eminent
ascetics in the east a codex encjclius, canvassing their opinion on the conse-
cration of Timothy Aelurus and on the status of Chalcedon. The replies
which have come down to us reject Timothy, and only one bishop,
Amphilochius of Side, seems to have declined to accept the council, pos-
sibly because at the gathering itself he had been hit on the head to encour-
age him to subscribe the conciliar statement. 13 In reaction to these positive
replies, Leo of Rome wrote his letter 165, the so-called Second Tome,

9 ACO 11. 2. 2, no. 8 (Latin) and 11.1.3, no. 23 (Greek). 10 Zach. Rh. HE iv.i. 11 CJ 1.5.8.

12 Zach. Rh. HE m.io-iv.2; Evagr. HE 11.8.

13 ACO 11.5.9—98. For the alleged coercion of Amphilochius see Zach. Rh. HE m.i.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8 1 6 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

spelling out the defence of Chalcedon. Timothy’s position had become
untenable, and partly through the efforts of the convinced Chalcedonian
Gennadius, the successor of patriarch Anatolius in Constantinople, he was
removed from Alexandria at the end of 45 9 or the beginning of 460. In his
exile, however, Timothy wrote influential works condemning Chalcedon.

Meanwhile Antioch was becoming increasingly anti-Chalcedonian, 14
particularly under the leadership of Peter the Fuller, a presbyter whose
theology was Cyrillian. Seemingly with help from the Isaurian general
Zeno, Peter was consecrated patriarch of Antioch in the absence of the
Chalcedonian patriarch, Martyrius. In particular Peter strove to make an
anti-Chalcedonian addition to the liturgical hymn known as the Trishagion
(Thrice-holy), which properly speaking ran: ‘Holy God, Holy Strong One,
Holy Immortal One, have mercy on us.’ The proposed addition of the
words ‘who was crucified for us’ before ‘have mercy on us’ would have
involved a phrase which was used as an anti-Chalcedonian slogan and was
seen by Chalcedonians as theopaschite i.e. as proposing that God, although
impassible and eternal, had died on the cross. Because of the unrest which
this phrase occasioned in Antioch, the emperor Leo intervened, and in 471
Peter was removed. 15

IV. ZENO AND BAS IL I S CU S

The Isaurian Zeno became emperor on 17 November 474, but the follow-
ing year was compelled to flee Constantinople because of a palace intrigue,
and to see Leo’s brother-in-law Basiliscus take his place. The usurper cast
his lot with the anti-Chalcedonians: 16 Timothy Aelurus and Peter the Fuller
were recalled to their sees, and Basiliscus composed an encyclical,
addressed primarily to Timothy, in which the Tome of Leo and the ‘inno-
vation’ of Chalcedon were anathematized, and the creeds and Councils of
Nicaea, Constantinople (381) and Ephesus I and II were upheld. 17 In the
conflict concerning Chalcedon this is the first of a series of imperial inter-
ventions imposing by force a doctrinal interpretation on the subjects of the
empire. 18 Although during Basiliscus’ regency the sees of Ephesus,
Antioch and Jerusalem were anti-Chalcedonian, there was opposition to
the encyclical in Constantinople itself, where patriarch Acacius considered
that the rights conferred on his patriarchate by Chalcedon had been ren-
dered ambiguous. Basiliscus was forced to retract his edict in favour of an

14 Where possible, the term ‘anti-Chalcedonian’ is to be preferred to the pejorative and incorrect
word ‘Monophysite’ in referring to the opponents of the council of 451. See Allen (1993).

15 Theod. Lect. HE ed. Hansen 1 10.14— 1 5.

16 For speculations on Basiliscus’ motives in this move see Frend, Monophysite Movement 169—70.

17 Zach. Rh. HE v.i— 2; Evagr. HE 111.4; Schwartz (1927) 49—51.

18 See Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 195—6, and 196 n. 46 for a list of these imperial statements down
to the seventh century.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ZENO AND BASILISCUS 817

antencyclical condemning Nestorius and Eutyches and reaffirming the
rights of the patriarchate of Constantinople, and eventually had to leave
the capital on the return of Zeno in 476.

On Zeno’s return Basiliscus’ edicts were promptly rescinded, the eccle-
siastical status quo was restored, and Acacius’ position reinforced. The
prominent anti-Chalcedonians Peter the Fuller and Paul of Ephesus were
exiled, but Timothy Aelurus died on 3 1 July 477 before he could be ban-
ished. There were obstacles to this restoration, however, and, indeed, to the
unity of church and of empire. To begin with, although consecrated irreg-
ularly in Timothy Aelurus’ stead, Peter Mongus was regarded in Alexandria
as the true patriarch. Furthermore the people of Antioch were anti-
Chalcedonian, even if Chalcedonian bishops were appointed there and
Peter the Fuller was still in exile. It was, in fact, because of the murder of a
new Chalcedonian bishop in Antioch that Acacius of Constantinople
wrote to pope Simplicius roundly condemning Peter Mongus. In
Jerusalem, meanwhile, an uneasy modus vivendi existed between the over-
whelmingly anti-Chalcedonian monks and the patriarch. It was precisely
the compromise in Jerusalem which seems to have inspired the edict prom-
ulgated by Zeno in 482 in an attempt to effect religious unity. The Henotikon
(document of union), as it came to be called, was addressed to the church
of Alexandria, Egypt and Cyrenaica; only later when it was enforced gen-
erally throughout the empire did it acquire universal relevance. While the
edict did not anathematize the Tome, Chalcedon or the formula ‘in two
natures’, stress was placed on the need for unity of belief according to the
one and only definition of faith, i.e. that of Nicaea. 19 Apart from Nicaea,
the Councils of Constantinople and Ephesus I were acknowledged, and
Cyril’s Twelve Chapters accepted. Chalcedon was mentioned only in the
following crucial sentence: ‘Everyone who has held or holds any other
opinion, either at present or at another time, whether at Chalcedon or in
any synod whatever, we anathematize.’ The Henotikon was a masterpiece of
imperial diplomacy, in which the patriarch Acacius had had a considerable
hand, and nominally at least it united Constantinople and Alexandria, while
bringing the major eastern sees into communion. In the long run, however,
it was to be unsuccessful. For extreme anti-Chalcedonians, especially the
monks in Egypt, euphemistically called Diakrinomenoi or Hesitants, only an
outright condemnation of the Tome and Chalcedon would suffice. In fact
the rigorists in Alexandria later separated, being known first as Aposchistai
(Separatists), and subsequently as Akephaloi or Headless Ones, a reference
to their seemingly anonymous leadership. But some Chalcedonians too,
like Calandion of Antioch, found the edict unacceptable. Rome was also
unhappy at the recognition of Peter Mongus inherent in the reconciliation

19 Zach. Rh. HE v.8; Evagr. HE 111.14; Schwartz (1927) 133.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8 1 8 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

of Alexandria and Constantinople, at the perceived perfidy of Acacius, and
at the jurisdiction which the patriarch of the capital had arrogated to
himself in other matters. Alerted by the strict Chalcedonian Sleepless
Monks in Constantinople, in 484 pope Felix III excommunicated Acacius,
and demanded that the emperor Zeno choose between the apostle Peter
and Peter Mongus. 20 This was the beginning of the Acacian schism
between east and west, which was to last until the reign of Justin I.

V. ANAS TA S I U S I

On his accession to the throne after the death of Zeno in April 491,
Anastasius I (491— 51 8) determined to use the Henotikon as an oecumenical
tool, interpreting the document as being in no way an annulment of
Chalcedon. In working towards restoring relations with Rome as well,
Anastasius tried to make the Henotikon the basis of negotiation. However,
since he aimed primarily at ecclesiastical peace rather than at a uniform
belief, the new emperor was usually willing to allow cities that were pre-
dominantly of one persuasion or another to be governed by bishops sym-
pathetic to their cause. This policy caused confusion and polarization,
according to the sixth-century church historian Evagrius, who identifies
three groupings: (1) rigorous anti-Chalcedonians who were satisfied only
with a condemnation of Chalcedon and Leo’s Tome; (2) rigorous, uncom-
promising defenders of Chalcedon; (3) Chalcedonians and anti-
Chalcedonians who abided by the Henotikon , 21 The emperor’s enforcement
of the Henotikon as the basis for negotiation is demonstrated clearly also by
the deposition and exile of the Chalcedonian patriarch of Constantinople,
Euphemius (490—6), who did not support the Henotikon. On the other
hand, adherence to the document availed a patriarch nothing if, like Flavian
of Antioch (498—512), he was unable to deal with unrest within his juris-
diction.

The reign of Anastasius is decisive for the history of opposition to
Chalcedonian orthodoxy in that, as well as proving the failure of compro-
mise documents like the Henotikon , this period produced two of the great-
est theologians of the anti-Chalcedonian ‘one nature’ (Monophysite)
christology — Philoxenus of Mabbug and Severus of Antioch, both of
whom tried to enforce an anti-Chalcedonian interpretation of the
Henotikon. Philoxenus not only induced the monastic body at Antioch to
oppose the Chalcedonian patriarch Flavian, but also persuaded Anastasius
to have Euphemius’ successor Macedonius summon the home synod,
where a confession of faith was composed (507?) in which the Antiochene
and Leonine tradition as evident in Chalcedon was condemned. In 509, at

20 Felix, Ep. 8, in Schwartz (1934) 81, lines 24fF. 21 Evagr. HE in. 30.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

ANASTASIUS I

819

a synod in Antioch where Philoxenus was present, the Henotikon was given
a more rigorous interpretation along Monophysite, and especially
Alexandrian, lines, but the two-nature christology (Dyophysitism) was not
condemned expressly. Meanwhile Severus had gone to the capital with a
large group of Palestinian monks to protest against the persecutions of
anti-Chalcedonians by patriarch Elias of Jerusalem. The latitude which
Anastasius had allowed bishops and patriarchs in their individual sees had
not produced the ecclesiastical unity which the emperor desired. This
explains the composition of the Typos of the emperor, a document drawn
up by Severus (perhaps between 5 1 2 and 5 1 8), in which Chalcedon and the
Tome of Leo were explicitly anathematized. It is doubtful, however,
whether the Typos was ever promulgated as official policy. 22 Although the
patriarch of Alexandria, John of Nikiu (505—16), was in favour of inter-
preting the Henotikon in an anti-Chalcedonian sense, the synod of Sidon in
October 5 1 1 , at which all the patriarchs of the east were present, retained
the Henotikon as the basis of negotiations and added to it no anathemata on
Chalcedon or the Tome. However, the anti-Chalcedonians were able to
secure the deposition of Flavian of Antioch a year later and to see Severus
consecrated in his stead on 16 November 512. 23

During this time, Anastasius’ attempts to produce unity had been threat-
ened on the one hand by those who rallied around the Monophysite catch-
cry ‘who was crucified for us’, which was used by Severus’ monks, and on
the other hand by the Chalcedonian party, of which the Sleepless Monks
were some of the most influential and vociferous members. In giving
asylum to pro-Chalcedonian refugees from Egypt and acting as informants
to the popes in Rome, as well as through instigating a collection of docu-
ments which was used as Chalcedonian propaganda, the Sleepless Monks
were to be centre-stage in the enforcement of the council of 451 from the
time of pope Felix (483—92) until the reign of Justinian. There were two
uprisings associated with the contentious formula, the first in 510/11, for
which Severus claimed Macedonius, patriarch of Constantinople, was
responsible, and the second in 5 1 2. In August 5 1 1 Macedonius, who was no
match for Severus and could not carry out the emperor’s eirenic policies,
was deposed. 24 Apart from Palestine, the east was now administered by
anti-Chalcedonian bishops, and thanks to the efforts of Philoxenus and
Severus Monophysitism was in the ascendancy. The Henotikon, on the other
hand, had once again proved unsuccessful as a tool for enforcing unity, as
the depositions of Macedonius and Flavian showed.

Once patriarch, Severus lost no time in anathematizing Chalcedon and
the Tome, but he left the Henotikon in abeyance. A number of clergy in the

22 See Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition ii.i 273—9 f° r an assessment of the contents of the
Typos. 23 De Halleux (1963) 70—4. 24 Theod. Lect. HE ed. Hansen 139.25—7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

820

27 . THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

east, however, in particular the bishops of Illyricium under Alcison of
Nicopolis, were in favour of Chalcedon and of Rome, and looked to
Vitalian, the Thracian count, as their champion. In 5 1 2 Vitalian led a revolt
against Anastasius, demanding the restoration of Macedonius and Flavian
and no addition to the Trishagion. On Vitalian’s victory in 514 Anastasius
agreed to eliminate the addition to the Trishagion and to end the breach with
Rome, and invited the bishop of Rome to a council to be held at Heracleia.
However, his attempts to reach a compromise with pope Hormisdas
(514—23) on these issues was unsuccessful, 25 and by the time the emperor
died in 5 1 8 the breach with Rome was complete. In the wake of Vitalian’s
success the Scythian monks in Constantinople were advocating the use of
a potentially theopaschite formula (‘one of the Trinity suffered’) in a
Chalcedonian but anti-Nestorian sense. At the end of Anastasius’ reign the
anti-Chalcedonian position had crystallized and been made explicit, in such
a way that the major issues in ecclesiastical unity were clear: all hinged on
the acceptance or rejection of Chalcedon and the Tome.

VI. JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

There could be no doubt about the agenda awaiting the new emperor Justin
I (518—27) on his accession: the populace in Constantinople demanded that
he should make his position clear by proclaiming Chalcedon and banishing
Severus. This Justin did. The four oecumenical councils were proclaimed,
the names of Macedonius and Leo of Rome were restored to the diptychs
in Constantinople, and the feast of the Council of Chalcedon was inaugu-
rated (16 July 518). Justin began initiatives to end the schism with Rome,
with the support of his nephew, Justinian, and Vitalian. The importance
which the emperor attached to the restoration of unity between east and
west can be seen from the invidious terms of the libellus put forward by
pope Hormisdas and signed by John, patriarch of Constantinople, on 28
March 5 1 9. Not only did John anathematize the most important opponents
of Ephesus and Chalcedon, but he acquiesced in removing from the dip-
tychs the names of all patriarchs of Constantinople, including Acacius, as
well as those of the emperors Zeno and Anastasius. 26 After thirty-five
years, and seemingly at a great price to the eastern empire, unity was
restored between east and west, and Chalcedonian orthodoxy triumphed.
But in the east itself the polarization between Chalcedonian and anti-
Chalcedonian parties was ever more apparent. Severus had been forced to
flee his see a few months after the death of Anastasius. Like Julian of
Halicarnassus and others before him, he sought refuge in Alexandria,
which was uncompromisingly anti-Chalcedonian. In 519 Philoxenus, too,

25 Frend, Monophysite Movement 2 3 1—2. 26 Guenther (1 895) 167.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN

821

was forced into exile. Chalcedonian bishops were put in the place of the
deposed except in Cilicia I, Phoenicia Maritima and Arabia, 27 and anti-
Chalcedonian monks were badly treated. Persecution followed. But even
within its own ranks the anti- Chalcedonian movement was experiencing
the problems which were to dog its history for the rest of the sixth century,
and to impede imperial attempts to enforce Chalcedonian orthodoxy on
opponents of the council of 451. These problems arose from theological
disputes among Monophysites, such as we see in Egypt between Severus
and Julian of Halicarnassus, who disagreed on the manner in which human
passions or emotions were attributed to Christ. For Julian the emphasis on
the unity of Christ was of primary importance, and the difference between
the two natures was secondary. Thus he asserted that to describe the body
of Christ as ‘corruptible’ ( phthartos ), i.e. subject to human suffering, was to
call into question the unity of the body with the divinity. 28 Julian’s doctrine,
which was not always understood properly by his adversaries, attracted
opposition not only from anti-Chalcedonians like Severus, who himself
wrote several works against it, but also from Chalcedonians. However,
Julian’s ‘aphthartodocetism’, as it was dubbed by its enemies, continued to
exercise considerable influence, especially in the Alexandrian and
Armenian churches.

Justin’s nephew, the count Justinian, had been assuming increasing
importance in ecclesiastical politics, taking up the cause of the Scythian
monks, and advising pope Hormisdas that the Scythian theopaschite
formula could be interpreted as anti-Nestorian and orthodox, and so unite
Chalcedonians and anti-Chalcedonians. The count also attempted to have
Hormisdas review his demands concerning the removal of bishops’ names
from the diptychs. Hormisdas, however, conceived of using, not being
used by, imperial power to enforce orthodoxy as he saw it.

From April to August 527, when Justinian acted as co-regent with his
uncle, he passed legislation against heretics, Manichees and Samaritans. 29
This was a foretaste of the policies he was to pursue after becoming sole
regent on the death of Justin. Not only was he determined to end the split
between Chalcedonians and anti-Chalcedonians, but in edicts early in his
reign he enacted penalties against Nestorians, Eutychians, Apollinarians,
Montanists and others. 30 Pagans (‘Hellenes’) were the subject of a particu-
larly energetic and programmatic attack. In a law passed in the year 529 31
pagans are ordered to be baptized with their entire households, or run the
risk of being excluded from the state and stripped of all goods and posses-
sions. Pagan teachers are singled out and forbidden to teach, under threat
of dire penalty. The promulgation of this stringent legislation, which

27 Honigmann (1951) 25 ff.

28 Draguet (1924); Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition 11.2 79—110. 29 CJ 1.1.5.

30 CJ 1.5.18. 31 CJ i.ii.io.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

822 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

affected chiefly the aristocratic class,’ 2 resulted in a spate of trials and exe-
cutions. It was an act which, like the closing of the Neoplatonist academy
of Athens and the confiscation of its endowment in 529—32, demonstrated
that for Justinian the enforcement of orthodoxy entailed the eradication of
paganism. Yet, as the missionary efforts of John of Ephesus were to show
a decade later, paganism did survive this onslaught. It has been argued that
Justinian’s anti-pagan measures, which had a deleterious effect on secular
higher education, were responsible for the decay of ancient literature and
culture, the renaissance of which had begun under Constantius two centu-
ries earlier. 33

In the administration of churches and clergyjustinian brought all under
his control. 34 His was a total religious policy in which pagans, heretics,
Samaritans and Jews were also to accept Chalcedonian orthodoxy, as is evi-
denced inter alia by the concerted mission effort in his reign. On the litur-
gical front as well, Justinian consequently left litde to chance. The liturgical
chant, the Trishagion, including the formula ‘One of the Holy Trinity
suffered in the flesh’, which the emperor had championed as a tool for
ecclesiastical unity even before becoming sole regent, was subsumed into
a profession of faith and enshrined in the introduction to his legal code in
528. j5 According to Theophanes, 36 in 5 35 Justinian ordered that the hymn
Ho monogenes (which began with the words ‘Onlybegotten Son and Word
of God’) was to be sung in the liturgy at Constantinople. In its terminol-
ogy the hymn was acceptable to both sides — the anti-Chalcedonian tradi-
tion even attributed its introduction to Severus of Antioch. A further step
was taken by the emperor at the Council of Constantinople in 553, when
an anathema was placed on anyone who did not confess that Christ, ‘who
was crucified in the flesh, is true God and Lord of glory, and one of the
Holy Trinity’. 37 Like the Cherubic hymn introduced into the liturgy in
573—4 by Justin II,” 8 the Ho monogenes and its manipulation by Justinian
show that theology in the sixth century had turned its back on the
Antiochene tradition and was tending in an Alexandrian direction. 39 It is
also no accident that the great melodist Romanos, who composed his kon-
takia or liturgical hymns during Justinian’s reign, is decidedly anti-
Nestorian, while reticent about christological heresies in the period before
or after Chalcedon. 40

The nature of Justinian’s collaboration with the empress Theodora in
ecclesiastical politics is difficult to determine; it has been seen variously as
clever or despicable. This is in large part caused by the extreme bias with
which she is portrayed in contemporary sources, particularly Procopius of

32 Chuvin, Chronicle 135. 33 Lemerle, Byzantine Humanism 77. 34 Nov. 6; CJ 1.3. 41; 1.3.47.

35 6/ 1.1.5. 36 Chron. A.M. 6028, p. 216 de Boor. 37 ACO iv. 1.242.

38 Cedrenus, Historiarum compendium , ed. Niebuhr, vol. 35, 685 lines 3—4.

39 See further Schulz (1986) 21—2. 40 Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition 11.2.513— 23.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN 823

Caesarea and John of Ephesus. 41 Theodora had Monophysite sympathies
and became the patron of Monophysites in exile, sheltering them in one of
her palaces. According to the partisan John of Ephesus, these bishops,
clergy and ascetics numbered more than five hundred, and one could

go into the palace itself called that of Hormisdas, as into a great and marvellous
desert of solitaries, and marvel at their numbers . . . and the same men’s spiritual
songs which were heard from all sides, and their marvellous canticles and their mel-
ancholy voices. 42

The polarization of the two sides in the debate over Chalcedon, which is
particularly evident in the bias of the two most important church histories
of the sixth century, those of John of Ephesus and the Chalcedonian
Evagrius, went a step further in c. 5 30, when John of Telia began to ordain
Monophysite clergy: this was eventually to lead to the separation of the
Monophysite churches. Around 530 Justinian relaxed the persecution of
Monophysites, probably in order to be able to organize meetings in
Constantinople between Chalcedonian and anti-Chalcedonian bishops and
monastic representatives. But the Nika revolt of 532, which threatened the
power of the Byzantine monarch, also demonstrated the extent of anti-
Chalcedonian feeling in the capital, as well as the necessity of removing all
suspicion of Nestorianism from the Chalcedonian position. The meetings
of 532/3 between Chalcedonians and anti-Chalcedonians were attended by
the patrician Strategius, whose reponsibility it was to report the progress of
the discussions to the emperor. The aim of this exercise was to conduct the
debate on a purely theological plane, and, by allowing the anti-
Chalcedonians to air their grievances against Chalcedon, to remove their
doubts and restore an ecclesiastical unity based on acceptance of the
council of 451. 4 ’ This can be seen from the fact that Justinian himself pre-
sided over the last session of the talks, and that on their conclusion impe-
rial decrees were promulgated, aimed at unifying the empire, accepting four
councils, condemning Eutyches, Apollinaris and Nestorius, proposing the
anti-Nestorian theopaschite formula of the Scythian monks (‘the one who
suffered in the flesh is God and one of the Trinity’), but passing over the
Tome of Leo. 44 The decrees were accepted in both east and west, and the
Sleepless Monks were even condemned by Rome as ‘Nestorian’. Further
accommodation of the anti-Chalcedonian position can be seen in the ordi-
nation of the Monophysite Theodosius to the patriarchate of Alexandria
on 1 o February 535, a move seemingly engineered by Theodora. The
empress also arranged for the Chalcedonian bishop of Trebizond,

41 Cameron, Procopius (1985) 49—83.

42 John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 47, ed. E. W Brooks, PO xvm.677.

43 Brock (1981); Speigl (1984); Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition 11.2 232—48.

44 <71.1.6; 1.1.7.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

824 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

Anthimus, to become patriarch of Constantinople. In Alexandria vocifer-
ous opposition to Theodosius’ accession was roused by the Gaianites, an
offshoot of the Julianists, and the patriarch had to be kept in power by the
intervention of imperial troops. When Theodosius was summoned to
Constantinople, an imperial invitation was extended to Severus to come to
the capital to discuss christological matters with Anthimus. The upshot was
that Severus, Anthimus and Theodosius communicated with each other, 45
thereby bringing unity and strength to the anti-Chalcedonians and threat-
ening the Chalcedonian position in the east. Strict Chalcedonians in
Palestine and Syria expressed their concern to Rome. At the demand of
pope Agapitus, Anthimus was deposed, and an imperial edict was promul-
gated (536) anathematizing Severus, Anthimus and their followers, and
ordering that Severus’ works be burnt. 46 Severus himself retreated again to
Egypt, where he died on 2 August 538.

Under the protection of Theodora, Theodosius took over Severus’ role
as leader of the anti-Chalcedonian party and began ordaining Monophysite
bishops. Between 5 36 and 5 38 the empress had attempted to have the ana-
themata against the Monophysite leaders revoked by using her influence on
Vigilius, the papal legate in Constantinople, and even by contriving his
appointment as pope (29 March 537). This ploy, however, was unsuccess-
ful, and in 540 Vigilius was forced by Justinian to ratify the anathemata of
536.

The reign of Justinian witnessed the rise of yet another christological
controversy, which apparently posed a threat both to Chalcedonian and
anti-Chalcedonian perceptions of orthodoxy, when in the 530s the
Monophysite deacon Themistius, who came from the anti-Julianist party in
Alexandria, promulgated in Constantinople his doctrine concerning the
ignorance of Christ. Just as Christ’s body was subject to death and corrup-
tion, so too, argued Themistius, was his human mind finite and subject to
ignorance. While this was a logical progression in the opposition to the sup-
posed ideas of Julian of Halicarnassus, the doctrine caused a furore within
anti-Chalcedonian circles, and Themistius and his followers were soon
awarded the sobriquet Agnoetai (those who do not know). The debate cer-
tainly lasted to the end of the sixth century. It seems as if Chalcedonians
too were attracted to Themistius’ ideas, and that Justinian was led to pass
an edict against Agnoetic teaching. 47 Like Julianism before it, this debate
both shows the shortcomings of Monophysite christology, the expression
of which produced an increasing number of splinter groups, and points to
a certain common ground between pro- and anti-Chalcedonians.

While on the Chalcedonian side a concerted defence of Chalcedonian
orthodoxy was being made by such writers as Leontius of Byzantium and

45 Zach. Rh. /ffiix.19. 46 Nov. 42. 47 Brock (1985) 38— 9; Van Roey and Allen (1994) 8— 9.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN 825

Cyril of Scythopolis, among the moderate Chalcedonians we find a ten-
dency to combine acceptance of the Council of Chalcedon and the Tome
with a Cyrillian interpretation of Chalcedon. The more radical position
within this development (often called neo-Chalcedonianism) was the fol-
lowing. The expression ‘in two natures’ used of Christ is necessary in order
to combat Eutychianism; the term ‘from two natures’ or the one-nature
formula of Cyril has to be used to preclude Nestorianism. Both expres-
sions need to be used together, lest the terminological impasse arising from
the Chalcedonian definition continue. Representatives of this school of
thought were Nephalius of Alexandria, John of Scythopolis, John the
Grammarian and Ephraim of Amida. A more moderate approach, found
in Leontius of Jerusalem and in Justinian’s edict On the Right Faith (551), was
to supplement the Chalcedonian definition of faith with Cyrillian terms,
particularly those of the Twelve Chapters against Nestorius. Yet in his
theological tract the emperor remained firmly on Chalcedonian ground. 48

Meanwhile, in 542/ 3, as a consequence of a request for Monophysite
bishops by the Arab king al-Harith to Theodora, Theodosius consecrated
Jacob Baradaeus (Bar’Addai) metropolitan of Edessa and Theodore of
Arabia metropolitan of Bostra. This was a decisive step for the expan-
sion of Monophysitism and for the eventual separation of the anti-
Chalcedonian churches. Through the missionary efforts of Jacob and
other bishops consecrated by Theodosius, the anti-Chalcedonian cause
was strengthened in Asia Minor, Armenia, Syria, Arabia, the Aegean,
Egypt and Nubia. 49 The part played by Jacob in particular is reflected in
the fact that the Monophysite church in the Syrian region eventually came
to be known by the name Jacobite. According to the partisan John of
Ephesus, Jacob was so successful ‘that all the synodite [i.e. Chalcedonian]
bishops from all sides were exasperated, and made threats against him to
arrest him and tear him in pieces’. 50 On another missionary front, we find
John of Ephesus himself sent in 542 to evangelize pagans in Asia, Caria,
Lydia and Phrygia. 51 In 545—6 he cut a swathe through the area around
Tralles in Asia Minor. 52 His own claim that ‘eighty thousand were con-
verted and rescued from paganism, and ninety-eight churches and twelve
monasteries and seven other churches transformed from Jewish syn-
agogues were founded in these four provinces’ during his campaign
sounds scarcely credible. 53 It may also be doubted whether John con-
verted these pagans to Chalcedonian orthodoxy, but, on the other hand,
his missionary expeditions were funded by Justinian, and churches and
convents were built after the destruction of pagan temples. 54 Many of

48 Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition 11.2 437—9. 49 Van Roey (1979).

50 John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 49, ed. Brooks, PO 1 8.693. 51 John Eph. HE 11.44.

52 John Eph. HE 111.3; cf. Chuvin, Chronicle 143—4.

53 John Eph. Lives of the Eastern Saints 47, ed. Brooks, PO 1 8.681. 54 Engelhardt (1974) 16—17.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

826 27 . THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

these churches were in fact dedicated to die Theotokos, whose tide had
been ratified by the definition of Chalcedon.

Justinian’s designs for religious conformity throughout the empire also
encompassed the Jews and Samaritans, who became the subject of regula-
tion and legislation to an extent not seen previously during the reign of
Christian emperors. Although the Jews fared better than the Samaritans,
they too were subject to legal and financial limitations, enumerated in Novel
4 5 from the year 531. Just as he regulated the internal affairs of the churches,
so too the emperor intervened in Jewish matters, in Novel 146 (a.d. 532)
going so far as to legislate for the Bible to be read in synagogues not in
Hebrew, but in Latin or Greek, the two official languages of the empire. A
body of Jewish dogma was also condemned in the same Novel. The
Samaritans, for their part, having revolted frequently against the empire in
the past, were brought to heel early in Justinian’s reign after a revolt in 529,
during which they appointed their own emperor. 55 In the legislation of 5 30 56
they are grouped with Manichaeans and the worst kinds of heretics, and
subjected to similar penalties; their synagogues were ordered to be burnt.
The relaxation of these stringent measures in Novel 120 of 5 51, as a result
of the intercession of bishop Sergius of Caesarea with the emperor, was
followed by another bloody revolt four years later, which Justinian sent no
less a dignitary than the magister militum per Orientem to quell. For their con-
tinued resistance to Christianity the Samaritans later had punitive legislation
imposed on them by Justinian’s successor, Justin II. 57

In his enforcement of Chalcedonian orthodoxy Justinian had also to
deal with the disruption caused by Origenist monks in Palestinian monas-
teries. In 543 the emperor himself wrote a tract against the controversial
third-century theologian Origen and against Origenists, including ten ana-
themata on Origenistic doctrine. 55 This writing was ratified by a synod in
the same year, but in 5 5 3 at the Second Council of Constantinople Origen
and his works were condemned, together with those of his followers,
Evagrius of Pontus and Didymus the Blind. Nevertheless, the emperor’s
abiding effort was directed towards making Chalcedon acceptable to its
opponents. A possibility presented itself, suggested by one of the leaders
of the condemned Origenists, Theodore Askidas, whereby suspicion from
the Monophysite side concerning the Nestorianism of Chalcedon could be
allayed. 59 The plan, which had first emerged among Cvrillians after 43 1, was
a condemnation, on three counts or heads, of the Antiochene Theodore of
Mopsuestia and his works, the works of Theodoret against Cyril’s Twelve

55 John Malalas, Chron. 1 8; Procop. Buildings v .7 . 56 CJ 1.5.18—19.

57 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.262. 58 ACO 111.189— 214.

59 Unlike e.g. Frend, Monophysite Movement 279—80 and Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition 11.2
419—23, MeyendorfF, Imperial Unity 236—7 argues against the involvement of Theodore Askidas in this
episode.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

JUSTIN I AND JUSTINIAN 827

Chapters, and the so-called letter of Ibas of Edessa to Maris the Persian,
in which the incarnation of the Word was denied and Cyril was accused of
being a follower of the heretical Apollinaris of Laodicea. In 544 Justinian
issued an edict, no longer extant, condemning these Three Chapters. There
were, however, problems associated with these condemnations, and nega-
tive outcomes which the emperor could not envisage. In the first place, the
Monophysites found the edict unacceptable because it had not rejected the
authority of Chalcedon. In the west Justinian’s legislation found even
stronger opposition, because it was argued that Theodore had died in the
peace of the church and Theodoret and Ibas had been vindicated at
Chalcedon. Surely the edict represented a betrayal of an inspired council?
Vigilius of Rome, who was deeply in Theodora’s debt, was not so much
invited as brought to Constantinople, the expectation being that he would
put the weight of papal authority behind Justinian and subscribe the edict.
Afraid of abrogating Chalcedon, the pope initially refused to sign, but then
produced the required anathemata in 548, to great opposition in the west.
In his tract On the Right Faith, published in 5 51, Justinian reiterated the ana-
themata of 544. Although this tract also proclaimed four councils and
reaffirmed the Council of Chalcedon, the emperor’s policy of showing that
the council of 451 was anti-Nestorian, true to Cyril and therefore accept-
able to its opponents had ended up alienating some Chalcedonians.

Justinian now wished to press on and summon a council to ratify the
condemnation of the Three Chapters, but Vigilius would not agree, rightly
fearing that the west would not be properly represented at such a gather-
ing. When a council none the less coverned on 5 May 553, the pope refused
to participate. Not surprisingly, the Second Council of Constantinople
ratified all Justinian’s religious policies, professing four councils, the cor-
rectness of Cyrillian christological tradition and the Cyrillian or neo-
Chalcedonian interpretation of Chalcedon. 60 Despite the fact that Vigilius
finally acceped Constantinople II in 554 and was restored to communion
with Eutychius, the patriarch of the capital, Justinian had to resort to elim-
inating opposition to the council’s decrees by exiling bishops. The bishops
of Africa, in particular, suffered for their resistance to the council, and
some of them, like Facundus of Hermiane, who were not exiled, were
incarcerated in Constantinople, where Justinian and Eutychius attempted
forcefully to show them the error of their ways. 61 Because its oecumenical
nature was suspect, the reception of Constantinople II remained ambigu-
ous for more than half a century, not only, but particularly, in the west. 62

On succeeding Vigilius as bishop of Rome in 555, Pelagius I attempted
to win over western opponents of Constantinople II by his profession of

60 Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition ii.i 459—84; Frank (1991).

61 On the role of Eutychius in this episode and its hagiographical presentation by his biographer

Eustratius see Cameron (1988) 230—1. 62 Murphy and Sherwood (1974) 127—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

828 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

faith in which only four councils were mentioned. This met with little
success, and in fact the provinces of Milan and Aquileia openly rejected the
fifth council, thereby inaugurating the Aquileian or Istrian schism, which
was to last for over a century. This situation was exploited by the Arian
Lombards who invaded Italy in 568, since the church in Lombard territory
was in communion neither with Rome nor with Constantinople. 63

Justinian’s strenuous efforts in the direction of appeasing anti-
Chalcedonians and thereby restoring ecclesiastical unity continued to be
beset both by the separation of the Monophysites from Chalcedonian ortho-
doxy and by splits within Monophysite ranks, which did not stop with the
Julianists and the Agnoetai. In about 577john Ascotzanges, ‘Bottle Shoes’, so
called because he apparently wore shoes made from the same leather as drink-
ing-bottles, began to teach that in the Godhead there are three substances or
natures, just as there are three hypostases. 64 His disciple John Philoponus, an
Alexandrian intellectual, became the most able exponent of this doctrine,
although the bishops Conon of Tarsus and Eugenius of Seleucia also played
a prominent role. The doctrine, which involved an attempt to bring
Monophysite christological and trinitarian terminology into alignment by
using Aristotelian terms, became known as tritheism, despite the fact that it
was merely a verbal tritheism. Theodosius refuted tritheism in 5 60 in a trac-
tate that was accepted by the majority of Monophysites, although one group,
the Condobaudites, refused it recognition and withdrew. 65 Then the contro-
versy seemingly went into abeyance until after the death of Theodosius (5 66),
when certain signatories retracted their consent. Subsequently its history
goes hand-in-hand with the activities of Paul of Beit Ukkame (‘Paul the
Black’). At the request of Theodosius, Paul the Black was ordained patriarch
of Antioch in c. 5 57. This was an unpopular move among Monophysites for
reasons which we cannot entirely explain, and led quickly to schism between
Jacob Baradaeus and his followers (Jacobites) and the Paulites.

Such was the disarray on the anti-Chalcedonian side when towards the
end of his reign Justinian himself, like not a few of his contemporaries both
Chalcedonian and Monophysite, espoused some of the tenets of Julianism.
This was opposed by senior clergy, notably the patriarchs Eutychius of
Constantinople and Anastasius of Antioch, who were consequently
deposed and exiled. The emperor was on the point of legislating for a
general acceptance of this doctrine when he died in 565 , 66

iv. Justinian’s successors

Justinian’s successor Justin II (565—78) initially had a conciliatory policy in
ecclesiastical matters. His first official command was to allow bishops in

63 Goubert (1965) 83; Meyendorff, Imperial Unity 31 1— 12.

64 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.251—61.

65 Van Roey and Allen (1994) 129—43, esp. 137, with n. 60. 66 Evagr. HE iv.41.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s successors

829

exile or in hiding to return to their sees, on condition that they maintained
the status quo and abstained from innovation in matters of the faith. 67
Theodosius died on 22 June 566 before he was able to take advantage of
this amnesty, but was given a public funeral in Constantinople, at which,
according to one of the sources, Theodora’s nephew, the monk Athanasius,
publicly anathematized Chalcedon. 68 Like his aunt, Athanasius played a
prominent part in Monophysite affairs. In his bid for unity, rather than
Chalcedonian orthodoxy, the emperor Justin had the symbol or creed of
Constantinople I read aloud at liturgies, thereby leaving Ephesus and
Chalcedon in abeyance. 69 In an attempt to smooth the way to unity he con-
voked a synod of archimandrites, prominent Chalcedonians and anti-
Chalcedonians in the capital. When this resulted in a stalemate, the emperor
had a statement of faith, which went a long way towards accommodating
anti-Chalcedonian demands, proposed at a meeting of anti-Chalcedonians
at Callinicum on the Euphrates in 5 67. 711 The emperor was prepared to
declare Christ to be ‘from two natures’, to proclaim the faith of Nicaea as
ratified by Constantinople I and Ephesus I, to condemn the Three
Chapters and rehabilitate Severus. The fact that Callinicum was in the heart
of Monophysite territory also shows how earnest Justin was in his desire
for unity at the expense of Chalcedonian orthodoxy. The Monophysite
monks present, however, who regarded themselves as the guardians of
christological orthodoxy, would only be satisfied by an explicit denial of
two natures in Christ, and the meeting ended in a riot, during which the
draft document was torn to pieces by extremist monks. Although he
imprisoned uncooperative Monophysite bishops, Justin was still prepared
to draft another edict. This too was unacceptable to the Monophysite
bishops because it contained no explicit condemnation of Chalcedon.

Rivalry had meanwhile developed between the anti-tritheite Paul of
Antioch and Athanasius, who was supported by Conon of Tarsus and
Eugenius of Seleucia. Paul had in fact attempted to have himself conse-
crated as Theodosius’ successor, using the wealth he had gained as the
beneficiary of Theodosius’ will to further his designs on the patriarchate of
Alexandria. But the large number of tritheists in Alexandria thwarted Paul’s
plans by their disingenuous request to Justin to send back to the city the
Chalcedonian patriarch, who had been chased from his see. 71 In defeat Paul
retired to Syria, to the camp of his friend and supporter, the Arab leader al-
Mundhir, and never returned to Antioch. Going to Constantinople, he con-
sented twice to communion with the Chalcedonians there, thus incurring
the wrath of his fellow Monophysites. For their part, in 569 Conon and
Eugenius were excommunicated from within Monophysite ranks, but they
remained active. 72 The fact that they were still supported by Athanasius

67 Evagr. HE v. i . 68 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.283. 69 John Biclar. Chron. ad a. 567 (?).

70 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.285—90. On this meeting at Callinicum see Allen, Evagrius 23—5.

71 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.253. 72 Van Roey (1982) and (1985).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

830 1-J. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

enabled them to arrange for discussions in Constantinople with other anti-
Chalcedonians — remarkably, under the presidency of the Chalcedonian
patriarch John (569—70). The president stipulated that the sole basis of
negotiation between the two dissenting parties should be the works of
Severus of Antioch. The failure of these discussions was the immediate
cause of the publication of an imperial edict in 571, sometimes called the
second HenotikonJ 3 The terms of the edict were moderate, and its inspira-
tion neo-Chalcedonian, but it was much less accommodating to
Monophysite demands than the draft edict presented at Callinicum.
Although the document is couched in Chalcedonian terms, there is no
mention of that council. Justin’s aim in this legislation was to unite both
Monophysites and Chalcedonians, and Monophysites among themselves,
and several Monophysite bishops, including Paul of Antioch and John of
Ephesus, were in fact beguiled into communion with the Dyophysites on
the understanding that Chalcedon would be anathematized. On withdraw-
ing from communion they were imprisoned, and, with Justin’s patience at
an end, persecution began in earnest, lasting until the emperor’s death in
578. In the west, too, Justin’s edict met with little success. However, the
prefect of Rome, Gregory, the future pope, was able to persuade the new
bishop of Milan, Laurentius, to join communion with Rome, thereby weak-
ening the Aquileian schism.

Between 569 and 571 John Philoponus had written a tract On the
Resurrection, which was strongly objected to by Conon but approved by
Athanasius. Subsequently the tritheists split into two groups, the Cononites
and the Athanasians, and the fortunes of tritheism after this point are inglo-
rious. Eugenius fled, Conon was exiled, and Athanasius died in 571. 74 While
this split meant the end of tritheist strength, the views of Philoponus and
Conon were attacked by both Chalcedonians and Monophysites in various
efforts to save orthodox christology.

According to the anti-Chalcedonian bishop and historian John of
Ephesus, Justin’s successor Tiberius (578—82) continued the persecution
instigated by Justin, but in a desultory manner. 75 On his accession there
was a demonstration in Constantinople against the Arian Goths, who, in
return for their service in the Byzantine army, had been permitted by
Tiberius to construct their own church in the capital. This religious toler-
ance aroused suspicions about the emperor himself, and to clear his ortho-
doxy he was constrained to take action against the Arians, Montanists and
Sabbatians, who were imprisoned but later dismissed on bail. 76 It was
during Tiberius’ reign, too, that a persecution was waged against pagans,
in retaliation for the persecution which the inhabitants of Heliopolis

73 E.g. by Frend, Monophysite Movement 322, 366. For the text of the edict see Evagr. HE v.4.

74 Allen, Evagrius 38. 75 Tohn Eph. HE iii.i 5—16; pace Frend, Monophysite Movement 328.

76 John Eph. AZE 111.13.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s successors

831

(Baalbek) had launched against Christians. During this episode alleged evi-
dence emerged of many other instances of pagan cults in the east, partic-
ularly in Syria, and the ringleader was identified as Rufinus, a pagan high
priest in Antioch, who committed suicide before he could be brought to
trial. 77 Finally, in an imperial enquiry, Anatolius, the vicar of the praetorian
prefect of Edessa, named the patriarch of Antioch as a collaborator in the
sacrifice of a boy at Daphne, outside Antioch. Both vicar and patriarch
were taken to Constantinople to be tried, and Anatolius was lynched by the
mob in the capital. While the polarity between the accounts of the anti-
Chalcedonian John of Ephesus and the Chalcedonian Evagrius, who was
in the employ of the patriarch of Antioch at the time, makes a reliable
reconstruction of the episode difficult, it is clear that, despite the rigorous
legislation of Justinian, paganism did in fact survive in the east until the
end of the sixth century, and apparently counted eminent administrators
among its adherents. 78

Increasingly the wars in the Balkans and against Persia were claiming the
attention of Tiberius, who is reported as saying that it was enough to
contend with the wars against the barbarians, without having to take up
arms against his own people as well. 79 Furthermore, because of their frag-
mentation, the Monophysites posed little threat, especially after the death
of the charismatic Jacob Baradaeus on 3 July 578.

The anti-Chalcedonian church, in fact, was in turmoil, and the divisions
among monks were so acrimonious that aged and venerable ascetics took to
murdering their opponents and had to be imprisoned. At the invitation of
Tiberius, al-Mundhir went to Constantinople with his two sons (February
5 80) in order to convene a Monophysite assembly and to put an end to the
incessant quarrels and anathemata. 80 The assembly was a four-way confer-
ence between the adherents of Jacob, those of Paul, and the Alexandrians
under their patriarch Damian (578—604) on the one hand, and John of
Ephesus as representative of mainstream Monophysitism on the other. 81 An
eirenic document, which probably hinged on the recognition of Paul, was
drawn up and signed by all. On the basis of this success, Tiberius passed an
edict of tolerance which was to be proclaimed throughout the patriarchate
of Antioch. The Arab prince had given the emperor his word that if troops
were not used against Christians (i.e. Monophysites), he, for his part, would
make peace. The persecution ceased for a short time, just long enough for
Damian to return to Alexandria and start anathematizing Paul. The Jacobites
took matters into their own hands and in 581 consecrated Peter of
Callinicum patriarch of Antioch. 82 Deceived by Damian, al-Mundhir had
been unsuccessful in fulfilling his ambitious promise to restore unity, and,

77 John Eph. HE in. 3; contrast Evagr. HE iv.18. 78 Bowersock, Hellenism 38—40.

79 John Eph. HE in. 12. 80 John Eph. HE iv. 41; Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.366.

81 John Eph. HE iv.46. 82 John Eph. HE iv.42.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

832 27. THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

together with his influence over the Monophysite groups, his prestige in the
eyes of imperial authority sharply declined.

The hopelessness of attemping to enforce unity, let alone Chalcedonian
orthodoxy, on anarchic Monophysite groups had become plain. Although
there is little reliable and comprehensive information about ecclesiastical
events in the reign of Tiberius’ successor Maurice (5 82—602) because of the
polarity between the pro- and anti-Chalcedonian sources, it seems that
Maurice too abandoned formal negotiations with Monophysites. Outside
the empire he was able to secure Georgia for the Chalcedonian cause, but he
was unsuccessful in substituting Chalcedonianism for Monophysitism in
Armenia. Notwithstanding the fact that the wars with Persia will have pre-
occupied the emperor until the Byzantine victory in 591, there is more than
a suggestion that Monophysites were persecuted during his reign. According
to John of Ephesus, John the Faster, patriarch of Constantinople at the time
(582—95), asked why pagans were given amnesty while Monophysite
Christians were persecuted. 83 At the instigation of his nephew Domitian, the
metropolitan of Melitene, the emperor apparently gave permission for a per-
secution of Monophysites near Melitene, but the persecution cannot have
achieved significant proportions, for Maurice became a saint in the
Monophysite tradition. 84 In the Nestorian tradition, too, he appears in a hag-
iographical light. 85

Soon after the accession of Peter of Callinicum, another dispute arose
in Monophysite circles as a result of the sophist Proba and the archiman-
drite Juhannan Barbur, who appear to have applied the philosophical ter-
minology of the Alexandrian sophist Stephen to Christ. 86 Their teaching
that it was impossible to maintain the difference in natural quality in
Christ’s natures without confessing at the same time a division and plu-
rality of natures brought them close to the Dyophysite position. Their
evangelization among Monophysites was so successful that in c. 585 Peter
of Callinicum convoked a synod at Goubba Barraya, the headquarters of
the Monophysite patriarchate between Aleppo and Mabbug, in order to
excommunicate them and check the progress of their doctrine. Together
with their followers in many monasteries, Proba and Juhannan Barbur
subsequently went over to the Chalcedonian side, where they were
accepted by the Chalcedonian patriarch of Antioch, Anastasius (5 59—70;
5 93-8). 87

Stability among Monophysite groups was also threatened by the disso-
lution of the Ghassanid federation in 5 84 after al-Mundhir had fallen under
suspicion of treachery to the Byzantine state. Many members of the Arab

83 John Eph. HE v.i 5. 84 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.381. See Allen, Evagrius 27.

85 See Nau (1910) 773— 8. 86 Uthemann (1985) 398—9.

87 Mich. Syr. Chron. ed. Chabot 11.361—3; Van Roey (1961).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

Justinian’s successors 833

tribes joined the Persians, seriously affecting both the Monophysites, whose
political arm was now cut off, and the strategic safety of the empire.

Under Maurice, the perpetual wrangling among Monophysites produced
yet another schism in the east. The death of Paul the Black in 5 8 1 did not
end the bad feeling between the patriarchates of Antioch and Alexandria.
In 5 87 Peter of Antioch, formerly of Callinicum, and Damian of
Alexandria came to blows when the Antiochene patriarch criticized
Damian’s treatise against tritheism. This episode, which was characterized
by futile and tempestuous meetings between the patriarchs in Arabia and
Alexandria, led to a complete rupture, which was to last until their succes-
sors were able to restore unity of a sort in 616. 88

Although cordial relations existed between east and west at this time, the
concerns in the west were different. The Aquileian schism continued there,
and on his succession in 5 90 as bishop of Rome, Gregory was careful to
proclaim the four oecumenical councils, likening them to the four gospels,
while reserving an ambiguous place for the Second Council of
Constantinople. 89 His mission of 596, bringing Christianity to the Anglo-
Saxons under the leadership of the monk Augustine, involved none of the
doctrinal complications associated with the two main differing interpreta-
tions of orthodoxy found in the east.

Although by the end of the sixth century the Council of Chalcedon was
generally accepted in the west, in the east the separation between the
Monophysite and Chalcedonian churches continued. Among anti-
Chalcedonians in Syria and Egypt, in particular, an increasing part was being
played by nationalism, fuelled by the long-standing rivalry between Antioch
and Alexandria. Whether or not orthodoxy was successfully defined at
Chalcedon, its enforcement by emperors and ecclesiastical hierarchy had
failed, as had attempts to restore enduring unity between Christians in the
empire. Neither imperial legislation, which especially under Justinian
became an autocratic tool for enforcing orthodoxy, nor compromise theo-
logical statements nor the deposition or exile of their bishops had per-
suaded convinced anti-Chalcedonians to accept the council of 451 and the
Tome of Leo. The Second Council of Constantinople and its attempt to
remove all suspicion of Nestorianism from Chalcedon had succeeded only
in driving another wedge between east and west. But it was not simply that
orthodoxy as defined by Chalcedon had resisted enforcement. Monophysite
orthodoxy and cohesion were threatened by the rise of splinter groups and
by growing anarchy among the adherents of the one-nature christology.

88 For Peter’s side of the dispute see Ebied, Van Roey and Wickham (1981).

89 Greg. Ep. $, 10; Murphy and Sherwood (1974) 127—8.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

834 2 7 - THE DEFINITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF ORTHODOXY

The ironical task of Chalcedonian bishops and highly placed secular
officials, to which they were sometimes directed by the imperial govern-
ment, became to resolve doctrinal squabbles among Monophysite groups in
the hope of effecting a unified block with whom Chalcedonians might enter
dialogue. Not even the energetic efforts of the emperor Heraclius in the
seventh century with his monoenergist and monothelite formulae would
succeed in achieving either undisputed orthodoxy or ecclesiastical unity in
the empire.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

CHAPTER 28

PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS 1

ANNE SHEPPARD

I. INTRODUCTION

The dominant pagan philosophy of the fifth and sixth century a.d. was
Neoplatonism. By this period Platonism had absorbed the other philosoph-
ical traditions of antiquity. Aristotle was extensively studied but in a
Platonist context, and usually as a preparation for the study of Plato himself.
Epicureanism and Scepticism had faded away. Many elements of Stoicism
do reappear in Neoplatonist logic and metaphysics but altered and trans-
posed so as to fit into a very different philosophical system: the Stoics were
materialists, whereas for the Neoplatonists the intelligible world is not only
distinct from the material one but superior to it in reality and power.
Neoplatonism was initiated by Plotinus in the third century and continued
into the fourth by Porphyry, lamblichus and their followers; by 425 it had
spread all over the Mediterranean world. There were several different
schools, in the physical sense, and this chapter will consider those in order.
I shall begin with the school of Athens, proceed to Alexandria and then
conclude with a brief account of philosophy elsewhere in the empire. The
two principal schools were in Athens and Alexandria. These schools have
often been seen as differing in doctrines and attitudes as well as in their geo-
graphical location. However, recent research has undermined this conven-
tional picture. 2 1 shall argue later in the chapter that there were some genuine
differences in emphasis and attitude between the two schools. However,
they both derived from the Iamblichean tradition of Neoplatonism, and I
shall begin by summarizing the main features of that tradition.

The contrast between an intelligible world, accessible only to the mind,

1 Several biographical works are important sources for the history of philosophy in this period:
Marinus, Life of Proclus (English translation in Rosan (1949); discussion in Blumenthal (1984));
Damascius, Life of Isidorus (discussion of the period heavily based on Damascius in Athanassiadi (1 993),
and see now P. Athanassiadi, Damascius, The Philosophical History (Athens, 1999)); Zacharias, Life of
Severus. For bibliography on individual philosophers see Sorabji (1990) 485 ff., with the addition of
Hoffmann (1994) on Damascius. For the archaeological evidence see Frantz (1988), Roueche,
Aphrodisias 85—6, Fowden (1990a), Smith (1990).

2 The Athenian and Alexandrian schools were sharply distinguished in Praechter (1910). For the case
against Praechter see, in the first instance, Hadot (1978). For a recent, balanced discussion see
Blumenthal (1993).

835

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

8j6 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

and the material world perceived by the senses goes back to Plato. In the
philosophy of Plotinus this contrast was developed into an elaborate meta-
physics in which, above and beyond the material world, there are three
further levels or ‘hypostases’: the One, the source of all other things, Mind
or Intellect and finally Soul. lamblichus and his successors developed this
Plotinian metaphysics further, offering more detailed accounts of the three
hypostases and their relation to one another, as well as introducing some
intermediate levels.

In later Neoplatonism philosophy and religion go hand-in-hand,
lamblichus himself was both a sophisticated philosopher and a pagan ‘holy
man’, credited by Eunapius with performing all kinds of wonders. The
same combination reappears in the philosophers of the fifth and sixth
century. Proclus, for example, is reported as celebrating the main feasts of
all (pagan) religions , 3 while at the same time he integrated the traditional
Greek gods into his philosophical system, identifying them with the divine
‘henads’ which he posited between the One and Mind in order to mediate
the transition from the One to the rest of reality. In philosophical terms
the supreme entity remains the transcendent One. Here too philosophy
and religion come together. The One is beyond Mind and so ultimately
inaccessible even to the intellect. It can be reached only by mystical expe-
rience. Plotinus writes as one who has had such experience but he always
regards it as something which comes only after rigorous intellectual effort . 4
Later Neoplatonists continued to talk in a Plotinian way about mystical
experience, but from the time of lamblichus onwards they also practised
the rites of theurgy, a type of religious magic associated with the Chaldaean
Oracles. The belief that theurgy could assist the soul in its return to the gods
and the One opened the way to a less severely intellectual approach to mys-
ticism.

In the third and fourth century Porphyry, lamblichus and their pupils
were firmly opposed to Christianity, although at the same time many
Christian thinkers were heavily influenced by Platonism. In the fifth and
sixth century attitudes became more diverse. At Athens the philosophers
continued to be strongly pagan; Proclus and his successors remained con-
sistently hostile to Christianity. At Alexandria, as we shall see in more detail
later, the school gradually moved from paganism through accommodation
with Christianity to the situation at the end of the sixth century, in which
the last known teachers of Neoplatonism were themselves Christians.

The term ‘Neoplatonism’ is a modern invention. All the Platonists of
late antiquity saw themselves as interpreters of Plato, and from the time of
Porphyry onwards commentaries were the main vehicle for the exposition
of Neoplatonist ideas. The Neoplatonists commented not only on Plato

3 Marinus ch. 19. 4 See e.g. Plotinus 6.7.36.6—21.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PHILOSOPHY IN ATHENS

837

but also on Aristotle, and tried to harmonize the two, explaining away
contradictions wherever that was possible. The desire to synthesize previ-
ous thought extended beyond the philosophical authorities. Just as they
integrated the pagan gods into their metaphysical system, so they brought
together Homer, the Orphic poems and the Chaldaean Oracles and found in
them the same fundamental ideas as they found in Plato and Aristotle.

II. PHILOSOPHY IN ATHENS

Proclus, the central figure in fifth-century Neoplatonism, was born in 410
or 41 2. A native of Xanthos in Lycia, he studied rhetoric, Latin and law in
Alexandria but then turned to philosophy. It was in pursuit of philosophy
that he arrived in Athens in 430/1. He found there a Platonic school
directed by Plutarch of Athens and Syrianus. Plutarch, already an old man,
died about two years later and Proclus continued his studies with Syrianus.
Syrianus died in 437 and Proclus in turn became head of the school.
Proclus continued to teach until his death in 485, although Marinus records
that his vigour diminished in the last few years of his life. His voluminous
output included commentaries on Plato, monographs on providence and
evil, systematic works of philosophy such as the Elements of Theology and the
Platonic Theology , works on mathematics and astronomy, works on theurgy
and a number of hymns. Much of our knowledge of later Neoplatonism
comes from these works of Proclus. He was also a very influential teacher:
pupils of his taught philosophy at Alexandria and Aphrodisias, as well as
carrying on the tradition in Athens; others moved on from philosophy to
political careers. 5

The Athenian Neoplatonists saw themselves as the spiritual heirs of
Plato’s Academy. However, the original institution of the Academy no
longer existed; the late antique school seems to have been a private foun-
dation, conducted in the house which Proclus inherited from Plutarch and
Syrianus. A large house of the period, excavated on the south side of the
Acropolis, has plausibly been identified as that of Proclus. 6 Marinus backs
up his praise of Proclus’ capacity for hard work with an impressive account
of how he spent his time. In one day Proclus would give five lectures, or
sometimes more, write about seven hundred lines, talk philosophy with his
colleagues and give further, oral instruction in the evening. This intense
scholarly activity was accompanied by religious devotion: as well as wor-
shipping at night, he prostrated himself before the sun three times a day, at
sunrise, midday and sunset. 7 Marinus may be exaggerating the details, but
Proclus’ own works confirm the general picture of a man who combined
energetic teaching, scholarly productivity and deep religious feeling.

5 Saffrey and Westerink (1968) i.ix— lx.

6 Glucker (1978) 1 5 3—8, 248—5 5, 306—15, 322—9. Frantz (1988) 42—4. 7 Marinus ch. 22.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

838 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

What was Proclus teaching? Both at Athens and Alexandria there was by
this time a traditional curriculum. Students would start by studying
Aristotle, as Proclus himself did. Marinus tells us that Proclus studied
Aristotle both in Alexandria and at Athens with Plutarch and Syrianus.
Ammonius refers to lectures on Aristotle by Proclus. Aristotle, however,
was only a beginning. Students would then move on to study selected dia-
logues of Plato: the First Alcibiades, the Gorgias, the Phaedo, the Cratylus, the
Theaetetus, the Sophist , the Politicus, the Phaedrus, the Symposium, the Philebus
and finally the Timaeus and the Parmenides S' This list of dialogues, read in this
order, would lead the students from ethics to metaphysics; Proclus would
presumably guide them through the interpretations of previous commen-
tators, as he does in his written commentaries on Plato, offering in the end
either his choice among earlier interpretations or his own, independent
view. In his written commentaries he often opts for the interpretation given
by Syrianus.

Dialogues outside this canon were not neglected. Proclus wrote a series
of essays on the Republic, one of which is written up from a special lecture
delivered at the annual celebration of Plato’s birthday. The Orphic poems
and the Chaldaean Oracles were also studied . 9

Marinus depicts Proclus as a model of pagan piety. He describes how
Proclus went in for sea-bathing as a form of purification, performed
Orphic and Chaldaean purification rites and the rites of the Great Mother,
observed the Egyptian holy days and in general kept the religious holidays
of all peoples and all nations, celebrating them by vigils and hymns rather
than idleness and feasting. Proclus’ surviving Hymns, modelled on the
Homeric Hymns, fit this picture, as does the shrine of Cybele found in the
‘House of Proclus’. Marinus also tells stories of Proclus’ theurgic ability to
work wonders: these included saving Athens from a drought by his rain-
making and curing the child Asclepigeneia by praying to Asclepius . 10

It is clear from Proclus’ works that his school was conducted in an
atmosphere of enthusiastic paganism. The traditional Greek gods were
revered and knowledge of classical Greek literature was assumed. It might
seem surprising that this was still possible in the fifth century, but archae-
ology suggests that Christianity was slower to permeate all sectors of
society in Athens than elsewhere. The removal of cult statues from temples
and the conversion of those temples into churches were slow processes.
Proclus could not just ignore Christianity, however. He does not attack it
explicitly but refers in his works to ‘impiety’, ‘ignorance’ and ‘confusion’,
using ‘code-phrases’ which would be readily understood by a sympathetic

8 Marinus chs. 9, 12, 13. Westerink (1962) xxxvii— xl. (Cf. Westerink and Trouillard (1990) lxvii— Ixxiv.)
Festugiere (1969). Lamberz (1987) 5 n. 17.

9 Proclus, In Rem Publicam 1.69.20—71.17. Marinus chs. 26, 27.

10 Marinus chs. 18, 19, 28, 29, 33. Frantz (1988) 44.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PHILOSOPHY IN ATHENS 839

contemporary audience. Marinus reports that Proclus had to leave Athens
for a year because of ‘a storm’. It seems pretty clear that this storm was a
disagreement with the Christian authorities. 11 Yet the school was not a
totally pagan enclave. The poet Christodorus of Coptos, whose name indi-
cates his Christianity, wrote a poem on the pupils of Proclus. The poem
does not survive and we do not know whether Christodorus himself was
among those pupils, but he must have had some connection with the
school, however indirect. Marinus mentions that when Proclus first arrived
in Athens he was welcomed by his fellow Lycian, Nicolaus of Myra, who
was studying in Athens. Nicolaus was a rhetor, whose Progymnasmata show
some knowledge of Platonism; his name suggests he was a Christian. Most
importantly, a significant body of research has drawn attention to the con-
nections between the work of the Christian author known to us as Pseudo-
Dionysius the Areopagite and the work of Proclus. In particular, H. D.
Saffrey has pointed out a number of close verbal echoes. Saffrey steers clear
of trying to identify Pseudo-Dionysius, but whoever he is, he appears
remarkably familiar with Proclus’ thought and Proclus’ phraseology.
Relations between pagans and Christians in Athens deteriorated during
Proclus’ lifetime. Marinus recounts that when the Christians removed the
statue of Athene from the Parthenon, probably around 470, a beautiful
woman appeared to Proclus in a dream and announced, ‘The Lady of
Athens wishes to come to live with you.’ Pagan worship, it seems, was
becoming a private and domestic affair. 12

Proclus’ philosophical views, like his religion, draw on a long tradition.
His reputation in modern times is as a great systematizer. His surviving
commentaries on Plato survey previous interpretations at length, while the
Elements of Theology is remarkable for its presentation of Neoplatonic meta-
physics as a series of axioms which follow deductively from one another.
The range and variety of his work have not always been fully appreciated.
He wrote short treatises as well as lengthy commentaries and, like many
philosophers of the period, his interests extended into mathematics on the
one hand and literature on the other. On the mathematical side, he wrote a
commentary on the first book of Euclid’s Elements. His literary interests are
evident not only in his comments on literary aspects of Plato’s work but
also in his writing of Hymns and his attempt, in his essays on the Republic,
to defend Homeric poetry against Plato’s attack.

Proclus taught and wrote in a tradition which placed no value on innova-
tion and originality. Philosophers of this period use appeals to earlier
authority as a way of arguing for their views. It is therefore difficult to
pick out Proclus’ own contributions to philosophy. The doctrine of the
divine henads which bridge the gap between the One and the rest of the

11 Marinus ch. 15. Saffrey (1975). 12 Marinus chs. 10, 30. Felten (1913) xxiff. Saffrey (1982).

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

840 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

Neoplatonic universe, traditionally ascribed to Proclus, goes back to
Syrianus. 13 In general the metaphysical system found in Proclus is more
elaborately structured than in earlier Neoplatonism; at the same time,
Proclus stresses the cohesiveness of the structure and its ultimate depen-
dence on the One. Much of this may go back to Iamblichus, although some-
times we can see Proclus applying the principles of Neoplatonism to
produce new solutions to traditional problems. For example, his discussions
of how evil can exist in a world ordered by divine providence develop the
idea that evil has only a dependent, parasitic existence which he calls par-
hypostasis', this suggestion may go back to Syrianus but is not found earlier. 14

When Proclus died, his pupil Marinus succeeded him as head of the
school. After a few years, Marinus was succeeded first by Isidorus, then by
Zenodotus, and finally, probably some time before 515, by Damascius.
Between the death of Proclus and the headship of Damascius, the Athenian
school suffered a temporary decline. Alexandria, where Ammonius was
teaching, was for the moment the dominant philosophical centre. However,
under Damascius the Athenian school revived again until its closure in 529.
Damascius, probably born around 462, studied both in Alexandria and in
Athens. He started his career as a teacher of rhetoric, although he was
already acquainted with the Neoplatonic philosophers. He was converted to
philosophy by Isidorus and then studied philosophy further, both in Athens
and at Alexandria under Ammonius. We do not know just when he returned
to Athens to become head of the school there. His surviving philosophical
works, commentaries on Plato’s Phaedo, Philehus and Parmenides and a treatise
On the First Principles all, like the works of Proclus before him, derive from
his teaching. His Fife of Isidorus, which survives only in fragments, described
the history and personalities of the Neoplatonic school from the end of the
fourth century. It, too, was written while Damascius was head of the school,
some time between 517 and 5 2 6 . 1 5

Damascius taught the same range of material as Proclus, in a similar way.
There is evidence for his teaching of Aristotle, although no certain evi-
dence for written commentaries on Aristotle. There are also references to
either lectures or written commentaries on Plato’s First Alcibiades, Republic,
Phaedrus, Sophist, Timaeus and Fairs, and on the Chaldaean Oracles. In his sur-
viving works Damascius draws on earlier commentators, particularly
Proclus, but shows a good deal of independence and readiness to criticize
Proclus. In the treatise On the First Principles Damascius argues that above
the One there is a further Ineffable principle, completely inaccessible to
conceptual thought. This view is not found in Proclus, but Damascius, with
a typical Neoplatonic appeal to authority, ascribes it to Iamblichus. 16

13 Saffrey and Westerink (1978) mix— lxxvii. 14 Sheppard (1982) 9—10. Lloyd (1987).

15 Westerink and Combes (1986) i.ix— xxvi, xxxiii— lxxii. Tardieu (1990) ch. 1; Hoffmann (1994).

16 Damascius, De Principiis 11.1— 3.

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

PHILOSOPHY IN ATHENS

841

Damascius was as strongly pagan as Proclus. The references to
Christians in the Life of Isidorus are veiled but scornful. According to
Agathias, Damascius and six other philosophers, including Simplicius and
Priscianus Lydus, left Athens for Persia and the court of Khusro I when
Justinian in 529 forbade pagans to teach philosophy or law Traditionally,
Justinian’s action has been described as ‘closing the schools’ and it has been
assumed that the Neoplatonist philosophers never returned to Athens.
Since 1969 there has been considerable discussion by philosophers, histo-
rians and archaeologists over what did happen to Damascius and his col-
leagues. Malalas reports that Justinian sent an edict to Athens prohibiting
the teaching there of philosophy and law. This report has regularly been
interpreted as referring to the laws prohibiting pagans from teaching found
in the Codex Iustinianus 1.11.10.2 and 1.5.18.4, although those laws do not
refer specifically to Athens. Archaeology suggests that several groups of
pagan teachers in Athens were affected by these laws. A group of houses
on the Areopagus, plausibly identified as educational establishments, was
suddenly abandoned about 5 30. In one, sculpture was deposited in a well
which was then sealed. The ‘House of Proclus’ too was abandoned some
time in the sixth century, although there are no finds which date its aban-
donment precisely. The combination of literary and archaeological evi-
dence does support the traditional view that the Neoplatonists left Athens
in 529 or soon afterwards.

By Agathias’ account, the philosophers’ stay in Persia was short-lived.
The peace treaty signed between Justinian and Khusro in 532 included a
provision that they might return to their own ways and live privately, without
fear. Where did they go? Damascius, an old man by this time, may have
retired to his native Syria. A funerary epigram in the museum at Emesa,
dated to 538, is almost identical with an epigram in the Palatine Anthology
ascribed to Damascius. We do not know when or where Damascius died. In
1969 Alan Cameron suggested that Simplicius, Priscianus Lydus and the
others returned to Athens. The only strong evidence for this is a passage
from Olympiodorus’ Commentary on the First Alcihiades, probably written
about 560, which says that the diadochika, the endowments of the Athenian
school, have lasted until the present time in spite of the many confiscations
which are taking place. Recently Michel Tardieu has argued that none of the
philosophers ever returned to Athens. Instead, Simplicius and others settled
in Harran in northern Mesopotamia. Tardieu’s case rests on two distinct
bodies of evidence. On the one hand there is an allusion in the Arabic writer
Mas’udi to a Platonist school in the tenth century at Harran, which was still
a pagan city at that time. On the other hand, Tardieu argues that a number
of references in Simplicius’ works indicate that they were written in that
area. Tardieu has even suggested that it was only Damascius who visited
Khusro’s court; the others never got further than Harran. The references in

Cambridge Histories Online © Cambridge University Press, 2008

842 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

Simplicius’ works do suggest that he spent some time in Mesopotamia,
although they do not prove that he settled there nor that there was a tenth-
century Platonist school in Harran which descended directly from the
Athenian school of the sixth century. Olympiodorus’ remark about the
diadochika remains puzzling and inadequately explained. 17

The last known Athenian philosophers, Simplicius and Priscianus Lydus,
probably left Athens while they were still in mid career. However, it will be
convenient to discuss them here before turning to the school at Alexandria.
Little is known of Priscianus. The only two works ascribed to him with cer-
tainty are the Solutiones eorum de quibus dubitavit Chosroes Persarum rex and the
Metaphrasis in Theopbrastum. The former was presumably a product of the
time in Persia, written either during the visit to Khusro or not long after-
wards. The latter is a discussion and paraphrase of Theophrastus’ views on
psychology. It has also been claimed that the commentary on Aristotle’s De
anima ascribed to Simplicius is in fact by Priscianus. 18

Simplicius’ output was far more significant, although many details of
his career are uncertain. Simplicius refers to his own studies under
Ammonius; he must therefore have been in Alexandria before
Ammonius’ death, which took place at the latest in 526. He also refers to
studying under Damascius, and it is probable diat these studies took place
in Athens in the period immediately before 529. Simplicius is best known
for his voluminous commentaries on Aristode; he also wrote a commen-
tary on Epictetus’ Encheiridion. The latter offers a simpler metaphysics
dian die Aristode commentaries, and Karl Praechter supposed that it
belonged to an early, Alexandrian phase of Simplicius’ career, while his
Aristode commentaries were written after he had come under die
influence of Damascius and the Athenian school. However, Ilsetraut
Hadot has shown that the Encheiridion commentary does display acquain-
tance with Damascius’ thought. It simplifies some of die complexities of
die Neoplatonic system because it is addressed to beginners in philoso-
phy, not because it was composed in Alexandria. Like earlier Neoplatonic
commentaries, it belongs to a context of teaching. Wherever Simplicius
was when he wrote it, he appears to have had pupils. Simplicius’ commen-
taries on Aristode may all be dated after 5 32 on internal evidence but they
seem less closely related to teaching. Like his predecessors, Simplicius
offers very full accounts of earlier philosophers’ views. Wherever he was,
he must have had access to a good library. If some kind of school con-
tinued somewhere in the 5 30s, die pupils may have been fewer and at a

17 Agathias, Hist. 11.28—30. Malalas, Chron. p. 451.16—21 Bonn. Jalabert and Mouterde (1959) 155, no.
2336. Anth. Pal. vn.553. Olympiodorus, InAlcibiadem 141.1— 3. Cameron (1969). Frantz (1988) 84—92.
Tardieu (1986), (1987) (but see the criticisms in Foulkes (1992)); Tardieu (1990) chs. 2—4. Athanassiadi
(1993) 24—9; Hoffmann (1994) 5 56—63.

18 Bossier and Steel (1972). Steel (1978). Hadot (1978) 193—202.

PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA 843

lower level than in the Athens of Proclus and Damascius; if so, Simplicius
will have had more time purely for research . 19

III. PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA

Alexandria was a centre of scholarship from the Hellenistic period onwards.
It was there that Plotinus studied under Ammonius Saccas, but there is no
evidence of a continuous tradition of Neoplatonic teaching. At the end of
the fourth and the beginning of the fifth century, Neoplatonism was being
taught by Theon and his daughter Hypatia. Hypatia, as is well known, was
lynched by a Christian mob in 41 5 . The Neoplatonic school of the fifth and
sixth century represents a fresh start, stimulated perhaps by developments
in Athens. There was much coming and going between the two centres.
Hierocles, who taught in Alexandria early in the fifth century, was a pupil of
Plutarch of Athens. Hermias, a contemporary of Proclus, was, like Proclus,
a pupil of Syrianus; his one surviving work, a commentary on Plato’s
Phaedrus, is largely a report of Syrianus’ lectures. Hermias’ wife, Aedesia, was
a relative of Syrianus, who had originally intended that she should marry
Proclus. His son, Ammonius, born between 435 and 445, studied at Athens
with Proclus before returning to Alexandria to teach. Ammonius in turn
taught both Damascius and Simplicius, as well as the Alexandrian philoso-
phers of the next generation, Philoponus and Olympiodorus.

The Alexandrian school, unlike the Athenian, received some form of
public funding. Hermias was paid a salary by the city 20 and Ammonius’
agreement with the patriarch, to be discussed shortly, had something to do
with money. The patriarch may have agreed to support the school, or at least
not to cut off municipal funds, in return for concessions by Ammonius.

The close personal links between the Athenian and Alexandrian schools
might suggest that there was little difference between them. This is not,
however, the traditional view. Since the work of Karl Praechter, it has been
conventional to distinguish quite sharply between the two schools. Praechter
argued that the Alexandrian school differed from the Athenian in three ways:
the Alexandrians had a simpler metaphysics in which the Demiurge,
identified with Mind, replaced the One as the supreme principle; they con-
centrated on the interpretation of Aristotle rather than Plato and interpreted
Aristotle in a more sober and level-headed manner than the Athenians did;
and they came increasingly under the influence of Christianity. We have
already seen that Praechter was wrong to regard Simplicius’ commentary on
Epictetus’ Encheiridion as evidence for a simpler, Alexandrian metaphysics.
He argued that a similar metaphysics, influenced by Christianity, could be

19 Praechter (1927) 206ft Hadot (1 978) chs. 3, 7, 8. Hadot (1990a).

20 Damascius, Life of Isidorus fr. 124 Zintzen.

844 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

found in Hierocles’ commentary on the Golden Verses of Pythagoras. Ilsetraut
Hadot has shown that Hierocles’ metaphysics is not significantly different
from that of the Athenian Neoplatonists; like Simplicius’ Encheiridion com-
mentary, it simplifies the system only because it is addressed to beginners . 21

Hadot has also turned her attention to examining Athenian and
Alexandrian styles of commentary. She has compared the introduction to
Simplicius’ commentary on the Categories, commonly regarded as
Athenian’, with the similar introductions to the Alexandrian Categories com-
mentaries of Ammonius, Philoponus, Olympiodorus and David (or Elias
— the attribution is disputed). All discuss ten questions such as ‘What is the
classification of Aristotle’s writings?’, ‘What is the end of Aristotle’s phi-
losophy?’, ‘What are the qualities required of the exegete?’ according to a
standard scheme; they all then proceed to a second set of points relating to
the Categories in particular and consider the aim of the work, its usefulness,
its authenticity, its place in the order of reading Aristotle, the reason for its
title and its division into chapters. Hadot argues that both schemes go back
in the first instance to a lost work of Proclus, the Synanagnosis or Commentary
on a Text under the Direction of a Teacher, although the second scheme can be
traced further back. Wider examination of the Alexandrian commentaries
leads her to the more general conclusion that the Alexandrian commenta-
tors, like their Athenian contemporaries, seek to harmonize Plato and
Aristotle but hold that Plato is superior. This conclusion accords with the
conclusions reached by Henry Blumenthal in his study of the Neoplatonic
commentaries on the De anima. Blumenthal has shown that all the
Neoplatonic commentators read the De anima through Platonizing specta-
cles and all sought to harmonize Plato and Aristotle. Individual commen-
tators differ over details but share a common approach . 22

What then remains of Praechter’s picture? Athenian and Alexandrian
metaphysics do not difler as radically as he thought; nor do Athenian and
Alexandrian styles of commentary. When we also take account of the per-
sonal connections between the two groups of philosophers, the division
into two schools might seem to lack real significance. Recent work has
stressed how much the two schools have in common. Nevertheless, there
are still some differences of emphasis and attitude which distinguish the
philosophers based in Athens from the philosophers based in Alexandria.
There are some differences in their interests as commentators, although the
differences are not as great as has been traditionally supposed; there are also
differences in the third area to which Praechter drew attention, in their atti-
tudes to Christianity.

21 Praechter (1913). Hadot (1978) chs. 4-6.

22 Hadot (1987b) (—Hadot (1990b) 21-47); Hadot (1991). Blumenthal (1976), (1977—8), (1981);
Mansfeld (1994).

PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA

845

First, the differences in Athenian and Alexandrian interests as commenta-
tors. The first Alexandrian commentators, Hierocles and Hermias, studied
in Athens under Plutarch and Syrianus respectively, and their scanty surviv-
ing work suggests no significant difference between their interests and those
of their Athenian teachers. Hierocles’ concern with Pythagoras’ Golden X erses
is typical of the period; Hermias’ commentary on the Phaedrus is, as I have
said, largely a report of the lectures of Syrianus. With Ammonius, however,
divergence does appear, although Ammonius too studied in Athens, under
Proclus. Koenraad Verrycken has examined Ammonius’ metaphysics, asking
specifically whether, as Praechter thought, Ammonius considered the
Demiurge the highest principle. 23 Verrycken argues convincingly that such a
view is no more to be found in Ammonius than it is in Hierocles. He con-
siders particularly Asclepius’ commentary on Aristotle’s Metaphysics, which is
a faithful report of Ammonius’ lectures, and concludes that Ammonius
regarded the One as the supreme principle followed, as in Syrianus and
Proclus, by the monad and the dyad. However, in those lectures Ammonius
has simplified Proclus’ metaphysical system in other ways: to quote
Verrycken, ‘the henads disappear; the Demiurge seems to be simply
identified with the divine intellect; there is not much left of Proclus’ con-
struction of innumerable triads; the articulation of the intelligible world at
levels between the divine Intellect and the sensible world has been blurred.
Moreover Ammonius is inclined to remodel the hierarchy of ontological
levels into a dichotomy between the creative and the created.’ 24 It could be
argued that this simplification of metaphysics, like the simplifications found
in Hierocles and in Simplicius’ Encheiridion commentary, is due to the nature
of the work being commented on. Aristode’s Metaphysics is hardly an elemen-
tary work, but in the standard Neoplatonic curriculum Aristotle was covered
first, before the student went on to the deeper thought of Plato. Verrycken
is well aware of this possibility but argues against it. He points out that the
only works of Plato on which Ammonius certainly commented were the
Gorgias and the Theaetetus, both regarded as elementary by the Neoplatonists.
There is no record of Ammonius commenting on the Timaeus or the
Parmenides. Ammonius regards Aristode’s Metaphysics as the final stage in the
study of Aristotelian philosophy and he tries to make Aristode’s theology con-
verge with Plato’s. Ammonius appears less interested than Proclus in the
details of the intelligible world, more concerned with the cosmos. Verrycken
finds a similar approach in certain commentaries of Philoponus which
derive from Ammonius’ lectures. (Philoponus, born around 490, studied
under Ammonius and edited some of his lectures. He produced a number
of philosophical works but gradually moved away from the teachings of his

23 Verrycken (1990). 24 Verrycken (1990) 226.

846 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

master to explicit attacks on both Proclus (in 529) and Aristotle (after 529).
He ended his career as a Christian controversialist.)

Verrycken’s arguments that Ammonius’ metaphysics really differed from
those of Proclus are not entirely convincing. Proclus himself readily offers
simplified versions of his system when context and occasion demand it. If
the henads do disappear from Ammonius’ system, they are back again by
the time of Olympiodorus. 25 However, it does seem to be true that
Ammonius was more interested in Aristotle and less in Plato than Proclus.
We have already seen that Ammonius did not comment on the Timaeus or
the Parmenides. Proclus had written lengthy commentaries on both these
dialogues, and that in itself might have inhibited Ammonius from writing
about them; but it need not have inhibited him from teaching them, making
use of Proclus’ work. Conversely, Proclus appears less interested in
Aristotle, and more prepared to attack him, than Ammonius.

Interesting traces of Proclus’ treatment of Aristotle’s De interpretatione
can be found in his commentary on Plato’s Cratylus, while in a number of
other places Proclus discusses Aristotle’s view of the divine Intellect. In
both cases there are revealing parallels with Ammonius. The more hostile
and defensive attitude to Aristotle in the Cratylus commentary could be due
precisely to the fact that there Proclus is commenting on Plato; the more
sympathetic tone of Ammonius might reflect a more sympathetic tone
adopted by Proclus when Aristotle himself was under discussion.
However, the same difference in tone also appears on a more contentious
subject, the treatment of Aristotle’s theology. Proclus criticizes Aristotle
for failing to draw the conclusion that the divine Intellect must be not only
the ultimate object of desire but also the efficient cause which produces the
world. In Ammonius, as reported by Asclepius, this criticism becomes a
favourable interpretation of Aristotle: according to Ammonius, Aristotle
did in fact regard the divine Intellect as an efficient cause. 26

Support for the claim that these differences of tone are not just produced
by the differences of context comes from the work of Proclus’ teacher,
Syrianus. Syrianus’ commentary on Aristotle, Metaphysics B, F, M and N sur-
vives. M and N in particular make difficult reading for a Platonist since they
attack the Platonist theory of ideal numbers. Syrianus is quite prepared to go
on the attack and to accuse Aristotle of talking nonsense. It is true that in
the preface to his commentary on M Syrianus speaks with respect and admi-
ration of Aristotle’s work in logic, ethics and physics and describes himself
as both a fighter on behalf of Platonism and an impartial arbitrator between
Aristotle and the disciples of Pythagoras (who, for Syrianus, include Plato).
In the subsequent commentary, however, the fighter is more in evidence than
the arbitrator. It is Ammonius, in his commentary on the De interpretatione.

25 Olympiodorus, In AJcibiadem 44.9, 51.16. 26 Sheppard (1987). Steel (1987).

PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA

847

who picks up the image of Syrianus as an arbitrator, while an anonymous
commentary on the De interpretatione reports Syrianus as contradicting
Aristotle and showing a view of his to be false. 27

It is true that both Proclus and Syrianus studied and taught Aristotle and,
like the other Neoplatonists, regarded his views as fundamentally in
harmony with Plato’s. However, they are more prepared than Ammonius
to criticize Aristotle explicitly, and Proclus evidently preferred to concen-
trate on Plato when it came to producing written commentary. Ammonius’
greater interest in Aristotle has sometimes been connected with his attitude
to Christianity: I shall say more about this in a moment. It could also be due
to personal preference. Whatever the reason, Philoponus too concentrated
on Aristotle, while at Athens Damascius continued Proclus’ emphasis on
Plato. With the latest Neoplatonists, interests shift again: Olympiodorus,
born some time between 49 5 and 505 and still teaching at Alexandria in 565,
produced commentaries on Plato’s Alcibiades , Gorgias and Phaedo as well as
on Aristotle’s Categories and Meteorologica, while Simplicius concerned
himself primarily with Aristotle. Olympiodorus’ Gorgias commentary
draws on his notes from Ammonius’ lectures, while his commentaries on
the Alcibiades and the Phaedo take account of Damascius; one of Simplicius’
concerns is to attack the views of Philoponus. By the mid sixth century,
interaction between the schools has already dissolved a short-lived distinc-
tion between Athenian concentration on Plato and Alexandrian emphasis
on Aristotle.

There are no surviving commentaries on Plato by the last Neoplatonic
teachers in Alexandria, Elias, David and Stephanus. Commentary on
Aristotle’s logical works does survive, however; it has also been argued that
the third book of the De anima commentary attributed to Philoponus is in
fact by Stephanus. Elias was probably a pupil of Olympiodorus and
describes himself as teaching Aristotelian philosophy as a preliminary to
Plato. David too was probably a pupil of Olympiodorus. Stephanus must
have been younger, since he was summoned by the emperor Heraclius to
teach at Constantinople in 610. There is no clear evidence for Neoplatonic
teaching at Alexandria after Stephanus, although it is usually assumed that
teaching continued until the Arabs captured the city in 642. 28

So much for differences between Athenian and Alexandrian interests as
commentators. There remains the difficult but important question of atti-
tudes to Christianity. For Praechter, different attitudes to Christianity at

27 Saffrey (1990). Ammonius, In De interpretatione 25 3.1 2— 17. Taran (1978) 1 20.13—14.

28 On Elias see Westerink (1990) 3 36—9 (cf. Westerink and Trouillard (1990) xxxi— xxxvi). On David,
Mahe (1990). On Stephanus, Wolska-Conus (1989). For a different view of the relationships between
Elias, David and Stephanus and some arguments for philosophical teaching at Alexandria continuing
into the seventh century, see Roueche (1990). An anonymous chronicle of the last Persian kings records
that Alexandria was betrayed to the Persians in 617 by one Peter who had gone to Alexandria as a youth
to study philosophy (Guidi (1903) 22).

28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

Athens and Alexandria were linked to differences in metaphysics and in
types of commentary. He thought that the influence of Christianity could
already be discerned in the metaphysics of Hierocles and persisted
throughout the life of the Alexandrian school; the concentration on
Aristotle and, as he thought, the more sober approach to his work
confirmed that the Alexandrians were turning away from the dangerous
pagan theology which the Athenian philosophers found in Plato. We have
seen that, even if Alexandrian, or at least Ammonian, metaphysics does
differ from Athenian in the way suggested by Verrycken, the One is the
supreme principle for both groups. The work of Hadot and Verrycken has
demolished any suggestion that there is Christian influence here. We have
also seen that it was Ammonius who turned the Alexandrian school more
strongly towards Aristotle, at least for a time. What was Ammonius’ atti-
tude to Christianity? Study of Ammonius’ writings reveals no influence of
Christianity on his thought: like any good pagan Platonist, he believed in
the eternity of the world, in the world soul and in the pre-existence and
reincarnation of the human soul.

There is, however, a celebrated report by Damascius that Ammonius
‘being greedy and prepared to do anything for money, made agreements’
with the patriarch of Alexandria. 29 What did Ammonius agree to? The
standard interpretation is that he agreed not to teach Plato; hence, it is sup-
posed, his concentration on Aristotle. If this was the substance of the
agreement, it was not faithfully adhered to. Damascius heard Ammonius
lecture on Plato some time between 475 and 485, and Olympiodorus lis-
tened to a course on the Gorgias. The agreement was made either with Peter
Mongus, patriarch in 482—9, or with Athanasius II, patriarch c. 489—96. It is
thus quite possible that Damascius heard Ammonius before the agreement
on which he pours scorn was made and that Ammonius did give up teach-
ing Plato for a time but resumed it later when both Peter and Athanasius
were dead. There have been other suggestions: that Ammonius pledged
himself to silence on pagan doctrines such as the eternity and divinity of
the world — if so, the silence did not endure, any more than a silence about
Plato; or that Ammonius agreed to teach elementary philosophy courses to
ecclesiastics. 30 Neither of these is particularly convincing. A Christian patri-
arch might conceivably be worried about Ammonius teaching Plato and
doctrines associated with Platonism such as the eternity of the world; it
seems unlikely that he would want Ammonius to teach his own flock. But
something else associated with Neoplatonism would worry a patriarch
much more, and that is the practice of theurgy.

As we have already seen, the Athenian Neoplatonists followed in the
Iamblichan tradition of practising the magic rites associated with the

29 Damascius, Life of Isidorusfa. 3i6Zintzen. 30 Westerink (i 990) 327. Blumenthal (1986) 321—3.

PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA 849

Chaldaean Oracles', they incorporated the theory of cosmic sympathy on
which theurgy is based into their philosophical system and regarded the
theurgy as a possible route to union with the divine. Hierocles and Hermias
are no different from the Athenians in this respect. True, there are no anec-
dotes about their theurgic activities comparable to the stories Marinus
reports about Proclus, but both are familiar with the theoretical basis of
theurgy. In Hierocles we find, as in Proclus, a theory of language based on
theurgic ideas: both Proclus and Hierocles describe words as agalmata,
theurgic images, and see the relationship of language to the world as par-
allel to the relationship between such images and the divine realities they
symbolize. jl Hermias’ commentary on the Phaedrus includes material on
theurgy. Ammonius, however, is silent about both theurgy and the
Chaldaean Oracles. This may of course reflect his own personal attitudes, but
I think it likely that his agreement with the patriarch was an agreement to
keep quiet about what Christians would see as pernicious magic.
Damascius would have regarded this quite as scornfully as an agreement
not to teach Plato. If this is right, Ammonius did make concessions to
Christianity in one important area.

The tendency to accommodation with Christianity can also be seen in
subsequent Alexandrian philosophers. Philoponus was a Monophysite
Christian, and recent scholarship has tended to the view that he was born
a Christian. On the other hand, Philoponus stands a little to one side of
the Alexandrian school since he never officially taught philosophy.
Olympiodorus was a pagan. He maintains the eternity of the world and
believes in reincarnation. He also mentions the cult of images, theurgy and
the Chaldaean Oracles. Like Proclus and Damascius, he sometimes alludes to
the prevailing religion of Christianity in terms which are both veiled and
contemptuous. Yet in other ways his attitude to Christianity is more concil-
iatory and more discreet than the attitudes of Proclus and Damascius.
Passages in his commentary on the Gorgias imply that he was addressing a
largely Christian audience, while in the commentary on the First Alcibiades
he suggests that the eilechos daimon, the guardian spirit, is to be understood
as conscience. Where Proclus had illustrated the point that agreement is
not necessarily evidence of truth by citing the Christians’ denial of the exis-
tence of the gods, Olympiodorus instead cites the Democriteans and their
doctrine of the vacuum. 32 Elias, David and Stephanus were Christians.
Elias is perhaps to be identified with the prefect of Illyricum to whom
Justinian addressed his Novel 153m December 541. If so, he will have been
an orthodox Christian. He still maintains a belief in the eternity of the
world but also admits the possibility of miracles understood as direct acts

31 Hirschle (1979).

32 Olympiodorus, In Gorgiam 32—3, 243.16—244.17; InAlcibiadem 22.14—23.4, 92.6—7.

850 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

of Providence. 33 David has a Christian name. Stephanus is perhaps to be
identified both with the Stephanus who around 5 8 1 was expelled from the
Monophysite church and with the Stephanus who was giving lectures in an
orthodox church annexe between 581 and 5 84. 34 In sixth-century
Alexandria, paganism and Christianity seem to be comfortably coexisting:
Christianity dominates, but Olympiodorus could openly express pagan
views, while Elias could assimilate them to a Christian viewpoint. Doctrinal
quarrels within Christianity had become more important than disputes
over pagan philosophical ideas.

Neoplatonic attitudes to Christianity may be better understood if they
are compared with the attitudes to Christianity found in other intellectuals
of the period. Combinations of paganism and Christianity appear in
several poets of the time. Nonnus’ voluminous Dionjsiaca is an epic on the
legend of Dionysus, but a verse paraphrase of St John’s gospel also sur-
vives under his name. The attractive poem on the legend of Hero and
Leander written by Musaeus uses motifs from Homer and Plato but at the
same time appears to be the work of a Christian. Cyrus of Panopolis, the
fifth-century politician and Christian bishop, wrote poetry which uses
motifs drawn from Homer and Virgil. 35 For Nonnus, Musaeus and Cyrus,
pagan tradition provides a literary and mythological frame of reference not
incompatible with Christianity. More significant perhaps is Procopius’
refusal to go into detail when he mentions a Christian dispute over the
nature of God. As for me’, he declares, ‘. . . I shall maintain a discreet
silence concerning these matters, with the sole object that old and vener-
able beliefs may not be discredited. For I, for my part, will say nothing
whatever about God save that he is altogether good and has all things in his
power.’ 36

There is a fair amount of evidence for contacts between the Neoplatonist
philosophers and other intellectuals, both pagan and Christian. Hierocles
dedicated his work On Providence to the pagan historian, poet and diplomat
Olympiodorus of Thebes. Pamprepius, another pagan poet from Egypt, was
a pupil of Proclus between 473 and 476 before he went to Constantinople
and became mixed up in the conspiracy of Ulus against the emperor Zeno
in 484 . 1 have already mentioned Christodorus of Coptos, the Christian poet
whose works included a poem on the pupils of Proclus. Musaeus too may
have had some kind of acquaintance with Proclus’ work and ideas. 37 We have
seen that Proclus and Damascius were well educated in rhetoric. Philoponus
is sometimes given the title grammatikos , which suggests that he taught what

33 Elias, In Categorias 120.16— 17, 242.11. 34 Wolska-Conus (1989) 47— 68; Uthemann (1985).

35 Cameron (1965), (1982). 36 Procop. Wars v.3.7— 9, quoted in H. B. Dewing’s Loeb translation.

37 Gelzer (1975) 297!?., esp. 316—22. Although Gelzer’s claim that the poem is a deliberate
Neoplatonic allegory is not convincing, he does demonstrate some looser connections between
Musaeus and Neoplatonism.

PHILOSOPHY IN ALEXANDRIA 8 5 I

we would call language and literature. He is said to have studied with the
‘grammarian’ Romanus and he wrote two works dealing with accentuation.
It has also been suggested that he taught the poet Dioscorus of Aphrodito . 38

Combining pagan culture with Christianity would be harder for a
Neoplatonist philosopher than for a poet or a historian. A Christian poet
can comfortably use Homeric motifs or even write a learned poem on
Dionysus (if Nonnus was a Christian when he wrote the Dionysiaca)-, a his-
torian like Procopius can avoid committing himself on matters of theol-
ogy; but a philosopher discussing Aristotle’s Metaphysics or Plato’s Timaeus
has to decide where he stands on the relationship between the creator God,
divine Intellect and the One or on the eternity of the world. But if, in a city
like Alexandria, pagans and Christians mixed freely and shared a common
culture, then we should not be surprised by Ammonius’ agreement with the
patriarch, the editing of Ammonius’ lectures by the Christian Philoponus
and Olympiodorus’ instruction of Christian pupils. It is the Athenian
Neoplatonists, clinging firmly and almost exclusively to pagan tradition,
who are the odd ones out.

Proclus was interested not only in literature but also in astronomy and
mathematics. The Alexandrian philosophers had similar interests.
Ammonius gave lectures on the work of the second-century Pythagorean,
Nicomachus of Gerasa, a mathematician popular among Neoplatonists
from Iamblichus onwards; these lectures are incorporated in the commen-
taries on Nicomachus by Asclepius and Philoponus. Ammonius’ immedi-
ate successor in his teaching post was a mathematician, Eutocius.
Olympiodorus gave lectures on astrology. Philoponus shows considerable
knowledge of medicine. Stephanus too had interests in astronomy and
astrology, but it remains uncertain whether the Stephanus who taught in
Alexandria is the same as the Stephanus of Athens who wrote commentar-
ies on Hippocrates and Galen.

So far, the Alexandrian Neoplatonists have been discussed as teachers,
commentators and scholars with wide intellectual interests. Did they make
any significant contributions to the development of philosophy? They
were the heirs of a long tradition and, like the Athenians, they saw them-
selves as perpetuators of that tradition, not as innovators. Philoponus is
something of an exception. He turned against the tradition to criticize the
Aristotelian account of the physical world which was normally accepted by
the Neoplatonists. In so doing, he introduced a number of new ideas,
notably ‘impetus theory’. Aristotle had been puzzled as to what makes a
projectile, such as a javelin, continue to move once it has left the thrower’s
hand. His solution was to say that successive pockets of air behind the
javelin received the power to push it onwards. Philoponus suggested

38 MacCouU ( 1987 ).

852 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

instead that a force, or impetus, could be implanted by the thrower directly
into the javelin. This theory was still standard in the time of Galileo.
Philoponus also made novel contributions to the discussion of concepts
such as velocity, space and light . 39

Study of Philoponus and the other Alexandrian philosophers requires
the ability to penetrate the long-winded form of commentary in which
their work is presented. Recent work has highlighted the interesting discus-
sions buried within the commentaries of Philoponus. It may well be that
equally interesting material lies concealed in the works of Ammonius or
even in those of Olympiodorus, who is commonly dismissed as totally
unoriginal. No final conclusions can be drawn about the philosophical
importance of the Alexandrian Neoplatonists until individual thinkers
have received more detailed and expert study.

IV. PHILOSOPHY ELSEWHERE IN THE EMPIRE

Students came to both Alexandria and Athens from a wide area. In due
course some of these students became teachers and spread Neoplatonism
to other cities. Aeneas of Gaza, a Christian, appears to have studied at
Alexandria under Hierocles before returning to his native city to teach a
Christian Neoplatonism . 40 Asclepiodotus, a native of Alexandria who had
studied in Athens with Proclus, settled as a teacher at Aphrodisias. He
married Damiane, the daughter of another Asclepiodotus, a prominent
local citizen who himself had philosophical interests. In fifth-century
Aphrodisias, both pagans and Christians occupied important positions.
Asclepiodotus of Aphrodisias was a pagan, and the two Asclepiodoti main-
tained a philosophical school where pagan worship and theurgy flourished.
It is not clear whether this school built on any local philosophical tradition.
There is some evidence for philosophical activity at Aphrodisias in the
second and third century, including the Aristotelian commentaries of
Alexander, but little to establish a continuing tradition. However, as at
Athens, archaeology confirms the literary evidence for philosophy in the
fifth century. Excavations at Aphrodisias have produced not only inscrip-
tions honouring Asclepiodotus of Aphrodisias and Pytheas, a member of
the same circle, but also a number of shield portraits and two busts found
in a building complex which appears to be a philosophical school. The
shield portraits depict both philosophers and pagan cultural heroes
(Pindar, Alexander and Alcibiades); the busts appear to represent a philos-
opher and a sophist. These sculptures may be earlier than the second half

39 Sorabji (19S7).

40 Sheldon Williams (1967) 483—8. On the problems of dating Aeneas’ dialogue Theophrastus , see
Hadot (1978) 203—4. Glucker (1987) 51—7 argues convincingly that the school of Gaza was primarily a
centre for literary and rhetorical studies.

PHILOSOPHY ELSEWHERE IN THE EMPIRE 853

of the fifth century. If Asclepiodotus of Alexandria arrived in Aphrodisias
in the late 470s, as Charlotte Roueche supposes, he may well have found a
Neoplatonic school already flourishing under the direction of his future
father-in-law. No writings survive by any representative of this school, and
it may not have lasted very long. Asclepiodotus of Alexandria probably left
Aphrodisias in the mid 480s. He and his wife visited the shrine of Isis at
Menouthis in Egypt in an attempt to cure Damiane’s childlessness. A baby
was produced, but the Christians of Alexandria alleged that it had been
bought from a priestess and used the affair as a pretext for attacking and
destroying the shrine. Asclepiodotus apparently did not return to
Aphrodisias. At some point, probably in the sixth century, the shield por-
traits were removed, broken up and dumped. It seems plausible that
Justinian’s legislation of 529 affected Aphrodisias as well as Athens. 41

Another pupil of Proclus, Agapios, taught philosophy to John Lydus in
Constantinople. An anonymous dialogue, On Political Science , written by a
Christian in Constantinople some time before 5 32, bears witness to the wide
diffusion of Neoplatonic teaching among contemporary intellectuals. 42

This diffusion was not confined to the Greek-speaking world.
Neoplatonism spread both westwards, into medieval Europe, and east-
wards, into Syria and Armenia. Neoplatonic thought had already influenced
writers in Latin in the third and fourth century. Macrobius, Marius
Victorinus and Augustine all drew on Plotinus and Porphyry. In the fifth
century one Latin writer, Boethius, stands out as strongly influenced by
contemporary Greek philosophy. Boethius, born around 480 and executed
in prison in 524, drew both on his Latin predecessors and on the Greek
thought of his own time. His Christian theology is strongly influenced by
Augustine but his works on logic, which include commentaries on
Aristotle’s De interpretatione and Categories and on Porphyry’s Isagoge (an
introduction to the Categories), show knowledge of fifth-century Greek
Neoplatonism, particularly the work of Proclus. Like his Greek contempo-
raries, and like Iamblichus, he was interested in the works on arithmetic and
music by Nicomachus of Gerasa and used them in his own writings on
these subjects. It remains, however, uncertain just how much of contem-
porary Greek thought was known to Boethius and whether he had any
direct personal contact with the Greek Neoplatonists. Pierre Courcelle
argued that much of Boethius’ work was closely parallel to that of
Ammonius and suggested that Boethius had actually studied at Alexandria.
At the other extreme, James Shiel has argued that Boethius worked from a
manuscript of Aristotle’s Organon with marginal glosses and had no other
access to the work of the Greek commentators. Boethius’ knowledge of

41 Roueche, Aphrodisias 85—96. Smith (1990).

42 Lydus, De Magistratibus 111.26. Maas ,John Lydus ch. 7. Fotiou (1985).

854 28. PHILOSOPHY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SCHOOLS

Greek Neoplatonism does appear wider and deeper than Shiel’s hypothe-
sis suggests. He was not working in isolation from his Greek contemporar-
ies; yet there is no evidence that he ever set foot in either Athens or
Alexandria. It may well be that his knowledge of Greek thought came from
reading works of Porphyry, Proclus and others which were available in
Italy. 43

Like Elias, Boethius maintains some Neoplatonic doctrines which one
might have supposed incompatible with Christianity, the soul’s existence
prior to life in the body and the everlastingness of the world. His Consolation
of Philosophy, written in prison, combines classical literary and philosophi-
cal tradition with a Christian outlook and beliefs. Boethius played a major
role in the transmission of Greek philosophy in the western European tra-
dition. Latin commentaries on the Consolation of Philosophy were written
from the ninth century onwards, and the work was translated into medie-
val English, French and German. His works on logic, arithmetic and music
were used in the medieval schools. 44

By around 600 Greek philosophy was also passing into other linguistic and
cultural traditions. Neoplatonic works, particularly from the Alexandrian
school, were translated into Syriac and later into Arabic. The works of David
were translated into Armenian at the end of the sixth century or the begin-
ning of the seventh. In the seventh century, the Armenian writer Anania of
Shirak records in his autobiography that his own, Greek, teacher of philos-
ophy, Tychikos of Trebizond, studied in Constantinople with a teacher from
Athens, ‘city of philosophers’. This may have been Stephanus, if Stephanus
of Alexandria and Stephanus of Athens are indeed the same person. 45 In any
case it is striking that in seventh-century Armenia Athens still had the repu-
tation of being the city of philosophers. This was of course its reputation in
the classical period, but the persistence of that reputation in late antiquity is
due to the Neoplatonists.

43 Courcelle (1948) 257—312. Shiel (1990). Chadwick, Boethius. 44 Gibson (ed.), Boethius.
45 Mahe (1990). Wolska-Conus (1989) 20—4.

CHAPTER 29

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

ROBERT BROWNING!

Throughout the fifth and sixth centuries a.d., and to some extent later also,
the education of the young followed patterns established in outline almost
a thousand years earlier. Changes in content and in institutional arrange-
ments had certainly taken place during the long period. The gradual disap-
pearance in the Greek world of the element of physical training and of the
institution which provided for it, the gymnasium, is an example. But change
on the whole had been slow and almost imperceptible. Traditional atti-
tudes, methods and values had sunk deep roots in ancient society, roots
which remained relatively undisturbed by the social, political and religious
changes of the period. Education of all kinds was marked by rigid conser-
vatism. There was no resistance to innovation because there was no inno-
vation to resist. In the words of a recent study, ‘Late antique schools of
grammar and rhetoric were sound-proof against the outside world, their
methods and their status largely untouched by the profound political and
religious changes taking place around them .’ 1 Such general statements call
for some qualification when one looks more closely at particular regions,
periods or ethnic groups, but on the whole they provide a valid and impor-
tant characterization of late antique education and of the culture which it
reflected and perpetuated.

The ancient world was and remained largely illiterate. The vast majority
of the peasants whose labour sustained its wealth could neither read nor
write, and the few who could had had little opportunity to pursue their edu-
cation any further. However, there clearly were exceptions. Vegetius men-
tions literate recruits to the Roman army, who were presumably peasants . 2
Education was a function of urban society, serving not only to distinguish
the citizen from the countryman, but also to mark an elite within each city.
It was, with only a few exceptions, in cities that instruction in ‘grammar’ —
the art of reading, understanding and, on occasion, imitating the works of
classical writers in Greek or Latin — and rhetoric — the art of structured and
persuasive oral and written communication — was available. The grammar-
ian and the teacher of rhetoric were conspicuous figures in late antique

1 Kaster, Guardians of Language ix. 2 Vegetius, De Re Military ii. 1 9 .

855

8 5 6

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

society, about whom a great deal is known. The elementary schoolmaster
( grammatistes , litterator, ludi magister) was a more humble individual, whose
activities and whose very existence have left few traces in the record of
history. He, too, seems to have been largely an urban figure. But there were
some elementary schoolmasters in the countryside, especially in the Greek
east. They turn up in some of the large villages of Egypt, and towards the
end of the sixth century we encounter a paidodidaskalos in a remote village
of Galatia, and in another village of the same province — which, however,
lay on a main strategic road — a future saint is sent at the age of eight to a
didaskalos to learn grammata? How widespread socially and geographically
the ability to read was cannot be determined with any pretension to preci-
sion. The father of St Symeon the Younger, a maker and seller of perfumes
in the fifth century, spent his evenings reading religious books. However,
he lived in a small town in northern Syria rather than in a village. 4

The principles which guided late antique education have been explained
and illustrated in the preceding volume of this History (see vol. xm, pp.
665—80). The traditional three-stage system — elementary literacy, grammar
and rhetoric — was maintained throughout the fifth and sixth century and
later, though the distinctions between the various stages tended to become
more blurred than in earlier periods.

Such information as we possess on the content and methods of elemen-
tary education in late antiquity is derived mainly from school exercises and
similar texts on papyrus, wooden tablets, ostraka (fragments of pottery)
and other materials preserved in the rubbish heaps of Egyptian villages and
towns. There is no reason to suppose that these are not representative of
what took place in schools elsewhere in the Graeco-Roman world, and in
the teaching of Latin as well as of Greek. About a hundred such texts
survive from the fifth to the eighth century. They do not differ significantly
from those of earlier periods, except for the very occasional replacement
of pagan by Christian examples. 5 Learning by rote from dictation and
copying short texts written by the teacher played a central role in teaching,
and there was little attempt to engage the interest of the pupil or to adapt
teaching to the psychological development of the juvenile mind. For most
schoolchildren the school day must have contained large stretches of
numbing boredom.

The traditional methods of learning to read and write developed over
the centuries in the Greek and Latin worlds were taken over with little or
no modification by other linguistic communities as they became literate.
This is illustrated by the corpus of 332 Coptic school texts recently pub-
lished. 6 Beginning with single letters, the pupils go on to copy the alphabet,

3 Festugiere (1970) 5.18,26.12. 4 PG’Lxxxvi.2993.

5 Zalateo (1961); Wouters (1979); Harrauer and Sijpesteijn (1985). 6 Hasitzka (1990) passim.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

857

then syllables, then lists of words — often of names — then formulae for
letters, etc., and finally short edifying texts. They also copied lists of
numbers, multiplication and other tables, arithmetical rules, exercises and
problems. Coptic-speaking students were often expected to learn a little
Greek. So we find them copying lists of Greek words with their Coptic
equivalents, sententiae of Menander with interlinear Coptic translations, and
short scriptural texts in both languages. It is interesting and touching to find
a seventh-century schoolboy in upper Egypt copying a long list of charac-
ters from the Iliad in alphabetical order.

Elementary schoolteachers were not in general paid by the state or by
municipalities, as were grammarians and rhetoricians, but depended on fees
payable by the parents of their pupils. Many children were taught to read
and write at home, either by their parents or by private tutors.

Grammarians occupied a more conspicuous social position than ele-
mentary schoolmasters, and are consequently far more frequently men-
tioned by contemporary sources. A recent study identifies 178 Greek or
Latin teachers of ‘grammar’ between the fourth and the sixth century, and
lists a further hundred individuals who may have exercised the profession. 7
We possess quite detailed information on the careers of some of these.
Unfortunately, we learn little about their day-to-day work.

The aims and methods of the teacher of grammar had changed little
over the centuries. The Gramm atike techne of Dionysios Thrax and the com-
mentaries which had grown up around it provided the theoretical founda-
tion. Reading and explication of a limited number of classical Greek or
Latin poetic texts provided the practical element in the teaching of the
grammarian. Damascius, the last head of the Academy in Athens, in the
early sixth century, defines grammar as ‘the art based on the explication of
poets and correct use of the Greek language’. 8 This is almost a direct trans-
lation of the definition given by Quintilian five centuries earlier: recte
loquendi scientia et poetarum enarratio? For both Greek and Latin speakers,
grammar was both explanatory and prescriptive. As both languages devel-
oped and changed over the centuries, the prescriptive function came more
and more to the fore. Preservation of the purity of language as enshrined
in a limited number of ancient literary texts became the grammarian’s
primary aim. As correct speech became the badge of the educated urban
upper classes, the grammarian came to play a role in the process of social
differentiation. It is probably no accident that many more handbooks of
grammar composed in the fourth to sixth century survive in Latin than in
Greek. The bearers of culture were fewer in number in the Latin west and
felt their position more threatened than in the Greek east. It is perhaps

7 Kaster, Guardians of Language. 8 1 Vita Isidori fr. 1 1 1 Zintzen.
9 Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria 1.4.2.

8 5 8

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

equally no accident that it is in the late antique west that we find such state-
ments as Tanto maxime rudibus praestare cognoscimur, qui rusticitatis enormitate
incultique sermonis ordine sauciant, immo deformant examussim normatam orationis
integritatem, politumque lumen eius obfuscant, quanto ipsi a pecudibis videantud 0 (We
are recognized to be as much superior to the uneducated, who by the form-
lessness of their rusticity and the disorder of their untrained speech wound
and even maim the purity of language guided by strict rule, and obscure the
brilliance of its elegance, which is the fruit of art, as they themselves seem
superior to beasts) and Experiere per dies quanto excellunt beluis homines, tanto
anteferri rusticis institutos 11 (You will find out as you go on that just as men
surpass beasts, so the educated surpass the rustic). It is worth remarking
that the first work is addressed to a certain Athanasius, evidently a
Christian, and that Sidonius Apollinaris when he wrote the letter cited was
already a bishop.

Surviving Greek handbooks from the fifth and sixth century are more
original in their approach than their Latin counterparts. They include an
Introductory Rules for the Inflection of Greek Nouns and Verbs 12 ( Eisagogikoi
kanones peri klisebs onomaton kai rhematon) of Theodosios of Alexandria (late
fifth/ early sixth century), the General Rules on Composition 13 ( kanones katholi-
koi peri syntaxeos) of Timotheos of Gaza (late fifth/early sixth century), the
Spelling Book 14 (Peri orthographias) of John Charax (sixth century), and several
lexica of uncommon words, including one by a certain Cyril, sometimes
identified with Cyril, patriarch of Alexandria 412—44, a lexicon of rare
words used in literature by Hesychius of Alexandria (fifth/ sixth century)
and the Ethnica of Stephanus of Byzantium, a vast geographical and eth-
nographical dictionary, which survives only in a later epitome.

In the Latin west the fourth century saw Artes grammaticae by
Victorinus, 15 Charisius 16 and Aelius Donatus, 17 all of which are derivative
from earlier manuals. In the fifth century Servius and Pompeius wrote long
commentaries on Donatus, 18 whose longer and shorter Artes had become
standard handbooks, while others compiled Artes grammaticae which drew
almost exclusively on Donatus. The most original work on Latin grammar,
the Institutiones of Priscian, 19 written about 500 in Constantinople, was
influenced by contemporary Greek grammatical doctrine, as was the
shorter Ars of his pupil Eutychius, 20 written in the mid sixth century.

These works were intended as handbooks for teachers, not as textbooks
for pupils, and they reveal little about oral teaching, which no doubt varied

10 Diomedes, Airs Grammatica {Grammatici l^atini ed. H. Keil (Leipzig 1857—80) 1) 299.19—23.

11 Sid. Ap. Ep. 4.17.2. 12 Hilgard (1889— 94). 13 Cramer (1839— 41) iv.239— 44.

14 Cramer (1835—7) iv.331— 9 (partial edition; the bulk of the work remains unpublished).

15 Grammatici Gatini 6.3—184. 16 Grammatici Gatini 1.1—269,524—65.

17 Grammatici iMtini 4.35 5—402. 18 Grammatici Gatini 4.40 5— 48; 5.95—312.

19 Grammatici Gatini 2— 3. 20 Grammatici Gatini 5 .447—89.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 859

in style and quality from teacher to teacher. However, some of the Latin
manuals permit a glimpse of what went on in the classroom. Donatus’Hrr
minor consists of a series of questions and answers designed to help teach-
ers formulate their teaching and test how much of it the students had mem-
orized and understood. Thus the section on the verb begins: Verbum quid
est ? Pars orationis cum tempore et persona sine casu aut agere aliquid aut pati aut
neutrum significans. Verbis quot accidunt? Septem. Quae? Qualitas, coniugatio, genus,
numerus, figura, tempus, persona. Each of these features of the verb is then
defined and its subdivisions set out . 21

The other principal activity of the grammarian was the explication of
poetic texts. This has a long history, in Greek going back beyond the
Alexandrian grammarians to the schoolmaster in a fragment of
Aristophanes who quizzes his pupils on the meaning of Homeric words,
and in Latin to Probus (late first century a.d.) and ultimately to Varro. No
continuous commentary on a Greek poetic text survives from late an-
tiquity. But we do possess the commentary on Virgil by Servius, written in
the first half of the fifth century, and embodying much earlier material . 22
Servius follows ancient practice in commenting on Virgil’s text line by line
rather than discussing the structure of the poem as a whole or the place in
it of particular episodes or particular characters. His commentary is mainly
linguistic, and he only occasionally touches upon mythological, historical
or literary questions at any length. His main principles of explanation are
natura , auctoritas and usus , and he easily slides from linguistic description to
linguistic prescription. He is alert to ambiguities and to semantic change,
and often elucidates a Virgilian passage by quoting Lucretius or Horace or
Lucan. But he scarcely ever refers to the spoken language of his own day,
as Eustathios was to do in the twelfth century in commenting on Homer.
Though he was aware of the existence of variant readings, he never tries to
solve a problem of interpretation by emending the text of his manuscript
as a modern scholar might do. Fortified by the accumulated learning of his
predecessors, he interprets Virgil, not without complacency, in a hermeti-
cally sealed world.

His commentary clearly reflects his teaching. But how? Few pupils would
have a text of Virgil. The grammarian presumably began his lesson by dic-
tating a passage of the Aeneid, which his pupils would copy. Then he would
go on to explain the passage, comment on its language and discuss its inter-
pretation. It must have been a slow procedure, not likely to give the pupil
a grasp of the larger structure of the poem or a sense of its grandeur. A
twelfth-century Greek commentator on Aristotle remarks that schoolboys
normally read about thirty lines of Homer a day, while only the brightest

21 On the relation between the teacher’s written text and his oral exposition cf. Holtz (1981) 75—100.

22 Thilo and Hagen (1881—7).

86o 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

read as many as fifty. 23 These figures are likely to be as true of late antiq-
uity as they were of the Middle Ages.

The teaching of rhetoric in antiquity comprised three distinct stages,
which might of course overlap in practice. The pupil began by studying and
probably learning by heart a series of short model texts, each illustrating a
particular rhetorical genre. These would be explained and commented on
by the teacher. Several collections of such preliminary exercises or progym-
nasmata were made in the Greek world, of which the earliest still surviving
is that of Aelius Theon of Alexandria (first/ second century a.d.). No such
collection survives in Latin, but the resemblances in content and arrange-
ment between Quintilian’s precepts and Theon’s practice bear witness to a
common pedagogical tradition, doubtless of Greek origin. The next stage
was the study of a theoretical handbook of rhetoric, often structured on
the model of a Hellenistic techne. Finally the student was required to
compose and deliver speeches, both on general moral or political topics
and in imaginary legal disputes. Side by side with these three stages went
the reading of a selection of speeches by classical writers — Demosthenes,
above all, in Greek, Cicero in Latin.

Unlike the grammarian, however, the rhetorician had another role
besides teaching. He was expected to give displays of his art in theatres and
other public places. These might be merely exhibitions of a virtuosity
which was much appreciated by those who had enjoyed a rhetorical educa-
tion and often admired by those who had not. But he might also be called
upon to be the spokesman of his city, delivering epithalamia or funeral ora-
tions for local notables, addresses of welcome to high officials, panegyrics
on emperors, requests for subventions or privileges, or pleas for clemency.
As Choricius observed in his funeral oration for Procopius of Gaza, deliv-
ered some time between 5 30 and 540: ‘There are two tests of the excellence
of a rhetorician, astounding his audience in the theatre by the wisdom and
beauty of his words, and initiating the young in the mysteries of the
ancients ... In his lectures to the young he never let pass a word that was
not Attic, nor a thought that was not relevant to his purpose, nor a syllable
which spoilt the rhythm of his speech, nor a sentence whose construction
failed to please the ear . . . When he came to deliver his own compositions
in the theatre — something which he often did in order to kindle in the
young a love of eloquence — he astonished every learned ear and charmed
all the bystanders.’ 24 This public role explains both the close relations which
often prevailed between the rhetorician and the governing elite of his city,
and the self-complacent aggrandizement of themselves and their craft so
characteristic of rhetoricians. A good example of this is to be found in the
opening paragraph of John Doxapatres’ introductory lecture on the

23 Michael of Ephesus, GAG 20.613 lines 4—7. 24 Choricius, Oratio Funebris in Procopium 7—9.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

86l

Progymnasmata of Aphthonius, a text written in the eleventh century, but
largely a compilation of tralatician cliches. ‘To those who have just come
from the study of poetry and its tales of marvels to the great mystery of
rhetoric, and who are eager to take their fill of its inspiration and grandeur
of thought, it is natural to feel no small sense of astonishment and not
ignoble confusion. The greatness of the reputation of the art and its
extraordinary renown make it reasonable to feel so much disquiet, and of
necessity engender in those of more noble spirit an eagerness commensu-
rate with their amazement. For the more difficult they hear this art to be,
and the harder to practise successfully, the greater the enthusiasm with
which they prepare themselves to succeed in an enterprise which for the
many is hard to comprehend and to grasp with the intellect, and so to
become distinguished in eloquence and enjoy widespread fame.’ 25

In late antiquity the general pattern of rhetorical teaching remained the
same in east and west, but many innovations made in the Greek world
remained virtually unknown in the Latin west. In the east a standard group
of textbooks was adopted, probably in the fifth century. The student began
by studying the Progymnasmata of Libanius’ student Aphthonius of
Antioch, which replaced earlier collections, but was itself not replaced in
general use by the less differentiated Progymnasmata of Nikolaos of Myra,
professor of rhetoric in Constantinople in the fifth century and friend of
the philosopher Proclus. All earlier theoretical handbooks had been super-
seded by the four treatises of Hermogenes of Tarsus (c. 160 —c. 225) — Peri
staseon. Peri ideon. Peri heureseos and Peri methodou deinotetos — who had intro-
duced a much subtler analysis of style than the earlier doctrine of the three
stylistic levels. Both Aphthonius’ Progymnasmata and Hermogenes’ treatises
accumulated around themselves numerous commentaries. The earliest,
those of Syrianus and Sopatros on Hermogenes, were composed in the
fifth or sixth century. Aphthonios and Hermogenes’ works regularly occur
together in medieval manuscripts, which are probably descended from
teachers’ manuals of late antiquity. The two treatises on epideictic oratory
attributed to Menander were also in use as teaching manuals in late an-
tiquity.

Western rhetorical teaching seems to have remained much as it was in
the days of Quintilian. There is no regular corpus of preliminary exercises.
Latin handbooks of rhetoric compiled in late antiquity by Julius Victor,
Fortunatianus, Julius Severianus, Augustine and Martianus Capella show no
trace of knowledge of Hermogenes or Menander. The only exceptions are
the fourth-century grammarian Grillius’ commentary on Cicero’s De inven-
tione, which appears to know some Hermogenian definitions, and the sixth-
century grammarian Priscian, who introduced Hermogenian matter in his

25 Rabe (1931) 80-1.

86z

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

De figuris numerorum. It is probably no accident that Grillius probably and
Priscian certainly worked and taught in Constantinople. For late Latin rhet-
oricians Cicero provided both models of style and theoretical treatises. His
De inventione was endlessly commented on, as were to a lesser extent his
Partitiones oratoriae and his Topica. Quintilian is the latest authority quoted by
most late antique Latin treatises on rhetoric. The causes of this imperme-
ability of late Latin rhetorical teaching are not easy to discern.

Many model declamations used in the later stages of rhetorical education
survive from late antiquity both in Greek and in Latin. They allow us a
glimpse into the rhetorician’s classroom. In Greek there are collections by
Libanius (only partly authentic), Himerius, Sopatros, Procopius of Gaza
and Choricius. In Latin some of the texts in the two collections of decla-
mations traditionally attributed to Quintilian may have been composed in
late antiquity, but they are impossible to date with precision. The eighty-one
texts in Sopatros’ Diaireseis \ ytematoit 16 are not complete declamations, but
analyses of the appropriate arguments and the manner of their presenta-
tion. The same is true of some of the shorter Pseudo-Quintilianic declama-
tions. Such texts throw an interesting light on how the late antique teacher
of rhetoric set about his business. Two striking features are common to
both Greek and Latin rhetorical texts of the period. The first is the predom-
inance of forensic and, to a lesser extent, of political themes. Yet the sur-
viving ‘real-life’ speeches of Libanius and Themistius, Procopius of Gaza
and Choricius, Dioscorus of Aphrodito and the Latin panegyrists, belong
with few exceptions to the epideictic genre — encomia, funeral orations,
addresses to rulers and the like. There is a curious discrepancy between
precept and practice, between the school and the life for which it was
intended to prepare. Even more remarkable are the themes of these model
declamations. Those dealing with political or moral themes, if in Greek, are
set either in fifth-century Athens or in the world of Demosthenes and
Alexander the Great, if in Latin, in the last century of the Roman republic.
The much more numerous forensic speeches display no knowledge of or
interest in Roman law or even the law of contemporary Greek cities. Almost
without exception they are set in a timeless world with arbitrary and often
fantastic laws. None of these model speeches, political, moral or forensic,
betrays any awareness of the Roman empire. When one reflects that a train-
ing in rhetoric was regarded as essential both for members of city councils
and for those who aspired to play a part in the public life of their province
or of the empire as a whole, one cannot but be surprised at this hermetic
exclusion of the world in which such men were to pass their lives.

The study of philosophy was never a regular stage in the education of
the urban elite, as were grammar and rhetoric. Late antiquity, however, saw

26 Walz (1832— 6) viii. 1— 385.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 863

a certain revival of philosophical teaching as part of the growth and spread
of Neoplatonism as a common world view. Athens and Alexandria were
the principal centres of philosophical teaching, with professors who were
paid either by the imperial government or by the city authorities or by
private endowments. The Alexandrian school was derivative from that of
Athens, where the Academy had existed as a teaching institution, if not
with unbroken continuity since the death of Plato, at least since the second
century b.c. Hermeias, the earliest in a continuous succession of heads of
the Alexandrian school, was a pupil of Syrianus (//or. a 430) in Athens, and
his son and successor Ammonius had studied in Athens under Proclus
(c. 41 1—95). There is no doubt, however, that there were teachers of philos-
ophy in other cities too. John the Lydian in the sixth century tells us inci-
dentally that he studied Plato and Aristotle in Constantinople under
Agapius, a pupil of Proclus. 27 It is evident that he did not pursue his phil-
osophical studies in any depth. Later in the sixth century Maximus
Confessor is said by some accounts to have studied grammar, rhetoric and
philosophy in Constantinople. This may well be a cliche; but Maximus was
certainly acquainted with Aristotelian logic.

Philosophical teaching was much more open to attack by the Christian
establishment, especially after the end of the fourth century, than was the
teaching of grammar and rhetoric, in spite of the pagan tone of much of
the teaching material used in connection with these subjects. The reasons
are threefold. First, philosophy often concerned itself with such questions
as whether the universe was created or uncreated, the relation between the
human and the divine, and the foundations of moral conduct, on all of
which Christian doctrine had much to say. The second reason was the asso-
ciation, real or supposed, between Neoplatonic philosophy and theurgy or
magic. Not all Neoplatonists engaged in these practices, and many dis-
tanced themselves sharply from them. But to the prejudiced or uncritical
observer, all philosophers were tarred with the same brush. The third
reason is the importance which many Neoplatonists attached to the obser-
vance of pagan cult ceremonies. A case in point is the great Proclus. Actual
persecution of philosophers was rare, until in 529 the Athenian school was
caught up in Justinian’s campaign against pagans in influential positions.
But biographies of Neoplatonist teachers, such as Marinus’ Life of Proclus
and Damascius’ Life of Isidore, reveal the uneasy and uncertain situation in
which the Athenian teachers felt themselves to be. We have less biograph-
ical information from Alexandria. But philosophers there must from time
to time have recalled the murder of Hypatia by fanatical Christians in 41 5.
Some of the Alexandrian teachers either took care not to give offence to
Christian feelings, like Ammonius, son of Hermeias, or were themselves

27 John Lydus, De Mag. 111.26.

864

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

Christians, like John Philoponus, Elias and David. At any rate, relations
appear to have been less tense in Alexandria than in Athens, and the phil-
osophical school there was unaffected byjustinian’s purges in 529 and later.

A very large body of writings in Greek connected with philosophical
teaching survives from late antiquity, not all of which have been published.
They are mainly text- orientated rather than problem-orientated. Much
teaching took the form of commentaries on works of Plato or Aristotle, in
which the teacher discussed and explained the meaning of the text section
by section. These commentaries are partly addressed to beginners (e.g. the
Fifth Essay in Proclus’ commentary on Plato’s Republic, and partly to
advanced students, who have already some acquaintance with philosophical
discourse, perhaps to students who hoped themselves to become profes-
sional philosophers; an example is the Sixth Essay in the same commentary
of Proclus. As well as commentaries on earlier texts, Neoplatonist teachers
also wrote introductory works, prolegomena to philosophy, and elementary
treatises on logic, based on Aristode’s logical works and Porphyry’s
Commentary on the Categories. These were addressed to a more general body of
students, most of whom may not have made any further study of philoso-
phy. All these works, advanced and elementary, are substantially the texts of
lectures given by teachers. Some are still divided into praxeis in surviving
manuscripts. The average length of a praxis is about 800—900 words. If each
praxis represents a lecture, then the lecture must have been delivered at dic-
tation speed. It is likely, though it can hardly be proved, that most of the
commentaries and similar works were delivered in this way, and that the texts
which we possess represent what some student had taken down from dicta-
tion, rather than the master copy of the teacher’s lecture notes. At any rate,
their origin is to be sought in a teaching situation. The principal exceptions
are the commentaries on Aristotle by Simplicius. They were all composed
after he had ceased to teach in 529, and were intended from the first for
reading. This may explain their high philosophical quality and the richness of
their quotations from earlier philosophers, including the Presocratics. Were
it not for Simplicius and his enforced leisure, Empedocles and Parmenides
might be mere names for us. 28

For the late antique Neoplatonists, Plato was the philosopher par excellence,
and the study of a small selection of his works the culmination of philo-
sophical education. The study of Aristotle was seen as a kind of propaedeu-
tic to ‘the greater mysteries of Plato’. But as time went on, Aristode came to
play a predominant role in their teaching, perhaps more in Alexandria than
in Athens. Syrianus and Proclus composed commentaries on dialogues of
Plato, and Damascius, the last head of the Academy in Athens, commented
on the Parmenides, the Philebus and the limaeus. Simplicius, who had studied

28 On Simplicius’ life and works see Hadot ( 1990 a).

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 865

in Alexandria before coming to Athens, concerned himself exclusively with
Aristotle. In Alexandria Olympiodorus still composed commentaries on
Plato of little philosophical significance, but John Philoponus, David and
Elias seem to have confined their teaching to Aristode.

The succession of the heads of the schools of Athens and Alexandria
in the fifth and sixth century can be plausibly reconstructed. In Athens
Plutarch, a member of a family connected with the Academy for several
generations, became head c. 410. He was succeeded c. 43 1 by Syrianus, who
at an unknown date was succeeded by his pupil Proclus. On Proclus’ death
in 485 the headship passed successively to Marinus, Isidorus and
Damascius, who was dismissed or resigned when the school was closed in
529. In Alexandria Ammonius, son of Hermeias (so called to distinguish
him from an earlier homonym) and a pupil of Proclus, died c. 520 after
heading the school for many years. He was succeeded, perhaps after a short
interregnum, by Olympiodorus, who remained head until 565 or later. He
in turn was followed by Elias, the first Christian holder of the chair. 29 He
was succeeded by David, who in turn was succeeded by Stephanus. The
transference of Stephanus to Constantinople some time between 610 and
618, no doubt on account of the Persian occupation of Egypt, probably
implied the transference of the whole school. 30 But it is likely that some
teachers returned to Alexandria after the end of the occupation, and that
some philosophical education went on until the Arab conquest or later.

John Philoponus, a pupil of Ammonius and a Monophysite Christian,
whose ideas have interested modern philosophers and historians of science,
never became head of the school and may indeed have left it before his
death soon after 565. He is sometimes referred to as a grammarian, and may,
at least at first, have taught grammar rather than philosophy. In his De aeter-
nitate mundi contra Proclum he rejects the traditional view that the superlunary
is different in its nature and superior to the sublunar world, and in his De
opificio mundi, dedicated to Sergius, patriarch of Antioch 546—9, he attempts
to reconcile Aristotle’s Physics with Christian doctrine. The commentaries in
his name on several works of Aristotle are actually the notes which he made
at Ammonius’ lectures with his own additions and comments. 31 Writings of
most of these teachers, and sometimes very extensive bodies of writings,
survive. We therefore have more detailed information on philosophical
teaching than on any other branch of late antique education.

Many students of philosophy, who will already have studied rhetoric,
went on to study law in Berytus in the fifth century and probably also in the
sixth. An example is Severus, the future Monophysite patriarch of Antioch.
Born in Pisidia c. 465, he studied rhetoric and philosophy in Alexandria,

29 PLRE 111.438. Elias has sometimes been supposed to have been praetorian prefect of Illyricum
on the basis of Justinian’s Novels 130 and 135. But his title apo eparchon is almost certainly honorary.

30 Wolska-Conus (1989). 31 Sorabji (1987); Wildberg (1988); Verrycken (1990).

866

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

then went to Berytus to study law, and on completion of his studies
returned to his native city and established himself as rhetor and scholasti-
cus (teacher of rhetoric and law).

From the Life of Severus, written by Zacharius Scholasticus, we learn some-
thing of the lively student life in Alexandria and Berytus. 32 There was still
tension between Christian and pagan students, and many conversions to
Christianity. 33 In Berytus a kind of witch-hunt was organized by Christian
students, directed against possessors of books on magic — the possession of
which by this time was illegal — and denunciations and house searches were
frequent. ’ 4 There were booksellers’ stalls in the Royal Stoa in Alexandria
which were frequented by students, and books seem to have been readily
available. When Zacharias Scholasticus moved from Alexandria to Berytus
he took with him many books by the fourth-century Fathers. 35 In the law
school at Berytus, and possibly also in Athens and Alexandria, teaching went
on every day except on Saturday afternoon and Sunday. 36 Some Christian
students met in reading circles at weekends to read and discuss patristic texts,
including St Basil’s Address to Young Men on the X T alue of Greek Literature , 37

Little useful can be said about philosophical teaching in the Latin west
after 425. Augustine, Boethius and Cassiodorus were not primarily teach-
ers. The gradual disappearance of knowledge of Greek in the west from
the early fourth century, in spite of a brief and probably somewhat
superficial revival in the reign of Theoderic, meant that contact was inex-
orably lost with the development of Neoplatonist thought in Athens and
Alexandria. Such scholars as there were in the west pondered on commen-
taries rather than on original texts. We hear of teachers of philosophy in
various regions of the Latin west, even as far afield as Gaul. Sidonius
Apollinaris recalls the philosophers who taught in Arles, but it is not clear
whether he is referring to formal teaching or to discussion in a circle of
intellectually inclined friends. If there were real teachers, their teaching did
not go beyond an elementary school tradition. Justinian’s arrangements
after the reconquest of Africa and Italy made provision for publicly funded
teachers of grammar and rhetoric, but not of philosophy. The broad
stream of classical philosophy had been reduced to a meagre trickle. As for
the Ostrogothic king Theodahad, who claimed to be a Platonic philoso-
pher, the less said the better.

The early Christian church had often shown some hostility to traditional
classical culture as preserved and transmitted by grammarians, rhetoricians
and philosophers. Not only was it founded on the study of overtly pagan
texts, but it was closely associated with the predominantly pagan establish-
ment. But the spread of Christianity in the fourth century among the urban

32 Kugener (1907) 46, 91—2. 33 Kugener (1907) 43. 34 Kugener (1907) 64—70.

35 Kugener (1907) 48. 36 Kugener (1907) 52. 37 Kugener (1 907) 53—4.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

867

upper classes who were the bearers of that culture, and the leading role
which members of this class began to play in the church hierarchy, led, par-
ticularly in the Greek east, to a kind of fusion of Hellenic and Christian
culture. John Chrysostom, himself a pupil of Libanius, urged the citizens
of Antioch to send their sons to be educated by hermits in the wilderness.
It was a utopian project, and he did not press the point for long. What he
expected from the monks was religious education, not literary and rhetor-
ical training. Neither in the Greek east nor in the Latin west did the church
attempt to set up its own schools in opposition to existing traditional
schools. Specifically Christian education was to be given in the family or in
the church, while teaching pupils to read with understanding the scriptures
and other Christian texts was left to the grammarian. It would have called
for an extraordinary effort to do otherwise. How could the church in a brief
space of time replace the system of select texts, commentaries, para-
phrases, lexica, technical manuals, model speeches, etc., elaborated over the
course of centuries, together with the concepts and values which they
embodied and perpetuated? And where were the teachers to be found? The
church never followed the example of the Jewish communities, who set up
their own schools, because, unlike the Jews, it did not see itself as a perpet-
ually marginalized minority. Of course, pagan literature had to be read with
discretion. A distinction had sometimes to be made between form and
content. Awkward passages had sometimes to be dealt with by allegorical
interpretation. St Basil’s Address to Young Men on the Value of Greek Literature,
twice translated into Syriac in the fifth and the seventh century, and into
Latin by Leonardo Bruni in Florence in 1403, provided a balanced state-
ment of the attitude of the church in the east: ‘We must seek from poets
and prose writers and rhetoricians and all men whatever will be advanta-
geous for the care of the soul.” 8 His friend and fellow bishop Gregory of
Nazianzus repeatedly emphasized the importance and value of logoi, both
literature and the culture which it reflected. Choricius in the sixth century
puts the matter thus: ‘We need a Christian and a pagan schooling; from the
one we gain profit for the soul, from the other we learn the witchery of
words.’ 39 Classical education was even accorded the approval of saints.
Among the Miracles of St Thecla was the healing of Alypios, 'xgrammatikos.
The account relates that the saint was philologos and philomousos, and always
took pleasure in those who praised her logikoteronM In the sixth century St
Cyril of Scythopolis in Palestine emphasizes the utility of classical educa-
tion, which he himself lacked, in his Life of Euthymiusf St Gregory of
Nyssa sent a copy of his polemic against the heretic Eunomius to Libanius
for a verdict on its stylistic merits.

38 Wilson (1975) 2, 37— 9. 39 Choricius, I^audatio Marciani Secunda 9.

40 Dagron (1978) Miracle 38.2. 41 PG cxiv.596.

868 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

In the west the situation was a little less clear. Augustine envisaged a
Christian education which could replace the traditional classical education,
but never worked out his idea in detail. Both in east and west the grammar-
ian and the rhetorician were left to teach Christian and pagan children alike,
using traditional methods and materials.

Monasteries faced peculiar problems of their own. They often admitted
novices who were juveniles or adult illiterates. They may have had no need
of the culture of the secular world which they had abandoned. But they
had to be taught to read the Bible and the essential liturgical texts.
Pachomius in Egypt had laid down rules for dealing with illiterate monks,
who were almost exclusively Coptic speakers. They were to be given twenty
Psalms to learn by heart and tested thrice daily by an older monk. Later they
were to be taught letters, syllables, verbs and nouns, i.e. the subjects taught
by the elementary schoolmaster. 42 ‘Even the unwilling must be taught to
read.’ The Regula Magistri and the Rule of St Benedict both insist on monks
becoming literate. St Basil desired illiterate oblates, who would be mostly
children, to learn to read biblical names and then, surprisingly, to go on to
short stories based on Greek mythology. This is one of the few indications
in antiquity of the adaptation of educational methods to the interests and
abilities of children. However, monastic education in general eschewed all
use of profane literature. Occasionally and sparingly, children who were
not committed to the religious life were admitted to monastery schools. But
in 451 the Council of Chalcedon banned the admission of secular children
—paides kosmikoi— to any monastery, a ban which has never been formally
relaxed.

In those regions of the Roman empire where the population largely
spoke neither Greek nor Latin, the situation differed both from that in the
Greek east and that of the Latin west. In these communities, members of
the local elites had for centuries sought a Greek or Latin education, and by
doing so had distanced themselves from their fellow citizens, who spoke
their own tongues, were more often than not illiterate, and neither under-
stood nor esteemed classical culture. It was largely thanks to the mission-
ary and pastoral work of the church, especially since the fourth century,
that the vernacular tongues of these peoples became literary languages and
the people themselves potentially literate. The Syriac, Coptic, Armenian,
Georgian and Gothic languages first emerged as vehicles of culture when
the Bible, the liturgy and some patristic texts were translated into them,
sometimes in an alphabet specially devised for the purpose. Speakers of
these languages, who could now become literate without having to learn a
foreign language, learnt to read, write and express themselves by the study
of Christian texts rather than of profane literature. What they took over

42 Pachomius, Praecepta 139—40.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

869

from the Greeks in this process of acculturation was the Christian element
in late antique culture. The pagan element was largely filtered out; the few
non-Christian texts translated into one or other of these languages in late
antiquity, such as Aristotle’s logical works, were perceived as playing a prop-
aedeutic role to the study of Christian literature and thought, or as techni-
cal manuals. The same process was to repeat itself three centuries later with
the creation by Cyril and Methodius and their pupils of a purely Christian
literature in Slavonic, and a system of education based upon it. This general
characterization is true, with very few exceptions, of translations made in
late antiquity. Syriac translators of the ninth century, however, working in
a very different milieu and for Muslim patrons, not infrequently translated
non-Christian works from Greek into Syriac, and often thence into Arabic.

However, although the structure and methods of schools were scarcely
affected by the Christianization of society, the spread of Christianity and
its increasingly dominant role in the culture of the age was reflected in
other ways. A new reading public was created, side by side with and over-
lapping with the traditional users of books. The scriptures, liturgical texts,
devotional works, and writings of the Fathers of the church were in
demand not only by the very large body of clergymen and monks, but by
some laymen as well, though we must resist the temptation to exaggerate
the dissemination of Christian literature among laymen, as some scholars
have done. The church of late antiquity did not encourage the reading by
laymen of its basic documents, as many Protestant groups did in the six-
teenth and seventeenth century. Entirely new kinds of literature were pro-
duced and widely read, of which the most notable were the Lives of holy
men. Athanasius wrote his Life of Antony c. 360. In turn it stimulated a vast
production of hagiographical texts in Latin, Syriac and Coptic, as well as in
Greek. These texts, particularly those in Greek, varied very much in their
literary and linguistic level. Some were clearly written for, if not necessar-
ily by, persons who had not had a traditional literary education, and cared
nothing for its values. Santo Mazzarino wrote thirty years ago of ‘the
democratization of culture in the late empire’. 43 It is probable that there
were far more persons who read and sometimes discussed books in the
sixth century than in the third. Whether ‘democratization’ is the best term
to describe this phenomenon is another matter. I should prefer to speak of
the growth of a new group of culture-bearers and the gradual disintegra-
tion of an old one. In the east the new group largely overlapped and fused
with the traditional Kulturtrager. In the west the two groups remained much
more distinct.

The demands of this new class of readers strained the resources of tra-
ditional book production — which was either commercial or dependent on

43 Mazzarino (i960) 3 5 fF.

870 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

the patronage of magnates. The church had long maintained libraries, to
which were attached scriptoria to provide for its own internal needs. These
ecclesiastical libraries and scriptoria expanded greatly to meet the increas-
ing demand for Christian texts. When Constantine wanted fifty Bibles for
the churches of Constantinople, the book trade of the newly founded
capital could not meet this sudden demand, and the emperor had to write
to Caesarea in Palestine, where since the days of Origen there had been an
active Christian scriptorium . 44 In the Greek east the two systems of book
production, secular and Christian, coexisted peacefully. Both Christian and
secular texts were copied in similar hands and with similar layout. In the
west commercial book production continued in Rome and Ravenna,
though probably on a much reduced scale. We hear of a bookseller or
copyist Gaudiosus, active in the late fifth and early sixth century in or near
the church of St Peter in Vinculis in Rome, and of a sixth-century scrip-
torium in Ravenna directed by Viliaric — evidently a man of Gothic or other
Germanic origin . 45 The surviving commercial copyists, the ecclesiastical
scriptoria, and the copyists maintained by the great senatorial magnates of
Italy seem in the course of the fifth century to have produced both secular
and Christian books. The consul Turcius Rufius Apronianus Asterius
‘edited’ the Medicean Virgil and the Paschale Carmen of Sedulius towards the
end of the fifth century , 46 and in the sixth century another consul, Agorius
Basilius Mavortius, ‘revised’ both Horace’s Epodes and Prudentius . 47
Hagiographic texts, since they sometimes found liturgical use, were pre-
sumably included in the books produced by the church for internal use. But
one suspects that some of them at least circulated as separate books for the
edification of clerics and laymen alike.

Since education in grammar and rhetoric was essential for the urban
upper classes, it was natural that from Hellenistic times onwards some
teachers should be paid out of municipal funds, just as doctors, athletic
coaches and others were so supported. A city which depended exclusively
on private teachers who lived on their fees might have found itself with no
teacher at all, which would have been a social disaster. In the same way, the
Roman state depended on a supply of educated men to run its administra-
tion, especially as centralization and bureaucratization increased in the later
empire. Considerations of class solidarity would also incline the rulers to
subsidize a service essential to the local aristocracy. But neither state nor
municipality appears ever to have provided subventions for elementary
teachers. There was never a programme of mass literacy in the ancient
world; and many of the upper class in the cities probably had their children
taught elementary literacy by private tutors.

44 Eus. Vita Constantini iv .36— 7 . 45 Cavallo (1975) 1 17 and nn. 161, 162. 46 PLRE 11.173— 4.

47 PLRE 11.736-7.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 871

Municipal funding of teachers of grammar and rhetoric and sometimes
philosophy continued throughout late antiquity, though it was often hin-
dered or interrupted by the impoverishment of the curial class and the acci-
dents of warfare. Such municipally paid teachers were to be found
everywhere in the empire. In cities which became imperial residences, as
well as in some others, the central government also took a hand in the
appointment and payment of teachers.

In Constantinople there had probably been officially appointed teachers
since the foundation of the city by Constantine in 330. His son,
Constantius II, made provision for a public library in the city, 48 probably to
supplement the provision of state support for teachers. In 425 Theodosius
II issued several edicts of great interest for the history of education in the
capital. The first ( C.Th . xiv.9.3) makes provision for the appointment of
ten Latin and ten Greek grammarians, three Latin and five Greek rhetori-
cians, one philosopher and two teachers of law. All are to have classrooms
allocated to them in the Capitol {C.Th. xv.1.3 and 14.9.3). No other person
is to teach in any public building, but private teachers may give instruction
in the houses of their patrons {C.Th. xiv.9.3). Elsewhere in the empire, it
seems, anyone could teach grammar or rhetoric in a public place. Another
edict deals in detail with the disposition of the rooms for teachers {C. Th.
xv. 1.53). Yet another confers on two Greek grammarians, one Latin gram-
marian, two rhetoricians and a teacher of law the dignity of comes primi
ordinis and a rank equivalent to that of es.-vicarii (governors of groups of
provinces), and goes on to ordain that all official teachers in the capital, pro-
vided they are of good character and professional standing, should after
twenty years of service be rewarded with the same dignity and rank {C. Th.
vi. 2 1 . 1) . It is a reasonable inference that the six teachers named in the edict
had all been in post for at least twenty years in 425 . Imperial recognition of
the social role played by teachers of grammar and rhetoric, like that of
doctors and others, had long included exemption from taxation and service
in municipal councils, and other immunities. 49 The practice goes back at
least to the reign of Vespasian. It may well have lapsed to some extent in
the third century, but was restored by Constantine by a series of edicts
{C.Th. xiii. 3). Similar immunities were extended to certain teachers of phi-
losophy by Theodosius II in 414 {C.Th. xm.3.16). They are not mentioned
in later legislation.

It is not always easy to determine whether a teacher’s salary is paid by the
central government or by a city council or by both. Libanius, teacher of
rhetoric in Antioch in the fourth century, seems to have been indebted for
his salary to both emperor and council. But when he argues in a speech for
higher salaries for teachers of rhetoric in Antioch, he appears to assume

48 Them. Or. iv.59b— 6ia. 49 Lemerle (1971) 63 — 5 .

872 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

that a decision by council is involved (Or. xxxi.16— 18). The salaries of
some teachers in Gaul in the fourth century seem to have been paid from
the fiscus (C. Th. xm. 3 . 1 1), but there is some ambiguity in the language used.
For the fifth and sixth centuries there is scarcely any firm evidence for the
source or amount of teachers’ salaries, other than the edicts of Theodosius
II already quoted.

In the high empire the culture of the urban elites was largely shared
between the eastern and western halves of the empire. This shared culture
is still visible in the temples, theatres, baths and other public buildings from
the Yorkshire Ouse to the Euphrates, as well as in the almost identical
mosaics sometimes found a thousand miles apart. Greeks, on the whole, did
not find it worth while to learn Latin, although some, like Plutarch, Appian,
Herodian and Cassius Dio, were at home in the language of their rulers.
Educated Romans, on the other hand, were more often than not bilingual,
or at any rate had a reasonably good knowledge of Greek. A break begins
to appear in the common culture by the late third century. It is significant
that the rhetorical concepts of Hermogenes failed to be adopted by Latin
teachers of rhetoric, and that the analysis of Greek syntax by Apollonius
Dyscolus was not imitated by Latin grammarians until Priscian, who lived
and worked in Constantinople. The quasi-bilingual culture of the western-
ers gradually gave way to a monoglot Latin culture. Jerome knew Greek very
well indeed. But in his famous dream it was Cicero, and not Demosthenes,
who held him in thrall. His almost equally learned contemporary Augustine
was bored by Greek at school, and never learned enough to understand the
Greek church Fathers of the fourth century. 5 " The gulf between eastern and
western culture was widening. At the same time, however, the transfer of
the imperial capital to Constantinople and the increasing bureaucratization
of the Roman government meant that more easterners learned Latin in
order to further their careers. Libanius laments the abandonment of the
study of rhetoric for that of Latin by some of his most promising pupils.
Most of these young Greeks probably aimed at no more than a functional
knowledge of the language. But in order to learn it they were obliged by the
age-old pedagogical tradition to make some study, however superficial, of a
few works of Latin literature. The papyri from late antique Egypt contain-
ing passages from Virgil with a parallel ‘crib’ in Greek illustrate vividly how
a Hellenophone learned Latin.

In the fifth century large tracts of Roman territory in the west passed
into barbarian control, and by the end of the century Italy itself was an
Ostrogothic kingdom. In general, the new Germanic rulers were not much
interested at first in classical culture, which they saw as a threat to their
sense of ethnic identity. But attitudes varied from region to region. In Italy

50 Aug. Conf. 1 . 13 .

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 873

schools continued to flourish. The rich and influential senatorial aristoc-
racy and the still numerous upper class of the cities provided a milieu in
which they had an important role to play. And the favourable policy of
Theoderic, who had spent his youth in Constantinople, helped to preserve
the traditional educational structures. Ennodius (473/4—521), bishop of
Pavia, paints a picture of flourishing schools in northern Italy. 51 Boethius
planned to translate into Latin all of Plato and Aristotle, but was prevented
from realizing his project by his early death. The project bears witness both
to a lively interest in philosophy and to a declining knowledge of Greek in
Italy. He is today remembered for his live theological treatises and above
all for his Consolation of Philosophy , written while he was in prison awaiting
execution. 52

Cassiodorus (c. 487— a 5 80) proposed to establish a kind of university in
Rome, in which classical literature and philosophy would be studied as a
preparation for the study of theology. His Institutiones provide an idea of
the curriculum which he envisaged. However, twenty years of war
destroyed not only much of the material fabric of Italy, but also the social
fabric of Italian society, and Cassiodorus had to content himself with
establishing a monastery at Vivarium in Calabria, where he strove to salvage
what he could of classical and Christian culture. Justinian by his Pragmatic
Sanction of 554 made some attempt to restore higher education in Rome.
Teachers of grammar and rhetoric were to be found in Rome and Ravenna
in the second half of the sixth century, under whom the future pope
Gregory the Great and the poet Venantius Fortunatus studied, but the
Lombard invasion in 568 struck the final blow to traditional education in
Italy, leaving monasteries as virtually the sole institutions providing basic
literacy. 53

In North Africa the Vandals at first gave no encouragement to tradi-
tional education, and the flight of many of the wealthier citizens must have
reduced the support for classical culture. But the new rulers gradually came
to appreciate Latin learning, and to acquire a taste for panegyrics of them-
selves in the classical manner. In the reigns of king Gunthamund (484—96)
and king Thrasamund (493—523) schools were established in Carthage. The
vast encyclopaedia of Martianus Capella, De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii, SA
written in the fifth century, testifies to a revived, if somewhat superficial,
interest in classical culture. Poetry flourished, as exemplified by the techni-
cality correct but shallow poems collected in the Latin Anthology and the De
laudibus Dei of Dracontius. 55 Corippus, the last notable Latin poet in the
classical tradition, was educated in Vandal Carthage and composed there in
549 his panegyrical account of the exploits of the Byzantine general John

51 DBI 42 (1993) 681—95; Fontaine (1962). 52 Gibson (ed.), Boethius', Chadwick, Boethius.

53 Mommsen (1874); Mynors (1937); cf. O’Donnell (1979); Momigliano (195 5).

54 Cf. Le Moine (1972). 55 Vollmer (1914).

874 2 9 - EDUCATION in the roman empire

Troglita before migrating to Constantinople, where he celebrated the
accession of Justin II in 5 65. 56

Prose writing, mainly of Christian content, flourished in late antique
Africa. Typical works are the Chronicle of Victor of Tunnuna and the
numerous Christian polemical treatises and other works of Fulgentius of
Ruspe. Both writers were active in the sixth century. Schools continued to
function, albeit on a dwindling scale, until the capture of Carthage by the
Arabs in 698.

In Spain the establishment of a Visigothic kingdom marked less of a
break than elsewhere in the barbarian west and did not change the domi-
nant role of classical Latin culture. Cities survived unscathed, and new ones
were founded by the Visigothic rulers. The Byzantine reconquest of south-
ern Spain, short-lived as it was, encouraged the maintenance of Roman
institutions and way of life. The conversion to the Catholic faith of king
Reccared in 5 89 brought Visigoths and Hispano-Romans closer together,
and leading Visigothic families intermarried with the surviving senatorial
aristocracy. There is little direct evidence for schools, but the general level
of culture, and the recently discovered documents written on slate in a late
Roman cursive hand, suggest that they had not disappeared. Medicine and
law continued to be studied. The Visigothic kings patronized literature, and
king Sisebut (6 1 2) even dabbled in Latin verse; an astronomical poem in
sixty-one hexameters survives from his pen. Eugenius, bishop of Toledo
(died 657), revised Dracontius’ poem De laudibus Dei. Isidore of Seville
(c. 570—636) must have had a fairly rich library at his disposal when he com-
posed his encyclopaedic Etymologiaed 1 John of Toledo ( c . 642—90) com-
posed minor works on theology and grammar. In 710 Toledo was captured
by the Arabs. The Romano-Visigothic culture did not very long survive its
fall.

In Gaul the situation was more complex. In the fifth and sixth century
the region south of the Loire and the Langres plateau, though ruled by
Visigothic, Burgundian and Frankish kings, still belonged culturally and
socially to the Mediterranean world, whereas in the north, which was
subject to invasions and where Latin culture was more thinly implanted,
Roman institutions and social relations largely vanished. In Provence,
Burgundy and Aquitaine the old senatorial families survived and flourished
in uneasy symbiosis with barbarian rulers. But city life gradually dwindled,
and with it public schools, and, indeed, schools of any kind, became few
and scattered. The aristocrats had their libraries and included in their
entourage men of learning, sometimes slaves. Sidonius Apollinaris
(43 1—90) corresponds with his friends in elegant Latin, peppered with clas-
sical allusions and involved figures of speech. His friend, the senator Felix,

56 Diggle and Goodyear (1970); Cameron, Corippus. 57 Fontaine (1959) 846—61, 1174—80.

EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE 875

studies Virgil and Roman law with the help of a slave tutor. Poets and
orators follow classical models. 58 Inscriptions are set up in public places,
and city officials draw up documents in traditional form. But this elegant
society, so conscious of being Roman, was living on an inherited stock of
cultural capital which it could not replace. In the late sixth century Gregory
of Tours (539—95), though belonging to an ancient Gallo-Roman family,
was unable because of the early death of his parents to learn grammar,
something which he deeply regretted. Later in life he read Virgil. But his
History of the Franks and his Fives of saints are written in unpolished and
sometimes awkward Latin, and his perception of the world about him is
almost exclusively a religious one. 59 Desiderius, bishop of Vienne (died
607), scion of an aristocratic family, learnt grammar in Vienne, where there
were still teachers in the early sixth century. 60 But when he became bishop
towards the end of the century there was no longer any teacher in the city.
So the bishop himself set about teaching grammar to a circle of young
men, for which he was sternly rebuked by pope Gregory the Great. 61 Yet
he was only trying to deal with the problem of educating possible future
clergy, a problem which became progressively more urgent during the sixth
century throughout the barbarian world. In south-east Gaul there were still
men who had not entirely forgotten the literary culture of their forefathers.
The biographer(s) of Caesarius of Arles, writing about 5 50, feared the crit-
icism of their Latinity by the scholastici of Provence. 62 Caprasius, a seventh-
century monk from Lerins, was horrified to find that Provencal clergy
‘studied books of the pagans, fables of poets, comedies and songs’. 6 ’ The
Provencal priest Florentius, composed a Fife of St Rusticula in elegant and
correct Latin in the mid seventh century. 64 But by his time the traditional
literary culture had become difficult to adapt to the new world of the early
Middle Ages.

Though, as we have seen, events took a slightly different course in each
of the Germanic kingdoms which were established in former Roman ter-
ritory, in the end three features appeared in all of them, which sharply dis-
tinguished education and culture in the west from that in the east. The first
is the loss of the knowledge of Greek. Boethius in Rome could contem-
plate translating Plato and Aristotle into Latin. Sidonius Apollinaris in
Auvergne could still read Menander with his son — presumably because he
could not find a teacher of Greek grammar. Isidore of Seville, polymath
though he was, in all probability knew no Greek. This loss of contact with
Greek language, literature and culture was part of a larger change, the
break-up of the unity of the Mediterranean Graeco-Roman world, which
affected trade, ecclesiastical relations and much else besides. We must

58 Chadwick (195 5). 59 Convegno Todi (1977); Goffart (1988). 60 Riche (1972) 233— 6.

61 Greg. Mag. Ep. 11.34. 62 Morin (1942) 297. 63 Vita Caprasii, AASS 1 June, 78.

64 Riche (1954) 369-77-

876 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

remember, however, that here and there pockets of Greek culture survived,
particularly in southern Italy and in some church circles in Rome.

The second feature is the separation between classical culture and
Christian culture. In the Greek-speaking world much of the classical liter-
ary heritage was quietly taken over and adapted by the fourth-century
Church Fathers, and absorbed into the Christian Greek culture of
Byzantium. In the west much of the Latin cultural heritage was marginal-
ized, or survived in selections as a propaedeutic to the study of Christian
literature and thought. Virgil, Horace, Terence, Lucan, Sallust and other
classical authors were read, but by fewer and fewer people, and even then
in the safety of the schoolroom. 65

The third common feature was that, as secular schools became fewer, it
became more difficult to find literate candidates for training as clergy.
Consequently bishops and sometimes priests were obliged to take over
what had previously been the work of the ludi magister and the grammarian,
and teach boys and young men themselves. This led to the first beginnings
of what were to become the cathedral schools and parish schools of the
Middle Ages. This movement was perhaps most marked in Gaul, but the
same need led to the same solution in all other regions of the barbarian
west. From the end of the sixth century this rather jejune culture was grad-
ually enriched by the influence of monks from Ireland and England, where
some features of classical culture had been better preserved than in conti-
nental Europe. But the old educational system was never revived.

In the Greek east, contact with Latin culture was not so immediately lost.
There were many Latin-speaking communities in the territories ruled from
Constantinople — Africa after 5 3 3, Sicily, much of Italy, much of the north-
ern and western Balkans. And there were many Latin speakers in
Constantinople itself, beginning with the emperors Justin I and Justinian,
and including influential refugees from Africa and Italy and their entour-
ages and descendants. Latin remained the language of the law, the army, the
central administration and the imperial court, either exclusively or along
with Greek, until the end of the sixth century. So it is scarcely surprising
that public and private teachers of Latin were to be found in the capital
throughout the fifth and most of the sixth century. Priscian was the great-
est of these, but at least twenty-one others are known to us by name. It may,
however, be no accident that we have no certain attestation of the presence
of a Latin grammarian in Constantinople in the second half of the sixth
century. Fewer Latin rhetoricians are known. What emerges from this is
that it was possible to obtain a literary education in Latin in Constantinople
up to the death of Justinian in 565, and probably later. There must there-
fore still have been a demand for such an education. Nevertheless, it is clear

65 Kaster, Guardians of Language jitt.

NON-LITERARY EDUCATION

877

from the use of Greek in most of Justinian’s Novels and from other indica-
tions that effective communication throughout the eastern empire required
the use of Greek. The Latin-speaking community in the capital may have
become progressively marginalized and isolated, as were the speakers of
Syriac and Coptic. The future pope Gregory the Great spent seven years,
from 579 to 5 86, as papal apocrisiarius in Constantinople without learning a
word of Greek, or so he claims.

NON-LITERARY EDUCATION

Doctors in late antiquity learnt their craft either by a kind of apprentice-
ship under a senior doctor, or by a formal course of study, or perhaps in
both ways. Most large cities had one or more public doctors, who received
both a salary from the state or from the city authorities, as well as fees from
their wealthier patients. These public doctors appear to have been under an
obligation, perhaps customary rather than legal, to teach pupils. This was
probably the way in which the majority of doctors learnt medicine. When
they had completed their training to the satisfaction of their teacher, they
received a letter of attestation or testimonial. The formal study of medi-
cine was pursued above all in Alexandria, where a school of medicine
existed until after the Arab conquest in the mid seventh century. The
subject was regarded as a branch of philosophy, and several of the teach-
ers of medicine there are described as philosophers. The link between med-
icine and philosophy was an old one; Galen had already observed that no
one could be a good doctor unless he had studied philosophy. David, head
of the Alexandrian school of philosophy in the early sixth century, wrote
a commentary on Hippocrates’ Prognostica , 66 Asclepiodotus (late fifth
century), a polymath with a touch of charlatanism, studied medicine in
Alexandria and taught both medicine and philosophy in Aphrodisias and
later in Alexandria. There was also formal teaching of medicine in
Constantinople, probably in the fifth century. Agapius, a native of
Alexandria, where he studied and probably taught medicine, went to
Constantinople in the mid fifth century as a teacher of medicine, perhaps
in the framework of the revived ‘university’ of Theodosius II. 67 Hesychius
of Damascus practised and taught medicine in the capital about the same
period. 68 His son and pupil Iacobus was comes et archiatrus there in the reign
of Leo I. He is said to have lived on his official salary and to have charged
no fees. He was an advocate of therapy by cold baths, whence his nickname
Psjchristos (‘Cooled’). 69 He numbered among his patients both Leo I and the
philosopher Proclus, and statues of him were set up in Constantinople and
Athens.

66 Westerink(i 9 64). 67 PLRE 11.32. 68 PLRE 11. 5 54. 69 PLRE 11.582-3.

878 ZC). EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

It is likely that the teaching of public doctors had a strong practical
emphasis, though one must not underestimate the role that could be played
by systematic handbooks. In the Alexandrian medical school, treatises of
Galen and Hippocrates — in that order — provided the basis of teaching.
They seem to have been commented on in the same way as the works of
Aristotle. Several such commentaries survive — e.g. Palladios’ on Galen’s De
sectis, and on Book VI of Hippocrates’ Epidemics and De fracturis, as well as
a synoptic handbook on fevers variously attributed to Palladius, Theophilus
Protospatharius and Stephanus of Alexandria, and a treatise by Paul of
Nicaea (or of Nike in Thrace?) on diagnosis and therapy. Doctors who
studied in Alexandria often obtained posts as public doctors or archiatri,
though no doubt many others entered private practice.

The doctor’s Doppelgdnger, the veterinarian ( veterinarius , hippiatros), must
have been an important figure in a predominantly agrarian society such as
that of the late Roman empire. He certainly had a role to play in the Roman
army. We know disappointingly little of how he was trained. There was no
institutional arrangement for veterinary education. But there was a body of
technical literature, both in Greek and in Latin, which budding veterinarians
must have studied, and which, in its turn, reflected the content and arrange-
ment of teaching. In Greek there survive handbooks attributed to Chrion —
no doubt a pseudonym — and Apsyrtus of Prusa (late sixth century), and a
medieval compilation of excerpts from earlier works entitled Hippiatrica. In
Latin there are a collection of letters on veterinary practice by Pelagonius
(probably fourth century), a Mulomedicina sive ars veterinaria attributed to P.
Vegetius, probably to be identified with Flavius Vegetius Renatus, author of
an Epitome rei militaris, and a Latin adaptation of the Greek text of ‘Chrion’.
To judge by these specimens, the veterinary art lacked the philosophical
basis of medicine. Empiricism tempered by superstition is characteristic of
veterinary literature. Vegetius attempts a somewhat more elevated style than
the authors of the other surviving treatises.

Pleading in courts of law was often, as in earlier times, done by persons
trained in rhetoric, who depended on experts for advice on legal matters.
Genuine legal education was, however, available, and a far-reaching reform
of it was carried out by Justinian in the first decade of his reign. Many stu-
dents seem to have studied law after completing a course in rhetoric. Until
Justinian’s reform of Roman law, a knowledge of Latin was essential for the
serious study of the subject. The publication of the Institutes (533), the
Digest (5 3 3) and the Code (second edition 5 34) made reference to the orig-
inal texts of the Roman jurisconsults unnecessary, and since Greek trans-
lations of Justinian’s Corpus Iuris were soon made, professional legal studies
became accessible to those who knew little Latin.

The primary source on legal education in late antiquity is Justinian’s
Constitutio omnem (5 3 3) which prescribes a programme of instruction based

NON-LITERARY EDUCATION 879

on the new Corpus Iuris. It also describes briefly the arrangements previ-
ously in force. This Constitution, though no doubt clear to contemporar-
ies, is not entirely free from ambiguity for us. Legal education, it declares,
had previously been available in a number of cities, including Alexandria
and Caesarea in Palestine. These schools were henceforth to be closed, and
the teaching of law confined to Berytus and Constantinople. No mention
is made of Rome, which when the Constitution was promulgated was
under Ostrogothic rule. But Law had been, and no doubt still was, taught
there, and provision was made for the payment of public teachers of law
in the Pragmatic Sanction of 554, after the reconquest of Italy.

Before Justinian’s reforms, law was studied for four years, with an
optional fifth year. The first year was devoted to reading the Institutes of
Gaius and to the law on dowry, tutela, wills and legacies. In their second year,
students studied the prima pars legum together with portions of the partes de
rebus and de iudiciis (these expressions probably refer to portions of the
commentaries of the classical jurists on the Praetorian Edict, particularly
those of Lfipian; but their precise meaning is not clear to us). The subject
matter of the third year was the remainder of the partes de rebus and de iudi-
ciis, together with selections from the responsa of Papinian. In their fourth
year, students studied the responsa of Paulus on their own and were not
expected to attend lectures. The optional fifth year may have been occu-
pied by the study of imperial constitutions.

The new programme of study instituted by Justinian lasted five years. In
their first year, students attended lectures on the Institutes and the first part
of the Digest — probably Books 1—4. The second year was devoted to the
study of either Books 5— 11 of the Digest (De iudiciis) or Books 12—19 (P e
rebus), in both cases plus Books 23, 26, 28 and 30, dealing respectively with
dowry, tutela, wills and legacies. In their third year, students attended lectures
on whichever of the sections of the Digest they had not covered in their
second year, as well as Books 20—2. The fourth year was for private study of
the books of the Digest up to Book 36, which had not been expounded in
the second and third years. The fifth year was for private study of Justinian’s
Code. The detailed arrangements for this programme escape us, but it
seems likely that the same professor taught a group of students through the
whole of their five-year course. Students of each year had long had names,
no doubt originally unofficial. Freshmen had been known as dupondii, the
meaning of which is not clear, but it was probably pejorative. Second- and
third-year students were known as Edictales and Papinianistae, and fourth-
year students were Ijtai. Justinian, who was fussy about such matters, pre-
scribed the following names: Iustiniani novi, Edictales, Papinianistae, Ijtai and
proljtai. He also prohibited all traditional student ragging — with what effect
we do not know. These matters have been set out in some detail, not only
for their intrinsic interest, but also as some indication of the precision with

88o 29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

which teaching programmes in other fields may have been organized. No
other programme of instruction, however, is likely to have been the subject
of imperial legislation. But law had always been a close concern of the
Roman state.

Architects and engineers were normally trained by a kind of apprentice-
ship system. Diocletian’s Edict on Maximum Prices establishes a monthly
fee payable by or for the pupils of an architectus magister. Constantine in an
Edict of 334 orders a provincial governor to urge ( impellere ) youths aged
eighteen qui liberales litteras degustaverint to study architecture, and grants to
them and their parents immunity from personal taxes as well as a salarium
competens ( C.Th . xm.4. 1). These young men will have completed their
studies with the grammaticus before going on to study architecture. The pro-
fession was not merely literate but cultured. Anthemius of Tralles, the
architect of Hagia Sophia in Constantinople, was not only a man of
remarkable imagination and technical skill, but was also an applied mathe-
matician and engineer of distinction and author of a surviving treatise On
Unusual Devices (Peri paradoxon mechanematon) as well as a lost treatise on
Burning-Mirrors. He was a member of an unusually talented family, and may
well have studied mathematics in Alexandria. 7 "

Surveyors probably learnt their craft by a similar system of apprentice-
ship. Their role in the assessment of taxes gave them unusual importance
in the eyes of the state in late antiquity, which probably explains why
Diocletian’s Edict on Maximum Prices allows them to charge twice as much
as architects for teaching pupils. They enjoyed the relatively high social
status accorded to practitioners of a profession based on a body of theory
enshrined in written texts.

At a much lower social level, and hence much less frequently mentioned
in our sources, came the practitioners of fine and applied arts — painters,
sculptors, potters, jewellers, mosaicists, etc. They too were taught by an
apprenticeship system. But concerning these professions there was no
body of theory and no authoritative texts. Diocletian’s Edict accords to a
portrait-painter 1 50 denarii a day, to a mural painter 75 denarii, to a mosaicist
60 denarii, and to a mason or carpenter 50 denarii. These were not contempt-
ible wages, but they were far below those of the grammarian, the rhetori-
cian, the doctor or the engineer. An enactment of Valentinian I of 374
granting certain tax exemptions to painters shows that they were regarded
as humiliores, whereas members of the literary’ professions were honestiores
(C.Th. xiii. 4.4).

Somewhere between these two categories came astrologers, apothecar-
ies and the like, as well as shorthand writers. The latter readily found
employment in the imperial service and in that of the church, and some

70 Huxley ( 1959 ).

NON-LITERARY EDUCATION

rose to the highest positions. Libanius laments the favour shown to short-
hand writers and castigates fathers who have their sons taught shorthand
rather than rhetoric. Shorthand seems to have been taught not only by spe-
cialist teachers but also by some elementary schoolmasters. What informa-
tion we possess on the teaching of shorthand comes mainly from contracts
between fathers — or owners of slaves — and teachers recorded in Egyptian
papyri, which tell us nothing about teaching methods or assessment of
qualifications. Most of what we do know about teachers of these ‘subliter-
ary’ subjects comes from sources much earlier than the period under
review. But there is no reason to suppose that teaching institutions and
methods, or the social status of practitioners of these crafts, were any
different in the fifth and sixth century except that the preference given to
shorthand writers in the imperial service began to be reduced after the
death of Constantius II in 362.

Finally, in a society more and more permeated by Christian ideology, one
asks how theology was taught. The short answer is that it was not taught at
all, or at least not in any systematic way. Children of Christian families and
converts to Christianity might receive elementary instruction in doctrine and
behaviour from the local bishop or one of his priests. This could be well
done, badly done, or not done at all. We are curiously ignorant of the content
and methods of such catechetical teaching in the fifth and sixth century. But
it seems very rarely to have risen to the level of systematic instruction in
theology. One systematic treatment of Christian theology in Greek is that
embodied in the four books of Pseudo-Dionysius the Areopagite, probably
written about 500. But this attempt to formulate Christian doctrine in
Neoplatonic terms, though it enjoyed immense influence in later centuries,
was ill-adapted to serve as a textbook for budding clerics. Bishops were
responsible for training clergy in their dioceses. Their teaching, which no
doubt varied greatly in thoroughness and clarity, seems to have been based
on reading of the scriptures and their exegesis by the church Fathers. John
Chrysostom, Severianus of Gabala and Theodore of Mopsuestia all com-
mented at length on books of the Bible in homilies or treatises in the fourth
and early fifth century. In the period at present under review, the principal
exegetes were Theodoret of Cyrrhus (died 457/8), Hesychius of Jerusalem
(died after 451), patriarch Gennadius I of Constantinople (458—71), Cyril of
Alexandria (412—44), Olympiodorus (sixth century), Oecumenius (sixth
century) and Andrew of Caesarea (563—614) — both of the latter wrote com-
mentaries on the Apocalypse. These often extremely lengthy commentaries
were in many cases not intended as textbooks. But soon collections of
excerpts from them were compiled and systematically arranged as variorum
commentaries or catenae on the various books of the Bible, intended both for
teaching purposes and for private study. An early compiler of catenae was
Procopius of Gaza (c. 475—528), a teacher of rhetoric by profession. His

29. EDUCATION IN THE ROMAN EMPIRE

Eklogai exegetikai, which covered the Octateuch and the other historical
books of the Old Testament, was read by Photius in the ninth century
( Bibliotheca , cod. 206). It no longer survives in its original form, but much of
it was absorbed into later catenae. An epitome of this great catena survives
both in Greek and in a Latin translation, while abbreviated and/or interpo-
lated versions of Procopius’ commentaries on Isaiah, on the Song of Songs,
on Proverbs and on Ecclesiastes also survive. A catena on the Psalms may be
the work of Procopius or of one of his pupils. Several other catenae by anon-
ymous compilers can plausibly be dated in the sixth century and linked with
teaching activity. 71 Many exegetical works were written in the fifth and sixth
century, including Prosper of Aquitaine’s commentary on the Psalms, which
consists largely of excerpts from Augustine’s Enarrationes in Psalmos,
Maximus of Turin on the Gospels, the younger Arnobius on the Psalms and
the Gospels, entirely derivative commentaries on the Apocalypse by
Primasius of Hadrumetum and Apringius of Pace, an allegorical exposition
of the Song of Songs by Justus of Urgel, and a set of exegetical homilies on
the New Testament by one Luculentius. Most of these unoriginal works
arose out of the need to train the local clergy. Cassiodorus’ Expositio
Psalmorum , probably written when he was in Constantinople in 540—54, aims
a little higher. But only with Gregory the Great’s commentaries on Job,
Ezekiel and the Psalms do we find exegesis comparable in its learning and
penetration with that of Jerome or Augustine.

As has already been observed, the relations between church and school
in the Syriac-speaking world were different from those in the Greek-
speaking and Latin-speaking regions of the empire. Syriac literature was a
Christian creation, with no long tradition. Syriac schools were often
attached to churches or monasteries, and the texts which were read and
studied in them were religious. There was no sharp separation between the
teaching of literacy and the teaching of Christian doctrine. Three schools
of higher learning, which included theology as well as grammar, rhetoric
and philosophy, all taught in Syriac, were established in Edessa in the late
fourth century. In 489 the emperor Zeno closed the so-called Persian
school, which was suspected of Nestorian heresy and of pro-Persian lean-
ings, and expelled its teachers. Most of them made their way across the
frontier to Nisibis (Nusaybin in south-east Turkey), which had been in
Persian hands since 363, and established or perhaps reinforced a similar
school there. The statutes of the School of Nisibis, promulgated in 496
after the arrival of the refugee teachers from Edessa, describe the teaching
regime in some detail. 72 There were at one time as many as 800 students.
The course of study in theology lasted three years. Students were required

71 For a catalogue raisonne of Greek catenae cf. Geerard (1974—87) iv. 185—2 5 9.

72 Voobus (1965), especially no— 15, 147—8, 177—87, 203—9, 2 ^9 _ 75> 282—9.

NON-LITERARY EDUCATION

883

to pass a preliminary entrance examination, and to live in a hostel attached
to the school, unless it was full, in which case they might seek lodgings in
the town. Attendance at classes, which lasted all day, was obligatory, except
during the summer vacation. Students must be unmarried, and were for-
bidden to visit taverns or attend parties in the town. Neither students nor
teachers could engage in a trade or handicraft or take any paid employment
during the teaching season. The school possessed a library, from which
books might be borrowed under strict conditions. Crossing the frontier
into Roman territory was strongly discouraged.

The School of Nisibis evidently preserved many of the features of a late
antique school of higher education, like that of Alexandria. Junillus, prob-
ably to be identified with the official who succeeded Tribonian as quaestor
sacri palatii in Constantinople in 5 42, and author of a brief introduction to
the Bible, describes a meeting with Paul the Persian, who had taught at ‘the
school of the Syrians’, where ‘divine law is taught systematically by rule by
public professors, as we teach grammar and rhetoric in secular schools’. 73
But the Nisibis school probably also owed something to Jewish educational
tradition and practice, and there was an influential rabbinical school in the
town. The School of Nisibis served in its turn as a model for the school of
theology which Cassiodorus hoped to establish, first in Rome and later at
Vivarium, but which did not outlast its founder. 74

73 PZ. Lxvm.ijb— c; cf. PLRE 111.742. 74 Cassiodorus, Institutiones praef. 1 .

CHAPTER 30

THE VISUAL ARTS

ROBIN CORMACK

Under detailed scrutiny, the period from 425 to 600 is seen to represent a time
of significant and conspicuous artistic production and stylistic change and
complexity. If the fourth century appears a time of transition, yet dominated
by traditional forms and techniques, then in contrast it is easy to see that the
fifth century witnesses considerable change, and that by 600 the forms of
Christian art have become distinctive, and many of the aspects of later med-
ieval art have been determined. This is the period which produced the
present church of St Sophia at Constantinople (5 32—7), one of the most dra-
matic and influential buildings in world architecture. This achievement alone
gives the period an identity in its own right. Yet in the broad view, it is clear
that Christianity adapted rather than rejected the values of classical ‘pagan’
art. Hence the predominant discussions of the art of this period in terms of
continuity and change, or — put more precisely — in terms of classical and
non-classical elements, and either their interplay or their independence.

This priority for the art-historical analysis of these centuries is
superfically justifiable, but one soon suspects that it may mask a whole set
of more serious problems. It may, however, still offer a way of identifying
the strengths and weaknesses of the current state of research; the question
of the stage of ‘classicism’ embodied in the art of this period should not
necessarily be evaded, so long as one remains aware that it encourages the
framing of questions in terms of style, and identifies the issues from the
surface appearance. It helps to assess how far the identification of stylistic
change is limited in its conceptual value. If it is the case that both pagans
and Christians as viewers confronted the artistic representation of their
various religious beliefs and values in very similar visual manners, then their
cognitive responses to these similar forms must have differed, and we need
to find ways of discovering these responses. This must involve setting the
evidence of texts against the evidence of art in order to relate visual expres-
sion to spiritual and ideological change in this period, and it may ultimately
need the framing of pictorial material within parameters set by texts rather
than simply by the images themselves . 1 This chapter, however, will track

1 For a coverage of these issues see Barasch ( 1992 ).

884

THE VISUAL ARTS

885

questions of pictorial continuity and change, and illuminate the problems
of isolating what is classical and non-classical in the material evidence. At
the same time, it is accepted that if ‘classicism’ is taken to be an attitude of
mind rather than an essentialist component, the pursuit of the classical may
only be a way of seeking to deduce the intentions of the planners and pro-
ducers of this art. It may turn out to be more constructive for future
research to ask how the art functioned among its viewing audience rather
than to emphasize the conditions of production. 2

The art-historical viewing of the period from 425 to 600 has, then, tra-
ditionally developed largely along ‘formalist’ lines. From this perspective,
the central questions which emerged were (predictably, perhaps) how to
define the essence of the period and how to describe its stylistic character.
The formalist emphasis also encouraged a critical assessment of the art of
the period, frequently couched in terms of ‘decline’; more recently, this
negative reaction has been increasingly replaced by more constructive
attempts to find the positive ‘transformations’ of ‘early Christian art’ into
a new art form with its own visual expressiveness; in this respect, art history
has conformed with other historical and literary approaches.

Parallel with this critical and general overview of these centuries has
been the debate on whether the term ‘early Christian art’ (or alternatively
late antique art) is the appropriate label for the production of all or part of
this period — for not all of it was produced in the service of the religion,
and even some art produced in the service of the religion does not appear
to modern hindsight to be sufficiently ‘Christian’. 3 Some have wished to
subdivide the period, resisting the idea that ‘early Christian art’ could label
the artistic situation right up to the period of Byzantine iconoclasm in the
eighth century. The debate is really about whether it is useful to use a cover-
all term encompassing all the complex and changing historical circum-
stances within which a ‘European’ art was developed. There is also the
long-running issue of how far a distinction should be made between the
artistic spheres of the ‘western’ and ‘eastern’ parts of the Roman empire.
But since the production of the sixth century has generally been seen in
terms of an attempt by Justinian to produce an international art, there is a
case for treating the production of the period as a unity, with certain
regional factors operating on occasion, rather than setting up a division in
this period between east and west (or between supposed regional or pro-
vincial identities). On this model, the best label for the period might be
‘early Byzantine’, although without the implication that Constantinople
was the only centre of production. Nevertheless, there is as yet no agreed

2 Such as Eisner (1995).

3 For ‘discourses’ or overlapping ‘discourses’ see Cameron, Rhetoric of Empire, mostly in relation to
the verbal: developed in Cameron (1992). Definitions of the period are discussed in Clover and
Humphreys (1989) and Shelton (1989).

886

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

term which characterizes the production of these centuries, and any term
proposed is likely to have conceptual undertones. So to speak of an ‘age of
Justinian’, for example, may seem to express historical reductionism,
however much the texts of the court writers such as Procopius, Paul the
Silentiary and Corippus may be adduced as contemporary witnesses of the
cult of the individual emperor.

The yardstick against which the changes of this period are most often
defined is ‘antiquity’. The analysis, therefore, has differed according to the
definitions of antiquity adopted by the art historian, and how far antiquity
was seen as a monolithic concept or itself a complex and changing con-
struct. For some viewers, then, the change from antiquity over this period
involved an over- all and radical transition from ‘naturalism’ to ‘abstraction’.
For others, the phases through which early Byzantine art went can be
related to separate episodes in the history of the art of antiquity, and might
represent phases of ‘renaissance’ or episodes of the more prominent emer-
gence or development of other classical styles and devices (such as fron-
tality in portraiture). All these analyses are open to the criticism that the art
historian has exaggerated the history of style over the recognition that
Christian art was responding to a whole matrix of demands from religious
beliefs and practices.

The formalist treatment of the surviving material has at least enabled a
particular set of stylistic stages and issues to be defined, and these have had
their various explanations. 4 The most influential commentator has undoubt-
edly been Ernst Kitzinger: he initially set out his formalist approach in a
book constructed within the framework of the British Museum materials
( Early Medieval Art in the British Museum , 1940), and then subsequently in a
series of articles (the majority brought together in a collected edition in 1 976)
and most systematically in his book Byzantine Art in the Making (1977) where
he refined his conceptual framework and conclusions. 5 Interestingly, the
British Museum has kept his first book in print, in an updated edition, and
so one might almost speak of ‘British Museum’ scholarship to refer to the
empirical approach. 6

I. ARTISTIC EVIDENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION

The traditional approach has always involved the collation of as many sur-
viving materials as possible in order to build up a deductive picture of the
period, while allowing for the ‘distortions’ due to the disappearance of so
much of the original production. Within this frame of reference, the period

4 A key formalist textbook is Morey (1942 and 1953). For a review of the field, see Kessler (1988).

5 For sweeping criticisms of Kiteinger see C. Mango in the 77A, 25 March 1977: 381, followed by a
reply on 6 May and subsequent rebuttal.

6 The empirical approach is maintained in the British Museum exhibition catalogue, Buckton (1 994).

ARTISTIC EVIDENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION 887

can only be viewed as one of random and serious losses, with almost
endless scope for speculation about the ‘realities’ of production. The liter-
ature has been particularly engaged with one particular problem (both in
our period and in the preceding one): how to solve the question of the loca-
tion of artistic innovation and development. Was Christian art developed in
the manuscript (and particularly in the codex which Christians were seen to
favour as their book form)? Or was the place where the ‘new’ art was estab-
lished rather the walls of churches or cemeteries? Or were the minor arts,
such as signs on personal gemstones, the carriers of the first Christian art? 7

None of diese alternative scenarios can be adequately reconstructed
and assessed, because of the lacunae in the evidence. They all assume the
doubtful proposition that a particular artistic medium or genre could be
produced and developed in isolation within the culture. Nevertheless, the
idea that Christianity as the religion of the book might have developed its
pictorial traditions within the medium of biblical manuscripts was once
very influential and still underlies much discussion of early Christian art
and its diffusion; it cannot be dismissed without mention. Any reapprai-
sal of this debate has repercussions on the high status frequently attrib-
uted to manuscript illumination within the artistic production of the
period. If the idea that the manuscript was the innovating medium is
dropped, much of the conjecture about the quantity and importance of
manuscript illumination may appear exaggerated. Pictures in books can
instead be treated analytically in new ways — for example, how do they
function pictorially and how far can their evidence be integrated with
other art of the period?

There are very few surviving luxuriously illuminated Christian manu-
scripts from the period. The key biblical books are the sixth-century Vienna
Genesis, the burnt remnants of the fifth- or sixth-century Cotton Genesis
in the British Library, the sixth-century Rossano Gospels, the sixth-century
Sinope Gospel fragments, the Rabula Gospels of the year 586, the sixth-
century St Augustine Gospels, and the sixth-century Ashburnham
Pentateuch. These manuscripts have often been the basis for the recon-
struction of lost models and lost affiliations. 8 Recently they have been alter-
natively treated, not as evidence for the existence of the mass production
of illuminated manuscripts in the period, but as unique objects, individu-
ally produced for a limited, probably elite, clientele. 9 Similarly, the two
Virgil manuscripts (Vatican lat 3225 from Rome in the early fifth century
and Vatican lat 3867 of the late fifth or sixth century) and the Milan Iliad
may be seen as special enterprises, no doubt owing some part of their illu-
mination to earlier models in illustrated manuscripts of a famous text, but
nevertheless unique productions rather than representative examples of

7 Murray (1977) and Finney (1994). 8 Weitzmann (1977).

9 Lowden (1990) and (1993).

888

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

Con vii ; o \n i tm \ n u m r £moi h At c u sau i [ \j n ' . r »

S iM \ \\ M I &V. • V l $1 k 1SVJ I ST A VM\5C iNC'iSSHlNUM} t\i
V M fcOXSt \ MMACXl 0 E I LO f I AADMOI N/f VMi.1©
^siiNT’jmvnMOsuostM.MWiMsju.tNaroiis
T \U&U5 l IN 5 1 D 1 I AlU R. l i Q? A RI £ 5 1 M 0 N l S
ZS.lt> L1AMSCA c I ICL-DOUSIAC MM lSQMiCOACT IS’
aW0SNtaumj>l6t5NliCCl\.U$lV4fiACHUIlS.-
NOKXVi MlODM' l^LDI'a\l-fOON3MlILMc\MN’.t'

Fig. 28 Laocoon. Miniature from the Vatican Virgil, early fifth century. Vatican Library (Cod. Vat.
Lat, 3225, fol. i8v). (Photo: Biblioteca Vaticana)

mass-produced editions. 111 The same may be said of the De Materia Medica
of Dioscorides (Vienna ONB med.gr. 1), produced around 512 in
Constantinople for Anicia Juliana, daughter of the empress Galla
Placidia. 11 It is a special edition with 498 miniatures, mostly of plants, but
with additional texts and pictures from other tracts.

Manuscript illumination remains an important source of information
about artistic craftsmanship and methods during the period. The damaged
physical condition of the Vatican Virgil lat 3225 and the Itala Quedlinburg

10 Wright (1993) and Bianchi Bandinelli (1955). 11 Gerstinger (1970).

ARTISTIC EVIDENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION 889

fragment of the Bible paradoxically offers valuable information about
working practices in the first half of the fifth century: flaked miniatures in
the former reveal that the artists worked with an underdrawing before
applying the pigments, and, in the case of the latter, the scribe wrote down
instructions indicating which figures to include in the pictures. 12 The mini-
atures were made up to some extent from stock types and stock motives
(sometimes incongruously linked — as in the Laocoon scene in the Vatican
Virgil). Some commentators on this period assume that in all cases artists,
whether floor mosaicists, miniature painters or monumental artists, worked
from ‘pattern books’, and that ideas and styles were transmitted mechani-
cally. 13 However, the range of artistic expertise and the actual complexities
of production can hardly be reduced to a mentality of copying. A test case
is given by the mosaics of the church of Santa Maria Maggiore in Rome
(432—40), a major papal commission. These mosaics incorporate some of
the same figure motives and compositional schemes as these two manu-
scripts. But this does not prove that all are linked by the use of common
model books; the same congruence of vocabulary might be interpreted as
due to the work of the same artists or by the conformity of different artists
to the same fashions. The significant visual issue here is the divergence in
style between the two parts of the decoration, despite the similarity of the
figural and architectural motives: the nave mosaics (which represent stories
of Old Testament history and accordingly offered Christians in Rome a new
‘past’) are illusionistic in a colourful and impressionist manner, whereas the
style of the triumphal arch mosaics (representing the New Testament story
of the Infancy of Christ) is linear and flat. The pictorial distinction between
the ‘narrative’ emphasis of the nave images and the ‘theological’ imagery of
the triumphal arch around the apse cannot be explained solely by the use of
stylistically different ‘models’ — whether pattern books, illustrated Bible
manuscripts, or some other source. Furthermore, the suggestion that some
of the details of the scenes of the nave might derive from traditions of the
‘Jewish’ community rather than from Gentile Christian thinking and that
their source might be Jewish pictorial iconography which had entered
Christian art through the illustration of manuscripts of the Septuagint
cannot be demonstrated. And in any case the planners and artists of these
mosaics (and the other art of this period) were influenced by a complex
visual experience and a knowledge of ideas from many texts, theological,
spiritual (including hymns) and others; to derive precise elements directly
from (lost) manuscript illuminations must be excessively speculative. 14

The cycles in both parts of Santa Maria Maggiore show parallel thinking,
and, whatever their sources, are examples of highly developed pictorial

12 Degering and Boekler (1932).

13 For the materials see Scheller (1963 and 1996); and Conkey and Hastorf (1990).

14 See Brenk (1975) and (1977).

890

30 . THE VISUAL ARTS

Fig. 29 Mosaic panel of the Hospitality of Abraham from the nave of S. Maria Maggiore, Rome,
432—40. (Photo: Alinari/Art Resource, NY)

decoration. The nave imagery is more than mere narrative, and involves just
as complex symbolic and liturgical references as the triumphal arch. For
example, the panel on the left wall nearest to the sanctuary shows a narra-
tive sequence of Abraham meeting the three angels at the oak of Mamre,
his hospitality, and their prediction of Sarah’s pregnancy, but the evocations
are rich and deeply theological: among these are the reference to the typo-
logical connection between Sarah and Mary, and the implication that the

ARTISTIC EVIDENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION 891

three angels represent the Trinity and the symbolic meal of bread and wine
foretelling the eucharist (which was celebrated in the church itself on the
altar in the sanctuary area below the mosaic). Neither of the cycles is a
simple narrative.

The decorators of the mosaics have also developed their means of
expression far beyond the conventions of the manuscripts of the period,
and they have reacted to the problems of a monumental environment.
They had to make the scenes somehow visible to the audience despite their
height above the colonnade and despite the difficulties of viewing which
result from daylight shining through windows. The use of gold around the
figures was one response to such problems; it was a device which succeeded
in marking and highlighting the principal figures, while at the same time
giving them increased symbolic status by their penumbra of gold. Making
the imagery visible had its spin-offs, too. This treatment of the scene of
Abraham and the three angels can be compared with another rendering in
the mosaics in San Vitale in Ravenna over a century later. Here the artists
have again explored and refined visual strategies to make the scene read-
able from the floor of the church (perhaps after study of the S. Maria
Maggiore panel itself). In Ravenna a more linear style and an increase in the
size and scale of the figures as they are placed higher on the wall have
solved the viewing problems. In these churches, the mosaics were set
tessera by tessera directly and pragmatically on the walls — not in the studio
or in front of manuscripts — and the skills of presentation derive from
experience gained in the monuments.

In the face of an art-historical literature which has in general emphasized
broad-scale change but failed to offer any consensus on what that change
was or how it can be described or explained, it is likely that style history
must in future be more closely aligned with the indications of history and
literature. If decline is to be replaced by a meaningful notion of transfor-
mation, we shall need to be aware of the formalistic contribution but also
to go beyond its limitations and accept that we are seeing a religious art
under development. 15 Although there are collections of texts about art in
this period (notably by C. Mango and C. Davis-Weyer), 16 the implications
for the history of art of such evocative authors at Paulinus of Nola,
Corippus, Procopius, Choricius of Gaza and Gregory of Tours (among
others) have been more signalled than explored by art historians.

The aim of this chapter is to cover the special and distinctive art-
historical features of the period from 425 to 600, which does offer an
identifiable phase in the history of art, even if it lacks an agreed label. It is
a time replete with major works and innovations, which established the

15 Eisner (1995) exploits the primary literature more than Mathews (1993); for a critical review of
Mathews, see P. Brown in th e. A.rt Bulletin 77 (1995) 499—502.

16 Davis-Weyer (1971) and Mango (1972).

Fig. 30 Mosaic panel of the Hospitality of Abraham and Sacrifice of Isaac in the sanctuary of S. Vitale, Ravenna, 548.

(Photo: Alinari/Art Resource, NY)

ARTISTIC EVIDENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION 893

character of the imagery not only of the Byzantine Middle Ages but of the
west as well. The period determined the nature of Christian visual expres-
sion and the main art forms of the Middle Ages. It is, however, also char-
acterized (more debatably) as a period which so far diverged from the
perceptual art of antiquity into the conceptual art of the Middle Ages that
it was the turning-point in Europe from western to non-western art.
Despite an ‘orientalizing’ bias in the art-historical literature, this chapter
regards the period as a phase in the history of classicism. The fact that later
medieval periods of ‘renaissance’ (both in the Carolingian west and
Byzantine east) seem as likely to draw on models of this period rather than
to return to the art of classical antiquity itself points to the need to uncover
its precise character in relation to classical art.

There are many signs of change in the early fifth century in comparison
with the previous century. Some of these are empirical: in Rome (and
Milan), for example, after decades of lively sculptural production, the series
of sarcophagi comes to an end, and although Ravenna becomes a minor
centre of the production during the fifth and sixth century and
Constantinople produces limestone and imperial porphyry sarcophagi,
monumental sculpture was clearly not to be a major form of Christian art
in this period. 1 7 The most impressive sculpture of the period was either the
portrait sculpture of provincial magnates, such as the magistrates of
Aphrodisias and Ephesus, or imperial statues. 18 But even for imperial
display, this production was not sustained, and it is debatable whether the
famous equestrian statue of Justinian set up in 543—4 in the Augustaion in
front of S. Sophia was any more than an adaptation of the old (the horse
was probably made in the reign of Theodosius I). 19 It is clear that this
period saw the essential demise of the production of traditional sculpture
in the round; in this medium we can recognize overall a break with the past.
But in particular cases where sculptural commissions were achieved, the
relation with the past is not simple. It is true that the base of the obelisk of
Theodosius I has reliefs which have encouraged the notion of a period of
‘renaissance’ of classicism, but the set of statue bases of the monuments
of the popular Constantinopolitan charioteer Porphyrios, set up on the
spina of the Hippodrome (the latest dating from around 545), are evidence
of different aesthetic aims. 20

Such empirical evidence of shifts in patronage or in taste points to new
developments and enterprises. There is the development of sponsorship
resulting in complex church architecture and the expansion of the medium
of mosaic for monumental decoration and of gold and silver furnishings
and fittings for churches. 21 Equally, one of the most significant forms of

17 Lawrence (1945); for further bibliography on sculpture see Effenberger (1986). For an overview
see Smith (1985). 18 Inan and Alfoldi-Rosenbaum (1979). 19 Sodini (1994).

20 Cameron (1973). 21 Mango, M. M. (1986) and Boyd and Mango (1992).

894 3 °- THE VISUAL ARTS

art to develop in this period was the icon — the portable painted panel for
home and monastery and church use or the larger image for grand church
display. 22 But more elusive and more significant is the change in the spiri-
tual character of the art which was produced after 425 . A number of works
help us to recognize what may perhaps best be described as public art for
the institutionalized church; it is in the development of church decoration
that we may want to recognize how ecclesiastical thinking and control dom-
inated the development of art over this period. In other words, we need to
recognize the importance of a functional Christian art (which cannot be
seen superficially as the advertising and presentation of a new religion).
Beneath the changing forms we can try to detect a new climate within
which art operated — and of course supported and expanded Christian
modes of thought. If there was a new culture in which the notion of sin
began to dominate and in which new ethical and family values emerged and
were promoted, clearly the visual art was fully implicated in the definition
and presentation of this Christian identity. While it was in this period that
Paulinus of Nola (died 431) and pope Gregory I (590—604) claimed art as
‘writing for the illiterate’, yet it is clear that the diverse functions which we
can detect in the art of this time are more than merely didactic. Indeed,
others who wrote about the art reveal a broader understanding of the
power of art, and so does the text of Gregory to bishop Serenus of
Marseilles: ‘To adore images is one thing; to teach with their help what
should be ignored is another. What scripture is to the educated, images are
to the ignorant, who see through them what they must accept; they read in
them what they cannot read in books.’ 23

II. CHURCH AND ART IN THE FIFTH CENTURY

The definitive monument in this period is the church building. The role of
the pope, Sixtus III (432—40), in the decoration of Santa Maria Maggiore
was prominently signalled at the apex of the triumphal arch with his name
as ‘seal’. 24 The church was a major dedication to Mary around the time of
the Council of Ephesus (431), and whatever the precise connection was
between council and church, it is clear that the planners of the decoration
belong to a period of concentrated debate on the nature and status of the
Virgin and Incarnate Christ. The decoration participates in that debate, and
shows how statements can be made visually, which might have been more
difficult to articulate so clearly in words. The church itself was a vast

22 The key source of information about the character and types of the painted icon in this period
comes from the holdings of the monastery of St Catherine on Sinai: see Weitzmann (1976).

23 Davis-Weyer (1971) esp. 46 and Duggan (1989).

24 For the architecture and dating see Krautheimer and others (1937— ); for the mosaics, Cecchelli
O967).

CHURCH AND ART IN THE FIFTH CENTURY 895

wooden-roofed basilica, which has over the succeeding centuries been con-
siderably altered and enhanced. The insertion of transepts in the Baroque
period and alterations to the entrance end of the nave mean that only
twenty-seven out of the original forty-two panels over the entablature of
the colonnade survive; and at the apse end, the extension of the sanctuary
in the Middle Ages means that the fifth-century apse decoration is lost; only
the (partially restored) mosaics of the triumphal arch have survived here.
Nevertheless, the decoration is enormously informative. High on the walls
the viewer saw Old Testament scenes, which offered a narrative of the past
which, as already suggested, was full of typological hints and evocations.
Indeed, the incipient fourth-century interest in typological connections
between the Old and New Testaments has clearly become a dominant
interest of fifth-century programme planners. 25 Because of the height of
the mosaics above the spectator, the scenes (sometimes one, sometimes
two in the panel) were hard to read from the floor and this is only partially
solved by the use of the gold around key figures. As suggested already, the
latter is a technical device to highlight them; but it is also a symbolic
enhancement — the figures are framed with divine light. Unlike the art of
the catacombs and other examples of earlier Christian art, the scenes offer
a denser and fuller narrative, and aim to convey far more than repetitive
cases of God’s power of salvation. The left wall portrays events from the
story of Abraham and Jacob, and the right wall, events from the life of
Moses and Joshua. The complexity of the symbolism is best seen by
looking further at the panel which completes the sequence on the left wall
and abuts the triumphal arch. It shows in sequence the meeting of
Abraham with the three angels, his hospitality, and their prophecy that
Sarah (despite her age) would bear a son (Genesis 22.1— 19). However much
narrative may seem a key element of the panel — the figures are dramati-
cally portrayed in an atmospheric landscape, the dwelling-place of
Abraham is fully delineated, as is the table at which the angels sit, and the
oak tree at Mamre where the event took place is prominently included — yet
through the narrative imagery the fifth-century viewer, particularly if edu-
cated by sermons, would hardly fail to detect several levels of symbolic
associations. The three angels would suggest the Trinity; their announce-
ment of the future pregnancy of Sarah would be recognized as a
prefiguration of the birth of Jesus to Mary; and the offering of bread and
wine would instantly evoke the eucharist.

Similarly, the registers on the triumphal arch show something more than
a narrative of the infancy of Christ. It has been often noted that the stylistic
treatment of the triumphal arch is far less atmospheric than the nave cycles,
and is conventionally described as more abstract (and so more obviously

25 Malbon (1990).

896

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

symbolic). The modern interpretation of this section of the church has led,
however, to considerable controversy, and the various viewpoints are ir-
reconcilable. 26 One issue is how closely to relate the imagery to biblical (or
even to apocryphal) sources or how far to see it as a tentative visual explora-
tion of the current interpretations of the status of Mary. The latter approach
is helped by the fact that technical examination of the mosaics shows that
some of the preliminary drawings on the plaster layers on the wall diverge
from the final composition. This might be taken to suggest a pictorial devel-
opment during the course of finalizing the imagery. The issues of interpre-
tation are illustrated immediately if one considers the opening scenes of the
set at the top left of the triumphal arch. The first scene might be identified
as the Annunciation (Luke 1.26—38), but the composition does not conform
to later medieval ‘norms’. Mary is seen seated in a throne, in imperial dress
and wearing a diadem; and she has a retinue of angels. All this imperial
emphasis is unexpected, and certainly far from the gospel account. Equally
absent from the gospels is her work of spinning a veil of purple wool for the
temple; this is a detail about the early life of Mary taken from the Apocrypha.
The angel Gabriel is shown in the sky, flying towards her. To the right is
another scene, the Annunciation to Joseph. Although the motif of Mary as
queen became a feature of art in Rome from the sixth century, it would seem
highly innovative to show the theme at this date; it also seems that the use of
the Apocrypha was discouraged at this period. For these reasons, alternative
interpretations of the scene have been pursued. The Annunciation, however,
remains the most likely reading.

But another scene of the cycle (in the register immediately below) is con-
siderably more arcane within the vocabulary of the art of this period.
Where we might have expected the Nativity, we appear to have a unique
version of the Adoration of the Magi; the three Magi approach the newly
born child (one to the left and two to the right) from each side of a massive
jewelled throne. Christ sits upright and has a halo with a small cross above
his head. On each side of Christ is a seated woman. The woman to the left
resembles the figure of Mary as queen in the Annunciation scene above;
the woman to the right, dressed in purple, is a figure one would expect to
identify as Mary, since she wears the conventional dress of the mother of
Christ. These two figures have caused particular difficulty, some identifying
the figures as symbolic figures (one symbolizing the church), some suggest-
ing that one may be Sarah, the wife of Abraham, some seeing the images
as two facets of Mary (Mary in glory, Mary in sadness for the fate of
Christ). As for the figure of baby Jesus sitting upright on the throne, the
identification is hardly controversial (although the surface is much

26 The fundamental exposition is that of Grabar (1936), and many of the controversial interpreta-
tions are in reaction to his identifications of the scenes: Brodsky (1966) and Spain (1979) are the most
antipathetic to his viewing.

Fig. 3 1 Mosaics of the Annunciation to Mary and Joseph and of the Adoration of the Magi on the left side of the Triumphal Arch
around the apse of S. Maria Maggiore, Rome, 432—40. (Photo: Alinari/Art Resource, NY)

8 9 8

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

restored), but the imagery is unique and the interpretation therefore
elusive. The omission of a separate Nativity scene and the emphasis on the
enthroned Christ’s audience of the Magi point to a theological controversy
about the nature of Christ at the time of the Incarnation. 27

The nave mosaics and the apse mosaics both exhibit, therefore, a high
degree of theological input, and, as visual art, their message is insistently
didactic and instructive. It is this aspect which defines their moment in the
history of art, so different from some of the more ‘frivolous’ mid-fourth-
century mosaics of Santa Costanza in Rome, which include among the bib-
lical scenes all sorts of traditional ‘pagan’ decorative imagery, including
scenes of the wine harvest. The cycles in Santa Maria Maggiore match well
the prescriptions of Paulinus of Nola in Italy and St Nilus of Ancyra in the
east, who appealed for the choice of serious subjects in church decoration
and for intense concentration in front of them on the part of viewer and
educators. 28 ‘It would be the mark of a firm and manly mind to represent
a single cross in the sanctuary, for it is by virtue of the one salutary cross
that mankind is being saved and hope is being preached everywhere to
those without hope; and to fill the holy church on both sides with pictures
from the Old and New Testaments so that the illiterate who are unable to
read the Holy Scriptures may, by gazing at the pictures, become mindful of
the manly deeds of those who have genuinely served the true God and may
be aroused to emulate those glorious and celebrated feats.’

This text of Nilus (if genuine) offers a direct and simple witness of
changes in thinking and expression at all levels of the church in the period
of the sophisticated papal-sponsored decoration of Santa Maria Maggiore,
but it is also a helpful text with a prescriptive message on the nature of
proper church decoration. Another church in the Byzantine east extends
this evidence of self-conscious didactic and ecclesiastical planning; this is
the mosaic decoration of the church now known as the Rotunda in
Thessalonica. 29 The exact date of the conversion of the early-fourth-
century building (perhaps intended as the mausoleum of Galerius) is still
disputed, most opting for a time either in the middle of the fifth century
or around 500. 30 The significance of this decoration is its confirmation of
the spreading influence of the established church over the choice of
imagery. The mosaic decoration of the cupola was in three registers: the
apex held a medallion of a large figure of Christ, the second register was
of angels and perhaps other heavenly figures, and the best-preserved and
lowest register was a set of exquisite architectural facades inhabited by

27 Hellemo (19 8 9); not discussed in Mathews (1993).

28 Mango (1972) 32—3 quotes Nilus’ Letter to Prefect Olympiodorus ( PG lxxix. 577—80).

29 Kleinbauer (1 972) set out the problems involved in the study of the monument. Recent restora-
tion and investigation do not seem to have resolved the dating.

30 Spieser (1984) is the fullest archaeological survey.

900 3°- the visual arts

named Christian figures. The buildings are no doubt meant to evoke the
church in heaven, and the figures are saints engaged in the heavenly liturgy.
The name of each saint and his festival day is written in the mosaic. What
we have in this register is, in other words, a visual church liturgical calendar
encircling the dome. There has been considerable discussion about the
possible source of the calendar (a factor being that the inclusion of Cosmas
and Damian might help in the location and date of the source). But it can
at least be said that the choice of saints must represent current com-
memorations in the city of Thessaloniki and that the conception indicates
the attention directed by the church authorities towards the content, value
and functions of public church art.

These two sophisticated examples of church decoration are significant
indicators of the nature of monumental art in the fifth century. One can
of course emphasize the classical past from which this art has emerged.
The architectural fa5ades shown in the mosaics of the Rotunda can easily
be compared with the wall paintings of Pompeian and Campanian houses;
and the stock figures and architectural motives which appear both in the
mosaics of Santa Maria Maggiore and in the Virgil manuscripts no doubt
have models in Roman art. But since the stylistic appearance of both mon-
uments is so different from those of antiquity and from each other, the
identification of classical sources and stylistic traditions may be of only
minor value. With such grand interiors it is obvious that the services and
the accessories needed for them would need to match the splendour of the
walls, and that most attention was directed towards supplying the ‘proper’
beauty and holiness for the setting in which the clergy operated and society
participated . 31

It was not just the walls of churches that were lavishly decorated in
expensive materials; considerable attention was also given to the provision
of rich church plate in the fifth and sixth century. Archaeological evidence
of vessels in precious metals comes from the east and Asia Minor, and
descriptions in the Liber Pontificalis show the wealth that accumulated in
churches through the gifts of successive donors . 32 These gifts included tex-
tiles, and the impressiveness in church decoration of woven textiles is con-
veyed by the tapestry of the Virgin and Child with apostles, now in the
Cleveland Museum.” Some liturgical silver might be purchased by
churches and monasteries from their own resources, and much was given
as votive gifts ‘for the remission of sins’. By the middle of the sixth century,
the production of these pieces was highly sophisticated and no doubt phe-
nomenally expensive: the Sion Treasure from Asia Minor (now in
Dumbarton Oaks and the Antalya Museum) includes large heavy pieces as

31 MacCormack (1981); Van Dam, Leadership and Community ; Cameron (1987); McCormick, Eternal
Victory. 32 Davis (1989). 33 Pelikan (1990) is constructed around this tapestry.

CHURCH AND ART IN THE FIFTH CENTURY 901

Fig. 3 3 Silver paten (from the Riha Treasure) with partially gilded repousse relief and niello
inscription showing the Communion of the Apostles, probably 577. Byzantine Collection,
Dumbarton Oaks, Washington, DC

well as a censer; the Stuma and Riha patens are highly refined productions;
and the Cross of Justin II and Sophia, now in the Vatican collections, was
an imperial gift with a value far beyond the metal itself . 34 In form and style,
much metalwork did tend to be traditional, and it is in this medium that the
vocabulary of classicism was most obviously continued and recreated in
this period . 35 Another medium which shows the mark of tradition is that
of floor mosaic: the vast areas of floor mosaic found in the Great Palace
in Constantinople continue to defy a precise dating, actually because of
their ‘classicism’, and are variously attributed to the fifth century, the period

34 Cruikshank Dodd (1961) and (1973); Mango, M. M. (1986) and Boyd and Mango (1992).

35 Kitzinger (1976).

902

30 . THE VISUAL ARTS

of Justinian, or even to more than a century later. The sixth century
remains the most likely. On the whole, the production of mosaic pave-
ments was given up in the sixth century, and marble or tiled floors suc-
ceeded them. 36

Similarly, the ivory production of this period has encouraged more
debate about chronologies than interpretations. 37 The series of consular
diptychs (up to 540), those of the fifth century mostly from Rome and of
the sixth century mostly from Constantinople, were produced within a
political framework but influenced the production of Christian imagery,
and were objects which soon passed into the hands of the church, recycled
in several ways.

hi. ‘the age of justinian’

The fifth century established the nature of early Christian church art.
Although historians of iconoclasm have sought to find traces of opposi-
tion to the proliferation of images in this period, and no doubt there were
critical eyes and attitudes, yet it is best seen as a period of amazing artistic
enterprise, particularly in the developing east. 38 Constantinople was no
doubt jerry-built in its original growing stage, but the gradual acceptance
of the permanence of the city as a capital meant the expansion and elab-
oration of the arts. Architectural sculpture flourished with the continued
exploitation of the Proconnesian quarries, and it has even been suggested
that the effects of polished marble revetments in the churches, with the hint
of natural pictorial images trapped inside the stone, influenced the aes-
thetic of this period and encouraged imaginative abstraction/’ 9

The key church type during the fifth century was the wooden-roofed
basilica, but by a century later the domed church was emerging as the pres-
tige form of ecclesiastical architecture, and this development must have
caused churchmen to think even more about the appropriate kind of
imagery for interior spaces of this kind. The development of a new archi-
tecture, often sponsored by the emperor, resulted in such striking buildings
as Sts Sergius and Bacchus (around 5 30) and St Sophia (5 32—7 ), and these
influenced other buildings, such as the throne room of the Chrysotriklinos
in the Great Palace or, further afield, San Vitale at Ravenna. Equally grand
was the church of S. Polyeuktos at Constantinople, built in the 520s (but by
the twelfth century in ruins). Its patron, Anicia Juliana (who earlier had
commissioned the grand Dioscorides manuscript), proclaimed her impe-
rial descent in a poem sculpted on the walls of the church. The ostenta-
tious sculpture and (probable) domed plan might again be seen as an

36 Maguire (1990). 37 Volbach (1976) and Cutler (1985). 38 Murray (1977).

39 The extreme statement is by Onians (1980).

‘the age of justinian’

9°3

imperial rather than aristocratic statement . 40 A feature of the architectural
ornament of these churches was its distinctly non-classical appearance
both in style and in the choice of motives; some of the inspiration for pal-
mettes and other such ornaments has been traced to eastern, particularly
Persian, models.

The widespread popularity of the centrally-planned church was a feature
of the Byzantine world rather than the west, and, by the later periods, it had
become the standard plan for the majority of buildings. The solution fol-
lowed for the decoration of this type of architecture has in the case of St
Sophia generally mystified modern commentators. While Justinian and his
planners might have been expected in this commissioned masterpiece to
have set out to match the luxuriance of the architecture and its sculptural
ornamentation with spectacular figurative mosaics, the actual mosaic pro-
gramme has been in these terms a surprise. The circumstantial evidence of
archaeology (and probably the texts) is that the Justinianic phase was
entirely devoid of monumental figurative mosaics . 41 The surprise is that the
emperor who was connected with complex iconography on the facade of
the Bronze Gate of the Great Palace or in Ravenna or Sinai was satisfied
in St Sophia with a mosaic vault decoration which was limited to the sign
of the cross, endlessly repeated, or to more neutral patterns and designs.
The church which from the moment of its construction symbolized
Byzantium was originally devoid of figurative mosaics — all the present
panels represent piecemeal additions from the periods after iconoclasm.
Whether apse, dome, vaults or narthex, it is safe to conclude that the main
decoration was the cross. While this scheme is strangely evocative of the
Islamic mosque’s equal rejection in later centuries of portraits and narra-
tive, yet the decision is a powerful one visually. Just as the building is per-
meated with light — and this is the point that Procopius was the first to
emphasize — so the decoration of crosses fills the building with the aura of
Christianity, the endlessly repeated sign of the life-giving cross. In this
respect, the vast spaces and architectural complexities of the church are
unified by the one repeated motive. Although conceptual and other expla-
nations are offered in the literature for the lack of figures on the walls — it
has been described as ‘an architect’s church’ or it is suggested that time was
too short too allow for a full decoration or it is postulated that it repre-
sented an incipient iconoclasm on the part of the emperor or his
Monophysite wife, and so on — yet perhaps all this speculation is uncalled
for. For the viewer in the church, these mosaics offered a highly successful
visual, mesmeric effect. This is a case where we can hardly know the inten-
tions of the period, but where we can at least be sensitive to the visual
effects of the decision. We can also see by hindsight that St Sophia excelled

40 Harrison (1989). 41 Mango (1962); and Cameron, Corippus.

30 . THE VISUAL ARTS

Fig. 34 The nave of St Sophia, Constantinople (5 32—7), looking east, when in use as a mosque,
recorded by Gaspare Fossati between 1847 an d 1 849 (lithograph after a watercolour).
(Photo: Foto Marburg/Art Resource, NY)

‘the age of justinian’

9°5

as the site for the state ceremonial of Byzantium. 42 Not only was it the
largest building of its time, but its interior could be guaranteed to impress,
not only the Byzantines — from the first writer on the building, Procopius,
and the other court encomiasts like Paul the Silentiary — but visitors from
any country. 4 ’ In this respect, the building offered, with its unrepentantly
repeated sign of the cross, a statement of the triumph of the Christian
religion in front of which all the faithful, whether orthodox or heterodox,
must assent to bow and worship. It may have been an inspired decision
after all.

In contrast with St Sophia, the redecoration of the churches of Ravenna
after the reconquest of 5 40 is of great visual complexity. 44 The city and
harbour of Ravenna had been developed from the mid fifth century, and
there were soon resplendent churches in the new city in the marshes. The
artists and architects seem to have come from Rome — at least, the stylistic
connections with Rome are often close. The so-called Mausoleum of Galla
Placidia owes nothing particular to Byzantine art in the east, either in its
domical vault or carpet covering of mosaic.

The inclusion of dynastic portraits was a recurrent feature of the
churches of the city (the local context is well documented in the later med-
ieval history of Agnellus), and when Theoderic took over the city and made
it the centre of a Gothic kingdom, he too employed artists with a knowl-
edge of the art of Rome to decorate his new Arian churches. 4 ’’ By the end
of the fifth century, Ravenna had two baptisteries and a rival ecclesiastical
situation. 46 Theoderic also began the construction of a new basilica dedi-
cated to Christ (c. 500—26). Its walls were decorated with mosaic — in the
highest register with New Testament scenes; in the lowest register below
the windows were the figures of Christ on one side and the Virgin on the
other. At the west end of this long register were topographical representa-
tions of the port (Classis) and the palace. Within the palace fa9ade were the
dynastic portraits of (probably) Theoderic and court. The style of the
upper biblical portraits was simple and direct, reminiscent of Roman
mosaics, even perhaps consciously going back, it has been suggested, to the
simplicity of the catacombs. The choice of imagery, since it omits the
Nativity and the Crucifixion and shows Christ in two forms (beardless in
the Miracles scenes and bearded in the Passion scenes), may reflect Arian
theology and thinking about the nature and sacrifice of Christ. 47 The dec-
oration of this church, which now carries its later medieval dedication,

42 Mains tone (1988).

43 Macrides and Magdalino (1988); and Majeska (1984) for the Russian perception. For local myths
of the church see the Narratio on the building of St Sophia, discussed by Dagron (1984) 1 91— 314.

44 The fundamental studies are Deichmann (1958) and (1969, 1974, 1976, 1989).

45 Pizzaro (1995). 46 Wharton (1987).

47 Von Simson (1948); Nordstrom (1953); also Gregg and Groh (1981).

906

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

S. Apollinare Nuovo, demonstrates how the forms and content of early
Christianity were so well established that even a new group entering the
ruling classes was able to manipulate church decorative schemes to declare
and proclaim their own particular aims, ambitions and sectarian beliefs.
Nothing more obviously shows the rapidly achieved maturity of Christian
art than the ability to operate subversively within the norms.

It became a matter of orthodox honour after the reconquest of Ravenna
in 5 40 to obliterate the Arian atmosphere of this church of Christ — oper-
ating, of course, within the now established visual discourses. The church
was accordingly rededicated, and the patron chosen was St Martin, the
famous bishop of Tours and so-called ‘hammer of the heretics’; at the
same time, various sections of the early-sixth-century mosaics were selec-
tively picked out and replaced. This work was probably carried out under
bishop Agnellus (5 57—70). The mosaic images of Theoderic and his court
were removed from their spaces between the columns of the palace fa9ade
— carelessly, though, to the modern eye, since the tesserae of their hands
were left intact on the columns. Another alteration was that a new cycle of
saints was inserted in the central section of the lower register: these were
twenty-six named male Catholic martyrs headed by St Martin on the south
side; on the north side was a procession of twenty-two female martyrs and
virgins. Instead of inserting new representations of the current rulers of
Ravenna in the spaces from which Theoderic was removed, these areas
were left blank. In fact, portraits of Justinian and Theodora had been set
up elsewhere in Ravenna in the newly built orthodox church of San Vitale
(which had originally been sponsored byjulius Argentarius). 48

San Vitale can help to exemplify the stage reached in church decoration
by around 548, when it was dedicated; the architecture was planned and
building may have begun in the 5 30s, judging from the similarity of the
sculptural style of the capitals with Justinian’s Constantinopolitan show-
piece churches. The mosaic decoration of San Vitale is now (and perhaps
always was) limited to the sanctuary. We retain a very clear view of its
general sixth-century appearance, although a considerable amount of res-
toration has been carried out over the surface, and this robs us of certainty
about the precise original treatment of some details. A similar multimedia
use of architectural decoration, using stucco, marble and mosaic (which
may include precious materials like mother-of-pearl), is found in a church
of similar mid-sixth-century date at the head of the Adriatic at Porec
(Parenzo). As a piece of visual organization, the point has already been
made that the mosaic has advanced far beyond Santa Maria Maggiore; the
figures are now designed to be more easily read from the floor of the

48 The information about Julius Argentarius (and his sponsorship of 26,000 solidi) is from Agnellus
xxiv.57, 59: see Mango (1972) 104—5.

It'll'

and St Vitalis and Bishop Ecclesius, c. 548, S.
Resource, NY)

ibridge University Press, 2008

908

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

church because of the attention to scale and the relative size of the figures
as the mosaic stretches higher into the vaults.

The semicircular panel of Abraham is in the prominent tympanum of
the left wall, facing the representation of Abel and Melchizedek opposite;
both panels are very clearly a reference to the theme of sacrifice and
through it to the eucharist which is celebrated in the sanctuary . 49 As in S.
Maria Maggiore, the Abraham scene has clear symbolic references — the
bread, for example, is marked like the bread of the eucharist; reference to
sacrifice is intensified by the inclusion of the Isaac scene. But the flatness
and linearity of the Abraham panel style is in contrast to the more impres-
sionist S. Maria Maggiore mosaics. This change of style from the earlier
mosaics — for some commentators, this greater distance from antique illu-
sionist style — does have the expressive value that it conveys more starkly
the dogmatic significance of the scene. 5 " The purpose of the oak tree may
be to define the authenticity of the location of the event, but perspectivally
the artist ignores its presence — one is not supposed to imagine that
Abraham walked literally around the tree as he went from house to table.

The side walls of the sanctuary of San Vitale were, therefore, conspicu-
ously decorated with Old Testament scenes with typological significance,
and around them with Old Testament prophets; but these images are sym-
bolically and hierarchically lower on the walls than the evangelist portraits
of the New Testament writers (with their emblems) above them. A reading
of the mosaics of San Vitale must allow for intersecting currents and
levels of symbolic meaning; the selection of subjects is both sophisticated
and designed technically to be highly visible. These church walls show the
typological, narrative and liturgical evocations which likewise are apparent
in the fifth century in Rome; but several additional strands are also to be
detected. There are overt references to salvation and paradise in the apse
composition (and to the earthly paradise, perhaps, in the luxurious animal
and vegetal imagery of the central vault mosaic). Christ is seated on a globe
in the apse above the four rivers of paradise and between a ‘court’ retinue
of two archangels; St Vitalis is given his martyr’s crown, and the founder
of the church, Ecclesius, holds a model of the octagonal church. One also
detects that the three figures in the central axis of the sanctuary composi-
tion — the young Christ, the lamb in the vault and God the Father at the
apex of the opening arch — are a reference to the orthodox concept of the
Trinity, and overtly counter to Arian and Monophysite theology.

There are yet other components in the sanctuary decoration, most
notably the famous panels, low down and near the altar, which represent
(to the left) Justinian (holding a paten for the bread of the eucharist), the
current archbishop, Maximian, and his clergy, and the imperial court and
army; and opposite them (on the right) the representation of Theodora and

49 Another level of interpretation is proposed by Leach (1983). 50 Walter (1984).

‘the age of justinian’

9°9

her retinue, also in full imperial regalia. Theodora holds a chalice for the
communion wine; her dress is ornamented with images of the Adoration
of the Magi, making their offerings to Christ . 51 It is well known (to us) that
Justinian and Theodora never themselves went to Ravenna (the extent of
Justinian’s travels seems surprisingly limited); and it is probable that
Theodora was still alive when the mosaic was dedicated in 547/8 (if so, she
died soon after). The meanings of these panels are therefore clearly sym-
bolic, not a commemoration of any actual event: the rulers of Ravenna are
present through their icons, just as the emperor was present in all civil and
judicial proceedings where his image was displayed . 52 But it has been con-
vincingly argued that their presence in the sanctuary mosaics also illustrates
a symbolic presence in the church liturgy: they are participating in the ritual
of the procession of the First Entrance of the liturgy . 53 Maximian leads the
emperor into the church, and it is clear that, in spatial narrative terms,
Theodora is processing from the atrium into the church interior. The set-
tings no doubt suggest more than simple progress across the threshold of
the church, since the niche which frames Theodora also conveys her royalty
and power. The languages and messages communicated by clothes are
incorporated within the languages of art. The extraordinary visibility of
Theodora within the sacred area of the church must have been startling:
the basis for the (sexist) complaints of Procopius in the Secret History about
the aggressive power of Theodora is eloquently made visible in this con-
spicuous positioning of the imperial couple.

It may be that the large ivory chair dated to this period through the inclu-
sion among the carvings of the monogram of Maximian was intended to
stand in the sanctuary of San Vitale . 54 Whether it was designed as a ‘chair’ or
as a stand for the display of a book of scripture, it was an extraordinary tour
de force as a display of ivory. Its panels, which include a cycle of Joseph scenes
and gospel images, are, like the mosaics of S. Maria Maggiore, conceived in
a range of different styles, some more, some less ‘classical’. It is again easier
to recognize that through the narratives a number of symbolic references are
intended — such as the representation of Joseph and the events of his life as
the antetype of a bishop — than to explain their greater or lesser use of clas-
sical modes and forms. Another ivory of this period can likewise be under-
stood to include all sorts of classical elements — this is the Barberini diptych
in the Louvre . 55 But the essential question for analysis is whether the
emperor portrayed should be identified specifically as Justinian, or whether
the imagery of triumph has to be handled in a more general way. Is this top-
icality or the universality of the triumph of the Christian emperor?

The breadth of expression exhibited in the sixth century and noticeably
in commissions connected with Justinian is further shown in the decorations

51 Barber (1990) and Clark (1993) esp. 106— 10. 52 Von Simson (1948). 53 Matthews (1971).

54 Cecchelli (1936—44). 55 Durand (1992) cat. no. 20.

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

910

of the church of the monastery of St Catherine on Sinai (the dedication to
St Catherine is post-Justinianic). Here the names of Justinian and Theodora
(now deceased) are carved in the wooden beams of the roof of the basilica,
as is the name of the architect (or builder?) Stephanus of Aila, now Eilat.
The church (constructed in local stone) thus dates between 548 and 565; and
a second inscription in the apse mosaics of the Sinai church mentions the
monks involved (the abbot Longinus and the deacon John) and indiction 14;
if the mosaic was carried out under the same programme of work, as seems
almost certain, it was done in either 550 or 565. The mosaic does not,
however, mention or represent the emperor. 56

The Sinai church was a martyrium built on the site of the burning bush, and
the mosaic programme of the apse commemorates events in the life of
Moses on the triumphal arch (Moses at the Burning Bush, and Moses receiv-
ing the Law); the Transfiguration is in the conch, and figures of Old
Testament prophets and New Testament apostles are in medallions around
the apse (together with an early ‘Deesis’ composition and the two icons
of the monks). Compared with San Vitale (which also includes Moses
scenes), the stylistic treatment of the figures is even more ‘abstract’ and
boldly non-illusionistic. The viewers of this mosaic would be the monks of
this remote community, together with the intrepid pilgrims who managed to
reach such an awesome holy site. All equally would feel insignificant in front
of the vast and mystic imagery of the holy light of the Transfiguration. All
commentators on this mosaic have emphasized the levels of meaning which
they detect in the mosaic: ‘eschatological, dogmatic, liturgical, topographic,
typological, imperial’ (Weitzmann); ‘visual exegesis’ (Eisner). While it may
seem feasible to argue that we can see a chronological development from San
Vitale to Sinai ‘away’ from classicism, the analysis of the functions and evo-
cations of the mosaic programmes suggests that the formal choices were
made for more complicated reasons than the weakening of illusionism.

The development of the pilgrimage monastery of Sinai was mentioned
by Procopius (and the tenth-century writer Eutychius) as a work of
Justinian, but the details of the financial and practical organization of the
work are not known. Since sponsorship of other works in the Holy Land
which are mentioned in contemporary texts (such as the New Church in
Jerusalem) might be delegated through the tax system, it is likely that the
monks who are commemorated in the mosaic organized the work. This sit-
uation may account for the debate about the origin of the artists. While the
architect (and probably the masons of the variety of capitals along the
columns of the nave) was local, the panache with which the mosaics are
carried out has led to the assumption that the artists were sent out from

56 Forsyth and Weitzmann (1973); Manafis (1990); Eisner (1995) 99—124. Doubts have been
expressed whether the inscription in the mosaic is original or added later. Ernest Hawkins pointed out
to me that since the sizes of the medallions below the lettering are adjusted to make room for the
inscription, all this section of the mosaic is homogeneous.

‘the age of justinian’

9 1 1

Constantinople by Justinian (or his court officials). There is clearly
insufficient evidence to decide on the provenance of the artists. The only
material factor is that the marble revetment around the base of the apse
(and other fittings in the sanctuary) is of Proconnesian marble. If this
marble was freshly quarried and transported out from the Sea of Marmara,
then it might seem reasonable to argue that the mosaicist accompanied the
cargo and came from Constantinople. But this was the period when, it has
been argued, the use of the quarries was virtually at an end, and the marble
may come from a stockpile anywhere — even perhaps in Jerusalem, since
churches of the fifth and sixth century in the Negev (and elsewhere) like-
wise had access to this marble for their church fittings . 57 Similar discussions
about the existence of local mosaicists recur in all parts of the regions
involved — from France to Syria. For example, there are three mosaic apses
on Cyprus, all representing in diverse imagery the Virgin Mary, from the
period before iconoclasm (and very likely all from the sixth century):
Kanakaria (recently looted from the site and fragmented), Livadia (recently
destroyed) and Kiti . 58 The case proposed — that these mosaics were
achieved by imported mosaicists from Syria or Constantinople — is perhaps
undermined by the fact that archaeology reveals that an enormous amount
of mosaic work was done on the island in this period, sufficient, one might
argue, to support a local industry. The same issue emerges in the analysis
of the mosaic at Qartmin in Syria from the early sixth century . 59

The quantity of work and the links between Constantinople and so
much enterprise undertaken outside the capital does support the notion
that the period of Justinian adds up to an ‘age of Justinian’; despite the
loose connections between the emperor and the production of the art. All
over the Mediterranean one detects artistic contacts and intersections, and
the signs of an ‘international art’. The writings of the court encomiasts
equally support the interpretation that the built environment and the
culture of viewing were selfconsciously promoted under the name of the
emperor . 60 But clearly art was not all centred on Constantinople, and there
is no evidence that the Byzantine capital was the source of all artistic enter-
prise: the character of the art of Ravenna is far too complex to support this
view . 61 In the same way, the architecture of the period shows many local
features . 62

57 Asgari (1995); a problem here is whether the quarries went entirely out of use in the sixth century
or whether the procedures for working in the quarries changed.

58 Megaw and Hawkins (1977); Megaw and Hawkins have dated the apse of Kiti to the late sixth
century; Barber (1991) argues for the late seventh century for Kiti. 59 Hawkins and Mundell (1973).

60 Cameron, Procopius. 61 Kostof (1965).

62 For the evolution of architecture over this period see fundamentally Grabar (1946) and Lassus
(1947); also Tchalenko, Villages. A more pragmatic coverage is offered by Krautheimer, Early Christian
and Byzantine Architecture and Mango, Byzantine Architecture. The range of possibilities is obvious from a
comparison of the Church of the Hundred Gates at Paros; Basilica B at Philippi (unfinished); the
church of St John at Ephesus; and Kasr Ibn Wardan in modern Jordan.

912

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

IV. CHURCH, MONKS AND ART AT THE END OF THE SIXTH

CENTURY

When the new emperor Justin II succeeded Justinian, the recommended
rhetoric for imperial succession was to claim continuity . 63 But in fact the
overstretching of resources which marks the artistic patronage of the age
of Justinian did not continue, and marked changes in art have been
detected in the late sixth century. Perhaps these were to some extent a
response to crisis, and so fit with the view that artistic change is to be linked
with spiritual and social anxieties. Outbreaks of plague and the fear of pre-
mature death may encourage increased artistic patronage (through church
endowments, for example) and may even initiate changes in visual expres-
sion. However, studies of the better-documented circumstances around
the time of the Black Death have shown only the complications of the
analysis rather than offering firm guidelines for other periods. The late sixth
century is also a period of foreign invasion and disruption; it might be said
that the dominance of Constantinople in the east was a negative conse-
quence of the decline of other cities, like Antioch, Alexandria and
Jerusalem, rather than a positive imperial policy . 64

The temptation for the art historian is to relate changing historical
circumstances and the emergence of new types of writing to new forms of
art. A period which produced the Akathistos hymn and numerous Lives of
holy men might be supposed also to initiate some kind of matching artis-
tic expression. The most tempting theory is to date the emergence of the
icon to the second half of the sixth century and relate the popularity of the
icon to new forms of spirituality. Weitzmann’s catalogue of early icons
from Sinai sees a set of portable icons in the monastery as the gift of
Justinian (in particular, Christ, St Peter and the Virgin with saints ). 65 Others
have dated these pieces later, perhaps within the seventh century. In fact,
despite the imprecision about the stylistic dating of these panels, there is
no reason to doubt the existence of painted panels in encaustic or tempera
throughout this period. However, there may have been an upsurge in pro-
duction, as Kitzinger proposed, in the second half of the sixth century . 66
Likewise the production of portable pilgrim souvenirs from the Holy
Land, such as the base metal ampullae which are now best-known from col-
lections at Bobbio and Monza, may have been a development of this
period . 67

Similarly, there may be a case for linking this supposed increase in devo-
tional materials with the growing influence of monasticism, especially in the
Holy Land and Asia Minor. It would not be true, however, in the present

63 Cameron, Corippus.

64 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century, Cor mack (1990); Wickham (1994).

65 Weitzmann (1976). 66 Kitzinger (1976) 91— 1 56. 67 Grabar (1958).

CHURCH, MONKS & ART AT END OF THE SIXTH CENTURY 9 1 3

Fig. 36 Encaustic icon of the Virgin and Child with angels and saints, sixth century, in the monastery
of St Catherine, Sinai, Egypt. (Photo: Erich Lessing/ Art Resource, NY)

Fig. 37 Sixth-century lead ampulla from the Holy Land with the Ascension of Christ. Cathedral
Treasury at Monza. (Photo: Foto Marburg/Art Resource, NY)

30. THE VISUAL ARTS

CHURCH, MONKS & ART AT END OF THE SIXTH CENTURY 9 1 5

state of the evidence to say that we can yet date the precise stages of sixth-
century developments. The important evidence from Thessalonica and
Rome suggests the need for caution over the detail. In the expansion of
Thessalonica after the mid- fifth-century development of the city after the
prefect of Illyricum moved there, we cannot be sure of the chronology of
the various churches and their decoration. In particular, the mosaics of the
first decoration of St Demetrius may be as early as the first quarter of the
sixth century . 68 Yet they incorporate many expressive and stylistic features
which Kitzinger saw as belonging to the early seventh century. The repre-
sentation of the Virgin Mary in the north inner aisle mosaics has much in
common with the icon of the Virgin and saint at Sinai. Kitzinger argued that
the icon included significant classical and non-classical elements and that in
this period style was being exploited for devotional purposes: that the clas-
sicism of the angels and Mary indicated through style their metaphysical
status, and that similarly the abstract style of the two saints (Theodore and
George or Demetrius) indicated their humanity and function as mediators
and receptors of prayers. But the same contrasts of form are found in the
church of St Demetrius — and substantially again in the fifth-century con-
sular diptychs. Another church with sets of panels acting as icons is Santa
Maria Antiqua in Rome, where again there is a debate about its precise rel-
ative chronology, although the case for saying that its first phase of decora-
tion (including the panel of Maria Regina) belongs to the reign of Justin II
is strong. These materials from Thessalonica and Rome also introduce ques-
tions about the nature of power and patronage in the period; it is clear that
the bishop in Thessalonica and the pope in Rome had the advantage of
long-term power and prestige, unlike the civil leaders.

The scholarly focus on an ‘age of Justinian’ may have unduly compart-
mentalized the developments of the sixth century. The materials from
Thessalonica and Rome in particular demonstrate the range of patronage —
popes, bishops, monks, governors and leading citizens all feature in the pat-
ronage of art in these cities. The church leaders were often long established
in city life, while secular officials were in power for relatively short times . 69
These add further complexities of power and status to our understanding
of how patronage worked in this period. But it is clear that it was a period
of great enterprises successfully carried out; the result was that the Roman
empire by the end of the period was visibly and deeply Christianized.

In viewing this visible Christianity, it has become clearer that we have
little access to the thought-processes of the planners and artists, who con-
tinued to work within a broadly classical vocabulary but were capable of
considerable variation in their choices of manner and content (pagan
motives continued to be included in art, particularly in floor mosaics and

Spieser (1984); Cormack (1989). 69 Ward-Perkins, Public Building.

Fig. 3 8 Sixth-century mosaic panel from the north aisle of the church of St Demetrius, Thessalonica, with the Virgin and Child enthroned between
angels and with St Demetrius and a donor, St Theodore and other saints (destroyed 1917). (Photo: Conway Library, Courtauld Institute of Art,

London)

CHURCH, MONKS & ART AT END OF THE SIXTH CENTURY 917

metalwork). It seems not until the seventh and eighth century that more
introspection was put into the ‘proper’ nature and uses of Christian art. In
our period, whatever the theologians did or did not say, and despite the
Second Commandment, Christian art is distinguished by its conspicuous
and aggressive use of imagery — with the glaring exception of the walls and
vaults of St Sophia. The distinctive aspect of the period is the grand scale
of church building and patronage. In this respect, one sees why Procopius
was able to construct a long list of monuments, even if we cannot agree
that they represent the personal achievement of one individual, Justinian,
alone. What is missing from the rhetoric of such a text is the more
significant development in the presentation of Christian patronage in the
period. We find in church inscriptions a new kind of statement. Images, not
only in the churches of Thessalonica like Hosios David and S. Demetrios,
but all around the Mediterranean, were increasingly accompanied by the
following text: ‘For the remission of sins of the person whose name God
knows ’. 70 Such a discourse in the patronage of art must have profoundly
affected also the viewing of art. It eloquently marks the end of classical pat-
terns of euergetism and shows the arrival of the Christian Middle Ages.

70 Cormack (19 89) 1.25.

CHAPTER 31

BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

MARLIA MUNDELL MANGO

I. INTRODUCTION

Buildings are the most tangible witnesses of the character of a civilization.
Their scale, their function, their elaboration and their novelty as compared
to earlier types are all significant pointers. A survey of architecture in the
fifth and sixth century leads to one inescapable conclusion: mutatis mutan-
dis, life in both city and countryside went on as before in areas under the
effective control of the empire. If a citizen of Ephesus of a.d. 300 had
been reborn in a.d. 600, he would not have found himself in an alien envi-
ronment. The forum or agora remained a focus of city life (Fig. 43), as did
the bath (Fig. 47) and circus. Of course, most of these traditional buildings
were not newly built structures in late antiquity, since most cities had
received lavish public buildings in the imperial period. Made to last, they
needed upkeep but not replacement, unless they burnt or fell in an earth-
quake. Unless, therefore, a city was expanding (e.g. Constantinople (Fig.
40), Caesarea, Jerusalem, etc.), was a new foundation (Dara, Justiniana
Prima (Fig. 41)) or had been raised in status (Dyrrhachium), there was little
call for new public buildings. One novelty was the invasion of the city
centres by large churches, but even in this domain, the essential structures
had been architecturally developed in the century prior to a.d. 425,
although there was still room for expansion. Other new architectural ele-
ments were monasteries (Figs. 49—50), martyria (Figs. 56—7) and welfare
establishments. Village architecture of this period is also abundantly repre-
sented by buildings, many still standing to roof height, in the limestone
massif of northern Syria: churches, baptisteries, baths, shops, and andron,
inns, monasteries, houses and tombs (Figs. 42, 54, 60—2).

In addition to standing structures and the archaeological record, knowl-
edge of the architecture in the period is available in a wide variety of narra-
tive and other sources: the Liber Pontificalis, Sidonius Apollinaris, Venantius
Fortunatus, Gregory of Tours, Malalas, Agnellus and, in particular,
Procopius, who describes in detail building carried out over much of the
empire during forty years (from the 510s to the 550s). 1 This information is

1 Mango (1972) 19—145 for a selection of texts in English.

918

INTRODUCTION

9 1 9

supplemented by inscriptions and by laws regulating construction (the height
of dwellings, the spaces between them, their access to a water supply, etc.). 2

Two building trends are apparent in the empire of the fifth and sixth
century — a decrease in the west and an increase in the east. At Rome (Fig.
39), a building ‘boom’ occurs between 380 and 480, precipitated in part by
the Gothic and Vandal sackings in 4 1 o and 4 5 5 , and including the large new
churches of Sta Sabina (422/32), Sta Maria Maggiore (432/40) and S.
Stefano Rotundo (468/83). At Milan, unsurprisingly, most of the large
churches had been built in the fourth century while the city served as a
major imperial capital (S. Ambrogio, S. Lorenzo) and, although two bishops
continued this work in the fifth and sixth, the two churches known to be
erected after 5 50 are comparatively small in scale. At Ravenna, after a major
period of building while the city served as an imperial capital (402—76) and
the Ostrogothic capital (until 540), no churches or other public buildings
are known to have been erected after S. Severo in 570—95. Although many
other churches were built in Italy (e.g. at Vicenza, Verona, Brescia) and
Gaul (e.g. at Narbonne, Clermont, Lyons) during the fifth and sixth century
— some described by Gregory of Tours — their numbers probably did not
reach the number put up in the east. 3

Constantinople, walled by Constantine in the early fourth century, had
continued to expand throughout the fourth century and reached its
maximum extent in the fifth (Fig. 40). After its enlargement under
Theodosius II (413), the fortified space was not further extended. Yet
building within the walls continued and the city benefited from the large
construction programme of Justinian, who rebuilt or set up a senate house,
a forum, a seaside promenade, a baths complex, a vast cistern, six hospices
and four palaces, in addition to thirty-three churches, including St Sophia,
the largest building in Christendom until six centuries later. Other eastern
cities, such as Antioch, Caesarea Maritima, the capital of Palaestina Prima,
and Jerusalem, expanded in size in the fifth or sixth century, adding new
buildings both secular and cultic, and new ‘symbolic’ cities, such as
Justiniana Prima in the Balkans (Fig. 41), were founded. At least in the
diocese of Oriens, construction in the countryside matched that in the city.
In the village of Rihab in the province of Arabia, five churches were built
between 594 and 623/

In the late antique city, defensive walls, the water supply, honorific mon-
uments, places of entertainment and cult buildings were all maintained by

2 Inscriptions: Ward-Perkins, Public Building, Mango, M. M. (1984). Laws: Janvier (1969); Saliou
(4994).

3 Rome: Krautheimer (1980) 33—58; Milan: Krautheimer (1983) 68—92; Ravenna: Ward-Perkins,
Public Building 241—4; other Italian cities: Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 125—47;
Gaul: Greg. Tur. Hist. 11.14— 17, 20, 21, 43; v.45; vii.io; x.31; Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. passim.

4 Constantinople: Mango, Studies on Constantinople 1.118, 124—8; other eastern cities and Rihab:
Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 430/1—592; vi.B.51; vii.a.i 450—598^11^.10432—630.

Fig. 40 Plan of Constantinople, fifth— sixth century, indicating monuments mentioned in the text

Fig. 41 Plan of Justiniana Prima. (After Bavant, Kondic, Spieser (1990) site plan.) For a different
reconstruction of the walled circuit, see Fig. 23, p. 719 above

INTRODUCTION

923

a combination of state and local money. By law, various public amenities
such as harbours, bridges, roads and circuit walls were the responsibility of
either the provincial governor or the city; forts were, by contrast, that of
military commanders. In the west, Justinian’s Pragmatic Sanction of 554
provided for repair to Rome’s public buildings, including the Forum, the
city’s port and aqueducts. The tradition had earlier been maintained by the
Romanized Ostrogoths, who prevented spoliation of buildings in Rome
(and elsewhere) and provided a fund to maintain the buildings of the city. 5
The last known imperially funded repairs in Rome were those carried out
on the Salaria bridge by Narses in 565; in Italy overall, it was the repair of
Ravenna’s aqueduct by Maurice in c. 600. 6 The ancient tradition of private
individuals spending on public buildings was not as marked a feature of our
period as it had been earlier, with the important exception of spending on
churches. In Italy the last known private funding of a secular public build-
ing was the restoration of Rome’s theatre of Pompey by Symmachus in
507—12, though private patronage of churches flourished — the most
famous instance being the largess of the banker Julianus Argentarius, who
financed several churches in sixth-century Ravenna, including San Vitale,
S. Apollinare in Classe and S. Michele in Africisco.

In the east, most public building at Constantinople was undertaken by
the state, private funding of secular public buildings being less established
than at Rome. Building in the diocesan capital Antioch was sponsored in
part by members of the imperial family: Eudocia, Theodosius II, Leo,
Anastasius, Justin I, Justinian and Maurice, as well as the rebel Ulus, and
overseen by local state officials; private patronage is, however, also
recorded. Privately financed public buildings in the city of Gerasa include
at least six out of the ten churches built between 464 and 5 40. 7

In late antiquity two types of specialists were responsible for construc-
tion; they were known in the Greek-speaking world as the mechanikos and
the architekton. The first, of higher standing, was not just an engineer but an
architect with a grounding in mathematics; the architekton was a master
builder, responsible for the majority of buildings, while an ordinary builder
was an oikodomos or a technites. The architects of Justinian’s St Sophia (Fig.
59), Anthemius of Tralles, a prominent mathematician, and Isidore of
Miletus, were mechanikoi. Texts give the names of other architects: Rufinus
of Antioch, who built the cathedral of Gaza under Arcadius, Isidore the
Younger, who rebuilt the dome of St Sophia, Stephen of Aila, who was
responsible for the monastery church at Mt Sinai, and Asaph and Addai,
who built St Sophia at Edessa, are all known from the reign of Justinian.

5 Jones, LRE 448—9, 461—2, 734—7; Ward-Perkins, Public Building 28—32, 38—48.

6 Ward-Perkins, Public Building 42—5 , 70—84, 243—4.

7 Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 430/ 1, 438, 45 8, 483, 507, 526—7 , C540, 05 88; vn.A.7 464, 526,
5 2 9 > 53 U 533 , 54 °-

JI. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

9 2 4

The numerous inscriptions of the small area of the limestone massif in
northern Syria have yielded a series of named builders ( oikodomoi and tech-
nitai) working there between the third and the sixth century (Figs. 42, 62). 8

Leaving aside works of engineering (defensive walls, aqueducts, har-
bours), 9 several types of architecture, both secular and religious, will be dis-
cussed below under the headings of ‘civic and administrative architecture’,
‘amenities’, ‘communal accommodation’, ‘palaces, houses and tombs’, and
‘churches and synagogues’. Works of building maintenance will also be
mentioned to provide a fuller historical picture of the period. Of the three
principal areas of elaborate or large-scale architecture in late antiquity —
baths, palaces and churches — only the last has been systematically and com-
prehensively studied by modern scholars. 10

II. SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

Until recently, excavation, survey, study and publication of late antique
architecture has concentrated on religious buildings, thus exaggerating a
perceived break in other construction. Yet both archaeology and texts attest
to a continuation of urban life in several cities, particularly in the east, which
would have demanded, at the least, administrative and commercial architec-
ture. The Miracles of St Artemius are set in a seventh-century Constantinople
little changed since the fourth. The Life of Theodore of Sjkeon written in c. 612
conveys an impression of urban vitality at Nicomedia. Other texts praise in
particular the monumental aspect of a city. Sidonius Apollinaris (c. 430—79)
does so of Narbonne, listing its ‘walls, circuit, shops, gates, porticoes, fora,
theatre, shrines, capitol, mints, baths, arches, granaries, markets, fountains,
merchandise’. In c. 592 Evagrius describes as still standing buildings set up
centuries earlier at Antioch: public baths, the law courts, the stoa of Callistus
and four civil basilicas, as well as the ‘beautiful’ palace of the magister militum.
In 739 a poem in praise of Milan mentions its secular (Roman) monuments
with pride — the forum, the paved streets and the aqueduct and bath — all
apparently still functioning. Such accounts prove beyond doubt that the
ideal of the ordered monumental city remained very close to that of classi-
cal times, although excavations, particularly in the west, have revealed the
reality of monumental decay — for example, at Luna (the forum) and Verona
in c. 600. 11

8 Mango, Byzantine Architecture 24—5; Downey (1948).

9 Defensive walls: Foss and Winfield (1986) 3—13, 25—34, 41—52, 125—31; Lawrence (1983) 171— 220.
Aqueducts and harbours in Italy: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 119—54, 250—5; at Constantinople:
Mango, Studies on Constantinople 1.1 20— 3.

10 E.g. Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture.

11 Constantinople: Mango (1980) 78—9; Nicomedia: Foss (1995) 186—7; Narbonne: Sid. Ap. Carm.
xin. 39— 44; Antioch: Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 5 92; Milan: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 224;
Luna: Ward-Perkins (1978); Verona: Hudson (1989).

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE 925

Fig. 42 Plan of Dar Qita, a village in the Jabal Barisha, Syria. Three churches, baptistery and several
houses (1— xix) were built in the fifth and sixth century. Kyros, Symeon and Eusebius, three technitai ,
built one church and two houses, respectively. (After Butler (1920))

926

JI. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

There still clearly existed an urban ideal expressed both by Cassiodorus,
who sets out measures taken by Theoderic to preserve and improve the
ancient buildings of Rome, Ravenna and other Italian cities, and by
Procopius, who describes new cities (poleis ) founded or refounded in this
period. Despite their small size, Martyropolis (420), Dara (508), Justiniana
Prima (c. 530) and Zenobia (550) were seen to embody this ideal. Dara
(Anastasiopolis), ‘a bulwark of the Roman empire’, was given every urban
amenity — porticoes, baths, inns, palaces, water works — in addition to the
defensive works, barracks and storehouses appropriate for a military
stronghold. At Zenobia on the Euphrates, another stronghold and a city,
Justinian was said to have built circuit walls, barracks and churches but also
baths and porticoes; a survey of the site revealed a public bath and a forum
flanked by two churches. Justiniana Prima (Fig. 41), founded to com-
memorate Justinian’s birthplace in the Balkans, was built as ‘a very notable
city with aqueduct . . . churches . . . lodgings for magistrates, great stoas,
fine market-places, fountains, streets, baths, shops’. 12 In these cities there is
a shift away from the pattern of earlier centuries (when, for instance, a
theatre would have been a prominent feature of the townscape), but the
shift certainly does not represent the abandonment of traditional classical
urbanism.

1 . Civic and administrative architecture

Texts cite fora, porticoed streets or stoas, and fountains or nymphaea as
among the main types of architectural embellishments of the Roman city.
The prestigious architecture of administrative buildings (the council
chamber, law courts, etc.) also contributed to the monumental aspects of
the city.

(a) Fora, porticoed streets, nymphaea

The ‘show area’ of Rome, which occupied about half the city, was little
embellished after Constantine, but much of it was maintained (Fig. 39). In
the mid fifth century the portico of the theatre of Pompey was restored,
and the senate buildings repaired in the fifth and sixth century. In 608 an
honorific column set up in the Forum by Diocletian was inscribed with a
dedication to the emperor Phocas. Only in the sixth century did the repub-
lican Roman Forum begin to undergo a Christian conversion, starting with
two public rooms turned into the church of SS. Cosmas and Damian and
a vestibule of the imperial palace converted into Sta Maria Antiqua.
Elsewhere in the city, two fora were restored in the mid fifth century. 13 Only

12 Cass. Variae 1.25; 111.30— 1, 44; iv.51; xi.39.2; Procop. Buildings 11.1.4—3.26; 8.11—25; iv.i. 19.

13 Ward Perkins, Public Building 45 n. 33, 46—8; Krautheimer (1980) 75—6.

^Parenzo/Porec

40° E 0

Justinianao

Prima

Stobio Philippi

San Giovanni
di Ruoti — C-

Constantinopje>

ThuburboOl
Timgado Majus

Land over 1000 metres

^ 0 SardiS 1 0 rv

Athens ‘Triene.-Ephesus 1 ^

C^n^^ e ^ a Sa ^.f Mi le 0 4 Phr p ° e t:L Sid,

Argos^Epidauros" Dld y m |^>!L Perge^oSide

Apolloniap->v_^

Ptolemais oC <

~ Cyrene ^ —

/j u Gasr Mismar
VUadi Senab

Mopsuestia V Edessa\

Alah o'V^An|och 0 Beroea^ \

rJSeleucia7| °Chalcis r— ,

-<y-\ Pieria I bApamea
Durion^^ S x ~n Epiphania
j— ^KSalamis l pEmesa

Berytuso

Tyreo

Scythopolis

Caesareap O OBostra
. I \ °Gerasa

Jerusalem 0 1

G “^o I

Birosaba

St Menas^
KelliaJ

•AoKom el-Doseh

Map 22 Building in late antiquity (places mentioned in chapter 31; see also Map 23, p. 943 below)

928 3 1 - building and architecture

in the seventh century does there seem to have been a decisive shift away
from the traditional urbanism in Rome, with, for example, the conversion
of the senate house into the church of S. Adriano in Foro (625/ 38).

At Constantinople (Fig. 40), prestige monuments were needed to sym-
bolize the pretensions of the empire. Being New Rome, the city con-
sciously reproduced some of Old Rome’s features: a palace/hippodrome
complex, fora, a capitolium, thermae , all set out on ‘seven hills’. The histori-
ated columns of Theodosius I and Arcadius imitated that of their sup-
posed ancestor Trajan at Rome. Emperors of the fifth and sixth century
added to the series of fora created by earlier emperors — Constantine,
Theodosius I and Arcadius — along the main street (the Mese) and beyond,
thereby enlarging the city’s ceremonial setting. Theodosius II (405—50) built
a semicircular portico, the Sigma, west of the Forum of Arcadius (of c. 403)
in the direction of the city’s Golden Gate, where he also set up bronze ele-
phants brought from Athens. The Forum of Marcian (450—7), whose
central monolithic column still stands on its base carved with Victories,
spanned the street leading north-west to the imperial mausoleum of the
Holy Apostles. The Forum of Leo I (457—74) was erected on the ancient
acropolis of the city, north-east of the church of St Irene. At 26 metres, its
honorific column was among the tallest in the city; the colossal Corinthian
capital, recently rediscovered, supported a bronze statue of the emperor,
perhaps to be identified with the Colossus of Barletta removed from the
medieval city by the Venetians (Fig. 44). The Tetrastoon, a large pre-
Constantinian agora (190X95 metres) bounded by four porticoes which lay
at the east end of the city, was Constantinople’s equivalent of Rome’s
central forum. Around it stood the Milion, the law courts, St Sophia, the
senate, the entrance to the imperial palace, and the Zeuxippus Baths. From
this ancient forum a somewhat smaller agora, renamed the Augustaion, was
carved, possibly in 459 (Figs. 40, 43). In 5 32 Justinian rebuilt the surround-
ing structures and enclosed the Augustaion with a wall and paved it in
marble; he replaced a silver statue of Theodosius I with an equestrian
statue of himself on top of a masonry column plated in bronze. 14

Honorific monuments were still being erected in Constantinople in the
early seventh century. In 609 Phocas set up a masonry column near the
bronze tetrapylon on the Mese (Fig. 40), intended to support a statue of
himself; in 612 Heraclius put a monumental cross on top of it. In 614,
Heraclius erected in Constantine’s Forum the last recorded honorific
statue, an equestrian portrait of the patrician Nicetas. 15

In other cities similar building of fora, porticoes and civil basilicas is
known, mostly from texts, and occasionally from excavation. Although

14 Mango, Studies on Constantinople 1.123—6; x.i— 4; Addenda, 3; Mango (1959) 36—60; Krautheimer,
Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 174. 15 Mango, Studies on Constantinople ix.30— 1; x.14— 17.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

929

Fig. 43 Plan of Augustaion and surrounding area, Constantinople. (Based on Mango (1959) fig. 1
and Miiller-Wiener (1977) fig. 263)

Theoderic provided public buildings in his capitals at Ravenna, Verona and
Pavia, most documented cases come from the eastern empire. At Gaza in
c. 5 36 rhetorical literature alludes to the construction of a civil basilica and
colonnaded street, in addition to baths, a summer theatre and other amen-
ities. Comparable construction occurred at Antioch until the very end of
the sixth century, though sadly, aside from the main street, none of these
documented buildings was identified in the excavations of the city. What

930 3 1 - building and architecture

Fig. 44 Column in the Forum of Leo, Constantinople. (From Peschlow (19 86) fig. 6)

may have been law courts, a stoa and a basilica were erected there by 43 3.
In the following years, Theodosius II built another basilica known as that
of Anatolius, described as ‘large and well illuminated’. In c. 480 a senator
constructed a tetrapylon adorned with bronze as well as two basilicas
having ‘brilliant stonework’ and paved in Proconnesian marble. Following
riots in 507, two basilicas, two tetrapyla and the governor’s praetorium were
rebuilt. Porticoes, baths and other public buildings were restored in 526 and

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

931

Fig. 45 Ephesus, Arcadiane built c. 400 with four honorific columns added during the reign of
Justinian. The columns supported statues of the Four Evangelists, a fascinating example of the
Christianization of a monument which in its setting and style appears traditional and secular.

(From Forschungen in Ephesos (1906) fig. 59)

540 following various disasters, as were, apparently, the law courts after an
earthquake in 5 8 8. 16

Comparable late monumental building has been excavated in other
cities, where pre-existing monuments were often rebuilt or remodelled
during this period, employing re-used materials. At Ephesus, the main por-
ticoed thoroughfares often bear the marks of late antiquity. The long
colonnaded Arcadiane, presumably built by Arcadius in c. 400 to link the
harbour and theatre, incorporated on its south side, opposite the baths
rebuilt by Constantius II, an exedra with decorative architecture and a water
basin. During the reign of Justinian four large columns, each supporting a
statue of an evangelist, were inserted into a central crossing of the street
(Fig. 45). In the fifth century, the square in front of Ephesus’ theatre and
the main porticoed street leading south from it were renovated and repaved
in marble. About this time the agora behind it was rebuilt and the nearby
Library of Celsus (of the second century) was transformed into a monu-
mental fountain, so that its two-storey fa9ade ornamented with statues was
reflected in a pool added below. Two other public fountains of more

16 Western cities: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 30—1, 179—86; Gaza and Antioch: Mango, M. M.
(1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 433,438,480, 507, 526, 540, 588; vn.A.21 536—48.

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

Fig. 46 Caesarea Maritima, porticoed street rebuilt in the sixth century. Shops and, on the right side,
the offices of the Archive Building open behind the portico. The central street is paved with slabs
and the covered passages have mosaic pavements. (After Holum (1988) fig. 128)

modest dimensions were set up on main streets in Ephesus — one in front
of the stadium, the other on the Embolos, at the top of which was also set
up in the fifth or sixth century a marble arch decorated in relief with
Victories. 17

At Gerasa, inscriptions attest to the construction of a stoa in 447 and a
rebuilding of at least parts of the porticoed cardo to the north and south of
the south tetrapylon in 513—30. Antioch’s porticoed cardo was rebuilt on a
large scale in 540, and at Caesarea in Palestine a secondary porticoed cardo
was rebuilt in the sixth century (Fig. 46). To the north-east of this area, near
the former temple of Hadrian, another public complex with stairs, an arch
and a new pavement was rebuilt in the later sixth century, and two large
statues set up, one a second- century portrait of Hadrian. Similar contem-
porary urban renewal occurred at Scythopolis in Palaestina Secunda, where
in 507 a porticoed exedra ringed with shops and embellished with marble
was built on Palladius Street (Fig. 47c). Excavations at Tsaricin Grad,
identified as Justiniana Prima, have revealed a porticoed main street and a
circular piazza with remains of a bronze statue of Justinian(P), as well as
baths and churches, all built in the sixth century (Fig. 41). 18

17 Foss (1979) 46-80.

18 Gerasa, Caesarea, Antioch: Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 430; vii.a.i 562, 568; vn.A.7 447;
Holum (1988) 174—6, 179—80, 186—7; Scythopolis: Tsafrir and Foerster (1997) 113— 14, 121— 2, 130;
Cari^in Grad: Bavant, Kondic, Spieser (1990) 303—15.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

933

Incorporated into the porticoes of city streets were offices or shops
(Figs. 46—7), workshops and housing for artisans, all combined under one
roof. These parallel oblong units occupied the space behind the back walls
of the porticoes on to which they opened. Facing one side of the Embolos
at Ephesus were twelve rectangular vaulted shops and workshops with
rooms above, serving as living-quarters for the artisans. At Sardis, similar
two-storeyed ergasteria (for glassmakers, dyers, ironmongers) formed one
side of the porticoed street running beside the Roman bath— gymnasium.
Some units at Sardis served as restaurants and a wine shop; others may have
been used as residences only. 19

(b) Administrative buildings

In the fifth and sixth century, imperial administration was sited in the
palaces of Ravenna and Constantinople (see below). Next to nothing is
known of the architecture of the offices of the prefects. At Rome, that of
the praefectus urbi was restored in 408/23. At Constantinople (Fig. 40) the
residence (see below) and offices of the praetorian prefect (who had a staff
of 2,000) were situated by the Forum of Leo; one of its five scrinia (depart-
ments dealing with Constantinople, Europe, Asia, Pontus and Oriens) was
located by the ‘middle entrance’, while its judicial archives were housed
behind the kathisma of the Hippodrome, inside the imperial palace. The
offices and, presumably, praetoria of the urban prefect and master of offices
were on the Mese and inside the imperial palace, respectively. 20

At Caesarea in Palestine a government complex built 5 60—614 included an
archive building and, apparently, a governor’s palace and bath (c. 5 50—640).
The archive building, identified by inscription as an imperial office ( skrinion ),
held accounts for the tax payments from the province; the simple square
structure is divided into a large entrance hall and seven rooms (Fig. 46).
Justinianic military headquarter buildings (principia) have been tentatively
identified at Justiniana Prima (Fig. 41) and Zenobia. What is considered the
fortified headquarters of the dux of Cyrenaica stood on the cardo at
Ptolemais, and another building nearby, restored possibly by a governor, has
a suite of offices in addition to living-quarters. Two offices ( secreta ) decorated
in mosaic survive from the Patriarchal Palace at Constantinople, constructed
on the south side of St Sophia byjustin II (565—78) (Fig. 43). A two-storeyed
episcopal audience hall survives on the north side of the cathedral atrium at
Porec/Parenzo. Like the imperial palace, the residences of governors, duces
and bishops (see below) may have contained administrative offices. 21

19 Ephesus: Foss (1979) 73—4; Sardis: Stephens-Crawford (1990).

20 Rome: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 42—3; Constantinople: Mango, Studies on Constantinople 1.124,
Addenda, 1—3.

21 Caesarea: Holum (1988) 68—71; Ptolemais: Kraeling (1962) 140—60; Constantinople: Mango
( 1 9 5 9) 52—6; Porec/Parenzo: Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 196—7.

934

JI. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

At Rome, the secretarium senatus was rebuilt in 4 1 2/ 1 4 following a fire, and
the senate house (curia) was restored under the Ostrogoths, though, as we
have seen earlier, it was abandoned and turned into a church in the early
seventh century. At Constantinople, however, the senate endured until the
twelfth century. One of the two senate houses there, that which stood on
the Augustaion, was rebuilt after 404, burned during the Nika riot in 5 32
and subsequently reconstructed byjustinian as a basilica with apse (Fig. 43).
Its porch was composed of six enormous white marble columns, four to
the front and two behind. As described by Procopius, ‘The stoa [thus
formed] carries a vaulted roof, and the whole upper portion of the colon-
nade is adorned with [beautiful] marbles . . . and the roof is wonderfully set
off by a great number of statues which stand upon it.’ 22

The law courts of Constantinople were situated in the Basilica, a legal
and cultural centre near the Augustaion (Fig. 43). Architecturally this was a
large court (c. 150 metres long) enclosed by four porticoes erected in c. 410.
The buildings attached to the Basilica included the Public Library (of
unknown plan) which in the fifth century was said to contain 120,000
books, and the Octagon, the seat of a university where law courses were
given and cases tried; book vendors occupied parts of the porticoes. The
Basilica burned down in 476, was rebuilt in 478 and burned again in 532. In
the subsequent reconstruction, a vast underground cistern (the Cisterna
Basilica) was built beneath the court, and in 542 the prefect Longinus
rebuilt the Basilica’s porticoes and repaved its court. Justin II set up there
a horologion (perhaps a sundial). 2 ’

2. Amenities: baths and places of entertainment

(a) Baths

Baths were in the forefront of the development of Roman architecture.
Concentric architecture conserved heat, and glass mosaics rendered walls
and vaults impermeable. Innovations in the use of concrete facilitated the
construction of vaults and domes. Thus the Roman bath chamber, domed
or vaulted and decorated in mosaic, is the architectural predecessor, not just
of the late antique bath chamber, but of the Byzantine church as well. 21

In late antiquity, baths were the most popular area of what remained of
secular public buildings, except for defensive walls and palaces. By the end
of the fourth century, there were eleven thermae (each a vast complex laid
out symmetrically on an axis leading to the caldarium ) in Rome and eight in
Constantinople. And the balneum or balaneion, a smaller, asymmetrical bath,
usually privately owned, proliferated: there were 856 at Rome and 1 5 3 at

22 Rome: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 220—1 ; Krautheimer (1980) 72; Constantinople: Mango (1959)
56—60; Procop. Buildings 1.10.6—9. 23 Mango (1959) 48— 51.

24 Ward-Perkins (1981) 105—7, 2IO > 418—21, 430; Sear (1977) 29—30.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

935

Constantinople by a.d. 400. Ostia, Athens and Timgad each had more than
a dozen. Whether state owned or privately owned, both thermae and balnea
were open to all for a small entrance fee . 25 By the fifth century, the church
started to provide baths exclusively for the poor and for the clergy. At
Rome, pope Hilarus (461—8) built two such baths at a monastery and pope
Symmachus (498—514) built others. At Ravenna, clerical baths were avail-
able to both orthodox and Arians; those of the former were rebuilt by the
bishop Victor (5 37 — 45). 26 The bishop of Gerasa built a bath in 454 which
was restored in 5 84. Justinian restored the bath ‘for soldiers’ enjoyment’ in
the garrisoned city of Circesium. Texts mention the existence of distinct
summer baths and winter baths at Antioch, Tripolis, Edessa, Gaza,
Epiphania (Hama) and Thuburbo Majus. Although the architectural
differences between the two are unclear, some distinctive features set sea-
sonal baths apart: in sixth-century Epiphania a normal bath was converted
into a winter bath. A summer bath built at Edessa in 497—504/ 5 had two
basilicas and a tepid arium ; the local winter bath also had at least two basili-
cas. The winter bath at Gaza had a dome decorated with a tabula mundi ? 1

At Rome, the thermae of Agrippa still functioned in the fifth century, the
baths on the Aventine were restored in 414 and those of Constantine in
443, while Theoderic restored the Baths of Caracalla (Fig. 39). Of the eight
thermae at Constantinople listed in the Notitia urbis Constantinopolitanae of
c. 425, four were built, completed or rebuilt in the fifth and sixth century:
the Thermae Constantianae, built 345—427; the Honorianae, finished in 41 2; the
Baths of Achilles, rebuilt in the fifth century; and the Baths of Zeuxippus,
rebuilt after 532 (Figs. 40, 43). The bath of Dagistheos north-west of the
Hippodrome was started by Anastasius and completed in 528 by Justinian,
who also built a marble colonnaded seaside promenade, decorated with
statues, at the Arcadianae Baths. Unfortunately, these baths are known only
from written sources, aside from parts of the sixth-century Zeuxippus
baths, which have been excavated (Fig. 43). Constructed of opus mixtum ,
these included a domed structure and another with a large apse (1 2 metres
wide) facing an extensive court which was possibly a palaestra. Two vaulted
chambers were excavated separately, as were two granite columns set 27
metres apart and two spiral staircases, of a type often found in imperial
thermae connecting the caldarium with the hypocaust below and the upper
storey above. The original Zeuxippus baths had contained eighty classical
statues, which were celebrated by a series of epigrams composed by
Christodoros of Coptus shortly before the fire of the Nika riot, which
destroyed the building in 532. Two inscribed statue bases and a marble slab

25 Yegiil (1992) i— 5, 314— 23. 26 Ward-Perkins, Public Buildings 135—46.

27 Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, vn.A.7 454, 584 (Gerasa); xv.A.17 527—60 (Circesium); i.a.i 360
(Antioch); iv.A.7 450 (Tripolis); xv.a.i 497, 500 (Edessa); vn.A.21 500, 536 (Gaza); 11.A.2 6th c.
(Epiphania); Yegiil (1992) 43, 222, 226—30, 238.

936 31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

with a relief of a nereid — all of the sixth century — were recovered in the
excavations. 28

In contrast to the imperial thermae of the west, which assimilated the
Greek palaestra to the Roman bath to create a new comprehensive form, the
bath in Asia Minor simply grafted the one on to the other to create the
bath-gymnasium. Archaeologists have dated most of these to before the
fifth century. That at Ephesus, built in the second and third century, was
restored in the fifth and redecorated again after that. The bath-gymnasium
at Salamis on Cyprus, built in the second century, was repeatedly rebuilt and
restored in the fourth, fifth and sixth century, and Heraclius helped to build
an aqueduct, which led in its direction, in the seventh. Baths excavated else-
where in the east may be thermae with or without a palaestra P

At Antioch, Malalas named nine large baths of the imperial period. The
Baths of Valens were restored by Eudocia in 438, and Leo repaired those
of Trajan, Hadrian and Severus in 45 8. Justinian and Theodora built baths
there in 527, and Maurice apparendy rebuilt a winter and a summer bath
in 588. Excavations at Antioch uncovered several large-scale baths, and
while none is easily identified with those cited in texts, Bath F (rebuilt in
5 37, according to an inscription) was apparently laid out symmetrically and
on a large scale. At Alexandria, what may also have been a thermae building
is a large-scale symmetrical bath, restored in the fifth and sixth century.
One thermae complex at Scythopolis (95 X 60 metres), built in the fifth
century and remodelled in the sixth, has a palaestra and large propylaeum
fagade (four columns supporting a pediment) made of reused carved
marble (Fig. 47A— b). 311

The plans of smaller baths with or without palaestra vary widely. At
Ephesus, a bath rebuilt c. 400 had an irregular plan adjusted to the nearly trap-
ezoidal lot available on the congested Embolos. Lacking both palaestra and
axiality, the bath had two large adjoining halls (an apsed room and a long
gallery) to serve as vestibule and apodyterium. The bath was paved with marble
and mosaic, its walls revetted with marble, and its rooms decorated with
statues of the owner Scholasticia herself, Socrates, Menander and a dignitary
of the sixth century. 31 Asymmetrical baths built or rebuilt in the fifth and
sixth century, with chambers arranged in a row (axial or angular) or in a
ring, have been identified in Constantinople, Greece (Philippi, Thebae
Phthiotis), Asia Minor (Didyma, Priene, Samos, Perge, Side, Anemorium),
Egypt (Kom el-Dosheh), Cyrenaica (Apollonia, Cyrene, Ptolemais, Gasar

28 Rome: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 34— 5; Yegiil (1992) 135, 152; Constantinople: Mango (1984b)
iv.388— 41; Janin (1964) 216—24; Zeuxippus excavations: Mango (1959) 37 — 9.

29 Yegiil (1992) 250—313; Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, xix.a.i 342, 5th, 528, 618—33.

30 Antioch: Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 438, 458, 527, 526/8—537/8, 588; Alexandria:
Nielsen (1990) catalogue no. 280, fig. 217; Scythopolis: Tsafrir and Foerster (1997) 13 1—2 and n. 207.

31 Foss (1979) 70; Yegiil (1992) 288, 290—1.

Fig. 47 Scythopolis: (a) plan of thermae built in the fifth century and remodelled in the sixth, when the ‘basilica’ and the pools were added in the palaestra on the west side;
(b) the propylaeum entrance composed of reused carvings is situated on the south side; (c) porticoed Palladius Street, with shop-lined exedra added, probably in the sixth
century. (P = praefurnium; C = caldarium; T = tepidarium; F = frigidarium.) (After Yeivin et al. (1987—8) fig. 1 1 and Tsafrir et al (1993) figs. 56, 60)

938 3 1 - building and architecture

Khuraybah, Gasr Mismar, Uadi Senab), Syria (Neocaesarea), Arabia (Gerasa)
and Palestine (Emmaus, Philoteria). 32

Small public baths were also built in villages; several are known from the
period in northern Syria, at Androna (in c. 558) and elsewhere. The baths at
Sergilla (built 473), which has latrines (Fig. 9, p. 331 above), and at Midjleyya
are composed of two parts: on the north, a large hall serving as lounge and
apodyterium, and on the south, a row of small hot rooms; elevated stone con-
duits projecting from the facades fed water from a cistern outside. Of similar
plan, a bath at Babisqa (dated 488) has an interior space split into several
levels and transformed by arcades. On the evidence of these village baths,
certain trends have been ascribed to bath architecture in the eastern prov-
inces: the disappearance of the palaestra, the reduction of the frigidarium, the
appearance of a spacious bath hall with fountain or pool, and the replace-
ment of a large communal pool by small pools. 33 However, contemporary
and later baths at and near Antioch, at Scythopolis (Fig. 47) and at Caesarea,
provide contradictory evidence for the continuation of the frigidarium , 34

One of the largest thermo-mineral baths in the Roman world is situated
next to hot springs at Gadara in Palaestina Secunda (Fig. 48). Built of basalt
ashlar blocks with rubble core and probably roofed in concrete barrel vaults,
it covers an area c. 50X70 metres. First mentioned in the mid third century,
the baths complex has three inscriptions recording work in 443—60 by the
empress Eudocia, an enlargement in a later period, and modifications in 664
under the Umayyad caliph Mu'awiya, when some pools were filled in to
create dry halls. It has no artificially heated chambers as there were in some
thermal baths. The hot spring was enclosed in a small pool within one of the
bath’s six interconnecting rooms (most with pools), which are compactly laid
out parallel or at right angles to each other. The baths were entered through
a long corridor, perhaps an apodyterium, which opened on to three rooms, one
having a colonnaded entrance with arcuated lintel. An oval room next to the
spring may have been the caldarium, and the hall (5 5 metres long) furthest
from the springs, the frigidarium. The bath may be that mentioned by the
pilgrim from Piacenza in c. 570 when he described lepers bathing at Gadara. 35

Baths continued to be built within palaces and villas in this period. In
Gaul, Sidonius Apollinaris describes the bath suite with colonnaded
entrance in his villa at Avitacum, which had a caldarium, a frigidarium (with
‘conical roof’) and a pool filled by a mountain stream through lion-headed
spouts. The winter bath in the villa of his friend Pontius Leontius was like-
wise fed from a stream. The villas of other friends (Consentius, Ferreolus

32 Nielsen (1990) catalogue nos. 284, 294, 312, 314, 319, 326—31, 338, 341, 347, 356—9, 370, 372, 373,
379, 387; Yegiil ( 1 992) 324—5. 33 Yegiil (1992) 329—39; Charpentier (1994) 113—42.

34 Bath F at Antioch and bath at Toprak en-Narlica nearby; Stillwell (1941) 8—9, 19—23; Scythopolis:
Tsafrir and Foerster (1997) 113, 131— 2 and nn. 123—4; Caesarea: Holum (1988) 182—4.

35 Yegiil (1992) 1 21—4.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE 939

Fig. 48 Gadara, thermal springs, isometric drawing of baths. Improved by the empress Eudocia
(443-60) later enlarged, and finally modified by the caliph Mu'awiya in 664. (S = hot spring; C =
caldarium; F = frigidarium; A = apodyterium; H = entrance hall with pool). (After Yegiil (1992) fig. 136)

and Apollinaris) also had baths. 36 The sixth-century governor’s palace at
Ephesus contains a bath with frigidarium, tepidarium and caldarium, arranged
in two parallel rows, and a villa outside Antioch, possibly built by Ardabur
when he was magister militum per Orientem at Antioch (45 3—66), had a bath
suite. Another private bath of the mid fifth century, attached to a group of
farm buildings at Toprak en Narlica, just east of Antioch, is of the angular
row type, reminiscent of the Syrian village baths. An oblong vestibule opens
into an octagonal frigidarium which recalls a room in thermae (Bath C) at
Antioch. Decorated with floor mosaics of Soteria (‘Well-being’) and
Apolausis (‘Enjoyment’), the chamber has four corner pools and a larger pool
in an alcove. From the octagon a small chamber leads into the sudatorium and

36 Sid. Ap. Carm. xvm— xix, xxn.179— 86; xxm.495— 9; Epp. 2.2.4—95 9.8; 8.4.1.

940 3 1 - building and architecture

then the caldarium. A latrine lies on the other side of a court. At Caesarea in
Palestine a compactly designed private bath, dated 5 50—640, had a fish pool
in addition to the usual hot and cold chambers. 37

(b) Places of entertainment

In this period, few if any theatres, circuses or other places of entertainment
were built or rebuilt — Theoderic’s amphitheatre at Pavia being an excep-
tion — but their continued use and architectural alterations are attested by
excavation and written sources. In the Colosseum at Rome the ‘arena and
balcony’ were repaired in the late fifth century, and the Theatre of Pompey
restored in the early sixth (Fig. 39). The emperor Maurice (5 82—602) gave
funds to reconstruct the Hippodrome at Antioch. The Hippodrome at
Constantinople, designed for horse-racing, remained the most important
public meeting-place in the city, where the populace saw the emperor
sitting in the kathismahy the palace (Figs. 40, 43). In other cities, the theatre
continued to be a major meeting-place for the people, as well as the setting
of mimes, pantomimes and games. Inscriptions record restorations in the
fifth and sixth century of the theatres at Ephesus and Side, and of the
Maiouma naumachia theatre at Gerasa (in 533). The theatre at Aphrodisias
was modified in the mid fourth century, and imperial and other statues were
set up there into the sixth, while the stage area of the theatre of Scythopolis
experienced four rebuilding phases in late antiquity. 38

3 . Communal accommodation: barracks, inns, hospitals, monasteries

Some types of communal accommodation in this period share certain
architectural features, such as a series of rooms grouped around a court.

(a) Barracks

Barracks are mentioned several times by Procopius in listing Justinian’s
building accomplishments throughout the empire. Actual remains are
available in Syria, where the barracks are square enclosures with accommo-
dation built around the inside of the wall, and incorporate a church or
chapel. In barracks (called kastellos and dated to 412 in an inscription) at
Umm idj -Djemal a chapel is attached to one of the enclosure walls. In the
barracks (558/9) at Androna and possibly in those ( c . 561) at Qasr Ibn
Wardan, a church stands in the centre. 39

37 Ephesus: Foss (1979) 48—51; Antioch: Stillwell (1938) 95—147; Toprak en-Narlica: Stillwell (1941)
19—23; Caesarea: Holum (1988) 182—4.

38 Pavia and Rome: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 44, 99, 107; Constantinople: Mango (1984b)
iv.344— 50; Ephesus: Foss (1979) 61; Antioch and Gerasa: Mango, M. M. (1984) Ga2etteer, i.a.i C588;
vi.A.7 533; Aphrodisias: Roueche (1991); Scythopolis: Tsafrir et al. (1992) 19—22.

39 Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, ii.b.8 5 58; n.B.65 C561; vi.B.64 412.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

941

(b) In ns

Several inns {xenon, xenodochion) have been identified by inscription in north-
ern Syria. An inn built, possibly in the mid fifth century, outside the north
gate of Antioch had a large entrance court and a mosaic pavement, as did an
inn (510) in the village of Frikya. Below Qal'at Sim'an (ancient Telanissos)
three inns, called pandocheia, were constructed in 471 and 479, for the use of
pilgrims visiting the column of St Symeon the Elder. Elsewhere in the area,
inns having stables on the lower level and accommodation for travellers
above were built in 436 at Dar Qita (Fig. 42) and 504. The inn situated inside
a fort at Umm al-Halahil may have served as a metaton or staging-post between
the cities of Chalcis and Epiphania (Fiama). Inns were excavated in the mon-
asteries of Mt Nebo and Martyrius (Fig. 50) in Palestine (see below). 40

In this period the Greek word xenon or xenodochion could apply either to an
inn or to a hospital/hospice, the latter also being called a nosokomeion.
Hospitals are recorded being built in several major cities during this period
— at Rome, Alexandria, Antioch and at Constantinople, where several hos-
pitals were established in the fifth and sixth century. These included the
hospice for both the destitute and the seriously ill built between St Irene
and St Sophia by one Samson before 450 (Fig. 40). Destroyed during the
Nika riot in 5 32, it was rebuilt by Justinian, who made it ‘nobler ... in the
beauty of its structure and much larger in the number of its rooms’. The
seventh-century Miracles of St Artemius relate that a deacon of St Sophia
underwent surgery there. The plan of ruins excavated on the site of this
hospice reveals a cistern to the east and a large hall with colonnaded
entrance to the west. 41

Not far from the Samson hospice was the orphanage of St Paul, founded
byjustin II (Fig. 40). What have been identified as its remains include a row
of late antique chambers with colonnaded fapade, behind which lie others
of medieval date; so large was the orphanage that in the twelfth century
Anna Comnena described it as being ‘a city within a city’. It had a two-
storey residential wing for the poor and sick, an international school and a
Georgian nunnery. 42

(d) Monasteries

The monastic rule of Basil the Great, which represents the norm of
Byzantine monasticism, advocated a self-sufficient community. Hence
many monasteries were land-based and engaged in agriculture, so that early
monasticism is more associated with the countryside than the city. However,

40 Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i.a.i 458; 1.B.23 436; 1.B.45 504/5; 1.B.81 471, 479; n.B.27 510;
11.B.98. 41 Miller (1990). 42 Anna Comnena, Alexiad xv.7.3— 9; Mango, Developpement 34.

942 3 1 - building and architecture

some monasteries existed within city walls from an early date. The first
monastery at Constantinople, that of Dalmatios, was founded in the late
fourth century, and by 536 there were nearly eighty monasteries in and
around the capital. In the Holy Land, many monasteries were founded at
pilgrimage sites to care for the shrine and its visitors; others were founda-
tions of elite individuals, like the empress Eudocia, who wished to be buried
in their own establishments with their own clergy praying for their souls. In
Palaestina Secunda, a monastery at Scythopolis, founded in c. 5 60 by a family
(titled members of which were buried there), had rooms decorated with
floor mosaics and sculpture and was laid out around a hall with a chapel at
one corner (Fig. 1 1, p. 339 above). 43

Aside from churches, litde monastic architecture has survived or been
excavated in cities. More is known of the architecture of rural monaster-
ies, from both texts and excavations, which reveal that they contained
dormitories, a refectory, stables, workshops, storage buildings, communal
tombs and a church or chapel — also, possibly, a bath, an infirmary and an
inn. Peter the Iberian’s monastery, built near Gaza in c. 488, was described
as having two-storey cells, porticoes, courtyards, gardens, cisterns, a
tower and a walled church. In many ways, rural monasteries resembled
the self-sufficient Roman villa as described by Palladius in the fourth
century and by earlier writers. Rural monasteries took two main social and
architectural forms — the laura, where monks lived separately in cells scat-
tered around the church and service buildings, and the coenobium, where
monks had communal quarters and refectory and a variety of buildings
usually arranged around a courtyard and enclosed by a quadrangular
wall. 44

In Egypt, where monasticism originated, the huge laura settlement of
Kellia, built in the sixth to the eighth century in the Nile delta, had c. 1,600
walled units, now partially excavated, each containing separate rooms for
two monks, a reception room, a kitchen and an oratory, all grouped
around a courtyard and often with a well, garden and watch tower, and,
sometimes, a small church (Fig. 49). The larger complexes at Kellia
serving as community centres also have towers, refectories and several
churches. At Bawit in upper Egypt the monastery of Apa Apollo is
composed of two churches and several complexes, some with chapels,
transverse halls with painted niches interpreted as prayer halls, and
tombs. At Saqqara, the necropolis of Memphis, the monks of Apa
Jeremias first settled in abandoned mausolea and had a mud-brick chapel
and single-aisled refectory; better premises were built only after the Arab
conquest. 45

43 Mango, Studies on Constantinople 1.125; Hirschfeld (1992) 18—58; Scythopolis: Fitzgerald (1939).

44 Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, vn.B.44.

45 Kellia: Bridel (1986); Bawit: Maspero (1931—43); Saqqara: Quibell (1909—12).

40° E

Map 23 Building in the eastern provinces (places mentioned in chapter 31 )

Fig. 49 Kellia, laura monastery in the Nile delta built between the sixth and eighth century. Plan of
some of the 1600 walled units. (After Bridel (1986))

In Palaestina Tertia, at the monastery of the Burning Bush (now
St Catherine’s) on Mt Sinai, rebuilt and heavily fortified by Justinian, the
sixth-century basilical church, still in use, has a chapel surrounding the
Burning Bush situated behind the altar; but other, still-functioning monas-
tic buildings there, such as the refectory and domestic quarters, date from
various different periods. At another Palestinian monastery attached to a

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

945

pilgrimage site, on Mt Nebo in Jordan, where Moses is believed to have
viewed the Promised Land before his death, the installations surrounding
the church have been excavated and dated — for the most part, to the fifth
and sixth century. In addition to the refectory, other areas identified were
occupied by the cells of the monks and their superior, a kitchen, bakeries
and, possibly, a library (all of which were laid out around courtyards and
the atrium of the church, under which lie two cisterns). A long narrow
lodging for guests stands on the floor above its own refectory. Similar to
the Mt Nebo monastery — but without the pilgrimage church — was that
founded before 474 just east of Jerusalem by Martyrius, where the walled
quadrilateral complex enclosed refectory, kitchen, cells, church, tombs and
service areas, as well as a bath and lavatory, all arranged around a central
courtyard, at one corner of which stood stables serving an external inn
(Fig. 50). Hundreds of ceramic table and kitchen vessels were excavated
there, in addition to a sigma - shaped marble dining-table top like those found
in a town house at Apamea (see below). Elsewhere in the Judaean desert,
sixty monastic sites have been identified, about a quarter of which have
been surveyed or excavated. Of these, some, like the monastery of
Martyrius, are coenobitic, while nineteen others are laura installations with
scattered cells. 46

In Syria, monasteries near Antioch had a separate, sometimes large
church, either a basilica or single-nave hall church. By contrast, in the area
of Apamea, the monastery church was replaced by an oratory added to one
side of a large communal building; this plan is thought to have been intro-
duced from Mesopotamia, where a related form of monastic architecture
is known at Qartmin and other sites. Monasteries were built adjacent to the
shrines of Symeon Stylites the Elder and the Younger, north-east and
south-west of Antioch, at Qaf at Sim'an and Wondrous Mountain, respec-
tively; both had inns for pilgrims and a baptistery (Fig. 62), and the latter
was said to contain a kitchen, bakery and granary. 47

Like the fortified monastery on Mt Sinai, two walled monasteries founded
in Mesopotamia in late antiquity continue to function today — those of
Qartmin (Mar Gabriel) and Deir Zafi aran in the Tur c Abdin. Both com-
plexes also retain sixth-century churches. The first (with a transverse nave
and tripartite sanctuary) was possibly built in 512 and is still decorated with
wall mosaics and an opus sectile pavement, and the second (a compact triconch
with tripartite sanctuary) is attributed to c. 536 and decorated with elaborate
sculpture. Early buildings in these two monasteries include collective tombs,
baptisteries and cisterns, built of massive ashlar masonry and some brick. 48

46 Mt Sinai: Forsyth and Weitzmann (1973); Grossmann (1990); Mt Nebo: Sailer (1941); Martyrius:
Hirschfeld (1992) 42—5, 99, 197—8; other Judaean monasteries: Hirschfeld (1992) 18—68, 112— 212.

47 Tchalenko, Villages 1. 1 9—20, 145—73, 178— 82, 211—18; Mango, M. M. (1984) Gazetteer, i . b . 81— 2.

48 Bell (1982) 132—5, 137—9.

Fig. 50 Near Jerusalem, reconstruction drawing of coenobitic monastery founded in 473 by Martyrius from Cappadocia, later patriarch of Jerusalem. Outside the
walled complex containing accommodation and a church for monks is an inn with its own chapel. (From Hirschfeld (1992))

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

947

4. Palaces, houses and tombs

(a) Palaces and houses
Palaces

Although no longer a regular imperial residence after 312, the Palatine
palace in Rome continued to be maintained, though not enlarged. Texts
refer to several palaces at Ravenna, imperial capital from 402: those of
Honorius, Galla Placidia, Valentinian III (called ‘Ad Laureta’, recalling the
Daphne section of the Constantinople palace), Odoacer and Theoderic.
Theoderic’s palace is known to have had an entrance called ‘Chalke’, a name
based on that of the imperial palace at Constantinople, and, apparently, a
basilica of Hercules. F. W Deichmann concluded that most of these
various palaces were located in the same urban area — namely, to the east of
the Platea Major — and that they were probably situated within the walls of
a large military building, possibly a praetorium , which had been in use
between the first and the fourth century. They probably all formed part of
a single sprawling complex, similar to those of Rome and Constantinople.
The porticoed facade of Theoderic’s ‘palatium’ is illustrated in a mosaic in
the church of S. Apollinare Nuovo, and remains of what may be his palace
have been uncovered near the church. The excavated building had a central
court with porticoes on two sides, one of which opened into an apsed tri-
clinium and a trefoil dining-chamber. Theoderic also built or improved
palaces at Pavia and Verona. The latter, situated inside the Castrum, was
linked by a portico to the city gate. 49

The origin and extent of the imperial palace adjacent to the
Hippodrome at Constantinople is a matter of great speculation, and several
restorations have been attempted, based largely on the descriptions given
in the Book of Ceremonies (Fig. 43). The entrance to the palace was a monu-
mental vestibule called the Chalke on account of its gilded bronze roof tiles
or its great bronze portals. An epigram ascribing a rebuilding of
Constantine’s Chalke to Anastasius describes the new structure as large and
splendid, rectangular or square in plan and with gilded roof tiles. When this
was burned during the Nika riot of 532, it was rebuilt by Justinian on a
magnificent scale, as described by Procopius. Its rectangular plan was on an
east— west axis. Inside, four square piers engaged in the walls carried eight
arches, four of which upheld the central dome, while the other four sup-
ported vaults. The floor and walls were covered with marble — white set off
by green and orange-red. The lateral vaults were decorated in mosaic with
scenes of Belisarius’ successful campaigns against the Vandals and the
Goths. The imperial couple and senators were portrayed in the dome. 50

49 Ravenna: Deichmann (1989) 49—75; Pavia and Verona: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 1 59—60.

50 Ebersolt (1910); Mango (1959) 21—35.

948 3 1 - building and architecture

Another part of the palace known from the early period, and loosely
ascribed to Constantine, is the Hall of the Nineteen Couches, used for state
banquets, when 228 persons reclined at table in the antique manner. Justin
II (565—78) built the Chrysotriklinos, the main throne room of the palace,
known only from written sources. It was octagonal in plan and had a dome
supported by eight arches and pierced by sixteen windows. On the east side,
an apse held the emperor’s throne. The other seven arches opened into
semicircular niches. From the written account, it appears that its architec-
ture may have distantly recalled that of Domitian’s audience hall in Rome’s
Palatine and may have reflected Justinian’s church of Sts Sergius and
Bacchius (Fig. 58). In 578 the emperor Tiberius is recorded to have pulled
down a number of buildings to enlarge the palace on one side and to have
put up what John of Ephesus describes as ‘larger and more magnificent
buildings, including a splendid bath’ and stables. 51

An unidentified part of the imperial palace, excavated and dated after
540 on the basis of underlying material, probably formed part of the
private quarters (Fig. 43). This discovery consisted of a large peristyle court
paved in high-quality mosaics, on to which opened an apsed reception
room or triclinium paved in marble. Nothing remains of another sixth-
century imperial palace, that of the Deuteron, built by Justin II on the main
street leading to the Adrianople Gate; this is recorded to have had a private
hippodrome, gardens and two columns with statues. 52

Certain large and luxuriously decorated town houses known from texts
and excavations can be identified as praetoria or official residences of pro-
vincial governors, bishops or other officials, although in the case of many
of the excavated buildings it is impossible to be certain if the building con-
cerned is a large privately owned dwelling or a publicly financed palace.
The residence of the praetorian prefect at Constantinople was established
in the 470s in an existing house with bath suite on the Forum of Leo; this
was enlarged in 517 by the addition of an upper storey into which a new
bath was built before 5 5 1 . A text indicates that the governor’s praetorium at
Antioch must have been large: in 526 the Baths of Commodus on the
Forum of Valens were converted to this use. At Apamea, a building that
has been identified as the palace of the governor of Syria Secunda (a prov-
ince created c. 41 5) had its entrance from the street in the west wing of the
peristyle, while two large triclinia project from the east and north wings.
The building’s decoration included mosaics and stone and stucco sculp-
ture. The massive ‘Palace of the Giants’ (84X 1 29 metres) built in c. 410 at
Athens, possibly for official use, had two peristyle complexes linked by a

51 Ebersolt (1910) 58—67, 77—92; Mango (1972) 128.

52 Brett, Macaulay and Stevenson (1947); Talbot Rice (1958); Mango (1972) 124—5.

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

949

(a)

Fig. 51 Athens, ‘Palace of the Giants’ of c. 410: (a) restoration of the entrance
facade and (b) isometric reconstruction of complex. (From Frantz (19 8 8) plate 55)

semicircular portico (Fig. 51). The principal facade was modelled on a tri-
umphal arch, and incorporated colossal figures reused from the Antonine
period. What is considered the sixth-century praetorium of the proconsul
of Asia based at Ephesus has a transverse double-apsed entrance hall (50
metres long) followed by a large reception room somewhat reminiscent of
the imperial Chrysotriklinos at Constantinople. Decorated with stucco,
painting and floor mosaics, the room, 19 metres square, has four large
corner niches and a projecting apse where the seated governor could
receive visitors. A bath was attached to one side, and a chapel was added
to another. Other possible praetoria of the fifth to the sixth century have

950 3 1 - building and architecture

been found at Ptolemais and Apollonia in Cyrenaica, and at Caesarea in
Palestine. 53

Relatively little is known of episcopal palaces. At Bostra, capital of
Arabia, two standing buildings have been identified as episcopal palaces.
At least one of the two is a square two-storey building with a central court
surrounded by vaulted rooms; the other may also have followed this
design. The main reception room, situated on the upper floor, is a tetra-
concli. A cruciform building near the cathedral of Justiniana Prima has
been identified as its episcopal palace (Fig. 41). At Ravenna, the orthodox
episcopal palace, first built in c. 450, had a banqueting hall, a mosaiced
chapel (which still survives) and a bath, which was rebuilt on a grander
scale by the archbishop Victor (5 37—44). The bishop of Naples added a
dining-hall to his palace in the mid fifth century. Only offices decorated
with wall mosaics survive from the patriarchal palace in Constantinople

(Pig. - 15 ) A'

Houses at Athens and Aphrodisias — cities noted for philosophical
schools during late antiquity — may have provided both living accommoda-
tion and teaching facilities for sophists, the latter in the form of a large apse
surrounded by colonnades. Apses in these houses had a series of niches to
hold sculpture; in those at Aphrodisias were excavated a series of tondo
portraits, ascribed to the fifth century, which commemorate Pindar,
Alexander and various philosophers. The most elaborate town houses of
this period were probably in Constantinople: the remains of two of these
have been excavated, situated side by side, to the north of the Hippodrome
(Fig. 5 2) . One, if correctly identified as the palace of Lausus ,praepositus sacri
cubiculi in 420, housed a famous collection of statues; the other was
identified by inscription as the palace of Antiochus, another praepositus sacri
cubiculi in c. 421. Both buildings had a monumental semi-circular entrance
portico. In the Lausus house, this led into a large circular hall, over 20
metres wide, with eight niches in its walls. Beyond this and a double-apsed
bay lay an apsed hall 52.5 metres long, covered by a series of cross-vaults;
in the sixth century six projecting niches were added to the lateral walls. The
sculpture may have been displayed in this long hall. 55

Less elaborate rich private houses are known from excavation in many
cities of the empire, such as the peristyle houses with triclinia uncovered at
Argos in Greece, at Carthage, at Apollonia in Cyrenaica, at Salamis in

53 Official residences including Apamea (house ‘au triclinos’): Duval (1984) and fig. 2b on p. 475;
Constantinople: Mango, Studies on Constantinople. Appendix, 1—2; Antioch: Mango, M. M. (1984)
Gazetteer, i.a.i 526; Athens: Frantz (1988) 95—116; Ephesus: Foss (1979) 50—1; Ptolemais: Kraeling
(1962) 140—60; Apollonia: Goodchild (1976); Caesarea: Holum (1988) 169—71.

54 Bostra: Butler (1919) 255—60, 286—8; Ravenna and Naples: Ward-Perkins, Public Building 177;
Constantinople: Mango (1959) 52—6.

55 Athens: Frantz (1988) 37—48; Aphrodisias: Smith (1991); Constantinople: Miiller-Wiener (1977)
125, 238; Mango, Vickers and Francis (1992); Bardill (1997).

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE 9 5 I

Fig. 52 Constantinople, partial plan of the private palaces of possibly two praepositi sacri cubiculi,
Antiochus and Lausus, built in the early fifth century. Both houses had semicircular porticoes.
(From Bardill (1997) fig. 1)

Cyprus (with elaborate stucco decoration) (Fig. 5 3) and at Apamea in Syria,
the latter being occupied into the seventh century. Many of these late
antique houses were elaborately decorated and provided with sophisticated
amenities, such as those of the partially excavated house at Aphrodisias,
which had an intricate system of water channels and pipes and which was
ornamented with statues, two of which, attributed to the fifth century, were
recovered. 56

Multi-storeyed houses and apartment buildings, well known at Rome,
were apparently commonplace at Constantinople, judging from the legisla-
tion made to limit the number of storeys permissible. No such buildings

56 Argos: Akerstrom-Hougen (1974); Carthage: Ga2da (1981) 125—78 and Dunbabin (1982) 179—92,
p. 188 = reconstruction of the house after a.d. 400; Apollonia: Goodchild (1976); Salamis: Argoud,
Callot and Helly (1980); Apamea: Baity (1984) 19— 20, 471— 501; Aphrodisias: Erim (1990) 27, figs. 29—30.

952

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

5 ID 15 28 m.

Fig. 5 3 Salamis, two-storey porticoed house decorated with elaborate stucco work; built in the fifth
century and subsequendy remodelled. (From Argoud, Callot, Helly (1980) plates xxm.8 and xlvi)

have been recovered there archaeologically, but two complex blocks of
housing [insulae) have been excavated at Ephesus. Both were originally built
in the first century a.d., but underwent numerous rebuildings into the
seventh century. Terraced against the hillside, the five levels of housing
extend between the diagonal Embolos and an upper straight street. A
vaulted drainage tunnel, six feet high, serviced the buildings, and clay pipes
conducted water into them at every level. An elaborate house was rebuilt
in the centre of one insula and the remainder of the space was given over
to smaller middle-class units. The other insula also contained two double-
storey luxurious peristyle units. Throughout the insulae, fountains were

SECULAR ARCHITECTURE

953

common, and frescoes, marble revetment and mosaic decorations are all
preserved. 57

Villas

Sidonius Apollinaris describes several villas of the fifth century in Gaul.
His own at Avitacum near Clermont faced north and south to attractive
vistas; in addition to its bath suite, it had a portico on the east overlooking
a lake, a living-room ( diaeta ), a summer drawing-room ( deversorium ) open to
the north, a winter dining-room ( triclinium ) with fireplace, a small dining-
room ( cenatiuncula ) with stibadium (a semicircular couch) and sideboard, a
ladies’ dining-room near a storeroom and a weaving-room. The villa of his
friend Consentius near Narbonne had colonnades, a bath, a chapel, an
entrance court, gardens, olive groves and vineyards. The villa of another
friend, Pontius Leontius, had a crescent-shaped atrium, a double portico
and marble facing on the fa9ade, as well as a winter house ( hiberna domus), a
dining-room with curved portico and fish tanks, a weaving-room, winter
baths, a summer portico and granaries. In the second half of the sixth
century, Venantius Fortunatus describes other villas in Gaul which also
seem to have been very much in the classical tradition. A singular example
of the type from this period in Italy is the villa at S. Giovanni di Ruoti,
which was rebuilt in c. 460 over an earlier villa (Fig. 10, p. 3 34 above). The
complex includes a reception hall with polygonal apse, a room with a
mosaic floor, and another room, of uncertain function, which was roofed
with a dome, as well as a tower and stables. 58

The Roman villa rustica is less associated with the eastern empire,
although proasteia — that is, suburban estates near a city — are well known
from written sources. Remains of such villas have been found outside the
walls of Caesarea in Palestine. They were also built in the fifth and sixth
century between the Constantinian and Theodosian walls of
Constantinople (Fig. 40), an area where tessellated pavements of a secular
nature have been unearthed. At Daphne, outside Antioch, houses paved in
mosaics, some built close together on irregular plans, had two main periods
of construction — in the second to the third century and in the fifth to the
sixth, when the size of rooms increased; the largest rooms (up to 1 3 metres
wide) may have been courtyards. One large complex, possibly built by
Ardabur when he was magister militum per Orientem at Antioch (453—66),
included a bath. What may be described as a forerunner in eastern Syria of
the Arab desert palace is the walled complex built in 561—4 at Qasr ibn
Wardan, which includes a palace, a church and barracks. The square sym-
metrical palace, in opus mixtum , centres on an unporticoed court; on the side

57 Foss (1979) 73-7.

58 Sid. Ap. Carm. xxn.4.101— 235; Epp. 2.2.3—19; 8.iv.i; Venantius Fortunatus, Carm. 1.18—20; vi.7;
vin. 19— 21. On the villas’ baths see n. 36 above; S. Giovanni di Ruoti: Small and Buck (1994) 75—121.

954

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

Fig. 54 Refade in the Jabal Sem'an in Syria, house built in 510. The heavy carved mouldings
terminating in large volutes which frame the upper colonnade are characteristic of the region.
(From de Vogiie (1865—77))

opposite the entrance is a suite of apsed rooms on the upper storey which
recalls that in the episcopal palace at Bostra (see p. 950 above). 59

Village houses

In northern Syria some villages, such as Dar Qita (Fig. 42) and Behyo, were
composed of small, simple houses, while others, like Refade, contained
larger, well- decorated houses (Fig. 54) with certain amenities, such as an
upper-storey lavatory. These houses were so well built that some are re-
inhabited today. On those with imposing facades, the decoration of niches
and mouldings became more elaborate by the sixth century. The plans of
houses are marked by consistency: all are organized around a court and on
two levels having different functions. The ground floor was used as stables
for animals, and the upper floor, which alone had windows, for living-quar-
ters (Fig. 13, p. 353 above). Each room is a separate unit entered from the
front. The houses vary from 100 to 2,000 metres square, and are composed
of from one to three — rarely four — units, to which are added an entrance
porch, a subterranean room, a portico and an olive or wine press. The
manner of construction (of the beams, floors, etc.) has been compared
with that of houses in Cyrenaica, while other features (a blind ground floor,
stone stairs, the placing of cisterns) have been compared to houses in Lycia
in Asia Minor. 60

(b) Tombs

Imperial mausoleums in the fourth century, such as those built for Helena
at Rome and for Constantine at Constantinople, were large rotundas. In
the fifth and sixth century, imperial and royal tombs in both east and west

59 Caesarea: Holum (1988) 181—4; Constantinople: Mango, Developpement 47; Daphne: Stillwell
(1961); Qasr ibn Wardan: Mango, Byzantine Architecture 146—51. 60 Tate (1992) 1 5—64.

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

955

continued to be structures with a centralized plan. In fifth-century
Ravenna, the chapel formerly attached to Sta Croce, which is considered
the mausoleum of Galla Placidia of c. 450, is cruciform. The second of
the two imperial mausoleums adjoining Holy Aposdes in Constantinople,
added to the north side byjustinian, was likewise cruciform. Theoderic’s
mausoleum at Ravenna is a two-storeyed rotunda, constructed of Istrian
limestone with a monolithic roof, 1 1 metres in diameter and weighing 300
tons. The decagonal building at Toulouse, known as La Daurade, may
have been built as a Visigothic royal mausoleum. Now destroyed, the
three-storey blind arcading which covered its walls had colonnettes
carved with vine scrolls and niches filled with figural mosaics on a gold
ground. 61

Tombs of a more modest type have been excavated at Istanbul. A tomb
standing to its full height just outside the Theodosian land walls in 413— 1 5
has a vestibule and a main chamber which contained five tombs fronted by
closure slabs decorated in relief with biblical scenes and portraits of the
deceased. Earlier tombs with similar closure slabs, rather than sarcophagi,
have been excavated elsewhere in the city. Imposing ashlar stone tombs of
the fifth to the sixth century still stand in Syria: a classical tomb with raking
stone roof fronted by a pediment, with prominent dentil courses, stands at
Ruweyha, while indigenous tower-like tombs with stone pyramidal roof
and ornately carved string courses are at Kaper Pera (al-Bara). Elsewhere,
such as at Jerusalem and Scythopolis, built tombs with tessellated pave-
ments have been excavated. That at Jerusalem, with an Armenian inscrip-
tion, has been identified as the burial place of the mother of the
mid-sixth-century general Artabanes who served in North Africa. 62
Monastic tombs have been noted above.

III. RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

i . Churches

In function, churches were either congregational, or pilgrimage shrines, or
monastic. They were built in cities and villages, in forts and monasteries.
Chapels were added to churches, dwellings and barracks. In addition to
churches built with imperial or other official support, many were financed
privately, a form of public benefaction which came to supplant the more
traditional forms of civic responsibility borne by the curial class. At the
village of Kaper Barada, in northern Syria, various parts of a church are
inscribed with separate dedications, indicating piecemeal subscription

61 Ravenna: Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 137—8; Constantinople: Mango,
Studies on Constantinople v. 53; Toulouse: Mackie (1994).

62 Constantinople: Deckers and Sergadoglu (1995); Mango (1977) 307—15; Syria: Tate (1992) 67—9;
Jerusalem and Scythopolis: Mango, M. M. (1984) vii.a.io 6th; viii.a.i 567.

956 3 1 - building and architecture

payment. Consequently, cities had dozens of churches — Justinian built or
rebuilt thirty-three at Constantinople alone — and large villages had several:
in the provinces of Arabia and Syria, by the early seventh century, Umm
idj -Djemal had fifteen churches, Androna had ten, and Rihab had eight,
five of which were built between 594 and 623. The relatively small village
of Dar Qita had three (Fig. 42). 63

Architecturally, church building is less complicated than building baths,
where there are functional constraints imposed by plumbing and heating,
combined with considerable choice in the shape and arrangement of the
various components that make up the progression from cold to tepid to
hot chambers (Figs. 47—8). The requirements of the church, whether con-
gregational or memorial, were simpler. For the congregational type, the
faithful’s need for simultaneous participation in a service demanded a
single space, while subsidiary spaces such as the baptistery were not neces-
sarily used in sequence with the main church, and did not require direct
communication with it (Figs. 41—2, 57, 59, 62). For the memorial church,
the venerated place or saint’s tomb provided an architectural focus, and
additional space was required for pilgrims to circulate and pray in, and for
services to be performed in (Figs. 5 6-7). 64

Architecturally, churches were of two types — longitudinal and central-
ized — the first remaining the primary form of western church architecture,
the second becoming that of the east. In late antiquity, the basilica was the
standard form of church. In the western empire Constantine used it at
Rome both for his cathedral, the Lateran, and for the memorial church of
St Peter. Simultaneously, and independently of Constantine, a basilica was
built in the eastern empire, then under the emperor Licinius, at Tyre, as
described by Eusebius of Caesarea. Yet centralized structures also
appeared at the outset in the eastern empire — Constantine built the cathe-
dral of Antioch as an octagon, and he used centralized forms for the focal
part of the pilgrimage shrines of the Nativity Church at Bethlehem and the
Holy Sepulchre at Jerusalem. 65

(a) The longitudinal church: the basilica and the hall church

The Roman civil basilica, which continued to be built in the secular sphere
during late antiquity, had been adopted and adapted for church architecture
by the time of Constantine, if not before. In its ecclesiastical form it occa-
sionally had a single aisle (in which case it is termed a ‘hall church’), but the
great majority of church basilicas were divided into three (Fig. 60) or five
(Fig. 56) aisles by piers or big monolithic columns. Most also had a timber
roof, with or without a coffered ceiling below, although in areas where long

63 Kaper Barada, Rihab: Mango, M. M. (1984) 1.B.41 399—402; vi.B.51; Thantia (Umm idj-Djemal):
Lassus (1947) 60—2; Androna: Buder (1920) 47, 52—62; Constantinople: Mango, Studies on Constantinople
1.126. 64 On church architecture and liturgy see Mathews (1971).

65 Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 17—44; Mango, Byzantine Architecture 5 8—61.

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

957

(a)

Fig. 5 5 Longitudinal sections of (a) Ravenna, cathedral church, showing western features of a long
nave and clerestory wall above colonnade (as in the eighteenth century; by Amadesi Buonamici, 1733);
(b) Thessalonica, Acheiropoietos church of c. 470, showing eastern features of a shorter nave and
upper-storey colonnade opening into a gallery above each side aisle. (From Krautheimer, Early
Christian and Byzantine Architecture fig. 25)

timbers were unobtainable, masonry vaults replaced them. The basilica was
equally popular in city and village (Figs. 41—2, 5 5—6, 60—1). At least six were
built in the Syrian village of Androna, and, although Constantinople is better
known for its centralized or domed churches (Sts Sergius and Bacchus, St
Irene, and St Sophia) (Figs. 5 8—9), timber-roofed basilicas were built there
too in the fifth and sixth century: St John Studios, St Mary Chalkoprateia, the
Blachernae church, and those unearthed at Beyazit and in the Saray. 66

Although all of the same basic type, there were many differences across
the empire in the details of the basilica’s design. For instance (Fig. 5 5),
western basilicas tend to be longer than eastern ones. In the east there were

66 Mango, Byzantine Architecture G 1—79; Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 74— 101 .
Androna: Buder (1919, 1920) n B, 47, 52—62; Constantinople: Mathews (1971) nos. 5,15, 34, 39; Procop.
Buildings 1 . 3 . 1 — 5 .

958 3 1 - building and architecture

often galleries over the aisles, which made the nave relatively dark and
reduced the amount of wall space available for decoration, whereas in the
west the absence of galleries allowed a clerestory wall above the nave.
There is also considerable variation in the number (basically one or three;
Figs. 58, 61) and form of the sanctuary rooms: the end wall might be
straight (Fig. 42: two churches), polygonal (Fig. 58) or curved, and, if
curved, this apse might be inscribed within the outer end wall (Fig. 6 1) or
project beyond it (Fig. 57). Trefoil sanctuaries are also known.
Constantinopolitan churches are noted for polygonal apses and the lack of
lateral sanctuary chambers (Figs. 58—9). The congregational church archi-
tecture in the villages of the adjacent provinces of Syria Prima and Secunda
has been compared. Churches in both groups are primarily basilical and
have a tripartite sanctuary (Fig. 42), but those in the second group have gal-
leries, inscribed semicircular apses, and narthexes. 67

In the west — at Rome and Milan — some basilicas of the fourth century
were provided with a transept in front of the sanctuary. Variants of this
plan reappear in the fifth century at Tarragona in Spain, as well as in the
east in pilgrimage shrines (St Demetrius at Thessalonica (Fig. 56) and St
Menas near Alexandria) and congregational churches (at Perge and Side in
Asia Minor, at Epidauros, Nea Anchialos and Corinth in Greece). In some
churches of cruciform plan — such as that of Symeon Stylites the Elder (at
Qal'at Sim'an near Antioch, c. 470) — each arm of the cross was a basilica.
Double basilicas, built side by side, were popular in late antiquity in the
west. In some Syrian basilicas strong masonry piers, widely spaced,
replaced monolithic columns as the main means of support of the nave
walls, thus opening up the space between the central nave and aisles, and
affording a more unified area comparable to that of the centralized church
(Fig. 61). The basilica could also be combined with a centralized plan, car-
rying a dome on four massive piers, as in St Irene at Constantinople, or a
wooden pyramidal roof, as restored at Germia and Alahan in Asia Minor.
In both types, the central bay has lateral arcades between the four piers and
the longitudinal axis is extended to the west by two bays. Justinian’s St
John’s at Ephesus (Fig. 57) and Basilica B at Philippi in Thrace combined
elements of the transept basilica with the domed centralized building. 68

(b) The centralized church

In plan, the centralized church is based on a square formed by the internal
supports for the roof, which may be a pyramid in wood or a dome in either
wood or masonry supported on pendentives (Fig. 59a H) or squinches. In
practice, the early Byzantine centralized church is a double shell building

67 Mainstone (1988) 141; Tchalenko, Villages 11, pis. xi— xn.

68 Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture , 67—213; Mango, Byzantine Architecture
1 54—60; Mango (1986).

Fig. 56 Thessalonica: (a) reconstruction and (b) plan of the pilgrimage church of the martyr St
Demetrius as built in the fifth or sixth century. The transept at the east end was a feature of
earlier martyrial churches at Rome; the hexagonal shrine of Demetrius (S) stood in the nave
near the north arcade. (From Mango, Byzantine Architecture figs. 78— 9)

960

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

Fig. 57 Ephesus, plan of the pilgrimage church of St John the Evangelist as it was rebuilt with dome
by Justinian by 565. (B = baptistery; C = ciborium; S = synthronon.) (From Foss (1979) fig. 34)

with an outer ambulatory or aisle surrounding the inner nave; the sanctu-
ary, whether a single room or three, projects to the east . 69

A series of aisled tetraconch and related churches was built in the eastern
provinces between the later fifth and the mid sixth century. These had an
inner chamber defined by colonnades, surrounded by an ambulatory.
Churches of this design have been found in the provincial capitals of
Apamea, Arnida, Rusafa and Bostra, as well as in the cities of Seleucia Pieria,

69 Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 1 5 3—70; Mango, Byzantine Architecture 87—96,
101—23, 132—40.

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

961

Beroea and Zorava. Before the recent discovery of a second aisled tetra-
conch at Bostra, these churches had all been identified as cathedrals under
the patriarchate of Antioch, where the cathedral initiated by Constantine
(327—41) was likewise built on a centralized plan — that of an octagon with
wooden dome — of which only a general written description survives. Of
these churches, only that at Apamea had central supports strong enough to
take a masonry dome. The L-shaped piers in the others probably offered
sufficient support only for thin upper walls under a light roof in wood. 70

Two other churches of the sixth century may be compared with the aisled
tetraconch churches of the eastern provinces: Sts Sergius and Bacchus, built
at Constantinople by Justinian in 524—7, and S. Vitale at Ravenna, built
between c. 526 and 547. Sts Sergius and Bacchus is a variant of the Bostra
group of aisled tetraconches in that its inner chamber and ambulatory are
inscribed in a square building with internal diagonal corner niches (Fig. 5 8).
The inner chamber is composed of eight wedge-shaped piers between which
four diagonal columnar exedrae alternate with three straight colonnades and
the arched opening into the eastern apse. The eight piers support a masonry
melon dome divided by ribs into sixteen segments. The dome does not rest
on pendentives, but rises from the walls built above the eight supporting
arches. The upper arcades of the nave, which open into the galleries, rest on
a richly carved flat entablature which incorporates a verse inscription in raised
lettering. Originally the church opened on the north side into the palace of
Hormisdas and on the south into the basilical church of Sts Peter and Paul
(built in 519) with which it shared a narthex, atrium and propylaeum. 71

Entered across an atrium and through a double-apsed oval narthex,
S. Vitale at Ravenna differs from the centralized churches discussed so far
in being octagonal both in its inner chamber and outer walls. As in Sts
Sergius and Bacchus, the inner octagon is composed of eight wedge-
shaped piers, but here seven columnar exedrae and the sanctuary open
between them. S. Vitale is eastern in style, rather than Italian, in its inclu-
sion of gallery over the cross-vaults of the ambulatory, in its marble deco-
ration, and in its walls, built of thin bricks with thick mortar joints rather
than the local short, thick bricks. The dome, however, is distinctly
Ravennate, made of earthenware tubes laid in horizontal courses, rather
than of brick. Unlike the low-slung dome of Sts Sergius and Bacchus, the
dome of S. Vitale rests on a drum pierced by eight windows over a zone of
squinches between its eight lower arches. 72

What may have been the largest church built at Constantinople before
Justinian’s St Sophia was the church of St Polyeuctus erected by Anicia

70 Kleinbauer (1973).

71 Mango, Byzantine Architecture 10 1—7; Mango, Studies on Constaninople xin— xiv.

72 Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 169—70; Mango, Byzantine Architecture 132—4,
138, 140.

ig. 5 8 Constantinople: (a) isometric drawing and (b) plan of Sts Sergius and Bacchr
fustinian in 524—7. In contrast to most aisled tetraconch churches, the increased nur
r eight of the internal piers of this church provided an adequate support for a masoi
(From Mango, Byzantine Architecture figs, ioq— 10)

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

963

Juliana. Now destroyed, its substructures and debris (including profuse
exotic sculptural decoration) have been excavated. Its plan and elevation
have been reconstructed as a centralized church with a dome on massive
piers surrounded on four sides by aisles, narthex and sanctuary, all of about
equal widths. On the north and south sides of the central space stood a pair
of two-storey exedrae composed of three niches with a pier in between.
The spaces around the domed bay would have been covered with barrel or
cross-vaults. 73

St Sophia, Constantinople, built in 532—7 to replace the cathedral of
Theodosius II — a timber-roofed basilica dedicated in 415, which was
burned down in the Nika riot — represents a high point in Byzantine tech-
nological achievement (Fig. 59, and Fig. 34, p. 904 above). The design of
St Sophia has been described as achieved by splitting Sts Sergius and
Bacchus (Fig. 5 8) in half and inserting a central dome. 74 St Sophia’s dome
on pendentives, 100 Byzantine feet (31 metres) in diameter, stands 56
metres above floor level. The webs between the forty dome ribs are
pierced by forty windows. The four main and four secondary piers are of
stone up to the springings of the gallery vaults; the four buttress piers are
of stone up to the springing of the aisle vaults. The arches, vaults, semi-
domes, pendentives and dome are constructed of brick, while the spring-
ing course of the dome is a cornice of Proconnesian marble. The
monolithic marble columns of die galleries do not stand directly above
those at ground level, but redistribute the vertical loads from above.
When the church was first built, the nearest comparable domed space was
that of the Pantheon in Rome, which was completely centralized, its
hemispherical dome set on a cylindrical base of walls. By contrast, St
Sophia is a complex domed structure which combines the centrality of an
aisled tetraconch with the axiality of a normal basilica. A primary system
of masonry (Fig. 59a), located mainly within the nave, carries die princi-
pal weight load, and secondary systems, mosdy widiin the enveloping
spaces (narthexes, aisles and galleries) support only diemselves.

The technological achievement in building St Sophia was, however,
hawed: twenty years after completion its dome collapsed and had to be
rebuilt. Most scholars attribute the collapse of this original dome to its
shallow pitch, which directed its force outwards, creating lateral pressure
against the four main piers. According to Agathias, the new dome was built
taller, and thus its weight is transmitted downwards in a more vertical path,
reducing lateral pressure. However, the dome again collapsed in part in the
tenth and in the fourteenth century, so that the present structure incorpo-
rates several stages of construction, while retaining the profile of the dome
as rebuilt after 5 5 7. 75

73 Harrison (1989). 74 Mango, Byzantine Architecture 106—21, 123. 75 Mainstone (1988).

964 3 1 - building and architecture

Fig. 59 Constantinople: (a) drawing and (b) plan of St Sophia as rebuilt by Justinian, 5 32—57. The
drawing by R. Mainstone shows the primary structural system with the secondary systems cut away.
(A, C = main arches; B = upper north and south arches; D = east and west barrel vaults;

E = exedrae semidome arches; F = exedrae semidomes (cut away at the top); G = main eastern
semidome (western counterpart cut away to show better the structure behind); H = pendentives
(western ones cut away to show structure behind); a = pier projections.)

(From Mainstone (19 88) ill. 88 and Mango, Byzantine Architecture fig. 1 1 5)

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE

965

Liturgical furnishings in the church included the chancel screen, altar,
ciborium, synthronon and ambo or bema (Figs. 57, 60). Texts attest to
their being covered with sheets of silver; some examples have been dis-
covered in Lycia. Unlike the medieval iconostasis, the late antique screen
fencing off the chancel was relatively open, being composed of colon-
nettes supporting an entablature and closed by low parapet panels. The
altar was normally a marble slab resting on four colonnettes. The syn-
thronon, which existed only in congregational churches, was a curved,
stepped bench for clergy, built against the apse wall and resembling the
sophist’s bema. 76

The congregational church nave also had a stone ambo or pulpit which
was used for readings during the mass. The ambo was composed of an oval
elevated platform reached by two flights of stairs and enclosed by curved
parapet slabs. It was connected with the chancel by means of a walled
passage, the solea. A different liturgical arrangement prevailed in parts of
northern Syria, where congregational churches in thirty-three cities and vil-
lages — basilicas, aisled tetraconches and hall churches — had instead a U-
shaped bema composed of a large low platform, normally apsed, which
was equipped with a synthronon and pulpit (Fig. 60). While it appears to
combine both these features as found in other churches, the exact function
of this bema, which occupied a large part of the nave, remains unclear,
although it was probably used for readings. 77

(d) Annexes: martyrial chapels and baptisteries

The influence of the cult of saints and relics on the planning of the ordi-
nary congregational church is demonstrated by the addition, often near the
sanctuary, of a martyrial chapel to hold reliquaries. In northern Italy and
southern Gaul these chapels were often cruciform or trefoil in plan, while
in northern Syria an existing south chamber in or adjacent to the tripartite
sanctuary was used, and sometimes enlarged, for this purpose (Figs. 60—1).
In North Africa, relics were often housed in an apse situated opposite the
main apse. 78

Prominent among the annexes of congregational and pilgrimage
churches was the baptistery, which was already part of the third-century
house church at Dura Europos. Architecturally, the baptistery was
centred on the font or pool which was sunk in the floor; the building itself
(externally and/or internally) could be square (Fig. 42), round, cruciform
(Fig. 41) or octagonal (Figs. 57, 59, 62) in plan, possibly ringed by an
ambulatory (Figs. 57, 62), and was often domed. Octagonal baptisteries

16 Xydis (1947); Boyd (1992) 31— 4, figs. S5 5.1— S69.1. 77 Xydis (1947); Tchalenko (1990).

78 Krautheimer, Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture 69, 79, 131— 2, 144 and n. 46, 196—8; Lassus
( T 947 ) 167-83-

9 66

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

Fig. 60 Jirade in the Jabal Zawiye in Syria, isometric reconstruction of a village church built in the
fifth century, showing the liturgical furnishings including the altar, the chancel-screen, the
U-shaped bema in the nave and the reliquaries in the north aisle and north-east chamber.

(R = reliquary.) (From Tchalenko (1979) pi. 299)

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE 967

Fig. 61 Behyo in the Jabal il Ala in Syria, isometric drawing of a village church built probably in the
first half of the sixth century. In contrast to the Jirade church (Fig. 60 ), which has closely spaced
columns supporting the lateral arcades, this church has widely spaced piers which open up the space
between nave and aisles. (R = reliquary.) (From Tchalenko, Villages pi. cxiv)

were built in the fifth century at the Lateran cathedral in Rome, in the
sixth century at St Sophia’s cathedral in Constantinople (Fig. 59), at
Marseilles and at the pilgrimage churches of St John at Ephesus (Fig. 57),
St Symeon Stylites (Qal'at Sim'an) near Antioch (Fig. 62) and St Menas
near Alexandria. The two built for the orthodox and Arian cathedrals at
Ravenna are still elaborately decorated with mosaic. The two baptisteries

968

31. BUILDING AND ARCHITECTURE

Fig. 62 Telanissos, pilgrimage shrine of St Symeon Stylites the Elder (Qal'at Sim'an). Isometric
drawing of (a) baptistery with adjoining basilical chapel built in c. 475—90 by the technites Agapius and
others and (b) its pool. (From Tchalenko, Villages pis. lxxv— lxxvi)

RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE 969

in the village of Dar Qita were built or modified in 5 1 5 and 5 66 respec-
tively (Fig. 42). 79

2. Synagogues

The synagogue had similar architectural requirements to the church, as it was
a place for prayer and reading the Torah, as well as a house of assembly.
Attached to its main building could also be a ritual bath, an infirmary and a
hostel. Out of some 120 synagogues known, at least 100 are situated in the
Holy Land. The largest, however, was excavated at Sardis in Asia Minor. This
was probably a secular building which was acquired and converted for use as
a synagogue. Like many others, it was basilical in form. Other diaspora syn-
agogues from the Roman period have been excavated at Ostia near Rome,
Naro near Carthage and Elche in Spain, and at Stobi, Corinth, Aegina, Delos,
Priene, Miletus, Dura Europos, Apamea and perhaps Mopsuestia in Cilicia,
Neocaesarea (Dibsi Faraj) on the Euphrates and Emesa (Homs) in Syria.
Further diaspora synagogues are known from texts. Those at Antioch,
Callinicum, Edessa, Berytus and Gerasa were destroyed or converted to
other uses between 350 and 5 30. In the Holy Land, synagogues are referred
to in written sources or have been excavated in both city (including Caesarea,
Gaza, Jericho, Scythopolis, Tiberias, Gadara, Birosaba) and village, well-
known rural examples being those at Capernaum and Beth Alpha. 80

What most synagogues shared was prayer directed to Jerusalem (shared
also with eastern churches), and the use of Jewish symbols in the decora-
tion. The wall facing Jerusalem had an aedicula or niche on a raised plat-
form for holding the Torah scroll kept in an ark, as at Horvat Susiya in
Palaestina Prima (Fig. 63). Recent studies in synagogue architecture have
focused on the Torah shrine and on problems of dating. It now seems that,
as with other buildings, the sixth century was an important period for syn-
agogue building in the near east. The location of the Torah shrine within
the synagogue varied locally. By the fifth century, a church-like apse was
sometimes added to an existing synagogue to hold it, replacing the smaller
aedicula or niche; by the sixth century, the apse was an integral architectu-
ral feature, except in the north of Palestine. Synagogues were often elab-
orately decorated. The Jerusalem Talmud states that during the late third
and fourth century the walls and floors of synagogues started to be deco-
rated and that this was tolerated. Tessellated pavements (illustrating the
Temple facade or Torah ark flanked by the menorah, shofar, lulav and
ethrog; the zodiac; biblical scenes; animals) were certainly common in syn-
agogues between the fourth and the sixth century. 81

79 Khatchatrian (1982). 80 Levine (1981); Hachlili (1989).

81 Levine (1981) 15—18; Hachlili (1989) 1—6, 65—100.

sfc Assumed niche

^ m

Fig. 63 Horvat Susiya, plan of synagogue. (From Gutman, Yeivin, Netzer (1981) fig. p. 123)

CONCLUSION

971

IV. CONCLUSION

The period 425 to 600 is traditionally seen as active and innovative only in
the building of churches. However, although this was much more marked
in the east than in the west (reflecting the greater political stability and pros-
perity of the former), the fifth and sixth century also saw considerable con-
tinuity of the ideal and the reality of the ancient city. Entirely new
scaled-down versions were built into the reign of Justinian at Justiniana
Prima in the Balkans and Anastasiopolis/Dara in Mesopotamia, while in
many other cities porticoed streets, fora, baths, fountains and aqueducts
continued to be maintained or even built for public enjoyment, alongside
new and elaborately decorated palaces and private houses for the ruling
classes.

Continued prosperity and the growth of Christianity did, of course, also
foster a boom in church building, and churches did eventually come to
replace the public baths as the largest buildings of public congregation. In
church architecture our period saw the evolution of what was to prove an
enduring split — between the centralized church in the east and the longitu-
dinal basilica in the west. By the mid sixth century, the masonry dome
poised on piers had been perfected, exemplified by St Sophia at
Constantinople, which was to remain for centuries the largest and most
structurally complex church in Christendom. The recent introduction of
monasticism occasioned the development of a communal architecture
which in a rural setting recalled the Roman villa.

Up until the seventh century, in the east at least, new architectural forms
evolved slowly out of old, with no obvious breaks in continuity and devel-
opment. Continuous traditions of urban life, combined in many regions
with favourable economic and political conditions, ensured that this was so.
Only in the troubles that beset seventh-century Byzantium did the scale of
all building, outside the Moslem east, decline dramatically; and only then
were a number of traditional forms of building abandoned for ever.

CONCLUSION

No other volume of The Cambridge Ancient History raises such major ques-
tions of periodization or historical interpretation as Volume XIV, the last
in the series. Indeed, the very decision to extend the original coverage of
the series by two extra volumes and to allow an overlap with the new
Cambridge Medieval History is an indication of the lively state of research on
this period and the variety of interpretative schemes currently proposed.
We can no longer be content with a simple ‘transition from classical antiq-
uity to the Middle Ages’, nor can we propose a single point where the line
between them may be drawn. The conventional date of the fall of the
Roman empire in the west, confidently placed by previous generations in
the year a.d. 476, was already found inadequate by Edward Gibbon, while
the lack of interest shown in the supposed event by contemporaries has
been noted as a problem by many historians. 1 ‘Transformation’ is now a
term more commonly used than ‘fall’ to describe the process of historical
change in the west from the last centuries of classical antiquity to the
Middle Ages, and the search for a chronological divide is felt with less
urgency than before as concentration focuses instead on a longer time-
scale of change. Meanwhile, the historic changes in eastern Europe in the
late twentieth century encouraged a re-examination of the processes which
led to the formation of Europe, and in particular a reconsideration of what
the very concept of Europe might entail. 2

Despite its similarity of title to the original version of The Cambridge
Ancient History, a series of fourteen volumes completed at the end of the
twentieth century ought indeed to look different from one that appeared
over sixty years ago. Volume XIV in particular is different in format. In part,
this is a function of the political geography of the period: given the conti-
nuity of Roman government in the east and the multiple changes taking
place in the west, a unitary narrative is no longer possible, and even the the-
matic chapters tend to concentrate on either western or eastern material.
Moreover, the undoubted vitality of urban life and the richness of the evi-

1 Momigliano (1973); Croke (1983). For the ‘Pirenne thesis’, see Pirenne (1937); Brown (1974);
Hodges and Whitehouse (1983). 2 Webster and Brown (1997); Davies (1996) introduction.

97 2

CONCLUSION

973

dence from some of the eastern provinces in the sixth century have given
the provincial section a distinct eastern emphasis.

Thus Volume XIV presents problems of organization and definition of
subject matter, covering as it does both the collapse of Roman government
in the west in the fifth century and the attempt of Justinian to reassert it
from Constantinople in the sixth. Justinian’s ‘reconquest’ was not straight-
forward, spectacular as it seemed in the early stages. The reconquest of
Vandal North Africa in a . d . 5 3 3—4 was swift and easy, but its consolidation
as an imperial province was to prove costly, and in the case of Italy
Justinian’s great endeavour met with military, logistical and financial
difficulties of such magnitude that the war lasted for nearly twenty years.
The government of the resulting province was officially organized in a law
of a . d . 5 54; however, partly as a result of the long war and partly because
of new movements of peoples unforeseeable byjustinian, Italy remained
divided, and the west was fragmented among different kingdoms. There
were also consequences for the east from the attempt at reconquest: a
heavy pressure on resources and manpower, and resulting political cost.
Justinian and his successors continued to try to hold together an empire
which stretched from west to east but which was under almost constant
pressure from outside, and under centrifugal tension internally, both polit-
ical and ecclesiastical. 3

This volume perhaps lays more emphasis on the Roman and imperial
perspective than an explicitly medieval European history would do. Yet the
vigorous development of newer states and kingdoms in both east and west 4
makes the point of view from the periphery as important as that from the
centre, and this is also reflected here — for instance, in the rich material in
the provincial section. For this period in particular it is important to recog-
nize that there are legitimately different ways of seeing it. As in the case of
the debate between ‘continuity’ and ‘decline’, it is largely a matter of where
one places the emphasis and why.

For previous generations, and even before Edward Gibbon’s Decline and
Fall, the historiography of the Roman empire was pervaded by the concept
of ‘decline and fall’. The reasons have been constantly debated, and the rival
claims of internal factors and external pressures weighed up against each
other; the French historian Andre Piganiol, for example, famously claimed
that Rome did not die but was assassinated, whereas in the Marxist analysis
of Geoffrey de Ste Croix the empire was preyed upon from within by its
own contradictions and inequalities. 5 There are indeed a number of possible
turning-points, such as the Roman defeat at Adrianople in 378. Rome itself
was sacked in 410. But the end of an empire is not always signalled by a

3 Cf. Brown (1976). 4 For the east see Fowden, Empire to Commonwealth.

5 Piganiol (1947); de Ste Croix (1981); see Brown (1967).

974

CONCLUSION

dramatic event like the dismantling of the Berlin Wall. Scholars are uncer-
tain whether to lay more stress on the military impact of the barbarians or
on the long-term process of acculturation whereby they were gradually
brought within the Roman world. In either case, as several contributors to
these volumes demonstrate, the barbarians gradually developed their own
distinct identities during this process, and their historians used methods
such as chronicle, chronography and genealogy to bestow upon them a his-
torical past to rival that of Rome . 6 This creation of new identities is an
important feature of the period, not confined to the west or to the new
peoples: in the sixth century the Syrian Monophysites in the east redefined
themselves as Jacobites, and a hundred years later the Arabs who followed
Muhammad acquired a new identity and a new religion capable of lasting
until the present day.

A straightforward concept of ‘fall’ in relation to the Roman empire is in
any case difficult, in that the empire based on Constantinople survived. In
the sixth century, even though its everyday language was Greek, Justinian’s
empire was still recognizably Roman, its administrative, fiscal and legal
apparatus similar in essentials to the system developed under Diocletian
and Constantine. The official titulature of the emperor had not changed,
and Justinian saw himself as the restorer of the Roman past, an aspiration
warmly endorsed, even if Justinian was criticized in the execution, by the
contemporary writer and former bureaucrat, John the Lydian . 7 By the sixth
century, Constantinople was a city of perhaps half a million, filled not only
with churches and palaces, but also with a panoply of traditional late
Roman buildings . 8 Even though the events of the seventh and eighth
century, especially the Arab conquests and the consequent loss of most of
the eastern provinces, critically undermined this sense of connection with
the Roman past, still for centuries to come the Byzantines continued to
think of themselves as Romans. It was only in the last period of the empire,
under the Palaeologan dynasty, that their intellectual heritage as ‘Hellenes’,
heirs of classical Greece, began to be admitted as worthy of celebration.
The challenge for the historian of the period covered in this last volume,
therefore, is to avoid subjective or tendentious categorization, even when
the terms are used by contemporaries, and to try instead to plot the many
shifts and nuances by which continuity of structures and mentality in fact
coexisted in dynamic relation with multiple change.

This problem of terminology is especially sharply posed in the case of
the eastern empire. From what date is it reasonable to call the emperors in
Constantinople and the inhabitants of the eastern empire Byzantines? The
question has been much debated among Byzantinists, and two main answers
have been given: either the sole reign of Constantine or the founding of

6 Goffart (1988); Heather (1989). 7 Maas , John Lydus. 8 Mango, Developpement.

CONCLUSION

975

Constantinople (a.d. 324 and 3 30), or the early seventh century, to coincide
with the reign of Heraclius (a.d. 610—41) and the Arab conquests. 9 There
are indeed good reasons why those with a focus on the eastern empire, and
especially its religious history, might want to start with Constantine, and why
the military, economic and administrative changes of the seventh century
might also seem to mark a realistic turning-point. 10 However, common
usage is in practice inconsistent, and even those who prefer the later date
commonly use the term Byzantine to refer, say, to the reign of Justinian,
while most Roman historians would find it unnatural to refer to Constantine
as Byzantine; in practical terms, the pivotal period is probably the fifth
century, when the western empire ceased to exist, leaving only an eastern,
‘Byzantine’ empire. But there is indeed a danger of seeming to prejudge the
relevant issues in imposing a consistent mode of reference, and there has
therefore been no aim in this Volume to introduce a rigid periodization.
Indeed, that would be contrary to the approach taken by many of the con-
tributors; overlap of terminology is therefore not only to be expected but
also in due measure to be welcomed.

Perhaps one of the most striking features of our period is the growing
disparity in apparent prosperity, in both town and country, between the east
and the west. In contrast to the situation in the west, some of the eastern
Mediterranean provinces in the sixth century display signs of a prosperity
hardly equalled previously; this is true especially of Palestine and modern
Jordan. 11 The basis of this prosperity and the extent to which it was still to
be found at the end of the sixth century are the subject of some discus-
sion, as is the scale and significance of the evidence for long-distance trade
across the Mediterranean. 12 But it is in general the case that the period saw
a shift of wealth and authority to the south and east. In part, this must be
due to the disruption caused by barbarian invasion and settlement in the
west, but it must also have been brought about by the heavy investment of
resources in the east which had been a feature of the Roman empire since
the third century. Doctrinal and political differences between east and west
— for example, in attitudes towards the Vandal regime in North Africa —
were to some degree sharpened by these underlying economic factors, and
they must also in part explain the political, military and cultural strength of
the east in the sixth century.

Another way of viewing the period covered in Volumes XIII and XIV,
or perhaps more accurately from Volume XII onwards, is as ‘the age of late
antiquity’, 13 a period broadly defined as running from the later third century

9 Kazhdan and Constable (1982). Whittow (1996) chooses to begin at a.d. 600.

10 Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century.

11 Cameron and King (1994); Whittow (1990); Walmsley (1996). 12 Wickham (1988).

13 Especially since Brown (1971), on which see the debate £ The world of late antiquity revisited’ in
Symbolae Osloenses 72 (1997): 5—90. See now Bowersock, Brown, Grabar (1999).

976 CONCLUSION

a.d. to perhaps the early seventh century, and with a culture or cultures cov-
ering, as well as the Mediterranean area, also the bordering regions from
Britain and northern Europe all the way to Mesopotamia and the hinter-
land of Iran. The Christian kingdoms of Georgia, Armenia, Ethiopia and
Axum and the civilization of south Yemen have also been seen as falling
within this orbit, particularly in view of the influence upon them of
Byzantine imperial culture and religion; indeed, one of the more intriguing
features of the period is the extent to which Christian influences were felt
in pre-Islamic Arabia. The particular advantages of this way of defining
and approaching the period lie in the very avoidance of potentially inap-
propriate categories and subjective and moral terms, and the possibility of
an expansive and multiform mode of description equal to the pluriformity
of the evidence. It is an approach particularly suited to cultural history, but
perhaps less so to structures of government, or economic and military
history. Nevertheless, it offers a powerful model within which to encom-
pass historical diversity, and a way of looking at the period which is appeal-
ing and recognizable to many modern readers for its multiculturalism and
stress on variety.

Questions of interpretation are especially urgent in relation to certain
kinds of contemporary evidence, including visual art. In this field, tradi-
tional analysis based on the perceived aesthetics of style is particularly apt
to lead to subjective judgements about the differences between classical and
medieval or Byzantine art, and the reasons for the supposed transition
from one to the other. Study of this material needs to be underpinned by
a concern for issues of patronage and production and by a greater willing-
ness to take late antique art on its own terms for what it is, rather than for
what the modern interpreter thinks it should be. In art history, too, there-
fore, new models of interpretation are evolving, while historians of late
antiquity in turn are today working with a heightened consciousness of the
importance of visual and material evidence. It is possible to cite, for
example, the lively and varied architectural developments of the period,
and the way in which images, especially religious images, were coming to
carry an increasing charge of meaning for contemporaries, a precursor to
the intense quarrels over their status during the succeeding centuries . 14 If
some late antique art looks crude by comparison with the art of classical
antiquity , 15 in other cases new artistic forms took shape, indicative of great
variety and local skill. Continued contact across the Mediterranean and
between Byzantium and the east meant that images in the Byzantine style
were to be found in Rome in the sixth and seventh century, that fine
exmples of silver dishes and utensils, one of the most impressive legacies
of late antiquity, have places of origin as far apart as Britain, Syria and

14 Cormack (1997). 15 But see ch. 30 (Cormack), pp. 884— 917 above.

CONCLUSION

977

Sasanian Persia, and that impressive mosaic floors with mythological or
classicizing themes were being laid across the empire, from Spain in the
west to Cyprus, Antioch and Apamea in Syria, and in many places in
Palestine and modern Jordan. We now know that some Christian commu-
nities in the eastern provinces were building large new churches and laying
elaborate mosaic floors even long after the establishment of Umayyad
rule . 16

It is possible to see in recent scholarship evidence of a breaking down
of barriers between traditionally distinct disciplines and their perceived
bodies of evidence. Historians of institutions are more ready to admit the
relevance of the visual, to realize the power of rhetoric or to draw on lit-
erary texts and documents from unexpected sources; religious history is no
longer necessarily treated as separate from other sorts of history. This
trend indeed seems to reflect the juxtapositions in late antiquity itself, a
matter not just of literary or artistic style but of the possibilities offered to
and seized by individual people. Thus a rich woman might pretend that she
was a beggar and dress in rags; one of the wealthiest couples in the Roman
world enrolled on the register of the poor at Jerusalem; a professor from
Bordeaux might become praetorian prefect; a former teacher of rhetoric
devoted his attention to the art of communicating to the uneducated.
Christianization in particular turned things upside down. Surprising juxta-
positions give the period life and vigour: a man of senatorial rank hiding
away in the desert; an obscure Cretan who became consul; a holy man in a
loincloth who thought it clever to humiliate a religious woman by asking
her to remove all her clothes in public. Rioting over religious issues coex-
isted in late-fourth-century Rome with the traditional life of the Roman
senate, while in contrast at Constantinople the court in the early fifth
century could be described as being like a nunnery. Men and women were
segregated, as at the funeral of Macrina, yet could become lifelong friends,
like Jerome and the loyal Paula, of whom Palladius quotes Posidonius as
remarking that, if she were to die first, at least she would be spared Jerome’s
bad temper . 17

It is deceptively easy in the face of such abundant evidence to think of
the period as characterized above all by the progress of Christianization.
Yet the life and vigour of late antique paganism — or, as some historians
prefer, polytheism — is one of the striking discoveries of recent scholarship.
The great oracular shrines which Eusebius tried so hard to pretend were
dead and silent still attracted visitors in the fourth century. The emperor
Julian may have been the only pagan emperor after Constantine (and was
vilified by the church for it), but the Neoplatonist Academy at Athens
entered one of its most brilliant phases in the fifth and early sixth century,

16 Piccirillo (1993). 17 Pall. Hist. Laus. 36.

978 CONCLUSION

and pagan philosophers travelled in the sixth century on religious pilgrim-
ages to sacred spots in Syria and wrote important and lasting commentar-
ies on Aristotle . 18 How far Christianity had completely won over the
population at large by the late sixth century is still an open question: St
Nicholas of Sion in Lycia, like pope Gregory in Sardinia, found country
people prone to folk practices connected with sacred trees, and it was still
more than worth while for Christian literature to insist on the superiority
of the faith over ‘Hellenism’. Far from indicating an inexorable advance of
Christianity towards the position it occupied in the medieval world, this
diversity of belief and practice gives late antiquity a vividness and life
hardly paralleled in any other period. Another feature of the period is the
evident vigour of the well-to-do Jewish communities in Palestine,
confident and settled enough to build and decorate substantial synagogues,
and numerous enough to attract Christian suspicion and distrust during the
Persian invasions of the early seventh century. Christians themselves were
divided and sometimes persecuted by fellow Christians in the name of
religious unity. There was nothing monolithic about late antique religion.

Late antiquity was a time of change, mental and psychological. It was not
a revolution, not an enlightenment, not the discovery of a New World. But
the change did involve, as well as the closing in of some of the old, the shift-
ing of mental horizons and the construction of new imagined worlds. The
clearest sign of this change is in the breaking down of existing barriers, with
a corresponding sense of possibility. Yet a parallel struggle was going on to
control the many possibilities that were opening up . 19 It was both a psycho-
logical struggle and a struggle of cognition. This was still a world in which
Dionysos and Orpheus were very much alive, whether in imaginative recre-
ations in visual art, or in the exotic melange of memory and fancy that is
Nonnus’ Dionjsiaca, where the signs of the zodiac exercised a lively fascina-
tion, where astrologers at once sprang to mind when someone needed
advice, and where a philosopher could still appeal to the example of Heracles
and Asclepius, and hold up for imitation the teachings of Pythagoras. It was
a world in which synagogues in Galilee or elsewhere were decorated with a
rich profusion of plant life, zodiacal signs or even figures such as Orpheus . 20

It was not surprising that so many people tried so hard to lay down sure
guidelines. His disciples reported with admiration the loathing which St
Euthymius felt for heresy, spelling out with relish the six types which he
most detested. As the possibilities of error proliferated, so did the polem-
ics and the denunciations. Public confrontations took place under the aus-
pices of the emperor, as when a hundred or so eastern monks debated
Monophysitism in Constantinople in the early years of Justinian. Justinian
and his wife liked nothing better than to debate with the Monophysite

18 Chuvin, Chronique\ Tardieu (1990). 19 Lim (1995). 20 Levine (1981).

CONCLUSION

979

monks living in part of the imperial palace, while St Symeon Stylites the
Younger would engage astrologers in discussion from the top of his pillar.
Endless talking went on. Set answers were produced for the standard ques-
tions, but that did not stop it. Letters poured out whenever a dispute arose,
and one has the distinct impression that a good deal of enjoyment was to
be had from the excitement of the battle. We should not underestimate,
either, the sheer joy of problem-solving, the pleasure of interpreting the
texts, the fascination of the intellectual puzzle. A pleasure in dialectic or her-
meneutics for their own sake is palpable in some of the later theological lit-
erature. For some of the intellectual heavyweights, considerable satisfaction
must have lain in the activity itself. But no wonder lesser people were con-
fused, and needed whatever help they could get by way of instruction.

The moral and spiritual as well as the social landscape of the period is
laid open to view in the copious surviving written material. After centuries
of silence or at best of rhetorical displays exploiting misogynistic tradi-
tions, the difference between male and female became a topic of attention
in learned discourses. Were women to be regarded as having been made in
the image of God, or, as the apostle had said, only in that of man? Was the
union with God that was seen as the goal of women’s asceticism, too, to be
defined as a type of gnosis, or in a specifically female sense, in terms of
mystic marriage? Could real women escape implication in the sin of Eve ? 21
Whatever the injunctions in some of the texts, public figures in the world
of Christianity did not avoid, but rather sought out, certain — even if self-
consciously limited — kinds of association with women. In the early fifth
century, Palladius went out of his way to include a section in praise of
women in his Lausiac History, Evagrius Ponticus and others concerned
themselves with women religious , 22 and in the sixth century the empress
Theodora transformed herself from a theatre performer of dubious repu-
tation to a virtual saint of the eastern church. In the surviving, and espe-
cially in the eastern, literature — monastic tales as well as academic treatises

— a central place is taken by issues of the moral and practical relations
between the sexes, and the moral tone of family life. The proper exercise
of emotion, and of affection, was much discussed, as was the proper beha-
viour of married people and the remarriage of widows, the best education
for little girls and the correct behaviour of those women who elected to look
after male religious in supposedly innocent relationships. Peter Brown has
pointed to proper deportment as a major concern among contemporaries

— how to present oneself in a world of change ; 23 such preoccupations
ranked only second to worries about the future and the desire to control
the environment by resort to soothsayers, astrologers or holy men . 24

21 Clark (1993); Mattioli (1992). 22 Elm (1994).

23 Brown (1992); also Wimbush and Valantasis (1995). 24 Dagron (1981).

980

CONCLUSION

There is, indeed, also new evidence from excavation from which to
reconstruct the concerns and life of the time. The epigraphic record of late
antique cities like Aphrodisias in Caria and Ephesus in Asia Minor traces
their change from Roman imperial centres with confident local elites ready
to spend freely on civic adornment to Byzantine bishoprics, much dimin-
ished from their former glory; yet seat inscriptions help to reveal the prom-
inence of the Blue and Green factions during the fifth and sixth century, as
well as the hierarchical seating arrangement of different groups within the
city . 25 Elsewhere, recently discovered charred papyrus scrolls at Petra in
southern Jordan show that the city was the home of a substantial Christian
population in the sixth century, which engaged in agriculture and bore
names which mixed Greek and Arabic. Such evidence is centred on cities,
and the study of late antique urbanism is one of the liveliest fields in
modern scholarship . 26 There are some common features, to be found in
differing combinations across the Mediterranean — the decline of the tra-
ditional upper-class house, the reuse of earlier materials (to our eyes often
inappropriately), the abandonment of public buildings and spaces asso-
ciated with the urbanism of an earlier age in favour of impressive defen-
sive and ecclesiastical buildings, and, at the later end of the period,
subdivision of houses and the once-forbidden practice of burial within the
walls. Yet the occurrences vary in different areas, and the changes happen
at differing speeds. Cities in some areas continue to show signs of growth,
whereas others manifest decline. Constantly-growing evidence, as more
towns are excavated and studied, makes this an often bewildering as well as
fascinating area of study, and one in which no general view is as yet pos-
sible. Research over recent decades, on individual sites and on big interna-
tional projects like that at Carthage, has transformed our knowledge of late
antique pottery, whether amphorae or fine table-wares, often allowing very
precise dating and a clear idea of provenance . 27 It is becoming increasingly
possible to map detailed patterns of distribution, although, inevitably, the
mechanisms behind it remain the subject of active scholarly debate. At the
same time, we also know more about the countryside, including in some
cases the continuing prosperity of villages, from the growing number of
archaeological surveys, whether in Greece or North Africa, which examine
a small area over a long chronological period. And re-examination of
known evidence, as in the case of the villages of the limestone massif of
northern Syria, is changing older conclusions . 28

This is a period which has attracted much recent scholarship, and which
has seen considerable development in its analysis. From the relevant liter-
ature in English one could single out in addition to Jones’s Later Roman

25 See ch. 21 a (Roueche), pp. 570—87 above.

26 See e.g. Rich (1992); Cameron, Mediterranean World ch. 7; Christie and Loseby (1996); Brogiolo

(1997). 27 Hayes (1972); Giardina (1988). 28 See Tate (1992).

CONCLUSION

981

Empire of 1964 and the influential work of Peter Brown, the collection
edited by Arnaldo Momigliano in 1963, The Conflict between Paganism and
Christianity in the Fourth Century P Brown has followed Momigliano in
emphasizing the religious and moral changes in late antiquity, and these
have captured the imagination of many other scholars. There are also many
important and original works on individual topics. But there is no work as
yet which reinterprets the political and institutional history of the period
by integrating it fully with the large amount of work that has now been
done in other fields, whether artistic, literary or cultural. Perhaps it is still
too soon for such a large-scale synthesis. But in another sense a multi-
authored work, with chapters on the many and varied aspects of the period,
for which the evidence itself is so diverse, may be exactly what is needed
to convey an impression of the diversity and excitement of the period
itself. With Volume XIV we therefore leave the ancient world, not with the
sense of some inevitable passage to the Middle Ages, but rather with a
sense of open-endedness and possibility. It is doubtful whether, after the
spectacular and exhausting success of his campaigns against the Persians,
the emperor Heraclius had any idea that they would be followed by equally
spectacular Byzantine defeat and the retrenchment of imperial power in
the seventh century to a small area surrounding the city of Constantinople.
Those events and their interpretation belong more properly in another
volume and another series. No doubt part of the explanation for them does
lie at an earlier date, and indeed during the period with which we are con-
cerned here. But history does not proceed in accordance with some deter-
ministic scheme, and it is right that our history-books should recognize that
fact.

29 On Momigliano (1963) see Consolino (1995).

CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE

A.D.

Emperors

The West

The East

425

Theodosius II (408—50)

Reform of teaching in Constantinople

Valentinian III (425—5 5)

427

First commission to codify laws

428

Nestorius, patriarch of Constantinople

429

Vandals cross to Africa

451

Aspar and eastern army defeated by Vandals

First Council of Ephesus; deposition of Nestorius

432

Death of Augustine

435

Revolt of bagaudae in Armorica

Exile of Nestorius

436

Goths besiege Narbonne

438

Theodosian Code issued

439

Geiseric the Vandal captures Carthage

440

Vandals ravage Sicily

Yazdgard II attacked eastern provinces

441

Sueves control Baetica and Carthaginiensis

Victories for Attila in Balkans

443

Ascendancy of eunuch Chrysaphius

447

Sweeping successes of Attila in Balkans

449

Embassy to Attila

Second Council of Ephesus (the Robber Synod)

450

Marcian (450—7)

451

Attila invades Gaul; defeat at Catalaunian Plains

Council of Chalcedon

452

Attila attacks Italy; sack of Aquileia

453

Death of Pulcheria

Death of Attila

454

Valentinian III murders Aetius

Huns defeated at River Nedao

45;

Avitus (45 5-7)

Vandals sack Rome

457

Leo I ( 457 - 74 )

Aspar controls succession

Majorian (457—61)

Death of Symeon Stylites

460

Expedition of Majorian to Spain v. Vandals

461

Libius Severus (461—5)

Defeat of Majorian in Spain; Ricimer controls succession

467

Anthemius (467—72)

468

Failure of eastern expedition v. Vandals

471

Overthrow and death of Aspar

47 2

Death of Ricimer

473

Glycerius (473-4)

474

Zeno (474-91)
Nepos ( 474 - 5 )

Leo sends Nepos west to depose Glycerius

475

Romulus (475-6)

Rebellion of Orestes

Rebellion of Basiliscus; Zeno retires to Isauria

476

Basiliscus (usurper)

Odoacer deposes Romulus Augustulus
Visigoths capture Arles and Marseilles

Return of Zeno; exile and death of Basiliscus

48O

Death of Theoderic Strabo

482

Acacian schism divides Rome and Constantinople

Zeno issues Henotikon

484

Huneric persecutes Catholics

Rebellion of Ulus

489

Theoderic enters Italy

Theoderic the Amal leaves Balkans for Italy

491

Anastasius (49 1—5 1 8)

49 2

Rebellion in Isauria

493

Theoderic the Amal captures Ravenna and kills Odoacer

496

Anastasius deposes Euphemius of Constantinople

497

Suppression of Isaurian revolt

498

Abolition of Chrysargyron tax; coinage reform

502

Kavadh invades eastern provinces; siege of Amida

5°5

Truce on eastern frontier; construction of Dara

5°7

Clovis and Franks defeat Visigoths at Vouille

5 1 1

Clovis’ Catholic Council of Orleans
Division of Frankish kingdom on Clovis’ death

Anastasius deposes Macedonius of Constantinople

5 12

Deposition of Flavius of Antioch; Severus succeeds

V 3

First revolt of Vitalian

5 M

Defeat of Vitalian

518

Justin I (518-27)

End of Acacian schism

5 2 4

Execution of Boethius

526

Athalaric (526—34)

5 2 7

Justinian I (527—65)

528

Commission for codification of Law

A.D.

Emperors

The West

The East

529

First edition of Codex Iustinianus

530

Commission to codify Roman jurists

5 3 1

Accession of Khusro I, king of Persia

532

Nika riot; ‘Endless Peace’ with Persia

533

Belisarius defeats Vandals

Theopaschite Edict

Completion of Digest of Roman law, and Institutes

5 34

Pragmatic Sanction to regulate affairs of Africa

Second edition of Codex Iustinianus

Burgundian kingdom taken over by Franks
Regency of Amalasuintha in Italy

Triumph of Belisarius at Constantinople

535

Murder of Amalasuintha; Belisarius despatched to Italy

Consulship of Belisarius

536

Belisarius lands in Italy; capture of Naples
Belisarius occupies Rome

5 37

Siege of Rome

Dedication of rebuilt St Sophia

539

Goths capture Milan and massacre inhabitants
Franks invade Italy

540

Belisarius enters Ravenna

Khusro I attacks Romans; sack of Antioch
Basilius, the last annual consul

Jacob Baradaeus appointed bishop of Edessa; creation
of separate Monophysite hierarchy

542

Bubonic plague strikes Constantinople

544

Belisarius’ second expedition to Italy

546

Totila captures Rome

547

Pope Vigilius summoned to Constantinople

548

Death of Theodora

549

Recall of Belisarius

5 5 2

Arrival of Narses in Ravenna

Defeat and death of Totila at Busta Gallorum

5 5 3/4

Fifth Oecumenical Council at Constantinople

554

Pragmatic Sanction to regulate affairs of Italy

558

First contacts between Avars and Romans

559

Kutrigurs cross Danube; raid breaches Long Walls

561

Division of Frankish kingdom on Chlothar I’s death

562

Plot against Justinian; 50 Years Peace with Persia

Visigothic Kings

Vandal Kings

Frankish Kings

Rulers of Italy

Lombard Rulers

in Italy

Persian Kings

Theoderic I

419-51

Geiseric

428-77

Childeric

?— 481

Odoacer

476-95

Vahram V

421-58

Theoderic II

453—66

Huneric

477-84

Clovis

c. 481—

Theoderic

495-526

Yazdgard 11

438-57

Euric

466-84

Gunthamund

484-96

Chlothar I

511—61

Athalaric

526-54

Hormizd III

457-9

Alaric II

484-507

Thrasamund

496-523

Theoderic I

511-33

Theodahad

554-6

Peroz

459-84

Gesalic

507-1 1

Hilderic

523-30

Childebert I

511-58

Vitigis

556-40

Balash

484—8

Amalric

51 1— 31

Gelimer

5 3°— 3

Theodebert I

5 53-47

Totila

541-52

Alboin

568-72

Kavadh

488-531

Theudis

5 3 1_ 48

Theodebald

547-5 5

Cleph

57 2- 4

Khusro I

5 3 1 — 7 9

Theudisclus

548-9

Guntram

561-92

Ducal interregnum

574-84

Hormizd IV

579-90

Agila

549-5 5

Charibert 1

561-7

Authari

5 84-90

Vahram Tchobin

590— 1

Athanagild

551-68

Sigibert I

561-75

Agilulf

590—616

Khusro II

Liuva I

567-71

Chilperic

561-84

Leovigild

569—86

Childebert II

575-95/6

Reccared

586—601

Chlothar II

5 84-629

Theodebert 5 96-6 1 2

Theoderic II 596—613

Visigothic Kings

Vandal Kings

Frankish Kings

Rulers of Italy

Lombard Rulers

in Italy

Persian Kings

Theoderic I

419-51

Geiseric

428-77

Childeric

?— 481

Odoacer

476-95

Vahram V

421-58

Theoderic II

453—66

Huneric

477-84

Clovis

c. 481—

Theoderic

495-526

Yazdgard 11

438-57

Euric

466-84

Gunthamund

484-96

Chlothar I

511—61

Athalaric

526-54

Hormizd III

457-9

Alaric II

484-507

Thrasamund

496-523

Theoderic I

511-33

Theodahad

554-6

Peroz

459-84

Gesalic

507-1 1

Hilderic

523-30

Childebert I

511-58

Vitigis

556-40

Balash

484—8

Amalric

51 1— 31

Gelimer

5 3°— 3

Theodebert I

5 53-47

Totila

541-52

Alboin

568-72

Kavadh

488-531

Theudis

5 3 1_ 48

Theodebald

547-5 5

Cleph

57 2- 4

Khusro I

5 3 1 — 7 9

Theudisclus

548-9

Guntram

561-92

Ducal interregnum

574-84

Hormizd IV

579-90

Agila

549-5 5

Charibert 1

561-7

Authari

5 84-90

Vahram Tchobin

590— 1

Athanagild

551-68

Sigibert I

561-75

Agilulf

590—616

Khusro II

Liuva I

567-71

Chilperic

561-84

Leovigild

569—86

Childebert II

575-95/6

Reccared

586—601

Chlothar II

5 84-629

Theodebert 5 96-6 1 2

Theoderic II 596—613

BIBLIOGRAPHY

ABBREVIATIONS

Full references to editions of primary sources and standard collections can be
found in, for example, Lewis and Short, A Latin Dictionary , Liddell, Scott and Jones,
Greek Lexicon, and Prosopography of the Later Roman Empire, vols. i— in.

AA Auctores Antiquissimi

AAntHung Acta Antiqua Academiae Scientiarium Hungaricae

+ 4 ASS Acta Sanctorum, 71 vols. 1863-1940

AB Analecta Bollandiana

ACHCM Actes du Congres d’Histoire et de Civilisation dn Maghreb

AGO Acta Conciliorum Oecumenicorum, ed. E. Schwartz, Berlin,

1914-40; ]. Straub, Berlin, 1971-

ACOR American Centre for Oriental Research, Amman

Actes XI Cong. Int. Actes du XI Congres International dArcheologie Chretienne
dArch. Chret.

AHR American Historical Review

AJA American Journal of Archaeology

Anc.H.Bull. Ancient History Bulletin

Annales:ESC Annales: Economies, Societes, Civilisations

ANRW Aufstieg und Niedergang der romischen Welt, ed. H. Temporini

Ant. Afr. Antiquites Africaines

AO Acta Orient alls

APF Archiv fiir Papyrusforschnng und verwandte Gebiete

AR Archaeological Reports

ARCA Classical and Medieval Texts, Papers and Monographs,

Liverpool

AS Anatolian Studies

BAR British Archaeological Reports, Oxford

BASOR Bulletin of the American School of Oriental Research

BASP Bulletin of the American Society of Papyrologists

BF Bygantinische Forschungen

BGU Aegyptische Urkunden aus den Kdniglichen (later Staatlichen ) Museen

yu Berlin, Griechische Urkunden

BIFAO Bulletin de I’lnstitut Frangais dArcheologie Orient ale

BMGS Byzantine and Modern Greek Studies

987

988

ABBREVIATIONS

Byzantine Studies

BSAA

Bulletin de la Societe archeologique d’Alexandrie

BS4C

Bulletin de la Societe dArcheologie Copte

BSOAS

Bulletin of the School of Orien tal and African Studies

£ JZ-

Bytantion

Bytslavica

By^antinoslavica

Bygantinische Zeitschrift

CAG

Commentaria in Aristotelem Graeca, Berlin, 1891

CCSG

Corpus Christianorum Series Graeca

CCSL

Corpus Christianorum Series Latina

Cd’E

Chronique d’Egypte

CH4AN

Colloque internationale d’histoire et archeologie de lAfrique du Nord,
Actes

ChHist

Church History

GIG

Corpus Iuris Civilis 2 , ed. T. Mommsen, P. Kruger et ah, 3 vols.,
Berlin, 1928—9

GIL

Corpus Inscriptionum Latinarum

Codex Justinianus, ed. P. Kruger, Berlin, 1929

CLA

Codices Latini Antiquiores, ed. E. A. Lowe, Oxford, 1934-

Class, et Med.

Classica et Medievalia

CPh

Classical Philology

CPR

Corpus Papyrorum Raineri

Classical Quarterly

CRAI

Comptes rendus de lAcademie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres

CSCO

Corpus Scriptorum Christianorum Orientalium

CSEL

Corpus Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Latinorum

C.Th.

Codex Theodosianus , ed. T. Mommsen, Berlin, 1905

DOP

Dumbarton Oaks Papers

DBI

DiQonario biografico degli italiani

EHR

English Historical Review

EME

Early Medieval Europe

FHG

Fragmenta Historicorum Graecorum, ed. C. Muller

FIRA

Fontes Iuris Romani Anteiustiniani

GRBS

Greek, Roman and Byzantine Studies

EBst. Zeit.

Historische Zeitschrift

HSCP

Harvard Studies in Classical Philology

HThR

Harvard Theological Review

ICS

Illinois Classical Studies

IGLS

Inscriptions grecques et latines de la Syrie, Paris

ILS

Inscriptiones Latinae Selectae

Islamic Quarterly

EZRA

Ivra. Rivista international 'e di Diritto romano e antico

J4AR

Journal of the American Academy of Religion

JAOS

Journal of the American Oriental Society

JbAC

Jahrbuch fiirAntike und Christentum

JEA

Journal of Egyptian Archaeology

JEH

Journal of Ecclesiastical History

ABBREVIATIONS

989

JESHO

JFA

JHS

JJP

JOB

JRA

JR.AS

JRS

JSAI

JSS

jrn

Justinian, Nov.

MAMA
MChr
MEFR
MGH
Mus. Helv.

Mu s. Phil. Lond.
NMS

Num. Chron.

OCA

OCP

OLA

OMRO

OMS

Oxf. J. Arch.

PBA

PBSR

P. Cair.Masp.

PCPS

PGL

P.Herm.

P.Lond.

PLRE

PLS

P.Mich.

P.Mkhael.

P.Monac.

Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient

Journal of Field Archaeology

Journal of Hellenic Studies

Journal of Juristic Papyrology

farhhuch der Osterreichischen Byyantinistik

Journal of Roman Archaeology

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society

Journal of Roman Studies

Jerusalem Studies in Arabic and Islam

Journal of Semitic Studies

Journal of Theological Studies

Corpus Iuris Civilis III, Novellae, 6th edn, R. Schoell and W.

Kroll, Berlin, 1954

Monument a Asiae Minoris Antiqua

Chrestomathie der Papyrus kunde, Juristische Teil, ed. L. Mitteis
Melanges de I’Ecole frangaise de Rome (Moyen Age)

Monnmenta Germaniae Historiae
Museum Helveticum
Museum Philologicum Londiniense
Nottingham Medieval Studies
Numismatic Chronicle
Oriens Christianum
Orientalia Christiana Analecta
Orientalia Christiana Periodica
Orientalia Lovaniensia Analecta

Oudheidkundige Mededelingen vit hen Rijksmuseum van Oudheden te
Leiden

Opera Minora Selecta
Oxford Journal of Archaeology
Proceedings of the British Academy
Papers of the British School at Rome

Papyrus grecs d’epoque byyantine, Catalogue general des antiqnites du
Musee du Caire

Proceedings of the Cambridge Philological Society
Patrologia Graeca

A Patristic Greek Lexikon, ed. G. W H. Lampe

Papyri from Hermopolis and Other Documents of the Byzantine Period

Patrologia Latina

Greek Papyri in the British Museum

Prosopography of the Later Roman Empire I— III, Cambridge,

I 97 I_ 9 2

Pactns Legis Salicae
Michigan Papyri
Papyri Michaelidae

Bysgantinische Papyri in der Kdniglichen Hof und Staatsbib/iothek •ytt
Miinchen

Patrologia Orientals

99 °

ABBREVIATIONS

P.Oxy.

The Oxyrbynchus Papyri

PerP

Past and Present

P.Ross. Georg.

Papyri russischer und georgischer Sammlungen

PRyi

Ry lands Papyri

PSl

Papy ri Greet e Eatini, Pubblica^ioni della Sorietd Italiana per la
Ricerca dei Papiri Greet e Eatini in Egitto , 1912—

P. Warren

The Warren Papyri (Papyrologica Lugd.-Bat.) 1, ed. M. David

RAC

Reallexikon furAntike und Christentum

RBPH

Revue beige de philologie et de I’histoire

RDC

Revue de droit canonique

Pauly- Wissoiva—Rroll, Realengyklopadie der klassischen
Altertumsmssenschaft. Stuttgart, 1894-

REA

Revue des Etudes Anciennes

REB

Revue des Etudes Byzantines

REG

Revue des Etudes Grecques

Revue historique

RHE

Revue d’Histoire Ecclesiastique

RIDA

Revue Internationale des Droits de I’Antiquite

Sammelbuch griechischer Urkunden ausAegypten

SCH

Studies in Church History

SChret.

Sources Chretiennes

SCI

Scripta Classica Israelica

SCNAC

Sacrorum Conciliorum Nova et Anrplissima Collectio, ed. J. D. Mansi,
Florence, 175 9ff.

SDHI

Studia et Documenta Historiae et Intis

SEG

Siipplementum Epigraphicum Graecum

Studia Islamica

SRM

Scriptores Rerum Merovingjcanm

StPatr.

Studia Patristica

StudPal

Studien gitr Paldographie und Papyruskunde

TAPA

Transactions of the American Philological Association

TA 1 V

Tiibinger Atlas des Vorderen Orients

T&MByz

Travaux et Memories

TRE

Theologische Realensyk/opadie, ed. G. Krause and G. Muller,
Berlin, 1977 —

TRHS

Transactions of the Royal Historical Society

Texte und Untersuchungen

Vigiliae Christianae

WChr

U. Wilcken, Grundguge und Chrestomathie der Papyruskunde,
Historischer Teil, 11. Leipzig— Berlin, 1912

YCS

Yale Classical Studies

Z 4 S

Zeitschrift fir dgyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde

ZDMG

Zeitschrift der deutschen Morgenldndischen Gesellschaft

ZPE

Zeitschrift f ir Papyrologie und Epigraphik

ZRGGA

Zeitschrift der Savigny-Stiftungfur Rechtsgeschichte, Germanistische
Abteilung

ZRGR 4

Zeitschrift der Savigny-Stiftungfur Rechtsgeschichte, Romanistische
Abteilung

FREQUENTLY CITED WORKS

99 1

FREQUENTLY CITED WORKS

Allen, Evagrius. Allen, Pauline (1981) Evagrius Scholasticus the Church Historian.
Louvain

Bagnall, Egypt. Bagnall, R. S. (1993) Egypt in Eate Antiquity. Princeton, NJ
Bagnall et al.. Consuls. Bagnall, Roger S., Cameron, Alan, Schwartz, Seth, Worp, K.

A. (1987) Consuls of the Eater Roman Empire. Atlanta, GA

Bowersock, Hellenism. Bowersock, G. W. (1990) Hellenism in Eate Antiquity. Ann
Arbor, MI, and Cambridge

Brown, ‘Holy man’. Brown, Peter (1971) ‘The rise and function of the holy man in
late antiquity’j/ASAi: 80— 101 (= Brown, Society and the Holy 103-52)

Brown, Religion and Society. Brown, P. (1972) Religion and Society in the Age of Saint
Augustine. London

Brown, Society and the Holy. Brown, P. (1982) Society and the Holy in Eate Antiquity.
Berkeley and Los Angeles

Brown, Gentlemen and Officers. Brown, T. S. (1984) Gentlemen and Officers: Inperial
Administration and Aristocratic Power in Byzantine Italy A.D. yyq—Soo. London
Bury, ERE. Bury, J. B. (1923) History of the Eater Roman Empire from the Death of
Theodosius I to the Death of fustinian, 2 vols. London
Cameron, Alan, Circus Factions. Cameron, Alan (1976) Circus Factions: Blues and
Greens at Rome and Byzantium. Oxford

Cameron, Alan, Literature and Society. Alan Cameron (1985) Literature and Society in
the Early Byzantine World. London

Cameron, Averil, Changing Cultures. Averil Cameron (1996) Changing Cultures in
Early Byzantium. Aldershot

Cameron, Averil, Corippus. Corippus, In laudem Iustini minoris libri quattuor, ed. with
transl. and comm, by Averil Cameron (1976). London
Cameron, Averil, Mediterranean World. Cameron, Averil (1993) The Mediterranean
World in Eate Antiquity AD ygy—600. London
Cameron, Averil, Procopius. Cameron, Averil (1985). Procopius and the Sixth Century.
London

Cameron, Averil, Rhetoric of Empire. Cameron, Averil (1991) Christianity and the
Rhetoric of Empire: The Development of Christian Discourse. Berkeley and Los
Angeles

Capizzi, Carmelo, Giustiniano. Capizzi, Carmelo (1994) Giustiniano lira politica e reli-
gione. Milan

Carandini et al., Storia di Roma 111. Carandini, A., Cracco Ruggini, L., Giardina, A.

(1993) Storia di Roma hi. E'eta tardoantica, 1. Crisi e trasforma^ioni. Turin
Chadwick, Boethius. Chadwick, Henry (1981) Boethius. The Consolations of Music,
Logic, Theology and Philosophy. Oxford

Chuvin, P., Chronicle. Chuvin, P. (1990) A Chronicle of the East Pagans, Eng. transl. by

B. A. Archer of part 1 of Chuvin, Chronique (Revealing Antiquity 4).
Cambridge, MA, and London

Chuvin, Chronique. Chuvin, P. (1990) Chronique des derniers pollens: Ea disparition dupag-
anisme dans I’Empire romain, du regne de Constantin a celui de Justinien. Paris (2nd
edn 1991)

Dagron, Naissance. Dagron, G. (1974) Naissance d’une capitale: Constantinople et ses
institutions de yyo a qyi (Bibliotheque byzantine. Etudes 7). Paris

992 FREQUENTLY CITED WORKS

Downey, History of Antioch. Downey, G. (1961) A History of Antioch in Syria.
Princeton, NJ

Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul. Drinkwater, J. and Elton, H. (eds.)

(1992) Fifth-century Gaul: A Crisis of Identity? Cambridge
Ducellier, L’Eglise bygantine. Ducellier, Alain (1990) L’Eglise bygantine: Entre Pouvoir
et Esprit (31 j— 1204). Paris

Fowden, Empire to Commonwealth. Fowden, Garth (1993) Empire to Commonwealth:
Consequences of Monotheism in Late Antiquity. Princeton, NJ
Frend, Monophysite Movement. Frend, W El. C. (1972) The Rise of the Monoplysite
Movement: Chapters in the History of the Church in the Fifth and Sixth Centuries.
Cambridge

Giardina (ed.), Societd romana. Giardina, A. (ed.) (1986) Societa romana e impero tardoan-
tico , 4 vols. (1: Istitugioni, ceti, economic, 11: Roma: Politica, economia, paesaggio urbano\
iii: Le merci, gli insediamentr, iv: Tradigione dei classici, trasformagioni della culturd).

Rome— Bari

Gibson (ed.), Boethius. Gibson, Margaret (ed.) (1981) Boethius: His Life, Thought and
Influence. Oxford

Goffart, Barbarians and Romans. Goffart, W (1980) Barbarians and Romans A.D.

418—484: The Techniques of Accommodation. Princeton, NJ
Gray, Defence of Chalcedon. Gray, P. T. R. (1979) The Defence of Chalcedon in the East
(441—443). Leiden

Grillmeier, Christ in Christian Tradition, i 2 , 11.1— 2, 11.4 A. Grillmeier, Christ in
Christian Tradition, Eng. tr., (1975) i 2 : From the Apostolic Age to Chalcedon (441),
trans. John Bowden; (1995) 11: From the Council of Chalcedon to Gregory the Great
(441—604), 1. Reception and Contradiction: The Development of Discussion about
Chalcedon from 441 to the Beginning of the Reign of Justinian, trans. Pauline Allen
and John Cawte; 2, in collaboration with Th. Flainthaler, The Church of
Constantinople in the Sixth Century , trans. John Cawte and Pauline Allen. London
Haldon, Byzantium in the Seventh Century. Haldon, J. F. (1990) Byzantium in the Seventh
Century: The Transformation of a Culture. Cambridge
Harvey, Asceticism and Society in Crisis. Harvey, Susan Ashbrook (1 990) Asceticism and
Society in Crisis: John of Ephesus and The Lives of the Eastern Saints. Berkeley
and Los Angeles

Heather, Goths and Romans. Heather, P. (1991) Goths and Romans 332— 484. Oxford
Hendy, Studies. Hendy, M. F. (1985) Studies in the Byzantine Monetary Economy
c. 300—1440. Cambridge

Herrin , Formation of Christendom. Herrin, Judith (1987) The Formation of Christendom,
Princeton, NJ, and Oxford

Holuni, Empresses. Holum, K. (1982) Theodosian Empresses: Women and Imperial
Dominion in Late Antiquity. Transformation of the Classical Heritage 3.
Berkeley and Los Angeles

Hommes et richesses 1. J. Lefort and C. Morrisson (eds.) (1989) Hornmes et richesses dans
I’enrpire bygantin 1, 7 T /t — VF siecle. Paris

Hunt, Holy Land Pilgrimage. Hunt, E. D. (1982) Holy Land Pilgrimage in the Later
Roman Empire A.D. 312—460. Oxford (2nd edn 1992)

Isaac, Limits of Empire. Isaac, B. (1990) The Limits of Empire: The Roman Army in the
East. Oxford (2nd edn 1992)

FREQUENTLY CITED WORKS

993

Jeffreys et al., Chronicle. Jeffreys, Elizabeth, Jeffreys, Michael, Scott, Roger et al.

(1986) The Chronicle of John Mala las: A Translation. Sydney
Jeffreys et al.. Studies. Jeffreys, Elizabeth, with Croke, Brian, and Scott, Roger (eds.)
(1990) Studies in John Malalas. Sydney

Jones, Cities. Jones, A. H. M. (1937) Cities of the Eastern Roman Provinces (2nd edn
1971). Oxford

Jones, ERE. Jones, A. H. M. (1964) The Eater Roman Empire 284—602: A Social,
Economic and Administrative Survey, 3 vols. Oxford; 2 vols. (continuous pagina-
tion). Norman, OK

Jones, Roman Economy. Jones, A. H. M. (1 974) The Roman Economy: Studies in Ancient
Economy and Administrative History , ed. P. A. Brunt. Oxford
Kaster, Guardians of Language. Kaster, R. (1988) Guardians of Language: The
Grammarian and Society in Late Antiquity. Berkeley, CA
Krautheimer, Early Christian and By gantine Architecture. Krautheimer, R. (1965) Early
Christian and Bygantine Architecture. Harmondsworth (rev. edns 1975, 1979, 1986)
Lemerle, Bygantine Humanism. Lemerle, P. (1986) Bygantine Humanism, Engl, transl.

by Lindsay, Helen, and Moffatt, Ann (Byzantina Australiensia 3). Canberra
Lepelley, Cites. Lepelley, C. (1979-81) Les cites de I’Afrique romaine au Bas-Empire
(Etudes Augustiniennes), 2 vols. Paris

Liebeschuetz, Barbarians and Bishops. Liebeschuetz, J. H. W. G. (1990) Barbarians and
Bishops: Army, Church and State in the Age of Arcadius and Chrysostom. Oxford
Maas John Eydus. Maas, Michael (1992) John Eydus and the Roman Past Antiqnarianism
and Politics in the Age of Justinian. London

McCormick, Eternal Victory. McCormick, Michael (1986) Eternal Victory:
Triumphal Rulership in Late Antiquity, Bygantium, and the Early Medieval West.
Cambridge

MacCoull, Dioscorus. MacCoull, L. S. B. (1988) Dioscorus of Aphrodito: His Work and
his World. Berkeley and Los Angeles

Magdalino (ed.), New Constantines. Magdalino, Paul (ed.) (1994) New Constantines:
The Rhythm of Imperial Renewal in Bygantium, yth-iyth Centuries. Aldershot
Mango, Bygantine Architecture. Mango, Cyril (1976) Bygantine Architecture. New York
Mango, Developpement. Mango, C. (1985) Le developpement urbain de Constantinople
(IV e- T die siecles). Paris

Mango, Studies on Constantinople. Mango, Cyril (1993) Studies on Constantinople.
Aldershot

Meyendorff, Imperial Unity. Meyendorff, J. (1989) Inperial Unity and Christian
Divisions: The Church yy 0—680 A.D. Crestwood, NY
Mitchell, Anatolia. Mitchell, Stephen (1993) Anatolia: Land, Men and Gods in Asia
Minor, 2 vols. Oxford

Not. Dig. Notitia Dignitatum , ed. O. Seeck, Berlin, 1 876

Padagean, Pauvrete. Patlagean, E. (1977 ) Pauvrete economique etpauvrete sociale aBygance
(ye— ye siecles). Paris

Pearson and Goehring (eds.), Egyptian Christianity. Pearson, Birger A., and
Goehring, James E. (eds.) (1986) The Roots of Egyptian Christianity: Studies in
Antiquity and Christianity. Philadelphia

Roueche, Aphrodisias. Roueche, C. M. (1989) Aphrodisias in Late Antiquity (JRS
Monographs 5). London

994

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

Roueche, Performers and Partisans. Roueche, C. M. (1993) Pe formers and Partisans at
Aphrodisias in the Roman and Pate Roman Periods (JRS Monographs 6).
London

Rousseau, Ascetics. Rousseau, Philip (1 978) Ascetics, Authority and the Church in the Age
of Jerome and Cassian. Oxford

Rousseau, Basil of Caesarea. Rousseau, Philip (1994) Basil of Caesarea. Berkeley and
Los Angeles

Rousseau, Pachomius. Rousseau, Philip (1985) Pachomius: The Making of a Community
in Fourth Century Egypt. Berkeley and Los Angeles
Stein, Bas-Empire. Stein, E. (1968) Histoire du Bas-Empire n (transl. by J.-R.

Palanque). Amsterdam (repr. of Paris-Bruges edn, 1949)

Tchalenko, Villages. Tchalenko, Georges (195 3—8) I Wages antiques de la Syrie du nord:
Le massif du Be/us a I’epoque romaine. 3 vols. Paris
Trombley, Hellenic Religion. Trombley, F. R. (1993-4) Hellenic Religion and
Christian fation c. yyo—y2% 2 vols. Leiden

Van Dam, Leadership and Community. Van Dam, Raymond (1985) Leadership and
Community in Late Antique Gaul. Berkeley and Los Angeles
Walker, Holy City, Holy Places'? Walker, Peter (1990) Holy City, Holy Places? Christian
Attitudes to Jerusalem and the Holy Land in the Fourth Century. Oxford
Ward-Perkins, Public Building. Ward-Perkins, B. (1984) From Classical Antiquity to the
Middle Ages: Urban Public Building in Northern and Central Italy, A.D. joo—Sjo.
Oxford

Whitby, Maurice. Whitby, L. M. (1988) The Emperor Maurice and his Historian:
Theophylact Simocatta on Persian and Balkan Wafare. Oxford
Wood, Merovingian Kingdoms. Wood, Ian (1994) The Merovingian Kingdoms qyo—yyi.
Harlow

PART I: CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW (CHS. 1-5)

Alcock,L. (1993) The Neighbours of the Piets: Angles, Britons & Scots at War and at Home.
Rosemarkie

Alexander, P. J. (1967) The Oracle of Baalbek. Washington, DC
Allen, Pauline (1979) ‘The “Justinianic” plague’, By%. 48: 5-20
Allen, Pauline (1980) ‘Neo-Chalcedonianism and the patriarchs of the late sixth
century’, By%. 50: 5—17

Amelotti, M. (ed.) (1972—94) Legum Iustiniani Imperatoris Vocabularium (Subsidia
1— iv). Turin

Amelotti, M. (1978) ‘Giustiniano tra theologia e diritto’, in Archi (ed.) (1978)
133—60

Amelotti, M. and Luzzato, G. L. (1972) Le costitufioni giustinianee nei papiri e nelle
epigrafi. Milan (= Amelotti (ed.) (1972-94) in)

Amelotti, M. and Zingale, L. M. (1977) Scritti teologici ed ecclesiastic i di Giustiniano.
Milan (= Amelotti (ed.) (1972—94) in)

Amory, P. (1993) ‘The meaning and purpose of ethnic terminology in the
Burgundian laws’, EME 2: 1—28
Anderson, P. (1974) Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism. London

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

995

Archi, G. G. (ed.) (1978) L’imperatore Giustiniano. Storia e Mito. Giornate di Studio a
Ravenna, 14—16 ottobre iyy6. Milan

Baker, D. (ed.) (1 976) The Orthodox Churches and the West (Studies in Church History
13). Oxford

Barber, C. (1990) ‘The imperial panels at San Vitale: a reconsideration’, BMGS 14:
19-42

Barnish, S. J. B. (1986) ‘Taxation, land and barbarian settlement in the western
empire’, PBSR 54: 170—95

Barnish, S. J. B. (1988) ‘Transformation and survival in the western senatorial aris-
tocracy, C. A.D. 400—700’, PBSR 33:1 2(^5 5
Barnish, S. J. B. (1989) ‘A note on the col/atio glebalis’ , Historia 38: 254-6
Barnish, S. J. B. (1990) ‘Maximian, Cassiodorus, Boethius, Theodehad: literature,
philosophy and politics in Ostrogothic Italy’, NMS 34: 16-32
Barnwell, P. S. (199a) Emperor, Prefects and Kings: The Roman West, yyy—ydj. London
Baynes, N. H. (1955) ‘Alexandria and Constantinople: a study in ecclesiastical
diplomacy’, in Baynes, Byzantine Studies and Other Essays (London) 97-1 1 5
Beaucamp, J. (1 990, 1 992) Le statut de la femme a Byyance (ye— ye. siecle), 2 vols. Paris
Biondi, B. (1936) Giustiniano Primo, principe e legislatore cattolico. Milan
Biondi, B. (1952) II diritto romano cristiano 1. Milan

Blockley, R. C. (1985) ‘Subsidies and diplomacy: Rome and Persia in late antiquity’,
Phoenix 39: 62—74

Blockley, R. C. (199a) East Roman Foreign Policy: Formation and Conduct from Diocletian
to Anastasias. Liverpool

Bona, I. (1976) The Dawn of the Dark Ages: The Gepids and the Lombards in the
Carpathian Basin. Budapest

Brock, S. P. (1 99 5) ‘The Syriac background’, in M. Lapidge (ed.). Archbishop Theodore
(Cambridge) 30—52

Brooks, E. W (1893) ‘The emperor Zeno and the Isaurians’, EHR 8: 209—38
Brown, P. R. L. (1971) The World of Late Antiquity. London

Brown, P. R. L. (1982) ‘Relics and social status in the age of Gregory of Tours’, in
Brown, Society and the Holy 222-50
Browning, R. (1971, 1987) Justinian and Theodora. London

Burgess, R. W. (1993) The ‘Chronicle’ of Hydatius and the ‘Consularia Constantinopolitana’ .
Oxford

Burgess, R. W (1993-4) ‘The accession of Marcian in the light of Chalcedonian
apologetic and Monophysite polemic’, BZ 86/87: 47-68
Burns, T. S. (1980) The Ostrogoths: Kingship and Society. Wiesbaden
Burns, T. S. (1984) A History of the Ostrogoths. Bloomington

Bury, J. B. (1889) History of the Later Roman Empire fromArcadius to Irene (yyyA.D. to
SooA.Di). London

Bury, J. B. (1897) ‘The Nika not’,JHS 17: 92-1 19
Bury,J. B. (1928) The Invasion of Europe by the Barbarians. London
Cameron, Alan (1965) ‘Wandering poets: a literary movement in Byzantine Egypt’,
Historia 14: 470—509
Cameron, Alan (1970) Claudian. Oxford
Cameron, Alan (1973) Porphyrins the Charioteer. Oxford

996 I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

Cameron, Alan (1974) ‘The date of Priscian’s De laude Anastasii , GRBS 1 5: 313-16
(= Alan Cameron, Literature and Society v)

Cameron, Alan (1978) ‘The house of Anastasius’, GRBS 19: 259-76 (=Alan
Cameron, Literature and Society xiv)

Cameron, Alan (1982) ‘The empress and the poet: paganism and politics at the
court of Theodosius II’, YCS 27: 217—89 (=Alan Cameron, Literature and
Society hi)

Cameron, Alan, and Long, J. (1993) Barbarians and Politics at the Court of Arcadius.
Berkeley

Cameron, Alan, and Schauer, D. (1982) ‘The last consul: Basilius and his diptych’,
JRS 72: 126-45

Cameron, Averil {ycf-jo) Agathias. Oxford

Cameron, Averil (1975) ‘The empress Sophia’, Byg. 45: 5—21 (= Averil Cameron
(1981) xi)

Cameron, Averil (1976) ‘The early religious policies of Justin II’, in Baker (ed.)

(1976) 51-67 (= Averil Cameron (1981) x)

Cameron, Averil (1977) ‘Early Byzantine Kaiserkritik. two case histories’, BMGS 3:
1— 17 (= Averil Cameron (1981) ix)

Cameron, Averil (1978) ‘The Theotokos in sixth-century Constantinople’, JTS 29:
79—108 (= Averil Cameron (1981) xvi)

Cameron, Averil (1979) ‘Images of authority: elites and icons in late sixth-century
Byzantium’, P&P 84: 3—35 (= Averil Cameron (1981) xviii)

Cameron, Averil (1980) ‘The artistic patronage of Justin II’, Byy. 50: 62—84 (=
Averil Cameron (1981) xii)

Cameron, Averil (1981) Continuity and Change in Sixth-Century Byyantium. Aldershot
Cameron, Averil (1982) ‘Byzantine Africa: the literary evidence’, in J. H. Humphrey
(ed.), Excavations at Carthage 1978 (Ann Arbor) 1— 51 (= Averil Cameron,
Changing Cultures vii)

Cameron, Averil (1987) ‘The construction of court ritual: the Byzantine Book of
Ceremonies’, in D. Cannadine and S. Price (eds.), Rituals of Royalty: Power and
Ceremonial in Traditional Societies (Cambridge) 106—36
Cameron, Averil (1988) ‘Eustratius’ life of the patriarch Eutychius and the Fifth
Ecumenical Council’, in Chrysostomides (ed.) (1988) 225-47 (=Averil
Cameron, Changing Cultures 1)

Cameron, Averil (1997) ‘Gibbon and Justinian’, in R. McKitterick and R. Quinault
(eds.), Edward Gibbon and Empire (Cambridge) 34-52
Cameron, A. and A. (1966) ‘The Cycle of Agathias’,//^ 86: 6—25
Campos, J. (i960) fuan de Biclaro. Madrid
Capizzi, C. (1969) L’imperatore Anastasio I (491—718). Rome

Carile, A. (1978) ‘Consenso e dissenso fra propaganda e fronda nelle fonti narra-
tive dell’eta Giustinianea’, in Archi (ed.) (1978) 37-93
Cavallo, G. (1978) ‘La circolazione libraria nell’eta di Giustiniano’, in Archi (ed.)
(1978) 83-132, 149-62

Chadwick, H. (1983) ‘The Chalcedonian definition’, in Actesdu Concile de Chalcedoine,
sessions iii-iv (trans. by A.-J. Festugiere) (Geneva) 3-12 (= Chadwick (1991)
xviii)

Chadwick, H. (1991) Heresy and Orthodoxy in the Early Church. London

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

997

Charlesworth, M. P. (1937) ‘The virtues of the Roman emperor’, PBA 23: 105—33
Charlesworth, M. P. (1 943) ‘Pietas and victoria-, the emperor and the citizen’,/^ 3 3 :
1— 1 1

Chauvot, A. (1986) Procope de Gaga, Priscien de Cesaree: Panegyriques de I’empereur
Anastase Ier. Bonn

Chauvot, A. (1987) ‘Curiales et paysans en Orient a la fin du Ve et au debut du Vie
siecle: note sur l’institution du vindeA, in Frezouls (ed.) (1987) 271—81
Christlein, R. (1979) Die Alamannen: Archdologie eines lebendigen Vblkes. 2nd edn.
Stuttgart

Chrysos, E. K. (1966) Die Bischiifslisten des T I Okumenischen Kon^ils (jjj). Bonn
Chrysos, E. K. (1971) ‘Die angebliche Abschaffung der stadtischen Kurien durch
Kaiser Anastasios’, Bjgantina 3: 93-102

Chrysos, E. K. and Schwarcz, A. (eds.) (1989) Das Reich und die Barbaren. Vienna
Chrysostomides, J. (ed.) (1988) Kathegetria: Essays Presented to Joan Hussey for her 80th
Birthday. Camberley

Claude, D. (1971) Adel, Kirche und Konigtum im Westgotenreich. Sigmaringen
Clover, E M. (1972) ‘Geiseric and Attila’, Historia 22: 104— 1 17 (= Clover (1993) n)
Clover, F. M. (1978) ‘The family and early career of Anicius Olybrius’, Historia 27:
169—96 (= Clover (1993) iii)

Clover, F. M. (1982) ‘Carthage and the Vandals’, in Humphrey (ed.) (1982) 1-22
Clover, F. M. (1989a) ‘Felix Karthago’, in Clover and Humphreys (eds.) (1989)
129—69

Clover, F. M. (1989b) ‘The symbiosis of Romans and Africans in Africa’, in
Chrysos and Schwarcz (eds.) (1989) 57—73
Clover, F. M. (1993) The Late Roman West and the I dndals. Aldershot
Clover, F. M. and Humphreys, R. S. (eds.) (1989) Tradition and Innovation in Late
Antiquity. Madison, WI

Collins, R. (1983) ‘Theodebert I: Rex Magnus Francorum’, in Wormald, Bullough
and Collins (eds.) (1983) 7—33
Collins, R. (1986) The Basques. Oxford
Collins, R. (1991) Early Medieval Europe, yoo—iooo. London
Collins, R. (1 992) Lau>, Culture and Regionalism in Early Medieval Spain. Aldershot
Collins, R. (1995) Early Medieval Spain, 400—1000. 2nd edn. London
Collins, R. (1996) Fredegar. Aldershot

Cormack, R. (1985) Writing in Gold: Byzantine Society and its Icons. London
Courtois, C. (1955) Les Vandales etlAfrique. Paris

Croke, B. (1977) ‘Evidence for the Hun invasion of Thrace in a.d. 422’, GRBS 18:
347—67 (= Croke (1992) xii)

Croke, B. (1978) ‘The date and circumstances of Marcian’s decease, a.d. 457’, Byg.
58: 5—9 (= Croke (1992) xiii)

Croke, B. (1982) ‘The date of the “Anastasian long wall” in Thrace’, GRBS 23:
59—78 (= Croke (1992) xvn)

Croke, B. (1983a) ‘The context and date of Priscus fragment 6’, CP78: 296—308 (=
Croke (1992) xiv)

Croke, B. (1983b) ‘Basiliscus the boy-emperor’, GRBS 24: 81-91 (= Croke (1992) x)
Croke, B. (1984) ‘Dating Theodoret’s Church History and Commentary on the Psalms',
B JZ- 54: 59-74 (= Croke (1992) vii)

998 I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

Croke, B. (1992) Christian Chronicles and Byzantine History, jtlj—6th Centuries.
Aldershot

Croke, B. (1995) The Chronicle of Marcellinus (Byzantina Australiensia 7). Sydney
Crone, P. (1991) ‘Kavad’s heresy and Mazdak’s revolt’, Iran 29: 21—42
Crow,J. G. (1995) ‘The long walls of Thrace’, in Mango and Dagron (eds.) (1995)
104—24

Dabrowa, E. (ed.) (1 994) The Roman and Byzantine Army in the East. Krakow
Dagron, G. (1982) ‘Le fils de Leon Ier (463): temoignages concordants de l’ha-
giographie et de l’astrologie’,-TB 100: 271-5
Dagron, G. (1984) Constantinople imagmaire, Etudes surle recueil des ‘Patria’. Paris
Dagron, G. (1996) Empereur et pretre. Etude surle ‘cesaropapisme’ bygantin. Paris
Davies, W (1982) Wales in the Early Middle Ages. Leicester

Demicheli, A. M. (ed.) (1994) Scritti apocrifi di Giustiniano. Turin (= Amelotti (ed.)
(1972-94) iv)

Driscoll, S. T. and Nieke, M. R. (eds.) (1 9 8 8) Power and Politics in Early Medieval Britain
and Ireland. Edinburgh

Dumville, D. (1977) ‘Sub-Roman Britain: history and legend’, History 62: 173-92
Dumville, D. (1993) Saint Patrick, A.D. yyy—iyyy. Woodbridge
Durliat, J. (1988) ‘Le salaire de la paix sociale dans les royaumes barbares (V— Vie
siecles), in Wolfram and Schwarcz (eds.) (1988) 21-72
Durliat, J. (1989) ‘Le peste du Vie siecle. Pour un nouvel examen des sources
byzantines’, in Hommes et richesses 1. 107-20
Ensslin, W (1947) Theoderich der Grosse. Munich

Evans, J. A. S. (1996) The Age of fustinian. The Circumstances of Imperial Power .London
Ewig,E. (195a) ‘Die frankischen Teilungen und Teilreiche (511-613)’ (Akademie der
Wissenschaften und der Titeratur in Main % Geistes- und sotfalwissenschaftliche Klasse
9) 651-715

Ewig, E. (1993) Die Merowinger und das Frankenreich. 2nd edn. Berlin/Cologne
Farka, C. (1993/4) ‘Rauberhorden in Thrakien. Eine unbeachtete Quelle zur
Geschichte der Zeit des Kaisers Maurikios’, BZ 86/87: 462-9
Feissel, D. (1984) ‘Deux inscriptions d’Asie Mineure et les consuls de 448 et 452’,
BCH 108: 564—71

Ferreiro, A. (1988) The Visigoths in Gaul and Spain A.D. 418-711: A Bibliography. Leiden
Freeman, P. and Kennedy, D. (eds.) (1986) The Defence of the Roman and Byzantine
East (BAR International Series 297). Oxford
French, D. H. and Lightfoot, C. S. (eds.) (1989) The Eastern Frontier of the Roman
Empire (BAR International Series 553). Oxford
Frezouls,E. (ed.) (1987) Societes nrbaines, societes rurales dans I’Asie Mineure et la Syrie hel-
lenistiques et romaines. Strasbourg
Frye, R. N. (1984) The History of Ancient Iran. Munich

Fulford, M. G. (1980) ‘Carthage: overseas trade and the political economy, c. ad
400—700’, Reading Medieval Studies 6: 68—80
Garcia Moreno, L. A. (1974) Prosopografla del Reino visigodo de Toledo. Salamanca
Garcia Moreno, L. A. (1989) Historia de Esparia visigoda. Madrid
Goffart, W (1957) ‘Byzantine policy in the west under Tiberius II and Maurice: the
pretenders Hermengild and Gundovald (579-85)’, Traditio 13: 73-118
Goffart, W. (1981) ‘Rome, Constantinople, and the Barbarians’, AHR 76: 275-306

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

999

Goffart, W (1989) Rome’s Fall and After. London and Ronceverte
Goffart, W (1989) ‘The theme of “The Barbarian Invasions” in late antique and
modern historiography’, in Chrysos and Schwarcz (eds.) (1989) 87—107
Gonzalez Blanco, A. (ed.) (1986) Los Visigodos: historiay civilisation. Murcia
Gonzalez Ruiz, R. (ed.) (1981) Innovationy continuidad en laEspana visigotica. Toledo
Goubert, P. (1951—65) By^ance avant f Islam, vols. 1, n.1-2 Paris
Grahn-Hoek, H. (1976) Die frankische Oberschicht im 6. Jahrhundert. Sigmaringen
Gray, P. (1988) ‘Justinian’, TRE 17.3/4 (Berlin) 478—86
Greatrex, G. (1994) ‘The dates of Procopius’s works’, BMGS 18: 101— 14
Greatrex, G. (1995) ‘The composition of Procopius’s Persian Wars and John the
Cappadocian’, Prudentia 27.1: 1 — 1 3
Greatrex, G. (1998) ‘The Nika riot: a reappraisal’, JHS 1 1 8: 60—86
Gregory, T. E. (1 979) VoxPopnli: Popular Opinion and Violence in Religious Controversies
of the Fifth Century AD. Columbus, OH
Guillaumont, A. (1969/70) ‘Justinien et l’eglise de Perse’, DOP 23/24: 39-66
Haldon, J. E (1979) Recruitment and Conscription in the Byzantine Army c. jjo—yjo: A
Study on the origins of the stratiotika ktemata (Sitzungsberichte der Osterreichis-
chen Akad. der Wissens., phil-hist. Kl. 3 57). Vienna
Haldon, J. F. (1984) Byzantine Praetorians. Bonn

Harl, K. W. (1990) ‘Sacrifice and pagan belief in fifth- and sixth-century
Byzantium’, P&P 128: 7—27

Harmatta, J. (1952) ‘The dissolution of the Hun empire’, Acta Archaeologica
Hungaricae 2: 277—304

Harries, J. (1994) ‘ Piusprinceps : Theodosius II and fifth-century Constantinople’, in
Magdalino (ed.). New Constantines 35—44
Harries, J. (1995) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rome, AD 407— 48; . Oxford
Harries, J. and Wood, I. (eds.) (1993) The Theodosian Code. London
Harrison, R. M. (1981) ‘The emperor Zeno’s real name’, BZ 74: 27—8
Harrison, R. M. (1989) A Temple for Byzantium. London and Austin
Harrison, R. M. and Hayes, J. W (1986) Excavations at Sarafioane in Istanbul: The
Church of St Poly euktos. 1.1. The excavations, structures, architectural decoration, small
finds, coins, bones and molluscs. 2. The pottery (byj. W Hayes). Princeton
Heather, P. (1992) ‘The emergence of the Visigothic kingdom’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 88-94

Heather, P. (1994) ‘New men for new Constantines: creating an imperial governing
class in the eastern Mediterranean’, in Magdalino (ed.), New Constantines 1 1-3 3
Heather, P. (1995) ‘The Huns and the end of the Roman empire in western
Europe’, EHR 1 10: 4—41

Heather, P. (1996) ‘Afterword’, in Thompson (1996) 238—84
Henry III, P. (1967) ‘A mirror for Justinian: the Ekthesis of Agapetus Diaconus’,
GRBS 8: 281—308

Herring, E., Whitehouse, R. and Wilkins, J. (eds.) (1991) Papers of the Fourth
Conference of Italian Archaeology. London

Higgins, M.J. (1939) The Persian War of the Emperor Maurice (jS2— 602) I The Chronology .
Washington, DC

Hohlfelder, R. L. (1984) ‘Marcian’s gamble: a reassessment of eastern imperial
policy toward Attila a.d. 450-45 3 \AJAH 9: 54—69

IOOO

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

Holum, K. (1977) ‘Pulcheria’s crusade a.d. 421-22 and the ideology of imperial
victory’, GRBS 18:15 3-72
Honore, T. (1978) Tribonian. London
Hopkins, K. (1978) Conquerors and Slaves. Cambridge

Hopwood, K. (1986) ‘Towers, territory and terror: how the east was held’, in
Freeman and Kennedy (eds.) (1986) 343—56
Hopwood, K. (1989) ‘Consent and control: how the peace was kept in Rough
Cilicia’, in French and Lightfoot (eds.) (1989) 191-201
Hughes, K. (1972) Early Christian Ireland: Introduction to the Sources. London
Humphrey, J. H. (ed.) (1 982) Excavations at Carthage 1978, conducted by the University of
Michigan. Ann Arbor

James, E. (ed.) (1980) Visigothic Spain: New Approaches. Oxford
James, E. (1988a) The Franks. Oxford

James, E. (1988b) ‘Childeric, Syagrius et la disparition du royaume de Soissons’,
Revue Archeologique de Picardie 3/4: 9-12
Jarman, A. O. H. (ed.) (1988) Aneirin: Y Gododdin. Llandysul
Jarnut,J. (1982) Geschichte der Langobarden. Stuttgart

Jimenez Garnica, A. (1983) Origenesy desarrollo delReino Visigodo de Tolosa. Valladolid
Kaegi, W E. (1968) Byzantium and the Decline of Rome. Princeton
Kaegi, W. E. (1981) Byzantine Military Unrest 471—847. Amsterdam
Kelly, J. N. D. (1995) Goldenmouth. The Story of John Chrysostom. London
Khazanov, A. M. (1984) Nomads and the Outside World (trans. J. Crookenden).
Cambridge

Kitzinger, E. (1977) Byzantine Art in the Making. Cambridge, MA
Lapidge, M. and Dumville, D. (eds.) (1984) Gildas: New Approaches. Woodbridge
Lee, A. D. (1993a) ‘Evagrius, Paul of Nisibis and the problem of loyalties in the
mid-sixth century’, fEH 44: 569-86

Lee, A. D. (1993b) Information and Frontiers: Roman Foreign Relations in Fate Antiquity.
Cambridge

Lee, A. D. (forthcoming) ‘Dirty tricks in late Roman diplomacy’

Lemerle, P. (1 971 , 1 9 86) Le premier humanisme bys^antin. Paris (tr. as Lemerle, Byzantine
Humanism )

Lemerle, P. (ed.) (1981) Fes plus anciens recueils des Miracles de saint Demetrius etla pene-
tration des Slaves dans les Balkans, 2. Fe commentaire. Paris
Lieu, J., North, J. and Rajak, T. (eds.) (1992) The fern among Pagans and Christians in
the Roman Empire. London

Linder, A. (1987) Jews in Roman Imperial legislation. Detroit
Lippold, A. (1973) ‘Theodosius IF, RE Suppl. xiii, 961-1044
MacCormack, S. G. (1981) Art and Ceremony in Fate Antiquity. Berkeley
Maenchen-Helfen, O. J. (1973) The World of the Huns. Berkeley
Magdalino, P. and Macrides, R. (1988) ‘The architecture of Ekphrasis: construc-
tion and context of Paul the Silentiary’s poem on Hagia Sophia’, BMGS 1 2:
47—82

Mainstone, R. (1988) Hagia Sophia. London

Mango, C. (195 9) The Brazen House. A Study of the Vestibule of the Imperial Palace of
Constantinople. Copenhagen

Mango, C. (1972) ‘The church of Saints Sergius and Bacchus at Constantinople and

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

IOOI

the alleged tradition of octagonal palace churches’ (= Mango, Studies on
Constantinople xiii)

Mango, C. (1975) ‘The church of Sts. Sergius and Bacchus once again’ (= Mango,
Studies on Constantinople xiv)

Mango, C. and Dagron, G. (eds.) (1995) Constantinople and its Hinterland. Aldershot
Markey, T. S. (1989) ‘Germanic in the Mediterranean: Lombards, Vandals, and
Visigoths’, in Clover and Humphreys (eds.) (1989) 51—71
Mathisen, R. (1979) ‘Resistance and reconciliation: Majorian and the Gallic aristoc-
racy after the fall of Avitus’, Francia 7: 597-627 (= Mathisen (1991) 167-98)
Mathisen, R. (1981) ‘Avitus, Italy and the east in a.d. 45 5-456’, By%. 51: 232—47 (=
Mathisen (1991) 137-52)

Mathisen, R. (1991) Studies in the History, Fiterature and Society of Fate Antiquity.
Amsterdam

Matthews, J. F. (1975) Western Aristocracies and Imperial Court AD 364— 42 y Oxford
Matthews, J. F. (1989) The Roman Empire of Ammianus. London and Baltimore
Max, G. E. (1979) ‘Political intrigue during the reigns of the western Roman
emperors Avitus and Majorian’, Historia 28: 225—37
Mazzucchi, C. M. (1982) Menae patricii cum Thoma referendario De scientia politica
Dialogus. Milan

Menghin, W. (1985) Die Fangoharden: Archaologie und Geschichte. Stuttgart
Metcalf, D. M. (1969) The Origins of the Anastasian Currency Reform. Amsterdam
Millar, F. (1992) ‘The Jews of the Graeco-Roman diaspora between paganism and
Christianity, a.d. 312-438’, in Lieu, North and Rajak (eds.) (1992) 97-123
Momigliano, A. (195 5) ‘Cassiodorus and the Italian culture of his time’, PBA 41:
207-45

Momigliano, A. (1972) ‘Popular religious beliefs and the late Roman historians’,
SCH 8: 1— 1 8

Mommaerts, T. S. and Kelly, D. H. (1992) ‘The Anicii of Gaul and Rome’, in
Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 1 1 1— 21
Mommsen, T. (1901) ‘Aetius’, Hermes 76: 516-47
Moorhead, J. (1981) ‘The last years of Theoderic’, Historia 32: 106-20
Moorhead, J. (1983) ‘Italian loyalties duringjustinian’s Gothic war’, Byt(. 5 3: 575-96
Moorhead, J. (1984) ‘Theoderic, Zeno and Odovacer’, BZif. 261-6
Moorhead, J. (1992a) Theoderic in Italy. Oxford

Moorhead, J. (1992b) llctorof Vita: History of the T dndal Persecution. Liverpool
Muhlberger, S. (1990) The Fifth-Century Chroniclers. Liverpool
Nelson, J. L. (1976) ‘Symbols in context: rulers’ inauguration rituals in Byzantium
and the west in the early middle ages’, SCH 13: 97-119
Obolensky, D. (1971) The Byzantine Commonwealth. London
O’Donnell, J. J. (1979) Cassiodorus. Berkeley and Los Angeles
O’Flynn, J. M. (1983) Generalissimos of the Western Roman Empire. Edmonton
Olajos, T. (1988) Fes sources de Theophylacte Simocatta historien. Leiden
Olster, D. M. (1993) The Politics of Usurpation in the Seventh Century: Rhetoric and
Revolution in Byzantium. Amsterdam

Orlandis, J. (1984) Hispaniay Zaragoza en laAntigiiedad Tardla. Saragossa
Orlandis, J. (1988) Historia del reino visigodo EspahoL Madrid
Orlandis, J. (1991) Fa vida en Espaha en tiempo de los Godos. Madrid

1002

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

Orlandis,J. (1992) Semblan^as visigodas. Madrid
Ostrogorsky, G. (1956) History of the Byzantine State. Oxford
Painter, K. (1991) ‘The silver dish of Ardabur Aspar’, in Herring etal. (1991) 1.73— Bo
Patterson, O. (19 82) Slavery and Social Death. Cambridge, MA
Perez Sanchez, D. (1989) E! ejercito en la sodedad visigoda. Salamanca
Pertusi, A. (1978) ‘Giustiniano e la cultura del suo tempo’, in Archi (ed.) (1978)
181—99

Pingree, D. (1976) ‘Political horoscopes from the reign of Zeno’, DOP 30: 133—50
Rabello, A. M. (1987) Giustiniano, Ebrei e Samaritani, alia luce delle fond storico-letterarie,
ecclesiastiche egiuridiche. Milan
Richards, J. (1980) Consul of God. London

Rodley, L. (1994) Byzantine Art and Architecture: An Introduction. Cambridge
Rodriguez Alonso, C. (ed.) (1975) Las Historias de los Godos, Vdndalos y Suevos de
Isidoro de Sevilla. Leon

Roueche, C. (1986) ‘Theodosius II, the cities, and the date of the “Church History”
of Sozomen ’ ,fThS 37: 130-2

Rousseau, P. (1979) ‘The death of Boethius: the charge of maleficiu/F , Studi Medieval!
20: 871—89

Rubin, B. (1954) Prokopios von Kaisareia. Stuttgart (= art. Prokopios von Kaisareia,
RE 23.1.273-599, 1959)

Rubin, B. (i960, 1995) Das Zeitalter Iustinians 1, 11 (ed. C. Capizzi). Berlin
Saitta, B. (1983) Studi Visigotid. Catania

Schwartz, E. (1939) Drei dogmatische Schriften Iustinians (Abh. der Bayer. Akad. der
Wiss., philosoph.-hist. Abt. 18). Munich

Scott, L. (1976) ‘Aspar and the burden of barbarian heritage’, Byzantine
Studies / Etudes bygantines 3: 59—69

Scott, R. (1985) ‘Malalas, the Secret History and Justinian’s propaganda’, DOP 39:
99-109

Scott, R. (1987) ‘Justinian’s coinage and Easter reforms and the date of the Secret
History ’, BMGS 11:21 5—21

Shahid, I. (1989) Byzantium and the Arabs in the Fifth Century. Washington, DC
Shahid, I. (1995) Byzantium and the Arabs in the Sixth Century 1, parts 1 and 2.
Washington, DC

Shaw, B. D. (1990) ‘Bandit highlands and lowland peace: the mountains of Isauria-
Cilicia ’ ,JESHO 33: 199—233, 237—70
Shepard, J. and Franklin, S. (eds.) (1992) Byzantine Diplomacy. Aldershot
Small, A. (ed.) (1987) The Piets: A New Look at Old Problems. Dundee
Smyth, A. P. (1972) ‘The earliest Irish annals’, Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy
72c: 1—48

Smyth, A. P. (1984) Warlords and Holy Men: Scotland AD 800—1000. London
Stein, E. (1919) Studien %ur Geschichte des byyantinischen Reiches, vornehmlich unter den
Kaisern Justinus II. und Tiberius Constantinus. Stuttgart
Stein, E. (1 9 5 9) Histoire du Bas-E/npire 1 (2nd edn trans. J. R. Palanque from German
1st edn: Geschichte des spatromischen Reiches 1, Vienna 1928). Paris
Stein, F. (1991) Alammanische Siedlung und Kultnr: das Reihengrdberfeld in Garnmertingen.
Sigmaringen

Sundwall,J. (1915) Westromische Studien. Berlin

I. CHRONOLOGICAL OVERVIEW

lOOJ

Tardieu, M. (1990) Les passages reliques. Routes et haltes syriennes d’ Isidore d Simplicius.
Paris

Thomas, C. (1 994) And Shall these Mute Stones Speak? Post-Roman Inscriptions in Western
Britain. Cardiff

Thompson, E. A. (1948) A History of Attila and the Huns. Oxford
Thompson, E. A. (1956) ‘The setdement of barbarians in southern Gaul \JRS 46:
65—75 (= Thompson (1982) 23-37)

Thompson, E. A. (1969) The Goths in Spain. Oxford

Thompson, E. A. (1977) ‘The Suevic kingdom of Galicia’, NMS 21: 3—31 (=
Thompson (1982) 161—87)

Thompson, E. A. (1982) Romans and Barbarians: The Decline of the Western Enpire.
Madison, WI

Thompson, E. A. (1985) Who was Saint Patrick? Woodbridge
Thompson, E. A. (1996) The Huns. Oxford (revised with an afterword by Peter
Heather)

Twyman, B. L. (1970) ‘Aetius and the aristocracy’, Historia 19: 480—503
Van Dam, R. (1993) Saints and their Miracles in Tate Antique Gaul. Princeton
Van de Vyver, M. (1936, 1937, 1938) ‘La victoire contre les Alamans et la conver-
sion de Clovis’, RBPh 1 5: 859—914, 16: 35—94 and 17: 793—813
Vasiliev, A. A. (1950) Justin the First. Cambridge, MA
Wainwright, F. T. (ed.) (195 5) The Problem of the Piets. London
van der Wal, N. and Stolte, B. H. (eds.) (1994) Collectio Tripartita: Justinian on Religious
and Ecclesiastical Affairs. Groningen

Wallace-Hadrill, A. (1981) ‘The emperor and his virtues’, Historia 30: 298—323
Weber, R.J. (1989) ‘Albinus: the living memory of a 5th-c. personality’, Historia 38:
47 2— 97

Werner, J. (1962) Die Langobarden im Pannonien. Munich

Whitby, Mary (1985) ‘The occasion of Paul the Silentiary’s Ekphrasis of S. Sophia’,
02 35: 215-28

Whitby, Michael (1985) ‘The long walls of Constantinople’, Byg. 5 5: 560—83
Whitby, Michael (1986a) ‘Procopius and the development of Roman defences in
upper Mesopotamia’, in Freeman and Kennedy (eds.) (1986) 717—35
Whitby, Michael (1986b) ‘Procopius’ description of Dara ( Buildings 2.1-3)’, i n
Freeman and Kennedy (eds.) (1986) 737-83
Whitby, Michael (1992) ‘From frontier to palace: the personal role of the emperor
in diplomacy’, in Shepard and Franklin (eds.) (1992) 295—303
Whitby, Michael (1994) ‘The Persian king at war’, in Dabrowa (ed.) (1994)
227—63

Whitby, Michael (1995) ‘Recruitment in Roman armies from Justinian to Heraclius
( ca . 565— 615’), in Averil Cameron (ed.), The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near
East m. States, Resources and Armies (Princeton) 61—124
Whitby, Michael and Whitby, Mary (1989) Chronicon Paschale 284—628 AD
(Translated Texts for Historians 7). Liverpool
Whittaker, C. R. (1994) Frontiers of the Roman Enrpire: A Social and Economic Study.
Baltimore

Whittow, M. (1990) ‘Ruling the late Roman and early Byzantine city: a continuous
history’, P<&P 1 29: 3—29

1004

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Wickham, C. (1981) Early Medieval Italy, Central Power and Local Society 400—1000.
London

Wickham, C. (1984) ‘The other transition. From the ancient world to feudalism’,
P&P 103: 3—36

Wickham, L. R. (1973) review of Frend, Monophy site Movement, JThS 24: 591-9
Wolfram, FI. (1988) History of the Goths (English trans.). Berkeley
Wolfram, H. and Pohl, W (eds.) (1990) Typen der Ethnogenese unter besonderer
Beriicksichtigung der Bayern (Denkschriften der Osterreichischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften, phil.-hist. Kl. 201). Vienna
Wolfram, H. and Schwarcz, A. (eds.) (1988) Anerkennung und Integration: Zn den wirt-
schaftlichen Gntndlagen der l ’dlkenvanderungsgeit (400—600) (Denkschriften der
osterreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, phil.-hist. Kl. 201). Vienna
Wood, I. N. (1984) ‘The end of Roman Britain: continental evidence and parallels’,
in Lapidge and Dumville (eds.) (1984) 1-25
Wood, I. N. (1985) ‘Gregory of Tours and Clovis’, RBPh 63: 249-72
Wood, I. N. (1990) ‘Ethnicity and the ethnogenesis of the Burgundians’, in
Wolfram and Pohl (eds.) (1990) 5 3-69

Wormald, P, Bullough, D. and Collins, R. (eds.) (1983) Ideal and Reality in Frankish
and Anglo-Saxon Society. Oxford

Wozniak, F. (1981) ‘East Rome, Ravenna and western Illyricum 454—536 ad’,
Historia 30: 351—82

Young, F. (1983) From Nicaea to Chalcedon. London
Zecchini, G. (1983) Aefio: Fnltima difesa dell’Occidente romano. Rome
Zingale, L. M. (1994) Nuovi Testi Epigrafi, Turin (= Amelotti (ed.) (1972-94) iv)
Zollner, E. (1970) Geschichte der Franken, bis ypr Mitte des 6. Jahrhunderts. Munich
Zuckerman, C. (1994) ‘L’empire d’Orient et les Huns: notes sur Priscus’, T&MBy%
12: 1 59—82

PART II: GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS (CHS. 6-11)

Albanese, B. (1991a) ‘Sul programma legislative esposto nel 429 da Theodosio II’,
in Albanese (1991b) 1669—87
Albanese, B. (1991b) Scritti ' giuridici 11. Palermo

Alberti, A. (1933) La Glossa Torinese e le altre g/osse del ms. D IHiy della Biblioteca
Nayionale Torino. Turin

Alfieri, N. (1977) ‘L’insediamento urbano sul litorale delle Marche’, in Duval and
Frezouls (eds.) (1977) 87—98
Alfoldy, G. (1974) Noricum. London

Alfoldy, G. (1987) ‘Romisches Stadtewesen auf der neukastilianischen Hochebene’
(Abhandlungen Heidelberger Akad., phil.-hist. Kl.). Heidelberg
Allen, P. (1979) ‘The “Justinianic” Plague’, Byy. 49: 5—20

Amelotti, M. and Zingale, L. M. (1985) Le costituyioni giustinianee net papiri e nelle
epigrafi. 2nd edn. Milan

Anton, H. H. (1986) Werfassungsgeschichtliche Kontinuitat und Wandlung von
der Spatantike zum hohen Mittelalter: das Beispiel Triers’, Francia 14: 1-25
Arangio-Ruiz, V. (ed.) (1935) ‘Frammenti di Gaio’, in Papiri greci e latini (Pubblicazioni
della Societa Italiana per la ricerca dei Papiri greci e latini in Egitto XI 1187)
1—52. Florence

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOO5

Arangio-Ruiz, V. (ed.) (1953) ‘Definition! e massime giuridiche’, in Papin greet e latini
(Pubblicazioni della Societa Italiana per la ricerca dei Papiri greci e latini in
Egitto XIII 1348) 196—208. Florence
Archi, G. G. (1937) EEpitome Gai. Milan

Ashburner, W (1926) ‘The Byzantine mutiny act \JHS 46: 80—109
Atsma, H. (ed.) (1976) Spdtantihes und frankisches Gallien. Munich
Ausbiittel, F. M. (1988) Die l \ erwaltung der Stddte und Provinten im spdtantiken Italien.
Frankfurt

Aussaresses, F. (1909) LArmee bytantine d la fin du \E me siecle d'apres le Strategicon de
1 ’ empereur Maurice (Bibliotheque des Universites du Midi 14). Bordeaux
Avramea, A. (1989) ‘Les constructions profanes de l’eveque dans l’epigraphie
grecque’, Mffef XI Congr. Int. d’Arch. Chret. 1: 829—35. Rome
Bachrach, B. S. (1971) Merovingian Military Organisation 481— yyi. Minneapolis
Bagnall, R. (1985) ‘Agricultural productivity and taxation in later Roman Egypt’,
TAPA 11 5: 289—308

Bagnall, R. S. and Worp, K. A. (1980) ‘Papyrus documentation in Egypt from
Constantine to Justinian’, in R. Pintaudi (ed fi Miscellanea Papyrologia (Florence)
13-23

Bakhit, M. A. and Asfour, M. (eds.) (1986) Proceedings of the Symposium on Bi/ad al-
Sham During the Byzantine Period. Amman

Baldovin, J. F. (1987) The Urban Character of Christian Worship (Orientalia Christiana
Analecta 228). Rome

Baity, J. C. (1980) ‘Notes sur l’habitat romain, byzantin et arabe d’ Apamee: rapport
de synthese’, in Colloque Apamee de Syrie, Musees Royaux d’Art et Histoire
(Brussels) 471—501

Baity, J. C. (1989) ‘Apamee au Vie siecle’, in Hommes et richesses 1.79—96
Banaji, J. (199a) ‘Rural Communities in the Late Empire, a.d. 300—700: Monetary
and Economic Aspects’ (Oxford D.Phil. thesis)

Barker, G. et al. (1985) Cyrenaica in Antiquity (BAR International Series 236).
Oxford

Barnes, T. D. (1974) ‘A law of Julian’, CPh 69: 288-91
Barnish, S. J. B. (1985) ‘The wealth of Iulianus Argentarius’, Byt- 55: 5-38
Barnish, S. J. B. (1986) ‘Taxation, land, and barbarian settlement in the western
empire’, PBSR 54: 170—95

Barnish, S. J. B. (1987) ‘Pigs, plebeians and potentes ’, PBSR 55:1 57—85
Barnish, S. J. B. (1988) ‘Transformation and survival in the western senatorial aris-
tocracy, C. A.D. 400-700’, PBSR 56: I2<^5 5
Barnish, S. J. B. (1989) ‘The transformation of classical cities and the Pirenne
debate’, JRA 2: 385-400

Barnish, S. J. B. (1990) ‘Maximian, Cassiodorus, Boethius, Theodahad’, NMS 34:
17-31

Barnish, S. J. B. (1992) Cassiodorus: Variae. Liverpool

Barnwell, P. S. (199a) Emperor, Prefects and Kings: The Roman West, qyj—ydj. London
Bartlett, R. (1986) Trial by Fire and Water: The Medieval Judicial Ordeal. Oxford
Bavand, B. (1989) ‘Cadre de vie et habitat urbain en Italie centrale byzantine’,
MEFR 101— 2: 465—532

Beck, H. G. (1966) ‘Senat und Volk von Ivonstantinopel’ (Sitzungsberichte,
Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, phil.-hist. Kl. 6). 10—22

ioo6

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Berger, A. (1958a) ‘Leontios 6’, RE suppl. 7: 373—5
Berger, A. (1958b) ‘Leontios 7’, RE suppl. 7: 375-6

Berger, A. (1988) Untersuchungen yu den ‘Patna Konstantinoupoleos’ (Poikila Byzantina
8). Bonn

von Bethmann-Hollweg, M. A. (1 866) Der Cmlpro^ess des gemeinen Rechts III=Der
romische Civilpro^ess III, Cognitiones. Bonn

Beyerle, F. (1924) ‘IJber Normtypen und Erweiterungen der Lex Salica’, ZRG GA
44: 216—61

Beyerle, F. (1954) ‘Zur Textgestalt und Textgeschichte der Lex Burgundionum’,
ZRG GA 71: 23—54

Beyerle, F. (1961) ‘Das legislative Werk Chilperichs I’, ZRG GA 78: 1-38

Beyerle, F. (1962) Leges Langobardorum 643—866, 2nd edn. Witzenhausen

Beyerle, F. (1972) ‘Die Malberg Glossen der Lex Salica’, ZRG G 4 89: 1-32

Bieler, L. (1963) The Irish Penitentials. Dublin

Binchy, D. A. (1956) ‘Some Celtic legal terms’, Celtica 3: 221—31

Binchy, D. A. (ed.) (1979) Corpus Iuris Hibernici. Dublin

Biondi, B. (1952-4) Diritto romano cristiano. Milan

Biraben, J.-N. (1989) ‘Rapport: la peste du VI e siecle dans l’empire byzantin’, in
Hommes et rich esses 1 . 1 2 1 - 5

Birks, P. and McLeod, G. (1987) Justinian’s Institutes. Ithaca, NY
Blake, H. M., Potter, T. W and Whitehouse, D. B. (eds.) (1978) Papers in Italian
Archaeology 1 . London

Blockley, R. C. (1969) ‘Internal self-policing in the late Roman administration:
some evidence from Ammianus Marcellinus’, Class, et Med. 30: 403—19
Blockley, R. (1985) The History of Menander the Guardsman. Liverpool
Blockley, R. C. (1992) East Roman Foreign Policy, Formation and Conduct from Diocletian
to Anastasias. Leeds

Bognetti, G. P. (i966-8a) L’eta Longobarda. 4 vols. Milan

Bognetti, G. P. (1966-8^ ‘L’editto di Rotari come espediente politico di una mon-
archia barbarica’, in Bognetti (1966— 8a) iv.i 1 5—35
Bognetti, G. P. (1966— 8c) ‘S. Maria Foris Portas di Castelseprio e la storia religiosa
dei Longobardi’, in Bognetti (1966—83) 11.13-683
Bossy, J. (ed.) (1983) Disputes and Settlements: Law and Human Relations in the West.
Cambridge

Bowman, A. K. (1985) ‘Landholding in the Hermopolite nome in the fourth
century’, JRS 75:13 7—6 3

Bowman, A. and Woolf, G. (eds.) (1994) Literacy and Power in the Roman World.
Cambridge

Brandes, W (1989) Die Stddte Kleinasiens imy. und 8. Jahrhundert. Amsterdam
Brandt, FI. (1988) Zeitkritik in der Spatantike. Munich

Brooks, A. D. (1986) ‘A review of evidence of continuity in British towns in the
5 th and 6th centuries’, OJA 5 (i): 77-102
Brown, P. R. L. (1978) The Making of Late Antiquity . Cambridge, MA
Brown, P. R. L. (1992) Power and Persuasion in Late Antiquity: Towards a Christian
Empire. Madison

Briihl, C.-R. (1975) Palatium und Civitas. Studien yier Profantopographie spdtantiker
Civitates. 1. Gallien. Cologne and Vienna
Brunner, H. (1906, 1928) Deutsche Rechtsgeschichte. 2nd edn. Berlin

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOO7

Bruns, K. G. and Sachau, E. (ed. with German trans.) (1880) Syrisch-Romisches
Rechtsbnch aus dem funften Jahrhundert. Leipzig
Buchner, R. (1953) Die Rechtsquellen, Beiheft zu Wattenbach-Levison (1952)
Deutschlands Geschichtsquellen im Mittelalter: Voryeit und Karo linger. Weimar
Burgmann, L. (1986) ‘Neue Zeugnisse der Digestensumme des Anonymos’, in
Simon (ed.) (1986) 101— 16

Burnham, B. C. and Wacher, J. (1990) The Small Tou’tis of Roman Britain. London
Bury, J. B. (1910) ‘Magistri scriniorum, dvTLypafrjs and pefepevhdpioC , HSCP
21: 23—9

Bury, J. B. (191 1) The Imperial Administrative System in the Ninth Century, with a revised
text of the Kleterologion of Philotheos. London
Bury, J. B. (1919) ‘Justa Grata Honoria’,/7A’9: 1-13
Butler, R. M. (1959) ‘Late Roman town walls in Gaul’,M/n6: 25—50
Caimi, J. (1981) ‘Iohannis Lydi de Magistratibus 111.70. Note esegetiche e spunti in
tema di fiscalita e legislazione protobizantine’, RSBS 1: 317—61
Cameron, Alan (1973) Porphyrins the Charioteer. Oxford

Cameron, Alan (1978) ‘The House of Anastasius’, GRBS 19: 259-76 (=Alan
Cameron, Literature and Society xiv)

Cameron, Alan (1981) ‘The empress and the poet’, YCS 27: 217-89 (=Alan
Cameron, Literature and Society 111)

Cameron, Alan, and Cameron, Averil (1966) ‘The Cycle of Agathias ’,///5 86: 6—25
Cameron, Alan, and Long, J. (1993) Barbarians and Politics at the Court of Arcadius.
Berkeley

Cameron, Averil (1967) ‘Notes on the Sophiae, the Sophianae and the harbour of
Sophia’, Byg. 37: 11—20 (= Averil Cameron (i98i)xiii)

Cameron, Averil (1978) ‘The Theotokos in sixth-century Constantinople. A city
finds its symbol’, JTS 29: 79—108 (= Averil Cameron (1981) xvi)

Cameron, Averil (1980) ‘The artistic patronage of Justin II’, By%. 50: 62-84
(= Averil Cameron (1981) xii)

Cameron, Averil (1981) Continuity and Change in Sixth-Century Byzantium. London
Cameron, Averil (1982) ‘Byzantine Africa: the literary evidence’, in Humphrey (ed.)

(1982) 26—92 (= Averil Cameron, Changing Cultures vn)

Cameron, Averil (ed.) (1995) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East 111, States,
Resources, Armies. Princeton

Campbell, J. B. (1984) The Emperor and the Roman Army yi BC- AD 23 y Oxford
Canivet, P. and Rey-Coquais, J.-P. (eds.) (1992) La Syrie de By^ance a I’Islam, \TIeand
l Tile siecles. Inst. Frang. de Damas. Damascus
Capizzi, C. (1969) L’Imperatore Anastasio I. Rome

Carrie, J.-M. (1986) ‘L’esercito: trasformazioni funzionali ed economie locali’, in
Giardina (ed.), Societd romana 449—88, 760—71
Carrie, J.-M. (1995) ‘L’etat a la recherche de nouveaux modes de financement des
armees (Rome et Byzance, IVe-VIIIe siecles)’, in Averil Cameron (ed.) (1 99 5)
27—60

Carver, M. (ed.) (1992) The Age of Sutton Hoo. Woodbridge

Cavallo, G. (1984) ‘Libri e continuity della cultura antica in eta barbarica’, in Magistra
barbaritas. I barbari in Italia (Milan) 603-62
Cesa, M. (1988) Ennodio: llta de! beatissimo Epifanio vescovo della chiesa pavese
(Bibliotheca di Athenaeum 6). Como

ioo8

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Charanis, P. (i 9 5 5) ‘The significance of coins as evidence for the history of Athens
and Corinth in the seventh and eighth centuries’, Historia 4: 163-7
Charanis, P. (1966) ‘Observations on the demography of the Byzantine empire’,
Thirteenth International Congress of Byzantine Studies, Main Papers (Oxford) 1-19
(= Charanis (1972b) 1)

Charanis, P. (1972a) ‘The Armenians in the Byzantine empire’, Bygslavica 22:
196—240 (= Charanis (1972b) v)

Charanis, P. (1 972b) Studies on the Demography of the Byzantine Empire. London
Charles-Edwards, T. M. (1989) The Welsh Taws. Cardiff
Charles-Edwards, T. M. and Kelly, F. (eds.) (1983) Bechbretha. Dublin
Chastagnol, A. (1963) ‘L’administration du diocese italien au Bas-Empire’, Historia
12: 348-79

Chastagnol, A. (1978) T’ album municipal de Timgad. Bonn

Chastagnol, A. (1979) ‘L’empereur Julien et les avocats de Numidie’, Antiquites
Africaines 14: 220-35

Chauvot, A. (1986) Procope de Gaga, Priscien de Caesaree, panegyriqnes de I’empereur
Anastase I. Bonn

Chauvot, A. (1987) ‘Curiales et paysans en orient a la fin du Ve et au debut du Vie
siecle: note sur l’institution du vindex’, in Frezouls (ed.) (1987) 271—81
Chrysos, E. (1971) ‘Die angebliche Abschaffung der stadtischen Kurien durch
Kaiser Anastasius’, Byg. 3: 97—8

Chrysos, E. K. and Schwarcz, A. (eds.) (1989) Das Reich und die Barbaren
(Veroffentlichungen des Instituts fur Osterreichische Geschichtsforschung
29). Vienna

Classen, P. (ed.) (1977a) Recht und Schrift im Mittelalter (Vortrage und Forschungen
23). Sigmaringen

Classen, P. (1977b) ‘Fortleben und Wandel spatromischen Urkundenwesens im
friihen Mittelalter’, in Classen (ed.) (1977a) 13—54
Classen, P. (1977c) Kaiserreskript und Konigsurkunde. 2nd edn. Thessalonica
Classen, P. and Scheibert, P. (eds.) (1964) Festschrift Percy Ernst Schramm. Wiesbaden
Claude, D. (i960) Topographie and I 'erfassung der Stddte Bonrges und Poitiers bis in das n
fahrhundert (Historische Studien 380). Liibeck
Claude, D. (1964) ‘Llntersuchungen zum friihfrankischen Comitat’, ZRG GA 81:
1—79

Claude, D. (1969) Die bygantinische Stadtim 6 fahrhundert. Munich
Clauss, M. (1980) Der magister officiorum in der Spatantike (4—6. Jh.). Munich
Clauss, M. (1984) TJrbicius “praepositus imperii”’, in Sodalitas. Scritti in onore di
Antonio Guarino ///(Naples) 1245—57

Clover, F. M. (1982) ‘Carthage and the Vandals’, in Humphrey (ed.) (1982) 1—22
Collinet, P. (1925) Histoire de F hole de droit de Beyrouth. Paris
Collins, R. (1983) Early Medieval Spain 400— 1000. London

Conrad, L. I. (1986) ‘The plague in Bilad al-Sham in pre-Islamic times’, in Bakhit
and Asfour (eds.) (1986) 11.143—63
Conrat, M. (1903) Breviarium Alaricianum. Leipzig
Coster, C. H. (1935) The indicium quinquevirale. Cambridge, MA
Cotton, H. M., Cockle, W H. and Millar, F. G. B. (1995) ‘The papyrology of the
Roman Near East: a survey’, JRS 85: 214-35

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOO9

Courtois, C. etal. (eds.) (1952) Tablettes Albertini. Actes prives de I’epoque T andale. Paris
Cracco Ruggini, L. (1961) Economia e societd nell’Italia annonaria. Milan
Cracco Ruggini, L. (1971) ‘Le associazioni professionali nel mondo romano bizan-
tino’, Settimane di studi 18: 59-193
Crawford, J. S. (1990) Byzantine Shops at Sardis. Cambridge, MA
Crook, J. (1 99 5) Legal Advocacy in the Roman World. London

Cuppers, H. (1977) ‘Die Stadt Trier und verschiedene Phasen ihres Ausbaues’, in
Duval and Frezouls (eds.) (1977 ) 223—8

Dagron, G. (1969) ‘Aux origines de la civilisation byzantine: langue de culture et
langue d’etat’, RH 241: 23—56

Dagron, G. (1977) ‘Le christianisme dans la ville byzantine’, DOP 31: 3-25 (=
Dagron (1984b) ix)

Dagron, G. (1978) Vie et miracles de Saint Thecle. Brussels

Dagron, G. (1979) ‘Entre village et cite: la bourgade rurale des IVe-VIIe siecles en
Orient’, Koinonia 3: 29—52 (= Dagron (1984b) vm)

Dagron, G. (1980) ‘Two documents concerning mid-sixth century Mopsuestia’, in
Laiou-Thomadakis (ed.) (1980) 19—30 (= Dagron (1984b) vi)

Dagron, G. (1984a) ‘Les villes dans l’lllyricum protobyzantin’, in Villes etpeuplement
dans I’lllyricum protobyzantin (1984). (Collection de l’Ecole Frangaise de Rome
77) (Paris) 1-19

Dagron, G. (1984b) La romanite chretienne en Orient. London

Dagron, G. (1989) ‘Vie religieuse a Constantinople’, Act. XI Cong. Int. dArch. Chret.
(Rome) 11.1069—85

Dagron, G. and Feissel, D. (1987) Inscriptions de Glide. Paris

Daniel, R. W. (1996) ‘The Petra papyri in historical perspective: the dating formu-
las’, ACCFS Newsletter 8.2 (Winter): 1-4
Daube, D. (1947) Studies in Biblical Law. Cambridge
Daube, D. (1956) Forms of Roman Legislation. Oxford

Dauphin, C. (1987) ‘Les Komai de Palestine’, Proche Orient Chretien 3: 251—67
Dauphin, C. M. and Schonfield, J. J. (1983) ‘Settlements of the Roman and
Byzantine periods on the Golan Heights: preliminary report on the survey
1 979-8 1 ’, Israel Exploration Journal 33:1 89—206
Davies, W. (1982) ‘The Latin charter tradition in western Britain, Brittany and
Ireland in the early medieval period’, in Whitelock, McKitterick and Dumville
(eds.) (1982) 258—80

Davies, W and Fouracre, P. (eds.) (1986) The Settlement of Disputes in Early Medieval
Europe. Cambridge

Dazert, H. (1986) Ergdnyungsabgaben und ausserordentliche Lasten im romischen Reich im
7. und friihen /. Jh. n. Chr. Freiburg im Breisgau
Declareuil,J. (1910) ‘Les comtes de la cite’, Rev. Hist, du Droit Francis et Etranger 34:
794-836

Deichmann, F. W. (1976-89) Ravenna: Hauptstadt des spdtantiken Abendlandes 11.2-3.
Wiesbaden and Stuttgart

Delmaire, R. (1989) Largesses Sacrees et Res Privata: I’aerarium imperial et son administra-
tion du IV’ an T T‘ siecle. Rome

Delmaire, R. (1995) Les institutions du Bas-Empire romain de Constantin a Justinien. I.
Les institutions dviles palatines. Paris

IOIO

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Demandt, A. (1970) ‘Magister militum’, RE suppl. 12: 5 5 3—790
Demandt, A. (1986) ‘Der Kelch von Ardabur und Arethusa’, D OP 40: 113— 17
Demandt, A. (1989) Die spdtantihe: romische Geschichte von Diocletian bis Justinian,
284—364 n. Cbr. Handbuch der Altertumswissenschaft 3, 6. Munich
Demangel, R. (1949) Contribution a la topographie de I’Hebdomon. Paris
Dentzer, J.-M. (1985) Le Hauran. 1— 11. Paris

Devreesse, R. (1945) Ee patriarcat d’Antiocbe depuis la paix de I’eglise jusqu’a la conquete
arabe. Paris

Dhondt, J. (1957) ‘L’essor urbain entre Meuse et mer du Nord a l’epoque
merovingienne’, Studi in onore diA. Sapori (Milan) 1.5 5—78
Dilcher, G. (1964) ‘Bischof und Stadtverfassung in Oberitalien ’, ZRG GA 81: 225-66
Dixon, P. (1992) ‘The cities are not populated as once they were’, in Rich (ed.)
(1992) 145-60

Dolezalek, G. (1985) Repertorium manuscriptorum veterum Codicis Iustiniani. Frankfurt
am Main

Dolger, F. J. (1959) ‘Die friihbyzantinisch und byzantinisch beeinflusste Stadt \Atti
del 3 congresso Internationale di studi s nil’ alto medioevo (Spoleto) 66-100
Doncel-Voute, P. (1988) Les pavements des eglises bygantines de Syrie et du Liban. Louvain
Donner, F. (1981) The Early Islamic Conquests. Princeton

d’Ors, A. (i960) El Codigo de Eurico: Estudios Visigotices 11, Cuadernos del Institute)
Juridico Espanol 12. Rome and Madrid
Doyle, W (1996) Venality: The Sale of Offices in Eighteenth-Century France. Oxford
Drijvers, H. J. W (1992) ‘The Gospel of the Twelve Apostles: a Syriac apocalypse
from the early Islamic period’, in Averil Cameron, and L. I. Conrad (eds.). The
Bygantine and Early Islamic Near East 1: Problems in the Literary Source Material
(Princeton) 189—213

Duchesne, L. (1907) Fastes episcopaux de I’ancienne Gaule. Paris
Dumville, D. N. (1984) ‘On the dating of the Breton lawcodes’, Etudes Celtiques 21:
207—21

Duncan-Jones, R. P. (1 978) ‘Pay and numbers in Diocletian’s army’, Chiron 8 : 541—60
Dunn, A. (1993) ‘The Kommerkiarios, Apotheke, Dromos, Vardarios and the
west’, BMGS 17: 3—24

Durliat, J. (198 1) ‘Les grands proprietaires africaines et l’etat byzantin (5 3 3—709)’,
Cahiers de Tunisie 29: 517—31

Durliat, J. (1982) ‘Les attributions civiles des eveques byzantines: l’exemple du
diocese d’Afrique 533—709 \JOB 32.2: 73-84
Durliat, J. (1984) ‘L’administration civile du diocese byzantin d’Afrique (5 3 3-703)’,
RSBS 4: 149-78

Durliat, J. (1989) ‘La peste du VI e siecle. Pour un nouvel examen des sources byzan-
tines’, in Hommes et richesses 1. 107-19

Durliat, J. (1 990a) De la ville antique a la ville Byzantine: le probleme des subsistances. Rome
Durliat, J. (1990b) Les finances pnbliques de Diocletien aux Carolingiens (284-889).
Sigmaringen

Duval, N. (1989) ‘L’eveque et la cathedrale en Afrique du Nord’,Mefef A 7 Cong. Int.
d’Arch. Chret. (Rome) 1.354-403

Duval, N. and Caillet, J. P. (1992) Basiliques chretiennes de lAlgerie. Paris
Duval, P.-M. (1959) ‘Une enquete sur les enceintes gauloises’, Gallia 17: 37—62

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOI I

Duval, P.-M. and Frezouls, E. (eds.) (1977) Themes de recherches sur les villes antiques
d’ Occident. Paris

Eck, W. (1978) ‘Der Einfluss der Konstantinischen Wende auf die Auswahl der
Bischofe im 4 und 5 Jahrhundert’, Chiron 8: 561-85
Eck, W (1983) ‘Der Episkopat im spatantiken Africa’, HZ 236: 265—95
Eck, W (1989) Religion und Gesellschaft in der romischen Kaisergeit. Cologne/Vienna
Eck, W. and Galsterer, H. (1991) Die Stadt in Oberitalien and in den nordivestlichen
Provingen des romischen Reiches. Mainz

Eckhardt, K. A. (1954) Pactus Legis Salicae I, Einfiihrung und 80-Titel Text.
Germanenrechte, NF. Gottingen

Eckhardt, K. A. (1956) Pactus Legis Salicae II.2, Kapitularien und go Titel-Text.
Germanenrechte, NF. Gottingen

Eckhardt, K. A. (1962) Pactus Legis Salicae. MGHLegam Sectio 1, iv.i. Hanover
Eckhardt, W. A. (1967) ‘Die Decretio Childeberti und ihre Uberlieferung’, ZRG GA,
84: 1-71

Elton, H. (1992) ‘Defence in fifth-century Gaul’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.),
Fifth-Century Gaul 167-76

Ennen, E. (1975) Die europaische Stadt des Mittelalters. Gottingen
Ensslin, W. (1942) ‘Palatini’, RE xvm, 1: 2529—60
Ensslin, W. (1961) ‘Vindex’, RE ix, ai: 25—7

Ersch,J. S. and Gruber, J. G. (eds.) (1868 } Allgemeine Encyklopddie der Wissenschaften
und der Kiinste 1.86

Evenari, M. (1971) The Negev. Cambridge, MA

Ewig, E. (1958) ‘Volkstum und Volksbewusstsein im Frankenreich des 7.

Jahrhunderts’, Settimane diStudi 5: 609—14 (= Ewig (1976) 1.246-9)

Ewig, E. (1969) ‘Die Stellung des Ribuariens in der Verfassungsgeschichte des
Merowingerreiches’ (Gesellschaft fur rheinische Geschichtskunde. Vortrage
18) (= Atsma (ed.) (1976) 450—71)

Ewig, E. (1976) Spdtantikes und frdnkisches Gallien. 2 vols. Munich
Ewig, E. (1988) Die Memvinger und das Frankenreich. Stuttgart
Falchi, G. L. (1989) Sulla codificagione del diritto romano nel Ye VI secolo. Rome
Feissel, D. (1989) ‘L’eveque, titres et fonctions d’apres les inscriptions jusqu’au
Vile siecle’, Acfes AT Cong. Int. d’Arch. Chret. (Rome) 1.801-28
Feissel, D. and Kaygusuz, I. (1 985) ‘Un mandement imperial du VI e siecle dans une
inscription d’Hadrianoupolis d’Honoriade’, TeYMBy^y: 397-419
Fentress, E. (1988) ‘Serif, les thermes du Ve siecle’, in Mastino (ed.) (1988) 320-37
Ferrill, A. (1986) The Fall of the Roman Empire: The Military Explanation. London
Ferrini, C. (ed.) (1884-97) Institutionum graeca paraphrasis Theophilo antecessori vulgo
tributa. Berlin

Ferrini, C. (1929) ‘Gli estratti di Giuliano Ascalonita’, in Ferrini, Open 1 (Milan)
443-52

Festugiere, A.-J. (195 9) Antioche paienne et chretienne: Libanius, Chrysostome et les moines
de Syrie. Paris

Fevrier, P. A. (1979) ‘Permanence et heritage de l’antiquite dans la topographie des
villes de l’occident durant le haut moyen age’, Settimane di Studi 21: 41—138
Fevrier, P. A. et al. (eds.) (1980) La ville antique des origines au IXe siecle (Histoire de la
France urbaine (ed. G. Duby) 1). Paris

1012 II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Fischer, H. T. and Riekhoff-Pauli, S. (1982) l on den Romern gtt den Bajuvaren. Munich
Fixot, M. (1980) ‘Les villes du Vile au IXe siecle’, in Fevrier et al. (eds.) (1980)
497-62

Flemming, J. and Floffmann, G. (1917) Akten der ephesinischen Synode vom fahre 449
(Abhandlungen der koniglichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften Gottingen,
phil.-hist. Kl. 1 5.1)

Fleuriot, L. (1971) ‘Un fragment en latin de tres anciennes lois bretonnes armori-
caines du Vie siecle’, Annales de Bretagne 78: 601-60
Fontaine, J. (1959) Isidore de Seville et la culture classique dans I’Espagne msigothique. Paris
Forsyth, G. H. and Weitzmann, K. (1966) The Monastery of Saint Catherine at Mount
Sinai. Ann Arbor

Foss, C. (1975) ‘The Persians in Asia Minor and the end of antiquity’, EHR 90:
721-47 (= Foss (1990) 1)

Foss, C. (1976) Byzantine and Turkish Sardis. Cambridge, MA
Foss, C. (1977a) ‘Archaeology and the “twenty cities of Asia ”’,AJA 81: 469-86 (=
Foss (1990) v)

Foss, C. (1977b) ‘Late antique and Byzantine Ankara’, DOP 31: 27—87 (=Foss
(1990) vi)

Foss, C. (1977c) ‘Attius Philippus and the walls of Side’, ZPE 26: 172—80 (= Foss
(1990) viii)

Foss, C. (1979) Ephesus after Antiquity: A Late Antique, Byzantine and Turkish City.
Cambridge

Foss, C. (1990) History and Archaeology of Byzantine Asia Minor. Aldershot
Fotiou, A. (1988) 'Recruitment shortages in sixth-century Byzantium’, Byg. 5 8: 65—77
Frank, R. I. (1969) Scholae Palatinae: The Palace Guards of the Later Roman Empire
(Papers and Monographs of the American Academy in Rome 23). Rome
Frank, T. (ed.) (1933—40) An Economic Survey of Ancient Rome. 5 vols. Baltimore
Frere, S. S. (1977) ‘Verulamium and Canterbury’, in Duval and Frezouls (eds.)
(1977) 189-95

Frezouls, E. (ed.) (1987) Societes urbaines, societes rurales dans I’Asie mineure et la Syrie hel-
lenistique et romaine. Strasbourg

Frezouls, E. (1988) Les villes antiques de la France 11. Strasbourg
Gage,J. (1933) ‘Hravgos vlkottchos. La victoire imperiale dans l’Empire chretien’,
Revue d’histoire et de philosophic religienses 1 3 : 370-400
Ganshof, F. L. (1961) Was waren die Kapitularien? Weimar

Garnsey, P, Hopkins, K. and Whittaker, C. R. (eds.) (1983) Trade in the Ancient
Economy. London

Gascou, J. (1972) ‘La detention collegiale de l’autorite pagarchique dans l’Egypte
byzantine’, By%. 43: 60—72

Gascou, J. (1976a) ‘L’institution des Bucellaires’, BIFAO 72: 143—56
Gascou, J. (1976b) ‘Les monasteres pachomiens et l’etat byzantin’, BIFAO 76:
1 57-8

Gascou, J. (1976c) ‘Les institutions de l’hippodrome en Egypte byzantine’, BIFAO
j 6 : 185—212

Gascou, J. (1985) ‘Les grands domaines, la cite et l’etat en Egypte byzantine’,
T&MBy^cy. 1—90

Gascou, J. (1987) ‘Le cadastre d’Aphrodito’, T&MBy% 10: 103-48

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOI 3

Gascou, J. (1989) ‘Le tableau budgetaire d’Antaeopolis’, in Hommes et richesses
1.279-313

Gascou, J. (1990) ‘Remarques critiques surla table budgetaire d’Antaeopolis’, ZPE
82: 97—101

Gaudemet, J. (1958) L’Eglise dans F empire romain, /T r e— Ve siecles. Paris
Gaudemet, J. (1979a) La formation du droit seculier et du droit de Feglise aux I\eet\ 7 e
siecles. 2nd edn. Paris

Gaudemet, J. (1979b) ‘Jus et leges’, in Gaudemet, Etudes de droit romain 1 (Camerino)
439-70

Geremek, H. (1981) ‘Les politeuomenoi egyptiens sont-ils identiques aux bouleutai? ,
Anagenesis 1:23 1-47

Geremek, H. (1990) ‘Sur la question des boulai dans les villes egyptiennes au
Ve-VIIe siecles \ffP 20: 47—54

Giardina, A. (1977) Aspetti della Burocrayia nel Basso Impero. Rome
Goffart, W. (1970) ‘Did Julian combat venal suffragiuni? A note on CTh 2.29.1’,
CPI: 65: 145—51

Goffart, W. (1982) ‘Old and new in Merovingian taxation’, P&P 96: 3—21
Goffart, W. (1989) Rome’s Fall and After. London
Goodchild, R. (1979) Libyan Studies (ed. J. Reynolds). London
Gorges, J.-G. (1979) Les villas hispano-romaines. Paris

Greatrex, G. (1996) ‘Stephanus, the father of Procopius?’, Medieval Prosopography 17:
125-45

Gregory, T. E. (1979) Vox Populi: Popular Opinion and Violence in the Religious
Controversies of the jth Century A.D. Columbus, OH
Grierson, P. and Blackburn, M. (1986) Medieval European Coinage 1, The Early Middle
Ages fth-ioth Centuries). Cambridge

Grosse, R. (1920) Romische Militdrgeschichte von Gallienus bis yum Beginn der byyantini-
schen Themenverfassung. Berlin

Griinewald, M. E. G. (1974) Spatantihe Herrschaftsvillen in den nordivestlichen Provinyen
des romischen Reiches. Vienna

Gui, I., Duval, N. and Caillet, J.-P. (1 992) Basiliques chretiennes d’Afrique du Nord, pt.

I, Inventaire de lAlgerie (Etudes Augustiniennes: Antiquites 1 29). Paris
Guilland, R. (1969) Etudes de topographie de Constantinople byyantin (Berliner byzanti-
nistische Arbeiten 37). Berlin
Guilland, R. (1971) ‘Questeur’, Byy. 41: 78—104

Guillou, A. (1980) ‘Transformations des structures socio-economiques dans le
monde byzantin du Vie au Vile siecle’, Zbornik Radova 19: 72-8
von Halban, A. (1 899) Das romische Rechtin den germanischen Volksstaaten n. Breslau
Haldon, J. F. (1979) Recruitment and Conscription in the Byyantine Army c. jjo—gjo: A
Study on the stratiotika ktemata (Sitzungsberichte der Osterreichischen Akad.
der Wissens., phil.-hist. Kl. 357). Vienna
Haldon, J. F. (1984) By yantine Praetorians. Bonn

Haldon, J. F. (1986) ‘Ideology and social change in the seventh century: military dis-
content as a barometer’, Klio 68: 139—90
Hanel, G. (ed.) (1849) Lex Romana Visigothorum. Leipzig
Hanel, G. (1857) Corpus Legum. Leipzig

Hanel, G. (ed.) (1873) Iuliani Epitome Latina Novellarum Iustiniani. Leipzig

ioi4

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Hannestad, K. (1961) ‘Les forces militaires d’apres la guerre gothique de Procope’,
Class. etMed. 21: 136-83

Hardy, E. R. (1968) ‘The Egyptian policy of Justinian’, DOP zz: 23—40
Harries, J. (1988) ‘The Roman imperial quaestor from Constantine to Theodosius
ll\JRSj8: 148—72

Harries, J. (1 992a) ‘Christianity and the city in late Roman Gaul’, in Rich (ed.) (1 992)
77-98

Harries, J. (1992b) ‘Sidonius Apollinaris, Rome and the barbarians: a climate of
treason?’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul z <)%- 308
Harries, J. (1994a) ‘Pius princeps-. Theodosius II and fifth-century Constantinople’,
in Magdalino (ed.), New Constantines 35-44
Harries, J. (1994b) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rome, AD 407— 48 J. Oxford
Harries, J. and Wood, I. (eds.) (1993) The Theodosian Code. London
Harris, W V. (1989) Ancient Literacy. Cambridge, MA

Harrison, R. M. (1979) ‘Nouvelles decouvertes romaines tardives et paleobyzan-
tines en Lycie’, CRAI 229—39

Harrison, R. M., et al. (1986) Excavations at Sarafane in Istanbul 1. Princeton
Hassall, M. and Ireland, R. (eds.) (1979) The Anonymus de Rebus Bellicis (BAR
International Series 63). Oxford

Heather, P. (1994) ‘New men for new Constantines? Creating an imperial elite in
the eastern Mediterranean’, in Magdalino (ed.), New Constantines 1 1-33
Heather, P. (1995) ‘Theoderic as war-leader’, EME 4: 145—73
Heidenheimer, A. J., Johnstone, M. and Levine, V. T. (eds.) (1979) Political
Corruption: A Handbook. New Brunswick

Heimbach, C. W E. (1 868) ‘Griechisch-romisches Recht 1 (5 34—867) 2: Geschichte
der Rechtswissenschaft’, in Ersch and Gruber (eds.) (1868) 223-98
Heimbach, G. E. (ed.) (1846-51) Authenticum. Novellarum constitutiomim Iustiniani
versio vulgata. Leipzig

Heinzelmann, M. (1976) Bischofsherrshaft in Gallien. Munich

Hendy, M. E (1972) ‘Aspects of coin production and fiscal administration in the
late Roman and early Byzantine period’, NCser. 7, 12: 117—39
Hendy, M. F. (1988) ‘From public to private: the western barbarian coinages as a
mirror of the disintegration of late Roman state structures’, Viator 19: 29—78
Hirschfield, Y. (1992) The Judaean Desert Monasteries in the Byzantine Period. New
Haven

Hobley, B. (1986) Roman and Saxon London: A Reappraisal. London
Hodges, R. and Whitehouse, D. (1983) Mohammed, Charlemagne and the Origins of
Europe. London

Hoffmann, D. (1969) Das spdtrdmische Bewegungsheer und die Notitia Dignitatum.
Diisseldorf

Hohlfelder, R. L. (ed.) (1982) City, Town and Countryside in the Early Byzantine Era.
New York

Holuni, K. (198 8) King Herod's Dream: Caesarea on the Sea. New York
Holuni, K. (1995) ‘Inscriptions from the imperial revenue office of Byzantine
Caesarea Palestinae’, in J. H. Humphrey (ed.) The Roman and Byyantine Near
East: Some Recent Archaeological Research (JRA Supplementary Series 14) (Ann
Arbor) 333-45

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOI 5

Holum, K. and Vikan, G. (1979) ‘The Trier Ivory, Adventus ceremonial and the
relics of St. Stephen’, DOP 33: 1 13— 3 3

Honigmann, E. (1951) Eveques et eveches monophy sites d’Asie anterieure an Vie si'ecle
( CSCO 127 subsid. 17). Louvain
Honore, T. (1978) Tribonian. London
Honore, T. (1994) Emperors and Lawyers. 2nd edn. Oxford
Honore, T. (1998) Law in the Crisis of Empire, yyy-qjj a.d. Oxford
Hopkins, K. (1978) Conquerors and Slaves. Cambridge
Horn, G. (1987) Die Romer in Nordrheinwestfalen. Stuttgart

Howard-Johnston, J. D. (199;) ‘The two great powers in late antiquity: a compari-
son’, in Averil Cameron (ed.) (1995) 1 57-226
Humphrey, J. H. (1980) ‘Vandal and Byzantine Carthage’, in Pedley (ed.) (1980)
85—120

Humphrey, J. H. (ed.) (1 982) Excavations at Carthage 1778 conducted by the University of
Michigan, vii. Ann Arbor

Hunger, H. (1978) Die hochsprachliche profane Literatnr der Byyantiner 11. Munich
Hunt, D. (1993) ‘Christianising the Roman empire: the evidence of the Code’, in
Harries and Wood (eds.) (1993) 143-58

Huschke, P. E., etal (eds.) (1927) Iurisprudentiae anteiustinianae reliquiae 11. 2. 6th edn.
Leipzig

Huxley, G. L. (1977) ‘The second dark age of the Peloponnese’, Lakonikai Spoudai
3: 84—110

Jaeger, H. (i960) ‘Justinien et l’episcopalis audientia’ Nonv. Rev. Hist. Droit Franf. et
Etr., 4 ser. 38: 214—62

James, E. (1982) The Origins of France: From Clovis to the Capetians 300—1000. London
James, E. (1983) ‘Beati pacifier, bishops and the law in sixth-century Gaul’, in Bossy
(ed.) (1983) 25-46

James, E. (1988) The Franks. Oxford

Janin, R. (1964) Constantinople byyantine. 2nd edn. Paris

Jenkins, D. (1986) The Law of Hywel Dda: Law Texts from Medieval Wales. Landysul
Johnson, A. C. and West, L. C. (1949) Byyantine Egypt: Economic Studies. Princeton
Johnson, S. (1983) Late Roman Fortifications. London

Jolowicz, H. F. and Nicholas, B. (1972) Historical Introduction to the Study of Roman
Law. 3rd edn. Cambridge

Jones, A. H. M. (1940) The Greek City from Alexander to Justinian. Oxford
Jones, A. H. M. (i960) ‘Church finance in the fifth and sixth centuries’, JTS 11:
84-94

Jones, A. H. M., Grierson, P. and Crook, J. A. (1957) ‘The authenticity of the
“Testamentum S. Remigii”’, RBPh 35: 356—73
Kaegi, W (1981) Byzantine Military Unrest, 471—813. Amsterdam
Kaegi, W (1 992) Byzantium and the Early Islamic Conquests. Cambridge
Kaiser, R. (1979) ‘Steuer und Zoll in der Merowingerzeit’, Francia 7: 1-1 8
Kaiser, W (1991) ‘Digestenentstehung und Digesteniiberlieferung’, ZRGRA 108:
330-50

Kaplan, M. (1976) Les proprietes de la Couronne et de 1 ’Eglise dans l’ empire byyantin
(V- P 7 ‘ siecles). Paris

Kaser, M. (1967) ‘Vulgarrecht’, RE vol. ix.a. 2: 1283—1304

ioi6

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Kaser, M. (1975) Das romische Privatrechtw. 2nd edn. Munich
Kaser, M. and Hackl, K. (1996) Das romische Zivilpro^essrecht. 2nd edn. Munich
Kaser, M. and Schwartz, F. (eds.) (1956) Die Interpretatio yu den Paulussenten^en.
Cologne

Kaufhold, H. (1966) ‘Uber einige Handschriften der Versionen R I, R II und R III
des syrisch-romischen Rechtsbuches’, ZRG RA 83: 350—57
Kazhdan, H. A. P. (ed.) (1991) Oxford Dictionary of Byzantium. Oxford
Keay, S. J. (1988) Roman Spain. London
Keay, S. J. (1991) ‘New light on Tarraco’,/AT 4: 383-94

Keenan, J. G. (1990) ‘Evidence for the Byzantine army in the Syene papyri’, RASP
27: 139-50

Kelly, C. (1994) ‘Later Roman bureaucracy: going through the files’, in Bowman
and Woolf (eds.) (1994) 161—76
Kelly, F. (1988) A Grade to Early Irish Law. Dublin

Kempf, K. (1964) ‘Untersuchungen am Trierer Dom 1961—63’, Germania 42:
126—41

Kempf, S. J. (1968) ‘Grundrissentwicklung und Baugeschichte des Trierer Dorns’,
Das Munster 21: iff.

Kennedy, H. (1985a) ‘From Polis to Madina’, P&P 106: 3—27
Kennedy, H. (1985b) ‘The last century of Byzantine Syria’, BF 10: 141-83
Kennedy, H. (1992) ‘Antioch from Byzantium to Islam and back again’, in Rich
(ed.) (199a) 181—98

King, C. E. (ed.) (1 980) Imperial Revenue, Expenditure and Monetary Policy in the Fourth
Century AD (BAR International Series 76). Oxford
Kirsten, E. (1954) ‘Chorbischof ’, RAC t. 1105— 14

Kirsten, E. (1958) Die byryrntinische Stadt, Berichte zum XI Internationalen
Byzantinisten Kongress. Munich 1: 1—48
Klingshirn, W (1993) Caesarius of Arles. Cambridge

Kniitel, R. (1996) ‘Chrisdiche Zahlensymbolik im Digestenplan’, ZRG RA 113:
422—30

Kopecek, T. A. (1974) ‘The Cappadocian fathers and civic patriotism’, ChHist 43:
293—303

Kraeling, C. H. (1938) Gerasa, City of the Decapolis. New Haven
Kraemer, C. J. (1958) Excavations atNessana, conducted by H. D. Colt, Jr. (vol. III). The
Non-Eiterary Papyri. Princeton

Krause, J.-V. (1987) Spdtantike Patronatsformen im Westen des romischen Reiches. Munich
Krautheimer, R. (1966) ‘Die Decanneacubita in Konstantinopel’, in Schumacher
(ed.) (1966) 195-9

Krautschick, S. (1986) ‘Zwei Aspekte des Jahres 476’, Historia 85: 344—71
Kreuter, N. (1993) Romisches Privatrecht im j.Jh. n. Chr. Berlin
Kruger, J. (1990) Oxyrhynchos in der Kaiseryeit. Frankfurt am Main
Kruger, P. (1912) Geschichte der Ouellen und Eiteratur des romischen Rechts. 2nd edn.
Munich

Kruger, P, et al. (eds.) (1 890) Collectio librorum iuris anteiustiniani III. Berlin
Kruse, H. (1934) Studien yrrr offiyiellen Geltung des Kaiserbildes im romischen Reiche.
Paderborn

Kulakovskij, Y. (1912) Istotia l lyantii 2. Kiev

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOI7

La Rocca, C. (1 992) ‘Public building and urban change in northern Italy in the early
medieval period’, in Rich (ed.) (1992) 161-80
Laiou-Thomadakis, A. E. (ed.) (1980) Charanis Studies. New Brunswick
Leclercq, H. (1948) ‘Choreveques’, in F. Cabrol and H. Leclerq (eds.) (1948)
Dictionnaire d’archeologie chretienne et de liturgie. 111. 1423-52
Lee, A. D. (1993) Information and Frontiers: Roman Foreign Relations in Fate Antiquity.
Cambridge

Leipoldt, J. (1903) Schenute von Atripe und die Entstehung des nationalen dgyptischen
Christentums (Texte und Untersuchungen 25.1). Leipzig
Lemerle, P. (1971) Le premier humanisme bygantin. Paris (trans. as Lemerle, Bygantine
Humanism)

Lendon, J. E. (1997) Empire of Honour: The Art of Government in the Roman World.
Oxford

Lestocquoi, J. (1953) ‘Le paysage urbain en Gaul \AESC 8: 159-72
Levy, E. (1934) ‘Neue Bruchstiicke aus den Institutionen des Gaius’, ZRGRA 54:
258—311

Levy, E. (1945) Pauli Sententiae. A Palingenesia of the Opening Titles as a Specimen of
Research in West Roman l itlgarFan'. Ithaca
Levy, E. (1951) West Roman Vulgar Faw. The Fau’ of Property. Philadelphia
Levy, E. (1956) Westromisches Vulgarrecht. Das Obligationenrecht. Weimar
Levy, E. (1963a) Gesammelte Schrften 1. Cologne

Levy, E. (1963b) ‘Reflections on the first “reception” of Roman law in Germanic
states’, in Levy (1963a) 1. 201-9

Lewis, A.R. (1976) ‘The dukes of the regnum Francorum, ad 550—751’, Speculum 51:
381—410

Liebeschuetz, W (1959) ‘The finances of Antioch in the fourth century ad’, BZ 5 2:
344—56 (= Liebeschuetz (1989) xii)

Liebeschuetz, W (1972) Antioch: City and Imperial Administration in the Fater Roman
Empire. Oxford

Liebeschuetz, W. (1973) ‘The origin of the office of the Pagarch’, BZ 66: 38-46 (=
Liebeschuetz (1989) xvu)

Liebeschuetz, W (1974) ‘The Pagarch: city and imperial administration in
Byzantine Egypt’, JJP 18: 163-8 (= Liebeschuetz (1989) xvm)

Liebeschuetz, W. (1985) ‘Synesius and municipal politics of Cyrenaica in the 5th
century AD’, Byy. 55: 146—64 (= Liebeschuetz (1989) xiv)

Liebeschuetz, W (1986) ‘Why did Synesius become bishop of Ptolemais?’, By%. 5 6:
180-95 (= Liebeschuetz (1989) xv)

Liebeschuetz, W. (1987) ‘Government and administration in the late empire’, in
Wacher (ed.) (1987) 45 5—69

Liebeschuetz, W (1 9 8 9) From Diocletian to the Arab Conquest: Change in the Fate Roman
Empire. Aldershot

Liebeschuetz, W (1992) ‘The end of the ancient city’, in Rich (ed.) (1992) 1—49
Liebeschuetz, W and Kennedy, H. (1988) ‘Antioch and the villages of northern
Syria in the 4th— 6th centuries ad’, NMS 32: 65-90
Liebs,D. (1971) ‘Variae kctiones. Zweijuristenschriften’, mStudi in onorediE. Volterra
v (Milan) 51-88

Liebs, D. (1976) ‘Romische Provinzialjurisprudenz’, \nANRW ir, 1 5: 288—362

ioi8

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Liebs, D. (1983) ‘Das ius gladii der romischen Provinzgouverneure in der
Kaiserzeit’, ZPE \y. 217—23

Liebs, D. (198;) ‘Unverhohlene Brutalitat in den Gesetzen der ersten christlichen
Kaiser’, in Liebs and Luig (eds.) (1985) 89—116
Liebs, D. (1986) Review of H.-J. Horstkotte, Die Theorie vom spatromischen
‘Zn'angsstaat’ und das Problem der ‘Steuerhaftung, Gnomon 58: 275—8
Liebs, D. (1987) Die Jurispruden^im spdtantiken Italien. Berlin

Liebs, D. (1992) ‘Das Gesetz im spatromischen Recht’, in Sellert (ed.) (1992) 1 1-27
Liebs, D. (1993) Romische furispruden\in Africa. Berlin

Liebs, D. and Luig, K. (eds.) (1985) Romisches Recht in der europdischen Tradition.

Symposion aus Anlass des 7/. Gebmtstages von F. Wieacker. Ebelsbach
Lieu, S. N. C. (1985) Manichaeism: in the Rater Roman Empire and Medieval China.
Manchester

Loseby, S. (1992) ‘Bishops and cathedrals: order and diversity in the fifth century
urban landscape of southern Gaul’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-
Century Gaul 144—5 5

Lotter, F. (1971) ‘Antonius von Lerins und der Untergang Ufernorikums: ein
Beitrag zur Frage der Bevolkerungs Kontinuitat im Alpen-Donau-Raum’,
HZ 212: 265—31 5

Luttwak, E. N. (1976) The Grand Strategy of the Roman Enrpire from the First Century
A.D. to the Third. Baltimore

Maas, M. (1986) ‘Roman history and Christian ideology in justinianic reform leg-
islation’, DOP 40: 17—31

McCail, R. C. (1969) ‘The Cycle of Agathias: new identifications scrutinised’, JHS
89: 87—96

MacCormack, S. (1981 ) Art and Ceremony in Tate Antiquity. Berkeley
McCormick, M. (1985) Analyzing imperial ceremonies \JOB 35: 1—20
McCormick, M. (1989) ‘Clovis at Tours, Byzantine public ritual and the origins of
medieval ruler symbolism’, in Chrysos and Schwarcz (eds.) (1989) 1 5 5—80
MacKenzie, M. M. and Roueche, C. (eds.) (1989) Images of Authority: Papers Presented
to foyce Reynolds on her joth Birthday. Cambridge
McKitterick, R. (ed.) (1990) The Uses of Literacy in Early Medieval Europe. Cambridge
MacMullen, R. (1980) ‘How big was the Roman Imperial Army?’, Klio 62: 451—60
MacMullen, R. (1987) ‘Tax-pressure in the Roman empire’, Latomus 46: 737—54
MacMullen, R. (1988) Corruption and the Decline of Rome. New Haven
Maier,J.-L. (1973) L’episcopat de lAfrique romaine, vandale et by^antine. Rome
Mamboury, E., Wiegand T., et al. (1934) Die Kaiserpaldste von Konstantinopel yrvischen
Hippodrom und Marmara-Meer. Berlin

Manenti, C. (ed.) (1887—9) Al ntiqua summaria codicis Theodosiani (Studi Senesi nel
Circolo Giuridico della R. Universita) 3: 257-88; 4: 141—57; 5: 203— 311
Mango, C. A. (1959) The Brazen House: A Study of the I 'estibule of the Imperial Palace of
Constantinople. Copenhagen

Mango, C. A. (1975) ‘The church of Sts. Sergius and Bacchus once again’, BZ 68:
385—92 (= Mango, Studies on Constantinople , xiv)

Mango, C. A. (1980) Byzantium: The Empire of New Rome. London
Mantovani, D. (1987) Digesto e masse bluhmiane. Milan
Markus, R. (1990) The End of Ancient Christianity. Cambridge

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IOI9

Marrou, H. I. (1956) A History of Education in Antiquity . London

Martin, J. and Quint, B. (eds.) (1990) Christentnm und antihe Gesellschaft. Darmstadt

Maspero, J. (191a) Organisation militaire de I’Egypte bygantine. Paris

Mastino, A. (ed.) (1988) L 'Africa Romana. Sassari

Mathews, T. (1971) The Early Churches of Constantinople. University Park,
Pennsylvania State University

Mathews, T. (1974) ‘Architecture et liturgie dans les premieres eglises palatiales de
Constantinople’, Revue de I’Art 24: 22—90

Mathisen, R. W (1984) ‘The family of Georgius Florentius Gregorius and the
bishops of Tours’, Medievalia et Humanistica 12: 83-95
Mathisen, R. W. (1 992) ‘Gallic visitors to Italy, business or pleasure?’, in Drinkwater
and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 228—38
Mathisen, R. W. (1993) Aristocrats in Barbarian Gaul. Austin, TX
Matthews, J. E (1989) The Roman Empire of Ammianus. London and Baltimore
Mayerson, P. (1986) ‘The Beersheba Edict’, ZPE 64: 141-8

Mayerson, P. (1988) ‘Justinian’s Novel 103 and the reorganization of Palestine’,
BASOR 269: 65—72

Mazzarino, S. (1951) Aspetti Sociali de! Ouarto Secolo. Rome
Meiggs, R. (1973) Roman Ostia. 2nd edn. Oxford

Memmer, M. (1990) ‘Der schone Kauf des guten Sklaven’, ZRG RA 107: 1—45
Merkel, J. (1888) ‘Uber romische Gerichtsgebiihren’, in Merkel, Abhandlungen aus
dem Gebiete des romischen Rechts III (Halle) 1 21—74
Millar, F. (1977) The Emperor and the Roman World. London

Millet, G. (1925) ‘L’origine dulogothete general’, in Melanges d’Histoire du Moyen Age
ojferts a M. Ferdinand Lot (Paris) 5 63-73
Millett, M. (1990) The Romanigation of Britain. Cambridge

Mitford, T. B. (1950) ‘Some new inscriptions front early Christian Cyprus’, Byg. 20:
128—32

Moderan, Y. (1 993) ‘La chronologie de la vie de saint Fulgence de Ruspe et ses inci-
dences sur 1 ’histoire de l’Afrique vandale’, MEFR 105: 135—88
Mollat, M. (ed.) (1974) Etudes sur 1 ’histoire de la pauvrete 1. Paris
Mommsen, T. (1905) ‘Das theodosianische Gesetzbuch’, in Mommsen, Gesammelte
Schriftenn (Berlin) 371-405
Mommsen, T. (1910) Gesammelte Schriften vi. Berlin
Moorhead, J. (1992) Theoderic in Italy. Oxford

Morosi, R. (1977) ‘L’Officium del prefetto del pretorio nel VI secolo’,
Romanobarbarica 2: 103-48

Morosi, R. (1978) ‘Cancellarii in Cassiodoro e in Giovanni Lido’, Romanobarbarica
3: 127-58

Morosi, R. (1981) ‘I Comitiaci, funzionari Romani nell’Italia Ostrogotica’, Quad.

Catanesi di Studi Classici e Medievali 3 : 77-1 1 1
Morrisson, C. (1970) Catalogue des monnaies bygantines de la Bibliotheque Nationale 1.
Paris

Moss, J. R. (1973) ‘The effects of the policy of Aetius on the history of western
Europe’, Historia 22: 71 1—3 1

Mrozek, S. (1978) ‘Munificentia privata in den Stadten Italiens wahrend der
spatromischen Zeit’, Historia 27: 35 5—68

1020

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Muller, A. (1912) ‘Das Heer Iustinians nach Prokop und Agathias’, Philologus 71:
101—38

Muller-Wiener, W. (1977) Bildlexikon yur Topographie Istanbuls. Tubingen
Murray, A. C. (1986) ‘The position of the grafio in the constitutional history of
Merovingian Gaul’, Speculum 64: 787-805

Murray, A. C. (1988) ‘From Roman to Frankish Gaul: “Centenarii” and “Centenae”
in the administration of the Frankish kingdom’, Traditio 44: 59—100
Naumann, R. (1965) ‘Vorbericht iiber die Ausgrabungen zwischen Mese und
Antiochus-Palast 1964 in Istanbul’, Istanbuler Mitteilungen 1 5: 135—48
Naumann, R. and Belting, H. (1966) Die Eiiphemiakirche am Hippodrom yu Istanbul
und ihre Freshen (Istanbuler Forschungen 25). Berlin
Nehlsen, H. (1969) Review of Vismara (1967), ZRG GA 86: 246-60
Nehlsen, H. (1972) Sklavenrecht yn’ischen Antike und Mittelalter: germanisches und romis-
ches Recht in den germanischen Rechtsaufipichnungen (Gottinger Studien zur
Rechtsgeschichte VII). Gottingen

Nehlsen, H. (1977) ‘Aktualitat und Effektivitat germanischer Rechtsaufzeich-
nungen’, in Classen (ed.) (1977a) 449-502
Nehlsen, H. (1984) ‘Codex Euricianus’, Reallexikon der germanischen Altertumskunde
2nd edn. 5 : 42-7

Nelson, H. L. W. (198 1) Uberlieferung, Aufbau und Stil von Gai Institutiones. Leiden
Nelson, H. L. W (1 99 5) Review of G. Archi, FEpitome Gai (Tijdschrift voor rechts-
geschiedenis 63) 170—7

Nelson, II. L. W and Manthe, U. (1999) Gai Institutiones III 88—181. Die
Kontraktsobligationen. Text and commentary. Berlin
Nesbitt, J. W. (1977) ‘Double names on early Byzantine seals’, DOP 31:11 1— 21
Nicole, J. (1 893) Le livre du prefet. Geneva

Noailles, P. (191 2— 14) Fes collections de novelles de lEmpereur Justinien. Paris
Noble, T. (1990) ‘Literacy and the papal government in late antiquity and the early
middle ages’, in McKitterick (ed.) (1990) 82—108
Noethlichs, K. L. (1981) Beamtentum and Dienstvergehen. Zur Staatsverwaltung in der
Spdtantihe. Wiesbaden

Noll, R. (1963) Das Leben des heiligen Severin. Berlin

Norr,D. (1988) ‘ZurneuenFaksimile-Ausgabeder//#eraE/0wrf/«tf’,/l/KLI 39: 121-36
Oikonomides, N. (1972) Les listes de preseance bjgantines des IXe etXe siecles. Paris
Oikonomides, N. (1986) ‘Silk trade and production in Byzantium from the sixth to
the ninth century: the seals of Kommerkiarioi’, DOP 40: 33—5 3
Oikonomides, N. (1987) ‘De l’impot de quantite a l’impot de distribution a propos
du premier cadastre Byzantin (jt—ye siecle)’, Zbornik Radova 26: 9-19
Oswald, F., Schaefer, L., Sennhauer, H. R. (1966) Vorromanische Kirchenbauten.
Munich

Palmer, A. (1990) Monk and Mason on the Tigris Frontier: The Early History of Tnr
Abdin. Cambridge

Palol, P. de S. (1966) Dernografiay arqtteologia hispanica de los siglos IV al T 7 II. Valladolid
Palol, P. de S. (1 967) Arqueologia Christiana de la Espana romana siglos IV— \I. Madrid
Palol, P. de S. (1968) Arte hispanico de la epoca visigoda. Barcelona
Le pandette di Giustiniano. Storia e fortima di im codice illustre. Duegiornate di studio Firenze,
2y—2qgiugno 1983. (1983) Florence

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

1021

Parker, S. T. (ed.) (1987) The Roman Frontier in Central Jordan. Interim Report on the
Times Arabian Project, 1980-198; (BAR International Series 340). Oxford
Patetta, F. (1967) ‘Contributi alia storia del diritto romano nel medio evo’, in
Patetta, Stndi sulle fonti giuridiche medievali. Turin 121-58
Paverd, F. van de. (1991) St John Chrysostom: The Homilies on the Statues (OCA 239).
Rome

Pedersen, F. S. (1970) ‘On professional qualifications for public posts in late an-
tiquity’, Class. etMed. 31: 161-213
Pedley, J. G. (ed.) (1980) New Light on Ancient Carthage. Ann Arbor
Percival, J. (1992) ‘The fifth century villa: new life or death?’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 1 5 6-64

Petrikovits, H. V (1981) ‘Die Spezialisierung des romischen Handwerks: 2,
Spatantike’, ZPE \y. 285—306

Picard, J. C. (1988) Le souvenir des eveques: sepultures, listes episcopates et cultes des eveques
en Italie du Nord des I’origine au Xe siecle. Rome
Pieler, P. E. (1978) ‘Byzantinische Rechtsliteratur’, in Plunger (1978) 11.341—480
Pietri, L. (1983) La ville de Tours du IVeau I Te siecle: naissance dime cite chretienne (Coll.

de l’Ecole Fran^aise de Rome 69). Paris
Pirenne, PI. (1939) Mohammed and Charlemagne. London
Pirling, R. (1986) Romer and Fran ken am Niederrhein. Mainz
Poulter, A. (1990) ‘Nicopolis’, Current Archaeology 121: 37-42
Poulter, A. (1992a) ‘The use and abuse of urbanism in the Danubian provinces
during the later Roman empire’, in Rich (ed.) (1992) 99-135
Poulter, A. (1992b) ‘Nicopolis ad Istrum, the anatomy of a Graeco-Roman city’,
in Schalles, von Plesberg, Zanker (eds.) (1992) 69—86
Pringle, D. (1981) The Defence of Byzantine Africa from Justinian to the Arab Conquest
An Account of the Military History and Archaeology of the African Provinces in the
Sixth and Seventh Centuries (BAR International Series 99). Oxford
Prinz, F. (1965) Friihes Monchtum im Franhenreich. Munich
Prinz, F. (1971) Klerus and Kriegim friihen Mittelalter. Stuttgart
Prinz, F. (1973) ‘Die bischofliche Stadtherrschaft im Frankenreich vom 5 . bis zum
7. Jahrhundert’, HZ z\-j: 1-35
Rackham, O. (1986) History of the Countryside. London

Rathbone, D. (1990) ‘Villages and population in Graeco-Roman Egypt’, PCPS 36:
100—42

Reece, R. (1992) ‘The end of the city in Roman Britain’, in Rich (ed.) (1992) 136—44
Reinink, G. J. (1988) ‘Pseudo-Methodius und die Legende vom romischen
Endkaiser’, in W. Verbeke, D. Verhelst, and A. Welkenhuysen (eds.). The Use
and Abuse of Eschatology in the Middle Ages. Louvain
Remondon, R. (1961) ‘Soldats de Byzance d’apres un papyrus trouve a Edfou’,
Recherches de Papyrologie 1: 41-93

Remondon, R. (1965) ‘P.Hamb. 56 et P.Lond. 1419 (notes sur les finances
d’Aphrodito du Vie siecle au Ville’, Egypte Greco-Romaine 40: 401-30
Remondon, R. (1966) ‘L’Egypte au Ve siecle de notre ere’, Atti dellXI Congr. Int. di
Papirologia (Milan) 135-48

Remondon, R. (1971) ‘Le monastere Alexandrin de la Metanoia: etait-il beneficiaire
du fisc ou a son service?’, Studi in onore di E. Volterra v (Milan) 771—81

1022 II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Rey-Coquais, J. (1977) ‘Inscriptions decouvertes dans les fouilles de Tyr’, Bull. Mus.
Beyrouth 29

Rich,J. (ed.) (1992) The City in Late Antiquity. London

Riche, P. (1957) ‘La survivance des ecoles publiques en Gaule au Ve siecle ’, LeMoyen
Age 63: 421—36

Riche, P. (1965) ‘L’enseignement du droit en Gaule du Vie au Xle siecle’, Ius
Romanian Medii Aevi 1.5 b: 1-21

Riche, P. (1972) ‘L’enseignement et la culture des laics dans l’occident pre-
carolingien’, Settimane di Studi 19: 231-51
Riche, P. (1973) Education et culture dans l’ Occident harbare. Paris
Robert, L. (1948) ‘Epigrammes relatives a des gouverneurs’, Hellenica 4: 34-1 14
Robert, L. (1958) ‘Inscriptions grecques de Side en Pamphylie, epoque imperiale
et bas empire’, RPh 32: 1 5—5 3

Rochow, I. (1976) ‘Die Heidenprozesse unter den Kaisern Tiberius II, Konstantins
und Maurikios’, in F. Winkelmann and H. Kopstein (eds.) (1976), Probleme der
Herausbildnngdes Feudalismus (Berlin) 120-30
Rohr, C. (1997) ‘Zum Theoderiche-Panegyricus des Ennodius’, Hermes 125:
100—17

Roques, D. (1987) Synesios de Cyr'ene etla Cyrenaique du Bas-Empire. Paris
Rouche, M. (1974) ‘La matricule des pauvres: evolution d’une institution de charite
du Bas-Empire, jusqu’a la fin du Haut Moyen Age’, in Mollat (ed.) (1974)
83—1 10

Rouche, M. (1979) LAqidtaine des Wisigoths auxArabes 418— j8i. Paris
Roueche,. C. (1979) ‘A new inscription from Aphrodisias and the title 77-aT r\Q r rjs
TToXews’, GRBS 20: 173—85

Roueche, C. (1984) ‘Acclamations in the later Roman empire: new evidence from
Aphrodisias’, JRS 74: 181-99

Roueche, C. (1989) ‘Floreat Perge’, in MacKenzie and Roueche (eds.) (1989)
205—28

Rousseau, P. (1996) ‘Inheriting the fifth century: who bequeathed what?’, in P.
Allen and E. Jeffreys (eds.), The Sixth Century: End or Beginning ? (1996)
(Brisbane) 1-19

Russell, J. (1987) The Mosaic Inscriptions of Anemurium.Nx&xaa.

Sachau, E. (1907) (ed.) Syrische Rechtsbiicher 1. Berlin
Saliou, C. (1996) Le Traite d’urbanisme de Julien d’Ascalon. Paris
Sanchez-Albornoz y Meduina, C. (1943) Ruinay extincion de! municipio romano en
Espana. Buenos Aires (= Sanchez-Albornoz y Meduina, Y. (1971) 1 1— 147)
Sanchez-Albornoz y Meduina, Y (1971) Estudios Visigodos. Roma
Sartre, M. (1982) Inscriptions grecques et latines de la Syrie xm. 1 , Bostra. Paris
Sartre, M. (1985) Bostra. Paris

Sawyer, P. H. and Wood, I. N. (eds.) (1977) Early Medieval Kingship. Leeds
Schalles, H.-J., von Hesberg, H., Zanker, P. (eds.) (1992) Die romische Stadt im 2.
Jahrhundert n. Chr. Cologne

Schellenberg, H. (1965) Die Interpretationen yu den Paulussentenyen. Gottingen
Scheltema, H. J. (1962) ‘Die Veronensischen Kodexscholien’, Tijdschrift voor
Rechtsgeschiedenis 30: 252!'.

Scheltema, H.J. (1966) ‘Kobidas’, RIDA 13: 341—3

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IO23

Scheltema, H. J. (1970) R’ enseignement de droit des antecesseurs. Leiden
Scheltema, H. J. (1 975) ‘Over getallen in het Corpus Iuris Civilis’, in Vrijheid en Recht.
Opstellen aangeboden aan Prof. mr. E. H. s’ Jacob ter gelegenheid van gijn aftreden als
hoogleraar aan de Rijksuniversiteit Groningen (Zwolle) 227—34
Schindler, K.-H. (1962) ‘Consultatio veteris cuiusdam iurisconsulti’, Labeo 8: 16-61
Schmidt, H. F. (1957) ‘Das Weiterleben und die Wiederbelebung antiker
Institutionen im mittelalterlichen Stadtewesen’, Annali di storia del diritto 1 :
85-135

Schmidt-Wiegand, R. (1959) ‘Die kritische Ausgabe der Lex Salica — noch immer
ein Problem’, ZRG GA 76: 301—19

Schmidt-Wiegand, R. (1987) ‘Reht und Ewa’, in R. Bergmann et al. (eds.),
Althocbdeutsch (Germanische Bibliothek, n.s. viii) (Heidelberg) 11.937—58
Schminck, A. (1989) ‘Frcimmigkeit ziere das Werk. Zur Datierung der 60 Bucher
Leons VI’ ( Subseciva Groningana 3) 79-1 14
Schubert, W. (1969) ‘Die rechtliche Sonderstellung der Dekurionen Kurialen in der
Kaisergesetzgebung 4.-6. Jhs.’, ZRG R4 86: 287-331
Schulz, F. (1953) History of Roman Regal Science. 2nd edn. Oxford
Schumacher, W N. (ed.) (1966) Tortnlae. Studien gu altchristlichen und bygantinischen
Monumenten. Rome

Scott, J. A. (1987) ‘Sardis. Byzantine and Turkish eras’, in E. Guralnick (ed.) Sardis,
27 years of discovery (Chicago) 74-87

Scott, R. (1985) ‘Malalas, the Secret History, and Justinian’s propaganda’, DOP 39:
99-109

Seeck, O. (1919) Regesten der Kaiser und Pdpste fiir die Jahre 311—4-76. Stuttgart
Selb, W. (1964) Zur Bedeutung des syrisch-rdmischen Rechtsbuches. Munich
Selb, W (1965) ‘Zum Plan einer Neuedition des syrisch-romischen Rechtsbuches’,
Labeo 11: 329—40

Selb, W. (ed.) (1990) Sententiae Syriacae. Vienna

Sellert, W (1992) (ed.) Das Gesetgin Spatantike und friihem Mittelalter. Gottingen
Sevcenko, I. and N. (1984) The Rife of Nicholas of Sion. Brookline, MA
Shahid, I. (= Kawar) (1957) ‘The Patriciate of Arethas’, BZ 52: 321-43 (= Shahid
(1988) 111)

Shahid, I. (1984) Bygantium and the Arabs in the Fourth Century. Washington, DC
Shahid, I. (1988) Bygantium and the Semitic Orient before the Rise of Islam. London
Shahid, I. (1989) Bygantium and the Arabs in the Fifth Century. Washington, DC
Shahid, I. (1995) Byzantium and the Arabs in the Sixth Century. Washington, DC
Siems, H. (1984) ‘Codex Theodosianus’, Reallexikon der germanischen Altertumskunde
v. 2nd edn. Berlin

Siems, H. (1989) ‘Zu Problemen der Bewertung fruhmittelalterlicher Rechtstexte’,
ZRG GA 106: 291—305

Sijpesteijn, P. J. (1986) ‘Nomination for a liturgy’, no. 1 in ‘Five Byzantine papyri
from the Michigan collection’, ZPE 62: 133—7
Sijpesteijn, P. J. (1987) ‘The tide Trarpp rrjs noAews and the papyri’, Tyche 2: 171— 4
Simon, D. (1975) Review of Sitzia (1973), ZRG RA 92: 417-24
Simon, D. (1978) ‘Marginalien zur Vulgarismusdiskussion’, in O. Behrends et al.

(eds.) Festschrift fir F. Wieacker gum 70. Geburtstag (GottmgesS) 154-74
Simon, D. (ed.) (1986) Fontes minores vii. Frankfurt am Main

1024

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Simon, D. and Troianos, S. (eds.) (1989) Das Novellensyntagma des Athanasius von
Emesa. Frankfurt am Main

Simon, D., et al. (1977) ‘Zum griechischen Novellenindex des Iulian’, in Simon
(ed.), Fontes minores 11 (Frankfurt am Main) 1—29
Simon, D., et al. (1979) ‘Eine Fragmentensammlung aus dem Baroccianus 173’, in
Simon (ed.), Fontes Minores 111 (Frankfurt am Main) 1—23
Sinnigen, W G. (1964) ‘Chiefs of staff and chiefs of the secret service’, BZ 57: 78-105
Sirks, A. J. B. (1991) Food for Rome. Amsterdam

Sirks, A. J. B. (1996a) in R. W. Mathisen and H. Sivan (eds.). Shifting Frontiers in Fate
Antiquity (Aldershot) 147—57

Sirks, A. J. B. (1996b) Summaria Antiqua Codicis Theodosiani. Amsterdam
Sirks, A. J. B. (1 996c) ‘The summaria antiqua codicis Theodosiani'm the MS. Vat. reg. Lat.
886 \ZRGRA 1 1 3 : 243—67

Sitzia, F. (1973) (ed.) De Actionibus. Edigione e commento. Milan
Sivan, H. (1992) ‘City and countryside in fifth-century Gaul: the example of
Bordeaux’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 132-43
Sjostrom, I. (1993) Tripolitania in Transition: Late Roman and Early Islamic Settlement.
Avebury

Sodini,J.-P. (1989) ‘Lesgroupes episcopaux de Turquie (al’exception de la Cilicie)’,
ActesXI Cong. Int. dArch. Chret. (Rome) 1.405—27
Sontis, J. M. (1937) Die Digestensumme des Anonymus. Fleidelberg
Spagnesi, £.(1986) (ed.) Le pandette di Giustiniano. Storia e fortuna della littera Florentina.

Mostra di codici e documenti 2qgiugno — 31 agosto 1983. Florence
Spieser, J.-M. (1984) ‘Les villes en Grece du Hie au Vile s.’, in lilies et peiplement
(1984) 315-38

Sprandel, R. (1957) ‘Dux und comes in der Merowingerzeit’, Zeitschrift fur
Rechtsgeschichte 74: 41—84

Stein, E. (1919) Studien %ur Geschichte des bygantinischen Reiches, vornehmlich unter den
Kaisern Justinus II. und Tiberius Constantinus. Stuttgart
Stein, P. G. and Lewis, A. D. E. (eds.) (1983) Studies in Justinian’s Institutes in Memory
of J. A. C. Thomas. London

Stern, E. (ed.) (1 993) New Encyclopedia of Archaeological Excavations in the Holy Land.
Jerusalem

Stevens, C. E. (1933) Sidonius Apollinaris and his Age. Oxford
Talbot Rice, D. (1958) The Great Palace of the Byzantine Emperors, Second Report.
Edinburgh

Taradell, M. (1977) ‘Les villes romaines dans l’Flispania de l’est’, in Duval and
Frezouls (eds.) (1977) 97ff.

Tate, G. (1989) ‘Les campagnes de Syrie du nord’, in Hommes et richesses 1.163—86
Tate, G. (1992) Les canrpagnes de la Syrie du nord, Ie au Vllesieclesi (Bibl. archeologique
et historique 133). Paris

Tate, G. and Sodini, J.-P. (1980) ‘Dehes, recherches sur l’habitat rural’, Syria 67:
I_3 ° 3

Teall,J. L. (1985) ‘The barbarians in Justinian’s armies’, Speculum 40: 294-322
Teitler, H. C. (1985) Notarii and Exceptores. Amsterdam

Teitler, H. C. (1992) ‘Un-Roman activities in late antique Gaul: the cases of

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IO25

Arvandus and Seronatus’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul
309—20

Testini, G., et al. (1989) ‘La cattedrale in Italia’, Actes XI Cong. Int. d’Arch. Chret.
(Rome) 1. 1— 231

Thomas, A. C. (1981) Christianity in Roman Britain to AD joo. London
Thompson, E. A. (1969) The Goths in Spain. Oxford

Thompson, E. A. (1979) ‘Gildas and the history of Britain’, Britannia 10: 203-26
Thompson, E. A. (1982) Romans and Barbarians: The Decline of the Western Empire.
Madison, WI

Thompson, E. A. (1984) St Germanus of Auxerre and the End of Roman Britain.
Wadebridge

Thompson, E. A. (1990) ‘Ammianus Marcellinus and Britain’, NMS 34: 1— 1 5
Tjader,J.- 0 . (1954) Tables. Lund

Tjader, J.-O. (1955-82) Die nichtliterarischen lateinischen Papyri Italiens ans der Zeit
j.jj—700. Lund and Stockholm

Tomlin, R. S. O. (1976) ‘Notitia Dignitatum omnium, tam civilium quani militar-
ium’, in R. Goodburn and P. Bartholomew (eds.), Aspects of the Notitia
Dignitatum (BAR Suppl. Series 1 5) (Oxford) 1 89—209
Tomlin, R. S. O. (1987) ‘The army of the late empire’, in Wacher (ed.) (1987) 1. 107-20
Tort-Martorell, C. (1989) Tradition textual del Codex Iustinianus. Un estudio del Libro 2.
Frankfurt am Main

Traube, L. (1891) ‘Untersuchungen zur Uberlieferungsgeschichte romischer
Schriftsteller’, Sitzungsberichte. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften,
phil.-hist. Kl.: 387—428

Treitinger, O. (1969) Die ostrdmische Kaiser- und Reichsidee nach Hirer Gestaltung im
hofischen Zeremoniell. Darmstadt

Trombley, F. R. (1987) ‘Korykos in Cilicia Trachis’, AHB 1: 16—23
Tsirplanis, C. (1974) ‘John Lydus on the imperial administration’, By%. 44: 478—502
Vanags, P. (1979) ‘Taxation and survival in the late fourth century: the Anonymus’
programme of economic reforms’, in Flassall and Ireland (eds.) (1979) 47—5 8
Van Dam, R. (1996) ‘Governors of Cappadocia during the fourth century’,
Medieval Prosopography 17: 7—83

Van der Vliet, J. (1993) ‘Spatantikes Heidentum in Agypten im Spiegel der kopti-
schen Literatur’, Riggisberger Berichte I (Riggisberg) 99—130
Van Ossel, P. (1985) ‘Quelques apports recents a l’etude de l’habitat rural gallo-
romain dans la region mosane’, EEC 53: 7996
Velkov, V. (1962) ‘Les campagnes et la population rurale en Thrace aux IVe-VIe
siecles’, By^antinica Bulgarica 1 : 3 1-66

Vera, D. (1986) ‘Forme e funzioni della Rendita Fondiaria nella tarda antichita’, in
Giardina (ed.), Societa romana 1.367—447

Veyne, P. (1981) ‘Clientele et corruption au service de l’Etat: La venalite des offices
dans le Bas-Empire remain’, Annales 36: 339—60
Viden, G. (1984) The Roman Chancery Tradition: Studies in the Language of Codex
Theodosianus and Cassiodorus’ T 'ariae. Gothenburg
Viereck, H. (1981) Lmitatio imperii und interpretatio Germanica vor der Wikingerzeit’,
in R. Zeitler (ed.), Les pays du Nord etByyance (Uppsala) 64-1 1 3

1026

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

Villes et peuplement dans ITllyricum protoby^antin (19 84) (Collection de l’Ecole
Frangaise de Rome 77). Rome

Vismara, G. (1967) Edictum Theodorici, Ius Romanum Medii Aevi, 1. zb Milan
Vittinghoff, F. (1 9 5 8) ‘Zur Verfassung der spatantiken Stadt’, Stndien %/t denAnfdngen
des europdischen Stddtemsens (Vortrage und Forschungen) 1 1—39
Vives,J. (1963) Concilios \isigoticos e Hispano-RomanosMwczGow.

Vogt, J. (1945) ‘Zur Frage des christlichen Einflusses auf die Gesetzgebung
Konstantins des Grossen’, Festschrift fir L. Wenger \\ (Munich) 118-48
Volterra, E. (1983) ‘Sulla legge delle citazioni’ (Atti dell’ Accademia nazionale dei
Lincei. Memorie. Classe di scienze morali, storiche e filologiche 8, 27) 1 85—267
Von Falkenstein, V. (1989) ‘Die Stadte im byzantinischen Italien’, MEFR 101— 2:
401—64

Voobus, A. (1958-60) A Edistory of Ascetism in the Syrian Orient. Louvain
Voobus, A. (1972) ‘Die Entdeckung neuer wichtiger Quellen fur das syrisch-
romische Rechtsbuch’, ZRG RA 89: 348—51
Voobus, A. (1975) ‘A new source for the Syro-Roman Lawbook’, Labeo 21: 7—9
Voss, W E. (1982) Recht und Rhetorik in den Kaisergeset^en der Spdtantike. Frankfurt am
Main

Voss, W E. (1985) ‘Der Grundsatz der argeren Fland bei Sklaven, Kolonen und
Horigen’, in Liebs and Luig (eds.) (1985) 1 17—84
Wacher, J. (ed.) (1987) The Roman World. London
van der Wal, N. (1964) Manuale Novellarum Justiniani. Groningen
van der Wal, N. (ed.) (1985) ‘Die Paratitla zur Epitome Iuliani’, in Snbseciva
Groningana 2: 93—137

van der Wal, N. and Lokin, J. H. A. (1985) Historiae iuris graeco-romani delineatio. 2nd
edn. Groningen

Waldstein, W (1980) ‘Tribonianus’, ZRG RA 97: 232-5 5

Wallace-Fladrill, J. M. (1962) ‘The blood-feud of the Franks’, in Wallace-Hadrill,
The Long-Haired Kings and Other Studies in Frankish History (London) 121-47
Wallace-Fladrill, J. M. (1971) Early Germanic Kingship in England and on the Continent.
Oxford

Walmsley, A. G. (1 992) ‘The social and economic regime at Fihl (Pella) between the
7th and 9th centuries’, in Canivet and Rey-Coqais (eds.) (1992) 249—61
Ward-Perkins, B. (1978) ‘Luni, the decline and abandonment of a Roman town’, in
Blake, Potter and Whitehouse (eds.) (1978) 313-21
Weidemann, K. (1970) ‘Zur Topographie von Metz in der Romerzeit und im
fruhen Mittelalter \Jahrb. R.-G. Mus. Main % 17: 147— 171
Wenger, L. (195 3) Die Quellen des romischen Rechts. Vienna

Wenskus, R. (1964) ‘Bemerkungen zum Thunginus der Lex Salica’, in Classen and
Scheibert (eds.) (1964) 217—36
Wessel, H. (2000) Das Recht der Tablettes Albertini. Berlin

Wetzler, C. F. (1997) Rechtsstaat und Absolutismus. Uberlegungen %ur Verfassung des spat-
anti ken Kaiserreichs anhand von CJ 1.14.8. Berlin
Whitby, Mary (1987) ‘On the omission of a ceremony in mid-sixth century
Constantinople: candidati, curopalatiis , silentiarii , excubitores and others’, Historia
36: 462-88

II. GOVERNMENT AND INSTITUTIONS

IO27

Whitby, Michael (1995) ‘Recruitment in Roman armies from Justinian to Heraclius
(c. 565-61 5)’, in Averil Cameron (ed.) (1995) 61-124
Whitelock, D., McKitterick, R. and Dumville, D. N. (eds.) (1982) Ireland in Early
Mediaeval Europe. Cambridge

Whittaker, C. R. (1980) ‘Inflation and the economy in the fourth century a.d.’, in
King (ed.) (1980) 1-22

Whittaker, C. R. (1983) ‘Late Roman trade and traders’, in Garnsey et al. (eds.)
(1983) 163-80

Whittow, M. (1990) ‘Ruling the late Roman and early Byzantine city: a continuous
history’, P&P 1 29: 3—29

Whittow, M. (1996) The Making of Orthodox Byzantium, 600—102J. London
Wickham, C. (1981) Early Medieval Italy. London

Wickham, C. (1984) ‘The other transition: from the ancient world to feudalism’,
P&P 103: 3—36

Wickham, C. (1988) ‘Marx, Sherlock Holmes and late Roman commerce’ (review
of Giardina, Societa romana 111) JRS 78: 183-93
Wickham, L. R. (1995) ‘Aspects of clerical life in the early Byzantine church in two
scenes: Mopsuestia and Apamea’,yE//46: 3-18
Wieacker, F. (1 9 5 5) T Plgarismus und Klassiyisnms im Recht der Spatantike. Heidelberg
Wieacker, F. (1964) Recht und Gesellschaft in der Spatantike. Stuttgart
Wieacker, F. (1983a) Ausgeivahlte Schriften 1. Frankfurt am Main
Wieacker, F. (1983b) ‘Zur Effektivitat des Gesetzes in der spaten Antike’, in
Wieacker (1983a) 222—40

Wieacker, F. (1983c) ‘Vulgarrecht und Vulgarismus. Alte und neue Probleme und
Diskussionen’, in Wieacker (1983a) 241—54
Wightman, E. M. (1978) ‘The towns of Gaul with special reference to the north-
east’, in M. W Barley (ed.) European Towns, their Archaeology and Early History.
London

Wightman, E. M. (1985) Gallia Belgica. London

Wilkinson, T. J. W (1990) Tou’ti and Country in S. E. Anatolia: Settlement and Land Use
at Kurban Hoyiik. Chicago

Willers, D., et al. (1993) Riggisberger Berichte 1, Begegnungen von Heidentum und
Christentum in Agypten. Riggisberg
Wilson, N. G. (1983) Scholars of Byzantium. London

Winkelmann, F. (1978a) ‘Zum byzantinischen Staat (Kaiser, Aristokratie, Heer)’, in
F. Winkelmann, H. Kopstein, H. Ditten and I. Rochow (eds.), Bygan^ im 7.
fahrhundert. Berlin

Winkelmann, F. (1978b) ‘Zur Rolle der Patriarchen von Konstantinopel bei den
Kaiserwechseln in fruhbyzantinischer Zeit’, Klio 60: 467—81
Wipszycka, E. (1972) Les ressources et activites economiques des eglises en Egypte du I\ ”e au
\IIIe siecle (Papyrologia Bruxellensia 10)

Wiseman, J. (1984) ‘The city in Macedonia Secunda’, in lilies et peuplement dans
I’lllyricum protobyyantin (Paris) 289-313

Wolff, H. (1991) ‘Die Kontinuitat des stadtischen Leben in den nordlichen
Grenzprovinzen des romischen Reiches und das Ende der Antike’, in Eck
and Galsterer (eds.) (1991) 287—318

1028

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Wolff, H. J. (1936) ‘Romische Grunds tucks kaufvertrage aus dem Vandalenreich’,
Tijdschrift voor Rechtsgeschiedenis 14: 398—420
Wolfram, H. (1988) History of the Goths, 2nd edn, trans. T. J. Dunlap. Berkeley
Wood, I. N. (1983) The Merovingian North Sea (Occasional Papers on Medieval
Topics, no. 1). Alingsas

Wood, I. N. (1986) ‘Disputes in late fifth- and sixth-century Gaul: some problems’,
in Davies and Fouracre (eds.) (1986) 7-22
Wood, I. N. (1990) ‘Administration, law and culture in Merovingian Gaul’, in
McKitterick (ed.) (1990) 63-81

Wood, I. N. (1992) ‘Frankish hegemony in England’, in Carver (ed.) (1992) 235—77
Wood, I. N. (1993) ‘The Code in Merovingian Gaul’, in Harries and Wood (eds.)
(1993) 159-77

Wormald, P. (1977) ‘Lex Scripta and T ’’erbum Regis-, legislation and early Germanic
kingship from Euric to Cnut’, in Sawyer and Wood (eds.) (1977) 105—38
Wormald, P. (1995) ‘“Inter cetera bona . . . genti suae”: lawmaking and peace-
keeping in the earliest English kingdoms’, Settimane di Studi 42: 963-93
Worp, K. A. (1982) ‘Byzantine imperial titulature in the Greek documentary papyri:
the oath formulas’, ZPE 45: 199—226
Zachariae von Lingenthal, K. E. (1843a) Anekdota hi. Leipzig
Zachariae von Lingenthal, K. E. (1843 b) ‘Edicta praefectorum praetorio ex codi-
cibus mss. Bodleianis, Laurentianis, Marcianis, Vindobonensibus’, in
Zachariae von Lingenthal (1843a) 227—78
Zachariae von Lingenthal, K. E. (1873a) ‘Die griechischen Scholien der rescrib-
ierten Handschrift des Codex in der Bibliotek des Domcapitels zu Verona’,
in Zachariae von Lingenthal (1 873b) 313—5 5
Zachariae von Lingenthal, K. E. (1 873b) K/eine Schriften "fir romischen und bygantinis-
chen Rechtsgeschichte 1. Leipzig

Zacos, G, Veglery, A. and Nesbitt, J. W. (1972-84) Byzantine Lead Seals. 6 vols.
Basel— Bern

Zayadine, F. (ed.) (1986) Jerash Archaeological Projects, 1981-1983. Amman
Zayadine, F. (ed.) (1989) Jerash Archaeological Project n, 1984—1988. Paris
Zeumer, K. (1886) Formulae Merowingici et Karolini Aevi {MGH Legum sectio 5).
Hanover

Zeumer, K. (1898) ‘Geschichte der westgotischen Gesetzgebung, 1’ Neues Archil’
23: 75—1 12

Zeumer, K. (1 899) ‘Zum westgotischen Urkundenwesen’, Neues Archil’ 24: 13—38
Zeumer, K. (1902) Leges \Ssigothorum {MGH Leges 1.1). Hanover
Zocco-Rosa, A. (1908—10) Imperatoris Iustiniani institutionum palingenesia. Catania

PART III: EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

(CHS. 12-17)

Abadie-Reynal, C. (1989) ‘Ceramique et commerce dans le bassin egeen du IVe au
Vile siecle’, in Hommes etrichesses 1: 143—62
Agache, R. (1 970) Detection aerienne de vestiges proto-historiques, gallo-romains et medievaux.
Amiens

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

IO29

Alcock, L. (1 972) ‘By South Cadbury is that Camelot . . The Excavation of Cadbury
Castle 1966-1970. London

Alcock, L. (19 87) Economy, Society and Warfare among the Britons and Saxons. Cardiff
Alcock, L. (1989) Arthur’s Britain. London

Alcock, S. E. (1985) ‘Roman imperialism in the Greek landscape’, JRA 2: 5—34
Alcock, S. E. (1993) Graecia Capta: The Landscapes of Roman Greece. Cambridge
Alfoldy, G. (1974) Noricum. London-Boston

Amory, P. (1993) ‘The meaning and purpose of ethnic terminology in the
Burgundian laws’, EME 2.1: 1-28

Amory, P. (1997) People and Identity in Ostrogothic Italy 489—774. Cambridge
Anderson, T. Jr (1995) ‘Roman military colonies in Gaul, Salian ethnogenesis and
the forgotten meaning of Pactus Legis Salicae 59.5’, EME 4: 1 29—44
Angenendt, A. (1984) Kaiserherrschaft und Kdnigstaufe: Kaiser, Konige undPdpste alsgeist-
liche Patrone in der abendl'dndischen Missionsgeschichte. Berlin
Angenendt, A. (1986) ‘The conversion of the Anglo-Saxons considered against the
background of early medieval mission’, in Angli e Sassoni al di qua e al di la del
mare (= XXXII Settimana di studio del Centro Italiano di Studi sull’Alto
Medioevo) (Spoleto) 11.755—66

Angiolini Martinelli, P. et al. (1968—9) ‘Corpus’ della scultura paleocristiana, biryantina ed
altomedioevale di Ravenna, diretto da Giuseppe Bovini. 3 vols. Rome
Anne, L. (1 941) Les rites des fianyailles etla donation pour cause de mariage sous le bas-empire.
Louvain

Anselmino, L. et al (1989) II castellan. 1 del Nador. Storia di una fattoria tra Tipasa e
Caesarea (I— VI sec. d. C.) (Monografie di Archeologia Libica xxm). Rome
Arjava, A. (1988) ‘Divorce in later Roman law’, Arctos 22: 5—21
Arjava, A. (1996) Women and Law in Late Antiquity. Oxford

Arnheim, M. T. W. (1972) The Senatorial Aristocracy in the Later Roman Empire. Oxford
Arrhenius, B. (1985) Merovingian Garnet Jewellery: Emergence and Social Implications.
Stockholm

Arthur, P. and Patterson, H. (1994) ‘Ceramics and early medieval central and south-
ern Italy’, in Francovich and Noye (1994) 409-41
Atlante delle forme ceramiche (1981) vol. 1 (Ceramica fine romana nel bacino mediterraneo.

Medio e tardo impero) (= supplement to Enciclopedia dell’Arte Antica). Rome
Ausenda, G. (1995) ‘The segmentary lineage in contemporary anthropology and
among the Lombards’, in G. Ausenda (ed ), After Empire: Towards an Ethnology
of Europe’s Barbarians (Woodbridge) 15-45
Avramea, A. and Feissel, D. (1994) ‘Inventaires en vue d’un recueil des incriptions
historiques de Byzance IV, inscriptions de Thessalie (a l’exception de
Meteores)’, T&MBy^ 14: 357-98

Bachrach, B. S. (197 2) Merovingian Military Organisation 481— 771. Minneapolis
Bachrach, B. S. (1993) ‘Grand strategy in the Germanic kingdoms: recruitment of
the rank and file’, in Vallet and Kazanski (1993) 5 5—63
Bachrach, B. S. (1994) The Anatomy of a Little War. Boulder

Bagnall, R. (1985) ‘Agricultural productivity and taxation in later Roman Egypt’,
TAPA 11 5: 289—308

Bagnall, R. (1987) ‘Church, state and divorce in late Roman Egypt’, in K. L. Selig

1030

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

and R. Somerville (eds.), Florilegium Clumbianum. Essays in Honour of Paul Oskar
Kristeller (New York) 41-61

Bagnall, R. (1993) ‘Slavery and society in late Roman Egypt’, in B. Halpern and D.
W. Hobson (eds.), Law, Politics and Society in the Ancient Mediterranean World
(Sheffield) 220—40

Baker, D. (ed.) (1979) The Church in Town and Countryside (Studies in Church History
16). Oxford

Barnish, S. J. B. (1986) ‘Taxation, land, and barbarian settlement in the western
empire’, PBSR 54: 170—95

Barnwell, P. S. (199a) Emperor, Prefects and Kings: The Roman West, 393—363. London
Bassett, S. (1988) The Origins of Anglo-Saxon Kingdoms. Leicester
Beaucamp, J. (1 990 and 1 99.2a) Le statut de la femme a Byyance fe—ye siecle) 1 , Le droit
imperial, 2, Les pratiques sociales. Paris

Beaucamp, J. (1992b) ‘L’Egypte byzantine: biens des parents, biens du couple?’, in
D. Simon (z&fEherechtundFamiliengutinAntikeimdMittelalterQAuA&i) 61—76
Bellinger, A. R. (1938) Coins from ferash, 1928—1934 (Numismatic Notes and
Monographs no. 81). New York

Bermond Montanari, G. (ed.) (1983) Ravenna e il porto di Classe. Venti anni di ricerche
archeologiche tra Ravenna e Classe. Bologna

Bettini, M. (1988) ‘II divieto fino al “sesto grado” incluso nel matrimonio romano’,
Athenaeum 66: 69-98

Bettini, M. (1994) ‘De la terminologie romaine des cousins’, in Bonte (1994)
221—39

Bianchi Fossati Vanzetti, M. (1983) ‘Vendita ed esposizione degli infanti da
Costantino a Giustiniano’, SDHI 49: 179—224
Bintliff, J. (1983) ‘The development of settlement in south-west Boeotia’, in P.
Roesch (ed.) , La Beotie antique, Lyon - Saint-Etienne ( 6-20 mai 1983) Colloques inter-
nationaux du Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique (Paris) 49-70
Bintliff, J. (1985) ‘The Boeotia survey’, in S. Macready and F. H. Thompson (eds.),
Archaeological Field Survey in Britain and Abroad (London) 1 96-2 1 6
Biondi, B. (1952-54) II diritto romano cristiano. Milan

Biraben, J.-N. and Le Goff, J. (1969) ‘La peste dans le haut Moyen ,Annales 24:
1484—1 510

Bishop, J. (1985) ‘Bishops as marital advisors in the ninth century’, in J. Kirshner
and S. F. Wemple (eds.), Women of the Medieval World. Essays in Honor of f. H.
Mundy (Oxford) 5 3-84

Blair, J. (1991) Early Medieval Surrey: Landholding, Church and Settlement. Stroud
Blair, J. and Sharpe, R. (eds.) (1992) Pastoral Care Before the Parish. Leicester
Bonnassie, R. (1991) From Slavery to Feudalism in South-Western Europe. Cambridge
Bonneau, D. (1970) ‘L’administration de l’irrigation dans les grands domaines en
Egypte au Vie siecle de n.e.’, in D. H. Samuel (ed.), Proceedings of the Twelfth
International Congress of Papyrology (Toronto) 45—62
Bonte, P. (ed.) (1994) Epouser au plus proche. Inceste, prohibitions et strategies matrimoni-
ales autour de la Mediterranee. Paris

Boswell, ]. (1989) The Kindness of Strangers: The Abandonment of Children in Western
Europe from Late Antiquity to the Renaissance. New York
Bowman, A. (1994) Life and Letters on the Roman Frontier: l indolanda and its People.
London

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

1031

Brandes, W. (1989) Die Stddte Kleinasiens im 7. und 8. Jahrhundert. Berlin
Breeze, D. (1984) ‘Demand and supply on the northern frontier’, in R. Miket and
C. Burgess (eds.), Between and Beyond the Walls: Essays on the Prehistory and History
of North Britain in Honour of George f obey (Edinburgh) 32—68
Bremmer, }. (1983) ‘The importance of the maternal uncle and grandfather in
archaic and classical Greece and early Byzantium’, ZPE 50: 173-86
Bresson, A. (198;) ‘Graphes et reseaux de parente en Grece ancienne’, in
Informatique et prosopographie, Paris 1984 (Paris) 261-75
Brogiolo, G. P. (1994), ‘Castra tardoantichi (IV-meta VI)’, in Francovich and Noye
(1994) 151-8

Brogiolo, G. P. and Gelichi, S. (eds.) (1996) Le ceramiche altomedievali (fine \ 7 -X secolo)
in Italia settentrionale: produgione e commerci, Mantua
Brown, P. R. L. (1988) The Body and Society: Men, Women and Sexual Renunciation in
Early Christianity. New York

Brown, P. R. L. (1992) Power and Persuasion in Late Antiquity. Madison
Brown, P. R. L. (1996) The Rise of Western Christendom: Triumph and Diversity AD
200—1000. Oxford

Bruce-Mitford, R. (1975-83) The Sutton Hoo Ship-Burial. 3 vols. in 4 parts. London
Burgess, R. W (1993/4) ‘The accession of Marcian in the light of Chalcedonian
apologetic and Monophysite polemic’, BZ 86/87: 47-68
Burkitt, F. C. (1913) Euphemia and the Goth, with the Acts of the Martyrdom of the
Confessors of Edessa. London

Burns, T. S. (1992) ‘The settlement of 418’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-
Century Gaul 53—63

Butler, FI. C. (1920) Syria: Publications of the Princeton University Archaeological
Expeditions to Syria in 1904 - / and 1909, n. Architecture, Section B Northern Syria.
Leiden

Caillet, J.-P (1 993) L’ evergetisme monumental chretien en Italic et a ses marges (Collection
de l’Ecole Fran^aise de Rome, 175). Rome
Cameron, Alan (1978) ‘The House of Anastasius’, GRBS 19: 259—76
Cameron, Alan and Long, J. (1993) Barbarians and Politics at the Court of Arcadius.
Berkeley

Cameron, Averil (1993) The Later Roman Enpire, A. D. 284—440. London
Carandini, A. etal. (1983) ‘Rapporto preliminare delle campagne \(ft^—-if,Quaderni
di Archeologia della Libia 13: 9-60

Carletti, C. (1977) ‘Aspetti biometrici del matrimonio nelle iscrizioni cristiane di
Roma \Augustinianum 17: 39-51

Carrie, J. M. (1986) ‘L’esercito: trasformazioni funzionali ed economie locali’, in
Giardina (ed.), Societd romana 449—88, 760—71
Carver, M. O. H. (1993) Arguments in Stone: Archaeological Research and the European
Town in the First Millennium (Oxbow Monograph 29). Oxford
Casey, P J. (1993) ‘The end of fort garrisons on Hadrian’s Wall: a hypothetical
model’, in Vallet and Kazanski (1993) 259—68
Castagnetti, A. (1979) L’ organiyyafione de! territorio rurale nel medioevo. Circoscrigioni
ecclesiastiche e civili nella Langobardia’ e nella Romania’. Turin
Castello, C. (1983) ‘Assenza d’ispirazione cristiana in C. Th. 3, 16, 1’, in Religion,
societe et politique. Melanges en hommage a Jacques Ellul (Paris) 203-12
Castello, C. (1988) ‘Legislazione costantiniana e conciliare in tema di scioglimento

1032

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

degli sponsali e di ratto’, in Atti dellAccademia Romanistica Costantiniana, T El
Convegno Internagionale, 198; (Perugia) 383—91
Chadwick, H. (1979) ‘The relativity of moral codes: Rome and Persia in late anti-
quity’, in W R. Schoedel and R. M. Wilken (eds.), Early Christian Literature and
the Classical Intellectual Tradition: In Honorem R. M. Grant (Paris) 135—53
Charles-Edwards, T. (1988) ‘Early medieval kingships in the British Isles’, in
Bassett (1988) 28—39

Charpentier, G. (1994) ‘Les bains de Sergilla’, Syria 71: 113—42
Chastagnol, A. (1966) Le senat romain sous le regne d’Odoacre: recherches sur I’epigraphie
du Colisee au Ve siecle. Bonn

Cheyette, F. L. (1977) ‘The origins of European villages and the first European
expansion’, Journal of Economic History 37: 182-209
Chrysos, E. K. (1993) ‘Cyprus in early Byzantine times’, in A. A. M. Bryer and
G. S. Georghallides (eds.), ‘The Sweet Land of Cyprus’, Papers given at the Twenty-
Fifth fubilee Symposium of Bygantine Studies, Birmingham, March 1991 (Nicosia and
Birmingham) 3—14

Chrysos, E. K. and Schwarcz, A. (eds.) (1989) Das Reich mid die Barbaren. Vienna
Clark, E. A. (1990) The Origenist Controversy. The Cultural Construction of an Early
Christian Debate. Princeton

Claude, D. (1969) Die bygantinische Stadt im 6. Jahrhundert. Munich
Claude, D. (1980) ‘Freedmen in the Visigothic kingdom’, in James (1980a) 159-88
Clover, F. (1989) ‘The symbiosis of Romans and Vandals in Africa’, in Chrysos and
Schwarcz (1989) 57—73

Cohen, B. (1949) ‘Betrothal in Jewish and Roman Law’, Proceedings of the American
Academy for Jewish Research 1 8: 67—135 (= Cohen (1966) fewish and Roman Law:
A Comparative Study (New York) 1: 279—349)

Collins, R. (1977) ‘Julian of Toledo and the royal succession in late seventh-century
Spain’, in Sawyer and Wood (1977 ) 30—49
Collins, R. (1980) ‘Merida and Toledo: 5 50-585’, in James (1980a) 189—219
Collins, R. (1983a) Early Medieval Spain: Unity in Diversity 900— 1000. London
Collins, R. (1983b) ‘Theodebert I: Res Magnus Francorum’ , in P. Wormald (ed.), Ideal
and Reality in Frankish and Anglo-Saxon Society (Oxford) 7—3 3
Collins, R. (1985) ‘SicutLex Gothorum continet law and charters in ninth- and tenth-
century Leon and Catalonia’, EHR 100: 489-512
Collins, R. (1986) ‘Visigothic law and regional custom in early medieval Spain’, in
Davies and Fouracre (1986) 85-104

Conrad, L. I. (1986) ‘The plague in Bilad al-Sham in pre-Islamic times’, in M. A.
Bakhit and M. Asfour (eds.). Proceedings of the Symposium on Bilad al-Sham during
the Bygantine Period (1989) (Amman) 11:143-63
Corbier, M. (1991) ‘Constructing kinship in Rome: marriage and divorce, filiation
and adoption’, in Kertzer and Sailer (1991) 127-44
Cornell, T. (1993) ‘The end of Roman imperial expansion’, in Rich and Shipley
(1993) 139-70

Courtois, C., Leschi, L., Perrat, C. and Saumagne, C. (1952) Tablettes Albertini: actes
prives de I’epoque vandale. Paris

Cristianiggagione ed organiggagione ecclesiastica delle canpagne nell’alto medioevo: espansione
e resistenge (1982) (= XXVIII Settimana di studio del Centro Italiano di Studi
sull’Alto Medioevo). Spoleto

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY IO 33

Crouzel, H. (1971) L'Eglise primitive face au divorce. Paris
Cubitt, C. (1995) Anglo-Saxon Church Councils c. 6jo—c. Sjo. Leicester
Cumont, F. (1924) ‘Les unions entre proches a Doura et chez les Perses’, Comptes
rendus de I’Academie des inscriptions et des belles lettres 53—62
Cunliffe, B. (1978) Iron Age Communities in Britain. 2nd edn. London
Curtius, E. (1953) European Eiterature and the Latin Middle Ages. London (first pub-
lished as Europdische Literatur und lateinisches Mittelalter, Bern 1 948)

Dagron, G. (1979) ‘Entre village et cite: la bourgade rurale des IVe- Vile siecles en
Orient’, Koinonia 3: 29—52 (= Dagron (1984b) vm)

Dagron, G. (1984a) ‘Les villes de rillyricum protobyzantin’, in lilies et peuplement
(1984) 1-19

Dagron, G. (1984b) La romanite chretienne en Orient. London
Dark, K. R. (1994) Civitas to Kingdom: British Political Community 300—800. Leicester
Dauphin, C. (1980) ‘Mosaic pavements as an index of prosperity and fashion’,
Levant 12: 1 1 2—34

Davies, W. (1982) Wales in the Early Middle Ages. Leicester

Davies, W (1988) Small Worlds: The Village Community in Early Medieval Brittany.
London

Davies, W and Fouracre, P. (eds.) (1986) The Settlement of Disputes in Early Medieval
Europe. Cambridge

Davies, W. and Fouracre, P. (eds.) (1995) Property and Power in the Early Middle Ages.
Cambridge

Dawes, E. and Baynes, N. H. (1948) Three Bygantine Saints. London and Oxford
Demandt, A. (1989) ‘The osmosis of late Roman and Germanic aristocracies’, in
Chrysos and Schwarcz (1989) 75-86

Demians d’Archimbaud, G. (1994) L’oppidum de Saint-Blaise du Ve au T Tie r. Paris
Dentzer, J.-M. (ed.) (1985) Hauran I. Recherches archeologiques sur la Syrie du Slid a
I’epoque hellenistique et romaine. Paris

Dodge, H. and Ward-Perkins, B. (eds.) (1992) Marble in Antiquity. Collected Papers of
f. B. Ward-Perkins. London

Doehaerd, R. (1971) Le haut mcyen age occidental. Economies et societes. Paris
Drinkwater, J. F. (1992) ‘The bacaudae of fifth-century Gaul’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.) Fifth-Century Gaul 208-17
Duby, G. (1974) The Early Growth of the European Economy. London
Durliat, J. (1988) ‘Le salaire de la paix sociale dans les royaumes barbares (Ve— Vie
siecles)’, in H. Wolfram and A. Schwarcz (eds.), Anerkenntmg und Integration
(Osterreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften, phil.-hist. Kl.
Denkmalschriften 193) 21—72

Durliat, J. (1989) ‘La peste du Vie siecle. Pour un nouvel examen des sources
byzantines’, in Hommes et richesses 1.1 07—1 9
Durliat, J. (1990a) De la ville antique a la ville by^antine. Le probleme des subsistances
(Collection de l’Ecole Frangaise de Rome 136). Rome
Durliat, J. (1990b) Les Finances Publiques de Diocletien aux Carolingiens (284—888)
(Beihefte der Francia 21). Sigmaringen

Durliat, J. (1993) ‘Armee et societe vers 600. Le probleme des soldes’, in Vallet and
Kazanski (1993) 31-8

Dvornik, F. (1966) Early Christian and Byzantine Political Philosophy: Origins and
Background, vol. 2. Washington, DC

1034

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Edwards, N. (1990) The Archaeology of Early Medieval Ireland. London
Ellis, S. (19 85) ‘Carthage in the seventh century, an expanding population’, Cahiers
des etudes anciennes 17: 30—42

Elton, H. (1996) Warfare in Roman Europe AD jjo—420. Oxford
Empereur, J.-Y. and Picon, M. (1989) ‘Les regions de production d’amphores imperi-
ales en Mediterranee orientale’, in Amphores romaines ethistoire economique: dix ans
de recherche (Collection de l’Ecole Frangaise de Rome 1 14) (Rome) 223-48
Esmonde Cleary, A. S. (1989) The Endingof Roman Britain. London
Evans Grubbs, J. (1989) ‘Abduction marriage in antiquity: a law of Constantine (C.

Th. ix. 24. 1) and its social context’, JRS 79: 59—83
Evans Grubbs, J. (1995) Law and Family in Late Antiquity: The Emperor Constantine’s
Marriage Legislation. Oxford

Ewig, E. (1963) ‘Residence et capitale pendant le haut Moyen Age’, RH 230: 25—72
Fabre, P. (1949) Saint Paulin de No/e et I’amitie chretienne (Bibliotheque des Ecoles
Frangaises d’Athenes et de Rome, 161). Paris
Farka, C. (1993-4) ‘Rauberhorden in Thrakien. Eine unbeachtete Quelle zur
Geschichte der Zeit des Kaisers Maurikios’, BZ 86/87: 462-9
Feissel,D. and Kaygusuz,I. (1985) ‘Un mandement imperial du Vie siecle dansune
inscription d’Fladrianoupolis d’Flonoriade’, T&MBy^y. 397-419
Feissel, D. and Philippidis-Braat, A. (1985) ‘Inventaires en vue d’un recueil des
inscriptions historiques de Byzance III, Inscriptions du Peloponnese (a l’ex-
ception de Mistra)’, T&MBy^y. 267—395

Fentress, E. and Perkins, P. (1988) ‘Counting African Red Slip Ware’, in A. Mastino
(ed.) , L Africa rornana. Atti del l r convegno di studi, Sassari 11—ig dicembre ig8y 205-14
Festugiere, A. J. (ed.) (1970) l ie de Theodore de Sykeon (Subsidia Hagiographica 48).
Brussels

Finley, M. I. (1973) The Ancient Economy. London (2nd edn London 1985)
Fitzgerald, G. M. (1939) A Sixth-Century Monastery at Beth-Shan (Syfhopo/is)
(Publications of the Palestine Section of the University Museum, University
of Pennsylvania, iv). Philadelphia

Fortin, E. L. (195 9) Christianisme et culture philosophique au cinquieme siecle. Paris
Foss, C. (1975) ‘The Persians in Asia Minor and the end of antiquity’, EHR 90:
7 2I— 47

Foss, C. (1979) Ephesus after Antiquity: A Late Antique, Byzantine and Turkish City.
Cambridge

Foss, C. (1995) ‘The near eastern countryside in late antiquity: a review article’, The
Roman and Byzantine Near East: Some Recent Archaeological Research (JRA supple-
mentary series 14) 213—34

Fouracre, P. (1986) ‘ P/acita and the settlement of disputes in later Merovingian
Francia’, in Davies and Fouracre (1986) 23-44
Fouracre, P. (1995) ‘Eternal light and earthly needs: practical aspects of the devel-
opment of Frankish immunities’, in Davies and Fouracre (1995) 5 3—81
Francovich, R. and Noye, G. (1 994) La storia dell’ Alto Medioevo italiano (VI— X secolo)
alia luce dell’ archeologia. Florence

Frank, T. (ed.) (193 3 — 40) An Economic Survey of Ancient Rome. 5 vols. Baltimore
Frantz, A. (1988) Late Antiquity: A. D. 26y—yoo (= The Athenian Agora vol. xxiv).
Princeton

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

IO35

Frova, A. (ed.) (1973) Scavi di Luni. Relatione preliminaire delle campagne di scavo
1970— 1971. Rome

Frova, A. (ed.) (1977) Scavi di Luni. II. Relatione delle campagne di scavo 1972 — 1973 ~
1974. Rome

Frugoni, C. (1977) ‘L’iconografia del matrimonio e della coppia nel Medioevo’, in
II matrimonio nella societd altomedievale n: 901-63
Ganz, D. (1995) ‘The ideology of sharing: apostolic community and ecclesiastical
property in the early Middle Ages’, in Davies and Fouracre (199;) 17-30
Garnsey, P. (1988) Famine and Food Supply in the Graeco-Roman World. Cambridge
Garnsey, P. (1996) ‘Prolegomenon to a study of the land in the later Roman
empire’, in J. H. M. Strubbe, R. A. Tybout and H. S. Versnel (eds.), Energeia:
Studies on Ancient History and Epigraphy presented to H. W. Pleket (Amsterdam)
I 35 — 5 3

Garnsey, P., Hopkins, K. and Whittaker, C. R. (eds.) (1983) Trade in the Ancient
Economy. London

Garnsey, P. and Sailer, R. (1987) The Roman Empire: Economy, Society and Culture.
London

Gascou, J. (198;) ‘Les grands domaines, la cite et l’etat en Egypte byzantine.

Recherches d’histoire agraire, fiscale et administrative’, T&MBy^ty. 1-90
Gascou, J. (1994) ‘Deux inscriptions byzantines de Haute-Egypte’, T<&MBy% 12:
323-42

Gaudemet, J. (1948) ‘Constantin restaurateur de l’ordre’, in Studi in onore di Siro
Solagpi (Naples) 652-74 (= Gaudemet (1979) 11.71— 95)

Gaudemet, J. (1950) ‘Droit romain et principes canoniques en matiere de mariage
au bas-empire’, in Studi in memoria di Emilio Albertario (Milano) 11.173—96 (=
Gaudemet (1979) 111.163—88)

Gaudemet, J. (1970) ‘Le lien matrimonial: les incertitudes du Haut Moyen-Age’, in
Le lien matrimonial (Strasbourg) 81—105 (= Gaudemet (1980) 230—89)
Gaudemet, J. (1977) ‘Le legs du droit romain en matiere matrimoniale’, in I! matrim-
onio nella societd altomedievale 1. 139-79 (= Gaudemet (1980) 230—89)

Gaudemet, J. (1978a) ‘Tendances nouvelles de la legislation familiale au I’Ve siecle’,
in Transformation et conflits au /T £ siecle ap.J.-C., Bordeaux 1970 (Bonn) 1 87-206
Gaudemet, J. (1978b) ‘L’interpretation du principe d’indissolubilite du mariage
chretien au cours du premier millenaire’, Bollettino dell’Istituto di diritto romano
81: 11-70 (= Gaudemet (1980) 230-89)

Gaudemet, J. (1979) Etudes de droit romain. Camerino
Gaudemet, J. (1980) Societe et mariage. Strasbourg
Gaudemet, J. (1989) L’Eglise dans /’empire romain (II e—Vesiec/es). Paris
Geary, P. (1985) Aristocracy in Provence: The Rhone Basin at the Dawn of the Carolingjan
Age. Philadelphia

George, J. (1992) Venantius Fortunatus: A Latin Poet in Merovingian Gaul. Oxford
Gerberding, R. A. (1987) The Rise of the Carolingians and the Liber Historiae Franco rum.
Oxford

Giannarelli, E. (1980) La tipologia femminile nella biografia e nell’ autobiografia cristiana del
/T ' secolo. Rome

Giardina, A. (1982) ‘Lavoro e storia sociale. Antagonismi e alleanze dall’ellenismo
al tardoantico’, Opus 1: 1 1 5—46

1036 III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Giardina, A. (1988) ‘Carita eversiva: le donazioni di Melania la Giovane e gli equi-
libri della societa tardoromana’, Studi Stoner. 1 27-42
Giardina, A. (1994) ‘Melania la Santa’, in A. Fraschetti (ed.), Roma al femminile
(Rome— Bari) 259-85

Goffart, W (1981) ‘Rome, Constantinople, and the barbarians’, AHR 76: 275-306
Goffart, W (1982) ‘Old and new in Merovingian taxation’, PeFPyG: 3—21
Goffart, W (1988) The Narrators of Barbarian History. Princeton
Goffart, W (1989) ‘The theme of “The Barbarian Invasions” in late antique and
modern historiography’, in Chrysos and Schwarcz (eds.) (1989) 87-107
Goody, J. (1983) The Development of the Family and Marriage in Europe. Cambridge
Goody, J. (1990) The Oriental, the Ancient and the Primitive: Systems of Marriage and the
Family in the Pre-industrial Societies of Eurasia. Cambridge
Goria, F. (1975) Studi sul matrimonio dell’ adultera nel diritto giustinianeo e biyantino. Turin
Grahn-Hoek, H. (1976) Die frankische Oberschicht im 6 Jahrhundert. Studien %ur ihrer
rechtlichen und politischen Stellung. Sigmaringen
Graus, F. (1965) Volk, Herrscher und Heiliger im Reich der Meromnger: Studien girr
Hagiographie der Meromngergeit. Prague
Greene, K. (1986) The Archaeology of the Roman Economy. London
Grierson, P. (1982) Byzantine Coins. London

Guastella, G. (1980) ‘I Parentalia come testo antropologico: l’avunculato nel
mondo celtico e nella famiglia di Ausonio’, Materiali e discussioni 4: 97—1 24
Hals all, G. (1995) Settlement and Social Organisation: The Merovingian Region of Met%.
Cambridge

Hardy, E. R. (193 1) The Targe Estates of Byzantine Egypt. New York
Hiirke, H. (1990) ‘“Warrior graves?”: the background of the Anglo-Saxon burial
rite’, P&P 26: 22—43

Hiirke, H. (1992) ‘Changing symbols in a changing society: the Anglo-Saxon
weapon burial rite in the seventh century’, in M. O. H. Carver (ed.), The Age
of Sutton Hoo (London) 149-65

Harper, G. M. (1928) ‘Village administration in the Roman province of Syria’, YCS
1: 105—68

Harries, J. (1994) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rome. Oxford
Harris, W V. (1986) ‘The Roman father’s power of life and death’, in R. S. Bagnall
and W V. Harris (eds.) , Studies in Roman Tan' in Memory of A. A. Schiller (Leiden)
81-95

Harris, W V. (1994) ‘Child-exposure in the Roman empire’, JRS 84: 1—22
Harrison, D. (1 993) The Early State and the Towns: Forms of Integration in Tombard Italy,
AD 468— yjy. Lund

Harrison, R. M. (1986) Excavations at Saraftane in Istanbul, T Plume I (The Excavations,
Structures, Architectural Decoration, Small Finds, Coins, Bones, and Molluscs). Princeton
Harrison, R. M. (1 9 89) A Temple for Byzantium: The Discovery and Excavation of Anicia
f uliana’s Palace-Church in Istanbul. London
Hatcher, J. (1977) Plague, Population and the English Economy iyy8—iyyo. London
Hayes, J. W. (1972) Tate Roman Pottery: A Catalogue of Roman Fine Wares. London
Hayes, J. W. (1980) Supplement to Tate Roman Pottery. London
Hayes, J. W (1992) Excavations at Sarafiane in Istanbul, Volume II ( The Pottery).
Princeton

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

io 37

Heather, P. (1989) ‘Cassiodorus and the rise of the Amals: genealogy and the
Goths under Hun domination’, /AJ79: 103-28
Heather, P. (1992) ‘The emergence of the Visigothic kingdom’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 84—94

Heather, P. (1993) ‘The historical culture of Ostrogothic Italy’, Atti del XIII
Congresso Internationale di studi sull’Alto Medioevo (Spoleto) 317—53
Heather, P. (1994) ‘New men for new Constantines. The creation of an imperial
elite in the eastern Mediterranean’, in Magdalino (ed.). New Constantines 11-33
Heather, P. (1995 a) ‘The Huns and the end of the Roman empire in western
Europe’, EHR 1 10: 4—41

Heather, P. (1995b) ‘Theoderic, king of the Goths’, EME 4: 145—73
Heather, P. (1996) The Goths (Blackwell Peoples of Europe series). Oxford
Heather, P. (1998) ‘Senators and senates’. Cambridge Ancient History xm.184— 210
Hedeager, L. (1987) ‘Empire, frontier and the barbarian hinterland. Rome and
northern Europe from ad 1—400’, in K. Kristiansen et al. (eds.), Centre and
Periphery in the Ancient World (Cambridge) 125—40
Hedeager, L. (1988) ‘The evolution of Germanic Society 1—400 a.d.’, in R. F. J.
Jones et al. (eds.). First Millennium Papers: Western Europe in the First Millennium
(BAR International Series 401) (Oxford) 129—44
Heinzelmann, M. (1976) Bischoffsherrschaft in Gallien. Munich
Heinzelmann, M. (1982) ‘Gallische Prosopographie 260—527’, Francia 10: 5 3 1— 71 8
Heinzelmann, M. (1992) ‘The “affair” of Hilary of Arles (445) and Gallo-Roman
identity in the fifth century’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul
239— 5 1

Heinzelmann, M. (1993) ‘ Villa d’apres les oeuvres de Gregoire de Tours’, in E.
Magnou-Nortier (ed.), Aux sources de lagestion publique. Tome I, Enquete lexicog-
raphique sur fundus, villa, domns, mans us (Lille) 45—70
Herrenschmidt, C. (1994) ‘Le xwetodas ou mariage “incestueux” en Iran ancien’, in
Bonte (ed.) (1994) 113—25

Hildebrandt, H. (1988) ‘Systems of agriculture in central Europe up to the tenth
and eleventh centuries’, in Hooke (ed.) (1988) 275—90
Hillgarth,J. (1980) ‘Popular religion in Visigothic Spain’, in James (ed.) (1980a) 3-59
Hillgarth,J. (1986) Christianity and Paganism, 350-750: The Conversion of Western Europe.
Philadelphia

Hodges, R. (1989) The Anglo-Saxon Achievement. London

Hodges, R. and Whitehouse, D. (1983) Mohammed, Charlemagne and the Origins of
Europe. London

Holum, K. G. et al. (1988) King Herod’s Dream. Caesarea on the Sea. New York and
London

Hooke, D. (ed.) (1988) Anglo-Saxon Settlements. Oxford

Hope-Taylor, B. (1977) Yeavering: An Anglo-British Centre of Early Northumbria
(Department of the Environment, Archaeological Reports 7). London
Hopkins, K. (1980a) ‘Taxes and trade in the Roman Empire (200 b.c.— a.d. 400)’,
JRS 70: 101—25

Hopkins, K. (1980b) ‘Brother-sister marriage in Roman Egypt’, Comparative Studies
in Society and History 22: 303—54

Humbert, M. (1972) Le remariage a Rome. Etude d’histoire juridique et sociale. Milan

1038 III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Humbert, M. (1983) ‘Enfants a louer ou a vendre: Augustin et l’autorite parentale
( Ep . 10* et 24*)’, in Les lettres de Saint Augustin decouvertes par Johannes Divjak
(Paris) 189—203

Inscriptions grecques et latines de la Syrie (1929- ). Paris

Irsigler, E (1979) ‘On the aristocratic character of early Frankish society’, in T.

Reuter (ed. and trans.), The Medieval Nobility (Amsterdam) 105—36
James, E. (ed.) (1980a) Visigothic Spain: New Approaches. Oxford
James, E. (1980b) ‘Septimania and its frontier: an archaeological approach’, in
James (ed.) (1980a) 223-41

James, E. (1982) The Origins of France: From Clovis to the Capetians 300-1000. London
James, £.(1983) ‘Beati pacific i\ bishops and the law in sixth-century Gaul’, in J. Bossy
(ed.), Disputes and Settlements: Law and Human Relations in the West (Cambridge)
25-46

James, E. (1988) The Franks. Oxford

Joxe, F. (1959) ‘Le christianisme et revolution des sentiments familiaux dans les
lettres privees sur papyrus” AAntHung 7: 41 1-20
Kaegi, W (1992) Byzantium and the Early Islamic Conquests. Cambridge
Kantorowicz, E. H. (i960) ‘On the golden marriage belt and the marriage rings of
the Dumbarton Oaks collection’, DOP 14: 3-16
Kaplan, M. (1992) Les homines et la terre a By^ance du T Te auXIe siecle. Propriete et exploi-
tation dit sol ( Bygantina sorbonica, 10) Paris

Karlin- Hayter, P. (1992) ‘Further notes on Byzantine marriage: raptus-ap7rayt) or
1 uvrjOTeiai?’, DOP 46: 135—54

Keenan, J. G. (1980) ‘Aurelius Phoibammon, son of Triadelphus: a Byzantine
Egyptian land entrepreneur’, BASP 22: 137—69
Keenan, J. G. (1984) ‘The Aphrodite papyri and village life in Byzantine Egypt’,
BSAC 26: 51—63

Keenan, J. G. (1985) ‘Notes on absentee landlordism at Aphrodito’, BASP 22:
137-69

Keenan, J. G. (1993) ‘Papyrology and Byzantine historiography’, in W. J. Cherf
(ed.), Alpha to Omega: Studies in Honour of George John Sgemler on his Sixty-Fifth
Birthday (Chicago) 1 1 1-22

Kennedy, H. (1985) ‘The last century of Byzantine Syria: a reinterpretation’, BF 10:
141-83

Kertzer, D. I. and Sailer, R. P. (eds.) (1991) The Family in Italy from Antiquity to the
Present. New Haven and London

King, P. D. (1972) Law and Society in the Visigothic Kingdom. Cambridge
Kirkby, H. (1981) ‘The scholar and his public’, in Gibson (ed.), Boethius 44—69
Klingshirn, W. E. (1994) Caesarius of Arles: The Making of a Christian Community in
Gaul. Cambridge

Kondic, V. (1984) ‘Les formes des fortifications protobyzantines dans la region des
Portes de Fer’, in I Hies etpeuplement (1984) 131—61
Kraemer, C. J. (1958) Excavations at Ness ana, conducted by H. A. Colt, Jr 111, The Non-
Literary Papyri. Princeton

Krautheimer, R. (1980) Rome: Profile of a City, 312—1308. Princeton
Laiou, A. E. (1985) ‘Consensus facit nuptias — et non. Pope Nicholas I’s Responsa
to the Bulgarians as a source for Byzantine marriage customs’, RJ 4: 1 89-201

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

io 39

(= no. IV of Laiou, Gender, Society and Economic Life in Byzantium, London
Variorum 1992)

Laiou, A. E. (1992) Manage, amour et parente a By^ance aux Xle—XIIIe siecles. Paris
Laiou, A. E. (1993) ‘Sex, consent, and coercion in Byzantium’, in A. E. Laiou (ed.),
Consent and Coercion to Sex and Marriage in Ancient and Medieval Societies
(Washington) 109— 221

Lambrechts, P. (1937) ‘Le commerce des “Syriens” en Gaule du haut empire a
l’epoque merovingienne’, AC 6: 35—61

Larson, C. W. R. (1970) ‘Theodosius and the Thessalonian massacre revisited - yet
again’, in F. L. Cross (ed.). Stadia Patristica 1 o (Texte und Untersuchungen 1 07)
(Berlin) 297—301

Latouche, R. (1967) The Birth of the Western Economy. London (first published, in
French, 1956)

Lebecq, S. (1 994) ‘Le bapteme manque du roi Radbod’, in Les assises du pouvoir: temps
medievaux: territoires africains: Melanges Jean Devisse (Valenciennes) 141—50
Lee, A. D. (1988) ‘Close-kin marriage in late antique Mesopotamia’, GRBSiy. 403-13
Lemaire, A. (1929) ‘Origine de la regie “ Nullum sine dote fiat conjugium” ’, in Melanges
P. Fournier (Paris) 41 5-24

Lepelley, C. (1983) ‘Liberte, colonat et esclavage d’apres la Lettre 24*: la jurisdic-
tion episcopale “de liberal! causa’” , in Les lettres de Saint Augustin decouvertes par
Johannes Divjak (Paris) 329-42
Levi, D. (1 947) Antioch Mosaic Pavements. Princeton

Lewit, T. (1991) Agricultural Production in the Roman Economy A.D. 200-400 (BAR
International Series 568). Oxford

Leyser, K. (1979) Rule and Conflict in an Early Medieval Society. London
L’Huillier, P. (1987) ‘Novella 89 of Leo the Wise on marriage: an insight into its
theoretical and practical impact’, Greek Orthodox Theological Review 32.2: 1 5 3-62
Liebeschuetz, J. H. W. G. (1972) Antioch, City and Imperial Administration in the Eater
Roman Empire. Oxford

Liebeschuetz, J. H. W G. (1979) Continuity and Change in Roman Religion. Oxford
Liebeschuetz, J. H. W G. (1993) ‘The end of the Roman army in the western
empire’, in Rich and Shipley (1993) 265—76
Lieu, S. (1986) ‘Captives, refugees and exiles: a study of cross-frontier civilian
movements between Rome and Persia from Valerian to Julian’, in P. Freeman
and D. Kennedy (eds.). The Defence of the Roman and Byzantine East (BAR
International Series 297.il) (Oxford) 475—505
Lintott, A. (1968) \dolence in Republican Rome. Oxford
Longnon, A. (1 878) Geographic de la Gaule an T Te siecle. Paris
Loseby, S. T. (1992) ‘Marseille: a late antique success story?’, JRS 82: 165-85
Lot, F. (1921) ‘Conjectures demographique sur la France au IXe siecle’, Le Moyen
Age 32: 1—27 and 109—37

Lot, F. (1928) L’impot fonder et la capitation personnelle sous le Bas-Empire et a l’epoque
franque (Bibliotheque de l’ecole des hautes etudes 253). Paris
Lynch,}. H. (1986) Godparents and Kinship in Early Medieval Europe. Princeton
MacCormack, S. (1981) Art and Ceremony in Late Antiquity. Berkeley
MacMullen, R. (1963) Soldier and Civilian in the Later Roman Empire. Cambridge
MacMullen, R. (1987) ‘Late Roman slavery’, Historia 26: 359-82

1040

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

MacMullen, R. (19 SB) Corruption and the Decline of Rome. New Haven
Mallory, J. P. and McNeill, T. E. (1991) The Archaeology of Ulster: From Colonisation to
Plantation. Belfast

Mathisen, R. W. (1981) ‘Epistolography, literary circles and family ties in late
Roman Gaul’, TAPA hi: 95—109

Mathisen, R. W. (1984) ‘The family of Georgius Florentius Gregorius and the
bishops of Tours’, Medievalia et Humanistica 12: 83-95
Mathisen, R. W (1993) Roman Aristocrats in Barbarian Gaul: Strategies for Survival in an
Age of Transition. Austin

IlMatrimonio nella societa altomedievale (1977). Spoleto (XXIV Settimana di studio del
Centro Italiano di Studi sull’Alto Medioevo)

Matthews, J. F. (1974) ‘The letters of Symmachus’, in J. W. Binns (ed.), Latin
Literature of the Fourth Century (London) 5 8-99
Matthews, J. F. (1975) Western Aristocracies and Imperial Court A.D. 363—323. Oxford
Matthews, J. F. (1989) The Roman Empire of Ammianus. London and Baltimore
Mattingly, D. J. (1995) Tripolitania. London

Mattingly, D. J. and Hayes, J. W (1992) ‘Nador and fortified farms in North Africa’,
JRA 5: 408—18

Mattingly, D. J. and Hitchner, R. B. (1 99 5) ‘Roman Africa: an archaeological review’,
JRS 85: 165—213

Millar, F. (1981) ‘The world of the Golden Ass’ ,JRS 71: 63—75
Millett, M. (1990) The Romanisation of Britain. Cambridge

Millett, M. (1991) ‘Pottery: population or supply pattern? The Ager Tarraconensis
approach’, in G. Barker and J. Lloyd (eds.), Roman Landscapes: Archaeological
Survey in the Mediterranean Region (Archaeological Monographs of the British
School at Rome 2) (London) 18—28
Mitchell, F. (1976) The Irish Landscape. London

Mitteis, L. (1891) Reichsrecht und Vblksrecht in den ostlichen Provinsen des romischen
Kaiserreichs. Leipzig

Moorhead, J. (1992) Theoderic in Italy. Oxford

Moreau, Ph. (1994) ‘Le mariage dans les degres rapproches. Le dossier romain (Ier
siecle av. J.-C. — Hie siecle ap. J.-C.)’, in Bonte (ed.) (1994) 59-78
Morrison, C. (1986) ‘Byzance au Vile siecle: le temoignage de la numismatique’, in
Byzantium: Tribute to Andreas Stratos (Athens) 1.149-63
Muller-Wiener, W. (1986) ‘Von der Polis zum Kastron. Wandlungen der Stadt im
agaischem Raum von der Antike zum Mittelalter’, Gymnasium 93: 435— 75
Murialdo, G., Bertolotti, F., Falcetti, C., Palazzi, P. and Paroli, L. (1997 ) ‘La suppel-
lettile da mensa e da cucina nel VII secolo in Liguria: l’esempio di un sito
fortificato’, in S. Gelichi (ed.), I Congresso Nagionale di Archaeologia Medievale,
Pisa 29—31 maggio 1993. Florence
Murray, A. C. (1983) Germanic Kinship Structure. Toronto

Nelson, J. (1991) ‘A propos des femmes royales dans les rapports entre le monde
wisigothique et le monde franc a l’epoque de Reccared’, in XI\ ' centenario
Concilio III de Toledo 389—1989 (Madrid) 465-76
Nippel, W. (1984) ‘Policing Rome’, JRS 74: 20—9

Nitz, H.-J. (1988) ‘Settlement structures and settlement systems of the Frankish
central state in Carolingian and Ottoman times’, in Hooke (1988) 249—73

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

IO41

Olster, D. M. (1993) The Politics of Usurpation in the Seventh Century: Rhetoric and
Revolution in Byzantium. Amsterdam

Orestano, R. (1 9 5 1 ) La struttura giuridica del matrimonio romano dal diritto classico al diritto
giustinianeo. Milan

Orlandis, J. and Ramos-Lissen, D. (198 1) Die Synoden auf der iberischen Halbinsel bis
%um Einbruch des Islam (711). Paderborn

Orrsaud, D. (1992) ‘De la ceramique byzantine a la ceramique islamique. Quelques
hypotheses a partir du mobilier trouve a Dehes’, in P. Canivet and J.-P. Rey-
Coquais (eds.), La Syrie de Byyance a l' Islam (Damascus) 219-28
Ovadiah, A. (1970) Corpus of the Byzantine Churches in the Holy Land. Bonn
Paroli, L. andDelogu, P. (eds.) (1993) La storia economica di Roma nell’ alto Medioevo alia
luce dei recenti scavi archeologici. Florence

Padagean, E. (1973) ‘L’enfant et son avenir dans la famille byzantine (IVe— Xlle
sihc\cs)’ ,Annales de demographie historique 86—93 (= no. x of Padagean, Structure
sociale, famille, chretiente a Bygance, IVe—XIe siecle, London Variorum 1981)
Padagean, E. (1978) ‘Families chretiennes d’Asie Mineure et histoire demo-
graphique du IVeme siecle’, in Transformation et confUts au IVeme siecle ap.f.-C.
(Bonn) 169-86 (=no. ix of Padagean, Structure sociale, famille, chretiente a
By^ance, II e—XIe siecle , London Variorum 1981)

Peacock, D. P. S. (1982) Pottery in the Roman World: An Ethnoarchaeological Approach.
London and New York

Peacock, D. P. S. and Williams, D. F. (1986) Amphorae and the Roman Economy: An
Introductory Guide. London and New York
Percival, J. (1976) The Roman I Ilia. London

Percival, J. (1992) ‘The fifth-century villa: new life or death postponed?’, in
Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul. 156—66
Piccirillo, M. (1985) ‘Rural settlement in Byzantine Jordan’, in A. Hadidi (ed.),
Studies in the History and Archaeology of fordan n (Amman) 257-61
Piccirillo, M. (1993) The Mosaics of fordan. Amman
La Pietra ollare dalla preistoria all’ eta moderna (1987 ). Como

Pietri, Ch. (1979) ‘Le mariage chretien a Rome’, in J. Delumeau (ed.), Histoire vecue
du peuple chretien (Toulouse) 1. 105—31

Pietri, L. (1983) La ville de Tours du /T ”e au lie siecle. Naissance dime cite chretienne
(Collection de l’Ecole Franqaise de Rome 69). Rome
Pirenne, H. (1939) Mohammed and Charlemagne. London (first published as Mahomet
et Charlemagne (Paris and Brussels) 1937)

Pontal, O. (1989) Histoire des conciles merovingiens. Paris

Popovic, V (1984) ‘Byzantins, Slaves et autochthones dans les provinces de
Prevalitane et Nouvelle Epire’, in Villes et peuplement { 1984) 181-243
Poulter, A. (1992) ‘The use and abuse of urbanism in the Danubian provinces
during the later Roman empire’, in J. Rich (ed.), The City in Late Antiquity
(London) 99—135

Pringle, D. (1981) The Defence of Byzantine Africa from fustinian to the Arab Conquest
An Account of the Military History and Archaeology of the African Provinces in the
Sixth and Seventh Centuries (BAR International Series 99). Oxford
Prinz, F. (1967) ‘Fleiligenkult und Adelsherrschaft im Spiegel merowingischer
Hagiographie’, Hist. Zeit. 204: 529—44

1042

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Randsborg, K. (1991) The First Millennium A.D in Europe and the Mediterranean: An
Archaeological Essay. Cambridge

Randsborg, K. (1992) ‘Barbarians, classical antiquity and the rise of western
Europe. An archaeological essay’, P&P 137: 8-24
Rebuffat, R. (1993) ‘Introduction au colloque’, in Vallet and Kazanski (1993) 5-9
Remondon, R. (1965) ‘P. Hamb. 56 et P. Lond. 1419 (notes sur les finances
d’Aphrodito du Vie siecle au Vile)’, Chronique d’Egypte 40: 401— 30
Reuter, T. (1985) ‘Plunder and tribute in the Carolingian empire,’ TRHS 35: 75-94
Reuter, T. (1991) ‘The end of Carolingian military expansion’, in P. Godman and
R. Collins (eds.), Charlemagne’s Heir: New Perspectives on the Reign of Louis the
Pious (Oxford) 391-405

Reynolds, P. (1995) Trade in the Western Mediterranean, A.D. 400—700: The Ceramic
Evidence (BAR International Series 604). Oxford
Reynolds, P. L. (1994) Marriage in the Western Church: The Christianization of Marriage
during the Patristic and Early Medieval Periods. Leiden, New York and Cologne
Rich, J. and Shipley, G. (1993) War and Society in the Roman World. London
Richards, J. (1 979) The Popes and the Papacy in the Early Middle Ages, 476—772. London
Riley, J. A. (1 979) ‘The coarse pottery’, in Excavations at Sidi Khrebish Benghazi (Berenice)
11, ed. J. A. Lloyd ( Tripoli , supplement to Libya Antiqua v, vol. n) 91-465
Ritzer, K. (1981) Formen, Riten und religioses Brauchtum der Eheschliessungin den christli-
chen Kirchen des ersten fahrtausends. 2nd edn. Munster
Roda, S. (1979) ‘II matrimonio fra cugini germani nella legislazione tardoimperi-
ale’, 673 / 7 / 45: 289-309

Rosener, W (ed.) (1989) Strukturen der Grundherrschaft imfriihen Mittelalter. Gottingen
Rossiter, J. J. (1 990) ‘Villas vandales; le suburbium de Carthage au debut du Vie siecle
de notre ere’, in Actes du IVe Colloque international surl’histoire de I’Afrique duNord
(Strasbourg 1988) vol. 1 ( Carthage et son territoire dans lAntiquite) (Paris) 221-7
Rouche, M. (1979) E Aquitaine des W'isigoths auxArabes 418—781. Naissance d’une region.
Paris

Rouche, M. (1983) ‘La destinee des biens de Saint Remi durant le haut moyen age’,
in W. Janssen and D. Lohrmann (eds.) Villa - Curtis - Grangia (Munich) 46-6 1
Rouche, M. (1987) ‘The early Middle Ages in the west’, in P. Veyne (ed.), A History
of Private Life from Pagan Rome to Byzantium (Cambridge, MA) 41 1—5 49
Rubin, R. (1989) ‘The debate over climatic changes in the Negev, fourth-seventh
centuries c.e.’, Palestine Exploration Quarterly 1989: 71—8
Ruggini, L. (1959) ‘Ebrei e orientali nell’Italia settentrionale fra il IV e il VI secolo
d. Cr.’, Studia et documenta historiae et iuris 25:1 87—308
Sailer, R. P. (1 99 1 a) ‘European family history and Roman law’. Continuity and Change
6: 335-46

Sailer, R. P. (1991b) ‘Roman heirship strategies in principle and in practice’, in
Kertzer and Sailer (1991) 26-47

Sailer, R. P. (1994) Property and Death in the Roman Family. Cambridge
Sailer, R. P. and Shaw, B. D. (1984) ‘Tombstones and Roman family relations in the
Principate: civilians, soldiers and slaves’, fRS 74: 124-56
Samson, R. (1987) ‘The Merovingian nobleman’s house: castle or villa?’, fMH 13:
287-315

Sargenti, M. (1986) ‘Matrimonio cristiano e societa pagana’, SDHI 51: 367—91 (=
Sargenti, Studi sul diritto del tardo impero, Padua 1986: 343—73)

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

IO43

Sartre, M. (1985) Bostra des origines a I’lslam. Paris

Sawyer, P. H. and Wood, I. N. (eds.) (1977) Early Medieval Kingship. Leeds
Schafer, C. (1991) Der mstromische Senat ah Tr'dger des antiker Kontinuitdt unter den
Ostgotenkonigen (490-J40 n. Chr.). St Katharinen
Seeck, O. (1919) Regesten der Kaiser und P'dpste fur die Jahre 31 1 bis 7 76 n. Chr. Stuttgart
Segal, J. B. (195 5) ‘Mesopotamian communities from Julian to the rise of Islam’,
PBA 41: 109—41

Segal, J. B. (1970) Edessa: ‘The Blessed City’. Oxford

Shaw, B. D. (1984) ‘Latin funerary epigraphy and family life in the later Roman
empire’, Historia 33: 457-97

Shaw, B. D. (1987a) ‘The family in late antiquity: the experience of Augustine’,
P&P 1 1 5: 3-51

Shaw, B. D. (1987b) ‘The age of Roman girls at marriage: some reconsiderations’,
JRS 1T . 30-46

Shaw, B. D. (1991) ‘The cultural meaning of death: age and gender in the Roman
family’, in Kertzer and Sailer (1991) 66—90
Shaw, B. D. (1992) ‘Explaining incest: brother— sister marriage in Graeco-Roman
Egypt’, Man n.s. 27: 267-99

Shaw, B. D. and Sailer, R. P. (1984) ‘Close-kin marriage in Roman society?’, Man n.s.
19: 432—44

Slack, P. (1990) The Impact of Plague in Tudor and Stuart England. Oxford
Small, A. M. and Buck, R. J. (1994) The Excavations of San Giovanni di Ruoti, 1. The
l Was and their Environment. Toronto

Sodini, J.-P. (1989) ‘Le commerce des marbres a l’epoque protobyzantine’, in
Hommes et richesses 1.163-86

Sodini, J.-P. et al. (1980) ‘Dehes (Syrie du Nord): campagnes I— III (1976—1978).

Recherches sur 1 ’habitat rural’, Syria 57: 1-304
Spagnuolo Vigorita, T. (1984) Exsecranda pernicies. De/atori e fisco nell’etd di Costantino.
Naples

Spieser, J.-M. (1984) ‘Les villes en Grece du Hie au Vile s.’, in Villes et penplement
(1984) 315-38

Stafford, P. (1983) Queens, Concubines and Dowagers. London
Stancliffe, C. (1983) St Martin and his Hagiographer. Oxford
Stroheker, K. F. (1948) Der senatorische Adel im spatantiken Gallien. Tubingen
Talbot, A. M. (1990) ‘The Byzantine family and monastery’, DOP 44: 119—29
Tate, G. (1992) Les campagnes de la Syrie du nord du He au T Tie siecle. Un example d’ex-
pansion demographique et economique a la fin de I’Antiquite (Institut Frangais
d’Archeologie du Proche-Orient, Bibliotheque archeologique et historique
133). Paris

Thebert, Y. (1987) ‘Private life and domestic architecture in Roman Africa’, in
P. Veyne (ed.), A History of Private Life: From Pagan Rome to Byzantium
(Cambridge, MA) 313—409

Thomas, J. P. (1987) Private Religious Foundations in the Byyantine Enrpire. Washington,
DC

Thompson, E. A. (i960) ‘The conversion of the Visigoths to Catholicism’, NMS
T 4-35

Thompson, E. A. (1963) ‘The Visigoths from Fritigern to Euric’, Historia 12: 105—26
Thompson, E. A. (1969) The Goths in Spain. Oxford

1044

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

Thompson, E. A. (19 82) Romans and Barbarians. The Decline of the Western Empire.
Madison, WI

Tjader, J.-O. (1982) Die nichtUterarischen lateinischen Papyri Italiens aus der Zeit 445—700,
vol. 2. Stockholm

Toubert, P. (1973) Les structures du Eatium medieval 2 vols. (Bibliotheque des Ecoles
Frangaises d’Athenes et de Rome 221). Rome
Toubert, P. (1977) ‘La theorie du mariage chez les moralistes carolingiens’, in II
matrimonio nella societd altomedievale 11.23 3— 82
Treadgold, W (199;) Byzantium and its Army 284— 1081. Stanford
Treggiari, S. (1991) Roman Marriage. Iusti Coniuges from the Time of Cicero to the Time
of Ulpian. Oxford

Trier Kaiserresiden^ und Bischofssit Die Stadt in spdtantiker und fruhchristlicher Zeit (1984).
Mainz

Troplong, R.-Th. (1843) De 1 ’ influence du christianisme sur le droit civil des Romains. Paris
Unwin, T. (1988) ‘Towards a model of Anglo-Scandinavian rural settlement in
England’, in Hooke (1988) 77-98

Vallet, F. and Kazanski, M. (1993) L’Armee romaine etles barbares du Hie au Vile siecle
(Association frangaise d’archeologie merovingienne et Musee des antiquites
nationales). Rouen

Van Dam, R. (1992) ‘The Pirenne thesis and fifth-century Gaul’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 321-33
Van Dam, R. (1993) Saints and their Miracles in Late Antique Gaul. Princeton
Van Ossel, P. (1992) Etablissements ruraux de l 'Antiquite tardive dans le nord de la Gaule.
Paris

Van Uytfanghe, M. (1987) Stylisation et condition humaine dans I’hagiographie merovingi-
enne (600—750). Brussels

Vatin, Cl. (1970) Recherches sur le mariage et la condition de la femme mariee a I’epoque hel-
lenistique. Paris

Vera, D. (1995) ‘Dalla “Villa Perfecta” alia villa di Palladio: sulle trasformazioni del
sistema agrario in Italia fra Principato e Dominato (2a parte)’, Athenaeum 83:
3 3 1—56

Villeneuve, F. (1985) ‘L’economie rurale et la vie des campagnes dans le Hauran
antique (Ier siecle ap. J.-C.). Une approche’, in Dentzer (1985) 63-138
T Hies et peuplement dans ITllyricum protoby^antin (1984) (Collection de l’Ecole
Frangaise de Rome 77). Rome

Vita-Finzi, C. (1969) The Mediterranean Valleys: Geological Changes in Historical Times.
Cambridge

Vogel, C. (1966) ‘L’age des epoux chretiens au moment de contracter mariage,
d’apres les inscriptions paleochretiennes’, RDC 16: 35 5—66
Vogel, C. (1977) ‘Les rites de la celebration du mariage: leur signification dans la
formation du lien durant le haut Moyen Age’, in II matrimonio nella societd alto-
medievale 1.397-46;

Vogel, C. (1982) ‘Application du principe de l’“economie” en matiere de divorce
dans le droit canonique oriental’, RDC 32: 81-100
Volterra, E. (1937) Diritto romano e diritti oriental i. Bologna (reprinted Naples 1983)
Volterra, E. (1967) ‘Famiglia (diritto romano)’, in Enciclopedia de! diritto (Milan)
xvi.723— 44

III. EAST AND WEST: ECONOMY AND SOCIETY

IO45

Volterra, E. (1975) ‘Matrimonio (dititto romano)’, in Enciclopedia del diritto (Milan)
xxv.726— 807

Wallace-Hadrill, J. M. (1962) ‘The blood- feud of the Franks’, in The Long-Haired
Kings and Other Studies in Frankish History (London) 121—47
Walmsley, A. (1988) ‘Pella/Fihl after the Islamic conquest (a.d. 635— c. 900): a con-
vergence of literary and archaeological data’, Mediterranean Archaeology
1-142-59

Ward-Perkins, B., Mills, N., Gadd, D. and Delano Smith, C. (1986) ‘Luni and the
Ager Lunensis: the rise and fall of a Roman town and its territory’, PBSR 54:
81—146

Ward-Perkins, J. B. (1968) ‘The Ager Veientanus north and east of Veii’, PBSR 36:
1-218

Ward-Perkins, J. B. etal. (1986) Town houses at Ptolemais, Cyrenaica’, Libyan Studies
i7 : io9-5 3

Watson, P. (1992) ‘Change in foreign and regional economic links with Pella in the
seventh century a.d.: the ceramic evidence’, in P. Canivet and J.-P. Rey-
Coquais (eds.), La Syrie de By^ance a I’Islam (Damascus) 233-48
Weiss, E. (1908) ‘Endogamie und Exogamie im romischen KaiserreiclT, ZRGRA
29: 340—69

Wenskus, R. (1961) Stammesbildung und Verfassung: Das Werden der friihmittelalterlichen
Gentes. Cologne

Whitby, M. (1996) ‘Recruitment in the Roman armies from Justinian to Heraclius
( ca . 565—615)’, in Cameron, Averil (ed.), The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near
East, iii: States, Resources and Armies (Princeton) 61-124
White, C. (1992) Christian Friendship in the Fourth Century. Cambridge
Whittaker, C. R. (1985) Trade and the aristocracy in the Roman empire’, Opus 4:
49-75

Whittaker, C. R. (1993) ‘Landlords and warlords in the later Roman Empire’, in
Rich and Shipley (1993) 277—302

Whittaker, C. R. (1994) Frontiers of the Roman Empire: A Social and Economic Study.
Baltimore

Wickham, C. (1981) Early Medieval Italy: Central Power and Local Society 400—1000.
London

Wickham, C. (1984) ‘The other transition: from the ancient world to feudalism’,
P&P 103: 3—36

Wickham, C. (1986) ‘Land disputes and their social framework in Lombard—
Carolingian Italy, 700-900’, in Davies and Fouracre (1986) 105-24
Wickham, C. (1988) ‘L’ltalia e l’alto medioevo’, AM 1 5: 105—24
Wickham, C. (1992) ‘Problems of comparing rural societies in early medieval
western Europe’, TRI IS 6 th series, 2: 221—46
Wickham, C. (1993) ‘La chute de Rome n’aura pas lieu. A propos d’un livre recent’,
LeMoyenAge 99: 107-26
Wightman, E. (1985) Gallia Belgica. London

Wipszycka, E. (1972) Les ressources et les activites economiques des eglises en Egypte du 11 / \ e
au VUIe siecle (Papyrologica Bruxellensia 10). Brussels
Wolff, H. J. (1939) Written and Unwritten Marriages in Hellenistic and Postc/assical Roman
Law. Haverford

1046 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Wolff, H. J. (1945) ‘The background of the post-classical legislation on illegiti-
macy’, Seminar 3: 21-45

Wolff, H. J. (1950) ‘Doctrinal trends inpostclassical Roman marriage law \ZRGRA
67: 261—319

Wolfram, H. (1988) History of the Goths. Berkeley, Los Angeles and London (first
published as Geschichte der Goten, Munich 1979)

Wolfram, H. (1993) ‘L’armee romaine comme niodele pour YExercitus barbaronm / ',
in Vallet and Kazanski (1993) 1 1— 1 5

Wood, I. N. (1986) ‘Disputes in late fifth- and sixth-century Gaul: some problems’,
in Davies and Fouracre (eds.) (1986) 7-22
Wood, I. N. (1990) ‘Ethnicity and the ethnogenesis of the Burgundians’, in
Wolfram, H. and Pohl, W (eds.), Typen der Ethnogenese tenter besonderer
Beriicksichtigung der Bayern (Denkschriften der Osterreichischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften, phil.-hist. Kl. 201) (Vienna) 53—69
Wood, I. N. (1992) ‘Continuity or calamity? The constraints of literary models’, in
Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 9-1 8
Wood, I. N. (1993 a) ‘Letters and letter-collections from antiquity to the Middle
Ages: the prose works of Avitus of Vienne’, in M. A. Meyer (ed.), The Culture
of Christendom (London) 29-43

Wood,I.N. (1993b) ‘The Secret Histories of Gregory of Tours’, RBPHji: 253—70
Wood, I. N. (1994) Gregory of Tours. Bangor

Wood, I. N. (1996) ‘Sepultures ecclesiastiques et senatoriales dans le bassin du
Rhone (400-600)’, Medievales 31: 13-27
Woolf, G. (1993) ‘Roman peace’, in Rich and Shipley (1993) 171-94
Wormald, P. (1977) ‘Lex scripta and verbum regir. legislation and Germanic kingship
from Euric to Cnut’, in P. H. Sawyer and I. N. Wood (eds.), Early Medieval
Kingship (Leeds) 105-38

Wormald, P. (1995) ‘ Inter cetera bona . . . genti suae-, law-making and peace-keeping in
the earliest English kingdoms’, in Lagiustigia nell’alto medioevo (XLII Settimana
di studio del Centro Italiano di Studi sull’ Alto Medioevo) (Spoleto) 963—996
Zanker, P. (1975) ‘Grabreliefs romischer Freigelassener’, fahrbuch des deutschen
archdologischen Instituts 90: 267-3 1 5

Zayadine, F. (ed.) (1986) Jerash Archaeological Project 1981— rgSj. Amman
Zuckerman, C. (1994) ‘L’empire d’Orient et les Huns: notes sur Priscus’, T&MByt ?
12: 1 59—82

PART IV: THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

(CHS. 18-23)

CH. 18: THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

Barker, P. (ed.) (1990) From Roman Viroconium to Medieval Wroxeter. Worcester
Bassett, S. (1989) ‘In search of the origins of Anglo-Saxon kingdoms’, in S. Bassett
(ed.), The Origins of Anglo-Saxon Kingdoms (London) 3-27
Brown, P. (1996) The Rise of Western Christendom: Triumph and Diversity AD 200—1000.
Oxford

Chadwick, N. (1969) Early Brittany. Cardiff

Daly, W M. (1994) ‘Clovis: how barbaric, how pagan?’. Speculum 69: 619-64

CH. 18: THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES

IO47

Dark, K. (1994) From Civitas to Kingdom: British Political Continuity 300—800. Leicester
Drinkwater, J. (1992) ‘The bacaudae of fifth-century Gaul’, in Drinkwater and
Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 208-17

Dumville, D. N. (1995) ‘The idea of government in sub-Roman Britain’, in G.
Ausenda (ed.), After Empire: Towards an Ethnology of Europe’s Barbarians
(Woodbridge) 177—204

Elton, H. (1992) ‘Defence in fifth-century Gaul’, in Drinkwater and Elton (eds.),
Fifth-Century Gaul 167-76

Esmonde Cleary, S. (1989) The Ending of Roman Britain. London
Ewig. E. (1954) Trier im Merowingerreich: Civitas, Stadt, Bistum. Trier
Ewig, E. (1978) ‘Bemerkungen zur Vita des Bischofs Lupus von Troyes’, in K.
Hauck and H. Mordek, Geschichtsschreibung mid geistiges Leben im Mittelalter
(Cologne) 14-26

Gauthier, N. et al. (1986— ) La topographie chretienne de la Gaule. Paris
Gerberding, R. A. (1987) The Rise of the Carolingians and the Liber Historiae Francorum.
Oxford

Goffart, W (1989) ‘Old and new in Merovingian taxation’, in W Goffart, Rome’s Fall
and After (London) 213-31

Griffe, E. (1964-6) La Gaule chretienne a I’epoque romaine , 3 vols. 2nd edn. Paris
Harries, J. (1994) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rome. Oxford
Haywood, J. (1991) Dark Age Naval Power: A Reassessment of Frankish and Anglo-
Saxon Seafaring Activity. London

Heinemeyer, K. (1979) Das Erybistum Mains^in romischerund frdnkischer Zeit. Marburg
Heinzelmann, M. (1976) Bischofsherrschaft in Gallien. Munich

Heinzelmann, M. and Poulin, J.-C. (1986) Les Vies anciennes de sainte Genevieve de Paris:
Etude critique. Paris

Higham, N. (1992) Rome, Britain and the Anglo-Saxons. London
Hillgarth, J. N. (1966) ‘Coins and chronicles: propaganda in sixth-century Spain
and the Byzantine background’, Historia 1 5: 483—508
Jackson, K. H. (1953) Language and History in Early Britain. Edinburgh
James, E. (1988) The Franks. Oxford

Iverlouegan, F. (1987) Le De Excidio Britanniae de Gildas: les destinies de la culture latine
dans File de Bretagne au \Ee siecle. Paris

Liebeschuetz, W. (1963) ‘Did the Pelagian movement have social aims?’, Historia
12: 227—41

Liebeschuetz, W (1967) ‘Pelagian evidence on the last period of Roman Britain?’,
Latomus 26: 436—47

Morris, J. (1965) ‘Pelagian literature’, JThSn.s. 16: 26-60
Morris, J. (1973) The Age of Arthur. Chichester
Muhlberger, S. (1990) The Fifth-Century Chroniclers. Leeds

Myres, J. N. L. (i960) ‘Pelagius and the end of Roman rule in Britain’, JRS 50: 21—36
Paxton, F. (1993) ‘Power and the power to heal: the cult of St Sigismund of
Burgundy’, EME 2: 95—110

Scheibelreiter, G. (1983) DerBischof in merowingischer Zeit. Vienna
Schiitte, S. (1995) ‘Continuity problems and authority structures in Cologne’, in G.
Ausenda (ed.). After Empire: Towards an Ethnology of Europe’s Barbarians
(Woodbridge) 163-9

Thomas, C. (1 994) And Shall These Mute Stones Speak ? Cardiff

1048 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Thompson, E. A. (1952) ‘Peasant revolts in late Roman Gaul and Spain’, P&P 2:
1 1—23

Thompson, E. A. (1956) ‘The settlement of the barbarians in southern Gaul’, JRS
46: 65-75

Thompson, E. A. (1977) ‘Britain a.d. 406—410’, Britannia 8: 303—18

Thompson, E. A. (1982) Romans and Barbarians: The Decline of the Western Empire.
Madison

Van Dam, R. (1993) Saints and their Miracles in Tate Antique Gaul. Princeton

Wickham, C. (1984) ‘The other transition: from the ancient world to feudalism’,
P&P 103: 3—36

Wightman, E. M. (1985) Gallia Belgica. London

Wolfram, H. (1987) Die Geburt Mitteleuropas. Vienna

Wolfram, H. (1988) History of the Goths. Berkeley

Wood, I. N. (1984) ‘The end of Roman Britain: continental evidence and parallels’,
in M. Lapidge and D. N. Dumville (eds.), Gildas: New Approaches (Woodbridge)
1-25

Wood, I. N. (1986) ‘Disputes in late fifth- and sixth-century Gaul: some problems’,
in W Davies and P. Fouracre (eds.), The Settlement of Disputes in Early Medieval
Europe (Cambridge) 7-22

Wood, I. N. (1 987) ‘The fall of the western empire and the end of Roman Britain’,
Britannia 18: 251-60

Wood, I. N. (1988) ‘Forgery in Merovingian hagiography’, in MGH Schriften yy,
Falschungen im Mittelalter 5 (Hanover) 369—84

Wood, I. N. (1990) ‘The Channel from the fourth to the seventh centuries’, in
S. McGrail (ed.), Maritime Celts, Frisians and Saxons, CR4 Research Report 71:
93-7

Wood, I. N. (1992) ‘Continuity or calamity?: the constraints of literary models’, in
Drinkwater and Elton (eds.), Fifth-Century Gaul 9-1 8

Wood, I. N. (1 993) ‘Letters and letter-collections from antiquity to the early Middle
Ages: the prose works of Avitus of Vienne’, in M. A. Meyer (ed.), The Culture
of Christendom 29—43

CH. 19: ITALY, A.D. 425—605

Amory, P. (1997) People and Identity in Ostrogothic Italy, Cambridge

Arthur, P. (1989) ‘Some observations on the economy of Bruttium under the later
Roman empire ’,JRA 2: 133—42

Barker, G. (1991) ‘Two Italys, one valley: anAnnaliste perspective’, inj. Bintliff (ed.),
The Annales School and Archaeology (London) 34—56

Barker, G. et al. (1995) A Mediterranean Valley: Landscape Archaeology and Annales
History in the Biferno Valley. London and New York

Barnish, S. J. B. (1986) ‘Taxation, land and barbarian settlement in the western
empire’, PBSR 54: 170—98

Barnish, S. J. B. (1987) ‘Pigs, plebeians and potentes. Rome’s economic hinterland,
c. 350-600 a.d.’, PBSR 55:1 57-85

Barnish, S. J. B. (1988) Trans formation and survival in the western senatorial aris-
tocracy, c. a.d. 400-700’, PBSR 56: 120-5 5

CH. 19: ITALY, A.D. 425—605

IO49

Barnwell, P. S. (1992) Emperor, Prefects and Kings: The Roman West, 394—464. London
Battisti, C. (1956) ‘L’elemento gotico nella toponomastica e nel lessico italiano’,
Sett. 3: 621—49

Bierbrauer, V. (1975) Die ostgotischen Grab- und Schatgfunde in Italien. Spoleto
Blake, H. McK., Potter, T. W and Whitehouse, D. B. (eds.) (1978) Papers in Italian
Archaeology 1 . Oxford

Brown, T. S. (1978) ‘Settlement and military policy in Byzantine Italy’, in Blake,
Potter and Whitehouse (1978) 323—38

Brown, T. S. (1995) ‘Byzantine Italy, c. 680 —c. 876’, The New Cambridge Medieval
History 11 (Cambridge): 320—48

Caillet, J. P. (1 993) L’evergetisme monumental chretien en Italie et a ses marges. Rome
Chastagnol, A. (1966)/^? senat romain sous le regne d’Odoacre. Recherches sur 1 ’epigraphie
du Colisee auVe siecle. Bonn

Christie, N. (1990) ‘Byzantine Liguria: an imperial province against the
Longobards, a.d. 568—643’, PBSR 58: 229—71
Christie, N. (1991) ‘The Alps as a frontier, ad 168-774’, JRA 4: 410-30
Christie, N. (1995) The Lombards. Oxford

Christie, N. (1996) ‘Barren fields? Landscapes and settlements in late Roman and
post-Roman Italy’, in G. Shipley and J. Salmon (eds.), Human Landscapes in
Classical Antiquity: Environment and Culture (London) 254-83
Christie, N. and Rushworth, A. (1988) ‘Urban fortification and defensive strategy
in fifth and sixth century Italy: the case of Terracina’,/AT 1: 73-88
Clover, F. M. (1978) ‘The family and early career of Anicius Olybrius’, Hist. 27:
169—96

Davis, R. (1992) The Lives of the Eighth-Century Popes. Liverpool
Deichman, F. W (1969) Ravenna. Haupstadt des spdtantiken Abend/andes 1. Geschichte
und Monumente. Wiesbaden
Devoto, G. (1978) The Languages of Italy. Chicago

Diehl, C. (1888) Etudes sur l’ administration bygantine dans I’exarchat de Ravenne (468—741).
Paris

Dolger, F. (1924) Regesten der Kaiserurkunden des ostromischen Reiches 1. Berlin
Dvornik, F. (1958) The Idea of Apostolicity in Byzantium and the Legend of the Apostle
Andrew. Washington, DC

Dvornik, F. (1966) Byzantium and the Roman Primacy. New York

Dyson, S. L. (1990) Community and Society in Roman Italy. Baltimore

Gabba, E. (1985) ‘La transumanza nell’Italia romana. Evidenze e problemi.

Qualche prospettiva per l’eta altomedievale’, Sett. 31: 373-89
Gasparri, S. (1978) I ditchi longobardi. Rome

Harries, J. D. (1994) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rome. Oxford
Harrison, D. (1993) The Early State and the Towns: Forms of Integration in Lombard Italy
AD 468—774. Lund

Heather, P. (1995) ‘Theoderic, king of Goths’, EME 4: 145-73
Heather, P. (1996) The Goths. Oxford

Hodges, R. and Whitehouse, D. (1983) Mohammed, Charlemagne and the Origins of
Europe. London

Jaggi, C. (1990) ‘Aspekte der stadtebaulichen Entwicklung Aquileias in
fruhchristlicher Zeit \JbAC 33:15 8—96

1050 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Jahn, W. (1989) ‘Felidtas est secuta Italiam. Bemerkungen zur Lage der romischen
Bevolkerung im 6. Jahrhundert in Italien’, Klio 71: 410— 13
Johnson, M. J. (1988) ‘Toward a history of Theoderic’s building program’, DOP
42: 73-96

King, A. and Potter, T. (1992) ‘Mola di Monte Gelato in the early Middle Ages: an
interim report on the excavations 1986—9’, E. Herring, R. Whitehouse and
J. Wilkins (eds.), Papers of the Fourth Conference of Italian Archaeology. 4. New
Developments in Italian Archaeology, Part 2 (London) 165—76
Kreutz, B. M. (1991) Before the Normans: Southern Italy in the Ninth and Tenth Centuries.
Philadelphia

Leciejewicz, L., Tabaczynska, E. and Tabaczynski, S. (1977) Torcello. Scavi 1962—63.
Rome

Lizzi, R. (1989) Vescovi e strutture ecclesiastiche nella citta tardoantica. Como
Malone, C., Stoddart, S. etal. (1994) Territory, Time and State. The Archaeological Devel-
opment of the G/tbbio Basin. Cambridge
Markus, R. A. (1981) ‘Ravenna and Rome, 5 54-600’, By%. 51:5 56—78
Martin, J.-M. (1 993) La Pouille du \ le au Xlle siecle. Rome

Matthews, J. F. (1967) ‘Continuity in a Roman family: the Rufii Festi of Volsinii’,
Hist. 16: 484—509

Mazzoleni, D. (1976) ‘Nomi di barbari nelle iscrizioni paleocristiane della l ' enetia et
Histria ’, Romanobarbarica 1:15 9-80

Meneghini, R. and Santangeli Valenzani, R. (1993) ‘Sepolture intramuranee e pae-
saggio urbano a Roma tra V e VII secolo’, in L. Paroli and P. Delogu (eds.),
La Storia economica di Roma neU’alto Medioevo alia luce del recenti scavi archeologici
(Florence) 89—111

Moorhead, J. (1992) Theoderic in Italy. Oxford
Moorhead, J. (1994) fustinian. London

Moreland, J. (1993) ‘Wilderness, wasteland, depopulation and the end of the
Roman empire?’, Accordia Research Papers 4: 89—1 10
O’Flynn, J. M. (1983) Generalissimos of the Western Roman Empire. Edmonton
Otranto, G. (1983) ‘II Liber de apparitione, il santuario di S. Michele sul Gargano e i
Longobardi del Ducato di Benevento’, in M. Sordi (ed.), Santuari e politico nel
mondo antico (Milan) 210-45

Otranto, G. (1990) Italia meridionale e Puglia paleocristiane. Bari
Petersen, J. M. (1984) The Dialogues of Gregory the Great in their Late Antique Cultural
Background. Toronto

Picard, J. C. (1 9 8 8) Le souvenir des eveques: sepultures, listes episcopates et cultes des eveques
en Italie dn Nord des I’origine auxXe siecle. Rome
Pietri, C. (1982) ‘Une aristocratie provinciale et la mission chretienne: l’exemple de
la Venetia\AntichitdAltoadriatiche22\ 89-137
Rando, D. (1994) Una chiesa di frontiera. Le istituyioni ecclesiastiche venegiane nei secoli
1 7 — XII. Bologna

Richards, J. (1979) The Popes and the Papacy in the Early Middle Ages 476-792. London
Richards, J. (1980) Consul of God: The Life and Times of Gregory the Great. London
Rouche, M. (1986) ‘Gregoire le Grand face a la situation economique de son
temps’, in J. Fontaine, R. Gillet and S. Pellistrandi (eds.), Gregoire le Grand
(Paris) 41-57

CH. 20: VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

105 I

Ruggini, L. (1 96 1) Economia e societa nell' Italia Annonaria. Rapportifra agricoltura e com-
mercio dal IV a! VI secolo d. C. Milan

Schafer, C. (1991) Der mstromische Senat als Trdger antiker Kontinuitdt miter den
Ostgotenkdnigen. St Katharinen

Schiaparelli, L. (ed.) (1929-3 3) Codice diplomatico Longobardo. 2 vols. Rome
Schmiedt, G. (1974) ‘Citta scomparse e citta di nuova formazione in Italia in relaz-
ione al sistema di comunicazione’, Sett. 21: 503—607
Schmiedt, G. (1978) ‘I porti italiani nell’alto medioevo’. Sett. 25: 129-254
Sirago, V. A. (1987) ‘Italia e Italianita nelle Variae di Cassiodoro’, Studi Tardoantichi
4 (= Hestiasis. Studi di tarda antichi ta ojferti a Salvatore Calderone 4) 1 29-62
Small, A. M. and Buck, R. J. (1993) The Excavation of San Giovanni di Ruoti. 1. The
l illas and their Environment. Toronto

Staffa, A. R. (1995) ‘L’Abruzzo tardoantico ed altomedievale nelle fonti archeolo-
giche: urbanesimo, popolamento rurale, economia e cultura materiale’, in N.
Christie (ed.). Settlement and Economy in Italy 1500 BC-AD lyoo. Papers of the Fifth
Conference of Italian Archaeology (Oxford) 317—30
Stein, E. (1939) ‘La disparition du senat de Rome a la fin du Vie siecle’, Academie
royale de la Belgique. Bulletin de la Classe des Lettref 25 : 308-22
Tabacco, G. (1989) The Struggle for Power in Medieval Italy: Structures of Political Rule.
Cambridge

Tjader, J.-O. (1954-82) Die nichtliterarischen lateinischen Papyri Italiens aus der Zeit
qyj—yoo. Lund and Stockholm

Ward-Perkins, B. (1988) ‘The towns of northern Italy: rebirth or renewal?’, in R.
Hodges and B. Hobley (eds.). The Rebirth of Towns in the West AD yoo—iojo
(London) 16—27

Ward-Perkins, B. et al. (1986) ‘Luni and the Ager Lunensis. The rise and fall of a
Roman town and its territory’, PBSR 54: 81-146
Wharton, A. J. (1995) Refiguring the Post Classical City: Dura Europus, Jerash, Jerusalem
and Ravenna. Cambridge

Wickham, C. (1981) Early Medieval Italy . London

Wickham, C. (1988) ‘Marx, Sherlock Holmes, and late Roman commerce’,/AJ’ 78:
183-93

Wilson, R.J. A. (1990) Sicily under the Roman Empire. Warminster
Wolfram, H. (1988) History of the Goths. Berkeley and Los Angeles
Zovatto, P. L. (1966) ‘II defensor ecclesiae e le iscrizioni musive di Trieste’, RSCI 20:
1-8

CH. 20: VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

Abadie-Reynal, C. (1989) ‘Ceramique et commerce dans le bassin egeen du IVe au
Vie siecle’, in Hommes et richesses 1. 143-59

Anselmino, L., Panella, C., Valenzani, R. S., Tortorella, S. (1986) ‘Cartagine’, in
Giardina, Societa romana 111.163—95

Bonnal, J.-P. and Fevrier, P.-A. (1966-7) ‘Ostraka de la region de Bir Trouch’, Bull,
d’archeol. algerienne 2: 239-49

Brett, M. (1 978) ‘The Arab conquest and the rise of Islam in North Africa’, in Fage
(ed.) (1978) 490—5 5 5, at 505—13 (‘The advance into the Maghrib’)

1052 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Brett, M. and Fentress, E. (1996) The Berbers. Oxford

Cameron, Averil (1982) ‘Byzantine Africa — the literary evidence’, in Humphrey
(ed.) (1982) 29—62 (= Cameron, Changing Cultures vii)

Cameron, Averil (1989) ‘Gelimer’s laughter: the case of Byzantine Africa’, in
Clover and Humphreys (eds.) (1989) 171-90 (= Cameron, Changing Cultures
viii)

Cameron, Averil (1993) ‘The Byzantine reconquest of Africa and the impact of
Greek culture’, Graeco-Arabica v: 1 5 3-6; (= Cameron, Changing Cultures x)
Camps, G. (1984) ‘Rex gentium et Maurorum et Romanorum. Recherches sur les
royaumes de Mauretanie aux Vie et Vile siecles’, Ant. Afr. 20: 1 83-218
Chadwick, H. (1974) ‘John Moschus and his friend Sophronius the sophist’, JThS
n.s. 25: 41-74

Chastagnol, A. and Duval, N. (1974) ‘Les survivances du culte imperial dans
l’Afrique du Nord a l’epoque vandale’, in Melanges d’histoire ancienne offerts a
William Seston (Paris) 87—1 1 8

Christie, N. and Loseby, S. T. (eds.) (1996) Towns in Transition: Urban Evolution in Tate
Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages. Aldershot
Chrysos, E. and Schwartz, A. (eds.) (1989) Das Reich mid die Barbaren. Vienna
Cintas, J. and Duval, N. (1958) ‘L’eglise du pretre Felix (region de Kelibia)’, Karthago
9 : 1 5 5-265

Clover, F. M. (1982a) ‘Emperor worship in Vandal Africa’, in Wirth (ed.) (1982)
661-74

Clover, F. M. (1982b) ‘Carthage and the Vandals’, in Humphrey (ed.) (1982) 1-22
Clover, F. M. (1986) ‘Felix Karthago’, DOP 40: 1— 16

Clover, F. M. (1989) ‘The symbiosis of Romans and Vandals in Africa’, in Chrysos
and Schwartz (eds.) (1989) 57-73

Clover, F. M. and Humphreys, R. S. (eds.) (1989) Tradition and Innovation in Tate
Antiquity. Madison

Courtois, C. (1954) Victor de Vita et son oeuvre. Algiers
Courtois, C. (195 5) Les Vandales et lAfrique. Paris

Courtois, C. et al. (1952) Tablettes Albertini: Actes prives de I’epoque vandale (fin du V
siecle). Paris

Cuoq, J. (1984) L’Eglise d’Afrique du Nord du lie du Xlle siecle. Paris
Dagron, G. and Deroche, V. (eds.) (1991) ‘Juifs et chretiens dans l’Orient au Vile
siecle’, T<&MBy% 11: 17-273 (Dagron, 17—46, ‘Introduction historique’;
Deroche, 47—229, ed. and trans., Doctrina Jacobi nuper bapti^ati)

Diehl, C. (1896) LAfrique lygantine 1-11. Paris
Diesner,J. (1966) Das Vandalenreich. Stuttgart

Durliat, J. (1979) ‘Magister militum-stratelates dans l’empire byzantin (Vie- Vile
siecles)’, BZ~jz\ 306—320

Durliat, J. (1981) Les dedicaces d’ouvrages de defense dans lAfrique bygantine (Coll, de
l’Ecole Frangaise de Rome 49). Rome

Duval, N. (1964) ‘Observations sur l’urbanisme tardif de Sufetula (Tunisie)’,
Cahiers de Tunisie 45—6: 88—103

Duval, N. (1990) ‘Quinze ans de recherches archeologiques sur 1 ’antiquite tardive
en Afrique du nord 1975—1990. 1, generalites et Tunisie (Carthage)’, REA 92:
349-87

CH. 20: VANDAL AND BYZANTINE AFRICA

IO53

Duval, N. (1993) ‘Deuxieme chronique et supplements a generalites et Carthage’,
REA 9 5: 583—640

Duval, N. and Prevot, F. (1 975) Recherches archeologiques a Haidra I. Les inscriptions chre-
tiennes. Rome

Duval, Y. (1982) Loca Sanctorum Africae, 2 vols. Paris

Ennabli, L. (1975) Les inscriptions funeraires chretiennes de la basilique dite de Sainte-
Monique a Carthage. Rome

Ennabli, L. (1982) Les inscriptions funeraires chretiennes de Carthage II. La basilique de
Mcidfa. Rome

Ennabli, L. (1992). Inscriptions funeraires chretiennes a Carthage III: Carthage intra mums
et extra muros. Paris and Rome

Fage,J. D. (ed.) (1978) The Cambridge History of Africa n. Cambridge

Fevrier, P. A. (1989) Approches du Maghreb romain, 2 vols. Aix-en-Provence

Frend, W H. C. (1952) The Donatist Church (2nd edn 1971). Oxford

Frend, W. H. C. (1978) ‘The Christian period in Mediterranean Africa, c. 200 to
700’, in Fage (ed.) (1978) 410—89

Fulford, M. G. (1984) ‘The long-distance trade and communications of Carthage,
c. a.d. 400 to c. a.d. 650’, in Fulford and Peacock (eds.) (1984) 25 5—62

Fulford, M. G. and Peacock, D. P. S. (eds.) (1984) Excavations at Carthage 1 . 2 . The
Avenue du President Habib Bourguiba, Salammbo. The Pottery and Other Ceramic
Objects from the Site. Sheffield

Gros, P. (ed.) (1985) Mission archeologique franfaise a Carthage. Byrsa III Rapport sur les
canpagnes de fouilles de 1977 a 1980: la basilique orientale etses abords (Coll, de l’Ecole
Fran^aise de Rome 41). Rome

Guery, R., Morrisson, C., Slim, H. (1982) Recherches archeologiques franco-tunisiennes a
Rougga III. Le tresor de monnaies d'or by^antines. Rome

Humphrey, J. H. (1980) ‘Vandal and Byzantine Carthage: some new archaeological
evidence’, in Pedley (ed.) (1980) 85—120

Humphrey, J. H. (ed.) (1 982) Excavations at Carthage 1978 conducted by the University of
Michigan vn. Michigan

Humphrey, J. H. (ed.) (1988) The Circus and a Byzantine Cemetery at Carthage 1. Ann
Arbor

Hurst, H. (1995) Excavations at Carthage: 11.1. The Circular Harbour, North Side.
Oxford

Hurst, H. R. and Roskams, S. P. (eds.) (1 984) Excavations at Carthage 1.1. TheAvenue
du President Habib Bourguiba, Salammbo I, The Site and Finds other than Pottery.
Sheffield

Kaegi, Jr, W E. (1965) ‘Arianism and the Byzantine army in Africa, 533-546’,
Traditio 21: 23—53

Lepelley, C. (1989) ‘Peuplement et richesses de l’Afrique romaine tardive’, in
Hommes et richesses 1.17— 30

Lepelley, C. (1992) ‘The survival and fall of the classical city in late Roman Africa’,
in Rich (ed.) (1992) 50—76

Mahjoubi, A. (1978) Recherches d’histoire et d’ archeologie a Henchir al-Faouar (Tunisie). La
cite de Belalitani Maiores.

Maier,J. (1973) L’Episcopat de lAfrique romaine, vandale et byyantine. Rome

Markus, R. A. (1964) ‘Donatism — the last phase’, SCH 1: 1 1 8—26

1054 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Markus, R. A. (1967) ‘The imperial administration and the church in Byzantine
Africa’, ChHist 36: 18—23

Markus, R. A. (1979) ‘Country bishops in Byzantine Africa’, ChHist 16: 1— 1 5
Mattingly, D. (1988) ‘Oil for export? A comparison of Libyan, Spanish and
Tunisian oil production in the Roman Empire’, JRA 1: 33—56
Mattingly, D. J. (1995) Tripotitania. London

Mattingly, D. and Hitchner, R. B. (1995) ‘Roman Africa: an archaeological review’,
JRS 85: 165—213

Moderan, Y. (1986) ‘Corippe et l’occupation byzantine de l’Afrique: pour une nou-
velle lecture de lajohannid €,Ant.Afr. 22: 19 5-21 2
Moderan, Y (1991) ‘Le decouverte des Maures. Reflexions sur la reconquete byz-
antine de l’Afrique en 533’, ACHCM 5:21 1—3 3
Moorhead, J. (1992) Victor of I ita: Histo ry of the Vandal Persecution (Translated Texts
for Historians 10). Liverpool

Morrisson, C. and Seibt, W (1982) ‘Sceaux de commerciaires byzantins du Vile
siecle trouves a Carthage’, Revue numismatique 24: 222-41
Panella, C. (1986) ‘Le merci: produzioni, itinerari e destini’, in Giardina (ed.), Societd
romana 111.431— 59

Panella, C. (1989) ‘Gli scambi nel mediterraneo occidentale dal IV al VII secolo’,
in Hommes et rich esses 1. 1 29-41

Panella, C. (1993) ‘Merci e scambi nel mediterraneo tardoantico’, in Carandini et al.
(eds.) (1993) 613-97

Parsons, J. (1994) ‘The African Catholic Church under the Vandals 429—533’.

Unpublished Ph.D. thesis. London
Pedley,J. G. (ed.) (1980) New Light on Ancient Carthage. Ann Arbor
Prevot, F. (1984) Recherches archeologiques franco-tunisiennes a Maktar I ? Les inscriptions
chretiennes. Rome

Pringle, D. (1981) The Defence of Byzantine Africa from Justinian to the Arab Conquest , 2
vols. (BAR International Series 99(1)). Oxford
Piilhorn, W (1977): see Veh (1977)

Rich,J. (ed.) (1992) The City in Late Antiquity. London
Rosenblum, M. (1 962) Luxorius: A Latin Poet among the Vandals. New York
Roskams, S. (1996) ‘Urban transition in North Africa: Roman and medieval towns
of the Maghreb’, in Christie and Loseby (eds.) (1996) 159-83
Rubin, B. (1954) Prokopios von Kaisareia. RE 23.1.273—599

Sjorstrom, I. (1993) Tripotitania in Transition: Late Roman to Early Islamic Settlement.
Aldershot

Stevens, S. T. et al. (1993) Bir el Knissia at Carthage: A Rediscovered Cemetery Church,
Report no. i,JRA Supp. Ser. 7. Ann Arbor
Trousset, P. (1985) ‘Les “fines antiquae” et la reconquete byzantine en Afrique’,
CHAAN 2: 361-76

Trousset, P. (1991) ‘Les defenses coheres byzantines de Byzacene’, Limes 15:
347-53

Veh, O. (ed.) (1977) Procopii Opera. De Aedificiis, with commentary by W. Piilhorn
Wickham, C. (1988) ‘Marx, Sherlock Holmes and late Roman commerce’, JRS 78:
183-93

CH. 21 a: ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

IO55

Wirth, G. (ed.) (1982) Romanitas-Christianitas: Untersnchungen %ur Geschichte und
Literatur der romischen Kaiseryeit. Berlin

CH. 2\a\ ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

Argoud, G. et al. (1980) Salamine de Chypre XI, Une residence byvyantine, ‘I’huilerie’. Paris
Belke, K. (1984) Galatien und Lykaonien. Tabula Imperii By^antini 4. Vienna
Belke, K. (1994) ‘Galatien in der Spatantike’, in Schwertheim (ed.) (1994) 171-88
Boyd, S. and Mango, M. Mundell (eds.) (1992) Ecclesiastical Silver Plate in Sixth-
Century Byzantium. Washington, DC
Brandes, W. (1988) Die Stadte Kleinasiens in 7 und 8 Jahrhundert. Berlin
Brandt, H. (1992) Gesellschaft und Wirtschajt Panphyliens und Pisidiens im Altertum.
Bonn

Bryer. A. A. M. and Georghallides, G. S. (eds.) (1 993) The Sweet Land of Cyprus: Papers
given at the 2yth Jubilee Symposium of Byzantine Studies, Birmingham 1991. Nicosia
Cameron, Averil (1 992) ‘Cyprus at the time of the Arab Conquests’, ErreTepls t rjs
KvirpiaKr/s Eraipeias IoTOpiKibv Ztt ovScuv i : 27—50 (= Cameron,
Changing Cultures vi)

Chrysos, E. (1993) ‘Cyprus in Early Byzantine times’, in Bryer and Georghallides
(eds.) (1993) 3-14

Cook,J. M. (1973) The Troad. Oxford

Cook, J. M. and Blackman, D. }. (1971) ‘Archaeology in western Asia Minor,
1 965 — 7 o’, Mi? 17: 33—62

Cormack, R. (1981) ‘The classical tradition in the Byzantine provincial city: the evi-
dence of Thessalonike and Aphrodisias’, in Mullett and Scott (eds.) (1981)
103— 1 8

Cormack, R. (1990a) ‘Byzantine Aphrodisias: changing the symbolic map of a city’,
PCPS11G: 26—41

Cormack, R. (1990b) ‘The temple as the cathedral’, in Roueche and Erim (eds.)
( J 99°) 75-88

Cormack, R. (1991) ‘The wall-painting of St Michael in the Theatre’, in Smith and
Erim (eds.) (1991) 109—22

Coulton, J. (1983) ‘The buildings of Oenoanda’, PCPS 209: 1-20
Crawford, J. Stephens (1990) The Byzantine Shops at Sardis. Cambridge, MA
Dagron, G. and Feissel, D. (1987) Inscriptions de Glide. Paris
Daszewski, W A. (1977) Nea Paphos II, La mosatque de Thesee. Warsaw
Daszewski, W A. (1985) ‘Researches at New Paphos 1965—1984’, in Karageorghis
(ed.) (1985) 277-91

Dawes, E. and Baynes, N. H. (trans.) (1948) Three Byzantine Saints. London and
Oxford (reissued 1977)

Feissel, D. (1985) ‘Un mandement imperial du Vie siecle dans une inscription
d’Adrianoupolis d’Honoriade’, T&MBy^<y. 397—419
Fejfer, J. and Mathiesen, FI. E. (1991) ‘The Danish Akamas project’, in Report of the
Department of Antiquities of Cyprus 21 1—23
Foss, C. (1975) ‘The Persians in Asia Minor and the end of antiquity’, EHR 90:
721-47 (=Foss (1990) 1)

1056 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Foss, C. (1976) Byzantine and Turkish Sardis. Cambridge, MA
Foss, C. (1977a) ‘Archaeology and the “Twenty Cities” of Byzantine Asia’, AJA 81:
469-86 (=Foss (1990) 11)

Foss, C. (1977b) ‘Late antique and Byzantine Ankara’, DOP 31: 29-87 (=Foss
(199°) vi)

Foss, C. (1977c) ‘Attius Philippus and the walls of Side’, ZPE 26: 172—80 (= Foss
(1990) viii)

Foss, C. (1979) Ephesus after Antiquity: A Late Antique, Byzantine and Turkish City.
Cambridge

Foss, C. (1990) History and Archaeology of Byzantine Asia Minor. Aldershot
Foss, C. (1991) ‘Cities and villages of Lycia in the Life of St Nicholas of Floly
Zion’, Greek Orthodox Theological Review 36: 303-39
Foss, C. (1993) ‘Lycia in history’, in J. Morganstern (ed.), The Fort at Dereaggi
(Tubingen) 16—20

Foss, C. (1994) ‘The Lycian coast in the Byzantine age’, DOP 48: 1—52
Fowden, G. (1990) ‘Religious developments in late Roman Lycia: topographical
preliminaries’, MeXeTrjpeaTa, Kevrpo EXXrjviKr/s kcli Pcop.aLKr/s
ApycuoTrjTOS , Edvirco ISpvpea Epevvcov 10:343-72
des Gagniers, J. and Tran Tam Tinh (1985) So/oi: Dix campagnes de fouilles 1964—1974.
Sainte-Foy

Gough, M. (1985) Alahan, an Early Christian Monastery in Southern Turkey. Toronto
Gregoire, H. (1922) Recueil des inscriptions grecques-chretiennes d’Asie Mineure 1. Paris
Harrison, R. M. (1963) ‘Churches and chapels in central Lycia’, AS 13: 117— 51
Harrison, R. M. (1981) ‘Town and country in late Roman Lycia’, IX Turk Tarih
Kongresiv. 383— 7. Ankara

Harrison, R. M. (1990) ‘Amorium 1989’, MT 40: 205—18
Harrison, R. M. (1991) ‘Amorium excavations i99o’,AL5’4i: 21 5—29
Harrison, R. M. (1992) ‘Amorium excavations 1991’, AH 42: 207—22
Harrison, R. M., Christie, N. et al. (1993) ‘Excavations at Amorium: 1992 Interim
Report’, Aid' 43: 147—62

Harrison, R. M. and Lawson, G. R. J. (1979) ‘An early Byzantine town at Arif in
Lycia’, Yayla 2: 13—17

Haspels, C. H. (1971) The Highlands of Phrygia. Princeton

Heather, P. (1994) ‘New men for New Constantines? Creating an imperial elite in
the eastern Mediterranean’, in Magdalino (ed.), New Constantines 1 1-33
Hild, F. and Hellenkemper, H. (1990) Kilikien undlsaurien. Tabula Imperii Bygantini 5.
Vienna

Hild, F. and Restle, M. (1981) Kappadokien. Tabula Imperii By^antini 2. Vienna
Hill, G. (1949) History of Cyprus 1. Cambridge

Hopwood, K. (1983) ‘Policing the hinterland: Rough Cilicia and Isauria’, in
Mitchell (ed.) (1983) 173-87

Hopwood, K. (1989) ‘Bandits, elites and rural order’, in Wallace-Hadrill (ed.) (1989)
173—87

Karageorghis, V. (1969) Salamis in Cyprus. London

Karageorghis, V. (ed.) (1985) Archaeology in Cyprus 1960-1984. Nicosia (includes an
extensive bibliography)

Mackenzie, M. M. and Roueche, C. (eds.) (1989) Images of Authority: Papers presented
to foyce Reynolds. Cambridge

CH. 21 a: ASIA MINOR AND CYPRUS

IO57

Mango, C. (1986) ‘The pilgrimage centre of St Michael at Germia \JOB 36: 117—32
Mango, C. (1991) ‘Germia: a postscript’, JOB 41: 297—306

Megaw, A. H. S. (1974) ‘Byzantine architecture and decoration in Cyprus’, DOP 28:
59-88

Megaw, A. H. S. (1985) ‘Progress in early Christian and medieval archeology’, in
Karageorghis (ed.) (1985) 292-8

Mitchell, S. (ed.) (1983) Armies and Frontiers in Roman and Byzantine Anatolia (BAR
International Series 156). Oxford

Mitchell, S. (1985) ‘Archaeology in Asia Minor, 1979— 84’,MA 31: 70—105
Mitchell, S. (1990) ‘Archaeology in Asia Minor, 1985— 89’, Mi? 36: 83—131
Mitchell, S. and McNicoll, A. W. (1979) ‘Archaeology in western and southern Asia
Minor, 1971— 78’, Mi? 25: 59—90

Mitchell, S., Owens, E. and Waelkens, M. (1989) ‘Ariassos and Sagalassos 1988’, AS
39: 61-77

Mitford, T. B. (1971) The Inscriptions of Kourion. Philadelphia

Miiller-Wiener, W. (1989) ‘Bischofsresidenzen im ostlichen Mittelmeer-raum 3.

Kleinasien und Armenien’, Actes AT Cong. Int. d’Arch. Chret. 1 (Rome) 670-86
Mullett, M. and Scott, R. (eds.) (1981) Byzantium and the Classical Tradition.
Birmingham

Nikolaou, K. (1966) ‘Archaeology in Cyprus, 1961— 66’, Mi? 12: 27-43
Nikolaou, K. (1969) ‘Archaeology in Cyprus, 1966-69^47? 15: 40—54
Nikolaou, K. (1976) ‘Archaeology in Cyprus, 1969-76’^-/? 22: 34—66
Nikolaou, K. (1981) ‘Archaeology in Cyprus, 1976— 80’, Mi? 27: 49-72
Nolle, J. (1993) Side im Altertum 1. Cologne

Papageorghiou, A. (1993) ‘Cities and countryside at the end of antiquity and the
beginning of the Middle Ages in Cyprus’, in Bryer and Georghallides (eds.)
(1993) 27-51

Radt, W. (1988) Pergamon. Geschichte und Banten, Funde und Erforschung einer antiken
Metropole. Cologne

Rautman, M. L. (1995) ‘A late Roman townhouse at Sardis’, in Schwertheim (ed.)
(1995) 49-66

Roueche, C. (1989) ‘Floreat Perge’, in Mackenzie and Roueche (eds.) (1989) 206-28
Roueche, C. and Erim, K. T. (eds.) (1990) Aphrodisias Papers. Ann Arbor
Roueche, C. and Smith, R. R. R. (eds.) (1996) Aphrodisias Papers 3. Ann Arbor
Rouge, J. (1966) ‘L’Histoire Auguste et l’Isaurie au I’Ve siecle’, REA 68: 28—3 1 5
Russell, J. (1986) ‘Transformation in early Byzantine life: the contributions and lim-
itations of archaeological evidence’, iyth International Byzantine Congress, Major
Papers (New York) 137-54

Russell, J. (1987) The Mosaic Inscriptions of Anemnrinm.Wtsma
Schafer, J. (1981) Phaselis. Tubingen

Schwertheim, E. (ed.) (1992) Forschungen in Pisidien (Asia-Minor Studien 8). Bonn
Schwertheim, E. (ed.) (1994) Forschungen in Galatien (Asia-Minor Studien 12). Bonn
Schwertheim, E. (ed.) (1995) Forschungen in Lydien (Asia Minor Studien 17). Bonn
Sevcenko, I. and Sevcenko, N. P. (trans.) (1984) The Fife of St Nicholas of Sion.
Brookline

Smith, R. R. R. (1990) ‘Late Roman philosopher portraits from Aphrodisias’,/i?,f
80: 127-55

Smith, R. R. R. and Erim, K. T. (eds.) (1991) Aphrodisias Papers 2. Ann Arbor

1058 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Sodini, J.-P. (1989) ‘Les groupes episcopaux de Turquie’, Actes X Cong. Int d ’Arch.
Chret. 1 (Rome) 406-26

Symons, D. J. (1987) ‘Archaeology in Cyprus, 1981-85’, AR 33: 62-77
Waelkens, M. (1991) ‘The excavations at Sagalassos 1990’, AS 41: 197— 213
Waelkens, M. (1992a) ‘The excavations at Sagalassos 1991’, ^^42: 79-98
Waelkens, M. (1992b) ‘Die neuen Forschungen (1985-1989) und die belgischen
Ausgrabungen (1990— 1991) in Sagalassos’, in Schwertheim (ed.) (1992) 43-60
Waelkens, M. (ed.) (1993) Sagalassos I. Leuven
Waelkens, M. and Poblome,J. (1993) Sagalassos II. Leuven
Wallace-Hadrill, A. (ed.) (1989) Patronage in Ancient Society. London
Whittow, M. (1990) ‘Ruling the late Roman and early Byzantine city: a continuous
history’, P&P 129: 3—29

Winfield, D. and Foss, C. (1987) Byzantine Fortifications. Pretoria
Yegiil, F. K. (1986) The Bath-Gymnasium Complex at Sardis. Flarvard

CH. 21 h: SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA

Alon, G. (1980) The Jem in their Land in the Talmudic Age (70-640 C.E.). 2 vols.
Jerusalem

Avi-Yonah, M. (1976) The Jem of Palestine: A Political History from the Bar Kokhha War
to the Arab Conquest. Oxford
Avigad, N. (1984) Discoveringjerusalem. Oxford
Baity, J. C. (1981) Guide dApamee. Brussels

Binns,J. (199 4) Ascetics and Ambassadors of Christ: The Monasteries of Palestine 714— 671.
Oxford

Bowersock, G. W (1982) Roman Arabia. Cambridge, MA
Burns, R. (1992) Monuments of Syria: An Historical Guide. London
Butler, H. C. (1907— 20) Publications of the Princeton University Archaeological Expedition
to Syria 1904—4, 1909. Leiden

Cameron, Averil (1994) ‘The Jews in seventh-century Palestine’, SCI 13: 75—93
Cameron, Averil (1996) ‘Byzantines and Jews: some recent work on early
Byzantium’, BMGS 20: 249—74

Cameron, Averil, and King, G. R. D. (1994) The Byzantine and Islamic Near East II
Land Use and Settlement Patterns (Studies in Late Antiquity and Islam 1).
Princeton

Canivet, P. and Rey-Coquais, J.-P. (eds.) (1992) La Syrie de Byyance a I’lslam.
Damascus

Conrad, L. I. (1981) ‘The Plague in the Early Medieval Near East’. Unpublished
PhD thesis. Princeton

Conrad, L. I. (1986) ‘The plague in Bilad al-Sham in pre-Islamic times’, in M. A. al-
Bakhit, and A. Asfur (eds.), Proceedings of the Symposium on Bilad al-Sham during
the By yantine Period 11 (Amman) 143-63

Conrad, L. I. (1994) ‘Epidemic disease in central Syria in the late sixth century:
some new insights from the verse of Hassan b. Thabit’, BMGS 18: 12-58
Crone, P. (1987) Meccan Trade and the Rise of Islam. Princeton
Crowfoot, J. W (1941) Early Churches in Palestine. The Schweich Lectures in Biblical
Archaeology, 1937. London

CH. 21 b\ SYRIA, PALESTINE AND MESOPOTAMIA IO59

Crown, A. D., Pummer, R. and Tal, A. (eds.) (1 993) A Companion to Samaritan Studies.
Tubingen

Dentzer,J.-M. (ed.) (1985) Hauranv. Recherches archeologiques sur laSyrie dit sud a I’epoque
hellenistique et romaine. Paris

Devreesse, R. (1945) Le patriarcat d’Antioche depuis la paix de I’eglise jusqu’a la conquete
Arabe. Paris

Di Segni, L. (1995) ‘The involvement of local, municipal and provincial authorities
in urban building in late antique Palestine and Arabia’, in JRA Supplement 14:
312—32

Donner, F. M. (1981) The Early Islamic Conquests. Princeton
Donner, H. (1992) The Mosaic Map of Madaba. Kampen

Drijvers, H. J. W. (1982) ‘The persistence of pagan cults and practices in Christian
Syria’, in N. Garsoian (ed.), East of Byzantium: Syria and Armenia in the Formative
Period (Washington, DC) 35—45

Durliat, J. (1989) ‘La peste du VI e siecle: pour un nouvel examen des sources byzan-
tines’, in Hommes et Richesses 1. 107-19
Fiema, Z. T. (1 993) ‘The Petra project’, ACOR Newsletter 5.1: 1-3
Foss, C. (1995) ‘The near eastern countryside in late antiquity: a review article’ in
fRA, supplementary series 14: 213—34

Freeman, P. and Kennedy, D. (1986) The Defence of the Roman and Byzantine East
(BAR International Series 297). Oxford
Gil, M. (1992) M History of Palestine, 634—1099. Cambridge
Grabar, O. (1978) City in the Desert. Cambridge, MA

Green, T. M. (1992) The City of the Moon God: Religious Traditions of Harran. Leiden
Gregory, S. and Kennedy, D. (1985) Sir Aurel Stein’s Limes Reports (BAR International
Series 272). Oxford

Gutwein, K. C. (1981) Third Palestine. Washington, DC

Hachlili, R. (1988) Ancient Jewish Art and Archaeology in the Land of Israel. Leiden
Hirschfeld, ¥.(1992) The Judaean Desert Monasteries in the Byzantine Period. New Haven
and London

Honigmann, E. (1 93 5) Die Ostgren^e des by^antinischen Reiches von 363 bis ioyi. Brussels
Honigmann, E. (1950) ‘Juvenal of Jerusalem’, DOP 5: 209—79
Honigmann, E. (1951) Eveques et eveches monophysites dAsie anterieures du \Ee siecle
(' CSCO Subsidia 2). Louvain

Honigmann, E. (1 9 5 4) Le convent de Barsauma et le patriarcat jacobite dAntioche et de la
Syrie (CSCO Subsidia 7). Louvain

Kaegi, W E. (1992) Byzantium and the Early Islamic Conquests. Cambridge
Karnapp, W. (1976) Die Stadtmauer von Resafa in Syrien. Berlin
Kawar, I. (1958) ‘The last days of Salih’, Arabica 5: 145—58

Kennedy, H. (1985) ‘From Polis to Medina: urban change in late antique and early
Islamic Syria’, P&P 106: 3—27

Kennedy, H. (1986a) ‘The last century of Byzantine Syria: a reconsideration’ BF
10: 141—83

Kennedy, H. (1986b) The Prophet and the Age of the Caliphates. London
Kennedy, H. and Liebeschuetz, W (1989) ‘Antioch and the villages of northern
Syria in the fifth and sixth centuries’, NMS 32: 65—90
Kraeling, C. H. (1938) Gerasa: City of the Decapolis. New Haven

1060 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Lassus, J. (1947) Sanctuaires chretiens de Syne. Paris

Lauffray, J. (1983) Halabiyya-Zenohia: place forte dn limes oriental et la Haute-Mesopotamie
au Vie siecle. Paris

Levine, L. I. (1981) Ancient Synagogues Reveakd. Jerusalem
Levine, L. I. (1985) Caesarea under Roman Rule. Leiden

Liebeschuetz, J. H. W G. (1977) ‘The defences of Syria in the sixth century’,
I drtrdge des 10 Internationalen Limeskongress (Cologne) 487—99
MacAdam, H. (1986) Studies in the History of the Roman Province of Arabia (BAR
International Series 125). Oxford
Morony, M. (1984) Iraq after the Muslim Conquest. Princeton

Northedge, A. (1993) Studies on Roman and Islamic Amman I: Site and Architecture.
Oxford

Noth, A. (1994) The Early Arabic Historical Tradition: A Source-Critical Study 2nd edn,
with Lawrence I. Conrad (Studies in late Antiquity and early Islam 3).
Princeton

Orssaud, D. (1992) ‘De la ceramique Byzantine a la ceramique Islamique’, in
Canivet and Rey-Coquais (1992) 219—28

Palmer, A. (1990) Monk and Mason on the Tigris Frontier: The Early History of the Tur
Abdin. Cambridge

Paret, R. (i960) ‘Les villes de Syrie du sud et les routes commerciales d’Arabie a la
fin du Vie siecle’, in F. Dolger and H. G. Beck (eds.) (i960) Akten des XI
Internationalen Bygantinisten-Kongress, Munchen, 1958 (Munich) 438—44
Parker, S. T. (1986) ‘Retrospective on the Arabian frontier after a decade of
research’, BAR International Series 297 (Oxford) 633—60
Parker, S. T., et al. (1987) ‘The legionary fortress of El-Lejjun’, BAR International
Series 340 (Oxford) 183—428

Patrich, J. (1995) Sabas, Leader of Palestinian Monasticism. A Comparative Study of
Eastern Monasticism, Fourth to Seventh Centuries (Dumbarton Oaks Studies 32).
Washington, DC

Pena, I., Castellana, C. and Fernandez, R. (1987) Les Stylites Syriens. Milan
Piccirillo, M. (1989) Chiese e mosaici di Madaba.]ct\is j Atm

Piccirillo, M. (1994) The Mosaics of Jordan. ACOR Publications 1. Amman and
Baltimore

Rey-Coquais, J.-P. (1977) Inscriptions grecques et latines decouvertes dans les fouilles de Tyr.

1. Inscriptions de la necropole. Bulletin du Musee de Beyrouth 29. Paris
Rostovtzeff, M. (1932) Caravan Cities. Oxford
Sartre, M. (1982) Trois etudes surlArabie romaine et bygantine. Brussels
Sartre, M. (1985) Bostra: des origines a I’Islam. Paris

Schick, R. (1992) ‘Jordan on the eve of the Muslim Conquest a.d. 602—34’, in
Canivet and Rey-Coquais (1992) 107-19

Schick, R. (1995) The Christian Communities of Palestine from Byyantine to Islamic Ride:
An Historical and Archaeological Study (Studies in late Antiquity and early Islam
2). Princeton

Segal, A. (1988) Town Planning and Architecture in Provincia Arabia (BAR International
Series 419) Oxford

Segal, J. B. (1970) Edessa ‘The Blessed City’. Oxford

Shahid, I. (1989) Byyantium and the Arabs in the Fifth Century. Washington, DC

ch. 2ii r . egypt 1061

Shahid, I. (1995) Byzantium and the Arabs in the Sixth Century. 2 vols. Washington, DC
Shereshevski, J. (1991) Byzantine Urban Settlements in the Negev Desert. Jerusalem
Sodini, J.-P., et al. (1980) ‘Dehes (Syrie du nord), campagnes i-m (1976—78):
recherches sur l’habitat rural’, Syria 57: 1-304
Stratos, A. N. (1968) Byzantium in the Seventh Century 1. Amsterdam
Tate, G. (1992) Les Campagnes de la Syrie du Nord du lie au T lie siecle. Paris
Tsafrir, Y. (ed.) (1993) Ancient Churches Revealed. Jerusalem

Tsafrir, Y. and Foerster, G. (1994) ‘From Scythopolis to Baysan — changing con-
cepts of urbanism’, in Cameron and King (eds.) 95—1 1 5
Urman, D. (1985) The Golan: A Profile of a Region During the Roman and Byzantine
Period (BAR International Series 269). Oxford
Urman, D. and Flesher, P. (eds.) (1995) Ancient Synagogues. Leiden
Villeneuve, F. (1985) ‘L’economie rurale et la vie des campagnes dans le Hauran
antique’, in Dentzer (1985) 63—129

Voobus, A. (195 8-9) History of Asceticism in the Syrian Orient. 2 vols. ( CSCO Subisida
14, 19). Louvain

de Vries, B. (1981) ‘The Umm el-Jimal Project, 1972—7’, BASOR 244: 52-73
Walmsley, A. (1996) ‘Byzantine Palestine and Arabia: urban prosperity in late an-
tiquity’, in N. Christie and S. T. Loseby (eds.). Towns in Transition: Urban
Evolution in Late Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages (Aldershot) 1 26—5 8
Watson, P. (1992) ‘Change in foreign and regional links with Pella in the seventh
century a.d.: the ceramic evidence’, in Canivet and Rey-Coquais (1992)
233-48

Whitby, L. M. (1986a) ‘Procopius and the development of Roman defences in
Upper Mesopotamia’, in Freeman and Kennedy (1986) 717—35
Whitby, L. M. (1986b) ‘Procopius on Dara’, in Freeman and Kennedy (1986)
737-83

Whittow, M. (1990) ‘Ruling the late Roman and early Byzantine city: a continuous
history’, P&P 1 29: 3—29

Wilkinson, J. (1977) Jerusalem Pilgrims before the Crusades. Warminster
Woolley, C. L. and Lawrence, T. E. (1914-1 5) The Wilderness of Zin. London

CH. 21 C: EGYPT

Abbott, N. (1938) The Kurrah Papyri from Aphrodito in the Oriental Institute (The
Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago Studies in Ancient Oriental
Civilization, 1 5). Chicago

Amirante, L. (1957) ‘Appunti per la storia della “Redemptio ab Hostibus”’, Labeo
3: 171— 220

Baldwin, B. (1984) ‘Dioscorus of Aphrodito: the worst poet of antiquity?’, Atti del
XVII Congresso Internationale di Papirologia 11 (Naples) 327—31
Bell, H. I. (1917) ‘The Byzantine servile state in Egypt’, JEA 4: 86—106
Bell, H. I. (1944) ‘An Egyptian village in the age of Justinian’, JHS 64: 21-36
Bell, H. I. (1948) Egypt from Alexander the Great to the Arab Conquest: A Study in the
Diffusion and Decay of Hellenism. Oxford

Bell, H. I. and Crum, W E. (1925) ‘A Greek-Coptic glossary’, Aegyptus 6: 177—226
Berger, A. (1953) Encyclopedic Dictionary of Roman Law. Philadelphia

1062 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD
Bernand, E. (1969) Les inscriptions grecques de Philae. Paris

Bonneau, D. (1970) ‘L’ administration de l’irrigation dans les grands domaines en
Egypte au Vie siecle de N.E.’, Proceedings of the Twelfth International Congress of
Papyrology (Toronto) 45—62

Bowman, A. K. (1986) Egypt after the Pharaohs, yp BC—AD 642. Berkeley and Los
Angeles

Butler, A. J. (1978) The Arab Conquest of Egypt and the Last Thirty Years of Roman
Domination (2nd edn, ed. P. M. Fraser). Oxford
Calderini, A. (1966) Digionario dei nomi geographic! e topografici dellEgitto greco-romano.

1.2. Madrid

Cameron, Averil (1979) A nativity poem of the sixth century a.d.’, CPh 74: 222—32
Charles, R. H. (trans.) (1916) The Chronicle of John, Coptic Bishop of Nikiufc. 690A.D.).

London (repr. Amsterdam, n.d.)

The Coptic Encyclopedia (ed. A. S. Atiya) (1991) 8 vols. New York
Daris, S. (1991) // lessico latino nelgreco dEgitto (2nd edn) (Estudis de papirologia i
filologia biblica 2). Barcelona

Farber, J. (1986) ‘The Patermuthis archive: a third look’, RASP 23: 81—98
Feissel, D. and Worp, K. A. (1988) ‘La requete d’Appion, eveque de Syene, a
Theodose II: P. Leid. Z revise’, OMRO 68: 97—108
Fikhman, I. F. (1965) Egypt on the Confines of Two Epochs (Russian). Moscow
Fichman [Fikhman], I. F. (1973) ‘Sklaven und Sklavenarbeit im spatromischen
Oxythynchod, Jahrbuch fur Wirtschaftsgeschichte 2: 149-206
Fikhman, I. F. (1975) ‘Quelques donnees sur la genese de la grande propriete fon-
ciere a Oxyrhynchus’, in Le monde grec: Hommages a Claire Preaux (Brussels)
784-90

Fikhman, I. F. (1981) ‘Les cautionnements pour les coloni adscripticiT , Proceedings of
the Sixteenth International Congress of Papyrology (Chico) 469—77
Fikhman, I. F. (1991) ‘Esclaves et colons en Egypte byzantin Analecta Papyrologica
3 : 7-i7

Fraser, P.M. (1993) [1995] ‘Byzantine Alexandria: decline and fall’, BSA 45: 91-106
Gagos, T. and van Minnen, P. (1994) Settling a Dispute: Towards a Legal Anthropology
of Late Antique Egypt (New Texts from Ancient Cultures 1). Ann Arbor
Gascou, J. (1975) ‘Militaires etrangers en Egypte byzantine’, BIFAO 75: 203—6
Gascou, J. (1985) ‘Les grands domaines, la cite et l’etat en Egypte byzantine’,
T&MBy^ey. 1—90

Gascou, J. (1990) ‘Nabla/Labla’, Cd’EGy. 111— 15

Gascou,}. (1994) Un codex fiscal her/nopolite (P. Sorb. II 69) (Amer. Stud. Pap. 32). Atlanta
Gelzer, M. (1909) Studien gurbyvymtinischen VerwaltungAgyptens (Leipziger historische
Abhandlungen 13). Leipzig

Geraci, G. (1979) ‘Per una storia dell’amministrazione fiscale nell’Egitto del VI
secolo d.C.: Dioskoros e l’autopragia di Aphrodito’, Actes du XVe Congres
International de Papyrologie (Brussels) iv. 19 5-205
Geremek, H. (1990) ‘Sur la question des BOULAI dans les villes egyptiennes aux
Ve— Vile sitcles’,JJP 20: 47—54

Haas, C. (1997) Alexandria in Late Antiquity: Topography and Social Conflict. Baltimore
Hagemann, H.-R. (1953) Die Stellung derPiae Causae nach justinianischem Rechte. Basel
Hardy, E. R. (193 1) The Large Estates of Byzantine Egypt. New York

CH. 21 r. EGYPT

1063

Hardy, E. R. (1968) ‘The Egyptian policy of Justinian’, DOP 22: 23-41
Heitsch, E. (1963) Die griechischen Dichterfragmente der romischen Kaiseryeiti (2nd edn
rev.) (Abhandlungen der Akademie der Wissenschaften in Gottingen, philol-
ogisch-historische Klasse, dritte Folge 49). Gottingen
Humphrey, J. H. (1986) Roman Circuses: Arenas for Chariot Racing. London
Johnson, A. C. and West, L. C. (1949) Byzantine Egypt Economic Studies (Princeton
University Studies in Papyrology 6). Princeton
Jones, A. H. M. (1949) ‘The Roman civil service (clerical and sub-clerical grades)’,
JRS 39: 38—55 (= Studies in Roman Government and Lan> (Oxford, 1 960) 151—75)
Jones, M. (1991) ‘The early Christian sites at Tell el-Amarna and Sheikh Said’,/ZLT
77: 129-44

Keenan, J. G. (1973, 1974) ‘The names Flavius and Aurelius as status designations
in later Roman Egypt’, ZPE 11: 33—63; 13: 283—304
Keenan, J. G. (1975) ‘On law and society in late Roman Egypt’, ZPE 17: 237-50
Keenan, J. G. (1977) ‘The provincial administration of Egyptian Arcadia’, Mus.
Phil. Loud. 2: 193—202

Keenan, J. G. (1978) ‘The case of Flavia Christodote: observations on PSI I 76’,
ZPE 29: 1 9 1— 209

Keenan, J. G. (1980) ‘Aurelius Phoibammon son of Triadelphus: a Byzantine
Egyptian land entrepreneur’, BASP 17: 145-54
Keenan, J. G. (1984a) ‘The Aphrodito papyri and village life in Byzantine Egypt’,
BSAC 26: 51—63

Keenan, J. G. (1984b) ‘Aurelius Apollos and the Aphrodito village elite’, Atti del
XVII Congresso Internationale di Papirologia (Naples) 111.957—63
Keenan, J. G. (1985a) ‘Notes on absentee landlordism at Aphrodito’, BASP 22:
137-69

Keenan, J. G. (1985b) ‘Village shepherds and social tension in Byzantine Egypt’,
YCS 28: 245—59

Keenan, J. G. (1990) ‘Evidence for the Byzantine army in the Syene papyri’, BASP
27: 139-50

Keenan, J. G. (1992) ‘A Constantinople loan, a.d. 541’, BASP 29: 175-82
Keenan, J. G. (1993) ‘Papyrology and Byzantine historiography’, BASP 30: 137—44
Ivovelman, A. B. (1991) ‘From logos to myth: Egyptian petitions of the 5 th — 7th
centuries’, BASP 28: 135—52

Kramer, J. (1992) ‘Schreiben der Pratorialprafekten des Jahres 399 an den praeses
provinciae Arcadiae in lateinischer und griechischer Version’, Tyche 7: 1 57-62
Kuehn, C. (1990) ‘Dioskoros of Aphrodito and Romanos the Melodist’, BASP 27:
103— 7

Kuehn, C. (1995) Channels of Inperishable Fire: The Beginnings of Christian Mystical
Poetry and Dioscorus of Aphrodito. New York
Kuhn, K. H. (1954) ‘A fifth century Egyptian abbot’, JThS n.s. 5: 36—48; 174—87
Leipoldt, J. (1902—3) ‘Berichte Schenutes fiber Einfalle der Nubier in Agypten’,
ZAS 40: 1 26—40

Liebeschuetz, W [=J. H. W. G] (1974) ‘The pagarch, the city and imperial admin-
istration in Byzantine Egypt’, ffP 18: 163-8
MacCoull, L. S. B. (1981) ‘The Coptic archive of Dioscorus of Aphrodito’, CdE
56: 185—93 (= MacCoull (1993b) 11)

1064 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

MacCoull, L. S. B. (1984) ‘Notes on the social structure of late antique Aphrodito’,
BSAC 26: 65—77 ( = MacCoull (1993b) xx)

MacCoull, L. S. B. (1986a) ‘Coptic Egypt during the Persian occupation: the papy-
rological evidence’, Studi classid e orientali 36: 307-13 (= MacCoull (1993b) xii)
MacCoull, L. S. B. (1986b) ‘Dioscorus and the dukes: an aspect of Coptic
Hellenism in the sixth century’, BS 13: 30—40 (= MacCoull (1993b) x)
MacCoull, L. S. B. (1 9 8 9) ‘The strange death of Coptic culture’, Coptic Church Review
10: 35—45 (= MacCoull (1993b) xxvi)

MacCoull, L. S. B. (1990) ‘Christianity at Syene/Elephantine/Philae’, BASF 27:
1 51— 62

MacCoull, L. S. B. (1993a) ‘The Apa Apollos monastery of Pharoou (Aphrodito)
and its papyrus archive’, he Museon 106: 21-63
MacCoull, L. S. B. (1993b) Coptic Perspectives on Late Antiquity. Aldershot
McGing, B. (1990) ‘Melitian monks at Labia’, Tyche 5: 67—94
Maehler, M. (1976) ‘Trouble in Alexandria in a letter of the sixth century’, GRBS
17: 197-203

Maspero, J. (1911) ‘Un dernier poete grec, Dioscore, fils d’Apollos’, REG 24:
426—81

Maspero, J. (1912) Organisation militaire de I’Egypte by^antine (Bibliotheque de l’Ecole
des Hautes Etudes, Sciences historiques et philologiques 201). Paris
Minnen, P. van (1992) ‘Isocrates and Menander in late antique perspective’, GRBS
33: 87-98

Monks, G. R. (1953) ‘The church of Alexandria and the city’s economic life in the
sixth century’, Speculum 28: 349—62

Palme, B. (1994) ‘Flavius Sarapodorus, ein agens in rebus aus Hermupolis’, APE 40:
42—68

Remondon, R. (1952) ‘L’Egypte et la supreme resistance au Christianisme
(Ve— Vile siecles)’, BIE 40 51: 63—78

Remondon, R. (195 5) ‘L’edit xiii de Justinien a-t-il ete promulgue en 5 39?’, Cd’E
30: 1 12—21

Robinson, O. (1968) ‘Private prisons’, RIDA ser. 3,15: 389-98
Rouillard, G. (1928) L’ administration civile de I’Egypte bysyantine (2nd edn). Paris
Samir, Khalil, S. J. (1986) ‘Arabic sources for early Egyptian Christianity’, in
Pearson and Goehring (eds.), Egyptian Christianity 82-97
Schefold, K. (1945) ‘Ein Bildnismedallion der Zeit Justinians’, Mas. Helv. 2: 48—5 3
Schmitt, O. (1994) ‘Die Bucellarii. Eine Studie zum militarischen
Gefolgschaftswesen in der Spatantike’, Tyche 9: 147—74
Schnebel, M. (1928) ‘An agricultural ledger in P. Bad. 95’,/Ed 14; 34-45
Sirks, B. (1993) ‘Reconsidering the Roman colonate’, ZRGR 4 no: 33 1—69
Thomas, J. P. (1987) Private Religious Foundations in the Byzantine Empire. Washington,
DC

Timm, S. (1983) Tiibinger Atlas des Vorderen Orients (TAVO) bvi 15: Agypten. Das
Christentum bis %ur Arabergeit (bis %umy Jahrhundert). Wiesbaden
Trimbie, J. (1986) ‘The state of research on the career of Shenoute of Atripe’, in
Pearson and Goehring (eds.), Egyptian Christianity 258—70
Turner, E. G. (1973) ‘The charioteers from Antino e’,JHS 93: 192—5 (with colour
plates)

Viljamaa, T. (1968) Studies in Encomiastic Poetry of the Early Byzantine Period

CH. zza\ THE SASANID MONARCHY 1065

(Commentationes Humanarum Litterarum, Societas Scientiarum Fennica
42.2). Helsinki

Wipszycka, E. (1972) Les ressources et les activites economiques des eglises en Egypte du IV \ e
au T -Tile siecle (Pap. Brux. 10). Brussels

Zingale, L. M. (1984-5) ‘Osservazioni sulla domus divina di Teodora’, Annali della
Facolta di Giurisprudenga di Genova 20: 142-9

CH. 22 a\ THE SASANID MONARCHY

Altheim, F. and Stiehl, R. (1954) Ein Asiatischer Stoat, Feudalismus unter den Sasaniden
und ihren Nachbaren. Wiesbaden

Altheim, F. and Stiehl, R. (1957) Finanzgeschichte der Spdtantike. Frankfurt am Main
Asmussen,J. P. (1975) Manichaean Literature. Delmar, NY
Back, M. (1978) ‘Die sassanidischen Staatsinschriften , , Acta Iranica 8
Baynes, N. H. (i960) ‘Rome and Armenia in the fourth century’, in Byzantine Studies
and Other Essays (London) 186—208

Blockley, R. C. (1981) The Fragmentary ClassicisingHistorians of the Later Roman Empire
1 (ARCA 10). Liverpool

Blockley, R. C. (1985) Menander the Guardsman (ARCA 17). Liverpool
Blockley, R. C. (1992) East Roman Foreign Polity (ARCA 30). Leeds
Bohlig, A. (1980) Die Gnosis. Drifter Band, der Manichaismus, in Die Bibliothek der alten
Welt. Zurich and Alunich

Bosworth, C. E. (1999) The History of al-Tabari, V: The Sasanids, the Byzantines, the
Lakhmids and Yemen (translated and annotated). New York
Boyce, M. (1957) ‘Some Reflections about Zurvanism’, BSOAS 19—2: 305-16
Boyce, M. (1968) The Letter of Tansar. Rome

Boyce, M. (1979) Zoroastrians, their Religious Beliefs and Practices. London and New
York

Boyce, M. (1984) Textual Sources for the Study of Zoroastrianism. Manchester
Boyce, M. (1990) ‘Some further reflections on Zurvanism \ Acta Iranica 16: 20—9
Braund, D. (1994) Georgia in Antiquity, a History of Colchis and Transcaucasian Iberia,
yjo BC—AD J62 (Oxford) 238-314

Browne, E. G. (1900) ‘Some account of the Arabic work entitled “Nihayatu’l-irab
ff, akhbari 3 1 -Furs wafl-’Arab” \JRAS-. 195-259
Cameron, Averil (1969/70) ‘Agathias on the Sassanians’, DOP 23/24: 67-183
Cameron, Averil (1995) (ed.) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East, in States,
Resources and Armies (Studies in Late Antiquity and Early Islam 1). Princeton
Chaumont, M.-L. (1958) ‘Le culte d’Anahita a Staxr et les premiers Sassanides’,
RHR i 5 3: 154-75

Chaumont, M.-L. (i960) ‘Recherches sur le clerge Zorastrien: Le herbad’, RHR
157: 54—80; 158: 161—79

Chaumont, M.-L. (1976) ‘L’Armenie entre Rome et l’lran I. De l’avenement
d’Auguste a l’avenement de Diocletien’,MA/i?IEii, 9.1: 71-194
Chaumont, M.-L. (1988) La Christianisation de l’ empire iranien des origines aux persecu-
tions du E re siecle (CSCO Subsidia 80). Louvain
Christensen, A. (1 925) Le regne du roiKmvadh etle communisme Mazdakite. Copenhagen
Christensen, A. (1944) L’lran sous les Sassanides. Copenhagen
Crone, P. (1991) ‘Kavad’s heresy and Mazdak’s revolt’, Iran 29: 21-42

1066 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Dabrowa, E. (ed.) (i 994) The Roman and Byzantine Army in the East. Krakow
Dodgeon, M. and Lieu, S. N. C. (1991) The Roman Eastern Frontier and the Persian
Wars, AD 226— 36$: A Documentary History. London and New York
Fisher, W B. (1968) (ed.) The Cambridge History of Irani, The Land of Iran. Cambridge
Frye, R. N. (1959) ‘Zurvanism again’, HThR 52: 63—73
Frye, R. N. (1984) The History of Ancient Iran (Munich) 287-339
Ghirshman, R. (1962) Iran, Parthians and Sassanians. London
Gobi, R. (1971) Sasanian Numismatics. Wurzburg

Goodblat, D. M. (1979) ‘The poll tax in Sassanian Babylonia’, JESHO 22: 233-95
Grignaschi, M. (1971) ‘La riforma tributaria di Flosro I e il feudalismo sassanide’,
in La Persia nel medioevo, Accademia nazionale dei Lincei (Rome) 88—138
Guidi, M. [Morony, M.] (1992) ‘Mazdak’, Encyclopaedia of Islam 2nd edn, vi.949— 52
Flahn, I. (1959) ‘Sassanidische und spatromische Besteuerung’,MH«tfA«g7: 149-60
Herrmann, G. (1 977) The Iranian Revival. London

Howard-Johnston, J. D. (1994) ‘The official history of Heraclius’ Persian cam-
paigns’ in Dabrowa (ed.) (1994) 57-87

Howard-Johnston, J. D. (1995) ‘The two great powers in late antiquity: a compari-
son’, in Averil Cameron (ed.) (1995) 1 57—226
Humbach, H. and Skjaervo, P. O. (1983) The Sassanian Inscription of Paikuli.
Wiesbaden

Huyse, P. ( 1999 ) ‘Die dreisprachige Inschrift Saburs I an der Ka‘aba-i Zardust’,
Corpus Inscriptionum Iranicarum hi, Pahlavi Inscriptions 1. London
Kllma, O. (1957) Mazdak. Geschichte einer sogialen Bemgung im Sassanidischen Persien.
Prague

Kllma, O. (1977) Beitrdge g/ir Geschichte des Maydakismns. Prague
Labourt, J. (1 904) Le Christianisme dans I’enrpire Perse sous la dynastie Sassanide. Paris
Langlois, V. (1 867, 1 869) Collection des historiens anciens et modernes de lArmenie, 2 vols.
Paris

Lee, A. D. (1993) Information and Frontiers: Roman Foreign Relations in Late Antiquity.
Cambridge

Lieu, S. N. C. (1 994) Manichaeism in Mesopotamia and the Roman Near East. Leiden
Loginov, S. D. and Nikitin, A. B. (1993 a) ‘Sasanian coins of the third century from
Merv’ , Mesopotamia 18: 225-46

Loginov, S. D. and Nikitin, A. B. (1993b) ‘Coins of Shapur II from Merv’,
Mesopotamia 18: 247—69

Loginov, S. D. and Nikitin, A. B. (1993c) ‘Sasanian coins of the late 4th— 7th centu-
ries from Merv’, Mesopotamia 1 8: 271—316
Lukonin, V. G. (1961) Iran v epokhu periykh Sasanidov. Leningrad
Millar, F. (1993) The Roman Near East, 31 BC—AD 33-y. Cambridge, MA
Noldeke, T. (1878) Geschichte des Artachsir i Papakan (Beitrage zur Kunde der indo-
germanischen Sprachen 4) (Gottingen) 24-69
Noldeke, T. (1879) Geschichte der Perser und Araber ytir Zeit der Sasaniden. Leiden
Noldeke, T. (1887) Aufsdtge gur persischen Geschichte. Leipzig
Noldeke, T. (1920) Das iranische Nationalepos. 2nd edn. Leipzig
Pellat, C. (1954) LeLivre de la couronne. Paris

Pigulevskaya, N. V. (= Pigulevskaja, N.) (1937) ‘K voprosu o podatnoj reforme
Khosroya Anushervana’, Vestnik Drevnej Istorii 1: 143-54

CH. llb\ ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 1067

Pigulevskaya, N. V. (1946) Vi^antiya i Iran na rubeghe VI i VII vekov. Moscow and
Leningrad

Pigulevskaja, N. (1963) Les villes de I’etatlranien aux epoques Parthe et Sassanide. Paris
Potter, D. S. (1990) Prophet y and History in the Crisis of the Roman Empire, a Historical
Commentary on the Thirteenth Sibylline Oracle. Oxford
Rubin, Z. (1986) ‘Diplomacy and war in the relations between Byzantium and the
Sassanids in the fifth century ad’ (BAR International Series 297) (Oxford)
677-95

Rubin, Z. (1995) ‘The reforms of Khusro Anushirwan’, in Averil Cameron (ed.)
(1995) 227-97

Schippmann, K. (1990) Grundyiige der Geschichte des Sasanidischen Reiches. Darmstadt
Shaked, S. (1979) The Wisdom of the Sasanian Sages (Denkard T 1 ) (Persian Heritage
Series 34). Boulder, CO

Shaked, S. (forthcoming) ‘Zoroastrians and others in Sasanian Iran’, in L. I. Conrad
(ed.), Late Antiquity and Early Islam II 1 Patterns of Communal Identity in the
Byyantine and Early Islamic Near East (Studies in Late Antiquity and Early
Islam). Princeton

Shaki, M. (1981) ‘The Denkard account of the history of the Zoroastrian
Scriptures’, Archiv Orientdlni 49: 114-25

Solodukho, J. A. (1948) ‘Podati i povinosti v Irake v III— V nashej ery’, Sovetskoe
l ostokovedenie 5: 55—72

Stratos, A. N. (1968) Byzantium in the Seventh Century I: 602—34. Amsterdam
Whitby, M. (1994) ‘The Persian king at war’, in Dabrowa (ed.) (1994) 227—63
Widengren, G. (1956) ‘Recherches sur le feodalisme iranien’, Orientalia Suecana 5:
79-182

Widengren, G. (1961) ‘The status of the Jews in the Sassanian Empire’, Iranica
Antiqua 1—2: 117—62

Widengren, G. (1965) Die Religionen Irans. Stuttgart
Widengren, G. (1967) Der Feudalismus im alten Iran. Cologne and Opladen
Widengren, G. (1976) ‘Iran der grosse Gegner Roms: Konigsgewalt, Feudalismus,
Militarwesen’, ANRW11, 9.1: 219—306

Wiesehofer, J. (1996) Ancient Persia. London (translation of Wiesehofer, J. (1998)
Das antike. Persien, von jjo v. Chr. bis 6jo n. Chr. Munich and Zurich
Wikander, S. (1 946) Feuerpriester in Kleinasien und Iran. Lund

Wolski, J. (1976) Tran und Rom. Versuch einer historischen Wertung der gegensei-
tigen Beziehungen’, MAffiJIFTi, 9.1: 195— 214
Yar-Shater, E. (1971) ‘Were the Sasanians heirs to the Achaemenids?’, in La Persia
nel Medioevo (Accademia nazionale dei Lincei) 517-33
Yar-Shater, E. (1983) (ed.) The Cambridge History of Iranm. The Seleucid, Parthian, and
Sasanian Periods. Cambridge

Zaehner, R. C. (195 5) Zurvan: A Zoroastrian Dilemma. Oxford
Zaehner, R. C. (1975) The Dawn and Twilight of Zoroastrianism. London

CH. 22/2: ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY

Adontz, N. (1934) ‘Les legendes de Maurice et de Constantin V’, in Melanges Bide %
(Annuaire de l’Institut de Philologie et d’Histoire orientales et slaves 2) 1—9
(= Etudes armeno-bygantines (Lisbon) 125-36)

1068 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Adontz, N. (1970) Armenia in the Period of Justinian: The Political Conditions Based on
the Naxarar System (translated with partial revisions, a bibliographical note, and
appendices by N. G. Garsoian). Lisbon

Agathangelos, Patmufiwn HayoP (ed. G. Ter-Mkrtc‘ean and S. Kanayeanc') (1909)
Tiflis (repr. Delmar, NY, 1980). English trans.: see Thomson (1976)
Arutyunova-Fidanyan, V. A. (1980) Armyane-khalkedoniti na vostochnikh granitsakh
I l^antijskov imperii. Erevan

Berberian, H. (1 964) Autobiographic d’Anania Sirakec'i’, Revue des etudes armeniennes
n.s. 1: 189—94

Book of Tetters: Girk Tlt‘oc c ed. Y. Izmiteanc' (1901). Tiflis
Charanis, P. (1963) The Armenians in the Byzantine Empire. Lisbon
Christensen, A. (1944) L’lran sous les Sassanides (2nd edn). Paris
Draguet, R. (1924) Julien d’Halicarnasse et sa controverse avec Severe dAntioche sur I’incor-
ruptibilite du corps du Christ. Louvain

Elishe, Elisei vast 1 Vardanay eu> HayoP Pateracpnin (ed. E. Ter-Minasyan) (1957)
Erevan (repr. Delmar, NY, 1993). English transl.: see Thomson (1982)
Garitte, G. (1952) La Narratio de Rebus Armeniae (CSCO Subsidia 4). Louvain
Garsoian, N. G. (1 976) ‘Prolegomena to a study of the Iranian elements in Arsacid
Armenia’, Handes Amsorya 90: 177-234 (= Garsoian (1985) x)

Garsoian, N. G. (1984) ‘Secular jurisdiction over the Armenian church
(fourth-seventh centuries)’, in Oheanos: Essays presetted to Ihor Sevcenko
(Harvard Ukrainian Studies 7) 220-50 (= Garsoian (1985) ix)

Garsoian, N. G. (1984/ 5) ‘The early-mediaeval Armenian city: an alien element?’,
in Ancient Studies in Memory of Elias Bickerman, The Journal of the Ancient Near
Eastern Society 16/17: 67—83

Garsoian, N. G. (1985) Armenia between Byzantium and the Sasanians. Aldershot
Garsoian, N. G. (1989) ‘Some preliminary precisions on the separation of the
Armenian and Imperial Churches: 1 . The presence of “Armenian” bishops
at the first five Oecumenical Councils’, in J. Chrysostomides (ed.) Kathegetria.
Essays Presented to Joan Hussey (Camberley) 249—85
Garsoian, N. G. (1996) ‘Quelques precisions preliminaires sur le schisme entre les
eglises byzantine et armenienne au sujet du concile de Chalcedoine: 11. La date
et les circonstances de la rupture’, in LArmenie et By^ance. Histoire et Culture
(Byzantina Sorbonensia 1 2) 99—1 1 2

Garsoian, N. G. (1999) L’Eglise armenienne et le grand schisme d’ Orient ( CSCO 574).
Louvain

Goubert, P. (1951) By^ance avant I’lslam vol. 1 : Bytyance et l’ Orient sons les successettrs de
Justinien. L’empereur Maurice. Paris

Kazhdan, A. P. (1975) Armyane v sostave gospodstvyuschego klassa Visyantijskoj imperii v
XXI— XII vv. Erevan

Koriwn, Vark‘ MastoCi (ed. M. Abelean) (1941) (repr. Delmar, NY, 1985, with
English translation by B. Norehad). German trans.: Winkler, G. (1994) Koriwns
Biographie des Mesrop MastoC (Orientalia Christiana Analecta 245). Rome
Lazar of P'arp, PatmuCmn Hayoc‘ (ed. G. Ter-Mkrtc‘ean and S. Malxasean) (1904)
Tiflis (repr. Delmar, NY, 1985). English trans.: see Thomson (1991)
Manandian, H. (1965) The Trade and Cities of Armenia in Relation to Ancient World
Trade. Lisbon

CH. llb\ ARMENIA IN THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CENTURY 1069

Moses of Khoren, PatmuFiwn HayoF (ed. M. Abelean and S. Yarut'iwnean) (1913)
Tiflis (rep. Delmar, NY, 1984). English trans.: see Thomson (1978)

P‘ awstos Buzand, Bugandaran PatmuFiwnk c (ed. K‘ . Patkanean) (1 8 8 3) St Petersburg
(repr. Delmar, NY, 1984). English trans.: Garsolan, N. G. (1989) The Epic
Histories ( Bugandaran PatmuCiwnk “). Cambridge, MA
Peeters, P. (1935) ‘Sainte Sousanik, martyre en Armeno-Georgie’, AB 53: 5-48,
245-307

Pseudo-Shapuh: Thomson, R. W (1988/89) ‘The anonymous story-teller (also
known as “Pseudo-Sapuh”)’, Revue des etudes armeniennes 21: 171-232
Renoux, Ch. (1993) ‘Langue et litterature armeniennes’, in M. Albert et al. (eds.),
Christianismes orientaux (Paris) 109-66
Russell, J. R. (1987) Zoroastrianism in Armenia. Cambridge, MA
Sarkissian, K. (1975) The Council of Chalcedon and the Armenian Church (2nd edn).
New York

Sebeos, PatmuCiwn Sebeosi (ed. G. Abgaryan) (1979) Erevan. English trans.: see
Thomson and Howard-Johnston (1999)

Shahid, I. (1971) The Martyrs of Najran. New Documents (Subsidia Hagiographica 49).
Brussels

Tallon, M. (195 5) ‘Livre des Lettres, ier Groupe: Documents concernant les rela-
tions avec les Grecs’, Melanges de I’Universite Saint Joseph 32: 1-146 (also printed
separately)

Ter-Minassiantz, E. (1904) Die armenische Kirche in ihren Begiehungen gu den syrischen
Kirchen bis gum Ende des iy. Jahrhunderts nach den armenischen und syrischen Quellen
(Texte und Untersuchungen 16). Leipzig

Thomson, R. W. (1 976) Agathangelos: History of the Armenians, trans. R. W Thomson.
Albany

Thomson, R. W (1978) Moses Khorenats‘i: History of the Armenians, trans. R. W
Thomson. Cambridge, MA

Thomson, R. W. (1980) ‘The formation of the Armenian literary tradition’, inN. G.
Garsoian, T. F. Mathews and R. W. Thomson (eds.), East of Bygantium: Syria
and Armenia in the Formative Period (Washington, DC) 135-50 (= Thomson
(1994) tv)

Thomson, R. W (1982) Elishe: History of T ardan and the Armenian War, trans. R. W
Thomson. Cambridge, MA

Thomson, R. W. (1988/9) ‘Mission, conversion, and Christianization: the
Armenian example’. Harvard Ukrainian Studies 12/13: 28-45 (= Thomson
(1994) m)

Thomson, R. W. (1991) The History of Lagar P c arpec c i, trans. R. W Thomson.
Atlanta

Thomson, R. W (1994) Studies in Armenian Literature and Christianity. Aldershot
Thomson, R. W and Howard-Johnston, J. (1999) The Armenian History attributed to
Sebeos, 2 parts (Translated Texts for Historians 31). Liverpool
Toumanoff, C. (1963) Studies in Christian Caucasian History. Washington, DC
Ukhtanes (1985) History of Armenia, Part 11: History of the Severance of the Georgians
from the Armenians (translated by Z. Arzoumanian) (1985). Fort Lauderdale
Winkler, G. (1982) Das armenische Initiationsrituale (OCA 217). Rome

1070 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

CH. 22 C\ THE ARABS

Abu 1-Baqa’ Hibat Allah al-Hilll (d. early sixth/twelfth century). Al-Manaqib al-
ma^yadiya fi akhbdr al-muluk al-asadiya. Ed. Salih Musa Daradka and
Muhammad ‘Abd al-Qadir Khuraysat. 2 vols. Amman, 19S4
Abu ‘Ubayda, Ma'mar ibn Muthanna al-Tayml (d. 204/819). Naqaid Jarir wa-l-
Fara^daq. Ed. A. A. Bevan. 3 vols. Leiden, 1905—12
al-A‘sha Maymun. Dhvdn. Ed. Rudolf Geyer. London, 1928
al-‘AskarI, Abu Hilal al-Hasan ibn ‘Abd Allah ibn Sahl (d. 39 5/ 1004). Kitdb al-awd’il.
Ed. Walid Qassab and Muhammad al-Misrl. 2 vols. 2nd edn. Riyadh,
1401/ 1981

al-Azdl, Abu Isma'll Muhammad ibn ‘Abd Allah al-Basrl (f. c. 180/796). Futuh al-
Shdm. Ed. W N. Lees. Calcutta, 1854
Arberry, A.J. (trans.). The Koran Interpreted. London, 1955

al-Azraql, Abu 1- Walid Muhammad ibn ‘Abd Allah ibn Ahmad (d. c. 250/865).
Akhbdr Makka wa-md ja’ a Jihd min al-dthdr. Ed. Rushdl al-Salih Malhas. 2 vols.
Beirut, 1403/1983

al-Bakrl, Abu ‘Ubayd ‘Abd Allah ibn ‘Abd al-‘AzIz (d. 487/1094). Mu‘jam md
stafam fi asnm al-bilad wa-l-mawadT . Ed. Mustafa al-Saqqa. 4 vols. Cairo,
1364— 7 I / I 945— 5 1

al-Baladhurl, Abu 1-Hasan Ahmad ibn Yahya ibn Jabir (d. 279/892). Ansdb al-ashraf,
1. Ed. Muhammad Hamid Allah. Cairo, 1959
Futuh al-buldan. Ed. M.J. de Goeje. Leiden, 1866
Cheikho, Louis. Shidam al-nasraniya. 2 vols. Beirut, 1890

Chronicon ad annum Christi 1234 pertinens. Ed. and trans. J. B. Chabot. 4 vols. Paris,
1916—20

Ibn ‘Abd Rabbih, Shihab al-DIn Abu ‘Umar Ahmad ibn Muhammad (d. 328/940).
Al- ' Iqd al-farid. Ed. Ahmad Amin, Ahmad al-Zayn and Ibrahim al-Abyarl. 7
vols. Cairo, 1368—84/1949—65

Ibn ‘Asakir, Abu 1-Qasim ‘All ibn al-Hasan ibn Hibat Allah (d. 571/1176). Tdrikh
madinat Dimashq, I. Ed. Salah al-DIn al-Munajjid. Damascus, 1951
Ibn A'tham al-Kufi, Abu Muhammad Ahmad (wr. 204/819). Kitdb al-fnttih. Ed.

Muhammad ‘Abd al-Mu‘ld Khan et al 8 vols. Hyderabad, 1388-95/1968-75
Ibn Habib, Abuja'far Muhammad al-Baghdadl (d. 245/860). Kitdb al-muhabbar. Ed.

Ilse Lichtenstadter. Hyderabad, 1361/1942
Ibn Hisham, Abu Muhammad ‘Abd al-Malik al-Ma‘afirI (d. 218/834). Sirat Rasul
Allah. Ed. Ferdinand Wiistenfeld. 2 vols. Gottingen, 1858—60
Ibn Khaldun, ‘Imad al-Din Abu Zayd ‘Abd al-Rahman ibn Muhammad (d.

808/1405 ). Al-Muqaddima. Ed. E. M. Quatremere. 3 vols. Paris, 1858
Ibn Khurradadhbih, Abu 1-Qasim ‘Ubayd Allah ibn ‘Abd Allah (d. c. 300/91 1).

Al-Masdlik n'a-l-mamdlik. Ed. M.J. de Goeje. Leiden, 1889
Ibn al-Najjar, Abu ‘Abd Allah Muhammad ibn Mahmud (d. 643/ 1245). Al-Ditrra
al-thamina Ji ta’rikh al-Madina, printed as an appendix to al-FasI (d. 832/ 1429),
Shifd } al-ghardm bi-akhbdr al-balad al-haram , 11. Mecca, 1956
Ibn Qutayba, Abu Muhammad ‘Abd Allah ibn Muslim (d. 276/889). Kitdb al-
mafrif. Ed. Tharwat ‘Ukkasha. 2nd edn. Cairo, 1969

CH. 22 C\ THE ARABS

IO7I

al-Isfahani, Abu 1 -Faraj ‘AE ibn al-Husayn (d. 356/ 967). Kitdb al-aghani. Ed. Ahmad
ZakI al-‘Adawi et al. 24 vols. Cairo, 1345—94/1927-74
Jeffery, Arthur. Materials for the History of the Text of the Quran. Leiden, 1937
John Moschus (d. 634). Pratum Spirituale. PG lxxxvii. 2852-3 1 1 2
John of Ephesus (d. c. 5 86). Historia Ecclesiastica, hi. Ed. and trans. E. W Brooks. 2
vols. Paris, 1935

Kraemer, Casper J. (ed.) Excavations at Nessana, in: Non-Literary Papyri. Princeton,
1958

Lughda al-Isfahani, Abu ‘AE al-Hasan ibn ‘Abd Allah (f. c. 261/875). Bilad aHarab.

Ed. Hamad al-Jasir and Salih Ahmad al-‘AlI. Riyadh, 1387/1968
al-Maqrlzi, Abu l-‘ Abbas Ahmad ibn ‘All (d. 845 / 1442). Al-Mawai £ wa-l-Ttibdr bi-
dhikr al-khit at wa-l-dthdr. 2 vols. Bulaq, ah 1270
al-Marzuql, Abu ‘AE Ahmad ibn Muhammad (d. 421/1030). Kitdb al-aspnina iva-l-
amkina. 2 vols. Hyderabad, ah 1332

Menander (wr. 580s). Fragmenta. Ed. and trans. R. C. Blockley, The History of
Menander the Guardsman. Liverpool, 1985

Michael I Qindasi (d. 1 199). Chronique de Michel le Syrien. Ed. and trans. J.-B. Chabot.
4 vols. Paris, 1899-1924

Periplus mans erythraei. Ed. and trans. Lionel Casson. Princeton, 1989
Sebeos (wr. 660s). Histoire d’Heraclius. Trans. Frederic Macler. Paris, 1904
Sophronius (d. c. 639). Life of John the Almsgwer. Ed. Hippolyte Delehaye, ‘Une vie
inedite de saint Jean lAumonierJMZ^ (1927) 19-25
Sozomen (d. before 448). Historia Ecclesiastica (Kirchengeschichte). Ed. Joseph
Bidez and Gunther Christian Hansen. Berlin, i960
Synodicon Orientale. Ed. and trans. J.-B. Chabot. Paris, 1902

al-Tabari, Abuja' far Muhammad ibn Jarir (d. 310/922). Tafsir. 30V0IS. Cairo ah 1330
Ta’rikh al-rusul wa-l-muluk. Ed. M. J. de Goeje et al. 1 5 vols. Leiden, 1 879-1 901
Theophanes Confessor (d. 818). Chronographia. Ed. Carl de Boor. 2 vols. Leipzig,
1883-5

al-Waqidi, Abu ‘Abd AHah Muhammad ibn ‘Umar ibn Waqid (d. 207/822). Kitdb
al-maghdfi. Ed. Marsden Jones. 3 vols. London, 1966
al-Washsha/ Abu 1 -Tayyib Muhammad ibn Ahmad (d. 325/936). Kitdb al-fddil.
British Library MS. Or. 6499

Wilkinson, John. Jerusalem Pilgrims before the Crusades. Warminster, 1977

Yaqut ibn ‘Abd Allah al-Hamawi, Abu ‘Abd Allah (d. 626/ 1 229). Muyam al-buldan.

Ed. Ferdinand Wiistenfeld. 6 vols. Leipzig, 1 866—73
Zuhayr ibn Abi Sulma (d. c. 609). Dhvdn , with the commentary of Tha'lab (d.
291/904). Cairo, 1363/1944

Secondary Sources

‘Abd al-Ghani, ‘A. (1993) Ta’rikh al-Hlra fi l-jdhiliya iva-l-Isldm. Damascus
Abel, F.-M. (1938) ‘File de Jotabe’, RB 47: 510—38

Abu Wandl, Riyad, et al. (1996) Tsd rva-Maryam fi l-Qurdn wa-l-tafdsir. Amman
al-Afghanl, S. (i960) Aswdq a/Aarab fi l-jdhiliya wa-l-Islam. Damascus
Ahlwardt, W. (1872) Bemerkungen fiber die Achtheit der alten arabischen Gedichte.
Greifswald

1072 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Ahrens, K. (1930) ‘Christliches im Qoran’, ZDMG 84: 1 5 — 68, 148—90
Altheim, F. and Stiehl, R. (1957) Finanygeschichte der Spdtantike. Frankfurt am Main
Altheim, F. and Stiehl, R. (1 971-3) Christentum am Roten Meer. 2 vols. Berlin
Arafat, W. (1 9 5 8) ‘Early critics of the authenticity of the poetry of the Sira’, BSOAS
21: 453-63

Arafat, W. (1965) ‘An aspect of the forger’s art in early Islamic poetry’, BSOAS 28:
477-82

Arafat, W. (1968) ‘Fact and fiction in the history of pre-Islamic idol-worship’, IQ
1 2: 9—21

Baity, J. (1989) ‘Mosai'ques antiques de Syrie et de Jordanie’, in M. Piccirillo,
Mosaiques by^antines de Jordanie (Lyons) 149-60
Bashear, S. (1984) Muqaddima ild l-ta’rikh al-dkhar. Jerusalem
Bashear, S. (1997 ) Arabs and Others in Early Islam. Princeton
Bellamy, J. A. (1985) ‘A new reading of the Namarah Inscription ’,/-! OS 105: 31—51
Birkeland, H. (1956) The Ford Guideth: Studies on Primitive Islam. Oslo
Blachere, R. (195 2-66) Histoire de la litterature arabe des origines a la fin du XI e siecle de
J.-C. 3 vols. Paris

Blachere, R. (1956) ‘Regards sur l’“acculturation” des arabo-musulmans jusque
vers 40/661’, Arabica 3: 247—65

Bousquet, G. H. (1954) ‘Un explication marxiste de l’lslam par un ecclesiastique
episcopalien’, Hesperis 41:23 1-47
Bowersock, G. W. (1983) Roman Arabia. Cambridge, MA

Bowman, J. (1967) ‘The debt of Islam to Monophysite Christianity’, in E. C. B.

MacLaurin (edi). Essays in Honour of G. W. Thatcher (Sydney) 201—40
Brock, S. (1982) ‘Christians in the Sasanid empire: a case of divided loyalties’, in S.
Mews (ed.). Religion and National Identity (Studies in Church History 18)
(Oxford) 1 -1 9

Brunschvig, R. (1976) ‘Coup d’oeil sur l’histoire des foires a travers l’lslam’, in his
Etudes d’islamologie (Paris) 1.1 13-44

Butzer, K. W (1957) ‘Der Llmweltfaktor in der grossen arabischen Expansion’,
Saeculum 8: 359—71

Caskel, W. (1927—30) ‘Die einheimischen Quellen zur Geschichte Nord-Arabiens
vor dem Islam’, Islamica 3: 331—41

Caskel, W. (1930) ‘Aijam al-‘arab. Studien zur altarabischen Epik’, Islamica 3: fasc. 5
(Erganzungsheft), 1-99

Caskel, W. (195 3) Die Bedeutung derBeduinen in der Geschichte derAraber. Cologne and
Opladen

Caskel, W (1962) ‘Der arabische Stamm vor dem Islam und seine gesellschaftliche
und juridische Organisation’, in Dalla tribu alio stato (Rome) 139—49
Caskel, W (1966) Gamharat an-Nasab. Das genealogische Werk des Hisam ibn Muhammad
al-Kalbl 2 vols. Leiden

Caton, S. C. (1990) ‘Anthropological theories of tribe and state formation in the
Middle East: ideology and the semiotics of power’, in P. S. Khoury and J.
Kostiner (eds.), Tribes and State Formation in the Middle East (Berkeley) 74—108
Charles, H. (1936) Le christianisme des arabes nomades sur le limes et dans le desert syro-
mesopotamien aux alentours de I’hegire. Paris
Chelhod, J. (1971) Ee droit dans la societe bedouine. Paris

CH. 22 c: THE ARABS

io 73

Christensen, A. (1944) L’lran sous les sassanides. 2nd edn. Copenhagen
Christides, V. (1 972) ‘The names Arabes, Sarakenoi, etc. and their false Byzantine ety-
mologies’, BZ Gy. 329—33

Conrad, L. I. (1981) ‘The jgwwof medieval Islam: some implications for the social
history of the Near East’, Al-Abhdth icy. 7—23
Conrad, L. I. (1987a) ‘Abraha and Muhammad: some observations apropos of
chronology and literary topoi in the early Arabic historical tradition’, BSOAS
50: 225—40

Conrad, L. I. (1987b) ‘Al-Azdi’s History of the Arab Conquests in Bilad al-Sham:
some historiographical observations’, in M. A. Bakhit (ed.). Proceedings of the
Second Symposium on the History of Bilad al-Shdm during the Early Islamic Period up
to 40 A.H. / 640 A.D.: The Fourth International Conference on the History of Bilad al-
Sham (Amman) 1.28—62

Conrad, L. I. (1994) ‘Epidemic disease in central Syria in the late sixth century:
some new insights form the verse of Hassan ibn Thabit’, BMGS 18: 12—58
Conrad, L. I. (1996a) ‘The Arabs and the Colossus’, fRAS, third series, 6: 165-87
Conrad, L. I. (1996b) ‘Die Pest und ihr Umfeld im Nahen Osten des friihen
Mittelalters’, Derlslam 73: 81—112

Conrad, L. I. (1998) ‘Futuh’, in J. Meisami and P. Starkey (eds.), Con/panion to Arabic
Literature (London) 237-40

Conrad, L. I. (forthcoming) Muhammadanea Edessensis: Muhammad and the Faith of
Islam in Christian Discussions in Early Abbasid Edessa. Princeton
Conrad, L. I. (forthcoming) ‘The early Arab urban foundations in Iraq and
Egypt: implications for trade and exchange’, in L. I. Conrad and G. R. D.
King (eds.). The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East, v: Trade and Exchange.
Princeton

Cook, M. (1983) Muhammad. Oxford

Crone, P. (1986) ‘The tribe and the state’, inj. A. Hall (ed.). States in History (Oxford)
48-77

Crone, P. (1987) Meccan Trade and the Rise of Islam. Oxford

Crone, P. (1992) ‘Serjeant and Meccan trade’, Arabica 39: 216-40

Crone, P. (1 993) ‘Tribes and states in the Middle East \JRAS, third series, 3:35 3-76

Crone, P. (1994) ‘The first-century concept of Higrd , Arabica 41: 352-87

Crone, P. and Cook, M. (1977) Hagarism. Cambridge

Delehaye, H. (1927): see Sophronius, under Sources

Djai't, H. (1986) Al-Ktifa: naissance de la ville islamique. Paris

Donner, F. M. (1977) ‘Mecca’s food supplies and Muhammad’s boycott’, JESHO
20: 249—66

Donner, F. M. (1981) The Early Islamic Conquests. Princeton

Donner, F. M. (1989) ‘The role of nomads in the Near East in late antiquity
(400— 800 c.e.)’, in F. M. Clover and R. S. Humphreys (eds.), Tradition and
Innovation in Fate Antiquity (Madison) 73—85
Donner, F. M. (1 998) Narratives of Islamic Origins: The Beginnings of Islamic Historical
Writing. Princeton

Dostal, W. (1979) Der Markt von SaAa. Vienna

Dostal, W (1984) ‘Towards a model of cultural evolution in Arabia’, in A. T. Ansary
(ed.), Studies in the History of Arabia , 11: Pre-Islamic Arabia (Riyadh) 185-91

1074 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD
Dunlop, D. M. (1957) ‘Sources of gold and silver according to al-Hamdanf, SI 8:

2 9- 49

Dussaud, R. (1955 ) La penetration des arabes en Syrie avant I Islam. Paris
Eph'al, I. (1984) The Ancient Arabs: Nomads on the Borders of the Fertile Crescent, 9th— fth
Centuries B. C. Jerusalem

Fahd, T. (ed.) (1989) L’Arabie preislamique et son environnement historique et culture!.

Leiden

Fares, B. (1932) L’honneur che % les arabes avant F Islam. Paris

Foss, C. (1975) ‘The Persians in Asia Minor and the end of antiquity’, EHR 90:
7 2I— 47

Foss, C. (1 977) ‘Late antique and Byzantine Ankara’, DOP 3 1 : 29—87
Frye, R. N. (1983) ‘Bahrain under the Sasanians’, in D. T. Potts (ed.), Dilmun: New
Studies in the Archaeology and History of Bahrain (Berlin) 167-70
Fiick,J. (1950) Arabiya. Untersuchungen vytr arabischen Sprach- und Stilgeschichte. Berlin
Fuck, J. (1981) Arabische Kultur und Islam im Mittelalter: Ausgewahlte Schriften. Weimar
Gabrieli, F. (ed.) (1959a) L’ antica societd beduina. Rome

Gabrieli, F. (1959b) ‘La letteratura beduina preislamica’, in Gabrieli (ed.), E antica
societd beduina (Rome) 95-114

Gaube, H. (1984) ‘Arabs in sixth-century Syria: some archaeological observations’,
in Proceedings of the First International Conference on Bilad al-Sham (Amman) 61-6
Geiger, A. (1833) Was hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthume aujgenommen? Bonn
Gellner, E. (1973) ‘The concept of kinship’, in his Cause and Meaning in the Social
Sciences, ed. I. C. Jarvie andj. Agassi (London) 163—82
Gibb, H. A. R. (1962) ‘Pre-Islamic monotheism in Arabia’, HThR 5 5: 269—80
Goitein, S. D. (1968) Studies in Islamic History and Institutions. Leiden
Goldziher, I. (1967—71) Muslim Studies, ed. and trans. S. M. Stern and C. R. Barber.
2 vols. London

Graf, D. and O’Connor, M. (1977) ‘The origin of the term Saracen and the Rawaffa
inscription’, BS 4: 52—66

Griffith, S. H. (1985) ‘The Gospel in Arabic: an inquiry into its appearance in the
first Abbasid century’, OC 69: 1 26—67

Groom, N. (1981) Frankincense and Myrrh: A Study of the Arabian Incense Trade.
London and New York

von Grunebaum, G. E. (1963) ‘The nature of Arab unity before Islam’, Arabica 10:
5— 2 3

Hammur, T.M. (1979) Aswaq aHarab: ' ard adabi ta’rikhi li-l-aswaq al-mamimiya al-
c amnia ‘ inda I- ‘arab. Beirut

Hawting, G. R. (1982) ‘The origins of the Islamic sanctuary at Mecca’, in G. H. A.

Juynboll (ed.). Studies on the First Century of Islamic Society (Carbondale) 25-47
Henninger, J. (1966) ‘Altarabische Genealogie (zu einem neuerschienenen Werk)’,
AnthroposG 1: 852-70

Hoyland, R. (1997) Seeing Islam as Others Saw It: A Survey and Evaluation of Christian,
Jewish and Zoroastrian Writings on Early Islam. Princeton
Husayn, T. (1927) Fi l-adab al-jdhill Cairo, 1345/1927
Izutsu, T. (1966) Ethico-Religious Concepts in the Quran. Montreal
Jabbur, J. S. (1959) ‘Abu-al-Duhur: the Ruwalah Utfah’, in J. Kritzeck and R. B.
Winder (eds.), The World of Islam: Studies in Honour of Philip K Hitti (London)
195-8

CH. 22 c: THE ARABS

IO 75

Jabbur,J. S. (1995) The Bedouins and the Desert Aspects of Nomadic Life in the Arab East,
trans. L. I. Conrad, ed. S. J. Jabbur and L. I. Conrad. Albany
Jacob, G. (1 897) Altarabisches Beditineneleben. Berlin

Jones, A. H. M. (195 5) ‘The economic life of the towns of the Roman empire’,
Recueils de la Societe Jean Bodin 161-92
Kaegi, W. E. (1992) Byzantium and the Early Islamic Conquests. Cambridge
Khoury,P. S. and Kostiner,J. (eds.) (1990) Tribes and State Formation in the Middle East.
Berkeley

Kister, M. J. (1965) ‘The market of the Prophet’, fESHO 8: 272—6
Kister, M. J. (1968) ‘Al-Htra: some notes on its relations with Arabia’, Arabica 1 5:
143-69

Kister, M.J. (1979) ‘Some reports concerning al-Ta’if’,/T 4 /i: 61-91
Krauss, S. (1916) ‘Talmudische Nachrichten uber Arabien’, ZDMG 70: 321—5 3
Kubiak, W B. (1987) Al-Fustat: Its Foundation and Early Urban Development. Cairo
Lammens, H. (1928) LArabie occidentale avant I’hegire. Beirut
Lancaster, W (1997) The Rwala Bedouin Today. 2nd edn. Prospect Heights, IL
Lecker, M. (1986) ‘On the markets of Medina (Yathrib) in pre-Islamic and early
Islamic times’,/AT 7 8: 133-47

Lecker, M. (1993) ‘Idol worship in pre-Islamic Medina (Yathrib)’, Le Museon 106:
331-46

Lecker, M. (1994) ‘Kinda on the eve of Islam and during the Ridda’ , fRAS, third
series, 4: 333-56

MacAdam, H. I. (1983) ‘Epigraphy and village life in southern Syria during the
Roman and early Byzantine periods’, Berytus 31: 103-15
MacAdam, H. I. (1989) ‘Strabo, Pliny the Elder and Ptolemy of Alexandria: three
views of ancient Arabia and its peoples’, in T. Fahd (ed.), LArabie preislamique
et son environnement historique et culturel (Leiden) 289—320
Macdonald, M. C. A. (1993) ‘Nomads and the Hawran in the late Hellenistic and
Roman periods: a reassessment of the epigraphic evidence’, Syria 70: 303—41 3
Macdonald, M. C. A. (1995a) ‘North Arabia in the first millennium bce’, in J. M.

Sasson (ed.), Civilisations of the Ancient Near East (New York) 11.1355-69
Macdonald, M. C. A. (1995 b) ‘Quelques reflexions sur les saracenes, l’inscription
de Rawwafa et l’armee romaine’, in H. Lozachmead (ed.), Presence arabe dans le
croissant fertile avant I’hegire (Paris) 93—101

Mayerson, P. (1963) ‘The desert of southern Palestine according to Byzantine
sources’ , Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 107: 160-72
Meeker, M. E. (1979) Literature and Violence in North Arabia. Cambridge
Michaud, H. (i960) Jesus selon le Coran. Neuchatel

Millar, F. (1993a) ‘Hagar, Ishmael, Josephus and the origins of Islam’, JJS 44: 23-45
Millar, F. (1993b) The Roman Near East, yi BC— AD yyy. Cambridge, MA
Morony, M. G. (1984) Iraq after the Muslim Conquest. Princeton
Muller, WW. (1 978) Wei branch. Ein arabisches Produkt und seine Bedeutung in derAntike,
in Pauly— Wissowa, RE, Supp. xv. Munich
Musil, A. (1928) The Manners and Customs of the Rwala Bedouins. New York
Nagel, T. (1 967) Die Qisas al-anbiya. Ein Beitrag sur arabischen Literaturgeschichte. Bonn
Nau,F. (1933) Les arabes chretiens de Mesopotamia et de Syne du Idle an \AIIe siecle. Paris
Nelson, C. (ed.) (1970) The Desert and the Sown: Nomads in the Wider Society. Berkeley
Newby, G. D. (1988) A History of the Jews of Arabia. Columbia, SC

1076 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Nicholson, R. A. (1907) A Literary History of the Arabs. London
Noldeke, T. (1879) Geschichte der Perser undAraber %ur Zeit der Sasaniden. Leiden
Noldeke, T. (1887) Die ghassdnischen Fiirsten ans dem Hanse Gafna’s. Berlin
O’Connor, M. P. (1986) ‘The etymology of Saracen in Aramaic and pre-Islamic
Arabic contexts’, in P. Freeman and D. Kennedy (eds.), The Defence of the
Roman and Byzantine East (Oxford) 11.603—32
Olinder, G. (1 9 27) The Kings of Kinda of the Family of Akil al-Murdr. Lund and Leipzig
Papathomopoulos, M. (1984) ‘Greek sources for the history of the Arabs in the
pre-Islamic period’, Graeco-Arabica 3: 203—6
Parrinder, G. (1965) Jesus in the Qur an. London
Pellat, C. (1953) Le milieu basrien etla formation de Gahisy Paris
Pellat, C. (1962-3) ‘Concept of Hilm in Islamic ethics’, Bulletin of the Institute of
Islamic Studies 6-7: 1-1 2
Pellat, C. (1973) Risala fi l-hilm. Beirut

Peters, F. E. (1984) ‘The Arabs on the frontier of Syria before Islam’, in Proceedings
of the First International Conference on Bildd al-Shdm (Amman) 141—73
Peters, F. E. (1988) ‘The commerce of Mecca before Islam’, in F. Kazemi and R.
D. McChesney (eds.), A Way Prepared: Essays in Honor of Richard Bayly Winder
(New York) 3-26

Rippin, A. (1990—3) Muslims: Their Beliefs and Practices. 2 vols. London
Rippin, A. (1991) ‘RHMNN and the Hantfs’, in W Hallaq and D. P. Little (eds.),
Islamic Studies Presented to Charles J. Adams (Leiden) 1 5 3—68
Robin, C. (1991) L’Arabie antique de Karb’il a Mahomet: nouvelles donnees sur I’histoire des
arabes grace aux inscriptions. Aix-en-Provence
Robinson, N. (1991) Christ in Islam and Christianity: The Representation of Jesus in the
Qur an and the Classical Muslim Commentaries. London
Rosenthal, E. I. J. (1961) Judaism and Islam. London and New York
Rothstein, G. (1 899) Die Dynastie der Lahmiden in al-Hira. Berlin
Rotter, G. (1 99 3) ‘Der veneris dies im vorislamischen Mekka, eine neue Deutung des
namens “Europa” und eine Erklarung fur kobar= Venus’, Der Islam 70:
112—32

Rubin, U. (1981) Al-Samad and the High God’, Der Islam 61: 197-214
Rubin, U. (1986) ‘The Ka'ba: aspects of its ritual functions and position in pre-
Islamic and early Islamic times’, JSAI 8: 97—131
Rubin, U. (1990) Hanifiyya and Ka'ba: an inquiry into the Arabian pre-Islamic
background of Din Ibrahim', JSAI 13: 85-112
Rubin, U. (1995) The Eye of the Beholder: The Life of Muhammad as Viewed by the Early
Muslims — a Textual Analysis. Princeton
Sartre, M. (1982) ‘Tribus et clans dans le Hawran antique’, Syria 59: 77-92
Schafer, P. (1997 ) Judeophobia: Attitudes towards the Jews in the Ancient World.
Cambridge, MA

Schick, R. (1995) The Christian Communities of Palestine from Byzantine to Islamic Rule:
A Historical and Archaeological Study. Princeton
Schneider, D. M. (1984) A Critique of the Study of Kinship. Ann Arbor
Segal, J. B. (1984) ‘Arabs in Syriac literature before the rise of Islam’ JSAI 4: 89-123
Serjeant, R. B. (1962) Haram and Hawtah: the sacred enclave in Arabia’, in A.
Badawi (ed.), Melanges Taha Husain (Cairo) 41—; 8

CH. 23: THE BALKANS AND GREECE, 420— 602 io 77

Serjeant, R. B. (1990) ‘Meccan trade and the rise of Islam: misconceptions and
flawed polemics’, JAOS no: 472-86

Seyrig, P. (1941) ‘Postes romains sur la route de Medine’, Syria 22: 218-23
Shahid, I. (1958) ‘The last days of Salih’, Arabica 5: 145—58
Shahid, I. (1971) The Martyrs of Najrdn: New Documents. Brussels
Shahid, I. (1984) Rome and the Arabs: A Prolegomenon to the Study of Byzantium and the
Arabs. Washington, DC

Shahid, I. (1989) Byzantium and the Arabs in the Fifth Century. Washington, DC
Shahid, I. (1995) Byyantium and the Arabs in the Sixth Century. 2 vols. Washington, DC
Shaw, B. D. (1982—3) “‘Eaters of flesh, drinkers of milk”: the ancient
Mediterranean ideology of the pastoral nomad’, Ancient Society 13-14: 5—31
Simon, R. (1967) ‘L’inscription Ry 506 et la prehistoire de la Mecque’, AO 20:
525-37

Simon, R. (1975) A mekkai kereskedelem kialaknlasa esjellege. Budapest
Simon, R. (1 9 8 9) Meccan Trade and Islam: Problems of Origin and Structure, trans. F. Sos.
Budapest

Smith, S. (1954) ‘Events in Arabia in the sixth entury a.d.’, BSOAS 16: 425—68
Stewart, F. (1994) Honor. Chicago

Sweet, L. E. (1965) ‘Camel raiding of north Arabian bedouin: a mechanism of
ecological adaptation’, American Anthropologist 67: 1132-50
Tapper, R. (1990) ‘Anthropologists, historians, and tribespeople on tribe and state
formation in the Middle East’, in P. S. Ivhoury andj. Kostiner (eds.), Tribes and
State Formation in the Middle East (Berkeley) 48—73
Teixidor, J. (1977) The Pagan God: Popular Religion in the Greco-Roman Near East.
Princeton

Trimingham, J. S. (1979) Christianity amongthe Arabs in Pre-Islamic Times. London and
New York

Villiers, A. (1 940) Sons of Sindbad. London
Watt, W. M. (1953) Muhammad at Mecca. Oxford

Watt, W M. (1979) ‘The Qur’an and belief in a “High God”’, Derls/am 56: 205-1 1
Welch, A. T. (1979) ‘Allah and other supernatural beings: the emergence of the
Qur’anic doctrine of Tawhld’ ,fAAR 47: 733-58
Wellhausen, J. (1897) Reste arabischen Heidentums. 2nd edn. Berlin
Whitby, M. (1992) ‘Greek historical writing after Procopius: variety and vitality’, in
Averil Cameron and L. I. Conrad (eds.) , The Fate Antique and Early Islamic Near
East, 1: Problems in the Literary Source Material (Princeton) 25—80
Whitehouse, D. and Williamson, A. (1 973) ‘Sasanian maritime trade’, Iran 1 1 : 29-48
Whittow, M. (1999) ‘Rome and the Jafnids: writing the history of a 6th-c. tribal
dynasty’, inj. Humphrey (ed.), The Roman and Byzantine Near East 2. Some Recent
Archaeological Research, JRA supp. series 31 (Portsmouth, RI) 207—24

CH. 23: THE BALKANS AND GREECE, 420— 602

Adshead, K. (1990) ‘Procopius’ poliorcetica-. continuities and discontinuities’, in G.

Clarke (ed.), Reading the Past in Late Antiquity (Rushcutters Bay, NSW) 93-119
Alcock, S. E. (1989) ‘Roman imperialism in the Greek landscape, 200 b.c.— 200
a . d .’, fRA 2: 5-34

1078 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD

Avramea, A. and Feissel, D. (1987) ‘Inventaires en vue d’un recueil des inscriptions
historiques de Byzance. III. Inscriptions de Thessalie (a l’exception des
Meteores)’, T&MBy^ir. 357—98

Baratte, F. (1984) ‘Les temoignages archeologiques de la presence Slave au sud du
Danube’, in Villes etpeuplement (1984) 11— 61
Bavant, B. (1984) ‘La ville dans le nord de rillyricum (Pannonie, Mesie I, Dacie et
Dardanie)’, in Villes etpeuplement (1984) 245-88
Besevliev, V. (1970) Zur Dentung der Kastellnamen in Prokops Werk ‘De Aedificiis’.
Amsterdam

Bintliff, J. M. and Snodgrass, A. M. (1985) ‘The Cambridge/Bradford Boeotian
expedition: the first four years’, JFA 12: 123—61
Blockley, R. C. (1981, 1983) The Fragmentary Classicising Historians of the Cater Roman
Empire 1— 11 (ARCA 10, 6). Liverpool

Blockley, R. C. (1992) East Roman Foreign Policy, Formation and Conduct from Diocletian
to Anastasius (ARCA 30). Leeds
Browning, R. (1975) Byzantium and Bulgaria. London

Burns, T. S. (1980) The Ostrogoths: Kingship and Society (Historia Einzelschriften 26).
Wiesbaden

Burns, T. S. (1984) A History of the Ostrogoths. Bloomington, IN

Cameron, Alan and Long, J. (1993) Barbarians and Politics at the Court of Arcadius.

Berkeley and Los Angeles
Cameron, Averil (1970 )Agathias. Oxford

Charanis, P. (1950) ‘The Chronicle of Monemvasia and the question of the
Slavonic settlements in Greece’, DOP 5: 139—66
Clover, F. (1973) ‘Geiseric and Attila’, Hist. 23: 104-17
Cormack, R. (1985) Writing in Gold: Byzantine Society and its Icons. London
Croke, B. (1978) ‘Hormisdas and the late Roman walls of Thessalonika’, GRBS 19:
251-8

Croke, B. (1980) ‘Justinian’s Bulgar victory celebration’, By^slavica 41: 188—95
Croke, B. (1981) ‘Thessalonika ’s early Byzantine palaces’, By%. 51: 475—83
Croke, B. (1982) ‘Mundo the Gepid: from freebooter to Roman general’, Chiron 1 2:
125-35

Croke, B. (1983) ‘The context and date of Priscus fragment 6’, CP 78: 297—308
Dagron, G. (1984) ‘Les villes dans l’Ulyricuni protobyzantin’, in l illes et peuplement
(1984) 1—20

Dunn, A. (1994) ‘The transition from polls to kastron in the Balkans (III— VIIcc.):
general and regional perspectives’, BMGS 1 8: 60-80
Duval, N. and Popovic, V. (1984) Caricin Gradl (Coll, de l’Ecole Frangaise de Rome
75). Rome

Eadie, J. W (1982) ‘City and countryside in late Roman Pannonia: the regio
Sirmiensis’, in Hohlfelder (ed.) (1982) 25-42
Farkas, C. (1993—4) ‘Rauberhorden in Thrakien. Eine unbeachtete Quelle zur
Geschichte der Zeit des Kaisers Maurikios’, BZ 86-7: 462—9
Feissel, D. and Philippidis-Braat, A. (1985) ‘Inventaires en vue d’un recueil des
inscriptions historiques de Byzance. IV. Inscriptions du Peloponnese (a l’ex-
ception de Mistra)’, T<&MBy ^ 10: 267—395

CH. 23: THE BALKANS AND GREECE, 420— 602 io 79

Ferjancic, B. (1984) ‘Invasions et installations des Slaves dans les Balkans’, in Villes
etpenplement (1984) 85—109

Fowden, G. (1988) ‘City and mountain in late Roman Attica’, JHS 108: 48—59
Fowden, G. (1990) ‘The Athenian agora and the progress of Christianity’, JRA 3:
494-501

Frantz, A. (1988) The Athenian Agora XXIV. Late Antiquity: A.D. 267—700. Princeton
Germanen, Hunen und Awaren, Schatge der I '’olkerwanderungsgeit (1987) (Germanisches
Nationalmuseum). Nuremberg
Gimbutas, M. (1971) The Slavs. London

Gregory, T. E. (1982) ‘Fortification and urban design in early Byzantine Greece’,
in Hohlfelder (ed.) (1982) 43—64

Gregory, T. E. (1992) ‘Kastro and diateichisma as responses to early Byzantine
frontier collapse’, By%. 62: 235-5 3

Gregory, T. E. (1993) An early Byzantine (Dark Age) settlement at Isthmia’, in
Gregory (ed.), The Corinthia in the Roman Period (JRA suppl. ser. 8) 149—59
Haussig, FI. W. (1953) ‘Theophylakts Exkurs fiber die skythischen Volker’, By%. 23:
275-462

Heather, P. (1989) ‘Cassiodorus and the rise of the Amals: genealogy and the
Goths under Hun domination’, fRSj<): 103-28
Heather, P. (1995) ‘The Huns and the end of the Roman empire in western
Europe’, EHR 1 10: 4—41

Heather, P. and Matthews, J. (1991) The Goths in the Fourth Century. Liverpool
Hoddinott, R. F. (1963) Early Byzantine Churches in Macedonia and Southern Serbia.
London

Hoddinott, R. F. (1975) Bulgaria in Antiquity. London

Hohlfelder, R. L. (ed.) (1982) City, Town and Countryside in the Early Byzantine Era.
New York

Howard-Johnston, J. D. (1983) ‘Urban continuity in the Balkans in the Early Middle
Ages’, in Poulter (ed.) (1983a) 242-54

Kollautz, A. and Miyakawa, H. (1970) Geschichte nnd Kultur eines volkenvan-
derungs^eitlichen Nomadenvolkes. Die Jou-Jan der Mongo lei und die Awaren in
Mitteleuropa. Klagenfurt

Ivovrig, 1.(1955) ‘Contribution au probleme de l’occupation de la Hongroie per les
Avares ’ , Acta Archaeologica 6: 163-91

Laszlo, G. (1955) ‘Etudes archeologiques sur l’histoire de la societe des Avares’,
Archaeologica Edungarica 34

Lemerle, P. (1954) ‘Invasions et migrations dans les Balkans depuis la fin de
l’epoque romaine jusqu’au Vile siecle’, RH 21 1: 264-308
Lemerle, P. (ed.) (1981) Les plus anciens recuei/s des Miracles de Saint Demetrius et la pene-
tration des Slaves dans les Balkans 2. Le commentaire. Paris
Lemerle, P. (1984) ‘Conclusion’, in Villes et peuplement { 1984) 501-21
Lengyel, A. and Radan, G. T. B. (1980) The Archaeology of Roman Pannonia.
Budapest

Maenchen-Helfen, J. O. (1973) The World of the Finns. Berkeley and Los Angeles
Metcalf, D. M. (1984) ‘The mint of Thessalonica in the early Byzantine period’, in
F Hies et peuplement (1984) 1 1 1-29

1080 IV. THE PROVINCES AND THE NON-ROMAN WORLD
Mocsy, A. (1974) Pannonia and Upper Moesia. London

Musset, L. (1975) The Germanic Invasions: The Making of Europe AD 400— 600. London
Obolensky, D. (1971) The 'Byzantine Commonwealth. London

Pohl. W (1980) ‘Die Gepiden und die gentes an der mittleren Donau nach dem
Zerfall des Attilareiche’, in Wolfram and Dain (eds.) (1980) 239—305
Popovic, VI. (1975) ‘Les temoins archeologiques des invasions avaro-slaves dans
l’lllyricum byzantin’, MEFR 87: 445—504
Popovic, VI. (1978) ‘La descente des Koutrigours, des Slaves et des Avars vers la
mer Egee: le temoignage de l’archeologie’, CRAI 596—648
Popovic, VI. (ed.) (1981) ‘Note sur l’habitat paleoslave’, in Lemerle (ed.) (1981)
235-41

Popovic, VI. (1984) ‘Byzantins, Slaves et autochthones dans les provinces de
Prevalitane et Nouvelle Spire’, in Villes etpeuplement (1984) 181-243
Poulter, A. G. (ed.) (1983 a } Ancient Bulgaria. Nottingham

Poulter, A. G. (1983b) ‘Town and country in Moesia Inferior’, in Poulter (ed.)
(1983a) 74-118

Runnels, C. N. and van Audel, T. H. (1987) ‘The evolution of settlement in the
Southern Argolid, Greece: an economic explanation’, Hesperia 56: 303-34
Sorlin, I. (1981) ‘Slaves et Sklavenes avant et dans les miracles de Saint Demetrius’,
in Lemerle (ed.) (1981) 219—34

Spieser, J. M. (1973) ‘Inventaires en vue d’un recueil des inscriptions historiques de
Byzance. 1. Les inscriptions de Thessalonique’, T&MBy ^ 5: 145—80
Spieser, J. M. (1984a) Thessalonique et ses monuments du IVe au T Te siecle. Contribution a
l’ etude dime ville paleochretienne. Paris

Spieser, J. M. (19 84b) ‘La ville en Grece du Hie au Vile siecle’, in I Hies et peuplement
(1984) 315-40

Teodor, D. G. (1984) ‘Origines et voies de penetration des Slaves au sud du Bas-
Danube (Vie— Vile siecles)’, in Villes etpeuplement (1984) 63—84
Thompson, E. A. (1948) The History of Attila and the Huns. Oxford
Toynbee, A. (1973) Constantine Porphyrogenitus and his World. Oxford
Trombley, F. R. (1989) ‘Boeotia in late antiquity: epigraphic evidence on society,
economy and Christianization’, in Harmut Beister and John Buckler (eds.),
Boiotika. I brtrage vom /. Int. Bootien-Kolloquium %u Ehren von Siegfried Leujfer, Inst
f alte Geschichte, Ludmg-Maximiliens-Universifdt Miinchen, iq—ij Juni, 1986
(Munich) 215—28

Velkov, V. (1977) Cities in Thrace and Dacia in Tate Antiquity. Amsterdam
T Hies et peuplement dans ITllyricum protobyyantin (1984) (Collection de l’Ecole
Frangaise de Rome lxxvii). Rome

Whitby, M. (1985) ‘The long walls of Constantinople’, 55: 560-83
Wilkes, J. J. (1969) Dalmatia. London

Wolfram, H. (1985) Treasures on the Danube: Barbarian Invaders and the Roman
Inheritance. Vienna

Wolfram, H. (1988) History of the Goths (trans. Thomas J. Dunlap). Berkeley and Los
Angeles

Wolfram, H. and Dain, F. (eds.) (1980) Die Volker an der mittleren und unteren Donau
im funften und sechsten Jahrhundert (Ost. Akad. der Wiss., phil.-hist. Kl.,
Denkschr. 145) Vienna

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

1081

Wozniak, F. E. (1982) ‘The justinianic fortification of interior Illyricum’, in
Hohlfelder (ed.) (1982) 199-209

Zasterova, B. (1971) Les Avares et les Slaves dans la Tactiqne de Maurice. (Rozpravy
Ceskoslovenske akadamie ved, r. spol. lxxxi/ 3)

Zuckerman, C. (1994) ‘L’empire d’Orient et les Huns: notes surPriscus’, T&MBj %
12: 1 59—82

PART V: RELIGION AND CULTURE (CHS. 24-31)

Aherne, C. M. (1949) T a lerio of Bieryo. Washington, DC

Akerstrom-Hougen, G. (1974) The Calendar and Hunting Mosaics of the Villa of the
Falconer in Argos. Stockholm
Allen, P. (1993) ‘Monophysiten’, THE 23: 219—33
Anderson, J. G. C. and Cumont, F. (1910) Studia Pontica. Brussels
Argoud, G, Callot, O. and Helly, B. (1980) Une residence by^antine, I’Huileries
(Salamine de Chypre XI). Paris

Armstrong, A. H. (ed.) (1967) Cambridge History of Later Greek and Early Medieval
Philosophy. Cambridge

Asgari, N. (1995) ‘The Proconnesian production of architectural elements in late
antiquity, based on evidence from the marble quarries’, in Mango and Dagron
(eds.) (1995) 263—88

Athanassiadi, P. (1993) ‘Persecution and response in late paganism: the evidence of
Damascius’,///Lii3: 1—29

Athanassiadi, P. (1999) ‘ Damascius . The Philosophical History. Athens
Bakhtin, M. M. (1981) The Dialogic Imagination. Austin, TX

Baity, J. (ed.) (1984) Aspects de l’ architecture domestique d’Apamee (Apamee de Syrie.

Bilan des recherches archeologiques 1973—1979). Brussels
Barasch, M. (1 992) Icon: Studies in the History of an Idea. New York
Barber, C. (1990) ‘The imperial panels at San Vitale: a reconsideration’, BMGS 14:
19-42

Barber, C. (1991) ‘The Koimesis Church, Nicaea: the limits of representation on
the eve of Iconoclasm \JOB 41: 43—60

Bardill, J. (1997) ‘The palace of Lausus and nearby monuments in Constantinople:
a topographical study’, AJA 101: 67-95

Baus, K., Beck, H.-G, Ewig, E., Vogt, H. J. (1980) The Imperial Church from
Constantine to the Early Middle Ages (=Jedin, H. (ed.) (1980) History of the Church
11, London) (tr. from Handbuch der Kirchengeschichte (1973/75) ii/ 1-2, Freiburg-
im-Br.)

Bavant, B., Kondic, V. and Spieser, J.-M. (eds.) (1990) Caricin Grad 11. Belgrade and
Rome

Baynes, N. H. (1 960) ‘The thought- world of east Rome’, in Baynes, Byzantine Studies
and Other Essays. London

Beck, H. G. (1950) The Pastoral Care of Souls in South-East France during the Sixth
Century (Analecta Gregoriana 51). Rome

Bell, D. N. (tr.) (1983) The Fife of Shenoute by Besa (Cistercian Studies 73). Kalamazoo
Bell, G. (1982) The Churches and Monasteries of the Tur Abdin (ed. and annotated M.
Mundell Mango). London

1082

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

di Berardino, A. (ed.) (1992) Encyclopedia of the Early Church (tr. from the Italian by
Adrian Walford). 2 vols. Cambridge (= Diffonario Patristico e di Antichita
Cristiana, Casale Monferrato 1983/88)

Bianchi Bandinelli, R. (1955) Hellenistic-Byvymtine Miniatures of the Iliad (Ilias
Ambrosiana). Olten

Bieler,L. (1986) Studies on the Life and Legend of StPatrick (edited by Richard Sharpe).
London

Binns,J. (1994) Ascetics and Ambassadors of Christ The Monasteries of Palestine, 314—631.
Oxford

Blumenthal, H. J. (1976) ‘Neoplatonic elements in the De anima commentaries’,
Phronesis 21: 64-87 (=Sorabji (ed.) (1990) 305-24)

Blumenthal, H. J. (1977—8) ‘Neoplatonic interpretations of Aristotle on phantasid.
Review of Metaphysics 31: 242-57

Blumenthal, H. J. (1981) ‘Some Platonist readings of Aristotle’, PCPS n.s. 27: 1— 16
Blumenthal, H. J. (1984) ‘Marinus’ Life of Proclus: Neoplatonist biography’, By%.
54: 469-94

Blumenthal, H. J. (1986) ‘John Philoponus: Alexandrian Platonist?’, Hermes 114:
3 14—3 5

Blumenthal, H. J. (1993) ‘Alexandria as a centre of philosophy in later classical
antiquity’, ICS 18: 307-25

Boesch-Gajano, S. (1991) ‘Uso e abuso del miracolo nella cultura altomedioevale’,
in Les Fonctions des saints dans le monde occidental (Ille—XIIIe siecle) (Collection de
l’Ecole Franqaise de Rome 149) (Rome) 109—22
Bossier, F. and Steel, C. (1972) ‘Priscianus Lydus en de “de anima” van
Pseudo(?)-Simplicius’, Tijdschrift voor filosofie 34: 761-822
Bowersock, G. W, Brown, P. and Grabar, O. (eds.) (1999) Late Antiquity: A Guide to
the Postclassical World. Cambridge, MA

Boyd, S. A. (1992) ‘A “metropolitan” treasure front a church in the provinces: an
introduction to the study of the Sion Treasure’, in Boyd and Mango (eds.)
(1992) 5-38

Boyd, S. A. and Mango, M. M. (eds.) (1992) Ecclesiastical Silver Plate in Sixth-Century
Byzantium. Washington, DC

Brenk, B. (1975) Die friichristlichen Mosaihen in S. Maria Maggiore yu Rom. Wiesbaden
Brenk, B. (1977) Spdtantike und friihes Christentum. Frankfurt
Brennan, B. (1985) ‘The career of Venantius Fortunatus’, Traditio 41: 49-68
Brett, G., Macaulay, W. J. and Stevenson, R. B. K. (1947) The Great Palace of the
Byzantine Emperors. Oxford

Bridel, P. (1986) Le site monastique copte des Kellia. Sources historiques et explorations
archeologiques. Geneva

Brock, S. (1973) ‘Early Syrian asceticism’, Numen 20: 1-19 (= Brock (1984) Syriac
Perspectives on Late Antiquity (London) 1)

Brock, S. (1981) ‘The conversations with the Syrian Orthodox under Justinian
(532)’, OCP 47: 87-121

Brock, S. (1985) ‘A monothelete florilegium in Syriac’, in C. Laga, J. A. Munitiz, L.
van Rompay (z&s). After Chalcedon: Studies in Theology and Church History Offered
to Prof. A. Van Roey for his yoth birthday (Louvain) 35-45

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE 1083

Brock, S. and Harvey, S. A. (1987) Holy Women of the Syrian Orient. Berkeley and Los
Angeles

Brodsky, N. A. (1966) L’iconographie oubliee de l’ Arc Ephesien de Sainte Marie Majeur a
Rome. Brussels

Brown, P. R. L. (1976) ‘Town, village and Holy Man: the case of Syria’, in D. M.
Pippidi (ed.). Assimilation et resistance a la culture greco-romaine dans le monde ancien.
Bucharest 213—20 (= Brown, Society and the Holy 1 5 3—65)

Brown, P. R. L. (1 98 1) The Cult of the Saints: Its Rise and Function in Latin Christianity
(Haskell Lectures on History of Religions, n.s. 2). Chicago
Brown, P. R. L. (1983) ‘The saint as exemplar’, Representations 1: 1-2;

Brown, P. R. L. (1998) ‘The rise and function of the holy man in late antiquity,
1971— 1997 ’, Journal of Early Christian Studies 6: 353-76
Brundage, J. A. (1987) Law, Sex, and Christian Society in Medieval Europe. Chicago and
London

Buckton, D. (ed.) (1994) Byzantium: Treasures of Byzantine Art and Culture from British
Collections. London

Bundy, D. D. (1979) ‘Jacob Baradaeus. The state of research, a review of sources
and a new approach’, Le Museon 91: 45—86
Butler, E. C. (1924) Benedictine Monachism. London (repr. Cambridge and New York,
196 1 )

Butler, H. C. (1919, 1920) Publications of the Princeton University Archaeological
Expedition to Syria in 1904—1909 and 1909 . 11 Architecture. A. Southern Syria (1919) B.
Northern Syria (1920). Leiden

Cameron, Alan (1965) ‘Wandering poets: a literary movement in Byzantine Egypt’,
Historia 14: 470—509 (= Cameron, Literature and Society 1)

Cameron, Alan (1969) ‘The last days of the Academy at Athens’, PCPS n.s. 1 5:
7—29 (= Cameron, Literature and Society xm)

Cameron, Alan (1973) Porphyrins the Charioteer. Oxford

Cameron, Alan (1982) ‘The empress and the poet: paganism and politics at the court
of Theodosius II’, in J. Winkler and G. Williams (eds.), Later Greek Literature
(Yale Classical Studies 27) 217-89 (= Cameron, Literature and Society 111)
Cameron, Averil (1987) ‘The construction of court ritual: the Byzantine Book of
Ceremonies’, in D. Cannadine and S. Price (eds.), Rituals of Royalty (Cambridge)
106—36

Cameron, Averil (1988) ‘Eustratius’ Life of the patriarch Eutychius and the Fifth
Ecumenical Council’, inj. Chrysostomides (ed.), Kathegetria. Essays Presented to
Joan Hussey on her 80th Birthday (Camberley) 225-47
Cameron, Averil (1990) ‘Models of the past in the late sixth century: the Life of
the patriarch Eutychius’, in Clarke, Graeme etal. (eds.), Reading the Past in Late
Antiquity (Rushcutters Bay) 205-33

Cameron, Averil (1992) ‘The language of images: the rise of icons and Christian
representation’, in D. Wood (ed.). The Church and the Arts (Oxford) 1-42
(Studies in Church History 28) (= Cameron, Cultural Changes xii)

Canivet, P. (1977) Le monachisme syrien selon Theodoret de Cyr (Theologie historique
42). Paris

Cavallo, G. (ed.) (1975) Libri, editori epubblico nelmondo antico. Rome and Bari

1084

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Cecchelli, C. (1936—44) La cattedra di Massimiano. Rome
Cecchelli, C. (1967) I mosaici della basilica di S. Maria Maggiore. Rome
Chabot, J. B. (ed. and tr.) (1908, 1933) Documenta ad origines monophysitarum illustran-
das ( CSCO , Scr. Syr. 2.37). Paris, Louvain

Chadwick, H. (1974) ‘John Moschus and his friend Sophronius the Sophist’, JThS
2-Y- 4i-74

Chadwick, H. E. (1976) Priscillian of Avila. Oxford
Chadwick, N. (1955) Poetry and Letters in Early Christian Gaul. London
Chadwick, O. (1950) John Cassian. 2nd edn, 1986. Cambridge
Charpentier, G. (1994) ‘Les bains de Sergilla’, Syria 71: 113-42
Chesnut, G. F. (1986) The First Christian Histories: Eusebius, Socrates, Sogomen,
Theodoret, and Evagrius (2nd edn, revised and enlarged). Macon, GA
Chitty, D. (1966) The Desert a City: An Introduction to the Study of Egyptian and
Palestinian Monasticism under the Christian Empire. Oxford
Chitty, D. (1971) ‘Abba Isaiah’,y 7 Mn.s. 22: 47—72
Clark, E. A. (1984) The Life of Melania the Younger. New York and Toronto
Clark, E. A. (1992) The Origenist Controversy: The Cultural Construction of an Early
Christian Debate. Princeton

Clark, G. (1993) Women in Late Antiquity: Pagan and Christian Lifestyles. Oxford
Clarke, H. B. and Brennan, M. (eds.) (1981) Columbanus and Merovingian Monasticism
(BAR International Series, 113). Oxford

Clover, F. M. and Humphreys, R. S. (eds.) (1989) Tradition and Innovation in Late
Antiquity. Madison and London
Collins, R. C. (1981) ‘Caesarius von Arles’, THE 7: 5 3 1—6
Conkey, M. and Hastorf, C. (1990) The Uses of Style in Archaeology. Cambridge
Convegno Todi (1977) Gregorio di Tours. Convegno del Centro di Studi sulla spiritualitd
medievale, 10— iy ottobre 1971 ( Convegni 12). Todi
Cormack, R. (1985) Writing in Gold: Byzantine Society and its Icons. London
Cormack,R. (1989) The Bygantine Eye: Studies in Art and Patronage. London Variorum
Cormack, R. (1990) ‘Byzantine Aphrodisias. Changing the symbolic map of a city’,
PCPS 216 (n.s. 36): 26—41

Courcelle, P. (1 948) Les lettres grecques en Occident de Macrobe a Cassiodore. Paris
Cracco, G. (1992) ‘II tempo fuori del monastero: tentazione o missione?’, Codex
Aquilarensis 6: 119—34

Cramer, A. (1835—7) Anecdota graeca e codd. manuscriptis bibliothecarum Oxoniensium.
Oxford

Cramer, A. (1839—41) Anecdota Parisiensia e codd. manuscriptis bibliothecae regiae
Parisiensis. Oxford

Cruikshank Dodd, E. (1961) Bygantine Silver Stamps. Washington, DC
Cruikshank Dodd, E. (1973) Bygantine Silver Treasures. Bern

Crum, W E. and Evelyn- White, H. G. (1926) The Monastery of Epiphanius of Thebes.
Part 2. New York

Cutler, A. (1985) The Craft of Ivory: Sources, Techniques and Uses in the Mediterranean
World A.D. 200—1400. Washington, DC

Dagron, G. (1970) ‘Les moines et la ville. Le monachisme a Constantinople
jusqu’au Concile de Chalcedoine (451)’, T&MByg 4: 229—76 (= Dagron
(1984) La romanite chretienne en Orient. Heritages et mutations (London) vii)

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

1085

Dagron, G. (1978) Vie et miracles de Sainte Th'ecle. Brussels

Dagron, G. (1981) ‘Le saint, le savant, l’astrologue’, in Hagiographie, cultures etsocietes,
n 'e—XIIe siecles (Paris) 143—56
Dagron, G. (1984) Constantinople imaginaire. Paris

Dagron, G. (1992) ‘L’ombre d’un doute: l’hagiographie en question, VIe-XIe
siecle’, DOP 46: 59-68

Davis, R. (tr.) (1989) The Book of Pontiffs (Liber Pontificalis) (Translated Texts for
Historians, Latin Series 5). Liverpool
Davis-Weyer, C. (1971) Early Medieval Art, 300—1150. Englewood Cliffs, NJ
Dawes, E. and Baynes, N. H. (trans.) (1977 ) Three Byzantine Saints. London and
Oxford

De Vogue, A. (1966) ‘La Regie du Maitre et les Dialogues de S. Gregoire’, RHE
61: 44-76

De Vogue, A. (1966a) Gregoire le Grand. Dialogues ( SChret . 251, 260, 265). Paris
De Vogue, A. (1976) ‘Benoit, modele de vie spirituelle d’apres le deuxieme livre des
Dialogues de Saint Gregoire’, Collectanea Cisterciensia 38: 147—57
De Vogue, A. (1 977 ) La Regie de saint Benoit, vn: Commentaire doctrinal etspirituel. Paris
De Vogiie, A. (1982) Les Regies des saints peres. Introduction, texte critique, traduc-
tion et notes par Adalbert de Vogiie. SChret. 297—8. Paris
De Vogiie, A. (1989) Saint Columban. Regies et penitentiels monastiques. Abbaye de
Bellefontaine, Begrolles-en-Mauges

De Vogiie, M. (1865—77) fyne centrale, architecture civile et religieuse, du P au T -TP siecle.
Paris

Deckers, J. G. and Sergadoglu, U. (1995) ‘Das Hypogaum beim Silivri-Kapi in
Istanbul’, in Akten des xii. Internationalen Kongresses fur Christliche Archaologie,
Bonn, 22—28. September 1991 ed. J. Engemann, 11. Vatican City and Munster
(1995) 674— 81, pis. 85-6

Degering, H. and Boekler, A. (1932) Die Quedlingburger Italafragment. Berlin
Deichmann, F W (195 8) Friihchristliche Bauten undMosaiken von Ravenna. Baden-Baden
Deichmann, E W. (1969, 1974, 1976, 1989) Ravenna. Hauptstadt des spdtantiken
Abend/andes, vol. 1 . Geschichte und Monumente. Wiesbaden; Kommentar , vol. 2 part
1. Wiesbaden; Kommentar, vol. 2 part 2. Wiesbaden; Kommentar , vol. 2 part 3.
Stuttgart

Dekkers, E. (1995) Claris Patrum Latinorum, editio tertia ( CCSL ). Steenbrugge
Delaplace, C. (1992) ‘Ermites et ascetes a fin de l’antiquite et leur fonction dans la
societe rurale. L’exemple de la Gaule’, MEFR 104: 981-1024
Deroche, V. (1995) Etudes sur Leontios de Neapolis. Uppsala

Desprez, V. (1980) Regies monastiques d’Occident IVe—Ve siecle, dAugustin a Ferreol.
French trans. with introductions and notes (Vie monastique, 9; Spiritualite
orientale, 9). Abbaye de Bellefontaine, Begrolles-en-Mauges
Diggle,J. and Goodyear, F. (eds.) (1970) Corippus. Johannidos seu De bellis Libycis libri
\ HI. Cambridge

Djobadze, W. (1986) Archaeological Investigations in the Region West of Antioch-on-the-
Orontes. Wiesbaden

Doran, R. (tr.) (1992) TheLivesof Symeon Stylites (Cistercian Studies 1 12). Kalamazoo
Downey, G. (1948) ‘Byzantine architects, their training and methods’, By%. 18:
99—118

io86

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Draguet, R. (1924) Julien d’ Halicarnasse et sa controverse avec Severe d’Antioche sur I’incor-
ruptibilite du corps du Christ. Louvain
Duchesne, L. (1925) L’Eglise an IT stick. Paris

Duggan, L. G. (1989) ‘Was art really the “book of the illiterate”?’ Word and Image 5 :
227-51

Dumville, D. N. (ed.) (1993) Saint Patrick, A.D. 493—1993. Woodbridge and
Rochester, NY

Dunbabin, K. M. D. (1982) ‘The marine mosaic (no. 16) from the House of the
Greek Charioteers’, in Excavations at Carthage 1938 conducted by the University of
Michigan 7, ed. J. H. Humphrey. Ann Arbor (1982) 179-92
Durand, J. (ed.) (199 2) Byyance. L’art by^antin dans les collections publiques fran^aises.
Paris

Duval, N. (1984) ‘Les maisons d’Apamee et l’architecture “palatiale” de l’antiquite
tardive’, in Baity (1984) 447—70

Duval, N. (1994) ‘L’architecture chretienne et les pratiques liturgiques en Jordanie
en rapport avec la Palestine: recherches nouvelles’, in K. Painter (ed.), Churches
Built in Ancient Times. London

Dvornik, F. (1934) ‘The authority of the state’, The Christian East 14: 95-108
Dvornik, F. (1966) Early Christian and Byyantine Political Philosophy , 2 vols.
Washington, DC

Ebersolt, J. (1910) Le grand palais de Constantinople et le Livre de Ceremonies. Paris
Ebied, R. Y., Van Roey, A., Wickham, L. R. (eds.) (1981) Peter of Callinicum. Anti-
Tritheist Dossier (OLA 10). Louvain
Edwards, N. (1990) The Archaeology of Early Medieval Ireland. London
Effenberger, A. (1986) Friichristliche Kunst mid Kidtur. I bn den Anfdngen bis %um 7.
fahrundert. Leipzig

Elm, S. (1994) ‘Virgins of God’: The Making of Asceticism in Eate Antiquity. Oxford
Eisner, J. (1995) Art and the Roman Viewer: The Transformation of Art from the Pagan
World to Christianity. Cambridge

Engelhardt, I. (1974) Mission und Politik in Byyany. Ein Beitrag gur Strukturanalyse
by^antinischer Mission %iir Zeit fustins und Justinians (Miscellanea Byzantina
Monacensia 19). Munich

Erim, K. T. (1990) ‘Recent work at Aphrodisias’, in C. Roueche and K. T. Erim
(eds.), Aphrodisias Papers: Recent Work on Architecture and Sculpture (Ann Arbor)
9-36

Escolan, P. (1999) Monachisme et Eglise: le monachisme syrien du IV’ au T UI‘ siecle: un
ministere charismatique. Paris

Evans, G. R. (1986) The Thought of Gregory the Great (Cambridge Studies in Medieval
Life and Thought, fourth series, 2). Cambridge
Felten,J. (ed.) (1913) Nicolaus. Progymnasmata. Leipzig
Fentress, J. and Wickham, C. (1992) Social Memory. Oxford
Ferguson, E. (ed.) (1990) Encyclopedia of Early Christianity. Chicago and London
Festugiere, A. J. (tr.) (1961) Les Moines d’ Orient II: Les Moines de Constantinople. Paris
Festugiere, A. J. (1969) ‘L’ordre de lecture des dialogues de Platon aux Ve/VIe
siecles’, MH 26: 281—96

Festugiere, A. J. (ed.) (1970) l ie de Theodore de Sykeon (Subsidia Hagiographica 48).
Brussels

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

1087

Finney, P. C. (1994) The Invisible God: The Earliest Christians on Art. Oxford
Fitzgerald, G. M. (1939) A Sixth Century Monastery at Beth Shan (Scythopolis).
Philadelphia

Flusin, B. (1983) Miracle et histoire dans I’ceuvre de Cyrille de Scythopolis. Paris
Flusin, B. (1991) ‘Demons et Sarrasins. L’auteur et le propos des Diegemata
Steriktika d’Anastase le Sinai'te’, T&MBy % xi
Fontaine, J. (1959) Isidore de Seville et la culture classique dans I’Espagne wisigothique. Paris
Fontaine, J. (1962) ‘Ennodius’, RAC 5: 398-421

Forschungen in Ephesos (1906). Vienna (Osterreichischen archaeologischen Institut)
Forsyth, G. H. and Weitzmann, K. (1973) The Monastery of Saint Catherine at Mount
Sinai: The Church and Fortress of Justinian. Ann Arbor
Foss, C. (1979) Ephesus after Antiquity: A Fate Antique, Byzantine and Turkish City.
Cambridge

Foss, C. (1994) ‘The Lycian coast in the Byzantine age’, DOP 48: 1-52
Foss, C. (1995) ‘Nicomedia and Constantinople’, in Mango and Dagron (eds.)
(1995) 181-90

Foss, C. and Winfield, D. (1986) Byzantine Fortification: An Introduction. Pretoria
Fotiou, A. S. (198;) ‘Plato’s philosopher king in the political thought of sixth-
century Byzantium’, Florilegium 71 : 17-29
Foulkes, P. (1992) ‘Where was Simplicius?’,//^ 112: 143

Fowden, G. (1990a) ‘The Athenian agora and the progress of Christianity’, JRA 3:
494-501

Fowden, G. (1990b) ‘Religious developments in late Roman Lycia’, Meletemata ton
K.E.RA. (Athens) 10: 343—72

Frank, G. L. C. (1991) ‘The Council of Constantinople II as a model reconciliation
council’. Theological Studies 52: 636—50

Frankfurter, D. T. M. (1990) ‘Stylites and phallobates. pillar religions in late antique
Syria’, VC 168-98

Frantz, A. (1988) The Athenian Agora XXIV: Fate Antiquity A.D. 26y—yoo. Princeton
Frend, W (1973) ‘Severus of Antioch and the rise of the Monophysite hierarchy’,
OC 4 195: 261—75

Frend, W (1984) The Rise of Christianity. London

Gahbauer, F. R. (1993) Die Patriarchietheorie. Ein Modell der Kirchenleitung von den
Anfangen bis gicr Gegenwart. Frankfurt
Gahbauer, F. R. (1996) ‘Patriarchat I’, TRE 26: 85—91

Garitte, G. (1941) ‘La Vie premetaphrastique de S. Chariton’, Bulletin de 1 ’ Institut
Historique Beige de Rom 21:1 6—46

Gassmann, P. (1977) Der Episkopat in Gallien im /. Jahrhundert. Bonn
Gaudemet, J. and Basdevant, B. (eds.) (1989) Fes Canons des Conciles merovingiens
( SChret . 353). Paris

Gazda, E. K. (1981) ‘A marble group of Ganymede and the eagle from the age of
Augustine’, in Excavations at Carthage iyyy conducted by the University of Michigan
6, ed. J. H. Humphrey. Ann Arbor (1981) 125—78
Geerard, M. (1974-87) Claris Patrum Graecorum. 5 vols. Turnhout
Gelzer, T. (ed.) (1975) Musaeus. Hero and Feander in Callimachus. Aetia, etc (ed. C. A.
Trypanis). Cambridge, MA

George, J. W. (1992) Venantius Fortunatus: A Fatin Poet in Merovingian Gaul. Oxford

io88

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Gerstinger, H. (1970) Codex Vindobonensis med. gr. 1 der Osterreichischen
Nationalbibliothek. Kommentarband 3 u der Faksimile. Graz
Gilsenan, M. (1982) Recognising Islam: Religion and Society in the Modern Arab World.
New York

Glucker, C. A. M. (1987) The City of Gaya in the Roman and Byzantine Periods. Oxford
Glucker,J. (1978) Antiochus and the Late Academy. Gottingen

Goffart, W (1988) The Narrators of Barbarian History: Jordanes, Gregory of Tours, Bede
and Paid the Deacon. Princeton

Goodchild, R. G. (1976) ‘The “Palace of the Dux’”, in J. Humphrey (ed.),
Apollonia, The Port of Cyrene: Excavations by the University of Michigan, 1965—1967.
Supplements to Libya Antiqua 4: 245—65

Goubert, P. (1965) Byyance avant I’lslam. Byyance et l’ Occident sous les successeurs de
fustinien. Vol. 11, Rome, Byyance et Carthage. Paris
Gould, G. (1993) The Desert Fathers on Monastic Community. Oxford
Grabar, A. (1936) L’empereur dans l’ art byyantin. Paris
Grabar, A. (1946) Martyrium. Paris

Grabar, A. (1958) Les ampoules de Terre Sainte (Monya, Bobbio). Paris
Greenslade, S. L. (1965) review of Jones, A. H. M.,/ 7 Mn.s. 16: 220—4
Gregg, R. C. and Groh, D. E. (1981) Early Arianism: A View of Salvation. London
Gregoire, R. (1966) Les homeliaires du Moyen Age. Rome

Gregory, T. E. (1979) Vox Populi. Popular Opinion and Violence in the Religious
Controversies of the Fifth Century A.D. Columbus, OH
Gribomont, J. (195 3) Histoire du texte des Ascetiques de saint Basile (Bibliotheque du
Museon 32). Louvain

Grillmeier, A. and Bacht, H. (1979) Das Konyil von Chalkedon. Geschichte und
Gegenwart (5th edn). Wurzburg

Grossman, P. (1990) ‘Architecture’, in K. A. Manafis (ed.), Sinai: Treasures of the
Monastery of St Catherine (Athens) 29-39
Guenther, O. (ed.) (1895) Collectio Avellana (CSEL 35). Prague, Vienna, Leipzig
Guidi, I. (ed.) (1903, repr. 195 5) Chronica Minora 11 (CSCO Ser. Syr. 3.4). Louvain
Guillou, A. and Durand, J. (eds.) (1994) Byyance et les images. Paris
Gutman, S., Yeivin, Z. and Netzer, E. (1981) ‘Excavations in the synagogue at
Horvat Susiya’, in Levine (ed.) (1981)

Guy, J.-C. (1962) Recherches surla tradition grecque des Apophthegmata Patrum (Subsidia
hagiographica, 36). Brussels

Haas, C. (1993) ‘Patriarch and people: Peter Mongus of Alexandria and Episcopal
leadership in the late fifth century’, Journal of Early Christian Studies 1 : 297-3 1 6
Hachlili, R. (ed.) (1989) Ancient Synagogues in Israel, Third— Seventh Century C.E. (BAR
International Series 499). Oxford

Hadot, I. (1978) Le probleme du neoplatonisme alexandrin: Hierocles et Simplicius. Paris
Hadot, I. (1987a) ‘Les introductions aux commentaires exegetiques chez les
auteurs neoplatoniciens et les auteurs chretiens’, in M. Tardieu (ed.), Les regies
de r interpretation 99-122. Paris (= Hadot (1990b) 21-47)

Hadot, I. (ed.) (1987b) Simplicius. Sa vie, son oeuvre, sa survie. Berlin
Hadot, I. (1990a) ‘The life and work of Simplicius in Greek and Arabic sources’,
in Sorabji (ed.) (1990) 275—303

Hadot, I. (1990b) Simplicius. Commentaire sur les categories 1. Leiden

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

1089

Hadot, I. (1 99 1) ‘The role of the commentaries on Aristotle in the teaching of phi-
losophy according to the prefaces of the Neoplatonic commentaries on the
Categories , in H. Blumenthal and H. Robinson (eds.), Aristotle and the Later
Tradition (Oxford) 175—89

Hajjar.J. (1962) Le Synode Permanent (avvoSos ivSrjfxovoa) dans I’Eglise by^antine des
origines auXI‘ siecle ( OCA 164). Rome

Halleux, A. de (1963) Philoxene de Mabbog. Sa vie, ses ecrits, sa theologie. Louvain
Hallinger, K. (1957) ‘Papst Gregor der Grosse und der heiliger Benedikt’, in B.
Steidle (ed.), CommentationesinRegulamS.Benedictii^i—^K) (Studia Anselmiana
42). Rome

Harrauer, H. and Sijpesteijn, P. (1985) Nette Texte aus dem antiken Unterricht. Vienna
Harries, J. (1994) Sidonius Apollinaris and the Fall of Rorne,A.D. 407—48}. Oxford
Harrison, R. M. (1963) ‘Churches and chapels in central Lycia’^TT 13: 117— 51
Harrison, R. M. (1989) M Temple for Byzantium: The Discovery and Excavation of Anicia
Juliana’s Palace-Church in Istanbul. London and Austin, TX
Harvey, S. A. (1988) ‘The sense of a stylite’, HC42: 376—94
Harvey, S. A. (1998) ‘The stylite ’s liturgy’, Journal of Early Christian Studies 6: 523-39
Hasitzka, M. R. M. (1990) Neue Texte und Dokumentation %am Koptischen Unterricht.
Vienna

Hawkins, E.J. W andMundell, M. C. (1973) ‘The mosaics of the Monastery of Mar
Samuel, Mar Simeon, and Mar Gabriel, near Kartmin’, DOP 27: 279-96
Hefele, K. J. and Leclerq, H. (1907— ) Histoire des Conciles d’apres les documents origi-
naux. Paris

Heinzelmann, M. (1976) Bischofsherrschaft in Gallien. Zur Kontinuifdt romischer
Fuhrungsschichten vom 4. bis sgtm 7. Jahrhundert. Munich
Hellemo, G. (\<f&<)) Adventus Domini: Eschatological Thought in Fourth-Century Apses and
Catechesis. Leiden

Herbert, M. (1988) Iona, Kells and Derry. The History and Hagiography of the Monastic
Familia of Columba. Oxford

Higham, N. J. (1994) The English Conquest: Gildas and Britain in the Fifth Century.
Manchester

Hilgard, A. (ed.) (1889-1894) Theodosii Alexandrini Canones. Leipzig
Hillgarth, J. N. (1987) ‘Modes of evangelization of western Europe in the seventh
century’, in Chatham, P. Ni and Richter, M. (eds.), Irland und die Christenheit
(Stuttgart) 3 1 1— 31

Hirschfeld, Y. (1 992) The Judean Desert Monasteries in the Byzantine Period. New Haven
and London

Hirschle, M. (1979) Sprachphilosophie und Namenmagie im Nenplatonismus. Meisenheim
am Gian

Hoffmann, P. (1994) ‘Damascius’ ,Dictionnaire des philosophes antiques 2: 541—93. Paris
Holtz, L. (1981) Donat et la tradition de l’ enseignment grammatical. Paris
Holum, K. G. (1986) ‘Andreas philoktistes-. a proconsul of Byzantine Palestine’, Israel
Exploration Journal 36: 61-4

Holum, K. G. (1988) King Herod’s Dream: Caesarea on the Sea. New York
Holze, H. (1992) Erfahrungund Theologie imfriihen Miinchtum. Gottingen
Honigmann, E. (1951) Eveques et eveches monophysites d’Asie anterieure an Vie siecle
{CSCO Subsidia 2). Louvain

1090

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Horden, P. (1993) ‘Responses to possession and insanity in the earlier Byzantine
world’, Social History of Medicine 6: 177—94
Howard-Johnston,J. and Hayward, P. (eds.) (1999) The Cult of Saints in Tate Antiquity
and the Early Middle Ages. Oxford

Hudson, P. J. (1989) ‘Contributi archeologici alia storia dell’ insediamento urbano
veneto (iv— xi secolo)’, in A. Castagnetti and G. M. Varanini (eds.), II \ / eneto
nel medioevo. 2 vols. Verona, 11.3 38— 9
Hughes, K. (1966) The Church in Early Irish Society. London

Hughes, K. (1987) Church and Society in Ireland, A.D. 400—1200 (edited by D.
Dumville). London

Huxley, G. W (1959) Anthemius of Tralles: A Study in Later Greek Geometry.
Cambridge, MA

Inan, J. and Alfoldi-Rosenbaum, E. (1979) Romische und fruhbysantinische
Portratplastik aus der Tiirkei. Neue Funde. Mainz
Jalabert, L. and Mouterde, R. (195 9) Inscriptions grecques et latines de la Syrie v. Paris
James, E. (tr.) (1985) Gregory of Tours: Lfe of the Fathers. Liverpool
Janin, R. (1964) Constantinople by^antine. 2nd edn. Paris

Janin, R. (1969) Ees Eglises et les monast'eres (Geographie ecclesiastique de l’empire
byzantin, 1, 3). 2nd edn. Paris

Janin, R. (1975) Ees Eglises et les monast'eres des grands centres by^antins (Geographie
ecclesiastique de l’empire byzantin, 1, 2). Paris
Janvier, Y. (1969), La legislation du bas-empire sur les edifices publics. Aix-en-Provence
Jenal, G. (1995) Italia Ascetica atque Monastica. DasAsketen- und Monchtum in Italien von
den Anfangen bis yicr Zeit der Langobarden (ca. 140/240—604) (Monographien zur
Geschichte des Mittelalters, Bd 39, 1-2). Stuttgart
Johnson, A. C. and West, L. C. (1949) Byzantine Egypt: Economic Studies (Princeton
University Studies in Papyrology 6). Princeton
Jones, A. H. M. (i960) ‘Church finance in the fifth and sixth centuries’, fThS n.s.

11: 84-94 (= Jones, Roman Economy 339—49)

Jones, C., Wainwright, G. and Yarnold, E. (eds.) (1986) The Study of Christian
Spirituality. London

Kaplan, M. (1976) Les proprietes de la couronne et de I’Eglise dans I’Empire byzantin
(V—l T e siecles). Documents (Byzantina Sorbonensia 2). Paris
Kaplan, S. (1984) The Monastic Holy Man and the Evangelisation of Early Solomonic
Ethiopia. Wiesbaden

Kasper, C. M. (1991) Theologie undAskese. Die Spiritualitat des Inselmonchtiims von Lerins
im 4. fahrhundert (Beitrage zur Geschichte des alten Monchtums und des
Benediktinertums, Bd 40). Munster

Kessler, H. L. (1988) ‘On the state of medieval art history’, Art Bulletin 70: 166-87
Khatchatrian, A. (1982) Origine et typologie des baptisteres paleochretiens (ed. F. M.
Buhler). Paris

Kitzinger, E. (1940) Early Medieval Art. London

Kitzinger, E. (1954) ‘The cult of images in the age before Iconoclasm’, DOP 8:
83—1 50 (repr. in Kitzinger (1976))

Kitzinger, E. (1 976) The Art of Byzantium and the Medieval West: Selected Studies by E.

Kitzinger ed. W E. Kleinbauer. Bloomington
Kleinbauer, W E. (1972) ‘The iconography and date of the mosaics of the rotunda
of Hagios Georgios, Thessaloniki’, Viator 3: 27ff.

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

1091

Kleinbauer, W E. (1973) ‘The origin and functions of the aisled tetraconch
churches in Syria and northern Mesopotamia’, DOP 27: 91— 1 14
Kleinbauer, W. E. (1992) Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture: An Annotated
Bibliography and Historiography. Boston
Klingshirn, W. (1990) ‘Caesarius of Arles’, in Ferguson (ed.) (1990) 167—8
Klingshirn, W. E. (1994) Caesarius of Arles: The Making of a Christian Community in
Late Antique Gaul. Cambridge

Ivonig, D. (198;) Amt und Askese. Priesteramt und Monchtum bei den lateinischen
Kirchenvatern in der vorbenediktinischer Zeit (Regular Benedicti Studia,
Supplementa 12). Erzabtei St Ottilien
Kostof, S. (1965) The Orthodox Baptistery of Ravenna. New Haven
Kraeling, C. H. (1962) Ptolemais, City of the Libyan Pentapolis. Chicago
Krautheimer, R. (1980) Rome. Profile of a City, 312—1308. Princeton
Krautheimer, R. (1983) Three Christian Capitals. Topography and Politics: Rome,
Constantinople, Milan. Berkeley and Los Angeles
Krautheimer, R. and others (1937-) Corpus Basilicarum Romanarum. Rome
Kropp, A. M. (1930) Ausgewdhlte koptische Zaubertexte. Brussels
Kugener, M. A. (ed.) (1 907) Zacharie le scholastique: \ le de Severe , PO 11. 1 . Paris (repr.
Turnhout 1993)

Laga, C. (ed.) (1992) Eustratii Presbyteri Vita Eutychii Patriarchae Constantinopolitani
( CCSG 25). Turnhout

Laing, L. (1990) Celtic Britain and Ireland, A.D. 200—800: The Myth of the Dark Ages.

Dublin

Lamberz, E. (1987) ‘Proklos und die Form des philosophischen Kommentars’, in
Pepin and Saffrey (eds.) (1987) 1-20

Lane Fox, R. (1997) ‘The Life of Daniel’, in M. J. Edwards and S. Swain (eds.),
Portraits. Biographical Representation in the Greek and Latin Literature of the Roman
Empire (Oxford) 175-225

Langgartner, G. (1964) Die Gallienpolitik des Papstes in j. und 6. fahrhundert. EineStudie
iiberden apostolischen Vikariat von Arles. Theophaneia 16. Bonn
Lapidge, M. and Dumville, D. (eds.) (1984) Gildas: New Approaches. Woodbridge
Lassus, J. (1 947) Sanctuaries chretiens de Syrie. Essai sur la genese, la forme et I usage litur-
gique des edifices de culte chretiens en Syrie, du Ille siecle a la conquete musulmane. Paris
Lawless, G. (1990) Augustine of Hippo and his Monastic Rule. Oxford
Lawrence, A. W. (1983) ‘A skeletal history of Byzantine fortification’. Annual of the
British School at Athens 78: 171-227
Lawrence, M. (1945) The Sarcophagi of Ravenna. New York
Le Moine, F. (1972) Martianus Capella: A Literary Re-evaluation. Munich
Leach, E. (1983) ‘Melchisedech and the emperor: icons of subversion and ortho-
doxy’, reprinted in E. Leach and D. A. Aycock (eds.). Structuralist Interpretations
of Biblical Myth (Cambridge) 67—88

Leipoldt, J. (1903) Schenute von Atripe und die Entstehung des national-agyptischen
Christentums. TU 25: 1

Lemerle, P. (1971) Le premier humanisme by^antin. Paris (trs. as Lemerle, Byzantine
Humanism)

Levine, L. I. (ed.) Ancient Synagogues Revealed. Jerusalem

Lloyd, A. C. (1987) ‘Parhypostasis in Proclus’, in G. Boss and G. Seel (eds.), Proclus
et son influence (Zurich) 145-57

1092

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Lowden, J. (1990) ‘Luxury and liturgy: the function of books’, in R. Morris (ed.),
Church and People in Byzantium (Birmingham) 263—80
Lowden, J. (1993) The Octateuchs. University Park and London
McCarthy, M. C. (i960) The Rule for Nuns of St Caesarins of Arles. Washington, DC
MacCormack, S. (1981) Art and Ceremony in Tate Antiquity. Berkeley and London
MacCoull, L. S. B. (1987) ‘Dioscorus of Aphrodito and John Philoponus’, Studies
Patristica 18: 163-68. Kalamazoo

McCready, W D. (1989) Signs of Sanctity : Miracles in the Thought of Gregory the Great.
Toronto

McGuckin,J. A. (1994) St Cyril of Alexandria: The Christological Controversy. Its History,
Theology, and Texts (Supplements to l Igiliae Christianae 23). Leiden
McGuire, B. (1988) Friendship and Community: The Monastic Experience, jjo—i2jo.
Kalamazoo

Mackie, G. (1994) ‘LaDaurade: a royal mausoleum’, Cahiers Archeologiques 42: 17-34
Macrides, R. and Magdalino, P. (1988) ‘The architecture of ekphrasis-. construction
and context of Paul the Silentiary’s ekphrasis of Hagia Sophia’, BMGS 12:
47—82

Maguire, H. (1990) Earth and Ocean. University Park and London
Mahe, J. P. (1990) ‘David l’lnvincible dans la tradition armenienne’, in Hadot
(1990b) 189—207

Mainstone, R. J. (1988) Hagia Sophia: Architecture, Structure and Liturgy of Justinian’s
Great Church. London. Reissued London 1 997
Majeska, G. (1984) Russian Travelers to Constantinople in the Fourteenth and Fifteenth
Centuries. Washington, DC

Malbon, E. S. (1990) The Iconography of the Sarcophagus of Junius Bassns. Princeton
Manafis, K. A. (ed.) (1990) Sinai: Treasures of the Monastery of Saint Catherine. Athens
Mango, C. (195 9) The Brazen House: A Study of the Vestibule of the Imperial Palace of
Constantinople. Copenhagen

Mango, C. (1962) Materials for the Study of the Mosaics of St Sophia at Istanbul.
Washington, DC

Mango, C. (1972) The Art of the Byzantine Empire 312—1453 (Sources and Documents
in the History of Art Series). Englewood Cliffs, NJ
Mango, C. (1977) ‘Storia dell’arte’, in A. Guillou (ed.), La civiltd biyantina dal IV al
IX secolo. Aspetti e problemi (Bari) 285—350
Mango, C. (1980) Byyantium: The Empire of New Rome. London
Mango, C. (1984a) ‘A Byzantine hagiographer at work’, Osterreichische Akademie der
Wissenschaften, philos.-hist. Kl. Sityungsberichte 432: 25-41
Mango, C. (1984b) By yantium and its Image. Aldershot

Mango, C. (1986) ‘The pilgrimage centre of St Michael at Germia’,/Q 5 36: 117—32
Mango, C., Dagron, D., with Greatrex, G. (eds.) (1995) Constantinople and its
Hinterland. Aldershot

Mango, C., Vickers, M. and Francis, E. D. (1992) ‘The palace of Lausus at
Constantinople and its collection of ancient statues \ Journal of the History of
Collections 4: 89—98

Mango, M. Mundell (1986) Silver from Early By yantium. Baltimore
Mango, M. Mundell (1984) Artistic Patronage in the Roman Diocese of Oriens, AD
yiy—641. Oxford D.Phil. thesis 1984. Oxford (in press)

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

io 93

Mansfeld, J. (i 994) Prolegomena. Questions to be Settled Before the Study of an Author or a
Text. Leiden

Marinus (1814) Life of Proclus ed. (1) J. F. Boissonade. Leipzig, 1814, reprinted 1 966;

(2) R. Masullo, with Italian translation and notes. Naples, 1985
Markus, R. (1985) ‘Gregor I’, TRE 14: 135-45
Markus, R. (1990) The End of Ancient Christianity. Cambridge
Martine, F. (ed.) (1968) Vies des peres du fnra ( SChret . 142). Paris
Masai, F. (1971) ‘La Vita patrum iurensium et les debuts du monachisme a Saint-
Maurice d’Agaune’, in J. Authenrieth and F. Brunholzl (eds.), Festschrift
Bernhard Bischojf \u • seinem 6j. Geburtstag (Stuttgart) 43—69
Maspero, J. (1931—43) Fouilles executees a Baouit 1-11. Cairo

Mathews, T. F. (1971) The Early Churches of Constantinople: Architecture and Liturgy.
University Park, PA

Mathews, T. F. (1993) The Clash of the Gods: A Reinterpretation of Early Christian Art.
Princeton

Mathisen, R. W (1989) Ecclesiastical Factionalism and Religious Controversy in Fifth-
Century Gaul. Washington, DC

Mathisen, R. W (1993) Roman Aristocrats in Barbarian Gaul. Strategies for Survival in an
Age of Transition. Austin, TX

Mayr-Harting, H. (1991) The Coming of Christianity to Anglo-Saxon England. 3rdedn.
London

Mazzarino, S. (i960) Rapports du Xle Congres International des Sciences Historiques
(Stockholm) 35 ff.

Megaw, A. H. S. and Hawkins, E. J. W. (1 977) The Church of the Panagia Kanakaria at
Lythrankomi in Cyprus: Its Mosaics and Frescoes. Washington, DC
Miller, T. S. (1984) ‘Byzantine hospitals’, DOP 38: 5 3—63
Miller, T. S. (1990) ‘The Sampson Hospital of Constantinople’, BF 1 5: 101—35
Molitor, R. (ed.) (1947) VirDei Benedictus. Munster

Momigliano, A. D. (195 5) ‘Cassiodorus and the Italian culture of his time’, PBA
41: 207-45

Mommsen, Th. (ed.) (1 894) Cassiodori Senatoris I ariae. Berlin
Morey, C. R. (1942 and 1953) Early Christian Art. Princeton
Morin, G. (ed.) (1942) Caesarii Opera Omnia. Maredsous
Miiller-Wiener, W. (1977) Bildlexikon yur Topographie Istanbuls. Tubingen
Munier, C. (i960) Les Statuta ecclesiae antiqua (Bibliotheque de l’lnstitut de Droit
Canonique de l’Universite de Strasbourg 5). Paris
Munier, C. (ed.) (1963a) Statuta Ecclesiae Antiqua (CCSL 148). Turnhout
Munier, C. (ed.) (1963b) Concilia Galliae I. A.yi4—A.jo6, II. A.jn—A.6gj (CCSL 98,
9 8 a). Turnhout

Murphy, F.-X. and Sherwood, P. (1974) Constantinople II et Constantinople 'III (Histoire
des conciles oecumeniques 3). Paris
Murray, C. (1977) ‘Art and the Early Church’, JThS n.s. 28: 305-45
Murray, R. (1975) Symbols of Church and Kingdom: A Study in Early Syriac Tradition.
London and New York

Mynors, R. A. B. (ed.) (1937) Cassiodori Institutiones. Oxford

Mytum, H. C. (1992) The Origins of Early Christian Ireland. London and New York

Nau, F. (ed.) (1910) Histoire de Saint Maurice, empereur des Remains (AO v). Paris

1094

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Nau, F. (1913) Revue de l’ Orient chretien 18: 130

Navarra, L. (1990) ‘Venantius Fortunatus’, in Ferguson (ed.) (1990) 2, 862—3
Nielsen, I. (1990) Thermae et Balnea: The Architecture and Cultural History of Roman
Public Baths. Aarhus

Nordstrom, C.-O. (1953) Ravennastudien: Ideengeschichtliche und ikonographische
Untersuchungen iiber die Mosaiken von Ravenna. Stockholm
O’Connell, P. (1963) ‘Equal representation from each patriarchate at
Constantinople II?’, OCP 29: 238-46
O’Donnell, J. (1979) Cassiodorus. Berkeley and Los Angeles

Onians, J. (1980) Abstraction and imagination in late antiquity’, Art History 3: 1-24
Orlandi, J. and Ramos-Lisson, D. (1981) Die Synoden auf der Iberischen Halbinsel bis
glim Einbruch von Islam (yu) (Konziliengeschichte Reihe A: Darstellungen).
Paderborn-Munich-Vienna-Zurich

Palmer, A. (1990) Monk and Mason on the Tigris Frontier: The Early History of Tttr
' Abdin (University of Cambridge Oriental Publications 39). Cambridge
Papyri Greek and Egyptian: In Honour of Eric Gardiner Turner (1981). London
Patlagean, E. (1968) ‘Ancienne hagiographie byzantine et histoire social e:\Annales:
ESC 23: 106—26 (Eng. trans. Jane Hodgkin, ‘Ancient Byzantine hagiography
and social history’, in S. Wilson (ed.) (1983) Saints and their Cults (Cambridge)
101— 21)

Patrich, J. (1995) Sabas, Leader of Palestinian Monasticism: A Comparative Study in
Eastern Monasticism. Fourth to Seventh Centuries (Dumbarton Oaks Studies 32).
Washington, DC

Pelikan, J. (1990) Imago Dei. New Haven and London

Pepin, J. and Saffrey, H. D. (eds.) (1987) Proclus, lecteur et interprete des anciens. Paris
Peschlow, U. (1986). ‘Eine wiedergewonnene byzant. Ehrensaule in Istanbul’, in
O. Feld and U. Peschlow (eds.), Studien gur spdtantiken und bygantinischen Kunst
F. W. Deichmann gewidmet 1 (Mainz)

Petersen, J. M. (1984) The Dialogues of Gregory the Great in their Late Antique Cultural
Background (Studies and Texts 69). Toronto
Picard, C. (1982) ‘The purpose of Adomnans’s Vita Colimbae’ , Peritia 1: 160—77
Pietri, C. (1983) ‘Frankreich I’, TRC 11: 346—51
Pietri, L. (1985) ‘Gregor von Tours’, TRE 14: 184—8

Pizzaro,J. M. (1995) Writing Ravenna: The Liber Pontificalis of Andreas Agnellus. Michigan
Pontal, O. (1986) Die Synoden im Merowingerreich (Konziliengeschichte Reihe A:
Darstellungen). Paderborn-Munich-Vienna-Zurich
Praechter, K. (1910) ‘Richtungen und Schulen im Neuplatonismus’, in Genethliakon
Carl Robert (Berlin) 103-56
Praechter, K. (1913) ‘Hierokles’, RE viu.2: 1479—87
Praechter, K. (1927) ‘Simplikios’, RE iii.a.i: 204—13

Price, R. M. (tr.) (1991) The Lives of the Monks of Palestine by Cyril of Scythopolis
(Cistercian Studies 114). Kalamazoo

Pricoco, S. (1967) ‘Studi su Sidonio Apollinare’, Nuovo Didaskaleion 15: 71-1 50
Pricoco, S. (1978) L’lsola del Santi. II Cenobio di Lerino e le Origini del Monachesimo
Gallico. Rome

Pricoco, S. (1990) ‘Sidonius Apollinaris’, in Ferguson (ed.) (1990) 2, 778-9
Pricoco, S. (1 993) ‘Gli scritti agiografici in prosa di Venanzio Fortunato’, in Venangio

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE IO 95

Fortunato tra Italia e Francia. Atti del Convegno Internazionale di Studi,
Valdobbiadene 17 maggio 1990, Treviso 18-19 maggio 1990, ed. Giuseppe
Marton (Treviso) 175-93

Prinz, F. (1965) Friihes Monchtum im Frankenreich. Rulturund Gesellschaft in Gallien, den
Rheinlanden itnd Bayern am Beispiel der monastischen Entwicklung (4. bis 8.
Jahrhundert). Munich and Vienna
Quibell, J. E. (1909-12) Excavations at Saqqara i-m. Cairo
Rabe, H. (ed.) (1931) Prolegomenon Sylloge. Leipzig

Recchia, V. (1990) ‘Gregory the Great’, in Ferguson (ed.) (1990) 1, 365—8
Reginald, G. (ed.) (1966) Les homeliaires du Moyen Age (Rerum Ecclesiasticarum
Documenta, series maior, Fontes 6). Rome
Regnault, L. (tr.) (1971) Barsanuphe et Jean de Gaga: Correspondance. Solesmes
Reydellet, M. (1993) ‘Tradition et nouveaute dans les Carmina de Fortunat’, in
Venangio Fortunato tra Italia e Francia. Atti del Convegno Internazionale di
Studi, Valdobbiadene 17 maggio 1990, Treviso 18-19 ma ggio T 99 °> ed-
Giuseppe Marton (Treviso) 81—98

Richards, J. (1980) Consul of God: The Life and Times of Gregory the Great. London-
Boston-Henley

Riche, P. (1972) ‘L’enseignement et la culture des laics dans l’occident pre-
carolingien’, Settimane di Studi, Spoleto 19: 231-51
Richter, M. (1982) ‘Dionysius Exiguus’, THE 9: 1—4

Rommel, F. (ed.) and Morel, C. (tr.) (1992) Gregoire le Grand, Regie Pastorale ( SChret .
381-2). Paris

Rosan, L. J. (1949) The Philosophy of Proclus. New York

Roueche, C. (1991) ‘Inscriptions and the later history of the theatre’, in Smith and
Erim (eds.) (1991) 99-108

Rouche, M. (1990) ‘The definitions of philosophy and a new fragment of
Stephanus the philosopher’, JOB 40: 107—28
Rousseau, P. (1975) ‘Cassian, contemplation, and the coenobitic life’, JEH 26:
113—26

Rousseau, P. (1995) ‘Eccentrics and coenobites in the late Roman East’, BF 21:
15-50 (= Conformity and Non-Conformity in Bygantium, ed. Lynda Garland)
Rousselle, A. (1990) Croire etguerir. La foi en Gaule dans I’antiquite tardive. Paris
Ruggini, L. Cracco (1981) ‘II miracolo nella cultura del tardo impero’, in
Hagiographie, cultures et societes, 7 T 'e—XIIe siecles (Paris) 161-204
Saffrey, H. D. (1975) ‘Allusions antichretiennes chez Proclus: le diadoque platoni-
cien’, Revue des sciences philosophiques et theologiques 59: 5 5 3—63
Saffrey, H. D. (1982) ‘New objective links between the Pseudo-Dionysius and
Proclus’, in D. J. O’Meara (ed.), Neoplatonism and Christian Thought (Norfolk,
VA) 64-74

Saffrey, H. D. (1990) ‘How did Syrianus regard Aristode?’, in Sorabji (ed.) (1990)
I 73 _ 9

Saffrey, H. D. and Westerink, L. G. (eds.) (1968, 1978) Proclus. Theologie platonicienne
1, hi. Paris

Saliou, C. (1994) Les lois des bdtiments. T hisinage et habitat urbain dans l’ empire romain.
Recherches sur les rapports entre le droit et la construction privee du siecle d 'Auguste au
si'ecle de Justinien. Beirut

1096

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Sailer, S.J. (1941) The Memorial of Moses on Mount Nebo. Jerusalem
Scheller, R. W (1963 and 1996) A Survey of Medieval Model Books. Haarlem
Scholz, S. (1992) Transmigration und Translation. Studien %ur Bistumswechsel der Bischofe
von der Spdtantike bis %um hohen Mittelalter (Kolner Historische Abhandlungen
37). Cologne-Weimar- Vienna

Schulz, H.-J. (1986) The Byzantine Liturgy: Symbolic Structure and Faith Expression
(translated by M. J. O’Connell). New York
Schwartz, E. (ed.) (1927 ) ‘Codex Vaticanus gr. 1431, eine anti-chalkedonische
Sammlung aus der Zeit Kaisers Zenos’, Abh. der bayer. Akad. der Wiss., phil.-
hist.Abt. 32.6

Schwartz, E. (ed.) (1934) ‘Publizistische Sammlungen zum acacianischen Schisma’,
Abh. der bayer. Akad. der Wiss., phil-hist. Abt. n.s. 10.4
Sear, F. B. (1977) Roman Wall and I du/t Mosaics. Heidelberg
Seiber,J. (1977) The Urban Saint in Early Byzantine Social History (BAR Supplementary
Series 37). Oxford

Sevcenko, I. and Sevcenko, N. (eds.) (1984) The Life of Nicholas of Sion. Brookline,
MA

Sheldon- Williams, I. P. (1967) ‘The Greek Christian Platonist tradition from the
Cappadocians to Maximus and Eriugena’, in Armstrong (ed.) (1967) 421-5 3 3
Shelton, K. (1989) ‘Roman aristocrats, Christian commissions: the Carrand
diptych’, in Clover and Humphreys (eds.) (1989) 105—27
Sheppard, A. (1982) ‘Monad and dyad as cosmic principles in Syrianus’, in H. J.
Blumenthal and A. C. Lloyd (eds.), Soul and the Structure of Being in late
Neoplatonism (Liverpool) 1-14

Sheppard, A. (1987) ‘Proclus’ philosophical method of exegesis: the use of
Aristode and the Stoics in the commentary on the Cratyluf in Pepin and
Saffrey (eds.) (1987) 137—51

Shiel, J. (1990) ‘Boethius’ commentaries on Aristode’, in Sorabji (ed.) (1990)
349 — 7 2

Sieben, H. J. (1986) Die Kon^ilsidee der alien Kirche (Konziliengeschichte Reihe B:
Untersuchungen). Paderborn-Munich-Vienna-Zurich
Small, A. M. and Buck, R. J. (1994) The Excavations of San Giovanni di Ruoti, 1. The
T 7 lias and Their Environment. Toronto

Smith, R. R. R. (1985) ‘Roman portraits: honours, empresses, and late emperors’,
JRS 75 : 209—21

Smith, R. R. R. (1990) ‘Late Roman philosopher portraits from Aphrodisias’/AL
80: 127-55

Smith, R. R. R. (1991) ‘Late Roman philosophers’, in Smith and Erim (eds.) (1991)
144-58

Smith, R. R. R. and Erim, K. T. (eds.) (1991) Aphrodisias Papers 2. The Theatre, a
Sculptor’s Workshop, Philosophers, and Coin-Types. Ann Arbor
Sodini, J.-P. (1989) ‘Le commerce des marbres a l’epoque protobyzantine’, in
Hommes et richesses 1. 162—86

Sodini, J.-P. (1994) ‘Images sculptees et propagande imperiale du IVe au Vie siecle:
recherches recentes sur les colonnes honorifiques et les reliefs politiques a
Byzance’, in A. Guillou and J. Durand (eds.), By^ance et les images (Paris) 43-94
Sorabji, R. (ed.) (1987) Philoponus and the Rejection of Aristotelian Science. Ithaca, NY
and London

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

io 97

Sorabji, R. (ed.) (1990 ) Aristotle Transformed. London

Spain, S. (1979) ‘“The Promised Blessing”: the iconography of the mosaics of S.
Maria Maggiore’, Art Bulletin 61: 518-69

Speigl, J. (1984) ‘Das Religionsgesprach mit den severianischen Bischofen in
Konstantinopel im Jahre 532 \Annuarium Historiae Conciliorum 16: 264-85
Spieser, J.-M. (1984) Thessalonique et ses monuments. Paris

Stancliffe, C. (1983) St Martin and his Hagiographer: History and Miracle in Sulpicius
Severus. Oxford

Steel, C. (1978) The Changing Self: A Study on the Soul in Later Neoplatonism: Iamhlichus,
Damascius and Priscianus. Brussels

Steel, C. (1987) ‘Proclus et Aristote sur la causalite efficiente de l’intellect divin’, in
Pepin and Saffrey (eds.) (1987) 213-25

Stephens-Crawford, J. (1990) The Byzantine Shops at Sardis. Cambridge, MA and
London

Stewart, C. (1991) ‘Workingthe Earth of theHearf: The MessaUan Controversy in History,
Texts and Language. Oxford

Stillwell, R. (ed.) (1938, 1941) Antioch-on-the-Orontes. 11. The Excavations 19))— 19)6', 111.

The Excavations 19)7—19)9. Princeton
Stillwell, R. (1961) ‘Houses of Antioch’, DOP 1 5: 47-57

Straw, C. (1988) Gregory the Great: Perfection in Impefection (The Transformation of
the Classical Heritage 14). Berkeley and Los Angeles
Stroheker, K. F. (1948) Der senatorische Adel im spdtantiken Gallien. Darmstadt
Studer, B. (1990) ‘Leo I’, TRE 20: 737—41

Studer, B. (1991) ‘Leo the Great’, in A. di Berardino (ed.), Patrology IV. The Golden
Age of Patristic Literature (Westminster, MD) 589-612 (tr. from Patrologia,
Casale (1978) 111.5 57— 78, with additional bibliography)

Summa, G. (1992) Geistliche Unterscheidnngbei Johannes Cassian. Wurzburg
Talbot Rice, D. (ed.) (1958) The Great Palace of the Byzantine Emperors. Second Report.
Edinburgh

Taran, L. (1978) Anonymous Commentary on Aristotle’s De Interpretatione. Meisenheim
am Gian

Tardieu, M. (1986) ‘Sabiens coraniques et “Sabiens” de Harran’ , Journal Asiatique
274: 1-44

Tardieu, M. (1987) ‘Les calendriers en usage a Harran d’apres les sources arabes et
le commentaire de Simplicius a la Physique d’Aristote’, in Hadot (ed.) (1987b)
40—57. Berlin

Tardieu, M. (1990) Les paysages reliques. Routes et haltes syriennes d’lsidore et Simplicius.
Louvain and Paris

Tate, G. (1 992) Les campagnes de la Syrie du Nord du He au L He siecle 1. Paris
Tchalenko, G. (1979) Eglises de village de la Syrie du nord. Plates. Paris
Tchalenko, G. (1990) Eglises syriennes a bema. Paris
Teyssier, G. (1964) Le bapteme de Clovis. Paris
Thelamon, F. (1981) Parens et chretiens au TVe siecle. Paris

Theurillat, J.-M. (1954) LAbbaye de Saint-Maurice d’Agaune. Des origines a la reforme
canoniale (717—8)0). Saint-Maurice

Thilo, G. and Hagen, H. (eds.) (1881—7) Servii grammatici quiferuntur in Vergilii carmina
commentarii. Leipzig (= Berlin, 1891—7); repr. 1923—7
Thompson, E. A. (1986) Who was Saint Patrick ? New York

1098

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

Till, W. C. (1936) Koptische Heiligen-und Mdrtyrerlegende: pt 2. ACO 108. Rome
Till, W C. (i960) ‘Die koptischen Ostraka’, Osterreichische Akademie der
Wissenschaften, philos.-hist. Kl. Denkschrifty^.s. Vienna
Tsafrir, Y. et al. (1992) ‘The Bet Shean project (1989—1991)’, Excavations and Surveys
in Israel 1 1

Tsafrir, Y. and Foerster, G. (1997) ‘Urbanism at Scythopolis-Bet Shean in the
fourth to seventh centuries’, DOP 51: 85-146
Tuilier, A. (1966) ‘Le sens de l’adjectif oiKovfxeviKOS dans la tradition patristique
et dans la tradition byzantine’, StPatry: (TU 92) 41 2—24
Turner, V. and Turner, E. (1978) Image and Pilgrimage in Christian Culture. New York
Uthemann, K.-H. (1985) ‘Stephanos von Alexandrien und die Konversion des
Jakobiten Probos, des spateren Metropoliten von Chalkedon’, in C. Laga, J.
A. Munitiz, L. van Rompay (e&s). After Chalcedon: Studies in Theology and Church
History Offered to Prof. A. Van Roey forhisyoth birthday (Louvain) 381—99
Van Dam, R. (1988a) ‘Images of St Martin in late Roman and early Merovingian
Gaul’, Viator 19: 1—27

Van Dam, R. (tr.) (1988b) Gregory of Tours: dory of the Confessors. Liverpool
Van Dam, R. (1993) Saints and their Miracles in Late Antique Gaul. Princeton
Van Lantschoot, A. (1946) ‘Fragments d’une homelie copte de Jean de Parallos’,
Studi et Testi 121: 296—326

Van Roey, A. (1961) ‘Flet dossier van Proba en Juhannan Barboer’, Scrinium
Lovaniense 24: 181—90

Van Roey, A. (1979) ‘Les debuts de l’eglise jacobite’, in A. Grillmeier and H. Bacht
(eds.) (1979) 11.339—60

Van Roey, A. (1982) ‘La controverse tritheite depuis la condamnation de Conon et
Eugene jusqu’a la conversion de l’eveque Elie’, Von Kanaan bis Kerala (= FS
J. P. M. van de Ploeg) (Alter Orient und Altes Testament 211) 487-97.
Neukirchen

Van Roey, A. (1985) ‘La controverse tritheite jusqu’a l’excommunication de Conon
et d’Eugene (5 57—569)’, OLP 16: 141-65

Van Roey, A. and Allen, P. (ed. and tr.) (1994) Monophysite Texts of the Sixth Century
(OLA 56). Louvain

Van den Ven, P. (ed.) (1962) La vie ancienne de St Symeon le Jeune , 2 vols. (Subsidia
Flagiographica 32). Brussels

Verheijen, L. (1967) La Regie de Saint Augustin. 2 vols. Paris

Verheijen, L. (1980) Nouvelle approche de la regie de saint Augustin. Abbaye de
Bellefontaine

Verrycken, K. (ed.) (1990) ‘The Metaphysics of Ammonius son of Hermeias’, in
Sorabji (ed.) (1990) 199—274

Volbach, W F. (1976) Elfenbeinarbeiten der Spatantik and des friihen Mittelalters (3rd
edn). Mainz

Vollmer, F. (ed.) (1914) Poetae latini minores /. Leipzig

Von Simson, O. G. (1948) Sacred Fortress: Byzantine Art and Statecraft in Ravenna.
Chicago

Voobus, A. (1958, i960) History of Asceticism in the Syrian Orient. 2 vols ( CSCO 1 84,
Subsidia 14; CSCO 197, Subsidia 17). Louvain
Voobus, A. (1965) History of the School of Nisibis (CSCO 266). Louvain

V. RELIGION AND CULTURE

io 99

Wallace-Hadrill, J. M. (1983) The Frankish Church. Oxford
Wallis, R. T. (197a) Neoplatonism. London

Walter, C. (1984) ‘Expressionism and Hellenism’, REB 42: 265—87
Walters, C. C. (1974) Monastic Archaeology in Egypt. Warminster
Walz, C. (ed.) (1832-6) Rhetores Graeci. Stuttgart-Tubingen

Ward-Perkins, B. (1978) ‘L’abbandono degli edifici pubblici a Luni’, Centro di studi
lunensi, Quaderni 3: 33—46

Ward-Perkins, J. B. (1981) Roman Imperial Architecture. Harmondsworth
Weitzmann, K. (1976) The Monastery of Saint Catherine at Mount Sinai: The Icons from
the Sixth to the Tenth Century. Princeton

Weitzmann, K. (1977 ) Tate Antique and Early Christian Book Illumination. London
Weitzmann, K., Loerke, W C., Kitzinger, E. and Buchthal, H. (1975) The Place of
Book Illumination in Byzantine Art. Princeton
Westerink, L. G. (ed.) (1962) Anonymous Prolegomena to Platonic Philosophy.
Amsterdam

Westerink, L. G. (1980) ‘Philosophy and medicine in late antiquity’, fames 57:
169—77 (= Texts and Studies in Neoplatonism and Byzantine Literature

(Amsterdam) 83—91

Westerink, L. G. (1990) ‘The Alexandrian commentators and the introductions to
their commentaries’, in Sorabji (ed.) (1990) 325—48
Westerink, L. G. and Combes, J. (eds.) (1986,1989) Damascius. Traite des premiers prin-
cipes. 1— 11. Paris

Westerink, L. G. and Trouillard, J. (1990) Pro/egomenes a la philosophic de Platon. Paris
Wharton, A. J. (1987) ‘Ritual and reconstructed meaning: the Neonian Baptistery
in Ravenna’, Art Bulletin, 69: 358—75

Wickham, C. (1994) Land and Power: Studies in Italian and European Social History.
London

Wickham, L. R. (1982a) ‘Eucherius von Lyon’, TRE 10: 522—6
Wickham, L. R. (1982b) ‘Eutyches/Eutychianischer Streit’, TRE 10: 5 58—65
Wickham, L. R. (1983) Cyril of Alexandria: Select Tetters (Oxford Early Christian
Texts). Oxford

Wickham, L. R. (1995) ‘Aspects of clerical life in the early Byzantine Church in two
scenes: Mopsuestia and Apamea’,yE//46: 3-18
Wildberg, C. (1988 ) John Philoponus’ Criticism of Aristotle’s Theory of Aether. Berlin and
New York

Wilken, R. L. (1992) The Land Called Holy: Palestine in Christian History and Thought.
New Haven and London

Wilson, N. G. (tr.) (1975) Saint Basil on the Value of Greek Literature. London
Wimbush, V. L. (ed.) (1990) Ascetic Behavior in Greco-Roman Antiquity: A Sourcebook.
Minneapolis

Witakowski, W (tr.) (1996) Pseudo-Dionysius of Tel-Mahre. Chronicle, Part III. Liverpool
Wolska-Conus, W. (1989) ‘Stephanos d’Athenes et Stephanos d’Alexandrie. Essai
d’identification et de biographie’, REB 47: 5-89
Wood, I. N. (1981) ‘A prelude to Columbanus: the monastic achievement in the
Burgundian territories’, in Clarke and Brennan (eds.) (1981) 3—32
Wortley,J. (tr.) (1992) The Spiritual Meadow of John Moschus (Cistercian Studies 139).
Kalamazoo

I IOO

CONCLUSION

Wouters, A. (1979) The Grammatical Papyri from Graeco-Roman Egypt Contributions to
the Study of the ‘Ars Grammatical in Antiquity. Brussels
Wright, D. H. (1993) The Vatican Vergil: A Masterpiece of Late Antique Art. Berkeley
Xydis, S. G. (1947) ‘The chancel barrier, solea and ambo of Hagia Sophia’, Art
Bulletin 29: 1-24

Yegiil, F. (1992) Baths and Bathing in Classical Antiquity. New York

Yeivin, Z. et al. (1992) ‘The Bet Shean project’, Excavations and Surveys in Israel 6

Zalateo, G. (1961) ‘Papiri scolnsncS, Aegyptus 4s \ 160-235

Zettl, E. (1974) Die Bestatigung des V. okumenischen Konyils durch Papst Vigilius
(Antiquitas, Reihe 1, 20). Bonn

CONCLUSION

Brogiolo, G. P. (ed.) (1 997) Early Medieval Towns in the Western Mediterranean , Ravello
2 2-24 September 1994 (Documenti di Archeologia 1 o), Societa Archeologica
Padana s.r.l.

Brown, P. R. L. (1967) ‘The later Roman empire’, Economic History Review 56, 2 ser.,
20: 327-43 (= Brown, Religion and Society 46—' 7 3)

Brown, P. R. L. (1971) The World of Late Antiquity . London

Brown, P. R. L. (1974) ‘'Mohammed and Charlemagne by Henri Pirenne’, Daedalus 103:
25— 3 3 (= Brown, Society and the Holy 63-79)

Brown, P. R. L. (1976) ‘Eastern and western Christendom in late antiquity: a
parting of the ways’, in The Orthodox Churches and the U %/, Studies in Church
History 13 (Oxford) 1-24 (= Brown, Society and the Holy 166-95)

Brown, P. R. L. (1992) Power and Persuasion in Late Antiquity. Madison
Cameron, Averil (1992) ‘The language of images. The rise of icons and Christian
representation’, in D. Wood (ed.). The Church and the Arts (Studies in Church
History 28) (Oxford) 1-42 (= Averil Cameron, Changing Cultures xii)
Cameron, Averil and King, G. R. D. (eds.) (1 994) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near
East 11: Land Use and Settlement Patterns. Princeton
Christie, N. and Loseby, S. T. (1996) Towns in Transition: Urban Evolution in Late
Antiquity and the Middle Ages. Aldershot
Clark, G. (1993) Women in Late Antiquity: Pagan and Christian Life-Styles. Oxford
Consolino, F. E. (ed.) (1995) Pagani e cristiani da Giuliano I’Apostat al Sacco di Roma,
Soveria Mannelli and Messina

Cormack, R. (1997) Painting the Soul: Icons, Death Masks and Shrouds. London
Croke, B. (1983) ‘a.d. 476: the manufacture of a turning point’, Chiron 13: 81-119
Dagron, G. (1981) ‘Le saint, le savant, l’astrologue. Etude de themes hagiogra-
phiques a travers quelques recueils de “Questions et reponses” des Ve— Vile
siecles’, in Hagiographie, cultures et societes ( 7 T Wile s.). Etudes Augustiniennes.
Paris (= G. Dagron, La romanite chretienne en Orient (1984), London, iv)
Davies, N. (1996) Europe: A History. London

Elm, S. (1994) ‘Virgins of Cod’: The Making of Asceticism in Late Antiquity. Oxford
Goffart, W (1988) The Narrators of Barbarian History: fordanes, Gregory of Tours, Bede
and Paul the Deacon. Princeton

Hayes, J. (1972) Late Roman Pottery: A Catalogue of Roman Fine Ware. London (British
School at Rome)

CONCLUSION

I IOI

Heather, P. (1989) ‘Cassiodorus and the rise of the Amals: genealogy and the
Goths under Hun domination’, JRSjy: 103-28
Hodges, R. and Whitehouse, D. (eds.) (1983) Mohammed, Charlemagne and the Pirenne
Thesis: Archaeology and the Origins of Europe. London
Kazhdan, A. and Constable, G. (1982) People and Power in Byzantium. Washington,
DC

Levine, L. I. (ye)%\) Ancient Synagogues Revealed. Jerusalem

Lim, R. (1995) Public Disputation, Power and Social Order in Tate Antiquity. Berkeley
and Los Angeles

Mattioli, U. (ed.) (199a) La donna nel pensiero cristiano antico. Genoa
Momigliano, A. (1973) ‘La caduta senza rumore di un impero nel 476 d.C \ Annuli
della Scuola Norma/e Superiore di Pisa, ser. 3, vol. 3, fasc. 2: 397—418 (= Sesto
Contribute 1 (Rome 1980) 160—79)

Momigliano, A. (ed.) (1963) The Conflict between Paganism and Christianity. Oxford
Piccirillo, M. (1993) The Mosaics of Jordan (ACOR Publications 1). Amman
Piganiol, A. (1947) L’empire chretien (Histoire romaine IV.2). Paris
Pirenne, H. (1937) Mohammed and Charlemagne, Eng. trans. London
Rich,J. W. (ed.) (199a) The City in Late Antiquity . London

Ste Croix, G. E. M. de (1981) The Class Struggle in the Ancient Greek World. London
Tardieu, M. (1990) Les pay sages reliques. Routes et haltes syriennes d’lsidore a Simplicius.
Paris

Tate, G. (1 992) Les campagnes de la Syrie du Nord du He au de siecle 1. Paris
Walmsley, A. (1996) ‘Byzantine Palestine and Arabia: urban prosperity in late an-
tiquity’, in Christie and Loseby (eds.) (1996) 126-; 8
Webster, L. and Brown, M. (eds.) (1997) The Transformation of the Roman World AD
400-900. London

Whittow, M. (1990) ‘Ruling the late antique and early Byzantine city: a continuous
history’, P&P 1 29: 3—29

Whittow, M. (1996) The Making of Orthodox Byzantium. London
Wickham, C. (1988) ‘Marx, Sherlock Holmes and the late Roman economy \JRS
78:183-93

Wimbush, V. and Valantasis, R. (eds.) (1995) Asceticism. New York

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Cambridge Ancient History 3rd Edition"

See other formats